This is a modern-English version of Language: Its Nature, Development and Origin, originally written by Jespersen, Otto.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
LANGUAGE
ITS NATURE
DEVELOPMENT
AND ORIGIN
LANGUAGE
ITS NATURE
DEVELOPMENT
AND ORIGIN
BY THE SAME AUTHOR
Articulation of Speech Sounds (Marburg: Elwert)
Articulation of Speech Sounds (Marburg: Elwert)
Studier over engelske kasus (out of print)
Studies on English Cases (out of print)
Chaucers liv og digtning (out of print)
Chaucer's life and writing (out of print)
Progress in Language (out of print)
Language Progress (out of print)
Fonetik (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
Fonetik (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
How to Teach a Foreign Language (London: George Allen & Unwin)
How to Teach a Foreign Language (London: George Allen & Unwin)
Lehrbuch der Phonetik (Leipzig: Teubner)
Textbook of Phonetics (Leipzig: Teubner)
Phonetische Grundfragen (Leipzig: Teubner)
Phonetic Fundamentals (Leipzig: Teubner)
Growth and Structure of the English Language (Leipzig: Teubner)
Growth and Structure of the English Language (Leipzig: Teubner)
A Modern English Grammar: I, II (Heidelberg: Winter)
A Modern English Grammar: I, II (Heidelberg: Winter)
Sprogets logik (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
Sprogets Logik (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
Nutidssprog (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
Contemporary Language (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
Negation in English and Other Languages (Copenhagen: Höst)
Negation in English and Other Languages (Copenhagen: Höst)
Chapters on English (London: George Allen & Unwin)
Chapters on English (London: George Allen & Unwin)
Rasmus Rask (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
Rasmus Rask (Copenhagen: Gyldendal)
LANGUAGE
Its Nature
Development
And Origin
BY
OTTO JESPERSEN
PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN
BY
OTTO JESPERSEN
PROFESSOR AT THE UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN

LONDON: GEORGE ALLEN & UNWIN LTD.
RUSKIN HOUSE, 40 MUSEUM STREET, W.C. 1
LONDON: GEORGE ALLEN & UNWIN LTD.
RUSKIN HOUSE, 40 MUSEUM STREET, W.C. 1
First published in 1922
Originally published in 1922
(All rights reserved)
All rights reserved
TO
VILHELM THOMSEN
TO
VILHELM THOMSEN
PREFACE
The distinctive feature of the science of language as conceived nowadays is its historical character: a language or a word is no longer taken as something given once for all, but as a result of previous development and at the same time as the starting-point for subsequent development. This manner of viewing languages constitutes a decisive improvement on the way in which languages were dealt with in previous centuries, and it suffices to mention such words as ‘evolution’ and ‘Darwinism’ to show that linguistic research has in this respect been in full accordance with tendencies observed in many other branches of scientific work during the last hundred years. Still, it cannot be said that students of language have always and to the fullest extent made it clear to themselves what is the real essence of a language. Too often expressions are used which are nothing but metaphors—in many cases perfectly harmless metaphors, but in other cases metaphors that obscure the real facts of the matter. Language is frequently spoken of as a ‘living organism’; we hear of the ‘life’ of languages, of the ‘birth’ of new languages and of the ‘death’ of old languages, and the implication, though not always realized, is that a language is a living thing, something analogous to an animal or a plant. Yet a language evidently has no separate existence in the same way as a dog or a beech has, but is nothing but a function of certain living human beings. Language is activity, purposeful activity, and we should never lose sight of the speaking individuals and of their purpose in acting in this particular way. When people speak of the life of words—as in celebrated books with such titles as La vie des mots, or Biographies of Words—they do not always keep in view that a word has no ‘life’ of its own: it exists only in so far as it is pronounced or heard or remembered by somebody, and this kind of existence cannot properly be compared with ‘life’ in the original and proper sense of that word. The only unimpeachable definition of a word is that it is a human habit, an habitual act on the part of one human individual which has, or may have, the effect of evoking some idea in the mind[8] of another individual. A word thus may be rightly compared with such an habitual act as taking off one’s hat or raising one’s fingers to one’s cap: in both cases we have a certain set of muscular activities which, when seen or heard by somebody else, shows him what is passing in the mind of the original agent or what he desires to bring to the consciousness of the other man (or men). The act is individual, but the interpretation presupposes that the individual forms part of a community with analogous habits, and a language thus is seen to be one particular set of human customs of a well-defined social character.
The unique aspect of how we understand the science of language today is its historical nature: a language or a word isn’t considered a fixed entity but rather the result of past evolution and at the same time a starting point for future development. This perspective on languages represents a significant advancement compared to how languages were approached in earlier centuries. Just mentioning terms like ‘evolution’ and ‘Darwinism’ illustrates that linguistic research aligns with trends seen in many other scientific fields over the last hundred years. However, it can't be said that language students have always fully grasped the true essence of what a language is. Frequently, terms used are merely metaphors—sometimes innocent ones, but at other times metaphors that obscure the actual facts. Language is often referred to as a ‘living organism’; we hear about the ‘life’ of languages, the ‘birth’ of new languages, and the ‘death’ of old languages, implying, sometimes unknowingly, that a language is a living entity akin to an animal or plant. Yet, a language clearly doesn’t exist separately like a dog or a tree does; it is simply a function of certain living human beings. Language is action, purposeful action, and we should always remember the speaking individuals and their purpose in communicating that way. When people discuss the life of words—like in famous books titled La vie des mots or Biographies of Words—they don't always realize that a word has no ‘life’ of its own: it exists only as it is spoken, heard, or remembered by someone, and this kind of existence can't genuinely be likened to ‘life’ in the traditional sense. The only indisputable definition of a word is that it is a human habit, a habitual action by one person that can evoke an idea in the mind of another person[8]. A word can thus be compared to acts like taking off one’s hat or raising one’s fingers to a cap: in both cases, we have a specific set of physical actions that, when seen or heard by someone else, convey what is happening in the mind of the original person or what they wish to communicate to others. The action is individual, but the understanding assumes that the individual belongs to a community with similar habits, making language one specific set of human customs with a clearly defined social nature.
It is indeed possible to speak of ‘life’ in connexion with language even from this point of view, but it will be in a different sense from that in which the word was taken by the older school of linguistic science. I shall try to give a biological or biographical science of language, but it will be through sketching the linguistic biology or biography of the speaking individual. I shall give, therefore, a large part to the way in which a child learns his mother-tongue (Book II): my conclusions there are chiefly based on the rich material I have collected during many years from direct observation of many Danish children, and particularly of my own boy, Frans (see my book Nutidssprog hos börn og voxne, Copenhagen, 1916). Unfortunately, I have not been able to make first-hand observations with regard to the speech of English children; the English examples I quote are taken second-hand either from notes, for which I am obliged to English and American friends, or from books, chiefly by psychologists. I should be particularly happy if my remarks could induce some English or American linguist to take up a systematic study of the speech of children, or of one child. This study seems to me very fascinating indeed, and a linguist is sure to notice many things that would be passed by as uninteresting even by the closest observer among psychologists, but which may have some bearing on the life and development of language.
It is certainly possible to talk about ‘life’ in relation to language from this perspective, but it will mean something different than how the older school of linguistic science understood it. I will attempt to provide a biological or biographical approach to language, focusing on the linguistic development or biography of the individual speaker. Therefore, I will dedicate a significant portion to how a child learns their mother tongue (Book II); my conclusions are mainly based on the extensive material I have gathered over many years from direct observations of many Danish children, particularly my own son, Frans (see my book Nutidssprog hos börn og voxne, Copenhagen, 1916). Unfortunately, I have not been able to make firsthand observations regarding the speech of English children; the English examples I include are taken from second-hand sources, for which I am grateful to my English and American friends, or from books, mostly by psychologists. I would be especially pleased if my comments could inspire an English or American linguist to undertake a systematic study of children’s speech or the speech of one child. This research seems incredibly fascinating to me, and a linguist is sure to notice many aspects that might be overlooked as uninteresting even by the most attentive observer among psychologists, but which could have implications for the life and development of language.
Another part of linguistic biology deals with the influence of the foreigner, and still another with the changes which the individual is apt independently to introduce into his speech even after he has fully acquired his mother-tongue. This naturally leads up to the question whether all these changes introduced by various individuals do, or do not, follow the same line of direction, and whether mankind has on the whole moved forward or not in linguistic matters. The conviction reached through a study of historically accessible periods of well-known languages is finally shown to throw some light on the disputed problem of the ultimate origin of human language.
Another area of linguistic biology explores how foreigners impact language, while another looks at the changes individuals often make to their speech even after they've fully learned their native language. This naturally raises the question of whether all these changes made by different people follow a similar trend and whether humanity, as a whole, has progressed in linguistic matters. Insights gained from studying historically available periods of well-known languages ultimately help shed light on the debated issue of the ultimate origin of human language.
Parts of my theory of sound-change, and especially my objections[9] to the dogma of blind sound-laws, date back to my very first linguistic paper (1886); most of the chapters on Decay or Progress and parts of some of the following chapters, as well as the theory of the origin of speech, may be considered a new and revised edition of the general chapters of my Progress in Language (1894). Many of the ideas contained in this book thus are not new with me; but even if a reader of my previous works may recognize things which he has seen before, I hope he will admit that they have been here worked up with much new material into something like a system, which forms a fairly comprehensive theory of linguistic development.
Parts of my theory on sound change, especially my critiques[9] of the belief in blind sound laws, trace back to my very first linguistic paper (1886). Most of the chapters on Decay or Progress and some parts of the later chapters, as well as the theory on the origins of speech, can be seen as a new and improved edition of the general chapters from my Progress in Language (1894). Many ideas in this book aren’t new to me; however, even if a reader of my earlier works recognizes familiar concepts, I hope they’ll agree that these ideas have been developed with a lot of new material into a cohesive framework, creating a fairly comprehensive theory of linguistic development.
Still, I have not been able to compress into this volume the whole of my philosophy of speech. Considerations of space have obliged me to exclude the chapters I had first intended to write on the practical consequences of the ‘energetic’ view of language which I have throughout maintained; the estimation of linguistic phenomena implied in that view has bearings on such questions as these: What is to be considered ‘correct’ or ‘standard’ in matters of pronunciation, spelling, grammar and idiom? Can (or should) individuals exert themselves to improve their mother-tongue by enriching it with new terms and by making it purer, more precise, more fit to express subtle shades of thought, more easy to handle in speech or in writing, etc.? (A few hints on such questions may be found in my paper “Energetik der Sprache” in Scientia, 1914.) Is it possible to construct an artificial language on scientific principles for international use? (On this question I may here briefly state my conviction that it is extremely important for the whole of mankind to have such a language, and that Ido is scientifically and practically very much superior to all previous attempts, Volapük, Esperanto, Idiom Neutral, Latin sine flexione, etc. But I have written more at length on that question elsewhere.) With regard to the system of grammar, the relation of grammar to logic, and grammatical categories and their definition, I must refer the reader to Sprogets Logik (Copenhagen, 1913), and to the first chapter of the second volume of my Modern English Grammar (Heidelberg, 1914), but I shall hope to deal with these questions more in detail in a future work, to be called, probably, The Logic of Grammar, of which some chapters have been ready in my drawers for some years and others are in active preparation.
Still, I haven't been able to fit all of my philosophy of language into this book. Due to space limitations, I had to leave out the chapters I originally planned to write about the practical effects of the ‘energetic’ view of language that I've maintained throughout. The understanding of language phenomena connected to that view affects questions like: What should be considered ‘correct’ or ‘standard’ regarding pronunciation, spelling, grammar, and idiom? Can (or should) individuals work on improving their native language by adding new terms and making it clearer, more accurate, more capable of expressing subtle thoughts, and easier to use in speech or writing, etc.? (You can find some insights on these questions in my paper “Energetik der Sprache” in Scientia, 1914.) Is it possible to create a scientific artificial language for international use? (Regarding this question, I want to state my belief that it is very important for all of humanity to have such a language, and that Ido is scientifically and practically far superior to previous attempts like Volapük, Esperanto, Idiom Neutral, and Latin sine flexione, etc. I have discussed this topic in more detail elsewhere.) For information on the grammar system, the relationship between grammar and logic, and grammatical categories and their definitions, I encourage readers to refer to Sprogets Logik (Copenhagen, 1913), and the first chapter of the second volume of my Modern English Grammar (Heidelberg, 1914). I hope to address these topics more thoroughly in a future work, likely to be titled The Logic of Grammar, for which some chapters have been completed for a few years and others are currently being developed.
I have prefixed to the theoretical chapters of this work a short survey of the history of the science of language in order to show how my problems have been previously treated. In this part (Book I) I have, as a matter of course, used the excellent works on the subject by Benfey, Raumer, Delbrück (Einleitung in das Sprachstudium, 1st ed., 1880; I did not see the 5th ed., 1908, till[10] my own chapters on the history of linguistics were finished), Thomsen, Oertel and Pedersen. But I have in nearly every case gone to the sources themselves, and have, I think, found interesting things in some of the early books on linguistics that have been generally overlooked; I have even pointed out some writers who had passed into undeserved oblivion. My intention has been on the whole to throw into relief the great lines of development rather than to give many details; in judging the first part of my book it should also be borne in mind that its object primarily is to serve as an introduction to the problems dealt with in the rest of the book. Throughout I have tried to look at things with my own eyes, and accordingly my views on a great many points are different from those generally accepted; it is my hope that an impartial observer will find that I have here and there succeeded in distributing light and shade more justly than my predecessors.
I’ve added a brief overview of the history of language science at the beginning of the theoretical chapters of this work to show how my issues have been addressed in the past. In this section (Book I), I've naturally drawn on the excellent works by Benfey, Raumer, Delbrück (Einleitung in das Sprachstudium, 1st ed., 1880; I didn't see the 5th ed., 1908, until[10] my own chapters on the history of linguistics were complete), Thomsen, Oertel, and Pedersen. However, in almost every case, I've gone to the original sources and found some interesting insights in some early linguistics texts that have often been overlooked; I've even highlighted a few authors who have been unfairly forgotten. My main goal has been to highlight the main lines of development rather than to delve into many details; when evaluating the first part of my book, it should be remembered that its purpose is primarily to introduce the issues discussed in the rest of the book. Throughout, I’ve aimed to observe things through my own perspective, which means my views on many points differ from the commonly accepted ideas; I hope that an impartial reader will see that I’ve occasionally managed to present nuances of light and shade more fairly than my predecessors.
Wherever it has been necessary I have transcribed words phonetically according to the system of the Association Phonétique Internationale, though without going into too minute distinction of sounds, the object being, not to teach the exact pronunciation of various languages, but rather to bring out clearly the insufficiency of the ordinary spelling. The latter is given throughout in italics, while phonetic symbols have been inserted in brackets [ ]. I must ask the reader to forgive inconsistency in such matters as Greek accents, Old English marks of vowel-length, etc., which I have often omitted as of no importance for the purpose of this volume.
Whenever necessary, I have written words phonetically using the system of the Association Phonétique Internationale, though I haven’t focused on small distinctions in sounds. The goal is not to teach the exact pronunciation of different languages, but to clearly highlight the limitations of standard spelling. Standard spelling is given in italics throughout, while phonetic symbols are included in brackets [ ]. I ask the reader to overlook inconsistencies in aspects like Greek accents or Old English vowel-length markings, which I often left out as they are not important for the purpose of this book.
I must express here my gratitude to the directors of the Carlsbergfond for kind support of my work. I want to thank also Professor G. C. Moore Smith, of the University of Sheffield: not only has he sent me the manuscript of a translation of most of my Nutidssprog, which he had undertaken of his own accord and which served as the basis of Book II, but he has kindly gone through the whole of this volume, improving and correcting my English style in many passages. His friendship and the untiring interest he has always taken in my work have been extremely valuable to me for a great many years.
I want to take a moment to thank the directors of the Carlsbergfond for their generous support of my work. I also want to express my gratitude to Professor G. C. Moore Smith from the University of Sheffield. Not only did he send me the manuscript of his translation of most of my Nutidssprog, which he did on his own, and which served as the foundation for Book II, but he also kindly reviewed the entire volume, enhancing and correcting my English style in many places. His friendship and the continuous interest he has shown in my work have been invaluable to me for many years.
OTTO JESPERSEN.
OTTO JESPERSEN.
University of Copenhagen,
June 1921.
University of Copenhagen,
June 1921.
CONTENTS
PAGE | ||
Introduction | 7 | |
Abbreviations of Book Titles, etc. | 13 | |
Phonetic Symbols | 16 | |
Book I | ||
HISTORY OF LINGUISTIC SCIENCE | ||
CHAPTER | ||
I. | Before 1800s | 19 |
II. | Early 1800s | 32 |
III. | Mid-1800s | 63 |
IV. | Late 1800s | 89 |
Book II | ||
THE CHILD | ||
V. | Sounds | 103 |
VI. | Words | 113 |
VII. | Grammar | 128 |
VIII. | Some Basic Issues | 140 |
IX. | The Impact of Children on Language Development | 161 |
[12]X. | The Child's Influence (continued) | 172 |
Book 3 | ||
THE INDIVIDUAL AND THE WORLD | ||
XI. | The Outsider | 191 |
XII. | Pidgin and Congeners | 216 |
XIII. | The Woman | 237 |
XIV. | Reasons for Change | 255 |
XV. | Reasons for Change (continued) | 276 |
Book 4 | ||
DEVELOPMENT OF LANGUAGE | ||
XVI. | Word origin | 305 |
XVII. | Progress or Decline? | 319 |
XVIII. | Progress | 337 |
XIX. | Origin of Grammar Elements | 367 |
XX. | Sound Symbolism | 396 |
XXI. | The Birth of Language | 412 |
Table of Contents | 443 |
ABBREVIATIONS OF BOOK TITLES, ETC.
Bally LV = Ch. Bally, Le Langage et la Vie, Genève 1913.
Bally LV = Ch. Bally, Le Langage et la Vie, Geneva 1913.
Benfey Gesch = Th. Benfey, Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft, München 1869.
Benfey Gesch = Th. Benfey, History of Linguistics, Munich 1869.
Bleek CG = W. H. I. Bleek, Comparative Grammar of South African Languages, London 1862-69.
Bleek CG = W. H. I. Bleek, Comparative Grammar of South African Languages, London 1862-69.
Bloomfield SL = L. Bloomfield, An Introduction to the Study of Language, New York 1914.
Bloomfield SL = L. Bloomfield, An Introduction to the Study of Language, New York 1914.
Bopp C = F. Bopp, Conjugationssystem der Sanskritsprache, Frankfurt 1816.
Bopp C = F. Bopp, Conjugationssystem der Sanskritsprache, Frankfurt 1816.
AC = Analytical Comparison (see ch. ii, § 6).
AC = Analytical Comparison (see ch. ii, § 6).
VG = Vergleichende Grammatik, 2te Ausg., Berlin 1857.
VG = Comparative Grammar, 2nd ed., Berlin 1857.
Bréal M = M. Bréal, Mélanges de Mythologie et de Linguistique, Paris 1882.
Bréal M = M. Bréal, Mélanges de Mythologie et de Linguistique, Paris 1882.
Brugmann VG = K. Brugmann, Grundriss der Vergleichenden Grammatik, Strassburg 1886 ff., 2te Ausg., 1897 ff.
Brugmann VG = K. Brugmann, Grundriss der Vergleichenden Grammatik, Strassburg 1886 and onward, 2nd edition, 1897 and onward.
KG = Kurze Vergleichende Grammatik, Strassburg 1904.
KG = Kurze Vergleichende Grammatik, Strasbourg 1904.
ChE = O. Jespersen, Chapters on English, London 1918.
ChE = O. Jespersen, Chapters on English, London 1918.
Churchill B = W. Churchill, Beach-la-Mar, Washington 1911.
Churchill B = W. Churchill, Beach-la-Mar, Washington 1911.
Curtius C = G. Curtius, Zur Chronologie der indogerm. Sprachforschung, Leipzig 1873.
Curtius C = G. Curtius, Zur Chronologie der indogerm. Sprachforschung, Leipzig 1873.
K = Zur Kritik der neuesten Sprachforschung, Leipzig 1885.
K = Zur Kritik der neuesten Sprachforschung, Leipzig 1885.
Dauzat V = A. Dauzat, La Vie du Langage, Paris 1910.
Dauzat V = A. Dauzat, La Vie du Langage, Paris 1910.
Ph = La Philosophie du Langage, Paris 1912.
Ph = La Philosophie du Langage, Paris 1912.
Delbrück E = B. Delbrück, Einleitung in das Sprachstudium, Leipzig 1880; 5te Aufl. 1908.
Delbrück E = B. Delbrück, Introduction to Language Study, Leipzig 1880; 5th edition 1908.
Grfr = Grundfragen der Sprachforschung, Strassburg 1901.
Grfr = Fundamentals of Language Research, Strasbourg 1901.
E. = English.
E. = English.
EDD = J. Wright, The English Dialect Dictionary, Oxford 1898 ff.
EDD = J. Wright, The English Dialect Dictionary, Oxford 1898 onwards.
ESt = Englische Studien.
ESt = English Studies.
Feist KI = S. Feist, Kultur, Ausbreitung und Herkunft der Indogermanen, Berlin 1913.
Feist KI = S. Feist, Kultur, Ausbreitung und Herkunft der Indogermanen, Berlin 1913.
Fonetik = O. Jespersen, Fonetik, Copenhagen 1897.
Fonetik = O. Jespersen, Fonetik, Copenhagen 1897.
Fr. = French.
Fr. = French.
Gabelentz Spr = G. v. d. Gabelentz, Die Sprachwissenschaft, Leipzig 1891.
Gabelentz Spr = G. v. d. Gabelentz, Die Sprachwissenschaft, Leipzig 1891.
Gr = Chinesische Grammatik, Leipzig 1881.
Gr = Chinese Grammar, Leipzig 1881.
Ginneken LP = J. v. Ginneken, Principes de Linguistique Psychologique, Amsterdam, Paris 1907.
Ginneken LP = J. v. Ginneken, Principes de Linguistique Psychologique, Amsterdam, Paris 1907.
Glenconner = P. Glenconner, The Sayings of the Children, Oxford 1918.
Glenconner = P. Glenconner, The Sayings of the Children, Oxford 1918.
Gr. = Greek.
Gr. = Greek.
Greenough and Kittredge W = J. B. Greenough and G. L. Kittredge, Words and their Ways in English Speech, London 1902.
Greenough and Kittredge W = J. B. Greenough and G. L. Kittredge, Words and their Ways in English Speech, London 1902.
Grimm Gr. = J. Grimm, Deutsche Grammatik, 2te Ausg., Göttingen 1822.
Grimm Gr. = J. Grimm, Deutsche Grammatik, 2nd ed., Göttingen 1822.
GDS = Geschichte der deutschen Sprache, 4te Aufl., Leipzig 1880.
GDS = History of the German Language, 4th ed., Leipzig 1880.
GRM = Germanisch-Romanische Monatsschrift.
GRM = Germanic-Roman Monthly Journal.
GS = O. Jespersen, Growth and Structure of the English Language, 3rd ed., Leipzig 1919.
GS = O. Jespersen, Growth and Structure of the English Language, 3rd ed., Leipzig 1919.
Hilmer Sch = H. Hilmer, Schallnachahmung, Wortschöpfung u. Bedeutungswandel, Halle 1914.
Hilmer Sch = H. Hilmer, Schallnachahmung, Wortschöpfung u. Bedeutungswandel, Halle 1914.
Hirt GDS = H. Hirt, Geschichte der deutschen Sprache, München 1919.
Hirt GDS = H. Hirt, History of the German Language, Munich 1919.
Idg = Die Indogermanen, Strassburg 1905-7.
Idg = The Indo-Europeans, Strasbourg 1905-7.
Humboldt Versch = W. v. Humboldt, Verschiedenheit des menschlichen Sprachbaues (number of pages as in the original edition).
Humboldt Versch = W. v. Humboldt, Verschiedenheit des menschlichen Sprachbaues (number of pages as in the original edition).
IF = Indogermanische Forschungen.
IF = Indo-European Research.
KZ = Kuhn’s Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung.
KZ = Kuhn’s Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung.
Lasch S = R. Lasch, Sondersprachen u. ihre Entstehung, Wien 1907.
Lasch S = R. Lasch, Sondersprachen u. ihre Entstehung, Vienna 1907.
LPh = O. Jespersen, Lehrbuch der Phonetik, 3te Aufl., Leipzig 1920.
LPh = O. Jespersen, Lehrbuch der Phonetik, 3rd ed., Leipzig 1920.
Madvig 1857 = J. N. Madvig, De grammatische Betegnelser, Copenhagen 1857.
Madvig 1857 = J. N. Madvig, De grammatische Betegnelser, Copenhagen 1857.
Kl = Kleine philologische Schriften, Leipzig 1875.
Kl = Kleine philologische Schriften, Leipzig 1875.
ME. = Middle English.
ME. = Middle English.
MEG = O. Jespersen, Modern English Grammar, Heidelberg 1909, 1914.
MEG = O. Jespersen, Modern English Grammar, Heidelberg 1909, 1914.
Meillet DI = A. Meillet, Les Dialectes Indo-Européens, Paris 1908.
Meillet DI = A. Meillet, Les Dialectes Indo-Européens, Paris 1908.
Germ. = Caractères généraux des Langues Germaniques, Paris 1917.
Germ. = Caractères généraux des Langues Germaniques, Paris 1917.
Gr = Aperçu d’une Histoire de la Langue Grecque, Paris 1913.
Gr = Aperçu d’une Histoire de la Langue Grecque, Paris 1913.
LI = Introduction à l’étude comp. des Langues Indo-Européennes, 2e éd., Paris 1908.
LI = Introduction to the Comparative Study of Indo-European Languages, 2nd ed., Paris 1908.
Meinhof Ham = C. Meinhof, Die hamitischen Sprachen, Hamburg 1912.
Meinhof Ham = C. Meinhof, Die hamitischen Sprachen, Hamburg 1912.
MSA = Die moderne Sprachforschung in Afrika, Berlin 1910.
MSA = Modern Language Research in Africa, Berlin 1910.
Meringer L = R. Meringer, Aus dem Leben der Sprache, Berlin 1908.
Meringer L = R. Meringer, Aus dem Leben der Sprache, Berlin 1908.
Misteli = F. Misteli, Charakteristik der haupts. Typen des Sprachbaues, Berlin 1893.
Misteli = F. Misteli, Charakteristik der haupts. Typen des Sprachbaues, Berlin 1893.
MSL = Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris.
MSL = Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris.
Fr. Müller Gr = Friedrich Müller, Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, Wien 1876 ff.
Fr. Müller Gr = Friedrich Müller, Basic Outline of Linguistics, Vienna 1876 onwards.
Max Müller Ch = F. Max Müller, Chips from a German Workshop, vol. iv, London 1875.
Max Müller Ch = F. Max Müller, Chips from a German Workshop, vol. iv, London 1875.
NED = A New English Dictionary, by Murray, etc., Oxford 1884 ff.
NED = A New English Dictionary, by Murray, et al., Oxford 1884 onwards.
Noreen UL = A. Noreen, Abriss der urgermanischen Lautlehre, Strassburg 1894.
Noreen UL = A. Noreen, Overview of Old Germanic Phonetics, Strasbourg 1894.
VS = Vårt Språk, Lund 1903 ff.
VS = Vårt Språk, Lund 1903 and onwards.
Nyrop Gr = Kr. Nyrop, Grammaire Historique de la Langue Française, Copenhagen 1914 ff.
Nyrop Gr = Kr. Nyrop, Grammaire Historique de la Langue Française, Copenhagen 1914 onwards.
OE. = Old English (Anglo-Saxon).
Old English (Anglo-Saxon).
Oertel = H. Oertel, Lectures on the Study of Language, New York 1901.
Oertel = H. Oertel, Lectures on the Study of Language, New York 1901.
OFr. = Old French.
OFr. = Old French.
ON. = Old Norse.
ON. = Old Norse.
Passy Ch = P. Passy, Les Changements Phonétiques, Paris 1890.
Passy Ch = P. Passy, Les Changements Phonétiques, Paris, 1890.
Paul P = H. Paul, Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte, 4te Aufl., Halle 1909.
Paul P = H. Paul, Principles of Language History, 4th ed., Halle 1909.
Gr = Grundriss der germanischen Philologie.
Gr = Basic Outline of Germanic Philology.
PBB = Beitrage zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache (Paul u. Braune).
PBB = Beitrage zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache (Paul and Braune).
Pedersen GKS = H. Pedersen, Vergl. Grammatik der keltischen Sprachen, Göttingen 1909.
Pedersen GKS = H. Pedersen, Comparative Grammar of the Celtic Languages, Göttingen 1909.
PhG = O. Jespersen, Phonetische Grundfragen, Leipzig 1904.
PhG = O. Jespersen, Phonetische Grundfragen, Leipzig 1904.
Porzezinski Spr = V. Porzezinski, Einleitung in die Sprachwissenschaft, Leipzig 1910.
Porzezinski Spr = V. Porzezinski, Einleitung in die Sprachwissenschaft, Leipzig 1910.
Progr. = O. Jespersen, Progress in Language, London 1894.
Progr. = O. Jespersen, Progress in Language, London 1894.
Rask P = R. Rask [Prisskrift] Undersögelse om det gamle Nordiske Sprogs Oprindelse, Copenhagen 1818.
Rask P = R. Rask [Publication] Investigation into the Origin of the Old Nordic Language, Copenhagen 1818.
SA = Samlede Afhandlinger, Copenhagen 1834.
SA = Samlede Afhandlinger, Copenhagen 1834.
Raumer Gesch = R. v. Raumer, Geschichte der germanischen Philologie, München 1870.
Raumer Gesch = R. v. Raumer, Geschichte der germanischen Philologie, München 1870.
Ronjat = J. Ronjat, Le Développement du Langage chez un Enfant Bilingue, Paris 1913.
Ronjat = J. Ronjat, Le Développement du Langage chez un Enfant Bilingue, Paris 1913.
Sandfeld Jensen S = Kr. Sandfeld Jensen, Sprogvidenskaben, Copenhagen 1913.
Sandfeld Jensen S = Kr. Sandfeld Jensen, Sprogvidenskaben, Copenhagen 1913.
Sprw = Die Sprachwissenschaft, Leipzig 1915.
Sprw = Die Sprachwissenschaft, Leipzig 1915.
Saussure LG = F. de Saussure, Cours de Linguistique Générale, Lausanne 1916.
Saussure LG = F. de Saussure, Cours de Linguistique Générale, Lausanne 1916.
Sayce P = A. H. Sayce, Principles of Comparative Philology, 2nd ed., London 1875.
Sayce P = A. H. Sayce, Principles of Comparative Philology, 2nd ed., London 1875.
S = Introduction to the Science of Language, London 1880.
S = Introduction to the Science of Language, London 1880.
Scherer GDS = W. Scherer, Zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache, Berlin 1878.
Scherer GDS = W. Scherer, Zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache, Berlin 1878.
Schleicher I, II = A. Schleicher, Sprachvergleichende Untersuchungen, I-II, Bonn 1848, 1850.
Schleicher I, II = A. Schleicher, Sprachvergleichende Untersuchungen, I-II, Bonn 1848, 1850.
Bed. = Die Bedeutung der Sprache, Weimar 1865.
Bed. = The Importance of Language, Weimar 1865.
C = Compendium der vergl. Grammatik, 4te Aufl., Weimar 1876.
C = Compendium der vergl. Grammatik, 4th ed., Weimar 1876.
D = Die deutsche Sprache, Stuttgart 1860.
D = The German Language, Stuttgart 1860.
Darw. = Die Darwinische Theorie und die Sprachwissenschaft, Weimar 1873.
Darw. = The Darwinian Theory and Linguistics, Weimar 1873.
NV = Nomen und Verbum, Leipzig 1865.
NV = Nomen und Verbum, Leipzig 1865.
Schuchardt SlD = H. Schuchardt, Slawo-Deutsches u. Slawo-Italienisches, Graz 1885.
Schuchardt SlD = H. Schuchardt, Slawo-Deutsches u. Slawo-Italienisches, Graz 1885.
KS = Kreolische Studien (Wien, Akademie).
KS = Creole Studies (Vienna, Academy).
Simonyi US = S. Simonyi, Die Ungarische Sprache, Strassburg 1907.
Simonyi US = S. Simonyi, Die Ungarische Sprache, Strasbourg 1907.
Skt. = Sanskrit.
Skt. = Sanskrit.
Sommer Lat. = F. Sommer, Handbuch der latein. Laut- und Formenlehre, Heidelberg 1902.
Sommer Lat. = F. Sommer, Handbuch der latein. Laut- und Formenlehre, Heidelberg 1902.
Stern = Clara and William Stern, Die Kindersprache, Leipzig 1907.
Stern = Clara and William Stern, Die Kindersprache, Leipzig 1907.
Stoffel Int. = C. Stoffel, Intensives and Down-toners, Heidelberg 1901.
Stoffel Int. = C. Stoffel, Intensives and Down-toners, Heidelberg 1901.
Streitberg Gesch = W. Streitberg, Geschichte der indogerm. Sprachwissenschaft, Strassburg 1917.
Streitberg Gesch = W. Streitberg, Geschichte der indogerm. Sprachwissenschaft, Strassburg 1917.
Urg = Urgermanische Grammatik, Heidelberg 1896.
Urg = Urgermanische Grammatik, Heidelberg 1896.
Sturtevant LCh = E. H. Sturtevant, Linguistic Change, Chicago 1917.
Sturtevant LCh = E. H. Sturtevant, Linguistic Change, Chicago 1917.
Sütterlin WSG = L. Sütterlin, Das Wesen der sprachlichen Gebilde, Heidelberg 1902.
Sütterlin WSG = L. Sütterlin, Das Wesen der sprachlichen Gebilde, Heidelberg 1902.
WW = Werden und Wesen der Sprache, Leipzig 1913.
WW = Becoming and Essence of Language, Leipzig 1913.
Sweet CP = H. Sweet, Collected Papers, Oxford 1913.
Sweet CP = H. Sweet, Collected Papers, Oxford 1913.
H = The History of Language, London 1900.
H = The History of Language, London 1900.
PS = The Practical Study of Languages, London 1899.
PS = The Practical Study of Languages, London 1899.
Tegnér SM = E. Tegnér, Språkets makt öfver tanken, Stockholm 1880.
Tegnér SM = E. Tegnér, Språkets makt över tanken, Stockholm 1880.
Verner = K. Verner, Afhandlinger og Breve, Copenhagen 1903.
Verner = K. Verner, Afhandlinger og Breve, Copenhagen 1903.
Wechssler L = E. Wechssler, Giebt es Lautgesetze? Halle 1900.
Wechssler L = E. Wechssler, Gibt es Lautgesetze? Halle 1900.
Whitney G = W. D. Whitney, Life and Growth of Language, London 1875.
Whitney G = W. D. Whitney, Life and Growth of Language, London 1875.
L = Language and the Study of Language, London 1868.
L = Language and the Study of Language, London 1868.
M = Max Müller and the Science of Language, New York 1892.
M = Max Müller and the Science of Language, New York 1892.
OLS = Oriental and Linguistic Studies, New York 1873-4.
OLS = Oriental and Linguistic Studies, New York 1873-4.
Wundt S = W. Wundt, Die Sprache, Leipzig 1900.
Wundt S = W. Wundt, Die Sprache, Leipzig 1900.
PHONETIC SYMBOLS
' stands before the stressed syllable.
· indicates length of the preceding sound.
' stands before the stressed syllable.
· indicates the length of the sound before it.
[a·] as in alms.
[ai] as in ice.
[au] as in house.
[æ] as in hat.
[ei] as in hate.
[ɛ] as in care; Fr. tel.
[ə] indistinct vowels.
[i] as in fill; Fr. qui.
[i·] as in feel; Fr. fille.
[o] as in Fr. seau.
[ou] as in so.
[ɔ] open o-sounds.
[u] as in full; Fr. fou.
[u·] as in foorl; Fr. épouse.
[y] as in Fr. vu.
[ʌ] as in cut.
[ø] as in Fr. feu.
[œ] as in Fr. sœur.
[~] French nasalization.
[c] as in G. ich.
[x] as in G., Sc. loch.
[ð] as in this.
[j] as in you.
[þ] as in thick.
[ʃ] as in she.
[ʒ] as in measure.
[’] in Russian palatalization, in Danish glottal stop.
[a·] as in alms.
[ai] as in ice.
[au] as in house.
[æ] as in hat.
[ei] as in hate.
[ɛ] as in care; Fr. tel.
[ə] unclear vowels.
[i] as in fill; Fr. qui.
[i·] as in feel; Fr. fille.
[o] as in Fr. seau.
[ou] as in so.
[ɔ] open o sounds.
[u] as in full; Fr. fou.
[u·] as in foorl; Fr. épouse.
[y] as in Fr. vu.
[ʌ] as in cut.
[ø] as in Fr. feu.
[œ] as in Fr. sœur.
[~] French nasal sounds.
[c] as in G. ich.
[x] as in G., Sc. loch.
[ð] as in this.
[j] as in you.
[þ] as in thick.
[ʃ] as in she.
[ʒ] as in measure.
[’] in Russian palatalization, in Danish glottal stop.
§ 1. Antiquity. § 2. Middle Ages and Renaissance. § 3. Eighteenth-century Speculation. Herder. § 4. Jenisch.
§ 1. Ancient Times. § 2. Medieval Era and Renaissance. § 3. Eighteenth-Century Thought. Herder. § 4. Jenisch.
I.—§ 1. Antiquity.
The science of language began, tentatively and approximately, when the minds of men first turned to problems like these: How is it that people do not speak everywhere the same language? How were words first created? What is the relation between a name and the thing it stands for? Why is such and such a person, or such and such a thing, called this and not that? The first answers to these questions, like primitive answers to other riddles of the universe, were largely theological: God, or one particular god, had created language, or God led all animals to the first man in order that he might give them names. Thus in the Old Testament the diversity of languages is explained as a punishment from God for man’s crimes and presumption. These were great and general problems, but the minds of the early Jews were also occupied with smaller and more particular problems of language, as when etymological interpretations were given of such personal names as were not immediately self-explanatory.
The study of language started, slowly and roughly, when people began to think about questions like these: Why don’t people everywhere speak the same language? How were words invented? What’s the connection between a name and what it refers to? Why is a certain person or thing called this and not that? The initial answers to these questions, similar to early explanations for other mysteries of the universe, were mostly religious: God, or a specific god, created language, or God brought all animals to the first man so he could name them. In the Old Testament, the variety of languages is explained as a punishment from God for human wrongdoing and arrogance. These were significant and broad issues, but the early Jews were also concerned with smaller and more specific language issues, such as when they sought etymological explanations for personal names that weren’t immediately clear.
The same predilection for etymology, and a similar primitive kind of etymology, based entirely on a more or less accidental similarity of sound and easily satisfied with any fanciful connexion in sense, is found abundantly in Greek writers and in their Latin imitators. But to the speculative minds of Greek thinkers the problem that proved most attractive was the general and abstract one, Are words natural and necessary expressions of the notions underlying them, or are they merely arbitrary and conventional signs for notions that might have been equally well expressed by any other sounds? Endless discussions were carried on about this question, as we see particularly from Plato’s Kratylos, and no very definite result was arrived at, nor could any be expected so long as one language only formed the basis of the discussion—even in our own days, after a century of comparative philology, the question still remains an open one. In Greece, the two catchwords phúsei (by nature) and thései (by convention) for centuries[20] divided philosophers and grammarians into two camps, while some, like Sokrates in Plato’s dialogue, though admitting that in language as actually existing there was no natural connexion between word and thing, still wished that an ideal language might be created in which words and things would be tied together in a perfectly rational way—thus paving the way for Bishop Wilkins and other modern constructors of philosophical languages.
The same love for etymology, and a similar basic type of etymology based mostly on accidental sound similarities and easily satisfied with any fanciful connections in meaning, can be seen in Greek writers and their Latin followers. However, for speculative Greek thinkers, the most intriguing question was whether words are natural and necessary expressions of the ideas they represent, or just arbitrary and conventional symbols for ideas that could be expressed with any other sounds. This led to endless debates, as seen particularly in Plato’s Kratylos, but no clear answers were found, nor could any be expected as long as the discussion was based on only one language—even today, after a century of comparative philology, the question is still open. In Greece, the two terms phúsei (by nature) and thései (by convention) divided philosophers and grammarians into two camps for centuries[20], while some, like Socrates in Plato’s dialogue, even though they acknowledged that in the language that exists there was no natural connection between word and thing, still hoped for an ideal language where words and things would be connected in a perfectly rational way—thus setting the stage for Bishop Wilkins and other modern creators of philosophical languages.
Such abstract and a priori speculations, however stimulating and clever, hardly deserve the name of science, as this term is understood nowadays. Science presupposes careful observation and systematic classification of facts, and of that in the old Greek writers on language we find very little. The earliest masters in linguistic observation and classification were the old Indian grammarians. The language of the old sacred hymns had become in many points obsolete, but religion required that not one iota of these revered texts should be altered, and a scrupulous oral tradition kept them unchanged from generation to generation in every minute particular. This led to a wonderfully exact analysis of speech sounds, in which every detail of articulation was carefully described, and to a no less admirable analysis of grammatical forms, which were arranged systematically and described in a concise and highly ingenious, though artificial, terminology. The whole manner of treatment was entirely different from the methods of Western grammarians, and when the works of Panini and other Sanskrit grammarians were first made known to Europeans in the nineteenth century, they profoundly influenced our own linguistic science, as witnessed, among other things, by the fact that some of the Indian technical terms are still extensively used, for instance those describing various kinds of compound nouns.
Such abstract and a priori speculations, no matter how stimulating and clever, hardly qualify as science, at least as we define it today. Science relies on careful observation and systematic classification of facts, and there is very little of that in the old Greek writings on language. The earliest experts in linguistic observation and classification were the ancient Indian grammarians. The language of the old sacred hymns had become outdated in many ways, but religion mandated that not a single word of these revered texts should be changed, so a meticulous oral tradition kept them exactly the same from generation to generation in every tiny detail. This resulted in an incredibly precise analysis of speech sounds, where every aspect of articulation was carefully outlined, and a similarly impressive analysis of grammatical forms, which were systematically arranged and described using a concise yet highly creative, if somewhat artificial, terminology. The entire approach was completely different from the methods of Western grammarians, and when the works of Panini and other Sanskrit grammarians were first introduced to Europeans in the nineteenth century, they significantly impacted our own linguistic science, as evidenced, among other things, by the fact that some of the Indian technical terms are still widely used, for example, those describing different types of compound nouns.
In Europe grammatical science was slowly and laboriously developed in Greece and later in Rome. Aristotle laid the foundation of the division of words into “parts of speech” and introduced the notion of case (ptôsis). His work in this connexion was continued by the Stoics, many of whose grammatical distinctions and terms are still in use, the latter in their Latin dress, which embodies some curious mistakes, as when genikḗ, “the case of kind or species,” was rendered genitivus, as if it meant “the case of origin,” or, worse still, when aitiatikḗ, “the case of object,” was rendered accusativus, as if from aitiáomai, ‘I accuse.’ In later times the philological school of Alexandria was particularly important, the object of research being the interpretation of the old poets, whose language was no longer instantly intelligible. Details of flexion and of the meaning of words were described and referred to the two categories of analogy or regularity and anomaly or irregularity, but real insight into the nature of language[21] made very little progress either with the Alexandrians or with their Roman inheritors, and etymology still remained in the childlike stage.
In Europe, the study of grammar developed slowly and with great effort, starting in Greece and later in Rome. Aristotle established the basis for dividing words into “parts of speech” and introduced the concept of case (ptôsis). His work in this area was expanded upon by the Stoics, many of whose grammatical distinctions and terms are still in use today, often in their Latin forms, which contain some interesting errors. For instance, genikḗ, meaning “the case of kind or species,” was translated as genitivus, implying “the case of origin,” and even more misleadingly, aitiatikḗ, meaning “the case of object,” was translated as accusativus, as if it derived from aitiáomai, meaning ‘I accuse.’ In later periods, the philological school of Alexandria became especially significant, focusing on interpreting the works of old poets, whose language was no longer easily understood. Details of inflection and word meanings were categorized into analogy (regularity) and anomaly (irregularity), but genuine understanding of language's nature made little progress among the Alexandrians or their Roman successors, and etymology remained at a simplistic level.
I.—§ 2. Middle Ages and Renaissance.
Nor did linguistic science advance in the Middle Ages. The chief thing then was learning Latin as the common language of the Church and of what little there was of civilization generally; but Latin was not studied in a scientific spirit, and the various vernacular languages, which one by one blossomed out into languages of literature, even less so.
Linguistic science didn't progress in the Middle Ages either. The main focus at that time was learning Latin, which was the common language of the Church and what little civilization existed; however, Latin wasn't studied scientifically, and the various vernacular languages that gradually developed into languages of literature were studied even less.
The Renaissance in so far brought about a change in this, as it widened the horizon, especially by introducing the study of Greek. It also favoured grammatical studies through the stress it laid on correct Latin as represented in the best period of classical literature: it now became the ambition of humanists in all countries to write Latin like Cicero. In the following centuries we witness a constantly deepening interest in the various living languages of Europe, owing to the growing importance of native literatures and to increasing facilities of international traffic and communication in general. The most important factor here was, of course, the invention of printing, which rendered it incomparably more easy than formerly to obtain the means of studying foreign languages. It should be noted also that in those times the prevalent theological interest made it a much more common thing than nowadays for ordinary scholars to have some knowledge of Hebrew as the original language of the Old Testament. The acquaintance with a language so different in type from those spoken in Europe in many ways stimulated the interest in linguistic studies, though on the other hand it proved a fruitful source of error, because the position of the Semitic family of languages was not yet understood, and because Hebrew was thought to be the language spoken in Paradise, and therefore imagined to be the language from which all other languages were descended. All kinds of fanciful similarities between Hebrew and European languages were taken as proofs of the origin of the latter; every imaginable permutation of sounds (or rather of letters) was looked upon as possible so long as there was a slight connexion in the sense of the two words compared, and however incredible it may seem nowadays, the fact that Hebrew was written from right to left, while we in our writing proceed from left to right, was considered justification enough for the most violent transposition of letters in etymological explanations. And yet all these flighty and whimsical comparisons served perhaps in some measure to[22] pave the way for a more systematic treatment of etymology through collecting vast stores of words from which sober and critical minds might select those instances of indubitable connexion on which a sound science of etymology could eventually be constructed.
The Renaissance brought significant changes, especially by expanding perspectives through the introduction of Greek studies. It also promoted grammatical studies by emphasizing correct Latin as seen in the best classical literature. Humanists across various countries aspired to write Latin like Cicero. In the following centuries, we saw a growing interest in the living languages of Europe, driven by the increasing significance of native literatures and improved international communication. A key factor was the invention of printing, which made it much easier to access resources for learning foreign languages. It’s worth noting that during this time, the strong focus on theology meant that it was more common for scholars to know some Hebrew, as it was the original language of the Old Testament. Familiarity with a language so different from those spoken in Europe sparked interest in linguistic studies. However, it also led to many misconceptions, as the relationship of the Semitic languages was not yet understood, and Hebrew was believed to be the language spoken in Paradise, thought to be the source of all languages. Various fanciful similarities between Hebrew and European languages were seen as evidence of this origin; any slight resemblance in meaning was interpreted as a potential link. Strangely enough, the fact that Hebrew was written from right to left, while we write from left to right, justified extreme rearrangements of letters in linguistic explanations. Yet, despite these whimsical comparisons, they perhaps contributed to laying the groundwork for a more systematic approach to etymology by gathering a wealth of words from which rational and critical thinkers could identify undeniable connections, ultimately allowing a solid science of etymology to be developed.
The discovery and publication of texts in the old Gothonic (Germanic) languages, especially Wulfila’s Gothic translation of the Bible, compared with which Old English (Anglo-Saxon), Old German and Old Icelandic texts were of less, though by no means of despicable, account, paved the way for historical treatment of this important group of languages in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. But on the whole, the interest in the history of languages in those days was small, and linguistic thinkers thought it more urgent to establish vast treasuries of languages as actually spoken than to follow the development of any one language from century to century. Thus we see that the great philosopher Leibniz, who took much interest in linguistic pursuits and to whom we owe many judicious utterances on the possibility of a universal language, instigated Peter the Great to have vocabularies and specimens collected of all the various languages of his vast empire. To this initiative taken by Leibniz, and to the great personal interest that the Empress Catherine II took in these studies, we owe, directly or indirectly, the great repertories of all languages then known, first Pallas’s Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia comparativa (1786-87), then Hervas’s Catálogo de las lenguas de las naziones conocidas (1800-5), and finally Adelung’s Mithridates oder allgemeine Sprachenkunde (1806-17). In spite of their inevitable shortcomings, their uncritical and unequal treatment of many languages, the preponderance of lexical over grammatical information, and the use of biblical texts as their sole connected illustrations, these great works exercised a mighty influence on the linguistic thought and research of the time, and contributed very much to the birth of the linguistic science of the nineteenth century. It should not be forgotten, moreover, that Hervas was one of the first to recognize the superior importance of grammar to vocabulary for deciding questions of relationship between languages.
The discovery and publication of texts in the old Gothic (Germanic) languages, especially Wulfila’s Gothic translation of the Bible, which made Old English (Anglo-Saxon), Old German, and Old Icelandic texts seem less noteworthy, though still significant, paved the way for a historical approach to this important group of languages in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Overall, interest in the history of languages at that time was limited, and linguistic scholars prioritized creating extensive collections of languages as they were actually spoken rather than tracking the development of a single language over the centuries. This is evident in the work of the great philosopher Leibniz, who had a keen interest in language studies and is credited with many insightful thoughts on the possibility of a universal language. He encouraged Peter the Great to collect vocabularies and samples of all the different languages within his vast empire. Thanks to Leibniz’s initiative, and the strong personal interest that Empress Catherine II showed in these studies, we have the great collections of all known languages at the time, starting with Pallas’s Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia comparativa (1786-87), followed by Hervas’s Catálogo de las lenguas de las naziones conocidas (1800-5), and finally Adelung’s Mithridates oder allgemeine Sprachenkunde (1806-17). Despite their inevitable shortcomings, such as their uncritical and uneven treatment of many languages, a focus on vocabulary over grammar, and the use of biblical texts as their only connected examples, these significant works had a powerful impact on the linguistic thought and research of the time and greatly contributed to the development of linguistic science in the nineteenth century. It’s also important to note that Hervas was one of the first to recognize the greater importance of grammar over vocabulary in determining relationships between languages.
It will be well here to consider the manner in which languages and the teaching of languages were generally viewed during the centuries preceding the rise of Comparative Linguistics. The chief language taught was Latin; the first and in many cases the only grammar with which scholars came into contact was Latin grammar. No wonder therefore that grammar and Latin grammar came in the minds of most people to be synonyms. Latin grammar played an enormous rôle in the schools, to the exclusion of many subjects (the pupil’s own native language, science, history, etc.)[23] which we are now beginning to think more essential for the education of the young. The traditional term for ‘secondary school’ was in England ‘grammar school’ and in Denmark ‘latinskole,’ and the reason for both expressions was obviously the same. Here, however, we are concerned with this privileged position of Latin grammar only in so far as it influenced the treatment of languages in general. It did so in more ways than one.
It’s important to look at how languages and language teaching were generally perceived in the centuries before Comparative Linguistics emerged. The main language taught was Latin; the first and often the only grammar that scholars encountered was Latin grammar. It’s no surprise that for many people, grammar and Latin grammar became synonymous. Latin grammar played a huge role in schools, overshadowing many subjects (like the student’s own native language, science, history, etc.)[23] that we are now realizing are essential for young people's education. The traditional term for ‘secondary school’ in England was ‘grammar school,’ and in Denmark, it was ‘latinskole,’ reflecting the same reason for both terms. However, we are focusing on the privileged status of Latin grammar only in terms of how it impacted the treatment of languages in general. It had that effect in several ways.
Latin was a language with a wealth of flexional forms, and in describing other languages the same categories as were found in Latin were applied as a matter of course, even where there was nothing in these other languages which really corresponded to what was found in Latin. In English and Danish grammars paradigms of noun declension were given with such cases as accusative, dative and ablative, in spite of the fact that no separate forms for these cases had existed for centuries. All languages were indiscriminately saddled with the elaborate Latin system of tenses and moods in the verbs, and by means of such Procrustean methods the actual facts of many languages were distorted and misrepresented. Discriminations which had no foundation in reality were nevertheless insisted on, while discriminations which happened to be non-existent in Latin were apt to be overlooked. The mischief consequent on this unfortunate method of measuring all grammar after the pattern of Latin grammar has not even yet completely disappeared, and it is even now difficult to find a single grammar of any language that is not here and there influenced by the Latin bias.
Latin was a language with a lot of different forms, and when describing other languages, the same categories used in Latin were applied as a standard practice, even when there was nothing in those other languages that truly matched what was found in Latin. English and Danish grammars included paradigms of noun declension with cases like accusative, dative, and ablative, even though no separate forms for those cases had existed for centuries. All languages were arbitrarily burdened with the complex Latin system of tenses and moods in verbs, and this rigid approach distorted and misrepresented the actual nature of many languages. Distinctions without a real basis were still emphasized, while distinctions that were absent in Latin tended to be ignored. The problems arising from this misguided method of judging all grammar based on Latin grammar have not completely vanished, and it's still hard to find a single grammar of any language that isn’t influenced by this Latin perspective.
Latin was chiefly taught as a written language (witness the totally different manner in which Latin was pronounced in the different countries, the consequence being that as early as the sixteenth century French and English scholars were unable to understand each other’s spoken Latin). This led to the almost exclusive occupation with letters instead of sounds. The fact that all language is primarily spoken and only secondarily written down, that the real life of language is in the mouth and ear and not in the pen and eye, was overlooked, to the detriment of a real understanding of the essence of language and linguistic development; and very often where the spoken form of a language was accessible scholars contented themselves with a reading knowledge. In spite of many efforts, some of which go back to the sixteenth century, but which did not become really powerful till the rise of modern phonetics in the nineteenth century, the fundamental significance of spoken as opposed to written language has not yet been fully appreciated by all linguists. There are still too many writers on philological questions who have evidently never tried to think in sounds instead of thinking in letters and symbols,[24] and who would probably be sorely puzzled if they were to pronounce all the forms that come so glibly to their pens. What Sweet wrote in 1877 in the preface to his Handbook of Phonetics is perhaps less true now than it was then, but it still contains some elements of truth. “Many instances,” he said, “might be quoted of the way in which important philological facts and laws have been passed over or misrepresented through the observer’s want of phonetic training. Schleicher’s failing to observe the Lithuanian accents, or even to comprehend them when pointed out by Kurschat, is a striking instance.” But there can be no doubt that the way in which Latin has been for centuries made the basis of all linguistic instruction is largely responsible for the preponderance of eye-philology to ear-philology in the history of our science.
Latin was mostly taught as a written language (just look at how differently Latin was pronounced in various countries; as early as the sixteenth century, French and English scholars couldn't understand each other's spoken Latin). This led to a focus almost entirely on reading instead of listening. The fact that all language is primarily spoken and only secondarily written down— that real language life is in the mouth and ear, not in the pen and eye— was ignored, harming a true understanding of the essence of language and its development. Often, when the spoken form of a language was available, scholars were satisfied with just being able to read it. Despite many efforts, some dating back to the sixteenth century but only gaining real traction with the rise of modern phonetics in the nineteenth century, the crucial difference between spoken and written language hasn't been fully recognized by all linguists. There are still too many writers on language issues who clearly have never tried to think in sounds rather than letters and symbols,[24] and they would likely be quite confused if they had to pronounce all the forms that come so easily to their pens. What Sweet said in 1877 in the preface to his Handbook of Phonetics might be less accurate now than it was back then, but it still holds some truth. “Many instances,” he noted, “could be cited of how important linguistic facts and laws have been overlooked or misrepresented due to the observer’s lack of phonetic training. Schleicher’s failure to notice the Lithuanian accents, or even to understand them when pointed out by Kurschat, is a striking example.” But there’s no doubt that the way Latin has been the foundation of all language instruction for centuries has significantly contributed to the dominance of eye-focused philology over ear-focused philology in the history of our field.
We next come to a point which to my mind is very important, because it concerns something which has had, and has justly had, enduring effects on the manner in which language, and especially grammar, is viewed and taught to this day. What was the object of teaching Latin in the Middle Ages and later? Certainly not the purely scientific one of imparting knowledge for knowledge’s own sake, apart from any practical use or advantage, simply in order to widen the spiritual horizon and to obtain the joy of pure intellectual understanding. For such a purpose some people with scientific leanings may here and there take up the study of some out-of-the-way African or American idiom. But the reasons for teaching and learning Latin were not so idealistic. Latin was not even taught and learnt solely with the purpose of opening the doors to the old classical or to the more recent religious literature in that language, but chiefly, and in the first instance, because Latin was a practical and highly important means of communication between educated people. One had to learn not only to read Latin, but also to write Latin, if one wanted to maintain no matter how humble a position in the republic of learning or in the hierarchy of the Church. Consequently, grammar was not (even primarily) the science of how words were inflected and how forms were used by the old Romans, but chiefly and essentially the art of inflecting words and of using the forms yourself, if you wanted to write correct Latin. This you must say, and these faults you must avoid—such were the lessons imparted in the schools. Grammar was not a set of facts observed but of rules to be observed, and of paradigms, i.e. of patterns, to be followed. Sometimes this character of grammatical instruction is expressly indicated in the form of the precepts given, as in such memorial verses as this: “Tolle -me, -mi, -mu, -mis, Si declinare domus vis!” In other words, grammar was prescriptive rather than descriptive.
We now arrive at a point that I believe is very significant because it relates to something that has had, and continues to have, lasting effects on how language, especially grammar, is perceived and taught today. What was the purpose of teaching Latin in the Middle Ages and afterward? It wasn't purely about gaining knowledge for knowledge's sake or for any practical advantage, simply to expand one’s spiritual understanding and to enjoy pure intellectual insight. Some people with scientific interests might occasionally study an obscure African or American language for that reason. However, the motivations behind teaching and learning Latin were far less idealistic. Latin wasn’t taught solely to access ancient classical literature or more recent religious texts, but mainly because it was an essential and effective way for educated people to communicate. One needed to learn not just to read Latin, but also to write it if they wanted to hold any position, no matter how humble, in the world of academia or within the Church hierarchy. Therefore, grammar was not (even primarily) the study of how the old Romans changed words and used forms; it was mainly the skill of changing words and using those forms correctly to write accurate Latin. These are the rules you had to know, and these mistakes you had to avoid—such were the lessons taught in schools. Grammar wasn't just a collection of observed facts; it was about following rules and patterns. Sometimes, this aspect of grammatical instruction was explicitly pointed out through the rules given, as in mnemonic verses like this: “Tolle -me, -mi, -mu, -mis, Si declinare domus vis!” In summary, grammar was prescriptive rather than descriptive.
The current definition of grammar, therefore, was “ars bene dicendi et bene scribendi,” “l’art de bien dire et de bien écrire,” the art of speaking and writing correctly. J. C. Scaliger said, “Grammatici unus finis est recte loqui.” To attain to correct diction (‘good grammar’) and to avoid faulty diction (‘bad grammar’), such were the two objects of grammatical teaching. Now, the same point of view, in which the two elements of ‘art’ and of ‘correctness’ entered so largely, was applied not only to Latin, but to other languages as well, when the various vernaculars came to be treated grammatically.
The current definition of grammar is therefore “the art of good speaking and good writing,” “the art of speaking and writing well,” the art of speaking and writing correctly. J. C. Scaliger stated, “The goal of grammarians is to speak correctly.” The goals of grammatical teaching were to achieve correct diction (‘good grammar’) and to avoid faulty diction (‘bad grammar’). This perspective, which focused heavily on the two elements of ‘art’ and ‘correctness,’ was applied not only to Latin but also to other languages as vernaculars were treated grammatically.
The vocabulary, too, was treated from the same point of view. This is especially evident in the case of the dictionaries issued by the French and Italian Academies. They differ from dictionaries as now usually compiled in being not collections of all and any words their authors could get hold of within the limits of the language concerned, but in being selections of words deserving the recommendations of the best arbiters of taste and therefore fit to be used in the highest literature by even the most elegant or fastidious writers. Dictionaries thus understood were less descriptions of actual usage than prescriptions for the best usage of words.
The vocabulary was also approached in the same way. This is especially clear in the dictionaries published by the French and Italian Academies. They differ from today's dictionaries, which often compile any and all words their authors can find within the language, by being curated selections of words that have earned the approval of the best judges of taste, making them suitable for use in high literature by even the most refined or picky writers. Dictionaries understood this way served more as guidelines for the best usage of words rather than simply describing actual usage.
The normative way of viewing language is fraught with some great dangers which can only be avoided through a comprehensive knowledge of the historic development of languages and of the general conditions of linguistic psychology. Otherwise, the tendency everywhere is to draw too narrow limits for what is allowable or correct. In many cases one form, or one construction, only is recognized, even where two or more are found in actual speech; the question which is to be selected as the only good form comes to be decided too often by individual fancy or predilection, where no scientific tests can yet be applied, and thus a form may often be proscribed which from a less narrow point of view might have appeared just as good as, or even better than, the one preferred in the official grammar or dictionary. In other instances, where two forms were recognized, the grammarian wanted to give rules for their discrimination, and sometimes on the basis of a totally inadequate induction he would establish nice distinctions not really warranted by actual usage—distinctions which subsequent generations had to learn at school with the sweat of their brows and which were often considered most important in spite of their intrinsic insignificance. Such unreal or half-real subtle distinctions are the besetting sin of French grammarians from the ‘grand siècle’ onwards, while they have played a much less considerable part in England, where people have been on the whole more inclined to let things slide as best they may on the[26] ‘laissez faire’ principle, and where no Academy was ever established to regulate language. But even in English rules are not unfrequently given in schools and in newspaper offices which are based on narrow views and hasty generalizations. Because a preposition at the end of a sentence may in some instances be clumsy or unwieldy, this is no reason why a final preposition should always and under all circumstances be considered a grave error. But it is of course easier for the schoolmaster to give an absolute and inviolable rule once and for all than to study carefully all the various considerations that might render a qualification desirable. If the ordinary books on Common Faults in Writing and Speaking English and similar works in other languages have not even now assimilated the teachings of Comparative and Historic Linguistics, it is no wonder that the grammarians of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, with whom we are here concerned, should be in many ways guided by narrow and insufficient views on what ought to determine correctness of speech.
The standard way of looking at language comes with some significant risks that can only be avoided through a thorough understanding of how languages have developed historically and the general principles of linguistic psychology. Otherwise, the tendency is to set overly restrictive boundaries on what is permissible or correct. In many cases, only one form or construction is recognized, even when two or more exist in actual speech; the choice of which is deemed the only correct form is often dictated by personal preference or bias when no scientific criteria can be applied. As a result, a form may be rejected that, from a broader perspective, might be just as acceptable or even preferable to the one favored in the official grammar or dictionary. In other cases, when two forms are acknowledged, grammarians would attempt to create rules for differentiating them, sometimes based on inadequate observations, leading to distinctions that are not genuinely supported by common usage—distinctions that subsequent generations had to learn in school with great effort and were often deemed crucial despite their inherent triviality. Such unrealistic or somewhat superficial distinctions have been a persistent issue for French grammarians since the 'grand siècle', while they have played a much less significant role in England, where people have generally preferred to let things work themselves out according to the 'laissez faire' principle, and where no Academy has ever been established to govern language. However, even in English, rules are frequently imposed in schools and newsrooms that are based on narrow perspectives and quick generalizations. Just because a preposition at the end of a sentence may sometimes sound awkward or cumbersome, it doesn't mean that a final preposition should always be considered a serious mistake in every situation. But, of course, it's easier for teachers to impose a strict and absolute rule than to carefully examine all the various factors that might make a qualification necessary. If the typical books on Common Faults in Writing and Speaking English and similar works in other languages haven't yet incorporated the insights of Comparative and Historical Linguistics, it's not surprising that the grammarians of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, whom we are discussing here, were guided by limited and inadequate views on what should determine the correctness of speech.
Here also the importance given to the study of Latin was sometimes harmful; too much was settled by a reference to Latin rules, even where the modern languages really followed rules of their own that were opposed to those of Latin. The learning of Latin grammar was supposed to be, and to some extent really was, a schooling in logic, as the strict observance of the rules of any foreign language is bound to be; but the consequence of this was that when questions of grammatical correctness were to be settled, too much importance was often given to purely logical considerations, and scholars were sometimes apt to determine what was to be called ‘logical’ in language according to whether it was or was not in conformity with Latin usage. This disposition, joined with the unavoidable conservatism of mankind, and more particularly of teachers, would in many ways prove a hindrance to natural developments in a living speech. But we must again take up the thread of the history of linguistic theory.
Here, the emphasis placed on studying Latin was sometimes counterproductive; too much was decided based on Latin rules, even when modern languages followed their own rules that contradicted Latin. Learning Latin grammar was seen as, and to some extent really was, an exercise in logic, just as strictly following the rules of any foreign language tends to be. However, the result of this was that when issues of grammatical correctness arose, too much weight was often given to purely logical considerations, and scholars sometimes judged what was considered 'logical' in language based on whether it aligned with Latin usage. This tendency, combined with the inevitable conservatism of people, especially teachers, often hindered natural developments in a living language. But we must again pick up the thread of the history of linguistic theory.
I.—§ 3. Eighteenth-century Speculation. Herder.
The problem of a natural origin of language exercised some of the best-known thinkers of the eighteenth century. Rousseau imagined the first men setting themselves more or less deliberately to frame a language by an agreement similar to (or forming part of) the contrat social which according to him was the basis of all social order. There is here the obvious difficulty of imagining how primitive men who had been previously without any speech came to feel the want of language, and how they could agree on what sound was to represent what idea without having already[27] some means of communication. Rousseau’s whole manner of putting and of viewing the problem is evidently too crude to be of any real importance in the history of linguistic science.
The issue of how language originated naturally intrigued some of the most prominent thinkers of the eighteenth century. Rousseau envisioned the first humans somewhat deliberately coming together to create a language through an agreement similar to (or part of) the contrat social, which he believed was the foundation of all social order. Here, a significant challenge arises in imagining how primitive people, who previously had no speech, came to feel the need for language, and how they could agree on what sounds represented what ideas without having some form of communication beforehand[27]. Rousseau’s approach to this issue is clearly too simplistic to hold any real significance in the history of linguistic science.
Condillac is much more sensible when he tries to imagine how a speechless man and a speechless woman might be led quite naturally to acquire something like language, starting with instinctive cries and violent gestures called forth by strong emotions. Such cries would come to be associated with elementary feelings, and new sounds might come to indicate various objects if produced repeatedly in connexion with gestures showing what objects the speaker wanted to call attention to. If these two first speaking beings had as yet very little power to vary their sounds, their child would have a more flexible tongue, and would therefore be able to, and be impelled to, produce some new sounds, the meaning of which his parents would guess at, and which they in their turn would imitate; thus gradually a greater and greater number of words would come into existence, generation after generation working painfully to enrich and develop what had been already acquired, until it finally became a real language.
Condillac makes a lot more sense when he imagines how a mute man and a mute woman might naturally start to develop something like language, beginning with instinctive cries and strong gestures driven by powerful emotions. These cries would become linked to basic feelings, and new sounds could start to signify different objects if repeated alongside gestures that pointed out what the speaker wanted to highlight. If these first speakers had limited ability to change their sounds, their child would have a more adaptable voice and would therefore be driven to create new sounds, the meanings of which their parents would try to infer and then imitate; thus, over time, more and more words would emerge, with each generation painstakingly working to expand and improve what had already been learned, until it eventually became a proper language.
The profoundest thinker on these problems in the eighteenth century was Johann Gottfried Herder, who, though he did little or nothing in the way of scientific research, yet prepared the rise of linguistic science. In his prize essay on the Origin of Language (1772) Herder first vigorously and successfully attacks the orthodox view of his age—a view which had been recently upheld very emphatically by one Süssmilch—that language could not have been invented by man, but was a direct gift from God. One of Herder’s strongest arguments is that if language had been framed by God and by Him instilled into the mind of man, we should expect it to be much more logical, much more imbued with pure reason than it is as an actual matter of fact. Much in all existing languages is so chaotic and ill-arranged that it could not be God’s work, but must come from the hand of man. On the other hand, Herder does not think that language was really ‘invented’ by man—although this was the word used by the Berlin Academy when opening the competition in which Herder’s essay gained the prize. Language was not deliberately framed by man, but sprang of necessity from his innermost nature; the genesis of language according to him is due to an impulse similar to that of the mature embryo pressing to be born. Man, in the same way as all animals, gives vent to his feelings in tones, but this is not enough; it is impossible to trace the origin of human language to these emotional cries alone. However much they may be refined and fixed, without understanding they can never become human, conscious language. Man differs from brute animals not in degree or in the addition of[28] new powers, but in a totally different direction and development of all powers. Man’s inferiority to animals in strength and sureness of instinct is compensated by his wider sphere of attention; the whole disposition of his mind as an unanalysable entity constitutes the impassable barrier between him and the lower animals. Man, then, shows conscious reflexion when among the ocean of sensations that rush into his soul through all the senses he singles out one wave and arrests it, as when, seeing a lamb, he looks for a distinguishing mark and finds it in the bleating, so that next time when he recognizes the same animal he imitates the sound of bleating, and thereby creates a name for that animal. Thus the lamb to him is ‘the bleater,’ and nouns are created from verbs, whereas, according to Herder, if language had been the creation of God it would inversely have begun with nouns, as that would have been the logically ideal order of procedure. Another characteristic trait of primitive languages is the crossing of various shades of feeling and the necessity of expressing thoughts through strong, bold metaphors, presenting the most motley picture. “The genetic cause lies in the poverty of the human mind and in the flowing together of the emotions of a primitive human being.” Another consequence is the wealth of synonyms in primitive language; “alongside of real poverty it has the most unnecessary superfluity.”
The most insightful thinker on these issues in the eighteenth century was Johann Gottfried Herder. Although he contributed little or nothing to scientific research, he paved the way for the development of linguistic science. In his award-winning essay on the Origin of Language (1772), Herder boldly challenges the conventional belief of his time—which had been recently and strongly supported by one Süssmilch—that language couldn't have been invented by humans, but was a direct gift from God. One of Herder’s strongest points is that if language were created by God and placed in the human mind, we would expect it to be much more logical and filled with pure reason than it actually is. Much of what exists in all current languages is so chaotic and poorly organized that it couldn't be the work of God but must be the result of human effort. On the flip side, Herder doesn't believe that language was truly 'invented' by humans—even though this was the word used by the Berlin Academy when announcing the competition in which Herder’s essay won the prize. Language wasn't intentionally created by humans; instead, it emerged inevitably from their innermost nature. According to him, the origin of language comes from an impulse similar to that of a developed embryo wanting to be born. Like all animals, humans express their feelings through sounds, but that's not enough; you can't trace the origin of human language to these emotional cries alone. No matter how refined and fixed they may be, without comprehension, they can never become human, conscious language. Humans differ from animals not in degree or in having new abilities, but in a completely different development of all their abilities. Humans' lack of strength and instinct compared to animals is balanced by their broader range of attention; the entire makeup of their minds as an indivisible entity creates an unbridgeable divide between them and lower animals. So, humans show conscious reflection when, amidst a flood of sensations entering their souls through all their senses, they focus on one sensation and capture it. For example, when seeing a lamb, they look for a distinguishing feature and find it in the bleating, so that next time they recognize the same animal, they imitate the bleating and thus create a name for it. To them, the lamb becomes ‘the bleater,' and nouns are derived from verbs. In contrast, according to Herder, if language were created by God, it would have started with nouns, as that would have been the logically ideal sequence. Another notable feature of primitive languages is the blending of various emotions and the necessity to express thoughts through strong, vivid metaphors, creating a colorful picture. “The root cause lies in the limitations of the human mind and in the mingling of feelings of a primitive human being.” Another result is the abundance of synonyms in primitive language; “it has both real poverty and unnecessary superfluity.”
When Herder here speaks of primitive or ‘original’ languages, he is thinking of Oriental languages, and especially of Hebrew. “We should never forget,” says Edward Sapir,[1] “that Herder’s time-perspective was necessarily very different from ours. While we unconcernedly take tens or even hundreds of thousands of years in which to allow the products of human civilization to develop, Herder was still compelled to operate with the less than six thousand years that orthodoxy stingily doled out. To us the two or three thousand years that separate our language from the Old Testament Hebrew seems a negligible quantity, when speculating on the origin of language in general; to Herder, however, the Hebrew and the Greek of Homer seemed to be appreciably nearer the oldest conditions than our vernaculars—hence his exaggeration of their ursprünglichkeit.”
When Herder talks about primitive or 'original' languages, he's referring to Eastern languages, especially Hebrew. "We should never forget," says Edward Sapir,[1] "that Herder's perspective on time was very different from ours. While we casually consider tens or even hundreds of thousands of years for the development of human civilization, Herder had to work within the less than six thousand years that orthodoxy grudgingly allowed. For us, the two or three thousand years that separate our language from the Old Testament Hebrew seems small when thinking about the origin of language in general; for Herder, though, Hebrew and the Greek of Homer appeared significantly closer to the earliest forms than our modern languages—hence his emphasis on their ursprünglichkeit.”
Herder’s chief influence on the science of speech, to my mind, is not derived directly from the ideas contained in his essay on the actual origin of speech, but rather indirectly through the whole of his life’s work. He had a very strong sense of the value of everything that had grown naturally (das naturwüchsige); he prepared the minds of his countrymen for the manysided recep[29]tiveness of the Romanticists, who translated and admired the popular poetry of a great many countries, which had hitherto been terræ incognitæ; and he was one of the first to draw attention to the great national value of his own country’s medieval literature and its folklore, and thus was one of the spiritual ancestors of Grimm. He sees the close connexion that exists between language and primitive poetry, or that kind of spontaneous singing that characterizes the childhood or youth of mankind, and which is totally distinct from the artificial poetry of later ages. But to him each language is not only the instrument of literature, but itself literature and poetry. A nation speaks its soul in the words it uses. Herder admires his own mother-tongue, which to him is perhaps inferior to Greek, but superior to its neighbours. The combinations of consonants give it a certain measured pace; it does not rush forward, but walks with the firm carriage of a German. The nice gradation of vowels mitigates the force of the consonants, and the numerous spirants make the German speech pleasant and endearing. Its syllables are rich and firm, its phrases are stately, and its idiomatic expressions are emphatic and serious. Still in some ways the present German language is degenerate if compared with that of Luther, and still more with that of the Suabian Emperors, and much therefore remains to be done in the way of disinterring and revivifying the powerful expressions now lost. Through ideas like these Herder not only exercised a strong influence on Goethe and the Romanticists, but also gave impulses to the linguistic studies of the following generation, and caused many younger men to turn from the well-worn classics to fields of research previously neglected.
Herder’s main influence on the study of language, in my opinion, doesn’t come directly from his essay on the actual origin of speech, but rather from the entirety of his life’s work. He had a deep appreciation for everything that developed naturally (the natural growth); he prepared his fellow countrymen for the diverse receptiveness of the Romanticists, who translated and admired the popular poetry from many countries that had previously been terræ incognitæ; and he was one of the first to highlight the significant national value of his country’s medieval literature and folklore, making him one of the spiritual forerunners of Grimm. He recognized the strong connection between language and primitive poetry, or that spontaneous singing that reflects the childhood or youth of humanity, which is completely different from the artificial poetry of later times. To him, each language is not just a tool for literature, but also literature and poetry itself. A nation expresses its essence through the words it uses. Herder appreciates his own mother tongue, which he believes may be inferior to Greek but is superior to its neighbors. The way consonants combine gives it a certain rhythmic quality; it doesn’t rush, but walks steadily with the dignified posture of a German. The subtle variations in vowels soften the impact of the consonants, and the many spirants make German speech pleasing and warm. Its syllables are rich and strong, its phrases are grand, and its idiomatic expressions are emphatic and serious. However, in some respects, the current German language has degraded compared to Luther's time, and even more so when compared to that of the Swabian Emperors, leaving a lot to be done in terms of rediscovering and revitalizing the powerful expressions that have been lost. Through ideas like these, Herder not only significantly influenced Goethe and the Romanticists, but also inspired the linguistic studies of the next generation, encouraging many younger individuals to shift their focus from the well-trodden classics to previously overlooked fields of research.
I.—§ 4. Jenisch.
Where questions of correct language or of the best usage are dealt with, or where different languages are compared with regard to their efficiency or beauty, as is done very often, though more often in dilettante conversation or in casual remarks in literary works than in scientific linguistic disquisitions, it is no far cry to the question, What would an ideal language be like? But such is the matter-of-factness of modern scientific thought, that probably no scientific Academy in our own days would think of doing what the Berlin Academy did in 1794 when it offered a prize for the best essay on the ideal of a perfect language and a comparison of the best-known languages of Europe as tested by the standard of such an ideal. A Berlin pastor, D. Jenisch, won the prize, and in 1796 brought out his book under the title Philosophisch-kritische vergleichung und würdigung von vierzehn ältern und neuern sprachen[30] Europens—a book which is even now well worth reading, the more so because its subject has been all but completely neglected in the hundred and twenty years that have since intervened. In the Introduction the author has the following passage, which might be taken as the motto of Wilhelm v. Humboldt, Steinthal, Finck and Byrne, who do not, however, seem to have been inspired by Jenisch: “In language the whole intellectual and moral essence of a man is to some extent revealed. ‘Speak, and you are’ is rightly said by the Oriental. The language of the natural man is savage and rude, that of the cultured man is elegant and polished. As the Greek was subtle in thought and sensuously refined in feeling—as the Roman was serious and practical rather than speculative—as the Frenchman is popular and sociable—as the Briton is profound and the German philosophic—so are also the languages of each of these nations.”
When discussing correct language or the best ways to use it, or comparing different languages in terms of their effectiveness or beauty, which often happens more in casual conversations or literary remarks than in serious linguistic studies, it's a natural step to ask, What would an ideal language be like? However, modern scientific thinking is so straightforward that it's unlikely any scientific academy today would consider doing what the Berlin Academy did in 1794 when it offered a prize for the best essay on the ideal of a perfect language and a comparison of the best-known languages of Europe based on that ideal. A Berlin pastor, D. Jenisch, won the prize and published his book in 1796 titled Philosophisch-kritische vergleichung und würdigung von vierzehn ältern und neuern sprachen[30]Europens—a book that is still very much worth reading, especially since its topic has been largely overlooked in the past hundred and twenty years. In the Introduction, the author includes a passage that could serve as a motto for Wilhelm v. Humboldt, Steinthal, Finck, and Byrne, who don't seem to have been influenced by Jenisch: “In language, the entire intellectual and moral essence of a person is somewhat revealed. The saying ‘Speak, and you are’ is rightly attributed to the Orient. The language of the natural man is crude and rough, while that of the cultured man is elegant and refined. Just as the Greek was subtle in thought and sensuously sophisticated in feeling—while the Roman was more serious and practical than speculative—while the Frenchman is friendly and sociable—while the Briton is deep, and the German is philosophical—so are the languages of each of these nations.”
Jenisch then goes on to say that language as the organ for communicating our ideas and feelings accomplishes its end if it represents idea and feeling according to the actual want or need of the mind at the given moment. We have to examine in each case the following essential qualities of the languages compared, (1) richness, (2) energy or emphasis, (3) clearness, and (4) euphony. Under the head of richness we are concerned not only with the number of words, first for material objects, then for spiritual and abstract notions, but also with the ease with which new words can be formed (lexikalische bildsamkeit). The energy of a language is shown in its lexicon and in its grammar (simplicity of grammatical structure, absence of articles, etc.), but also in “the characteristic energy of the nation and its original writers.” Clearness and definiteness in the same way are shown in vocabulary and grammar, especially in a regular and natural syntax. Euphony, finally, depends not only on the selection of consonants and vowels utilized in the language, but on their harmonious combination, the general impression of the language being more important than any details capable of being analysed.
Jenisch then states that language, as a means of sharing our thoughts and feelings, achieves its purpose when it accurately reflects the current needs or desires of the mind. We need to evaluate the following key qualities of the languages we’re comparing: (1) richness, (2) energy or emphasis, (3) clarity, and (4) euphony. When we talk about richness, we're interested not just in the number of words—for tangible objects as well as spiritual and abstract concepts—but also in how easily new words can be created. The energy of a language is evident in its vocabulary and grammar (like straightforward grammatical structures, lack of articles, etc.), as well as in "the characteristic energy of the nation and its notable writers." Clarity and precision are similarly reflected in vocabulary and grammar, particularly through a consistent and natural sentence structure. Lastly, euphony relies not only on the choice of consonants and vowels in the language but also on how well they fit together, with the overall feel of the language being more significant than any analyzable details.
These, then, are the criteria by which Greek and Latin and a number of living languages are compared and judged. The author displays great learning and a sound practical knowledge of many languages, and his remarks on the advantages and shortcomings of these are on the whole judicious, though often perhaps too much stress is laid on the literary merits of great writers, which have really no intrinsic connexion with the value of a language as such. It depends to a great extent on accidental circumstances whether a language has been or has not been used in elevated literature, and its merits should be estimated, so far as this is possible, independently of the perfection of its literature. Jenisch’s prejudice[31] in that respect is shown, for instance, when he says (p. 36) that the endeavours of Hickes are entirely futile, when he tries to make out regular declensions and conjugations in the barbarous language of Wulfila’s translation of the Bible. But otherwise Jenisch is singularly free from prejudices, as shown by a great number of passages in which other languages are praised at the expense of his own. Thus, on p. 396, he declares German to be the most repellent contrast to that most supple modern language, French, on account of its unnatural word-order, its eternally trailing article, its want of participial constructions, and its interminable auxiliaries (as in ‘ich werde geliebt werden, ich würde geliebt worden sein,’ etc.), with the frequent separation of these auxiliaries from the main verb through extraneous intermediate words, all of which gives to German something incredibly awkward, which to the reader appears as lengthy and diffuse and to the writer as inconvenient and intractable. It is not often that we find an author appraising his own language with such severe impartiality, and I have given the passage also to show what kind of problems confront the man who wishes to compare the relative value of languages as wholes. Jenisch’s view here forms a striking contrast to Herder’s appreciation of their common mother-tongue.
These are the criteria by which Greek, Latin, and several modern languages are compared and evaluated. The author shows impressive knowledge and practical understanding of many languages, and his comments on their benefits and drawbacks are generally wise, although he sometimes places too much emphasis on the literary qualities of prominent writers, which don’t necessarily reflect the true value of a language itself. Whether a language has been used in high literature often depends on random factors, and its worth should be assessed, as much as possible, separate from the quality of its literature. Jenisch’s bias[31] is evident when he asserts (p. 36) that Hickes’s attempts to establish regular declensions and conjugations in the awkward language of Wulfila’s Bible translation are completely pointless. However, Jenisch is largely free from biases, as seen in many instances where he praises other languages at the expense of his own. For example, on p. 396, he describes German as the most unattractive contrast to the flexible modern language, French, because of its awkward word order, its unnecessarily prolonged article, its lack of participial constructions, and its endless auxiliary verbs (like ‘I will be loved, I would have been loved.,’ etc.), with these auxiliaries often separated from the main verb by other words, making German seem incredibly clumsy, lengthy, and difficult for readers, and cumbersome for writers. It's rare to see an author judge his own language with such harsh objectivity, and I've included this passage to illustrate the type of challenges faced by someone trying to compare the overall value of languages. Jenisch’s perspective here stands in stark contrast to Herder’s view of their shared mother tongue.
Jenisch’s book does not seem to have been widely read by nineteenth-century scholars, who took up totally different problems. Those few who read it were perhaps inclined to say with S. Lefmann (see his book on Franz Bopp, Nachtrag, 1897, p. xi) that it is difficult to decide which was the greater fool, the one who put this problem or the one who tried to answer it. This attitude, however, towards problems of valuation in the matter of languages is neither just nor wise, though it is perhaps easy to see how students of comparative grammar were by the very nature of their study led to look down upon those who compared languages from the point of view of æsthetic or literary merits. Anyhow, it seems to me no small merit to have been the first to treat such problems as these, which are generally answered in an off-hand way according to a loose general judgement, so as to put them on a scientific footing by examining in detail what it is that makes us more or less instinctively prefer one language, or one turn or expression in a language, and thus lay the foundation of that inductive æsthetic theory of language which has still to be developed in a truly scientific spirit.
Jenisch's book doesn't seem to have been widely read by scholars in the nineteenth century, who focused on entirely different issues. The few who did read it might have echoed S. Lefmann (see his book on Franz Bopp, Nachtrag, 1897, p. xi), saying it's hard to tell who was the bigger fool: the person who posed this problem or the one who tried to answer it. However, this viewpoint regarding the assessment of languages isn't fair or wise, even if it's understandable that students of comparative grammar, by the nature of their field, looked down on those who evaluated languages based on aesthetic or literary qualities. Regardless, I believe it's significant that Jenisch was the first to approach such problems, which are usually addressed in a casual manner based on a loose general judgment, and instead examined the factors that lead us to instinctively prefer one language or one phrasing over another. This work lays the groundwork for an inductive aesthetic theory of language that still needs to be fully developed in a genuinely scientific way.
CHAPTER II
Early 1800s
§ 1. Introduction. Sanskrit. § 2. Friedrich von Schlegel. § 3. Rasmus Rask. § 4. Jacob Grimm. § 5. The Sound Shift. § 6. Franz Bopp. § 7. Bopp continued. § 8. Wilhelm von Humboldt. § 9. Grimm once more.
§ 1. Introduction. Sanskrit. § 2. Friedrich von Schlegel. § 3. Rasmus Rask. § 4. Jacob Grimm. § 5. The Sound Shift. § 6. Franz Bopp. § 7. Bopp continued. § 8. Wilhelm von Humboldt. § 9. Grimm once more.
II.—§ 1. Introduction. Sanskrit.
The nineteenth century witnessed an enormous growth and development of the science of language, which in some respects came to present features totally unknown to previous centuries. The horizon was widened; more and more languages were described, studied and examined, many of them for their own sake, as they had no important literature. Everywhere a deeper insight was gained into the structures even of such languages as had been for centuries objects of study; a more comprehensive and more incisive classification of languages was obtained with a deeper understanding of their mutual relationships, and at the same time linguistic forms were not only described and analysed, but also explained, their genesis being traced as far back as historical evidence allowed, if not sometimes further. Instead of contenting itself with stating when and where a form existed and how it looked and was employed, linguistic science now also began to ask why it had taken that definite shape, and thus passed from a purely descriptive to an explanatory science.
The nineteenth century saw massive growth and development in the science of language, which started to show features completely new to earlier centuries. The scope expanded; more languages were described, studied, and analyzed, many for their own sake, even though they lacked significant literature. A deeper understanding of the structures of languages that had been studied for centuries emerged; there was a more thorough and insightful classification of languages along with a better grasp of their interrelationships. At the same time, linguistic forms were not just described and analyzed but also explained, tracing their origins as far back as historical evidence permitted, and sometimes even further. Instead of merely stating when and where a form existed, how it looked, and how it was used, linguistic science began to explore why it took on that specific shape, transitioning from a purely descriptive to an explanatory discipline.
The chief innovation of the beginning of the nineteenth century was the historical point of view. On the whole, it must be said that it was reserved for that century to apply the notion of history to other things than wars and the vicissitudes of dynasties, and thus to discover the idea of development or evolution as pervading the whole universe. This brought about a vast change in the science of language, as in other sciences. Instead of looking at such a language as Latin as one fixed point, and instead of aiming at fixing another language, such as French, in one classical form, the new science viewed both as being in constant flux, as growing, as moving, as continually changing. It cried aloud like Heraclitus[33] “Pánta reî,” and like Galileo “Eppur si muove.” And lo! the better this historical point of view was applied, the more secrets languages seemed to unveil, and the more light seemed also to be thrown on objects outside the proper sphere of language, such as ethnology and the early history of mankind at large and of particular countries.
The main breakthrough at the start of the nineteenth century was the historical perspective. Overall, it was during this century that people began to apply the concept of history to areas beyond just wars and the ups and downs of dynasties, leading to the realization of development or evolution as a fundamental aspect of the entire universe. This resulted in significant changes in the study of language, as well as in other fields. Instead of treating a language like Latin as a fixed point and trying to establish another language, like French, in one standard form, the new science viewed both as constantly evolving, growing, moving, and continuously changing. It echoed Heraclitus’s idea of “Pánta reî” and Galileo’s “Eppur si muove.” And indeed, the more effectively this historical perspective was applied, the more mysteries languages seemed to reveal, and the more light was shed on subjects beyond language itself, such as ethnology and the early history of humanity in general and specific countries.
It is often said that it was the discovery of Sanskrit that was the real turning-point in the history of linguistics, and there is some truth in this assertion, though we shall see on the one hand that Sanskrit was not in itself enough to give to those who studied it the true insight into the essence of language and linguistic science, and on the other hand that real genius enabled at least one man to grasp essential truths about the relationships and development of languages even without a knowledge of Sanskrit. Still, it must be said that the first acquaintance with this language gave a mighty impulse to linguistic studies and exerted a lasting influence on the way in which most European languages were viewed by scholars, and it will therefore be necessary here briefly to sketch the history of these studies. India was very little known in Europe till the mighty struggle between the French and the English for the mastery of its wealth excited a wide interest also in its ancient culture. It was but natural that on this intellectual domain, too, the French and the English should at first be rivals and that we should find both nations represented in the pioneers of Sanskrit scholarship. The French Jesuit missionary Cœurdoux as early as 1767 sent to the French Institut a memoir in which he called attention to the similarity of many Sanskrit words with Latin, and even compared the flexion of the present indicative and subjunctive of Sanskrit asmi, ‘I am,’ with the corresponding forms of Latin grammar. Unfortunately, however, his work was not printed till forty years later, when the same discovery had been announced independently by others. The next scholar to be mentioned in this connexion is Sir William Jones, who in 1796 uttered the following memorable words, which have often been quoted in books on the history of linguistics: “The Sanscrit language, whatever be its antiquity, is of a wonderful structure; more perfect than the Greek, more copious than the Latin and more exquisitely refined than either; yet bearing to both of them a stronger affinity, both in the roots of verbs and in the forms of grammar, than could possibly have been produced by accident; so strong, indeed, that no philologer could examine them all three without believing them to have sprung from some common source, which, perhaps, no longer exists. There is a similar reason, though not quite so forcible, for supposing that both the Gothic and the Celtic ... had the same origin with the Sanscrit; and the old Persian might be added to[34] the same family.” Sir W. Jones, however, did nothing to carry out in detail the comparison thus inaugurated, and it was reserved for younger men to follow up the clue he had given.
It’s often said that discovering Sanskrit was the real turning point in the history of linguistics, and there’s some truth to this claim. However, we will see that, on one hand, Sanskrit alone didn’t provide those who studied it with a true understanding of the essence of language and linguistic science, and on the other hand, real genius allowed at least one person to grasp essential truths about the relationships and development of languages, even without knowing Sanskrit. Still, it must be noted that the initial exposure to this language gave a significant boost to linguistic studies and had a lasting impact on how most European languages were perceived by scholars. Therefore, we will briefly outline the history of these studies. India was not well-known in Europe until the intense competition between the French and the English for control of its wealth sparked widespread interest in its ancient culture. It’s only natural that in this intellectual arena, the French and the English initially became rivals, leading to both nations being represented among the pioneers of Sanskrit scholarship. In 1767, the French Jesuit missionary Cœurdoux submitted a paper to the French Institute, highlighting the similarities between many Sanskrit words and Latin, and even compared the conjugation of the present indicative and subjunctive of Sanskrit asmi, ‘I am,’ with the equivalent forms in Latin grammar. Unfortunately, his work wasn’t published until forty years later, by which time the same discovery had already been made independently by others. The next scholar worth mentioning in this context is Sir William Jones, who in 1796 made the famous statement that has been frequently quoted in the history of linguistics: “The Sanskrit language, whatever its age, has a remarkable structure; it is more perfect than Greek, more abundant than Latin, and more exquisitely refined than either; yet it shares a stronger affinity with both in the roots of verbs and in grammatical forms than could possibly arise by chance; so strong, indeed, that no philologist could examine all three without believing that they stem from a common source, which perhaps no longer exists. There’s a similar, albeit less compelling, argument for the idea that both Gothic and Celtic... share the same origin as Sanskrit; and old Persian could also be added to [34] the same family.” Sir W. Jones, however, did not carry out a detailed comparison based on his initial findings, leaving it to younger scholars to follow the lead he provided.
II.—§ 2. Friedrich von Schlegel.
One of the books that exercised a great influence on the development of linguistic science in the beginning of the nineteenth century was Friedrich von Schlegel’s Ueber die sprache und weisheit der Indier (1808). Schlegel had studied Sanskrit for some years in Paris, and in his romantic enthusiasm he hoped that the study of the old Indian books would bring about a revolution in European thought similar to that produced in the Renaissance through the revival of the study of Greek. We are here concerned exclusively with his linguistic theories, but to his mind they were inseparable from Indian religion and philosophy, or rather religious and philosophic poetry. He is struck by the similarity between Sanskrit and the best-known European languages, and gives quite a number of words from Sanskrit found with scarcely any change in German, Greek and Latin. He repudiates the idea that these similarities might be accidental or due to borrowings on the side of the Indians, saying expressly that the proof of original relationship between these languages, as well as of the greater age of Sanskrit, lies in the far-reaching correspondences in the whole grammatical structure of these as opposed to many other languages. In this connexion it is noticeable that he is the first to speak of ‘comparative grammar’ (p. 28), but, like Moses, he only looks into this promised land without entering it. Indeed, his method of comparison precludes him from being the founder of the new science, for he says himself (p. 6) that he will refrain from stating any rules for change or substitution of letters (sounds), and require complete identity of the words used as proofs of the descent of languages. He adds that in other cases, “where intermediate stages are historically demonstrable, we may derive giorno from dies, and when Spanish so often has h for Latin f, or Latin p very often becomes f in the German form of the same word, and c not rarely becomes h [by the way, an interesting foreshadowing of one part of the discovery of the Germanic sound-shifting], then this may be the foundation of analogical conclusions with regard to other less evident instances.” If he had followed up this idea by establishing similar ‘sound-laws,’ as we now say, between Sanskrit and other languages, he would have been many years ahead of his time; as it is, his comparisons are those of a dilettante, and he sometimes falls into the pitfalls of accidental similarities while overlooking the real correspondences. He is also led astray by the idea of a[35] particularly close relationship between Persian and German, an idea which at that time was widely spread[2]—we find it in Jenisch and even in Bopp’s first book.
One of the books that had a significant impact on the development of linguistic science in the early nineteenth century was Friedrich von Schlegel’s Ueber die sprache und weisheit der Indier (1808). Schlegel had studied Sanskrit for several years in Paris, and with his romantic enthusiasm, he hoped that exploring the old Indian texts would spark a revolution in European thought similar to the one that the Renaissance created through the revival of Greek studies. Our focus here is solely on his linguistic theories, but he believed they were tightly linked to Indian religion and philosophy, or more accurately, to religious and philosophical poetry. He was struck by the similarities between Sanskrit and the most well-known European languages, providing numerous examples of Sanskrit words that appear with little to no change in German, Greek, and Latin. He rejected the notion that these similarities could be coincidental or a result of borrowing by the Indians, stating explicitly that the evidence of a fundamental relationship between these languages, along with Sanskrit’s greater age, lies in the extensive correspondences within their grammatical structures compared to many other languages. Notably, he was the first to introduce the term ‘comparative grammar’ (p. 28), but, like Moses, he only glimpsed this promised land without stepping into it. In fact, his method of comparison prevents him from being considered the founder of this new science, as he himself notes (p. 6) that he will avoid establishing any rules for the change or substitution of letters (sounds) and demands complete identity of the words used as evidence for the descent of languages. He adds that in other cases, “where intermediate stages are historically demonstrable, we may derive giorno from dies, and when Spanish often has h for Latin f, or Latin p frequently becomes f in the German form of the same word, and c not infrequently turns into h [by the way, an interesting foreshadowing of one aspect of the discovery of Germanic sound-shifting], then this may be the basis for drawing analogical conclusions regarding other less obvious examples.” Had he pursued this idea by establishing similar ‘sound laws,’ as we refer to them now, between Sanskrit and other languages, he would have been well ahead of his time; instead, his comparisons come across as those of a dilettante, and he sometimes falls into the traps of coincidental similarities while missing the genuine correspondences. He is also misled by the notion of a particularly close relationship between Persian and German, a concept that was widely accepted at that time[2]—it can be found in Jenisch and even in Bopp’s first book.
Schlegel is not afraid of surveying the whole world of human languages; he divides them into two classes, one comprising Sanskrit and its congeners, and the second all other languages. In the former he finds organic growth of the roots as shown by their capability of inner change or, as he terms it, ‘flexion,’ while in the latter class everything is effected by the addition of affixes (prefixes and suffixes). In Greek he admits that it would be possible to believe in the possibility of the grammatical endings (bildungssylben) having arisen from particles and auxiliary words amalgamated into the word itself, but in Sanskrit even the last semblance of this possibility disappears, and it becomes necessary to confess that the structure of the language is formed in a thoroughly organic way through flexion, i.e. inner changes and modifications of the radical sound, and not composed merely mechanically by the addition of words and particles. He admits, however, that affixes in some other languages have brought about something that resembles real flexion. On the whole he finds that the movement of grammatical art and perfection (der gang der bloss grammatischen kunst und ausbildung, p. 56) goes in opposite directions in the two species of languages. In the organic languages, which represent the highest state, the beauty and art of their structure is apt to be lost through indolence; and German as well as Romanic and modern Indian languages show this degeneracy when compared with the earlier forms of the same languages. In the affix languages, on the other hand, we see that the beginnings are completely artless, but the ‘art’ in them grows more and more perfect the more the affixes are fused with the main word.
Schlegel isn't hesitant to explore the entire spectrum of human languages; he categorizes them into two groups: one includes Sanskrit and its related languages, while the other encompasses all other languages. In the first group, he observes a natural development of roots, evident through their ability to change internally, which he calls 'flexion.' In the second group, everything is achieved by adding affixes (prefixes and suffixes). He acknowledges that in Greek, it seems plausible to think that the grammatical endings (bildungssylben) originated from particles and auxiliary words merged into the words themselves, but in Sanskrit, even the last trace of this possibility fades away. It becomes clear that the language's structure is formed in a completely organic manner through flexion, meaning internal changes and modifications of the root sound, rather than being assembled mechanically by piling on words and particles. He does, however, recognize that affixes in some other languages have created something that resembles true flexion. Overall, he observes that the development of grammatical skill and sophistication (the practice of purely grammatical skill and training, p. 56) moves in opposite directions between the two types of languages. In organic languages, which represent the pinnacle of development, the elegance and artistry of their structure are often diminished by laziness; German, along with Romance and modern Indian languages, exhibits this decline when compared to their earlier forms. In contrast, with affix languages, we find that the initial forms are entirely straightforward, but the 'art' in them becomes more refined as the affixes become more merged with the main word.
As to the question of the ultimate origin of language, Schlegel thinks that the diversity of linguistic structure points to different beginnings. While some languages, such as Manchu, are so interwoven with onomatopœia that imitation of natural sounds must have played the greatest rôle in their formation, this is by no means the case in other languages, and the perfection of the oldest organic or flexional languages, such as Sanskrit, shows that they cannot be derived from merely animal sounds; indeed, they form an additional proof, if any such were needed, that men did not everywhere start from a brutish state, but that the clearest and intensest reason existed from the very first beginning. On all these points Schlegel’s ideas foreshadow views that are found in later works; and it is probable that his fame as a writer outside the philological field gave to his linguistic speculations a notoriety which his often[36] loose and superficial reasonings would not otherwise have acquired for them.
As for the question of where language ultimately comes from, Schlegel believes that the different structures of languages suggest they had different beginnings. Some languages, like Manchu, are so closely tied to onomatopoeia that mimicking natural sounds must have played a significant role in their development. However, this isn’t true for all languages, and the complexity of the oldest organic or inflectional languages, like Sanskrit, indicates that they couldn’t have simply come from animal sounds. In fact, they serve as additional evidence, if any were needed, that humans did not universally start from a primitive state, but that clear and intense reasoning has been present from the very beginning. On all these topics, Schlegel’s ideas hint at perspectives found in later works; it’s likely that his reputation as a writer beyond the field of linguistics gave his language theories a notoriety that his often loose and superficial reasoning wouldn’t have gained on its own.
Schlegel’s bipartition of the languages of the world carries in it the germ of a tripartition. On the lowest stage of his second class he places Chinese, in which, as he acknowledges, the particles denoting secondary sense modifications consist in monosyllables that are completely independent of the actual word. It is clear that from Schlegel’s own point of view we cannot here properly speak of ‘affixes,’ and thus Chinese really, though Schlegel himself does not say so, falls outside his affix languages and forms a class by itself. On the other hand, his arguments for reckoning Semitic languages among affix languages are very weak, and he seems also somewhat inclined to say that much in their structure resembles real flexion. If we introduce these two changes into his system, we arrive at the threefold division found in slightly different shapes in most subsequent works on general linguistics, the first to give it being perhaps Schlegel’s brother, A. W. Schlegel, who speaks of (1) les langues sans aucune structure grammaticale—under which misleading term he understands Chinese with its unchangeable monosyllabic words; (2) les langues qui emploient des affixes; (3) les langues à inflexions.
Schlegel’s division of the languages of the world hints at a tripartite distinction. In the lowest category of his second class, he includes Chinese, noting that the particles indicating secondary meanings are made up of monosyllables that are completely independent of the actual word. It is evident that, from Schlegel’s perspective, we can't accurately refer to these as ‘affixes,’ so Chinese actually falls outside his classification of affix languages and stands alone. On the other hand, his reasoning for including Semitic languages as affix languages is quite weak, and he also seems to suggest that much of their structure is similar to true inflection. If we apply these two adjustments to his system, we reach the three-part division found in slightly different forms in most later works on general linguistics, first articulated perhaps by Schlegel’s brother, A. W. Schlegel, who describes (1) languages without any grammatical structure—a misleading label he uses for Chinese with its unchanging monosyllabic words; (2) languages that use affixes; (3) inflected languages.
Like his brother, A. W. Schlegel places the flexional languages highest and thinks them alone ‘organic.’ On the other hand, he subdivides flexional languages into two classes, synthetic and analytic, the latter using personal pronouns and auxiliaries in the conjugation of verbs, prepositions to supply the want of cases, and adverbs to express the degrees of comparison. While the origin of the synthetic languages loses itself in the darkness of ages, the analytic languages have been created in modern times; all those that we know are due to the decomposition of synthetic languages. These remarks on the division of languages are found in the Introduction to the book Observations sur la langue et la littérature provençale (1818) and are thus primarily meant to account for the contrast between synthetic Latin and analytic Romanic.
Like his brother, A. W. Schlegel ranks flexional languages at the top and believes they are the only ones that are truly 'organic.' He also divides flexional languages into two categories: synthetic and analytic. The analytic languages use personal pronouns and auxiliary verbs in verb conjugation, rely on prepositions to replace case markings, and use adverbs to indicate degrees of comparison. While the origins of synthetic languages are lost in the mists of time, analytic languages have been developed in more recent history; all the ones we are familiar with have resulted from the breakdown of synthetic languages. These observations on language classification are found in the Introduction to the book Observations sur la langue et la littérature provençale (1818) and are primarily intended to explain the difference between synthetic Latin and analytic Romanic.
II.—§ 3. Rasmus Rask.
We now come to the three greatest names among the initiators of linguistic science in the beginning of the nineteenth century. If we give them in their alphabetical order, Bopp, Grimm and Rask, we also give them in the order of merit in which most subsequent historians have placed them. The works that constitute their first claims to the title of founder of the new science came in close succession, Bopp’s Conjugationssystem in 1816, Rask’s Undersøgelse in 1818, and the first volume of Grimm’s Grammatik in[37] 1819. While Bopp is entirely independent of the two others, we shall see that Grimm was deeply influenced by Rask, and as the latter’s contributions to our science began some years before his chief work just mentioned (which had also been finished in manuscript in 1814, thus two years before Bopp’s Conjugationssystem), the best order in which to deal with the three men will perhaps be to take Rask first, then to mention Grimm, who in some ways was his pupil, and finally to treat of Bopp: in this way we shall also be enabled to see Bopp in close relation with the subsequent development of Comparative Grammar, on which he, and not Rask, exerted the strongest influence.
We now turn to the three most significant figures in the early development of linguistic science in the nineteenth century. If we list them alphabetically, we get Bopp, Grimm, and Rask, and this also reflects their order of merit as recognized by most historians since. Their foundational works appeared in quick succession: Bopp's Conjugationssystem in 1816, Rask's Undersøgelse in 1818, and the first volume of Grimm's Grammatik in[37] 1819. While Bopp worked independently from the other two, we’ll see that Grimm was significantly influenced by Rask. Since Rask's contributions to our field began a few years before his major work mentioned earlier (which was completed in manuscript in 1814, two years ahead of Bopp's Conjugationssystem), it makes sense to discuss Rask first, then Grimm, who in some ways was his student, and finally Bopp. This way, we can also understand Bopp's close connection to the later development of Comparative Grammar, where he had a greater impact than Rask.
Born in a peasant’s hut in the heart of Denmark in 1787, Rasmus Rask was a grammarian from his boyhood. When a copy of the Heimskringla was given him as a school prize, he at once, without any grammar or dictionary, set about establishing paradigms, and so, before he left school, acquired proficiency in Icelandic, as well as in many other languages. At the University of Copenhagen he continued in the same course, constantly widened his linguistic horizon and penetrated into the grammatical structure of the most diverse languages. Icelandic (Old Norse), however, remained his favourite study, and it filled him with enthusiasm and national pride that “our ancestors had such an excellent language,” the excellency being measured chiefly by the full flexional system which Icelandic shared with the classical tongues, partly also by the pure, unmixed state of the Icelandic vocabulary. His first book (1811) was an Icelandic grammar, an admirable production when we consider the meagre work done previously in this field. With great lucidity he reduces the intricate forms of the language into a consistent system, and his penetrating insight into the essence of language is seen when he explains the vowel changes, which we now comprise under the name of mutation or umlaut, as due to the approximation of the vowel of the stem to that of the ending, at that time a totally new point of view. This we gather from Grimm’s review, in which Rask’s explanation is said to be “more astute than true” (“mehr scharfsinnig als wahr,” Kleinere schriften, 7. 515). Rask even sees the reason of the change in the plural blöð as against the singular blað in the former having once ended in -u, which has since disappeared. This is, so far as I know, the first inference ever drawn to a prehistoric state of language.
Born in a peasant's hut in the heart of Denmark in 1787, Rasmus Rask was a grammarian from a young age. When he received a copy of the Heimskringla as a school prize, he immediately started working on establishing grammatical paradigms, all without any grammar book or dictionary. By the time he finished school, he had become proficient in Icelandic, along with many other languages. At the University of Copenhagen, he continued in this vein, expanding his linguistic knowledge and delving into the grammatical structures of various languages. However, Icelandic (Old Norse) remained his favorite subject, filling him with enthusiasm and national pride because "our ancestors had such an excellent language," with its excellence primarily attributed to the comprehensive inflectional system it shared with classical languages, and partly due to the pure, unadulterated state of the Icelandic vocabulary. His first book, published in 1811, was an Icelandic grammar, an impressive work given the limited research previously done in this area. He clearly distills the complex forms of the language into a coherent system, and his deep understanding of language is evident when he explains vowel changes—what we now refer to as mutation or umlaut—as resulting from the vowel of the stem moving closer to that of the ending. This perspective was completely new at the time. Grimm's review notes that Rask's explanation was "more astute than true" ("more insightful than true," Kleinere schriften, 7. 515). Rask even explains the reason for the change in the plural blöð compared to the singular blað, noting that the former once ended in -u, which has since disappeared. To my knowledge, this is the first instance of linking a language change to its prehistoric state.
In 1814, during a prolonged stay in Iceland, Rask sent down to Copenhagen his most important work, the prize essay on the origin of the Old Norse language (Undersøgelse om det gamle nordiske eller islandske sprogs oprindelse) which for various reasons was not printed till 1818. If it had been published when it was finished, and especially if it had been printed in a language[38] better known than Danish, Rask might well have been styled the founder of the modern science of language, for his work contains the best exposition of the true method of linguistic research written in the first half of the nineteenth century and applies this method to the solution of a long series of important questions. Only one part of it was ever translated into another language, and this was unfortunately buried in an appendix to Vater’s Vergleichungstafeln, 1822. Yet Rask’s work even now repays careful perusal, and I shall therefore give a brief résumé of its principal contents.
In 1814, during an extended stay in Iceland, Rask sent his most significant work, the prize essay on the origin of the Old Norse language (Undersøgelse om det gamle nordiske eller islandske sprogs oprindelse), back to Copenhagen, but it wasn’t printed until 1818 for various reasons. If it had been published when it was completed, especially in a more widely known language than Danish, Rask might have been regarded as the founder of modern linguistics, since his work offers the best explanation of the proper method for linguistic research written in the first half of the nineteenth century and applies this method to tackle a long series of important questions. Only one part of it was ever translated into another language, and unfortunately, that was buried in an appendix to Vater’s Vergleichungstafeln, 1822. However, Rask’s work is still worth a close read, so I will provide a brief summary of its main contents.
Language according to Rask is our principal means of finding out anything about the history of nations before the existence of written documents, for though everything may change in religion, customs, laws and institutions, language generally remains, if not unchanged, yet recognizable even after thousands of years. But in order to find out anything about the relationship of a language we must proceed methodically and examine its whole structure instead of comparing mere details; what is here of prime importance is the grammatical system, because words are very often taken over from one language to another, but very rarely grammatical forms. The capital error in most of what has been written on this subject is that this important point has been overlooked. That language which has the most complicated grammar is nearest to the source; however mixed a language may be, it belongs to the same family as another if it has the most essential, most material and indispensable words in common with it; pronouns and numerals are in this respect most decisive. If in such words there are so many points of agreement between two languages that it is possible to frame rules for the transitions of letters (in other passages Rask more correctly says sounds) from the one language to the other, there is a fundamental kinship between the two languages, more particularly if there are corresponding similarities in their structure and constitution. This is a most important thesis, and Rask supplements it by saying that transitions of sounds are naturally dependent on their organ and manner of production.
Language, according to Rask, is our main way of learning about the history of nations before written records existed. Although everything can change in religion, customs, laws, and institutions, language usually remains, if not unchanged, then still recognizable even after thousands of years. However, to understand the relationships between languages, we need to take a methodical approach and examine their entire structure instead of just small details. The key factor to focus on is the grammatical system, as words are often borrowed from one language to another, but grammatical forms are rarely passed along. The significant mistake in most discussions on this topic is that this crucial point has been ignored. The language with the most complex grammar is closest to the source; no matter how mixed a language may be, it is related to another if it shares the most essential and necessary words, like pronouns and numerals. If there are many similarities in these words between two languages that allow us to create rules for how letters (or sounds, as Rask more accurately describes it) transition from one language to the other, then there is a fundamental connection between the two languages, especially if their structures and setups show corresponding similarities. This is a crucial argument, and Rask adds that the transitions of sounds naturally depend on how they are produced and articulated.
Next Rask proceeds to apply these principles to his task of finding out the origin of the Old Icelandic language. He describes its position in the ‘Gothic’ (Gothonic, Germanic) group and then looks round to find congeners elsewhere. He rapidly discards Greenlandic and Basque as being too remote in grammar and vocabulary; with regard to Keltic languages he hesitates, but finally decides in favour of denying relationship. (He was soon to see his error in this; see below.) Next he deals at some length with Finnic and Lapp, and comes to the conclusion that the simi[39]larities are due to loans rather than to original kinship. But when he comes to the Slavonic languages his utterances have a different ring, for he is here able to disclose so many similarities in fundamentals that he ranges these languages within the same great family as Icelandic. The same is true with regard to Lithuanian and Lettic, which are here for the first time correctly placed as an independent sub-family, though closely akin to Slavonic. The comparisons with Latin, and especially with Greek, are even more detailed; and Rask in these chapters really presents us with a succinct, but on the whole marvellously correct, comparative grammar of Gothonic, Slavonic, Lithuanian, Latin and Greek, besides examining numerous lexical correspondences. He does not yet know any of the related Asiatic languages, but throws out the hint that Persian and Indian may be the remote source of Icelandic through Greek. Greek he considers to be the ‘source’ or ‘root’ of the Gothonic languages, though he expresses himself with a degree of uncertainty which forestalls the correct notion that these languages have all of them sprung from the same extinct and unknown language. This view is very clearly expressed in a letter he wrote from St. Petersburg in the same year in which his Undersøgelse was published; he here says: “I divide our family of languages in this way: the Indian (Dekanic, Hindostanic), Iranic (Persian, Armenian, Ossetic), Thracian (Greek and Latin), Sarmatian (Lettic and Slavonic), Gothic (Germanic and Skandinavian) and Keltic (Britannic and Gaelic) tribes” (SA 2. 281, dated June 11, 1818).
Next, Rask goes on to apply these principles to his task of figuring out the origin of the Old Icelandic language. He describes its place in the 'Gothic' (Gothonic, Germanic) group and then looks around to find related languages elsewhere. He quickly rules out Greenlandic and Basque as being too different in grammar and vocabulary. As for the Celtic languages, he hesitates but ultimately decides there’s no relationship. (He would soon recognize his mistake in this; see below.) He then discusses Finnic and Lapp in detail, concluding that the similarities are due to borrowed elements rather than a shared origin. However, when he examines the Slavic languages, his tone shifts, as he finds so many fundamental similarities that he categorizes these languages within the same larger family as Icelandic. The same applies to Lithuanian and Lettic, which he accurately identifies here for the first time as an independent sub-family, though closely related to Slavic. His comparisons with Latin, and especially with Greek, are even more thorough; in these chapters, Rask provides us with a concise but mostly accurate comparative grammar of Gothonic, Slavonic, Lithuanian, Latin, and Greek, while also exploring numerous vocabulary connections. He isn’t yet familiar with any related Asian languages but suggests that Persian and Indian could be a distant source of Icelandic through Greek. He views Greek as the 'source' or 'root' of the Gothonic languages, although he speaks with a level of uncertainty that implies the correct idea that all these languages stemmed from the same extinct and unknown language. This perspective is clearly stated in a letter he wrote from St. Petersburg in the same year his Undersøgelse was published; he states: “I categorize our language family this way: the Indian (Dekanic, Hindostanic), Iranic (Persian, Armenian, Ossetic), Thracian (Greek and Latin), Sarmatian (Lettic and Slavonic), Gothic (Germanic and Scandinavian), and Celtic (British and Gaelic) tribes” (SA 2. 281, dated June 11, 1818).
This is the fullest and clearest account of the relationships of our family of languages found for many years, and Rask showed true genius in the way in which he saw what languages belonged together and how they were related. About the same time he gave a classification of the Finno-Ugrian family of languages which is pronounced by such living authorities on these languages as Vilhelm Thomsen and Emil Setälä to be superior to most later attempts. When travelling in India he recognized the true position of Zend, about which previous scholars had held the most erroneous views, and his survey of the languages of India and Persia was thought valuable enough in 1863 to be printed from his manuscript, forty years after it was written. He was also the first to see that the Dravidian (by him called Malabaric) languages were totally different from Sanskrit. In his short essay on Zend (1826) he also incidentally gave the correct value of two letters in the first cuneiform writing, and thus made an important contribution towards the final deciphering of these inscriptions.
This is the most comprehensive and clear account of the connections among our family of languages in many years, and Rask displayed remarkable insight in identifying which languages were related and how. Around the same time, he provided a classification of the Finno-Ugrian family of languages, which experts like Vilhelm Thomsen and Emil Setälä consider to be better than most later efforts. While traveling in India, he correctly identified the true status of Zend, which earlier scholars had misunderstood. His overview of the languages of India and Persia was deemed valuable enough in 1863 to be published from his manuscript, forty years after it was written. He was also the first to recognize that the Dravidian languages (which he called Malabaric) were completely distinct from Sanskrit. In his brief essay on Zend (1826), he also correctly identified the value of two letters in the earliest cuneiform writing, making a significant contribution to the eventual deciphering of these inscriptions.
His long tour (1816-23) through Sweden, Finland, Russia, the Caucasus, Persia and India was spent in the most intense study[40] of a great variety of languages, but unfortunately brought on the illness and disappointments which, together with economic anxieties, marred the rest of his short life.
His extended journey (1816-23) through Sweden, Finland, Russia, the Caucasus, Persia, and India was dedicated to an intense study of a wide range of languages, but unfortunately, it led to the illness and disappointments that, along with financial worries, overshadowed the remainder of his brief life.[40]
When Rask died in 1832 he had written a great number of grammars of single languages, all of them remarkable for their accuracy in details and clear systematic treatment, more particularly of morphology, and some of them breaking new ground; besides his Icelandic grammar already mentioned, his Anglo-Saxon, Frisian and Lapp grammars should be specially named. Historical grammar in the strict sense is perhaps not his forte, though in a remarkable essay of the year 1815 he explains historically a great many features of Danish grammar, and in his Spanish and Italian grammars he in some respects forestalls Diez’s historical explanations. But in some points he stuck to erroneous views, a notable instance being his system of old Gothonic ‘long vowels,’ which was reared on the assumption that modern Icelandic pronunciation reflects the pronunciation of primitive times, while it is really a recent development, as Grimm saw from a comparison of all the old languages. With regard to consonants, however, Rask was the clearer-sighted of the two, and throughout he had this immense advantage over most of the comparative linguists of his age, that he had studied a great many languages at first hand with native speakers, while the others knew languages chiefly or exclusively through the medium of books and manuscripts. In no work of that period, or even of a much later time, are found so many first-hand observations of living speech as in Rask’s Retskrivningslære. Handicapped though he was in many ways, by poverty and illness and by the fact that he wrote in a language so little known as Danish, Rasmus Rask, through his wide outlook, his critical sagacity and aversion to all fanciful theorizing, stands out as one of the foremost leaders of linguistic science.[3]
When Rask died in 1832, he had written many grammars for individual languages, all notable for their detailed accuracy and clear, systematic approach, especially regarding morphology, with some of them introducing new concepts. Besides his already mentioned Icelandic grammar, his grammars for Anglo-Saxon, Frisian, and Lapp deserve special mention. Historical grammar, in the strict sense, may not have been his strength; however, in a remarkable essay from 1815, he historically explains many features of Danish grammar, and in his Spanish and Italian grammars, he in some ways anticipates Diez’s historical explanations. In some areas, though, he clung to mistaken views, such as his theory on the old Gothic ‘long vowels,’ based on the mistaken belief that modern Icelandic pronunciation reflects that of earlier times, when it is actually a recent development, as Grimm noted from comparing all the old languages. Regarding consonants, however, Rask had clearer insights than others, and he had a huge advantage over most comparative linguists of his time: he studied many languages firsthand with native speakers, while most others learned primarily through books and manuscripts. No works from that period, or even from much later, contain as many first-hand observations of spoken language as Rask’s Retskrivningslære. Despite facing many challenges, such as poverty, illness, and the struggle of writing in a lesser-known language like Danish, Rasmus Rask, with his broad perspective, critical insight, and rejection of fanciful theories, stands out as one of the leading figures in linguistic science.[3]
II.—§ 4. Jacob Grimm.
Jacob Grimm’s career was totally different from Rask’s. Born in 1785 as the son of a lawyer, he himself studied law and came under the influence of Savigny, whose view of legal institutions as the outcome of gradual development in intimate connexion with popular tradition and the whole intellectual and moral life of the[41] people appealed strongly to the young man’s imagination. But he was drawn even more to that study of old German popular poetry which then began to be the fashion, thanks to Tieck and other Romanticists; and when he was in Paris to assist Savigny with his historico-legal research, the old German manuscripts in the Bibliothèque nationale nourished his enthusiasm for the poetical treasures of the Middle Ages. He became a librarian and brought out his first book, Ueber den altdeutschen meistergesang (1811). At the same time, with his brother Wilhelm as constant companion and fellow-worker, he began collecting popular traditions, of which he published a first instalment in his famous Kinder- und hausmärchen (1812 ff.), a work whose learned notes and comparisons may be said to have laid the foundation of the science of folklore. Language at first had only a subordinate interest to him, and when he tried his hand at etymology, he indulged in the wildest guesses, according to the method (or want of method) of previous centuries. A. W. Schlegel’s criticism of his early attempts in this field, and still more Rask’s example, opened Grimm’s eyes to the necessity of a stricter method, and he soon threw himself with great energy into a painstaking and exact study of the oldest stages of the German language and its congeners. In his review (1812) of Rask’s Icelandic grammar he writes: “Each individuality, even in the world of languages, should be respected as sacred; it is desirable that even the smallest and most despised dialect should be left only to itself and to its own nature and in nowise subjected to violence, because it is sure to have some secret advantages over the greatest and most highly valued language.” Here we meet with that valuation of the hitherto overlooked popular dialects which sprang from the Romanticists’ interest in the ‘people’ and everything it had produced. Much valuable linguistic work was directly inspired by this feeling and by conscious opposition to the old philology, that occupied itself exclusively with the two classical languages and the upper-class literature embodied in them. As Scherer expresses it (Jacob Grimm, 2te ausg., Berlin, 1885, p. 152): “The brothers Grimm applied to the old national literature and to popular traditions the old philological virtue of exactitude, which had up to then been bestowed solely on Greek and Roman classics and on the Bible. They extended the field of strict philology, as they extended the field of recognized poetry. They discarded the aristocratic narrowmindedness with which philologists looked down on unwritten tradition, on popular ballads, legends, fairy tales, superstition, nursery rimes.... In the hands of the two Grimms philology became national and popular; and at the same time a pattern was created for the scientific study of all the peoples of the earth and[42] for a comparative investigation of the entire mental life of mankind, of which written literature is nothing but a small epitome.”
Jacob Grimm's career was completely different from Rask's. Born in 1785 to a lawyer, he studied law and was influenced by Savigny, whose perspective on legal institutions as the result of gradual development closely connected with popular tradition and the entire intellectual and moral life of the[41] people strongly appealed to his imagination. However, he was even more drawn to the study of old German popular poetry, which was becoming fashionable thanks to Tieck and other Romanticists; while in Paris assisting Savigny with his historical-legal research, the old German manuscripts in the Bibliothèque nationale fueled his passion for the poetic treasures of the Middle Ages. He became a librarian and published his first book, Ueber den altdeutschen meistergesang (1811). Simultaneously, with his brother Wilhelm as a constant companion and collaborator, he began collecting popular traditions, publishing the first installment in his famous Kinder- und hausmärchen (1812 ff.), a work whose scholarly notes and comparisons laid the groundwork for the science of folklore. Initially, language held only a minor interest for him, and when he ventured into etymology, he made the wildest guesses, following the method (or lack of method) of previous centuries. A. W. Schlegel’s criticism of his early attempts in this area, along with Rask’s example, opened Grimm’s eyes to the need for a more rigorous approach, and he quickly immersed himself in painstaking and precise study of the oldest stages of the German language and its relatives. In his review (1812) of Rask’s Icelandic grammar, he writes: “Each individuality, even in the realm of languages, should be treated as sacred; it is desirable that even the smallest and most disregarded dialect should be left solely to itself and its own nature, and not subjected to any violence, as it is bound to have some hidden advantages over the most esteemed and valued language.” Here, we see the appreciation for the previously overlooked popular dialects, stemming from the Romanticists’ interest in the 'people' and everything they produced. Much valuable linguistic work was directly inspired by this sentiment and by a conscious opposition to the old philology, which focused exclusively on the two classical languages and the upper-class literature produced within them. As Scherer puts it (Jacob Grimm, 2te ausg., Berlin, 1885, p. 152): “The brothers Grimm applied the old philological virtue of precision to the old national literature and popular traditions, which until then had been reserved solely for Greek and Roman classics and the Bible. They broadened the scope of strict philology, just as they expanded the field of recognized poetry. They rejected the aristocratic narrow-mindedness that led philologists to look down on unwritten tradition, popular ballads, legends, fairy tales, superstitions, and nursery rhymes.... In the hands of the Grimms, philology became national and popular; simultaneously, they set a standard for the scientific study of all the peoples of the earth and[42] for a comparative exploration of the entire mental life of mankind, of which written literature is merely a small summary.”
But though Grimm thus broke loose from the traditions of classical philology, he still carried with him one relic of it, namely the standard by which the merits of different languages were measured. “In reading carefully the old Gothonic (altdeutschen) sources, I was every day discovering forms and perfections which we generally envy the Greeks and Romans when we consider the present condition of our language.”... “Six hundred years ago every rustic knew, that is to say practised daily, perfections and niceties in the German language of which the best grammarians nowadays do not even dream; in the poetry of Wolfram von Eschenbach and of Hartmann von Aue, who had never heard of declension and conjugation, nay who perhaps did not even know how to read and write, many differences in the flexion and use of nouns and verbs are still nicely and unerringly observed, which we have gradually to rediscover in learned guise, but dare not reintroduce, for language ever follows its inalterable course.”
But even though Grimm broke away from the traditions of classical philology, he still carried with him one remnant of it, namely the standard by which the qualities of different languages were judged. “As I carefully read the old Gothic (altdeutschen) sources, I discovered new forms and subtleties every day that we often envy the Greeks and Romans when we think about the current state of our language.”... “Six hundred years ago, every common person knew, meaning they practiced daily, the subtleties and intricacies of the German language that the best grammarians today can hardly imagine; in the poetry of Wolfram von Eschenbach and Hartmann von Aue, who had never heard of declension and conjugation, and who perhaps didn’t even know how to read or write, many distinctions in the inflection and use of nouns and verbs are still consistently and accurately applied, which we have gradually had to rediscover in a learned way but cannot dare to reintroduce, as language always follows its unchanging path.”
Grimm then sets about writing his great historical and comparative Deutsche Grammatik, taking the term ‘deutsch’ in its widest and hardly justifiable sense of what is now ordinarily called Germanic and which is in this work called Gothonic. The first volume appeared in 1819, and in the preface we see that he was quite clear that he was breaking new ground and introducing a new method of looking at grammar. He speaks of previous German grammars and says expressly that he does not want his to be ranged with them. He charges them with unspeakable pedantry; they wanted to dogmatize magisterially, while to Grimm language, like everything natural and moral, is an unconscious and unnoticed secret which is implanted in us in youth. Every German therefore who speaks his language naturally, i.e. untaught, may call himself his own living grammar and leave all schoolmasters’ rules alone. Grimm accordingly has no wish to prescribe anything, but to observe what has grown naturally, and very appropriately he dedicates his work to Savigny, who has taught him how institutions grow in the life of a nation. In the new preface to the second edition there are also some noteworthy indications of the changed attitude. “I am hostile to general logical notions in grammar; they conduce apparently to strictness and solidity of definition, but hamper observation, which I take to be the soul of linguistic science.... As my starting-point was to trace the never-resting (unstillstehende) element of our language which changes with time and place, it became necessary for me to admit one dialect after the other, and I could not even[43] forbear to glance at those foreign languages that are ultimately related with ours.”
Grimm then begins to write his major historical and comparative Deutsche Grammatik, taking the term ‘deutsch’ in its broadest and arguably questionable sense of what is now commonly called Germanic, which in this work is referred to as Gothonic. The first volume was published in 1819, and in the preface, it's clear that he recognized he was venturing into new territory and introducing a new way of understanding grammar. He discusses previous German grammars and explicitly states that he does not want his to be classified alongside them. He criticizes them for their unbearable pedantry; they attempted to impose rules dogmatically, while for Grimm, language—like all things natural and moral—is an unconscious and unnoticed secret planted in us during our youth. Therefore, every German who speaks their language naturally, meaning without formal training, can consider themselves their own living grammar and ignore all the rules laid down by schoolmasters. Grimm, therefore, does not wish to impose anything but to observe what has developed naturally, and he fittingly dedicates his work to Savigny, who taught him how institutions evolve in a nation’s life. In the new preface to the second edition, there are also some significant indications of a shifted perspective. “I am opposed to overarching logical concepts in grammar; they seem to lead to strictness and clear definitions but hinder observation, which I believe is the essence of linguistic science.... Since my approach was to trace the ever-changing (unstable) element of our language that varies with time and place, it became essential for me to include one dialect after another, and I couldn’t even[43] resist looking at those foreign languages that are ultimately related to ours.”
Here we have the first clear programme of that historical school which has since then been the dominating one in linguistics. But as language according to this new point of view was constantly changing and developing, so also, during these years, were Grimm’s own ideas. And the man who then exercised the greatest influence on him was Rasmus Rask. When Grimm wrote the first edition of his Grammatik (1819), he knew nothing of Rask but the Icelandic grammar, but just before finishing his own volume Rask’s prize essay reached him, and in the preface he at once speaks of it in the highest terms of praise, as he does also in several letters of this period; he is equally enthusiastic about Rask’s Anglo-Saxon grammar and the Swedish edition of his Icelandic grammar, neither of which reached him till after his own first volume had been printed off. The consequence was that instead of going on to the second volume, Grimm entirely recast the first volume and brought it out in a new shape in 1822. The chief innovation was the phonology or, as he calls it, “Erstes buch. Von den buchstaben,” which was entirely absent in 1819, but now ran to 595 pages.
Here we have the first clear program of that historical school, which has since become the dominant one in linguistics. But just as language was constantly changing and developing according to this new perspective, so were Grimm’s own ideas during these years. The person who had the greatest influence on him at that time was Rasmus Rask. When Grimm wrote the first edition of his Grammatik (1819), he knew nothing about Rask except for the Icelandic grammar. However, just before finishing his own volume, Rask’s prize essay arrived, and in the preface, Grimm immediately praises it highly, as he does in several letters from this period. He is equally enthusiastic about Rask’s Anglo-Saxon grammar and the Swedish edition of his Icelandic grammar, neither of which he received until after his own first volume had been printed. As a result, instead of continuing to the second volume, Grimm completely rewrote the first volume and published it in a new form in 1822. The main innovation was the phonology, or as he calls it, “First book. About the letters,” which was entirely missing in 1819 but now spans 595 pages.
II.—§ 5. The Sound Shift.
This first book in the 1822 volume contains much, perhaps most, of what constitutes Grimm’s fame as a grammarian, notably his exposition of the ‘sound shift’ (lautverschiebung), which it has been customary in England since Max Müller to term ‘Grimm’s Law.’ If any one man is to give his name to this law, a better name would be ‘Rask’s Law,’ for all these transitions, Lat. Gr. p = f, t = þ (th), k = h, etc., are enumerated in Rask’s Undersøgelse, p. 168, which Grimm knew before he wrote a single word about the sound shift.
This first book in the 1822 volume contains much, perhaps most, of what makes Grimm famous as a grammarian, especially his explanation of the ‘sound shift’ (sound shift), which has been commonly referred to in England since Max Müller as ‘Grimm’s Law.’ If one person should really be credited with this law, a better name would be ‘Rask’s Law,’ because all these changes, Lat. Gr. p = f, t = þ (th), k = h, etc., are listed in Rask’s Undersøgelse, p. 168, which Grimm was aware of before he wrote anything about the sound shift.
Now, it is interesting to compare the two scholars’ treatment of these transitions. The sober-minded, matter-of-fact Rask contents himself with a bare statement of the facts, with just enough well-chosen examples to establish the correspondence; the way in which he arranges the sounds shows that he saw their parallelism clearly enough, though he did not attempt to bring everything under one single formula, any more than he tried to explain why these sounds had changed.[4] Grimm multiplies the examples and[44] then systematizes the whole process in one formula so as to comprise also the ‘second shift’ found in High German alone—a shift well known to Rask, though treated by him in a different place (p. 68 f.). Grimm’s formula looks thus:
Now, it’s interesting to compare how the two scholars handle these transitions. The practical and straightforward Rask presents a simple statement of the facts, along with just enough carefully chosen examples to show the connections; the way he organizes the sounds reveals that he clearly recognized their parallels, although he didn’t try to fit everything into one single formula or explain why these sounds changed.[4] Grimm adds more examples and[44] then organizes the entire process into one formula to also include the ‘second shift’ found only in High German—something Rask was aware of, although he discusses it in a different section (p. 68 f.). Grimm’s formula looks like this:
Greek | p | b | f | t | d | th | k | g | ch |
Gothic | f | p | b | th | t | d | h | k | g |
High G. | b(v) | f | p | d | z | t | g | ch | k, |
which may be expressed generally thus, that tenuis (T) becomes aspirate (A) and then media (M), etc., or, tabulated:
which can generally be expressed like this: tenuis (T) becomes aspirate (A) and then media (M), etc., or, in a table:
Greek | T | M | A |
Gothic | A | T | M |
High G. | M | A | T. |
For this Grimm would of course have deserved great credit, because a comprehensive formula is more scientific than a rough statement of facts—if the formula had been correct; but unfortunately it is not so. In the first place, it breaks down in the very first instance, for there is no media in High German corresponding to Gr. p and Gothic f (cf. poûs, fotus, fuss, etc.); secondly, High German has h just as Gothic has, corresponding to Greek k (cf. kardía, hairto, herz, etc.), and where it has g, Gothic has also g in accordance with rules unknown to Grimm and not explained till long afterwards (by Verner). But the worst thing is that the whole specious generalization produces the impression of regularity and uniformity only through the highly unscientific use of the word ‘aspirate,’ which is made to cover such phonetically disparate things as (1) combination of stop with following h, (2) combination of stop with following fricative, pf, ts written z, (3) voiceless fricative, f, s in G. das, (4) voiced fricative, v, ð written th, and (5) h. Grimm rejoiced in his formula, giving as it does three chronological stages in each of the three subdivisions (tenuis, media, aspirate) of each of the three classes of consonants (labial, dental, ‘guttural’). This evidently took hold of his fancy through the mystic power of the number three, which he elsewhere (Gesch 1. 191, cf. 241) finds pervading language generally: three original vowels, a, i, u, three genders, three numbers (singular, dual, plural), three persons, three ‘voices’ (genera: active, middle, passive), three tenses (present, preterit, future), three declensions through a, i, u. As there is here an element of mysticism, so is there also in Grimm’s highflown[45] explanation of the whole process from pretended popular psychology, which is full of the cloudiest romanticism. “When once the language had made the first step and had rid itself of the organic basis of its sounds, it was hardly possible for it to escape the second step and not to arrive at the third stage,[5] through which this development was perfected.... It is impossible not to admire the instinct by which the linguistic spirit (sprachgeist) carried this out to the end. A great many sounds got out of joint, but they always knew how to arrange themselves in a different place and to find the new application of the old law. I am not saying that the shift happened without any detriment, nay from one point of view the sound shift appears to me as a barbarous aberration, from which other more quiet nations abstained, but which is connected with the violent progress and craving for freedom which was found in Germany in the beginning of the Middle Ages and which initiated the transformation of Europe. The Germans pressed forward even in the matter of the innermost sounds of their language,” etc., with remarks on intellectual progress and on victorious and ruling races. Grimm further says that “die dritte stufe des verschobnen lauts den kreislauf abschliesse und nach ihr ein neuer ansatz zur abweichung wieder von vorn anheben müsse. Doch eben weil der sprachgeist seinen lauf vollbracht hat, scheint er nicht wieder neu beginnen zu wollen” (GDS 1. 292 f., 299). It would be difficult to attach any clear ideas to these words.
For this, Grimm would definitely deserve a lot of credit because a comprehensive formula is more scientific than a rough statement of facts—if the formula had been correct; but unfortunately, it’s not. First of all, it breaks down right from the start, as there’s no middle sound in High German that corresponds to Gr. p and Gothic f (see poûs, fotus, fuss, etc.); secondly, High German has h, just like Gothic, corresponding to Greek k (see kardía, hairto, herz, etc.), and where it has g, Gothic also has g according to rules that Grimm didn’t know and that weren’t explained until much later (by Verner). But the worst part is that the entire misleading generalization creates the impression of regularity and uniformity only through the highly unscientific use of the word ‘aspirate,’ which is used to cover such phonetically different things as (1) the combination of a stop with a following h, (2) the combination of a stop with a following fricative, pf, ts written as z, (3) voiceless fricatives, f, s in G. das, (4) voiced fricatives, v, ð written as th, and (5) h. Grimm was pleased with his formula, as it presents three chronological stages in each of the three subdivisions (tenuis, media, aspirate) of each of the three classes of consonants (labial, dental, ‘guttural’). This evidently captured his imagination due to the mystical nature of the number three, which he also finds throughout language in general (Gesch 1. 191, cf. 241): three original vowels, a, i, u, three genders, three numbers (singular, dual, plural), three persons, three ‘voices’ (types: active, middle, passive), three tenses (present, past, future), three declensions through a, i, u. Just as there’s an element of mysticism involved here, there’s also mysticism in Grimm’s grand explanation of the whole process based on supposed popular psychology, which is filled with the murkiest romanticism. “Once the language took the first step and freed itself from the organic foundation of its sounds, it was almost impossible for it to avoid the second step and not reach the third stage,[5] through which this development was perfected.... It’s hard not to admire the instinct with which the linguistic spirit (language spirit) executed this to completion. A lot of sounds went out of alignment, but they always managed to rearrange themselves and find new applications of the old rules. I’m not saying the shift happened without any drawbacks; indeed, from one perspective, the sound shift seems like a barbaric deviation, from which other more peaceful nations refrained, but which is linked to the intense progress and desire for freedom that characterized Germany at the start of the Middle Ages and that initiated the transformation of Europe. The Germans pushed ahead even when it came to the innermost sounds of their language,” etc., with comments on intellectual progress and on conquering and ruling races. Grimm further states that “The third stage of the shifted sound completes the cycle, and after that, a new approach to deviation needs to start over from the beginning. However, precisely because the spirit of language has completed its course, it seems unwilling to begin anew.” (GDS 1. 292 f., 299). It would be difficult to attach any clear meaning to these words.
Grimm’s idea of a ‘kreislauf’ is caused by the notion that the two shifts, separated by several centuries, represent one continued movement, while the High German shift of the eighth century has really no more to do with the primitive Gothonic shift, which took place probably some time before Christ, than has, for instance, the Danish shift in words like gribe, bide, bage, from gripæ, bitæ, bakæ (about 1400), or the still more recent transition in Danish through which stressed t in tid, tyve, etc., sounds nearly like [ts], as in HG. zeit. There cannot possibly be any causal nexus between such transitions, separated chronologically by long periods, with just as little change in the pronunciation of these consonants as there has been in English.[6]
Grimm's concept of a ‘cycle’ comes from the idea that the two shifts, which are separated by several centuries, represent one ongoing movement. However, the High German shift of the eighth century is really no more related to the early Gothic shift, which probably occurred some time before Christ, than the Danish shift in words like gribe, bide, bage, derived from gripæ, bitæ, bakæ (around 1400), or the more recent change in Danish where stressed t in tid, tyve, etc., sounds almost like [ts], similar to HG. zeit. There can't possibly be any causal connection between such transitions, which are separated by long time periods, and with no significant change in the pronunciation of these consonants compared to what has happened in English.[6]
Grimm was anything but a phonetician, and sometimes says things which nowadays cannot but produce a smile, as when he says (Gr 1. 3) “in our word schrift, for instance, we express eight sounds through seven signs, for f stands for ph”; thus he earnestly believes that sch contains three sounds, s and the ‘aspirate’ ch = c + h! Yet through the irony of fate it was on the history of sounds that Grimm exercised the strongest influence. As in other parts of his grammar, so also in the “theory of letters” he gave fuller word lists than people had been accustomed to, and this opened the eyes of scholars to the great regularity reigning in this department of linguistic development. Though in his own etymological practice he was far from the strict idea of ‘phonetic law’ that played such a prominent rôle in later times, he thus paved the way for it. He speaks of law at any rate in connexion with the consonant shift, and there recognizes that it serves to curb wild etymologies and becomes a test for them (Gesch 291). The consonant shift thus became the law in linguistics, and because it affected a great many words known to everybody, and in a new and surprising way associated well-known Latin or Greek words with words of one’s own mother-tongue, it became popularly the keystone of a new wonderful science.
Grimm was far from being a phonetician, and sometimes he says things that nowadays can’t help but make people smile, like when he claims (Gr 1. 3) “in our word schrift, for instance, we express eight sounds with seven signs, since f stands for ph.” He genuinely believes that sch contains three sounds, s, and the ‘aspirate’ ch = c + h! Yet, ironically, it was in the history of sounds that Grimm had the biggest impact. In other areas of his grammar, just like in the “theory of letters,” he provided more comprehensive word lists than people were used to, and this opened up scholars' eyes to the significant regularity present in this aspect of linguistic development. While his own approach to etymology was far from the strict notion of ‘phonetic law’ that became prominent later on, he laid the groundwork for it. He references laws, at least in connection with the consonant shift, recognizing that it serves to limit wild etymologies and acts as a test for them (Gesch 291). The consonant shift thus became the law in linguistics, and because it affected many words familiar to everyone, linking well-known Latin or Greek words to words in one’s native language in a new and surprising way, it became popularly regarded as the cornerstone of a remarkable new science.
Grimm coined several of the terms now generally used in linguistics; thus umlaut and ablaut, ‘strong’ and ‘weak’ declensions and conjugations. As to the first, we have seen that it was Rask who first understood and who taught Grimm the cause of this phenomenon, which in English has often been designated by the German term, while Sweet calls it ‘mutation’ and others better ‘infection.’ With regard to ‘ablaut’ (Sweet: gradation, best perhaps in English apophony), Rask termed it ‘omlyd,’ a word which he never applied to Grimm’s ‘umlaut,’ thus keeping the two kinds of vowel change as strictly apart as Grimm does. Apophony was first discovered in that class of verbs which Grimm called ‘strong’; he was fascinated by the commutation of the vowels in springe, sprang, gesprungen, and sees in it, as in bimbambum, something mystic and admirable, characteristic of the old German spirit. He was thus blind to the correspondences found in other languages, and his theory led him astray in the second volume, in which he constructed imaginary verbal roots to explain apophony wherever it was found outside the verbs.
Grimm introduced several terms that are now commonly used in linguistics, such as umlaut and ablaut, as well as the concepts of 'strong' and 'weak' declensions and conjugations. Regarding the first term, it's important to note that it was Rask who first understood and taught Grimm about the cause of this phenomenon, which is often referred to in English by the German term, although Sweet calls it ‘mutation’ and others prefer ‘infection.’ For 'ablaut' (Sweet refers to it as gradation, but it’s perhaps best known in English as apophony), Rask used the term ‘omlyd,’ which he never applied to Grimm’s ‘umlaut,’ thus keeping the two types of vowel changes distinctly separate, just as Grimm did. Apophony was first identified in the category of verbs that Grimm referred to as ‘strong’; he was captivated by the way the vowels changed in springe, sprang, gesprungen, and saw in it, along with bimbambum, something mystical and admirable, representative of the old German spirit. This focus made him overlook the similarities found in other languages, and his theory led him off course in the second volume, where he created imaginary verbal roots to explain apophony wherever it appeared outside of verbs.
Though Grimm, as we have seen, was by his principles and whole tendency averse to prescribing laws for a language, he is sometimes carried away by his love for mediæval German, as when he gives as the correct nominative form der boge, though everybody for centuries had said der bogen. In the same way many of his followers would apply the historical method to questions of correctness of speech, and would discard the forms evolved in later times in favour of previously existing forms which were looked upon as more ‘organic.’
Though Grimm, as we’ve seen, was fundamentally opposed to imposing rules on a language, he occasionally gets swept up in his enthusiasm for medieval German, as when he suggests the correct nominative form der boge, even though everyone has said der bogen for centuries. Likewise, many of his followers would use the historical method to address questions of language correctness, rejecting forms that developed later in favor of earlier forms that were considered more ‘organic.’
It will not be necessary here to speak of the imposing work done by Grimm in the rest of his long life, chiefly spent as a professor in Berlin. But in contrast to the ordinary view I must say that what appears to me as most likely to endure is his work on syntax, contained in the fourth volume of his grammar and in monographs. Here his enormous learning, his close power of observation, and his historical method stand him in good stead, and there is much good sense and freedom from that kind of metaphysical systematism which was triumphant in contemporaneous work on classical syntax. His services in this field are the more interesting because he did not himself seem to set much store by these studies and even said that syntax was half outside the scope of grammar. This utterance belongs to a later period than that of the birth of historical and comparative linguistics, and we shall have to revert to it after sketching the work of the third great founder of this science, to whom we shall now turn.
It’s not necessary to discuss the impressive work Grimm did throughout his long life, mainly spent as a professor in Berlin. However, I must point out that, contrary to popular belief, I think his work on syntax is most likely to stand the test of time. This is found in the fourth volume of his grammar and in various monographs. His vast knowledge, keen observational skills, and historical approach serve him well here, and there's a lot of common sense and a refreshing lack of the metaphysical systematism that dominated contemporary classical syntax work. His contributions in this area are particularly intriguing because he himself didn’t seem to value them highly and even remarked that syntax was only partially related to grammar. This statement comes from a later time than when historical and comparative linguistics first emerged, and we’ll need to return to it after outlining the contributions of the third major founder of this field, whom we will now discuss.
II.—§ 6. Franz Bopp.
The third, by some accounted the greatest, among the founders of modern linguistic science was Franz Bopp. His life was uneventful. At the age of twenty-one (he was born in 1791) he went to Paris to study Oriental languages, and soon concentrated his attention on Sanskrit. His first book, from which it is customary in Germany to date the birth of Comparative Philology, appeared in 1816, while he was still in Paris, under the title Ueber des conjugationssystem der sanskritsprache in vergleichung mit jenem der griechischen, lateinischen, persischen und germanischen sprache, but the latter part of the small volume was taken up with translations from Sanskrit, and for a long time he was just as much a Sanskrit scholar, editing and translating Sanskrit texts, as a comparative grammarian. He showed himself in the latter character in several papers read before the Berlin Academy, after he had been made a professor there in 1822, and especially in his famous Vergleichende grammatik des sanskrit, ṣend, armenischen, griechischen, lateinischen, litauischen, altslawischen, gotischen und deutschen, the first edition of which was[48] published between 1833 and 1849, the second in 1857, and the third in 1868. Bopp died in 1867.
The third, considered by some to be the greatest, among the founders of modern linguistic science was Franz Bopp. His life was quite ordinary. At the age of twenty-one (he was born in 1791), he moved to Paris to study Oriental languages, quickly shifting his focus to Sanskrit. His first book, which is typically regarded in Germany as the starting point of Comparative Philology, was published in 1816 while he was still in Paris, titled Ueber des conjugationssystem der sanskritsprache in vergleichung mit jenem der griechischen, lateinischen, persischen und germanischen sprache. However, the latter part of this small volume consisted of translations from Sanskrit, and for a long time, he was equally a Sanskrit scholar, editing and translating Sanskrit texts, as well as a comparative grammarian. He demonstrated his comparative work in several papers presented at the Berlin Academy after he became a professor there in 1822, especially in his well-known Vergleichende grammatik des sanskrit, ṣend, armenischen, griechischen, lateinischen, litauischen, altslawischen, gotischen und deutschen, the first edition of which was [48] published between 1833 and 1849, the second in 1857, and the third in 1868. Bopp passed away in 1867.
Of Bopp’s Conjugationssystem a revised, rearranged and greatly improved English translation came out in 1820 under the title Analytical Comparison of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin and Teutonic Languages. This was reprinted with a good introduction by F. Techmer in his Internationale zeitschrift für allgem. sprachwissenschaft IV (1888), and in the following remarks I shall quote this (abbreviated AC) instead of, or alongside of, the German original (abbreviated C).
Of Bopp’s Conjugationssystem, a revised, reorganized, and significantly improved English translation was released in 1820 titled Analytical Comparison of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin and Teutonic Languages. This was later reprinted with a solid introduction by F. Techmer in his Internationale zeitschrift für allgem. sprachwissenschaft IV (1888). In the following remarks, I will refer to this (abbreviated AC) instead of, or alongside, the German original (abbreviated C).
Bopp’s chief aim (and in this he was characteristically different from Rask) was to find out the ultimate origin of grammatical forms. He follows his quest by the aid of Sanskrit forms, though he does not consider these as the ultimate forms themselves: “I do not believe that the Greek, Latin, and other European languages are to be considered as derived from the Sanskrit in the state in which we find it in Indian books; I feel rather inclined to consider them altogether as subsequent variations of one original tongue, which, however, the Sanskrit has preserved more perfect than its kindred dialects. But whilst therefore the language of the Brahmans more frequently enables us to conjecture the primitive form of the Greek and Latin languages than what we discover in the oldest authors and monuments, the latter on their side also may not unfrequently elucidate the Sanskrit grammar” (AC 3). Herein subsequent research has certainly borne out Bopp’s view.
Bopp's main goal (and this sets him apart from Rask) was to discover the ultimate origin of grammatical forms. He pursued this quest using Sanskrit forms, although he didn’t see them as the final forms themselves: “I don’t believe that Greek, Latin, and other European languages should be viewed as derived from Sanskrit in the form we find it in Indian texts; I tend to think of them as later variations of one original language, which Sanskrit has preserved more accurately than its related dialects. However, while the language of the Brahmans often helps us infer the primitive form of Greek and Latin better than what we find in the oldest authors and artifacts, the latter can also frequently shed light on Sanskrit grammar” (AC 3). Subsequent research has definitely supported Bopp's perspective.
After finding out by a comparison of the grammatical forms of Sanskrit, Greek, etc., which of these forms were identical and what were their oldest shapes, he tries to investigate the ultimate origin of these forms. This he takes to be a comparatively easy consequence of the first task, but he was here too much under the influence of the philosophical grammar then in vogue. Gottfried Hermann (De emendanda ratione Græcæ grammaticæ, 1801), on purely logical grounds, distinguishes three things as necessary elements of each sentence, the subject, the predicate, and the copula joining the first two elements together; as the power of the verb is to attribute the predicate to the subject, there is really only one verb, namely the verb to be. Bopp’s teacher in Paris, Silvestre de Sacy, says the same thing, and Bopp repeats: “A verb, in the most restricted meaning of the term, is that part of speech by which a subject is connected with its attribute. According to this definition it would appear that there can exist only one verb, namely, the substantive verb, in Latin esse; in English, to be.... Languages of a structure similar to that of the Greek, Latin, etc., can express by one verb of this kind a whole logical proposition, in which, however, that part of speech which expresses the connexion[49] of the subject with its attribute, which is the characteristic function of the verb, is generally entirely omitted or understood. The Latin verb dat expresses the proposition ‘he gives,’ or ‘he is giving’: the letter t, indicating the third person, is the subject, da expresses the attribute of giving, and the grammatical copula is understood. In the verb potest, the latter is expressed, and potest unites in itself the three essential parts of speech, t being the subject, es the copula, and pot the attribute.”
After analyzing the grammatical forms of Sanskrit, Greek, and others to determine which ones are identical and what their earliest versions were, he aims to explore the ultimate origins of these forms. He sees this as a relatively straightforward follow-up to the first task, but he is too influenced by the philosophical grammar that was popular at the time. Gottfried Hermann (De emendanda ratione Græcæ grammaticæ, 1801), based on logical reasoning, identifies three necessary components in every sentence: the subject, the predicate, and the copula that connects the first two elements. Since the role of the verb is to link the predicate to the subject, there is effectively only one verb, namely the verb to be. Bopp's instructor in Paris, Silvestre de Sacy, agrees with this, and Bopp reiterates: “A verb, in the strictest sense, is the part of speech that connects a subject with its attribute. According to this definition, it seems that only one verb can exist, namely the substantive verb, in Latin esse; in English, to be.... Languages that have a structure similar to Greek, Latin, etc., can express a complete logical proposition with just one verb of this type, where the part of speech that indicates the connection[49] between the subject and its attribute, which is the defining function of the verb, is usually absent or implied. The Latin verb dat conveys the statement ‘he gives’ or ‘he is giving’: the letter t signals the third person, da indicates the action of giving, and the grammatical copula is understood. In the verb potest, this element is expressed, and potest combines all three essential components of speech, with t as the subject, es as the copula, and pot as the attribute.”
Starting from this logical conception of grammar, Bopp is inclined to find everywhere the ‘substantive verb’ to be in its two Sanskrit forms as and bhu as an integral part of verbal forms. He is not the first to think that terminations, which are now inseparable parts of a verb, were originally independent words; thus Horne Tooke (in Epea pteroenta, 1786, ii. 429) expressly says that “All those common terminations in any language ... are themselves separate words with distinct meanings,” and explains, for instance, Latin ibo from i, ‘go’ + b, ‘will,’ from Greek boúl(omai) + o ‘I,’ from ego. Bopp’s explanations are similar to this, though they do not imply such violent shortenings as that of boúl(omai) to b. He finds the root Sanskrit as, ‘to be,’ in Latin perfects like scrip-s-i, in Greek aorists like e-tup-s-a and in futures like tup-s-o. That the same addition thus indicates different tenses does not trouble Bopp greatly; he explains Lat. fueram from fu + es + am, etc., and says that the root fu “contains, properly, nothing to indicate past time, but the usage of language having supplied the want of an adequate inflexion, fui received the sense of a perfect, and fu-eram, which would be nothing more than an imperfect, that of a pluperfect, and after the same manner fu-ero signifies ‘I shall have been,’ instead of ‘I shall be’” (AC 57). All Latin verbal endings containing r are thus explained as being ultimately formed with the substantive verb (ama-rem, etc.); thus among others the infinitives fac-ere, ed-ere, as well as esse, posse: “E is properly, in Latin, the termination of a simple infinitive active; and the root Es produced anciently ese, by adding e; the s having afterwards been doubled, we have esse. This termination e answers to the Greek infinitive in ai, eînai ...” (AC 58).
Starting from this logical idea of grammar, Bopp tends to find the 'substantive verb' to be in its two Sanskrit forms as and bhu as essential parts of verb forms. He's not the first to think that endings, which are now inseparable parts of a verb, were originally standalone words; Horne Tooke (in Epea pteroenta, 1786, ii. 429) specifically states that "All those common endings in any language ... are themselves separate words with distinct meanings," and explains, for example, Latin ibo from i, 'go' + b, 'will,' from Greek boúl(omai) + o 'I,' from ego. Bopp's explanations are similar to this, although they don't suggest such drastic shortenings as turning boúl(omai) into b. He finds the root Sanskrit as, 'to be,' in Latin perfect forms like scrip-s-i, in Greek aorists like e-tup-s-a, and in futures like tup-s-o. The fact that the same addition can indicate different tenses doesn't bother Bopp much; he explains Lat. fueram from fu + es + am, etc., and says that the root fu "contains, properly, nothing to indicate past time, but since the usage of language filled the need for an adequate inflection, fui took on the meaning of a perfect, and fu-eram, which would simply be an imperfect, that of a pluperfect, and in the same way fu-ero means 'I shall have been,' rather than 'I shall be'" (AC 57). All Latin verbal endings containing r are thus explained as ultimately being formed with the substantive verb (ama-rem, etc.); this includes the infinitives fac-ere, ed-ere, as well as esse, posse: "E is properly, in Latin, the ending of a simple active infinitive; and the root Es originally produced ese, by adding e; the s having later been doubled, we now have esse. This ending e corresponds to the Greek infinitive in ai, eînai ..." (AC 58).
If Bopp found a master-key to many of the verbal endings in the Sanskrit root es, he found a key to many others in the other root of the verb ‘to be,’ Sanskrit bhu. He finds it in the Latin imperfect da-bam, as well as in the future da-bo, the relation between which is the same as that between er-am and er-o. “Bo, bis, bit has a striking similarity with the Anglo-Saxon beo, bys, byth, the future tense of the verb substantive, a similarity which cannot be considered as merely accidental.” [Here neither the form nor the function of the Anglo-Saxon is stated quite correctly.] But[50] the ending in Latin ama-vi is also referred to the same root; for the change of the b into v we are referred to Italian amava, from Lat. amabam; thus also fui is for fuvi and potui is for pot-vi: “languages manifest a constant effort to combine heterogeneous materials in such a manner as to offer to the ear or eye one perfect whole, like a statue executed by a skilful artist, that wears the appearance of a figure hewn out of one piece of marble” (AC 60).
If Bopp discovered a master key to many of the verbal endings in the Sanskrit root es, he also found a key to many others in the other root of the verb ‘to be,’ Sanskrit bhu. He sees it in the Latin imperfect da-bam, as well as in the future da-bo, with the relationship being the same as that between er-am and er-o. “Bo, bis, bit has a striking resemblance to the Anglo-Saxon beo, bys, byth, the future tense of the verb to be, a similarity that cannot be considered purely coincidental." [Here, neither the form nor the function of the Anglo-Saxon is stated quite accurately.] But[50] the ending in Latin ama-vi is also linked to the same root; for the change of the b into v, we are directed to Italian amava, from Lat. amabam; similarly, fui is for fuvi and potui is for pot-vi: “languages show a constant effort to blend different elements in such a way as to present to the ear or eye one complete whole, like a statue crafted by a skilled artist that appears to be shaped from a single piece of marble” (AC 60).
The following may be taken as a fair specimen of the method followed in these first attempts to account for the origin of flexional forms: “The Latin passive forms amat-ur, amant-ur, would, in some measure, conform to this mode of joining the verb substantive, if the r was also the result of a permutation of an original s; and this appears not quite incredible, if we compare the second person ama-ris with the third amat-ur. Either in one or the other there must be a transposition of letters, to which the Latin language is particularly addicted. If ama-ris, which might have been produced from ama-sis, has preserved the original order of letters, then ama-tur must be the transposition of ama-rut or ama-sut, and ama-ntur that of ama-runt or ama-sunt. If this be the case, the origin of the Latin passive can be accounted for, and although differing from that of the Sanskrit, Greek, and Gothic languages, it is not produced by the invention of a new grammatical form. It becomes clear, also, why many verbs, with a passive form, have an active signification; because there is no reason why the addition of the verb substantive should necessarily produce a passive sense. There is another way of explaining ama-ris, if it really stands for ama-sis; the s may be the radical consonant of the reflex pronoun se. The introduction of this pronoun would be particularly adapted to form the middle voice, which expresses the reflexion of the action upon the actor; but the Greek language exemplifies the facility with which the peculiar signification of the middle voice passes into that of the passive.” The reasoning in the beginning of this passage (the only one contained in C) carries us back to a pre-scientific atmosphere, of which there are few or no traces in Rask’s writings; the latter explanation (added in AC) was preferred by Bopp himself in later works, and was for many years accepted as the correct one, until scholars found a passive in r in Keltic, where the transition from s to r is not found as it is in Latin; and as the closely corresponding forms in Keltic and Italic must obviously be explained in the same way, the hypothesis of a composition with se was generally abandoned. Bopp’s partiality for the abstract verb is seen clearly when he explains the Icelandic passive in -st from s = es (C 132); here Rask and Grimm saw the correct and obvious explanation.
The following can be seen as a fair example of the method used in these early attempts to explain the origin of flexional forms: "The Latin passive forms amat-ur, amant-ur, would, to some extent, fit this way of connecting with the verb substantive, if the r came from a change of an original s; and this doesn’t seem too unlikely when we compare the second person ama-ris with the third amat-ur. In either case, there must be a letter rearrangement, which Latin is known for. If ama-ris, which might have come from ama-sis, has kept the original letter order, then ama-tur must come from a rearrangement of ama-rut or ama-sut, and ama-ntur from ama-runt or ama-sunt. If this is true, we can explain the origin of the Latin passive, and although it differs from that of Sanskrit, Greek, and Gothic, it is not created by inventing a new grammatical form. It also clarifies why many verbs with a passive form can have an active meaning; there’s no reason that adding the verb substantive should automatically make it passive. There’s another way to interpret ama-ris, if it actually stands for ama-sis; the s could be the base consonant from the reflex pronoun se. This pronoun’s introduction would be particularly suitable for forming the middle voice, which reflects the action back onto the actor; but the Greek language shows how easily the specific meaning of the middle voice shifts into passive meaning." The reasoning at the start of this passage (the only one in C) takes us back to a pre-scientific context, which is hardly present in Rask’s writings; the latter explanation (added in AC) was favored by Bopp himself in his later works and was for many years seen as the correct one until scholars found a passive in r in Keltic, where the transition from s to r doesn’t occur as it does in Latin; and since the similar forms in Keltic and Italic must clearly be explained in the same way, the idea of a combination with se was generally set aside. Bopp’s bias toward the abstract verb is clearly seen when he explains the Icelandic passive in -st from s = es (C 132); here, Rask and Grimm found the correct and obvious explanation.
Among the other explanations given first by Bopp must be mentioned the Latin second person of the passive voice -mini, as in ama-mini, which he takes to be the nominative masculine plural of a participle corresponding to Greek -menos and found in a different form in Lat. alumnus (AC 51). This explanation is still widely accepted, though not by everybody.
Among the other explanations provided initially by Bopp, the Latin second person of the passive voice, -mini, as seen in ama-mini, should be noted. He considers this to be the nominative masculine plural of a participle that corresponds to Greek -menos, and it appears in another form in Latin as alumnus (AC 51). This explanation is still widely accepted, though not by everyone.
With regard to the preterit of what Grimm was later to term the ‘weak’ verbs, Bopp vacillates between different explanations. In C 118 he thinks the t or d is identical with the ending of the participle, in which the case endings were omitted and supplanted by personal endings; the syllable ed after d [in Gothic sok-id-edum; ‘Greek,’ p. 119, must be a misprint for Gothic] is nothing but an accidental addition. But on p. 151 he sees in sokidedun, sokidedi, a connexion of sok with the preterit of the verb Tun, as if the Germans were to say suchetaten, suchetäte; he compares the English use of did (did seek), and thinks the verb used is G. tun, Goth. tanjan. The theory of composition is here restricted to those forms that contain two d’s, i.e. the plural indicative and the subjunctive. In the English edition this twofold explanation is repeated with some additions: d or t as in Gothic sok-i-da and oh-ta originates from a participle found in Sanskr. tyak-ta, likh-i-ta, Lat. -tus, Gr. -tós; this suffix generally has a passive sense, but in neuter verbs an active sense, and therefore would naturally serve to form a preterit tense with an active signification. He finds a proof of the connexion between this preterit and the participle in the fact that only such verbs as have this ending in the participle form their preterit by means of a dental, while the others (the ‘strong’ verbs, as Grimm afterwards termed them) have a participle in an and reduplication or a change of vowel in the preterit; and Bopp compares the Greek aorist passive etúphth-ēn, edóth-ēn, which he conceives may proceed from the participle tuphth-eís, doth-eís (AC 37 ff.). This suggestion seems to have been commonly overlooked or abandoned, while the other explanation, from dedi as in English did seek, which Bopp gives p. 49 for the subjunctive and the indicative plural, was accepted by Grimm as the explanation of all the forms, even of those containing only one dental; in later works Bopp agreed with Grimm and thus gave up the first part of his original explanation. The did explanation had been given already by D. von Stade (d. 1718, see Collitz, Das schwache präteritum, p. 1); Rask (P 270, not mentioned by Collitz) says: “Whence this d or t has come is not easy to tell, as it is not found in Latin and Greek, but as it is evident from the Icelandic grammar that it is closely connected with the past participle and is also found in the preterit subjunctive, it seems clear that it must have been an old characteristic of the past tense in every mood, but was lost[52] in Greek when the above-mentioned participles in tos disappeared from the verbs” (cf. Ch. XIX § 12).
With respect to the past tense of what Grimm later called the ‘weak’ verbs, Bopp wavers between different explanations. In C 118, he suggests that the t or d is the same as the ending of the participle, in which the case endings were dropped and replaced by personal endings; the syllable ed after d [in Gothic sok-id-edum; ‘Greek,’ p. 119 must be a typo for Gothic] is just an accidental addition. But on page 151, he sees a connection between sokidedun, sokidedi, and the past tense of the verb Tun, suggesting that the Germans might say suchetaten, suchetäte; he compares this to the English use of did (did seek) and thinks the verb in question is G. tun, Goth. tanjan. The theory of composition here is limited to those forms that contain two d’s, i.e., the plural indicative and the subjunctive. In the English edition, this dual explanation is repeated with some additions: d or t as in Gothic sok-i-da and oh-ta originates from a participle found in Sanskr. tyak-ta, likh-i-ta, Lat. -tus, Gr. -tós; this suffix generally has a passive meaning, but in neuter verbs, it has an active meaning, so it would naturally form a past tense with an active sense. He finds evidence of the connection between this past tense and the participle in the fact that only those verbs that have this ending in the participle form their past tense using a dental, while others (the ‘strong’ verbs, as Grimm later called them) have a participle in an and use reduplication or a vowel change in the past tense; and Bopp compares this to the Greek aorist passive etúphth-ēn, edóth-ēn, which he believes may come from the participle tuphth-eís, doth-eís (AC 37 ff.). This suggestion seems to have been largely ignored or set aside, while the other explanation, based on dedi as in English did seek, which Bopp provides on page 49 for the subjunctive and the indicative plural, was accepted by Grimm as the explanation for all forms, even for those containing only one dental; in later works, Bopp aligned with Grimm and thus abandoned the first part of his original explanation. The did theory had previously been proposed by D. von Stade (d. 1718, see Collitz, Das schwache präteritum, p. 1); Rask (P 270, not cited by Collitz) states: “It’s not easy to determine where this d or t comes from since it isn't found in Latin and Greek, but as is clear from the Icelandic grammar, it is closely linked to the past participle and is also present in the past subjunctive, suggesting that it must have been an old feature of the past tense in every mood, though it was lost[52] in Greek when the aforementioned participles in tos disappeared from the verbs” (cf. Ch. XIX § 12).
With regard to the vowels, Bopp in AC has the interesting theory that it is only through a defect in the alphabet that Sanskrit appears to have a in so many places; he believes that the spoken language had often “the short Italian e and o,” where a was written. “If this was the case, we can give a reason why, in words common to the Sanskrit and Greek, the Indian akāra [that is, short a] so often corresponds to ε and ο, as, for instance, asti, he is, ἐστί; patis, husband, πόσις; ambaras, sky, ὄμβρος, rain, etc.” Later, unfortunately, Bopp came under the influence of Grimm, who, as we saw, on speculative grounds admitted in the primitive language only the three vowels a, i, u, and Bopp and his followers went on believing that the Sanskrit a represented the original state of language, until the discovery of the ‘palatal law’ (about 1880) showed (what Bopp’s occasional remark might otherwise easily have led up to, if he had not himself discarded it) that the Greek tripartition into a, e, o represented really a more original state of things.
Regarding the vowels, Bopp in AC has an interesting theory that it is only due to a flaw in the alphabet that Sanskrit seems to have a in so many places; he thinks that the spoken language often had “the short Italian e and o,” where a was written. “If this was the case, we can explain why, in words common to Sanskrit and Greek, the Indian akāra [that is, short a] frequently corresponds to ε and ο, as, for example, asti, he is, ἐστί; patis, husband, πόσις; ambaras, sky, ὄμβρος, rain, etc.” Later, unfortunately, Bopp was influenced by Grimm, who, as we saw, speculated that in the primitive language there were only the three vowels a, i, u, and Bopp and his followers continued to believe that the Sanskrit a represented the original state of language, until the discovery of the ‘palatal law’ (around 1880) showed (what Bopp’s occasional remark might otherwise have led to, if he hadn't discarded it) that the Greek tripartition into a, e, o actually represented a more original state of affairs.
II.—§ 7. Bopp continued.
In a chapter on the roots in AC (not found in C), Bopp contrasts the structure of Semitic roots and of our own; in Semitic languages roots must consist of three letters, neither more nor less, and thus generally contain two syllables, while in Sanskrit, Greek, etc., the character of the root “is not to be determined by the number of letters, but by that of the syllables, of which they contain only one”; thus a root like i, ‘to go,’ would be unthinkable in Arabic. The consequence of this structure of the roots is that the inner changes which play such a large part in expressing grammatical modifications in Semitic languages must be much more restricted in our family of languages. These changes were what F. Schlegel termed flexions and what Bopp himself, two years before (C 7), had named “the truly organic way” of expressing relation and mentioned as a wonderful flexibility found in an extraordinary degree in Sanskrit, by the side of which composition with the verb ‘to be’ is found only occasionally. Now, however, in 1820, Bopp repudiates Schlegel’s and his own previous assumption that ‘flexion’ was characteristic of Sanskrit in contradistinction to other languages in which grammatical modifications were expressed by the addition of suffixes. On the contrary, while holding that both methods are employed in all languages, Chinese perhaps alone excepted, he now thinks that it is the suffix method which is prevalent in Sanskrit, and that “the only real inflexions ... possible[53] in a language, whose elements are monosyllables, are the change of their vowels and the repetition of their radical consonants, otherwise called reduplication.” It will be seen that Bopp here avoids both the onesidedness found in Schlegel’s division of languages and the other onesidedness which we shall encounter in later theories, according to which all grammatical elements are originally independent subordinate roots added to the main root.
In a chapter about roots in AC (not found in C), Bopp compares the structure of Semitic roots to our own. In Semitic languages, roots must be made up of three letters—no more and no less—leading to generally two syllables. In contrast, in Sanskrit, Greek, and others, a root’s character “is not determined by the number of letters, but by the number of syllables, of which they contain only one.” Therefore, a root like i, meaning ‘to go,’ would be impossible in Arabic. This root structure means that the internal changes that play a significant role in showing grammatical modifications in Semitic languages must be much more limited in our language family. These changes were referred to by F. Schlegel as flexions, and two years earlier (C 7), Bopp called them “the truly organic way” of showing relations, pointing out the remarkable flexibility observed in Sanskrit, where combining with the verb ‘to be’ occurs only occasionally. However, in 1820, Bopp rejects both Schlegel’s and his earlier belief that ‘flexion’ was a defining characteristic of Sanskrit compared to other languages, where grammatical modifications are expressed by adding suffixes. Instead, while maintaining that both methods are used in all languages, except possibly Chinese, he now believes that the suffix method is predominant in Sanskrit, and that “the only real inflexions ... possible[53] in a language whose elements are monosyllables, are the change of their vowels and the repetition of their radical consonants, known as reduplication.” It will be noted that Bopp avoids both the one-sided view in Schlegel’s classification of languages and the later theories that suggest that all grammatical elements are originally independent subordinate roots added to the main root.
In his Vocalismus (1827, reprinted 1836) Bopp opposes Grimm’s theory that the changes for which Grimm had introduced the term ablaut were due to psychological causes; in other words, possessed an inner meaning from the very outset. Bopp inclined to a mechanical explanation[7] and thought them dependent on the weight of the endings, as shown by the contrast between Sanskr. vēda, Goth. vait, Gr. oîda and the plural, respectively vidima, vitum, ídmen. In this instance Bopp is in closer agreement than Grimm with the majority of younger scholars, who see in apophony (ablaut) an originally non-significant change brought about mechanically by phonetic conditions, though they do not find these in the ‘weight’ of the ending, but in the primeval accent: the accentuation of Sanskrit was not known to Bopp when he wrote his essay.
In his Vocalismus (1827, reprinted 1836), Bopp challenges Grimm’s theory that the changes Grimm called ablaut were caused by psychological factors; in other words, that they had an inherent meaning from the beginning. Bopp leaned towards a mechanical explanation[7] and believed these changes depended on the weight of the endings, as illustrated by the contrast between Sanskr. vēda, Goth. vait, Gr. oîda and their plurals vidima, vitum, ídmen. In this case, Bopp is more aligned than Grimm with many later scholars, who view apophony (ablaut) as an originally non-significant change driven mechanically by phonetic conditions. However, they attribute these conditions to the original accent rather than the 'weight' of the ending: the Sanskrit accent system was not known to Bopp when he wrote his essay.
The personal endings of the verbs had already been identified with the corresponding pronouns by Scheidius (1790) and Rask (P 258); Bopp adopts the same view, only reproaching Scheidius for thinking exclusively of the nominative forms of the pronouns.
The personal endings of the verbs were already linked to the corresponding pronouns by Scheidius (1790) and Rask (P 258); Bopp agrees with this perspective, but criticizes Scheidius for focusing only on the nominative forms of the pronouns.
It thus appears that in his early work Bopp deals with a great many general problems, but his treatment is suggestive rather than exhaustive or decisive, for there are too many errors in details and his whole method is open to serious criticism. A modern reader is astonished to see the facility with which violent changes of sounds, omissions and transpositions of consonants, etc., are gratuitously accepted. Bopp never reflected as deeply as Rask did on what constitutes linguistic kinship, hence in C he accepts the common belief that Persian was related more closely to German than to Sanskrit, and in later life he tried to establish a relationship between the Malayo-Polynesian and the Indo-European languages. But in spite of all this it must be recognized that in his long laborious life he accomplished an enormous amount of highly meritorious work, not only in Sanskrit philology, but also in comparative grammar, in which he gradually freed himself of his worst methodical errors. He was constantly widening his range of vision, taking into consideration more and more cognate languages. The ingenious way in which he explained the curious Keltic shiftings in initial[54] consonants (which had so puzzled Rask as to make him doubt of a connexion of these languages with our family, but which Bopp showed to be dependent on a lost final sound of the preceding word) definitely and irrefutably established the position of those languages. Among other things that might be credited to his genius, I shall select his explanation of the various declensional classes as determined by the final sound of the stem. But it is not part of my plan to go into many details; suffice it to say that Bopp’s great Vergleichende grammatik served for long years as the best, or really the only, exposition of the new science, and vastly contributed not only to elucidate obscure points, but also to make comparative grammar as popular as it is possible for such a necessarily abstruse science to be.
It seems that in his early work, Bopp addresses a lot of general issues, but his approach is more suggestive than thorough or conclusive. There are too many mistakes in the details, and his entire method can be seriously critiqued. A modern reader would be surprised by how easily he accepts drastic changes in sounds, as well as the omission and rearrangement of consonants, among other things. Bopp didn't think as deeply as Rask about what really defines linguistic relationships. For example, in section C, he follows the common belief that Persian is more closely related to German than to Sanskrit, and later in his life, he tried to find a connection between the Malayo-Polynesian and Indo-European languages. However, despite all this, it's essential to recognize that throughout his long and dedicated life, he achieved a significant amount of valuable work—not only in Sanskrit philology but also in comparative grammar, where he gradually corrected his most significant methodological mistakes. He continuously broadened his perspective, considering more cognate languages. The clever way he explained the unusual Keltic shifts in initial consonants (which had so confused Rask that he doubted a connection between these languages and our family) showed that they depended on a lost final sound from the preceding word, definitively established their position. Among the many contributions credited to his genius, I will mention his explanation of the different declensional classes based on the final sound of the stem. However, I don't want to delve into too many details; it's enough to say that Bopp’s great Vergleichende grammatik served for many years as the best—or really the only—overview of the new science and significantly helped clarify obscure points, making comparative grammar as popular as such a complex science can be.
In Bopp’s Vergleichende grammatik (1. § 108) he gives his classification of languages in general. He rejects Fr. Schlegel’s bipartition, but his growing tendency to explain everything in Aryan grammar, even the inner changes of Sanskrit roots, by mechanical causes makes him modify A. W. Schlegel’s tripartition and place our family of languages with the second instead of the third class. His three classes are therefore as follows: I. Languages without roots proper and without the power of composition, and thus without organism or grammar; to this class belongs Chinese, in which most grammatical relations are only to be recognized by the position of the words. II. Languages with monosyllabic roots, capable of composition and acquiring their organism, their grammar, nearly exclusively in this way; the main principle of word formation is the connexion of verbal and pronominal roots. To this class belong the Indo-European languages, but also all languages not comprised under the first or the third class. III. Languages with disyllabic roots and three necessary consonants as sole bearers of the signification of the word. This class includes only the Semitic languages. Grammatical forms are here created not only by means of composition, as in the second class, but also by inner modification of the roots.
In Bopp’s Vergleichende grammatik (1. § 108), he outlines his classification of languages. He dismisses Fr. Schlegel’s two-part division and, due to his increasing inclination to explain all aspects of Aryan grammar, even the internal changes of Sanskrit roots, through mechanical causes, he adjusts A. W. Schlegel’s three-part division, placing our language family in the second class rather than the third. His three classes are as follows: I. Languages that lack true roots and the ability to form compounds, and therefore lack organization or grammar; this class includes Chinese, where most grammatical relationships are indicated solely by word order. II. Languages with monosyllabic roots that can be combined to develop their structure and grammar, primarily through this method; the main principle of word formation is the connection of verbal and pronominal roots. This class includes the Indo-European languages as well as all languages not classified under the first or third class. III. Languages with disyllabic roots and three essential consonants as the only carriers of meaning. This class consists solely of the Semitic languages. In these languages, grammatical forms are created not only through composition, as in the second class, but also through internal modifications of the roots.
It will be seen that Bopp here expressly avoids both expressions ‘agglutination’ and ‘flexion,’ the former because it had been used of languages contrasted with Aryan, while Bopp wanted to show the essential identity of the two classes; the latter because it had been invested with much obscurity on account of Fr. Schlegel’s use of it to signify inner modification only. According to Schlegel, only such instances as English drink / drank / drunk are pure flexion, while German trink-e / trank / ge-trunk-en, and still more Greek leip-ō / e-lip-on / le-loip-a, besides an element of ‘flexion’ contain also affixed elements. It is clear that no language can use ‘flexion’ (in Schlegel’s sense) exclusively, and consequently this[55] cannot be made a principle on which to erect a classification of languages generally. Schlegel’s use of the term ‘flexion’ seems to have been dropped by all subsequent writers, who use it so as to include what is actually found in the grammar of such languages as Sanskrit and Greek, comprising under it inner and outer modifications, but of course not requiring both in the same form.
Bopp clearly steers clear of the terms ‘agglutination’ and ‘flexion’ here, using the former because it has been applied to languages that are different from Aryan, while Bopp aimed to highlight the fundamental similarities between the two categories. He avoids the latter term because it became obscure due to Fr. Schlegel’s use, which refers only to internal changes. According to Schlegel, only examples like English drink / drank / drunk are true flexion, whereas German trink-e / trank / ge-trunk-en, and even more so Greek leip-ō / e-lip-on / le-loip-a, contain elements beyond pure ‘flexion’. It’s clear that no language can rely solely on ‘flexion’ (in Schlegel’s sense), and therefore this[55] cannot serve as a foundational principle for classifying languages as a whole. Schlegel’s interpretation of ‘flexion’ appears to have been abandoned by later scholars, who use it to encompass what is actually present in the grammar of languages like Sanskrit and Greek, including both internal and external modifications, but without necessitating that both occur in the same way.
In view of the later development of our science, it is worthy of notice that neither in the brothers Schlegel nor in Bopp do we yet meet with the idea that the classes set up are not only a distribution of the languages found side by side in the world at this time, but also represent so many stages in historical development; indeed, Bopp’s definitions are framed so as positively to exclude any development from his Class II to Class III, as the character of the underlying roots is quite heterogeneous. On the other hand, Bopp’s tendency to explain Aryan endings from originally independent roots paved the way for the theory of isolation, agglutination and flexion as three successive stages of the same language.
Considering the later advancements in our field, it's important to note that neither the Schlegel brothers nor Bopp recognized that the classifications they established are not just a way to categorize the languages that coexist in the world at this time, but also reflect different stages of historical development. In fact, Bopp’s definitions are designed to explicitly rule out any progression from Class II to Class III, as the nature of the underlying roots is entirely different. However, Bopp’s approach of explaining Aryan endings from roots that were originally independent contributed to the theory that isolation, agglutination, and inflection represent three successive stages of the same language.
In his first work (C 56) Bopp had already hinted that in the earliest period known to us languages had already outlived their most perfect state and were in a process of decay; and in his review of Grimm (1827) he repeats this: “We perceive them in a condition in which they may indeed be progressive syntactically, but have, as far as grammar is concerned, lost more or less of what belonged to the perfect structure, in which the separate members stand in exact relation to each other and in which everything derived has still a visible and unimpaired connexion with its source” (Voc. 2). We shall see kindred ideas in Humboldt and Schleicher.
In his first work (C 56), Bopp already suggested that in the earliest period known to us, languages had outlived their most perfect state and were in a process of decline. In his review of Grimm (1827), he reiterates this: “We see them in a condition where they may indeed be advancing syntactically, but, as far as grammar is concerned, they have lost more or less of what belonged to a perfect structure, where the individual parts stand in exact relation to one another and where everything that is derived still has a clear and intact connection with its source” (Voc. 2). We will encounter similar ideas in Humboldt and Schleicher.
To sum up: Bopp set about discovering the ultimate origin of flexional elements, but instead of that he discovered Comparative Grammar—“à peu près comme Christophe Colomb a découvert l’Amérique en cherchant la route des Indes,” as A. Meillet puts it (LI 413). A countryman of Rask may be forgiven for pushing the French scholar’s brilliant comparison still further: in the same way as Norsemen from Iceland had discovered America before Columbus, without imagining that they were finding the way to India, just so Rasmus Rask through his Icelandic studies had discovered Comparative Grammar before Bopp, without needing to take the circuitous route through Sanskrit.
To sum up: Bopp set out to find the ultimate source of inflectional elements, but instead, he discovered Comparative Grammar—“about like Christopher Columbus discovered America while searching for the route to India,” as A. Meillet puts it (LI 413). A fellow countryman of Rask might be forgiven for extending the French scholar’s clever analogy even further: just like the Norsemen from Iceland discovered America before Columbus, without realizing they were finding the way to India, Rasmus Rask, through his studies of Icelandic, had discovered Comparative Grammar before Bopp, without needing to take the longer path through Sanskrit.
II.—§ 8. Wilhelm von Humboldt.
This will be the proper place to mention one of the profoundest thinkers in the domain of linguistics, Wilhelm von Humboldt (1767-1835), who, while playing an important part in the political[56] world, found time to study a great many languages and to think deeply on many problems connected with philology and ethnography.[8]
This is the right time to mention one of the most significant thinkers in linguistics, Wilhelm von Humboldt (1767-1835), who, while being active in the political world, also made time to study numerous languages and reflect deeply on various issues related to philology and ethnography.[8]
In numerous works, the most important of which, Ueber die Kawisprache auf der Insel Jawa, with the famous introduction “Ueber die Verschiedenheit des menschlichen Sprachbaues und ihren Einfluss auf die geistige Entwickelung des Menschengeschlechts,” was published posthumously in 1836-40, Humboldt developed his linguistic philosophy, of which it is not easy to give a succinct idea, as it is largely couched in a most abstruse style; it is not surprising that his admirer and follower, Heymann Steinthal, in a series of books, gave as many different interpretations of Humboldt’s thoughts, each purporting to be more correct than its predecessors. Still, I believe the following may be found to be a tolerably fair rendering of some of Humboldt’s ideas.
In several works, the most significant of which is Ueber die Kawisprache auf der Insel Jawa, featuring the well-known introduction “On the Diversity of Human Language Structures and Their Impact on the Intellectual Development of Humanity,” published posthumously between 1836 and 1840, Humboldt developed his linguistic philosophy. It's challenging to summarize it clearly because it's expressed in a quite complex style; it's not surprising that his admirer and follower, Heymann Steinthal, provided many different interpretations of Humboldt's ideas in a series of books, each claiming to be more accurate than the last. Still, I believe the following may offer a reasonably fair interpretation of some of Humboldt’s concepts.
He rightly insists on the importance of seeing in language a continued activity. Language is not a substance or a finished work, but action (Sie selbst ist kein werk, ergon, sondern eine tätigkeit, energeia). Language therefore cannot be defined except genetically. It is the ever-repeated labour of the mind to utilize articulated sounds to express thoughts. Strictly speaking, this is a definition of each separate act of speech; but truly and essentially a language must be looked upon as the totality of such acts.[57] For the words and rules, which according to our ordinary notions make up a language, exist really only in the act of connected speech. The breaking up of language into words and rules is nothing but a dead product of our bungling scientific analysis (Versch 41). Nothing in language is static, everything is dynamic. Language has nowhere any abiding place, not even in writing; its dead part must continually be re-created in the mind; in order to exist it must be spoken or understood, and so pass in its entirety into the subject (ib. 63).
He rightly emphasizes how important it is to see language as an ongoing activity. Language is not a substance or a finished product, but rather action (She herself is not a work, ergon, but an activity, energeia.). Therefore, language can only be defined in a developmental way. It is the constant effort of the mind to use articulated sounds to convey thoughts. Strictly speaking, this defines each individual act of speech; however, a language should truly and fundamentally be viewed as the sum of all these acts.[57] The words and rules that we usually think of as making up a language only really exist in the act of connected speech. Breaking language down into words and rules is merely a lifeless result of our clumsy scientific analysis (Versch 41). Nothing in language is static; everything is dynamic. Language has no permanent place, not even in writing; its static components must constantly be re-created in the mind; to exist, it must be spoken or understood, thus fully integrating into the individual (ib. 63).
Humboldt speaks continually of languages as more perfect or less perfect. Yet “no language should be condemned or depreciated, not even that of the most savage tribe, for each language is a picture of the original aptitude for language” (Versch 304). In another place he speaks about special excellencies even of languages that cannot in themselves be recognized as superlatively good instruments of thought. Undoubtedly Chinese of the old style carries with it an impressive dignity through the immediate succession of nothing but momentous notions; it acquires a simple greatness because it throws away all unnecessary accessory elements and thus, as it were, takes flight to pure thinking. Malay is rightly praised for its ease and the great simplicity of its constructions. The Semitic languages retain an admirable art in the nice discrimination of sense assigned to many shades of vowels. Basque possesses a particular vigour, dependent on the briefness and boldness of expression imparted by the structure of its words and by their combination. Delaware and other American languages express in one word a number of ideas for which we should require many words. The human mind is always capable of producing something admirable, however one-sided it may be; such special points decide nothing with regard to the rank of languages (Versch 189 f.). We have here, as indeed continually in Humboldt, a valuation of languages with many brilliant remarks, but on the whole we miss the concrete details abounding in Jenisch’s work. Humboldt, as it were, lifts us to a higher plane, where the air may be purer, but where it is also thinner and not seldom cloudier as well.
Humboldt constantly talks about languages being more or less perfect. However, "no language should be condemned or undervalued, not even that of the most primitive tribe, because each language reflects our inherent ability for language" (Versch 304). In another instance, he discusses the unique qualities of languages that may not necessarily be considered the best tools for thought. Clearly, old-style Chinese carries a significant dignity due to its focus on impactful ideas; it achieves a certain greatness by eliminating unnecessary elements, allowing it to reach pure thought. Malay is rightly praised for its simplicity and ease of construction. The Semitic languages demonstrate an impressive ability to distinguish subtle meanings through variations in vowel sounds. Basque has a unique energy, thanks to the brevity and boldness of its expressions, shaped by its word structure and combinations. Delaware and other American languages manage to convey multiple ideas in a single word that would require many words in English. The human mind is always capable of creating something remarkable, no matter how limited it may be; these unique features don't determine the overall ranking of languages (Versch 189 f.). Here, as is often the case with Humboldt, we find a rich evaluation of languages filled with insightful observations, but overall, we lack the concrete details found in Jenisch’s work. Humboldt elevates us to a higher level, where the air may be clearer, but it's also thinner and often cloudier.
According to Humboldt, each separate language, even the most despised dialect, should be looked upon as an organic whole, different from all the rest and expressing the individuality of the people speaking it; it is characteristic of one nation’s psyche, and indicates the peculiar way in which that nation attempts to realize the ideal of speech. As a language is thus symbolic of the national character of those who speak it, very much in each language had its origin in a symbolic representation of the notion it stands for; there is a natural nexus between certain sounds and certain general ideas, and consequently we often find similar sounds used for the[58] same, or nearly the same, idea in languages not otherwise related to one another.
According to Humboldt, every single language, even the least respected dialect, should be seen as a complete entity, distinct from all others and representing the individuality of the people who speak it; it reflects the mindset of a nation and shows how that nation strives to achieve the ideal of communication. Since a language symbolizes the national character of its speakers, a lot about each language comes from a symbolic representation of the idea it conveys; there's a natural connection between specific sounds and certain general concepts, which is why we often see similar sounds used for the same, or almost the same, ideas in languages that aren't otherwise related.
Humboldt is opposed to the idea of ‘general’ or ‘universal’ grammar as understood in his time; instead of this purely deductive grammar he would found an inductive general grammar, based upon the comparison of the different ways in which the same grammatical notion was actually expressed in a variety of languages. He set the example in his paper on the Dual. His own studies covered a variety of languages; but his works do not give us many actual concrete facts from the languages he had studied; he was more interested in abstract reasonings on language in general than in details.
Humboldt disagreed with the idea of 'general' or 'universal' grammar as it was understood in his time; rather than a purely deductive grammar, he wanted to create an inductive general grammar based on comparing the different ways that the same grammatical concepts were expressed across various languages. He set an example in his paper on the Dual. His own studies included a range of languages, but his works don't provide many specific facts from the languages he examined; he was more focused on abstract reasoning about language in general than on the specifics.
In an important paper, Ueber das Entstehen der grammatischen Formen und ihren Einfluss auf die Ideenentwickelung (1822), he says that language at first denotes only objects, leaving it to the hearer to understand or guess at (hinzudenken) their connexion. By and by the word-order becomes fixed, and some words lose their independent use and sound, so that in the second stage we see grammatical relations denoted through word-order and through words vacillating between material and formal significations. Gradually these become affixes, but the connexion is not yet firm, the joints are still visible, the result being an aggregate, not yet a unit. Thus in the third stage we have something analogous to form, but not real form. This is achieved in the fourth stage, where the word is one, only modified in its grammatical relations through the flexional sound; each word belongs to one definite part of speech, and form-words have no longer any disturbing material signification, but are pure expressions of relation. Such words as Lat. amavit and Greek epoíēsas are truly grammatical forms in contradistinction to such combinations of words and syllables as are found in cruder languages, because we have here a fusion into one whole, which causes the signification of the parts to be forgotten and joins them firmly under one accent. Though Humboldt thus thinks flexion developed out of agglutination, he distinctly repudiates the idea of a gradual development and rather inclines to something like a sudden crystallization (see especially Steinthal’s ed., p. 585).
In an important paper, Ueber das Entstehen der grammatischen Formen und ihren Einfluss auf die Ideenentwickelung (1822), he states that language initially refers only to objects, leaving it up to the listener to understand or infer the connection (hinzudenken). Over time, the order of words becomes fixed, and some words lose their independent use and meaning, so that in the second stage we observe grammatical relations expressed through word order and through words that shift between material and formal meanings. Gradually, these become affixes, but the connections aren't yet solid; the joints are still visible, resulting in a collection rather than a cohesive unit. In the third stage, we see something similar to form, but not true form. This is realized in the fourth stage, where the word becomes one, only altered in its grammatical relationships through inflection; each word belongs to one specific part of speech, and function words no longer have any distracting material meaning, but are pure expressions of relation. Words like Latin amavit and Greek epoíēsas are truly grammatical forms, unlike the combinations of words and syllables found in simpler languages, because here we have a fusion into one unit, which causes the meanings of the parts to be forgotten and binds them firmly under one accent. Although Humboldt believes that inflection developed from agglutination, he clearly rejects the idea of a gradual evolution and leans more toward a sudden crystallization (see especially Steinthal’s ed., p. 585).
Humboldt’s position with regard to the classification of languages is interesting. In his works we continually meet with the terms agglutination[9] and flexion by the side of a new term, ‘incorporation.’ This he finds in full bloom in many American languages, such as Mexican, where the object may be inserted into the verbal form between the element indicating person and the[59] root. Now, Humboldt says that besides Chinese, which has no grammatical form, there are three possible forms of languages, the flexional, the agglutinative and the incorporating, but he adds that all languages contain one or more of these forms (Versch 301). He tends to deny the existence of any exclusively agglutinative or exclusively flexional language, as the two principles are generally commingled (132). Flexion is the only method that gives to the word the true inner firmness and at the same time distributes the parts of the sentence according to the necessary interlacing of thoughts, and thus undoubtedly represents the pure principle of linguistic structure. Now, the question is, what language carries out this method in the most consistent way? True perfection may not be found in any one language: in the Semitic languages we find flexion in its most genuine shape, united with the most refined symbolism, only it is not pursued consistently in all parts of the language, but restricted by more or less accidental laws. On the other hand, in the Sanskritic languages the compact unity of every word saves flexion from any suspicion of agglutination; it pervades all parts of the language and rules it in the highest freedom (Versch 188). Compared with incorporation and with the method of loose juxtaposition without any real word-unity, flexion appears as an intuitive principle born of true linguistic genius (ib.). Between Sanskrit and Chinese, as the two opposed poles of linguistic structure, each of them perfect in the consistent following one principle, we may place all the remaining languages (ib. 326). But the languages called agglutinative have nothing in common except just the negative trait that they are neither isolating nor flexional. The structural diversities of human languages are so great that they make one despair of a fully comprehensive classification (ib. 330).
Humboldt’s views on how languages are classified are quite fascinating. In his works, he frequently discusses the concepts of agglutination[9] and flexion alongside a new term, ‘incorporation.’ He sees this concept fully developed in many American languages, like Mexican, where the object can fit into the verbal form between the person indicator and the[59] root. Humboldt notes that besides Chinese, which lacks grammatical form, there are three possible types of languages: flexional, agglutinative, and incorporating. However, he points out that all languages have one or more of these types (Versch 301). He tends to dispute the idea of any language being exclusively agglutinative or exclusively flexional, as these two principles typically mix together (132). Flexion is the only method that provides a word with true inner strength while also organizing the parts of a sentence according to the required connections of ideas, thus clearly representing the essential principle of linguistic structure. The question then becomes, which language employs this method most consistently? True perfection may not exist in any single language: in Semitic languages, we find flexion in its truest form, combined with sophisticated symbolism, but it isn’t consistently applied throughout the language, as it is limited by various accidental rules. In contrast, Sanskritic languages showcase a cohesive unity in every word that keeps flexion from appearing agglutinative; it permeates all aspects of the language and governs it with great freedom (Versch 188). Compared to incorporation and the method of loose combination without true word unity, flexion emerges as an instinctive principle stemming from genuine linguistic talent (ib.). Between Sanskrit and Chinese, the two extreme poles of linguistic structure, each exemplifying a perfect adherence to one principle, we can categorize all other languages (ib. 326). However, the languages labeled as agglutinative share nothing except the negative characteristic that they are neither isolating nor flexional. The structural differences in human languages are so vast that they can leave one feeling hopeless about achieving a fully comprehensive classification (ib. 330).
According to Humboldt, language is in continued development under the influence of the changing mental power of its speakers. In this development there are naturally two definite periods, one in which the creative instinct of speech is still growing and active, and another in which a seeming stagnation begins and then an appreciable decline of that creative instinct. Still, the period of decline may initiate new principles of life and new successful changes in a language (Versch 184). In the form-creating period nations are occupied more with the language than with its purpose, i.e. with what it is meant to signify. They struggle to express thought, and this craving in connexion with the inspiring feeling of success produces and sustains the creative power of language (ib. 191). In the second period we witness a wearing-off of the flexional forms. This is found less in languages reputed crude or rough than in refined ones. Language is exposed to the most[60] violent changes when the human mind is most active, for then it considers too careful an observation of the modifications of sound as superfluous. To this may be added a want of perception of the poetic charm inherent in the sound. Thus it is the transition from a more sensuous to a more intellectual mood that works changes in a language. In other cases less noble causes are at work. Rougher organs and less sensitive ears are productive of indifference to the principle of harmony, and finally a prevalent practical trend may bring about abbreviations and omissions of all kinds in its contempt for everything that is not strictly necessary for the purpose of being understood. While in the first period the elements still recall their origin to man’s consciousness, there is an æsthetic pleasure in developing the instrument of mental activity; but in the second period language serves only the practical needs of life. In this way such a language as English may reduce its forms so as to resemble the structure of Chinese; but there will always remain traces of the old flexions; and English is no more incapable of high excellences than German (Versch 282-6). What these are Humboldt, however, does not tell us.
According to Humboldt, language is constantly evolving due to the changing mental abilities of its speakers. This evolution includes two distinct stages: one where the creative instinct of speech is still growing and active, and another where a noticeable stagnation begins, followed by a decline in that creative instinct. However, this decline can also spark new principles of life and successful changes in a language (Versch 184). During the form-creating stage, nations focus more on the language itself than on its purpose—what it is meant to convey. They strive to express thoughts, and this desire, coupled with the inspiring feeling of success, fuels and maintains the creative power of language (ib. 191). In the second stage, we see a deterioration of flexional forms, which happens more in refined languages than in those considered crude or rough. Language undergoes the most drastic changes when the human mind is most active, as it tends to deem careful observation of sound modifications unnecessary. This is often accompanied by a lack of appreciation for the poetic charm present in sound. Thus, the shift from a more sensuous to a more intellectual mindset brings about changes in language. In other cases, less noble causes contribute to these changes. Coarser speech organs and less sensitive ears lead to indifference toward the principle of harmony, and a strong practical focus may lead to various abbreviations and omissions, disregarding anything that isn't essential for clear understanding. While in the first stage, elements still evoke their origins in human consciousness, there's an aesthetic pleasure in crafting the tool of mental activity; in the second stage, language is primarily geared towards practical life needs. As a result, a language like English may streamline its forms to resemble Chinese structure, yet remnants of the old inflections will always be present; and English is just as capable of high excellence as German (Versch 282-6). However, Humboldt does not specify what these are.
II.—§ 9. Grimm Once More.
Humboldt here foreshadowed and probably influenced ideas to which Jacob Grimm gave expression in two essays written in his old age and which it will be necessary here to touch upon. In the essay on the pedantry of the German language (Ueber das pedantische in der deutschen sprache, 1847), Grimm says that he has so often praised his mother-tongue that he has acquired the right once in a while to blame it. If pedantry had not existed already, Germans would have invented it; it is the shadowy side of one of their virtues, painstaking accuracy and loyalty. Grimm’s essay is an attempt at estimating a language, but on the whole it is less comprehensive and less deep than that of Jenisch. Grimm finds fault with such things as the ceremoniousness with which princes are spoken to and spoken of (Durchlauchtigster, allerhöchstderselbe), and the use of the pronoun Sie in the third person plural in addressing a single person; he speaks of the clumsiness of the auxiliaries for the passive, the past and the future, and of the word-order which makes the Frenchman cry impatiently “J’attends le verbe.” He blames the use of capitals for substantives and other peculiarities of German spelling, but gives no general statement of the principles on which the comparative valuation of different languages should be based, though in many passages we see that he places the old stages of the language very much higher than the language of his own day.
Humboldt here hinted at and likely influenced ideas that Jacob Grimm expressed in two essays written in his later years, which we should discuss. In the essay on the pedantry of the German language (Ueber das pedantische in der deutschen sprache, 1847), Grimm mentions that he has praised his native language so often that he has earned the right to criticize it now and then. If pedantry didn’t already exist, Germans would have created it; it is the negative side of one of their strengths, meticulous accuracy and loyalty. Grimm's essay attempts to evaluate a language, but overall, it is less thorough and insightful than Jenisch’s work. Grimm criticizes things like the formal ways in which princes are addressed and referred to (Durchlauchtigster, allerhöchstderselbe), and the use of the pronoun Sie in the third person plural when talking to an individual. He points out the awkwardness of the auxiliaries for the passive voice, past, and future, and the word order that makes the French person exclaim, “I’m waiting for the verb..” He also critiques the capitalization of nouns and other quirks of German spelling, but doesn’t provide a general principle for how to compare languages. However, in many parts of the essay, it’s clear that he holds the earlier stages of the language in much higher regard than the language of his time.
The essay on the origin of language (1851) is much more important, and may be said to contain the mature expression of all Grimm’s thoughts on the philosophy of language. Unfortunately, much of it is couched in that high-flown poetical style which may be partly a consequence of Grimm’s having approached the exact study of language through the less exact studies of popular poetry and folklore; this style is not conducive to clear ideas, and therefore renders the task of the reporter very difficult indeed. Grimm at some length argues against the possibility of language having been either created by God when he created man or having been revealed by God to man after his creation. The very imperfections and changeability of language speak against its divine origin. Language as gradually developed must be the work of man himself, and therein is different from the immutable cries and songs of the lower creation. Nature and natural instinct have no history, but mankind has. Man and woman were created as grown-up and marriageable beings, and there must have been created at once more than one couple, for if there had been only one couple, there would have been the possibility that the one mother had borne only sons or only daughters, further procreation being thus rendered impossible (!), not to mention the moral objections to marriages between brother and sister. How these once created beings, human in every respect except in language, were able to begin talking and to find themselves understood, Grimm does not really tell us; he uses such expressions as ‘inventors’ of words, but apart from the symbolical value of some sounds, such as l and r, he thinks that the connexion of word and sense was quite arbitrary. On the other hand, he can tell us a great deal about the first stage of human speech: it contained only the three vowels a, i, u, and only few consonant groups; every word was a monosyllable, and abstract notions were at first absent. The existence in all (?) old languages of masculine and feminine flexions must be due to the influence of women on the formation of language. Through the distinction of genders Grimm says that regularity and clearness were suddenly brought about in everything concerning the noun as by a most happy stroke of fortune. Endings to indicate person, number, tense and mood originated in added pronouns and auxiliary words, which at first were loosely joined to the root, but later coalesced with it. Besides, reduplication was used to indicate the past; and after the absorption of the reduplicational syllable the same effect was obtained in German through apophony. All nouns presuppose verbs, whose material sense was applied to the designation of things, as when G. hahn (‘cock’) was thus called from an extinct verb hanan, corresponding to Lat. canere, ‘to sing.’
The essay on the origin of language (1851) is significantly more important and can be seen as the comprehensive expression of all of Grimm’s ideas on the philosophy of language. Unfortunately, much of it is written in a lofty, poetic style, which may be partly due to Grimm's approach to the precise study of language through the less precise realms of popular poetry and folklore. This style does not lend itself to clear ideas, making the reporter's job very challenging. Grimm argues extensively against the idea that language was either created by God when humanity was created or revealed by God to humanity after creation. The very imperfections and changing nature of language contradict its divine origin. Language must have gradually developed through human effort, differentiating it from the fixed cries and sounds of lower creatures. Nature and instinct have no history, but humanity does. Man and woman were created as fully grown and eligible for marriage, and it is likely that more than one couple was created at once; if there had only been one couple, there would be the chance that a single mother could have only sons or only daughters, making further procreation impossible, not to mention the moral issues with sibling marriages. Grimm does not clearly explain how these beings, human in every respect except for language, began to speak and be understood. He uses terms like 'inventors' of words, but apart from the symbolic significance of certain sounds, such as l and r, he believes the link between words and their meanings was largely random. On the other hand, he provides considerable insight into the initial stage of human speech, which included only three vowels a, i, u, and very few consonant clusters; every word was a single syllable, and abstract concepts were initially missing. The existence of masculine and feminine forms in all (?) ancient languages must stem from the influence of women on language formation. Grimm claims that the distinction of genders brought about regularity and clarity to nouns, as if by a fortunate accident. Endings indicating person, number, tense, and mood originated from added pronouns and auxiliary words that were initially loosely connected to the root but later merged with it. Additionally, reduplication was used to signify the past, and after the syllable indicating reduplication was absorbed, a similar effect was achieved in German through apophony. All nouns assume verbs, whose concrete meanings were used to name things, as seen when G. hahn (‘cock’) was derived from an extinct verb hanan, corresponding to Lat. canere, ‘to sing.’
In what Grimm says about the development of language it is easy to trace the influence of Humboldt’s ideas, though they are worked out with great originality. He discerns three stages, the last two alone being accessible to us through historical documents. In the first period we have the creation and growing of roots and words, in the second the flourishing of a perfect flexion, and in the third a tendency to thoughts, which leads to the giving up of flexion as not yet (?) satisfactory. They may be compared to leaf, blossom and fruit, “the beauty of human speech did not bloom in its beginning, but in its middle period; its ripest fruits will not be gathered till some time in the future.” He thus sums up his theory of the three stages: “Language in its earliest form was melodious, but diffuse and straggling; in its middle form it was full of intense poetical vigour; in our own days it seeks to remedy the diminution of beauty by the harmony of the whole, and is more effective though it has inferior means.” In most places Grimm still speaks of the downward course of linguistic development; all the oldest languages of our family “show a rich, pleasant and admirable perfection of form, in which all material and spiritual elements have vividly interpenetrated each other,” while in the later developments of the same languages the inner power and subtlety of flexion has generally been given up and destroyed, though partly replaced by external means and auxiliary words. On the whole, then, the history of language discloses a descent from a period of perfection to a less perfect condition. This is the point of view that we meet with in nearly all linguists; but there is a new note when Grimm begins vaguely and dimly to see that the loss of flexional forms is sometimes compensated by other things that may be equally valuable or even more valuable; and he even, without elaborate arguments, contradicts his own main contention when he says that “human language is retrogressive only apparently and in particular points, but looked upon as a whole it is progressive, and its intrinsic force is continually increasing.” He instances the English language, which by sheer making havoc of all old phonetic laws and by the loss of all flexions has acquired a great force and power, such as is found perhaps in no other human language. Its wonderfully happy structure resulted from the marriage of the two noblest languages of Europe; therefore it was a fit vehicle for the greatest poet of modern times, and may justly claim the right to be called a world’s language; like the English people, it seems destined to reign in future even more than now in all parts of the earth. This enthusiastic panegyric forms a striking contrast to what the next great German scholar with whom we have to deal, Schleicher, says about the same language, which to him shows only “how rapidly the language of a nation important both in history and literature can decline” (II. 231).
In what Grimm discusses regarding language development, you can easily see the impact of Humboldt’s ideas, though they are expressed with great originality. He identifies three stages, but only the last two are accessible to us through historical records. In the first stage, roots and words are created and grow; in the second, there is a flourishing of perfect inflection; and in the third, there's a shift towards concepts, which leads to abandoning inflection as it is not yet satisfactory. These stages can be likened to leaf, blossom, and fruit: “the beauty of human speech did not bloom in its beginning, but in its middle period; its ripest fruits will not be gathered until sometime in the future.” He summarizes his theory of the three stages: “Language in its earliest form was melodious but scattered; in its middle form, it was full of intense poetic vigor; in our own time, it strives to make up for the loss of beauty with overall harmony, and while it is more effective, it has less sophisticated means.” In many instances, Grimm still talks about the decline of linguistic development; all the oldest languages in our family “show a rich, pleasant, and admirable perfection of form, in which all material and spiritual elements have vividly intermingled,” while the later forms of the same languages have generally lost their inner strength and subtlety of inflection, although partially replaced by external means and auxiliary words. Overall, then, the history of language shows a decline from a period of perfection to a less perfect state. This perspective is common among most linguists, but there’s a new insight when Grimm begins to vaguely see that the loss of inflectional forms can sometimes be offset by other equally valuable—or even more valuable—elements; he even contradicts his own main argument when he states that “human language is only apparently retrogressive in specific areas, but when viewed as a whole, it is progressive, and its intrinsic power is continually increasing.” He cites the English language, which, by completely disregarding all old phonetic rules and losing all inflections, has gained great strength and power, unmatched perhaps in any other human language. Its remarkably effective structure resulted from the union of the two most noble languages of Europe; thus, it became a fitting medium for the greatest poet of modern times, and rightly claims the title of a world language; like the English people, it seems destined to dominate even more in the future across all parts of the earth. This enthusiastic praise sharply contrasts with the views of the next prominent German scholar we must consider, Schleicher, who asserts that the same language demonstrates “how quickly the language of a nation, significant both in history and literature, can decline” (II. 231).
CHAPTER III
Mid-1800s
§ 1. After Bopp and Grimm. § 2. K. M. Rapp. § 3. J. H. Bredsdorff. § 4. August Schleicher. § 5. Classification of Languages. § 6. Reconstruction. § 7. Curtius, Madvig and Specialists. § 8. Max Müller and Whitney.
§ 1. After Bopp and Grimm. § 2. K. M. Rapp. § 3. J. H. Bredsdorff. § 4. August Schleicher. § 5. Classification of Languages. § 6. Reconstruction. § 7. Curtius, Madvig and Specialists. § 8. Max Müller and Whitney.
III.—§ 1. After Bopp and Grimm.
Bopp and Grimm exercised an enormous influence on linguistic thought and linguistic research in Germany and other countries. Long even before their death we see a host of successors following in the main the lines laid down in their work, and thus directly and indirectly they determined the development of this science for a long time. Through their efforts so much new light had been shed on a number of linguistic phenomena that these took a quite different aspect from that which they had presented to the previous generation; most of what had been written about etymology and kindred subjects in the eighteenth century seemed to the new school utterly antiquated, mere fanciful vagaries of incompetent blunderers, whereas now scholars had found firm ground on which to raise a magnificent structure of solid science. This feeling was especially due to the undoubted recognition of one great family of languages to which the vast majority of European languages, as well as some of the most important Asiatic languages, belonged: here we had one firmly established fact of the greatest magnitude, which at once put an end to all the earlier whimsical attempts to connect Latin and Greek words with Hebrew roots. As for the name of that family of languages, Rask hesitated between different names, ‘European,’ ‘Sarmatic’ and finally ‘Japhetic’ (as a counterpart of the Semitic and the Hamitic languages); Bopp at first had no comprehensive name, and on the title-page of his Vergl. grammatik contents himself with enumerating the chief languages described, but in the work itself he says that he prefers the name ‘Indo-European,’ which has also found wide acceptance, though more in France, England and Skandinavia than in Germany. Humboldt for a long while said ‘Sanskritic,’ but later he adopted ‘Indo-Germanic,’ and this has been the generally recognized name used in Germany, in spite of Bopp’s protest who said that ‘Indo-klassisch’ would be more to the point; ‘Indo-[64]Keltic’ has also been proposed as designating the family through its two extreme members to the East and West. But all these compound names are clumsy without being completely pertinent, and it seems therefore much better to use the short and convenient term ‘the Aryan languages’: Aryan being the oldest name by which any members of the family designated themselves (in India and Persia).[10]
Bopp and Grimm had a massive impact on linguistic thought and research in Germany and beyond. Long before they passed away, many followers were already adhering to the principles established in their work, which shaped the evolution of this field both directly and indirectly for a long time. Their efforts illuminated many linguistic phenomena, presenting them in a completely new light compared to how they appeared to the previous generation. Most of the writings on etymology and related subjects from the eighteenth century seemed outdated and fanciful, attributed to clueless individuals, while scholars had finally found solid ground to build a robust scientific framework. This perception was largely due to the clear recognition of one significant language family encompassing the vast majority of European languages, as well as some of the most important Asian languages. This established fact ended previous whimsical attempts to link Latin and Greek words to Hebrew roots. Regarding the name of that language family, Rask wavered among several options like ‘European,’ ‘Sarmatic,’ and finally ‘Japhetic’ (to complement the Semitic and Hamitic languages). Bopp initially lacked a comprehensive term and simply listed the main languages in the title page of his Vergl. grammatik, but stated in the text that he preferred ‘Indo-European,’ a term that gained broader acceptance, especially in France, England, and Scandinavia rather than in Germany. Humboldt initially referred to it as ‘Sanskritic,’ but later switched to ‘Indo-Germanic,’ which has been the commonly recognized term in Germany, despite Bopp's objection that ‘Indo-classic’ would be more accurate. ‘Indo-[64]Keltic’ has also been suggested to represent the family through its two farthest members to the East and West. However, all these compound names are unwieldy and not entirely suitable, making it more effective to use the concise and practical term 'the Aryan languages,' with Aryan being the oldest name that members of the family used for themselves in India and Persia.[10]
Thanks to the labours of Bopp and Grimm and their co-workers and followers, we see also a change in the status of the study of languages. Formerly this was chiefly a handmaiden to philology—but as this word is often in English used in a sense unknown to other languages and really objectionable, namely as a synonym of (comparative) study of languages, it will be necessary first to say a few words about the terminology of our science. In this book I shall use the word ‘philology’ in its continental sense, which is often rendered in English by the vague word ‘scholarship,’ meaning thereby the study of the specific culture of one nation; thus we speak of Latin philology, Greek philology, Icelandic philology, etc. The word ‘linguist,’ on the other hand, is not infrequently used in the sense of one who has merely a practical knowledge of some foreign language; but I think I am in accordance with a growing number of scholars in England and America if I call such a man a ‘practical linguist’ and apply the word ‘linguist’ by itself to the scientific student of language (or of languages); ‘linguistics’ then becomes a shorter and more convenient name for what is also called the science of language (or of languages).
Thanks to the efforts of Bopp, Grimm, and their colleagues, we've seen a shift in how languages are studied. In the past, this was mainly viewed as a supporting role to philology—but since "philology" is often used in English in a way that's not recognized in other languages and can be problematic, equating it with the comparative study of languages, it's important to clarify the terminology we use in our field. In this book, I will use "philology" in its continental sense, which is often vaguely translated in English as "scholarship," referring to the study of the specific culture of one nation; for example, we talk about Latin philology, Greek philology, Icelandic philology, and so on. The term "linguist," however, is often used to refer to someone with just practical knowledge of a foreign language; I believe I align with an increasing number of scholars in England and America by calling such a person a "practical linguist" and reserving "linguist" for the academic study of language (or languages). Thus, "linguistics" becomes a shorter and more convenient term for what is also known as the science of language (or languages).
Now that the reader understands the sense in which I take these two terms, I may go on to say that the beginning of the nineteenth century witnessed a growing differentiation between philology and linguistics in consequence of the new method introduced by comparative and by historical grammar; it was nothing less than a completely new way of looking at the facts of language and trying to trace their origin. While to the philologist the Greek or Latin language, etc., was only a means to an end, to the linguist it was an end in itself. The former saw in it a valuable, and in fact an indispensable, means of gaining a first-hand knowledge of the literature which was his chief concern, but the linguist cared not for the literature as such, but studied languages for their own sake, and might even turn to languages destitute of literature because they were able to throw some light on the life of language in general or on forms in related languages. The philologist as such would not think of studying the Gothic of Wulfila, as a know[65]ledge of that language gives access only to a translation of parts of the Bible, the ideas of which can be studied much better elsewhere; but to the linguist Gothic was extremely valuable. The differentiation, of course, is not an absolute one; besides being linguists in the new sense, Rask was an Icelandic philologist, Bopp a Sanskrit philologist, and Grimm a German philologist; but the tendency towards the emancipation of linguistics was very strong in them, and some of their pupils were pure linguists and did no work in philology.
Now that the reader understands how I define these two terms, I can say that the beginning of the nineteenth century saw a growing distinction between philology and linguistics due to the new methods introduced by comparative and historical grammar. This was a completely new perspective on language facts and an effort to trace their origins. For the philologist, Greek or Latin, and similar languages were just tools to achieve a goal, whereas for the linguist, they were valuable in their own right. The former saw them as essential resources for acquiring direct knowledge of literature, which was their primary focus. In contrast, the linguist was not interested in literature per se; they studied languages for their own sake and might even explore languages without a literary tradition because they could provide insight into the nature of language as a whole or into forms in related languages. A philologist wouldn't consider studying Wulfila's Gothic, as knowledge of that language offers access only to translations of parts of the Bible, which could be analyzed more effectively from other sources. However, for the linguist, Gothic was extremely important. The distinction is not absolute; besides being linguists in this new sense, Rask was an Icelandic philologist, Bopp was a Sanskrit philologist, and Grimm was a German philologist. However, their growing independence in linguistics was very pronounced, and some of their students became pure linguists with no involvement in philology.
In breaking away from philology and claiming for linguistics the rank of a new and independent science, the partisans of the new doctrine were apt to think that not only had they discovered a new method, but that the object of their study was different from that of the philologists, even when they were both concerned with language. While the philologist looked upon language as part of the culture of some nation, the linguist looked upon it as a natural object; and when in the beginning of the nineteenth century philosophers began to divide all sciences into the two sharply separated classes of mental and natural sciences (geistes- und naturwissenschaften), linguists would often reckon their science among the latter. There was in this a certain amount of pride or boastfulness, for on account of the rapid rise and splendid achievements of the natural sciences at that time, it began to be a matter of common belief that they were superior to, and were possessed of a more scientific method than, the other class—the same view that finds an expression in the ordinary English usage, according to which ‘science’ means natural science and the other domains of human knowledge are termed the ‘arts’ or the ‘humanities.’
By breaking away from philology and establishing linguistics as a new and independent science, proponents of this new approach often believed that they had not only discovered a new method but also that their focus was distinct from that of philologists, even when both were examining language. While philologists viewed language as part of a nation's culture, linguists saw it as a natural phenomenon. When philosophers in the early nineteenth century started categorizing all sciences into two clear-cut classes—mental and natural sciences (humanities and sciences)—linguists frequently classified their field among the latter. There was a certain sense of pride or arrogance in this choice, as the rapid advancement and impressive accomplishments of the natural sciences at that time led many to believe that they were superior and employed a more scientific method than the other category. This perspective is echoed in common English usage, where ‘science’ typically refers to natural science, while other areas of human knowledge are labeled as the ‘arts’ or the ‘humanities.’
We see the new point of view in occasional utterances of the pioneers of linguistic science. Rask expressly says that “Language is a natural object and its study resembles natural history” (SA 2. 502); but when he repeats the same sentence (in Retskrivningslære, 8) it appears that he is thinking of language as opposed to the more artificial writing, and the contrast is not between mental and natural science, but between art and nature, between what can and what cannot be consciously modified by man—it is really a different question.
We can see a new perspective in the occasional statements made by early leaders in linguistic science. Rask clearly states that “Language is a natural object and its study resembles natural history” (SA 2. 502); however, when he repeats this same idea (in Retskrivningslære, 8), it seems he is considering language in relation to the more artificial nature of writing. The contrast he’s drawing isn’t between mental and natural sciences, but rather between art and nature, between what can be consciously changed by humans and what cannot—it’s actually a different issue altogether.
Bopp, in his review of Grimm (1827, reprinted Vocalismus, 1836, p. 1), says: “Languages are to be considered organic natural bodies, which are formed according to fixed laws, develop as possessing an inner principle of life, and gradually die out because they do not understand themselves any longer [!], and therefore cast off or mutilate their members or forms, which were at first significant, but gradually have become more of an extrinsic mass....[66] It is not possible to determine how long languages may preserve their full vigour of life and of procreation,” etc. This is highly figurative language which should not be taken at its face value; but expressions like these, and the constant use of such words as ‘organic’ and ‘inorganic’ in speaking of formations in languages, and ‘organism’ of the whole language, would tend to widen the gulf between the philological and the linguistic point of view. Bopp himself never consistently followed the naturalistic way of looking at language, but in § 4 of this chapter we shall see that Schleicher was not afraid of going to extremes and building up a consistent natural science of language.
Bopp, in his review of Grimm (1827, reprinted Vocalismus, 1836, p. 1), states: “Languages should be viewed as organic natural entities, formed according to set rules, developing with an intrinsic life force, and gradually fading away because they no longer understand themselves [!], which leads them to discard or distort their original meaningful elements, which have gradually become more like an external mass....[66] It’s impossible to determine how long languages can maintain their full vibrancy and ability to reproduce,” etc. This is highly figurative language that shouldn’t be taken literally; however, phrases like these, and the consistent use of terms such as ‘organic’ and ‘inorganic’ when discussing language structures, and ‘organism’ for the whole language, would likely increase the divide between the philological and linguistic perspectives. Bopp himself never consistently adhered to a naturalistic perspective on language, but in § 4 of this chapter, we will see that Schleicher was willing to go to extremes and create a coherent natural science of language.
The cleavage between philology and linguistics did not take place without arousing warm feeling. Classical scholars disliked the intrusion of Sanskrit everywhere; they did not know that language and did not see the use of it. They resented the way in which the new science wanted to reconstruct Latin and Greek grammar and to substitute new explanations for those which had always been accepted. Those Sanskritists chatted of guna and vrddhi and other barbaric terms, and even ventured to talk of a locative case in Latin, as if the number of cases had not been settled once for all long ago![11]
The split between philology and linguistics didn’t happen without generating strong feelings. Classical scholars were not fond of Sanskrit's pervasive presence; they didn’t understand that language and saw no benefit in it. They resented how the new field aimed to reconstruct Latin and Greek grammar and replace long-accepted explanations with new ones. Those Sanskrit scholars talked about guna, vrddhi, and other strange terms, and even dared to mention a locative case in Latin, as if the number of cases hadn’t been definitively established ages ago![11]
Classicists were no doubt perfectly right when they reproached comparativists for their neglect of syntax, which to them was the most important part of grammar; they were also in some measure right when they maintained that linguists to a great extent contented themselves with a superficial knowledge of the languages compared, which they studied more in grammars and glossaries than in living texts, and sometimes they would even exult when they found proof of this in solecisms in Bopp’s Latin translations from Sanskrit, and even on the title-page of Glossarium Sanscritum a Franzisco Bopp. Classical scholars also looked askance at the growing interest in the changes of sounds, or, as it was then usual to say, of letters. But when they were apt here to quote the scriptural phrase about the letter that killeth, while the spirit giveth life, they overlooked the fact that Nature has rendered it impossible for anyone to penetrate to the mind of anyone else except through its outer manifestations, and that it is consequently impossible to get at the spirit of a language except through its sounds: phonology must therefore form the necessary basis and prerequisite of the scientific study of any group of languages. Still, it cannot be denied that sometimes comparative phonology was treated in such a mechanical way as partly to dehumanize the study of language.
Classicists were definitely correct when they criticized comparativists for ignoring syntax, which they viewed as the most crucial aspect of grammar. They were also somewhat right in stating that linguists often settled for a superficial understanding of the languages they compared, focusing more on grammars and glossaries than on actual texts. They would sometimes celebrate when they found evidence of this in grammatical mistakes in Bopp’s Latin translations from Sanskrit, even noting it on the title page of Glossarium Sanscritum a Franzisco Bopp. Classical scholars also frowned upon the increasing interest in sound changes, or, as it was commonly put, letter changes. However, when they quoted the scriptural phrase about the letter that kills while the spirit gives life, they ignored the fact that it’s impossible for anyone to truly understand another person’s mind except through its external expressions, meaning you can only grasp the spirit of a language through its sounds. Phonology, therefore, must be the essential foundation and prerequisite for the scientific study of any language group. Yet, it is undeniable that at times, comparative phonology was approached in such a mechanical manner that it somewhat stripped the study of language of its human element.
When we look back at this period in the history of linguistics, there are certain tendencies and characteristics that cannot fail to catch our attention. First we must mention the prominence given to Sanskrit, which was thought to be the unavoidable requirement of every comparative linguist. In explaining anything in any of the cognate languages the etymologist always turned first to Sanskrit words and Sanskrit forms. This standpoint is found even much later, for instance in Max Müller’s Inaugural Address (1868, Ch. 19): “Sanskrit certainly forms the only sound foundation of Comparative Philology, and it will always remain the only safe guide through all its intricacies. A comparative philologist without a knowledge of Sanskrit is like an astronomer without a knowledge of mathematics.” A linguist of a later generation may be excused for agreeing rather with Ellis, who says (Transact. Philol. Soc., 1873-4, 21): “Almost in our own days came the discovery of Sanskrit, and philology proper began—but, alas! at the wrong end. Now, here I run great danger of being misunderstood. Although for a scientific sifting of the nature of language I presume to think that beginning at Sanskrit was unfortunate, yet I freely admit that, had that language not been brought into Europe ... our knowledge of language would have been in a poor condition indeed.... We are under the greatest obligations to those distinguished men who have undertaken to unravel its secrets and to show its connexion with the languages of Europe. Yet I must repeat that for the pure science of language, to begin with Sanskrit was as much beginning at the wrong end as it would have been to commence zoology with palæontology—the relations of life with the bones of the dead.”
When we look back at this time in the history of linguistics, certain trends and features definitely stand out. First, we should highlight the importance placed on Sanskrit, which was seen as essential for any comparative linguist. When explaining anything in related languages, etymologists consistently referred first to Sanskrit words and forms. This perspective persisted much later, as noted in Max Müller’s Inaugural Address (1868, Ch. 19): “Sanskrit certainly forms the only solid foundation of Comparative Philology, and it will always be the only reliable guide through all its complexities. A comparative philologist lacking knowledge of Sanskrit is like an astronomer without a grasp of mathematics.” A linguist from a later generation might relate more to Ellis, who states (Transact. Philol. Soc., 1873-4, 21): “Almost in our own time came the discovery of Sanskrit, and true philology began—but, unfortunately, at the wrong starting point. Now, I risk being misunderstood. While I believe that starting with Sanskrit was an unfortunate choice for a scientific examination of language, I fully acknowledge that if that language hadn't been introduced to Europe... our understanding of language would be in a very poor state indeed.... We owe a great debt to those distinguished individuals who worked to uncover its secrets and demonstrate its connection to European languages. Still, I must reiterate that for the pure science of language, starting with Sanskrit was as misguided as beginning zoology with paleontology—the relationship of life to the bones of the dead.”
Next, Bopp and his nearest successors were chiefly occupied with finding likenesses between the languages treated and discovering things that united them. This was quite natural in the first stage of the new science, but sometimes led to one-sidedness, the characteristic individuality of each language being lost sight of, while forms from many countries and many times were mixed up in a hotch-potch. Rask, on account of his whole mental equipment, was less liable to this danger than most of his contemporaries; but Pott was evidently right when he warned his fellow-students that their comparative linguistics should be supplemented by separative linguistics (Zählmethode, 229), as it has been to a great extent in recent years.
Next, Bopp and his closest successors were mainly focused on finding similarities between the languages they studied and identifying common elements that connected them. This was quite natural in the early stages of this new field, but it sometimes resulted in a one-sided approach, where the unique characteristics of each language were overlooked, leading to a mix of forms from various countries and time periods. Rask, because of his overall mental capability, was less prone to this issue than many of his peers; however, Pott was clearly correct when he warned his fellow students that their comparative linguistics should be complemented by separative linguistics (Zählmethode, 229), as has been largely the case in recent years.
Still another feature of the linguistic science of those days is the almost exclusive occupation of the student with dead languages. It was quite natural that the earliest comparativists should first give their attention to the oldest stages of the languages compared, since these alone enabled them to prove the essential[68] kinship between the different members of the great Aryan family. In Grimm’s grammar nearly all the space is taken up with Gothic, Old High German, Old Norse, etc., and comparatively little is said about recent developments of the same languages. In Bopp’s comparative grammar classical Greek and Latin are, of course, treated carefully, but Modern Greek and the Romanic languages are not mentioned (thus also in Schleicher’s Compendium and in Brugmann’s Grammar), such later developments being left to specialists who were more or less considered to be outside the sphere of Comparative Linguistics and even of the science of language in general, though it would have been a much more correct view to include them in both, and though much more could really be learnt of the life of language from these studies than from comparisons made in the spirit of Bopp.
Another characteristic of the linguistic studies of that time is the almost exclusive focus of students on dead languages. It was only natural for the earliest comparativists to concentrate on the oldest stages of the languages they were comparing, as these were the only ones that allowed them to demonstrate the essential[68] kinship among the different members of the large Aryan family. In Grimm’s grammar, nearly all the content is dedicated to Gothic, Old High German, Old Norse, etc., with very little discussion of the modern developments of those languages. Bopp’s comparative grammar gives thorough attention to classical Greek and Latin, but Modern Greek and the Romance languages are not addressed (similarly in Schleicher’s Compendium and Brugmann’s Grammar), with those later developments being left to specialists who were often seen as outside the realm of Comparative Linguistics and even the science of language as a whole, even though a more accurate perspective would have included them in both fields, and much more could have genuinely been learned about the life of language from these studies than from the comparisons made in Bopp’s approach.
The earlier stages of different languages, which were compared by linguists, were, of course, accessible only through the medium of writing; we have seen that the early linguists spoke constantly of letters and not of sounds. But this vitiated their whole outlook on languages. These were scarcely ever studied at first-hand, and neither in Bopp nor in Grimm nor in Pott or Benfey do we find such first-hand observations of living spoken languages as play a great rôle in the writings of Rask and impart an atmosphere of soundness to his whole manner of looking at languages. If languages were called natural objects, they were not yet studied as such or by truly naturalistic methods.
The earlier stages of different languages that linguists compared were only accessible through writing. We have seen that early linguists often talked about letters rather than sounds. This affected their overall perspective on languages. These languages were rarely studied directly, and in the works of Bopp, Grimm, Pott, or Benfey, we don’t find the kind of direct observations of living spoken languages that are prominent in Rask’s writings and give his approach an air of credibility. While languages were referred to as natural objects, they were not yet studied as such or using genuinely naturalistic methods.
When living dialects were studied, the interest constantly centred round the archaic traits in them; every survival of an old form, every trace of old sounds that had been dropped in the standard speech, was greeted with enthusiasm, and the significance of these old characteristics greatly exaggerated, the general impression being that popular dialects were always much more conservative than the speech of educated people. It was reserved for a much later time to prove that this view is completely erroneous, and that popular dialects, in spite of many archaic details, are on the whole further developed than the various standard languages with their stronger tradition and literary reminiscences.
When people studied living dialects, the focus was always on the old features in them. Every bit of an old form and every hint of sounds that had disappeared from standard speech was met with excitement, and the importance of these old traits was often overstated. The common belief was that popular dialects were much more traditional than the speech of educated people. It took quite some time to show that this idea is completely wrong and that, despite many old details, popular dialects are generally more developed than the various standard languages, which have a stronger tradition and literary influences.
III.—§ 2. K. M. Rapp.
It was from this archæological point of view only that Grimm encouraged the study of dialects, but he expressly advised students not to carry the research too far in the direction of discriminating minutiæ of sounds, because these had little bearing on the history of language as he understood it. In this connexion we may[69] mention an episode in the history of early linguistics that is symptomatic. K. M. Rapp brought out his Versuch einer Physiologie der Sprache nebst historischer Entwickelung der abendländischen Idiome nach physiologischen Grundsätzen in four volumes (1836, 1839, 1840, 1841). A physiological examination into the nature and classification of speech sounds was to serve only as the basis of the historical part, the grandiose plan of which was to find out how Greek, Latin and Gothic sounded, and then to pursue the destinies of these sound systems through the Middle Ages (Byzantine Greek, Old Provençal, Old French, Old Norse, Anglo-Saxon, Old High German) to the present time (Modern Greek, Italian, Spanish, etc., down to Low and High German, with different dialects). To carry out this plan Rapp was equipped with no small knowledge of the earlier stages of these languages and a not contemptible first-hand observation of living languages. He relates how from his childhood he had a “morbidly sharpened ear for all acoustic impressions”; he had early observed the difference between dialectal and educated speech and taken an interest in foreign languages, such as French, Italian and English. He visited Denmark, and there made the acquaintance of and became the pupil of Rask; he often speaks of him and his works in terms of the greatest admiration. After his return he took up the study of Jacob Grimm; but though he speaks always very warmly about the other parts of Grimm’s work, Grimm’s phonology disappointed him. “Grimm’s theory of letters I devoured with a ravenous appetite for all the new things I had to learn from it, but also with heartburning on account of the equally numerous things that warred against the whole of my previous research with regard to the nature of speech sounds; fascinated though I was by what I read, it thus made me incredibly miserable.” He set to his great task with enthusiasm, led by the conviction that “the historical material gives here only one side of the truth, and that the living language in all its branches that have never been committed to writing forms the other and equally important side which is still far from being satisfactorily investigated.” It is easy to understand that Rapp came into conflict with Grimm’s Buchstabenlehre, that had been based exclusively on written forms, and Rapp was not afraid of expressing his unorthodox views in what he himself terms “a violent and arrogating tone.” No wonder, therefore, that his book fell into disgrace with the leaders of linguistics in Germany, who noticed its errors and mistakes, which were indeed numerous and conspicuous, rather than the new and sane ideas it contained. Rapp’s work is extraordinarily little known; in Raumer’s Geschichte der germanischen Philologie and similar works it is not even mentioned, and when I disinterred it[70] from undeserved oblivion in my Fonetik (1897, p. 35; cf. Die neueren Sprachen, vol. xiii, 1904) it was utterly unknown to the German phoneticians of my acquaintance. Yet not only are its phonetic observations[12] deserving of praise, but still more its whole plan, based as it is on a thorough comprehension of the mutual relations of sounds and writing, which led Rapp to use phonetic transcription throughout, even in connected specimens both of living and dead languages; that this is really the only way in which it is possible to obtain a comprehensive and living understanding of the sound-system of any language (as well as to get a clear perception of the extent of one’s own ignorance of it!) has not yet been generally recognized. The science of language would have made swifter and steadier progress if Grimm and his successors had been able to assimilate the main thoughts of Rapp.
It was from an archaeological perspective that Grimm encouraged the study of dialects, but he specifically advised students not to delve too deeply into the exact details of sounds, as these had little relevance to the history of language as he saw it. In this context, we can mention a notable episode in the early history of linguistics. K. M. Rapp released his Versuch einer Physiologie der Sprache nebst historischer Entwickelung der abendländischen Idiome nach physiologischen Grundsätzen in four volumes (1836, 1839, 1840, 1841). His physiological examination of the nature and classification of speech sounds was meant to be the foundation for the historical part, which aimed to discover how Greek, Latin, and Gothic sounded, and then to track these sound systems through the Middle Ages (Byzantine Greek, Old Provençal, Old French, Old Norse, Anglo-Saxon, Old High German) to the present day (Modern Greek, Italian, Spanish, etc., as well as various dialects of Low and High German). To achieve this goal, Rapp had substantial knowledge of the earlier stages of these languages and noteworthy firsthand experience with living languages. He mentioned that from childhood he had a “keenly tuned ear for all acoustic impressions”; he had early noticed the differences between dialectal and educated speech and developed an interest in foreign languages, including French, Italian, and English. He visited Denmark, where he got to know and studied under Rask; he often spoke about him and his work with great admiration. After returning, he began studying Jacob Grimm; although he praised other aspects of Grimm's work, he was disappointed with Grimm’s phonology. “I eagerly consumed Grimm’s theory of letters, hungry for all the new insights I could gain from it, but I also felt frustrated due to the many aspects that conflicted with my existing research on speech sounds; while I was captivated by my reading, it made me incredibly miserable.” He approached his monumental task with enthusiasm, convinced that “the historical material only represents one side of the truth, and the living language in all its branches that have never been documented forms the other equally important side that is still far from being satisfactorily explored.” It’s clear that Rapp clashed with Grimm’s Buchstabenlehre, which was based solely on written forms, and Rapp wasn’t shy about voicing his unconventional opinions in what he described as “a violent and arrogant tone.” Therefore, it’s no surprise that his book was met with disapproval from the leaders of linguistics in Germany, who focused on its numerous and glaring errors rather than acknowledging the new and sound ideas it included. Rapp’s work is surprisingly little known; it’s not even mentioned in Raumer’s Geschichte der germanischen Philologie and similar texts, and when I unearthed it from undeserved obscurity in my Fonetik (1897, p. 35; cf. Die neueren Sprachen, vol. xiii, 1904), it was entirely unfamiliar to the German phoneticians I knew. Yet, not only are its phonetic observations[12] commendable, but its overall plan, grounded in a thorough understanding of the relationships between sounds and writing, led Rapp to employ phonetic transcription throughout, even in connected examples from both living and dead languages; this method is truly the only way to achieve a comprehensive and vibrant understanding of any language's sound system (as well as to gain a clear awareness of one’s own ignorance about it!) Acknowledging this has yet to be widely accepted. The field of linguistics could have progressed more swiftly and steadily if Grimm and his successors had been able to embrace Rapp’s main ideas.
III.—§ 3. J. H. Bredsdorff.
Another (and still earlier) work that was overlooked at the time was the little pamphlet Om Aarsagerne til Sprogenes Forandringer (1821) by the Dane J. H. Bredsdorff. Bopp and Grimm never really asked themselves the fundamental question, How is it that language changes: what are the driving forces that lead in course of time to such far-reaching differences as those we find between Sanskrit and Latin, or between Latin and French? Now, this is exactly the question that Bredsdorff treats in his masterly pamphlet. Like Rapp, he was a very good phonetician; but in the pamphlet that concerns us here he speaks not only of phonetic but of other linguistic changes as well. These he refers to the following causes, which he illustrates with well-chosen examples: (1) Mishearing and misunderstanding; (2) misrecollection; (3) imperfection of organs; (4) indolence: to this he inclines to refer nine-tenths of all those changes in the pronunciation of a language that are not due to foreign influences; (5) tendency towards analogy: here he gives instances from the speech of children and explains by analogy such phenomena as the extension of s to all genitives, etc.; (6) the desire to be distinct; (7) the need of expressing new ideas. He recognizes that there are changes that cannot be brought under any of these explanations, e.g. the Gothonic sound shift (cf. above, p. 43 note), and he emphasizes the many ways in which foreign nations or foreign languages may influence a language. Bredsdorff’s explanations may not always be correct;[71] but what constitutes the deep originality of his little book is the way in which linguistic changes are always regarded in terms of human activity, chiefly of a psychological character. Here he was head and shoulders above his contemporaries; in fact, most of Bredsdorff’s ideas, such as the power of analogy, were the same that sixty years later had to fight so hard to be recognized by the leading linguists of that time.[13]
Another (and even earlier) work that was overlooked at the time was the little pamphlet Om Aarsagerne til Sprogenes Forandringer (1821) by Danish author J. H. Bredsdorff. Bopp and Grimm never really considered the fundamental question: Why does language change? What are the driving forces that lead to significant differences over time, like those between Sanskrit and Latin, or Latin and French? This is precisely the question that Bredsdorff addresses in his impressive pamphlet. Like Rapp, he was a skilled phonetician; however, in the pamphlet we're discussing here, he talks not just about phonetic changes but also other linguistic changes. He attributes these to the following causes, illustrated with well-chosen examples: (1) Mishearing and misunderstanding; (2) misrecollection; (3) imperfection of organs; (4) laziness: he tends to link nine-tenths of changes in a language's pronunciation that aren't due to foreign influences to this; (5) the tendency toward analogy: here he provides examples from children's speech and explains phenomena like the extension of s to all genitives by analogy, etc.; (6) the desire to be clear; (7) the need to express new ideas. He acknowledges that some changes cannot be explained by any of these reasons, like the Gothonic sound shift (cf. above, p. 43 note), and he highlights the various ways that foreign nations or languages can influence a language. Bredsdorff’s explanations may not always be accurate;[71] but what makes his little book so original is how linguistic changes are consistently viewed through the lens of human activity, primarily of a psychological nature. Here, he was far ahead of his contemporaries; in fact, most of Bredsdorff’s ideas, such as the power of analogy, were the very ones that sixty years later had to struggle for recognition among leading linguists of that time.[13]
III.—§ 4. August Schleicher.
In Rapp, and even more in Bredsdorff, we get a whiff of the scientific atmosphere of a much later time; but most of the linguists of the twenties and following decades (among whom A. F. Pott deserves to be specially named) moved in essentially the same grooves as Bopp and Grimm, and it will not be necessary here to deal in detail with their work.
In Rapp, and even more in Bredsdorff, we catch a glimpse of the scientific vibe of a much later period; however, most of the linguists from the twenties onward (with A. F. Pott being particularly noteworthy) operated in basically the same ways as Bopp and Grimm, so there’s no need to go into detail about their work here.
August Schleicher (1821-68) in many ways marks the culmination of the first period of Comparative Linguistics, as well as the transition to a new period with different aims and, partially at any rate, a new method. His intimate knowledge of many languages, his great power of combination, his clear-cut and always lucid exposition—all this made him a natural leader, and made his books for many years the standard handbooks of linguistic science. Unlike Bopp and Grimm, he was exclusively a linguist, or, as he called it himself, ‘glottiker,’ and never tired of claiming for the science of linguistics (‘glottik’), as opposed to philology, the rank of a separate natural science. Schleicher specialized in Slavonic and Lithuanian; he studied the latter language in its own home and took down a great many songs and tales from the mouths of the peasants; he was for some years a professor in the University of Prague, and there acquired a conversational knowledge of Czech; he spoke Russian, too, and thus in contradistinction to Bopp and Grimm had a first-hand knowledge of more than one foreign language; his interest in living speech is also manifested in his specimens of the dialect of his native town, Volkstümliches aus Sonneberg. When he was a child his father very severely insisted on the constant and correct use of the educated language at home; but the boy, perhaps all the more on account of the paternal prohibition, was deeply attracted to the[72] popular dialect he heard from his playfellows and to the fascinating folklore of the old townspeople, which he was later to take down and put into print. In the preface he says that the acquisition of foreign tongues is rendered considerably easier through the habit of speaking two dialects from childhood.
August Schleicher (1821-68) is often seen as the high point of the first phase of Comparative Linguistics, as well as the start of a new phase with different goals and, at least in part, a new approach. His deep understanding of many languages, his exceptional ability to combine ideas, and his clear, always understandable explanations made him a natural leader, and his books were standard texts in linguistic studies for many years. Unlike Bopp and Grimm, he was solely a linguist, or as he referred to himself, ‘glottal speaker', and he constantly argued that linguistics (‘glottal’), in contrast to philology, deserved recognition as a separate natural science. Schleicher focused on Slavonic and Lithuanian; he studied Lithuanian in its native regions and collected numerous songs and stories from the local peasants. He served as a professor at the University of Prague for several years, where he gained conversational skills in Czech; he also spoke Russian, which gave him, unlike Bopp and Grimm, first-hand experience with multiple foreign languages. His interest in living languages is also shown in his recordings of the dialect from his hometown, Volkstümliches aus Sonneberg. As a child, his father strictly enforced the consistent and correct use of educated language at home; however, perhaps because of this parental restriction, the boy became fascinated with the [72] local dialect he heard from his friends and the captivating folklore of the older townspeople, which he would later record and publish. In the preface, he states that learning foreign languages is significantly easier when one grows up speaking two dialects.
What makes Schleicher particularly important for the purposes of this volume is the fact that in a long series of publications he put forth not only details of his science, but original and comprehensive views on the fundamental questions of linguistic theory, and that these had great influence on the linguistic philosophy of the following decades. He was, perhaps, the most consistent as well as one of the clearest of linguistic thinkers, and his views therefore deserve to be examined in detail and with the greatest care.
What makes Schleicher especially important for this volume is that in a long series of publications, he presented not just details of his science, but also original and comprehensive ideas on the fundamental questions of linguistic theory. These ideas had a significant influence on the linguistic philosophy of the following decades. He was probably the most consistent as well as one of the clearest linguistic thinkers, so his views deserve to be examined in detail and with great care.
Apart from languages, Schleicher was deeply interested both in philosophy and in natural science, especially botany. From these he fetched many of the weapons of his armoury, and they coloured the whole of his theory of language. In his student days at Tübingen he became an enthusiastic adherent of the philosophy of Hegel, and not even the Darwinian sympathies and views of which he became a champion towards the end of his career made him abandon the doctrines of his youth. As for science, he says that naturalists make us understand that in science nothing is of value except facts established through strictly objective observation and the conclusions based on such facts—this is a lesson that he thinks many of his colleagues would do well to take to heart. There can be no doubt that Schleicher in his practice followed a much more rigorous and sober method than his predecessors, and that his Compendium in that respect stands far above Bopp’s Grammar. In his general reasonings on the nature of language, on the other hand, Schleicher did not always follow the strict principles of sober criticism, being, as we shall now see, too dependent on Hegelian philosophy, and also on certain dogmatic views that he had inherited from previous German linguists, from Schlegel downwards.
Aside from languages, Schleicher was deeply interested in both philosophy and natural science, especially botany. He drew many of his ideas from these fields, which influenced his entire theory of language. During his student days at Tübingen, he became an enthusiastic follower of Hegel's philosophy, and even his later embrace of Darwinian ideas did not make him abandon the beliefs of his youth. Regarding science, he stated that naturalists help us recognize that in science, only facts established through strictly objective observation and the conclusions drawn from those facts hold value—this is a lesson he believed many of his colleagues should heed. There’s no doubt that Schleicher practiced a much more rigorous and straightforward method than his predecessors, and his Compendium greatly surpasses Bopp’s Grammar in that respect. However, in his overall reasoning about the nature of language, Schleicher didn't always adhere to the strict principles of clear criticism, as he was, as we will now see, too influenced by Hegelian philosophy and certain dogmatic views he inherited from earlier German linguists, starting from Schlegel.
The Introductions to Schleicher’s two first volumes are entirely Hegelian, though with a characteristic difference, for in the first he says that the changes to be seen in the realm of languages are decidedly historical and in no way resemble the changes that we may observe in nature, for “however manifold these may be, they never show anything but a circular course that repeats itself continually” (Hegel), while in language, as in everything mental, we may see new things that have never existed before. One generation of animals or plants is like another; the skill of animals has no history, as human art has; language is specifically human and mental: its development is therefore analogous to history, for in[73] both we see a continual progress to new phases. In Schleicher’s second volume, however, this view is expressly rejected in its main part, because Schleicher now wants to emphasize the natural character of language: it is true, he now says, that language shows a ‘werden’ which may be termed history in the wider sense of this word, but which is found in its purest form in nature; for instance, in the growing of a plant. Language belongs to the natural sphere, not to the sphere of free mental activity, and this must be our starting-point if we would discover the method of linguistic science (ii. 21).
The introductions to Schleicher’s first two volumes are completely Hegelian, although there’s a notable difference. In the first volume, he argues that changes in languages are clearly historical and don’t resemble the changes observed in nature, since “no matter how varied these may be, they only display a circular pattern that keeps repeating itself” (Hegel), while in language, as in everything mental, we can see new things that have never existed before. One generation of animals or plants is like any other; the abilities of animals lack history, unlike human art; language is uniquely human and mental: its development is, therefore, similar to history, as in both we see continuous progress to new phases. In the second volume, however, this viewpoint is clearly rejected in the main part, because Schleicher now wants to emphasize the natural character of language. It is true, he states, that language reflects a ‘become’ which can be called history in the broader sense of the term, but it’s found in its purest form in nature, such as in the growth of a plant. Language belongs to the natural realm, not to the realm of free mental activity, and this must be our starting point if we want to find the method of linguistic science (ii. 21).
It would, of course, be possible to say that the method of linguistic science is that of natural science, and yet to maintain that the object of linguistics is different from that of natural science, but Schleicher more and more tends to identify the two, and when he was attacked for saying, in his pamphlet on the Darwinian theory, that languages were material things, real natural objects, he wrote in defence Ueber die bedeutung der sprache für die naturgeschichte des menschen, which is highly characteristic as the culminating point of the materialistic way of looking at languages. The activity, he says, of any organ, e.g. one of the organs of digestion, or the brain or muscles, is dependent on the constitution of that organ. The different ways in which different species, nay even different individuals, walk are evidently conditioned by the structure of the limbs; the activity or function of the organ is, as it were, nothing but an aspect of the organ itself, even if it is not always possible by means of the knife or microscope of the scientist to demonstrate the material cause of the phenomenon. What is true of the manner of walking is true of language as well; for language is nothing but the result, perceptible through the ear, of the action of a complex of material substances in the structure of the brain and of the organs of speech, with their nerves, bones, muscles, etc. Anatomists, however, have not yet been able to demonstrate differences in the structures of these organs corresponding to differences of nationality—to discriminate, that is, the organs of a Frenchman (quâ Frenchman) from those of a German (quâ German). Accordingly, as the chemist can only arrive at the elements which compose the sun by examining the light which it emits, while the source of that light remains inaccessible to him, so must we be content to study the nature of languages, not in their material antecedents but in their audible manifestations. It makes no great difference, however, for “the two things stand to each other as cause and effect, as substance and phenomenon: a philosopher [i.e. a Hegelian] would say that they are identical.”
It’s certainly possible to argue that the approach of linguistic science is similar to that of natural science, while still claiming that the focus of linguistics differs from that of natural science. However, Schleicher increasingly seems to equate the two. When he was criticized for stating in his pamphlet on the Darwinian theory that languages are material entities and genuine natural objects, he defended himself in Ueber die bedeutung der sprache für die naturgeschichte des menschen, which is very telling as it marks the peak of his materialistic perspective on languages. He claims that the function of any organ, whether it's part of digestion, the brain, or muscles, depends on the structure of that organ. The various ways in which different species—and even different individuals—move are evidently influenced by the structure of their limbs; the function or activity of an organ is essentially just one aspect of the organ itself, even if it's not always possible for scientists to clearly demonstrate the material cause of the phenomenon with a knife or microscope. What applies to walking also applies to language; language is merely the result, which we perceive through hearing, of the interaction of various material substances within the brain and the speech organs, along with their nerves, bones, muscles, and so on. However, anatomists have yet to identify structural differences in these organs that correspond to differences in nationality—that is, they can’t distinguish the organs of a French person (quâ French person) from those of a German (quâ German). Therefore, just as a chemist can only understand the elements composing the sun by studying the light it gives off, while the light source remains beyond reach, we must also settle for analyzing languages through their audible expressions rather than their material origins. Still, this doesn’t make much difference, as “the two are related as cause and effect, as substance and phenomenon: a philosopher [i.e., a Hegelian] would say they are identical.”
Now I, for one, fail to understand how this can be what Schleicher believes it to be, “a refutation of the objection that language is[74] nothing but a consequence of the activity of these organs.” The sun exists independently of the human observer; but there could be no such thing as language if there was not besides the speaker a listener who might become a speaker in his turn. Schleicher speaks continually in his pamphlet as if structural differences in the brain and organs of speech were the real language, and as if it were only for want of an adequate method of examining this hidden structure that we had to content ourselves with studying language in its outward manifestation as audible speech. But this is certainly on the face of it preposterous, and scarcely needs any serious refutation. If the proof of the pudding is in the eating, the proof of a language must be in the hearing and understanding; but in order to be heard words must first be spoken, and in these two activities (that of producing and that of perceiving sounds) the real essence of language must consist, and these two activities are the primary (or why not the exclusive?) object of the science of language.
Now I, for one, don't understand how this can be what Schleicher thinks it is, “a refutation of the objection that language is[74] nothing but a consequence of the activity of these organs.” The sun exists independently of human observation; however, there would be no such thing as language if there wasn't a listener besides the speaker who might also become a speaker in turn. Schleicher constantly talks in his pamphlet as if the structural differences in the brain and speech organs were the real language, and as if we only have to settle for studying language in its outward form as audible speech because we lack a proper way to examine this hidden structure. But this is clearly ridiculous and hardly needs a serious counterargument. If the proof of the pudding is in the eating, the proof of a language must be in the hearing and understanding; but for words to be heard, they must first be spoken, and in these two activities (producing and perceiving sounds) lies the true essence of language, and these two activities should be the primary (or why not the only?) focus of the science of language.
Schleicher goes on to meet another objection that may be made to his view of the ‘substantiality of language,’ namely, that drawn from the power of learning other languages. Schleicher doubts the possibility of learning another language to perfection; he would admit this only in the case of a man who exchanged his mother-tongue for another in his earliest youth; “but then he becomes by that very fact a different being from what he was: brain and organs of speech develop in another direction.” If Mr. So-and-So is said to speak and write German, English and French equally well, Schleicher first inclines to doubt the fact; and then, granting that the same individual may “be at the same time a German, a Frenchman and an Englishman,” he asks us to remember that all these three languages belong to the same family and may, from a broader point of view, be termed species of the same language; but he denies the possibility of anyone’s being equally at home in Chinese and German, or in Arabic and Hottentot, etc., because these languages are totally different in their innermost essence. (But what of bilingual children in Finland, speaking Swedish and Finnish, or in Greenland, speaking Danish and Eskimo, or in Java, speaking Dutch and Malay?) Schleicher has to admit that our organs are to some extent flexible and capable of acquiring activities that they had not at first; but one definite function is and remains nevertheless the only natural one, and thus “the possibility of a man’s acquiring foreign languages more or less perfectly is no objection to our seeing the material basis of language in the structure of the brain and organs of speech.”
Schleicher addresses another objection to his view of the ‘substantiality of language,’ which is based on the ability to learn other languages. He doubts the possibility of mastering a new language completely; he would only accept this for someone who replaced their mother tongue with another in early childhood. “But then, that person becomes a different being than they were: their brain and speech organs develop in another way.” If someone is said to speak and write German, English, and French equally well, Schleicher is initially skeptical. Even if we accept that the same person can “simultaneously be a German, a Frenchman, and an Englishman,” he points out that all three languages come from the same family and can, from a broader perspective, be viewed as variations of the same language. He argues, however, that no one can be equally proficient in Chinese and German, or Arabic and Hottentot, because those languages are fundamentally different in their essence. (But what about bilingual children in Finland who speak Swedish and Finnish, or in Greenland who speak Danish and Eskimo, or in Java who speak Dutch and Malay?) Schleicher acknowledges that our organs are somewhat flexible and capable of adopting functions they initially didn’t have; however, one specific function remains the only natural one, so “the ability for someone to learn foreign languages to varying degrees of proficiency doesn’t challenge our understanding of the material basis of language as rooted in the structure of the brain and speech organs.”
Even if we admit that Schleicher is so far right that in nearly all (or all?) cases of bilingualism one language comes more naturally[75] than the other, he certainly exaggerates the difference, which is always one of degree; and at any rate his final conclusion is wrong, for we might with the same amount of justice say that a man who has first learned to play the piano has acquired the structure of brain and fingers peculiar to a pianist, and that it is then unnatural for him also to learn to play the violin, because that would imply a different structure of these organs. In all these cases we have to do with a definite proficiency or skill, which can only be obtained by constant practice, though of course one man may be better predisposed by nature for it than another; but then it is also the fact that people who speak no foreign language attain to very different degrees of proficiency in the use of their mother-tongue. It cannot be said too emphatically that we have here a fundamental question, and that Schleicher’s view can never lead to a true conception of what language is, or to a real insight into its changes and historical development.
Even if we agree that Schleicher is so far right that in almost every case of bilingualism one language feels more natural than the other, he definitely exaggerates the difference, which is always a matter of degree. Regardless, his final conclusion is incorrect because we could likewise argue that a person who first learns to play the piano has developed the brain and finger structure unique to pianists, making it "unnatural" for him to also learn to play the violin, as that would require a different structure for those organs. In all these situations, we’re dealing with a specific level of proficiency or skill that can only be achieved through constant practice, although one person may indeed have a greater natural predisposition for it than another. However, it's also a fact that people who don’t speak any foreign language have very different levels of proficiency in their native language. It's essential to stress that this is a fundamental issue, and Schleicher’s perspective can never lead to a true understanding of what language is, or provide real insight into its changes and historical development.
Schleicher goes on to say that the classification of mankind into races should not be based on the formation of the skull or on the character of the hair, or any such external criteria, as they are by no means constant, but rather on language, because this is a thoroughly constant criterion. This alone would give a perfectly natural system, one, for instance, in which all Turks would be classed together, while otherwise the Osmanli Turk belongs to the ‘Caucasian’ race and the so-called Tataric Turks to the ‘Mongolian’ race; on the other hand, the Magyar and the Basque are not physically to be distinguished from the Indo-European, though their languages are widely dissimilar. According to Schleicher, therefore, the natural system of languages is also the natural system of mankind, for language is closely connected with the whole higher life of men, which is therefore taken into consideration in and with their language. In this book I am not concerned with the ethnographical division of mankind into races, and I therefore must content myself with saying that the very examples adduced by Schleicher seem to me to militate against his theory that a division of mankind based on language is the natural one: are we to reckon the Basque’s son, who speaks nothing but French (or Spanish) as belonging to a different race from his father? And does not Schleicher contradict himself when on p. 16 he writes that language is “ein völlig constantes merkmal,” and p. 20 that it is “in fortwährender veränderung begriffen”? So far as I see, Schleicher never expressly says that he thinks that the physical structure conditioning the structure of a man’s language is hereditary, though some of his expressions point that way, and that may be what he means by the expression ‘constant.’ In other places (Darw. 25, Bed. 24) he allows external conditions[76] of life to exercise some influence on the character of a language, as when languages of neighbouring peoples are similar (Aryans and Semites, for example, are the only nations possessing flexional languages). On such points, however, he gives only a few hints and suggestions.
Schleicher argues that classifying people into races shouldn’t rely on skull shape, hair type, or any other external characteristics, as these aren’t consistent. Instead, it should be based on language, which is a much more stable criterion. This method would create a natural classification system where, for instance, all Turks would be grouped together. In contrast, the Ottoman Turk is considered part of the 'Caucasian' race, while the so-called Tatar Turks fall under the 'Mongolian' race. Furthermore, the Magyar and the Basque don’t differ physically from those of the Indo-European race, although their languages are very different. According to Schleicher, the natural classification of languages reflects the natural classification of humanity since language is deeply tied to the entire higher experience of people, which is considered alongside their language. In this book, I’m not focused on the ethnographic division of humanity into races, but I must point out that the examples Schleicher presents seem to contradict his theory that a division based on language is natural. Should we consider the Basque’s son, who only speaks French (or Spanish), to belong to a different race than his father? Doesn’t Schleicher contradict himself when he states on p. 16 that language is “a totally constant feature”” and on p. 20 that it is “in constant change”? As far as I can tell, Schleicher never clearly states that he believes the physical characteristics that shape a person's language are hereditary, though some of his wording suggests that may be what he means by 'constant.' In other instances (Darw. 25, Bed. 24), he acknowledges that external life conditions can influence a language's character, as seen when languages of neighboring peoples are similar (for example, Aryans and Semites are the only nations with inflectional languages). However, on these points, he only provides a few hints and suggestions.
III.—§ 5. Classification of Languages.
In the question of the classification of languages Schleicher introduces a deductive element from his strong preoccupation with Hegelian ideas. Hegel everywhere moves in trilogies; Schleicher therefore must have three classes, and consequently has to tack together two of Pott’s four classes (agglutinating and incorporating); then he is able philosophically to deduce the tripartition. For language consists in meaning (bedeutung; matter, contents, root) and relation (beziehung; form), tertium non datur. As it would be a sheer impossibility for a language to express form only, we obtain three classes:
In the debate over how to classify languages, Schleicher introduces a deductive approach influenced by his deep interest in Hegelian ideas. Hegel often works in trilogies, so Schleicher feels the need to create three categories. As a result, he combines two of Pott's four categories (agglutinating and incorporating) to arrive at this tripartite classification. Language is made up of meaning (meaning; matter, content, root) and relation (relationship; form), no third option. It would be completely impossible for any language to express only form, which leads us to the three classes:
I. Here meaning is the only thing indicated by sound; relation is merely suggested by word-position: isolating languages.
I. Here, meaning is only indicated by sound; the relationship is just hinted at by word position: isolating languages.
II. Both meaning and relation are expressed by sound, but the formal elements are visibly tacked on to the root, which is itself invariable: agglutinating languages.
II. Both meaning and relation are conveyed through sound, but the formal elements are clearly attached to the root, which remains unchanged: agglutinating languages.
III. The elements of meaning and of relation are fused together or absorbed into a higher unity, the root being susceptible of inward modification as well as of affixes to denote form: flexional languages.
III. The elements of meaning and relation are combined or integrated into a higher unity, with the root being capable of internal modification as well as having prefixes and suffixes to indicate form: inflectional languages.
Schleicher employs quasi-mathematical formulas to illustrate these three classes: if we denote a root by R, a prefix by p and a suffix by s, and finally use a raised x to denote an inner modification, we see that in the isolated languages we have nothing but R (a sentence may be represented by R R R R ...), a word in the second class has the formula R s or p R or p R s, but in the third class we may have p Rx s (or Rx s).
Schleicher uses almost mathematical formulas to explain these three categories: if we describe a root as R, a prefix as p, and a suffix as s, and then use a raised x to indicate an inner change, we see that in the isolated languages we only have R (a sentence can be shown as R R R R ...), a word in the second category follows the formula R s or p R or p R s, but in the third category, we might have p Rx s (or Rx s).
Now, according to Schleicher the three classes of languages are not only found simultaneously in the tongues of our own day, but they represent three stages of linguistic development; “to the nebeneinander of the system corresponds the nacheinander of history.” Beyond the flexional stage no language can attain; the symbolic denotation of relation by flexion is the highest accomplishment of language; speech has here effectually realized its object, which is to give a faithful phonetic image of thought. But before a language can become flexional it must have passed through an isolating and an agglutinating period. Is this theory borne out by historical facts? Can we trace back[77] any of the existing flexional languages to agglutination and isolation? Schleicher himself answers this question in the negative: the earliest Latin was of as good a flexional type as are the modern Romanic languages. This would seem a sort of contradiction in terms; but the orthodox Hegelian is ready with an answer to any objection; he has the word of his master that History cannot begin till the human spirit becomes “conscious of its own freedom,” and this consciousness is only possible after the complete development of language. The formation of Language and History are accordingly successive stages of human activity. Moreover, as history and historiography, i.e. literature, come into existence simultaneously, Schleicher is enabled to express the same idea in a way that “is only seemingly paradoxical,” namely, that the development of language is brought to a conclusion as soon as literature makes its appearance; this is a crisis after which language remains fixed; language has now become a means, instead of being the aim, of intellectual activity. We never meet with any language that is developing or that has become more perfect; in historical times all languages move only downhill; linguistic history means decay of languages as such, subjugated as they are through the gradual evolution of the mind to greater freedom.
Now, according to Schleicher, the three classes of languages exist not only simultaneously in the languages of our time but also represent three stages of linguistic development; “to the nebeneinander of the system corresponds the nacheinander of history.” No language can go beyond the flexional stage; the symbolic indication of relation through flexion is the pinnacle of language; speech has effectively achieved its goal, which is to provide a true phonetic representation of thought. However, before a language can become flexional, it must first go through an isolating and an agglutinating period. Is this theory supported by historical facts? Can we trace any of the current flexional languages back to agglutination and isolation? Schleicher himself answers this question negatively: early Latin was as good a flexional type as the modern Romance languages. This seems somewhat contradictory; but the orthodox Hegelian has ready responses to any objections; he cites his master's assertion that History cannot begin until the human spirit becomes “conscious of its own freedom,” and this awareness is only possible after the complete development of language. The formation of Language and History are therefore successive stages of human activity. Furthermore, since history and historiography, i.e., literature, emerge simultaneously, Schleicher can express the same idea in a way that “is only seemingly paradoxical,” namely, that the development of language is concluded as soon as literature appears; this marks a crisis after which language remains static; language has now become a tool rather than the goal of intellectual activity. We never encounter any language that is still evolving or has become more advanced; in historical times, all languages only decline; linguistic history signifies the decay of languages as such, as they are gradually dominated by the evolution of the mind toward greater freedom.
The reader of the above survey of previous classifications will easily see that in the matter itself Schleicher adds very little of his own. Even the expressions, which are here given throughout in Schleicher’s own words, are in some cases recognizable as identical with, or closely similar to, those of earlier scholars.
The reader of the above survey of previous classifications will easily see that in the subject itself, Schleicher contributes very little of his own. Even the phrases presented here in Schleicher's own words are, in some cases, identical to or very similar to those of earlier scholars.
He made one coherent system out of ideas of classification and development already found in others. What is new is the philosophical substructure of Hegelian origin, and there can be no doubt that Schleicher imagined that by this addition he contributed very much towards giving stability and durability to the whole system. And yet this proved to be the least stable and durable part of the structure, and as a matter of fact the Hegelian reasoning is not repeated by a single one of those who give their adherence to the classification. Nor can it be said to carry conviction, and undoubtedly it has seemed to most linguists at the same time too rigid and too unreal to have any importance.
He created a unified system from classification and development ideas already present in others. What's new is the philosophical foundation derived from Hegel, and there's no doubt that Schleicher believed this addition significantly strengthened the entire system. However, this turned out to be the least stable and durable part of the structure, and in fact, not a single person who supports the classification echoes Hegelian reasoning. It also doesn’t seem convincing, and many linguists undoubtedly find it too rigid and unrealistic to hold any significance.
But apart from the philosophical argument the classification proved very successful in the particular shape it had found in Schleicher. Its adoption into two such widely read works as Max Müller’s and Whitney’s Lectures on the Science of Language contributed very much to the popularity of the system, though the former’s attempt at ascribing to the tripartition a sociological[78] importance by saying that juxtaposition (isolation) is characteristic of the ‘family stage,’ agglutination of ‘the nomadic stage’ and amalgamation (flexion) of the ‘political stage’ of human society was hardly taken seriously by anybody.
But aside from the philosophical debate, the classification was very successful in the specific form it took in Schleicher's work. Its inclusion in two popular books, Max Müller’s and Whitney’s Lectures on the Science of Language, greatly boosted the system's popularity, although Müller’s attempt to link the tripartite classification to societal stages—suggesting that juxtaposition (isolation) represents the ‘family stage,’ agglutination represents ‘the nomadic stage,’ and amalgamation (flexion) reflects the ‘political stage’ of human society—was hardly considered credible by anyone.
The chief reasons for the popularity of this classification are not far to seek. It is easy of handling and appeals to the natural fondness for clear-cut formulas through its specious appearance of regularity and rationality. Besides, it flatters widespread prejudices in so far as it places the two groups of languages highest that are spoken by those nations which have culturally and religiously exercised the deepest influence on the civilization of the world, Aryans and Semites. Therefore also Pott’s view, according to which the incorporating or ‘polysynthetic’ American languages possess the same characteristics that distinguish flexion as against agglutination, only in a still higher degree, is generally tacitly discarded, for obviously it would not do to place some languages of American Indians higher than Sanskrit or Greek. But when these are looked upon as the very flower of linguistic development it is quite natural to regard the modern languages of Western Europe as degenerate corruptions of the ancient more highly flexional languages; this is in perfect keeping with the prevalent admiration for classical antiquity and with the belief in a far past golden age. Arguments such as these may not have been consciously in the minds of the framers of the ordinary classification, but there can be no doubt that they have been unconsciously working in favour of the system, though very little thought seems to be required to show the fallacy of the assumption that high civilization has any intrinsic and necessary connexion with the grammatical construction of the language spoken by the race or nation concerned. No language of modern Europe presents the flexional type in a purer shape than Lithuanian, where we find preserved nearly the same grammatical system as in old Sanskrit, yet no one would assert that the culture of Lithuanian peasants is higher than that of Shakespeare, whose language has lost an enormous amount of the old flexions. Culture and language must be appraised separately, each on its own merits and independently of the other.
The main reasons for the popularity of this classification are easy to identify. It is user-friendly and taps into the natural preference for clear-cut formulas due to its misleading appearance of regularity and logic. Additionally, it caters to common biases by highlighting the two groups of languages that are most spoken in nations that have significantly influenced world civilization, namely the Aryans and Semites. Consequently, Pott’s perspective, which argues that the incorporating or ‘polysynthetic’ languages of America share the same traits that differentiate inflection from agglutination—but to an even greater extent—is generally ignored. Obviously, it wouldn't be acceptable to rank some Native American languages above Sanskrit or Greek. When these ancient languages are seen as the pinnacle of linguistic development, it becomes understandable to see modern Western European languages as degenerate versions of the more sophisticated ancient inflected languages; this aligns perfectly with the widespread admiration for classic antiquity and the belief in a long-lost golden age. While these ideas may not have been consciously considered by those who created the typical classification, it's clear they have been unconsciously supporting the system, though it takes little thought to reveal the fallacy in assuming that high civilization is inherently linked to the grammatical structure of the language spoken by a particular race or nation. No modern European language embodies the inflectional type more clearly than Lithuanian, which retains almost the same grammatical system as ancient Sanskrit, yet no one would claim that Lithuanian peasants possess a culture superior to that of Shakespeare, whose language has shed a significant number of old inflections. Culture and language should be evaluated separately, each based on its own value and independent of the other.
From a purely linguistic point of view there are many objections to the usual classification, and it will be well here to bring them together, though this will mean an interruption of the historical survey which is the main object of these chapters.
From a purely linguistic perspective, there are several objections to the standard classification, and it would be beneficial to compile them here, even though this will disrupt the historical overview, which is the primary focus of these chapters.
First let us look upon the tripartition as purporting a comprehensive classification of languages as existing side by side without any regard to historic development (the nebeneinander[79] of Schleicher). Here it does not seem to be an ideal manner of classifying a great many objects to establish three classes of such different dimensions that the first comprises only Chinese and some other related languages of the Far East, and the third only two families of languages, while the second includes hundreds of unrelated languages of the most heterogeneous character. It seems certain that the languages of Class I represent one definite type of linguistic structure, and it may be that Aryan and Semitic should be classed together on account of the similarity of their structure, though this is by no means quite certain and has been denied (by Bopp, and in recent times by Porzezinski); but what is indubitable is that the ‘agglutinating’ class is made to comprehend languages of the most diverse type, even if we follow Pott and exclude from this class all incorporating languages. Finnish is always mentioned as a typically agglutinative language, yet there we meet with such declensional forms as nominative vesi ‘water,’ toinen ‘second,’ partitive vettä, toista, genitive veden, toisen, and such verbal forms as sido-n ‘I bind,’ sido-t ‘thou bindest,’ sito-o ‘he binds,’ and the three corresponding persons in the plural, sido-mme, sido-tte, sito-vat. Here we are far from having one unchangeable root to which endings have been glued, for the root itself undergoes changes before the endings. In Kiyombe (Congo) the perfect of verbs is in many cases formed by means of a vowel change that is a complete parallel to the apophony in English drink, drank, thus vanga ‘do,’ perfect venge, twala ‘bring,’ perfect twele or twede, etc. (Anthropos, ii. p. 761). Examples like these show that flexion, in whatever way we may define this term, is not the prerogative of the Aryans and Semites, but may be found in other nations as well. ‘Agglutination’ is either too vague a term to be used in classification, or else, if it is taken strictly according to the usual definition, it is too definite to comprise many of the languages which are ordinarily reckoned to belong to the second class.
First, let's consider the tripartition as representing a broad classification of languages that exist alongside each other without taking historical development into account (the nebeneinander[79] as Schleicher describes it). It may not be the most effective way to group many languages when we establish three classes of such differing sizes, where the first contains only Chinese and a few related languages from the Far East, the third consists of only two language families, while the second includes hundreds of unrelated languages that are extremely diverse in nature. It seems clear that the languages in Class I represent one specific type of linguistic structure, and it might make sense to group Aryan and Semitic together due to their structural similarities, although this is not entirely certain and has been disputed (by Bopp and more recently by Porzezinski); however, what is indisputable is that the ‘agglutinating’ class encompasses languages of vastly different types, even if we follow Pott and exclude incorporating languages from this category. Finnish is often cited as a prime example of an agglutinative language, yet we encounter declensional forms like nominative vesi ‘water,’ toinen ‘second,’ partitive vettä, toista, genitive veden, toisen, along with verbal forms like sido-n ‘I bind,’ sido-t ‘you bind,’ sito-o ‘he binds,’ and the three corresponding plural forms, sido-mme, sido-tte, sito-vat. Here, we are far from having a single unchanging root to which endings have simply been attached, as the root itself alters before the endings are added. In Kiyombe (Congo), the perfect tense of verbs is often formed through a vowel change that parallels the apophony seen in English with drink and drank; for example, vanga ‘do,’ perfect venge, twala ‘bring,’ perfect twele or twede, etc. (Anthropos, ii. p. 761). Such examples illustrate that inflection, however we define it, is not exclusive to the Aryans and Semites but can also be found in other cultures. ‘Agglutination’ is either too broad a term for classification or, if strictly defined, is too narrow to include many languages typically categorized in the second class.
It will be seen, also, that those writers who aim at giving descriptions of a variety of human tongues, or of them all, do not content themselves with the usual three classes, but have a greater number. This began with Steinthal, who in various works tried to classify languages partly from geographical, partly from structural points of view, without, however, arriving at any definite or consistent system. Friedrich Müller, in his great Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, really gives up the psychological or structural division of languages, distributing the more than hundred different languages that he describes among twelve races of mankind, characterized chiefly by external criteria that have nothing to do with language. Misteli establishes six main types: I. Incorporating. II. Root-[80]isolating. III. Stem-isolating. IV. Affixing (Anreihende). V. Agglutinating. VI. Flexional. These he also distributes so as to form four classes: (1) languages with sentence-words: I; (2) languages with no words: II, III and IV; (3) languages with apparent words: V; and (4) languages with real words: VI. But the latter division had better be left alone; it turns on the intricate question “What constitutes a word?” and ultimately depends on the usual depreciation of ‘inferior races’ and corresponding exaltation of our own race, which is alone reputed capable of possessing ‘real words.’ I do not see why we should not recognize that the vocables of Greenlandic, Malay, Kafir or Finnish are just as ‘real’ words as any in Hebrew or Latin.
It will also be noticed that those writers who attempt to describe a variety of languages, or even all of them, don’t settle for the usual three categories, but instead classify them into many more. This started with Steinthal, who in various works tried to categorize languages based on both geographical and structural perspectives, but didn’t arrive at any clear or consistent system. Friedrich Müller, in his major work Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, essentially abandons the psychological or structural classification of languages, instead organizing the more than a hundred languages he discusses into twelve human races, defined mainly by external criteria unrelated to language. Misteli identifies six main types: I. Incorporating. II. Root-isolating. III. Stem-isolating. IV. Affixing (Anreihende). V. Agglutinating. VI. Flexional. He then organizes them into four categories: (1) languages with sentence-words: I; (2) languages with no words: II, III, and IV; (3) languages with apparent words: V; and (4) languages with real words: VI. However, it’s better to avoid this last classification; it hinges on the complex issue of “What constitutes a word?” and ultimately relies on the usual bias against ‘inferior races’ and the corresponding elevation of our own race, which is considered the only one capable of possessing ‘real words.’ I don’t see why we shouldn’t acknowledge that the words of Greenlandic, Malay, Kafir, or Finnish are just as ‘real’ as any in Hebrew or Latin.
Our final result, then, is that the tripartition is insufficient and inadequate to serve as a comprehensive classification of languages actually existing. Nor shall we wonder at this if we see the way in which the theory began historically in an obiter dictum of Fr. v. Schlegel at a time when the inner structure of only a few languages had been properly studied, and if we consider the lack of clearness and definiteness inherent in such notions as agglutination and flexion, which are nevertheless made the corner-stones of the whole system. We therefore must go back to the wise saying of Humboldt quoted on p. 59, that the structural diversities of languages are too great for us to classify them comprehensively.
Our final conclusion is that the three-part classification is inadequate and fails to serve as a complete categorization of the languages that actually exist. We shouldn't be surprised by this when we consider how the theory originated from a passing comment by Fr. v. Schlegel at a time when the inner workings of only a few languages had been thoroughly examined. Additionally, we should recognize the confusion and vagueness associated with concepts like agglutination and inflection, which have been treated as the foundation of the entire system. Therefore, we must return to the insightful observation by Humboldt mentioned on p. 59, that the structural differences among languages are too significant for us to categorize them comprehensively.
In a subsequent part of this work I shall deal with the tripartition as representing three successive stages in the development of such languages as our own (the nacheinander of Schleicher), and try to show that Schleicher’s view is not borne out by the facts of linguistic history, which give us a totally different picture of development.
In a later section of this work, I will discuss the tripartition as representing three successive stages in the development of languages like ours (the nacheinander of Schleicher) and attempt to demonstrate that Schleicher’s perspective is not supported by the facts of linguistic history, which present a completely different picture of development.
From both points of view, then, I think that the classification here considered deserves to be shelved among the hasty generalizations in which the history of every branch of science is unfortunately so rich.
From both perspectives, I believe that the classification discussed here should be put aside alongside the quick generalizations that, unfortunately, the history of every field of science has in abundance.
III.—§ 6. Reconstruction.
Probably Schleicher’s most original and important contribution to linguistics was his reconstruction of the Proto-Aryan language, die indogermanische ursprache. The possibility of inferentially constructing this parent language, which to Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Gothic, etc., was what Latin was to Italian, Spanish, French, etc., was early in his thoughts (see quotations illustrating the gradual growth of the idea in Oertel, p. 39 f.), but it was not till the first edition of his Compendium that he carried it out in[81] detail, giving there for each separate chapter (vowels, consonants, roots, stem-formation, declension, conjugation) first the Proto-Aryan forms and then those actually found in the different languages, from which the former were inferred. This arrangement has the advantage that the reader everywhere sees the historical evolution in the natural order, beginning with the oldest and then proceeding to the later stages, just as the Romanic scholar begins with Latin and then takes in successive stages Old French, Modern French, etc. But in the case of Proto-Aryan this procedure is apt to deceive the student and make him take these primitive forms as something certain, whose existence reposes on just as good evidence as the forms found in Sanskrit literature or in German or English as spoken in our own days. When he finds some forms given first and used to explain some others, there is some danger of his forgetting that the forms given first have a quite different status to the others, and that their only raison d’être is the desire of a modern linguist to explain existing forms in related languages which present certain similarities as originating from a common original form, which he does not find in his texts and has, therefore, to reconstruct. But apart from this there can be no doubt that the reconstruction of older forms (and the ingenious device, due to Schleicher, of denoting such forms by means of a preposed asterisk to distinguish them from forms actually found) has been in many ways beneficial to historical grammar. Only it may be questioned whether Schleicher did not go too far when he wished to base the whole grammar of all the Aryan languages on such reconstructions, instead of using them now and then to explain single facts.
Probably Schleicher’s most original and important contribution to linguistics was his reconstruction of the Proto-Aryan language, die indogermanische ursprache. He early entertained the idea of constructing this parent language through inference, which was to Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Gothic, etc., what Latin was to Italian, Spanish, French, etc. (see quotations illustrating the gradual growth of the idea in Oertel, p. 39 f.), but it wasn’t until the first edition of his Compendium that he detailed his findings, providing for each separate chapter (vowels, consonants, roots, stem-formation, declension, conjugation) first the Proto-Aryan forms and then those actually found in the different languages from which the former were inferred. This arrangement allows the reader to see the historical evolution in a natural order, starting with the oldest forms and then moving to the later stages, just as a Romance scholar starts with Latin and then successively examines Old French, Modern French, etc. However, with Proto-Aryan, this approach can mislead the student into believing these primitive forms are certain and supported by just as strong evidence as the forms found in Sanskrit literature or in contemporary German or English. When he sees some forms presented first to explain others, there's a risk he might forget that the initial forms have a totally different standing from the others, and their only raison d’être is to fulfill the modern linguist’s need to explain existing forms in related languages that share certain similarities, tracing back to a common original form that he cannot find in his texts and must, therefore, reconstruct. Despite this concern, there’s no doubt that reconstructing older forms (and the clever method, invented by Schleicher, of indicating such forms with a preposed asterisk to differentiate them from actual forms) has greatly benefited historical grammar. It may just be questioned whether Schleicher went too far in intending to base the entire grammar of all the Aryan languages on these reconstructions, rather than just using them occasionally to clarify single facts.
Schleicher even ventured (and in this he seems to have had no follower) to construct an entire little fable in primitive Aryan: see “Eine fabel in indogermanischer ursprache,” Beiträge zur vergl. sprachforschung, 5. 206 (1868). In the introductory remarks he complains of the difficulty of such attempts, chiefly because of the almost complete lack of particles capable of being inferred from the existing languages, but he seems to have entertained no doubt about the phonetic and grammatical forms of the words he employed. As the fable is not now commonly known, I give it here, with Schleicher’s translation, as a document of this period of comparative linguistics.
Schleicher even took the bold step (and it seems he had no followers in this) to create a whole fable in primitive Aryan: see “A fable in Indo-European language,” Beiträge zur vergl. sprachforschung, 5. 206 (1868). In his introductory comments, he talks about the challenges of such attempts, mainly because there's almost no evidence of particles that can be inferred from the existing languages, but he didn't seem to doubt the phonetic and grammatical forms of the words he used. Since the fable isn’t widely known today, I’m including it here, along with Schleicher’s translation, as a record of this time in comparative linguistics.
AVIS AKVASAS KA
AVIS AKVASAS KA
Avis, jasmin varna na ā ast, dadarka akvams, tam, vāgham garum vaghantam, tam, bhāram magham, tam, manum āku bharantam. Avis akvabhjams ā vavakat: kard aghnutai mai vidanti manum akvams agantam.
Avis, jasmine is on the thread, while the heavy tiger goes on, bearing the weight, the human carries. The bird speaks: those who know are aware that humanity has come into being.
Akvāsas ā vavakant: krudhi avai, kard aghnutai vividvantsvas: manus patis varnām avisāms karnanti svabhjam gharmam vastram avibhjams ka varnā na asti.
Akvāsas ā vavakant: krudhi avai, kard aghnutai vividvantsvas: manus patis varnām avisāms karnanti svabhjam gharmam vastram avibhjams ka varnā na asti.
Tat kukruvants avis agram ā bhugat.
Tat kukruvants avis agram ā bhugat.
[DAS] SCHAF UND [DIE] ROSSE
The Sheep and the Horses
[Ein] schaf, [auf] welchem wolle nicht war (ein geschorenes schaf) sah rosse, das [einen] schweren wagen fahrend, das [eine] grosse last, das [einen] menschen schnell tragend. [Das] schaf sprach [zu den] rossen: [Das] herz wird beengt [in] mir (es thut mir herzlich leid), sehend [den] menschen [die] rosse treibend.
[Ein] schaf, [auf] dem keine wolle war (ein geschorenes schaf) sah pferde, die einen schweren wagen zogen und eine große last, die schnell einen menschen trugen. [Das] schaf sprach [zu den] pferden: [Mein] herz wird eng in mir (es tut mir wirklich leid), wenn ich [den] menschen sehe, die [die] pferde antreiben.
[Die] rosse sprachen: Höre schaf, [das] herz wird beengt [in den] gesehend-habenden (es thut uns herzlich leid, da wir wissen): [der] mensch, [der] herr macht [die] wolle [der] schafe [zu einem] warmen kleide [für] sich und [den] schafen ist nicht wolle (die schafe aber haben keine wolle mehr, sie werden geschoren; es geht ihnen noch schlechter als den rossen).
[Die] rosse sprachen: Höre schaf, [das] herz wird eng [in den] gesehend-habenden (es tut uns wirklich leid, da wir wissen): [der] mensch, [der] herr macht [die] wolle [der] schafe [zu einem] warmen kleid [für] sich und [den] schafen bleibt keine wolle (die schafe aber haben keine wolle mehr, sie werden geschoren; es geht ihnen noch schlechter als den rossen).
Dies gehört habend bog (entwich) [das] schaf [auf das] feld (es machte sich aus dem staube).
Dies gehört habend bog (entwich) [das] schaf [auf das] feld (es machte sich aus dem staube).
The question here naturally arises: Is it possible in the way initiated by Schleicher to reconstruct extinct linguistic stages, and what degree of probability can be attached to the forms thus created by linguists? The answer certainly must be that in some instances the reconstruction may have a very strong degree of probability, namely, if the data on which it is based are unambiguous and the form to be reconstructed is not far removed from that or those actually found; but that otherwise any reconstruction becomes doubtful, and naturally the more so according to the extent of the reconstruction (as when a whole text is constructed) and to the distance in time that intervenes between the known and the unknown stage. If we look at the genitives of Lat. genus and Gr. génos, which are found as generis and génous, it is easy to see that both presuppose a form with s between two vowels, as we see a great many intervocalic s’s becoming r in Latin and disappearing in Greek; but when Schleicher gives as the prototype of both (and of corresponding forms in the other languages) Aryan ganasas, he oversteps the limits of the permissible in so far as he ascribes to the vowels definite sounds not really warranted by the known forms. If we knew the modern Scandinavian languages and English only, we should not hesitate to give to the Proto-Gothonic genitive of the word for ‘mother’ the ending -s, cf. Dan. moders, E. mother’s; but G. der mutter suffices to show that the conclusion is not safe, and as a matter of fact, both in Old Norse and in Old English the genitive of this[83] word is without an s. An analogous case is presented when Schleicher reconstructs the nom. of the word for ‘father’ as patars, because he presupposes -s as the invariable sign of every nom. sg. masc., although in this particular word not a single one of the old languages has -s in the nominative. All Schleicher’s reconstructions are based on the assumption that Primitive Aryan had a very simple structure, only few consonant and fewer vowel sounds, and great regularity in morphology; but, as we shall see, this assumption is completely gratuitous and was exploded only a few years after his death. Gabelentz (Spr 182), therefore, was right when he said, with a certain irony, that the Aryan ursprache had changed beyond recognition in the short time between Schleicher and Brugmann. The moral to be drawn from all this seems to be that hypothetical and starred forms should be used sparingly and with the extremest caution.
The question arises: Is it possible to reconstruct extinct stages of language in the way Schleicher proposed, and how reliable are the forms linguists create from this? The answer must be that in certain cases, the reconstruction can be highly reliable, especially when the data it relies on is clear and the form being reconstructed is close to the actual forms found. However, beyond that, any reconstruction becomes questionable, particularly as the extent of the reconstruction increases (like when an entire text is created) and the time gap between the known and unknown stages increases. For example, looking at the genitives of Latin genus and Greek génos, which appear as generis and génous, it’s clear that both suggest a form with an s between two vowels, since many intervocalic s’s turn into r in Latin and drop out in Greek. However, when Schleicher suggests that both derive from the Aryan form ganasas, he goes too far by assigning specific sounds to the vowels that are not actually supported by the known forms. If we only knew modern Scandinavian languages and English, we might think that the Proto-Gothonic genitive for ‘mother’ should end in -s, similar to Danish moders and English mother’s; but the German der mutter shows that this conclusion isn’t solid, and in fact, both Old Norse and Old English lack an s genitive for this word. A similar issue arises with Schleicher's reconstruction of the nominative for ‘father’ as patars, because he assumes that -s is a constant marker of every masculine singular nominative, although no ancient languages show an -s in that nominative form for this particular word. All of Schleicher’s reconstructions rest on the belief that Primitive Aryan had a very simple structure, with very few consonant and vowel sounds, and a high degree of regularity in morphology. However, as we will see, this assumption is entirely unfounded and was challenged just a few years after his death. Gabelentz (Spr 182) was right when he wryly remarked that the Aryan ursprache had changed so much that it was unrecognizable in the brief period between Schleicher and Brugmann. The takeaway from all of this seems to be that hypothetical and speculative forms should be used carefully and with extreme caution.
With regard to inferential forms denoted by a star, the following note may not be out of place here. Their purely theoretical character is not always realized. An example will illustrate what I mean. If etymological dictionaries give as the origin of F. ménage (OF. maisnage) a Latin form *mansionaticum, the etymology may be correct although such a Latin word may never at any time have been uttered. The word was framed at some date, no one knows exactly when, from the word which at various times had the forms (acc.) mansionem, *masione, maison, by means of the ending which at first had the form -aticum (as in viaticum), and finally (through several intermediate stages) became -age; but at what stage of each the two elements met to make the word which eventually became ménage, no one can tell, so that the only thing really asserted is that if the word had been formed at a very early date (which is far from probable) it would have been mansionaticum. It would, therefore, perhaps be more correct to say that the word is from mansione + -aticum.
Regarding inferential forms marked by a star, it’s worth noting that their purely theoretical nature isn’t always recognized. For example, if etymological dictionaries state that the origin of F. ménage (OF. maisnage) is a Latin form *mansionaticum, this etymology could be valid even if that Latin word was never actually spoken. The term was constructed at some point, though no one knows exactly when, from the word which at different times had the forms (acc.) mansionem, *masione, maison, using the ending that initially appeared as -aticum (like in viaticum) and ultimately (through several intermediate forms) transformed into -age; however, at which stage of development the two elements combined to form the word that eventually became ménage remains a mystery. Thus, the only assertive claim is that if the word had been created at a very early time (which is unlikely), it would have been mansionaticum. Therefore, it might be more accurate to say that the word comes from mansione + -aticum.
III.—§ 7. Curtius, Madvig, and Specialists.
Second only to Schleicher among the linguists of those days was Georg Curtius (1820-85), at one time his colleague in the University of Prague. Curtius’s special study was Greek, and his books on the Greek verb and on Greek etymology cleared up a great many doubtful points; he also contributed very much to bridge the gulf between classical philology and Aryan linguistics. His views on general questions were embodied in the book Zur Chronologie der indogermanischen Sprachforschung (1873). While Schleicher died when his fame was at its highest and his theories were seemingly victorious in all the leading circles, Curtius had[84] the misfortune to see a generation of younger men, including some of his own best disciples, such as Brugmann, advance theories that seemed to him to be in conflict with the most essential principles of his cherished science; and though he himself, like Schleicher, had always been in favour of a stricter observance of sound-laws than his predecessors, his last book was a polemic against those younger scholars who carried the same point to the excess of admitting no exceptions at all, who believed in innumerable analogical formations even in the old languages, and whose reconstructions of primitive forms appeared to the old man as deprived of that classical beauty of the ursprache which was represented in his own and Schleicher’s works (Zur Kritik der neuesten Sprachforschung, 1885). But this is anticipating.
Second only to Schleicher among the linguists of that time was Georg Curtius (1820-85), who was once his colleague at the University of Prague. Curtius specialized in Greek, and his books on the Greek verb and etymology clarified many uncertainties; he also played a significant role in bridging the gap between classical philology and Aryan linguistics. His general ideas were expressed in the book Zur Chronologie der indogermanischen Sprachforschung (1873). While Schleicher passed away at the height of his fame, with his theories seemingly triumphant in all major circles, Curtius had[84] the misfortune of witnessing a generation of younger scholars, including some of his own top students like Brugmann, propose theories that he felt conflicted with the fundamental principles of his beloved science. Although he had always supported a stricter adherence to sound laws than his predecessors, his last book was a critique aimed at those younger scholars who took this idea to the extreme by admitting no exceptions whatsoever, believing in countless analogical formations even in ancient languages, and whose reconstructions of primitive forms struck the old man as lacking the classical beauty of the ursprache that was exemplified in his and Schleicher’s works (Zur Kritik der neuesten Sprachforschung, 1885). But that’s jumping ahead.
If Curtius was a comparativist with a sound knowledge of classical philology, Johan Nikolai Madvig was pre-eminently a classical philologist who took a great interest in general linguistics and brought his critical acumen and sober common sense to bear on many of the problems that exercised the minds of his contemporaries. He was opposed to everything of a vague and mystical nature in the current theories of language and disliked the tendency of some scholars to find deep-lying mysterious powers at the root of linguistic phenomena. But he probably went too far in his rationalism, for example, when he entirely denied the existence of the sound-symbolism on which Humboldt had expatiated. He laid much stress on the identity of the linguistic faculty in all ages: the first speakers had no more intention than people to-day of creating anything systematic or that would be good for all times and all occasions—they could have no other object in view than that of making themselves understood at the moment; hence the want of system which we find everywhere in languages: a different number of cases in singular and plural, different endings, etc. Madvig did not escape some inconsistencies, as when he himself would explain the use of the soft vowel a to denote the feminine gender by a kind of sound-symbolism, or when he thought it possible to determine in what order the different grammatical ideas presented themselves to primitive man (tense relation first in the verb, number before case in the noun). He attached too little value to phonological and etymological research, but on the whole his views were sounder than many which were set forth on the same subjects at the time; his papers, however, were very little known, partly because they were written in Danish, partly because his style was extremely heavy and difficult, and when he finally brought out his Kleine philologische schriften in German (1875), he expressed his regret in the preface at finding that many of the theories he had put forward years before in Danish[85] had in the meantime been independently arrived at by Whitney, who had had the advantage of expressing them in a world-language.
If Curtius was a comparativist with a solid understanding of classical philology, Johan Nikolai Madvig was primarily a classical philologist who had a strong interest in general linguistics. He applied his critical insights and practical common sense to many issues that engaged the minds of his contemporaries. He opposed everything vague and mystical in the prevailing theories of language and disliked the tendency of some scholars to attribute profound, mysterious powers to linguistic phenomena. However, he may have taken his rationalism too far, such as when he completely denied the existence of the sound-symbolism that Humboldt had elaborated on. He emphasized the consistency of the linguistic ability across all times: the first speakers were no more intent on creating something systematic or universally applicable than people today; their only goal was to communicate effectively in the moment, which accounts for the lack of system we see in languages: varying numbers of cases in singular and plural, different endings, and so on. Madvig was not free from inconsistencies, especially when he explained the use of the soft vowel a to indicate the feminine gender through a kind of sound-symbolism, or when he believed it was possible to determine the order in which different grammatical ideas appeared to primitive humans (with tense relations first in verbs and number before case in nouns). He undervalued phonological and etymological research, but overall, his views were more solid than many others proposed on the same topics at the time. His works, however, were not well-known, partly because they were written in Danish and partly due to his extremely dense and challenging writing style. When he finally published his Kleine philologische schriften in German (1875), he lamented in the preface that many of the theories he had previously presented in Danish[85] had meanwhile been independently discovered by Whitney, who had the advantage of articulating them in a widely spoken language.
One of the most important features of the period with which we are here dealing is the development of a number of special branches of historical linguistics on a comparative basis. Curtius’s work on Greek might be cited as one example; in the same way there were specialists in Sanskrit (Westergaard and Benfey among others), in Slavonic (Miklosich and Schleicher), in Keltic (Zeuss), etc. Grimm had numerous followers in the Gothonic or Germanic field, while in Romanic philology there was an active and flourishing school, headed by Friedrich Diez, whose Grammatik der romanischen Sprachen and Etymologisches Wörterbuch der romanischen Sprachen were perhaps the best introduction to the methodical study of linguistics that anyone could desire; the writer of these lines looks back with the greatest gratitude to that period of his youth when he had the good fortune to make the acquaintance of these truly classical works. Everything was so well arranged, so carefully thought out and so lucidly explained, that one had everywhere the pleasant feeling that one was treading on firm ground, the more so as the basis of the whole was not an artificially constructed nebulous ursprache, but the familiar forms and words of an historical language. Here one witnessed the gradual differentiation of Latin into seven or eight distinct languages, whose development it was possible to follow century by century in well-authenticated texts. The picture thus displayed before one’s eyes of actual linguistic growth in all domains—sounds, forms, word-formation, syntax—and (a very important corollary) of the interdependence of these domains, could not but leave a very strong impression—not merely enthusiasm for what had been achieved here, but also a salutary skepticism of theories in other fields which had not a similarly solid basis.
One of the most important features of the period we're discussing is the emergence of several specific branches of historical linguistics based on comparison. Curtius’s work on Greek is one example; similarly, there were experts in Sanskrit (like Westergaard and Benfey), in Slavic (Miklosich and Schleicher), in Celtic (Zeuss), and so on. Grimm had many followers in the Gothic or Germanic area, while in Romance philology, there was a vibrant and active school led by Friedrich Diez. His Grammatik der romanischen Sprachen and Etymologisches Wörterbuch der romanischen Sprachen were perhaps the best introduction to the systematic study of linguistics anyone could want. The author of these lines looks back with immense gratitude to that time in his youth when he was fortunate enough to discover these truly classic works. Everything was so well organized, so thoughtfully constructed, and so clearly explained that one always felt the reassurance of solid ground beneath them. This was especially true because the foundation was not an artificially created nebulous ursprache, but the familiar forms and words of a historical language. Here, one could witness the gradual evolution of Latin into seven or eight distinct languages, with their development traceable century by century through well-documented texts. The representation of actual linguistic growth in all areas—sounds, forms, word formation, syntax—and (a very important consequence) the interdependence of these areas, left a very strong impression—not just enthusiasm for what had been accomplished, but also a healthy skepticism towards theories in other fields that lacked a similarly solid foundation.
III.—§ 8. Max Müller and Whitney.
Working, as we have seen, in many fields, linguists had now brought to light a shoal of interesting facts affecting a great many languages and had put forth valuable theories to explain these facts; but most of their work remained difficult of access except to the specialist, and very little was done by the experts to impart to educated people in general those results of the new science which might be enjoyed without deeper study. But in 1861 Max Müller gave the first series of those Lectures on the Science of Language which, in numerous editions, did more than anything else to popularize linguistics and served to initiate a great many students into our science. In many ways these lectures were[86] excellently adapted for this purpose, for the author had a certain knack of selecting interesting illustrations and of presenting his subject in a way that tended to create the same enthusiasm for it that he felt himself. But his arguments do not bear a close inspection. Too often, after stating a problem, he is found to fly off at a tangent and to forget what he has set out to prove for the sake of an interesting etymology or a clever paradox. He gives an uncritical acceptance to many of Schleicher’s leading ideas; thus, the science of linguistics is to him a physical science and has nothing to do with philology, which is an historical science. If, however, we look at the book itself, we shall find that everything that he counts on to secure the interest of his reader, everything that made his lectures so popular, is really non-naturalistic: all those brilliant exposés of word-history are really like historical anecdotes in a book on social evolution; they may have some bearing on the fundamental problems, but these are rarely or never treated as real problems of natural science. Nor does he, when taken to task, maintain his view very seriously, but partly retracts it and half-heartedly ensconces himself behind the dictum that everything depends on the definition you give of “physical science” (see especially Ch 234, 442, 497)—thus calling forth Whitney’s retort that “the implication here is that our author has a right at his own good pleasure to lay down such a definition of a physical science as should make the name properly applicable to the study of this particular one among the products of human capacities.... So he may prove that a whale is a fish, if you only allow him to define what a fish is” (M 23 f.).
Working in many fields, linguists have uncovered a wealth of interesting facts that affect many languages and have proposed valuable theories to explain these facts. However, much of their work remained difficult to access for anyone but specialists, and very little was done by experts to share the findings of this new science with educated people in general, which could be appreciated without extensive study. In 1861, Max Müller presented the first series of Lectures on the Science of Language, which, in various editions, did more than anything else to popularize linguistics and helped a lot of students get introduced to the field. These lectures were[86]well-suited for this purpose because the author had a talent for choosing interesting examples and presenting his subject in a way that inspired the same enthusiasm in others that he felt himself. However, his arguments don't hold up under careful scrutiny. Too often, after introducing a problem, he veers off topic and loses sight of what he intended to prove in favor of an intriguing etymology or a clever paradox. He uncritically accepts many of Schleicher’s main ideas; for him, linguistics is a physical science and has no connection to philology, which is a historical science. However, if we look at the book itself, we’ll find that everything he relies on to engage his readers, everything that made his lectures so popular, is actually non-naturalistic. All those brilliant explanations of word histories are like historical anecdotes in a book about social evolution; they might relate to fundamental issues, but these are rarely or never addressed as genuine problems of natural science. When challenged, he doesn’t defend his viewpoint seriously, instead partially retracting it and weakly hiding behind the claim that everything depends on how you define “physical science” (see especially Ch 234, 442, 497)—prompting Whitney’s response that “the implication here is that our author has a right at his own good pleasure to lay down such a definition of a physical science as should make the name properly applicable to the study of this particular one among the products of human capacities.... So he may prove that a whale is a fish, if you only allow him to define what a fish is” (M 23 f.).
Though Schleicher and Max Müller in their own day had few followers in defining linguistics as a natural or physical science—the opposite view was taken, for instance, by Curtius (K 154), Madvig and Whitney—there can be no doubt that the naturalistic point of view practically, though perhaps chiefly unconsciously, had wide-reaching effects on the history of linguistic science. It was intimately connected with the problems chiefly investigated and with the way in which they were treated. From Grimm through Pott to Schleicher and his contemporaries we see a growing interest in phonological comparisons; more and more “sound-laws” were discovered, and those found were more and more rigorously applied, with the result that etymological investigation was attended with a degree of exactness of which former generations had no idea. But as these phonological studies were not, as a rule, based on a real, penetrating insight into the nature of speech-sounds, the work of the etymologist tended more and more to be purely mechanical, and the science of language was to a great extent deprived of those elements which are more[87] intimately connected with the human ‘soul.’ Isolated vowels and consonants were compared, isolated flexional forms and isolated words were treated more and more in detail and explained by other isolated forms and words in other languages, all of them being like dead leaves shaken off a tree rather than parts of a living and moving whole. The speaking individual and the speaking community were too much lost sight of. Too often comparativists gained a considerable acquaintance with the sound-laws and the grammatical forms of various languages without knowing much about those languages themselves, or at any rate without possessing any degree of familiarity with them. Schleicher was not blind to the danger of this. A short time before his death he brought out an Indogermanische Chrestomathie (Weimar, 1869), and in the preface he justifies his book by saying that “it is of great value, besides learning the grammar, to be acquainted, however slightly, with the languages themselves. For a comparative grammar of related languages lays stress on what is common to a language and its sisters; consequently, the languages may appear more alike than they are in reality, and their idiosyncrasies may be thrown into the shade. Linguistic specimens form, therefore, an indispensable supplement to comparative grammar.” Other and even more weighty reasons might have been adduced, for grammar is after all only one side of a language, and it is certainly the best plan, if one wants to understand and appreciate the position of any language, to start with some connected texts of tolerable length, and only afterwards to see how its forms are related to and may be explained by those of other languages.
Although Schleicher and Max Müller had few supporters in their time who viewed linguistics as a natural or physical science—Curtius (K 154), Madvig, and Whitney had a different perspective—it's clear that the naturalistic approach had a significant, albeit mostly unconscious, impact on the development of linguistic science. This perspective was closely linked to the issues being explored and the methods used to tackle them. From Grimm to Pott to Schleicher and his contemporaries, there was an increasing interest in phonological comparisons; more and more “sound laws” were identified, and the ones that were discovered were applied with greater rigor, resulting in etymological research that achieved a level of precision that earlier generations couldn't have imagined. However, since these phonological studies were usually not based on a deep understanding of the nature of speech sounds, etymologists' work increasingly became mechanical, and the science of language lost many aspects that are more closely tied to the human ‘soul.’ Isolated vowels and consonants were compared, and individual grammatical forms and words were examined in detail, explained solely by other isolated forms and words in different languages—much like dead leaves falling from a tree rather than parts of a living, dynamic whole. The individual speaker and the speaking community were often overlooked. Comparativists frequently gained significant knowledge of the sound laws and grammatical structures of various languages without knowing much about those languages themselves, or at least without any real familiarity with them. Schleicher recognized this danger. Shortly before his death, he published an Indogermanische Chrestomathie (Weimar, 1869), and in the preface, he explains that “besides learning the grammar, it's important to have at least a slight acquaintance with the languages themselves. A comparative grammar of related languages emphasizes what is common among a language and its siblings; as a result, the languages may seem more similar than they actually are, and their unique characteristics may be overlooked. Linguistic samples are, therefore, an essential complement to comparative grammar.” There could have been other even more compelling reasons, since grammar is just one aspect of a language, and it’s definitely best to start by engaging with some connected texts of reasonable length to understand and appreciate a language's context before examining how its forms relate to and can be explained by those of other languages.
Though the mechanical school of linguists, with whom historical and comparative phonology was more and more an end in itself, prevailed to a great extent, the trend of a few linguists was different. Among these one must especially mention Heymann Steinthal, who drew his inspiration from Humboldt and devoted numerous works to the psychology of language. Unfortunately, Steinthal was greatly inferior to Schleicher in clearness and consistency of thought: “When I read a work of Steinthal’s, and even many parts of Humboldt, I feel as if walking through shifting clouds,” Max Müller remarks, with good reason, in a letter (Life, i. 256). This obscurity, in connexion with the remoteness of Steinthal’s studies, which ranged from Chinese to the language of the Mande negroes, but paid little regard to European languages, prevented him from exerting any powerful influence on the linguistic thought of his generation, except perhaps through his emphatic assertion of the truth that language can only be understood and explained by means of psychology: his explanation of syntactic attraction paved the way for much in Paul’s Prinzipien.
Although the mechanical approach of linguists, where historical and comparative phonology became increasingly an end in itself, was largely dominant, some linguists had a different perspective. One notable figure is Heymann Steinthal, who was influenced by Humboldt and dedicated many works to the psychology of language. Unfortunately, Steinthal was not as clear or consistent in his thinking as Schleicher: “When I read a work of Steinthal’s, and even many parts of Humboldt, I feel as if walking through shifting clouds,” Max Müller wisely noted in a letter (Life, i. 256). This lack of clarity, along with the broad scope of Steinthal’s studies—from Chinese to the language of the Mande blacks, while neglecting European languages—limited his powerful influence on the linguistic thought of his time, except perhaps through his strong assertion that language can only be understood and explained through psychology: his explanation of syntactic attraction laid the groundwork for much in Paul’s Prinzipien.
The leading exponent of general linguistics after the death of Schleicher was the American William Dwight Whitney, whose books, Language and the Study of Language (first ed. 1867) and its replica, The Life and Growth of Language (1875), were translated into several languages and were hardly less popular than those of his antagonist, Max Müller. Whitney’s style is less brilliant than Max Müller’s, and he scorns the cheap triumphs which the latter gains by the multiplication of interesting illustrations; he never wearies of running down Müller’s paradoxes and inconsistencies,[14] from which he himself was spared by his greater general solidity and sobriety of thought. The chief point of divergence between them was, as already indicated, that Whitney looked upon language as a human institution that has grown slowly out of the necessity for mutual understanding; he was opposed to all kinds of mysticism, and words to him were conventional signs—not, of course, that he held that there ever was a gathering of people that settled the meaning of each word, but in the sense of “resting on a mutual understanding or a community of habit,” no matter how brought about. But in spite of all differences between the two they are in many respects alike, when viewed from the coign of vantage of the twentieth century: both give expression to the best that had been attained by fifty or sixty years of painstaking activity to elucidate the mysteries of speech, and especially of Aryan words and forms, and neither of them was deeply original enough to see through many of the fallacies of the young science. Consequently, their views on the structure of Proto-Aryan, on roots and their rôle, on the building-up and decay of the form-system, are essentially the same as those of their contemporaries, and many of their theories have now crumbled away, including much of what they probably thought firmly rooted for all time.
The main figure in general linguistics after Schleicher's death was the American William Dwight Whitney. His books, Language and the Study of Language (first ed. 1867) and its counterpart, The Life and Growth of Language (1875), were translated into several languages and were almost as popular as those of his rival, Max Müller. Whitney’s writing style is less flashy than Müller’s, and he dismisses the superficial successes that Müller achieves through a plethora of engaging examples. He consistently critiques Müller’s paradoxes and inconsistencies,[14] which he himself avoids thanks to his greater intellectual rigor and clear-headedness. The main difference between them, as previously noted, is that Whitney viewed language as a human construct that evolved slowly out of the need for mutual understanding. He rejected all forms of mysticism, seeing words as conventional signs—not in the sense that there was ever a group of people who decided the meaning of each word, but in the sense of “based on mutual understanding or a shared habit,” regardless of how that understanding came about. Yet despite their differences, they are quite similar when considered from the perspective of the twentieth century: both reflect the best achievements of fifty or sixty years of dedicated efforts to clarify the complexities of speech, especially regarding Aryan words and structures, and neither was original enough to challenge many of the misconceptions of the emerging science. As a result, their views on the structure of Proto-Aryan, on roots and their functions, and on the development and decline of the form-system are essentially the same as those of their contemporaries, and many of their theories have since disintegrated, including much of what they likely believed was permanently established.
CHAPTER IV
Late 1800s
§ 1. Achievements about 1870. § 2. New Discoveries. § 3. Phonetic Laws and Analogy. § 4. General Tendencies.
§ 1. Achievements around 1870. § 2. New Discoveries. § 3. Phonetic Rules and Similarities. § 4. General Trends.
IV.—§ 1. Achievements about 1870.
In works of this period one frequently meets with expressions of pride and joy in the wonderful results that had been achieved in comparative linguistics in the course of a few decades. Thus Max Müller writes: “All this becomes clear and intelligible by the light of Comparative Grammar; anomalies vanish, exceptions prove the rule, and we perceive more plainly every day how in language, as elsewhere, the conflict between the freedom claimed by each individual and the resistance offered by the community at large establishes in the end a reign of law most wonderful, yet perfectly rational and intelligible”; and again: “There is nothing accidental, nothing irregular, nothing without a purpose and meaning in any part of Greek or Latin grammar. No one who has once discovered this hidden life of language, no one who has once found out that what seemed to be merely anomalous and whimsical in language is but, as it were, a petrification of thought, of deep, curious, poetical, philosophical thought, will ever rest again till he has descended as far as he can descend into the ancient shafts of human speech,” etc. (Ch 41 f.). Whitney says: “The difference between the old haphazard style of etymologizing and the modern scientific method lies in this: that the latter, while allowing everything to be theoretically possible, accepts nothing as actual which is not proved by sufficient evidence; it brings to bear upon each individual case a wide circle of related facts; it imposes upon the student the necessity of extended comparison and cautious deduction; it makes him careful to inform himself as thoroughly as circumstances allow respecting the history of every word he deals with” (L 386). And Benfey, in his Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft (1869, see pp. 562 f. and 596), arrives at the conclusion that the investigation of Aryan languages has already attained a very great degree of certainty, and that the reconstruction of Primitive Aryan, both in grammar and[90] vocabulary, must be considered as in the main settled in such a way that only some details are still doubtful; thus, it is certain that the first person singular ended in -mi, and that this is a phonetic reduction of the pronoun ma, and that the word for ‘horse’ was akva. This feeling of pride is certainly in a great measure justified if we compare the achievements of linguistic science at that date with the etymologies of the eighteenth century; it must also be acknowledged that 90 per cent. of the etymologies in the best-known Aryan languages which must be recognized as established beyond any reasonable doubt had already been discovered before 1870, while later investigations have only added a small number that may be considered firmly established, together with a great many more or less doubtful collocations. But, on the other hand, in the light of later research, we can now see that much of what was then considered firm as a rock did not deserve the implicit trust then placed in it.
In the works from this time, you often see expressions of pride and joy in the incredible progress made in comparative linguistics over a few decades. Max Müller states: “All this becomes clear and understandable through Comparative Grammar; anomalies disappear, exceptions prove the rule, and we notice more clearly every day how in language, as in other areas, the struggle between the freedom claimed by each individual and the resistance from the broader community ultimately establishes a reign of law that is both amazing and completely rational and understandable.” He adds: “There is nothing random, nothing irregular, nothing without purpose and meaning in any part of Greek or Latin grammar. Anyone who has once discovered this hidden life of language, anyone who has realized that what seemed merely anomalous and whimsical in language is actually, in a sense, a fossilization of deep, curious, poetic, and philosophical thought will never rest until they have explored as deeply as possible into the ancient wells of human speech,” etc. (Ch 41 f.). Whitney notes: “The difference between the old random style of etymology and the modern scientific approach is this: the latter, while considering everything theoretically possible, accepts nothing as actual unless it’s supported by sufficient evidence; it applies a broad range of related facts to each individual case; it requires the student to engage in extensive comparison and careful deduction; it makes them diligent in learning as much as possible about the history of every word they study” (L 386). Additionally, Benfey, in his Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaft (1869, see pp. 562 f. and 596), concludes that the study of Aryan languages has already reached a high degree of certainty and that the reconstruction of Primitive Aryan, both in grammar and vocabulary, must be regarded as mostly settled, with only a few details still uncertain; for instance, it is certain that the first person singular ended in -mi, which is a phonetic reduction of the pronoun ma, and that the word for ‘horse’ was akva. This sense of pride is largely justified when we compare the achievements of linguistic science at that time with the etymologies of the eighteenth century; it's also important to recognize that 90 percent of the etymologies in the most well-known Aryan languages, which can be considered established beyond reasonable doubt, had already been discovered before 1870, while later studies have only added a small number that can be viewed as firmly established, along with many more uncertain connections. However, looking back with the benefit of later research, we can now see that much of what was then thought to be rock-solid did not deserve the unquestioning trust it was given at the time.
IV.—§ 2. New Discoveries.
This is true in the first place with regard to the phonetic structure ascribed to Proto-Aryan. A series of brilliant discoveries made about the year 1880 profoundly modified the views of scholars about the consonantal and still more about the vocalic system of our family of languages. This is particularly true of the so-called palatal law.[15] So long as it was taken for granted that Sanskrit had in all essential points preserved the ancient sound system, while Greek and the other languages represented younger stages, no one could explain why Sanskrit in some cases had the palatals c and j (sounds approximately like the initial sounds of E. chicken and joy) where the other languages have the velar sounds k and g. It was now recognized that so far from the distribution of the two classes of sounds in Sanskrit being arbitrary, it followed strict rules,[91] though these were not to be seen from Sanskrit itself. Where Sanskrit a following the consonant corresponded to Greek or Latin o, Sanskrit had velar k or g; where, on the other hand, it corresponded to Greek or Latin e, Sanskrit had palatal c or j. Thus we have, for instance, c in Sansk. ca, ‘and’ = Greek te, Lat. que, but k in kakša = Lat. coxa; the difference between the two consonants in a perfect like cakara, ‘have done,’ is dependent on the same vowel alternation as that of Greek léloipa; c in the verb pacati, ‘cooks,’ as against k in the substantive pakas, ‘cooking,’ corresponds to the vowels in Greek légei as against lógos, etc. All this shows that Sanskrit itself must once have had the vowels e and o instead of a; before the front vowel e the consonant has then been fronted or palatalized, as ch in E. chicken is due to the following front vowel, while k has been preserved before o in cock. Sanskrit is thus shown to be in some important respects less conservative than Greek, a truth which was destined profoundly to modify many theories concerning the whole family of languages. As Curtius said, with some resentment of the change in view then taking place, “Sanskrit, once the oracle of the rising science and trusted blindly, is now put on one side; instead of the traditional ex oriente lux the saying is now in oriente tenebræ” (K 97).
This is especially true regarding the phonetic structure attributed to Proto-Aryan. A series of groundbreaking discoveries made around 1880 significantly changed scholars' views on the consonantal and even more on the vocalic system of our language family. This is particularly relevant to the so-called palatal law.[15] As long as it was assumed that Sanskrit had essentially preserved the ancient sound system, while Greek and the other languages represented later stages, no one could explain why Sanskrit sometimes used the palatal sounds c and j (similar to the initial sounds in English chicken and joy) where other languages had the velar sounds k and g. It was then recognized that the distribution of these two sound classes in Sanskrit was not random; it followed strict rules,[91] even though these rules weren’t visible from Sanskrit alone. When Sanskrit a followed a consonant that matched Greek or Latin o, Sanskrit had velar k or g; conversely, when it corresponded to Greek or Latin e, Sanskrit had palatal c or j. For example, we have c in Sanskrit ca, meaning ‘and’ = Greek te, Latin que, but k in kakša = Latin coxa; the difference between the two consonants in a form like cakara, meaning ‘have done,’ depends on the same vowel alternation as in Greek léloipa; c in the verb pacati, meaning ‘cooks,’ compared to k in the noun pakas, meaning ‘cooking,’ corresponds to the vowels in Greek légei versus lógos, etc. All this indicates that Sanskrit must have once had the vowels e and o instead of a; before the front vowel e, the consonant has been fronted or palatalized, similar to how ch in English chicken is caused by the following front vowel, while k is preserved before o in cock. Thus, Sanskrit is shown to be, in some significant ways, less conservative than Greek, a realization that profoundly affected many theories about the entire language family. As Curtius remarked, with some resentment about the shift in perspective that was occurring, “Sanskrit, once the oracle of the emerging science and trusted without question, is now set aside; instead of the traditional ex oriente lux, the saying now is in oriente tenebræ” (K 97).
The new views held in regard to Aryan vowels also resulted in a thorough revision of the theory of apophony (ablaut). The great mass of Aryan vowel alternations were shown to form a vast and singularly consistent system, the main features of which may be gathered from the following tabulation of a few select Greek examples, arranged into three columns, each representing one ‘grade’:
The new perspectives on Aryan vowels also led to a complete overhaul of the theory of apophony (ablaut). The extensive range of Aryan vowel variations was demonstrated to create a vast and remarkably consistent system, the key elements of which can be summarized in the following table of a few selected Greek examples, organized into three columns, each representing one ‘grade’:
I | II | III | |
(1) | pétomai | pótē | eptómai |
(s)ékhō | (s)ókhos | éskhon | |
(2) | leípō | léloipa | élipon |
(3) | peúthomai | — | eputhómēn |
(4) | dérkomai | dédorka | édrakon |
(5) | teínō (*tenjo) | tónos | tatós |
It is outside our scope to show how this scheme gives us a natural clue to the vowels in such verbs as E. I ride, II rode, III ridden (2), G. I werde, II ward, III geworden (4), or I binde, II band, III gebunden (5). It will be seen from the Greek examples that grade I is throughout characterized by the vowel e and grade II by the vowel o; as for grade III, the vowel of I and II has entirely disappeared in (1), where there is no vowel between the[92] two consonants, and in (2) and (3), where the element found after e and o and forming a diphthong with these has now become a full (syllabic) vowel i and u by itself. In (4) Sanskrit has in grade III a syllabic r (adrçam = Gr. édrakon), while Greek has ra, or in some instances ar, and Gothonic has ur or or according to the vowel of the following syllable. It was this fact that suggested to Brugmann his theory that in (5) Greek a, Lat. in, Goth. un in the third grade originated in syllabic ṇ, and that tatós thus stood for *tṇtós; he similarly explained Gr. déka, Lat. decem, Gothic taihun, E. ten from *dekṃ with syllabic m. I do not believe that his theory is entirely correct; but so much is certain, that in all instances grade III is characterized by a reduction of the vowel that appears in the two other grades as e and o, and there can be no doubt that this reduction is due to want of stress. This being so, it becomes impossible to consider lip the original root-form, which in leip and loip has been extended, and the new theory of apophony thus disposes of the old theory, based on the Indian grammarians’ view that the shortest form was the root-form, which was then raised through ‘guna’ and ‘vrddhi.’ This now is reversed, and the fuller form is shown to be the oldest, which in some cases was shortened according to a process paralleled in many living languages. Bopp was right in his rejection of Grimm’s theory of an inner, significatory reason for apophony, as apophony is now shown to have been due to a mechanical cause, though a different one from that suggested by Bopp (see above, p. 53); and Grimm was also wrong in another respect, because apophony is found from the first in noun-formations as well as in verbs, where Grimm believed it to have been instituted to indicate tense differences, with which it had originally nothing to do. Apophony even appears in other syllables than the root syllable; the new view thus quite naturally paved the way for skepticism with regard to the old doctrine that Aryan roots were necessarily monosyllabic; and scholars soon began to admit dissyllabic ‘bases’ in place of the old roots; instead of lip, the earliest accessible form thus came to be something like leipo or leipe. In this way the new vowel system had far-reaching consequences and made linguists look upon many problems in a new light. It should be noted, however, that the mechanical explanation of apophony from difference in accent applies only to grade III, in contradistinction to grades I and II; the reason of the alternation between the e of I and the o of II is by no means clear.
It’s beyond our scope to explain how this system provides a natural clue to the vowels in verbs like E. I ride, II rode, III ridden (2), G. I werde, II ward, III geworden (4), or I binde, II band, III gebunden (5). From the Greek examples, it’s clear that grade I is always marked by the vowel e and grade II by the vowel o. In grade III, the vowels from I and II completely vanish in (1), where there’s no vowel between the[92] two consonants, and in (2) and (3), where the element that follows e and o and forms a diphthong with them has become a full (syllabic) vowel i and u on their own. In (4), Sanskrit has a syllabic r in grade III (adrçam = Gr. édrakon), while Greek has ra, or sometimes ar, and Gothic has ur or or depending on the vowel in the next syllable. This fact led Brugmann to propose his theory that in (5) Greek a, Lat. in, Goth. un in the third grade originated from syllabic ṇ, suggesting that tatós represented *tṇtós; he similarly interpreted Gr. déka, Lat. decem, Gothic taihun, E. ten from *dekṃ with syllabic m. I don’t think his theory is entirely accurate; however, it’s certain that grade III is characterized by a reduction of the vowel that appears in the other two grades as e and o, and it’s undeniable that this reduction results from a lack of stress. Given this, it’s impossible to consider lip as the original root form, which in leip and loip has been extended. The new theory of apophony thus refutes the old view, based on Indian grammarians’ belief that the shortest form was the root form, which was then modified through ‘guna’ and ‘vrddhi.’ Now, this is reversed, showing that the fuller form is actually the oldest, which in some cases was shortened, a process observed in many living languages. Bopp was correct in rejecting Grimm’s theory of an inner, meaningful reason for apophony, as it’s now shown to be the result of a mechanical cause, although different from what Bopp suggested (see above, p. 53); and Grimm was also wrong in another respect, as apophony has always been present in noun formations as well as verbs, where Grimm thought it was created to indicate tense differences, which it didn’t originally relate to. Apophony can also be found in syllables other than the root syllable; this new perspective naturally led to doubts about the old doctrine that Aryan roots were necessarily monosyllabic. Scholars soon began to accept dissyllabic ‘bases’ instead of the old roots; thus, instead of lip, the earliest form we have access to began to appear as something like leipo or leipe. This way, the new vowel system had significant consequences and caused linguists to reconsider many issues in a different light. However, it's important to note that the mechanical explanation of apophony based on differences in stress only applies to grade III, in contrast to grades I and II; the reason for the alternation between the e of I and the o of II isn't clear at all.
The investigations leading to the discovery of the palatal law and the new theory of apophony were only a part of the immense labour of a number of able linguists in the ’seventies[93] and ’eighties, which cleared up many obscure points in Aryan phonology and morphology. One of the most famous discoveries was that of the Dane Karl Verner, that a whole series of consonant alternations in the old Gothonic languages was dependent on accent, and (more remarkable still) on the primeval accent, preserved in its oldest form in Sanskrit only, and differing from that of modern Gothonic languages in resting in some instances on the ending and in others on the root. When it was realized that the fact that German has t in vater, but d in bruder, was due to a different accentuation of the two words three or four thousand years ago, or that the difference between s and r in E. was and were was connected with the fact that perfect singulars in Sanskrit are stressed on the root, but plurals on the ending, this served not only to heighten respect for the linguistic science that was able to demonstrate such truths, but also to increase the feeling that the world of sounds was subject to strict laws comparable to those of natural science.
The research that led to the discovery of the palatal law and the new theory of apophony was just part of the extensive work done by several skilled linguists in the 1870s and 1880s, which clarified many unclear aspects of Aryan phonology and morphology. One of the most notable findings was made by the Dane Karl Verner, who showed that a series of consonant changes in the old Gothic languages depended on accent, and even more interestingly, on the ancient accent, which remained in its earliest form only in Sanskrit. This ancient accent differed from that of modern Gothic languages, sometimes resting on the ending and other times on the root. When it became clear that the reason German has t in vater and d in bruder was due to different stresses on the two words three or four thousand years ago, or that the difference between s and r in E. was and were was related to the fact that singular perfects in Sanskrit are stressed on the root, while plurals are stressed on the ending, this not only increased respect for the linguistic science that could reveal such truths but also fostered the sense that the world of sounds was governed by strict laws comparable to those of natural science.
IV.—§ 3. Phonetic Laws and Analogy.
The ‘blind’ operation of phonetic laws became the chief tenet of a new school of ‘young-grammarians’ or ‘junggrammatiker’ (Brugmann, Delbrück, Osthoff, Paul and others), who somewhat noisily flourished their advance upon earlier linguists and justly roused the anger not only of their own teachers, including Curtius, but also of fellow-students like Johannes Schmidt and Collitz. For some years a fierce discussion took place on the principles of linguistic science, in which young-grammarians tried to prove deductively the truth of their favourite thesis that “Sound-laws admit of no exceptions” (first, it seems, enounced by Leskien). Osthoff wrongly maintained that sound changes belonged to physiology and analogical change to psychology; but though that distribution of the two kinds of change to two different domains was untenable, the distinction in itself was important and proved a valuable, though perhaps sometimes too easy instrument in the hands of the historical grammarian. It was quite natural that those who insisted on undeviating phonetic laws should turn their attention to those cases in which forms appeared that did not conform to these laws, and try to explain them; and thus they inevitably were led to recognize the immense importance of analogical formations in the economy of all languages. Such formations had long been known, but little attention had been paid to them, and they were generally termed ‘false analogies’ and looked upon as corruptions or inorganic formations found only[94] or chiefly in a degenerate age, in which the true meaning and composition of the old forms was no longer understood. Men like Curtius were scandalized at the younger school explaining so many even of the noble forms of ancient Greek as due to this upstart force of analogy. His opponents contended that the name of ‘false analogy’ was wrong and misleading: the analogy in itself was perfect and was handled with unerring instinct in each case. They likewise pointed out that analogical formations, so far from being perversions of a late age, really represented one of the vital principles of language, without which it could never have come into existence.
The ‘blind’ operation of phonetic laws became the main principle of a new group of ‘young grammarians’ or ‘young grammarians’ (Brugmann, Delbrück, Osthoff, Paul, and others), who loudly showcased their advancements over earlier linguists and justifiably sparked the anger not only of their own teachers like Curtius but also of fellow students such as Johannes Schmidt and Collitz. For several years, there was a fierce debate on the principles of linguistic science, where young grammarians attempted to prove deductively the truth of their favorite thesis that “Sound laws admit of no exceptions” (first reportedly stated by Leskien). Osthoff incorrectly argued that sound changes belonged to physiology and analogical change to psychology; however, while that division was untenable, the distinction itself was significant and became a valuable, although sometimes too simplistic, tool for the historical grammarian. It was only natural that those who emphasized unchanging phonetic laws would focus on cases where forms did not align with these laws and try to explain them; as a result, they inevitably recognized the immense importance of analogical formations in the structure of all languages. These formations had been known for a long time, but little attention had been given to them, and they were typically labeled as ‘false analogies’ and viewed as corruptions or inorganic formations mostly found in a decline in which the true meaning and structure of the old forms were no longer understood. People like Curtius were appalled at the younger school attributing so many of the admirable forms of ancient Greek to this new force of analogy. His opponents argued that the term ‘false analogy’ was incorrect and misleading: the analogy itself was perfect and was applied with instinctive accuracy in each case. They also pointed out that analogical formations, far from being distortions of a later age, actually represented one of the essential principles of language, without which it could never have developed.
One of the first to take the new point of view and to explain it clearly was Hermann Paul. I quote from an early article (as translated by Sweet, CP 112) the following passages, which really struck a new note in linguistic theory:
One of the first to embrace the new perspective and explain it clearly was Hermann Paul. I quote from an early article (as translated by Sweet, CP 112) the following passages, which really introduced a fresh perspective in linguistic theory:
“There is one simple fact which should never be left out of sight, namely, that even in the parent Indogermanic language, long before its split-up, there were no longer any roots, stems, and suffixes, but only ready-made words, which were employed without the slightest thought of their composite nature. And it is only of such ready-made words that the store is composed from which everyone draws when he speaks. He has no stock of stems and terminations at his disposal from which he could construct the form required for each separate occasion. Not that he must necessarily have heard and learnt by heart every form he uses. This would, in fact, be impossible. He is, on the contrary, able of himself to form cases of nouns, tenses of verbs, etc., which he has either never heard or else not noticed specially; but, as there is no combining of stem and suffix, this can only be done on the pattern of the other ready-made combinations which he has learnt from his fellows. These latter are first learnt one by one, and then gradually associated into groups which correspond to the grammatical categories, but are never clearly conceived as such without special training. This grouping not only greatly aids the memory, but also makes it possible to produce other combinations. And this is what we call analogy.”
“There’s one simple fact that should always be kept in mind: even in the parent Indo-European language, long before it split up, there were no longer any roots, stems, or suffixes, just ready-made words that were used without any thought about their components. It’s from these ready-made words that everyone draws when they speak. They don't have a stash of stems and endings on hand to create the form needed for each specific situation. Not that they necessarily have heard and memorized every form they use; that would actually be impossible. Instead, they can, on their own, create noun cases, verb tenses, etc., that they either haven’t heard or haven’t paid special attention to. However, since there’s no combining of stem and suffix, this can only be done based on the other ready-made combinations they've learned from others. These combinations are first learned individually and then gradually grouped into categories that match grammatical rules, but are never clearly understood as such without special training. This grouping not only helps with memory but also allows for the creation of new combinations. And that’s what we call analogy.”
“It is, therefore, clear that, while speaking, everyone is incessantly producing analogical forms. Reproduction by memory and new-formation by means of association are its two indispensable factors. It is a mistake to assume a language as given in grammar and dictionary, that is, the whole body of possible words and forms, as something concrete, and to forget that it is nothing but an abstraction devoid of reality, and that the actual language exists only in the individual, from whom it cannot be separated even in scientific investigation, if we will understand[95] its nature and development. To comprehend the existence of each separate spoken form, we must not ask ‘Is it current in the language?’ or ‘Is it conformable to the laws of the language as deduced by the grammarians?’ but ‘Has he who has just employed it previously had it in his memory, or has he formed it himself for the first time, and, if so, according to what analogy?’ When, for instance, anyone employs the plural milben in German, it may be that he has learnt it from others, or else that he has only heard the singular milbe, but knows that such words as lerche, schwalbe, etc., form their plural lerchen, etc., so that the association milbe-milben is unconsciously suggested to him. He may also have heard the plural milben, but remembers it so imperfectly that he would forget it entirely were it not associated in his mind with a series of similar forms which help him to recall it. It is, therefore, often difficult to determine the share memory and creative fancy have had in each separate case.”
“It’s clear that when people speak, they are constantly creating analogical forms. Memory reproduction and new formation through association are its two essential components. It’s a mistake to view language as just what you find in grammar and dictionaries—the complete set of possible words and forms—as something tangible. We must remember that it’s merely an abstraction without real substance, and that actual language exists only in individuals, from whom it can't be separated even in scholarly study if we want to understand[95] its nature and development. To understand each distinct spoken form, we shouldn’t ask, ‘Is it used in the language?’ or ‘Does it fit the rules laid out by grammarians?’ Instead, we should ask, ‘Did the person who just used it have it stored in their memory, or did they create it for the first time, and if so, based on what analogy?’ For instance, when someone uses the plural milben in German, it could be that they've learned it from others, or perhaps they've only heard the singular milbe but know that words like lerche, schwalbe, etc., form their plural as lerchen, etc., which unconsciously suggests the association milbe-milben to them. They may have also heard the plural milben, but if they remember it so vaguely that they would completely forget it without it being linked to a series of similar forms, that’s also possible. Hence, it’s often challenging to determine the extent to which memory and creative imagination are involved in each specific instance.”
Linguists thus set about it seriously to think of language in terms of speaking individuals, who have learnt their mother-tongue in the ordinary way, and who now employ it in their daily intercourse with other men and women, without in each separate case knowing what they owe to others and what they have to create on the spur of the moment. Just as Sokrates fetched philosophy down from the skies, so also now linguists fetched words and forms down from vocabularies and grammars and placed them where their natural home is, in the minds and on the lips of ordinary men who are neither lexicographers nor grammarians, but who nevertheless master their language with sufficient ease and correctness for all ordinary purposes. Linguists now were confronted with some general problems which had not greatly troubled their predecessors (with the solitary exception of Bredsdorff, whose work was entirely overlooked), namely, What are the causes of changes in language? How are they brought about, and how should they be classified? Many articles on these questions appeared in linguistic periodicals about the year 1880, but the profoundest and fullest treatment was found in a masterly book by H. Paul, Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte, the first edition of which (1880) exercised a very considerable influence on linguistic thought, while the subsequent editions were constantly enlarged and improved so as to contain a wealth of carefully sifted material to illustrate the various processes of linguistic change. It should also be noted that Paul paid more and more attention to syntax, and that this part of grammar, which had been neglected by Bopp and Schleicher and their contemporaries, was about this time taken up by some[96] of the leading linguists, who showed that the comparative and historical method was capable of throwing a flood of light on syntax no less than on morphology (Delbrück, Ziemer).
Linguists began to seriously consider language in terms of individuals who learned their native language in a normal way and who now use it in their everyday interactions with others, often without realizing what they owe to those before them and what they create on the spot. Just as Socrates brought philosophy down from the heavens, linguists now took words and forms from dictionaries and grammar books and placed them where they truly belong: in the minds and on the lips of ordinary people who are neither lexicographers nor grammarians, yet manage to use their language with enough ease and accuracy for everyday needs. Linguists faced some general issues that hadn't really troubled their predecessors (with the one exception of Bredsdorff, whose work was largely ignored), namely, What are the causes of changes in language? How do these changes happen, and how should they be categorized? Many articles on these topics appeared in linguistic journals around 1880, but the most thorough and comprehensive treatment was found in a remarkable book by H. Paul, Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte, the first edition of which (1880) had a significant impact on linguistic thought, while later editions continued to expand and improve, containing a wealth of thoroughly examined material to illustrate the various processes of language change. It's also worth noting that Paul gradually focused more on syntax, a part of grammar that had been overlooked by Bopp, Schleicher, and their contemporaries, and around this time, some of the leading linguists began to explore syntax, showing that the comparative and historical method could shed as much light on syntax as it did on morphology (Delbrück, Ziemer).
IV.—§ 4. General Tendencies.
While linguists in the ’eighties were taking up, as we have seen, a great many questions of vast general importance that had not been treated by the older generation, on the other hand they were losing interest in some of the problems that had occupied their predecessors. This was the case with the question of the ultimate origin of grammatical endings. So late as 1869 Benfey included among Bopp’s ‘brilliant discoveries’ his theory that the s of the aorist and of the future was derived from the verb as, ‘to be,’ and that the endings of the Latin imperfect -bam and future -bo were from the synonymous verb fu = Sanskrit bhu (Gesch 377), and the next year Raumer reckons the same theories among Bopp’s ‘most important discoveries.’ But soon after this we see that speculations of this kind somehow go out of fashion. One of the last books to indulge in them to any extent is Scherer’s once famous Zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache (2nd ed., 1878), in the eighth chapter of which the writer disports himself among primitive roots, endings, prepositions and pronouns, which he identifies and differentiates with such extreme boldness and confidence in his own wild fancies that a sober-minded man of the twentieth century cannot but feel dazed and giddy. The ablest linguists of the new school simply left these theories aside: no new explanations of the same description were advanced, and the old ones were not substantiated by the ascertained phenomena of living languages. So much was found in these of the most absorbing interest that scholars ceased to care for what might lie behind Proto-Aryan; some even went so far as to deprecate in strong expressions any attempts at what they termed ‘glottogonic’ theories. To these matter-of-fact linguists all speculations as to the ultimate origin of language were futile and nebulous, a verdict which might be in no small degree justified by much of what had been written on the subject by quasi-philosophers and quasi-linguists. The aversion to these questions was shown as early as 1866, when La Société de Linguistique was founded in Paris. Section 2 of the statutes of the Society expressly states that “La Société n’admet aucune communication concernant, soit l’origine du langage, soit la création d’une langue universelle”—both of them questions which, as they can be treated in a scientific spirit, should not be left exclusively to dilettanti.
While linguists in the '80s were tackling many important questions that hadn’t been addressed by the previous generation, they were also losing interest in some problems that had concerned their predecessors. This was true for the question of the ultimate origin of grammatical endings. As late as 1869, Benfey included in Bopp’s ‘brilliant discoveries’ his theory that the s of the aorist and future came from the verb as, ‘to be,’ and that the endings of the Latin imperfect -bam and future -bo were derived from the equivalent verb fu = Sanskrit bhu (Gesch 377). The following year, Raumer considered these theories among Bopp’s ‘most important discoveries.’ However, shortly after this, we see that speculations of this kind began to fall out of favor. One of the last books to engage significantly in these ideas was Scherer’s once-popular Zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache (2nd ed., 1878), in which the author plays with primitive roots, endings, prepositions, and pronouns, identifying and differentiating them with such boldness and confidence in his imaginative ideas that a level-headed person from the twentieth century can’t help but feel bewildered. The leading linguists of the new generation simply set these theories aside: no new explanations of a similar nature were proposed, and the old ones weren’t supported by the observed phenomena of living languages. There was so much of significant interest found in these that scholars stopped caring about what might lie behind Proto-Aryan; some even went as far as to strongly criticize any attempts at what they labeled ‘glottogonic’ theories. To these pragmatic linguists, all speculations about the ultimate origin of language were pointless and vague, a judgment which could be largely justified by much of what had been written on the topic by semi-philosophers and semi-linguists. The aversion to these questions was evident as early as 1866, when The Linguistic Society was founded in Paris. Section 2 of the Society's statutes explicitly states that “The Society does not accept any communication regarding either the origin of language or the creation of a universal language.”—both of which, as they can be discussed in a scientific way, should not be relegated entirely to amateurs.
The last forty years have witnessed an extraordinary activity on the part of scholars in investigating all domains of the Aryan languages in the light of the new general views and by the aid of the methods that have now become common property. Phonological investigations have no doubt had the lion’s share and have to a great extent been signalized by that real insight into physiological phonetics which had been wanting in earlier linguists; but very much excellent work has also been done in morphology, syntax and semantics; and in all these domains much has been gained by considering words not as mere isolated units, but as parts of sentences, or, better, of connected speech. In phonetics more and more attention has been paid to sentence phonetics and ‘sandhi phenomena’; the heightened interest in everything concerning ‘accent’ (stress and pitch) has also led to investigations of sentence-stress and sentence-melody; the intimate connexion between forms and their use or function in the sentence, in other words their syntax, has been more and more recognized; and finally, if semantics (the study of the significations of words) has become a real science instead of being a curiosity shop of isolated specimens, this has only been rendered possible through seeing words as connected with other words to form complete utterances. But this change of attitude could not have been brought about unless linguists had studied texts in the different languages to a far greater extent than had been done in previous periods; thus, naturally, the antagonism formerly often felt between the linguistic and the purely philological study of the same language has tended to disappear, and many scholars have produced work both in their particular branch of linguistics and in the corresponding philology. There can be no doubt that this development has been profitable to both domains of scientific activity.
The last forty years have seen an incredible effort by scholars to explore all areas of the Aryan languages, informed by new general perspectives and by methods that are now widely used. Phonological research has certainly taken the lead and has been notably enhanced by a genuine understanding of physiological phonetics that was lacking in earlier linguists. However, a lot of great work has also been accomplished in morphology, syntax, and semantics; in all these areas, significant progress has been made by viewing words not as isolated units but as parts of sentences, or even better, as components of connected speech. In phonetics, there has been increasing focus on sentence phonetics and 'sandhi phenomena'; the growing interest in everything related to 'accent' (stress and pitch) has also spurred research into sentence stress and sentence melody; the close relationship between forms and their function or use in sentences, or in other words, their syntax, has been increasingly acknowledged; and finally, if semantics (the study of word meanings) has evolved into a true science rather than being a collection of random examples, this shift has only been possible by viewing words as connected with other words to form complete statements. However, this change in perspective wouldn't have occurred if linguists hadn’t studied texts in various languages much more extensively than in the past; thus, the previously common conflict between linguistic study and purely philological analysis of the same language has gradually faded, and many scholars have produced work in both their specific areas of linguistics and the related philology. There’s no doubt that this development has been beneficial to both fields of scientific inquiry.
Another beneficial change is the new attitude taken with regard to the study of living speech. The science of linguistics had long stood in the sign of Cancer and had been constantly looking backwards—to its own great loss. Now, with the greater stress laid on phonetics and on the psychology of language, the necessity of observing the phenomena of actual everyday speech was more clearly perceived. Among pioneers in this respect I must specially mention Henry Sweet; now there is a steadily growing interest in living speech as the necessary foundation of all general theorizing. And with interest comes knowledge.
Another positive change is the new attitude toward studying everyday language. The field of linguistics had been stuck in the past for a long time, to its own detriment. Now, with more emphasis placed on phonetics and the psychology of language, it's become clearer that observing real, everyday speech is essential. I want to highlight Henry Sweet as a key pioneer in this area; there is now a growing interest in living speech as the fundamental basis for all broader theories. And with that interest, knowledge is expanding.
It is outside the purpose of this volume to give the history of linguistic study during the last forty years in the same way as I have attempted to give it for the period before 1880, and I must therefore content myself with a few brief remarks on[98] general tendencies. I even withstand the temptation to try and characterize the two greatest works on general linguistics that have appeared during this period, those by Georg v. d. Gabelentz and Wilhelm Wundt: important and in many ways excellent as they are, they have not exercised the same influence on contemporary linguistic research as some of their predecessors. Personally I owe incomparably much more to the former than to the latter, who is much less of a linguist than of a psychologist and whose pages seem to me often richer in words than in fertilizing ideas. As for the rest, I can give only a bare alphabetical list of some of the writers who during this period have dealt with the more general problems of linguistic change or linguistic theory, and must not attempt any appreciation of their works: Bally, Baudouin de Courtenay, Bloomfield, Bréal, Delbrück, van Ginneken, Hale, Henry, Hirt, Axel Kock, Meillet, Meringer, Noreen, Oertel, Pedersen, Sandfeld (Jensen), de Saussure, Schuchardt, Sechehaye, Streitberg, Sturtevant, Sütterlin, Sweet, Uhlenbeck, Vossler, Wechssler. In the following parts of my work there will be many opportunities of mentioning their views, especially when I disagree with them, for I am afraid it will be impossible always to indicate what I owe to their suggestions.
It's not the goal of this volume to provide the history of linguistic study over the past forty years in the same way I have for the period before 1880, so I’ll stick to a few brief comments on[98]general trends. I even resist the temptation to summarize the two major works on general linguistics that have come out during this time, by Georg v. d. Gabelentz and Wilhelm Wundt. While they are important and often very good, they haven't had the same impact on contemporary linguistic research as some of their predecessors. Personally, I owe much more to the former than to the latter, who is more of a psychologist than a linguist, and whose writing often feels fuller of words than of truly insightful ideas. As for the others, I can only provide a simple alphabetical list of some writers who have tackled broader issues related to linguistic change or theory during this time, without attempting to assess their contributions: Bally, Baudouin de Courtenay, Bloomfield, Bréal, Delbrück, van Ginneken, Hale, Henry, Hirt, Axel Kock, Meillet, Meringer, Noreen, Oertel, Pedersen, Sandfeld (Jensen), de Saussure, Schuchardt, Sechehaye, Streitberg, Sturtevant, Sütterlin, Sweet, Uhlenbeck, Vossler, Wechssler. In the following parts of my work, I will frequently mention their perspectives, particularly when I disagree with them, as I’m afraid it will be impossible to consistently indicate what I owe to their suggestions.
In the history of linguistic science we have seen in one period a tendency to certain large syntheses (the classification of languages into isolating, agglutinative and flexional, and the corresponding theory of three periods with its corollary touching the origin of flexional endings), and we have seen how these syntheses were later discredited, though never actually disproved, linguists contenting themselves with detailed comparisons and explanations of single words, forms or sounds without troubling about their ultimate origin or about the evolutionary tendencies of the whole system or structure of language. The question may therefore be raised, were Bopp and Schleicher wrong in attempting these large syntheses? It would appear from the expressions of some modern linguists that they thought that any such comprehensive generalization or any glottogonic theory were in itself of evil. But this can never be admitted. Science, of its very nature, aims at larger and larger generalizations, more and more comprehensive formulas, so as finally to bring about that “unification of knowledge” of which Herbert Spencer speaks. It was therefore quite right of the early linguists to propound those great questions; and their failure to solve them in a way that could satisfy the stricter demands of a later generation should not be charged too heavily against them. It was also quite right of the moderns to reject their premature solutions (though this was often done without any adequate examination), but[99] it was decidedly wrong to put the questions out of court altogether.[16] These great questions have to be put over and over again, till a complete solution is found; and the refusal to face these difficulties has produced a certain barrenness in modern linguistics, which must strike any impartial observer, however much he admits the fertility of the science in detailed investigations. Breadth of vision is not conspicuous in modern linguistics, and to my mind this lack is chiefly due to the fact that linguists have neglected all problems connected with a valuation of language. What is the criterion by which one word or one form should be preferred to another? (most linguists refuse to deal with such questions of preference or of correctness of speech). Are the changes that we see gradually taking place in languages to be considered as on the whole beneficial or the opposite? (most linguists pooh-pooh such questions). Would it be possible to construct an international language by which persons in different countries could easily communicate with one another? (most linguists down to the present day have looked upon all who favour such ideas as visionaries and Utopians). It is my firm conviction that such questions as these admit of really scientific treatment and should be submitted to serious discussion. But before tackling those of them which fall within the plan of this work, it will be well to deal with some fundamental facts of what is popularly called the ‘life’ of language, and first of all with the manner in which a child acquires its mother-tongue. For as language exists only in individuals and means some specific activities of human beings which are not inborn, but have to be learnt by each of them separately from his fellow-beings, it is important to examine somewhat in detail how this interaction of the individual and of the surrounding society is brought about. This, then, will occupy us in Book II.
In the history of language science, there was a time when researchers aimed for big theories, like classifying languages as isolating, agglutinative, and flexional and proposing a theory that divides language evolution into three stages, including ideas about the origins of flexional endings. Later, these big ideas were discredited, though not actually disproven. Linguists settled for detailed comparisons and explanations of individual words, forms, or sounds without digging into their ultimate origins or the evolutionary trends of the entire language system. This raises the question: were Bopp and Schleicher wrong to pursue these comprehensive theories? Some modern linguists seem to suggest that making broad generalizations or any unifying theory is inherently problematic. However, that's not a valid position. Science, by its nature, strives for broader generalizations and more comprehensive formulas to achieve what Herbert Spencer called “the unification of knowledge.” So it was entirely appropriate for earlier linguists to ask these big questions, and their inability to provide satisfying answers for a later generation shouldn't be held too harshly against them. Modern linguists were also right to dismiss their premature solutions (even though this often happened without thorough evaluation), but it was definitely wrong to disregard these questions altogether. These significant questions need to be revisited repeatedly until we find complete answers. The refusal to confront these challenges has led to a certain lack of creativity in modern linguistics, which any unbiased observer would notice, regardless of how productive the field has been in detailed studies. Modern linguistics lacks broad thinking, and I believe this is mainly because linguists have ignored issues related to valuing language. What criteria should be used to prefer one word or form over another? (Most linguists avoid tackling questions of preference or correct language usage.) Are the gradual changes we see in languages overall positive or negative? (Most linguists dismiss these inquiries.) Is it possible to create an international language that allows people from different countries to communicate easily? (Most linguists still regard those who support such ideas as dreamers and idealists.) I firmly believe that these questions can be studied scientifically and should be discussed seriously. However, before we tackle those that align with this work's objectives, we should first address some fundamental facts about what people commonly refer to as the ‘life’ of language, starting with how a child learns its native language. Since language exists only in individuals and represents specific human activities that are not innate but must be learned from others, it’s essential to examine in detail how this interaction between individuals and their social environment occurs. This will be the focus of Book II.
CHAPTER V
SOUNDS
§ 1. From Screaming to Talking. § 2. First Sounds. § 3. Sound-laws of the Next Stage. § 4. Groups of Sounds. § 5. Mutilations and Reduplications. § 6. Correction. § 7. Tone.
§ 1. From Screaming to Talking. § 2. First Sounds. § 3. Sound laws of the Next Stage. § 4. Groups of Sounds. § 5. Mutilations and Reduplications. § 6. Correction. § 7. Tone.
V.—§ 1. From Screaming to Talking.
A Danish philosopher has said: “In his whole life man achieves nothing so great and so wonderful as what he achieved when he learnt to talk.” When Darwin was asked in which three years of his life a man learnt most, he said: “The first three.”
A Danish philosopher once said, “In his entire life, a person accomplishes nothing as significant and remarkable as when he learns to talk.” When Darwin was asked during which three years of a man’s life he learns the most, he answered, “The first three.”
A child’s linguistic development covers three periods—the screaming time, the crowing or babbling time, and the talking time. But the last is a long one, and must again be divided into two periods—that of the “little language,” the child’s own language, and that of the common language or language of the community. In the former the child is linguistically an individualist, in the latter he is more and more socialized.
A child's language development includes three stages—the crying stage, the cooing or babbling stage, and the talking stage. However, the talking stage is lengthy and can be further divided into two phases: the "little language," which is the child's personal way of speaking, and the common language or the language of the community. In the first phase, the child is more of an individualist in their language use, while in the second phase, they become increasingly socialized.
Of the screaming time little need be said. A child’s scream is not uttered primarily as a means of conveying anything to others, and so far is not properly to be called speech. But if from the child’s side a scream is not a way of telling anything, its elders may still read something in it and hurry to relieve the trouble. And if the child comes to remark—as it soon will—that whenever it cries someone comes and brings it something pleasant, if only company, it will not be long till it makes use of this instrument whenever it is uneasy or wants something. The scream, which was at first a reflex action, is now a voluntary action. And many parents have discovered that the child has learnt to use its power of screaming to exercise a tyrannical power over them—so that they have had to walk up and down all night with a screaming child that prefers this way of spending the night to lying quietly in its cradle. The only course is brutally to let the baby scream till it is tired, and persist in never letting it get its desire because it screams for it, but only because what it desires is good for it. The child learns its lesson, and a scream is once more what it was at first, an involuntary, irresistible result of the fact that something is wrong.
Not much needs to be said about the screaming phase. A child's scream isn't primarily meant to communicate anything to others, so it doesn't really count as speech. However, while a scream doesn’t inform, adults can still interpret it and rush to provide comfort. If the child realizes—which it will—that whenever it cries, someone comes and offers something nice, even just company, it won’t take long before it uses this tactic whenever it’s upset or wants something. What started as a reflex action becomes a deliberate one. Many parents have found that their child has figured out how to use screaming as a way to control them—leading to sleepless nights spent walking around with a screaming child who prefers this over lying quietly in the crib. The best approach is to let the baby scream until it tires out and to resist giving in to its demands just because it screams, but only providing what’s good for it. The child learns its lesson, and a scream once again becomes what it originally was: an involuntary, uncontrollable response to something being wrong.
Screaming has, however, another side. It is of physiological value as an exercise of all the muscles and appliances which are afterwards to be called into play for speech and song. Nurses say—and there may be something in it—that the child who screams loudest as a baby becomes the best singer later.
Screaming has, however, another side. It's actually good for you as it exercises all the muscles and tools that will later be used for speaking and singing. Nurses say—and there might be some truth to it—that the child who screams the loudest as a baby grows up to be the best singer.
Babbling time produces pleasanter sounds which are more adapted for the purposes of speech. Cooing, crowing, babbling—i.e. uttering meaningless sounds and series of sounds—is a delightful exercise like sprawling with outstretched arms and legs or trying to move the tiny fingers. It has been well said that for a long time a child’s dearest toy is its tongue—that is, of course, not the tongue only, but the other organs of speech as well, especially the lips and vocal chords. At first the movements of these organs are as uncontrolled as those of the arms, but gradually they become more systematic, and the boy knows what sound he wishes to utter and is in a position to produce it exactly.
Babbling creates more pleasant sounds that are better suited for communicating. Cooing, crowing, and babbling—making meaningless sounds and combinations of sounds—is a fun activity, similar to stretching out with arms and legs or trying to move tiny fingers. It’s often said that for a long time, a child’s favorite toy is its tongue—not just the tongue, but also the other speech organs, especially the lips and vocal cords. Initially, the movements of these organs are as uncoordinated as those of the arms, but over time they become more organized, and the child starts to know what sound they want to make and can produce it accurately.
First, then, come single vowels or vowels with a single consonant preceding them, as la, ra, lö, etc., though a baby’s sounds cannot be identified with any of ours or written down with our letters. For, though the head and consequently the mouth capacity is disproportionally great in an infant and grows more rapidly than its limbs, there is still a great difference between its mouth capacity and that required to utter normal speech-sounds. I have elsewhere (PhG, p. 81 ff.) given the results of a series of measurings of the jaw in children and adults and discussed the importance of these figures for phonetic theory: while there is no growth of any importance during the talking period (for a child of five may have the same jaw-length as a man of thirty-seven), the growth is enormous during the first months of a child’s life: in the case of my own child, from 45 mm. a few days after birth to 60 mm. at three months old and 75 mm. at eleven months, while the average of grown-up men is 99 mm. and of women 93 mm. The consequence is that the sounds of the baby are different from ours, and that even when they resemble ours the mechanism of production may be different from the normal one; when my son during the first weeks said something like la, I was able to see distinctly that the tip of the tongue was not at all in the position required for our l. This want of congruence between the acoustic manners of operation in the infant and the adult no doubt gives us the key to many of the difficulties that have puzzled previous observers of small children.
First, we have single vowels or vowels with a single consonant before them, like la, ra, lö, etc., but a baby’s sounds can’t be matched to ours or written down with our letters. Even though a baby's head and mouth are much larger compared to their limbs and grow quickly, there’s still a significant difference between their mouth capacity and what’s needed to make normal speech sounds. I have previously shared (PhG, p. 81 ff.) the results from a series of measurements of jaws in children and adults and discussed what these figures mean for phonetic theory: while there isn’t much change during the talking phase (for a five-year-old might have the same jaw length as a thirty-seven-year-old man), there’s significant growth in the first months of life: in the case of my child, the jaw expanded from 45 mm a few days after birth to 60 mm at three months and 75 mm at eleven months, while the average for adult men is 99 mm and for women is 93 mm. This means that a baby’s sounds differ from ours, and even when they sound similar, the way they’re produced may not match our normal method; when my son said something like la in his first weeks, I could see that the tip of his tongue wasn't positioned as it should be for our l. This mismatch between how infants and adults produce sounds likely explains many of the challenges that have confused those who study small children.
Babbling or crowing begins not earlier than the third week; it may be, not till the seventh or eighth week. The first sound exercises are to be regarded as muscular exercises pure and simple, as is clear from the fact that deaf-mutes amuse themselves with[105] them, although they cannot themselves hear them. But the moment comes when the hearing child finds a pleasure in hearing its own sounds, and a most important step is taken when the little one begins to hear a resemblance between the sounds uttered by its mother or nurse and its own. The mother will naturally answer the baby’s syllables by repeating the same, and when the baby recognizes the likeness, it secures an inexhaustible source of pleasure, and after some time reaches the next stage, when it tries itself to imitate what is said to it (generally towards the close of the first year). The value of this exercise cannot be over-estimated: the more that parents understand how to play this game with the baby—of saying something and letting the baby say it after, however meaningless the syllable-sequences that they make—the better will be the foundation for the child’s later acquisition and command of language.
Babbling or cooing starts no earlier than the third week; it might not even begin until the seventh or eighth week. The first sounds are really just muscle exercises, which is evident because deaf-mutes enjoy making these sounds even though they can’t hear them. But then comes a moment when a hearing child finds joy in hearing their own sounds, and a significant milestone is reached when the child starts to notice similarities between the sounds made by their mother or caregiver and their own. Naturally, the mother will respond to the baby’s sounds by mimicking them, and when the baby recognizes this connection, it creates an endless source of enjoyment. Eventually, usually by the end of the first year, the baby will try to imitate what’s being said. The importance of this exercise can’t be overstated: the more parents engage in this back-and-forth with the baby—by saying something and encouraging the baby to repeat it, no matter how nonsensical the sounds may be—the stronger the foundation will be for the child's future language skills.
V.—§ 2. First Sounds.
It is generally said that the order in which the child learns to utter the different sounds depends on their difficulty: the easiest sounds are produced first. That is no doubt true in the main; but when we go into details we find that different writers bring forward lists of sounds in different order. All are agreed, however, that among the consonants the labials, p, b and m, are early sounds, if not the earliest. The explanation has been given that the child can see the working of his mother’s lips in these sounds and therefore imitates her movements. This implies far too much conscious thought on the part of the baby, who utters his ‘ma’ or ‘mo’ before he begins to imitate anything said to him by his surroundings. Moreover, it has been pointed out that the child’s attention is hardly ever given to its mother’s mouth, but is steadily fixed on her eyes. The real reason is probably that the labial muscles used to produce b or m are the same that the baby has exercised in sucking the breast or the bottle. It would be interesting to learn if blind children also produce the labial sounds first.
It’s commonly believed that the order in which a child learns to make different sounds depends on their difficulty; the easiest sounds come first. This is mostly true, but when we look closely, we see that different authors present lists of sounds in varying sequences. However, everyone agrees that among consonants, the labials, p, b, and m, are often learned early, if not the earliest. One explanation is that the child can see their mother’s lips moving while making these sounds, so they imitate her. This assumes a lot of conscious thought from the baby, who says 'ma' or 'mo' before they start imitating anything from their environment. Also, it’s noted that a child rarely fixates on their mother’s mouth and is usually focused on her eyes. The real reason is likely that the labial muscles used to make b or m are the same ones the baby has been using when sucking on the breast or bottle. It would be interesting to know if blind children also produce labial sounds first.
Along with the labial sounds the baby produces many other sounds—vowel and consonant—and in these cases one is certain that it has not been able to see how these sounds are produced by its mother. Even in the case of the labials we know that what distinguishes m from b, the lowering of the soft palate, and b from p, the vibrations of the vocal chords, is invisible. Some of the sounds produced by means of the tongue may be too hard to pronounce till the muscles of the tongue have been exercised in consequence of the child having begun to eat more solid things than milk.
Along with the sounds made with its lips, the baby produces many other sounds—both vowels and consonants—and in these cases, we can be sure it hasn’t seen how its mother makes those sounds. Even with the lip sounds, we know that what makes m different from b is the lowering of the soft palate, and b differs from p due to the vibrations of the vocal cords, which are invisible. Some of the sounds made using the tongue might be too difficult to pronounce until the tongue muscles have been exercised because the child has started eating more solid foods instead of just milk.
By the end of the first year the number of sounds which the little babbler has mastered is already considerable, and he loves to combine long series of the same syllables, dadadada ..., nenenene ..., bygnbygnbygn ..., etc. That is a game which need not even cease when the child is able to talk actual language. It is strange that among an infant’s sounds one can often detect sounds—for instance k, g, h, and uvular r—which the child will find difficulty in producing afterwards when they occur in real words, or which may be unknown to the language which it will some day speak. The explanation lies probably in the difference between doing a thing in play or without a plan—when it is immaterial which movement (sound) is made—and doing the same thing of fixed intention when this sound, and this sound only, is required, at a definite point in the syllable, and with this or that particular sound before and after. Accordingly, great difficulties come to be encountered when the child begins more consciously and systematically to imitate his elders. Some sounds come without effort and may be used incessantly, to the detriment of others which the child may have been able previously to produce in play; and a time even comes when the stock of sounds actually diminishes, while particular sounds acquire greater precision. Dancing masters, singing masters and gymnastic teachers have similar experiences. After some lessons the child may seem more awkward than it was before the lessons began.
By the end of the first year, the number of sounds the little chatterbox has learned is already quite impressive, and they love to string together long sequences of the same syllables, like dadadada ..., nenenene ..., bygnbygnbygn ..., etc. This is a game that can continue even after the child starts speaking actual words. It's interesting that among a baby’s sounds, you can often hear sounds—like k, g, h, and the uvular r—that the child will struggle to produce later when they appear in real words, or that may not even exist in the language they will eventually speak. This likely has to do with the difference between doing something playfully or spontaneously—when it doesn't matter which sound is made—and doing it with a specific intention, where this sound and this sound only is needed at a certain point in the syllable, with particular sounds before and after. As a result, children face significant challenges when they start to imitate adults more consciously and systematically. Some sounds can come easily and be used repeatedly, which can negatively affect others that the child was previously able to make while playing. There may even come a time when the variety of sounds they can produce actually decreases, while specific sounds become more refined. Dance instructors, vocal coaches, and gym teachers often observe similar situations. After a few lessons, the child may seem clumsier than they were before the lessons started.
The ‘little language’ which the child makes for itself by imperfect imitation of the sounds of its elders seems so arbitrary that it may well be compared to the child’s first rude drawings of men and animals. A Danish boy named Gustav (1.6)[17] called himself [dodado] and turned the name Karoline into [nnn]. Other Danish children made skammel into [gramn] or [gap], elefant into [vat], Karen into [gaja], etc. A few examples from English children: Hilary M. (1.6) called Ireland (her sister) [a·ni], Gordon M. (1.10) called Millicent (his sister) [dadu·]. Tony E. (1.11) called his playmate Sheila [dubabud].
The "little language" that a child creates for itself through the imperfect imitation of the sounds made by adults seems so random that it can be likened to the child's first rough drawings of people and animals. A Danish boy named Gustav (1.6)[17] referred to himself as [dodado] and transformed the name Karoline into [nnn]. Other Danish children changed skammel to [gramn] or [gap], elefant to [vat], Karen to [gaja], and so on. Here are a few examples from English children: Hilary M. (1.6) called Ireland (her sister) [a·ni], Gordon M. (1.10) called Millicent (his sister) [dadu·]. Tony E. (1.11) referred to his playmate Sheila as [dubabud].
V.—§ 3. Sound-laws of the Next Stage.
As the child gets away from the peculiarities of his individual ‘little language,’ his speech becomes more regular, and a linguist can in many cases see reasons for his distortions of normal words. When he replaces one sound by another there is always some common element in the formation of the two sounds, which causes[107] a kindred impression on the ear, though we may have difficulty in detecting it because we are so accustomed to noticing the difference. There is generally a certain system in the sound substitutions of children, and in many instances we are justified in speaking of ‘strictly observed sound-laws.’ Let us now look at some of these.
As the child moves away from the quirks of their unique 'little language,' their speech becomes more consistent, and a linguist can often find reasons for their mispronunciations of standard words. When they swap one sound for another, there’s usually a shared feature in how the two sounds are produced, which creates a similar impression on the ear, even though we might struggle to identify it because we’re so used to picking up on the differences. There’s often a certain pattern in the way children substitute sounds, and in many cases, it makes sense to refer to these as 'strictly observed sound laws.' Now, let’s explore some of these.
Children in all countries tend to substitute [t] for [k]: both sounds are produced by a complete stoppage of the breath for the moment by the tongue, the only difference being that it is the back of the tongue which acts in one case, and the tip of the tongue in the other. A child who substitutes t for k will also substitute d for g; if he says ‘tat’ for ‘cat’ he will say ‘do’ for ‘go.’
Children everywhere often swap [t] for [k]: both sounds are made by completely stopping the airflow briefly with the tongue, but the only difference is that the back of the tongue is used in one case and the tip in the other. A child who says t instead of k will also say d instead of g; if they say ‘tat’ for ‘cat,’ they will say ‘do’ for ‘go.’
R is a difficult sound. Hilary M. (2.0) has no r’s in her speech. Initially they become w, as in [wʌn] for ‘run,’ medially between vowels they become l, as in [veli, beli] for ‘very, berry,’ in consonantal combinations they are lost, as in [kai, bʌʃ] for ‘cry, brush.’ Tony E. (1.10 to 3.0) for medial r between vowels first substituted d, as in [vedi] for ‘very,’ and later g [vegi]; similarly in [mu·gi] for ‘Muriel,’ [tægi] for ‘carry’; he often dropped initial r, e.g. oom for ‘room.’ It is not unusual for children who use w for r in most combinations to say [tʃ] for tr and [dʒ] for dr, as in ‘chee,’ ‘jawer’ for ‘tree,’ ‘drawer.’ This illustrates the fact that what to us is one sound, and therefore represented in writing by one letter, appears to the child’s ear as different sounds—and generally the phonetician will agree with the child that there are really differences in the articulation of the sound according to position in the syllable and to surroundings, only the child exaggerates the dissimilarities, just as we in writing one and the same letter exaggerate the similarity.
R is a tough sound. Hilary M. (2.0) doesn’t have any r sounds in her speech. At first, they turn into w, like [wʌn] for ‘run’; in the middle of vowels, they become l, like [veli, beli] for ‘very, berry’; in consonant combos, they’re dropped, like [kai, bʌʃ] for ‘cry, brush.’ Tony E. (1.10 to 3.0) first replaced medial r between vowels with d, like [vedi] for ‘very,’ and later with g, [vegi]; similarly, he said [mu·gi] for ‘Muriel,’ [tægi] for ‘carry’; he often dropped the initial r, saying oom for ‘room.’ It's not unusual for kids who use w for r in most cases to say [tʃ] for tr and [dʒ] for dr, like ‘chee,’ ‘jawer’ for ‘tree,’ ‘drawer.’ This shows that what we hear as one sound, and is written with one letter, sounds different to a child—and generally, phoneticians agree with the child that there are real differences in how the sound is produced based on its position in the syllable and its surroundings; however, the child tends to exaggerate those differences, just as we tend to exaggerate the similarities when writing the same letter.
The two th sounds offer some difficulties and are often imitated as f and v respectively, as in ‘frow’ and ‘muvver’ for ‘throw’ and ‘mother’; others say ‘ze’ or ‘de’ for ‘the.’ Hilary M. (2.0) has great difficulty with th and s; th usually becomes [ʃ], [beʃ, ti·ʃ, ʃri·] for ‘Beth,’ ‘teeth,’ ‘three’; s becomes [ʃ], e.g. [franʃiʃ, ʃti·m] for ‘Francis,’ ‘steam’; in the same way z becomes [ʒ] as in [lʌbʒ, bouʒ] for ‘loves,’ ‘Bowes’; sw becomes [fw] as in [fwiŋ, fwi·t] for ‘swing,’ ‘sweet.’ She drops l in consonantal combinations, e.g. [ki·n, kaim, kɔk, ʃi·p] for ‘clean,’ ‘climb,’ ‘clock,’ ‘sleep.’
The two th sounds can be tricky and are often replaced with f and v, like saying ‘frow’ and ‘muvver’ instead of ‘throw’ and ‘mother.’ Some people say ‘ze’ or ‘de’ for ‘the.’ Hilary M. (2.0) struggles a lot with th and s; th usually turns into [ʃ], so she says [beʃ, ti·ʃ, ʃri·] for ‘Beth,’ ‘teeth,’ ‘three’; s becomes [ʃ] too, like [franʃiʃ, ʃti·m] for ‘Francis,’ ‘steam’; similarly, z turns into [ʒ] as in [lʌbʒ, bouʒ] for ‘loves,’ ‘Bowes’; sw becomes [fw] as in [fwiŋ, fwi·t] for ‘swing,’ ‘sweet.’ She also drops l in consonant clusters, saying [ki·n, kaim, kɔk, ʃi·p] for ‘clean,’ ‘climb,’ ‘clock,’ ‘sleep.’
Sometimes it requires a phonetician’s knowledge to understand the individual sound-laws of a child. Thus I pick out from some specimens given by O’Shea, p. 135 f. (girl, 2.9), the following words: pell (smell), teeze (sneeze), poke (smoke), tow (snow), and formulate the rule: s + a nasal became the voiceless stop corre[108]sponding to the nasal, a kind of assimilation, in which the place of articulation and the mouth-closure of the nasals were preserved, and the sound was made unvoiced and non-nasal as the s. In other combinations m and n were intact.
Sometimes it takes a phonetician’s expertise to understand the specific sound patterns of a child. For example, I picked out some examples provided by O’Shea, p. 135 f. (girl, 2.9), which include the following words: pell (smell), teeze (sneeze), poke (smoke), tow (snow), and I formulate the rule: s + a nasal became the voiceless stop corresponding to the nasal, a type of assimilation where the articulation and closure of the nasals were preserved, and the sound was made voiceless and non-nasal like s. In other combinations, m and n remained unchanged.
Some further faults are illustrated in Tony E.’s [tʃouz, pʌg, pus, tæm, pʌm, bæk, pi·z, nouʒ, ɔk, es, u·] for clothes, plug, push, tram, plum, black, please, nose, clock, yes, you.
Some additional mistakes are shown in Tony E.’s [tʃouz, pʌg, pus, tæm, pʌm, bæk, pi·z, nouʒ, ɔk, es, u·] for clothes, plug, push, tram, plum, black, please, nose, clock, yes, you.
V.—§ 4. Groups of Sounds.
Even when a sound by itself can be pronounced, the child often finds it hard to pronounce it when it forms part of a group of sounds. S is often dropped before another consonant, as in ‘tummy’ for ‘stomach.’ Other examples have already been given above. Hilary M. (2.0) had difficulty with lp and said [hæpl] for ‘help.’ She also said [ointən] for ‘ointment’; C. M. L. (2.3) said ‘sikkums’ for ‘sixpence.’ Tony E. (2.0) turns grannie into [nægi]. When initial consonant groups are simplified, it is generally, though not always, the stop that remains: b instead of bl-, br-, k instead of kr-, sk-, skr-, p instead of pl-, pr-, spr-, etc. For the groups occurring medially and finally no general rule seems possible.
Even when a sound can be pronounced on its own, kids often have a hard time saying it when it's part of a group of sounds. S is often dropped before another consonant, like saying ‘tummy’ instead of ‘stomach.’ Other examples have already been mentioned above. Hilary M. (2.0) struggled with lp and said [hæpl] for ‘help.’ She also said [ointən] for ‘ointment’; C. M. L. (2.3) said ‘sikkums’ for ‘sixpence.’ Tony E. (2.0) turns grannie into [nægi]. When initial consonant groups are simplified, it's usually, but not always, the stop that stays: b instead of bl-, br-, k instead of kr-, sk-, skr-, p instead of pl-, pr-, spr-, etc. For the groups that appear in the middle and at the end, there doesn't seem to be a general rule.
V.—§ 5. Mutilations and Reduplications.
To begin with, the child is unable to master long sequences of syllables; he prefers monosyllables and often emits them singly and separated by pauses. Even in words that to us are inseparable wholes some children will make breaks between syllables, e.g. Shef-field, Ing-land. But more often they will give only part of the word, generally the last syllable or syllables; hence we get pet-names like Bet or Beth for Elizabeth and forms like ‘tatoes’ for potatoes, ‘chine’ for machine, ‘tina’ for concertina, ‘tash’ for moustache, etc. Hilary M. (1.10) called an express-cart a press-cart, bananas and pyjamas nanas and jamas.
To start, the child struggles to handle long sequences of syllables; they prefer single-syllable words and often say them one at a time with pauses in between. Even with words that seem completely connected to us, some children will break them into syllables, like Shef-field or Ing-land. More commonly, they will say only part of the word, usually the last syllable or syllables; this is why we hear nicknames like Bet or Beth for Elizabeth and forms like ‘tatoes’ for potatoes, ‘chine’ for machine, ‘tina’ for concertina, ‘tash’ for moustache, etc. Hilary M. (1.10) referred to an express-cart as a press-cart, and called bananas and pyjamas nanas and jamas.
It is not, however, the production of long sequences of syllables in itself that is difficult to the child, for in its meaningless babbling it may begin very early to pronounce long strings of sounds without any break; but the difficulty is to remember what sounds have to be put together to bring about exactly this or that word. We grown-up people may experience just the same sort of difficulty if after hearing once the long name of a Bulgarian minister or a Sanskrit book we are required to repeat it at once. Hence we should not wonder at such pronunciations as [pekəlout] for petticoat or [efelənt] for elephant (Beth M., 2.6); Hilary M. called a caterpillar[109] a pillarcat. Other transpositions are serreval for several and ocken for uncle; cf. also wops for wasp.
It’s not the production of long sequences of syllables itself that’s hard for a child, because even in their meaningless babbling, they can start to pronounce long strings of sounds without any breaks very early on. The challenge is remembering which sounds need to be combined to form this or that specific word. We adults can face the same kind of difficulty: if we hear the long name of a Bulgarian minister or a Sanskrit book just once, we might struggle to repeat it right away. So we shouldn’t be surprised by pronunciations like [pekəlout] for petticoat or [efelənt] for elephant (Beth M., 2.6). Hilary M. referred to a caterpillar[109] as a pillarcat. Other mix-ups include serreval for several and ocken for uncle; see also wops for wasp.
To explain the frequent reduplications found in children’s language it is not necessary, as some learned authors have done, to refer to the great number of reduplicated words in the languages of primitive tribes and to see in the same phenomenon in our own children an atavistic return to primitive conditions, on the Häckelian assumption that the development of each individual has to pass rapidly through the same (‘phylogenetic’) stages as the whole lineage of his ancestors. It is simpler and more natural to refer these reduplications to the pleasure always felt in repeating the same muscular action until one is tired. The child will repeat over and over again the same movements of legs and arms, and we do the same when we wave our hand or a handkerchief or when we nod our head several times to signify assent, etc. When we laugh we repeat the same syllable consisting of h and a more or less indistinct vowel, and when we sing a melody without words we are apt to ‘reduplicate’ indefinitely. Thus also with the little ones. Apart from such words as papa and mamma, to which we shall have to revert in another chapter (VIII, § 8), children will often form words from those of their elders by repeating one syllable; cf. puff-puff, gee-gee. Tracy (p. 132) records pepe for ‘pencil,’ kaka for ‘Carrie.’ For a few weeks (1.11) Hilary M. reduplicated whole words, e.g. king-king, ring-ring (i.e. bell), water-water. Tony F. (1.10) uses [touto] for his own name. Hence pet-names like Dodo; they are extremely frequent in French—for instance, Fifine, Lolotte, Lolo, Mimi; the name Daudet has arisen in a similar way from Claudet, a diminutive of Claude.
To explain the frequent reduplications seen in children's language, it's not necessary, as some scholars have suggested, to point to the many reduplicated words in the languages of primitive tribes and view the same phenomenon in our children as a throwback to primitive conditions, based on the idea that each individual's development has to quickly pass through the same ('phylogenetic') stages as their ancestors. It’s simpler and more natural to attribute these reduplications to the enjoyment of repeating the same physical action until one gets tired. A child will repeatedly make the same movements with their legs and arms, just as we do when we wave our hand or handkerchief, or when we nod our head several times to show agreement, etc. When we laugh, we often repeat the same sound made up of h and an unclear vowel, and when we sing a melody without words, we tend to 'reduplicate' endlessly. The same goes for young children. Aside from words like papa and mamma, which we will discuss in another chapter (VIII, § 8), children often create words from those of adults by repeating one syllable; for example, puff-puff, gee-gee. Tracy (p. 132) notes pepe for 'pencil,' and kaka for 'Carrie.' For a few weeks (1.11), Hilary M. reduplicated whole words, e.g., king-king, ring-ring (i.e., bell), water-water. Tony F. (1.10) uses [touto] for his own name. Hence, we see pet names like Dodo; they are very common in French—for example, Fifine, Lolotte, Lolo, Mimi; the name Daudet has similarly come from Claudet, a diminutive of Claude.
It is a similar phenomenon (a kind of partial reduplication) when sounds at a distance affect one another, as when Hilary M. (2.0) said [gɔgi] for doggie, [bɔbin] for Dobbin, [dezmən di·n] for Jesmond Dene, [baikikl] for bicycle, [kekl] for kettle. Tracy (p. 133) mentions bopoo for ‘bottle,’ in which oo stands for the hollow sound of syllabic l. One correspondent mentions whoofing-cough for ‘whooping-cough’ (where the final sound has crept into the first word) and chicken-pops for ‘chicken-pox.’ Some children say ‘aneneme’ for anemone; and in S. L. (4.9) this caused a curious confusion during the recent war: “Mother, there must be two sorts of anenemies, flowers and Germans.”
It's a similar thing (a kind of partial reduplication) when sounds that are far apart influence each other, like when Hilary M. (2.0) said [gɔgi] for doggie, [bɔbin] for Dobbin, [dezmən di·n] for Jesmond Dene, [baikikl] for bicycle, and [kekl] for kettle. Tracy (p. 133) mentions bopoo for ‘bottle,’ where oo represents the hollow sound of the syllabic l. One correspondent brings up whoofing-cough for ‘whooping-cough’ (where the last sound moves into the first word) and chicken-pops for ‘chicken-pox.’ Some kids say ‘aneneme’ for anemone; and in S. L. (4.9) this caused a funny mix-up during the recent war: “Mother, there must be two kinds of anenemies, flowers and Germans.”
Dr. Henry Bradley once told me that his youngest child had a difficulty with the name Connie, which was made alternatingly [tɔni] and [kɔŋi], in both cases with two consonants articulated at the same point. Similar instances are mentioned in German books on children’s language, thus gigarr for ‘zigarre,’ baibift[110] for ‘bleistift,’ autobobil (Meringer),[18] fotofafieren (Stern), ambam for ‘armband,’ dan for ‘dame,’ pap for ‘patte’ (Ronjat). I have given many Danish examples in my Danish book. Grammont’s child (see Mélanges linguistiques offerts à A. Meillet, 1902) carried through these changes in a most systematic way.
Dr. Henry Bradley once told me that his youngest child had trouble with the name Connie, which was alternately pronounced as [tɔni] and [kɔŋi], in both cases with two consonants articulated at the same point. Similar examples are found in German books on children’s language, such as gigarr for ‘zigarre,’ baibift[110] for ‘bleistift,’ autobobil (Meringer),[18] fotofafieren (Stern), ambam for ‘armband,’ dan for ‘dame,’ and pap for ‘patte’ (Ronjat). I have provided many Danish examples in my Danish book. Grammont’s child (see Mélanges linguistiques offerts à A. Meillet, 1902) exhibited these changes in a very systematic manner.
V.—§ 6. Correction.
The time comes when the child corrects his mistakes—where it said ‘tat’ it now says ‘cat.’ Here there are two possibilities which both seem to occur in actual life. One is that the child hears the correct sound some time before he is able to imitate it correctly; he will thus still say t for k, though he may in some way object to other people saying ‘tum’ for ‘come.’ Passy relates how a little French girl would say tosson both for garçon and cochon; but she protested when anybody else said “C’est un petit cochon” in speaking about a boy, or vice versa. Such a child, as soon as it can produce the new sound, puts it correctly into all the places where it is required. This, I take it, is the ordinary procedure. Frans (my own boy) could not pronounce h and said an, on for the Danish pronouns han, hun; but when he began to pronounce this sound, he never misplaced it (2.4).
The time comes when a child corrects their mistakes—where it used to say ‘tat,’ it now says ‘cat.’ There are two possibilities that both seem to happen in real life. One is that the child hears the correct sound sometime before they can imitate it correctly; they will still say t for k, even if they might object to other people saying ‘tum’ for ‘come.’ Passy shares how a little French girl said tosson for both garçon and cochon; however, she protested when anyone else said “C’est un petit cochon” when talking about a boy, or vice versa. Such a child, as soon as they can produce the new sound, will use it correctly in all the places it's needed. This, I believe, is the usual process. Frans (my own son) couldn't pronounce h and would say an, on instead of the Danish pronouns han, hun; but when he started to pronounce this sound, he never misplaced it (2.4).
The other possibility is that the child learns how to pronounce the new sound at a time when its own acoustic impression is not yet quite settled; in that case there will be a period during which his use of the new sound is uncertain and fluctuating. When parents are in too great a hurry to get a child out of some false pronunciation, they may succeed in giving it a new sound, but the child will tend to introduce it in places where it does not belong. On the whole, it seems therefore the safest plan to leave it to the child itself to discover that its sound is not the correct one.
The other possibility is that the child learns to pronounce the new sound while their own understanding of it isn’t fully developed yet; in that case, there will be a period during which their use of the new sound is inconsistent and variable. When parents rush too much to correct a child's mispronunciation, they might successfully teach a new sound, but the child may end up using it inappropriately. Overall, it seems to be the best approach to allow the child to realize on their own that their sound isn't correct.
Sometimes a child will acquire a sound or a sound combination correctly and then lose it till it reappears a few months later. In an English family where there was no question of the influence of h-less servants, each child in succession passed through an h-less period, and one of the children, after pronouncing h correctly, lost the use of it altogether for two or three months. I have had similar experiences with Danish children. S. L. (ab. 2) said ‘bontin’ for bonnet; but five months earlier she had said bonnet correctly.
Sometimes a child will correctly say a sound or sound combination and then lose it, only for it to come back a few months later. In a British family with no influence from h-less servants, each child went through an h-less phase in turn, and one of the kids, after pronouncing h correctly, stopped using it entirely for two or three months. I’ve seen similar situations with Danish children. S. L. (ab. 2) said ‘bontin’ for bonnet; but five months earlier, she had pronounced bonnet correctly.
The path to perfection is not always a straight one. Tony E. in order to arrive at the correct pronunciation of please passed through the following stages: (1) [bi·], (2) [bli·], (3) [pi·z],[111] (4) [pwi·ʒ], (5) [beisk, meis, mais] and several other impossible forms. Tracy (p. 139) gives the following forms through which the boy A. (1.5) had to pass before being able to say pussy: pooheh, poofie, poopoohie, poofee. A French child had four forms [mèni, pèti, mèti, mèsi] before being able to say merci correctly (Grammont). A Danish child passed through bejab and vamb before pronouncing svamp (‘sponge’), etc.
The road to perfection isn’t always a straight one. Tony E. went through the following stages to get the pronunciation of please right: (1) [bi·], (2) [bli·], (3) [pi·z],[111] (4) [pwi·ʒ], (5) [beisk, meis, mais] and several other impossible forms. Tracy (p. 139) lists the forms that the boy A. (1.5) had to go through before he could say pussy: pooheh, poofie, poopoohie, poofee. A French child went through four forms [mèni, pèti, mèti, mèsi] before saying merci correctly (Grammont). A Danish child used bejab and vamb before pronouncing svamp (‘sponge’), etc.
It is certain that all this while the little brain is working, and even consciously working, though at first it has not sufficient command of speech to say anything about it. Meringer says that children do not practise, but that their new acquisitions of sounds happen at once without any visible preparation. He may be right in the main with regard to the learning of single sounds, though even there I incline to doubt the possibility of a universal rule; but Ronjat (p. 55) is certainly right as against Meringer with regard to the way in which children learn new and difficult combinations. Here they certainly do practise, and are proudly conscious of the happy results of their efforts. When Frans (2.11) mastered the combination fl, he was very proud, and asked his mother: “Mother, can you say flyve?”; then he came to me and told me that he could say bluse and flue, and when asked whether he could say blad, he answered: “No, not yet; Frans cannot say b-lad” (with a little interval between the b and the l). Five weeks later he said: “Mother, won’t you play upon the klaver (piano)?” and after a little while, “Frans can say kla so well.” About the same time he first mispronounced the word manchetter, and then (when I asked what he was saying, without telling him that anything was wrong) he gave it the correct sound, and I heard him afterwards in the adjoining room repeat the word to himself in a whisper.
It's clear that all this time the little brain is working, and even doing so consciously, though at first it doesn't have enough control of speech to express anything about it. Meringer claims that children don’t practice, but that their new sounds emerge suddenly without any visible preparation. He may be mostly right when it comes to learning individual sounds, although I still question the possibility of a universal rule; however, Ronjat (p. 55) is definitely correct in contrast to Meringer regarding how children learn new and challenging combinations. Here, they definitely do practice and are proudly aware of the positive results of their efforts. When Frans (2.11) mastered the combination fl, he was very proud and asked his mother, “Mom, can you say flyve?” Then he came to me and told me that he could say bluse and flue, and when I asked if he could say blad, he replied, “No, not yet; Frans cannot say b-lad” (pausing a little between the b and the l). Five weeks later he said, “Mom, won’t you play on the klaver (piano)?” and after a while, “Frans can say kla so well.” Around the same time, he first mispronounced the word manchetter, and then (when I asked what he was saying without telling him anything was wrong) he pronounced it correctly, and I later heard him in the next room repeat the word to himself in a whisper.
How well children observe sounds is again seen by the way in which they will correct their elders if they give a pronunciation to which they are not accustomed—for instance, in a verse they have learnt by heart. Beth M (2.6) was never satisfied with her parents’ pronunciation of “What will you buy me when you get there?” She always insisted on their gabbling the first words as quickly as they could and then coming out with an emphatic there.
How well children pick up on sounds is evident in how they correct their parents if they pronounce something differently than they’re used to—like in a verse they’ve memorized. Beth M (2.6) was never happy with how her parents said, “What will you buy me when you get there?” She always insisted that they rushed through the first words as fast as they could and then pronounced there emphatically.
V.—§ 7. Tone.
As to the differences in the tone of a voice, even a baby shows by his expression that he can distinguish clearly between what is said to him lovingly and what sharply, a long time before he understands a single word of what is said. Many children are[112] able at a very early age to hit off the exact note in which something is said or sung. Here is a story of a boy of more advanced age. In Copenhagen he had had his hair cut by a Swedish lady and did not like it. When he travelled with his mother to Norway, as soon as he entered the house, he broke out with a scream: “Mother, I hope I’m not going to have my hair cut?” He had noticed the Norwegian intonation, which is very like the Swedish, and it brought an unpleasant association of ideas.
As for the differences in tone of voice, even a baby shows through their expressions that they can clearly tell the difference between what is said to them lovingly and what is said sharply, long before they understand a single word. Many kids are[112] able at a very young age to pick up on the exact tone in which something is said or sung. Here’s a story about an older boy. In Copenhagen, he had his hair cut by a Swedish lady and didn’t like it. When he traveled with his mom to Norway, as soon as he entered the house, he yelled, “Mom, I hope I’m not going to have my hair cut?” He had noticed the Norwegian intonation, which is very similar to the Swedish, and it triggered an unpleasant memory.
CHAPTER VI
WORDS
§ 1. Introductory. § 2. First Period. § 3. Father and Mother. § 4. The Delimitation of Meaning. § 5. Numerals. Time. § 6. Various Difficulties. § 7. Shifters. § 8. Extent of Vocabulary. § 9. Summary.
§ 1. Introductory. § 2. First Period. § 3. Father and Mother. § 4. Defining Meaning. § 5. Numbers. Time. § 6. Different Challenges. § 7. Contextual Shifters. § 8. Vocabulary Range. § 9. Summary.
VI.—§ 1. Introductory.
In the preceding chapter, in order to simplify matters, we have dealt with sounds only, as if they were learnt by themselves and independently of the meanings attached to them. But that, of course, is only an abstraction: to the child, as well as to the grown-up, the two elements, the outer, phonetic element, and the inner element, the meaning, of a word are indissolubly connected, and the child has no interest, or very little interest, in trying to imitate the sounds of its parents except just in so far as these mean something. That words have a meaning, the child will begin to perceive at a very early age. Parents may of course deceive themselves and attribute to the child a more complete and exact understanding of speech than the child is capable of. That the child looks at its father when it hears the word ‘father,’ may mean at first nothing more than that it follows its mother’s glance; but naturally in this way it is prepared for actually associating the idea of ‘father’ with the sound. If the child learns the feat of lifting its arms when it is asked “How big is the boy?” it is not to be supposed that the single words of the sentence are understood, or that the child has any conception of size; he only knows that when this series of sounds is said he is admired if he lifts his arms up: and so the sentence as a whole has the effect of a word of command. A dog has the same degree of understanding. Hilary M. (1.0), when you said to her at any time the refrain “He greeted me so,” from “Here come three knights from Spain,” would bow and salute with her hand, as she had seen some children doing it when practising the song.
In the previous chapter, to make things simpler, we focused only on sounds, as if they could be learned on their own without any reference to their meanings. But that's really just an abstraction: for both children and adults, the two aspects—sounds and meanings—are closely tied together. A child has little interest in imitating their parents' sounds unless those sounds actually mean something. A child starts to recognize that words have meanings at a very young age. Parents might fool themselves into thinking their child understands speech more thoroughly than they actually do. For example, when a child looks at their father upon hearing the word "father," it may initially just mean they are following their mother’s gaze; however, this sets the stage for them to truly connect the idea of "father" with the sound. If a child learns to lift their arms when asked, “How big is the boy?” it doesn’t mean they comprehend the individual words or have any idea of size; they just know that when that particular sound sequence is said, they receive praise for lifting their arms. So, the entire phrase acts like a command. A dog shows the same level of understanding. Hilary M. (1.0) would bow and salute with her hand whenever someone said the line “He greeted me so,” from “Here come three knights from Spain,” just as she saw some children do while practicing the song.
The understanding of what is said always precedes the power of saying the same thing oneself—often precedes it for an extraordinarily long time. One father notes that his little daughter of a year and seven months brings what is wanted and understands questions while she cannot say a word. It often happens that[114] parents some fine day come to regret what they have said in the presence of a child without suspecting how much it understands. “Little pitchers have long ears.”
The ability to understand what is being said usually comes before the ability to express it oneself—and this can happen for a surprisingly long time. One father observes that his daughter, who is a year and seven months old, can bring what is needed and understands questions even though she can't say a word. Parents often find, one day, that they regret what they've said in front of a child, not realizing how much the child understands. “Little pitchers have long ears.”
One can, however, easily err in regard to the range and certainty of a child’s understanding. The Swiss philologist Tappolet noticed that his child of six months, when he said “Where is the window?” made vague movements towards the window. He made the experiment of repeating his question in French—with the same intonation as in German, and the child acted just as it had done before. It is, properly speaking, only when the child begins to talk that we can be at all sure what it has really understood, and even then it may at times be difficult to sound the depths of the child’s conception.
One can easily make mistakes about how much and how clearly a child understands. The Swiss linguist Tappolet observed that when he asked his six-month-old, “Where is the window?” the child would vaguely gesture towards the window. He then tried repeating the question in French, using the same tone as in German, and the child responded in the same way as before. It's really only when the child starts to speak that we can be sure of what they truly understand, and even then, it can sometimes be hard to grasp the full extent of the child's comprehension.
The child’s acquisition of the meaning of words is truly a highly complicated affair. How many things are comprehended under one word? The answer is not easy in all cases. The single Danish word tæppe covers all that is expressed in English by carpet, rug, blanket, counterpane, curtain (theatrical). And there is still more complication when we come to abstract ideas. The child has somehow to find out for himself with regard to his own language what ideas are considered to hang together and so come under the same word. He hears the word ‘chair’ applied to a particular chair, then to another chair that perhaps looks to him totally different, and again to a third: and it becomes his business to group these together.
The way a child learns the meaning of words is really complex. How many things can be included under one word? The answer isn't always straightforward. The single Danish word tæppe encompasses everything expressed in English by carpet, rug, blanket, bedspread, and theater curtain. It gets even trickier when we look at abstract concepts. The child has to figure out for himself which ideas are related enough to fall under the same word in his language. He hears the word ‘chair’ used for one specific chair, then for another that might seem completely different to him, and again for a third one. It then becomes his job to categorize these together.
What Stern tells about his own boy is certainly exceptional, perhaps unique. The boy ran to a door and said das? (‘That?’—his way of asking the name of a thing). They told him ‘tür.’ He then went to two other doors in the room, and each time the performance was repeated. He then did the same with the seven chairs in the room. Stern says, “As he thus makes sure that the objects that are alike to his eye and to his sense of touch have also the same name, he is on his way to general conceptions.” We should, however, be wary of attributing general ideas to little children.
What Stern shares about his own son is definitely remarkable, maybe even one-of-a-kind. The boy ran to a door and asked, “That?”—his way of inquiring about the name of an object. They told him “door.” He then approached two other doors in the room, and each time the same thing happened. He did the same with the seven chairs in the room. Stern notes, “As he ensures that the objects that look the same to him and feel the same to his touch also have the same name, he is starting to form general concepts.” However, we should be cautious about assuming that young children have general ideas.
VI.—§ 2. First Period.
In the first period we meet the same phenomena in the child’s acquisition of word-meanings that we found in his acquisition of sounds. A child develops conceptions of his own which are as unintelligible and strange to the uninitiated as his sounds.
In the early stages, we encounter the same phenomena in a child's understanding of word meanings as we did in their grasp of sounds. A child forms their own ideas that are just as confusing and unfamiliar to those who are not experienced as their sounds are.
Among the child’s first passions are animals and pictures of animals, but for a certain time it is quite arbitrary what animals are classed together under a particular name. A child of nine[115] months noticed that his grandfather’s dog said ‘bow-wow’ and fancied that anything not human could say (and therefore should be called) bow-wow—pigs and horses included. A little girl of two called a horse he (Danish hest) and divided the animal kingdom into two groups, (1) horses, including all four-footed things, even a tortoise, and (2) fishes (pronounced iz), including all that moved without use of feet, for example, birds and flies. A boy of 1.8 saw a picture of a Danish priest in a ruff and was told that it was a præst, which he rendered as bæp. Afterwards seeing a picture of an aunt with a white collar which recalled the priest’s ruff, he said again bæp, and this remained the name of the aunt, and even of another aunt, who was called ‘other bæp.’ These transferences are sometimes extraordinary. A boy who had had a pig drawn for him, the pig being called öf, at the age of 1.6 used öf (1) for a pig, (2) for drawing a pig, (3) for writing in general.
Among a child's first interests are animals and pictures of animals, but for a while, it's pretty random how certain animals are grouped together under a specific name. A nine-month-old child noticed that his grandfather's dog said ‘bow-wow’ and thought that anything that wasn't human could say (and should be called) bow-wow—including pigs and horses. A two-year-old girl referred to a horse as he (Danish hest) and categorized the animal kingdom into two groups: (1) horses, which included all four-legged creatures, even a tortoise, and (2) fish (pronounced iz), which included anything that moved without using feet, like birds and flies. A boy who was 1.8 years old saw a picture of a Danish priest in a ruff and was told it was a præst, which he called bæp. Later, when he saw a picture of an aunt with a white collar similar to the priest's ruff, he again said bæp, and that became the name for his aunt, as well as another aunt, who he referred to as ‘other bæp.’ These associations can be quite surprising. A boy who had a pig drawn for him, which was called öf, at the age of 1.6 used öf (1) for a pig, (2) for drawing a pig, and (3) for writing in general.
Such transferences may seem very absurd, but are not more so than some transferences occurring in the language of grown-up persons. The word Tripos passed from the sense of a three-legged stool to the man who sat on a three-legged stool to dispute with candidates for degrees at Cambridge. Then, as it was the duty of Mr. Tripos also to provide comic verses, these were called tripos verses, such verses being printed under that name till very near the end of the nineteenth century, though Mr. Tripos himself had disappeared long ago. And as the examination list was printed on the back of these verses, it was called the Tripos list, and it was no far cry to saying of a successful candidate, “he stands high on the Tripos,” which now came to mean the examination itself.
Such transfers might seem really silly, but they're not any more ridiculous than some terms we use today. The word Tripos went from meaning a three-legged stool to the person who sat on it to argue with students seeking degrees at Cambridge. Since it was also Mr. Tripos's job to come up with funny poems, those became known as tripos verses, and they were printed under that name until almost the end of the nineteenth century, even though Mr. Tripos himself had been gone for a long time. Since the exam list was printed on the back of these verses, it was called the Tripos list, and it wasn't a big leap to say of a successful candidate, “he stands high on the Tripos,” which eventually came to refer to the exam itself.
But to return to the classifications in the minds of the children. Hilary M. (1.6 to 2.0) used the word daisy (1) of the flower itself, (2) of any flower, (3) of any conventional flower in a pattern, (4) of any pattern. One of the first words she said was colour (1.4), and she got into a way of saying it when anything striking attracted her attention. Originally she heard the word of a bright patch of colour in a picture. The word was still in use at the age of two. For some months anything that moved was a fly, every man was a soldier, everybody that was not a man was a baby. S. L. (1.8) used bing (1) for a door, (2) for bricks or building with bricks. The connexion is through the bang of a door or a tumbling castle of bricks, but the name was transferred to the objects. It is curious that at 1.3 she had the word bang for anything dropped, but not bing; at 1.8 she had both, bing being specialized as above. From books about children’s language I quote two illustrations. Ronjat’s son used the word papement, which stands for ‘kaffemensch,’ in speaking about the[116] grocer’s boy who brought coffee; but as he had a kind of uniform with a flat cap, papement was also used of German and Russian officers in the illustrated papers. Hilde Stern (1.9) used bichu for drawer or chest of drawers; it originated in the word bücher (books), which was said when her picture-books were taken out of the drawer.
But let's go back to how children categorize things in their minds. Hilary M. (1.6 to 2.0) used the word daisy for (1) the actual flower, (2) any flower, (3) any flower in a pattern, and (4) any pattern. One of the first words she said was colour (1.4), and she developed a habit of saying it when something colorful caught her eye. She first heard the word when she saw a bright patch of color in a picture. She still used it at age two. For several months, anything that moved was a fly, every man was a soldier, and everyone who wasn’t a man was a baby. S. L. (1.8) used bing for (1) a door and (2) for bricks or anything built with bricks. The connection comes from the bang of a door or a crashing pile of bricks, but the name was shifted to the objects. Interestingly, at 1.3, she had the word bang for anything that was dropped, but not bing; by 1.8, she had both, with bing being used as mentioned before. From books about children's language, I’ll share two examples. Ronjat’s son used the word papement, which stands for ‘coffee person’, when talking about the [116] grocer’s boy who brought coffee; but since he had a kind of uniform with a flat cap, papement was also used for German and Russian officers in illustrated magazines. Hilde Stern (1.9) used bichu for a drawer or chest of drawers; it came from the word bücher (books), which she said when her picture books were taken out of the drawer.
A warning is, however, necessary. When a grown-up person says that a child uses the same word to denote various things, he is apt to assume that the child gives a word two or three definite meanings, as he does. The process is rather in this way. A child has got a new toy, a horse, and at the same time has heard its elders use the word ‘horse,’ which it has imitated as well as it can. It now associates the word with the delight of playing with its toy. If the next day it says the same sound, and its friends give it the horse, the child gains the experience that the sound brings the fulfilment of its wish: but if it sets its eye on a china cow and utters the same sound, the father takes note that the sound also denotes a cow, while for the child it is perhaps a mere experiment—“Could not I get my wish for that nice thing fulfilled in the same way?” If it succeeds, the experiment may very well be repeated, and the more or less faulty imitation of the word ‘horse’ thus by the co-operation of those around it may become also firmly attached to ‘cow.’
A warning is needed, though. When an adult says that a child uses the same word for different things, they tend to think that the child has assigned two or three specific meanings to the word, like they do. However, the process works differently. A child gets a new toy, a horse, and at the same time hears their elders use the word "horse," which they do their best to imitate. They start to associate the word with the joy of playing with their toy. If the next day they say the same sound and their friends give them the toy horse, the child learns that making that sound brings the fulfillment of their desire. But if they see a china cow and make the same sound, the father notes that the sound also refers to a cow, while for the child it might just be an experiment—“Can I make the same sound to get that nice thing too?” If they succeed, they might try it again, and the somewhat imperfect imitation of the word "horse" can, with help from those around them, become firmly associated with "cow" as well.
When Elsa B. (1.10), on seeing the stopper of a bottle in the garden, came out with the word ‘beer,’ it would be rash to conclude (as her father did) that the word ‘beer’ to her meant a ‘stopper’: all we know is that her thoughts had taken that direction, and that some time before, on seeing a stopper, she had heard the word ‘beer.’
When Elsa B. (1.10) saw the stopper of a bottle in the garden and said the word "beer," it would be unwise to assume (as her father did) that for her, "beer" meant "stopper." What we do know is that her thoughts had moved in that direction, and that some time before, when she saw a stopper, she had heard the word "beer."
Parents sometimes unconsciously lead a child into error about the use of words. A little nephew of mine asked to taste his father’s beer, and when refused made so much to-do that the father said, “Come, let us have peace in the house.” Next day, under the same circumstances, the boy asked for ‘peace in the house,’ and this became the family name for beer. Not infrequently what is said on certain occasions is taken by the child to be the name of some object concerned; thus a sniff or some sound imitating it may come to mean a flower, and ‘hurrah’ a flag. S. L. from an early age was fond of flowers, and at 1.8 used ‘pretty’ or ‘pretty-pretty’ as a substantive instead of the word ‘flower,’ which she learnt at 1.10.
Parents sometimes unintentionally lead a child to misunderstand words. My little nephew wanted to try his dad’s beer, and when he was refused, he made such a fuss that his dad said, “Come on, let’s have peace in the house.” The next day, in the same situation, the boy asked for “peace in the house,” and that became the family term for beer. Often, things said in certain situations are taken by the child to be the name of something relevant; for example, a sniff or noise imitating it might come to mean a flower, and ‘hurrah’ might refer to a flag. S. L. loved flowers from a young age, and at 1.8, she used ‘pretty’ or ‘pretty-pretty’ as a noun instead of the word ‘flower,’ which she learned at 1.10.
I may mention here that analogous mistakes may occur when missionaries or others write down words from foreign languages with which they are not familiar. In the oldest list of Greenlandic words (of 1587) there is thus a word panygmah given with[117] the signification ‘needle’; as a matter of fact it means ‘my daughter’s’: the Englishman pointed at the needle, but the Eskimo thought he wanted to know whom it belonged to. In an old list of words in the now extinct Polabian language we find “scumbe, yesterday, subuda, to-day, janidiglia, to-morrow”: the questions were put on a Saturday, and the Slav answered accordingly, for subuta (the same word as Sabbath) means Saturday, skumpe ‘fasting-day,’ and ja nedila ‘it is Sunday.’
I should point out that similar mistakes can happen when missionaries or others write down words from foreign languages they don’t know well. In the oldest list of Greenlandic words (from 1587), there’s a word panygmah listed as meaning ‘needle’; however, it actually means ‘my daughter’s.’ The Englishman was pointing at the needle, but the Eskimo thought he was asking who it belonged to. In an old list of words from the now-extinct Polabian language, we see “scumbe, yesterday, subuda, today, janidiglia, tomorrow”: the questions were asked on a Saturday, and the Slav answered accordingly, since subuta (the same word as Sabbath) means Saturday, skumpe means ‘fasting-day,’ and ja nedila means ‘it is Sunday.’
According to O’Shea (p. 131) “a child was greatly impressed with the horns of a buck the first time he saw him. The father used the term ‘sheep’ several times while the creature was being inspected, and it was discovered afterwards that the child had made the association between the word and the animal’s horns, so now sheep signifies primarily horns, whether seen in pictures or in real life.” It is clear that mistakes of that kind will happen more readily if the word is said singly than when it is embodied in whole connected sentences: the latter method is on the whole preferable for many reasons.
According to O’Shea (p. 131), “a child was really impressed by the horns of a buck the first time he saw it. The father used the word ‘sheep’ several times while the animal was being looked at, and it was later found out that the child had linked the word to the animal’s horns, so now sheep mainly means horns, whether in pictures or in real life.” It’s clear that mistakes like that are more likely to happen if the word is used alone rather than in full sentences: the latter approach is generally better for many reasons.
VI.—§ 3. Father and Mother.
A child is often faced by some linguistic usage which obliges him again and again to change his notions, widen them, narrow them, till he succeeds in giving words the same range of meaning that his elders give them.
A child often encounters language that forces them repeatedly to adjust their understanding, expanding and refining it, until they manage to assign words the same range of meaning that adults do.
Frequently, perhaps most frequently, a word is at first for the child a proper name. ‘Wood’ means not a wood in general, but the particular picture which has been pointed out to the child in the dining-room. The little girl who calls her mother’s black muff ‘muff,’ but refuses to transfer the word to her own white one, is at the same stage. Naturally, then, the word father when first heard is a proper name, the name of the child’s own father. But soon it must be extended to other individuals who have something or other in common with the child’s father. One child will use it of all men, another perhaps of all men with beards, while ‘lady’ is applied to all pictures of faces without beards; a third will apply the word to father, mother and grandfather. When the child itself applies the word to another man it is soon corrected, but at the same time it cannot avoid hearing another child call a strange man ‘father’ or getting to know that the gardener is Jack’s ‘father,’ etc. The word then comes to mean to the child ‘a grown-up person who goes with or belongs to a little one,’ and he will say, “See, there goes a dog with his father.” Or, he comes to know that the cat is the kittens’ father, and the dog the puppies’ father, and next day asks, “Wasps, are they the flies’[118] father, or are they perhaps their mother?” (as Frans did, 4.10). Finally, by such guessing and drawing conclusions he gains full understanding of the word, and is ready to make acquaintance later with its more remote applications, as ‘The King is the father of his people; Father O’Flynn; Boyle was the father of chemistry,’ etc.
Often, and maybe most often, a word starts out for a child as a proper name. ‘Wood’ refers not to wood in general, but to the specific picture the child has been shown in the dining room. The little girl who calls her mother’s black muff ‘muff,’ but refuses to use the word for her own white one, is in the same phase. Naturally, then, when the child first hears the word father, it is a proper name, specifically referring to the child’s own father. But soon, the word must be expanded to include other people who share something in common with the child's father. One child might use it to refer to all men, while another may restrict it to men with beards, and ‘lady’ might be used for all images of faces without beards; a third child might call both father, mother, and grandfather by that name. When the child uses the word to describe another man, they are quickly corrected, but they hear another child call a stranger ‘father’ or learn that the gardener is Jack’s ‘father,’ etc. The word then begins to mean to the child ‘a grown-up person who is with or belongs to a little one,’ and they might say, “Look, there goes a dog with his father.” Or, they might realize that the cat is the father of the kittens, and the dog is the father of the puppies, and the next day asks, “Are wasps the flies’ [118] father, or are they maybe their mother?” (as Frans did, 4.10). Ultimately, through such guesses and conclusions, they fully understand the word and are ready to learn about its broader meanings later, such as ‘The King is the father of his people; Father O’Flynn; Boyle was the father of chemistry,’ etc.
Difficulties are caused to the child when its father puts himself on the child’s plane and calls his wife ‘mother’ just as he calls his own mother ‘mother,’ though at other moments the child hears him call her ‘grandmother’ or ‘grannie.’ Professor Sturtevant writes to me that a neighbour child, a girl of about five years, called out to him, “I saw your girl and your mother,” meaning ‘your daughter and your wife.’ In many families the words ‘sister’ (‘Sissie’) or ‘brother’ are used constantly instead of his or her real name. Here we see the reason why so often such names of relations change their meaning in the history of languages; G. vetter probably at first meant ‘father’s brother,’ as it corresponds to Latin patruus; G. base, from ‘father’s sister,’ came to mean also ‘mother’s sister,’ ‘niece’ and ‘cousin.’ The word that corresponds etymologically to our mother has come to mean ‘wife’ or ‘woman’ in Lithuanian and ‘sister’ in Albanian.
Difficulties arise for a child when their father put himself on the child's level and refers to his wife as ‘mother’ just as he calls his own mother ‘mother,’ even though at other times the child hears him call her ‘grandmother’ or ‘grannie.’ Professor Sturtevant informs me that a neighbor child, a girl around five years old, called out to him, “I saw your girl and your mother,” meaning ‘your daughter and your wife.’ In many families, the terms ‘sister’ (‘Sissie’) or ‘brother’ are constantly used instead of their actual names. This illustrates why the meanings of such family terms often change throughout the history of languages; German vetter probably originally meant ‘father’s brother,’ corresponding to Latin patruus; German base, meaning ‘father’s sister,’ evolved to also mean ‘mother’s sister,’ ‘niece,’ and ‘cousin.’ The term that etymologically relates to our mother has come to signify ‘wife’ or ‘woman’ in Lithuanian and ‘sister’ in Albanian.
The same extension that we saw in the case of ‘father’ now may take place with real proper names. Tony E. (3.5), when a fresh charwoman came, told his mother not to have this Mary: the last charwoman’s name was Mary.[19] In exactly the same way a Danish child applied the name of their servant, Ingeborg, as a general word for servant: “Auntie’s Ingeborg is called Ann,” etc., and a German girl said viele Augusten for ‘many girls.’ This, of course, is the way in which doll has come to mean a ‘toy baby,’ and we use the same extension when we say of a statesman that he is no Bismarck, etc.
The same pattern we noticed with ‘father’ can also happen with real names. Tony E. (3.5), when a new cleaning woman arrived, told his mom not to hire this Mary: the last cleaning woman's name was Mary.[19] Similarly, a Danish child used the name of their maid, Ingeborg, as a general term for maid: “Auntie’s Ingeborg is called Ann,” and a German girl said viele Augusten to mean 'many girls.' This is also how doll came to mean a ‘toy baby,’ and we use this same extension when we say a politician is no Bismarck, etc.
VI.—§ 4. The Delimitation of Meaning.
The association of a word with its meaning is accomplished for the child by a series of single incidents, and as many words are understood only by the help of the situation, it is natural that the exact force of many of them is not seized at once. A boy of 4.10, hearing that his father had seen the King, inquired, “Has he a head at both ends?”—his conception of a king being derived from playing-cards. Another child was born on what the Danes call Constitution Day, the consequence being that he confused birthday and Constitution Day, and would speak of “my Consti[119]tution Day,” and then his brother and sister also began to talk of their Constitution Day.
The connection between a word and its meaning is formed for a child through a series of individual experiences, and since many words are understood only with the help of context, it’s normal that the exact meaning of many of them isn’t grasped right away. A 4-year-and-10-month-old boy, upon hearing that his father had seen the King, asked, “Does he have a head at both ends?”—his idea of a king coming from playing cards. Another child was born on what the Danes call Constitution Day, which led him to mix up his birthday with Constitution Day, and he would refer to it as “my Consti[119]tution Day,” prompting his brother and sister to also start calling it their Constitution Day.
Hilary M. (2.0) and Murdoch D. (2.6) used dinner, breakfast and tea interchangeably—the words might be translated ‘meal.’ Other more or less similar confusions may be mentioned here. Tony F. (2.8) used the term sing for (1) reading, (2) singing, (3) any game in which his elders amused him. Hilary said indifferently, ‘Daddy, sing a story three bears,’ and ‘Daddy, tell a story three bears.’ She cannot remember which is knife and which is fork. Beth M. (2.6) always used can’t when she meant won’t. It meant simply refusal to do what she did not want to.
Hilary M. (2.0) and Murdoch D. (2.6) used dinner, breakfast, and tea interchangeably—the words could be thought of as ‘meal.’ Other similar mix-ups can be noted here. Tony F. (2.8) used the term sing for (1) reading, (2) singing, and (3) any game that entertained him. Hilary would casually say, ‘Daddy, sing a story about three bears,’ and ‘Daddy, tell a story about three bears.’ She can’t remember which is knife and which is fork. Beth M. (2.6) always used can’t when she meant won’t. It simply indicated her refusal to do what she didn’t want to.
VI.—§ 5. Numerals. Time.
It is interesting to watch the way in which arithmetical notions grow in extent and clearness. Many children learn very early to say one, two, which is often said to them when they learn how to walk; but no ideas are associated with these syllables. In the same way many children are drilled to say three when the parents begin with one, two, etc. The idea of plurality is gradually developed, but a child may very well answer two when asked how many fingers papa has; Frans used the combinations some-two and some-three to express ‘more than one’ (2.4). At the age of 2.11 he was very fond of counting, but while he always got the first four numbers right, he would skip over 5 and 7; and when asked to count the apples in a bowl, he would say rapidly 1-2-3-4, even if there were only three, or stop at 3, even if there were five or more. At 3.4 he counted objects as far as 10 correctly, but might easily pass from 11 to 13, and if the things to be counted were not placed in a row he was apt to bungle by moving his fingers irregularly from one to another. When he was 3.8 he answered the question “What do 2 and 2 make?” quite correctly, but next day to the same question he answered “Three,” though in a doubtful tone of voice. This was in the spring, and next month I noted: “His sense of number is evidently weaker than it was: the open-air life makes him forget this as well as all the verses he knew by heart in the winter.” When the next winter came his counting exercises again amused him, but at first he was in a fix as before about any numbers after 6, although he could repeat the numbers till 10 without a mistake. He was fond of doing sums, and had initiated this game himself by asking: “Mother, if I have two apples and get one more, haven’t I then three?” His sense of numbers was so abstract that he was caught by a tricky question: “If you have two eyes and one nose, how many ears have you?” He answered at once, “Three!” A child thus seems to think in[120] abstract numbers, and as he learns his numbers as 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., not as one pear, two pears, three pears, one may well be skeptical about the justification for the recommendation made by many pedagogues that at an early stage of the school-life a child should learn to reckon with concrete things rather than with abstract numbers.
It’s interesting to see how kids develop their understanding of numbers. Many children learn to say one and two very early, often when they're learning to walk, but they don’t really understand what those words mean. Similarly, parents might teach their kids to say three right after one and two. The concept of more than one gradually takes shape, but a kid might confidently say two when asked how many fingers their dad has. Frans used to say some-two and some-three to mean ‘more than one’ (2.4). By the time he was 2 years and 11 months, he loved counting. He could name the first four numbers correctly but would skip 5 and 7. If asked to count the apples in a bowl, he might quickly say 1-2-3-4 even if there were only three, or stop at 3 even if there were five or more. At 3 years and 4 months, he could count objects up to 10 correctly, but he might jump from 11 to 13, and if the items weren’t lined up, he would often get confused, moving his fingers randomly from one to another. When he was 3 years and 8 months, he correctly answered the question “What do 2 and 2 make?” But the next day, when asked the same question, he replied “Three,” albeit hesitantly. This was in the spring, and the following month I noted: “His understanding of numbers seems to be weaker than before; being outside makes him forget that as well as all the poems he memorized during winter.” When winter arrived again, he enjoyed counting practice, but initially struggled with numbers beyond 6, even though he could recite numbers up to 10 perfectly. He loved doing math problems and had started this game by asking: “Mom, if I have two apples and I get one more, don’t I have three now?” His grasp of numbers was so abstract that he fell for a tricky question: “If you have two eyes and one nose, how many ears do you have?” He immediately replied, “Three!” Kids seem to think in abstract numbers, learning 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., not relating those numbers to things like one pear, two pears, or three pears. This makes one question the advice from many educators that children should learn to work with concrete items instead of abstract numbers early in their schooling.
A child will usually be familiar with the sound of higher numerals long before it has any clear notion of what they mean. Frans (3.6) said, “They are coming by a train that is called four thirty-four,” and (4.4) he asked, “How much is twice hundred? Is that a thousand?”
A child often recognizes the sound of higher numbers long before they understand what those numbers mean. Frans (3.6) said, “They’re coming on a train called four thirty-four,” and (4.4) he asked, “How much is twice two hundred? Is that a thousand?”
A child’s ideas of time are necessarily extremely vague to begin with; it cannot connect very clear or very definite notions with the expressions it constantly hears others employ, such as ‘last Sunday,’ ‘a week ago,’ or ‘next year.’ The other day I heard a little girl say: “This is where we sat next time,” evidently meaning ‘last time.’ All observers of children mention the frequent confusion of words like to-morrow and yesterday, and the linguist remembers that Gothic gistradagis means ‘to-morrow,’ though it corresponds formally with E. yesterday and G. gestern.
A child's understanding of time is very vague at first; they can't really connect clear or specific ideas with phrases they hear from others, like "last Sunday," "a week ago," or "next year." Recently, I heard a little girl say, "This is where we sat next time," clearly meaning "last time." Everyone who observes children notes their common mix-up of words like to-morrow and yesterday, and linguists point out that Gothic gistradagis means "to-morrow," even though it formally matches E. yesterday and G. gestern.
VI.—§ 6. Various Difficulties.
Very small children will often say up both when they want to be taken up and when they want to be put down on the floor. This generally means nothing else than that they have not yet learnt the word down, and up to them simply is a means to obtain a change of position. In the same way a German child used hut auf for having the hat taken off as well as put on, but Meumann rightly interprets this as an undifferentiated desire to have something happen with the hat. But even with somewhat more advanced children there are curious confusions.
Very small children will often say up when they want to be picked up and also when they want to be put down on the floor. This usually means nothing more than they haven't learned the word down yet, and for them, up is just a way to change their position. Similarly, a German child might use hut auf to mean having the hat taken off or put on, but Meumann correctly interprets this as a general desire to have something done with the hat. Even slightly older children can show some interesting mix-ups.
Hilary M. (2.0) is completely baffled by words of opposite meaning. She will say, “Daddy, my pinny is too hot; I must warm it at the fire.” She goes to the fire and comes back, saying, “That’s better; it’s quite cool now.” (The same confusion of hot and cold was also reported in the case of one Danish and one German child; cf. also Tracy, p. 134.) One morning while dressing she said, “What a nice windy day,” and an hour or two later, before she had been out, “What a nasty windy day.” She confuses good and naughty completely. Tony F. (2.5) says, “Turn the dark out.”
Hilary M. (2.0) is totally confused by words that mean the opposite. She’ll say, “Daddy, my pinny is too hot; I need to warm it by the fire.” She goes to the fire and comes back, saying, “That’s better; it’s quite cool now.” (The same mix-up of hot and cold was also observed in one Danish and one German child; see also Tracy, p. 134.) One morning while getting dressed, she said, “What a nice windy day,” and a couple of hours later, before she had gone outside, she said, “What a nasty windy day.” She completely confuses good and naughty. Tony F. (2.5) says, “Turn the dark out.”
Sometimes a mere accidental likeness may prove too much for the child. When Hilary M. had a new doll (2.0) her mother said to her: “And is that your son?” Hilary was puzzled, and[121] looking out of the window at the sun, said: “No, that’s my sun.” It was very difficult to set her out of this confusion.[20] Her sister Beth (3.8), looking at a sunset, said: “That’s what you call a sunset; where Ireland (her sister) is (at school) it’s a summerset.” About the same time, when staying at Longwood Farm, she said: “I suppose if the trees were cut down it would be Shortwood Farm?”
Sometimes an accidental resemblance can be too much for a child. When Hilary M. got a new doll (2.0), her mother asked her, “And is that your son?” Hilary was confused, and looking out the window at the sun, replied, “No, that’s my sun.” It was very hard to clear up her confusion.[121][20] Her sister Beth (3.8), while watching a sunset, remarked, “That’s what you call a sunset; where Ireland (her sister) is (at school), it’s a summerset.” Around the same time, while staying at Longwood Farm, she said, “I guess if the trees were cut down, it would be Shortwood Farm?”
An English friend writes to me: “I misunderstood the text, ‘And there fell from his eyes as it were scales,’ as I knew the word scales only in the sense ‘balances.’ The phenomenon seemed to me a strange one, but I did not question that it occurred, any more than I questioned other strange phenomena recounted in the Bible. In the lines of the hymn—
An English friend writes to me: “I misunderstood the text, ‘And there fell from his eyes as it were scales,’ because I only knew the word scales in the sense of ‘balances.’ The phenomenon seemed strange to me, but I didn’t doubt that it happened, any more than I doubted other strange phenomena mentioned in the Bible. In the lines of the song—
I supposed that the words ‘as little as my bed’ were descriptive of my future grave, and that it was my duty according to the hymn to fear the grave.”
I thought that the phrase ‘as little as my bed’ referred to my future grave, and that according to the hymn, I should be afraid of the grave.
Words with several meanings may cause children much difficulty. A Somerset child said, “Moses was not a good boy, and his mother smacked ’un and smacked ’un and smacked ’un till she couldn’t do it no more, and then she put ’un in the ark of bulrushes.” This puzzled the teacher till he looked at the passage in Exodus: “And when she could hide him no longer, she laid him in an ark of bulrushes.” Here, of course, we have technically two different words hide; but to the child the difficulty is practically as great where we have what is called one and the same word with two distinct meanings, or when a word is used figuratively.
Words with multiple meanings can cause children a lot of confusion. A child from Somerset said, “Moses was not a good boy, and his mother smacked him and smacked him and smacked him until she couldn’t do it anymore, and then she put him in the ark of bulrushes.” This puzzled the teacher until he looked at the passage in Exodus: “And when she could hide him no longer, she laid him in an ark of bulrushes.” Here, we technically have two different uses of the word hide; but for the child, the confusion is just as significant when we have one word with two distinct meanings, or when a word is used figuratively.
The word ‘child’ means two different things, which in some languages are expressed by two distinct words. I remember my own astonishment at the age of nine when I heard my godmother talk of her children. “But you have no children.” “Yes, Clara and Eliza.” I knew them, of course, but they were grown up.
The word ‘child’ has two different meanings, which some languages express with separate words. I still remember my surprise at nine when my godmother talked about her children. “But you don’t have any children.” “Yes, Clara and Eliza.” I knew them, of course, but they were all grown up.
Take again the word old. A boy knew that he was three years, but could not be induced to say ‘three years old’; no, he is three years new, and his father too is new, as distinct from his grandmother, who he knows is old. A child asked, “Why have grand dukes and grand pianos got the same name?” (Glenconner, p. 21).
Take again the word old. A boy knew that he was three years, but wouldn't say 'three years old'; no, he says he is three years new, and his dad is new too, unlike his grandmother, who he knows is old. A child asked, “Why do grand dukes and grand pianos have the same name?” (Glenconner, p. 21).
When Frans was told (4.4) “Your eyes are running,” he was much astonished, and asked, “Are they running away?”
When Frans was told (4.4) “Your eyes are running,” he was very surprised and asked, “Are they running away?”
Sometimes a child knows a word first in some secondary sense. When a country child first came to Copenhagen and saw a soldier, he said, “There is a tin-soldier” (2.0). Stern has a story about his daughter who was taken to the country and wished to pat the backs of the pigs, but was checked with the words, “Pigs always lie in dirt,” when she was suddenly struck with a new idea; “Ah, that is why they are called pigs, because they are so dirty: but what would people call them if they didn’t lie in the dirt?” History repeats itself: only the other day a teacher wrote to me that one of his pupils had begun his essay with the words: “Pigs are rightly called thus, for they are such swine.”
Sometimes a child first learns a word in a secondary way. When a country kid came to Copenhagen for the first time and saw a soldier, he said, “There’s a tin soldier” (2.0). Stern has a story about his daughter who was taken to the countryside and wanted to pet the pigs, but was told, “Pigs always lie in dirt,” which made her think of something new; “Ah, that’s why they’re called pigs, because they’re so dirty: but what would people call them if they didn’t lie in the dirt?” History repeats itself: just the other day, a teacher wrote to me that one of his students started his essay with the words: “Pigs are rightly called thus, for they are such swine.”
Words of similar sound are apt to be confused. Some children have had trouble till mature years with soldier and shoulder, hassock and cassock, diary and dairy. Lady Glenconner writes: “They almost invariably say ‘lemon’ [for melon], and if they make an effort to be more correct they still mispronounce it. ‘Don’t say melling.’ ‘Very well, then, mellum.’” Among other confusions mentioned in her book I may quote Portugal for ‘purgatory,’ King Solomon’s three hundred Columbines, David and his great friend Johnson, Cain and Mabel—all of them showing how words from spheres beyond the ordinary ken of children are assimilated to more familiar ones.
Words that sound alike can easily get mixed up. Some kids struggle well into adulthood with soldier and shoulder, hassock and cassock, diary and dairy. Lady Glenconner notes: “They almost always say ‘lemon’ instead of ‘melon,’ and even when they try to be more correct, they still mispronounce it. ‘Don’t say melling.’ ‘Okay, then, mellum.’” Among other mix-ups she mentions in her book, I can quote Portugal for ‘purgatory,’ King Solomon’s three hundred Columbines, David and his great friend Johnson, Cain and Mabel—all of these show how words from areas beyond what children normally understand get confused with more familiar ones.
Schuchardt has a story of a little coloured boy in the West Indies who said, “It’s three hot in this room”: he had heard too = two and literally wanted to ‘go one better.’ According to Mr. James Payne, a boy for years substituted for the words ‘Hallowed be Thy name’ ‘Harold be Thy name.’ Many children imagine that there is a pole to mark where the North Pole is, and even (like Helen Keller) that polar bears climb the Pole.
Schuchardt tells a story about a little Black boy in the West Indies who said, “It’s three hot in this room”: he had heard too = two and literally wanted to make it a bit better. According to Mr. James Payne, a boy for years replaced the words ‘Hallowed be Thy name’ with ‘Harold be Thy name.’ Many children think there’s a pole to show where the North Pole is, and even (like Helen Keller) that polar bears climb the Pole.
This leads us naturally to what linguists call ‘popular etymology’—which is very frequent with children in all countries. I give a few examples from books. A four-year-old boy had heard several times about his nurse’s neuralgia, and finally said: “I don’t think it’s new ralgia, I call it old ralgia.” In this way anchovies are made into hamchovies, whirlwind into worldwind, and holiday into hollorday, a day to holloa. Professor Sturtevant writes: A boy of six or seven had frequently had his ear irrigated; when similar treatment was applied to his nose, he said that he had been ‘nosigated’—he had evidently given his own interpretation to the first syllable of irrigate.
This naturally brings us to what linguists call ‘popular etymology’—which is very common with kids in all countries. Here are a few examples from books. A four-year-old boy had heard several times about his nurse’s neuralgia, and finally said: “I don’t think it’s new ralgia, I call it old ralgia.” In this way, anchovies become hamchovies, whirlwind turns into worldwind, and holiday changes to hollorday, a day to shout. Professor Sturtevant writes: A boy of six or seven had frequently had his ear irrigated; when the same treatment was done to his nose, he said that he had been ‘nosigated’—he had clearly given his own interpretation to the first syllable of irrigate.
There is an element of ‘popular etymology’ in the following joke which was made by one of the Glenconner children when four years old: “I suppose you wag along in the wagonette, the landau lands you at the door, and you sweep off in the brougham” (pronounced broom).
There’s an element of ‘popular etymology’ in the following joke made by one of the Glenconner kids when they were four years old: “I guess you go along in the wagonette, the landau drops you off at the door, and you drive off in the brougham” (pronounced broom).
VI.—§ 7. Shifters.
A class of words which presents grave difficulty to children are those whose meaning differs according to the situation, so that the child hears them now applied to one thing and now to another. That was the case with words like ‘father,’ and ‘mother.’ Another such word is ‘enemy.’ When Frans (4.5) played a war-game with Eggert, he could not get it into his head that he was Eggert’s enemy: no, it was only Eggert who was the enemy. A stronger case still is ‘home.’ When a child was asked if his grandmother had been at home, and answered: “No, grandmother was at grandfather’s,” it is clear that for him ‘at home’ meant merely ‘at my home.’ Such words may be called shifters. When Frans (3.6) heard it said that ‘the one’ (glove) was as good as ‘the other,’ he asked, “Which is the one, and which is the other?”—a question not easy to answer.
A group of words that can be really tricky for kids are those whose meanings change depending on the context. For example, a child might hear words like "father" and "mother" used in different ways. The word "enemy" is another example. When Frans (4.5) was playing a war game with Eggert, he couldn't understand that he was supposed to be Eggert's enemy; to him, it was just Eggert who was the enemy. An even clearer example is the word "home." When a child was asked if his grandmother was at home and he replied, “No, grandmother was at grandfather’s,” it shows that for him, "at home" only meant "at my home." These kinds of words can be called shifters. When Frans (3.6) heard someone say that "the one" (glove) was as good as "the other," he asked, “Which is the one, and which is the other?”—a question that isn’t easy to answer.
The most important class of shifters are the personal pronouns. The child hears the word ‘I’ meaning ‘Father,’ then again meaning ‘Mother,’ then again ‘Uncle Peter,’ and so on unendingly in the most confusing manner. Many people realize the difficulty thus presented to the child, and to obviate it will speak of themselves in the third person as ‘Father’ or ‘Grannie’ or ‘Mary,’ and instead of saying ‘you’ to the child, speak of it by its name. The child’s understanding of what is said is thus facilitated for the moment: but on the other hand the child in this way hears these little words less frequently and is slower in mastering them.
The most important type of shifters are personal pronouns. The child hears the word ‘I’ meaning ‘Dad,’ then again as ‘Mom,’ then again as ‘Uncle Peter,’ and so on in an endlessly confusing way. Many people recognize the challenges this creates for the child, and to help with it, they refer to themselves in the third person, saying ‘Dad’ or ‘Granny’ or ‘Mary,’ and instead of saying ‘you’ to the child, they use the child’s name. This makes it easier for the child to understand what’s being said in the moment; however, because of this, the child hears these little words less often and takes longer to learn them.
If some children soon learn to say ‘I’ while others speak of themselves by their name, the difference is not entirely due to the different mental powers of the children, but must be largely attributed to their elders’ habit of addressing them by their name or by the pronouns. But Germans would not be Germans, and philosophers would not be philosophers, if they did not make the most of the child’s use of ‘I,’ in which they see the first sign of self-consciousness. The elder Fichte, we are told, used to celebrate not his son’s birthday, but the day on which he first spoke of himself as ‘I.’ The sober truth is, I take it, that a boy who speaks of himself as ‘Jack’ can have just as full and strong a perception of himself as opposed to the rest of the world as one who has learnt the little linguistic trick of saying ‘I.’ But this does not suit some of the great psychologists, as seen from the following quotation: “The child uses no pronouns; it speaks of itself in the third person, because it has no idea of its ‘I’ (Ego) nor of its ‘Not-I,’ because it knows nothing of itself nor of others.”
If some kids quickly learn to say "I" while others refer to themselves by their name, the difference isn't just about their different mental abilities; it's mostly because of how their parents talk to them, either by name or using pronouns. But Germans wouldn't be Germans, and philosophers wouldn't be philosophers if they didn't make a big deal out of a child's use of "I," which they see as the first sign of self-awareness. We hear that the elder Fichte celebrated not his son's birthday, but the day he first referred to himself as "I." The plain truth, I believe, is that a boy who calls himself "Jack" can have just as clear a sense of himself compared to the rest of the world as someone who has learned the little language trick of saying "I." But this view doesn't fit with some leading psychologists, as shown in the following quote: “The child uses no pronouns; it speaks of itself in the third person because it has no concept of its ‘I’ (Ego) nor of its ‘Not-I,’ because it knows nothing of itself nor of others.”
It is not an uncommon case of confusion for a child to use ‘you’ and ‘your’ instead of ‘I,’ ‘me,’ and ‘mine.’ The child has noticed that ‘will you have?’ means ‘will Jack have?’ so that he looks on ‘you’ as synonymous with his own name. In some children this confusion may last for some months. It is in some cases connected with an inverted word-order, ‘do you’ meaning ‘I do’—an instance of ‘echoism’ (see below). Sometimes he will introduce a further complication by using the personal pronoun of the third person, as though he had started the sentence with ‘Jack’—then ‘you have his coat’ means ‘I have my coat.’ He may even speak of the person addressed as ‘I.’ ‘Will I tell a story?’ = ‘Will you tell a story?’ Frans was liable to use these confused forms between the ages of two and two and a-half, and I had to quicken his acquaintance with the right usage by refusing to understand him when he used the wrong. Beth M. (2.6) was very jealous about her elder sister touching any of her property, and if the latter sat on her chair, she would shriek out: “That’s your chair; that’s your chair.”
It's not uncommon for a child to mix up 'you' and 'your' with 'I,' 'me,' and 'mine.' The child realizes that 'will you have?' is the same as 'will Jack have?' so they see 'you' as just another way of referring to themselves. For some kids, this confusion can last several months. Sometimes it's linked to a reversed word order, where 'do you' actually means 'I do'—an example of 'echoism' (see below). Occasionally, they complicate things further by using third-person pronouns as if they had started the sentence with 'Jack'—so 'you have his coat' would mean 'I have my coat.' They might even refer to the person they're talking to as 'I.' 'Will I tell a story?' actually means 'Will you tell a story?' Frans would often mix up these words between the ages of two and two and a half, and I had to help him learn the correct usage by pretending not to understand him when he got it wrong. Beth M. (2.6) was very protective of her things and would scream, “That’s your chair; that’s your chair,” if her older sister sat on her chair.
The forms I and me are a common source of difficulty to English children. Both Tony E. (2.7 to 3.0) and Hilary M. (2.0) use my for me; it is apparently a kind of blending of me and I; e.g. “Give Hilary medicine, make my better,” “Maggy is looking at my,” “Give it my.” See also O’Shea, p. 81: ‘my want to do this or that; my feel bad; that is my pencil; take my to bed.’
The words I and me often confuse English children. Both Tony E. (2.7 to 3.0) and Hilary M. (2.0) use my instead of me; it seems to be a mix of me and I; for example, “Give Hilary medicine, make my better,” “Maggy is looking at my,” “Give it my.” See also O’Shea, p. 81: ‘my want to do this or that; my feel bad; that is my pencil; take my to bed.’
His and her are difficult to distinguish: “An ill lady, his legs were bad” (Tony E., 3.3).
His and her are hard to tell apart: “A sick woman, his legs were hurt” (Tony E., 3.3).
C. M. L. (about the end of her second year) constantly used wour and wours for our and ours, the connexion being with we, as ‘your’ with you. In exactly the same way many Danish children say vos for os on account of vi. But all this really falls under our next chapter.
C. M. L. (around the end of her second year) consistently used wour and wours for our and ours, connecting it to we, just like ‘your’ connects with you. Similarly, many Danish children say vos instead of os because of vi. However, all of this actually belongs to our next chapter.
VI.—§ 8. Extent of Vocabulary.
The number of words which the child has at command is constantly increasing, but not uniformly, as the increase is affected by the child’s health and the new experiences which life presents to him. In the beginning it is tolerably easy to count the words the child uses; later it becomes more difficult, as there are times when his command of speech grows with astonishing rapidity. There is great difference between individual children. Statistics have often been given of the extent of a child’s vocabulary at different ages, or of the results of comparing the vocabularies of a number of children.
The number of words a child can use is constantly growing, but not at a steady pace, as this growth is influenced by the child's health and the new experiences life offers them. At first, it's fairly easy to count the words the child uses; later on, it becomes more challenging, as there are moments when their speaking skills improve at an astonishing rate. There's a significant difference between individual children. Statistics have frequently been provided regarding the size of a child's vocabulary at various ages, or the outcomes of comparing the vocabularies of several children.
An American child who was closely observed by his mother, Mrs. Winfield S. Hall, had in the tenth month 3 words, in the eleventh 12, in the twelfth 24, in the thirteenth 38, in the fourteenth 48, in the fifteenth 106, in the sixteenth 199, and in the seventeenth 232 words (Child Study Monthly, March 1897). During the first month after the same boy was six years old, slips of paper and pencils were distributed over the house and practically everything which the child said was written down. After two or three days these were collected and the words were put under their respective letters in a book kept for that purpose. New sets of papers were put in their places and other lists made. In addition to this, the record of his life during the past year was examined and all of his words not already listed were added. In this way his summer vocabulary was obtained; conversations on certain topics were also introduced to give him an opportunity to use words relating to such topics. The list is printed in the Journal of Childhood and Adolescence, January 1902, and is well worth looking through. It contains 2,688 words, apart from proper names and numerals. No doubt the child was really in command of words beyond that total.
An American child who was closely observed by his mother, Mrs. Winfield S. Hall, had in the tenth month 3 words, in the eleventh 12, in the twelfth 24, in the thirteenth 38, in the fourteenth 48, in the fifteenth 106, in the sixteenth 199, and in the seventeenth 232 words (Child Study Monthly, March 1897). During the first month after the boy turned six, slips of paper and pencils were spread around the house, and practically everything he said was written down. After two or three days, these were collected, and the words were organized under their respective letters in a book kept for that purpose. New sets of papers were put in their places, and other lists were made. In addition to this, the record of his life during the past year was reviewed, and all the words not already listed were added. This way, his summer vocabulary was compiled; conversations on specific topics were also introduced to provide him with opportunities to use words related to those topics. The list is printed in the Journal of Childhood and Adolescence, January 1902, and is definitely worth checking out. It contains 2,688 words, not including proper names and numbers. No doubt the child was really in command of words beyond that total.
This list perhaps is exceptional on account of the care with which it was compiled, but as a rule I am afraid that it is not wise to attach much importance to these tables of statistics. One is generally left in the dark whether the words counted are those that the child has understood, or those that it has actually used—two entirely different things. The passive or receptive knowledge of a language always goes far beyond the active or productive.
This list might be special because of how carefully it was put together, but generally, I’m afraid it’s not wise to give too much weight to these statistical tables. It usually isn’t clear whether the words counted are ones the child understands or ones they actually use—these are two completely different things. A child’s passive or receptive knowledge of a language is always much greater than their active or productive vocabulary.
One also gets the impression that the observers have often counted up words without realizing the difficulties involved. What is to be counted as a word? Are I, me, we, us one word or four? Is teacup a new word for a child who already knows tea and cup? And so for all compounds. Is box (= a place at a theatre) the same word as box (= workbox)? Are the two thats in ‘that man that you see’ two words or one? It is clear that the process of counting involves so much that is arbitrary and uncertain that very little can be built on the statistics arrived at.
One also gets the sense that observers often count words without fully understanding the challenges involved. What counts as a word? Are I, me, we, us considered one word or four? Is teacup a new word for a child who already knows tea and cup? And this applies to all compounds. Is box (as in a spot at the theater) the same word as box (as in a workbox)? Are the two thats in ‘that man that you see’ two words or one? It’s clear that the counting process involves a lot of arbitrary and uncertain factors, so not much can be reliably inferred from the resulting statistics.
It is more interesting perhaps to determine what words at a given age a child does not know, or rather does not understand when he hears them or when they occur in his reading. I have myself collected such lists, and others have been given me by teachers, who have been astonished at words which their classes did not understand. A teacher can never be too cautious about assuming linguistic knowledge in his pupils—and this applies not only to foreign words, about which all teachers are on the alert,[126] but also to what seem to be quite everyday words of the language of the country.
It might be more interesting to figure out which words a child of a certain age does not know, or more precisely, which words they don’t understand when they hear them or when they encounter them in reading. I've compiled my own lists, and I've received others from teachers who were surprised by the words their students didn’t understand. A teacher can never be too careful about assuming what language knowledge their students have—and this applies not just to foreign words that teachers always keep an eye on,[126] but also to words that seem like everyday language in their country.
In connexion with the growth of vocabulary one may ask how many words are possessed by the average grown-up man? Max Müller in his Lectures stated on the authority of an English clergyman that an English farm labourer has only about three hundred words at command. This is the most utter balderdash, but nevertheless it has often been repeated, even by such an authority on psychology as Wundt. A Danish boy can easily learn seven hundred English words in the first year of his study of the language—and are we to believe that a grown Englishman, even of the lowest class, has no greater stock than such a beginner? If you go through the list of 2,000 to 3,000 words used by the American boy of six referred to above, you will easily convince yourself that they would far from suffice for the rudest labourer. A Swedish dialectologist, after a minute investigation, found that the vocabulary of Swedish peasants amounted to at least 26,000 words, and his view has been confirmed by other investigators. This conclusion is not invalidated by the fact that Shakespeare in his works uses only about 20,000 words and Milton in his poems only about 8,000. It is easy to see what a vast number of words of daily life are seldom or never required by a poet, especially a poet like Milton, whose works are on elevated subjects. The words used by Zola or Kipling or Jack London would no doubt far exceed those used by Shakespeare and Milton.[21]
In connection with the growth of vocabulary, one might wonder how many words the average adult has. Max Müller, in his Lectures, claimed, based on an English clergyman's opinion, that an English farm laborer knows only about three hundred words. This is complete nonsense, yet it has often been repeated, even by someone as authoritative in psychology as Wundt. A Danish boy can easily learn seven hundred English words in his first year studying the language—are we really to believe that an adult Englishman, even from the lowest class, has no more words than a beginner? If you look at the list of 2,000 to 3,000 words used by the American six-year-old mentioned above, you’ll see they’re nowhere near enough for even the simplest laborer. A Swedish dialectologist, after a thorough investigation, found that Swedish peasants have at least 26,000 words in their vocabulary, and other researchers have confirmed this. This conclusion holds true despite the fact that Shakespeare uses about 20,000 words in his works and Milton about 8,000 in his poetry. It's clear that many everyday words are rarely or never used by a poet, especially someone like Milton, whose works focus on elevated themes. The vocabulary of Zola, Kipling, or Jack London would undoubtedly far exceed that of Shakespeare and Milton.[21]
VI.—§ 9. Summary.
To sum up, then. There are only very few words that are explained to the child, and so long as it is quite small it will not even understand the explanations that might be given. Some it learns because, when the word is used, the object is at the same time pointed at, but most words it can only learn by drawing conclusions about their meaning from the situation in which they arise or from the context in which they are used. These conclusions, however, are very uncertain, or they may be correct for the particular occasion and not hold good on some other, to the child’s mind quite similar, occasion. Grown-up people are in the same position with regard to words they do not know, but which they come across in a book or newspaper, e.g. demise. The meanings of many words are at the same time extraordinarily vague and yet so strictly limited (at least in some respects) that the least deviation is felt as a mistake. Moreover, the child often learns a secondary or figurative meaning of a word before its simple[127] meaning. But gradually a high degree of accuracy is obtained, the fittest meanings surviving—that is (in this connexion) those that agree best with those of the surrounding society. And thus the individual is merged in society, and the social character of language asserts itself through the elimination of everything that is the exclusive property of one person only.
To sum up, there are only a few words explained to the child, and while they are still very young, they won’t even understand the explanations given. Some words are learned because, when the word is used, the object is pointed out at the same time, but most words are learned by figuring out their meaning from the situation they’re in or from the context they are used in. However, these conclusions are often very uncertain, or they might be correct for that specific moment but not applicable in a similar situation later on. Adults face the same issue when they encounter unfamiliar words in a book or newspaper, like demise. The meanings of many words can be incredibly vague yet also strictly limited (at least in certain ways) that even a slight deviation feels like a mistake. Additionally, a child often learns a secondary or figurative meaning of a word before grasping its basic meaning. Gradually, a high level of accuracy is achieved, with the most suitable meanings surviving—that is, those that align best with the surrounding society. In this way, the individual becomes part of society, and the social nature of language becomes evident through the removal of anything that belongs exclusively to one person.
CHAPTER VII
GRAMMAR
§ 1. Introductory. § 2. Substantives and Adjectives. § 3. Verbs. § 4. Degrees of Consciousness. § 5. Word-formation. § 6. Word-division. § 7. Sentences. § 8. Negation and Question. § 9. Prepositions and Idioms.
§ 1. Introductory. § 2. Nouns and Adjectives. § 3. Verbs. § 4. Levels of Awareness. § 5. Word Formation. § 6. Word Division. § 7. Sentences. § 8. Negation and Questions. § 9. Prepositions and Expressions.
VII.—§ 1. Introductory.
To learn a language it is not enough to know so many words. They must be connected according to the particular laws of the particular language. No one tells the child that the plural of ‘hand’ is hands, of ‘foot’ feet, of ‘man’ men, or that the past of ‘am’ is was, of ‘love’ loved; it is not informed when to say he and when him, or in what order words must stand. How can the little fellow learn all this, which when set forth in a grammar fills many pages and can only be explained by help of many learned words?
To learn a language, just knowing a bunch of words isn't enough. They need to be connected according to the specific rules of that language. No one tells a child that the plural of ‘hand’ is hands, of ‘foot’ feet, of ‘man’ men, or that the past tense of ‘am’ is was, and 'love' becomes loved; no one explains when to use he and when to use him, or the order in which words should be arranged. How can a young child learn all this, which is laid out in grammar books that take up many pages and can only be explained using complicated terminology?
Many people will say it comes by ‘instinct,’ as if ‘instinct’ were not one of those fine words which are chiefly used to cover over what is not understood, because it says so precious little and seems to say so precious much. But when other people, using a more everyday expression, say that it all ‘comes quite of itself,’ I must strongly demur: so far is it from ‘coming of itself’ that it demands extraordinary labour on the child’s part. The countless grammatical mistakes made by a child in its early years are a tell-tale proof of the difficulty which this side of language presents to him—especially, of course, on account of the unsystematic character of our flexions and the irregularity of its so-called ‘rules’ of syntax.
A lot of people will say it comes by 'instinct,' as if 'instinct' isn't one of those words that's mainly used to cover up what we don't fully understand, since it doesn't really explain much but suggests a lot. However, when others say that it all 'comes naturally,' I have to strongly disagree: it definitely doesn't just happen on its own; it requires a huge amount of effort from the child. The countless grammatical errors a child makes during their early years are clear evidence of the challenges this aspect of language poses for them—especially because of the chaotic nature of our grammar rules and the irregularity of its so-called 'syntax rules.'
At first each word has only one form for the child, but he soon discovers that grown-up people use many forms which resemble one another in different connexions, and he gets a sense of the purport of these forms, so as to be able to imitate them himself or even develop similar forms of his own. These latter forms are what linguists call analogy-formations: by analogy with ‘Jack’s hat’ and ‘father’s hat’ the child invents such as ‘uncle’s hat’ and ‘Charlie’s hat’—and inasmuch as these forms are ‘correct,’ no one can say on hearing them whether the child[129] has really invented them or has first heard them used by others. It is just on account of the fact that the forms developed on the spur of the moment by each individual are in the vast majority of instances perfectly identical with those used already by other people, that the principle of analogy comes to have such paramount importance in the life of language, for we are all thereby driven to apply it unhesitatingly to all those instances in which we have no ready-made form handy: without being conscious of it, each of us thus now and then really creates something never heard before by us or anybody else.
At first, each word has only one form for a child, but they quickly realize that adults use many forms that look similar in different contexts. The child starts to understand the meaning of these forms, allowing them to imitate these forms or even create their own. These new forms are what linguists refer to as analogy-formations: by drawing parallels with ‘Jack’s hat’ and ‘father’s hat,’ the child creates phrases like ‘uncle’s hat’ and ‘Charlie’s hat.’ Since these forms are ‘correct,’ it's hard to say whether the child has truly invented them or heard them used by others first. It's precisely because the forms that each individual comes up with in the moment often match those already used by others that the principle of analogy becomes so crucial in language; we are all compelled to apply it confidently to instances where we lack a ready-made form. Without realizing it, each of us occasionally creates something that has never been heard before by us or anyone else.
VII.—§ 2. Substantives and Adjectives.
The -s of the possessive is so regular in English that it is not difficult for the child to attach it to all words as soon as the character of the termination has dawned upon him. But at first there is a time with many children in which words are put together without change, so that ‘Mother hat’ stands for ‘Mother’s hat’; cf. also sentences like “Baby want baby milk.”
The -s for possessives is so regular in English that it isn't hard for kids to add it to all words once they realize how the ending works. But initially, many kids go through a phase where they put words together without changing them, so "Mother hat" means "Mother's hat"; compare that to sentences like "Baby want baby milk."
After the s-form has been learnt, it is occasionally attached to pronouns, as you’s for ‘your,’ or more rarely I’s or me’s for ‘my.’
After the s-form has been learned, it is sometimes added to pronouns, like you’s for ‘your,’ or less frequently I’s or me’s for ‘my.’
The -s is now in English added freely to whole groups of words, as in the King of England’s power, where the old construction was the King’s power of England, and in Beaumont and Fletcher’s plays (see on the historical development of this group genitive my ChE iii.). In Danish we have exactly the same construction, and Danish children will very frequently extend it, placing the -s at the end of a whole interrogative sentence, e.g., ‘Hvem er det da’s?’ (as if in English, ‘Who is it then’s,’ instead of ‘Whose is it then?’). Dr. H. Bradley once wrote to me: “One of your samples of children’s Danish is an exact parallel to a bit of child’s English that I noted long ago. My son, when a little boy, used to say ‘Who is that-’s’ (with a pause before the s) for ‘Whom does that belong to?’”
The -s is now used in English with whole groups of words, like in the King of England’s power, where the old way was the King’s power of England, and in Beaumont and Fletcher’s plays (see my ChE iii. for the historical development of this group genitive). In Danish, we have the same construction, and Danish children often extend it by placing the -s at the end of a whole question, for example, ‘Hvem er det da’s?’ (like in English, ‘Who is it then’s,’ instead of ‘Whose is it then?’). Dr. H. Bradley once wrote to me: “One of your examples of children’s Danish is an exact match to a bit of child’s English that I noticed long ago. My son, when he was little, used to say ‘Who is that-’s’ (with a pause before the s) for ‘Whom does that belong to?’”
Irregular plurals are often regularized, gooses for ‘geese,’ tooths, knifes, etc. O’Shea mentions one child who inversely formed the plural chieves for chiefs on the analogy of thieves.
Irregular plurals are often turned into regular ones, like gooses for ‘geese,’ tooths, knifes, and so on. O’Shea talks about one child who created the plural chieves for chiefs based on the example of thieves.
Sometimes the child becomes acquainted with the plural form first, and from it forms a singular. I have noticed this several times with Danish children, who had heard the irregular plural køer, ‘cows,’ and then would say en kø instead of en ko (while others from the singular ko form a regular plural koer). French children will say un chevau instead of un cheval.
Sometimes the child learns the plural form first and then creates a singular from it. I've noticed this several times with Danish children, who have heard the irregular plural køer, ‘cows,’ and then would say en kø instead of en ko (while others using the singular ko create a regular plural koer). French children will say un chevau instead of un cheval.
In the comparison of adjectives analogy-formations are frequent with all children, e.g. the littlest, littler, goodest, baddest,[130] splendider, etc. One child is reported as saying quicklier, another as saying quickerly, instead of the received more quickly. A curious formation is “P’raps it was John, but p’rapser it was Mary.”
In comparing adjectives, children often create their own forms, like the littlest, littler, goodest, baddest, [130] splendider, and so on. One child is noted for saying quicklier, while another said quickerly instead of the standard more quickly. A funny formation is “P’raps it was John, but p’rapser it was Mary.”
O’Shea (p. 108) notices a period of transition when the child may use the analogical form at one moment and the traditional one the next. Thus S. (4.0) will say better perhaps five times where he says gooder once, but in times of excitement he will revert to the latter form.
O’Shea (p. 108) points out a transitional phase when the child might use the analogical form at one moment and the traditional one the next. So S. (4.0) might say better maybe five times and use gooder once, but during moments of excitement, he will go back to using the latter form.
VII.—§ 3. Verbs.
The child at first tends to treat all verbs on the analogy of love, loved, loved, or kiss, kissed, kissed, thus catched, buyed, frowed for ‘caught, bought, threw or thrown,’ etc., but gradually it learns the irregular forms, though in the beginning with a good deal of hesitation and confusion, as done for ‘did,’ hunged for ‘hung,’ etc. O’Shea gives among other sentences (p. 94): “I drunked my milk.” “Budd swunged on the rings.” “Grandpa boughted me a ring.” “I caughted him.” “Aunt Net camed to-day.” “He gaved it to me”—in all of which the irregular form has been supplemented with the regular ending.
The child initially tends to handle all verbs like love, loved, loved, or kiss, kissed, kissed, so they might say catched, buyed, frowed for ‘caught, bought, threw or thrown,’ etc., but over time, they learn the irregular forms, though at first with a lot of hesitation and confusion, like done for ‘did,’ hunged for ‘hung,’ etc. O’Shea gives some examples (p. 94): “I drunked my milk.” “Budd swunged on the rings.” “Grandpa boughted me a ring.” “I caughted him.” “Aunt Net camed today.” “He gaved it to me”—in all of these, the irregular form has been combined with the regular ending.
A little Danish incident may be thus rendered in English. The child (4.6): “I have seed a chestnut.” “Where have you seen it?” He: “I seen it in the garden.” This shows the influence of the form last heard.
A little Danish incident can be expressed in English like this: The child (4.6): “I saw a chestnut.” “Where did you see it?” He: “I saw it in the garden.” This shows the influence of the form last heard.
I once heard a French child say “Il a pleuvy” for ‘plu’ from ‘pleuvoir.’ Other analogical forms are prendu for ‘pris’; assire for ‘asseoir’ (from the participle assis), se taiser for ‘se taire’ (from the frequent injunction taisez-vous). Similar formations are frequent in all countries.
I once heard a French child say “Il a pleuvy” instead of ‘plu’ from ‘pleuvoir.’ Other similar examples are prendu for ‘pris’; assire for ‘asseoir’ (from the participle assis), se taiser for ‘se taire’ (from the common command taisez-vous). Similar patterns occur in many countries.
VII.—§ 4. Degrees of Consciousness.
Do the little brains think about these different forms and their uses? Or is the learning of language performed as unconsciously as the circulation of the blood or the process of digestion? Clearly they do not think about grammatical forms in the way pursued in grammar-lessons, with all the forms of the same word arranged side by side of one another, with rules and exceptions. Still there is much to lead us to believe that the thing does not go of itself without some thinking over. The fact that in later years we speak our language without knowing how we do it, the right words and phrases coming to us no one knows how or whence, is no proof that it was always so. We ride a bicycle without giving a thought to the machine, look around us, talk with a friend,[131] etc., and yet there was a time when every movement had to be mastered by slow and painful efforts. There would be nothing strange in supposing that it is the same with the acquisition of language.
Do little brains think about these different forms and their uses? Or is learning a language done as unconsciously as how blood circulates or how digestion works? Clearly, they don’t think about grammatical forms in the way we do in grammar lessons, where all the forms of the same word are lined up next to each other along with rules and exceptions. Still, there's plenty to suggest that it doesn’t just happen on its own without some thinking involved. The fact that later on we speak our language without knowing how we do it, with the right words and phrases coming to us somehow, is no proof that it's always been that way. We ride a bike without focusing on the machine, look around us, talk with a friend, [131] etc., yet there was a time when we had to learn every movement through slow and difficult practice. It wouldn't be surprising to think that it’s the same with learning a language.
Of course, it would be idle to ask children straight out if they think about these things, and what they think. But now and then one notices something which shows that at an early age they think about points of grammar a good deal. When Frans was 2.9, he lay in bed not knowing that anyone was in the next room, and he was heard to say quite plainly: “Små hænder hedder det—lille hånd—små hænder—lille hænder, næ små hænder.” (“They are called small hands—little hand—small hands—little hands, no, small hands”: in Danish lille is not used with a plural noun.) Similar things have been related to me by other parents, one child, for instance, practising plural forms while turning over the leaves of a picture-book, and another one, who was corrected for saying nak instead of nikkede (‘nodded’), immediately retorted “Stikker stak, nikker nak,” thus showing on what analogy he had formed the new preterit. Frequently children, after giving a form which their own ears tell them is wrong, at once correct it: ‘I sticked it in—I stuck it in.’
Of course, it would be pointless to ask children outright if they think about these things and what their thoughts are. But every so often, you notice something that shows they do think about grammar a lot at a young age. When Frans was 2.9, he was lying in bed, unaware that someone was in the next room, and he was heard saying quite clearly: “Små hænder hedder det—lille hånd—små hænder—lille hænder, næ små hænder.” (“They are called small hands—little hand—small hands—little hands, no, small hands”: in Danish, lille is not used with a plural noun.) Other parents have shared similar stories with me; for example, one child practiced plural forms while flipping through the pages of a picture book, and another, who was corrected for saying nak instead of nikkede (‘nodded’), immediately replied, “Stikker stak, nikker nak,” thus showing the reasoning behind his new past tense form. Often, children, after saying a form that their own ears recognize as wrong, will quickly correct themselves: ‘I sticked it in—I stuck it in.’
A German child, not yet two, said: “Papa, hast du mir was mitgebringt—gebrungen—gebracht?” almost at a breath (Gabelentz), and another (2.5) said hausin, but then hesitated and added: “Man kann auch häuser sagen” (Meringer).
A German child, not even two yet, said: “Dad, did you bring me something?” almost in one breath (Gabelentz), and another child (2.5) said hausin, but then paused and added: “You can also say häuser” (Meringer).
VII.—§ 5. Word-formation.
In the forming of words the child’s brain is just as active. In many cases, again, it will be impossible to distinguish between what the child has heard and merely copied and what it has itself fashioned to a given pattern. If a child, for example, uses the word ‘kindness,’ it is probable that he has heard it before, but it is not certain, because he might equally well have formed the word himself. If, however, we hear him say ‘kindhood,’ or ‘kindship,’ or ‘wideness,’ ‘broadness,’ ‘stupidness,’ we know for certain that he has made the word up himself, because the resultant differs from the form used in the language he hears around him. A child who does not know the word ‘spade’ may call the tool a digger; he may speak of a lamp as a shine. He may say it suns when the sun is shining (cf. it rains), or ask his mother to sauce his pudding. It is quite natural that the enormous number of nouns and verbs of exactly the same form in English (blossom, care, drink, end, fight, fish, ape, hand, dress, etc.) should induce children to make new verbs according to the same pattern;[132] I quote a few of the examples given by O’Shea: “I am going to basket these apples.” “I pailed him out” (took a turtle out of a washtub with a pail). “I needled him” (put a needle through a fly).
In forming words, the child's brain is just as active. Often, it can be impossible to tell the difference between what the child has heard and copied and what they have created themselves. For example, if a child uses the word “kindness,” it's likely they’ve heard it before, but it’s not certain because they might have come up with it on their own. However, if we hear them say “kindhood,” “kindship,” “wideness,” “broadness,” or “stupidness,” we know for sure they made those words up themselves because the results differ from the forms used in the language around them. A child who doesn’t know the word “spade” might call the tool a digger; they might refer to a lamp as a shine. They could say it suns when the sun is shining (similar to it rains), or ask their mother to sauce their pudding. It’s completely natural that the vast number of nouns and verbs with the same form in English (blossom, care, drink, end, fight, fish, ape, hand, dress, etc.) would lead children to create new verbs following the same pattern;[132] I’ll quote a few examples given by O’Shea: “I am going to basket these apples.” “I pailed him out” (took a turtle out of a washtub with a pail). “I needled him” (put a needle through a fly).
Other words are formed by means of derivative endings, as sorrified, lessoner (O’Shea 32), flyable (able to fly, Glenconner 3); “This tooth ought to come out, because it is crookening the others” (a ten-year-old, told me by Professor Ayres). Compound nouns, too, may be freely formed, such as wind-ship, eye-curtain (O’Shea), a fun-copy of Romeo and Juliet (travesty, Glenconner 19). Bryan L. (ab. 5) said springklers for chrysalises (‘because they wake up in the spring’).
Other words are created using derivative endings, like sorrified, lessoner (O’Shea 32), flyable (able to fly, Glenconner 3); “This tooth should come out because it is crookening the others” (a ten-year-old, told to me by Professor Ayres). Compound nouns can also be easily formed, such as wind-ship, eye-curtain (O’Shea), a fun-copy of Romeo and Juliet (travesty, Glenconner 19). Bryan L. (ab. 5) said springklers for chrysalises (‘because they wake up in the spring’).
Sometimes a child will make up a new word through ‘blending’ two, as when Hilary M. (1.8 to 2) spoke of rubbish = the rubber to polish the boots, or of the backet, from bat and racquet. Beth M. (2.0) used breakolate, from breakfast and chocolate, and Chally as a child’s name, a compound of two sisters, Charity and Sally.
Sometimes a child will invent a new word by blending two, like when Hilary M. (1.8 to 2) talked about rubbish meaning the rubber to polish the boots, or referred to the backet, combining bat and racquet. Beth M. (2.0) created breakolate from breakfast and chocolate, and Chally as a name for a child, a mix of two sisters, Charity and Sally.
VII.—§ 6. Word-division.
We are so accustomed to see sentences in writing or print with a little space left after each word, that we have got altogether wrong conceptions of language as it is spoken. Here words follow one another without the least pause till the speaker hesitates for a word or has come to the end of what he has to say. ‘Not at all’ sounds like ‘not a tall.’ It therefore requires in many cases a great deal of comparison and analysis on the part of the child to find out what is one and what two or three words. We have seen before that the question ‘How big is the boy?’ is to the child a single expression, beyond his powers of analysis, and to a much later age it is the same with other phrases. The child, then, may make false divisions, and either treat a group of words as one word or one word as a group of words. A girl (2.6) used the term ‘Tanobijeu’ whenever she wished her younger brother to get out of her way. Her parents finally discovered that she had caught up and shortened a phrase that some older children had used—‘’Tend to your own business’ (O’Shea).
We are so used to seeing sentences in writing or print with a little space after each word that we have completely misunderstood how language is actually spoken. In speech, words flow into each other without any pauses until the speaker hesitates for a word or finishes what they have to say. “Not at all” can sound like “not a tall.” This often means that kids have to do a lot of comparing and analyzing to figure out what counts as one word and what counts as two or three. As we’ve seen before, the question “How big is the boy?” is one single expression for a child, beyond their ability to break it down, and it stays the same for other phrases as they get older. This leads kids to make incorrect divisions, treating a group of words as one word or a single word as a group of words. A girl (2.6) used the term “Tanobijeu” whenever she wanted her younger brother to move out of her way. Her parents eventually realized that she had picked up and shortened a phrase some older kids used—“Tend to your own business” (O’Shea).
A child, addressing her cousin as ‘Aunt Katie,’ was told “I am not Aunt Katie, I am merely Katie.” Next day she said: “Good-morning, Aunt merely-Katie” (translated). A child who had been praised with the words, ‘You are a good boy,’ said to his mother, “You’re a good boy, mother” (2.8).
A child, calling her cousin ‘Aunt Katie,’ was told, “I’m not Aunt Katie, I’m just Katie.” The next day she said, “Good morning, Aunt Just-Katie.” A child who had been praised with the words, “You’re a good boy,” said to his mom, “You’re a good boy, Mom” (2.8).
Cecil H. (4.0) came back from a party and said that she had been given something very nice to eat. “What was it?”[133] “Rats.” “No, no.” “Well, it was mice then.” She had been asked if she would have ‘some-ice,’ and had taken it to be ‘some mice.’ S. L. (2.6) constantly used ‘ababana’ for ‘banana’; the form seems to have come from the question “Will you have a banana?” but was used in such a sentence as “May I have an ababana?” Children will often say napple for apple through a misdivision of an-apple, and normous for enormous; cf. Ch. X § 2.
Cecil H. (4.0) came back from a party and said that she had been given something really nice to eat. “What was it?”[133] “Rats.” “No, no.” “Well, it was mice then.” She had been asked if she wanted ‘some-ice,’ and had thought they meant ‘some mice.’ S. L. (2.6) constantly said ‘ababana’ for ‘banana’; it seems to have come from the question “Will you have a banana?” but was used in a sentence like “May I have an ababana?” Kids will often say napple for apple because they misheard an-apple, and normous for enormous; cf. Ch. X § 2.
A few examples may be added from children’s speech in other countries. Ronjat’s child said nésey for ‘échelle,’ starting from u'ne‿échelle; Grammont’s child said un tarbre, starting from cet arbre, and ce nos for ‘cet os,’ from un os; a German child said motel for ‘hotel,’ starting from the combination ‘im‿(h)‿otel’ (Stern). Many German children say arrhöe, because they take the first syllable of ‘diarrhöe’ as the feminine article. A Dutch child heard the phrase ‘’k weet ’t niet’ (‘I don’t know’), and said “Papa, hij kweet ’t niet” (Van Ginneken). A Danish child heard his father say, “Jeg skal op i ministeriet” (“I’m going to the Government office”), and took the first syllable as min (my); consequently he asked, “Skal du i dinisteriet?” A French child was told that they expected Munkácsy (the celebrated painter, in French pronounced as Mon-), and asked his aunt: “Est-ce que ton Kácsy ne viendra pas?” Antoinette K. (7.), in reply to “C’est bien, je te félicite,” said, “Eh bien, moi je ne te fais pas licite.”
Here are some examples from children’s speech in other countries. Ronjat’s child said nésey for ‘échelle,’ starting from u'ne‿échelle; Grammont’s child said un tarbre, starting from cet arbre, and ce nos for ‘cet os,’ from un os; a German child said motel for ‘hotel,’ starting from the combination ‘im‿(h)‿otel’ (Stern). Many German children say arrhöe because they take the first syllable of ‘diarrhöe’ as the feminine article. A Dutch child heard the phrase ‘’k weet ’t niet’ (‘I don’t know’), and said “Papa, hij kweet ’t niet” (Van Ginneken). A Danish child heard his father say, “Jeg skal op i ministeriet” (“I’m going to the Government office”), and took the first syllable as min (my); consequently, he asked, “Skal du i dinisteriet?” A French child was told that they expected Munkácsy (the celebrated painter, pronounced in French as Mon-), and asked his aunt: “Est-ce que ton Kácsy ne viendra pas?” Antoinette K. (7.), in response to “C’est bien, je te félicite,” said, “Eh bien, moi je ne te fais pas licite.”
The German ‘Ich habe antgewortet’ is obviously on the analogy of angenommen, etc. (Meringer). Danish children not unfrequently take the verb telefonere as two words, and in the interrogative form will place the personal pronoun in the middle of it, ‘Tele hun fonerer?’ (‘Does she telephone?’) A girl asked to see ele mer fant (as if in English she had said ‘ele more phant’). Cf. ‘Give me more handier-cap’ for ‘Give me a greater handicap’—in a foot-race (O’Shea 108).
The German phrase ‘Ich habe antgewortet’ clearly follows the pattern of angenommen, etc. (Meringer). Danish kids often treat the verb telefonere as if it were two words and will place the personal pronoun in the middle when asking questions, like ‘Tele hun fonerer?’ (‘Does she telephone?’). A girl asked to see ele mer fant (as if she had said ‘ele more phant’ in English). Compare this to ‘Give me more handier-cap’ for ‘Give me a greater handicap’—in a foot race (O’Shea 108).
VII.—§ 7. Sentences.
In the first period the child knows nothing of grammar: it does not connect words together, far less form sentences, but each word stands by itself. ‘Up’ means what we should express by a whole sentence, ‘I want to get up,’ or ‘Lift me up’; ‘Hat’ means ‘Put on my hat,’ or ‘I want to put my hat on,’ or ‘I have my hat on,’ or ‘Mamma has a new hat on’; ‘Father’ can be either ‘Here comes Father,’ or ‘This is Father,’ or ‘He is called Father,’ or ‘I want Father to come to me,’ or ‘I want this or that from Father.’ This particular group of sounds is vaguely associated with the mental picture of the person in question,[134] and is uttered at the sight of him or at the mere wish to see him or something else in connexion with him.
In the first stage, the child doesn’t know anything about grammar: it doesn’t link words together, let alone form sentences, but each word stands alone. ‘Up’ conveys what we would express with an entire sentence, like ‘I want to get up,’ or ‘Lift me up’; ‘Hat’ means ‘Put on my hat,’ or ‘I want to put my hat on,’ or ‘I have my hat on,’ or ‘Mom has a new hat on’; ‘Father’ could mean either ‘Here comes Dad,’ or ‘This is Dad,’ or ‘He is called Dad,’ or ‘I want Dad to come to me,’ or ‘I want this or that from Dad.’ This specific group of sounds is loosely associated with the mental image of the person involved,[134] and is spoken when the child sees him or simply wishes to see him or something else related to him.
When we say that such a word means what we should express by a whole sentence, this does not amount to saying that the child’s ‘Up’ is a sentence, or a sentence-word, as many of those who have written about these questions have said. We might just as well assert that clapping our hands is a sentence, because it expresses the same idea (or the same frame of mind) that is otherwise expressed by the whole sentence ‘This is splendid.’ The word ‘sentence’ presupposes a certain grammatical structure, which is wanting in the child’s utterance.
When we say that a word conveys what we could express with an entire sentence, it doesn’t mean that the child’s “Up” is a sentence, or a sentence-word, as many have suggested in discussions about these topics. We might as well claim that clapping our hands is a sentence because it expresses the same idea (or the same feelings) as the full sentence “This is great.” The term “sentence” implies a specific grammatical structure, which is missing in the child’s expression.
Many investigators have asserted that the child’s first utterances are not means of imparting information, but always an expression of the child’s wishes and requirements. This is certainly somewhat of an exaggeration, since the child quite clearly can make known its joy at seeing a hat or a plaything, or at merely being able to recognize it and remember the word for it; but the statement still contains a great deal of truth, for without strong feelings a child would not say much, and it is a great stimulus to talk that he very soon discovers that he gets his wishes fulfilled more easily when he makes them known by means of certain sounds.
Many researchers have claimed that a child's first words aren't just for sharing information, but are really about expressing their wants and needs. This is somewhat of an overstatement, as it's clear that a child can show their happiness when they see a hat or a toy, or simply when they recognize it and remember its name. However, there's a lot of truth in the statement because without strong feelings, a child wouldn't say much. They soon realize that they can get what they want more easily by using specific sounds to express those desires.
Frans (1.7) was accustomed to express his longings in general by help of a long m with rising tone, while at the same time stretching out his hand towards the particular thing that he longed for. This he did, for example, at dinner, when he wanted water. One day his mother said, “Now see if you can say vand (water),” and at once he said what was an approach to the word, and was delighted at getting something to drink by that means. A moment later he repeated what he had said, and was inexpressibly delighted to have found the password which at once brought him something to drink. This was repeated several times. Next day, when his father was pouring out water for himself, the boy again said ‘van,’ ‘van,’ and was duly rewarded. He had not heard the word during the intervening twenty-four hours, and nothing had been done to remind him of it. After some repetitions (for he only got a few drops at a time) he pronounced the word for the first time quite correctly. The day after, the same thing occurred; the word was never heard but at dinner. When he became rather a nuisance with his constant cries for water, his mother said: “Say please”—and immediately came his “Bebe vand” (“Water, please”)—his first attempt to put two words together.
Frans (1.7) was used to expressing what he wanted by making a long m with a rising tone while reaching out for the specific thing he desired. For instance, at dinner, when he wanted water, his mother said, “Now see if you can say vand (water),” and immediately he made a sound that was close to the word and was thrilled to get something to drink that way. A moment later, he repeated what he had said and was incredibly happy to have discovered the magic word that brought him something to drink. This happened several times. The next day, when his father was pouring water for himself, the boy again said ‘van,’ ‘van,’ and was rewarded. He hadn’t heard the word in the past twenty-four hours, and nothing had reminded him of it. After a few tries (since he only got a few drops at a time), he pronounced the word correctly for the first time. The next day, the same thing happened; the word was only heard at dinner. When he became somewhat annoying with his constant calls for water, his mother said, “Say please”—and right away he said “Bebe vand” (“Water, please”)—his first attempt to combine two words.
Later—in this formless period—the child puts more and more words together, often in quite haphazard order: ‘My go snow’[135] (‘I want to go out into the snow’), etc. A Danish child of 2.1 said the Danish words (imperfectly pronounced, of course) corresponding to “Oh papa lamp mother boom,” when his mother had struck his father’s lamp with a bang. Another child said “Papa hen corn cap” when he saw his father give corn to the hens out of his cap.
Later—in this formless period—the child starts to put more and more words together, often in a random order: ‘My go snow’[135] (‘I want to go outside to play in the snow’), etc. A Danish child at 2.1 said the Danish words (imperfectly pronounced, of course) that matched “Oh papa lamp mother boom,” when his mom accidentally hit his dad’s lamp. Another child said “Papa hen corn cap” when he saw his dad feeding corn to the hens from his cap.
When Frans was 1.10, passing a post-office (which Danes call ‘posthouse’), he said of his own accord the Danish words for ‘post, house, bring, letter’(a pause between the successive words)—I suppose that the day before he had heard a sentence in which these words occurred. In the same month, when he had thrown a ball a long way, he said what would be in English ‘dat was good.’ This was not a sentence which he had put together for himself, but a mere repetition of what had been said to him, clearly conceived as a whole, and equivalent to ‘bravo.’ Sentences of this kind, however, though taken as units, prepare the way for the understanding of the words ‘that’ and ‘was’ when they turn up in other connexions.
When Frans was 1 year and 10 months old, passing a post office (which Danes call ‘posthouse’), he spontaneously said the Danish words for ‘post, house, bring, letter’ (with a pause between each word)—I assume that the day before he had heard a sentence that included those words. In the same month, after throwing a ball a long distance, he said what would translate to English as ‘that was good.’ This wasn’t a sentence he created himself; it was just a repetition of something he had heard, clearly understood as a whole, and meant to say ‘great job.’ However, sentences like this, although considered as units, help him begin to understand the words ‘that’ and ‘was’ when they appear in different contexts.
One thing which plays a great rôle in children’s acquisition of language, and especially in their early attempts to form sentences, is Echoism: the fact that children echo what is said to them. When one is learning a foreign language, it is an excellent method to try to imitate to oneself in silence every sentence which one hears spoken by a native. By that means the turns of phrases, the order of words, the intonation of the sentence are firmly fixed in the memory—so that they can be recalled when required, or rather recur to one quite spontaneously without an effort. What the grown man does of conscious purpose our children to a large extent do without a thought—that is, they repeat aloud what they have just heard, either the whole, if it is a very short sentence, or more commonly the conclusion, as much of it as they can retain in their short memories. The result is a matter of chance—it need not always have a meaning or consist of entire words. Much, clearly, is repeated without being understood, much, again, without being more than half understood. Take, for example (translated):
One thing that plays a big role in how children learn language, especially in their early attempts to form sentences, is Echoism: the fact that children repeat what they hear. When someone is learning a foreign language, it's a great method to silently imitate every sentence spoken by a native speaker. This helps keep the phrase structures, word order, and sentence intonation firmly in memory—so they can recall it when needed, or it can spontaneously come to mind without effort. What adults do with conscious intention, children largely do without thinking—that is, they repeat aloud what they've just heard, either the whole thing if it's a very short sentence, or more often just the ending, as much as they can remember. The outcome is random—it doesn't always have to make sense or be complete words. A lot is repeated without being understood, and much is only half understood. Take, for example (translated):
Shall I carry you?—Frans (1.9): Carry you.
Shall I carry you?—Frans (1.9): Carry you.
Shall Mother carry Frans?—Carry Frans.
Should Mother carry Frans?—Carry Frans.
The sky is so blue.—So boo.
The sky is so blue.—So sad.
I shall take an umbrella.—Take rella.
I’ll grab an umbrella.—Grab the umbrella.
Though this feature in a child’s mental history has been often noticed, no one seems to have seen its full significance. One of the acutest observers (Meumann, p. 28) even says that it has no importance in the development of the child’s speech. On the contrary, I think that Echoism explains very much indeed. First let us bear in mind the mutilated forms of words which a child[136] uses: ’chine for machine, ’gar for cigar, Trix for Beatrix, etc. Then a child’s frequent use of an indirect form of question rather than direct, ‘Why you smoke, Father?’ which can hardly be explained except as an echo of sentences like ‘Tell me why you smoke.’ This plays a greater rôle in Danish than in English, and the corresponding form of the sentence has been frequently remarked by Danish parents. Another feature which is nearly constant with Danish children at the age when echoing is habitual is the inverted word order: this is used after an initial adverb (nu kommer hun, etc.), but the child will use it in all cases (kommer hun, etc.). Further, the extremely frequent use of the infinitive, because the child hears it towards the end of a sentence, where it is dependent on a preceding can, or may, or must. ‘Not eat that’ is a child’s echo of ‘You mustn’t eat that.’ In German this has become the ordinary form of official order: “Nicht hinauslehnen” (“Do not lean out of the window”).
Though this aspect of a child's mental development has often been observed, no one seems to grasp its full significance. One sharp observer (Meumann, p. 28) even claims it has no importance in how a child develops speech. On the contrary, I believe that Echoism explains a lot. First, let’s consider the distorted forms of words that a child uses: ’chine for machine, ’gar for cigar, Trix for Beatrix, and so on. Then there’s a child’s frequent use of indirect questions instead of direct ones, like ‘Why you smoke, Father?’ This can hardly be explained except as an echo of phrases like ‘Tell me why you smoke.’ This is more common in Danish than in English, and Danish parents have often noted this sentence structure. Another feature that is almost always present with Danish children at the age when echoing is common is the inverted word order: this is used after an initial adverb (nu kommer hun, etc.), but the child will use it in all situations (kommer hun, etc.). Additionally, there's the very frequent use of the infinitive, as the child hears it at the end of a sentence, where it depends on a preceding can, may, or must. ‘Not eat that’ is a child’s echo of ‘You mustn’t eat that.’ In German, this has become the standard form of an official order: “Nicht hinauslehnen” (“Do not lean out of the window”).
VII.—§ 8. Negation and Question.
Most children learn to say ‘no’ before they can say ‘yes’—simply because negation is a stronger expression of feeling than affirmation. Many little children use nenenene (short ĕ) as a natural expression of fretfulness and discomfort. It is perhaps so natural that it need not be learnt: there is good reason for the fact that in so many languages words of negation begin with n (or m). Sometimes the n is heard without a vowel: it is only the gesture of ‘turning up one’s nose’ made audible.
Most kids learn to say ‘no’ before they can say ‘yes’—just because saying no is a stronger expression of feelings than saying yes. Many little kids use nenenene (short ĕ) as a natural way to show they're anxious or uncomfortable. It's probably so natural that they don't even need to learn it: there's a good reason why in so many languages words for negation start with n (or m). Sometimes the n is heard without a vowel: it's just the sound of ‘turning up one’s nose’ made audible.
At first the child does not express what it is that it does not want—it merely puts it away with its hand, pushes away, for example, what is too hot for it. But when it begins to express in words what it is that it will not have, it does so often in the form ‘Bread no,’ often with a pause between the words, as two separate utterances, as when we might say, in our fuller forms of expression: ‘Do you offer me bread? I won’t hear of it.’ So with verbs: ‘I sleep no.’ Thus with many Danish children, and I find the same phenomenon mentioned with regard to children of different nations. Tracy says (p. 136): “Negation was expressed by an affirmative sentence, with an emphatic no tacked on at the end, exactly as the deaf-mutes do.” The blind-deaf Helen Keller, when she felt her little sister’s mouth and her mother spelt ‘teeth’ to her, answered: “Baby teeth—no, baby eat—no,” i.e., baby cannot eat because she has no teeth. In the same way, in German, ‘Stul nei nei—schossel,’ i.e., I won’t sit on the chair, but in your lap, and in French, ‘Papa abeié ato non, iaian abeié non,’ i.e., Papa n’est pas encore habillé, Suzanne n’est pas[137] habillée (Stern, 189, 203). It seems thus that this mode of expression will crop up everywhere as an emphatic negation.
At first, the child doesn’t say what it doesn’t want—it just pushes it away with its hand, like when something is too hot for it. But when the child starts to use words to express what it refuses, it often does so in the form of "Bread no," sometimes pausing between the words, almost like we might say in a more elaborate way: "Are you offering me bread? I won’t have it." The same goes for verbs: "I sleep no." This happens with many Danish children, and I’ve noticed the same pattern in children from various countries. Tracy states (p. 136): “Negation was expressed by an affirmative sentence, with an emphatic no added at the end, just like deaf-mutes do.” The blind-deaf Helen Keller, when she felt her little sister’s mouth and her mother spelled ‘teeth’ to her, responded: “Baby teeth—no, baby eat—no,” meaning the baby can’t eat because she has no teeth. Similarly, in German, ‘Stul nei nei—schossel’ means I won’t sit on the chair, but on your lap, and in French, ‘Papa abeié ato non, iaian abeié non’ means Papa isn’t dressed yet, Suzanne isn’t dressed yet (Stern, 189, 203). It seems that this way of expressing an emphatic negation appears everywhere.
Interrogative sentences come generally rather early—it would be better to say questions, because at first they do not take the form of interrogative sentences, the interrogation being expressed by bearing, look or gesture: when it begins to be expressed by intonation we are on the way to question expressed in speech. Some of the earliest questions have to do with place: ‘Where is...?’ The child very often hears such sentences as ‘Where is its little nose?’ which are not really meant as questions; we may also remark that questions of this type are of great practical importance for the little thing, who soon uses them to beg for something which has been taken away from him or is out of his reach. Other early questions are ‘What’s that?’ and ‘Who?’
Interrogative sentences usually come up pretty early—it’s more accurate to say questions, because at first, they don’t really take the form of a complete question; the questioning is shown through body language, expression, or gestures. When it starts to be shown through tone of voice, we’re getting closer to spoken questions. Some of the first questions kids ask are about location: ‘Where is...?’ Children often hear phrases like ‘Where is its little nose?’ which aren’t truly meant as questions. It’s also worth noting that questions like these are really important for little ones, who quickly use them to ask for things that have been taken away or are out of their reach. Other early questions include ‘What’s that?’ and ‘Who?’
Later—generally, it would seem, at the close of the third year—questions with ‘why’ crop up: these are of the utmost importance for the child’s understanding of the whole world and its manifold occurrences, and, however tiresome they may be when they come in long strings, no one who wishes well to his child will venture to discourage them. Questions about time, such as ‘When? How long?’ appear much later, owing to the child’s difficulty in acquiring exact ideas about time.
Later—usually, it seems, at the end of the third year—questions starting with ‘why’ come up: these are crucial for the child’s understanding of the world and its many happenings. And even though they can be exhausting when they come in long waves, anyone who truly cares for their child wouldn’t dare to discourage them. Questions about time, like ‘When? How long?’ arise much later because children find it difficult to grasp precise concepts of time.
Children often find a difficulty in double questions, and when asked ‘Will you have brown bread or white?’ merely answer the last word with ‘Yes.’ So in reply to ‘Is that red or yellow?’ ‘Yes’ means ‘yellow’ (taken from a child of 4.11). I think this is an instance of the short memories of children, who have already at the end of the question forgotten the beginning, but Professor Mawer thinks that the real difficulty here is in making a choice: they cannot decide between alternatives: usually they are silent, and if they say ‘Yes’ it only means that they do not want to go without both or feel that they must say something.
Children often struggle with double questions, and when asked, “Will you have brown bread or white?” they simply respond with the last word by saying “Yes.” So in response to “Is that red or yellow?” “Yes” means “yellow” (from a child aged 4.11). I believe this shows how quickly children forget what was asked at the beginning of the question, but Professor Mawer thinks the real issue is making a choice: they can’t decide between the options. Usually, they stay silent, and if they say “Yes,” it just means they don’t want to miss out on either option or feel pressured to say something.
VII.—§ 9. Prepositions and Idioms.
Prepositions are of very late growth in a child’s language. Much attention has been given to the point, and Stern has collected statistics of the ages at which various children have first used prepositions: the earliest age is 1.10, the average age is 2.3. It does not, however, seem to me to be a matter of much interest how early an individual word of some particular grammatical class is first used; it is much more interesting to follow up the gradual growth of the child’s command of this class and to see how the first inevitable mistakes and confusions arise in the little brain. Stern makes the interesting remark that when the[138] tendency to use prepositions first appears, it grows far more rapidly than the power to discriminate one preposition from another; with his own children there came a time when they employed the same word as a sort of universal preposition in all relations. Hilda used von, Eva auf. I have never observed anything corresponding to this among Danish children.
Prepositions develop late in a child’s language. A lot of focus has been placed on this, and Stern has gathered stats on the ages when different kids first used prepositions: the earliest age is 1 year and 10 months, while the average is 2 years and 3 months. However, I don’t think it’s particularly interesting to know how early a specific word from a certain grammatical class is first used; what’s much more fascinating is tracking the gradual development of the child's understanding of this class and seeing how the initial inevitable mistakes and confusions occur in their little minds. Stern makes an interesting point that when the tendency to use prepositions first appears, it grows much faster than the ability to differentiate one preposition from another; with his own kids, there was a time when they used the same word as a universal preposition in all contexts. Hilda used von, and Eva used auf. I have never seen anything like this among Danish children.
All children start by putting the words for the most important concepts together without connective words, so ‘Leave go bedroom’ (‘May I have leave to go into the bedroom?’), ‘Out road’ (‘I am going out on the road’). The first use of prepositions is always in set phrases learnt as wholes, like ‘go to school,’ ‘go to pieces,’ ‘lie in bed,’ ‘at dinner.’ Not till later comes the power of using prepositions in free combinations, and it is then that mistakes appear. Nor is this surprising, since in all languages prepositional usage contains much that is peculiar and arbitrary, chiefly because when we once pass beyond a few quite clear applications of time and place, the relations to be expressed become so vague and indefinite, that logically one preposition might often seem just as right as another, although usage has laid down a fast law that this preposition must be used in this case and that in another. I noted down a great number of mistakes my own boy made in these words, but in all cases I was able to find some synonymous or antonymous expression in which the preposition used would have been the correct one, and which may have been vaguely before his mind.
All kids start by putting together words for the most important concepts without connecting words, like ‘Leave go bedroom’ (meaning ‘May I go to the bedroom?’) and ‘Out road’ (meaning ‘I’m going out on the road’). The first time they use prepositions, it’s always in fixed phrases learned as whole units, like ‘go to school,’ ‘go to pieces,’ ‘lie in bed,’ and ‘at dinner.’ It’s only later that they gain the ability to use prepositions in more flexible ways, and that’s when mistakes start to happen. This isn’t surprising because in every language, using prepositions includes a lot of peculiar and arbitrary rules. Once we move beyond a few clear uses tied to time and place, the relationships we need to express become so vague and unclear that logically, one preposition might seem just as right as another, even though language usage dictates that one preposition must be used in one case and another in a different case. I noted down a lot of mistakes my own son made with these words, but in every case, I was able to find some synonymous or opposite expression where the preposition used would have been correct, and that might have been somewhat on his mind.
The multiple meanings of prepositions sometimes have strange results. A little girl was in her bath, and hearing her mother say: “I will wash you in a moment,” answered: “No, you must wash me in the bath”! She was led astray by the two uses of in. We know of the child at school who was asked “What is an average?” and said: “What the hen lays eggs on.” Even men of science are similarly led astray by prepositions. It is perfectly natural to say that something has passed over the threshold of consciousness: the metaphor is from the way in which you enter a house by stepping over the threshold. If the metaphor were kept, the opposite situation would be expressed by the statement that such and such a thing is outside the threshold of consciousness. But psychologists, in the thoughtless way of little children, take under to be always the opposite of over, and so speak of things ‘lying under (or below) the threshold of our consciousness,’ and have even invented a Latin word for the unconscious, viz. subliminal.[22]
The multiple meanings of prepositions can sometimes lead to odd outcomes. A little girl was in her bath, and when she heard her mother say, “I will wash you in a moment,” she replied, “No, you have to wash me in the bath”! She got confused by the two uses of in. We also know about a child in school who was asked, “What is an average?” and answered, “What the hen lays eggs on.” Even scientists can be misled by prepositions. It makes sense to say that something has crossed the threshold of consciousness—this metaphor comes from entering a house by stepping over the threshold. If we maintained the metaphor, the opposite situation would be described by saying that something is outside the threshold of consciousness. However, psychologists, like little children, thoughtlessly assume that under is always the opposite of over, and thus refer to things as ‘lying under (or below) the threshold of our consciousness,’ even coining a Latin term for the unconscious, which is subliminal.[22]
Children may use verbs with an object which require a preposition (‘Will you wait me?’), or which are only used intransitively (‘Will you jump me?’), or they may mix up an infinitival with a direct construction (‘Could you hear me sneezed?’). But it is surely needless to multiply examples.
Children might use verbs with an object that need a preposition (‘Will you wait for me?’), or verbs that are only used intransitively (‘Will you jump for me?’), or they might confuse an infinitive with a direct construction (‘Could you hear me sneeze?’). But it’s definitely unnecessary to provide more examples.
When many years ago, in my Progress in Language, I spoke of the advantages, even to natives, of simplicity in linguistic structure, Professor Herman Möller, in a learned review, objected to me that to the adult learning a foreign tongue the chief difficulty consists in “the countless chicaneries due to the tyrannical and capricious usage, whose tricks there is no calculating; but these offer to the native child no such difficulty as morphology may,” and again, in speaking of the choice of various prepositions, which is far from easy to the foreigner, he says: “But any considerable mental exertion on the part of the native child learning its mother-tongue is here, of course, out of the question.” Such assertions as these cannot be founded on actual observation; at any rate, it is my experience in listening to children’s talk that long after they have reached the point where they make hardly any mistake in pronunciation and verbal forms, etc., they are still capable of using many turns of speech which are utterly opposed to the spirit of the language, and which are in the main of the same kind as those which foreigners are apt to fall into. Many of the child’s mistakes are due to mixtures or blendings of two turns of expression, and not a few of them may be logically justified. But learning a language implies among other things learning what you may not say in the language, even though no reasonable ground can be given for the prohibition.
Many years ago, in my Progress in Language, I talked about the benefits of simplicity in language structure, even for native speakers. Professor Herman Möller, in a knowledgeable review, argued that for adults learning a foreign language, the main challenge lies in “the countless tricks caused by the strict and unpredictable usage, which are impossible to anticipate; however, these do not pose the same challenge to the native child as morphology does.” He further pointed out that the choice of different prepositions, which can be difficult for foreigners, presents “no significant mental effort for the native child learning its mother tongue.” Such claims cannot be based on actual observation; at least, from my experience listening to children, I find that long after they’ve mastered pronunciation and verb forms, they still use many phrases that completely contradict the essence of the language, much like mistakes made by foreigners. Many of a child's errors come from mixing two expressions, and several can be reasonably justified. However, learning a language involves, among other things, figuring out what you must not say, even if there isn’t a valid reason for the restriction.
CHAPTER VIII
SOME FUNDAMENTAL ISSUES
§ 1. Why is the Native Language learnt so well? § 2. Natural Ability and Sex. § 3. Mother-tongue and Other Tongue. § 4. Playing at Language. § 5. Secret Languages. § 6. Onomatopœia. § 7. Word-inventions. § 8. ‘Mamma’ and ‘Papa.’
§ 1. Why is the native language learned so well? § 2. Natural ability and gender. § 3. Mother tongue and other languages. § 4. Playing with language. § 5. Secret languages. § 6. Onomatopoeia. § 7. Word inventions. § 8. ‘Mom’ and ‘Dad.’
VIII.—§ 1. Why is the Native Language learnt so well?
How does it happen that children in general learn their mother-tongue so well? That this is a problem becomes clear when we contrast a child’s first acquisition of its mother-tongue with the later acquisition of any foreign tongue. The contrast is indeed striking and manifold: here we have a quite little child, without experience or prepossessions; there a bigger child, or it may be a grown-up person with all sorts of knowledge and powers: here a haphazard method of procedure; there the whole task laid out in a system (for even in the schoolbooks that do not follow the old grammatical system there is a certain definite order of progress from more elementary to more difficult matters): here no professional teachers, but chance parents, brothers and sisters, nursery-maids and playmates; there teachers trained for many years specially to teach languages: here only oral instruction; there not only that, but reading-books, dictionaries and other assistance. And yet this is the result: here complete and exact command of the language as a native speaks it, however stupid the children; there, in most cases, even with people otherwise highly gifted, a defective and inexact command of the language. On what does this difference depend?
How do children learn their mother tongue so well? This question becomes clear when we compare how a child first learns their native language to how they later learn a foreign language. The differences are quite striking and numerous: here we have a small child, without any experience or biases; there we have an older child or even an adult with all kinds of knowledge and skills: here a random method of learning; there a structured approach (even in textbooks that don’t follow traditional grammar, there is usually a clear progression from simple to complex topics): here no professional teachers, just parents, siblings, caregivers, and friends; there trained teachers who have spent many years specifically learning how to teach languages: here only spoken instruction; there additional resources like textbooks, dictionaries, and other aids. And yet the outcome is this: here a complete and accurate command of the language as a native speaker, regardless of the children’s intelligence; there, for most people, even those who are otherwise very talented, a limited and imperfect grasp of the language. What accounts for this difference?
The problem has never been elucidated or canvassed from all sides, but here and there one finds a partial answer, often given out to be a complete answer. Often one side of the question only is considered, that which relates to sounds, as if the whole problem had been solved when one had found a reason for children acquiring a better pronunciation of their mother-tongue than one generally gets in later life of a foreign speech.
The issue has never been fully explained or examined from every angle, but occasionally, you come across a partial answer that is often presented as if it's the complete solution. Frequently, only one aspect of the question is looked at—the one related to sounds— as if the entire problem has been solved just by figuring out why children tend to have better pronunciation of their native language than adults do of a foreign language.
Many people accordingly tell us that children’s organs of speech are especially flexible, but that this suppleness of the tongue and lips is lost in later life. This explanation, however, does not hold[141] water, as is shown sufficiently by the countless mistakes in sound made by children. If their organs were as flexible as is pretended, they could learn sounds correctly at once, while as a matter of fact it takes a long time before all the sounds and groups of sounds are imitated with tolerable accuracy. Suppleness is not something which is original, but something acquired later, and acquired with no small difficulty, and then only with regard to the sounds of one’s own language, and not universally.
Many people say that children’s speech organs are particularly flexible, but this flexibility of the tongue and lips tends to fade as they grow older. However, this explanation doesn’t really make sense[141], as shown by the numerous sound mistakes children make. If their speech organs were as flexible as claimed, they would be able to learn sounds correctly right away; in reality, it takes a long time for them to imitate all sounds and combinations of sounds with decent accuracy. Flexibility isn’t something inherent; it’s something developed later on, and it comes with considerable difficulty, and only concerning the sounds of their own language, not universally.
The same applies to the second answer (given by Bremer, Deutsche Phonetik, 2), namely, that the child’s ear is especially sensitive to impressions. The ear also requires development, since at first it can scarcely detect a number of nuances which we grown-up people hear most distinctly.
The same applies to the second answer (given by Bremer, Deutsche Phonetik, 2), which is that a child's ear is particularly sensitive to sounds. The ear also needs to develop, as initially it can barely pick up on many of the nuances that we adults hear quite clearly.
Some people say that the reason why a child learns its native language so well is that it has no established habits to contend against. But that is not right either: as any good observer can see, the process by which the child acquires sounds is pursued through a continuous struggle against bad habits which it has acquired at an earlier stage and which may often have rooted themselves remarkably firmly.
Some people argue that a child learns its native language effectively because it doesn't have any established habits to overcome. However, that’s not entirely accurate: as any good observer can tell, the way a child picks up sounds involves an ongoing battle against the bad habits it developed at an earlier stage, which can often become quite deeply ingrained.
Sweet (H 19) says among other things that the conditions of learning vernacular sounds are so favourable because the child has nothing else to do at the time. On the contrary, one may say that the child has an enormous deal to do while it is learning the language; it is at that time active beyond all belief: in a short time it subdues wider tracts than it ever does later in a much longer time. The more wonderful is it that along with those tasks it finds strength to learn its mother-tongue and its many refinements and crooked turns.
Sweet (H 19) mentions that the conditions for learning spoken language are quite favorable because the child isn’t occupied with anything else at that time. However, one could argue that the child has a lot on its plate while learning the language; during this period, it is incredibly active: in a short span, it conquers greater areas of knowledge than it ever will later on in a much longer time. It's even more impressive that amidst these challenges, it still manages to learn its native language along with its many nuances and complexities.
Some point to heredity and say that a child learns that language most easily which it is disposed beforehand to learn by its ancestry, or in other words that there are inherited convolutions of the brain which take in this language better than any other. Perhaps there is something in this, but we have no definite, carefully ascertained facts. Against the theory stands the fact that the children of immigrants acquire the language of their foster-country to all appearance just as surely and quickly as children of the same age whose forefathers have been in the country for ages. This may be observed in England, in Denmark, and still more in North America. Environment clearly has greater influence than descent.
Some people point to heredity and claim that a child finds it easiest to learn a language that they are predisposed to know based on their ancestry, or in other words, that there are inherited brain structures that help them learn this language better than others. There might be some truth to this, but we don’t have definite, thoroughly verified facts. What counters this theory is the observation that children of immigrants pick up the language of their new country just as effectively and quickly as children of the same age whose families have been there for generations. This can be seen in England, Denmark, and even more so in North America. Clearly, environment plays a bigger role than ancestry.
The real answer in my opinion (which is not claimed to be absolutely new in every respect) lies partly in the child itself, partly in the behaviour towards it of the people around it. In the first place, the time of learning the mother-tongue is the most favourable of all, namely, the first years of life. If one assumes[142] that mental endowment means the capacity for development, without doubt all children are best endowed in their first years: from birth onwards there is a steady decline in the power of grasping what is new and of accommodating oneself to it. With some this decline is a very rapid one—they quickly become fossilized and unable to make a change in their habits; with others one can notice a happy power of development even in old age; but no one keeps very long in its full range the adaptability of his first years.
The real answer, in my view (which isn’t claimed to be entirely new in every way), lies partly in the child itself and partly in how the people around it behave. First of all, the time for learning the mother tongue is the most favorable, specifically during the early years of life. If we assume that mental ability means the capacity for growth, it's clear that all children are best equipped during their first years: from birth onward, there’s a consistent decline in the ability to grasp what’s new and adapt to it. For some, this decline happens very quickly—they rapidly become set in their ways and unable to change their habits; for others, you can see a remarkable ability to grow even in old age. However, no one can maintain the full adaptability they had in their early years for very long.
Further, we must remember that the child has far more abundant opportunities of hearing his mother-tongue than one gets, as a rule, with any language one learns later. He hears it from morning to night, and, be it noted, in its genuine shape, with the right pronunciation, right intonation, right use of words and right syntax: the language comes to him as a fresh, ever-bubbling spring. Even before he begins to say anything himself, his first understanding of the language is made easier by the habit that mothers and nurses have of repeating the same phrases with slight alterations, and at the same time doing the thing which they are talking about. “Now we must wash the little face, now we must wash the little forehead, now we must wash the little nose, now we must wash the little chin, now we must wash the little ear,” etc. If men had to attend to their children, they would never use so many words—but in that case the child would scarcely learn to understand and talk as soon as it does when it is cared for by women.[23]
Moreover, we need to keep in mind that a child has far more chances to hear their native language than anyone normally gets with any other language they learn later on. They hear it from morning till night, and importantly, it's in its true form, with the correct pronunciation, intonation, word usage, and grammar: the language comes to them like a fresh, endless spring. Even before they start speaking, their initial understanding of the language is supported by the way mothers and caregivers repeat the same phrases with slight variations while simultaneously demonstrating what they’re talking about. “Now we must wash the little face, now we must wash the little forehead, now we must wash the little nose, now we must wash the little chin, now we must wash the little ear,” and so on. If men were responsible for taking care of the children, they wouldn’t use so many words—but if that were the case, the child probably wouldn’t learn to understand and speak as quickly as they do when cared for by women.[23]
Then the child has, as it were, private lessons in its mother-tongue all the year round. There is nothing of the kind in the learning of a language later, when at most one has six hours a week and generally shares them with others. The child has another priceless advantage: he hears the language in all possible situations and under such conditions that language and situation ever correspond exactly to one another and mutually illustrate one another. Gesture and facial expression harmonize with the words[143] uttered and keep the child to a right understanding. Here there is nothing unnatural, such as is often the case in a language-lesson in later years, when one talks about ice and snow in June or excessive heat in January. And what the child hears is just what immediately concerns him and interests him, and again and again his own attempts at speech lead to the fulfilment of his dearest wishes, so that his command of language has great practical advantages for him.
Then the child has private lessons in their mother tongue all year round. There's nothing like this when learning a language later, when you usually get only six hours a week and often share that time with others. The child has another priceless advantage: they hear the language in every possible situation, and the language and situation always match up perfectly and illustrate each other. Gestures and facial expressions go hand in hand with the words spoken, helping the child understand correctly. There’s nothing unnatural about it, unlike language lessons in later years where you might talk about ice and snow in June or extreme heat in January. What the child hears is directly relevant and interesting to them, and their attempts at speaking often lead to satisfying their highest desires, giving them a strong practical command of the language.
Along with what he himself sees the use of, he hears a great deal which does not directly concern him, but goes into the little brain and is stored up there to turn up again later. Nothing is heard but leaves its traces, and at times one is astonished to discover what has been preserved, and with what exactness. One day, when Frans was 4.11 old, he suddenly said: “Yesterday—isn’t there some who say yesterday?” (giving yesterday with the correct English pronunciation), and when I said that it was an English word, he went on: “Yes, it is Mrs. B.: she often says like that, yesterday.” Now, it was three weeks since that lady had called at the house and talked English. It is a well-known fact that hypnotized persons can sometimes say whole sentences in a language which they do not know, but have merely heard in childhood. In books about children’s language there are many remarkable accounts of such linguistic memories which had lain buried for long stretches of time. A child who had spent the first eighteen months of its life in Silesia and then came to Berlin, where it had no opportunity of hearing the Silesian pronunciation, at the age of five suddenly came out with a number of Silesian expressions, which could not after the most careful investigation be traced to any other source than to the time before it could talk (Stern, 257 ff.). Grammont has a story of a little French girl, whose nurse had talked French with a strong Italian accent; the child did not begin to speak till a month after this nurse had left, but pronounced many words with Italian sounds, and some of these peculiarities stuck to the child till the age of three.
Along with what he directly uses, he hears a lot that doesn’t really concern him, but it goes into his little brain and gets stored up to resurface later. Nothing is heard without leaving its mark, and sometimes it’s surprising to discover what has been retained and how accurately. One day, when Frans was 4 years and 11 months old, he suddenly said, “Yesterday—isn’t there some who say yesterday?” (pronouncing yesterday with the right English accent), and when I mentioned that it was an English word, he continued, “Yeah, it’s Mrs. B.: she often says that, yesterday.” It had been three weeks since that lady visited our home and spoke in English. It’s a well-known fact that hypnotized people can sometimes recite whole sentences in a language they don’t know but have only heard in childhood. In books about children’s language, there are many remarkable accounts of such linguistic memories that had been buried for long periods. A child who spent the first eighteen months of their life in Silesia and then moved to Berlin, where they had no chance to hear the Silesian accent, suddenly started using several Silesian expressions at the age of five, which could not, even after the most thorough investigation, be traced to any other source than their time before they could speak (Stern, 257 ff.). Grammont tells a story about a little French girl whose nanny spoke French with a strong Italian accent; the child didn’t start speaking until a month after this nanny left, but she pronounced many words with Italian sounds, and some of those quirks stuck with her until she was three.
We may also remark that the baby’s teachers, though, regarded as teachers of language, they may not be absolutely ideal, still have some advantages over those one encounters as a rule later in life. The relation between them and the child is far more cordial and personal, just because they are not teachers first and foremost. They are immensely interested in every little advance the child makes. The most awkward attempt meets with sympathy, often with admiration, while its defects and imperfections never expose it to a breath of unkind criticism. There is a Slavonic proverb, “If you wish to talk well, you must murder the language first.” But this is very often overlooked by teachers of language, who[144] demand faultless accuracy from the beginning, and often keep their pupils grinding so long at some little part of the subject that their desire to learn the language is weakened or gone for good. There is nothing of this sort in the child’s first learning of his language.
We can also point out that the baby’s teachers, while they may not be perfect language instructors, have certain advantages compared to those we typically encounter later in life. Their relationship with the child is much more friendly and personal because they aren't mainly focused on being teachers. They are genuinely interested in every small step the child takes. Even the most clumsy attempts are met with support, often with admiration, while any flaws or mistakes never lead to unkind criticism. There’s a Slavic saying, “If you want to speak well, you have to break the language first.” But this is often ignored by language teachers, who[144] expect perfect accuracy from the start, and frequently keep their students stuck on some minor part of the subject for so long that their motivation to learn the language diminishes or disappears completely. There’s nothing like this in how a child first learns their language.
It is here that our distinction between the two periods comes in, that of the child’s own separate ‘little language’ and that of the common or social language. In the first period the little one is the centre of a narrow circle of his own, which waits for each little syllable that falls from his lips as though it were a grain of gold. What teachers of languages in later years would rejoice at hearing such forms as we saw before used in the time of the child’s ‘little language,’ fant or vat or ham for ‘elephant’? But the mother really does rejoice: she laughs and exults when he can use these syllables about his toy-elephant, she throws the cloak of her love over the defects and mistakes in the little one’s imitations of words, she remembers again and again what his strange sounds stand for, and her eager sympathy transforms the first and most difficult steps on the path of language to the merriest game.
It’s here that we distinguish between the two periods: the child’s own unique ‘little language’ and the common social language. In the first period, the child is the center of a small circle that hangs on every little syllable they utter as if it were gold. What language teachers would later celebrate to hear forms like fant, vat, or ham for ‘elephant’! But the mother truly does celebrate: she laughs and delights when he uses these syllables for his toy elephant, she lovingly overlooks the flaws and mistakes in his attempts at words, she repeatedly remembers what his strange sounds mean, and her enthusiastic support turns those first and challenging steps in learning language into a joyful game.
It would not do, however, for the child’s ‘little language’ and its dreadful mistakes to become fixed. This might easily happen, if the child were never out of the narrow circle of its own family, which knows and recognizes its ‘little language.’ But this is stopped because it comes more and more into contact with others—uncles and aunts, and especially little cousins and playmates: more and more often it happens that the mutilated words are not understood, and are corrected and made fun of, and the child is incited in this way to steady improvement: the ‘little language’ gradually gives place to the ‘common language,’ as the child becomes a member of a social group larger than that of his own little home.
However, it wouldn't be good for the child's 'little language' and its awful mistakes to become set. This could easily occur if the child stayed within the limited circle of its own family, who understands and accepts its 'little language.' But this is prevented because the child increasingly interacts with others—uncles, aunts, and especially little cousins and playmates. More and more often, the jumbled words aren’t understood, and the child gets corrected and teased, which encourages steady improvement. The 'little language' gradually gives way to the 'common language' as the child becomes part of a social group larger than their own home.
We have now probably found the chief reasons why a child learns his mother-tongue better than even a grown-up person who has been for a long time in a foreign country learns the language of his environment. But it is also a contributory reason that the child’s linguistic needs, to begin with, are far more limited than those of the man who wishes to be able to talk about anything, or at any rate about something. Much more is also linguistically required of the latter, and he must have recourse to language to get all his needs satisfied, while the baby is well looked after even if it says nothing but wawawawa. So the baby has longer time to store up his impressions and continue his experiments, until by trying again and again he at length gets his lesson learnt in all its tiny details, while the man in the foreign country,[145] who must make himself understood, as a rule goes on trying only till he has acquired a form of speech which he finds natives understand: at this point he will generally stop, at any rate as far as pronunciation and the construction of sentences are concerned (while his vocabulary may be largely increased). But this ‘just recognizable’ language is incorrect in thousands of small details, and, inasmuch as bad little habits quickly become fixed, the kind of language is produced which we know so well in the case of resident foreigners—who need hardly open their lips before everyone knows they are not natives, and before a practised ear can detect the country they hail from.[24]
We’ve probably discovered the main reasons why a child picks up their mother tongue better than an adult who’s been in a foreign country for a long time learns the local language. One key reason is that a child’s language needs are much more limited compared to an adult who wants to talk about everything, or at least something. Adults need to communicate much more effectively and rely on language to fulfill all their needs, while a baby is well taken care of even if they only say wawawawa. This gives the baby more time to absorb their experiences and keep experimenting until, through repeated attempts, they finally get the hang of everything in fine detail. In contrast, the adult in a foreign country, who must be understood, usually stops trying once they’ve figured out a way to speak that locals can understand: typically, they won’t push further in terms of pronunciation and sentence structure (though their vocabulary might grow). This “just understandable” language is filled with countless small errors, and since bad habits can quickly become ingrained, this leads to the kind of language we often hear from foreigners—who barely need to speak before it’s clear they aren’t natives, and a practiced ear can even pick up where they’re from.[145][24]
VIII.—§ 2. Natural Ability and Sex.
An important factor in the acquisition of language which we have not considered is naturally the individuality of the child. Parents are apt to draw conclusions as to the abilities of their young hopeful from the rapidity with which he learns to talk; but those who are in despair because their Tommy cannot say a single word when their neighbours’ Harry can say a great deal may take comfort. Slowness in talking may of course mean deficiency of ability, or even idiocy, but not necessarily. A child who chatters early may remain a chatterer all his life, and children whose motto is ‘Slow and sure’ may turn out the deepest, most independent and most trustworthy characters in the end. There are some children who cannot be made to say a single word for a long time, and then suddenly come out with a whole sentence, which shows how much has been quietly fructifying in their brain. Carlyle was one of these: after eleven months of taciturnity he heard a child cry, and astonished all by saying, “What ails wee Jock?” Edmund Gosse has a similar story of his own childhood, and other examples have been recorded elsewhere (Meringer, 194; Stern, 257).
An important factor in learning a language that we haven't discussed yet is the child's individuality. Parents often make judgments about their child's abilities based on how quickly they learn to speak; however, those who feel discouraged because their Tommy can't say a single word while their neighbor's Harry is chatting away can find solace. Slow speech may sometimes indicate a lack of ability or even a developmental issue, but that’s not always the case. A child who talks early might continue to be a talker their whole life, while those who live by the saying "slow and steady wins the race" might grow up to be some of the most thoughtful, independent, and reliable individuals. Some children may not say a word for a long time and then suddenly express a full sentence, demonstrating that a lot has been quietly developing in their minds. Carlyle was one such child: after being quiet for eleven months, he heard a child cry and surprised everyone by saying, “What ails wee Jock?” Edmund Gosse has a similar story from his own childhood, and there are other recorded examples (Meringer, 194; Stern, 257).
The linguistic development of an individual child is not always in a steady rising line, but in a series of waves. A child who seems to have a boundless power of acquiring language suddenly stands still or even goes back for a short time. The cause may be sickness, cutting teeth, learning to walk, or often a removal to new surroundings or an open-air life in summer. Under such circumstances even the word ‘I’ may be lost for a time.
The language development of a child doesn’t always follow a straight path; instead, it often comes in waves. A child who appears to effortlessly pick up language may suddenly plateau or even regress for a bit. This can happen due to illness, teething, learning to walk, or frequently moving to new environments or spending more time outdoors in the summer. During these times, even the word ‘I’ might be temporarily forgotten.
Some children develop very rapidly for some years until they have reached a certain point, where they stop altogether, while others retain the power to develop steadily to a much later age. It is the same with some races: negro children in American schools may, while they are little, be up to the standard of their white schoolfellows, whom they cannot cope with in later life.
Some kids grow up really fast for a few years until they hit a certain point where they just stop, while others keep developing steadily for much longer. The same goes for some racial groups: black children in American schools may keep up with their white classmates when they’re young, but struggle to match them later in life.
The two sexes differ very greatly in regard to speech—as in regard to most other things. Little girls, on the average, learn to talk earlier and more quickly than boys; they outstrip them in talking correctly; their pronunciation is not spoilt by the many bad habits and awkwardnesses so often found in boys. It has been proved by statistics in many countries that there are far more stammerers and bad speakers among boys and men than among girls and women. The general receptivity of women, their great power of, and pleasure in, imitation, their histrionic talent, if one may so say—all this is a help to them at an early age, so that they can get into other people’s way of talking with greater agility than boys of the same age.
The two genders are very different when it comes to communication, just like in many other areas. On average, little girls learn to talk earlier and faster than boys; they excel in speaking correctly, and their pronunciation isn't affected by the many bad habits and awkwardness often seen in boys. Statistics from various countries have shown that there are significantly more stutterers and poor speakers among boys and men than among girls and women. Women's general willingness to learn, their great ability and enjoyment in mimicking, and their talent for performance—if one can put it that way—help them at a young age to adapt to the way others speak more easily than boys of the same age.
Everything that is conventional in language, everything in which the only thing of importance is to be in agreement with those around you, is the girls’ strong point. Boys may often show a certain reluctance to do exactly as others do: the peculiarities of their ‘little language’ are retained by them longer than by girls, and they will sometimes steadily refuse to correct their own abnormalities, which is very seldom the case with girls. Gaucherie and originality thus are two points between which the speech of boys is constantly oscillating. Cf. below, Ch. XIII.
Everything that’s typical in language, where the main goal is to fit in with those around you, is a strong point for girls. Boys often hesitate to conform completely: the quirks of their ‘little language’ stick with them longer than with girls, and they might refuse to fix their own oddities, which is rarely true for girls. Awkwardness and originality are therefore two extremes that boys’ speech swings between. Cf. below, Ch. XIII.
VIII.—§ 3. Mother-tongue and Other Tongue.
The expression “mother-tongue” should not be understood too literally: the language which the child acquires naturally is not, or not always, his mother’s language. When a mother speaks with a foreign accent or in a pronounced dialect, her children as a rule speak their language as correctly as other children, or keep only the slightest tinge of their mother’s peculiarities. I have seen this very distinctly in many Danish families, in which the mother has kept up her Norwegian language all her life, and in[147] which the children have spoken pure Danish. Thus also in two families I know, in which a strong Swedish accent in one mother, and an unmistakable American pronunciation in the other, have not prevented the children from speaking Danish exactly as if their mothers had been born and bred in Denmark. I cannot, therefore, agree with Passy, who says that the child learns his mother’s sound system (Ch § 32), or with Dauzat’s dictum to the same effect (V 20). The father, as a rule, has still less influence; but what is decisive is the speech of those with whom the child comes in closest contact from the age of three or so, thus frequently servants, but even more effectually playfellows of his own age or rather slightly older than himself, with whom he is constantly thrown together for hours at a time and whose prattle is constantly in his ears at the most impressionable age, while he may not see and hear his father and mother except for a short time every day, at meals and on such occasions. It is also a well-known fact that the children of Danish parents in Greenland often learn the Eskimo language before Danish; and Meinhof says that German children in the African colonies will often learn the language of the natives earlier than German (MSA 139).
The term “mother-tongue” shouldn’t be taken too literally: the language that a child naturally picks up isn’t always the same as their mother’s language. If a mother has a foreign accent or speaks a strong dialect, her children usually speak the language just as correctly as other kids, or they may only have a slight influence from their mother’s way of speaking. I’ve seen this clearly in many Danish families where the mother has maintained her Norwegian language her entire life, yet the children speak pure Danish. Likewise, I know two families where a strong Swedish accent in one mother and a clear American pronunciation in another didn’t stop the children from speaking Danish as if their mothers were born and raised in Denmark. Therefore, I can’t agree with Passy, who states that the child learns their mother’s sound system (Ch § 32), or with Dauzat’s similar claim (V 20). Generally, the father has even less influence; what truly matters is the speech of those with whom the child interacts the most from around age three, which often includes servants but is even more influenced by playmates who are around their age or slightly older, with whom they spend hours and whose chatter fills their ears during their most impressionable years. Meanwhile, they may only see and hear their parents for short periods each day, like at mealtime and on special occasions. It’s also well-known that the children of Danish parents in Greenland often learn the Eskimo language before Danish; and Meinhof mentions that German children in African colonies often pick up the native language before they learn German (MSA 139).
This is by no means depreciating the mother’s influence, which is strong indeed, but chiefly in the first period, that of the child’s ‘little language.’ But that is the time when the child’s imitative power is weakest. His exact attention to the minutiæ of language dates from the time when he is thrown into a wider circle and has to make himself understood by many, so that his language becomes really identical with that of the community, where formerly he and his mother would rest contented with what they, but hardly anyone else, could understand.
This doesn't diminish the mother's influence, which is definitely strong, especially in the early stages when the child uses their ‘little language.’ However, that's also when the child’s ability to imitate is at its lowest. The child's precise attention to the details of language starts when they are introduced to a larger group and need to communicate with many people, making their language truly align with that of the community, rather than just what they and their mother could understand comfortably.
The influence of children on children cannot be overestimated.[25] Boys at school make fun of any peculiarities of speech noticed in schoolfellows who come from some other part of the country. Kipling tells us in Stalky and Co. how Stalky and Beetle carefully kicked McTurk out of his Irish dialect. When I read this, I was vividly reminded of the identical method my new friends applied to me when at the age of ten I was transplanted from Jutland to a school in Seeland and excited their merriment through some Jutlandish expressions and intonations. And so we may say that the most important factor in spreading the common or standard language is children themselves.
The impact of kids on each other is huge.[25] Boys at school tease anyone with an unusual way of speaking who comes from somewhere else in the country. Kipling shows us in Stalky and Co. how Stalky and Beetle worked hard to make McTurk drop his Irish accent. Reading this reminded me of how my new friends treated me when I moved from Jutland to a school in Seeland at age ten, amusing themselves with my Jutlandish phrases and speech patterns. So, it's clear that kids themselves are the biggest factor in spreading the common or standard language.
It often happens that children who are compelled at home to talk without any admixture of dialect talk pure dialect when playing with their schoolfellows out of doors. They can keep the[148] two forms of speech distinct. In the same way they can learn two languages less closely connected. At times this results in very strange blendings, at least for a time; but many children will easily pass from one language to the other without mixing them up, especially if they come in contact with the two languages in different surroundings or on the lips of different people.
It often happens that kids who are required at home to speak without any dialect tend to use pure dialect when they’re outside playing with their friends. They can keep the[148] two forms of speech separate. Similarly, they can learn two languages that aren’t closely related. Sometimes this leads to some very strange mixtures, at least for a while; but many kids can easily switch from one language to the other without confusing them, especially if they encounter the two languages in different settings or spoken by different people.
It is, of course, an advantage for a child to be familiar with two languages: but without doubt the advantage may be, and generally is, purchased too dear. First of all the child in question hardly learns either of the two languages as perfectly as he would have done if he had limited himself to one. It may seem, on the surface, as if he talked just like a native, but he does not really command the fine points of the language. Has any bilingual child ever developed into a great artist in speech, a poet or orator?
It’s definitely a plus for a child to know two languages, but often that advantage comes at a high cost. For one, the child usually doesn’t master either language as well as they would have if they had focused on just one. It might appear that they speak like a native, but they often miss the subtle nuances of the language. Has any bilingual child ever become an outstanding speaker, poet, or orator?
Secondly, the brain effort required to master two languages instead of one certainly diminishes the child’s power of learning other things which might and ought to be learnt. Schuchardt rightly remarks that if a bilingual man has two strings to his bow, both are rather slack, and that the three souls which the ancient Roman said he possessed, owing to his being able to talk three different languages, were probably very indifferent souls after all. A native of Luxemburg, where it is usual for children to talk both French and German, says that few Luxemburgers talk both languages perfectly. “Germans often say to us: ‘You speak German remarkably well for a Frenchman,’ and French people will say, ‘They are Germans who speak our language excellently.’ Nevertheless, we never speak either language as fluently as the natives. The worst of the system is, that instead of learning things necessary to us we must spend our time and energy in learning to express the same thought in two or three languages at the same time.”[26]
Secondly, the brain effort needed to master two languages instead of one definitely reduces a child's ability to learn other important things. Schuchardt correctly points out that if a bilingual person has two skills, neither is particularly strong, and the idea that the ancient Romans thought having three languages meant they had three distinct identities likely just meant those identities weren't very well developed. A native of Luxembourg, where it’s common for children to speak both French and German, mentions that few Luxembourgers are fluent in both languages. "Germans often tell us: 'You speak German remarkably well for a Frenchman,' and French people say, 'They are Germans who speak our language excellently.' Still, we never speak either language as fluently as the natives. The downside of this system is that instead of learning what we truly need, we have to spend our time and energy learning to express the same thought in two or three languages at once.”[26]
VIII.—§ 4. Playing at Language.
The child takes delight in making meaningless sounds long after it has learnt to talk the language of its elders. At 2.2 Frans amused himself with long series of such sounds, uttered with the most confiding look and proper intonation, and it was a joy to him when I replied with similar sounds. He kept up this game for years. Once (4.11) after such a performance he asked me: “Is that English?”—“No.”—“Why not?”—“Because I understand English, but I do not understand what you say.” An hour later he came back and asked: “Father, do you know all languages?”—“No, there are many I don’t know.”—“Do you[149] know German?”—“Yes.” (Frans looked rather crestfallen: the servants had often said of his invented language that he was talking German. So he went on) “Do you know Japanese?”—“No.”—(Delighted) “So remember when I say something you don’t understand, it’s Japanese.”
The child enjoys making silly noises long after they've learned to speak the language of the adults around them. At 2.2, Frans entertained himself with long sequences of these sounds, delivered with the most trusting expression and proper intonation, and it brought him joy when I responded with similar noises. He kept this up for years. Once (4.11), after such a performance, he asked me, “Is that English?”—“No.”—“Why not?”—“Because I understand English, but I don’t understand what you’re saying.” An hour later, he came back and asked, “Dad, do you know all languages?”—“No, there are many I don’t know.”—“Do you know German?”—“Yes.” (Frans looked a bit disappointed: the staff had often said that his made-up language sounded like German. So he continued) “Do you know Japanese?”—“No.”—(Excited) “So remember when I say something you don’t understand, it’s Japanese.”
It is the same everywhere. Hawthorne writes: “Pearl mumbled something into his ear, that sounded, indeed, like human language, but was only such gibberish as children may be heard amusing themselves with, by the hour together” (The Scarlet Letter, 173). And R. L. Stevenson: “Children prefer the shadow to the substance. When they might be speaking intelligibly together, they chatter senseless gibberish by the hour, and are quite happy because they are making believe to speak French” (Virginibus P., 236; cf. Glenconner, p. 40; Stern, pp. 76, 91, 103). Meringer’s boy (2.1) took the music-book and sang a tune of his own making with incomprehensible words.
It’s the same everywhere. Hawthorne writes: “Pearl mumbled something into his ear that sounded, indeed, like human language, but was just the kind of gibberish that children often amuse themselves with for hours” (The Scarlet Letter, 173). And R. L. Stevenson: “Children prefer the shadow to the substance. When they could be talking to each other clearly, they chatter nonsensical gibberish for hours and are perfectly happy pretending to speak French” (Virginibus P., 236; cf. Glenconner, p. 40; Stern, pp. 76, 91, 103). Meringer’s boy (2.1) took the music book and sang a tune of his own making with incomprehensible words.
Children also take delight in varying the sounds of real words, introducing, for instance, alliterations, as “Sing a song of sixpence, A socket full of sye,” etc. Frans at 2.3 amused himself by rounding all his vowels (o for a, y for i), and at 3.1 by making all words of a verse line he had learnt begin with d, then the same words begin with t. O’Shea (p. 32) says that “most children find pleasure in the production of variations upon some of their familiar words. Their purpose seems to be to test their ability to be original. The performance of an unusual act affords pleasure in linguistics as in other matters. H., learning the word dessert, to illustrate, plays with it for a time and exhibits it in a dozen or more variations—dĭssert, dishert, dĕsot, des'sert, and so on.”
Kids also enjoy changing the sounds of real words, introducing things like alliterations, such as “Sing a song of sixpence, A socket full of sye,” and so on. Frans, at 2 years and 3 months, entertained himself by rounding all his vowels (using o for a, y for i), and at 3 years and 1 month, he made all the words in a verse line he had learned start with d, and then did the same with t. O’Shea (p. 32) notes that “most kids find joy in creating variations of some of their familiar words. Their goal seems to be to test their ability to be original. Doing something unusual brings joy in language just as it does in other areas. For example, when H. learns the word dessert, he plays with it for a while and shows it in a dozen or more variations—dĭssert, dishert, dĕsot, des'sert, and so on.”
Rhythm and rime appeal strongly to the children’s minds. One English observer says that “a child in its third year will copy the rhythm of songs and verses it has heard in nonsense words.” The same thing is noted by Meringer (p. 116) and Stern (p. 103). Tony E. (2.10) suddenly made up the rime “My mover, I lov-er,” and Gordon M. (2.6) never tired of repeating a phrase of his own composition, “Custard over mustard.” A Danish girl of 3.1 is reported as having a “curious knack of twisting all words into rimes: bestemor hestemor prestemor, Gudrun sludrun pludrun, etc.”
Rhythm and rhyme strongly capture children's attention. One English observer notes that “a child in its third year will imitate the rhythm of songs and verses it has heard using nonsense words.” This observation is also made by Meringer (p. 116) and Stern (p. 103). Tony E. (2.10) suddenly created the rhyme “My mover, I lov-er,” and Gordon M. (2.6) never got tired of repeating his own phrase, “Custard over mustard.” A Danish girl of 3.1 has a “unique ability to twist all words into rhymes: bestemor hestemor prestemor, Gudrun sludrun pludrun, etc.”
VIII.—§ 5. Secret Languages.
Children, as we have seen, at first employ play-language for its own sake, with no arrière-pensée, but as they get older they may see that such language has the advantage of not being understood by their elders, and so they may develop a ‘secret language’[150] consciously. Some such languages are confined to one school, others may be in common use among children of a certain age all over a country. ‘M-gibberish’ and ‘S-gibberish’ consist in inserting m and s, as in goming mout tomdaym or gosings outs tosdays for ‘going out to-day’; ‘Marrowskying’ or ‘Hospital Greek’ transfers the initial letters of words, as renty of plain for ‘plenty of rain,’ flutterby for ‘butterfly’; ‘Ziph’ or ‘Hypernese’ (at Winchester) substitutes wa for the first of two initial consonants and inserts p or g, making ‘breeches’ into wareechepes and ‘penny’ into pegennepy. From my own boyhood in Denmark I remember two languages of this sort, in which a sentence like ‘du er et lille asen’ became dupu erper etpet lilpillepe apasenpen and durbe erbe erbe lirbelerbe arbeserbe respectively. Closely corresponding languages, with insertion of p and addition of -erbse, are found in Germany; in Holland we find ‘de schoone Mei’ made into depé schoopóonepé Meipéi, besides an -erwi-taal with a variation in which the ending is -erf. In France such a language is called javanais; ‘je vais bien’ is made into je-de-que vais-dai-qai bien-den-qen. In Savoy the cowherds put deg after each syllable and thus make ‘a-te kogneu se vaçhi’ (‘as-tu connu ce vacher?’ in the local dialect) into a-degá te-dege ko-dego gnu-degu sé-degé va-dega chi-degi? Nay, even among the Maoris of New Zealand there is a similar secret language, in which instead of ‘kei te, haere au ki reira’ is said te-kei te-i-te te-haere-te-re te-a te-u te-ki te-re-te-i-te-ra. Human nature is pretty much the same everywhere.[27]
Children, as we've seen, initially use playful language just for fun, without any hidden agenda, but as they grow older, they might realize that this language has the perk of not being understood by adults, leading them to create a ‘secret language’ purposefully. Some of these languages are limited to one school, while others might be used among kids of a certain age throughout the country. ‘M-gibberish’ and ‘S-gibberish’ involve inserting m and s, as in goming mout tomdaym or gosings outs tosdays for ‘going out today’; ‘Marrowskying’ or ‘Hospital Greek’ moves the initial letters of words around, like renty of plain for ‘plenty of rain,’ flutterby for ‘butterfly’; ‘Ziph’ or ‘Hypernese’ (in Winchester) replaces wa for the first of two initial consonants and adds p or g, turning ‘breeches’ into wareechepes and ‘penny’ into pegennepy. From my childhood in Denmark, I remember two such languages where a sentence like ‘du er et lille asen’ became dupu erper etpet lilpillepe apasenpen and durbe erbe erbe lirbelerbe arbeserbe respectively. Similar languages, with the insertion of p and adding -erbse, are found in Germany; in Holland, ‘de schoone Mei’ turns into depé schoopóonepé Meipéi, along with an -erwi-taal variation where the ending is -erf. In France, this type of language is called javanais; ‘je vais bien’ transforms into je-de-que vais-dai-qai bien-den-qen. In Savoy, the cowherds add deg after each syllable, turning ‘a-te kogneu se vaçhi’ (‘as-tu connu ce vacher?’ in the local dialect) into a-degá te-dege ko-dego gnu-degu sé-degé va-dega chi-degi? Even among the Maoris of New Zealand, there’s a similar secret language, where instead of saying ‘kei te, haere au ki reira,’ they say te-kei te-i-te te-haere-te-re te-a te-u te-ki te-re-te-i-te-ra. Human nature is pretty much the same everywhere.[27]
VIII.—§ 6. Onomatopœia.
Do children really create new words? This question has been much discussed, but even those who are most skeptical in that respect incline to allow them this power in the case of words which imitate sounds. Nevertheless, it should be remembered that the majority of onomatopœic words heard from children are not their own invention, but are acquired by them in the same way as other words. Hence it is that such words have different forms in different languages. Thus to English cockadoodledoo corresponds French coquerico, German kikeriki and Danish kykeliky, to E. quack-quack, F. cancan, Dan. raprap, etc. These words are an imperfect representation of the birds’ natural cry, but from their likeness to it they are easier for the child to seize than an entirely arbitrary name such as duck.
Do kids really come up with new words? This question has been widely debated, but even the most skeptical people usually believe that children have this ability when it comes to words that mimic sounds. Still, it should be noted that most of the onomatopoeic words kids use aren’t actually created by them; they learn them just like they learn other words. That’s why these words have different forms in different languages. For example, in English, cockadoodledoo corresponds to French coquerico, German kikeriki, and Danish kykeliky; English quack-quack is cancan in French, raprap in Danish, and so on. These words don’t perfectly capture the birds’ natural cries, but because they resemble those sounds, they’re easier for kids to grasp than a completely unrelated name like duck.
But, side by side with these, children do invent forms of their own, though the latter generally disappear quickly in favour of the[151] traditional forms. Thus Frans (2.3) had coined the word vakvak, which his mother had heard sometimes without understanding what he meant, when one day he pointed at some crows while repeating the same word; but when his mother told him that these birds were called krager, he took hold of this word with eagerness and repeated it several times, evidently recognizing it as a better name than his own. A little boy of 2.1 called soda-water ft, another boy said ging or gingging for a clock, also for the railway train, while his brother said dann for a bell or clock; a little girl (1.9) said pooh (whispered) for ‘match, cigar, pipe,’ and gagag for ‘hen,’ etc.
But alongside these, children also create their own words, although these usually fade away quickly in favor of the[151] traditional ones. For instance, Frans (2.3) made up the word vakvak, which his mother sometimes heard without understanding what he meant, until one day he pointed at some crows while repeating the word; but when his mother told him those birds were called krager, he eagerly grabbed onto that word and repeated it several times, clearly recognizing it as a better name than his own. A little boy of 2.1 called soda-water ft, another boy referred to a clock as ging or gingging, which he also used for a train, while his brother said dann for a bell or clock; a little girl (1.9) whispered pooh for ‘match, cigar, pipe,’ and gagag for ‘hen,’ and so on.
When once formed, such words may be transferred to other things, where the sound plays no longer any rôle. This may be illustrated through two extensions of the same word bŏom or bom, used by two children first to express the sound of something falling on the floor; then Ellen K. (1.9) used it for a ‘blow,’ and finally for anything disagreeable, e.g. soap in the eyes, while Kaare G. (1.8), after seeing a plate smashed, used the word for a broken plate and afterwards for anything broken, a hole in a dress, etc., also when a button had come off or when anything else was defective in any way.
Once formed, such words can be applied to other things, where the sound no longer plays a role. This can be illustrated through two extensions of the same word bŏom or bom, used by two children. Initially, they used it to express the sound of something falling on the floor. Then Ellen K. (1.9) used it to mean a ‘blow’ and eventually for anything unpleasant, like soap in the eyes. Meanwhile, Kaare G. (1.8), after seeing a plate break, used the word for a broken plate and later for anything that was broken, like a hole in a dress, as well as when a button came off or anything else was defective in some way.
VIII.—§ 7. Word-inventions.
Do children themselves create words—apart from onomatopœic words? To me there is no doubt that they do. Frans invented many words at his games that had no connexion, or very little connexion, with existing words. He was playing with a little twig when I suddenly heard him exclaim: “This is called lampetine,” but a little while afterwards he said lanketine, and then again lampetine, and then he said, varying the play, “Now it is kluatine and traniklualalilua” (3.6). A month later I write: “He is never at a loss for a self-invented word; for instance, when he has made a figure with his bricks which resembles nothing whatever, he will say, ‘That shall be lindam.’” When he played at trains in the garden, there were many stations with fanciful names, and at one time he and two cousins had a word kukukounen which they repeated constantly and thought great fun, but whose inner meaning I never succeeded in discovering. An English friend writes about his daughter: “When she was about two and a quarter she would often use some nonsense word in the middle of a perfectly intelligible sentence. When you asked her its meaning she would explain it by another equally unintelligible, and so on through a series as long as you cared to make it.” At 2.10 she pretended she had lost her bricks, and when you showed her that they were just by her, she insisted that they were not ‘bricks’ at all, but mums.
Do kids come up with their own words—aside from onomatopoetic ones? I have no doubt that they do. Frans made up a lot of words during his games that were either unrelated or only loosely connected to existing words. He was playing with a little twig when I suddenly heard him shout: “This is called lampetine,” but shortly after he changed it to lanketine, then went back to lampetine, and then varied his play with, “Now it is kluatine and traniklualalilua” (3.6). A month later I noted: “He never runs out of a self-made word; for instance, when he builds something with his blocks that looks like nothing at all, he will say, ‘That shall be lindam.’” When he played trains in the garden, there were many stations with imaginative names, and at one point he and two cousins kept repeating the word kukukounen, which they thought was hilarious, but I never figured out what it meant. An English friend shared about his daughter: “When she was about two and a quarter, she would often use a silly word in the middle of a perfectly clear sentence. When you asked her what it meant, she would explain it with another equally confusing word, and this went on as long as you wanted.” At 2.10, she pretended she had lost her blocks, and when you showed her they were right next to her, she insisted they weren't 'blocks' at all, but mums.
In all accounts of children’s talk you find words which cannot be referred back to the normal language, but which have cropped up from some unsounded depth of the child’s soul. I give a few from notes sent to me by Danish friends: goi ‘comb,’ putput ‘stocking, or any other piece of garment,’ i-a-a ‘chocolate,’ gön ‘water to drink, milk’ (kept apart from the usual word vand for water, which she used only for water to wash in), hesh ‘newspaper, book.’ Some such words have become famous in psychological literature because they were observed by Darwin and Taine. Among less famous instances from other books I may mention tibu ‘bird’ (Strümpel), adi ‘cake’ (Ament), be’lum-be’lum ‘toy with two men turning about,’ wakaka ‘soldier,’ nda ‘jar,’ pamma ‘pencil,’ bium ‘stocking’ (Meringer).
In all accounts of how children talk, you find words that can’t be traced back to regular language, but have emerged from some unexplored depth of the child’s soul. Here are a few from notes sent to me by Danish friends: goi ‘comb,’ putput ‘stocking, or any other piece of clothing,’ i-a-a ‘chocolate,’ gön ‘drinking water, milk’ (set apart from the usual word vand for water, which she only used for water to wash with), hesh ‘newspaper, book.’ Some of these words have become well-known in psychological literature because they were noted by Darwin and Taine. Among less famous examples from other writings, I can mention tibu ‘bird’ (Strümpel), adi ‘cake’ (Ament), be’lum-be’lum ‘toy with two men spinning around,’ wakaka ‘soldier,’ nda ‘jar,’ pamma ‘pencil,’ bium ‘stocking’ (Meringer).
An American correspondent writes that his boy was fond of pushing a stick over the carpet after the manner of a carpet-sweeper and called the operation jazing. He coined the word borkens as a name for a particular sort of blocks with which he was accustomed to play. He was a nervous child and his imagination created objects of terror that haunted him in the dark, and to these he gave the name of Boons. This name may, however, be derived from baboons. Mr. Harold Palmer tells me that his daughter (whose native language was French) at an early age used ['fu'wɛ] for ‘soap’ and [dɛ'dɛtʃ] for ‘horse, wooden horse, merry-go-round.’
An American reporter mentions that his son liked to push a stick across the carpet like a carpet sweeper and called this action "jazing." He invented the word "borkens" to describe a specific type of blocks he played with. He was an anxious child, and his imagination conjured up scary things that frightened him in the dark, which he referred to as "Boons." This term might actually come from "baboons." Mr. Harold Palmer tells me that his daughter (whose first language was French) used [‘fu’wɛ] for ‘soap’ and [dɛ'dɛtʃ] for ‘horse, wooden horse, merry-go-round’ at a young age.
Dr. F. Poulsen, in his book Rejser og rids (Copenhagen, 1920), says about his two-year-old daughter that when she gets hold of her mother’s fur-collar she will pet it and lavish on it all kinds of tender self-invented names, such as apu or a-fo-me-me. The latter word, “which has all the melodious euphony and vague signification of primitive language,” is applied to anything that is rare and funny and worth rejoicing at. On a summer day’s excursion there was one new a-fo-me-me after the other.
Dr. F. Poulsen, in his book Rejser og rids (Copenhagen, 1920), talks about his two-year-old daughter, saying that when she grabs her mother’s fur collar, she will pet it and give it all sorts of sweet, made-up names, like apu or a-fo-me-me. The latter term, “which has all the melodic charm and vague meaning of primitive language,” is used for anything that is unique, amusing, and worth celebrating. On a summer outing, there were one new a-fo-me-me after another.
In spite of all this, a point on which all the most distinguished investigators of children’s language of late years are agreed is that children never invent words. Wundt goes so far as to say that “the child’s language is the result of the child’s environment, the child being essentially a passive instrument in the matter” (S 1. 196)—one of the most wrong-headed sentences I have ever read in the works of a great scientist. Meumann says: “Preyer and after him almost every careful observer among child-psychologists have strongly held the view that it is impossible to speak of a child inventing a word.” Similarly Meringer, L 220, Stern, 126, 273, 337 ff., Bloomfield, SL 12.
Despite all this, a point that all the most respected researchers of children's language in recent years agree on is that children never create words. Wundt goes as far as to say that “the child’s language is the result of the child’s environment, the child being essentially a passive instrument in the matter” (S 1. 196)—one of the most misguided statements I have ever read in the works of a great scientist. Meumann states: “Preyer and nearly every careful observer among child psychologists after him have strongly believed that it is impossible to say a child invents a word.” Similarly, Meringer, L 220, Stern, 126, 273, 337 ff., Bloomfield, SL 12.
These investigators seem to have been led astray by expressions such as ‘shape out of nothing,’ ‘invent,’ ‘original creation’[153] (Urschöpfung), and to have taken this doctrinaire attitude in partial defiance of the facts they have themselves advanced. Expressions like those adduced occur over and over again in their discussions, and Meumann says openly: “Invention demands a methodical proceeding with intention, a conception of an end to be realized.” Of course, if that is necessary it is clear that we can speak of invention of words in the case of a chemist seeking a word for a new substance, and not in the case of a tiny child. But are there not many inventions in the technical world, which we do not hesitate to call inventions, which have come about more or less by chance? Wasn’t it so probably with gunpowder? According to the story it certainly was so with blotting-paper: the foreman who had forgotten to add size to a portion of writing-paper was dismissed, but the manufacturer who saw that the paper thus spoilt could be turned to account instead of the sand hitherto used made a fortune. So according to Meumann blotting-paper has never been ‘invented.’ If in order to acknowledge a child’s creation of a word we are to postulate that it has been produced out of nothing, what about bicycles, fountain-pens, typewriters—each of which was something existing before, carried just a little further? Are they on that account not inventions? One would think not, when one reads these writers on children’s language, for as soon as the least approximation to a word in the normal language is discovered, the child is denied both ‘invention’ and ‘the speech-forming faculty’! Thus Stern (p. 338) says that his daughter in her second year used some words which might be taken as proof of the power to create words, but for the fact that it was here possible to show how these ‘new’ words had grown out of normal words. Eischei, for instance, was used as a verb meaning ‘go, walk,’ but it originated in the words eins, zwei (one, two) which were said when the child was taught to walk. Other examples are given comparable to those mentioned above (106, 115) as mutilations of the first period. Now, even if all those words given by myself and others as original inventions of children could be proved to be similar perversions of ‘real’ words (which is not likely), I should not hesitate to speak of a word-creating faculty, for eischei, ‘to walk,’ is both in form and still more in meaning far enough from eins, zwei to be reckoned a totally new word.
These researchers seem to have been confused by phrases like “shape out of nothing,” “invent,” and “original creation”[153] (Urschöpfung), and have adopted this rigid approach in partial disregard of the facts they themselves have presented. Terms like those mentioned appear repeatedly in their discussions, and Meumann openly states: “Invention requires a systematic approach with intention, a clear idea of an outcome to be achieved.” Of course, if that’s necessary, it’s evident that we can refer to the invention of words in the case of a chemist searching for a term for a new substance, but not when it comes to a small child. Yet, aren’t there many inventions in the tech world that we readily call inventions, which happened more or less by chance? Wasn’t that likely the case with gunpowder? According to the story, it certainly was with blotting paper: the supervisor who forgot to add sizing to some writing paper was fired, but the manufacturer who realized that the spoiled paper could be useful instead of the sand that had been used made a fortune. So, according to Meumann, blotting paper has never been “invented.” If we have to assert that a child's creation of a word must come from nothing, what about bicycles, fountain pens, and typewriters—each of which was something that already existed, just taken a bit further? Are they not inventions for that reason? It seems not, when reading these authors on children’s language, because as soon as there’s the slightest resemblance to a word in standard language, the child is denied both “invention” and “the ability to form speech”! For instance, Stern (p. 338) notes that his daughter, at two years old, used some words that could be seen as evidence of the ability to create words, except for the fact that it was clear how these “new” words came from normal words. The word Eischei, for example, was used as a verb meaning “go, walk,” but it originated from the words eins, zwei (one, two) that were said when the child was learning to walk. Other examples comparable to those mentioned above (106, 115) are noted as distortions from that early period. Now, even if all those words I and others have identified as original creations of children could be proven to be similar distortions of “real” words (which isn’t likely), I would still confidently refer to a word-creating ability, because eischei, “to walk,” is both in form and, even more so in meaning, far enough from eins, zwei to be considered a completely new word.
We can divide words ‘invented’ by children into three classes:
We can categorize the words 'made up' by kids into three groups:
A. The child gives both sound and meaning.
A. The child expresses both sound and meaning.
B. The grown-up people give the sound, and the child the meaning.
B. Adults provide the sound, while the child understands the meaning.
C. The child gives the sound, grown-up people the meaning.
C. The child makes the sound, and adults give it meaning.
But the three classes cannot always be kept apart, especially when the child imitates the grown-up person’s sound so badly or seizes the meaning so imperfectly that very little is left of what the grown-up person gives. As a rule, the self-created words will be very short-lived; still, there are exceptions.
But the three classes can't always be separated, especially when a child mimics an adult's sounds poorly or grasps the meaning so inaccurately that hardly anything remains of what the adult conveys. Generally, the words kids create themselves tend to be short-lived; however, there are exceptions.
O’Shea’s account of one of these words is very instructive. “She had also a few words of her own coining which were attached spontaneously to objects, and these her elders took up, and they became fixed in her vocabulary for a considerable period. A word resembling Ndobbin was employed for every sort of thing which she used for food. The word came originally from an accidental combination of sounds made while she was eating. By the aid of the people about her in responding to this term and repeating it, she ‘selected’ it and for a time used it purposefully. She employed it at the outset for a specific article of food; then her elders extended it to other articles, and this aided her in making the extension herself. Once started in this process, she extended the term to many objects associated with her food, even objects as remote from her original experience as dining-room, high-chair, kitchen, and even apple and plum trees” (O’Shea, 27).
O’Shea’s description of one of these words is very enlightening. “She also created a few words of her own that she naturally attached to objects, and her elders picked them up, making them a lasting part of her vocabulary for quite a while. A word similar to Ndobbin was used for every kind of thing she called food. The word originated from a random combination of sounds she made while eating. With the help of the people around her responding to this term and repeating it, she ‘chose’ it and used it intentionally for a while. She initially used it for a specific type of food; then her elders applied it to other items, which helped her expand its use herself. Once she got started on this, she applied the term to many food-related objects, even extending it to things as different from her original experience as dining room, high chair, kitchen, and even apple and plum trees” (O’Shea, 27).
To Class A I assign most of the words already given as the child’s creations, whether the child be great or small.
To Class A, I assign most of the words that have already been identified as the child's creations, regardless of whether the child is big or small.
Class B is that which is most sparsely represented. A child in Finland often heard the well-known line about King Karl (Charles XII), “Han stod i rök och damm” (“He stood in smoke and dust”), and taking rö to be the adjective meaning ‘red,’ imagined the remaining syllables, which he heard as kordamm, to be the name of some piece of garment. This amused his parents so much that kordamm became the name of a dressing-gown in that family.
Class B is the one that is represented the least. A child in Finland often heard the famous line about King Karl (Charles XII), “Han stod i rök och damm” (“He stood in smoke and dust”), and misunderstanding rö as the adjective for ‘red,’ imagined the rest of the syllables, which he heard as kordamm, to be the name of some kind of clothing. This made his parents laugh so much that kordamm became the term for a dressing gown in their family.
To Class C, where the child contributes only the sound and the older people give a meaning to what on the child’s side was meaningless—a process that reminds one of the invention of blotting-paper—belong some of the best-known words, which require a separate section.
To Class C, where the child only provides the sounds and the adults assign meaning to what was meaningless for the child—a process that is similar to the invention of blotting paper—belong some of the most well-known words, which need a separate section.
VIII.—§ 8. ‘Mamma’ and ‘Papa.’
In the nurseries of all countries a little comedy has in all ages been played—the baby lies and babbles his ‘mamama’ or ‘amama’ or ‘papapa’ or ‘apapa’ or ‘bababa’ or ‘ababab’ without associating the slightest meaning with his mouth-games, and his grown-up friends, in their joy over the precocious child, assign to these syllables a rational sense, accustomed as they are themselves to the fact of an uttered sound having a content, a thought, an idea, corresponding to it. So we get a whole class[155] of words, distinguished by a simplicity of sound-formation—never two consonants together, generally the same consonant repeated with an a between, frequently also with an a at the end—words found in many languages, often in different forms, but with essentially the same meaning.
In the nurseries of all countries, a little comedy has been played throughout the ages—the baby lies there and babbles “mamama,” “amama,” “papapa,” “apapa,” “bababa,” or “ababab” without attaching any real meaning to these sounds. Meanwhile, the adults, delighted by the advanced child, attribute a rational meaning to these syllables, as they are used to the idea that spoken sounds convey content, thoughts, or ideas. This results in a whole class[155] of words, characterized by simple sound patterns—never two consonants together, usually the same consonant repeated with an a in the middle, often also with an a at the end—words that appear in many languages, often in various forms but essentially sharing the same meaning.
First we have words for ‘mother.’ It is very natural that the mother who is greeted by her happy child with the sound ‘mama’ should take it as though the child were calling her ‘mama,’ and since she frequently comes to the cradle when she hears the sound, the child himself does learn to use these syllables when he wants to call her. In this way they become a recognized word for the idea ‘mother’—now with the stress on the first syllable, now on the second. In French we get a nasal vowel either in the last syllable only or in both syllables. At times we have only one syllable, ma. When once these syllables have become a regular word they follow the speech laws which govern other words; thus among other forms we get the German muhme, the meaning of which (‘aunt’) is explained as in the words mentioned, p. 118. In very early times ma in our group of languages was supplied with a termination, so that we get the form underlying Greek mētēr, Lat. mater (whence Fr. mère, etc.), our own mother, G. mutter, etc. These words became the recognized grown-up words, while mama itself was only used in the intimacy of the family. It depends on fashion, however, how ‘high up’ mama can be used: in some countries and in some periods children are allowed to use it longer than in others.
First, we have words for ‘mother.’ It’s completely natural that the mom who hears her happy child calling out ‘mama’ would interpret it as the child calling her ‘mama,’ and since she often comes to the crib when she hears that sound, the child learns to use those syllables when he wants to get her attention. This way, they become an accepted word for the idea of ‘mother’—sometimes with the emphasis on the first syllable, sometimes on the second. In French, we encounter a nasal vowel either in the last syllable only or in both syllables. Occasionally, we have just one syllable, ma. Once these syllables become a standard word, they follow the language rules that apply to other words; so among other forms, we have the German muhme, meaning (‘aunt’), explained as in the words mentioned, p. 118. In ancient times, ma in our language group was given a suffix, leading to the form underlying Greek mētēr, Latin mater (from which we get Fr. mère, etc.), our own mother, G. mutter, etc. These words became the accepted grown-up terms, while mama itself was only used in family intimacy. However, it depends on trends how ‘formal’ mama can be used: in some countries and periods, children are allowed to use it for longer than in others.
The forms mama and ma are not the only ones for ‘mother.’ The child’s am has also been seized and maintained by the grown-ups. The Albanian word for ‘mother’ is ama, the Old Norse word for ‘grandmother’ is amma. The Latin am-ita, formed from am with a termination added, came to mean ‘aunt’ and became in OFr. ante, whence E. aunt and Modern Fr. tante. In Semitic languages the words for ‘mother’ also have a vowel before m: Assyrian ummu, Hebrew ’êm, etc.
The terms mama and ma aren’t the only ones for ‘mother.’ The child’s am has also been taken and kept by the adults. The Albanian word for ‘mother’ is ama, the Old Norse word for ‘grandmother’ is amma. The Latin am-ita, created from am with an added ending, means ‘aunt’ and evolved into OFr. ante, leading to E. aunt and Modern Fr. tante. In Semitic languages, the words for ‘mother’ also include a vowel before m: Assyrian ummu, Hebrew ’êm, and so on.
Baba, too, is found in the sense ‘mother,’ especially in Slavonic languages, though it has here developed various derivative meanings, ‘old woman,’ ‘grandmother,’ or ‘midwife.’ In Tonga we have bama ‘mother.’
Baba is also used to mean ‘mother,’ particularly in Slavonic languages, although it has taken on various related meanings, such as ‘old woman,’ ‘grandmother,’ or ‘midwife.’ In Tonga, we have bama for ‘mother.’
Forms with n are also found for ‘mother’; so Sanskrit naná, Albanian nane. Here we have also Gr. nannē ‘aunt’ and Lat. nonna; the latter ceased in the early Middle Ages to mean ‘grandmother’ and became a respectful way of addressing women of a certain age, whence we know it as nun, the feminine counterpart of ‘monk.’ From less known languages I may mention Greenlandic a'na·na ‘mother,’ 'a·na ‘grandmother.’
Forms with n are also found for ‘mother’; for example, Sanskrit naná and Albanian nane. Here we also see Greek nannē meaning ‘aunt’ and Latin nonna; the latter stopped meaning ‘grandmother’ in the early Middle Ages and evolved into a respectful way to address women of a certain age, which is how we know it as nun, the feminine version of ‘monk.’ From lesser-known languages, I can mention Greenlandic a'na·na for ‘mother’ and 'a·na for ‘grandmother.’
Now we come to words meaning ‘father,’ and quite naturally, where the sound-groups containing m have already been interpreted in the sense ‘mother,’ a word for ‘father’ will be sought in the syllables with p. It is no doubt frequently noticed in the nursery that the baby says mama where one expected papa, and vice versa; but at last he learns to deal out the syllables ‘rightly,’ as we say. The history of the forms papa, pappa and pa is analogous to the history of the m syllables already traced. We have the same extension of the sound by tr in the word pater, which according to recognized laws of sound-change is found in the French père, the English father, the Danish fader, the German vater, etc. Philologists no longer, fortunately, derive these words from a root pa ‘to protect,’ and see therein a proof of the ‘highly moral spirit’ of our aboriginal ancestors, as Fick and others did. Papa, as we know, also became an honourable title for a reverend ecclesiastic, and hence comes the name which we have in the form Pope.
Now we turn to words that mean ‘father,’ and naturally, since the sound groups with m have already been understood to mean ‘mother,’ we will look for a word for ‘father’ in the syllables containing p. It's often noticed in the nursery that a baby might say mama when we expect papa, and the other way around; but eventually, they learn to use the syllables correctly, as we say. The development of the forms papa, pappa, and pa is similar to the history of the m forms we've already discussed. We see the same extension of the sound with tr in the word pater, which according to recognized rules of sound change appears in French as père, in English as father, in Danish as fader, in German as vater, and so on. Fortunately, philologists no longer trace these words back to a root pa meaning ‘to protect,’ as Fick and others did, believing it showed the ‘highly moral spirit’ of our early ancestors. Papa, as we know, also became a respectable title for a reverend cleric, which is how we got the name Pope.
Side by side with the p forms we have forms in b—Italian babbo, Bulgarian babá, Serbian bába, Turkish baba. Beginning with the vowel we have the Semitic forms ab, abu and finally abba, which is well known, since through Greek abbas it has become the name for a spiritual father in all European languages, our form being Abbot.
Side by side with the p forms, we have forms in b—Italian babbo, Bulgarian babá, Serbian bába, Turkish baba. Starting with the vowel, we have the Semitic forms ab, abu, and finally abba, which is well-known because through Greek abbas it has become the name for a spiritual father in all European languages, with our form being Abbot.
Again, we have some names for ‘father’ with dental sounds: Sanskrit tatá, Russian tata, tyatya, Welsh tat, etc. The English dad, now so universal, is sometimes considered to have been borrowed from this Welsh word, which in certain connexions has an initial d, but no doubt it had an independent origin. In Slavonic languages déd is extensively used for ‘grandfather’ or ‘old man.’ Thus also deite, teite in German dialects. Tata ‘father’ is found in Congo and other African languages, also (tatta) in Negro-English (Surinam). And just as words for ‘mother’ change their meaning from ‘mother’ to ‘aunt,’ so these forms in some languages come to mean ‘uncle’: Gr. theios (whence Italian zio), Lithuanian dede, Russian dyadya.
Again, we have some names for ‘father’ that include dental sounds: Sanskrit tatá, Russian tata, tyatya, Welsh tat, and so on. The English dad, now so common, is sometimes thought to have been borrowed from this Welsh word, which in certain contexts has an initial d, but it likely has an independent origin. In Slavic languages, déd is widely used for ‘grandfather’ or ‘old man.’ The same is true for deite, teite in some German dialects. Tata ‘father’ is found in Congo and other African languages, and also (tatta) in Negro-English (Surinam). Just as words for ‘mother’ can change meaning from ‘mother’ to ‘aunt,’ some of these forms in various languages can also mean ‘uncle’: Gr. theios (which leads to Italian zio), Lithuanian dede, Russian dyadya.
With an initial vowel we get the form atta, in Greek used in addressing old people, in Gothic the ordinary word for ‘father,’ which with a termination added gives the proper name Attila, originally ‘little father’; with another ending we have Russian otec. Outside our own family of languages we find, for instance, Magyar atya, Turkish ata, Basque aita, Greenlandic a'ta·ta ‘father,’ while in the last-mentioned language a·ta means ‘grandfather.’[28]
With an initial vowel, we get the form atta, which in Greek is used when addressing older people, while in Gothic it’s the common word for ‘father.’ Adding a suffix gives us the proper name Attila, which means ‘little father’; with another ending, we have the Russian word otec. Beyond our own language family, we find examples like Hungarian atya, Turkish ata, Basque aita, and Greenlandic a'ta·ta meaning ‘father,’ while in Greenlandic, a·ta means ‘grandfather.’[28]
The nurse, too, comes in for her share in these names, as she too is greeted by the child’s babbling and is tempted to take it as the child’s name for her; thus we get the German and Scandinavian amme, Polish niania, Russian nyanya, cf. our Nanny. These words cannot be kept distinct from names for ‘aunt,’ cf. amita above, and in Sanskrit we find mama for ‘uncle.’
The nurse also gets her share of these names, as she too is welcomed by the child's chatter and is tempted to think of it as the child's name for her; this is how we have the German and Scandinavian amme, Polish niania, Russian nyanya, and our Nanny. These words can't be separated from names for 'aunt,' like amita mentioned above, and in Sanskrit, we find mama for 'uncle.'
It is perhaps more doubtful if we can find a name for the child itself which has arisen in the same way; the nearest example is the Engl. babe, baby, German bube (with u as in muhme above); but babe has also been explained as a word derived normally from OFr. baube, from Lat. balbus ‘stammering.’ When the name Bab or Babs (Babbe in a Danish family) becomes the pet-name for a little girl, this has no doubt come from an interpretation put on her own meaningless sounds. Ital. bambo (bambino) certainly belongs here. We may here mention also some terms for ‘doll,’ Lat. pupa or puppa, G. puppe; with a derivative ending we have Fr. poupée, E. puppet (Chaucer, A 3254, popelote). These words have a rich semantic development, cf. pupa (Dan. puppe, etc.) ‘chrysalis,’ and the diminutive Lat. pupillus, pupilla, which was used for ‘a little child, minor,’ whence E. pupil ‘disciple,’ but also for the little child seen in the eye, whence E. (and other languages) pupil, ‘central opening of the eye.’
It’s uncertain if we can find a name for the child that originated in the same way; the closest example is the English babe, baby, and the German bube (with u as in muhme above); however, babe has also been explained as a word derived from Old French baube, from Latin balbus meaning ‘stammering.’ When the name Bab or Babs (like Babbe in a Danish family) becomes the nickname for a little girl, this is likely due to an interpretation of her own nonsensical sounds. The Italian bambo (bambino) certainly fits here. We should also mention some terms for ‘doll,’ such as Latin pupa or puppa, and German puppe; with a derivative ending, we have French poupée and English puppet (Chaucer, A 3254, popelote). These words have a rich semantic history, for example, pupa (Danish puppe, etc.) meaning ‘chrysalis,’ and the diminutive Latin pupillus, pupilla, which was used to mean ‘a little child, minor,’ leading to the English pupil meaning ‘disciple,’ but also referring to the little child seen in the eye, which is why we have the term in English (and other languages) pupil meaning ‘the central opening of the eye.’
A child has another main interest—that is, in its food, the breast, the bottle, etc. In many countries it has been observed that very early a child uses a long m (without a vowel) as a sign that it wants something, but we can hardly be right in supposing that the sound is originally meant by children in this sense. They do not use it consciously till they see that grown-up people on hearing the sound come up and find out what the child wants. And it is the same with the developed forms which are uttered by the child in its joy at getting something to eat, and which are therefore interpreted as the child’s expression for food: am, mam, mammam, or the same words with a final a—that is, really the same groups of sounds which came to stand for ‘mother.’ The determination of a particular form to a particular meaning is always due to the adults, who, however, can subsequently teach it to the child. Under this heading comes the sound ham, which Taine observed to be one child’s expression for hunger or thirst (h mute?), and similarly the word mum, meaning ‘something to eat,’ invented,[158] as we are told, by Darwin’s son and often uttered with a rising intonation, as in a question, ‘Will you give me something to eat?’ Lindner’s child (1.5) is said to have used papp for everything eatable and mem or möm for anything drinkable. In normal language we have forms like Sanskrit māmsa (Gothic mimz) and mās ‘flesh,’ our own meat (which formerly, like Dan. mad, meant any kind of food), German mus ‘jam’ (whence also gemüse), and finally Lat. mandere and manducare, ‘to chew’ (whence Fr. manger)—all developments of this childish ma(m).
A child has another main interest—that is, food, like breast milk, bottles, etc. In many countries, it's been noticed that very early on, a child uses a long m (without a vowel) as a signal that it wants something, but we can't really assume that kids originally intended the sound to mean this. They don’t use it intentionally until they see that adults come over when they hear it to find out what the child wants. The same goes for the more developed sounds that a child makes in joy when getting something to eat, which are interpreted as the child’s way of expressing hunger: am, mam, mammam, or the same words with an added a—these actually represent the same sounds associated with ‘mother.’ The association of a specific sound with a specific meaning is always influenced by adults, who can then teach it to the child. This includes the sound ham, which Taine noted was a child’s way of expressing hunger or thirst (h silent?), and similarly the word mum, which means ‘something to eat,’ invented, as we’ve heard, by Darwin’s son, often said with a rising intonation, like in a question, ‘Will you give me something to eat?’ Lindner’s child (1.5) reportedly used papp for anything edible and mem or möm for anything drinkable. In ordinary language, we have terms like Sanskrit māmsa (Gothic mimz) and mās ‘flesh,’ our own meat (which used to mean any kind of food, like Dan. mad), German mus ‘jam’ (which also gave us gemüse), and finally Latin mandere and manducare, ‘to chew’ (which led to Fr. manger)—all stemming from this childish ma(m).
As the child’s first nourishment is its mother’s breast, its joyous mamama can also be taken to mean the breast. So we have the Latin mamma (with a diminutive ending mammilla, whence Fr. mamelle), and with the other labial sound Engl. pap, Norwegian and Swed. dial. pappe, Lat. papilla; with a different vowel, It. poppa, Fr. poupe, ‘teat of an animal, formerly also of a woman’; with b, G. bübbi, obsolete E. bubby; with a dental, E. teat (G. zitze), Ital. tetta, Dan. titte, Swed. dial. tatte. Further we have words like E. pap ‘soft food,’ Latin papare ‘to eat,’ orig. ‘to suck,’ and some G. forms for the same, pappen, pampen, pampfen. Perhaps the beginning of the word milk goes back to the baby’s ma applied to the mother’s breast or milk; the latter half may then be connected with Lat. lac. In Greenlandic we have ama·ma ‘suckle.’
As a child’s first food is its mother’s breast, its cheerful mamama can also refer to the breast. So we have the Latin mamma (with a diminutive ending mammilla, leading to Fr. mamelle), and with a different labial sound, Engl. pap, Norwegian and Swedish dialects pappe, Latin papilla; with a different vowel, It. poppa, Fr. poupe, ‘teat of an animal, which used to also mean a woman’; with b, G. bübbi, outdated E. bubby; with a dental sound, E. teat (G. zitze), Ital. tetta, Dan. titte, Swedish dialect tatte. We also have words like E. pap ‘soft food,’ Latin papare ‘to eat,’ originally ‘to suck,’ and some German forms for the same, pappen, pampen, pampfen. Perhaps the origin of the word milk traces back to the baby’s ma used for the mother’s breast or milk; the second part might then connect with Latin lac. In Greenlandic, we have ama·ma ‘suckle.’
Inseparable from these words is the sound, a long m or am, which expresses the child’s delight over something that tastes good; it has by-forms in the Scotch nyam or nyamnyam, the English seaman’s term yam ‘to eat,’ and with two dentals the French nanan ‘sweetmeats.’ Some linguists will have it that the Latin amo ‘I love’ is derived from this am, which expresses pleasurable satisfaction. When a father tells me that his son (1.10) uses the wonderful words nananæi for ‘chocolate’ and jajajaja for picture-book, we have no doubt here also a case of a grown person’s interpretation of the originally meaningless sounds of a child.
Inseparable from these words is the sound, a long m or am, which shows the child’s joy over something that tastes good; it has variations in the Scottish nyam or nyamnyam, the English sailor’s term yam meaning ‘to eat,’ and with two dental sounds, the French nanan for ‘sweet treats.’ Some linguists believe that the Latin amo meaning ‘I love’ comes from this am, which conveys pleasurable satisfaction. When a father tells me that his son (1.10) uses the delightful words nananæi for ‘chocolate’ and jajajaja for picture book, we see that this is likely a grown person's interpretation of the originally meaningless sounds of a child.
Another meaning that grown-up people may attach to syllables uttered by the child is that of ‘good-bye,’ as in English tata, which has now been incorporated in the ordinary language.[29] Stern probably is right when he thinks that the French adieu would not have been accepted so commonly in Germany and other countries if it had not accommodated itself so easily, especially in the form commonly used in German, ade, to the child’s natural word.
Another meaning that adults might give to the sounds made by the child is ‘good-bye,’ similar to how we use tata in English, which has now become a part of everyday language.[29] Stern is likely correct when he suggests that the French adieu would not have become so widely accepted in Germany and other countries if it hadn't adapted so well, particularly in its common German form, ade, to the child’s natural sound.
There are some words for ‘bed, sleep’ which clearly belong to this class: Tuscan nanna ‘cradle,’ Sp. hacer la nana ‘go to sleep,’ E. bye-bye (possibly associated with good-bye, instead of which is also said byebye); Stern mentions baba (Berlin), beibei (Russian), bobo (Malay), but bischbisch, which he also gives here, is evidently (like the Danish visse) imitative of the sound used for hushing.
There are some words for 'bed, sleep' that clearly belong to this category: Tuscan nanna 'cradle,' Sp. hacer la nana 'go to sleep,' E. bye-bye (possibly related to good-bye, which is also said byebye); Stern mentions baba (Berlin), beibei (Russian), bobo (Malay), but bischbisch, which he also lists here, is clearly (like the Danish visse) imitative of the sound people use for hushing.
Words of this class stand in a way outside the common words of a language, owing to their origin and their being continually new-created. One cannot therefore deduce laws of sound-change from them in their original shape; and it is equally wrong to use them as evidence for an original kinship between different families of language and to count them as loan-words, as is frequently done (for example, when the Slavonic baba is said to be borrowed from Turkish). The English papa and mam(m)a, and the same words in German and Danish, Italian, etc., are almost always regarded as borrowed from French; but Cauer rightly points out that Nausikaa (Odyssey 6. 57) addresses her father as pappa fil, and Homer cannot be suspected of borrowing from French. Still, it is true that fashion may play a part in deciding how long children may be permitted to say papa and mamma, and a French fashion may in this respect have spread to other European countries, especially in the seventeenth century. We may not find these words in early use in the literatures of the different countries, but this is no proof that the words were not used in the nursery. As soon as a word of this class has somewhere got a special application, this can very well pass as a loan-word from land to land—as we saw in the case of the words abbot and pope. And it may be granted with respect to the primary use of the words that there are certain national or quasi-national customs which determine what grown people expect to hear from babies, so that one nation expects and recognizes papa, another dad, a third atta, for the meaning ‘father.’
Words in this group stand somewhat apart from the common words of a language because of their origins and the fact that they are constantly being refreshed. Therefore, you cannot deduce rules about sound changes from them in their original form; it's equally incorrect to use them as evidence for an inherent connection among different language families or to classify them as loanwords, as is often done (for example, when it's claimed that the Slavic baba was borrowed from Turkish). The English papa and mam(m)a, along with the same terms in German, Danish, Italian, etc., are usually thought to be borrowed from French; but Cauer correctly points out that Nausikaa (Odyssey 6. 57) calls her father pappa fil, and Homer certainly wasn’t borrowing from French. However, it is true that trends can influence how long children are allowed to say papa and mamma, and a French trend might have spread to other European countries, especially in the seventeenth century. We may not find these words used early on in the literatures of various countries, but that doesn’t prove they weren’t used in homes. Once a word from this group has found a specific usage somewhere, it can easily become a loanword from one country to another—as we saw with the words abbot and pope. It can also be acknowledged that there are certain national or semi-national customs that shape what adults expect to hear from babies, so one culture recognizes papa, another dad, and yet another atta for the meaning of ‘father.’
When the child hands something to somebody or reaches out for something he will generally say something, and if, as often happens, this is ta or da, it will be taken by its parents and others as a real word, different according to the language they speak; in England as there or thanks, in Denmark as tak ‘thanks’[30] or tag ‘take,’ in Germany as da ‘there,’ in France as tiens ‘hold,’ in Russia as day ‘give,’ in Italy as to, (= togli) ‘take.’ The form tê in Homer is interpreted by some as an imperative of teinō ‘stretch.’ These instances, however, are slightly different[160] in character from those discussed in the main part of this chapter.[31]
When a child gives something to someone or reaches for something, they usually say something, and if it’s often ta or da, parents and others tend to interpret it as a real word, which varies based on the language they speak; in England, it means there or thanks, in Denmark it’s tak for ‘thanks’[30] or tag for ‘take,’ in Germany it’s da for ‘there,’ in France it’s tiens for ‘hold,’ in Russia it’s day for ‘give,’ in Italy it’s to (from togli) for ‘take.’ The form tê in Homer is seen by some as an imperative of teinō for ‘stretch.’ However, these examples are a bit different[160] in nature compared to those discussed in the main part of this chapter.[31]
CHAPTER IX
THE IMPACT OF CHILDREN ON LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT
§ 1. Conflicting Views. § 2. Meringer. Analogy. § 3. Herzog’s Theory of Sound Changes. § 4. Gradual Shiftings. § 5. Leaps. § 6. Assimilations, etc. § 7. Stump-words.
§ 1. Conflicting Views. § 2. Meringer. Analogy. § 3. Herzog’s Theory of Sound Changes. § 4. Gradual Shifts. § 5. Leaps. § 6. Assimilations, etc. § 7. Stump Words.
IX.—§ 1. Conflicting Views.
We all know that in historical times languages have been constantly changing, and we have much indirect evidence that in prehistoric times they did the same thing. But when it is asked if these changes, unavoidable as they seem to be, are to be ascribed primarily to children and their defective imitation of the speech of their elders, or if children’s language in general plays no part at all in the history of language, we find linguists expressing quite contrary views, without the question having ever been really thoroughly investigated.
We all know that throughout history, languages have been constantly evolving, and we have a lot of indirect evidence that they changed in prehistoric times too. But when people ask whether these changes, which seem unavoidable, are mainly due to children and their imperfect imitation of how adults speak, or if children’s language doesn’t contribute at all to the development of language, we see linguists offering very different opinions, even though the question hasn’t been thoroughly explored.
Some hold that the child acquires its language with such perfection that it cannot be held responsible for the changes recorded in the history of languages: others, on the contrary, hold that the most important source of these changes is to be found in the transmission of the language to new generations. How undecided the attitude even of the foremost linguists may be towards the question is perhaps best seen in the views expressed at different times by Sweet. In 1882 he reproaches Paul with paying attention only to the shiftings going on in the pronunciation of the same individual, and not acknowledging “the much more potent cause of change which exists in the fact that one generation can learn the sounds of the preceding one by imitation only. It is an open question whether the modifications made by the individual in a sound he has once learnt, independently of imitation of those around him, are not too infinitesimal to have any appreciable effect” (CP 153). In the same spirit he asserted in 1899 that the process of learning our own language in childhood is a very slow one, “and the results are always imperfect.... If languages were learnt perfectly by the children of each generation, then languages would not change: English children would still speak a language as old at least as ‘Anglo-Saxon,’ and there would be[162] no such languages as French and Italian. The changes in languages are simply slight mistakes, which in the course of generations completely alter the character of the language” (PS 75). But only one year later, in 1900, he maintains that the child’s imitation “is in most cases practically perfect”—“the main cause of sound-change must therefore be sought elsewhere. The real cause of sound-change seems to be organic shifting—failure to hit the mark, the result either of carelessness or sloth ... a slight deviation from the pronunciation learnt in infancy may easily pass unheeded, especially by those who make the same change in their own pronunciation” (H 19 f.). By the term “organic shifting” Sweet evidently, as seen from his preface, meant shifting in the pronunciation of the adult, thus a modification of the sound learnt ‘perfectly’ in childhood. Paul, who in the first edition (1880) of his Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte did not mention the influence of children, in all the following editions (2nd, 1886, p. 58; 3rd, 1898, p. 58; 4th, 1909, p. 63) expressly says that “die hauptveranlassung zum lautwandel in der übertragung der laute auf neue individuen liegt,” while the shiftings within the same generation are very slight. Paul thus modified his view in the opposite direction of Sweet[32]—and did so under the influence of Sweet’s criticism of his own first view!
Some believe that children learn their language so perfectly that we can't hold them responsible for the changes we see in language history; others, however, argue that the main reason for these changes lies in how language gets passed down to new generations. The uncertainty even among leading linguists on this topic is perhaps best illustrated by the differing opinions of Sweet over time. In 1882, he criticized Paul for only considering the changes in pronunciation of the same individual and not recognizing "the much more powerful cause of change, which is that one generation can only learn the sounds of the previous one by imitation. It’s still up for debate whether the small adjustments made by someone to a sound they once learned, independent of the imitation of those around them, are significant enough to have any noticeable impact" (CP 153). In a similar vein, he stated in 1899 that learning our own language in childhood is a very gradual process, "and the outcomes are always incomplete... If children learned languages perfectly from each generation, then languages wouldn’t change: English kids would still speak a language at least as old as 'Anglo-Saxon,' and there wouldn’t be languages like French and Italian. The changes in languages are simply minor mistakes that, over generations, completely transform the character of the language" (PS 75). Yet, just a year later, in 1900, he argued that a child’s imitation "is practically flawless in most cases"—"thus, the main cause of sound change must be found elsewhere. The true cause of sound change seems to be organic shifting—failure to achieve the correct pronunciation, resulting either from carelessness or laziness... a slight divergence from the pronunciation learned in childhood can easily go unnoticed, especially by those who make the same adjustment in their own speech" (H 19 f.). By "organic shifting," Sweet clearly meant changes in the pronunciation of adults, which modifies the sound learned 'perfectly' during childhood. Paul, who did not mention the influence of children in the first edition (1880) of his Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte, explicitly states in all subsequent editions (2nd, 1886, p. 58; 3rd, 1898, p. 58; 4th, 1909, p. 63) that "The main reason for the sound change in the transmission of sounds to new individuals lies," while noting that changes within the same generation are very slight. In this way, Paul changed his perspective in the opposite direction of Sweet[32]—and did so influenced by Sweet's criticism of his initial view!
When one finds scholars expressing themselves in this manner and giving hardly any reasons for their views, one is tempted to believe that the question is perhaps insoluble, that it is a mere toss-up, or that in the sentence “children’s imitation is nearly perfect” the stress may be laid, according to taste, now on the word nearly, and now on the word perfect. I am, however, convinced that we can get a little farther, though only by breaking up the question, instead of treating it as one vague and indeterminate whole.
When you see scholars expressing themselves like this and providing almost no reasons for their opinions, it’s easy to think that the issue might be unsolvable, that it’s just a toss-up, or that in the statement “children’s imitation is nearly perfect,” the emphasis could be placed, depending on personal preference, either on the word nearly or on the word perfect. However, I believe we can make some progress, but only by breaking the issue down instead of viewing it as one unclear and undefined concept.
IX.—§ 2. Meringer. Analogy.
Among recent writers Meringer has gone furthest into the question, adhering in the main to the general view that, just as in other fields, social, economic, etc., it is grown-up men who take the lead in new developments, so it is grown-up men, and not women or children, who carry things forward in the field of[163] language. In one place he justifies his standpoint by a reference to a special case, and I will take this as the starting-point of my own consideration of the question. He says: “It can be shown by various examples that they [changes in language] are decidedly not due to children. In Ionic, Attic and Lesbian Greek the words for ‘hundreds’ are formed in -kosioi (diakósioi, etc.), while elsewhere (in Doric and Bœotian) they appear as -kátioi. How does the o arise in -kósioi? It is generally said that it comes from o in the ‘tens’ in the termination -konta. Can it be children who have formed the words for hundreds on the model of the words for tens, children under six years old, who are just learning to talk? Such children generally have other things to attend to than to practise themselves in numerals above a hundred.” Similar formations are adduced from Latin, and it is stated that the personal pronouns are especially subject to change, but children do not use the personal pronouns till an age when they are already in firm possession of the language. Meringer then draws the conclusion that the share which children take in bringing about linguistic change is a very small one.
Among recent writers, Meringer has explored the topic the most, mainly maintaining the view that, similar to other areas like social and economic fields, it’s adult men who lead in new developments. He argues that it’s adults, not women or children, who drive progress in the field of [163] language. He provides justification for his perspective using a specific example, which I will use as the basis for my own examination of the issue. He states: “It can be shown by various examples that changes in language are definitely not caused by children. In Ionic, Attic, and Lesbian Greek, the words for ‘hundreds’ are formed as -kosioi (diakósioi, etc.), while in other dialects (like Doric and Bœotian) they appear as -kátioi. How does the o come about in -kósioi? It is generally believed to derive from the o in the ‘tens’ in the suffix -konta. Can it be children who created the words for hundreds based on the words for tens, particularly children under six who are just starting to speak? Such young children usually have other things to focus on rather than practicing numerals over a hundred.” Similar examples are drawn from Latin, noting that personal pronouns are especially prone to change, but children don't use personal pronouns until they are at an age when they already have a solid grasp of the language. Meringer then concludes that the role children play in linguistic change is very minimal.
Now, I should like first to remark that even if it is possible to point to certain changes in language which cannot be ascribed to little children, this proves nothing with regard to the very numerous changes which lie outside these limits. And next, that all the cases here mentioned are examples of formation by analogy. But from the very nature of the case, the conditions requisite for the occurrence of such formations are exactly the same in the case of adults and in that of the children. For what are the conditions? Some one feels an impulse to express something, and at the moment has not got the traditional form at command, and so is driven to evolve a form of his own from the rest of the linguistic material. It makes no difference whether he has never heard a form used by other people which expresses what he wants, or whether he has heard the traditional form, but has not got it ready at hand at the moment. The method of procedure is exactly the same whether it takes place in a three-year-old or in an eighty-three-year-old brain: it is therefore senseless to put the question whether formations by analogy are or are not due to children. A formation by analogy is by definition a non-traditional form. It is therefore idle to ask if it is due to the fact that the language is transmitted from generation to generation and to the child’s imperfect repetition of what has been transmitted to it, and Meringer’s argument thus breaks down in every respect.
Now, I want to start by saying that even though you can identify certain changes in language that aren’t caused by little kids, this doesn’t mean anything regarding the many changes that happen outside of that scope. Also, all the examples mentioned here show how formation occurs through analogy. The conditions needed for these formations to happen are exactly the same for both adults and children. So what are those conditions? Someone feels the urge to express something but doesn't have the traditional phrase at hand, which makes them create their own form from the available language. It doesn’t matter if they’ve never heard a phrase that conveys their meaning or if they’ve heard the traditional phrase but can’t recall it in that moment. The process is the same whether it’s happening in a three-year-old or an eighty-three-year-old brain: so it’s pointless to question whether analogy-based formations are due to children. An analogy formation is, by definition, a non-traditional form. Therefore, it’s useless to ask if it’s because language is passed down through generations, leading to the child’s imperfect imitation of what has been taught, which means Meringer’s argument fails in every way.
It must not, of course, be overlooked that children naturally come to invent more formations by analogy than grown-up people,[164] because the latter in many cases have heard the older forms so often that they find a place in their speech without any effort being required to recall them. But that does not touch the problem under discussion; besides, formations by analogy are unavoidable and indispensable, in the talk of all, even of the most ‘grown-up’: one cannot, indeed, move in language without having recourse to forms and constructions that are not directly and fully transmitted to us: speech is not alone reproduction, but just as much new-production, because no situation and no impulse to communication is in every detail exactly the same as what has occurred on earlier occasions.
It's important to recognize that children naturally create more language forms by analogy than adults do,[164] because adults often rely on familiar expressions they've heard countless times, making it easy to include them in their speech without needing to consciously remember them. However, this doesn't solve the issue at hand; moreover, creating forms by analogy is essential and unavoidable in communication for everyone, even the most ‘grown-up’ individuals. Language involves not just repeating what we've learned, but also producing new expressions, since no situation or impulse to communicate is ever exactly the same as previous ones.
IX.—§ 3. Herzog’s Theory of Sound Changes.
If, leaving the field of analogical changes, we begin to inquire whether the purely phonetic changes can or must be ascribed to the fact that a new generation has to learn the mother-tongue by imitation, we shall first have to examine an interesting theory in which the question is answered in the affirmative, at least with regard to those phonetic changes which are gradual and not brought about all at once; thus, when in one particular language one vowel, say [e·], is pronounced more and more closely till finally it becomes [i·], as has happened in E. see, formerly pronounced [se·] with the same vowel as in G. see, now [si·]. E. Herzog maintains that such changes happen through transference to new generations, even granted that the children imitate the sound of the grown-up people perfectly. For, it is said, children with their little mouths cannot produce acoustically the same sound as adults, except by a different position of the speech-organs; this position they keep for the rest of their lives, so that when they are grown-up and their mouth is of full size they produce a rather different sound from that previously heard—which altered sound is again imitated by the next generation with yet another position of the organs, and so on. This continuous play of generation v. generation may be illustrated in this way:
If we move away from analogical changes and start to explore whether purely phonetic changes can or should be attributed to the fact that a new generation has to learn their mother tongue through imitation, we will first need to look at an intriguing theory that answers this question affirmatively, at least concerning those phonetic changes that are gradual and not sudden. For example, in a specific language, one vowel, like [e·], is pronounced more and more closely until it eventually becomes [i·], similar to what has occurred in English see, which was formerly pronounced [se·] with the same vowel as in German see, now [si·]. E. Herzog argues that these changes happen through transmission to new generations, even if children perfectly imitate the sounds of adults. This is because, it is said, children with their small mouths cannot produce the exact same sounds as adults, except by adjusting their speech organs in different ways; they maintain this position throughout their lives, so when they grow up and their mouths are fully developed, they produce a somewhat different sound than what was previously heard. This altered sound is then imitated by the next generation using yet another position of their organs, and so on. This ongoing cycle of generation v. generation can be illustrated like this:
Articulation | corresponding to | Sound. | ||
1st generation | young | A1 | ... | S1 |
old | A1 | ... | S2 | |
2nd generation | young | A2 | ... | S2 |
old | A2 | ... | S3 | |
3rd generation | young | A3 | ... | S3 |
old | A3 | ... | S4, etc.[33] |
It is, however, easy to prove that this theory cannot be correct. (1) It is quite certain that the increase in size of the mouth is far less important than is generally supposed (see my Fonetik, p. 379 ff., PhG, p. 80 ff.; cf. above, V § 1). (2) It cannot be proved that people, after once learning one definite way of producing a sound, go on producing it in exactly the same way, even if the acoustic result is a different one. It is much more probable that each individual is constantly adapting himself to the sounds heard from those around him, even if this adaptation is neither as quick nor perhaps as perfect as that of children, who can very rapidly accommodate their speech to the dialect of new surroundings: if very far-reaching changes are rare in the case of grown-up people, this proves nothing against such small adaptations as are here presupposed. In favour of the continual regulation of the sound through the ear may be adduced the fact that adults who become perfectly deaf and thus lose the control of sounds through hearing may come to speak in such a way that their words can hardly be understood by others. (3) The theory in question also views the relations between successive generations in a way that is far removed from the realities of life: from the wording one might easily imagine that there were living together at any given time only individuals of ages separated by, say, thirty years’ distance, while the truth of the matter is that a child is normally surrounded by people of all ages and learns its language more or less from all of them, from Grannie down to little Dick from over the way, and that (as has already been remarked) its chief teachers are its own brothers and sisters and other playmates of about the same age as itself. If the theory were correct, there would at any rate be a marked difference in vowel-sounds between anyone and his grandfather, or, still more, great-grandfather: but nothing of the kind has ever been described. (4) The chief argument, however, against the theory is this, that were it true, then all shiftings of sounds at all times and in all languages would proceed in exactly the same direction. But this is emphatically contradicted by the history of language. The long a in English in one period was rounded and raised into o, as in OE. stan, na, ham, which have become stone, no, home; but when a few centuries later new long a’s had entered the language, they followed the opposite direction towards e, now [ei], as in name, male, take. Similarly in Danish, where an old stratum of long a’s have become å, as in ål, gås, while a later stratum tends rather towards [æ], as in the present pronunciation of gade, hale, etc. At the same time the long a in Swedish tends towards the rounded pronunciation (cf. Fr. âme, pas): in one sister language we thus witness a repetition of the old shifting, in the other a[166] tendency in the opposite direction. And it is the same with all those languages which we can pursue far enough back: they all present the same picture of varying vowel shiftings in different directions, which is totally incompatible with Herzog’s view.
It’s easy to show that this theory can’t be correct. (1) It’s pretty clear that the increase in mouth size is much less significant than most people think (see my Fonetik, p. 379 ff., PhG, p. 80 ff.; cf. above, V § 1). (2) There’s no proof that once people learn one specific way to produce a sound, they consistently produce it in the exact same way, even if the acoustic result is different. It’s way more likely that each person constantly adapts to the sounds they hear from those around them, even though this adaptation might not be as quick or perfect as that of children, who can easily adjust their speech to a new dialect: while major changes are rare in adults, that doesn’t mean small adaptations, like the ones assumed here, don’t occur. Supporting the idea of constant sound regulation through hearing is the fact that adults who become completely deaf and lose the ability to hear sounds can end up speaking in a way that's barely understandable to others. (3) The theory also misunderstands the relationships between successive generations: from the wording, one might think that at any given time, only individuals of ages separated by about thirty years coexist, but the reality is that a child typically interacts with people of all ages and learns language from all of them, from Grandmother to little Dick next door, and (as mentioned earlier) its main teachers are its own brothers and sisters and playmates of similar ages. If the theory were correct, you would definitely notice a significant difference in vowel sounds between someone and their grandfather, or even more so, their great-grandfather: but nothing like that has ever been reported. (4) The strongest argument against the theory is that if it were true, then all changes in sounds at all times and in all languages would move in exactly the same direction. But this is clearly contradicted by the history of language. In one period of English, the long a was rounded and raised into o, as in OE. stan, na, ham, which became stone, no, home; but a few centuries later, when new long a’s entered the language, they shifted in the opposite direction towards e, now [ei], as seen in name, male, take. Similarly, in Danish, where an older layer of long a’s became å, as in ål, gås, while a later layer tends towards [æ], as in the current pronunciation of gade, hale, etc. Meanwhile, the long a in Swedish tends towards a rounded pronunciation (see Fr. âme, pas): in one sister language, we see a repeat of the old shifting, while in the other a[166] tendency in the opposite direction. The same applies to all languages we can trace back far enough: they all show a similar pattern of varying vowel shifts in different directions, which is completely incompatible with Herzog’s view.
IX.—§ 4. Gradual Shiftings.
We shall do well to put aside such artificial theories and look soberly at the facts. When some sounds in one century go one way, and in another, another, while at times they remain long unchanged, it all rests on this, that for human habits of this sort there is no standard measure. Set a man to saw a hundred logs, measuring No. 2 by No. 1, No. 3 by No. 2, and so on, and you will see considerable deviations from the original measure—perhaps all going in the same direction, so that No. 100 is very much longer than No. 1 as the result of the sum of a great many small deviations—perhaps all going in the opposite direction; but it is also possible that in a certain series he was inclined to make the logs too long, and in the next series too short, the two sets of deviations about balancing one another.
We should set aside these artificial theories and look seriously at the facts. When some sounds change direction in one century and go another way in another while sometimes staying the same for a long time, it all comes down to the fact that there’s no standard measure for human habits like this. If you have a person saw a hundred logs, measuring Log No. 2 by Log No. 1, Log No. 3 by Log No. 2, and so on, you’ll notice significant deviations from the original measure—maybe all in the same direction, so that Log No. 100 ends up much longer than Log No. 1 due to a lot of small deviations adding up—or maybe all in the opposite direction. It’s also possible that in one series they tended to make the logs too long, and in the next series too short, with the two sets of deviations roughly balancing each other out.
It is much the same with the formation of speech sounds: at one moment, for some reason or other, in a particular mood, in order to lend authority or distinction to our words, we may happen to lower the jaw a little more, or to thrust the tongue a little more forward than usual, or inversely, under the influence of fatigue or laziness, or to sneer at someone else, or because we have a cigar or potato in our mouth, the movements of the jaw or of the tongue may fall short of what they usually are. We have all the while a sort of conception of an average pronunciation, of a normal degree of opening or of protrusion, which we aim at, but it is nothing very fixed, and the only measure at our disposal is that we are or are not understood. What is understood is all right: what does not meet this requirement must be repeated with greater correctness as an answer to ‘I beg your pardon?’
It's pretty much the same with how we make speech sounds: sometimes, for various reasons, depending on our mood, to sound more authoritative or distinguished, we might drop our jaw a bit more or push our tongue forward a little more than usual. On the flip side, when we're tired, lazy, sneering at someone, or have something like a cigar or a potato in our mouth, our jaw and tongue movements might not be as they usually are. We always have a sort of idea of what average pronunciation sounds like, a normal level of jaw opening or tongue extension that we aim for, but it’s not very fixed. The only real measure we have is whether or not people understand us. If they do, then we're good; if not, we have to repeat ourselves more clearly in response to "I beg your pardon?"
Everyone thinks that he talks to-day just as he did yesterday, and, of course, he does so in nearly every point. But no one knows if he pronounces his mother-tongue in every respect in the same manner as he did twenty years ago. May we not suppose that what happens with faces happens here also? One lives with a friend day in and day out, and he appears to be just what he was years ago, but someone who returns home after a long absence is at once struck by the changes which have gradually accumulated in the interval.
Everyone believes that he speaks today just as he did yesterday, and, of course, he does in almost every way. But no one knows if he pronounces his native language in every way the same as he did twenty years ago. Can we not assume that what happens with faces happens here too? You spend time with a friend every day, and he seems like the same person he was years ago, but someone who comes back home after a long time immediately notices the changes that have gradually built up during that period.
Changes in the sounds of a language are not, indeed, so rapid as those in the appearance of an individual, for the simple reason that it is not enough for one man to alter his pronunciation,[167] many must co-operate: the social nature and social aim of language has the natural consequence that all must combine in the same movement, or else one neutralizes the changes introduced by the other; each individual also is continually under the influence of his fellows, and involuntarily fashions his pronunciation according to the impression he is constantly receiving of other people’s sounds. But as regards those little gradual shiftings of sounds which take place in spite of all this control and its conservative influence, changes in which the sound and the articulation alter simultaneously, I cannot see that the transmission of the language to a new generation need exert any essential influence: we may imagine them being brought about equally well in a society which for hundreds of years consisted of the same adults who never died and had no issue.
Changes in the sounds of a language aren't as quick as changes in a person's appearance, mainly because it's not just one person who can change how they speak; many people have to work together. Language is social, so everyone needs to be on the same page, or the changes one person makes will just be canceled out by someone else. Each person is also constantly influenced by those around them and naturally adjusts their pronunciation based on what they hear from others. However, regarding those gradual shifts in sound that happen despite this influence and control, where sound and articulation change at the same time, I don't think passing the language down to a new generation has a major effect. We can imagine these changes happening just as easily in a society where the same adults lived for hundreds of years without dying and had no children.
IX.—§ 5. Leaps.
While in the shiftings mentioned in the last paragraphs articulation and acoustic impression went side by side, it is different with some shiftings in which the old sound and the new resemble one another to the ear, but differ in the position of the organs and the articulations. For instance, when [þ] as in E. thick becomes [f] and [ð] as in E. mother becomes [v], one can hardly conceive the change taking place in the pronunciation of people who have learnt the right sound as children. It is very natural, on the other hand, that children should imitate the harder sound by giving the easier, which is very like it, and which they have to use in many other words: forms like fru for through, wiv, muvver for with, mother, are frequent in the mouths of children long before they begin to make their appearance in the speech of adults, where they are now beginning to be very frequent in the Cockney dialect. (Cf. MEG i. 13. 9.) The same transition is met with in Old Fr., where we have muef from modu, nif from nidu, fief from feodu, seif, now soif, from site, estrif (E. strife) from stridh, glaive from gladiu, parvis from paradis, and possibly avoutre from adulteru, poveir, now pouvoir, from potere. In Old Gothonic we have the transition from þ to f before l, as in Goth. þlaqus = MHG. vlach, Goth. þlaihan = OHG. flêhan, þliuhan = OHG. fliohan; cf. also E. file, G. feile = ON. þēl, OE. þengel and fengel ‘prince,’ and probably G. finster, cf. OHG. dinstar (with d from þ), OE. þeostre. In Latin we have the same transition, e.g. in fumus, corresponding to Sansk. dhumás, Gr. thumós.[34]
While in the shifts mentioned in the previous paragraphs, articulation and sound impressions occurred together, there are other shifts where the old and new sounds are similar to the ear but differ in how the speech organs are positioned and how they articulate. For example, when [þ], as in English thick, changes to [f], and [ð], as in English mother, changes to [v], it's hard to imagine the changes happening in the pronunciation of people who learned the correct sounds as children. It's quite natural, however, for children to mimic the harder sounds by producing the easier ones, which are very similar and which they use in many other words: forms like fru for through, wiv, and muvver for with and mother are commonly heard from children long before they start appearing in adult speech, where they're now increasingly found in the Cockney dialect. (See MEG i. 13. 9.) The same transition is seen in Old French, where we have muef from modu, nif from nidu, fief from feodu, seif, now soif, from site, estrif (English strife) from stridh, glaive from gladiu, parvis from paradis, and possibly avoutre from adulteru, poveir, now pouvoir, from potere. In Old Gothic, we see the shift from þ to f before l, as in Gothic þlaqus = Middle High German vlach, Gothic þlaihan = Old High German flêhan, þliuhan = Old High German fliohan; also note English file, German feile = Old Norse þēl, Old English þengel and fengel meaning ‘prince,’ and probably German finster, compare Old High German dinstar (with d from þ), Old English þeostre. In Latin, we find the same shift, for example, in fumus, which corresponds to Sanskrit dhumás, Greek thumós.[34]
The change from the back-open consonant [x]—the sound in G. buch and Scotch loch—to f, which has taken place in enough, cough, etc., is of the same kind. Here clearly we have no gradual passage, but a jump, which could hardly take place in the case of those who had already learnt how to pronounce the back sound, but is easily conceivable as a case of defective imitation on the part of a new generation. I suppose that the same remark holds good with regard to the change from kw to p, which is found in some languages, for instance, Gr. hippos, corresponding to Lat. equus, Gr. hepomai = Lat. sequor, hêpar = Lat. jecur; Rumanian apa from Lat. aqua, Welsh map, ‘son’ = Gaelic mac, pedwar = Ir. cathir, ‘four,’ etc. In France I have heard children say [pizin] and [pidin] for cuisine.
The shift from the back-open consonant [x]—the sound in G. buch and Scotch loch—to f, which has happened in enough, cough, etc., is similar. Here, it's clear we don’t have a gradual transition, but rather a jump, which would be hard for those who have already learned to pronounce the back sound, but is easily understandable as a case of imperfect imitation by a new generation. I think the same observation applies to the change from kw to p, seen in some languages, for example, Gr. hippos, which corresponds to Lat. equus, Gr. hepomai = Lat. sequor, hêpar = Lat. jecur; Rumanian apa from Lat. aqua, Welsh map, ‘son’ = Gaelic mac, pedwar = Ir. cathir, ‘four,’ etc. In France, I’ve heard kids say [pizin] and [pidin] for cuisine.
IX.—§ 6. Assimilations, etc.
There is an important class of sound changes which have this in common with the class just treated, that the changes take place suddenly, without an intermediate stage being possible, as in the changes considered in IX § 4. I refer to those cases of assimilation, loss of consonants in heavy groups and transposition (metathesis), with which students of language are familiar in all languages. Instances abound in the speech of all children; see above, V § 4.
There’s a key group of sound changes that share a similarity with the previously discussed changes: they occur suddenly, without any gradual transition, like the changes looked at in IX § 4. I’m talking about instances of assimilation, the dropping of consonants in complex clusters, and transposition (metathesis), which anyone studying languages will recognize across all languages. You can find plenty of examples in the speech of children; refer to V § 4.
If now we dared to assert that such pronunciations are never heard from people who have passed their babyhood, we should here have found a field in which children have exercised a great influence on the development of language: but of course we cannot say anything of the sort. Any attentive observer can testify to the frequency of such mispronunciations in the speech of grown-up people. In many cases they are noticed neither by the speaker nor by the hearer, in many they may be noticed, but are considered too unimportant to be corrected, and finally, in some cases the speaker stops to repeat what he wanted to say in a corrected form. Now it would not obviously do, from their frequency in adult speech, to draw the inference: “These changes are not to be ascribed to children,” because from their frequent appearance on the lips of the children one could equally well infer: “They are not to be ascribed to grown-up people.” When we find in Latin impotens and immeritus with m side by side with indignus and insolitus with n, or when English handkerchief is pronounced with [ŋk] instead of the original [ndk], the change is not to be charged against children or grown-up people exclusively, but against both parties together: and so when t is lost in waistcoat [weskət], or postman or castle, or k in asked. There[169] is certainly this difference, that when the change is made by older people, we get in the speech of the same individual first the heavier and then the easier form, while the child may take up the easier pronunciation first, because it hears the [n] before a lip consonant as [m], and before a back consonant as [ŋ], or because it fails altogether to hear the middle consonant in waistcoat, postman, castle and asked. But all this is clearly of purely theoretical interest, and the result remains that the influence of the two classes, adults and children, cannot possibly be separated in this domain.[35]
If we dared to claim that such mispronunciations are never heard from people past their childhood, we would have found a way in which children significantly influence language development. However, we can't make such a claim. Any observant person can confirm how often these mispronunciations occur in adults' speech. In many instances, neither the speaker nor the listener notices them; in some cases, they are noticed but deemed too minor to correct, and occasionally, the speaker will pause to restate what they meant in the correct form. It would clearly be wrong to conclude from their prevalence in adult speech that “these changes can't be attributed to children,” since it’s just as valid to infer from children's frequent usage: “these changes can't be attributed to adults.” For example, in Latin, we see impotens and immeritus with m alongside indignus and insolitus with n. Similarly, in English, handkerchief might be pronounced as [ŋk] instead of its original [ndk]. These changes shouldn't be blamed solely on children or adults; they result from influences on both groups. This applies when we lose the t in waistcoat [weskət], postman, or castle, or the k in asked. There’s certainly a distinction: when adults make the change, a single speaker tends to first use the heavier form and then the easier one, while a child may adopt the easier pronunciation first because they hear the [n] before a lip consonant as [m] and before a back consonant as [ŋ], or because they may not hear the middle consonant in waistcoat, postman, castle, and asked. However, this is mainly of theoretical interest, and the conclusion remains that the influence of both adults and children in this area cannot be separated.
IX.—§ 7. Stump-words.
Next we come to those changes which result in what one may call ‘stump-words.’ There is no doubt that words may undergo violent shortenings both by children and adults, but here I believe we can more or less definitely distinguish between their respective contributions to the development of language. If it is the end of the word that is kept, while the beginning is dropped, it is probable that the mutilation is due to children, who, as we have seen (VII § 7), echo the conclusion of what is said to them and forget the beginning or fail altogether to apprehend it. So we get a number of mutilated Christian names, which can then be used by grown-up people as pet-names. Examples are Bert for Herbert or Albert, Bella for Arabella, Sander for Alexander, Lottie for Charlotte, Trix for Beatrix, and with childlike sound-substitution Bess (and Bet, Betty) for Elizabeth. Similarly in other languages, from Danish I may mention Bine for Jakobine, Line for Karoline, Stine for Kristine, Dres for Andres: there are many others.
Next, let's discuss the changes that lead to what we might call 'stump-words.' It's clear that both children and adults can significantly shorten words, but I think we can fairly distinguish between their different impacts on language development. If the end of the word is preserved while the beginning is dropped, it's likely that this shortening is due to children, who, as we've seen (VII § 7), repeat the latter part of what they hear while forgetting the beginning or not fully grasping it. This results in a number of shortened Christian names that adults can then use as nicknames. For instance, we have Bert for Herbert or Albert, Bella for Arabella, Sander for Alexander, Lottie for Charlotte, Trix for Beatrix, and, with a childlike twist in sound, Bess (and Bet, Betty) for Elizabeth. Similarly, in other languages, from Danish, we can mention Bine for Jakobine, Line for Karoline, Stine for Kristine, Dres for Andres: there are many more.
If this way of shortening a word is natural to a child who hears the word for the first time and is not able to remember the beginning when he comes to the end of it, it is quite different when others clip words which they know perfectly well: they will naturally keep the beginning and stop before they are half through the word, as soon as they are sure that their hearers understand what is alluded to. Dr. Johnson was not the only one who “had a way of contracting the names of his friends, as Beauclerc, Beau; Boswell, Bozzy; Langton, Lanky; Murphy, Mur; Sheridan, Sherry; and Goldsmith, Goldy, which Gold[170]smith resented” (Boswell, Life, ed. P. Fitzgerald, 1900, i. 486). Thackeray constantly says Pen for Arthur Pendennis, Cos for Costigan, Fo for Foker, Pop for Popjoy, old Col for Colchicum. In the beginning of the last century Napoleon Bonaparte was generally called Nap or Boney; later we have such shortened names of public characters as Dizzy for Disraeli, Pam for Palmerston, Labby for Labouchere, etc. These evidently are due to adults, and so are a great many other clippings, some of which have completely ousted the original long words, such as mob for mobile, brig for brigantine, fad for fadaise, cab for cabriolet, navvy for navigator, while others are still felt as abbreviations, such as photo for photograph, pub for public-house, caps for capital letters, spec for speculation, sov for sovereign, zep for Zeppelin, divvy for dividend, hip for hypochondria, the Cri and the Pavvy for the Criterion and the Pavilion, and many other clippings of words which are evidently far above the level of very small children. The same is true of the abbreviations in which school and college slang abounds, words like Gym(nastics), undergrad(uate), trig(onometry), lab(oratory), matric(ulation), prep(aration), the Guv for the governor, etc. The same remark is true of similar clippings in other languages, such as kilo for kilogram, G. ober for oberkellner, French aristo(crate), réac(tionnaire), college terms like desse for descriptive (géométrie d.), philo for philosophie, preu for premier, seu for second; Danish numerals like tres for tresindstyve (60), halvfjerds(indstyve), firs(indstyve). We are certainly justified in extending the principle that abbreviation through throwing away the end of the word is due to those who have previously mastered the full form, to the numerous instances of shortened Christian names like Fred for Frederick, Em for Emily, Alec for Alexander, Di for Diana, Vic for Victoria, etc. In other languages we find similar clippings of names more or less carried through systematically, e.g. Greek Zeuxis for Zeuxippos, Old High German Wolfo for Wolfbrand, Wolfgang, etc., Icelandic Sigga for Sigríðr, Siggi for Sigurðr, etc.
If a child naturally shortens a word they hear for the first time because they can’t remember the beginning by the time they get to the end, it’s a different story when others abbreviate words they already know. They’ll likely keep the beginning and stop before they’re halfway through, as soon as they’re sure their listeners understand what they mean. Dr. Johnson wasn’t the only one who had a habit of shortening his friends' names, calling Beauclerc, Beau; Boswell, Bozzy; Langton, Lanky; Murphy, Mur; Sheridan, Sherry; and Goldsmith, Goldy, a nickname that Goldsmith didn’t appreciate (Boswell, Life, ed. P. Fitzgerald, 1900, i. 486). Thackeray frequently calls Arthur Pendennis Pen, Costigan Cos, Foker Fo, Popjoy Pop, and Colchicum old Col. At the start of the last century, Napoleon Bonaparte was typically referred to as Nap or Boney; later, we saw shortened names for public figures like Dizzy for Disraeli, Pam for Palmerston, Labby for Labouchere, etc. These nicknames clearly come from adults, just like many other abbreviations, some of which have completely replaced the original longer terms, such as mob for mobile, brig for brigantine, fad for fadaise, cab for cabriolet, and navvy for navigator, while others still feel like abbreviations, such as photo for photograph, pub for public house, caps for capital letters, spec for speculation, sov for sovereign, zep for Zeppelin, divvy for dividend, hip for hypochondria, the Cri and the Pavvy for the Criterion and the Pavilion, along with many more shortened words that are clearly above the level of very small children. The same applies to slang in schools and colleges, with terms like Gym (for gymnastics), undergrad (for undergraduate), trig (for trigonometry), lab (for laboratory), matric (for matriculation), and the Guv for the governor, etc. The same observation holds true for similar abbreviations in other languages, such as kilo for kilogram, G. ober for oberkellner, French elite(crate), reactionary, college terms like desse for descriptive (geometry), philo for philosophy, preu for premier, seu for second; Danish numerals like tres for tresindstyve (60), seventies(stocks), firs. We’re definitely justified in applying the idea that abbreviating by dropping the end of the word is something done by those who have already mastered its full form, to the many cases of shortened first names like Fred for Frederick, Em for Emily, Alec for Alexander, Di for Diana, Vic for Victoria, etc. Other languages show similar systematic clippings of names, like Greek Zeuxis for Zeuxippos, Old High German Wolfo for Wolfbrand, Wolfgang, etc., and Icelandic Sigga for Sigríðr, Siggi for Sigurðr, etc.
I see a corroboration of my theory in the fact that there are hardly any family names shortened by throwing away the beginning: children as a rule have no use for family names.[36] The rule, however, is not laid down as absolute, but only as holding in the main. Some of the exceptions are easily accounted for. ’Cello for violoncello undoubtedly is an adults’ word, originating[171] in France or Italy: but here evidently it would not do to take the beginning, for then there would be confusion with violin (violon). Phone for telephone: the beginning might just as well stand for telegraph. Van for caravan: here the beginning would be identical with car. Bus, which made its appearance immediately after the first omnibus was started in the streets of London (1829), probably was thought expressive of the sound of these vehicles and suggested bustle. But bacco (baccer, baccy) for tobacco and taters for potatoes belong to a different sphere altogether: they are not clippings of the usual sort, but purely phonetic developments, in which the first vowel has been dropped in rapid pronunciation (as in I s’pose), and the initial voiceless stop has then become inaudible; Dickens similarly writes ’tickerlerly as a vulgar pronunciation of particularly.[37]
I see support for my theory in the fact that there are hardly any family names shortened by dropping the beginning: kids generally don’t use family names.[36] However, this rule isn’t absolute, but mostly holds true. Some exceptions make sense. ’Cello for violoncello is definitely an adult term, coming from France or Italy: in this case, it wouldn’t work to drop the beginning, as it would confuse it with violin (violon). Phone for telephone: the start could also refer to telegraph. Van for caravan: here, the start would be the same as car. Bus, which appeared right after the first omnibus started running in the streets of London (1829), likely sounded like the noise of these vehicles and suggested bustle. But bacco (baccer, baccy) for tobacco and taters for potatoes belong to a different category: they aren’t typical shortenings, but purely phonetic variations, where the first vowel gets dropped in quick speech (like in I s’pose), and the initial voiceless stop becomes inaudible; Dickens similarly writes ’tickerlerly as a slangy way of saying particularly.[37]
§ 1. Confusion of Words. § 2. Metanalysis. § 3. Shiftings of Meanings. § 4. Differentiations. § 5. Summary. § 6. Indirect Influence. § 7. New Languages.
§ 1. Confusion of Words. § 2. Metanalysis. § 3. Changes in Meanings. § 4. Differentiations. § 5. Summary. § 6. Indirect Influence. § 7. New Languages.
X.—§ 1. Confusion of Words.
Some of the most typical childish sound-substitutions can hardly be supposed to leave any traces in language as permanently spoken, because they are always thoroughly corrected by the children themselves at an early age; among these I reckon the almost universal pronunciation of t instead of k. When, therefore, we do find that in some words a t has taken the place of an earlier k, we must look for some more specific cause of the change: but this may, in some cases at any rate, be found in a tendency of children’s speech which is totally independent of the inability to pronounce the sound of k at an early age, and is, indeed, in no way to be reckoned among phonetic tendencies, namely, the confusion resulting from an association of two words of similar sound (cf. above, p. 122). This, I take it, is the explanation of the word mate in the sense ‘husband or wife,’ which has replaced the earlier make: a confusion was here natural, because the word mate, ‘companion,’ was similar not only in sound, but also in signification. The older name for the ‘soft roe’ of fishes was milk (as Dan. mælk, G. milch), but from the fifteenth century milt has been substituted for it, as if it were the same organ as the milt, ‘the spleen.’ Children will associate words of similar sound even in cases where there is no connecting link in their significations; thus we have bat for earlier bak, bakke (the animal, vespertilio), though the other word bat, ‘a stick,’ is far removed in sense.
Some of the most typical childlike sound substitutions rarely leave lasting marks on spoken language because kids usually correct themselves early on. One example is the almost universal tendency to pronounce t instead of k. So, when we notice that in some words a t has replaced an earlier k, we need to find a more specific reason for the change. In some cases, this can be traced back to a pattern in children's speech that isn't tied to their difficulty pronouncing k at a young age. It's more about confusion stemming from similarities in the sounds of two words. For example, the word mate, meaning ‘husband or wife,’ has replaced the older word make: this mix-up makes sense because mate, meaning ‘companion,’ is similar in both sound and meaning. The older term for the ‘soft roe’ of fish was milk (like Dan. mælk, G. milch), but since the fifteenth century, milt has been used instead, as if it were the same organ as the milt, ‘the spleen.’ Kids will link words with similar sounds even when their meanings are unrelated, which is why we see bat taking the place of earlier bak or bakke (the animal, vespertilio), even though the other word bat, meaning ‘a stick,’ is quite different in meaning.
I think we must explain the following cases of isolated sound-substitution as due to the same confusion with unconnected words in the minds of children hearing the new words for the first time: trunk in the sense of ‘proboscis of an elephant,’ formerly trump, from Fr. trompe, confused with trunk, ‘stem of a tree’; stark-naked, formerly start-naked, from start, ‘tail,’ confused with stark, ‘stiff’; vent, ‘air-hole,’ from Fr. fente, confused with vent,[173] ‘breath’ (for this v cannot be due to the Southern dialectal transition from f, as in vat from fat, for that transition does not, as a rule, take place in French loans); cocoa for cacao, confused with coconut; match, from Fr. mèche, by confusion with the other match; chine, ‘rim of cask,’ from chime, cf. G. kimme, ‘border,’ confused with chine, ‘backbone.’ I give some of these examples with a little diffidence, though I have no doubt of the general principle of childish confusion of unrelated words as one of the sources of irregularities in the development of sounds.
I think we should explain the following examples of isolated sound substitution as arising from the same confusion with unrelated words in the minds of children hearing the new words for the first time: trunk meaning ‘the trunk of an elephant,’ which was previously trump, from Fr. trompe, mixed up with trunk, meaning ‘stem of a tree’; stark-naked, which used to be start-naked, from start, meaning ‘tail,’ confused with stark, meaning ‘stiff’; vent, ‘air-hole,’ from Fr. fente, confused with vent,[173] ‘breath’ (since this v can't be attributed to the Southern dialectal shift from f, like vat from fat, because that shift doesn't usually occur in French loanwords); cocoa for cacao, confused with coconut; match, from Fr. mèche, mixed up with the other match; chine, meaning ‘rim of cask,’ from chime, cf. G. kimme, meaning ‘border,’ confused with chine, meaning ‘backbone.’ I present some of these examples with a bit of hesitation, though I’m confident in the general idea that children’s confusion of unrelated words is one of the sources of irregularities in the evolution of sounds.
These substitutions cannot of course be separated from instances of ‘popular etymology,’ as when the phrase to curry favour was substituted for the former to curry favel, where favel means ‘a fallow horse,’ as the type of fraud or duplicity (cf. G. den fahlen hengst reiten, ‘to act deceitfully,’ einen auf einem fahlen pferde ertappen, ‘to catch someone lying’).
These substitutions can’t really be separated from examples of ‘popular etymology,’ like when the phrase to curry favour replaced the earlier to curry favel, where favel means ‘a fallow horse,’ symbolizing fraud or deceit (cf. G. den fahlen hengst reiten, ‘to act deceitfully,’ einen auf einem fahlen pferde ertappen, ‘to catch someone lying’).
X.—§ 2. Metanalysis.
We now come to the phenomenon for which I have ventured to coin the term ‘metanalysis,’ by which I mean that words or word-groups are by a new generation analyzed differently from the analysis of a former age. Each child has to find out for himself, in hearing the connected speech of other people, where one word ends and the next one begins, or what belongs to the kernel and what to the ending of a word, etc. (VII § 6). In most cases he will arrive at the same analysis as the former generation, but now and then he will put the boundaries in another place than formerly, and the new analysis may become general. A naddre (the ME. form for OE. an nædre) thus became an adder, a napron became an apron, an nauger: an auger, a numpire: an umpire; and in psychologically the same way an ewte (older form evete, OE. efete) became a newt: metanalysis accordingly sometimes shortens and sometimes lengthens a word. Riding as a name of one of the three districts of Yorkshire is due to a metanalysis of North Thriding (ON. þriðjungr, ‘third part’), as well as of East Thriding, West Thriding, after the sound of th had been assimilated to the preceding t.
We now come to the phenomenon that I’ve decided to call ‘metanalysis,’ which means that new generations analyze words or phrases differently than previous generations did. Each child has to figure out for themselves, by listening to how other people speak, where one word ends and the next begins, or what’s part of the main word and what’s an ending, etc. (VII § 6). In most cases, they will come to the same conclusions as the previous generation, but occasionally they will draw boundaries differently than before, and this new analysis might become common. A naddre (the Middle English form for Old English an nædre) became an adder, a napron became an apron, an nauger became an auger, a numpire became an umpire; and in a similar psychological way, an ewte (older form evete, OE. efete) became a newt: metanalysis can sometimes shorten and sometimes lengthen a word. Riding as one of the three districts of Yorkshire comes from a metanalysis of North Thriding (Old Norse þriðjungr, ‘third part’), as well as from East Thriding and West Thriding, after the sound of th had been blended with the preceding t.
One of the most frequent forms of metanalysis consists in the subtraction of an s, which originally belonged to the kernel of a word, but is mistaken for the plural ending; in this way we have pea instead of the earlier peas, pease, cherry for ME. cherris, Fr. cerise, asset from assets, Fr. assez, etc. Cf. also the vulgar Chinee, Portuguee, etc.[38]
One of the most common forms of metanalysis involves dropping an s that used to be part of the core of a word, but is confused with a plural ending; this gives us pea instead of the earlier peas, pease, cherry for ME. cherris, Fr. cerise, asset from assets, Fr. assez, etc. Also, see the informal Chinee, Portuguee, etc.[38]
The influence of a new generation is also seen in those cases in which formerly separate words coalesce into one, as when he breakfasts, he breakfasted, is said instead of he breaks fast, he broke fast; cf. vouchsafe, don (third person, vouchsafes, dons), instead of vouch safe, do on (third person, vouches safe, does on). Here, too, it is not probable that a person who has once learnt the real form of a word, and thus knows where it begins and where it ends, should have subsequently changed it: it is much more likely that all such changes originate with children who have once made a wrong analysis of what they have heard and then go on repeating the new forms all their lives.
The influence of a new generation is also noticeable in cases where separate words come together as one, like when we say he breakfasts or he breakfasted instead of he breaks fast or he broke fast; compare vouchsafe and don (third person, vouchsafes, dons), rather than vouch safe and do on (third person, vouches safe, does on). Here, it's unlikely that someone who has learned the proper form of a word and understands where it begins and ends would later change it; it's much more probable that these changes come from children who initially misunderstood the words they've heard and continue using the new forms for the rest of their lives.
X.—§ 3. Shiftings of Meanings.
Changes in the meaning of words are often so gradual that one cannot detect the different steps of the process, and changes of this sort, like the corresponding changes in the sounds of words, are to be ascribed quite as much to people already acquainted with the language as to the new generation. As examples we may mention the laxity that has changed the meaning of soon, which in OE. meant ‘at once,’ and in the same way of presently, originally ‘at present, now,’ and of the old anon. Dinner comes from OF. disner, which is the infinitive of the verb which in other forms was desjeun, whence modern French déjeune (Lat. *desjejunare); it thus meant ‘breakfast,’ but the hour of the meal thus termed was gradually shifted in the course of centuries, so that now we may have dinner twelve hours after breakfast. When picture, which originally meant ‘painting,’ came to be applied to drawings, photographs and other images; when hard came to be used as an epithet not only of nuts and stones, etc., but of words and labour; when fair, besides the old sense of ‘beautiful,’ acquired those of ‘blond’ and ‘morally just’; when meat, from meaning all kinds of food (as in sweetmeats, meat and drink), came to be restricted practically to one kind of food (butcher’s meat); when the verb grow, which at first was used only of plants, came to be used of animals, hairs, nails, feelings, etc., and, instead of implying always increase, might even be combined with such a predicative as smaller and smaller; when pretty, from the meaning ‘skilful, ingenious,’ came to be a general epithet of approval (cf. the modern American, a cunning child = ‘sweet’), and, besides meaning good-looking, became an adverb of degree, as in pretty bad: neither these nor countless similar shiftings need be ascribed to any influence on the part of the learners of English; they can easily be accounted for as the product of innumerable small extensions and restrictions on the part of the users of the language after they have once acquired it.
Changes in the meanings of words often happen so slowly that it's hard to notice the gradual steps involved. These changes, just like the shifts in the sounds of words, can be attributed as much to those already familiar with the language as to the new generation. For example, the meaning of soon, which in Old English (OE) meant ‘immediately,’ has relaxed over time, as has presently, which originally meant ‘right now,’ and the old anon. Dinner comes from the Old French disner, the infinitive of a verb that in other forms was desjeun, leading to the modern French déjeune (from Latin *desjejunare); it originally meant ‘breakfast,’ but over centuries the timing of this meal has shifted so that now we can have dinner twelve hours after breakfast. When picture, which initially meant ‘painting,’ started being used for drawings, photographs, and other images; when hard was applied not just to nuts and stones, but also to words and work; when fair, aside from its old meaning of ‘beautiful,’ included meanings like ‘blond’ and ‘morally just’; when meat, which used to refer to all kinds of food (as in sweetmeats, meat and drink), became almost exclusively associated with one type of food (butcher’s meat); when the verb grow, which initially referred only to plants, started to apply to animals, hair, nails, feelings, etc., and could even be used with phrases like smaller and smaller; when pretty, which meant ‘skilful, ingenious,’ evolved into a general term of approval (like the modern American usage, a cunning child = ‘sweet’) and also came to mean good-looking while functioning as an adverb of degree, as in pretty bad: none of these shifts, nor countless others, need be attributed to any specific influence from English learners; they can easily be understood as the result of many small extensions and restrictions by users of the language once they have learned it.
But along with changes of this sort we have others that have come about with a leap, and in which it is impossible to find intermediate stages between two seemingly heterogeneous meanings, as when bead, from meaning a ‘prayer,’ comes to mean ‘a perforated ball of glass or amber.’ In these cases the change is occasioned by certain connexions, where the whole sense can only be taken in one way, but the syntactical construction admits of various interpretations, so that an ambiguity at one point gives occasion for a new conception of the meaning of the word. The phrase to count your beads originally meant ‘to count your prayers,’ but because the prayers were reckoned by little balls, the word beads came to be transferred to these objects, and lost its original sense.[39] It seems clear that this misapprehension could not take place in the brains of those who had already associated the word with the original signification, while it was quite natural on the part of children who heard and understood the phrase as a whole, but unconsciously analyzed it differently from the previous generation.
But along with changes like these, we have others that have happened suddenly, where it’s impossible to find any middle ground between two seemingly unrelated meanings. For example, the word bead evolved from meaning ‘a prayer’ to meaning ‘a perforated ball of glass or amber.’ In these cases, the change occurs due to certain connections where the overall meaning can only be interpreted one way, but the grammatical structure allows for different interpretations. This creates ambiguity at one point, leading to a new understanding of the word. The phrase to count your beads originally meant ‘to count your prayers,’ but since prayers were tallied using small balls, the term beads was applied to these objects, losing its original meaning.[39] It’s clear that this misunderstanding couldn’t happen in the minds of those who were already familiar with the original meaning, while it was quite natural for children who heard and understood the phrase as a whole but unconsciously analyzed it differently from the previous generation.
There is another word which also meant ‘prayer’ originally, but has lost that meaning, viz. boon; through such phrases as ‘ask a boon’ and ‘grant a boon’ it came to be taken as meaning ‘a favour’ or ‘a good thing received.’
There’s another word that originally meant ‘prayer,’ but has lost that meaning: boon; through phrases like ‘ask a boon’ and ‘grant a boon,’ it has come to mean ‘a favor’ or ‘a benefit received.’
Orient was frequently used in such connexions as ‘orient pearl’ and ‘orient gem,’ and as these were lustrous, orient became an adjective meaning ‘shining,’ without any connexion with the geographical orient, as in Shakespeare, Venus 981, “an orient drop” (a tear), and Milton, PL i. 546, “Ten thousand banners rise into the air, With orient colours waving.”
Orient was often used in phrases like ‘orient pearl’ and ‘orient gem,’ and because these were shiny, orient became an adjective meaning ‘shining,’ without any link to the geographical orient, as seen in Shakespeare, Venus 981, “an orient drop” (a tear), and Milton, PL i. 546, “Ten thousand banners rise into the air, With orient colours waving.”
There are no connecting links between the meanings of ‘glad’ and ‘obliged,’ ‘forced,’ but when fain came to be chiefly used in combinations like ‘he was fain to leave the country,’ it was natural for the younger generation to interpret the whole phrase as implying necessity instead of gladness.
There are no connections between the meanings of ‘glad’ and ‘obliged,’ ‘forced,’ but when fain started being used mostly in phrases like ‘he was fain to leave the country,’ it was natural for the younger generation to understand the whole phrase as suggesting necessity instead of happiness.
We have similar phenomena in certain syntactical changes. When me thinks and me likes gave place to I think and I like, the chief cause of the change was that the child heard combinations like Mother thinks or Father likes, where mother and father can be either nominative or accusative-dative, and the construction is thus syntactically ambiguous. This leads to a ‘shunting’ of the meaning as well as of the construction of the verbs, which must[176] have come about in a new brain which was not originally acquainted with the old construction.
We see similar phenomena in some grammatical changes. When me thinks and me likes were replaced by I think and I like, the main reason for this change was that children heard phrases like Mother thinks or Father likes, where mother and father can function as either the subject or the object, making the structure syntactically ambiguous. This creates a shift in meaning as well as in the way the verbs are used, which must[176] have emerged in a new mind that wasn't initially familiar with the old structure.
As one of the factors bringing about changes in meaning many scholars mention forgetfulness; but it is important to keep in view that what happens is not real forgetting, that is, snapping of threads of thought that had already existed within the same consciousness, but the fact that the new individual never develops the threads of thought which in the elder generation bound one word to another. Sometimes there is no connexion of ideas in the child’s brain: a word is viewed quite singly as a whole and isolated, till later perhaps it is seen in its etymological relation. A little girl of six asked when she was born. “You were born on the 2nd of October.” “Why, then, I was born on my birthday!” she cried, her eyes beaming with joy at this wonderfully happy coincidence. Originally Fare well was only said to some one going away. If now the departing guest says Farewell to his friend who is staying at home, it can only be because the word Farewell has been conceived as a fixed formula, without any consciousness of the meaning of its parts.
Many scholars point to forgetfulness as a factor in changing meanings. However, it's crucial to understand that this isn’t real forgetting—like losing the threads of thought already present in consciousness—but rather that the new generation never forms the connections between words that the older generation did. Sometimes, a child’s mind lacks any connection of ideas: a word is seen as a complete, isolated unit until it’s later understood in its historical context. For example, a six-year-old girl asked when she was born. “You were born on the 2nd of October.” “Well, then, I was born on my birthday!” she exclaimed, her eyes shining with joy at this delightful coincidence. Originally, Fare well was only said to someone who was leaving. Now, if a departing guest says Farewell to a friend staying home, it’s likely because the word Farewell has become a fixed phrase, without awareness of the meanings of its components.
Sometimes, on the other hand, new connexions of thought arise, as when we associate the word bound with bind in the phrase ‘he is bound for America.’ Our ancestors meant ‘he is ready to go’ (ON. búinn, ‘ready’), not ‘he is under an obligation to go.’ The establishment of new associations of this kind seems naturally to take place at the moment when the young mind makes acquaintance with the word: the phenomenon is, of course, closely related to “popular etymology” (see Ch. VI § 6).
Sometimes, on the other hand, new connections of thought arise, like when we link the word bound with bind in the phrase ‘he is bound for America.’ Our ancestors meant ‘he is ready to go’ (ON. búinn, ‘ready’), not ‘he is obligated to go.’ The formation of these new associations seems to naturally happen when a young mind first encounters the word: this phenomenon is, of course, closely related to “popular etymology” (see Ch. VI § 6).
X.—§ 4. Differentiations.
Linguistic ‘splittings’ or differentiations, whereby one word becomes two, may also be largely due to the transmission of the language to a new generation. The child may hear two pronunciations of the same word from different people, and then associate these with different ideas. Thus Paul Passy learnt the word meule in the sense of ‘grindstone’ from his father, and in the sense of ‘haycock’ from his mother; now the former in both senses pronounced [mœl], and the latter in both [mø·l], and the child thus came to distinguish [mœl] ‘grindstone’ and [mø·l] ‘haycock’ (Ch 23).
Linguistic "splits" or differences, where one word evolves into two, can largely result from passing the language onto a new generation. A child might hear two pronunciations of the same word from different people and then associate them with different meanings. For example, Paul Passy learned the word meule as 'grindstone' from his father and as 'haycock' from his mother; both pronunciations of the former are [mœl], while both for the latter are [mø·l], leading the child to recognize [mœl] as 'grindstone' and [mø·l] as 'haycock' (Ch 23).
Or the child may have learnt the word at two different periods of its life, associated with different spheres. This, I take it, may be the reason why some speakers make a distinction between two pronunciations of the word medicine, in two and in three syllables: they take [medsin], but study [medisin].
Or the child might have learned the word at two different times in their life, connected to different contexts. This, I think, could be why some speakers distinguish between two pronunciations of the word medicine, using two and three syllables: they say [medsin], but study [medisin].
Finally, the child can itself split words. A friend writes: “I remember that when a schoolboy said that it was a good thing that the new Headmaster was Dr. Wood, because he would then know when boys were ‘shamming,’ a schoolfellow remarked, ‘Wasn’t it funny? He did not know the difference between Doctor and Docter.’” In Danish the Japanese are indiscriminately called either Japanerne or Japaneserne; now, I once overheard my boy (6.10) lecturing his playfellows: “Japaneserne, that is the soldiers of Japan, but Japanerne, that is students and children and such-like.” It is, of course, possible that he may have heard one form originally when shown some pictures of Japanese soldiers, and the other on another occasion, and that this may have been the reason for his distinction. However this may be, I do not doubt that a number of differentiations of words are to be ascribed to the transmission of the language to a new generation. Others may have arisen in the speech of adults, such as the distinction between off and of (at first the stressed and unstressed form of the same preposition), or between thorough and through (the former is still used as a preposition in Shakespeare: “thorough bush, thorough brier”). But complete differentiation is not established till some individuals from the very first conceive the forms as two independent words.
Finally, the child can split words on their own. A friend writes: “I remember that when a schoolboy said it was a good thing that the new Headmaster was Dr. Wood, because he would then know when boys were ‘shamming,’ a classmate remarked, ‘Wasn’t it funny? He didn’t know the difference between Doctor and Docter.’” In Danish, the Japanese are called either Japanerne or Japaneserne; once, I overheard my boy (6.10) lecturing his playmates: “Japaneserne, that means the soldiers of Japan, but Japanerne, that means students and children and such.” It’s possible he heard one term when shown pictures of Japanese soldiers and the other on a different occasion, which may have led to his distinction. Regardless of how it happened, I believe many word differences arise from passing language to a new generation. Others might have come from adults’ speech, like the distinction between off and of (initially the stressed and unstressed forms of the same preposition), or between thorough and through (the former is still used as a preposition in Shakespeare: “thorough bush, thorough brier”). But full differentiation doesn’t happen until some people from the start view the forms as two separate words.
X.—§ 5. Summary.
Instead of saying, as previous writers on these questions have done, either that children have no influence or that they have the chief influence on the development of language, it will be seen that I have divided the question into many, going through various fields of linguistic change and asking in each what may have been the influence of the child. The result of this investigation has been that there are certain fields in which it is both impossible and really also irrelevant to separate the share of the child and of the adult, because both will be apt to introduce changes of that kind; such are assimilations of neighbouring sounds and droppings of consonants in groups. Also, with regard to those very gradual shiftings either of sound or of meaning in which it is natural to assume many intermediate stages through which the sound or signification must have passed before arriving at the final result, children and adults must share the responsibility for the change. Clippings of words occur in the speech of both classes, but as a rule adults will keep the beginning of a word, while very small children will perceive or remember only the end of a word and use that for the whole. But finally there are some kinds of changes which must wholly or chiefly be charged to the account[178] of children: such are those leaps in sound or signification in which intermediate stages are out of the question, as well as confusions of similar words and misdivisions of words, and the most violent differentiations of words.
Instead of saying, as earlier writers on these topics have done, that children have no influence or that they are the main influence on language development, I've broken the question down into several parts, exploring different aspects of linguistic change and examining how children may contribute in each case. This investigation shows that in certain areas, it’s both impossible and irrelevant to separate the contributions of children and adults, since both are likely to introduce similar changes; this includes the combination of neighboring sounds and the dropping of consonants in clusters. Additionally, concerning those gradual shifts in sound or meaning where it’s reasonable to assume several intermediate stages that the sound or meaning must have gone through before arriving at the final outcome, both children and adults share the responsibility for these changes. Shortened versions of words appear in the speech of both groups, but generally, adults tend to keep the start of a word, while very young children often only notice or remember the end of a word and use that as a stand-in for the entire word. However, there are specific types of changes that can be attributed solely or primarily to children: these include sudden shifts in sound or meaning where intermediate stages don't apply, as well as mix-ups of similar words, incorrect divisions of words, and the most drastic differentiations of words.
I wish, however, here to insist on one point which has, I think, become more and more clear in the course of our disquisition, namely, that we ought not really to put the question like this: Are linguistic changes due to children or to grown-up people? The important distinction is not really one of age, which is evidently one of degree only, but that between the first learners of the sound or word in question and those who use it after having once learnt it. In the latter case we have mainly to do with infinitesimal glidings, the results of which, when summed up in the course of long periods of time, may be very considerable indeed, but in which it will always be possible to detect intermediate links connecting the extreme points. In contrast to these changes occurring after the correct (or original) form has been acquired by the individual, we have changes occurring simultaneously with the first acquisition of the word or form in question, and thus due to the fact of its transmission to a new generation, or, to speak more generally, and, indeed, more correctly, to new individuals. The exact age of the learner here is of little avail, as will be seen if we take some examples of metanalysis. It is highly probable that the first users of forms like a pea or a cherry, instead of a pease and a cherries, were little children; but a Chinee and a Portuguee are not necessarily, or not pre-eminently, children’s words: on the other hand, it is to me indubitable that these forms do not spring into existence in the mind of someone who has previously used the forms Chinese and Portuguese in the singular number, but must be due to the fact that the forms the Chinese and the Portuguese (used as plurals) have been at once apprehended as made up of Chinee, Portuguee + the plural ending -s by a person hearing them for the first time; similarly in all the other cases. We shall see in a later chapter that the adoption (on the part of children and adults alike) of sounds and words from a foreign tongue presents certain interesting points of resemblance with these instances of change: in both cases the innovation begins when some individual is first made acquainted with linguistic elements that are new to him.
I want to emphasize one point that has become increasingly clear as we've discussed this topic: we shouldn’t really frame the question like this: Are language changes caused by children or by adults? The key distinction isn't really about age, which is just a matter of degree, but rather between the first learners of a specific sound or word and those who use it after having learned it. In the latter situation, we're mainly dealing with very small shifts, the cumulative effect of which can be significant over long periods, but it will always be possible to identify intermediate forms connecting the extremes. In contrast to these changes happening after someone has acquired the correct (or original) form, we have changes that occur simultaneously with the initial learning of the word or form, which comes from passing it on to a new generation, or more generally, to new individuals. The exact age of the learner isn't really relevant here, as we'll see with some examples of metanalysis. It's highly likely that the first users of forms like a pea or a cherry, instead of a pease and a cherries, were young children; however, a Chinee and a Portuguee aren't necessarily or primarily children's words: on the other hand, I firmly believe that these forms don’t just pop into someone's mind after they’ve previously used Chinese and Portuguese in the singular; they must stem from the fact that the forms the Chinese and the Portuguese (as plurals) were immediately interpreted as Chinee, Portuguee + the plural ending -s by someone hearing them for the first time; this applies similarly to all other cases. We'll discuss in a later chapter that the adoption (by both children and adults) of sounds and words from a foreign language has certain interesting similarities to these examples of change: in both cases, the innovation starts when an individual is first introduced to unfamiliar linguistic elements.
X.—§ 6. Indirect Influence.
We have hitherto considered what elements of the language may be referred to a child’s first acquisition of language. But we have not yet done with the part which children play in[179] linguistic development. There are two things which must be sharply distinguished from the phenomena discussed in the preceding chapter—the first, that grown-up people in many cases catch up the words and forms used by children and thereby give them a power of survival which they would not have otherwise; the second, that grown-up people alter their own language so as to meet children half-way.
We have so far looked at the aspects of language related to a child's initial language acquisition. However, we still need to address the role children play in[179] linguistic development. There are two important points that must be clearly separated from the topics discussed in the previous chapter: first, that adults often adopt the words and expressions used by children, which gives these words a chance to thrive that they wouldn’t have otherwise; second, that adults modify their own language to connect with children more effectively.
As for the first point, we have already seen examples in which mothers and nurses have found the baby’s forms so pretty that they have adopted them themselves. Generally these forms are confined to the family circle, but they may under favourable circumstances be propagated further. A special case of the highest interest has been fully discussed in the section about words of the mamma-class.
As for the first point, we've already seen examples where mothers and nurses have found the baby's shapes so adorable that they've started using them themselves. Usually, these shapes are limited to the family circle, but they can sometimes spread further under favorable conditions. A particularly interesting case has been thoroughly discussed in the section about words in the mamma category.
As for the second point, grown-up people often adapt their speech to the more or less imaginary needs of their children by pronouncing words as they do, saying dood and tum for ‘good’ and ‘come,’ etc. This notion clearly depends on a misunderstanding, and can only retard the acquisition of the right pronunciation; the child understands good and come at least as well, if not better, and the consequence may be that when he is able himself to pronounce [g] and [k] he may consider it immaterial, because one can just as well say [d] and [t] as [g] and [k], or may be bewildered as to which words have the one sound and which the other. It can only be a benefit to the child if all who come in contact with it speak from the first as correctly, elegantly and clearly as possible—not, of course, in long, stilted sentences and with many learned book-words, but naturally and easily. When the child makes a mistake, the most effectual way of correcting it is certainly the indirect one of seeing that the child, soon after it has made the mistake, hears the correct form. If he says ‘A waps stinged me’: answer, ‘It stung you: did it hurt much when the wasp stung you?’ etc. No special emphasis even is needed; next time he will probably use the correct form.
Regarding the second point, adults often change how they speak to meet the imagined needs of their children by using words like dood and tum instead of ‘good’ and ‘come,’ etc. This idea clearly comes from a misunderstanding and can actually hinder the development of proper pronunciation. The child understands good and come at least as well, if not better, and as a result, when they can pronounce [g] and [k] themselves, they might think it doesn't matter, as one can just say [d] and [t] instead of [g] and [k], or they could get confused about which words have one sound and which have the other. It’s beneficial for the child if everyone who interacts with them speaks as correctly, elegantly, and clearly as possible—not in long, formal sentences filled with complicated words, but in a natural and easy way. When the child makes a mistake, the most effective way to correct it is indirectly, by ensuring the child hears the correct form shortly after making the mistake. For example, if they say ‘A waps stinged me,’ you can respond, ‘It stung you: did it hurt much when the wasp stung you?’ No special emphasis is even necessary; next time, they will likely use the correct form.
But many parents are not so wise; they will say stinged themselves when once they have heard the child say so. And nurses and others have even developed a kind of artificial nursery language which they imagine makes matters easier for the little ones, but which is in many respects due to erroneous ideas of how children ought to talk rather than to real observation of the way children do talk. Many forms are handed over traditionally from one nurse to another, such as totties, tootems or tootsies for ‘feet’ (from trotters?), toothy-peg for ‘tooth,’ tummy or tumtum for ‘stomach,’ tootleums for ‘babies,’ shooshoo for ‘a fly.’ I give a connected specimen of this nursery language (from Egerton,[180] Keynotes, 85): “Didsum was denn? Oo did! Was ums de prettiest itta sweetums denn? Oo was. An’ did um put ’em in a nasty shawl an’ joggle ’em in an ole puff-puff, um did, was a shame! Hitchy cum, hitchy cum, hitchy cum hi, Chinaman no likey me.” This reminds one of pidgin-English, and in a later chapter we shall see that that and similar bastard languages are partly due to the same mistaken notion that it is necessary to corrupt one’s language to be easily understood by children and inferior races.
But many parents aren't that smart; they will say stinged themselves after hearing the child say it that way. Nurses and others have even created a sort of fake nursery language that they think makes things easier for the little ones, but which is largely based on incorrect ideas about how children should talk instead of real observations of how they actually do talk. Many terms are passed down traditionally from one caregiver to another, like totties, tootems or tootsies for ‘feet’ (from trotters?), toothy-peg for ‘tooth,’ tummy or tumtum for ‘stomach,’ tootleums for ‘babies,’ and shooshoo for ‘a fly.’ Here’s an example of this nursery language (from Egerton,[180] Keynotes, 85): “Didsum was denn? Oo did! Was ums de prettiest itta sweetums denn? Oo was. An’ did um put ’em in a nasty shawl an’ joggle ’em in an ole puff-puff, um did, was a shame! Hitchy cum, hitchy cum, hitchy cum hi, Chinaman no likey me.” This sounds a lot like pidgin-English, and in a later chapter, we'll see that this and similar mixed languages come from the same mistaken belief that you need to distort language to be easily understood by children and so-called inferior races.
Very frequently mothers and nurses talk to children in diminutives. When many of these have become established in ordinary speech, losing their force as diminutives and displacing the proper words, this is another result of nursery language. The phenomenon is widely seen in Romance languages, where auricula, Fr. oreille, It. orecchio, displaces auris, and avicellus, Fr. oiseau, It. uccello, displaces avis; we may remember that classical Latin had already oculus, for ‘eye.’[40] It is the same in Modern Greek. An example of the same tendency, though not of the same formal means of a diminutive ending, is seen in the English bird (originally = ‘young bird’) and rabbit (originally = ‘young rabbit’), which have displaced fowl and coney.
Mothers and nurses often talk to children using cute, smaller versions of words. When many of these have become so common in everyday language that they've lost their cuteness and replaced the actual words, it shows another effect of baby talk. This trend is common in Romance languages, where auricula, Fr. oreille, It. orecchio, replaces auris, and avicellus, Fr. oiseau, It. uccello, replaces avis; we should note that classical Latin already had oculus for ‘eye.’[40] The same happens in Modern Greek. A similar trend, though not using a diminutive ending, can be seen in English with bird (originally meaning ‘young bird’) and rabbit (originally meaning ‘young rabbit’), which have taken the place of fowl and coney.
A very remarkable case of the influence of nursery language on normal speech is seen in many countries, viz. in the displacing of the old word for ‘right’ (as opposed to left). The distinction of right and left is not easy for small children: some children in the upper classes at school only know which is which by looking at some wart, or something of the sort, on one of their hands, and have to think every time. Meanwhile mothers and nurses will frequently insist on the use of the right (dextera) hand, and when they are not understood, will think they make it easier for the child by saying ‘No, the right hand,’ and so it comes about that in many languages the word that originally means ‘correct’ is used with the meaning ‘dexter.’ So we have in English right, in German recht, which displaces zeso, Fr. droit, which displaces destre; in Spanish also la derecha has begun to be used instead of la diestra; similarly, in Swedish den vackra handen instead of högra, and in Jutlandish dialects den kjön hånd instead of höjre.
A notable example of how nursery language influences everyday speech can be seen in many countries, particularly in the replacement of the traditional word for ‘right’ (as opposed to left). Distinguishing between right and left is tricky for young children; some kids in higher social classes only identify which is which by referencing a wart or something similar on one of their hands, and they have to think about it each time. Meanwhile, mothers and caregivers often insist on using the right hand, and when they aren't understood, they think they’re helping by saying, “No, the right hand.” This leads to the situation where, in many languages, the word that originally meant ‘correct’ is now used to mean ‘right.’ In English, we have right, in German recht, which replaces zeso, in French droit, which replaces destre; in Spanish, la derecha has started to be used instead of la diestra; similarly, in Swedish den vackra handen is used instead of högra, and in Jutlandish dialects den kjön hånd replaces höjre.
X.—§ 7. New Languages.
In a subsequent chapter (XIV § 5) we shall consider the theory that epochs in which the changes of some language proceed at a[181] more rapid pace than at others are due to the fact that in times of fierce, widely extended wars many men leave home and remain abroad, either as settlers or as corpses, while the women left behind have to do the field-work, etc., and neglect their homes, the consequence being that the children are left more to themselves, and therefore do not get their mistakes in speech corrected as much as usual.
In a later chapter (XIV § 5) we will look at the idea that periods when changes in a language happen faster than others are caused by intense, widespread wars. During these times, many men leave home and stay away, either as settlers or as casualties, while the women who remain must handle tasks like farming and neglect their homes. As a result, children are often left to their own devices, which means they don't have their speech mistakes corrected as often as usual.
A somewhat related idea is at the bottom of a theory advanced as early as 1886 by the American ethnologist Horatio Hale (see “The Origin of Languages,” in the American Association for the Advancement of Science, XXXV, 1886, and “The Development of Language,” the Canadian Institute, Toronto, 1888). As these papers seem to have been entirely unnoticed by leading philologists, I shall give a short abstract of them, leaving out what appears to me to be erroneous in the light of recent linguistic thought and research, namely, his application of the theory to explain the supposed three stages of linguistic development, the monosyllabic, the agglutinative and the flexional.
A somewhat related idea underpins a theory proposed as early as 1886 by the American ethnologist Horatio Hale (see “The Origin of Languages,” in the American Association for the Advancement of Science, XXXV, 1886, and “The Development of Language,” the Canadian Institute, Toronto, 1888). Since these papers seem to have gone completely unnoticed by leading linguists, I will provide a brief summary of them, omitting what I believe to be incorrect based on recent linguistic theories and research, specifically his application of the theory to explain the supposed three stages of language development: monosyllabic, agglutinative, and flexional.
Hale was struck with the fact that in Oregon, in a region not much larger than France, we find at least thirty different families of languages living together. It is impossible to believe that thirty separate communities of speechless precursors of man should have begun to talk independently of one another in thirty distinct languages in this district. Hale therefore concludes that the origin of linguistic stocks is to be found in the language-making instinct of very young children. When two children who are just beginning to speak are thrown much together, they sometimes invent a complete language, sufficient for all purposes of mutual intercourse, and yet totally unintelligible to their parents. In an ordinary household, the conditions under which such a language would be formed are most likely to occur in the case of twins, and Hale now proceeds to mention those instances—five in all—that he has come across of languages framed in this manner by young children. He concludes: “It becomes evident that, to ensure the creation of a speech which shall be a parent of a new language stock, all that is needed is that two or more young children should be placed by themselves in a condition where they will be entirely, or in a large degree, free from the presence and influence of their elders. They must, of course, continue in this condition long enough to grow up, to form a household, and to have descendants to whom they can communicate their new speech.”
Hale was struck by the fact that in Oregon, in an area not much larger than France, there are at least thirty different language families coexisting. It's hard to believe that thirty separate groups of silent human ancestors would have started speaking independently in thirty distinct languages in this region. Hale concludes that the roots of these languages stem from the language-learning instinct of very young children. When two children who are just starting to talk spend a lot of time together, they sometimes create an entirely new language, sufficient for all their communication needs, yet completely incomprehensible to their parents. In a typical household, the best conditions for forming such a language are most likely to occur with twins. Hale goes on to mention five instances he has encountered where young children have created languages like this. He concludes: “It becomes clear that, to ensure the creation of a speech that could become the foundation of a new language family, all that is needed is for two or more young children to be placed together in an environment where they are largely free from the presence and influence of adults. They must, of course, remain in this situation long enough to grow up, start a family, and have children to whom they can pass on their new language.”
These conditions he finds among the hunting tribes of America, in which it is common for single families to wander off from the main band. “In modern times, when the whole country is occupied, their flight would merely carry them into the territory of[182] another tribe, among whom, if well received, they would quickly be absorbed. But in the primitive period, when a vast uninhabited region stretched before them, it would be easy for them to find some sheltered nook or fruitful valley.... If under such circumstances disease or the casualties of a hunter’s life should carry off the parents, the survival of the children would, it is evident, depend mainly upon the nature of the climate and the ease with which food could be procured at all seasons of the year. In ancient Europe, after the present climatal conditions were established, it is doubtful if a family of children under ten years of age could have lived through a single winter. We are not, therefore, surprised to find that no more than four or five language stocks are represented in Europe.... Of Northern America, east of the Rocky Mountains and north of the tropics, the same may be said.... But there is one region where Nature seems to offer herself as the willing nurse and bountiful stepmother of the feeble and unprotected ... California. Its wonderful climate (follows a long description).... Need we wonder that, in such a mild and fruitful region, a great number of separate tribes were found, speaking languages which a careful investigation has classed in nineteen distinct linguistic stocks?” In Oregon, and in the interior of Brazil, Hale finds similar climatic conditions with the same result, a great number of totally dissimilar languages, while in Australia, whose climate is as mild as that of any of these regions, we find hundreds, perhaps thousands, of petty tribes, as completely isolated as those of South America, but all speaking languages of the same stock—because “the other conditions are such as would make it impossible for an isolated group of young children to survive. The whole of Australia is subject to severe droughts, and is so scantily provided with edible products that the aborigines are often reduced to the greatest straits.”
He sees these conditions among the hunting tribes of America, where it's common for individual families to drift away from the main group. “In modern times, when the entire country is populated, leaving would just take them into another tribe's territory, where, if received well, they would quickly blend in. But in ancient times, when a vast, uninhabited area lay before them, it would be easy for them to find a sheltered spot or a fertile valley... If, in such situations, sickness or the dangers of a hunter’s life caused the parents to die, the children's survival would mainly depend on the climate and how easily food could be gathered all year round. In ancient Europe, after the current climate was established, it's questionable whether a family with children under ten could survive a single winter. Therefore, it’s not surprising that only four or five language families are found in Europe... The same applies to Northern America, east of the Rocky Mountains and north of the tropics... However, there is one place where Nature seems to be a nurturing caregiver and generous protector of the weak and vulnerable... California. Its amazing climate (follows a long description)... Should we be surprised that, in such a mild and fertile area, many separate tribes speaking languages that careful research has grouped into nineteen distinct linguistic families were found?” In Oregon and the interior of Brazil, Hale discovers similar climate conditions yielding the same outcome: a wide variety of completely different languages, whereas in Australia, with a climate as mild as any of these regions, we find hundreds, perhaps thousands, of small tribes, just as isolated as those in South America, but all speaking languages from the same family—because “the other conditions make it impossible for a group of young children to survive alone. The entire continent of Australia experiences severe droughts and has such limited edible resources that the indigenous people often find themselves in extreme hardship.”
This, then, is Hale’s theory. Let us now look a little closer into the proofs adduced. They are, as it will be seen, of a twofold order. He invokes the language-creating tendencies of young children on the one hand, and on the other the geographical distribution of linguistic stocks or genera.
This is Hale’s theory. Let’s take a closer look at the evidence provided. It can be seen that there are two types. He points to the language-creating tendencies of young children on one hand, and on the other, the geographical distribution of language families or groups.
As to the first, it is true that so competent a psychologist as Wundt denies the possibility in very strong terms.[41] But facts certainly do not justify this foregone conclusion. I must first refer the reader to Hale’s own report of the five instances known[183] to him. Unfortunately, the linguistic material collected by him is so scanty that we can form only a very imperfect idea of the languages which he says children have developed and of the relation between them and the language of the parents. But otherwise his report is very instructive, and I shall call special attention to the fact that in most cases the children seem to have been ‘spoilt’ by their parents; this is also the case with regard to one of the families, though it does not appear from Hale’s own extracts from the book in which he found his facts (G. Watson, Universe of Language, N.Y., 1878).
As for the first point, it's true that a highly regarded psychologist like Wundt strongly denies the possibility. But the facts definitely don't support this preconceived conclusion. First, I need to point out Hale's own report on the five instances he knows about. Unfortunately, the linguistic material he collected is so limited that we can only get a very incomplete picture of the languages he claims children have developed and how they relate to their parents' language. However, his report is still very enlightening, and I want to highlight that in most cases, the children seem to have been ‘spoiled’ by their parents; this also applies to one of the families, even though it doesn't come through in Hale's own excerpts from the book where he found his information (G. Watson, Universe of Language, N.Y., 1878).
The only word recorded in this case is nī-si-boo-a for ‘carriage’; how that came into existence, I dare not conjecture; but when it is said that the syllables of it were sometimes so repeated that they made a much longer word, this agrees very well with what I have myself observed with regard to ordinary children’s playful word-coinages. In the next case, described by E. R. Hun, M.D., of Albany, more words are given. Some of these bear a strong resemblance to French, although neither the parents nor servants spoke that language; and Hale thinks that some person may have “amused herself, innocently enough, by teaching the child a few words of that tongue.” This, however, does not seem necessary to explain the words recorded. Feu, pronounced, we are told, like the French word, signified ‘fire, light, cigar, sun’: it may be either E. fire or else an imitation of the sound fff without a vowel, or [fə·] used in blowing out a candle or a match or in smoking, so as to amuse the child, exactly as in the case of one of my little Danish friends, who used fff as the name for ‘smoke, steam,’ and later for ‘funnel, chimney,’ and finally anything standing upright against the sky, for instance, a flagstaff. Petee-petee, the name which the Albany girl gave to her brother, and which Dr. Hun derived from F. petit, may be just as well from E. pet or petty; and to explain her word for ‘I,’ ma, we need not go to F. moi, as E. me or my may obviously be thus distorted by any child. Her word for ‘not’ is said to have been ne-pas, though the exact pronunciation is not given. This cannot have been taken from the French, at any rate not from real French, as ne and pas are here separated, and ne is more often than not pronounced without the vowel or omitted altogether; the girl’s word, if pronounced something like ['nepa·] may be nothing else than an imperfect childish pronunciation of never, cf. the negroes’ form nebber. Too, ‘all, everything,’ of course resembles Fr. tout, but how should anyone have been able to teach this girl, who did not speak any intelligible language, a French word of this abstract character? Some of the other words admit of a natural explanation from English: go-go, ‘delicacy, as sugar,[184] candy or dessert,’ is probably goody-goody, or a reduplicated form of good; deer, ‘money,’ may be from dear, ‘expensive’; odo, ‘to send for, to go out, to take away,’ is evidently out, as in ma odo, ‘I want to go out’; gaän, ‘God,’ must be the English word, in spite of the difference in pronunciation, for the child would never think of inventing this idea on its own accord; pa-ma, ‘to go to sleep, pillow, bed,’ is from by-bye or an independent word of the mamma-class; mea, ‘cat, fur,’ of course is imitative of the sound of the cat. For the rest of the words I have no conjectures to offer. Some of the derived meanings are curious, though perhaps not more startling than many found in the speech of ordinary children; papa and mamma separately had their usual signification, but papa-mamma meant ‘church, prayer-book, cross, priest’: the parents were punctual in church observances; gar odo, ‘horse out, to send for the horse,’ came to mean ‘pencil and paper,’ as the father used, when the carriage was wanted, to write an order and send it to the stable. In the remaining three cases of ‘invented’ languages no specimens are given, except shindikik, ‘cat.’ In all cases the children seem to have talked together fluently when by themselves in their own gibberish.
The only word noted in this case is nī-si-boo-a for ‘carriage’; how it came to be, I can't guess; but when it's mentioned that the syllables were sometimes repeated to form a much longer word, this aligns well with what I've observed in children's playful language creations. In the next case, described by E. R. Hun, M.D., of Albany, more words are provided. Some of these resemble French quite closely, even though neither the parents nor the servants spoke the language; Hale suggests that someone might have "innocently amused herself by teaching the child a few words." However, this doesn't seem necessary to account for the words recorded. Feu, pronounced like the French word, meant ‘fire, light, cigar, sun’: it could either be E. fire or an imitation of the sound fff without a vowel, or [fə·], used when blowing out a candle or a match or while smoking to entertain the child, similar to one of my little Danish friends, who used fff for ‘smoke, steam,’ and later for ‘funnel, chimney,’ and eventually for anything standing upright against the sky, like a flagpole. Petee-petee, the name the Albany girl gave to her brother, which Dr. Hun derived from F. petit, might also come from E. pet or petty; and to explain her word for ‘I,’ ma, we don't need to reference F. moi, as E. me or my could easily be mispronounced by any child. Her word for ‘not’ is said to have been ne-pas, though the exact pronunciation isn't given. This couldn't have been borrowed from the French, at least not from real French, since ne and pas are separated here, and ne is often pronounced without the vowel or omitted altogether; the girl’s word, if pronounced something like ['nepa·], might just be an imperfect childish pronunciation of never, similar to the black English form nebber. Too, ‘all, everything,’ resembles Fr. tout, but how could anyone teach this girl, who didn't speak any clear language, a French word with such an abstract meaning? Some of the other words can be easily explained in English: go-go, ‘delicacy, like sugar, candy, or dessert,’ likely comes from goody-goody or a reduplicated version of good; deer, meaning ‘money,’ could come from dear, which means ‘expensive’; odo, ‘to send for, to go out, to take away,’ is clearly out, as in ma odo, ‘I want to go out’; gaän, ‘God,’ must be the English word, despite the different pronunciation, since the child wouldn't have thought to invent this concept on her own; pa-ma, meaning ‘to go to sleep, pillow, bed,’ comes from by-bye or is an independent word in the mamma-class; mea, meaning ‘cat, fur,’ is clearly imitative of the sound a cat makes. For the rest of the words, I have no guesses to offer. Some of the derived meanings are interesting, though perhaps not more surprising than many found in the speech of typical children; papa and mamma had their usual meanings, but papa-mamma referred to ‘church, prayer book, cross, priest’: the parents were regular in their church attendance; gar odo, meaning ‘horse out, to send for the horse,’ came to mean ‘pencil and paper,’ because the father would write an order and send it to the stable when the carriage was needed. In the last three cases of ‘invented’ languages, no examples are provided, except for shindikik, meaning ‘cat.’ In all cases, the children seemed to talk fluently with each other in their own gibberish when they were alone.
But there exists on record a case better elucidated than Hale’s five cases, namely that of the Icelandic girl Sæunn. (See Jonasson and Eschricht in Dansk Maanedsskrift, Copenhagen, 1858.) She was born in the beginning of the last century on a farm in Húnavatns-syssel in the northern part of Iceland, and began early to converse with her twin brother in a language that was entirely unintelligible to their surroundings. Her parents were disquieted, and therefore resolved to send away the brother, who died soon afterwards. They now tried to teach the girl Icelandic, but soon (too soon, evidently!) came to the conclusion that she could not learn it, and then they were foolish enough to learn her language, as did also her brothers and sisters and even some of their friends. In order that she might be confirmed, her elder brother translated the catechism and acted as interpreter between the parson and the girl. She is described as intelligent—she even composed poetry in her own language—but shy and distrustful. Jonasson gives a few specimens of her language, some of which Eschricht succeeds in interpreting as based on Icelandic words, though strangely disfigured. The language to Jonasson, who had heard it, seemed totally dissimilar to Icelandic in sounds and construction; it had no flexions, and lacked pronouns. The vocabulary was so limited that she very often had to supplement a phrase by means of nods or gestures; and it was difficult to carry on a conversation with her in the dark. The ingenuity of some of the compounds and metaphors is greatly admired by[185] Jonasson, though to the more sober mind of Eschricht they appear rather childish or primitive, as when a ‘wether’ is called mepok-ill from me (imitation of the sound) + pok, ‘a little bag’ (Icel. poki) + ill, ‘to cut.’ The only complete sentence recorded is ‘Dirfa offo nonona uhuh,’ which means: ‘Sigurdur gets up extremely late.’ In his analysis of the whole case Eschricht succeeds in stripping it of the mystical glamour in which it evidently appeared to Jonasson as well as to the girl’s relatives; he is undoubtedly right in maintaining that if the parents had persisted in only talking Icelandic to her, she would soon have forgotten her own language; he compares her words with some strange disfigurements of Danish which he had observed among children in his own family and acquaintanceship.
But there’s a documented case that's clearer than Hale’s five cases, specifically that of the Icelandic girl Sæunn. (See Jonasson and Eschricht in Dansk Maanedsskrift, Copenhagen, 1858.) She was born in the early 1900s on a farm in Húnavatns-syssel in northern Iceland, and from a young age, she conversed with her twin brother in a language that was completely incomprehensible to those around them. Her parents were worried and decided to send away the brother, who died shortly after. They then tried to teach the girl Icelandic but soon (too soon, obviously!) concluded that she couldn't learn it, and then they foolishly learned her language, as did her brothers and sisters and even some of their friends. To prepare her for confirmation, her older brother translated the catechism and acted as an interpreter between the minister and the girl. She was described as intelligent—she even wrote poetry in her own language—but she was shy and distrustful. Jonasson provides a few examples of her language, some of which Eschricht manages to interpret as being based on Icelandic words, though they were oddly distorted. To Jonasson, who had heard it, her language seemed completely different from Icelandic in terms of sounds and structure; it had no inflections and lacked pronouns. The vocabulary was so limited that she often had to add to a phrase with nods or gestures, and it was hard to have a conversation with her in the dark. Some of the creative compounds and metaphors are highly praised by Jonasson, though to the more pragmatic Eschricht, they seem rather childish or primitive, like when a ‘wether’ is called mepok-ill from me (the imitation of the sound) + pok, ‘a little bag’ (Icel. poki) + ill, ‘to cut.’ The only complete sentence recorded is ‘Dirfa offo nonona uhuh,’ which means: ‘Sigurdur gets up extremely late.’ In his analysis of the case, Eschricht manages to remove the mystical allure that it clearly had for both Jonasson and the girl’s family; he is undoubtedly correct in saying that if the parents had continued to speak only Icelandic to her, she would have quickly forgotten her own language; he compares her words to some peculiar distortions of Danish he had seen among children in his own family and acquaintances.
I read this report a good many years ago, and afterwards I tried on two occasions to obtain precise information about similar cases I had seen mentioned, one in Halland (Sweden) and the other in Finland, but without success. But in 1903, when I was lecturing on the language of children in the University of Copenhagen, I had the good fortune to hear of a case not far from Copenhagen of two children speaking a language of their own. I investigated the case as well as I could, by seeing and hearing them several times and thus checking the words and sentences which their teacher, who was constantly with them, kindly took down in accordance with my directions. I am thus enabled to give a fairly full account of their language, though unfortunately my investigation was interrupted by a long voyage in 1904.
I read this report many years ago, and after that, I tried twice to get detailed information about similar cases I had seen mentioned, one in Halland (Sweden) and the other in Finland, but I had no luck. However, in 1903, while I was lecturing on children's language at the University of Copenhagen, I was fortunate enough to hear about a case not far from Copenhagen involving two children who spoke their own language. I looked into the case as best as I could, by seeing and hearing them several times, checking the words and sentences that their teacher, who was with them constantly, kindly recorded according to my instructions. Because of this, I can provide a fairly comprehensive account of their language, although unfortunately, my investigation was cut short by a long trip in 1904.
The boys were twins, about five and a half years old when I saw them, and so alike that even the people who were about them every day had difficulty in distinguishing them from each other. Their mother (a single woman) neglected them shamefully when they were quite small, and they were left very much to shift for themselves. For a long time, while their mother was ill in a hospital, they lived in an out-of-the-way place with an old woman, who is said to have been very deaf, and who at any rate troubled herself very little about them. When they were four years old, the parish authorities discovered how sadly neglected they were and that they spoke quite unintelligibly, and therefore sent them to a ‘children’s home’ in Seeland, where they were properly taken care of. At first they were extremely shy and reticent, and it was a long time before they felt at home with the other children. When I first saw them, they had in so far learnt the ordinary language that they were able to understand many everyday sentences spoken to them, and could do what they were told (e.g. ‘Take the footstool and put it in my room near the stove’), but they could not speak Danish and said very little[186] in the presence of anybody else. When they were by themselves they conversed pretty freely and in a completely unintelligible gibberish, as I had the opportunity to convince myself when standing behind a door one day when they thought they were not observed. Afterwards I got to be in a way good friends with them—they called me py-ma, py being their word for ‘smoke, smoking, pipe, cigar,’ so that I got my name from the chocolate cigars which I used to ingratiate myself with them—and then I got them to repeat words and phrases which their teacher had written out for me, and thus was enabled to write down everything phonetically.
The boys were twins, about five and a half years old when I met them, and so similar that even the people around them every day struggled to tell them apart. Their mother (a single woman) neglected them terribly when they were very young, leaving them to fend for themselves. For a long time, while their mother was sick in the hospital, they lived in a remote area with an old woman, who was said to be quite deaf and hardly paid any attention to them. When they turned four, the local authorities found out just how badly they were neglected and that they spoke almost unintelligibly, so they sent them to a ‘children’s home’ in Seeland, where they received proper care. At first, they were extremely shy and withdrawn, taking a long time to adjust to the other kids. When I first saw them, they had learned enough of the usual language to understand many everyday sentences directed at them and could follow instructions (e.g., “Take the footstool and put it in my room near the stove”), but they couldn’t speak Danish and said very little in front of anyone else. When they were alone, they chatted quite easily in a completely unintelligible gibberish, which I was able to witness one day while standing behind a door, thinking they didn’t see me. Later, I became sort of good friends with them—they called me py-ma, where py was their word for ‘smoke, smoking, pipe, cigar,’ so I got my name from the chocolate cigars I used to win them over—and then I encouraged them to repeat words and phrases that their teacher had written down for me, allowing me to transcribe everything phonetically.
An analysis of the sounds occurring in their words showed me that their vocal organs were perfectly normal. Most of the words were evidently Danish words, however much distorted and shortened; a voiceless l, which does not occur in Danish, and which I write here lh, was a very frequent sound. This, combined with an inclination to make many words end in -p, was enough to disguise words very effectually, as when sort (black) was made lhop. I shall give the children’s pronunciations of the names of some of their new playfellows, adding in brackets the Danish substratum: lhep (Svend), lhip (Vilhelm), lip (Elisabeth), lop (Charlotte), bap (Mandse); similarly the doctor was called dop. In many cases there was phonetic assimilation at a distance, as when milk (mælk) was called bep, flower (blomst) bop, light (lys) lhylh, sugar (sukker) lholh, cold (kulde) lhulh, sometimes also ulh, bed (seng) sæjs, fish (fisk) se-is.
An analysis of the sounds in their words showed that their vocal organs were completely normal. Most of the words were clearly Danish words, even though they were very distorted and shortened; a voiceless l, which doesn’t exist in Danish and which I write as lh, was a very common sound. This, along with a tendency to make many words end with -p, was enough to effectively disguise the words, as when sort (black) became lhop. I’ll provide the children’s pronunciations of the names of some of their new playmates, adding the Danish base in brackets: lhep (Svend), lhip (Vilhelm), lip (Elisabeth), lop (Charlotte), bap (Mandse); similarly, the doctor was called dop. In many cases, there was phonetic assimilation at a distance, as when milk (milk) was called bep, flower (flower) bop, light (lys) lhylh, sugar (sugar) lholh, cold (kulde) lhulh, sometimes also ulh, bed (sick) sæjs, fish (fish) se-is.
I subjoin a few complete sentences: nina enaj una enaj hæna mad enaj, ‘we shall not fetch food for the young rabbits’: nina rabbit (kanin), enaj negation (nej, no), repeated several times in each negative sentence, as in Old English and in Bantu languages, una young (unge). Bap ep dop, ‘Mandse has broken the hobby-horse,’ literally ‘Mandse horse piece.’ Hos ia bov lhalh, ‘brother’s trousers are wet, Maria,’ literally ‘trousers Maria brother water.’ The words are put together without any flexions, and the word order is totally different from that of Danish.
I’m adding a few complete sentences: nina enaj una enaj hæna mad enaj, ‘we won’t get food for the young rabbits’: nina rabbit (kanin), enaj negation (nej, no), repeated several times in each negative sentence, like in Old English and Bantu languages, una young (unge). Bap ep dop, ‘Mandse has broken the hobby-horse,’ literally ‘Mandse horse piece.’ Hos ia bov lhalh, ‘brother’s trousers are wet, Maria,’ literally ‘trousers Maria brother water.’ The words are put together without any endings, and the word order is completely different from Danish.
Only in one case was I unable to identify words that I understood either as ‘little language’ forms of Danish words or else as sound-imitations; but then it must be remembered that they spoke a good deal that neither I nor any of the people about them could make anything of. And then, unfortunately, when I began to study it, their language was already to a great extent ‘humanized’ in comparison to what it was when they first came to the children’s home. In fact, I noticed a constant progress during the short time I observed the boys, and in some of the last sentences I have noted, I even find the genitive case employed.
Only in one instance was I unable to recognize words that I understood either as "little language" versions of Danish words or as sound imitations; however, it's important to note that they spoke a lot that neither I nor the people around them could understand. Unfortunately, when I started to study it, their language had already become significantly "humanized" compared to how it was when they first arrived at the children's home. In fact, I observed a continuous improvement during the brief time I watched the boys, and in some of the last sentences I noted, I even found the genitive case being used.
The idiom of these twins cannot, of course, be called an independent, still less a complete or fully developed language; but if they were able to produce something so different from the language spoken around them at the beginning of the twentieth century and in a civilized country, there can to my mind be no doubt that Hale is right in his contention that children left to themselves even more than these were, in an uninhabited region where they were still not liable to die from hunger or cold, would be able to develop a language for their mutual understanding that might become so different from that of their parents as really to constitute a new stock of language. So that we can now pass to the other—geographical—side of what Hale advances in favour of his theory.
The way these twins communicate can't really be called an independent language, let alone a complete or fully developed one; however, if they managed to create something so different from the language spoken around them at the start of the twentieth century in a developed country, I have no doubt that Hale is right when he argues that children left to their own devices, even more than these twins were, in an uninhabited area where they wouldn't be at risk of dying from hunger or cold, could develop a language for communicating with each other that might become so distinct from their parents' language that it would essentially form a new language family. Now, we can move on to the other—geographical—aspect of Hale's argument supporting his theory.
So far as I can see, the facts here tally very well with the theory. Take, on the one hand, the Eskimo languages, spoken with astonishingly little variation from the east coast of Greenland to Alaska, an immense stretch of territory in which small children if left to themselves would be sure to die very soon indeed. Or take the Finnish-Ugrian languages in the other hemisphere, exhibiting a similar close relationship, though spread over wide areas. And then, on the other hand, the American languages already adduced by Hale. I do not pretend to any deeper knowledge of these languages; but from the most recent works of very able specialists I gather an impression of the utmost variety in phonetics, in grammatical structure and in vocabulary; see especially Roland B. Dixon and Alfred L. Kroeber, “The Native Languages of California,” in the American Anthropologist, 1903. Even where recent research seems to establish some kind of kinship between families hitherto considered as distinguished stocks (as in Dixon’s interesting paper, “Linguistic Relationships within the Shasta-Achomawi Stock,” XV Congrès des Américanistes, 1906) the similarities are still so incomplete, so capricious and generally so remote that they seem to support Hale’s explanation rather than a gradual splitting of the usual kind.
As far as I can tell, the facts here align very well with the theory. Take, for instance, the Eskimo languages, which are spoken with surprisingly little variation from the east coast of Greenland to Alaska, a vast area where small children left to their own devices would almost certainly perish quickly. Or consider the Finnish-Ugrian languages in the other hemisphere, showing a similar close connection despite being spread over large regions. On the other hand, we have the American languages already mentioned by Hale. I'm not claiming to have any more profound understanding of these languages; however, from the latest works of very knowledgeable specialists, I get the impression of significant variety in phonetics, grammatical structure, and vocabulary, particularly in Roland B. Dixon and Alfred L. Kroeber’s “The Native Languages of California,” published in the American Anthropologist, 1903. Even when recent studies seem to indicate some sort of kinship between families previously thought to be entirely distinct (as discussed in Dixon’s intriguing paper, “Linguistic Relationships within the Shasta-Achomawi Stock,” 15th Congress of Americanists, 1906), the similarities remain so incomplete, so unpredictable, and generally so distant that they seem to support Hale’s theory more than a gradual splitting typical of language evolution.
As for Brazil, I shall quote some interesting remarks from C. F. P. v. Martius, Beiträge zur Ethnographie u. Sprachenkunde Amerika’s, 1867, i. p. 46: “In Brazil we see a scant and unevenly distributed native population, uniform in bodily structure, temperament, customs and manner of living generally, but presenting a really astonishing diversity in language. A language is often confined to a few mutually related individuals; it is in truth a family heirloom and isolates its speakers from all other people so as to render any attempt at understanding impossible. On the vessel in which we travelled up the rivers in the interior of Brazil, we often, among twenty Indian rowers, could count only[188] three or four that were at all able to speak together ... they sat there side by side dumb and stupid.”
As for Brazil, I’ll share some interesting remarks from C. F. P. v. Martius, Beiträge zur Ethnographie u. Sprachenkunde Amerika’s, 1867, i. p. 46: “In Brazil, we observe a sparse and unevenly distributed native population, similar in physical appearance, temperament, customs, and overall way of life, but showcasing a truly astonishing diversity in language. A language is often limited to a small group of closely related individuals; it’s basically a family treasure that isolates its speakers from everyone else, making any attempt to communicate impossible. On the boat we took while traveling up the rivers in the interior of Brazil, we often found that out of twenty Indian rowers, we could count only[188] three or four who could actually speak to each other ... they sat there side by side, silent and unresponsive.”
Hale’s theory is worthy, then, of consideration, and now, at the close of our voyage round the world of children’s language, we have gained a post of vantage from which we can overlook the whole globe and see that the peculiar word-forms which children use in their ‘little language’ period can actually throw light on the distribution of languages and groups of languages over the great continents. Yes,
Hale’s theory deserves our attention. Now, as we finish our journey exploring children's language, we have a perspective from which we can view the entire landscape and recognize that the unique words and expressions children use during their 'little language' phase can actually help us understand how languages and language groups are spread across the continents. Yes,
CHAPTER XI
THE STRANGER
§ 1. The Substratum Theory. § 2. French u and Spanish h. § 3. Gothonic and Keltic. § 4. Etruscan and Indian Consonants. § 5. Gothonic Sound-shift. § 6. Natural and Specific Changes. § 7. Power of Substratum. § 8. Types of Race-mixture. § 9. Summary. § 10. General Theory of Loan-words. § 11. Classes of Loan-words. § 12. Influence on Grammar. § 13. Translation-loans.
§ 1. The Substratum Theory. § 2. French u and Spanish h. § 3. Gothic and Celtic. § 4. Etruscan and Indian Consonants. § 5. Gothic Sound Shift. § 6. Natural and Specific Changes. § 7. Power of Substratum. § 8. Types of Race Mixture. § 9. Summary. § 10. General Theory of Loanwords. § 11. Classes of Loanwords. § 12. Influence on Grammar. § 13. Translation Loans.
XI.—§ 1. The Substratum Theory.
It seems evident that if we wish to find out the causes of linguistic change, a fundamental division must be into—
It seems clear that if we want to understand the reasons behind changes in language, we need to make a basic distinction—
(1) Changes that are due to the transference of the language to new individuals, and
(1) Changes that happen when the language is passed on to new people, and
(2) Changes that are independent of such transference.
(2) Changes that are not related to that transfer.
It may not be easy in practice to distinguish the two classes, as the very essence of the linguistic life of each individual is a continual give-and-take between him and those around him; still, the division is in the main clear, and will consequently be followed in the present work.
It might not be easy in practice to separate the two groups, since the core of each person's linguistic experience is a constant interaction between them and the people around them. However, the distinction is generally clear and will therefore be maintained in this work.
The first class falls again naturally into two heads, according as the new individual does not, or does already, possess a language. With the former, i.e. with the native child learning his ‘mother-tongue,’ we have dealt at length in Book II, and we now proceed to an examination of the influence exercised on a language through its transference to individuals who are already in possession of another language—let us, for the sake of shortness, call them foreigners.
The first category can be divided into two groups, depending on whether the new individual has a language or not. For the former, that is, the native child learning their ‘mother tongue,’ we discussed this in detail in Book II. Now, we will examine the impact a language has when it's transferred to individuals who already have another language—let's just call them foreigners for simplicity.
While some earlier scholars denied categorically the existence of mixed languages, recent investigators have attached a very great importance to mixtures of languages, and have studied actually occurring mixtures of various degrees and characters with the greatest accuracy: I mention here only one name, that of Hugo Schuchardt, who combines profundity and width of knowledge with a truly philosophical spirit, though the form of his numerous scattered writings makes it difficult to gather a just idea of his views on many questions.
While some earlier scholars completely denied the existence of mixed languages, recent researchers have emphasized the significance of language mixtures and have studied real-life examples of these mixtures in various forms and degrees with great precision. I’ll mention just one name: Hugo Schuchardt, who blends deep understanding with broad knowledge and a genuinely philosophical approach, although the scattered nature of his many writings makes it hard to fully grasp his perspectives on several issues.
Many scholars have recently attached great importance to the subtler and more hidden influence exerted by one language on another in those cases in which a population abandons its original[192] language and adopts that of another race, generally in consequence of military conquest. In these cases the theory is that people keep many of their speech-habits, especially with regard to articulation and accent, even while using the vocabulary, etc., of the new language, which thus to a large extent is tinged by the old language. There is thus created what is now generally termed a substratum underlying the new language. As the original substratum modifying a language which gradually spreads over a large area varies according to the character of the tribes subjugated in different districts, this would account for many of those splittings-up of languages which we witness everywhere.
Many scholars have recently emphasized the subtle and often hidden influence that one language has on another when a population gives up its original[192] language and adopts a new one, typically due to military conquest. In these situations, the theory suggests that people retain many of their speech patterns, particularly in terms of pronunciation and accent, even while using the vocabulary and other aspects of the new language, which becomes significantly shaped by the original language. This results in what is now commonly referred to as a substratum that underlies the new language. Since the original substratum that modifies a language varies based on the characteristics of the tribes that are conquered in different regions, this helps explain many of the language divisions we observe everywhere.
Hirt goes so far as to think it possible by the help of existing dialect boundaries to determine the extensions of aboriginal languages (Idg 19).
Hirt even believes that it's possible to use existing dialect boundaries to figure out the reach of indigenous languages (Idg 19).
There is certainly something very plausible in this manner of viewing linguistic changes, for we all know from practical everyday experience that the average foreigner is apt to betray his nationality as soon as he opens his mouth: the Italian’s or the German’s English is just as different from the ‘real thing’ as, inversely, the Englishman’s Italian or German is different from the Italian or German of a native: the place of articulation, especially that of the tongue-tip consonants, the aspiration or want of aspiration of p, t, k, the voicing or non-voicing of b, d, g, the diphthongization or monophthongization of long vowels, the syllabification, various peculiarities in quantity and in tone-movements—all such things are apt to colour the whole acoustic impression of a foreigner’s speech in an acquired language, and it is, of course, a natural supposition that the aboriginal inhabitants of Europe and Asia were just as liable to transfer their speech habits to new languages as their descendants are nowadays. There is thus a priori a strong probability that linguistic substrata have exercised some influence on the development of conquering languages. But when we proceed to apply this natural inference to concrete examples of linguistic history, we shall see that the theory does not perhaps suffice to explain everything that its advocates would have it explain, and that there are certain difficulties which have not always been faced or appraised according to their real value. A consideration of these concrete examples will naturally lead up to a discussion of the general principles involved in the substratum theory.
There’s definitely something convincing about this way of looking at language changes. We all know from everyday experience that a typical foreigner tends to reveal their nationality as soon as they start speaking. The English spoken by an Italian or a German is quite different from native English, just like an English speaker’s Italian or German is distinct from what a native would say. Factors like the place of articulation, especially for tongue-tip consonants, whether the sounds p, t, k are aspirated or not, the voicing of b, d, g, the way long vowels are diphthongized or not, syllabification, and specific quirks in quantity and tone—all of these elements tend to influence the overall sound of a foreigner’s speech in a second language. It’s reasonable to assume that the original inhabitants of Europe and Asia likely transferred their speech habits to new languages just like their descendants do today. Therefore, there’s a strong chance that linguistic substrata have impacted the development of conquering languages. However, when we try to apply this natural assumption to specific cases in linguistic history, we’ll find that the theory might not fully explain everything its supporters hope it will, and there are some challenges that haven’t always been addressed properly. Examining these specific cases will naturally lead to a discussion of the general principles related to the substratum theory.
XI.—§ 2. French u and Spanish h.
First I shall mention Ascoli’s famous theory that French [y·] for Latin u, as in dur, etc., is due to Gallic influence, cf. Welsh i in din from dun, which presupposes a transition from u to [y].[193] Ascoli found a proof in the fact that Dutch also has the pronunciation [y·], e.g. in duur, on the old Keltic soil of the Belgæ, to which Schuchardt (SlD 126) added his observation of [y] in dialectal South German (Breisgau), in a district in which there had formerly been a strong Keltic element. This looks very convincing at first blush. On closer inspection, doubts arise on many points. The French transition cannot with certainty be dated very early, for then c in cure would have been palatalized and changed as c before i (Lenz, KZ 39. 46); also the treatment of the vowel in French words taken over into English, where it is not identified with the native [y], but becomes [iu], is best explained on the assumption that about 1200 A.D. the sound had not advanced farther on its march towards the front position than, say, the Swedish ‘mixed-round’ sound in hus. The district in which [y] is found for u is not coextensive with the Keltic possessions; there were very few Kelts in what is now Holland, and inversely South German [y] for u does not cover the whole Keltic domain; [y] is found outside the French territory proper, namely, in Franco-Provençal (where the substratum was Ligurian) and in Provençal (where there were very few Galli; cf. Wechssler, L 113). Thus the province of [y] is here too small and there too large to make the argument conclusive. Even more fatal is the objection that the Gallic transition from u to y is very uncertain (Pedersen, GKS 1. § 353). So much is certain, that the fronting of u was not a common Keltic transition, for it is not found in the Gaelic (Goidelic) branch.[42] On the other hand, the transition from [u] to [y] occurs elsewhere, independent of Keltic influence, as in Old Greek (cf. also the Swedish sound in hus): why cannot it, then, be independent in French?
First, I'll mention Ascoli’s well-known theory that the French [y] sound for the Latin u, as in dur, among others, is the result of Gallic influence, similar to the Welsh i in din derived from dun, which suggests a shift from u to [y].[193] Ascoli found evidence for this in the fact that Dutch also uses the pronunciation [y], as seen in duur, on the ancient Celtic land of the Belgæ. Schuchardt (SlD 126) added his observation of [y] in dialectal South German (Breisgau), in a region where there used to be a strong Celtic presence. This seems very convincing at first glance. However, upon closer inspection, many doubts arise. The French transition can't be pinpointed to an early date, because if it were so, the c in cure would have undergone palatalization and changed like c before i (Lenz, KZ 39. 46). Moreover, the treatment of the vowel in French words borrowed into English, where it is not recognized as the native [y], but rather becomes [iu], is best explained by the assumption that around 1200 CE, the sound had not progressed any further towards the front position than the Swedish ‘mixed-round’ sound in hus. The region where [y] is found for u doesn't perfectly overlap with the Celtic areas; there were very few Celts in what is now Holland, and conversely, South German [y] for u does not cover the entire Celtic domain; [y] can also be found outside of proper French territory, specifically in Franco-Provençal (where the underlying language was Ligurian) and in Provençal (where there were very few Gauls; cf. Wechssler, L 113). Thus, the area of [y] is too small here and too large there to make the argument definitive. An even more serious issue is the point that the Gallic shift from u to y is very uncertain (Pedersen, GKS 1. § 353). What is certain is that the fronting of u was not a common Celtic change, as it does not occur in the Gaelic (Goidelic) branch.[42] On the flip side, the transition from [u] to [y] happens elsewhere, independent of Celtic influence, such as in Old Greek (and similarly in the Swedish sound in hus): so why can't it be independent in French too?
Another case adduced by Ascoli is initial h instead of Latin f in the country anciently occupied by the Iberians. Now, Basque has no f sound at all in any connexion; if the same aversion to f had been the cause of the Spanish substitution of h for f, we should expect the substitution to have been made from the moment when Latin was first spoken in Hispania, and we should expect it to be found in all positions and connexions. But what do we find instead? First, that Old Spanish had f in many cases where modern Spanish has h (i.e. really no sound at all), and this cannot be[194] altogether ascribed to ‘Latinizing scribes.’ On the contrary, the transition f > h seems to have taken place many centuries after the Roman invasion, since the Spanish-speaking Jews of Salonika, who emigrated from Spain about 1500, have to this day preserved the f sound among other archaic traits (see F. Hanssen, Span. Gramm. 45; Wiener, Modern Philology, June 1903, p. 205). And secondly, that f has been kept in certain connexions; thus, before [w], as in fuí, fuiste, fué, etc., before r and l, as in fruto, flor, etc. This certainly is inexplicable if the cause of f > h had been the want of power on the part of the aborigines to produce the f sound at all, while it is simple enough if we assume a later transition, taking place possibly at first between two vowels, with a subsequent generalization of the f-less forms. Diez is here, as not infrequently, more sensible than some of his successors (see Gramm. d. roman. spr., 4th ed., 1. 283 f., 373 f.).
Another case presented by Ascoli is the initial h instead of the Latin f in the region once occupied by the Iberians. Basque doesn't have an f sound at all in any situation; if the same dislike for f led to the Spanish replacing f with h, we would expect this substitution to have happened right when Latin was first spoken in Hispania, and we would expect to see it in all contexts. But what do we actually see? First, Old Spanish had f in many instances where modern Spanish uses h (which essentially means no sound at all), and this can't be entirely blamed on ‘Latinizing scribes.’ In fact, the change from f to h seems to have occurred many centuries after the Roman invasion, since the Spanish-speaking Jews of Salonika, who left Spain around 1500, still preserve the f sound along with other archaic features (see F. Hanssen, Span. Gramm. 45; Wiener, Modern Philology, June 1903, p. 205). Secondly, f remains in certain contexts; for example, before [w], as in fuí, fuiste, fué, etc., and before r and l, as in fruto, flor, etc. This is certainly puzzling if the reason for f turning into h was because the natives couldn't produce the f sound at all, while it makes perfect sense if we assume a later transition, which possibly first occurred between two vowels, with a later broadening of the f-less forms. Diez is here, as often, more reasonable than some of his successors (see Gramm. d. roman. spr., 4th ed., 1. 283 f., 373 f.).
XI.—§ 3. Gothonic and Keltic.
Feist (KI 480 ff.: cf. PBB 36. 307 ff., 37. 112 ff.) applies the substratum theory to the Gothonic (Germanic) languages. The Gothons are autochthonous in northern Europe, and very little mixed with other races; they must have immigrated just after the close of the glacial period. But the arrival of Aryan (Indogermanic) tribes cannot be placed earlier than about 2000 B.C.; they made the original inhabitants give up their own language. The nation that thus Aryanized the Gothons cannot have been other than the Kelts; their supremacy over the Gothons is proved by several loan-words for cultural ideas or state offices, such as Gothic reiks ‘king,’ andbahts ‘servant.’ The Aryan language which the Kelts taught the Gothons was subjected in the process to considerable changes, the old North Europeans pronouncing the new language in accordance with their previous speech habits; instead of taking over the free Aryan accent, they invariably stressed the initial syllable, and they made sad havoc of the Aryan flexion.
Feist (KI 480 ff.: cf. PBB 36. 307 ff., 37. 112 ff.) applies the substratum theory to the Gothic (Germanic) languages. The Goths are native to northern Europe and mixed very little with other races; they likely immigrated just after the end of the Ice Age. However, the arrival of Aryan (Indo-European) tribes didn't happen until around 2000 BCE; they caused the original inhabitants to abandon their own language. The people who Aryanized the Goths were likely the Celts; their dominance over the Goths is demonstrated by several borrowed words relating to cultural concepts or government roles, such as Gothic reiks ‘king’ and andbahts ‘servant.’ The Aryan language that the Celts taught the Goths underwent significant changes, as the old North Europeans pronounced it according to their previous speech patterns; instead of adopting the free Aryan accent, they consistently stressed the first syllable and greatly altered the Aryan inflections.
The theory does not bear close inspection. The number of Keltic loan-words is not great enough for us to infer such an overpowering ascendancy on the part of the Kelts as would force the subjected population to make a complete surrender of their own tongue. Neither in number nor in intrinsic significance can these loans be compared with the French loans in English: and yet the Normans did not succeed in substituting their own language for English. Besides, if the theory were true, we should not merely see a certain number of Keltic loan-words, but the whole speech, the complete vocabulary as well as the entire grammar, would be Keltic; yet as a matter of fact there is a wide gulf between Keltic[195] and Gothonic, and many details, lexical and grammatical, in the latter group resemble other Aryan languages rather than Keltic. The stressing of the first syllable is said to be due to the aboriginal language. If that were so, it would mean that this population, in adopting the new speech, had at once transferred its own habit of stressing the first syllable to all the new words, very much as Icelanders are apt to do nowadays. But this is not in accordance with well established facts in the Gothonic languages: we know that when the consonant shift took place, it found the stress on the same syllables as in Sanskrit, and that it was this stress on many middle or final syllables that afterwards changed many of the shifted consonants from voiceless to voiced (Verner’s law).[43] This fact in itself suffices to prove that the consonant shift and the stress shift cannot have taken place simultaneously, and thus cannot be due to one and the same cause, as supposed by Feist. Nor can the havoc wrought in the old flexions be due to the inability of a new people to grasp the minute nuances and intricate system of another language than its own; for in that case too we should have something like the formless ‘Pidgin English’ from the very beginning, whereas the oldest Gothonic languages still preserve a great many old flexions and subtle syntactical rules which have since disappeared. As a matter of fact, many of the flexions of primitive Aryan were much better preserved in Gothonic languages than in Keltic.
The theory doesn’t hold up under scrutiny. The number of Keltic loanwords isn’t large enough for us to conclude that the Kelts had such overwhelming dominance that the subjected population completely surrendered their own language. The quantity and significance of these loans can’t compare to the French loans in English, yet the Normans weren’t able to replace their language with English. Moreover, if the theory were accurate, we wouldn’t just see a certain number of Keltic loanwords; the entire language—including the complete vocabulary and grammar—would be Keltic. In reality, there’s a significant gap between Keltic[195] and Gothonic, with many details, both lexical and grammatical, in the latter group resembling other Aryan languages more than Keltic. The emphasis on the first syllable is said to come from the original language. If that were the case, it would imply that this population, while adopting the new language, immediately transferred its own habit of stressing the first syllable to all new words, similar to how Icelanders tend to do today. However, this doesn’t align with established facts in the Gothonic languages: we know that during the consonant shift, stress was placed on the same syllables as in Sanskrit, and this stress on many middle or final syllables later changed many of the shifted consonants from voiceless to voiced (Verner’s law).[43] This fact alone is enough to demonstrate that the consonant shift and the stress shift could not have occurred at the same time and therefore cannot be attributed to the same cause, as Feist suggested. Additionally, the disruption caused in the old flexions cannot be attributed to a new population’s inability to grasp the subtle nuances and complex systems of another language; otherwise, we would expect to see a kind of shapeless ‘Pidgin English’ from the start, while the oldest Gothonic languages still maintain many old flexions and intricate syntactical rules that have since disappeared. In fact, many of the flexions of primitive Aryan were much better preserved in Gothonic languages than in Keltic.
XI.—§ 4. Etruscan and Indian Consonants.
In another place in the same work (KI 373) Feist speaks of the Etruscan language, and says that this had only one kind of stop consonants, represented by the letters k (c), t, p, besides the aspirated stops kh, th, ph, which in some instances correspond to Latin and Greek tenues. This, he says, reminds one very strongly of the sound system of High German (oberdeutschen) dialects, and more particularly of those spoken in the Alps. Feist here (and in PBB 36. 340 ff.) maintains that these sounds go back to a Pre-Gothonic Alpine population, which he identifies with the ancient Rhætians; and he sees in this a strong support of a linguistic connexion between the Rhætians and Etruscans. He finds further striking analogies between the Gothonic and the Armenian sound systems; the predilection for voiceless stops and aspirated sounds in Etruscan, in the domain of the ancient Rhætians and in Asia Minor is accordingly ascribed to the speech habits of one and the same aboriginal race.
In another section of the same work (KI 373), Feist discusses the Etruscan language and states that it had only one type of stop consonants, represented by the letters k (c), t, p, along with the aspirated stops kh, th, ph, which in some cases correspond to Latin and Greek tenuis. He notes that this strongly resembles the sound system of High German (High German) dialects, particularly those spoken in the Alps. Feist argues here (and in PBB 36. 340 ff.) that these sounds trace back to a Pre-Gothonic Alpine population, which he connects with the ancient Rhætians; he views this as strong evidence of a linguistic link between the Rhætians and the Etruscans. He also finds notable similarities between the Gothonic and Armenian sound systems; the preference for voiceless stops and aspirated sounds in Etruscan, in the area of the ancient Rhætians and in Asia Minor, is attributed to the speech patterns of the same aboriginal race.
Here, too, there are many points to which I must take exception. It is not quite certain that the usual interpretation of Etruscan letters is correct; in fact, much may be said in favour of the hypothesis that the letters rendered p, t, k stand really for the sounds of b, d, g, and that those transcribed ph, th, kh (or Greek φ, θ, χ) represent ordinary p, t, k. However this may be, Feist seems to be speaking here almost in the same breath of the first (or common Gothonic) shift and of the second (or specially High German) shift, although they are separated from each other by several centuries and neither cover the same geographical ground nor lead to the same phonetic result. Neither Armenian nor primitive Gothonic can be said to be averse to voiced stops, for in both we find voiced b, d, g for the old ‘mediæ aspiratæ.’ And in both languages the old voiceless stops became at first probably not aspirates, but simply voiceless spirants, as in English father, thing, and Scotch loch. Further, it should be noted that we do not find the tendency to unvoice stops and to pronounce affricates either in Rhæto-Romanic (Ladin) or in Tuscan Italian; both languages have unaspirated p, t, k and voiced b, d, g, and the Tuscan pronunciation of c between two vowels as [x], thus in la casa [la xa·sa], but not in a casa = [akka·sa], could not be termed ‘aspiration’ except by a non-phonetician; this pronunciation can hardly have anything to do with the old Etruscan language.
There are many points here that I must disagree with. It's not entirely certain that the standard interpretation of Etruscan letters is accurate; actually, there's a lot of evidence supporting the idea that the letters represented by p, t, k really correspond to the sounds of b, d, g, and that those transcribed as ph, th, kh (or Greek φ, θ, χ) actually represent regular p, t, k. Regardless, Feist seems to be discussing the first (or common Gothic) shift and the second (or specifically High German) shift almost interchangeably, even though they are separated by several centuries, don't cover the same geographic areas, and don't lead to the same phonetic outcomes. Neither Armenian nor primitive Gothic can be said to reject voiced stops, because both have voiced b, d, g corresponding to the old ‘mediæ aspiratæ.’ In both languages, the old voiceless stops likely transitioned not to aspirates, but to simple voiceless spirants, like in English father, thing, and Scotch loch. Additionally, it should be highlighted that we don't see a tendency to unvoice stops or to pronounce affricates in Rhæto-Romanic (Ladin) or in Tuscan Italian; both languages feature unaspirated p, t, k and voiced b, d, g, and the Tuscan pronunciation of c between two vowels as [x], as in la casa [la xa·sa], but not in a casa = [akka·sa], wouldn't accurately be called ‘aspiration’ unless by someone who isn’t a phonetician; this pronunciation probably doesn’t relate to the old Etruscan language at all.
According to a theory which is very widely accepted, the Dravidian languages exerted a different influence on the Aryan languages when the Aryans first set foot on Indian soil, in making them adopt the ‘cacuminal’ (or ‘inverted’) sounds ḍ, ṭ, ṇ with ḍh and ṭh, which were not found in primitive Aryan. But even this theory does not seem to be quite proof against objections. It is easy to admit that natives accustomed to one place of articulation of their d, t, n will unconsciously produce the d, t, n of a new language they are learning in the same place; but then they will do it everywhere. Here, however, both Dravidian and Sanskrit possess pure dental d, t, n, pronounced with the tip of the tongue touching the upper teeth, besides cacuminal ḍ, ṭ, ṇ, in which it touches the gum or front part of the hard palate. In Sanskrit we find that the cacuminal articulation occurs only under very definite conditions, chiefly under the influence of r. Now, a trilled tongue-point r in most languages, for purely physiological reasons which are easily accounted for, tends to be pronounced further back than ordinary dentals; and it is therefore quite natural that it should spontaneously exercise an influence on neighbouring dentals by drawing them back to its own point of articulation. This may have happened in India quite independently of the occurrence of the same sounds in other vernaculars, just as we find[197] the same influence very pronouncedly in Swedish and in East Norwegian, where d, t, n, s are cacuminal (supradental) in such words as bord, kort, barn, först, etc. According to Grandgent (Neuere Sprachen, 2. 447), d in his own American English is pronounced further back than elsewhere before and after r, as in dry, hard; but in none of these cases need we conjure up an extinct native population to account for a perfectly natural development.
According to a widely accepted theory, the Dravidian languages had a different impact on the Aryan languages when the Aryans first arrived in India, making them adopt the ‘cacuminal’ (or ‘inverted’) sounds ḍ, ṭ, ṇ along with ḍh and ṭh, which were not present in primitive Aryan. However, this theory doesn’t seem to be entirely free from criticism. It’s easy to recognize that people familiar with one place of articulation for their d, t, n will unconsciously produce the d, t, n of a new language they are learning in the same way; but they would do this everywhere. Here, both Dravidian and Sanskrit feature pure dental d, t, n, articulated with the tip of the tongue touching the upper teeth, in addition to the cacuminal ḍ, ṭ, ṇ, where it touches the gum or the front of the hard palate. In Sanskrit, the cacuminal articulation appears only under very specific conditions, mainly influenced by r. A trilled tongue-point r in most languages tends to be pronounced further back than regular dentals for purely physiological reasons that are easy to explain; therefore, it’s quite natural that it would influence nearby dentals by pulling them back to its own place of articulation. This could have occurred in India independently of the presence of similar sounds in other languages, much like we see[197] the same influence very noticeably in Swedish and East Norwegian, where d, t, n, s are cacuminal (supradental) in words like bord, kort, barn, först, etc. According to Grandgent (Neuere Sprachen, 2. 447), d in his own American English is pronounced further back than in other accents before and after r, as in dry, hard; but in none of these instances do we need to invoke an extinct native population to explain a perfectly natural development.
XI.—§ 5. Gothonic Sound-shift.
Since the time of Grimm the Gothonic consonant changes have harassed the minds of linguists; they became the sound-shift and were considered as something sui generis, something out of the common, which required a different explanation from all other sound-shifts. Several explanations have been offered, to some of which we shall have to revert later; none, however, has been so popular as that which attributes the shift to an ethnic substratum. This explanation is accepted by Hirt, Feist, Meillet and others, though their agreement ceases when the question is asked: What nationality and what language can have been the cause of the change? While some cautiously content themselves with saying that there must have been an original population, others guess at Kelts, Finns, Rhætians or Etrurians—all fascinating names to minds of a speculative turn.
Since the time of Grimm, the Gothonic consonant changes have puzzled linguists; they became the sound shift and were seen as something sui generis, something unusual that needed a different explanation than all other sound shifts. Several explanations have been put forward, and we'll revisit some of them later; however, none has been as widely accepted as the one that attributes the shift to an ethnic substrate. This explanation is supported by Hirt, Feist, Meillet, and others, although their consensus breaks down when the question arises: What nationality and what language could have caused the change? While some carefully state that there must have been an original population, others speculate about Celts, Finns, Raetians, or Etruscans—all intriguing names for those with a speculative mindset.
The latest treatment of the question that I have seen is by K. Wessely (in Anthropos, XII-XIII 540 ff., 1917). He assumes the following different substrata, beginning with the most recent: a Rhæto-Romanic for the Upper-German shift, a Keltic for the common High-German shift, and a Finnic for the first Germanic shift with the Vernerian law. This certainly has the merit of neatly separating sound-shifts that are chronologically apart, except with regard to the last-mentioned shift, for here the Finns are made responsible for two changes that were probably separated by centuries and had really no traits in common. It is curious to see the transition from p to f and from t to þ—both important elements of the first shift—here ascribed to Finnic, for as a matter of fact the two sounds f and þ are not found in present-day Finnish, and were not found in primitive Ugro-Finnic.[44]
The most recent analysis of the question I’ve seen is by K. Wessely (in Anthropos, XII-XIII 540 ff., 1917). He proposes the following different underlying languages, starting with the most recent: a Rhæto-Romanic for the Upper-German shift, a Keltic for the common High-German shift, and a Finnic for the first Germanic shift with the Vernerian law. This approach does a good job of clearly distinguishing sound shifts that are chronologically separate, except for the last shift mentioned, where he holds the Finns accountable for two changes that were likely separated by centuries and really had no common characteristics. It’s interesting to see the transition from p to f and from t to þ—both critical elements of the first shift—attributed to Finnic here, because in reality, the sounds f and þ are not found in modern Finnish and didn’t exist in early Ugro-Finnic.[44]
When Wessely thinks that the change discovered by Verner is also due to Finnic influence, his reasons are two: an alleged parallelism with the Finnic consonant change which he terms ‘Setälä’s law,’ and then the assumption that such a shift, conditioned by the place of the accent, is foreign to the Aryan race (p. 543). When, however, we find a closely analogous case only four hundred years ago in English, where a number of consonants were voiced according to the place of the stress,[45] are we also to say that it is foreign to the Anglo-Saxon race and therefore presupposes some non-Aryan substratum? As a matter of fact, the parallelism between the English and the old Gothonic shift is much closer than that between the latter and the Finnic consonant-gradation: in English and in old Gothonic the stress place is decisive, while in the Finnic shift it is very doubtful whether stress goes for anything; in both English and old Gothonic the same consonants are affected (spirants, in English also the combinations [tʃ, ks], but otherwise no stops), while in Finnic it is the stops that are primarily affected. In old Gothonic, as in English, the change is simply voicing, and we have nothing corresponding to the reduction of double consonants and of consonant groups in Finnic pappi / papin, otta / otat, kukka / kukan, parempi / paremman, jalka / jalan, etc. On the whole, Wessely’s paper shows how much easier it is to advance hypotheses than to find truths.
When Wessely believes that the change noted by Verner is also a result of Finnic influence, he gives two reasons: a supposed similarity to the Finnic consonant change he calls ‘Setälä’s law,’ and the idea that such a shift, based on the position of the accent, is not typical of the Aryan race (p. 543). However, when we see a closely related case just four hundred years ago in English, where several consonants were voiced depending on where the stress fell, are we then supposed to say that this is foreign to the Anglo-Saxon race and therefore implies some non-Aryan foundation? In reality, the similarity between English and the old Gothonic shift is much stronger than between that and the Finnic consonant gradation: in both English and old Gothonic, the stress position is crucial, while it's unclear if stress plays any role in the Finnic shift; in both English and old Gothonic, the same consonants are affected (fricatives, in English also the combinations [tʃ, ks], but no stops otherwise), whereas in Finnic it is the stops that are primarily impacted. In old Gothonic, like in English, the change is simply voicing, and we don’t see anything that resembles the reduction of double consonants and consonant groups found in Finnic pappi / papin, otta / otat, kukka / kukan, parempi / paremman, jalka / jalan, etc. Overall, Wessely’s paper illustrates how much easier it is to propose theories than to establish facts.
XI.—§ 6. Natural and Specific Changes.
Meillet (MSL 19. 164 and 172; cf. Bulletin 19. 50 and Germ. 18) thinks that we must distinguish between such phonetic changes as are natural, i.e. due to universal tendencies, and such as are peculiar to certain languages. In the former class he includes the opening and the voicing of intervocalic consonants; there is also a natural and universal tendency to shorten long words and to slur the pronunciation towards the end of a word. In the latter class (changes which are peculiar to and characteristic of a particular language) he reckons the consonant shifts in Gothonic and Armenian, the weakening of consonants in Greek and in Iranian, the tendency to unround back vowels in English and Slav. Such changes can only be accounted for on the supposition of a change of language: they must be due to people whose own language had habits foreign to Aryan. Unfortunately, Meillet cannot tell us how to measure the difference between natural and[199] peculiar shifts; he admits that they cannot always be clearly separated; and when he says that there are some extreme cases ‘relativement nets,’ such as those named above, I must confess that I do not see why the change from the sharp tenuis, as in Fr. p, t, k, to a slightly aspirated sound, as in English (Bulletin 19. 50),[46] or the relaxing of the closure which finally led to the sounds of [f, þ, x], should be less ‘natural’ than a hundred other changes and should require the calling in of a deus ex machina in the shape of an aboriginal population. The unrounding of E. u in hut, etc., to which he alludes, began about 1600—what ethnic substratum does that postulate, and is any such required, more than for, say, the diphthongizing of long a and o?
Meillet (MSL 19. 164 and 172; cf. Bulletin 19. 50 and Germ. 18) believes that we need to differentiate between phonetic changes that are natural, meaning those caused by universal tendencies, and those that are unique to specific languages. In the first category, he includes the opening and voicing of consonants between vowels; there's also a natural, universal tendency to shorten long words and to slur the pronunciation toward the end of a word. In the second category (changes that are characteristic of a particular language), he includes the consonant shifts in Gothic and Armenian, the weakening of consonants in Greek and Iranian, and the tendency to unround back vowels in English and Slavic languages. These changes can only be explained by a change of language: they must originate from people whose own language had characteristics that were foreign to the Aryan languages. Unfortunately, Meillet doesn't explain how to measure the difference between natural and unique shifts; he acknowledges that they can't always be clearly distinguished. When he notes that there are some extreme cases that are "relativement nets," like the ones mentioned above, I must admit that I don't understand why the change from the sharp tenuis, as in French p, t, k, to a slightly aspirated sound, like in English (Bulletin 19. 50), or the relaxing of the closure that eventually resulted in the sounds [f, þ, x], should be considered less "natural" than countless other changes and require the intervention of an aboriginal population. The unrounding of English u in hut, etc., which he references, began around 1600—what ethnic background does that imply, and is any such background necessary, more than for example, the diphthongizing of long a and o?
Meillet (MSL 19. 172) also says that there are certain speech sounds which are, as it were, natural and are found in nearly all languages, thus p, t, k, n, m, and among the vowels a, i, u, while other sounds are found only in some languages, such as the two English th sounds or, among the vowels, Fr. u and Russian y. But when he infers that sounds of the former class are stable and remain unchanged for many centuries, whereas those of the latter are apt to change and disappear, the conclusion is not borne out by actual facts. The consonants p, t, k, n, m are said to have remained unchanged in many Aryan languages from the oldest times till the present day—that is, only initially before vowels, which is a very important reservation and really amounts to an admission that in the vast majority of cases these sounds are just as unstable as most other things on this planet, especially if we remember that nothing could well be more unstable than k before front vowels, as seen in It. [tʃ] and Sp. [þ] in cielo, Fr. [s] in ciel, and [ʃ] in chien, Eng. and Swedish [tʃ] in chin, kind, Norwegian [c] in kind, Russian [tʃ] in četyre ‘four’ and [s] in sto ‘hundred,’ etc. As an example of a typically unstable sound Meillet gives bilabial f, and it is true that this sound is so rare that it is difficult to find it represented in any language; the reason is simply that the upper teeth normally protrude above the lower jaw, and that consequently the lower lip articulates easily against the upper teeth, with the natural result that where we should theoretically expect the bilabial f the labiodental f takes its place. And s, which is found almost universally, and should therefore on Meillet’s theory be very stable, is often seen to change into h or [x] or to disappear. On the whole, then, we see that it is not the ‘naturalness’ or universality of a[200] consonant so much as its position in the syllable and word that decides the question ‘change or no change.’ The relation between stability and naturalness is seen, perhaps, most clearly in such an instance as long [a·]: this sound is so natural that English, from the oldest Aryan to present-day speech, has never been without it; yet at no time has it been stable, but as soon as one class of words with long [a·] is changed, a new class steps into its shoes: (1) Aryan māter, now mother; (2) lengthening of a short a before n: gās, brāhta, now goose, brought; (3) levelling of ai: stān, now stone; (4) lengthening of short a: cāld, now cold; (5) later lengthening of a in open syllable: nāme, now [neim]; (6) mod. carve, calm, path and others from various sources; and (7) vulgar speech is now developing new levellings of diphthongs in [ma·l, pa·(ə)] for mile, power.
Meillet (MSL 19. 172) also notes that there are certain speech sounds that are somewhat natural and are found in nearly all languages, such as p, t, k, n, m, and among the vowels a, i, u, while other sounds only occur in some languages, like the two English th sounds or, among the vowels, French u and Russian y. However, when he concludes that sounds of the first type are stable and remain unchanged for many centuries, while those of the latter are likely to change and vanish, this conclusion isn't supported by actual evidence. The consonants p, t, k, n, m have been said to remain unchanged in many Aryan languages from ancient times to now—that is, only at the beginning of vowels, which is a very important limitation and indicates that in most cases these sounds are just as unstable as many other elements in the world, especially when we consider that nothing is more unstable than k before front vowels, as shown in Italian [tʃ] and Spanish [þ] in cielo, French [s] in ciel, and [ʃ] in chien, English and Swedish [tʃ] in chin, kind, Norwegian [c] in kind, Russian [tʃ] in četyre ‘four’ and [s] in sto ‘hundred,’ etc. As an example of a typically unstable sound, Meillet cites the bilabial f, and it is true that this sound is so rare that it's hard to find it represented in any language; the reason is simply that the upper teeth typically protrude above the lower jaw, which makes it easy for the lower lip to touch the upper teeth, resulting in the labiodental f taking the place of the theoretical bilabial f. And s, which is almost universally found and should, according to Meillet's theory, be very stable, often changes into h or [x] or disappears entirely. Overall, we see that it’s not so much the ‘naturalness’ or universality of a consonant but rather its position in the syllable and word that determines whether it will change or remain the same. The connection between stability and naturalness is perhaps clearest in the case of long [a·]: this sound is so natural that English, from ancient Aryan to modern speech, has never been without it; yet it has never been stable, and as soon as one type of word with long [a·] changes, another type takes its place: (1) Aryan māter, now mother; (2) lengthening of a short a before n: gās, brāhta, now goose, brought; (3) leveling of ai: stān, now stone; (4) lengthening of short a: cāld, now cold; (5) later lengthening of a in open syllables: nāme, now [neim]; (6) modern carve, calm, path, and others from various sources; and (7) colloquial speech is now developing new levels of diphthongs in [ma·l, pa·(ə)] for mile, power.
XI.—§ 7. Power of Substratum.
V. Bröndal has made the attempt to infuse new blood into the substratum theory through his book, Substrater og Laan i Romansk og Germansk (Copenhagen, 1917). The effect of a substratum, according to him, is the establishment of a ‘constant idiom,’ working “without regard to place and time” (p. 76) and changing, for instance, Latin into Old French, Old French into Classical French, and Classical French into Modern French. His task, then, is to find out certain tendencies operating at these various periods; these are ascribed to the Keltic substratum, and Bröndal then passes in review a great many languages spoken in districts where Kelts are known to have lived in former times, in order to find the same tendencies there. If he succeeds in this to his own satisfaction, it is only because the ‘tendencies’ established are partly so vague that they will fit into any language, partly so ill-defined phonetically that it becomes possible to press different, nay, in some cases even directly contrary movements into the same class. But considerations of space forbid me to enter on a detailed criticism here. I must content myself with taking exception to the principle that the effect of the ethnic substratum may show itself several generations after the speech substitution took place. If Keltic ever had ‘a finger in the pie,’ it must have been immediately on the taking over of the new language. An influence exerted in such a time of transition may have far-reaching after-effects, like anything else in history, but this is not the same thing as asserting that a similar modification of the language may take place after the lapse of some centuries as an effect of the same cause. Suppose we have a series of manuscripts, A, B, C, D, etc., of which B is copied from A, C from B,[201] etc., and that B has an error which is repeated in all the following copies; now, if M suddenly agrees with A (which the copyist has never seen), we infer that this reading is independent of A. In the same way with a language: each individual learns it from his contemporaries, but has no opportunity of hearing those who have died before his own time. It is possible that the transition from a to æ, in Old English (as in fæder) is due to Keltic influence, but when we find, many centuries later, that a is changed into [æ] (the present sound) in words which had not æ in OE., e.g. crab, hallow, act, it is impossible to ascribe this, as Bröndal does, to a ‘constant Keltic idiom’ working through many generations who had never spoken or heard any Keltic. ‘Atavism,’ which skips over one or more generations, is unthinkable here, for words and sounds are nothing but habits acquired by imitation.
V. Bröndal has tried to breathe new life into the substratum theory with his book, Substrater og Laan i Romansk og Germansk (Copenhagen, 1917). He argues that the impact of a substratum creates a ‘constant idiom’ that functions “without regard to place and time” (p. 76), transforming Latin into Old French, Old French into Classical French, and Classical French into Modern French. His goal is to identify certain trends operating during these various periods, which he links to the Keltic substratum. Bröndal reviews numerous languages spoken in areas where Kelts are known to have lived in the past to find similar trends. If he finds this satisfying, it's mainly because the ‘trends’ he identifies are often so vague that they could apply to any language, and partly so poorly defined phonetically that it's possible to categorize different, even opposing movements together. However, space constraints prevent me from providing a detailed critique here. I can only disagree with the idea that the impact of an ethnic substratum can appear several generations after the new language has been adopted. If Keltic had any influence, it must have occurred right when the new language was introduced. An influence felt during such a transitional period can have lasting effects, like many other historical events, but that doesn’t mean similar changes in the language could occur centuries later due to the same cause. For example, consider a series of manuscripts, A, B, C, D, etc., where B is a copy of A, C is taken from B, [201] and so forth, and B contains an error that is repeated in all subsequent copies. If M suddenly matches A (which the copyist has never seen), we conclude that this reading is independent of A. It's similar with language: each person learns it from their contemporaries, having no chance to hear those who lived before them. It’s possible that the shift from a to æ in Old English (as in fæder) is influenced by Keltic, but when we observe, many centuries later, that a has changed to [æ] (the current sound) in words that didn't have æ in Old English, like crab, hallow, and act, it’s incorrect to attribute this, as Bröndal does, to a ‘constant Keltic idiom’ influencing generations who never spoke or heard Keltic. ‘Atavism,’ which skips one or more generations, is impossible here because words and sounds are merely habits learned through imitation.
So far, then, our discussion of the substratum theory has brought us no very positive results. One of the reasons why the theories put forward of late years have been on the whole so unsatisfactory is that they deal with speech substitutions that have taken place so far back that absolutely nothing, or practically nothing, is known of those displaced languages which are supposed to have coloured languages now existing. What do we know beyond the mere name of Ligurians or Veneti or Iberians? Of the Pre-Germanic and Pre-Keltic peoples we know not even the names. As to the old Kelts who play such an eminent rôle in all these speculations, we know extremely little about their language at this distant date, and it is possible that in some cases, at any rate, the Kelts may have been only comparatively small armies conquering this or that country for a time, but leaving as few linguistic traces behind them as, say, the armies of Napoleon in Russia or the Cimbri and Teutoni in Italy. Linguists have turned from the ‘glottogonic’ speculations of Bopp and his disciples, only to indulge in dialectogonic speculations of exactly the same visionary type.
So far, our discussion of substratum theory hasn't resulted in much clarity. One reason the theories proposed in recent years have generally been unsatisfactory is that they address speech substitutions that occurred so long ago that we know almost nothing about the displaced languages that supposedly influenced the languages we have today. What do we really know beyond the names like Ligurians, Veneti, or Iberians? We don’t even have the names of the Pre-Germanic and Pre-Celtic peoples. As for the ancient Celts, who play such a significant role in all these theories, our knowledge of their language from that long ago is very limited. It's possible that, in some cases, the Celts were just relatively small groups that conquered certain regions temporarily, leaving behind as few linguistic traces as, say, Napoleon’s army in Russia or the Cimbri and Teutoni in Italy. Linguists have moved away from the ‘glottogonic’ theories of Bopp and his followers, only to engage in dialectogonic theories of the same speculative nature.
XI.—§ 8. Types of Race-mixture.
It would be a great mistake to suppose that the conditions, and consequently the linguistic results, are always the same, whenever two different races meet and assimilate. The chief classes of race-mixture have been thus described in a valuable paper by George Hempl (Transactions of the American Philological Association, XXIX, p. 31 ff., 1898).
It would be a big mistake to think that the conditions, and therefore the language outcomes, are always the same whenever two different races come together and blend. The main types of race-mixing have been outlined in an important paper by George Hempl (Transactions of the American Philological Association, XXIX, p. 31 ff., 1898).
(1) The conquerors are a comparatively small body, who become the ruling class, but are not numerous enough to impose their language on the country. They are forced to learn the language of their subjects, and their grandchildren may come to know that[202] language better than they know the language of their ancestors. The language of the conquerors dies out, but bequeaths to the native language its terms pertaining to government, the army, and those other spheres of life that the conquerors had specially under their control. Historic examples are the cases of the Goths in Italy and Spain, the Franks in Gaul, the Normans in France and the Norman-French in England. Of course, the greater the number of the conquerors and the longer they had been close neighbours of the people they conquered, or maintained the bonds that united them to their mother-country, the greater was their influence. Thus the influence of the Franks on the language of France was greater than that of the Goths on the language of Spain, and the influence of the Norman-French in England was greater still. Yet in each case the minority ultimately succumbed.
(1) The conquerors are a relatively small group who become the ruling class, but they are not numerous enough to impose their language on the country. They have to learn the language of their subjects, and their grandchildren might end up knowing that[202] language better than the language of their ancestors. The conquerors' language eventually fades away but leaves behind terms related to government, the military, and other areas of life that they specifically controlled in the native language. Historical examples include the Goths in Italy and Spain, the Franks in Gaul, the Normans in France, and Norman-French in England. Naturally, the larger the group of conquerors and the longer they lived alongside the people they conquered, or the more they maintained their ties to their homeland, the greater their influence. Therefore, the Franks had a bigger impact on the language of France than the Goths did on the language of Spain, and the influence of Norman-French in England was even greater. Yet in every case, the minority eventually gave in.
(2a) The conquest is made by many bodies of invaders, who bring with them their whole households and are followed for a long period of time by similar hordes of their kinsmen. The conquerors constitute the upper and middle classes and a part of the lower classes of the new community. The natives recede before the conquerors or become their slaves: their speech is regarded as servile and is soon laid aside, except for a few terms pertaining to the humbler callings, the names of things peculiar to the country and place-names. Examples: Angles and Saxons in Britain and Europeans in America and Australia, though in the last case we can hardly speak of race-mixture between the natives and the immigrants.
(2a) The conquest happens when many groups of invaders come in, bringing their entire families, and are followed for a long time by similar groups of their relatives. The conquerors make up the upper and middle classes, along with some of the lower classes, in the new community. The natives retreat before the conquerors or become their slaves: their language is seen as inferior and is soon abandoned, except for a few words related to the lower-class jobs, specific local items, and place names. For example: Angles and Saxons in Britain and Europeans in America and Australia, although in the latter case, we can hardly discuss race mixing between the natives and the newcomers.
(2b) A more powerful nation conquers the people and annexes its territory, which is made a province, to which not only governors and soldiers, but also merchants and even colonists are sent. These become the upper class and the influential part of the middle class. If centuries pass and the province is still subjected to the direct influence of the ruling country, it will more and more imitate the speech and the habits and customs of that country. Such was the history of Italy, Spain and Gaul under the Romans; similar, also, is the story of the Slavs of Eastern Germany and of the Dutch in New York State; such is the process going on to-day among the French in Louisiana and among the Germans in their original settlements in Pennsylvania.
(2b) A more powerful nation conquers the people and takes control of their land, turning it into a province, to which not only governors and soldiers but also merchants and even settlers are sent. These groups become the upper class and the influential part of the middle class. If centuries go by and the province continues to be directly influenced by the ruling country, it will increasingly mimic the language, habits, and customs of that country. Such was the history of Italy, Spain, and Gaul under the Romans; similarly, the story of the Slavs in Eastern Germany and the Dutch in New York State follows this pattern; the same process is happening today among the French in Louisiana and the Germans in their original settlements in Pennsylvania.
(3) Immigrants come in scattered bands and at different times; they become servants or follow other humble callings. It is usually not to their advantage to associate with their fellow-countrymen, but rather to mingle with the native population. The better they learn to speak the native tongue, the faster they get on in the world. If their children in their dress or speech betray their foreign origin, they are ridiculed as ‘Dutch’ or Irish,[203] or whatever it may be. They therefore take pains to rid themselves of all traces of their alien origin and avoid using the speech of their parents. In this way vast numbers of newcomers may be assimilated year by year till they constitute a large part of the new race, while their language makes practically no impression on the language of the country. This is the story of what is going on in all parts of the United States to-day.
(3) Immigrants arrive in small groups at different times; they often work as servants or in other low-paying jobs. It's usually not beneficial for them to hang out with people from their home country; instead, they blend in with the local population. The better they become at speaking the local language, the quicker they succeed. If their children show their foreign background through their clothes or accents, they get teased as 'Dutch' or Irish, or whatever it may be. So, they make an effort to shed all signs of their foreign roots and avoid speaking their parents' language. As a result, many newcomers become assimilated year after year until they make up a significant part of the new population, while their original language has little impact on the country's language. This is what's happening all across the United States today.[203]
It will be seen that in classes 1 and 3 the speech of the natives prevails, while in the two classes comprised under 2 it is that of the conqueror which eventually triumphs. Further, that, in all cases except type 2b, that language prevails which is spoken by what is at the time the majority.
It can be observed that in classes 1 and 3, the local language dominates, whereas in the two classes categorized under 2, it is the language of the conqueror that ultimately wins out. Additionally, in all instances except for type 2b, the language spoken by the majority at that time prevails.
Sound substitution is found in class 3 in the case of foreigners who come to America after they have learnt to speak, and of the children of foreigners who keep up their original language at home. If, however, while they are still young, they are chiefly thrown with English-speaking people, they usually gain a thorough mastery of the English language; thus most of the children, and practically all of the grandchildren, of immigrants, by the time they are grown-up, speak English without foreign taint. Their origin has thus no permanent influence on their adopted language. The same thing is true when a small ruling minority drops its foreign speech and learns that of the majority (class 1), and practically also (class 2a) when a native minority succumbs to a foreign majority, though here the ultimate language may be slightly influenced by the native dialect.
Sound substitution is observed in class 3 for foreigners who move to America after learning to speak, and for the children of foreigners who continue to use their original language at home. However, if they are primarily surrounded by English-speaking people while still young, they usually achieve a strong command of the English language. As a result, most immigrant children, and nearly all their grandchildren, speak English fluently by the time they reach adulthood, without any foreign accents. Their background thus has no lasting impact on the language they adopt. The same applies when a small ruling minority abandons their foreign language and adopts that of the majority (class 1), and also in situations (class 2a) where a native minority succumbs to a foreign majority, although in this case, the resulting language may be slightly influenced by the native dialect.
It is different with class 2b: when a whole population comes in the course of centuries to surrender its natural speech for that of a ruling minority, sound substitution plays an important part, and to a great extent determines the character and future of the language. Hempl here agrees with Hirt in seeing in this fact the explanation of much (N.B. not all!) of the difference between the Romanic languages and of the difference between natural High German and High German spoken in Low German territory, and he is therefore not surprised when he is told by Nissen that the dialects of modern Italy correspond geographically pretty closely to the non-Latin languages once spoken in the Peninsula. But he severely criticizes Hirt for going so far as to explain the differentiation of Aryan speech by the theory of sound substitution. Hirt assumes conditions like those in class 1, and yet thinks that the results would be like those of class 2a. “It is essential to Hirt’s theory that the conquering bodies of Indo-Europeans should be small compared with the number of the people they conquered.... If we wish to prove that the differentiation of Indo-European speech was like the differentiation of Romance speech, we must[204] be able to show that the conditions under which the differentiations took place were alike or equivalent. But even a cursory examination of the manner in which the Romance countries were Romanized ... will make it clear that no parallel could possibly be drawn between the conditions under which the Romance languages arose and those that we can suppose to have existed while the Indo-European languages took shape.” Hempl also criticizes the way in which the Germanic consonant-shift is supposed by Hirt to be due to sound-substitution: when instead of the original
It is different with class 2b: when an entire population over centuries gives up its natural language for that of a ruling minority, sound substitution plays a significant role and largely shapes the character and future of the language. Hempl agrees with Hirt in viewing this fact as the explanation for much (not all!) of the differences between the Romance languages and between natural High German and High German spoken in Low German areas. Therefore, he is not surprised when Nissen tells him that the dialects of modern Italy closely align geographically with the non-Latin languages once spoken on the Peninsula. However, he strongly criticizes Hirt for going as far as to explain the differentiation of Aryan speech using the theory of sound substitution. Hirt assumes conditions similar to those in class 1, yet believes that the results would resemble those of class 2a. “Hirt’s theory relies on the idea that the conquering Indo-European groups were small compared to the number of people they conquered.... If we want to prove that the differentiation of Indo-European speech was like that of Romance speech, we must[204] be able to show that the conditions under which these differentiations occurred were the same or comparable. But even a quick look at how the Romance countries were Romanized... makes it clear that no direct comparison can be drawn between the conditions that led to the emergence of Romance languages and those that likely existed during the formation of Indo-European languages.” Hempl also critiques the idea that the Germanic consonant shift should be attributed to sound substitution: when instead of the original
t th d dh
Germanic has
þ þ t ð,
t th d dh
Germanic has
þ þ t ð,
these latter sounds, on Hirt’s theory, must be either the native sounds that the conquered people substituted for the original sounds, or else they have developed out of such sounds as the natives substituted. If the first be true, we ask ourselves why the conquered people did not use their t for the Indo-European t, instead of substituting it for d, and then substituting þ for the Indo-European t. If the second supposition be true, the native population introduced into the language sounds very similar to the original t, th, d, dh, and all the change from that slightly variant form to the one that we find in Germanic was of subsequent development—and must be explained by the usual methods after all.
These later sounds, according to Hirt’s theory, must either be the native sounds that the conquered people replaced the original sounds with, or they developed from the sounds the natives substituted. If the first is true, we wonder why the conquered people didn’t use their t for the Indo-European t, instead of replacing it with d, and then substituting þ for the Indo-European t. If the second assumption is true, the local population introduced sounds into the language that are very similar to the original t, th, d, dh, and all the changes from that slightly different form to the one we find in Germanic occurred later—and these changes must be explained by the usual methods after all.
I have dwelt so long on Hempl’s paper because, in spite of its (to my mind) fundamental importance, it has been generally overlooked by supporters of the substratum theory. To construct a true theory, it will be necessary to examine the largest possible number of facts with regard to race-mixture capable of being tested by scientific methods. In this connexion the observations of Lenz in South America and of Pușcariu in Rumania are especially valuable. The former found that the Spanish spoken in Chile was greatly influenced in its sounds by the speech of the native Araucanians (see Zeitschr. f. roman. Philologie, 17. 188 ff., 1893). Now, what were the facts in regard to the population speaking this language? The immigrants were chiefly men, who in many cases necessarily married native women and left the care of their children to a great extent in the hands of Indian servants. As the natives were more warlike than in many other parts of South America, there was for a very long time a continuous influx of Spanish soldiers, many of whom, after a short time, settled down peacefully in the country. More Spanish soldiers, indeed, arrived in Chile in the course of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries than in the whole of the rest of[205] South America. Accordingly, by the beginning of the eighteenth century the Indians had been either driven back or else assimilated, and at the beginning of the War of Liberation early in the nineteenth century Chile was the only State in which there was a uniform Spanish-speaking population. In the greater part of Chile the population is denser than anywhere else in South America, and this population speaks nothing but Spanish, while in Peru and Bolivia nearly the whole rural population still speaks more or less exclusively Keshua or Aimará, and these languages are also used occasionally, or at any rate understood, by the whites. Chile is thus the only country in which a real Spanish people’s dialect could develop. (In Hempl’s classification this would be a typical case of class 2a.) In the other Spanish-American countries the Spanish-speakers are confined to the upper ruling class, there being practically no lower class with Spanish as its mother-tongue, except in a couple of big cities. Thus we understand that the Peruvian who has learnt his Spanish at school has a purer Castilian pronunciation than the Chilean; yet, apart from pronunciation, the educated Chilean’s Spanish is much more correct and fluent than that of the other South Americans, whose language is stiff and vocabulary scanty, because they have first learnt some Indian language in childhood. Lenz’s Chileans, who have often been invoked by the adherents of the unlimited substratum theory, thus really serve to show that sound substitution takes place only under certain well-defined conditions.
I spent so much time on Hempl’s paper because, despite its (to me) fundamental importance, it has mostly been ignored by supporters of the substratum theory. To build a valid theory, we need to look at as many facts as possible regarding race mixture that can be tested with scientific methods. In this context, Lenz's observations in South America and Pușcariu's in Romania are particularly valuable. Lenz found that the Spanish spoken in Chile was heavily influenced by the sounds of the native Araucanians (see Zeitschr. f. roman. Philologie, 17. 188 ff., 1893). So, what were the facts regarding the people speaking this language? The immigrants were mostly men, many of whom married native women and left much of the child-rearing to Indian servants. Since the natives were more warlike than in other parts of South America, there was a continuous influx of Spanish soldiers for a long time, many of whom settled down peacefully in the country after a short period. In fact, more Spanish soldiers arrived in Chile during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries than in all of the rest of South America combined. By the early eighteenth century, the Indians had either been pushed back or assimilated, and at the start of the War of Liberation in the early nineteenth century, Chile was the only place with a uniform Spanish-speaking population. In most of Chile, the population density is higher than anywhere else in South America, and this population speaks only Spanish, while in Peru and Bolivia, most of the rural population still speaks predominantly Keshua or Aimará, which are also occasionally used or understood by white people. Therefore, Chile is the only country where a genuine Spanish dialect could develop. (In Hempl’s classification, this would be a typical case of class 2a.) In other Spanish-speaking American countries, the Spanish speakers are limited to the upper ruling class, with practically no lower class that speaks Spanish as their mother tongue, except in a couple of large cities. This explains why a Peruvian who learned Spanish in school has a purer Castilian pronunciation than a Chilean; yet, aside from pronunciation, the educated Chilean’s Spanish is much more correct and fluent than that of other South Americans, whose language is rigid and vocabulary limited because they first learned an indigenous language as children. Therefore, Lenz's Chileans, often cited by proponents of the unlimited substratum theory, actually demonstrate that sound substitution happens only under specific well-defined conditions.
Pușcariu (in Prinzipienfragen der romanischen Sprachwissenschaft, Beihefte zur Zschr. f. rom. Phil., 1910) says that in a Saxon village which had been almost completely Rumanianized he had once talked for hours with a peasant without noticing that he was not a native Rumanian: he was, however, a Saxon, who spoke Saxon with his wife, but Rumanian with his son, because the latter language was easier to him, as he had acquired the Rumanian basis of articulation. Here, then, there was no sound substitution, and in general we may say that the less related two languages are, the fewer will be the traces of the original language left on the new language (p. 49). The reason must be that people who naturally speak a closely related language are easily understood even when their acquired speech has a tinge of dialect: there is thus no inducement for them to give up their pronunciation. Pușcariu also found that it was much more difficult for him to rid himself of his dialectal traits in Rumanian than to acquire a correct pronunciation of German or French. He therefore disbelieves in a direct influence exerted by the indigenous languages on the formation of the Romanic languages (and thus goes much further than Hempl). All these languages, and particularly Rumanian, during[206] the first centuries of the Middle Ages underwent radical transformations not paralleled in the thousand years ensuing. This may have been partly due to an influence exerted by ethnic mixture on the whole character of the young nations and through that also on their language. But other factors have certainly also played an important rôle, especially the grouping round new centres with other political aims than those of ancient Rome, and consequent isolation from the rest of the Romanic peoples. Add to this the very important emancipation of the ordinary conversational language from the yoke of Latin. In the first Christian centuries the influence of Latin was so overpowering in official life and in the schools that it obstructed a natural development. But soon after the third century the educational level rapidly sank, and political events broke the power not only of Rome, but also of its language. The speech of the masses, which had been held in fetters for so long, now asserted itself in full freedom and with elemental violence, the result being those far-reaching changes by which the Romanic languages are marked off from Latin. Language and nation or race must not be confounded: witness Rumania, whose language shows very few dialectal variations, though the populations of its different provinces are ethnically quite distinct (ib. p. 51).
Pușcariu (in Prinzipienfragen der romanischen Sprachwissenschaft, Beihefte zur Zschr. f. rom. Phil., 1910) states that in a Saxon village that had almost completely become Rumanianized, he once spoke for hours with a peasant without realizing that he wasn’t a native Rumanian: he was actually a Saxon, who spoke Saxon with his wife but Rumanian with his son because he found Rumanian easier, as he had developed a foundation for Rumanian pronunciation. Here, there was no sound substitution, and generally, we can say that the less related two languages are, the fewer traces of the original language will remain in the new language (p. 49). This is likely because people who naturally speak a closely related language can be easily understood even if their acquired speech has some dialect influence; therefore, they have no reason to change their pronunciation. Pușcariu also discovered that it was much harder for him to eliminate his dialectal features in Rumanian than to learn to pronounce German or French correctly. He therefore does not believe in a direct influence of indigenous languages on the development of the Romance languages (which takes him much further than Hempl). All these languages, especially Rumanian, underwent radical changes during the first centuries of the Middle Ages that were not matched in the subsequent thousand years. This may have been partly due to the impact of ethnic mixing on the overall character of the emerging nations and consequently on their language. However, other factors certainly played an important role, especially the formation of new centers with different political aims than those of ancient Rome, resulting in isolation from the other Romance peoples. Additionally, there was a significant liberation of the everyday spoken language from the constraints of Latin. In the early Christian centuries, Latin had such a dominating influence in official matters and in schools that it hindered natural development. But soon after the third century, educational standards declined rapidly, and political changes weakened the power not only of Rome but also of its language. The speech of the common people, which had been restrained for so long, then asserted itself freely and powerfully, resulting in the significant changes that differentiate the Romance languages from Latin. Language should not be confused with nation or ethnicity: for example Rumania, whose language has very few dialectal variations, even though the populations of its different provinces are ethnically quite distinct (ib. p. 51).
XI.—§ 9. Summary.
The general impression gathered from the preceding investigation must be that it is impossible to ascribe to an ethnic substratum all the changes and dialectal differentiations which some linguists explain as due to this sole cause. Many other influences must have been at work, among which an interruption of intercourse created by natural obstacles or social conditions of various kinds would be of prime importance. If we take ethnic substrata as the main or sole source of dialectal differentiation, it will be hard to account for the differences between Icelandic and Norwegian, for Iceland was very sparsely inhabited when the ‘land-taking’ took place, and still harder to account for the very great divergences that we witness between the dialects spoken in the Faroe Islands. A mere turning over the leaves of Bennike and Kristensen’s maps of Danish dialects (or the corresponding maps of France) will show the impossibility of explaining the crisscross of boundaries of various phonetic phenomena as entirely due to ethnical differences in the aborigines. On the other hand, the speech of Russian peasants is said to be remarkably free from dialectal divergences, in spite of the fact that it has spread in comparatively recent times over districts inhabited by populations with[207] languages of totally different types (Finnic, Turkish, Tataric). I thus incline to think that sound substitution cannot have produced radical changes, but has only played a minor part in the development of languages. There are, perhaps, also interesting things to be learnt from conditions in Finland. Here Swedish has for many centuries been the language of the ruling minority, and it was only in the course of the nineteenth century that Finnish attained to the dignity of a literary language. The sound systems of Swedish and Finnish are extremely unlike: Finnish lacks many of the Swedish sounds, such as b, d (what is written d is either mute or else a kind of weak r), g and f. No word can begin with more than one consonant, consequently Swedish strand and skräddare, ‘tailor,’ are represented in the form of the loan-words ranta and räätäli. Now, in spite of the fact that most Swedish-speaking people have probably spoken Finnish as children and have had Finnish servants and playfellows to teach them the language, none of these peculiarities have influenced their Swedish: what makes them recognizable as hailing from Finland (‘finska brytningen’) is not simplification of consonant groups or substitution of p for b, etc., but such small things as the omission of the ‘compound tone,’ the tendency to lengthen the second consonant in groups like ns, and European (‘back’) u instead of the Swedish mixed vowel.
The overall impression from the previous investigation is that we can’t attribute all the changes and dialect differences to an ethnic background that some linguists claim cause these variations. Many other factors must have influenced this, including interruptions in communication caused by natural barriers or various social conditions. If we treat ethnic backgrounds as the main or only reason for dialect differences, it becomes challenging to explain the distinctions between Icelandic and Norwegian, considering that Iceland was very sparsely populated during the ‘land-taking’ period. It’s even harder to explain the significant variations in dialects spoken in the Faroe Islands. Simply flipping through Bennike and Kristensen’s maps of Danish dialects (or the corresponding maps of France) will illustrate the impossibility of attributing the complex boundaries of various phonetic phenomena solely to ethnic differences among the original inhabitants. Conversely, the speech of Russian peasants is said to show remarkably little dialect variation, despite spreading relatively recently across areas inhabited by populations with languages of entirely different types (Finnic, Turkish, Tataric). I tend to believe that sound substitution hasn’t led to major changes but has only played a minor role in language development. There are also intriguing lessons to be learned from the situation in Finland. Here, Swedish has been the language of the ruling minority for many centuries, and it was not until the nineteenth century that Finnish gained recognition as a literary language. The sound systems of Swedish and Finnish are extremely different; Finnish lacks many sounds found in Swedish, such as b, d (which is either silent or a weak r), g, and f. No word can start with more than one consonant, so the Swedish words strand and skräddare (‘tailor’) are represented as the loanwords ranta and räätäli. Despite the fact that most Swedish speakers probably learned Finnish as children and had Finnish servants and playmates to teach them the language, none of these peculiarities have influenced their Swedish speech. What makes them identifiable as coming from Finland (‘Finnish accent’) is not the simplification of consonant clusters or substituting p for b, among other changes, but rather small details like omitting the ‘compound tone,’ a tendency to lengthen the second consonant in groups like ns, and using the European (‘back’) u instead of the Swedish mixed vowel.
But if sound substitution as a result of race-mixture and of conquest cannot have played any very considerable part in the differentiation of languages as wholes, there is another domain in which sound substitution is very important, that is, in the shape which loan-words take in the languages into which they are introduced. However good the pronunciation of the first introducer of a word may have been, it is clear that when a word is extensively used by people with no intimate and first-hand knowledge of the language from which it was taken, most of them will tend to pronounce it with the only sounds with which they are familiar, those of their own language. Thus we see that the English and Russians, who have no [y] in their own speech, substitute for it the combination [ju, iu] in recent loans from French. Scandinavians have no voiced [z] and [ʒ] and therefore, in such loans from French or English as kusine, budget, jockey, etc., substitute the voiceless [s] and [ʃj], or [sj]. The English will make a diphthong of the final vowels of such words as bouquet, beau [bu·kei, bou], and will slur the r of such French words as boulevard, etc. The same transference of speech habits from one’s native language also affects such important things as quantity, stress and tone: the English have no final short stressed vowels, such as are found in bouquet, beau; hence their tendency to lengthen as well as diphthongize[208] these sounds, while the French will stress the final syllable of recent loans, such as jury, reporter. These phenomena are so universal and so well known that they need no further illustration.
But if sound changes due to race-mixing and conquest didn't play a significant role in the overall differentiation of languages, there’s another area where sound changes are really important: the form that loan-words take when they are introduced into new languages. No matter how well the first person pronouncing a word does it, when a word is widely used by people who don’t have a deep or firsthand understanding of the language it comes from, most of them will likely pronounce it using the sounds they know from their own language. For example, English speakers and Russians, who don’t have the [y] sound in their languages, substitute it with the combination [ju, iu] in newer loans from French. Scandinavians don’t have the voiced [z] and [ʒ] sounds, so when they borrow words from French or English like kusine, budget, jockey, etc., they replace them with the voiceless [s] and [ʃj], or [sj]. English speakers will turn the final vowels of words like bouquet and beau into a diphthong, and they tend to slur the r in French words like boulevard and so on. This shift in speech habits from one’s native language also impacts important aspects like quantity, stress, and tone: English has no short stressed vowels at the end of words, like those in bouquet and beau; as a result, they tend to lengthen and diphthongize these sounds, while the French put stress on the last syllable of recent loans like jury and reporter. These trends are so common and well-recognized that they don’t need further examples.
The more familiar such loan-words are, the more unnatural it would be to pronounce them with foreign sounds or according to foreign rules of quantity and stress; for this means in each case a shunting of the whole speech-apparatus on to a different track for one or two words and then shifting back to the original ‘basis of articulation’—an effort that many speakers are quite incapable of and one that in any case interferes with the natural and easy flow of speech.
The more familiar loanwords are, the more awkward it is to pronounce them with foreign sounds or follow foreign rules of emphasis and rhythm. This requires switching the entire speech system to a different mode for just one or two words and then shifting back to the original way of speaking. This effort is something many speakers struggle with, and it disrupts the natural and smooth flow of conversation.
XI.—§ 10. General Theory of Loan-words.
In the last paragraphs we have already broached a very important subject, that of loan-words.[47] No language is entirely free from borrowed words, because no nation has ever been completely isolated. Contact with other nations inevitably leads to borrowings, though their number may vary very considerably. Here we meet with a fundamental principle, first formulated by E. Windisch (in his paper “Zur Theorie der Mischsprachen und Lehnwörter,” Verh. d. sächsischen Gesellsch. d. Wissensch., XLIX, 1897, p. 107 ff.): “It is not the foreign language a nation learns that turns into a mixed language, but its own native language becomes mixed under the influence of a foreign language.” When we try to learn and talk a foreign tongue we do not introduce into it words taken from our own language; our endeavour will always be to speak the other language as purely as possible, and generally we are painfully conscious of every native word that we intrude into phrases framed in the other tongue. But what we thus avoid in speaking a foreign language we very often do in our own. Frederick the Great prided himself on his good French, and in his French writings we do not find a single German word, but whenever he wrote German his sentences were full of French words and phrases. This being the general practice, we now understand why so few Keltic words were taken over into French and English. There was nothing to induce the ruling classes to learn[209] the language of the inferior natives: it could never be fashionable for them to show an acquaintance with a despised tongue by using now and then a Keltic word. On the other hand, the Kelt would have to learn the language of his masters, and learn it well; and he would even among his comrades like to show off his knowledge by interlarding his speech with words and turns from the language of his betters. Loan-words always show a superiority of the nation from whose language they are borrowed, though this superiority may be of many different kinds.
In the last paragraphs, we touched on a very important topic: loanwords.[47] No language is completely free from borrowed words because no nation has ever been entirely isolated. Interacting with other nations inevitably leads to borrowing, although the extent can vary greatly. Here we encounter a fundamental principle first proposed by E. Windisch in his paper “On the Theory of Pidgins and Loanwords,” Verh. d. sächsischen Gesellsch. d. Wissensch., XLIX, 1897, p. 107 ff.: “It is not the foreign language a nation learns that turns into a mixed language, but its own native language becomes mixed under the influence of a foreign language.” When we try to learn and speak a foreign language, we don't introduce words from our own language; instead, we strive to speak the other language as purely as possible, and we are often acutely aware of every native word we slip into phrases in that language. However, what we avoid doing in a foreign language, we often do in our own. Frederick the Great took pride in his good French, and in his French writings, there isn't a single German word, but when he wrote in German, his sentences were filled with French words and phrases. Given this general trend, we can understand why so few Celtic words made their way into French and English. The ruling classes had no incentive to learn the language of the lower classes; it was never fashionable for them to exhibit knowledge of a despised language by occasionally using a Celtic word. On the other hand, the Celt would need to learn the language of his rulers well, and he would want to impress his peers by mixing in words and expressions from the language of his superiors. Loanwords always indicate a superiority of the nation from which they are borrowed, though this superiority can take many forms.
In the first place, it need not be extensive: indeed, in some of the most typical cases it is of a very partial character and touches only on one very special point. I refer to those instances in which a district or a people is in possession of some special thing or product wanted by some other nation and not produced in that country. Here quite naturally the name used by the natives is taken over along with the thing. Obvious examples are the names of various drinks: wine is a loan from Latin, tea from Chinese, coffee from Arabic, chocolate from Mexican, and punch from Hindustani. A certain type of carriage was introduced about 1500 from Hungary and is known in most European languages by its Magyar name: E. coach, G. kutsche, etc. Moccasin is from Algonquin, bamboo from Malay, tulip and turban (ultimately the same word) from Persian. A slightly different case is when some previously unknown plant or animal is made known through some foreign nation, as when we have taken the name of jasmine from Persian, chimpanzee from some African, and tapir from some Brazilian language. It is characteristic of all words of this kind that only a few of them are taken from each foreign language, and that they have nearly all of them gone the round of all civilized languages, so that they are now known practically all over the world.
First of all, it doesn't have to be extensive: in fact, in some of the most typical cases, it can be quite limited and only focus on one specific point. I'm talking about situations where a region or a people has something unique or a product desired by another nation that isn't produced in that country. Naturally, the name used by the locals is adopted along with the item. Obvious examples include the names of various beverages: wine comes from Latin, tea from Chinese, coffee from Arabic, chocolate from Mexican, and punch from Hindustani. A specific type of carriage was introduced around 1500 from Hungary and is known in most European languages by its Hungarian name: E. coach, G. kutsche, etc. Moccasin is from Algonquin, bamboo from Malay, tulip and turban (which ultimately share the same origin) from Persian. A slightly different scenario occurs when a previously unknown plant or animal is introduced through a foreign nation, as when we adopted the name jasmine from Persian, chimpanzee from an African language, and tapir from a Brazilian language. It's typical of all these kinds of words that only a small number are adopted from each foreign language, and that nearly all of them have circulated through all civilized languages, making them known practically all over the world.
Other loan-words form larger groups and bear witness to the cultural superiority of some nation in some one specified sphere of activity or branch of knowledge: such are the Arabic words relating to mathematics and astronomy (algebra, zero, cipher, azimuth, zenith, in related fields tariff, alkali, alcohol), the Italian words relating to music (piano, allegro, andante, solo, soprano, etc.) and commerce (bank, bankrupt, balance, traffic, ducat, florin)—one need not accumulate examples, as everybody interested in the subject of this book will be able to supply a great many from his own reading. The most comprehensive groups of this kind are those French, Latin and Greek words that have flooded the whole world of Western civilization from the Middle Ages and the Renaissance and have given a family-character to all those parts of the vocabularies of otherwise different languages which[210] are concerned with the highest intellectual and technical activities. See the detailed discussion of these strata of loan-words in English in GS ch. v and vi.
Other loanwords create larger groups and highlight the cultural dominance of certain nations in specific areas of expertise or knowledge. Examples include Arabic terms related to mathematics and astronomy (algebra, zero, cipher, azimuth, zenith), along with words from related fields like tariff, alkali, and alcohol; Italian terms linked to music (piano, allegro, andante, solo, soprano), and commerce (bank, bankrupt, balance, traffic, ducat, florin). There’s no need to list more examples, as anyone interested in this book's topic can easily provide many from their own reading. The most extensive groups of this nature are the French, Latin, and Greek words that have permeated Western civilization since the Middle Ages and the Renaissance, shaping the vocabulary of otherwise distinct languages concerning the highest intellectual and technical pursuits. For a detailed discussion of these layers of loanwords in English, see GS ch. v and vi.
When one nation has imbibed for centuries the cultural influence of another, its language may have become so infiltrated with words from the other language that these are found in most sentences, at any rate in nearly every sentence dealing with things above the simplest material necessities. The best-known examples are English since the influx of French and classical words, and Turkish with its wholesale importations from Arabic. Another example is Basque, in which nearly all expressions for religious and spiritual ideas are Romanic. Basque is naturally very poor in words for general ideas; it has names for special kinds of trees, but ‘tree’ is arbolia, from Spanish árbol, ‘animal’ is animale, ‘colour’ colore, ‘plant’ planta or landare, ‘flower’ lore or lili, ‘thing’ gauza, ‘time’ dembora. Thus also many of its names for utensils and garments, weights and measures, arms, etc., are borrowed; ‘king’ is errege, ‘law’ lege, lage, ‘master’ maisu, etc. (See Zs. f. roman. Phil., 17. 140 ff.)
When a nation has absorbed the cultural influence of another for centuries, its language can become so mixed with words from the other language that these terms appear in almost every sentence, especially those that go beyond basic material needs. Well-known examples include English, which has incorporated many French and classical words, and Turkish, which has borrowed extensively from Arabic. Another example is Basque, where nearly all expressions for religious and spiritual concepts are Romanic. Basque is generally lacking in words for broader ideas; it has specific names for different types of trees, but ‘tree’ is arbolia, derived from the Spanish árbol, ‘animal’ is animale, ‘colour’ colore, ‘plant’ planta or landare, ‘flower’ lore or lili, ‘thing’ gauza, ‘time’ dembora. Many of its words for tools and clothing, units of weight and measure, weapons, etc., are also borrowed; ‘king’ is errege, ‘law’ lege, lage, ‘master’ maisu, and so on. (See Zs. f. roman. Phil., 17. 140 ff.)
In a great many cases linguistic borrowing must be considered a necessity, but this is not always so. When a nation has once got into the habit of borrowing words, people will very often use foreign words where it would have been perfectly possible to express their ideas by means of native speech-material, the reason for going out of one’s own language being in some cases the desire to be thought fashionable or refined through interlarding one’s speech with foreign words, in others simply laziness, as is very often the case when people are rendering thoughts they have heard or read in a foreign tongue. Translators are responsible for the great majority of these intrusive words, which might have been avoided by a resort to native composition or derivation, or very often by turning the sentence a little differently from the foreign text. The most thoroughgoing speech mixtures are due much less to real race-mixture than to continued cultural contact, especially of a literary character, as is seen very clearly in English, where the Romanic element is only to a very small extent referable to the Norman conquerors, and far more to the peaceful relations of the following centuries. That Greek and Latin words have come in through the medium of literature hardly needs saying. Many of these words are superfluous: “The native words cold, cool, chilly, icy, frosty, might have seemed sufficient for all purposes, without any necessity for importing frigid, gelid and algid, which, as a matter of fact, are found neither in Shakespeare nor in the Authorized Version of the Bible nor in the poetical works of Milton, Pope, Cowper and Shelley” (GS § 136). But on the[211] other hand it cannot be denied that the imported words have in many instances enriched the language through enabling its users to obtain greater variety and to find expressions for many subtle shades of thought. The question of the value of loan-words cannot be dismissed offhand, as the ‘purists’ in many countries are inclined to imagine, with the dictum that foreign words should be shunned like the plague, but requires for its solution a careful consideration of the merits and demerits of each separate foreign term viewed in connexion with the native resources for expressing that particular idea.
In many cases, borrowing words from other languages is necessary, but that's not always the case. Once a country starts adopting foreign words, people often choose them instead of expressing their ideas using their own language. This happens partly because some want to seem trendy or sophisticated by mixing in foreign terms, and partly due to laziness, especially when people are translating thoughts they've heard or read in another language. Translators are mainly responsible for these extra words, which could have been avoided by using native words or simply reshaping the sentence differently from the original text. The most mixed speech patterns come less from actual racial mixing and more from ongoing cultural interactions, particularly in literature. This is evident in English, where the influence from Romance languages is mostly due to peaceful relations over the centuries rather than just the Norman conquest. It's pretty clear that Greek and Latin words entered the language through literature. Many of these imported words are unnecessary: the native words cold, cool, chilly, icy, and frosty seem sufficient, making the use of frigid, gelid, and algid quite redundant—none of which actually appear in Shakespeare, the Authorized Version of the Bible, or the poetic works of Milton, Pope, Cowper, and Shelley (GS § 136). However, it's also true that these borrowed words have enriched the language by giving speakers more variety and expressions for subtle shades of thought. The value of loan-words shouldn't be easily dismissed, as many ‘purists’ in various countries might think when they argue that foreign words should be avoided at all costs. Instead, the worth of each borrowed term needs careful consideration, weighing its advantages and disadvantages against the native options available to express that specific idea.
XI.—§ 11. Classes of Loan-words.
It is quite natural that there should be a much greater inclination everywhere to borrow ‘full’ words (substantives, adjectives, notional verbs) than ‘empty’ words (pronouns, prepositions, conjunctions, auxiliary verbs), to which class most of the ‘grammatical’ words belong. But there is no hard-and-fast limit between the two classes. It is rare for a language to take such words as numerals from another language; yet examples are found here and there—thus, in connexion with special games, etc. Until comparatively recently, dicers and backgammon-players counted in England by means of the French words ace, deuce, tray, cater, cinque, size, and with the English game of lawn tennis the English way of counting (fifteen love, etc.) has been lately adopted in Russia and to some extent also in Denmark. In some parts of England Welsh numerals were until comparatively recent times used in the counting of sheep. Cattle-drivers in Jutland used to count from 20 to 90 in Low German learnt in Hamburg and Holstein, where they sold their cattle. In this case the clumsiness and want of perspicuity of the Danish expressions (halvtredsindstyve for Low German föfdix, etc.) may have been one of the reasons for preferring the German words; in the same way the clumsiness of the Eskimo way of counting (“third toe on the second foot of the fourth man,” etc.) has favoured the introduction into Greenlandic of the Danish words for 100 and 1,000: with an Eskimo ending, untritigdlit and tusintigdlit. Most Japanese numerals are Chinese. And of course million and milliard are used in most civilized countries.
It's completely normal that there's a much stronger tendency to borrow "full" words (nouns, adjectives, meaningful verbs) rather than "empty" words (pronouns, prepositions, conjunctions, auxiliary verbs), which most of the "grammatical" words fall into. However, there isn't a strict boundary between the two categories. It's uncommon for a language to adopt numeral words from another language; yet, there are instances of this happening—particularly related to specific games, etc. Until fairly recently, players of dice and backgammon in England counted using the French terms ace, deuce, tray, cater, cinque, size. In the case of lawn tennis, the English counting system (fifteen love, etc.) has recently been adopted in Russia and also to some extent in Denmark. In certain areas of England, Welsh numerals were used for counting sheep until quite recently. Cattle herders in Jutland used to count from 20 to 90 in Low German learned in Hamburg and Holstein, where they sold their cattle. In this situation, the awkwardness and lack of clarity of the Danish terms (halvtredsindstyve for Low German föfdix, etc.) may have contributed to the preference for the German words; similarly, the clumsiness of the Eskimo counting method (“third toe on the second foot of the fourth man,” etc.) has led to the adoption of Danish words for 100 and 1,000 in Greenlandic, with an Eskimo ending: untritigdlit and tusintigdlit. Most Japanese numerals come from Chinese. And of course, million and milliard are used in most developed countries.
Prepositions, too, are rarely borrowed by one language from another. Yet the Latin (Ital.) per is used in English, German and Danish, and the French à in the two latter languages, and both are extending their domain beyond the commercial language in which they were first used. The Greek kata, at first also commercial, has in Spanish found admission into the ordinary language and has become the pronoun cada ‘each.’
Prepositions are also rarely borrowed from one language to another. However, the Latin (Italian) per is used in English, German, and Danish, and the French à appears in the latter two languages, both of which are expanding their use beyond the commercial contexts where they were initially adopted. The Greek kata, originally commercial, has made its way into everyday Spanish, becoming the pronoun cada, meaning ‘each.’
Personal and demonstrative pronouns, articles and the like are scarcely ever taken over from one language to another. They are so definitely woven into the innermost texture of a language that no one would think of giving them up, however much he might like to adorn his speech with words from a foreign source. If, therefore, in one instance we find a case of a language borrowing words of this kind, we are justified in thinking that exceptional causes must have been at work, and such really proves to be the case in English, which has adopted the Scandinavian forms they, them, their. It is usual to speak of English as being a mixture of native Old English (‘Anglo-Saxon’) and French, but as a matter of fact the French influence, powerful as it is in the vocabulary and patent as it is to the eyes of everybody, is superficial in comparison with the influence exercised in a much subtler way by the Scandinavian settlers in the North of England. The French influence is different in extent, but not in kind, from the French influence on German or the old Gothonic influence on Finnic; it is perhaps best compared with the German influence on Danish in the Middle Ages. But the Scandinavian influence on English is of a different kind. The number of Danish and Norwegian settlers in England must have been very large, as is shown by the number of Scandinavian place-names; yet that does not account for everything. A most important factor was the great similarity of the two languages, in spite of numerous points of difference. Accordingly, when their fighting was over, the invaders and the original population would to some extent be able to make themselves understood by one another, like people talking two dialects of the same language, or like students from Copenhagen and from Lund nowadays. Many of the most common words were absolutely identical, and others differed only slightly. Hence it comes that in the Middle English texts we find a great many double forms of the same word, one English and the other Scandinavian, used side by side, some of these doublets even surviving till the present day, though now differentiated in sense (e.g. whole, hale; no, nay; from, fro; shirt, skirt), while in other cases one only of the two forms, either the native or the Scandinavian, has survived; thus the Scandinavian sister and egg have ousted the English sweostor and ey. We find, therefore, a great many words adopted of a kind not usually borrowed; thus, everyday verbs and adjectives like take, call, hit, die, ill, ugly, wrong, and among substantives such non-technical ones as fellow, sky, skin, wing, etc. (For details see my GS ch. iv.) All this indicates an intimate fusion of the two races and of the two languages, such as is not provided for in any of the classes described by Hempl (above, § 8). In most speech-mixtures the various elements remain distinct and can[213] be separated, just as after shuffling a pack of cards you can pick out the hearts, spades, etc.; but in the case of English and Scandinavian we have a subtler and more intimate fusion, very much as when you put a lump of sugar into a cup of tea and a few minutes afterwards are quite unable to say which is tea and which is sugar.
Personal and demonstrative pronouns, articles, and similar parts of speech are rarely carried over from one language to another. They're so intricately woven into the very fabric of a language that no one would consider giving them up, no matter how much they might want to enhance their speech with words from another language. Therefore, if we ever see a case of a language borrowing these kinds of words, we can reasonably conclude that exceptional circumstances must have been involved, which indeed is true for English, which has incorporated the Scandinavian forms they, them, their. It's common to describe English as a blend of native Old English (‘Anglo-Saxon’) and French, but in reality, the French influence, strong as it is in vocabulary and obvious to everyone, is superficial compared to the deeper influence exerted by the Scandinavian settlers in Northern England. The French impact is notable in its extent, but not in essence, similar to the French influence on German or the ancient Gothic influence on Finnish; it might be best compared to the German influence on Danish during the Middle Ages. However, the Scandinavian impact on English is of a different nature. The number of Danish and Norwegian settlers in England must have been quite significant, as indicated by the abundance of Scandinavian place names; but that doesn’t explain everything. A crucial factor was the great similarity between the two languages, despite many differences. Thus, when the fighting was done, the invaders and the original inhabitants could to some degree understand each other, much like people speaking two dialects of the same language, or like students from Copenhagen and Lund today. Many of the most common words were completely identical, and others only slightly different. As a result, in the Middle English texts, we find a large number of double forms of the same word, one of English origin and the other Scandinavian, used alongside each other, with some of these pairs even surviving to the present day, although now distinguished by meaning (e.g. whole, hale; no, nay; from, fro; shirt, skirt), while in other cases, only one of the two forms, either the native or the Scandinavian, remains; for instance, the Scandinavian sister and egg have replaced the English sweostor and ey. Thus, we see a significant number of words adopted that are not typically borrowed; including everyday verbs and adjectives like take, call, hit, die, ill, ugly, wrong, and among nouns, such ordinary ones as fellow, sky, skin, wing, etc. (For details see my GS ch. iv.) All of this suggests a close fusion of the two races and languages, unlike any of the categories described by Hempl (above, § 8). In most language mixtures, the different elements remain distinct and can be separated, just like how after shuffling a deck of cards you can sort out the hearts, spades, etc.; but in the case of English and Scandinavian, we have a subtler and more intimate blending, much like when you add a lump of sugar to a cup of tea and after a few minutes are unable to say which is tea and which is sugar.
XI.—§ 12. Influence on Grammar.
The question has often been raised whether speech-mixture affects the grammar of a language which has borrowed largely from some other language. The older view is expressed pointedly by Whitney (L 199): “Such a thing as a language with a mixed grammatical apparatus has never come under the cognizance of linguistic students: it would be to them a monstrosity; it seems an impossibility.” This is an exaggeration, and cannot be justified, for the simple reason that the vocabulary of a language and its ‘grammatical apparatus’ cannot be nicely separated in the way presupposed: indeed, much of the borrowed material mentioned in our last paragraphs does belong to the grammatical apparatus. But there is, of course, some truth in Whitney’s dictum. When a word is borrowed it is not as a rule taken over with all the elaborate flexion which may belong to it in its original home; as a rule, one form only is adopted, it may be the nominative or some other case of a noun, the infinitive or the present or the naked stem of a verb. This form is then either used unchanged or with the endings of the adopting language, generally those of the most ‘regular’ declension or conjugation. It is an exceptional case when more than one flexional form is taken over, and this case does not occur in really popular loans. In learned usage we find in older Danish such case-flexion as gen. Christi, dat. Christo, by the side of nom. Christus, also, e.g., i theatro, and still sometimes in German we have the same usage: e.g. mit den pronominibus. In a somewhat greater number of instances the plural form is adopted as well as the singular form, as in English fungi, formulæ, phenomena, seraphim, etc., but the natural tendency is always towards using the native endings, funguses, formulas, etc., and this has prevailed in all popular words, e.g. ideas, circuses, museums. As the formation of cases, tenses, etc., in different languages is often very irregular, and the distinctive marks are often so intimately connected with the kernel of the word and so unsubstantial as not to be easily distinguished, it is quite natural that no one should think of borrowing such endings, etc., and applying them to native words. Schuchardt once thought that the English genitive ending s had been adopted into Indo-Portuguese (in the East Indies), where gobernadors casa stands for ‘governor’s house,’ but he now explains the[214] form more correctly as originating in the possessive pronoun su: gobernador su casa (dem g. sein haus, Sitzungsber. der preuss. Akademie, 1917, 524).
The question has often come up about whether a mix of languages affects the grammar of a language that has borrowed heavily from another. The older perspective is clearly stated by Whitney (L 199): “There has never been a language with a mixed grammatical structure that has caught the attention of linguists: it would be a monstrosity to them; it seems impossible.” This is an exaggeration and can't be justified because the vocabulary of a language and its ‘grammatical structure’ cannot be neatly separated as implied: indeed, much of the borrowed material mentioned in our last paragraphs is part of the grammatical structure. However, there is some truth to Whitney’s statement. When a word is borrowed, it usually isn’t taken over with all the complex inflections it might have in its original language; typically, just one form is adopted, whether it’s the nominative or some other case of a noun, the infinitive, or the base form of a verb. This form is then either used as is or given the endings of the adopting language, usually those of the most ‘regular’ declension or conjugation. It’s rare for more than one inflectional form to be adopted, and this doesn’t happen with truly popular loans. In academic usage, we see in older Danish inflections such as gen. Christi, dat. Christo, alongside nom. Christus, and similarly, for example, i theatro; this usage still appears sometimes in German: e.g. mit den pronominibus. In a few more cases, both the plural and the singular forms are adopted, as in English fungi, formulæ, phenomena, seraphim, etc., but the natural tendency is always to use the native endings, funguses, formulas, etc., and this has dominated with all popular words, e.g. ideas, circuses, museums. Since the formation of cases, tenses, and so on in different languages is often very irregular, and the distinctive features are frequently so closely tied to the core of the word and so insubstantial that they’re not easily distinguished, it’s quite normal that no one would think of borrowing such endings, etc., and applying them to native words. Schuchardt once thought that the English genitive ending s had been taken into Indo-Portuguese (in the East Indies), where gobernadors casa means ‘governor’s house,’ but he now interprets the form more accurately as stemming from the possessive pronoun su: gobernador su casa (their g. his house, Sitzungsber. der preuss. Akademie, 1917, 524).
It was at one time commonly held that the English plural ending s, which in Old English was restricted in its application, owes its extension to the influence of French. This theory, I believe, was finally disposed of by the six decisive arguments I brought forward against it in 1891 (reprinted in ChE § 39). But after what has been said above on the Scandinavian influence, I incline to think that E. Classen is right in thinking that the Danes count for something in bringing about the final victory of -s over its competitor -n, for the Danes had no plural in -n, and -s reminded them of their own -r (Mod. Language Rev. 14. 94; cf. also -s in the third person of verbs, Scand. -r). Apart from this particular point, it is quite natural that the Scandinavians should have exercised a general levelling influence on the English language, as many niceties of grammar would easily be sacrificed where mutual intelligibility was so largely brought about by the common vocabulary. Accordingly, we find that in the regions in which the Danish settlements were thickest the wearing away of grammatical forms was a couple of centuries in advance of the same process in the southern parts of the country.
At one point, it was widely believed that the English plural ending s, which was limited in its use in Old English, got its broader application from the influence of French. I think this theory was finally put to rest by the six strong arguments I presented against it in 1891 (reprinted in ChE § 39). However, considering what has been said about Scandinavian influence, I tend to agree with E. Classen that the Danes played a role in the ultimate success of -s over its rival -n, since the Danes didn't have a plural form in -n, and -s was reminiscent of their own -r (Mod. Language Rev. 14. 94; cf. also -s in the third person of verbs, Scand. -r). Besides this specific point, it makes sense that the Scandinavians had a general leveling effect on the English language, as many subtle grammar rules would likely be sacrificed where mutual understanding was primarily facilitated by the shared vocabulary. Thus, we see that in areas where Danish settlements were most concentrated, the erosion of grammatical forms occurred a couple of centuries earlier than in the southern parts of the country.
Derivative endings certainly belong to the ‘grammatical apparatus’ of a language; yet many such endings have been taken over into another language as parts of borrowed words and have then been freely combined with native speech-material. The phenomenon is extremely frequent in English, where we have, for instance, the Romanic endings -ess (shepherdess, seeress), -ment (endearment, bewilderment), -age (mileage, cleavage, shortage), -ance (hindrance, forbearance) and many more. In Danish and German the number of similar instances is much more restricted, yet we have, for instance, recent words in -isme, -ismus and -ianer; cf. also older words like bageri, bäckerei, etc. It is the same with prefixes: English has formed many words with de-, co-, inter-, pre-, anti- and other classical prefixes: de-anglicize, co-godfather, inter-marriage, at pre-war prices, anti-slavery, etc. (quotations in my GS § 124; cf. MEG ii. 14. 66). Ex- has established itself in many languages: ex-king, ex-roi, ex-konge, ex-könig, etc. In Danish the prefix be-, borrowed from German, is used very extensively with native words: bebrejde, bebo, bebygge, and this is not the only German prefix that is productive in the Scandinavian languages.
Derivative endings definitely belong to the "grammatical structure" of a language; however, many of these endings have been adopted into another language as parts of borrowed words and have then been freely combined with native vocabulary. This phenomenon occurs quite often in English, where we have, for example, the Romanic endings -ess (shepherdess, seeress), -ment (endearment, bewilderment), -age (mileage, cleavage, shortage), -ance (hindrance, forbearance), and many others. In Danish and German, the number of similar instances is much more limited, but we do have, for instance, recent words in -isme, -ismus, and -ianer; also, older words like bageri, bäckerei, etc. The same goes for prefixes: English has created many words with de-, co-, inter-, pre-, anti-, and other classical prefixes: de-anglicize, co-godfather, inter-marriage, at pre-war prices, anti-slavery, etc. (quotations in my GS § 124; see MEG ii. 14. 66). Ex- has become common in many languages: ex-king, ex-roi, ex-konge, ex-könig, etc. In Danish, the prefix be-, borrowed from German, is used very widely with native words: bebrejde, bebo, bebygge, and this is not the only German prefix that is productive in the Scandinavian languages.
With regard to syntax, very little can be said except in a general way: languages certainly do influence each other syntactically, and those who know a foreign language only imperfectly are apt to transfer to it methods of construction from their[215] own tongue. Many instances of this have been collected by Schuchardt, SlD. But it is doubtful whether these syntactical influences have the same permanent effects on any language as those exerted on one’s own language by the habit of translating foreign works into it: in this purely literary way a great many idioms and turns of phrases have been introduced into English, German and the Scandinavian languages from French and Latin, and into Danish and Swedish from German. The accusative and infinitive construction, which had only a very restricted use in Old English, has very considerably extended its domain through Latin influence, and the so-called ‘absolute construction’ (in my own grammatical terminology called ‘duplex subjunct’) seems to be entirely due to imitation of Latin syntax. In the Balkan tongues there are some interesting instances of syntactical agreement between various languages, which must be due to oral influence through the necessity imposed on border peoples of passing continually from one language to another: the infinitive has disappeared from Greek, Rumanian and Albanian, and the definite article is placed after the substantive in Rumanian, Albanian and Bulgarian.
When it comes to syntax, there's not much to say except in broad terms: languages definitely influence each other syntactically, and people who only partially know a foreign language tend to apply construction methods from their own language. Many examples of this have been documented by Schuchardt, SlD. However, it’s questionable whether these syntactical influences have the same lasting effects on any language as the influence that comes from the habit of translating foreign works into one’s own language: through this purely literary method, a lot of idioms and expressions have made their way into English, German, and the Scandinavian languages from French and Latin, and into Danish and Swedish from German. The accusative and infinitive construction, which was very limited in Old English, has greatly expanded its usage due to Latin influence, and the so-called ‘absolute construction’ (which I refer to as ‘duplex subjunct’) seems to be entirely a result of imitating Latin syntax. In the Balkan languages, there are some interesting examples of syntactical agreement between different languages, likely due to oral influence from the need for border communities to continuously switch between languages: the infinitive has vanished from Greek, Romanian, and Albanian, and in Romanian, Albanian, and Bulgarian, the definite article follows the noun.
XI.—§ 13. Translation-loans.
Besides direct borrowings we have also indirect borrowings or ‘translation loan-words,’ words modelled more or less closely on foreign ones, though consisting of native speech-material. I take some examples from the very full and able paper “Notes sur les Calques Linguistiques” contributed by Kr. Sandfeld to the Festschrift Vilh. Thomsen, 1912: ædificatio: G. erbauung, Dan. opbyggelse; æquilibrium: G. gleichgewicht, Dan. ligevægt; beneficium: G. wohltat, Dan. velgerning; conscientia: Goth. miþwissi, G. gewissen, Dan. samvittighed, Swed. samvete, Russ. soznanie; omnipotens: E. almighty, G. allmächtig, Dan. almægtig; arrière-pensée: hintergedanke, bagtanke; bien-être: wohlsein, velvære; exposition: austellung, udstilling; etc. Sandfeld gives many more examples, and as he has in most instances been able to give also corresponding words from various Slavonic languages as well as from Magyar, Finnic, etc., he rightly concludes that his collections serve to throw light on that community in thought and expression which Bally has well termed “la mentalité européenne.” (But it will be seen that English differs from most European languages in having a much greater propensity to swallowing foreign words raw, as it were, than to translating them.)
Aside from direct borrowings, we also have indirect borrowings or "translation loanwords," which are words modeled somewhat closely on foreign terms but consist of native language material. I will provide some examples from the detailed and insightful paper “Notes on Linguistic Layers,” contributed by Kr. Sandfeld to the Festschrift Vilh. Thomsen, 1912: ædificatio: G. construction, Dan. uplift; æquilibrium: G. balance, Dan. balance; beneficium: G. wohltat, Dan. velgerning; conscientia: Goth. miþwiss
CHAPTER XII
Pidgin and congeners
§ 1. Beach-la-Mar. § 2. Grammar. § 3. Sounds. § 4. Pidgin. § 5. Grammar, etc. § 6. General Theory. § 7. Mauritius Creole. § 8. Chinook Jargon. § 9. Chinook continued. § 10. Makeshift Languages. § 11. Romanic Languages.
§ 1. Beach-la-Mar. § 2. Grammar. § 3. Sounds. § 4. Pidgin. § 5. Grammar, etc. § 6. General Theory. § 7. Mauritius Creole. § 8. Chinook Jargon. § 9. Chinook continued. § 10. Makeshift Languages. § 11. Romanic Languages.
XII.—§ 1. Beach-la-Mar.
As a first typical example of a whole class of languages now found in many parts of the world where people of European civilization have come into contact with men of other races, we may take the so-called Beach-la-mar (or Beche-le-mar, or Beche de mer English);[48] it is also sometimes called Sandalwood English. It is spoken and understood all over the Western Pacific, its spread being largely due to the fact that the practice of ‘blackbirding’ often brought together on the same plantation many natives from different islands with mutually incomprehensible languages, whose only means of communication was the broken English they had picked up from the whites. And now the natives learn this language from each other, while in many places the few Europeans have to learn it from the islanders. “Thus the native use of Pidgin-English lays down the rules by which the Europeans let themselves be guided when learning it. Even Englishmen do not find it quite easy at the beginning to understand Pidgin-English, and have to learn it before they are able to speak it properly” (Landtman).
As a typical example of a whole category of languages now found in many areas of the world where European communities have interacted with people from other racial backgrounds, we can look at what’s known as Beach-la-mar (or Beche-le-mar, or Beche de mer English);[48] it’s also sometimes referred to as Sandalwood English. It’s spoken and understood throughout the Western Pacific, largely because the practice of ‘blackbirding’ often brought together many natives from different islands, who spoke languages that were mutually incomprehensible. Their only way to communicate was through the broken English they had learned from the Europeans. Nowadays, the natives teach this language to each other, while in many areas, the few Europeans have to learn it from the islanders. “Thus, the native use of Pidgin-English establishes the rules that guide the Europeans when they learn it. Even Englishmen initially find it somewhat challenging to understand Pidgin-English and must learn it before they can speak it fluently” (Landtman).
I shall now try to give some idea of the structure of this lingo.
I will now attempt to provide an overview of the structure of this language.
The vocabulary is nearly all English. Even most of the words which ultimately go back to other languages have been admitted only because the English with whom the islanders were thrown into contact had previously adopted them into their own speech, so that the islanders were justified in believing that they were really English. This is true of the Spanish or Portuguese savvy, ‘to know,’ and pickaninny, ‘child’ or ‘little one’ (a favourite in many languages on account of its symbolic sound; see Ch. XX § 8), as well as the Amerindian tomahawk, which in the whole of Australia is the usual word for a small axe. And if we find in Beach-la-mar the two Maori words tapu or taboo and kai, or more often kaikai, ‘to eat’ or ‘food,’ they have probably got into the language through English—we know that both are very extensively used in Australia, while the former is known all over the civilized world. Likkilik or liklik, ‘small, almost,’ is said to be from a Polynesian word liki, but may be really a perversion of Engl. little. Landtman gives a few words from unknown languages used by the Kiwais, though not derived from their own language. The rest of the words found in my sources are English, though not always pure English, in so far as their signification is often curiously distorted.
The vocabulary is almost entirely English. Even most of the words that trace back to other languages were adopted because the English people who interacted with the islanders had already incorporated them into their speech, making it reasonable for the islanders to think they were truly English. This applies to the Spanish or Portuguese savvy, meaning 'to know,' and pickaninny, meaning 'child' or 'little one' (a favorite in many languages due to its appealing sound; see Ch. XX § 8). The same is true for the Amerindian tomahawk, which is the common term for a small axe throughout Australia. Additionally, in Beach-la-mar, we find the two Maori words tapu or taboo and kai, or more frequently kaikai, meaning 'to eat' or 'food'; these likely entered the language through English—both words are widely used in Australia, with the former recognized globally. The term likilik or liklik, meaning 'small, almost,' is said to derive from the Polynesian word liki, but it might actually be a variation of the English little. Landtman mentions a few words from unknown languages used by the Kiwais, though they aren't derived from their own language. The remaining words in my sources are English, although not always entirely so, as their meanings are often strangely distorted.
Nusipepa means ‘a letter, any written or printed document,’ mary is the general term for ‘woman’ (cf. above, p. 118), pisupo (peasoup) for all foreign foods which are preserved in tins; squareface, the sailor’s name for a square gin-bottle, is extended to all forms of glassware, no matter what the shape. One of the earliest seafarers is said to have left a bull and a cow on one of the islands and to have mentioned these two words together; the natives took them as one word, and now bullamacow or pulumakau means ‘cattle, beef, also tinned beef’; pulomokau is now given as a native word in a dictionary of the Fijian language.[49] Bulopenn, which means ‘ornament,’ is said to be nothing but the English blue paint. All this shows the purely accidental character of many of the linguistic acquisitions of the Polynesians.
Nusipepa means 'a letter, any written or printed document,' mary is the general term for 'woman' (cf. above, p. 118), pisupo (peasoup) refers to all foreign foods preserved in tins; squareface, the term sailors use for a square gin bottle, has been extended to all types of glassware, regardless of shape. It is said that one of the earliest seafarers left behind a bull and a cow on one of the islands and mentioned these two words together; the locals combined them into one word, and now bullamacow or pulumakau means 'cattle, beef, also tinned beef'; pulomokau is now included as a native word in a dictionary of the Fijian language.[49] Bulopenn, which means 'ornament,' is said to simply be the English blue paint. All of this demonstrates the purely accidental nature of many of the linguistic influences on the Polynesians.
As the vocabulary is extremely limited, composite expressions are sometimes resorted to in order to express ideas for which we have simple words, and not unfrequently the devices used appear to us very clumsy or even comical. A piano is called ‘big fellow bokus (box) you fight him he cry,’ and a[218] concertina ‘little fellow bokus you shove him he cry, you pull him he cry.’ Woman he got faminil (‘family’) inside means ‘she is with child.’ Inside is also used extensively about mental states: jump inside ‘be startled,’ inside tell himself ‘to consider,’ inside bad ‘grieved or sorry,’ feel inside ‘to know,’ feel another kind inside ‘to change one’s mind.’ My throat he fast ‘I was dumb.’ He took daylight a long time ‘lay awake.’ Bring fellow belong make open bottle ‘bring me a corkscrew.’ Water belong stink ‘perfumery.’ The idea of being bald is thus expressed: grass belong head belong him all he die finish, or with another variant, coconut belong him grass no stop, for coconut is taken from English slang in the sense ‘head’ (Schuchardt has the sentence: You no savvy that fellow white man coconut belong him no grass?). For ‘feather’ the combination grass belong pigeon is used, pigeon being a general term for any bird.
Due to the very limited vocabulary, people sometimes create mixed expressions to express ideas for which we have simple words. Often, these phrases seem quite awkward or even funny to us. A piano is called ‘big fellow bokus (box) you fight him he cry,’ and a concertina is referred to as ‘little fellow bokus you shove him he cry, you pull him he cry.’ Woman he got faminil (‘family’) inside means ‘she is pregnant.’ Inside is also widely used to describe mental states: jump inside means ‘to be startled,’ inside tell himself means ‘to think about it,’ inside bad means ‘grieved or sorry,’ feel inside means ‘to know,’ and feel another kind inside means ‘to change one’s mind.’ My throat he fast means ‘I was speechless.’ He took daylight a long time means ‘he lay awake.’ Bring fellow belong make open bottle means ‘bring me a corkscrew.’ Water belong stink means ‘perfume.’ The concept of being bald is expressed as grass belong head belong him all he die finish, or, with another variation, coconut belong him grass no stop, since coconut is borrowed from English slang meaning ‘head’ (Schuchardt has the sentence: You no savvy that fellow white man coconut belong him no grass?). For ‘feather’, the phrase grass belong pigeon is used, with pigeon as a general term for any bird.
A man who wanted to borrow a saw, the word for which he had forgotten, said: ‘You give me brother belong tomahawk, he come he go.’ A servant who had been to Queensland, where he saw a train, on his return called it ‘steamer he walk about along bush.’ Natives who watched Landtman when he enclosed letters in envelopes named the latter ‘house belong letter.’ Many of these expressions are thus picturesque descriptions made on the spur of the moment if the proper word is not known.
A man who wanted to borrow a saw, which he had forgotten the word for, said: ‘You give me brother belong tomahawk, he come he go.’ A servant who had been to Queensland, where he saw a train, called it ‘steamer he walk about along bush’ upon returning. Natives who saw Landtman putting letters in envelopes referred to the envelopes as ‘house belong letter.’ Many of these expressions are colorful descriptions created on the spot when the correct word isn’t known.
XII.—§ 2. Grammar.
These phrases have already illustrated some points of the very simple grammar of this lingo. Words have only one form, and what is in our language expressed by flexional forms is either left unexpressed or else indicated by auxiliary words. The plural of nouns is like the singular (though the form men is found in my texts alongside of man); when necessary, the plural is indicated by means of a prefixed all: all he talk ‘they say’ (also him fellow all ‘they’); all man ‘everybody’; a more indefinite plural is plenty man or full up man. For ‘we’ is said me two fella or me three fellow, as the case may be; me two fellow Lagia means ‘I and Lagia.’ If there are more, me altogether man or me plenty man may be said, though we is also in use. Fellow (fella) is a much-vexed word; it is required, or at any rate often used, after most pronouns, thus, that fellow hat, this fellow knife, me fellow, you fellow, him fellow (not he fellow); it is found very often after an adjective and seems to be required to prop up the adjective before the substantive: big fellow name, big fellow tobacco, another fellow man. In other cases no fellow is used, and it seems difficult to give definite rules; after[219] a numeral it is frequent: two fellow men (man?), three fellow bottle. There is a curious employment in ten fellow ten one fellow, which means 101. It is used adverbially in that man he cry big fellow ‘he cries loudly.’
These phrases have already shown some points of the very simple grammar of this language. Words have only one form, and what is expressed in our language through inflections is either not expressed at all or indicated by auxiliary words. The plural of nouns is the same as the singular (though the form men appears in my texts alongside man); when needed, the plural is indicated by adding a prefixed all: all he talk means ‘they say’ (also him fellow all means ‘they’); all man means ‘everybody’; a more indefinite plural is plenty man or full up man. For ‘we,’ it’s said me two fella or me three fellow, depending on the situation; me two fellow Lagia means ‘Lagia and I.’ If there are more, me altogether man or me plenty man can be used, though we is also common. Fellow (fella) is a frequently discussed word; it's required, or at least often used, after most pronouns, like that fellow hat, this fellow knife, me fellow, you fellow, him fellow (not he fellow); it often appears after an adjective and seems necessary to support the adjective before the noun: big fellow name, big fellow tobacco, another fellow man. In other cases, no fellow is used, and it seems hard to provide definite rules; after [219] a numeral, it's common: two fellow men (man?), three fellow bottle. There’s an interesting usage in ten fellow ten one fellow, which means 101. It’s used adverbially in that man he cry big fellow meaning ‘he cries loudly.’
The genitive is expressed by means of belong (or belong-a, long, along), which also serves for other prepositional relations. Examples: tail belong him, pappa belong me, wife belong you, belly belong me walk about too much (I was seasick), me savvee talk along white man; rope along bush means liana. Missis! man belong bullamacow him stop (the butcher has come). What for you wipe hands belong-a you on clothes belong esseppoon? (spoon, i.e. napkin). Cf. above the expressions for ‘bald.’ Piccaninny belong banana ‘a young b. plant.’ Belong also naturally means ‘to live in, be a native of’; boy belong island, he belong Burri-burrigan. The preposition along is used about many local relations (in, at, on, into, on board). From such combinations as laugh along (l. at) and he speak along this fella the transition is easy to cases in which along serves to indicate the indirect object: he give’m this fella Eve along Adam, and also a kind of direct object, as in fight alonga him, you gammon along me (deceive, lie to me), and with the form belong: he puss-puss belong this fellow (puss-puss orig. a cat, then as a verb to caress, make love to).
The genitive is shown using belong (or belong-a, long, along), which also works for other prepositional relationships. Examples: tail belong him, pappa belong me, wife belong you, belly belong me walk about too much (I was seasick), me savvee talk along white man; rope along bush means liana. Missis! man belong bullamacow him stop (the butcher has come). What for you wipe hands belong-a you on clothes belong esseppoon? (spoon, i.e. napkin). Compare the expressions for ‘bald’ above. Piccaninny belong banana means ‘a young b. plant.’ Belong also naturally means ‘to live in, be a native of’; boy belong island, he belong Burri-burrigan. The preposition along is used for many local relations (in, at, on, into, on board). From combinations like laugh along (laugh at) and he speak along this fella, it's easy to see how along can indicate the indirect object: he give’m this fella Eve along Adam, and also a type of direct object, as in fight alonga him, you gammon along me (deceive, lie to me), and with the form belong: he puss-puss belong this fellow (puss-puss originally refers to a cat, then as a verb to caress, make love to).
There is no distinction of gender: that woman he brother belong me = ‘she is my sister’; he (before the verb) and him (in all other positions) serve both for he, she and it. There is a curious use of ’m, um or em, in our texts often written him, after a verb as a ‘vocal sign of warning that an object of the verb is to follow,’ no matter what that object is.
There is no distinction of gender: that woman he brother belong me = ‘she is my sister’; he (before the verb) and him (in all other positions) work for he, she, and it. There's an interesting use of ’m, um, or em, often written as him in our texts after a verb as a ‘vocal sign to warn that an object of the verb is about to follow,’ regardless of what that object is.
Churchill says that “in the adjective comparison is unknown; the islanders do not know how to think comparatively—at least, they lack the form of words by which comparison may be indicated; this big, that small is the nearest they can come to the expression of the idea that one thing is greater than another.” But Landtman recognizes more big and also more better: ‘no good make him that fashion, more better make him all same.’ The same double comparative I find in another place, used as a kind of verb meaning ‘ought to, had better’: more better you come out. Too simply means ‘much’: he savvy too much ‘he knows much’ (praise, no blame), he too much talk. A synonym is plenty too much. Schuchardt gives the explanation of this trait: “The white man was the teacher of the black man, who imitated his manner of speaking. But the former would constantly use the strongest expressions and exaggerate in a manner that he would only occasionally resort to in speaking[220] to his own countrymen. He did not say, ‘You are very lazy,’ but ‘You are too lazy,’ and this will account for the fact that ‘very’ is called too much in Beach-la-mar as well as tumussi in the Negro-English of Surinam” (Spr. der Saramakkaneger, p. iv).
Churchill says that "in the adjective comparison is unknown; the islanders don't know how to think comparatively—at least, they lack the words to indicate comparison; this big, that small is the closest they can get to expressing the idea that one thing is greater than another." But Landtman notes more big and also more better: 'no good make him that way, more better make him all same.' I find the same double comparative elsewhere, used as a sort of verb meaning 'ought to, had better': more better you come out. Too simply means 'much': he savvy too much means 'he knows a lot' (praise, no blame), he too much talk. A synonym is plenty too much. Schuchardt explains this trait: "The white man was the teacher of the black man, who imitated his way of speaking. But the former would constantly use the strongest expressions and exaggerate in a way that he would only occasionally use when speaking[220] to his own countrymen. He didn't say, 'You are very lazy,' but 'You are too lazy,' and this explains why 'very' is called too much in Beach-la-mar as well as tumussi in the Negro-English of Surinam" (Spr. der Saramakkaneger, p. iv).
Verbs have no tense-forms; when required, a future may be indicated by means of by and by: brother belong-a-me by and by he dead (my br. is dying), bymby all men laugh along that boy; he small now, bymbye he big. It may be qualified by additions like bymby one time, bymby little bit, bymby big bit, and may be used also of the ‘postpreterit’ (of futurity relative to a past time): by and by boy belong island he speak. Another way of expressing the future is seen in that woman he close up born (!) him piccaninny ‘that woman will shortly give birth to a child.’ The usual sign of the perfect is been, the only idiomatic form of the verb to be: you been take me along three year; I been look round before. But finish may also be used: me look him finish (I have seen him), he kaikai all finish (he has eaten it all up).
Verbs don’t have tense forms; when needed, the future can be indicated by using by and by: my brother will be dead soon (my br. is dying), soon all the men will laugh at that boy; he's small now, but later he’ll be big. It can be qualified with phrases like eventually one time, eventually a little bit, eventually a big bit, and it can also refer to the 'postpreterit' (futurity related to a past time): soon the boy from the island will talk. Another way to express the future is shown in that woman will soon give birth to a child. The usual marker for the perfect is been, the only idiomatic form of the verb to be: you've been taking me along for three years; I’ve looked around before. However, finish can also be used: I’ve seen him finish (I have seen him), he's eaten it all up (he has eaten it all up).
Where we should expect forms of the verb ‘to be,’ there is either no verb or else stop is used: no water stop (there is no water), rain he stop (it rains), two white men stop Matupi (live in), other day plenty money he stop (... I had ...). For ‘have’ they say got. My belly no got kaikai (I am hungry), he got good hand (is skilful).
Where we expect forms of the verb ‘to be,’ there is either no verb or the word stop is used: no water stop (there is no water), rain he stop (it rains), two white men stop Matupi (live in), other day plenty money he stop (... I had ...). For ‘have’ they say got. My belly no got kaikai (I am hungry), he got good hand (is skillful).
XII.—§ 3. Sounds.
About the phonetic structure of Beach-la-mar I have very little information; as a rule the words in my sources are spelt in the usual English way. Churchill speaks in rather vague terms about difficulties which the islanders experience in imitating the English sounds, and especially groups of consonants: “Any English word which on experiment proved impracticable to the islanders has undergone alteration to bring it within the scope of their familiar range of sounds or has been rejected for some facile synonym.” Thus, according to him, the conjunction if could not be used on account of the f, and that is the reason for the constant use of suppose (s’pose, pose, posum = s’pose him)—but it may be allowable to doubt this, for as a matter of fact f occurs very frequently in the language—for instance, in the well-worn words fellow and finish. Suppose probably is preferred to if because it is fuller in form and less abstract, and therefore easier to handle, while the islanders have many occasions to hear it in other combinations than those in which it is an equivalent of the conjunction.
I have very little information about the phonetic structure of Beach-la-mar; usually, the words in my sources are spelled in the typical English way. Churchill speaks vaguely about the challenges the islanders face when trying to imitate English sounds, especially groups of consonants: “Any English word that turned out to be impractical for the islanders has been changed to fit their familiar range of sounds or has been replaced with a simpler synonym.” So, according to him, the conjunction if couldn't be used because of the f, which is why suppose (s’pose, pose, posum = s’pose him) is used so often—but one might question this, as f appears quite frequently in the language, such as in the common words fellow and finish. Suppose is likely preferred over if because it has a fuller form and is less abstract, making it easier to use, and the islanders often hear it in combinations other than those where it serves as a conjunction.
Landtman says that with the exception of a few sounds (j, ch, and th as in nothing) the Kiwai Papuans have little difficulty in pronouncing English words.
Landtman says that aside from a few sounds (j, ch, and th as in nothing), the Kiwai Papuans have no trouble pronouncing English words.
Schuchardt gives a little more information about pronunciation, and instances esterrong = strong, esseppoon = spoon, essaucepen = saucepan, pellate = plate, coverra = cover, millit = milk, bock-kiss = box (in Churchill bokus, bokkis) as mutilations due to the native speech habits. He also gives the following letter from a native of the New Hebrides, communicated to him by R. H. Codrington; it shows many sound substitutions:
Schuchardt provides a bit more information about pronunciation and gives examples like esterrong for strong, esseppoon for spoon, essaucepen for saucepan, pellate for plate, coverra for cover, millit for milk, and bock-kiss for box (in Churchill bokus, bokkis) as distortions resulting from native speech patterns. He also shares the following letter from a native of the New Hebrides, sent to him by R. H. Codrington; it displays many sound substitutions:
Misi Kamesi Arelu Jou no kamu ruki mi Mi no ruki iou Jou ruku Mai Poti i ko Mae tete Vakaromala mi raiki i tiripi Ausi parogi iou i rukauti Mai Poti mi nomoa kaikai mi angikele nau Poti mani Mae i kivi iou Jamu Vari koti iou kivi tamu te pako paraogi mi i penesi nomoa te Pako.
Misi Kamesi Arelu Jou no kamu ruki mi Mi no ruki iou Jou ruku Mai Poti i ko Mae tete Vakaromala mi raiki i tiripi Ausi parogi iou i rukauti Mai Poti mi nomoa kaikai mi angikele nau Poti mani Mae i kivi iou Jamu Vari koti iou kivi tamu te pako paraogi mi i penesi nomoa te Pako.
Oloraiti Ta, Mataso.
Oloraiti Ta, Mataso.
This means as much as:
This means a lot:
Mr. Comins, (How) are you? You no come look me; me no look you; you look my boat he go Mae to-day. Vakaromala me like he sleep house belong you, he look out my boat, me no more kaikai, me hungry now, boat man Mae he give you yam very good, you give some tobacco belong (here = to) me, he finish, no more tobacco.
Mr. Comins, how are you? You haven't come to see me; I haven't seen you; you saw my boat go to Mae today. Vakaromala, I wish I could stay at your place and look out for my boat. I have no more food; I'm hungry now. The boatman in Mae will give you some really good yams, and you can give me some tobacco. I'm out; I have no more tobacco.
All right Ta, Mataso.
All right, Ta, Mataso.
There are evidently many degrees of approximation to the true English sounds.
There are clearly many levels of closeness to the actual English sounds.
This letter also shows the characteristic tendency to add a vowel, generally a short i, to words ending in consonants. This is old, for I find in Defoe’s Farther Adventures of Robinson Crusoe (1719, p. 211): “All those natives, as also those of Africa, when they learn English, they always add two E’s at the end of the words where we use one, and make the accent upon them, as makee, takee and the like.” (Note the un-phonetic expressions!) Landtman, besides this addition, as in belongey, also mentions a more enigmatic one of lo to words ending in vowels, as clylo for ‘cry’ (cf. below on Pidgin).
This letter also displays the common habit of adding a vowel, usually a short i, to words that end in consonants. This is not new; I found in Defoe’s Farther Adventures of Robinson Crusoe (1719, p. 211): “All those natives, as well as those in Africa, when they learn English, always add two E’s at the end of the words where we use one, and place the emphasis on them, like makee, takee, and so on.” (Note the non-phonetic expressions!) Landtman, in addition to this, mentions a more mysterious addition of lo to words that end in vowels, like clylo for ‘cry’ (see below on Pidgin).
XII.—§ 4. Pidgin.
I now turn to Pidgin-English. As is well known, this is the name of the jargon which is very extensively used in China, and to some extent also in Japan and California, as a means of communication between English-speaking people and the yellow[222] population. The name is derived from the Chinese distortion of the Engl. word business. Unfortunately, the sources available for Pidgin-English as actually spoken in the East nowadays are neither so full nor so exact as those for Beach-la-mar, and the following sketch, therefore, is not quite satisfactory.[50]
I’ll now talk about Pidgin-English. As you probably know, this is the term used for the jargon that is widely spoken in China, and to some degree in Japan and California, to communicate between English speakers and the local population. The name comes from the Chinese mispronunciation of the English word business. Unfortunately, the resources available on how Pidgin-English is actually spoken in the East today are neither as comprehensive nor as accurate as those for Beach-la-mar, so this overview isn’t completely satisfying.[50]
Pidgin-English must have developed pretty soon after the first beginning of commercial relations between the English and Chinese. In Engl. Studien, 44. 298, Prick van Wely has printed some passages of C. F. Noble’s Voyage to the East Indies in 1747 and 1748, in which the Chinese are represented as talking to the writer in a “broken and mixed dialect of English and Portuguese,” the specimens given corresponding pretty closely to the Pidgin of our own days. Thus, he no cari Chinaman’s Joss, hap oter Joss, which is rendered, ‘that man does not worship our god, but has another god’; the Chinese are said to be unable to pronounce r and to use the word chin-chin for compliments and pickenini for ‘small.’
Pidgin English likely started developing soon after the initial commercial interactions between the English and the Chinese. In Engl. Studien, 44. 298, Prick van Wely has published some excerpts from C. F. Noble’s Voyage to the East Indies in 1747 and 1748, where the Chinese are described as speaking to the writer in a “broken and mixed dialect of English and Portuguese,” with the examples given resembling modern Pidgin quite closely. For instance, he no cari Chinaman’s Joss, hap oter Joss translates to ‘that man does not worship our god, but has another god’; it's mentioned that the Chinese struggle to pronounce r and use the word chin-chin for compliments and pickenini for ‘small.’
The latter word seems now extinct in Pidgin proper, though we have met it in Beach-la-mar, but Joss is still very frequent in Pidgin: it is from Portuguese Deus, Deos (or Span. Dios): Joss-house is a temple or church, Joss-pidgin religion, Joss-pidgin man a clergyman, topside Joss-pidgin man a bishop. Chin-chin, according to the same source, is from Chinese ts’ing-ts’ing, Pekingese ch’ing-ch’ing, a term of salutation answering to ‘thank you, adieu,’ but the English have extended its sphere of application very considerably, using it as a noun meaning ‘salutation, compliment,’ and as a verb meaning “to worship (by bowing and striking the chin), to reverence, adore, implore, to deprecate anger, to wish one something, invite, ask” (Leland). The explanation given here within parentheses shows how the Chinese word has been interpreted by popular etymology, and no doubt it owes its extensive use partly to its sound, which has taken the popular fancy. Chin-chin joss means religious worship of any kind.
The latter word seems to be extinct in standard Pidgin, although we've come across it in Beach-la-mar, but Joss is still quite common in Pidgin. It comes from the Portuguese Deus, Deos (or Spanish Dios): Joss-house refers to a temple or church, Joss-pidgin denotes the religion, Joss-pidgin man means a clergyman, and topside Joss-pidgin man is a bishop. Chin-chin, according to the same source, comes from the Chinese ts’ing-ts’ing and the Pekingese ch’ing-ch’ing, a greeting that corresponds to ‘thank you, goodbye,’ but the English have broadened its use significantly, applying it as a noun to mean ‘greeting, compliment,’ and as a verb meaning “to worship (by bowing and striking the chin), to honor, adore, implore, to avoid anger, to wish someone well, invite, or ask” (Leland). The explanation provided in parentheses shows how the Chinese word has been understood through popular etymology, and its widespread use likely comes from its appealing sound. Chin-chin joss refers to any form of religious worship.
Simpson says: “Many of the words in use are of unknown origin. In a number of cases the English suppose them to be[223] Chinese, while the Chinese, on the other hand, take them to be English.” Some of these, however, admit now of explanation, and not a few of them point to India, where the English have learnt them and brought them further East. Thus chit, chitty, ‘a letter, an account,’ is Hindustani chiṭṭhī; godown ‘warehouse’ is an English popular interpretation of Malay gadong, from Tamil giḍangi. Chowchow seems to be real Chinese and to mean ‘mixed preserves,’ but in Pidgin it has acquired the wider signification of ‘food, meal, to eat,’ besides having various other applications: a chowchow cargo is an assorted cargo, a ‘general shop’ is a chowchow shop. Cumshaw ‘a present’ is Chinese. But tiffin, which is used all over the East for ‘lunch,’ is really an English word, properly tiffing, from the slang verb to tiff, to drink, esp. to drink out of meal-times. In India it was applied to the meal, and then reintroduced into England and believed to be a native Indian word.
Simpson says: “Many of the words we use have unknown origins. In several cases, the English think they are[223] Chinese, while the Chinese, on the other hand, believe they are English.” However, some of these can now be explained, and many point to India, where the English learned them and brought them further East. For instance, chit, chitty, meaning ‘a letter, an account,’ comes from Hindustani chiṭṭhī; godown meaning ‘warehouse’ is an English interpretation of the Malay gadong, derived from Tamil giḍangi. Chowchow appears to be genuine Chinese and means ‘mixed preserves,’ but in Pidgin, it has taken on a broader meaning of ‘food, meal, to eat,’ among other uses: a chowchow cargo is a mixed cargo, and a ‘general shop’ is a chowchow shop. Cumshaw, meaning ‘a present,’ is Chinese. Yet tiffin, which is used throughout the East for ‘lunch,’ is actually an English word, originally tiffing, from the slang verb to tiff, meaning to drink, especially outside of mealtimes. In India, it referred to the meal and was later reintroduced to England, where it was thought to be a native Indian word.
XII.—§ 5. Grammar, etc.
Among points not found in Beach-la-mar I shall mention the extensive use of piecee, which in accordance with Chinese grammar is required between a numeral and the noun indicating what is counted; thus in a Chinaman’s description of a three-masted screw steamer with two funnels: “Thlee piecee bamboo, two piecee puff-puff, walk-along inside, no can see” (walk-along = the engine). Side means any locality: he belongey China-side now (he is in China), topside above, or high, bottom-side below, farside beyond, this-side here, allo-side around. In a similar way time (pronounced tim or teem) is used in that-tim then, when, what-tim when? one-tim once, only, two-tim twice, again, nother-tim again.
Among the points not found in Beach-la-mar, I will mention the widespread use of piecee, which, following Chinese grammar, is necessary between a number and the noun indicating what is being counted; for example, in a Chinese man's description of a three-masted screw steamer with two funnels: “Three piecee bamboo, two piecee puff-puff, walk-along inside, can't see” (walk-along = the engine). Side means any location: he belongey China-side now (he is in China), topside above or high, bottom-side below, farside beyond, this-side here, allo-side around. In a similar way, time (pronounced tim or teem) is used in that-tim then, when, what-tim when? one-tim once, only, two-tim twice, again, nother-tim again.
In one respect the Chinese sound system is accountable for a deviation from Beach-la-mar, namely in the substitution of l for r: loom, all light for ‘room, all right,’ etc., while the islanders often made the inverse change. But the tendency to add a vowel after a final consonant is the same: makee, too muchee, etc. The enigmatic termination lo, which Landtman found in some words in New Guinea, is also added to some words ending in vowel sounds in Pidgin, according to Leland, who instances die-lo, die; in his texts I find the additional examples buy-lo, say-lo, pay-lo, hear-lo, besides wailo, or wylo, which is probably from away; it means ‘go away, away with you! go, depart, gone.’ Can it be the Chinese sign of the past tense la, lao, generalized?
In one way, the Chinese sound system explains a difference from Beach-la-mar, specifically in replacing r with l: loom, all light for ‘room, all right,’ etc., while the islanders often did the opposite. However, the tendency to add a vowel after a final consonant is similar: makee, too muchee, etc. The puzzling ending lo, which Landtman found in some words in New Guinea, is also added to some words ending in vowel sounds in Pidgin, according to Leland, who gives examples like die-lo, die; in his texts, I find additional examples like buy-lo, say-lo, pay-lo, hear-lo, along with wailo or wylo, which likely comes from away; it means ‘go away, away with you! go, depart, gone.’ Could it be the Chinese past tense marker la, lao, used more broadly?
Among usual expressions must be mentioned number one (numpa one) ‘first-class, excellent,’ catchee ‘get, possess, hold,[224] bring,’ etc., ploper (plopa) ‘proper, good, nice, correct’: you belong ploper? ‘are you well?’
Among common expressions, we should mention number one (numpa one) meaning ‘first-class, excellent,’ catchee meaning ‘get, possess, hold,[224] bring,’ etc., and ploper (plopa) meaning ‘proper, good, nice, correct’: you belong ploper? meaning ‘are you well?’
Another word which was not in use among the South Sea islanders, namely have, in the form hab or hap is often used in Pidgin, even to form the perfect. Belong (belongy) is nearly as frequent as in Beach-la-mar, but is used in a different way: ‘My belongy Consoo boy,’ ‘I am the Consul’s servant.’ ‘You belong clever inside,’ ‘you are intelligent.’ The usual way of asking the price of something is ‘how much belong?’
Another word that wasn't used by the South Sea islanders, which is have, appears in the forms hab or hap and is often used in Pidgin, even to create the perfect tense. Belong (belongy) is almost as common as in Beach-la-mar, but it's used differently: ‘My belongy Consoo boy,’ means ‘I am the Consul’s servant.’ ‘You belong clever inside,’ means ‘you are intelligent.’ The typical way to ask the price of something is ‘how much belong?’
XII.—§ 6. General Theory.
Lingos of the same type as Beach-la-mar and Pidgin-English are found in other parts of the world where whites and natives meet and have to find some medium of communication. Thus a Danish doctor living in Belgian Congo sends me a few specimens of the ‘Pidgin’ spoken there: to indicate that his master has received many letters from home, the ‘boy’ will say, “Massa catch plenty mammy-book” (mammy meaning ‘woman, wife’). Breeze stands for air in general; if the boy wants to say that he has pumped up the bicycle tyres, he will say, “Plenty breeze live for inside,” live, being here the general term for ‘to be’ (Beach-l. stop); ‘is your master in?’ becomes ‘Massa live?’ and the answer is ‘he no live’ or ‘he live for hup’ (i.e. he is upstairs). If a man has a stomach-ache he will say ‘he hurt me for belly plenty too much’—too much is thus used exactly as in Beach-la-mar and Chinese Pidgin. The similarity of all these jargons, in spite of unavoidable smaller differences, is in fact very striking indeed.
Languages similar to Beach-la-mar and Pidgin-English can be found in various parts of the world where white people and locals interact and need a way to communicate. For example, a Danish doctor living in the Belgian Congo sent me some samples of the ‘Pidgin’ spoken there: to say that his boss has received many letters from home, the ‘boy’ will say, “Massa catch plenty mammy-book” (with mammy meaning ‘woman, wife’). Breeze refers to air in general; if the boy wants to say that he’s pumped up the bicycle tires, he’ll say, “Plenty breeze live for inside,” where live is used generally to mean ‘to be’ (like Beach-la-mar’s stop); ‘is your master in?’ becomes ‘Massa live?’ and the response is ‘he no live’ or ‘he live for hup’ (meaning he is upstairs). If someone has a stomach ache, they’ll say ‘he hurt me for belly plenty too much’—too much is used just like in Beach-la-mar and Chinese Pidgin. The striking similarity among all these jargons, despite some unavoidable smaller differences, is quite remarkable.
It may be time now to draw the moral of all this. And first I want to point out that these languages are not ‘mixed languages’ in the proper sense of that term. Churchill is not right when he says that Beach-la-mar “gathered material from every source, it fused them all.” As a matter of fact, it is English, and nothing but English, with very few admixtures, and all of these are such words as had previously been adopted into the English speech of those classes of the population, sailors, etc., with whom the natives came into contact: they were therefore justified in their belief that these words formed part of the English tongue and that what they learned themselves was real English. The natives really adhere to Windisch’s rule about the adoption of loan-words (above, XI § 10). If there are more Chinese words in Pidgin than there are Polynesian ones in Beach-la-mar, this is a natural consequence of the fact that the Chinese civilization ranked incomparably[225] much higher than the Polynesian, and that therefore the English living in China would adopt these words into their own speech. Still, their number is not very large. And we have seen that there are some words which the Easterners must naturally suppose to be English, while the English think that they belong to the vernacular, and in using them each party is thus under the delusion that he is rendering a service to the other.
It might be time to wrap up the lesson from all this. First, I want to clarify that these languages are not "mixed languages" in the true sense of the term. Churchill is mistaken when he says that Beach-la-mar "collected material from every source and combined them all." In reality, it is English, and nothing but English, with very few additions, and all of these are words that had already been incorporated into the English speech of certain groups, like sailors, who interacted with the locals: they were therefore justified in their belief that these words were part of the English language and that what they learned was real English. The locals really follow Windisch's rule about adopting loanwords (above, XI § 10). If there are more Chinese words in Pidgin than there are Polynesian words in Beach-la-mar, this is simply because Chinese civilization was on a much higher level than Polynesian civilization, so the English living in China would adopt these words into their speech. Still, the number is not very large. As we've seen, there are some words that Easterners naturally assume are English, while the English think they are part of the local dialect, leading both sides to mistakenly believe they are helping each other.
This leads me to my second point: those deviations from correct English, those corruptions of pronunciation and those simplifications of grammar, which have formed the object of this short sketch, are due just as much to the English as to the Easterners, and in many points they began with the former rather than with the latter (cf. Schuchardt, Auf anlass des Volapüks, 1888, 8; KS 4. 35, SlD 36; ESt 15. 292). From Schuchardt I take the following quotation: “The usual question on reaching the portico of an Indian bungalow is, Can missus see?—it being a popular superstition amongst the Europeans that to enable a native to understand English he must be addressed as if he were deaf, and in the most infantile language.” This tendency to meet the ‘inferior races’ half-way in order to facilitate matters for them is by Churchill called “the one supreme axiom of international philology: the proper way to make a foreigner understand what you would say is to use broken English. He speaks it himself, therefore give him what he uses.” We recognize here the same mistaken notion that we have seen above in the language of the nursery, where mothers and others will talk a curious sort of mangled English which is believed to represent real babytalk, though it has many traits which are purely conventional. In both cases these more or less artificial perversions are thought to be an aid to those who have not yet mastered the intricacies of the language in question, though the ultimate result is at best a retardation of the perfect acquisition of correct speech.
This brings me to my second point: the deviations from correct English, the corrupt pronunciations, and the simplified grammar that I’ve discussed here are just as much the fault of the English as they are of the Easterners. In many ways, these issues started with the former rather than the latter (cf. Schuchardt, Auf anlass des Volapüks, 1888, 8; KS 4. 35, SlD 36; ESt 15. 292). I quote Schuchardt: “The usual question when entering an Indian bungalow is, Can missus see?—believed by Europeans to be a popular superstition that to make a native understand English, you have to address them as if they were deaf, using the most childish language.” Churchill calls this tendency to meet 'inferior races' halfway to make things easier for them “the one supreme axiom of international philology: the best way to make a foreigner understand what you want to say is to use broken English. He speaks it himself, so give him what he uses.” We see here the same misguided idea present in nursery language, where mothers and others speak a bizarrely mangled English that is believed to be genuine baby talk, even though it has many purely conventional traits. In both situations, these somewhat artificial distortions are thought to help those who haven't yet mastered the complexities of the language. However, the end result is, at best, a delay in fully acquiring proper speech.
My view, then, is that Beach-la-mar as well as Pidgin is English, only English learnt imperfectly, in consequence partly of the difficulties always inherent in learning a totally different language, partly of the obstacles put in the way of learning by the linguistic behaviour of the English-speaking people themselves. The analogy of its imperfections with those of a baby’s speech in the first period is striking, and includes errors of pronunciation, extreme simplification of grammar, scantiness of vocabulary, even to such peculiarities as that the word too is apprehended in the sense of ‘very much,’ and such phrases as you better go, etc.
My perspective is that Beach-la-mar and Pidgin are forms of English, just learned imperfectly. This is due partly to the challenges involved in learning a completely different language and partly because of the barriers created by the language habits of native English speakers themselves. The comparison of their flaws to a baby's early speech is quite striking and includes issues like pronunciation mistakes, overly simplified grammar, limited vocabulary, and even specific quirks, such as understanding the word too as meaning 'very much,' along with phrases like you better go, and so on.
XII.—§ 7. Mauritius Creole.
The view here advanced on the character of these ‘Pidgin’ languages is corroborated when we see that other languages under similar circumstances have been treated in exactly the same way as English. With regard to French in the island of Mauritius, formerly Ile de France, we are fortunate in possessing an excellent treatment of the subject by M. C. Baissac (Étude sur le Patois Créole Mauricien, Nancy, 1880; cf. the same writer’s Le Folk-lore de l’Ile-Maurice, Paris, 1888, Les littératures populaires, tome xxvii). The island was uninhabited when the French occupied it in 1715; a great many slaves were imported from Madagascar, and as a means of intercourse between them and their French masters a French Creole language sprang up, which has survived the English conquest (1810) and the subsequent wholesale introduction of coolies from India and elsewhere. The paramount element in the vocabulary is French; one may read many pages in Baissac’s texts without coming across any foreign words, apart from the names of some indigenous animals and plants. In the phonetic structure there are a few all-pervading traits: the front-round vowels are replaced by the corresponding unrounded vowels or in a few cases by [u], and instead of [ʃ, ʒ] we find [s, z]; thus éré heureux, éne plime une plume, sakéne chacun(e), zize juge, zunu genou, suval cheval: I replace Baissac’s notation, which is modelled on the French spelling, by a more phonetic one according to his own indications; but I keep his final e muet.
The perspective presented here on these 'Pidgin' languages is supported when we observe that other languages in similar situations have been treated just like English. Concerning French on the island of Mauritius, once known as Ile de France, we have the benefit of a thorough analysis by M. C. Baissac (Étude sur le Patois Créole Mauricien, Nancy, 1880; see also the same author's Le Folk-lore de l’Ile-Maurice, Paris, 1888, Popular literatures, volume xxvii). The island was uninhabited when the French took possession in 1715; many slaves were brought in from Madagascar, and a French Creole language emerged as a means of communication between them and their French masters, which has endured the English takeover (1810) and the later significant influx of laborers from India and other regions. The main component of the vocabulary is French; one can read through many pages of Baissac's texts without encountering foreign words, except for the names of some local animals and plants. In the phonetic structure, there are a few prevalent characteristics: front-round vowels are replaced by the corresponding unrounded vowels or, in some cases, by [u], and instead of [ʃ, ʒ] we see [s, z]; so éclairé heureux, éne plime a feather, sakéne each, zize judge, zunu knee, suval horse: I substitute Baissac’s notation, based on French spelling, with a more phonetic version following his own guidelines; however, I retain his final e muet.
The grammar of this language is as simple as possible. Substantives have the same form for the two numbers: dé suval deux chevaux. There is no definite article. The adjective is invariable, thus also sa for ce, cet, cette, ces, ceci, cela, celui, celle, ceux, celles. Mo before a verb is ‘I,’ before a substantive it is possessive: mo koné I know, mo lakaze my house; in the same way to is you and your, but in the third person a distinction is made, for li is he or she, but his or her is so, and here we have even a plural, zaute from ‘les autres,’ which form is also used as a plural of the second person: mo va alle av zaut, I shall go with you.
The grammar of this language is as simple as possible. Nouns have the same form for both singular and plural: give up two horses. There is no definite article. The adjective doesn't change, so sa stands for this, that, these, those, this one, that one, the one, the ones. Mo before a verb means ‘I,’ and before a noun, it shows possession: mo koné I know, mo lakaze my house; similarly, to means you and your, but in the third person, there's a distinction: li is he or she, but his or her is so, and we even have a plural, zaute from ‘les autres,’ which is also used as a plural for the second person: mo va alle av zaut, I shall go with you.
The genitive is expressed by word-order without any preposition: lakase so papa his father’s house; also with so before the nominative: so piti ppa Azor old Azor’s child.
The genitive is shown through word order without any preposition: lakase so papa his father's house; also with so before the nominative: so piti ppa Azor old Azor's child.
The form in which the French words have been taken over presents some curious features, and in some cases illustrates the difficulty the blacks felt in separating the words which they heard in the French utterance as one continuous stream of[227] sounds. There is evidently a disinclination to begin a word with a vowel, and sometimes an initial vowel is left out, as bitation habitation, tranzé étranger, but in other cases z is taken from the French plural article: zozo oiseau, zistoire, zenfan, zimaze image, zalfan éléphant, zanimo animal, or n from the French indefinite article: name ghost, nabi (or zabi) habit. In many cases the whole French article is taken as an integral part of the word, as lérat rat, léroi, licien chien, latabe table, lére heure (often as a conjunction ‘when’); thus also with the plural article lizié from les yeux, but without the plural signification: éne lizié an eye. Similarly éne lazoie a goose. Words that are often used in French with the so-called partitive article keep this; thus disel salt, divin wine, duri rice, éne dipin a loaf; here also we meet with one word from the French plural: éne dizéf an egg, from des œufs. The French mass-word with the partitive article du monde has become dimunde or dumune, and as it means ‘people’ and no distinction is made between plural and singular, it is used also for ‘person’: éne vié dimunde an old man.
The way the French words have been adopted shows some interesting characteristics, and in some cases reflects the challenge that Black speakers faced in distinguishing the words they heard in the French spoken as a continuous stream of[227] sounds. There clearly seems to be a reluctance to start a word with a vowel, and sometimes an initial vowel is dropped, as in habitation habitation, tranzé foreign, but in other situations, z is taken from the French plural article: zing bird, story, fan, maze image, fan elephant, animal animal, or n from the French indefinite article: name ghost, nabi (or zabi) habit. In many instances, the entire French article is included as part of the word, such as lérat rat, léroi, license dog, latabe table, lére heure (often functioning as 'when'); this occurs as well with the plural article lizié from les yeux, but without the plural meaning: éne lizié an eye. Similarly, éne lazoie a goose. Words that are frequently used in French with the so-called partitive article retain this; thus disel salt, divin wine, duri rice, éne dipin a loaf; we also encounter a word from the French plural: éne dizéf an egg, derived from des œufs. The French mass word with the partitive article du monde has transformed into dimunde or dumune, and since it means ‘people’ with no distinction between plural and singular, it is also used for ‘person’: éne vié dimunde an old man.
Verbs have only one form, generally from the French infinitive or past participle, which in most cases would fall together (manzé = manger, mangé; kuri = courir, couru); this serves for all persons in both numbers and all moods. But tenses are indicated by means of auxiliary words: va for the future, té (from été) for the ordinary past, and fine for the perfect: mo manzé I eat, mo va manzé I shall eat, mo té manzé I ate, mo fine manzé I have eaten, mo fine fini I have finished. Further, there is a curious use of aprè to express what in English are called the progressive or expanded tenses: mo aprè manzé I am eating, mo té aprè manzé I was eating, and of pour to express the immediate future: mo pour manzé I am going to eat, and finally an immediate past may be expressed by fék: mo fék manzé I have just been eating (je ne fais que de manger). As these may be combined in various ways (mo va fine manzé I shall have eaten, even mo té va fék manzé I should have eaten a moment ago, etc.), the language has really succeeded in building up a very fine and rich verbal system with the simplest possible means and with perfect regularity.
Verbs have only one form, usually from the French infinitive or past participle, which in most cases would be the same (manzé = eat, eaten; kuri = run, ran); this works for all subjects in both numbers and all moods. However, tenses are shown using auxiliary words: va for the future, té (from été) for the simple past, and fine for the perfect: mo manzé I eat, mo va manzé I will eat, mo té manzé I ate, mo fine manzé I have eaten, mo fine fini I have finished. Additionally, there’s an interesting use of aprè to express what in English are called the progressive or continuous tenses: mo aprè manzé I am eating, mo té aprè manzé I was eating, and pour to express the near future: mo pour manzé I am going to eat, and lastly, the immediate past can be expressed with fék: mo fék manzé I have just eaten (je ne fais que de manger). Since these can be combined in different ways (mo va fine manzé I will have eaten, even mo té va fék manzé I would have eaten a moment ago, etc.), the language has really managed to create a very sophisticated and rich verbal system with the simplest means and perfect consistency.
The French separate negatives have been combined into one word each: napa not (there is not), narien nothing, and similarly nék only.
The French separate negatives have been combined into single words: napa meaning not (there is not), narien meaning nothing, and similarly nék meaning only.
In many cases the same form is used for a substantive or adjective and for a verb: mo soif, mo faim I am thirsty and hungry; li content so madame he is fond of his wife.
In many cases, the same form is used for a noun or adjective and for a verb: mo soif, mo faim I am thirsty and hungry; li content so madame he is fond of his wife.
Côte (or à côte) is a preposition ‘by the side of, near,’ but also means ‘where’: la case àcote li resté ‘the house in which he lives’; cf. Pidgin side.
Côte (or à côte) is a preposition meaning 'by the side of, near,' but it also means 'where': la case àcote li resté 'the house in which he lives'; cf. Pidgin side.
In all this, as will easily be seen, there is very little French grammar; this will be especially evident when we compare the French verbal system with its many intricacies: difference according to person, number, tense and mood with their endings, changes of root-vowels and stress-place, etc., with the unchanged verbal root and the invariable auxiliary syllables of the Creole. But there is really as little in the Creole dialect of Malagasy grammar, as I have ascertained by looking through G. W. Parker’s Grammar (London, 1883): both nations in forming this means of communication have, as it were, stripped themselves of all their previous grammatical habits and have spoken as if their minds were just as innocent of grammar as those of very small babies, whether French or Malagasy. Thus, and thus only, can it be explained that the grammar of this variety of French is for all practical purposes identical with the grammar of those two varieties of English which we have previously examined in this chapter.
In all of this, as you can easily see, there's very little French grammar; this will be especially clear when we compare the complex French verb system, which varies by person, number, tense, and mood with their endings, root vowel changes, and stress placement, etc., to the unchanged verb root and the consistent auxiliary syllables of the Creole. However, the Creole dialect also has very little Malagasy grammar, which I've confirmed by reviewing G. W. Parker’s Grammar (London, 1883): both nations, in creating this means of communication, have essentially stripped away all their previous grammatical habits and spoken as if their understanding of grammar were as innocent as that of very small babies, whether French or Malagasy. Thus, and only in this way, can we explain that the grammar of this form of French is practically identical to the grammar of the two forms of English we've previously examined in this chapter.
No one can read Baissac’s collection of folk-tales from Mauritius without being often struck with the felicity and even force of this language, in spite of its inevitable naïveté and of the childlike simplicity of its constructions. If it were left to itself it might develop into a really fine idiom without abandoning any of its characteristic traits. But as it is, it seems to be constantly changing through the influence of real French, which is more and more taught to and imitated by the islanders, and the day may come when most of the features described in this rapid sketch will have given place to something which is less original, but will be more readily understood by Parisian globe-trotters who may happen to visit the distant island.
No one can read Baissac’s collection of folk tales from Mauritius without being frequently impressed by the charm and even power of the language, despite its unavoidable naïveté and the childlike simplicity of its structure. Left on its own, it might evolve into a truly beautiful dialect without losing any of its distinctive characteristics. However, as it stands, it seems to be continuously changing due to the influence of standard French, which is increasingly taught to and imitated by the locals. One day, most of the features described in this quick overview may be replaced by something less original but easier for Parisian travelers to understand when they visit the remote island.
XII.—§ 8. Chinook Jargon.
The view here advanced may be further put to the test if we examine a totally different language developed in another part of the world, viz. in Oregon. I give its history in an abridged form from Hale.[51] When the first British and American trading ships appeared on the north-west coast of America, towards the end of the eighteenth century, they found a great number of distinct languages, the Nootka, Nisqually, Chinook, Chihailish and[229] others, all of them harsh in pronunciation, complex in structure, and each spoken over a very limited space. The traders learnt a few Nootka words and the Indians a few English words. Afterwards the traders began to frequent the Columbia River, and naturally attempted to communicate with the natives there by means of the words which they had found intelligible at Nootka. The Chinooks soon acquired these words, both Nootka and English. When later the white traders made permanent establishments in Oregon, a real language was required; and it was formed by drawing upon the Chinook for such words as were requisite, numerals, pronouns, and some adverbs and other words. Thus enriched, ‘the Jargon,’ as it now began to be styled, became of great service as a means of general intercourse. Now, French Canadians in the service of the fur companies were brought more closely into contact with the Indians, hunted with them, and lived with them on terms of familiarity. The consequence was that several French words were added to the slender stock of the Jargon, including the names of various articles of food and clothing, implements, several names of the parts of the body, and the verbs to run, sing and dance, also one conjunction, puis, reduced to pi.
The view presented here can be further tested by looking at a completely different language developed in another part of the world, namely Oregon. I summarize its history from Hale.[51] When the first British and American trading ships arrived on the northwest coast of America near the end of the eighteenth century, they encountered many distinct languages, including Nootka, Nisqually, Chinook, Chihailish, and others, all of which were harsh in pronunciation and complex in structure, spoken over very small areas. The traders learned a few Nootka words, and the Indigenous people picked up some English words. Later, when traders began frequenting the Columbia River, they naturally tried to communicate with the locals using the words they had found understandable at Nootka. The Chinooks quickly picked up both Nootka and English words. When the white traders established permanent settlements in Oregon, a real language was needed, and it was developed by using Chinook words for things like numbers, pronouns, some adverbs, and other terms. This new ‘Jargon’, as it came to be called, became very useful for general communication. French Canadians working for the fur companies became more closely acquainted with the Indigenous people, hunting and living with them as friends. As a result, several French words were added to the limited vocabulary of the Jargon, including names for different foods, clothing items, tools, various body parts, and the verbs to run, sing, and dance, as well as the conjunction puis, which was simplified to pi.
“The origin of some of the words is rather whimsical. The Americans, British and French are distinguished by the terms Boston, Kinchotsh (King George), and pasaiuks, which is presumed to be the word Français (as neither f, r nor the nasal n can be pronounced by the Indians) with the Chinook plural termination uks added.... ‘Foolish’ is expressed by pelton or pilton, derived from the name of a deranged person, one Archibald Pelton, whom the Indians saw at Astoria; his strange appearance and actions made such an impression upon them, that thenceforward anyone behaving in an absurd or irrational manner” was termed pelton.
“The origin of some of the words is quite amusing. The Americans, British, and French are identified by the terms Boston, Kinchotsh (King George), and pasaiuks, which is thought to be a version of the word Français (since the Indians cannot pronounce f, r, or the nasal n) with the Chinook plural ending uks added.... ‘Foolish’ is expressed by pelton or pilton, which comes from the name of a crazy person, one Archibald Pelton, whom the Indians observed at Astoria; his strange appearance and behavior left such an impression on them that from then on, anyone acting in a silly or irrational way” was referred to as pelton.
The phonetic structure is very simple, and contains no sound or combination that is not easy to Englishmen and Frenchmen as well as to Indians of at least a dozen tribes. The numerous harsh Indian velars either disappear entirely or are softened to h and k. On the other hand, the d, f, r, v, z of the English and French become in the mouth of a Chinook t, p, l, w, s. Examples:
The phonetic structure is really simple and has no sounds or combinations that are difficult for English and French speakers, as well as for Indians from at least a dozen tribes. The many harsh Indian velar sounds either fade away completely or are softened to h and k. Meanwhile, the d, f, r, v, z sounds from English and French turn into t, p, l, w, s when spoken by a Chinook. Examples:
Chinook: | thliakso | yakso | hair |
etsghot | itshut | black bear | |
tkalaitanam | kalaitan | arrow, shot, bullet | |
ntshaika | nesaika | we | |
mshaika | mesaika | we | |
thlaitshka | klaska (tlaska) | they | |
[230] | tkhlon | klon (tlun) | three |
English: | handkerchief | hakatshum (kenkeshim) | handkerchief |
cry | klai, kalai (kai) | cry, mourn | |
fire | paia | fire, cook, ripe | |
dry | tlai, delai | dry | |
French: | courir | kuli | run |
la bouche | labus (labush) | mouth | |
le mouton | lemuto | sheep |
The forms in parentheses are those of the French glossary (1853).
The forms in parentheses are from the French glossary (1853).
It will be noticed that many of the French words have the definite article affixed (a trait noticed in many words in the French Creole dialect of Mauritius). More than half of the words in Hale’s glossary beginning with l have this origin, thus labutai bottle, lakloa cross, lamie an old woman (la vieille), lapushet fork (la fourchette), latlá noise (faire du train), lidú finger, lejaub (or diaub, yaub) devil (le diable), léma hand, liplét missionary (le prêtre), litá tooth. The plural article is found in lisáp egg (les œufs)—the same word in which Mauritius French has also adopted the plural form.
It will be noticed that many of the French words have the definite article attached (a feature observed in many words in the French Creole dialect of Mauritius). More than half of the words in Hale’s glossary starting with l come from this origin, such as labutai for bottle, lakloa for cross, lamie for an old woman (the old), lapushet for fork (the fork), latlá for noise (faire du train), lidú for finger, lejaub (or diaub, yaub) for devil (the devil), léma for hand, liplét for missionary (the priest), and litá for tooth. The plural article is found in lisáp for eggs (les œufs)—the same word in which Mauritius French has also adopted the plural form.
Some of the meanings of English words are rather curious; thus, kol besides ‘cold’ means ‘winter,’ and as the years, as with the old Scandinavians, are reckoned by winters, also ‘year.’ Sun (son) besides ‘sun’ also means ‘day.’ Spos (often pronounced pos), as in Beach-la-mar, is a common conjunction, ‘if, when.’
Some of the meanings of English words are quite interesting; for example, kol besides ‘cold’ also means ‘winter,’ and just like the old Scandinavians who counted years by winters, it can also mean ‘year.’ Sun (son) not only means ‘sun’ but also ‘day.’ Spos (often pronounced pos), as in Beach-la-mar, is a common conjunction meaning ‘if’ or ‘when.’
The grammar is extremely simple. Nouns are invariable; the plural generally is not distinguished from the singular; sometimes haiu (ayo) ‘much, many’ is added by way of emphasis. The genitive is shown by position only: kahta nem maika papa? (lit., what name thou father) what is the name of your father? The adjective precedes the noun, and comparison is indicated by periphrasis. ‘I am stronger than thou’ would be weke maika skukum kahkwa naika, lit. ‘not thou strong as I.’ The superlative is indicated by the adverb haiás ‘great, very’: haiás oliman okuk kanim, that canoe is the oldest, lit., very old that canoe, or (according to Gibbs) by elip ‘first, before’: elip klosh ‘best.’
The grammar is really simple. Nouns don’t change form; the plural is usually the same as the singular; sometimes haiu (ayo) meaning ‘much, many’ is added for emphasis. The genitive is indicated by position only: kahta nem maika papa? (literally, what name your father) meaning what is your father's name? The adjective comes before the noun, and comparison is shown through phrasing. ‘I am stronger than you’ would be weke maika skukum kahkwa naika, literally ‘not you strong as I.’ The superlative is shown by the adverb haiás meaning ‘great, very’: haiás oliman okuk kanim, that canoe is the oldest, literally, very old that canoe, or (according to Gibbs) by elip meaning ‘first, before’: elip klosh meaning ‘best.’
The numerals and pronouns are from the Chinook, but the latter, at any rate, are very much simplified. Thus the pronoun for ‘we’ is nesaika, from Chinook ntshaika, which is the exclusive form, meaning ‘we here,’ not including the person or persons addressed.
The numbers and pronouns come from the Chinook language, but the pronouns, at least, are much more straightforward. For example, the pronoun for 'we' is nesaika, derived from the Chinook ntshaika, which is the exclusive form meaning 'we here,' not including the person or people being addressed.
Like the nouns, the verbs have only one form, the tense being left to be inferred from the context, or, if strictly necessary,[231] being indicated by an adverb. The future, in the sense of ‘about to, ready to,’ may be expressed by tike, which means properly ‘wish,’ as naika papa tike mimalus (mimelust) my father is about to die. The verb ‘to be’ is not expressed: maika pelton, thou art foolish.
Like the nouns, the verbs have only one form, and the tense is inferred from the context, or, if absolutely necessary, indicated by an adverb. The future, meaning ‘about to, ready to,’ can be expressed by tike, which actually means ‘wish,’ as in naika papa tike mimalus (mimelust) my father is about to die. The verb ‘to be’ is not used: maika pelton, you are foolish.
There is a much-used verb mámuk, which means ‘make, do, work’ and forms causatives, as mamuk chako ‘make to come, bring,’ mamuk mimalus ‘kill.’ With a noun: mamuk lalam (Fr. la rame) ‘make oar,’ i.e. ‘to row,’ mamuk pepe (make paper) ‘write,’ mamuk po (make blow) ‘fire a gun.’
There is a commonly used verb mámuk, which means ‘make, do, work’ and forms causatives, as in mamuk chako ‘make to come, bring,’ mamuk mimalus ‘kill.’ With a noun: mamuk lalam (Fr. la rame) ‘make oar,’ meaning ‘to row,’ mamuk pepe (make paper) ‘write,’ mamuk po (make blow) ‘fire a gun.’
There is only one true preposition, kopa, which is used in various senses—to, for, at, in, among, about, etc.; but even this may generally be omitted and the sentence remain intelligible. The two conjunctions spos and pi have already been mentioned.
There is only one true preposition, kopa, which is used in different ways—to, for, at, in, among, about, etc.; but even this can usually be left out and the sentence will still make sense. The two conjunctions spos and pi have already been mentioned.
XII.—§ 9. Chinook continued.
In this way something is formed that may be used as a language in spite of the scantiness of its vocabulary. But a good deal has to be expressed by the tone of the voice, the look and the gesture of the speaker. “The Indians in general,” says Hale (p. 18), “are very sparing of their gesticulations. No languages, probably, require less assistance from this source than theirs.... We frequently had occasion to observe the sudden change produced when a party of the natives, who had been conversing in their own tongue, were joined by a foreigner, with whom it was necessary to speak in the Jargon. The countenances, which had before been grave, stolid and inexpressive, were instantly lighted up with animation; the low, monotonous tone became lively and modulated; every feature was active; the head, the arms and the whole body were in motion, and every look and gesture became instinct with meaning.”
In this way, something is created that can be used as a language despite its limited vocabulary. However, a lot has to be conveyed through the speaker's tone of voice, facial expressions, and gestures. “The Indians in general,” says Hale (p. 18), “are very sparing of their gestures. No languages probably require less support from this source than theirs.... We often noticed the sudden change when a group of natives, who had been speaking in their own language, were joined by a foreigner, with whom they had to communicate in the Jargon. The faces, which had previously been serious, impassive, and expressionless, instantly lit up with energy; the low, monotonous tone turned lively and varied; every feature became animated; the head, arms, and entire body were in motion, and every look and gesture was full of meaning.”
In British Columbia and in parts of Alaska this language is the prevailing medium of intercourse between the whites and the natives, and there Hale thinks that it is likely to live “for hundreds, and perhaps thousands, of years to come.” The language has already the beginning of a literature: songs, mostly composed by women, who sing them to plaintive native tunes. Hale gives some lyrics and a sermon preached by Mr. Eells, who has been accustomed for many years to preach to the Indians in the Jargon and who says that he sometimes even thinks in this idiom.
In British Columbia and parts of Alaska, this language is the main way that white people and natives communicate, and Hale believes it will likely continue to thrive “for hundreds, and maybe thousands, of years to come.” The language already has the start of a literature: songs, mostly written by women, who perform them to sorrowful native melodies. Hale shares some lyrics and a sermon delivered by Mr. Eells, who has been preaching to the Indians in the Jargon for many years and says he sometimes even thinks in this language.
Hale counted the words in this sermon, and found that to express the whole of its “historic and descriptive details, its[232] arguments and its appeals,” only 97 different words were required, and not a single grammatical inflexion. Of these words, 65 were from Amerindian languages (46 Chinook, 17 Nootka, 2 Salish), 23 English and 7 French.
Hale counted the words in this sermon and found that to express all of its “historical and descriptive details, its[232]arguments and its appeals,” only 97 different words were needed, and there wasn't a single grammatical inflection. Of these words, 65 were from Indigenous languages (46 Chinook, 17 Nootka, 2 Salish), 23 were English, and 7 were French.
It is very instructive to go through the texts given by Hale and to compare them with the real Chinook text analysed in Boas’s Handbook of American Indian Languages (Washington, 1911, p. 666 ff.): the contrast could not be stronger between simplicity carried to the extreme point, on the one hand, and an infinite complexity and intricacy on the other. But though it must be admitted that astonishingly much can be expressed in the Jargon by its very simple and few means, a European mind, while bewildered in the entangled jumble of the Chinook language, cannot help missing a great many nuances in the Jargon, where thoughts are reduced to their simplest formula and where everything is left out that is not strictly necessary to the least exacting minds.
It’s very enlightening to read the texts provided by Hale and compare them with the actual Chinook text analyzed in Boas’s Handbook of American Indian Languages (Washington, 1911, p. 666 ff.): the difference is striking between the extreme simplicity on one side and the overwhelming complexity and intricacies on the other. However, while it’s true that an incredible amount can be conveyed in the Jargon with its very basic and limited tools, a European perspective, while lost in the tangled mess of the Chinook language, can’t help but notice many nuances that are absent in the Jargon, where thoughts are boiled down to their simplest form and where everything unnecessary for the most straightforward minds is omitted.
XII.—§ 10. Makeshift Languages.
To sum up, this Oregon trade language is to be classed together with Beach-la-mar and Pidgin-English, not perhaps as ‘bastard’ or ‘mongrel’ languages—such expressions taken from biology always convey the wrong impression that a language is an ‘organism’ and had therefore better be avoided—but rather as makeshift languages or minimum languages, means of expression which do not serve all the purposes of ordinary languages, but may be used as substitutes where fuller and better ones are not available.
To sum up, this Oregon trade language should be grouped with Beach-la-mar and Pidgin-English, not necessarily as ‘bastard’ or ‘mongrel’ languages—terms borrowed from biology that often create the wrong impression of a language being an ‘organism’ and should therefore be avoided—but more as makeshift languages or minimal languages, ways of communicating that don’t cover all the functions of regular languages, but can be used as substitutes when more complete and effective options aren’t available.
The analogy between this Jargon and the makeshift languages of the East is closer than might perhaps appear at first blush, only we must make it clear to ourselves that English is in the two cases placed in exactly the inverse position. Pidgin and Beach-la-mar are essentially English learnt imperfectly by the Easterners, the Oregon Jargon is essentially Chinook learnt imperfectly by the English. Just as in the East the English not only suffered but also abetted the yellows in their corruption of the English language, so also the Amerindians met the English half-way through simplifying their own speech. If in Polynesia and China the makeshift language came to contain some Polynesian and Chinese words, they were those which the English themselves had borrowed into their own language and which the yellows therefore must think formed a legitimate part of the language they wanted to speak; and in the same way the American Jargon contains such words from the European[233] languages as had been previously adopted by the reds. If the Jargon embraces so many French terms for the various parts of the body, one concomitant reason probably is that these names in the original Chinook language presented special difficulties through being specialized and determined by possessive affixes (my foot, for instance, is lekxeps, thy foot tāmēps, its foot lelaps, our (dual inclusive) feet tetxaps, your (dual) feet temtaps; I simplify the notation in Boas’s Handbook, p. 586), so that it was incomparably easier to take the French lepi and use it unchanged in all cases, no matter what the number, and no matter who the possessor was. The natives, who had learnt such words from the French, evidently used them to other whites under the impression that thereby they could make themselves more readily understood, and the British and American traders probably imagined them to be real Chinook; anyhow, their use meant a substantial economy of mental exertion.
The comparison between this jargon and the makeshift languages of the East is closer than it might seem at first glance, but we need to recognize that English plays exactly the opposite role in the two cases. Pidgin and Beach-la-mar are essentially English that Easterners have learned imperfectly, while the Oregon jargon is essentially Chinook that the English have learned imperfectly. Just as in the East, the English not only struggled but also facilitated the corruption of the English language by the locals, the Amerindians simplified their own speech to meet the English halfway. In Polynesia and China, the makeshift languages included some Polynesian and Chinese words, which were originally borrowed by the English and that locals believed were legitimate parts of the languages they wanted to speak; similarly, the American jargon contains words from European languages that had already been adopted by the natives. The reason the jargon includes so many French terms for body parts is likely that these names in the original Chinook language were particularly difficult due to their use of possessive affixes (for example, my foot is lekxeps, your foot tāmēps, its foot lelaps, our feet tetxaps, your feet temtaps; I simplify the notation in Boas’s Handbook, p. 586), making it much easier to take the French word lepi and use it as is in all cases, regardless of number or who the owner was. The natives, who learned these words from the French, clearly used them with other whites thinking it would help them be understood better, and the British and American traders probably thought they were real Chinook; either way, using these words significantly reduced the mental effort needed.
The chief point I want to make, however, is with regard to grammar. In all these languages, both in the makeshift English and French of the East and in the makeshift Amerindian of the North-West, the grammatical structure has been simplified very much beyond what we find in any of the languages involved in their making, and simplified to such an extent that it may be expressed in very few words, and those nearly the same in all these languages, the chief rule being common to them all, that substantives, adjectives and verbs remain always unchanged. The vocabularies are as the poles asunder—in the East English and French, in America Chinook, etc.—but the morphology of all these languages is practically identical, because in all of them it has reached the vanishing-point. This shows conclusively that the reason of this simplicity is not the Chinese substratum or the influence of Chinese grammar, as is so often believed. Pidgin-English cannot be described, as is often done, as English with Chinese pronunciation and Chinese grammar, because in that case we should expect Beach-la-mar to be quite different from it, as the substratum there would be Melanesian, which in many ways differs from Chinese, and further we should expect the Mauritius Creole to be French with Malagasy pronunciation and Malagasy grammar, and on the other hand the Oregon trade language to be Chinook with English pronunciation and English grammar—but in none of these cases would this description tally with the obvious facts. We might just as well say that the speech of a two-year-old child in England is English with Chinese grammar, and that of the two-year-old French child is French modelled on Chinese grammar: the truth on the contrary, is that in all these seemingly so different[234] cases the same mental factor is at work, namely, imperfect mastery of a language, which in its initial stage, in the child with its first language and in the grown-up with a second language learnt by imperfect methods, leads to a superficial knowledge of the most indispensable words, with total disregard of grammar. Often, here and there, this is combined with a wish to express more than is possible with the means at hand, and thus generates the attempts to express the inexpressible by means of those more or less ingenious and more or less comical devices, with paraphrases and figurative or circuitous designations, which we have seen first in the chapters on children’s language and now again in Beach-la-mar and its congeners.
The main point I want to make is about grammar. In all these languages, whether it’s the makeshift English and French used in the East or the makeshift Amerindian spoken in the Northwest, the grammatical structure has been simplified far beyond what we find in the original languages that contributed to them. It has been simplified to the point where it can be expressed in very few words, almost the same in all these languages, with the main rule being that nouns, adjectives, and verbs always stay unchanged. The vocabularies are extremely different—English and French in the East, Chinook, etc., in America—but the structure of all these languages is practically identical because it has reached a bare minimum. This clearly shows that this simplicity isn’t due to a Chinese foundation or the influence of Chinese grammar, as is often assumed. Pidgin English shouldn’t be described as English with Chinese pronunciation and grammar; if that were true, we would expect Beach-la-mar to be quite different, since its foundation is Melanesian and differs from Chinese in many ways. Similarly, we shouldn’t expect Mauritius Creole to be French with Malagasy pronunciation and grammar, or the Oregon trade language to be Chinook with English pronunciation and grammar—but none of these descriptions fit the obvious facts. We could just as easily say that a two-year-old child’s speech in England is English with Chinese grammar, and that a two-year-old French child’s speech is French based on Chinese grammar. The reality is that in all these seemingly different cases, the same mental factor is at work: imperfect mastery of a language. This occurs initially in children learning their first language and in adults learning a second language through inadequate methods, leading to a superficial grasp of essential words while completely ignoring grammar. Often, this is mixed with a desire to express more than what is possible with the tools available, resulting in attempts to articulate the inexpressible through various clever and often humorous strategies, using paraphrases and figurative or indirect expressions. We’ve seen this first in the chapters on children’s language and now again in Beach-la-mar and its counterparts.
Exactly the same characteristics are found again in the lingua geral Brazilica, which in large parts of Brazil serves as the means of communication between the whites and Indians or negroes and also between Indians of different tribes. It “possesses neither declension nor conjugation” and “places words after one another without grammatical flexion, with disregard of nuances in sentence structure, but in energetic brevity,” it is “easy of pronunciation,” with many vowels and no hard consonant groups—in all these respects it differs considerably from the original Tupí, from which it has been evolved by the Europeans.[52]
The same traits can be found again in the lingua geral Brazilica, which serves as a way for people in many parts of Brazil to communicate with each other, whether they are whites, Indians, or blacks, and even between Indians from different tribes. It “doesn’t have declension or conjugation” and “puts words together without grammatical changes, ignoring nuances in sentence structure, but doing so with energetic brevity.” It is “easy to pronounce,” featuring many vowels and no harsh consonant clusters—this makes it quite different from the original Tupí, from which it has developed through European influence.[52]
Finally, I would point the contrast between these makeshift languages and slang: the former are an outcome of linguistic poverty; they are born of the necessity and the desire to make oneself understood where the ordinary idiom of the individual is of no use, while slang expressions are due to a linguistic exuberance: the individual creating them knows perfectly well the ordinary words for the idea he wants to express, but in youthful playfulness he is not content with what is everybody’s property, and thus consciously steps outside the routine of everyday language to produce something that is calculated to excite merriment or even admiration on the part of his hearers. The results in both cases may sometimes show related features, for some of the figurative expressions of Beach-la-mar recall certain slang words by their bold metaphors, but the motive force in the two kinds is totally different, and where a comic effect is produced, in one case it is intentional and in the other unintentional.
Finally, I want to highlight the difference between these makeshift languages and slang: the former are the result of linguistic limitations; they come from the need and desire to be understood when the person's regular words aren’t helpful. In contrast, slang comes from a linguistic creativity: the person creating it knows the standard words for the idea they want to express, but in a playful, youthful way, they want something beyond what everyone else knows. They intentionally step away from regular language to create something meant to amuse or impress their audience. The outcomes in both cases may sometimes show similar traits, as some of the colorful expressions of Beach-la-mar remind us of certain slang words with their bold imagery, but the motivation behind the two is completely different. When humor is involved, in one case it’s purposeful, while in the other it’s accidental.
XII.—§ 11. Romanic Languages.
When Schuchardt began his studies of the various Creole languages formed in many parts of the world where Europeans[235] speaking various Romanic and other languages had come into contact with negroes, Polynesians and other races, it was with the avowed intention of throwing light on the origin of the Romanic languages from a contact between Latin and the languages previously spoken in the countries colonized by the Romans. We may now raise the question whether Beach-la-mar—to take that as a typical example of the kind of languages dealt with in this chapter—is likely to develop into a language which to the English of Great Britain will stand in the same relation as French or Portuguese to Latin. The answer cannot be doubtful if we adhere tenaciously to the points of view already advanced. Development into a separate language would be imaginable only on condition of a complete, or a nearly complete, isolation from the language of England (and America)—and how should that be effected nowadays, with our present means of transport and communication? If such isolation were indeed possible, it would also result in the breaking off of communication between the various islands in which Beach-la-mar is now spoken, and that would probably entail the speedy extinction of the language itself in favour of the Polynesian language of each separate island. On the contrary, what will probably happen is a development in the opposite direction, by which the English of the islanders will go on constantly improving so as to approach correct usage more and more in every respect: better pronunciation and syntax, more flexional forms and a less scanty vocabulary—in short, the same development that has already to a large extent taken place in the English of the coloured population in the United States. But this means a gradual extinction of Beach-la-mar as a separate idiom through its complete absorption in ordinary English (cf. above, p. 228, on conditions at Mauritius).
When Schuchardt started studying the different Creole languages that developed in various parts of the world where Europeans speaking several Romance languages interacted with Black people, Polynesians, and other groups, he aimed to shed light on the origins of Romance languages from the contact between Latin and the languages previously spoken in the regions colonized by the Romans. We can now ask if Beach-la-mar—using it as a typical example of the languages discussed in this chapter—might evolve into a language that, for speakers in Great Britain, would relate to English in the same way that French or Portuguese relate to Latin. The answer is clear if we stick firmly to the perspectives already presented. The development into a distinct language would only be possible if there were complete, or almost complete, isolation from the languages of England (and America)—but how could that happen today with our current means of transport and communication? If such isolation were indeed achievable, it would also lead to a breakdown in communication among the various islands where Beach-la-mar is currently spoken, likely resulting in the rapid extinction of the language in favor of the native Polynesian language of each island. Instead, what will likely occur is a progression in the opposite direction, where the islanders' English will continue to improve, becoming closer to standard usage in every aspect: enhanced pronunciation and syntax, more inflected forms, and a richer vocabulary—in short, the same kind of development that has largely occurred in the English spoken by the mixed-race population in the United States. However, this means a gradual disappearance of Beach-la-mar as a distinct language through its total absorption into standard English (cf. above, p. 228, on conditions at Mauritius).
Do these ‘makeshift languages,’ then, throw any light on the development of the Romanic languages? They may be compared to the very first initial stage of the Latin language as spoken by the barbarians, many of whom may be supposed to have mutilated Latin in very much the same way as the Pacific islanders do English. But by and by they learnt Latin much better, and if now the Romanic languages have simplified the grammatical structure of Latin, this simplification is not to be placed on the same footing as the formlessness of Beach-la-mar, for that is complete and has been achieved at one blow: the islanders have never (i.e. have not yet) learnt the English form-system. But the inhabitants of France, Spain, etc., did learn the Latin form system as well as the syntactic use of the forms. This is seen by the fact that when French and the other languages[236] began to be written down, there remained in them a large quantity of forms and syntactic applications that agree with Latin but have since then become extinct: in its oldest written form, therefore, French is very far from the amorphous condition of Beach-la-mar: in its nouns it had many survivals of the Latin case system (gen. pl. corresponding to -orum; an oblique case different from the nominative and formed in various ways according to the rules of Latin declensions), in the verbs we find an intricate system of tenses, moods and persons, based on the Latin flexions. It is true that these had been already to some degree simplified, but this must have happened in the same gradual way as the further simplification that goes on before our very eyes in the written documents of the following centuries: the distance from the first to the tenth century must have been bridged over in very much the same way as the distance between the tenth and the twentieth century. No cataclysm such as that through which English has become Beach-la-mar need on any account be invoked to explain the perfectly natural change from Latin to Old French and from Old French to Modern French.
Do these 'makeshift languages' shed any light on the development of the Romance languages? They can be compared to the very first initial stage of the Latin language as spoken by the barbarians, many of whom likely altered Latin much like how the Pacific islanders do with English. Over time, they learned Latin much better, and while the Romance languages have simplified the grammatical structure of Latin, this simplification isn't the same as the formlessness of Beach-la-mar, which is complete and has happened all at once: the islanders have not yet learned the English form system. However, the people of France, Spain, etc., did learn the Latin form system along with the syntactic use of those forms. This is evident because when French and the other languages began to be written down, there remained a large quantity of forms and syntactic usages that align with Latin but have since disappeared: in its oldest written form, French is very far from the amorphous state of Beach-la-mar. In its nouns, it retained many remnants of the Latin case system (gen. pl. corresponding to -orum; an oblique case different from the nominative and formed in various ways according to the rules of Latin declensions). In the verbs, we see a complex system of tenses, moods, and persons based on Latin inflections. It's true that these had already been simplified to some extent, but this must have occurred in a gradual way, just like the further simplifications happening before our very eyes in the written documents of subsequent centuries: the transition from the first to the tenth century must have been similar to the transition between the tenth and twentieth centuries. There’s no need to invoke any cataclysm, like the one that transformed English into Beach-la-mar, to explain the perfectly natural changes from Latin to Old French and from Old French to Modern French.
CHAPTER XIII
THE WOMAN
§ 1. Women’s Languages. § 2. Tabu. § 3. Competing Languages. § 4. Sanskrit Drama. § 5. Conservatism. § 6. Phonetics and Grammar. § 7. Choice of Words. § 8. Vocabulary. § 9. Adverbs. § 10. Periods. § 11. General Characteristics.
§ 1. Women’s Languages. § 2. Taboo. § 3. Competing Languages. § 4. Sanskrit Drama. § 5. Conservatism. § 6. Phonetics and Grammar. § 7. Choice of Words. § 8. Vocabulary. § 9. Adverbs. § 10. Periods. § 11. General Characteristics.
XIII.—§ 1. Women’s Languages.
There are tribes in which men and women are said to speak totally different languages, or at any rate distinct dialects. It will be worth our while to look at the classical example of this, which is mentioned in a great many ethnographical and linguistic works, viz. the Caribs or Caribbeans of the Small Antilles. The first to mention their distinct sex dialects was the Dominican Breton, who, in his Dictionnaire Caraïbe-français (1664), says that the Caribbean chief had exterminated all the natives except the women, who had retained part of their ancient language. This is repeated in many subsequent accounts, the fullest and, as it seems, most reliable of which is that by Rochefort, who spent a long time among the Caribbeans in the middle of the seventeenth century: see his Histoire naturelle et morale des Iles Antilles (2e éd., Rotterdam, 1665, p. 449 ff.). Here he says that “the men have a great many expressions peculiar to them, which the women understand but never pronounce themselves. On the other hand, the women have words and phrases which the men never use, or they would be laughed to scorn. Thus it happens that in their conversations it often seems as if the women had another language than the men.... The savage natives of Dominica say that the reason for this is that when the Caribs came to occupy the islands these were inhabited by an Arawak tribe which they exterminated completely, with the exception of the women, whom they married in order to populate the country. Now, these women kept their own language and taught it to their daughters.... But though the boys understand the speech of their mothers and sisters, they nevertheless follow their fathers and brothers and conform to their speech from the age of five or six.... It is asserted that there is some similarity between the speech of the continental Arawaks and that of the Carib women. But the Carib men and women on the continent[238] speak the same language, as they have never corrupted their natural speech by marriage with strange women.”
There are tribes where men and women are said to speak completely different languages, or at least distinct dialects. It's worth looking at the classic example of this, often mentioned in many ethnographic and linguistic studies, namely the Caribs or Caribbeans of the Small Antilles. The first to mention their distinct gender dialects was Dominican Breton, who, in his Dictionnaire Caraïbe-français (1664), states that the Caribbean chief exterminated all the natives except for the women, who had retained part of their ancient language. This is repeated in many subsequent accounts, the most comprehensive and seemingly most reliable of which is that by Rochefort, who spent considerable time among the Caribbeans in the mid-seventeenth century: see his Histoire naturelle et morale des Iles Antilles (2e éd., Rotterdam, 1665, p. 449 ff.). Here, he notes that “the men have many expressions unique to them, which the women understand but never use themselves. On the other hand, the women have words and phrases that the men never use, or they would be laughed at. Thus, it often seems in their conversations as if the women have a different language from the men.... The native people of Dominica say that the reason for this is that when the Caribs arrived on the islands, they exterminated an Arawak tribe that inhabited them, except for the women, whom they married to populate the country. These women kept their own language and taught it to their daughters.... However, while the boys understand the speech of their mothers and sisters, they follow their fathers and brothers and adapt to their speech from the age of five or six.... It is claimed that there is some similarity between the speech of the continental Arawaks and that of the Carib women. But the Carib men and women on the continent[238] speak the same language, as they have never mixed their natural speech through marriage with outsiders.”
This evidently is the account which forms the basis of everything that has since been written on the subject. But it will be noticed that Rochefort does not really speak of the speech of the two sexes as totally distinct languages or dialects, as has often been maintained, but only of certain differences within the same language. If we go through the comparatively full and evidently careful glossary attached to his book, in which he denotes the words peculiar to the men by the letter H and those of the women by F, we shall see that it is only for about one-tenth of the vocabulary that such special words have been indicated to him, though the matter evidently interested him very much, so that he would make all possible efforts to elicit them from the natives. In his lists, words special to one or the other sex are found most frequently in the names of the various degrees of kinship; thus, ‘my father’ in the speech of the men in youmáan, in that of the women noukóuchili, though both in addressing him say bába; ‘my grandfather’ is itámoulou and nárgouti respectively, and thus also for maternal uncle, son (elder son, younger son), brother-in-law, wife, mother, grandmother, daughter, cousin—all of these are different according as a man or a woman is speaking. It is the same with the names of some, though far from all, of the different parts of the body, and with some more or less isolated words, as friend, enemy, joy, work, war, house, garden, bed, poison, tree, sun, moon, sea, earth. This list comprises nearly every notion for which Rochefort indicates separate words, and it will be seen that there are innumerable ideas for which men and women use the same word. Further, we see that where there are differences these do not consist in small deviations, such as different prefixes or suffixes added to the same root, but in totally distinct roots. Another point is very important to my mind: judging by the instances in which plural forms are given in the lists, the words of the two sexes are inflected in exactly the same way; thus the grammar is common to both, from which we may infer that we have not really to do with two distinct languages in the proper sense of the word.
This is clearly the account that lays the foundation for everything that's been written on the topic since. However, it’s important to note that Rochefort doesn’t actually describe the speech of the two sexes as completely separate languages or dialects, as has often been claimed, but rather points out certain differences within the same language. When we look through the relatively comprehensive and clearly meticulous glossary at the end of his book, where he marks words unique to men with the letter H and those of women with F, we find that he identifies special words for only about one-tenth of the vocabulary. This clearly fascinated him, prompting him to make every effort to discover them from the locals. In his lists, words specific to one sex or the other are most commonly found in the names for various degrees of kinship; for instance, ‘my father’ in the men's speech is youmáan, while in the women’s it’s noukóuchili, though both refer to him as bába; ‘my grandfather’ is itámoulou and nárgouti, respectively, and the same pattern applies to maternal uncle, son (elder son, younger son), brother-in-law, wife, mother, grandmother, daughter, cousin—all of which differ depending on whether a man or woman is speaking. The same goes for the names of some, though not all, body parts, and for a few isolated words like friend, enemy, joy, work, war, house, garden, bed, poison, tree, sun, moon, sea, earth. This list covers nearly every concept for which Rochefort denotes separate words, and it’s clear that there are countless ideas for which men and women use the same word. Moreover, where differences do exist, they’re not just minor changes like different prefixes or suffixes added to the same root; rather, they involve entirely distinct roots. Another point that I find very important is that, based on the examples where plural forms are provided in the lists, the words of both sexes are inflected in exactly the same way; thus, the grammar is shared between them, leading us to conclude that we’re not really dealing with two distinct languages in the strict sense.
Now, some light may probably be thrown on the problem of this women’s language from a custom mentioned in some of the old books written by travellers who have visited these islands. Rochefort himself (p. 497) very briefly says that “the women do not eat till their husbands have finished their meal,” and Lafitau (1724) says that women never eat in the company of their husbands and never mention them by name, but must wait upon them as their slaves; with this Labat agrees.
Now, we might gain some insight into the issue of women's language from a custom noted in some old travel writings about these islands. Rochefort himself (p. 497) briefly mentions that “the women do not eat until their husbands have finished their meal,” while Lafitau (1724) states that women never eat in front of their husbands and don’t refer to them by name, but must serve them like slaves; Labat agrees with this.
XIII.—§ 2. Tabu.
The fact that a wife is not allowed to mention the name of her husband makes one think that we have here simply an instance of a custom found in various forms and in varying degrees throughout the world—what is called verbal tabu: under certain circumstances, at certain times, in certain places, the use of one or more definite words is interdicted, because it is superstitiously believed to entail certain evil consequences, such as exasperate demons and the like. In place of the forbidden words it is therefore necessary to use some kind of figurative paraphrase, to dig up an otherwise obsolete term, or to disguise the real word so as to render it more innocent.
The fact that a wife can't say her husband's name makes you think this is just a case of a custom found in different ways around the world—what we call a verbal taboo: in certain situations, at certain times, in particular places, the use of specific words is prohibited because it's believed to bring about negative consequences, like angering demons and similar things. Instead of the forbidden words, it's necessary to use some kind of figurative expression, to revive an otherwise outdated term, or to disguise the actual word to make it seem less harmful.
Now as a matter of fact we find that verbal tabu was a common practice with the old Caribs: when they were on the war-path they had a great number of mysterious words which women were never allowed to learn and which even the young men might not pronounce before passing certain tests of bravery and patriotism; these war-words are described as extraordinarily difficult (“un baragoin fort difficile,” Rochefort, p. 450). It is easy to see that when once a tribe has acquired the habit of using a whole set of terms under certain frequently recurring circumstances, while others are at the same time strictly interdicted, this may naturally lead to so many words being reserved exclusively for one of the sexes that an observer may be tempted to speak of separate ‘languages’ for the two sexes. There is thus no occasion to believe in the story of a wholesale extermination of all male inhabitants by another tribe, though on the other hand it is easy to understand how such a myth may arise as an explanation of the linguistic difference between men and women, when it has become strong enough to attract attention and therefore has to be accounted for.
Actually, we find that verbal taboo was a common practice among the old Caribs: when they went to war, they had a lot of mysterious words that women were never allowed to learn, and even young men couldn’t say them until they passed certain tests of bravery and patriotism. These war words were described as incredibly difficult (“a really tough baragoin,” Rochefort, p. 450). It's clear that once a tribe starts using a specific set of terms in certain situations while prohibiting others, this can lead to a situation where many words are reserved for one gender. An observer might be tempted to claim there are separate ‘languages’ for men and women. Therefore, there's no reason to believe in the story of a complete extermination of all male inhabitants by another tribe. However, it's easy to see how such a myth might arise as an explanation for the linguistic differences between men and women when those differences have become noticeable enough that an explanation is needed.
In some parts of the world the connexion between a separate women’s language and tabu is indubitable. Thus among the Bantu people of Africa. With the Zulus a wife is not allowed to mention the name of her father-in-law and of his brothers, and if a similar word or even a similar syllable occurs in the ordinary language, she must substitute something else of a similar meaning. In the royal family the difficulty of understanding the women’s language is further increased by the woman’s being forbidden to mention the names of her husband, his father and grandfather as well as his brothers. If one of these names means something like “the son of the bull,” each of these words has to be avoided, and all kinds of paraphrases have to be used. According to Kranz the interdiction holds good not only for meaning elements of the name, but even for certain sounds entering into them; thus, if[240] the name contains the sound z, amanzi ‘water’ has to be altered into amandabi. If a woman were to contravene this rule she would be indicted for sorcery and put to death. The substitutes thus introduced tend to be adopted by others and to constitute a real women’s language.
In some parts of the world, the link between a separate women's language and taboo is clear. For example, among the Bantu people of Africa, Zulu wives are not allowed to say the name of their father-in-law or his brothers. If even a similar word or syllable appears in regular conversation, they must replace it with something else that has a similar meaning. In the royal family, the challenge of understanding the women's language is even greater because women are also prohibited from mentioning their husbands' names, along with their fathers, grandfathers, and brothers. If one of these names translates to something like “the son of the bull,” each of these terms must be avoided, requiring the use of various paraphrases. According to Kranz, this prohibition applies not only to the meanings of the names but also to certain sounds within them; for instance, if the name has the sound z, amanzi meaning 'water' has to be changed to amandabi. If a woman breaks this rule, she could be accused of witchcraft and executed. The substitutes that are introduced often end up being adopted by others, creating a true women’s language.
With the Chiquitos in Bolivia the difference between the grammars of the two sexes is rather curious (see V. Henry, “Sur le parler des hommes et le parler des femmes dans la langue chiquita,” Revue de linguistique, xii. 305, 1879). Some of Henry’s examples may be thus summarized: men indicate by the addition of -tii that a male person is spoken about, while the women do not use this suffix and thus make no distinction between ‘he’ and ‘she,’ ‘his’ and ‘her.’ Thus in the men’s speech the following distinctions would be made:
With the Chiquitos in Bolivia, the differences in grammar between the two sexes are quite interesting (see V. Henry, “On the speech of men and the speech of women in the chiquita language,” Revue de linguistique, xii. 305, 1879). Some of Henry’s examples can be summarized like this: men add -tii to indicate they are talking about a male person, while women don't use this suffix and therefore don't differentiate between ‘he’ and ‘she,’ ‘his’ and ‘her.’ So in men’s speech, the following distinctions would be made:
He went to her house: yebotii ti n-ipoos.
She went to his house: yebo ti n-ipoostii.
But to express all these different meanings the women would have only one form, viz.
But to convey all these different meanings, the women would have just one form, namely.
which in the men’s speech would mean only ‘She went to her house.’
which in the men's speech would mean only 'She went to her house.'
To many substantives the men prefix a vowel which the women do not employ, thus o-petas ‘turtle,’ u-tamokos ‘dog,’ i-pis ‘wood.’ For some very important notions the sexes use distinct words; thus, for the names of kinship, ‘my father’ is iyai and išupu, ‘my mother’ ipaki and ipapa, ‘my brother’ tsaruki and ičibausi respectively.
To many nouns, men add a vowel that women don’t use, like o-petas for ‘turtle,’ u-tamokos for ‘dog,’ and i-pis for ‘wood.’ For some very important concepts, the genders use different words; for example, 'my father' is iyai and išupu, 'my mother' is ipaki and ipapa, and 'my brother' is tsaruki and ičibausi respectively.
Among the languages of California, Yana, according to Dixon and Kroeber (The American Anthropologist, n.s. 5. 15), is the only language that shows a difference in the words used by men and women—apart from terms of relationship, where a distinction according to the sex of the speaker is made among many Californian tribes as well as in other parts of the world, evidently “because the relationship itself is to them different, as the sex is different.” But in Yana the distinction is a linguistic one, and curiously enough, the few specimens given all present a trait found already in the Chiquito forms, namely, that the forms spoken by women are shorter than those of the men, which appear as extensions, generally by suffixed -(n)a, of the former.
Among the languages of California, Yana, according to Dixon and Kroeber (The American Anthropologist, n.s. 5. 15), is the only language that shows a difference in the words used by men and women—besides terms of relationship, where a distinction based on the speaker's gender is found among many Californian tribes as well as in other parts of the world, clearly “because the relationship itself is different to them, as the sex is different.” However, in Yana, the distinction is linguistic, and interestingly, the few examples provided all show a feature already seen in the Chiquito forms, namely that the forms used by women are shorter than those used by men, which appear as extensions, typically by suffixed -(n)a, of the former.
It is surely needless to multiply instances of these customs, which are found among many wild tribes; the curious reader may be referred to Lasch, S. pp. 7-13, and H. Ploss and M. Bartels, Das Weib in der Natur und Völkerkunde (9th ed., Leipzig, 1908). The latter[241] says that the Suaheli system is not carried through so as to replace the ordinary language, but the Suaheli have for every object which they do not care to mention by its real name a symbolic word understood by everybody concerned. In especial such symbols are used by women in their mysteries to denote obscene things. The words chosen are either ordinary names for innocent things or else taken from the old language or other Bantu languages, mostly Kiziguha, for among the Waziguha secret rites play an enormous rôle. Bartels finally says that with us, too, women have separate names for everything connected with sexual life, and he thinks that it is the same feeling of shame that underlies this custom and the interdiction of pronouncing the names of male relatives. This, however, does not explain everything, and, as already indicated, superstition certainly has a large share in this as in other forms of verbal tabu. See on this the very full account in the third volume of Frazer’s The Golden Bough.
It's probably unnecessary to list more examples of these customs, which can be found among many indigenous tribes; interested readers can check Lasch, S. pp. 7-13, and H. Ploss and M. Bartels, Das Weib in der Natur und Völkerkunde (9th ed., Leipzig, 1908). The latter[241] states that the Suaheli system isn't fully adopted to replace the everyday language, but instead, the Suaheli have a symbolic word for every object they prefer not to name directly, which everyone involved understands. Particularly, such symbols are commonly used by women in their rituals to refer to obscene matters. The words selected are either regular names for innocent items or borrowed from the old language or other Bantu languages, mostly Kiziguha, since secret rites play a huge role among the Waziguha. Bartels also mentions that women in our culture have distinct names for everything related to sexual life, believing that a similar sense of shame is behind this custom and the prohibition of mentioning male relatives' names. However, this doesn't explain everything, and, as mentioned earlier, superstition certainly plays a significant role in this and other forms of verbal taboo. For more on this, see the detailed account in the third volume of Frazer’s The Golden Bough.
XIII.—§ 3. Competing Languages.
A difference between the language spoken by men and that spoken by women is seen in many countries where two languages are straggling for supremacy in a peaceful way—thus without any question of one nation exterminating the other or the male part of it. Among German and Scandinavian immigrants in America the men mix much more with the English-speaking population, and therefore have better opportunities, and also more occasion, to learn English than their wives, who remain more within doors. It is exactly the same among the Basques, where the school, the military service and daily business relations contribute to the extinction of Basque in favour of French, and where these factors operate much more strongly on the male than on the female population: there are families in which the wife talks Basque, while the husband does not even understand Basque and does not allow his children to learn it (Bornecque et Mühlen, Les Provinces françaises, 53). Vilhelm Thomsen informs me that the old Livonian language, which is now nearly extinct, is kept up with the greatest fidelity by the women, while the men are abandoning it for Lettish. Albanian women, too, generally know only Albanian, while the men are more often bilingual.
A difference between the language spoken by men and that spoken by women is observed in many countries where two languages are competing for dominance without one nation trying to eliminate the other or the male part of it. Among German and Scandinavian immigrants in America, the men interact much more with the English-speaking population, giving them better chances and more opportunities to learn English than their wives, who stay more at home. This is also true among the Basques, where schools, military service, and daily business interactions contribute to the decline of Basque in favor of French, and these factors have a stronger impact on men than on women: there are families where the wife speaks Basque, while the husband does not even understand Basque and does not permit his children to learn it (Bornecque et Mühlen, Les Provinces françaises, 53). Vilhelm Thomsen informs me that the old Livonian language, which is now nearly extinct, is maintained most faithfully by the women, while the men are switching to Lettish. Albanian women, too, usually only know Albanian, while the men are more likely to be bilingual.
XIII.—§ 4. Sanskrit Drama.
There are very few traces of real sex dialects in our Aryan languages, though we have the very curious rule in the old Indian drama that women talk Prakrit (prākrta, the natural or vulgar language) while men have the privilege of talking Sanskrit (sam[242]skrta, the adorned language). The distinction, however, is not one of sex really, but of rank, for Sanskrit is the language of gods, kings, princes, brahmans, ministers, chamberlains, dancing-masters and other men in superior positions and of a very few women of special religious importance, while Prakrit is spoken by men of an inferior class, like shopkeepers, law officers, aldermen, bathmen, fishermen and policemen, and by nearly all women. The difference between the two ‘languages’ is one of degree only: they are two strata of the same language, one higher, more solemn, stiff and archaic, and another lower, more natural and familiar, and this easy, or perhaps we should say slipshod, style is the only one recognized for ordinary women. The difference may not be greater than that between the language of a judge and that of a costermonger in a modern novel, or between Juliet’s and her nurse’s expressions in Shakespeare, and if all women, even those we should call the ‘heroines’ of the plays, use only the lower stratum of speech, the reason certainly is that the social position of women was so inferior that they ranked only with men of the lower orders and had no share in the higher culture which, with the refined language, was the privilege of a small class of selected men.
There are very few signs of distinct gender dialects in our Aryan languages, although we do see an interesting rule in ancient Indian drama: women speak Prakrit (prākrta, the natural or colloquial language) while men have the right to speak Sanskrit (sam[242]skrta, the refined language). However, this distinction isn't really about gender but about social status, as Sanskrit is the language of gods, kings, princes, priests, ministers, chamberlains, dancing instructors, and other high-ranking individuals, along with a small group of women with special religious significance. In contrast, Prakrit is spoken by lower-class men like shopkeepers, law officials, council members, bath attendants, fishermen, and police officers, as well as nearly all women. The difference between the two "languages" is merely one of degree: they represent two layers of the same language, one being more elevated, formal, and archaic, while the other is more casual and familiar. This informal, or perhaps we should say careless, style is the only one accepted for ordinary women. The distinction might not be much greater than that between the language of a judge and that of a street vendor in a modern novel, or between Juliet's speech and her nurse's in Shakespeare. The fact that all women, even those we might consider the 'heroines' of the plays, only use the lower form of speech undoubtedly reflects their inferior social status, which placed them among men of the lower classes and excluded them from the higher culture that came with the refined language, reserved for a small group of select men.
XIII.—§ 5. Conservatism.
As Prakrit is a ‘younger’ and ‘worn-out’ form of Sanskrit, the question here naturally arises: What is the general attitude of the two sexes to those changes that are constantly going on in languages? Can they be ascribed exclusively or predominantly to one of the sexes? Or do both equally participate in them? An answer that is very often given is that as a rule women are more conservative than men, and that they do nothing more than keep to the traditional language which they have learnt from their parents and hand on to their children, while innovations are due to the initiative of men. Thus Cicero in an often-quoted passage says that when he hears his mother-in-law Lælia, it is to him as if he heard Plautus or Nævius, for it is more natural for women to keep the old language uncorrupted, as they do not hear many people’s way of speaking and thus retain what they have first learnt (De oratore, III. 45). This, however, does not hold good in every respect and in every people. The French engineer, Victor Renault, who lived for a long time among the Botocudos (in South America) and compiled vocabularies for two of their tribes, speaks of the ease with which he could make the savages who accompanied him invent new words for anything. “One of them called out the word in a loud voice, as if seized by a sudden idea, and the others would repeat it amid laughter and excited shouts, and then it[243] was universally adopted. But the curious thing is that it was nearly always the women who busied themselves in inventing new words as well as in composing songs, dirges and rhetorical essays. The word-formations here alluded to are probably names of objects that the Botocudos had not known previously ... as for horse, krainejoune, ‘head-teeth’; for ox, po-kekri, ‘foot-cloven’; for donkey, mgo-jonne-orône, ‘beast with long ears.’ But well-known objects which have already got a name have often similar new denominations invented for them, which are then soon accepted by the family and community and spread more and more” (v. Martius, Beitr. zur Ethnogr. u. Sprachenkunde Amerikas, 1867, i. 330).
As Prakrit is a "younger" and "worn-out" version of Sanskrit, a natural question arises: What is the general attitude of men and women toward the constant changes happening in languages? Can these changes be attributed solely or mainly to one gender? Or do both genders participate equally in them? A common response is that women are generally more conservative than men, sticking to the traditional language they learned from their parents and passing it on to their children, while men are the ones driving innovations. Cicero famously noted that when he hears his mother-in-law Lælia speak, it’s like hearing Plautus or Nævius, because it's more natural for women to preserve the old language intact since they tend to hear fewer different ways of speaking and thus retain what they first learned (De oratore, III. 45). However, this doesn’t hold true in every case or among every group. The French engineer Victor Renault, who spent a long time with the Botocudos in South America and compiled vocabularies for two of their tribes, described how easily he could get the local people to invent new words for different things. "One of them would shout out a word as if struck by a sudden idea, and the others would repeat it amid laughter and excited shouts, and then it was universally adopted. But interestingly, it was almost always the women who engaged in inventing new words, as well as composing songs, mournful poems, and rhetorical pieces. The newly formed words likely referred to objects that the Botocudos hadn’t encountered before... like for horse, krainejoune, ‘head-teeth’; for ox, po-kekri, ‘foot-cloven’; for donkey, mgo-jonne-orône, ‘beast with long ears.’ Even well-known objects that already had names often received similar new terms, which would quickly be accepted by families and the community, spreading more widely" (v. Martius, Beitr. zur Ethnogr. u. Sprachenkunde Amerikas, 1867, i. 330).
I may also quote what E. R. Edwards says in his Étude phonétique de la langue japonaise (Leipzig, 1903, p. 79): “In France and in England it might be said that women avoid neologisms and are careful not to go too far away from the written forms: in Southern England the sound written wh [ʍ] is scarcely ever pronounced except in girls’ schools. In Japan, on the contrary, women are less conservative than men, whether in pronunciation or in the selection of words and expressions. One of the chief reasons is that women have not to the same degree as men undergone the influence of the written language. As an example of the liberties which the women take may be mentioned that there is in the actual pronunciation of Tokyo a strong tendency to get rid of the sound (w), but the women go further in the word atashi, which men pronounce watashi or watakshi, ‘I.’ Another tendency noticed in the language of Japanese women is pretty widely spread among French and English women, namely, the excessive use of intensive words and the exaggeration of stress and tone-accent to mark emphasis. Japanese women also make a much more frequent use than men of the prefixes of politeness o-, go- and mi-.”
I can also quote what E. R. Edwards says in his Étude phonétique de la langue japonaise (Leipzig, 1903, p. 79): “In France and England, it's often said that women avoid new words and try to stick closely to written forms: in Southern England, the sound represented by wh [ʍ] is rarely pronounced except in girls’ schools. In contrast, women in Japan are less traditional than men, whether in how they pronounce words or the choice of words and expressions they use. One main reason is that women have not been as influenced by written language as men. For example, in the current pronunciation in Tokyo, there’s a strong tendency to drop the sound (w), but women take it a step further with the word atashi, which men say as watashi or watakshi, meaning ‘I.’ Another trend observed in the language of Japanese women is somewhat common among French and English women as well: the excessive use of intensifying words and the exaggeration of stress and tone to convey emphasis. Japanese women also use the polite prefixes o-, go-, and mi- much more frequently than men.”
XIII.—§ 6. Phonetics and Grammar.
In connexion with some of the phonetic changes which have profoundly modified the English sound system we have express statements by old grammarians that women had a more advanced pronunciation than men, and characteristically enough these statements refer to the raising of the vowels in the direction of [i]; thus in Sir Thomas Smith (1567), who uses expressions like “mulierculæ quædam delicatiores, et nonnulli qui volunt isto modo videri loqui urbanius,” and in another place “fœminæ quædam delicatiores,” further in Mulcaster (1582)[53] and in Milton’s[244] teacher, Alexander Gill (1621), who speaks about “nostræ Mopsæ, quæ quidem ita omnia attenuant.”
In connection with some of the phonetic changes that have significantly altered the English sound system, old grammarians have made statements noting that women had a more advanced pronunciation than men. Interestingly, these statements refer to the raising of the vowels toward [i]; for example, in Sir Thomas Smith (1567), who uses phrases like “Some delicate women, and a few who want to appear to speak more elegantly in this way,” and elsewhere “some delicate women,” as well as in Mulcaster (1582)[53] and in Milton’s[244] teacher, Alexander Gill (1621), who talks about “nostræ Mopsæ, which truly diminishes everything in this way.”
In France, about 1700, women were inclined to pronounce e instead of a; thus Alemand (1688) mentions Barnabé as “façon de prononcer mâle” and Bernabé as the pronunciation of “les gens polis et délicats ... les dames surtout”; and Grimarest (1712) speaks of “ces marchandes du Palais, qui au lieu de madame, boulevart, etc., prononcent medeme, boulevert” (Thurot i. 12 and 9).
In France, around 1700, women tended to say e instead of a; for example, Alemand (1688) mentions Barnabé as “the way a guy would say it” and Bernabé as the way “polite and sophisticated people ... especially women” would say it; and Grimarest (1712) refers to “those merchants in the Palais, who instead of madame, boulevart, etc., say medeme, boulevert” (Thurot i. 12 and 9).
There is one change characteristic of many languages in which it seems as if women have played an important part even if they are not solely responsible for it: I refer to the weakening of the old fully trilled tongue-point r. I have elsewhere (Fonetik, p. 417 ff.) tried to show that this weakening, which results in various sounds and sometimes in a complete omission of the sound in some positions, is in the main a consequence of, or at any rate favoured by, a change in social life: the old loud trilled point sound is natural and justified when life is chiefly carried on out-of-doors, but indoor life prefers, on the whole, less noisy speech habits, and the more refined this domestic life is, the more all kinds of noises and even speech sounds will be toned down. One of the results is that this original r sound, the rubadub in the orchestra of language, is no longer allowed to bombard the ears, but is softened down in various ways, as we see chiefly in the great cities and among the educated classes, while the rustic population in many countries keeps up the old sound with much greater conservatism. Now we find that women are not unfrequently mentioned in connexion with this reduction of the trilled r; thus in the sixteenth century in France there was a tendency to leave off the trilling and even to go further than to the present English untrilled point r by pronouncing [z] instead, but some of the old grammarians mention this pronunciation as characteristic of women and a few men who imitate women (Erasmus: mulierculæ Parisinæ; Sylvius: mulierculæ ... Parrhisinæ, et earum modo quidam parum viri; Pillot: Parisinæ mulierculæ ... adeo delicatulæ sunt, ut pro pere dicant pese). In the ordinary language there are a few remnants of this tendency; thus, when by the side of the original chaire we now have also the form chaise, and it is worthy of note that the latter form is reserved for the everyday signification (Engl. chair, seat) as belonging more naturally to the speech of women, while chaire has the more special signification of ‘pulpit, professorial chair.’ Now the same tendency to substitute [z]—or after a voiceless sound [s]—for r is found in our own days among the ladies of Christiania, who will say gzuelig for gruelig and fsygtelig for frygtelig (Brekke, Bidrag til dansknorskens lydlære, 1881, p. 17; I have often heard the sound myself). And even in far-off Siberia we find that the Chuckchi women will say[245] nídzak or nízak for the male nírak ‘two,’ zërka for rërka ‘walrus,’ etc. (Nordqvist; see fuller quotations in my Fonetik, p. 431).
There’s a change that many languages have experienced, where it seems that women have played a significant role, even if they aren't solely responsible for it: I’m talking about the softening of the old fully trilled tongue-point r. In another work (Fonetik, p. 417 ff.), I've tried to show that this softening, which leads to various sounds and sometimes to the complete omission of the sound in certain positions, is mainly a result of, or at least encouraged by, changes in social life: the old loud trilled sound is natural and fitting when life mostly takes place outdoors, but indoor life generally favors quieter speech habits, and the more refined domestic life becomes, the more all kinds of noises, including speech sounds, are toned down. One consequence is that this original r sound, the rhythmic beat in the orchestra of language, is no longer allowed to bombard the ears, but is softened in various ways, as we primarily observe in large cities and among educated classes, while rural populations in many countries retain the old sound with much more conservatism. Now, it turns out that women are often mentioned concerning this reduction of the trilled r; for example, in the sixteenth century in France, there was a trend to drop the trilling and even to go further, replacing it with a sound like [z], but some old grammarians noted this pronunciation as characteristic of women and a few men who imitate women (Erasmus: Parisian women; Sylvius: women ... from Parrhisina, and some of them are a bit like men.; Pillot: The women of Paris are so delicate that they say pese instead of pere.). In common language, there are a few remnants of this trend; for example, alongside the original chaire, we now also have the form chaise, and it's interesting to note that the latter is reserved for everyday meaning (Engl. chair, seat) as it aligns more with women's speech, while chaire has the more specific meaning of ‘pulpit, professorial chair.’ The same tendency to replace [z]—or after a voiceless sound, [s]—for r can be seen today among the women of Christiania, who say gzuelig for gruelig and fsygtelig for frygtelig (Brekke, Bidrag til dansknorskens lydlære, 1881, p. 17; I’ve heard that sound myself many times). Even in far-off Siberia, Chuckchi women say nídzak or nízak for the male nírak ‘two,’ and zërka for rërka ‘walrus,’ etc. (Nordqvist; see fuller quotations in my Fonetik, p. 431).
In present-day English there are said to be a few differences in pronunciation between the two sexes; thus, according to Daniel Jones, soft is pronounced with a long vowel [sɔ·ft] by men and with a short vowel [sɔft] by women; similarly [gɛel] is said to be a special ladies’ pronunciation of girl, which men usually pronounce [gə·l]; cf. also on wh above, p. 243. So far as I have been able to ascertain, the pronunciation [tʃuldrən] for [tʃildrən] children is much more frequent in women than in men. It may also be that women are more inclined to give to the word waistcoat the full long sound in both syllables, while men, who have occasion to use the word more frequently, tend to give it the historical form [weskət] (for the shortening compare breakfast). But even if such observations were multiplied—as probably they might easily be by an attentive observer—they would be only more or less isolated instances, without any deeper significance, and on the whole we must say that from the phonetic point of view there is scarcely any difference between the speech of men and that of women: the two sexes speak for all intents and purposes the same language.
In modern English, it's noted that there are some differences in pronunciation between men and women. For example, according to Daniel Jones, soft is pronounced with a long vowel [sɔ·ft] by men and with a short vowel [sɔft] by women. Similarly, [gɛel] is considered a specific pronunciation of girl for women, while men typically say [gə·l]. Also, see wh above, p. 243. From what I can gather, the pronunciation [tʃuldrən] for [tʃildrən] children is more common among women than men. It also seems that women are more likely to pronounce waistcoat with full long sounds in both syllables, while men, who use the word more often, usually say it as [weskət] (for comparison, think of breakfast). However, even if these observations were to increase—likely, they could be with careful attention—they would be mostly isolated cases, without any significant implications. Overall, from a phonetic perspective, there’s hardly any difference between the way men and women speak: both sexes essentially speak the same language.
XIII.—§ 7. Choice of Words.
But when from the field of phonetics we come to that of vocabulary and style, we shall find a much greater number of differences, though they have received very little attention in linguistic works. A few have been mentioned by Greenough and Kittredge: “The use of common in the sense of ‘vulgar’ is distinctly a feminine peculiarity. It would sound effeminate in the speech of a man. So, in a less degree, with person for ‘woman,’ in contrast to ‘lady.’ Nice for ‘fine’ must have originated in the same way” (W, p. 54).
But when we shift from phonetics to vocabulary and style, we’ll find a much larger number of differences, even though they haven't been given much attention in linguistic studies. A few have been noted by Greenough and Kittredge: “The use of common to mean ‘vulgar’ is definitely a feminine trait. It would sound effeminate if a man used it. Similarly, using person to refer to ‘woman,’ as opposed to ‘lady,’ is less pronounced. The use of nice to mean ‘fine’ likely originated in the same way” (W, p. 54).
Others have told me that men will generally say ‘It’s very good of you,’ where women will say ‘It’s very kind of you.’ But such small details can hardly be said to be really characteristic of the two sexes. There is no doubt, however, that women in all countries are shy of mentioning certain parts of the human body and certain natural functions by the direct and often rude denominations which men, and especially young men, prefer when among themselves. Women will therefore invent innocent and euphemistic words and paraphrases, which sometimes may in the long run come to be looked upon as the plain or blunt names, and therefore in their turn have to be avoided and replaced by more decent words.
Others have told me that men usually say, “It’s very good of you,” while women will say, “It’s very kind of you.” But these small differences can’t really be taken as truly representative of the two sexes. There’s no doubt, however, that women everywhere tend to be uncomfortable mentioning certain parts of the human body and certain natural functions using the direct and often crude terms that men, especially younger men, prefer when they’re together. As a result, women come up with innocent and euphemistic words and phrases, which may eventually be seen as the straightforward or blunt terms, and so they have to be avoided and replaced with more decent words.
In Pinero’s The Gay Lord Quex (p. 116) a lady discovers some French novels on the table of another lady, and says: “This is a little—h’m—isn’t it?”—she does not even dare to say the word[246] ‘indecent,’ and has to express the idea in inarticulate language. The word ‘naked’ is paraphrased in the following description by a woman of the work of girls in ammunition works: “They have to take off every stitch from their bodies in one room, and run in their innocence and nothing else to another room where the special clothing is” (Bennett, The Pretty Lady, 176).
In Pinero’s The Gay Lord Quex (p. 116), a woman finds some French novels on another woman's table and says, “This is a little—h’m—isn’t it?”—she doesn’t even want to say the word ‘indecent,’ and has to express the thought in vague language. The word ‘naked’ is rephrased in the following description by a woman about what girls do in ammunition factories: “They have to take off every stitch from their bodies in one room and run in their innocence and nothing else to another room where the special clothing is” (Bennett, The Pretty Lady, 176).
On the other hand, the old-fashioned prudery which prevented ladies from using such words as legs and trousers (“those manly garments which are rarely mentioned by name,” says Dickens, Dombey, 335) is now rightly looked upon as exaggerated and more or less comical (cf. my GS § 247).
On the other hand, the outdated modesty that kept women from saying words like legs and trousers (“those manly garments that are seldom referred to by name,” says Dickens, Dombey, 335) is now justifiably seen as over the top and somewhat amusing (cf. my GS § 247).
There can be no doubt that women exercise a great and universal influence on linguistic development through their instinctive shrinking from coarse and gross expressions and their preference for refined and (in certain spheres) veiled and indirect expressions. In most cases that influence will be exercised privately and in the bosom of the family; but there is one historical instance in which a group of women worked in that direction publicly and collectively; I refer to those French ladies who in the seventeenth century gathered in the Hôtel de Rambouillet and are generally known under the name of Précieuses. They discussed questions of spelling and of purity of pronunciation and diction, and favoured all kinds of elegant paraphrases by which coarse and vulgar words might be avoided. In many ways this movement was the counterpart of the literary wave which about that time was inundating Europe under various names—Gongorism in Spain, Marinism in Italy, Euphuism in England; but the Précieuses went further than their male confrères in desiring to influence everyday language. When, however, they used such expressions as, for ‘nose,’ ‘the door of the brain,’ for ‘broom’ ‘the instrument of cleanness,’ and for ‘shirt’ ‘the constant companion of the dead and the living’ (la compagne perpétuelle des morts et des vivants), and many others, their affectation called down on their heads a ripple of laughter, and their endeavours would now have been forgotten but for the immortal satire of Molière in Les Précieuses ridicules and Les Femmes savantes. But apart from such exaggerations the feminine point of view is unassailable, and there is reason to congratulate those nations, the English among them, in which the social position of women has been high enough to secure greater purity and freedom from coarseness in language than would have been the case if men had been the sole arbiters of speech.
There’s no doubt that women have a significant and widespread impact on language development by naturally avoiding crude and vulgar expressions and preferring more refined and, in some cases, subtle or indirect language. Most of the time, this influence happens privately within the family, but there’s one historical example where a group of women made a public and collective effort; I’m talking about the French ladies in the seventeenth century who gathered in the Hôtel de Rambouillet and are commonly referred to as the Précieuses. They debated issues of spelling, pronunciation, and clarity of language, promoting various elegant alternatives to steer clear of coarse and vulgar terms. In many ways, this movement mirrored the literary trends flooding Europe at that time—Gongorism in Spain, Marinism in Italy, Euphuism in England—but the Précieuses aimed even higher than their male counterparts by wanting to influence everyday language. However, when they used phrases like ‘the door of the brain’ for ‘nose,’ ‘the instrument of cleanliness’ for ‘broom,’ and ‘the constant companion of the dead and the living’ for ‘shirt’ (the eternal companion of the dead and the living), their pretentiousness drew laughter, and their efforts would have faded into obscurity if not for Molière’s enduring satire in Les Précieuses ridicules and Les Femmes savantes. Despite those exaggerations, the feminine perspective is valid, and we should applaud those nations, including England, where women’s social status has been sufficiently elevated to promote greater purity and less coarseness in language than if men had been the exclusive judges of speech.
Among the things women object to in language must be specially mentioned anything that smacks of swearing[54]; where a man will[247] say “He told an infernal lie,” a woman will rather say, “He told a most dreadful fib.” Such euphemistic substitutes for the simple word ‘hell’ as ‘the other place,’ ‘a very hot’ or ‘a very uncomfortable place’ probably originated with women. They will also use ever to add emphasis to an interrogative pronoun, as in “Whoever told you that?” or “Whatever do you mean?” and avoid the stronger ‘who the devil’ or ‘what the dickens.’ For surprise we have the feminine exclamations ‘Good gracious,’ ‘Gracious me,’ ‘Goodness gracious,’ ‘Dear me’ by the side of the more masculine ‘Good heavens,’ ‘Great Scott.’ ‘To be sure’ is said to be more frequent with women than with men. Such instances might be multiplied, but these may suffice here. It will easily be seen that we have here civilized counterparts of what was above mentioned as sexual tabu; but it is worth noting that the interdiction in these cases is ordained by the women themselves, or perhaps rather by the older among them, while the young do not always willingly comply.
Among the things women dislike in language, we should especially mention anything that sounds like swearing[54]; where a man might say, “He told an awful lie,” a woman is more likely to say, “He told a really terrible fib.” Euphemisms for the simple word ‘hell’ like ‘the other place,’ ‘a very hot’ or ‘a very uncomfortable place’ probably started with women. They also use ever to emphasize an interrogative pronoun, as in “Whoever told you that?” or “Whatever do you mean?” and avoid the stronger ‘who the devil’ or ‘what the dickens.’ For surprise, we have feminine exclamations like ‘Good gracious,’ ‘Gracious me,’ ‘Goodness gracious,’ ‘Dear me’ alongside the more masculine ‘Good heavens’ and ‘Great Scott.’ ‘To be sure’ is said to be more common with women than with men. More examples could be added, but these should suffice for now. It’s clear that we have civilized alternatives to what was previously mentioned as sexual taboo; however, it’s worth noting that this restriction is imposed by the women themselves, or perhaps more so by the older ones, while the young do not always willingly follow suit.
Men will certainly with great justice object that there is a danger of the language becoming languid and insipid if we are always to content ourselves with women’s expressions, and that vigour and vividness count for something. Most boys and many men have a dislike to some words merely because they feel that they are used by everybody and on every occasion: they want to avoid what is commonplace and banal and to replace it by new and fresh expressions, whose very newness imparts to them a flavour of their own. Men thus become the chief renovators of language, and to them are due those changes by which we sometimes see one term replace an older one, to give way in turn to a still newer one, and so on. Thus we see in English that the old verb weorpan, corresponding to G. werfen, was felt as too weak and therefore supplanted by cast, which was taken from Scandinavian; after some centuries cast was replaced by the stronger throw, and this now, in the parlance of boys especially, is giving way to stronger expressions like chuck and fling. The old verbs, or at any rate cast, may be retained in certain applications, more particularly in some fixed combinations and in figurative significations, but it is now hardly possible to say, as Shakespeare does, “They cast their caps up.” Many such innovations on their first appearance are counted as slang, and some never make their way into received speech; but I am not in this connexion concerned with the distinction between slang[248] and recognized language, except in so far as the inclination or disinclination to invent and to use slang is undoubtedly one of the “human secondary sexual characters.” This is not invalidated by the fact that quite recently, with the rise of the feminist movement, many young ladies have begun to imitate their brothers in that as well as in other respects.
Men will definitely argue justly that there's a risk of the language becoming dull and bland if we always settle for women's expressions, and that energy and vividness matter. Most boys and many men dislike certain words just because they feel they're used by everyone all the time: they want to steer clear of what's common and unoriginal and replace it with fresh and new expressions, whose very novelty gives them a unique flavor. Men thus become the primary innovators of language, and it's due to them that we sometimes see one term take the place of an older one, only to be replaced by an even newer one, and so forth. For instance, in English, the old verb weorpan, which corresponds to G. werfen, was seen as too weak and was replaced by cast, which came from Scandinavian; after a few centuries, cast was replaced by the stronger throw, and now, particularly among boys, this is gradually giving way to even stronger expressions like chuck and fling. The old verbs, or at least cast, might still be used in certain contexts, especially in some fixed phrases and figurative meanings, but it's now almost impossible to say, as Shakespeare does, “They cast their caps up.” Many of these new terms are seen as slang when they first show up, and some never become part of everyday language; but I'm not concerned with the difference between slang[248] and standard language here, except in the way that the tendency to create and use slang is definitely one of the “secondary sexual characteristics” of humans. This is not undermined by the fact that recently, with the rise of the feminist movement, many young women have started to imitate their brothers in this and other ways.
XIII.—§ 8. Vocabulary.
This trait is indissolubly connected with another: the vocabulary of a woman as a rule is much less extensive than that of a man. Women move preferably in the central field of language, avoiding everything that is out of the way or bizarre, while men will often either coin new words or expressions or take up old-fashioned ones, if by that means they are enabled, or think they are enabled, to find a more adequate or precise expression for their thoughts. Woman as a rule follows the main road of language, where man is often inclined to turn aside into a narrow footpath or even to strike out a new path for himself. Most of those who are in the habit of reading books in foreign languages will have experienced a much greater average difficulty in books written by male than by female authors, because they contain many more rare words, dialect words, technical terms, etc. Those who want to learn a foreign language will therefore always do well at the first stage to read many ladies’ novels, because they will there continually meet with just those everyday words and combinations which the foreigner is above all in need of, what may be termed the indispensable small-change of a language.
This trait is closely linked to another: generally, a woman's vocabulary is much less extensive than a man's. Women tend to stick to the core of language, avoiding anything unusual or strange, while men often create new words or revive old-fashioned ones if they believe it helps them express their thoughts more effectively. Women usually stick to the main path of language, while men may wander off into a narrow side path or even forge a new one. Most people who read books in foreign languages have found that books by male authors tend to be more challenging on average than those by female authors, as they contain many more rare words, dialect terms, technical language, and so on. Therefore, those learning a foreign language should consider starting with many women's novels, as they'll frequently encounter the everyday words and phrases that are essential for understanding, what can be considered the necessary currency of a language.
This may be partly explicable from the education of women, which has up to quite recent times been less comprehensive and technical than that of men. But this does not account for everything, and certain experiments made by the American professor Jastrow would tend to show that we have here a trait that is independent of education. He asked twenty-five university students of each sex, belonging to the same class and thus in possession of the same preliminary training, to write down as rapidly as possible a hundred words, and to record the time. Words in sentences were not allowed. There were thus obtained 5,000 words, and of these many were of course the same. But the community of thought was greater in the women; while the men used 1,375 different words, their female class-mates used only 1,123. Of 1,266 unique words used, 29·8 per cent. were male, only 20·8 per cent. female. The group into which the largest number of the men’s words fell was the animal kingdom; the group into which the largest number of the women’s words fell was wearing apparel and fabrics; while[249] the men used only 53 words belonging to the class of foods, the women used 179. “In general the feminine traits revealed by this study are an attention to the immediate surroundings, to the finished product, to the ornamental, the individual, and the concrete; while the masculine preference is for the more remote, the constructive, the useful, the general and the abstract.” (See Havelock Ellis, Man and Woman, 4th ed., London, 1904, p. 189.)
This can be partly explained by the education of women, which has, until very recently, been less comprehensive and technical than men's. However, this doesn’t account for everything. Some experiments conducted by American professor Jastrow suggest that this trait is independent of education. He asked twenty-five university students of each gender, who were in the same class and thus had the same background training, to quickly write down a hundred words and note the time. They were not allowed to use words in complete sentences. In total, 5,000 words were gathered, many of which were repeats. However, women showed a greater commonality of thought; while the men used 1,375 different words, their female classmates only used 1,123. Of the 1,266 unique words, 29.8 percent were used by men, while only 20.8 percent were used by women. The category in which most of the men’s words fell was the animal kingdom, while the category with the majority of the women’s words was clothing and fabrics. The men used only 53 words related to food, while women used 179. “Overall, the feminine traits revealed by this study show an attention to immediate surroundings, finished products, ornamental, individual, and concrete aspects; while masculine preferences lean towards the more distant, constructive, useful, general, and abstract.” (See Havelock Ellis, Man and Woman, 4th ed., London, 1904, p. 189.)
Another point mentioned by Jastrow is the tendency to select words that rime and alliterative words; both these tendencies were decidedly more marked in men than in women. This shows what we may also notice in other ways, that men take greater interest in words as such and in their acoustic properties, while women pay less attention to that side of words and merely take them as they are, as something given once for all. Thus it comes that some men are confirmed punsters, while women are generally slow to see any point in a pun and scarcely ever perpetrate one themselves. Or, to get to something of greater value: the science of language has very few votaries among women, in spite of the fact that foreign languages, long before the reform of female education, belonged to those things which women learnt best in and out of schools, because, like music and embroidery, they were reckoned among the specially feminine ‘accomplishments.’
Another point Jastrow mentioned is that men tend to choose rhyming words and alliterative words more often than women do. This points to a broader observation: men seem to have a greater interest in words themselves and their sound qualities, while women tend to focus less on that aspect and accept words as they are, as something fixed. As a result, some men become avid pun makers, while women generally take longer to appreciate a pun and rarely create one themselves. On a more significant note, the field of linguistics has very few female enthusiasts, despite the fact that foreign languages, even before improvements in women's education, were among the subjects women excelled in both in and out of school, since, like music and embroidery, they were considered special "accomplishments" for women.
Woman is linguistically quicker than man: quicker to learn, quicker to hear, and quicker to answer. A man is slower: he hesitates, he chews the cud to make sure of the taste of words, and thereby comes to discover similarities with and differences from other words, both in sound and in sense, thus preparing himself for the appropriate use of the fittest noun or adjective.
Women are faster with language than men: quicker to learn, quicker to listen, and quicker to respond. Men are slower: they hesitate, mull things over to understand the nuances of words, and in doing so, they notice similarities and differences with other words, both in sound and meaning, preparing themselves for the best possible use of the right noun or adjective.
XIII.—§ 9. Adverbs.
While there are a few adjectives, such as pretty and nice, that might be mentioned as used more extensively by women than by men, there are greater differences with regard to adverbs. Lord Chesterfield wrote (The World, December 5, 1754): “Not contented with enriching our language by words absolutely new, my fair countrywomen have gone still farther, and improved it by the application and extension of old ones to various and very different significations. They take a word and change it, like a guinea into shillings for pocket-money, to be employed in the several occasional purposes of the day. For instance, the adjective vast and its adverb vastly mean anything, and are the fashionable words of the most fashionable people. A fine woman ... is vastly obliged, or vastly offended, vastly glad, or vastly sorry. Large objects are[250] vastly great, small ones are vastly little; and I had lately the pleasure to hear a fine woman pronounce, by a happy metonymy, a very small gold snuff-box, that was produced in company, to be vastly pretty, because it was so vastly little.” Even if that particular adverb to which Lord Chesterfield objected has now to a great extent gone out of fashion, there is no doubt that he has here touched on a distinctive trait: the fondness of women for hyperbole will very often lead the fashion with regard to adverbs of intensity, and these are very often used with disregard of their proper meaning, as in German riesig klein, English awfully pretty, terribly nice, French rudement joli, affreusement délicieux, Danish rædsom morsom (horribly amusing), Russian strast’ kakoy lovkiy (terribly able), etc. Quite, also, in the sense of ‘very,’ as in ‘she was quite charming; it makes me quite angry,’ is, according to Fitzedward Hall, due to the ladies. And I suspect that just sweet (as in Barrie: “Grizel thought it was just sweet of him”) is equally characteristic of the usage of the fair sex.
While there are a few adjectives, like pretty and nice, that might be more commonly used by women than by men, there are even bigger differences when it comes to adverbs. Lord Chesterfield wrote (The World, December 5, 1754): “Not only are my lovely countrywomen enriching our language with absolutely new words, but they’ve also taken it a step further by applying and extending old words to various and very different meanings. They take a word and modify it, like exchanging a guinea for shillings to spend as pocket money for different daily needs. For example, the adjective vast and its adverb vastly can mean pretty much anything and are trendy words among the most fashionable people. A lovely woman ... is vastly obliged, or vastly offended, vastly glad, or vastly sorry. Large things are vastly great, small things are vastly little; and I recently had the pleasure of hearing a lovely woman describe a very small gold snuff-box, which was shown to us, as vastly pretty, just because it was so vastly little.” Even if that particular adverb which Lord Chesterfield criticized has mostly fallen out of fashion, he definitely highlighted a distinctive trait: women's love for hyperbole often sets the trend when it comes to adverbs of intensity, which are often used without regard for their actual meanings, like the German riesig klein, English awfully pretty, terribly nice, French rudement joli, affreusement délicieux, Danish rædsom morsom (horribly amusing), Russian strast’ kakoy lovkiy (terribly able), etc. The word quite, also used to mean ‘very,’ as in ‘she was quite charming; it makes me quite angry,’ is, according to Fitzedward Hall, attributed to the ladies. And I think that just sweet (as in Barrie: “Grizel thought it was just sweet of him”) is also typical of how women use the language.
There is another intensive which has also something of the eternally feminine about it, namely so. I am indebted to Stoffel (Int. 101) for the following quotation from Punch (January 4, 1896): “This little adverb is a great favourite with ladies, in conjunction with an adjective. For instance, they are very fond of using such expressions as ‘He is so charming!’ ‘It is so lovely!’ etc.” Stoffel adds the following instances of strongly intensive so as highly characteristic of ladies’ usage: ‘Thank you so much!’ ‘It was so kind of you to think of it!’ ‘That’s so like you!’ ‘I’m so glad you’ve come!’ ‘The bonnet is so lovely!’
There’s another intensive that has a touch of the eternally feminine about it, namely so. I owe a thanks to Stoffel (Int. 101) for the following quotation from Punch (January 4, 1896): “This little adverb is a huge favorite with women when paired with an adjective. For instance, they love using phrases like ‘He is so charming!’ ‘It is so lovely!’ etc.” Stoffel adds some examples of the strongly intensive so that are very characteristic of women’s speech: ‘Thank you so much!’ ‘It was so kind of you to think of it!’ ‘That’s so like you!’ ‘I’m so glad you’ve come!’ ‘The hat is so lovely!’
The explanation of this characteristic feminine usage is, I think, that women much more often than men break off without finishing their sentences, because they start talking without having thought out what they are going to say; the sentence ‘I’m so glad you’ve come’ really requires some complement in the shape of a clause with that, ‘so glad that I really must kiss you,’ or, ‘so glad that I must treat you to something extra,’ or whatever the consequence may be. But very often it is difficult in a hurry to hit upon something adequate to say, and ‘so glad that I cannot express it’ frequently results in the inexpressible remaining unexpressed, and when that experiment has been repeated time after time, the linguistic consequence is that a strongly stressed so acquires the force of ‘very much indeed.’ It is the same with such, as in the following two extracts from a modern novel (in both it is a lady who is speaking): “Poor Kitty! she has been in such a state of mind,” and “Do you know that you look such a duck this afternoon.... This hat suits you so—you are such a grande dame in it.” Exactly the same thing has happened with Danish så and sådan,[251] G. so and solch; also with French tellement, though there perhaps not to the same extent as in English.
The reason for this typical way of speaking among women, I think, is that women often drop off without finishing their sentences because they begin talking without having thought through what they want to say. The statement “I’m so glad you’ve come” really needs a follow-up, like “so glad that I really must kiss you,” or “so glad that I must treat you to something extra,” or whatever the outcome might be. But often, it’s hard to quickly think of something fitting to say, and “so glad that I can’t express it” frequently leads to the feeling remaining unexpressed. When this happens repeatedly, the result is that a strongly emphasized “so” takes on the meaning of “very much indeed.” The same goes for “such,” as shown in these two quotes from a modern novel (both spoken by a woman): “Poor Kitty! she has been in such a state of mind,” and “Do you know that you look such a duck this afternoon…. This hat suits you so—you are such a grande dame in it.” The same phenomenon has occurred with Danish så and sådan, G. so and solch; also with French tellement, although perhaps not to the same degree as in English.
We have the same phenomenon with to a degree, which properly requires to be supplemented with something that tells us what the degree is, but is frequently left by itself, as in ‘His second marriage was irregular to a degree.’
We see the same situation with to a degree, which should actually be followed by something explaining what that degree is, but is often left alone, as in ‘His second marriage was irregular to a degree.’
XIII.—§ 10. Periods.
The frequency with which women thus leave their exclamatory sentences half-finished might be exemplified from many passages in our novelists and dramatists. I select a few quotations. The first is from the beginning of Vanity Fair: “This almost caused Jemima to faint with terror. ‘Well, I never,’ said she. ‘What an audacious’—emotion prevented her from completing either sentence.” Next from one of Hankin’s plays. “Mrs. Eversleigh: I must say! (but words fail her).” And finally from Compton Mackenzie’s Poor Relations: “‘The trouble you must have taken,’ Hilda exclaimed.” These quotations illustrate types of sentences which are becoming so frequent that they would seem soon to deserve a separate chapter in modern grammars, ‘Did you ever?’ ‘Well, I never!’ being perhaps the most important of these ‘stop-short’ or ‘pull-up’ sentences, as I think they might be termed.
The way women often leave their exclamatory sentences unfinished can be seen in many works by novelists and playwrights. Here are a few examples. The first is from the beginning of Vanity Fair: “This almost made Jemima faint with fear. ‘Well, I never,’ she said. ‘What an audacious’—emotion stopped her from finishing either sentence.” Next, from one of Hankin’s plays: “Mrs. Eversleigh: I must say! (but words fail her).” And finally, from Compton Mackenzie’s Poor Relations: “‘The trouble you must have taken,’ Hilda exclaimed.” These examples highlight types of sentences that are becoming so common that they could soon warrant a separate chapter in modern grammar books, with ‘Did you ever?’ and ‘Well, I never!’ being perhaps the most significant of these ‘stop-short’ or ‘pull-up’ sentences, as I think they might be called.
These sentences are the linguistic symptoms of a peculiarity of feminine psychology which has not escaped observation. Meredith says of one of his heroines: “She thought in blanks, as girls do, and some women,” and Hardy singularizes one of his by calling her “that novelty among women—one who finished a thought before beginning the sentence which was to convey it.”
These sentences reflect a unique aspect of feminine psychology that hasn't gone unnoticed. Meredith describes one of his heroines by saying, “She thought in incomplete thoughts, like girls do, and some women,” while Hardy highlights one of his characters by referring to her as “that rarity among women—someone who completed a thought before starting the sentence meant to express it.”
The same point is seen in the typical way in which the two sexes build up their sentences and periods; but here, as so often in this chapter, we cannot establish absolute differences, but only preferences that may be broken in a great many instances and yet are characteristic of the sexes as such. If we compare long periods as constructed by men and by women, we shall in the former find many more instances of intricate or involute structures with clause within clause, a relative clause in the middle of a conditional clause or vice versa, with subordination and sub-subordination, while the typical form of long feminine periods is that of co-ordination, one sentence or clause being added to another on the same plane and the gradation between the respective ideas being marked not grammatically, but emotionally, by stress and intonation, and in writing by underlining. In learned terminology we may say that men are fond of hypotaxis and women of parataxis.[252] Or we may use the simile that a male period is often like a set of Chinese boxes, one within another, while a feminine period is like a set of pearls joined together on a string of ands and similar words. In a Danish comedy a young girl is relating what has happened to her at a ball, when she is suddenly interrupted by her brother, who has slyly taken out his watch and now exclaims: “I declare! you have said and then fifteen times in less than two and a half minutes.”
The same observation can be made about how men and women construct their sentences and phrases. However, as is often the case in this chapter, we can't draw absolute distinctions, only tendencies that can be broken in many cases but still are indicative of each gender. If we compare long sentences written by men and women, we'll notice that men tend to use a lot more complex structures, with clauses nested within clauses, like a relative clause in the middle of a conditional clause or the other way around, along with lots of subordination. In contrast, women typically use longer sentences that rely on coordination, where one sentence or clause adds to another on the same level, and the relationship between the ideas is marked not through grammar but through emotional emphasis, tone, or in writing by underlining. In technical terms, we might say that men prefer hypotaxis while women lean towards parataxis.[252] Or we could say that a man's sentence often resembles a set of Russian nesting dolls, while a woman's sentence is more like a string of pearls linked together with ands and similar words. In a Danish comedy, a young girl is sharing what happened to her at a ball when her brother suddenly interrupts her, having slyly pulled out his watch, and exclaims, “I can't believe it! You've said and then fifteen times in less than two and a half minutes.”
XIII.—§ 11. General Characteristics.
The greater rapidity of female thought is shown linguistically, among other things, by the frequency with which a woman will use a pronoun like he or she, not of the person last mentioned, but of somebody else to whom her thoughts have already wandered, while a man with his slower intellect will think that she is still moving on the same path. The difference in rapidity of perception has been tested experimentally by Romanes: the same paragraph was presented to various well-educated persons, who were asked to read it as rapidly as they could, ten seconds being allowed for twenty lines. As soon as the time was up the paragraph was removed, and the reader immediately wrote down all that he or she could remember of it. It was found that women were usually more successful than men in this test. Not only were they able to read more quickly than the men, but they were able to give a better account of the paragraph as a whole. One lady, for instance, could read exactly four times as fast as her husband, and even then give a better account than he of that small portion of the paragraph he had alone been able to read. But it was found that this rapidity was no proof of intellectual power, and some of the slowest readers were highly distinguished men. Ellis (Man and W. 195) explains this in this way: with the quick reader it is as though every statement were admitted immediately and without inspection to fill the vacant chambers of the mind, while with the slow reader every statement undergoes an instinctive process of cross-examination; every new fact seems to stir up the accumulated stores of facts among which it intrudes, and so impedes rapidity of mental action.
The faster way women think is reflected in how they use language, for example, by frequently referring to someone with pronouns like he or she not just for the last person mentioned but for someone else their thoughts have already drifted to. Meanwhile, a man, with a slower pace of thought, may assume she is still focused on the previous topic. Researchers like Romanes have tested this difference in perception speed. They had several educated individuals read the same paragraph as quickly as possible, allowing just ten seconds for twenty lines. Once the time was up, the paragraph was taken away, and each reader wrote down everything they could remember. Results showed that women often performed better than men in this exercise. Not only could they read faster, but they also provided a more comprehensive summary of the paragraph. For example, one woman read exactly four times faster than her husband and still offered a better summary of the small section he managed to read. However, this speed didn’t necessarily indicate greater intellectual ability, as some of the slowest readers were distinguished men. Ellis (Man and W. 195) explains this by saying that for a quick reader, each statement is instantly accepted into the mind without much thought, while for a slow reader, every statement is instinctively scrutinized; each new fact seems to trigger a review of previously learned information, which slows down mental processing.
This reminds me of one of Swift’s “Thoughts on Various Subjects”: “The common fluency of speech in many men, and most women, is owing to the scarcity of matter, and scarcity of words; for whoever is a master of language, and hath a mind full of ideas, will be apt in speaking to hesitate upon the choice of both: whereas common speakers have only one set of ideas, and one set of words to clothe them in; and these are always ready at the mouth. So[253] people come faster out of a church when it is almost empty, than when a crowd is at the door” (Works, Dublin, 1735, i. 305).
This reminds me of one of Swift’s “Thoughts on Various Subjects”: "The smoothness of conversation in many men, and most women, comes from having fewer thoughts and fewer words. Because anyone who truly understands language and has a mind full of ideas will often hesitate when trying to choose both. Meanwhile, average speakers only have one set of ideas and one set of words to express them, and those are always ready on their lips. So[253] people leave a church more quickly when it’s nearly empty than when there's a crowd at the door" (Works, Dublin, 1735, i. 305).
The volubility of women has been the subject of innumerable jests: it has given rise to popular proverbs in many countries,[55] as well as to Aurora Leigh’s resigned “A woman’s function plainly is—to talk” and Oscar Wilde’s sneer, “Women are a decorative sex. They never have anything to say, but they say it charmingly.” A woman’s thought is no sooner formed than uttered. Says Rosalind, “Do you not know I am a woman? when I think, I must speak” (As You Like It, III. 2. 264). And in a modern novel a young girl says: “I talk so as to find out what I think. Don’t you? Some things one can’t judge of till one hears them spoken” (Housman, John of Jingalo, 346).
The talkativeness of women has been the target of countless jokes: it has inspired popular sayings in many cultures,[55] as well as Aurora Leigh’s acceptance of “A woman’s function plainly is—to talk” and Oscar Wilde’s jab, “Women are a decorative sex. They never have anything to say, but they say it charmingly.” A woman’s thoughts are expressed as soon as they emerge. Rosalind says, “Do you not know I am a woman? When I think, I must speak” (As You Like It, III. 2. 264). And in a modern novel, a young girl says: “I talk so as to find out what I think. Don’t you? Some things one can’t judge of till one hears them spoken” (Housman, John of Jingalo, 346).
The superior readiness of speech of women is a concomitant of the fact that their vocabulary is smaller and more central than that of men. But this again is connected with another indubitable fact, that women do not reach the same extreme points as men, but are nearer the average in most respects. Havelock Ellis, who establishes this in various fields, rightly remarks that the statement that genius is undeniably of more frequent occurrence among men than among women has sometimes been regarded by women as a slur upon their sex, but that it does not appear that women have been equally anxious to find fallacies in the statement that idiocy is more common among men. Yet the two statements must be taken together. Genius is more common among men by virtue of the same general tendency by which idiocy is more common among men. The two facts are but two aspects of a larger zoological fact—the greater variability of the male (Man and W. 420).
The better ability of women to express themselves verbally is linked to the fact that their vocabulary is smaller and more focused than that of men. This ties into another clear fact: women tend not to reach the same extremes as men and usually fall closer to the average in many areas. Havelock Ellis, who shows this across different fields, rightly points out that the idea that genius occurs more often in men than in women has sometimes been seen by women as an insult to their gender. However, it seems that women have not been as eager to challenge the claim that idiocy is more prevalent among men. Both statements need to be considered together. Genius is more common in men because of the same general trend that leads to a higher occurrence of idiocy among men. These two facts reflect a larger biological truth—the greater variability of males. (Man and W. 420).
In language we see this very clearly: the highest linguistic genius and the lowest degree of linguistic imbecility are very rarely found among women. The greatest orators, the most famous literary artists, have been men; but it may serve as a sort of consolation to the other sex that there are a much greater number of men than of women who cannot put two words together intelligibly, who stutter and stammer and hesitate, and are unable to find suitable expressions for the simplest thought. Between these two extremes the woman moves with a sure and supple tongue which is ever ready to find words and to pronounce them in a clear and intelligible manner.
In language, this becomes clear: the highest level of linguistic genius and the lowest level of linguistic ineptitude are rarely found in women. The greatest speakers and the most renowned writers have generally been men. However, it might be a comfort to the other gender that there are far more men than women who struggle to form coherent sentences, who stutter and falter, and who can’t find the right words for even the simplest ideas. In contrast, women tend to navigate these extremes with a confident and flexible command of language, always ready to articulate their thoughts in a clear and understandable way.
Nor are the reasons far to seek why such differences should have developed. They are mainly dependent on the division of labour enjoined in primitive tribes and to a great extent also among more civilized peoples. For thousands of years the work that especially fell to men was such as demanded an intense display of energy for a comparatively short period, mainly in war and in hunting. Here, however, there was not much occasion to talk, nay, in many circumstances talk might even be fraught with danger. And when that rough work was over, the man would either sleep or idle his time away, inert and torpid, more or less in silence. Woman, on the other hand, had a number of domestic occupations which did not claim such an enormous output of spasmodic energy. To her was at first left not only agriculture, and a great deal of other work which in more peaceful times was taken over by men; but also much that has been till quite recently her almost exclusive concern—the care of the children, cooking, brewing, baking, sewing, washing, etc.,—things which for the most part demanded no deep thought, which were performed in company and could well be accompanied with a lively chatter. Lingering effects of this state of things are seen still, though great social changes are going on in our times which may eventually modify even the linguistic relations of the two sexes.
The reasons for these differences are not hard to find. They're mainly linked to the division of labor established in early tribes and also to a large extent among more advanced societies. For thousands of years, the tasks typically assigned to men required a burst of energy for a relatively short time, mainly in warfare and hunting. During these activities, there wasn't much need for conversation; in many cases, talking could even be dangerous. When that intense work was done, men would either sleep or spend their time doing nothing, mostly in silence. In contrast, women had various domestic duties that didn't require such high peaks of energy. They were initially responsible for agriculture and many other tasks that men took over in more peaceful times. They also handled what has only recently been considered mainly their responsibility—caring for children, cooking, brewing, baking, sewing, washing, and so on—activities that generally didn't involve deep thought, could be done in groups, and often included lively chatting. The lingering effects of this situation can still be seen today, although significant social changes are happening in our time that may eventually alter even the linguistic relationships between the sexes.
CHAPTER XIV
Reasons for Change
§ 1. Anatomy. § 2. Geography. § 3. National Psychology. § 4. Speed of Utterance. § 5. Periods of Rapid Change. § 6. The Ease Theory. § 7. Sounds in Connected Speech. § 8. Extreme Weakenings. § 9. The Principle of Value. § 10. Application to Case System, etc. § 11. Stress Phenomena. § 12. Non-phonetic Changes.
§ 1. Anatomy. § 2. Geography. § 3. National Psychology. § 4. Speed of Utterance. § 5. Periods of Rapid Change. § 6. The Ease Theory. § 7. Sounds in Connected Speech. § 8. Extreme Weakenings. § 9. The Principle of Value. § 10. Application to Case System, etc. § 11. Stress Phenomena. § 12. Non-phonetic Changes.
XIV.—§ 1. Anatomy.
In accordance with the programme laid down in the opening paragraph of Book III, we shall now deal in detail with those linguistic changes which are not due to transference to new individuals. The chapter on woman’s language has served as a kind of bridge between the two main divisions, in so far as the first sections treated of those women’s dialects which were, or were supposed to be, due to the influence of foreigners.
In line with the plan outlined in the opening paragraph of Book III, we will now explore in detail the linguistic changes that aren't caused by shifting to new individuals. The chapter on women's language has acted as a bridge between the two main sections, as the initial parts discussed women's dialects that were, or were thought to be, influenced by outsiders.
Many theories have been advanced to explain the indubitable fact that languages change in course of time. Some scholars have thought that there ought to be one fundamental cause working in all instances, while others, more sensibly, have maintained that a variety of causes have been and are at work, and that it is not easy to determine which of them has been decisive in each observed case of change. The greatest attention has been given to phonetic change, and in reading some theorists one might almost fancy that sounds were the only thing changeable, or at any rate that phonetic changes were the only ones in language which had to be accounted for. Let us now examine some of the theories advanced.
Many theories have been proposed to explain the undeniable fact that languages change over time. Some scholars believed there should be one main cause for these changes, while others, more reasonably, argued that multiple factors have been and are still at play, making it challenging to identify which ones are responsible for each instance of change. The most focus has been on phonetic change, and reading some theorists, one might almost think that sounds were the only things that could change, or at least that phonetic changes were the only ones in language that needed explanation. Let’s take a look at some of the theories that have been put forward.
Sometimes it is asserted that sound changes must have their cause in changes in the anatomical structure of the articulating organs. This theory, however, need not detain us long (see the able discussion in Oertel, p. 194 ff.), for no facts have been alleged to support it, and one does not see why small anatomical variations should cause changes so long as any teacher of languages on the phonetic method is able to teach his pupils practically every speech sound, even those that their own native language has been without for centuries. Besides, many phonetic changes do not at all lead to new sounds being developed or old[256] ones lost, but simply to the old sounds being used in new places or disused in some of the places where they were formerly found. Some tribes have a custom of mutilating their lips or teeth, and that of course must have caused changes in their pronunciation, which are said to have persisted even after the custom was given up. Thus, according to Meinhof (MSA 60) the Yao women insert a big wooden disk within the upper lip, which makes it impossible for them to pronounce [f], and as it is the women that teach their children to speak, the sound of [f] has disappeared from the language, though now it is beginning to reappear in loan-words. It is clear, however, that such customs can have exercised only the very slightest influence on language in general.
Sometimes people claim that changes in speech sounds are caused by changes in the structure of the speech organs. However, this theory doesn’t require much attention (see the insightful discussion in Oertel, p. 194 ff.), since no evidence has been provided to back it up, and it’s unclear why minor anatomical variations would trigger changes, especially when any language teacher using the phonetic method can effectively teach their students almost any speech sound, even those not present in their native language for centuries. Furthermore, many phonetic changes don’t actually create new sounds or eliminate old ones; instead, they typically involve old sounds being used in new contexts or being dropped from places where they were previously common. Some cultures have traditions of altering their lips or teeth, which certainly affects their pronunciation, and these changes can persist even after the customs are abandoned. For example, according to Meinhof (MSA 60), Yao women insert a large wooden disk in their upper lip, making it impossible for them to pronounce [f]. Since the women teach their children to speak, the sound [f] has vanished from the language, although it is starting to return through loanwords. Nonetheless, it's evident that such customs can have only a very minimal impact on language overall.
XIV.—§ 2. Geography.
Some scholars have believed in an influence exercised by climatic or geographical conditions on the character of the sound system, instancing as evidence the harsh consonants found in the languages of the Caucasus as contrasted with the pleasanter sounds heard in regions more favoured by nature. But this influence cannot be established as a general rule. “The aboriginal inhabitants of the north-west coast of America found subsistence relatively easy in a country abounding in many forms of edible marine life; nor can they be said to have been subjected to rigorous climatic conditions; yet in phonetic harshness their languages rival those of the Caucasus. On the other hand, perhaps no people has ever been subjected to a more forbidding physical environment than the Eskimos, yet the Eskimo language not only impresses one as possessed of a relatively agreeable phonetic system when compared with the languages of the north-west coast, but may even be thought to compare favourably with American Indian languages generally” (Sapir, American Anthropologist, XIV (1912), 234). It would also on this theory be difficult to account for the very considerable linguistic changes which have taken place in historical times in many countries whose climate, etc., cannot during the same period have changed correspondingly.
Some scholars have suggested that climatic or geographical conditions influence the character of sound systems, pointing to the harsh consonants in languages from the Caucasus compared to the more pleasant sounds in regions that are more favored by nature. However, this influence can't be established as a general rule. “The indigenous people of the north-west coast of America found it relatively easy to survive in a region rich in various types of edible marine life; they also did not experience harsh climatic conditions, yet their languages are as phonetically harsh as those of the Caucasus. Conversely, perhaps no group has faced a more challenging physical environment than the Eskimos, yet the Eskimo language not only seems to have a relatively pleasant phonetic system compared to the languages of the north-west coast, but it might even be favorably compared to American Indian languages in general” (Sapir, American Anthropologist, XIV (1912), 234). This theory also struggles to explain the significant linguistic changes that have occurred historically in many countries where the climate and other conditions have not changed correspondingly during the same period.
A geographical theory of sound-shifting was advanced by Heinrich Meyer-Benfey in Zeitschr. f. deutsches Altert. 45 (1901), and has recently been taken up by H. Collitz in Amer. Journal of Philol. 39 (1918), p. 413. Consonant shifting is chiefly found in mountain regions; this is most obvious in the High German shift, which started from the Alpine district of Southern Germany. After leaving the region of the high mountains it gradually decreases in strength; yet it keeps on extending, with steadily[257] diminishing energy, over part of the area of the Franconian dialects. But having reached the plains of Northern Germany, the movement stops. The same theory applies to languages in which a similar shifting is found, e.g. Old and Modern Armenian, the Soho language in South Africa, etc. “However strange it may appear at the first glance,” says Collitz, “that certain consonant changes should depend on geographical surroundings, the connexion is easily understood. The change of media to tenuis and that of tenuis to affricate or aspirate are linked together by a common feature, viz. an increase in the intensity of expiration. As the common cause of both these shiftings we may therefore regard a change in the manner in which breath is used for pronunciation. The habitual use of a larger volume of breath means an increased activity of the lungs. Here we have reached the point where the connexion with geographical or climatic conditions is clear, because nobody will deny that residence in the mountains, especially in the high mountains, stimulates the lungs.”
A geographical theory of sound-shifting was proposed by Heinrich Meyer-Benfey in Zeitschr. f. deutsches Altert. 45 (1901), and has recently been discussed by H. Collitz in Amer. Journal of Philol. 39 (1918), p. 413. Consonant shifting is mainly found in mountainous areas; this is most evident in the High German shift, which originated from the Alpine region of Southern Germany. After moving away from the high mountains, its strength gradually lessens; however, it continues to spread over part of the Franconian dialect regions with diminishing intensity. But upon reaching the plains of Northern Germany, the movement halts. The same theory applies to languages where a similar shift occurs, such as Old and Modern Armenian, the Soho language in South Africa, and others. “However strange it may seem at first glance,” says Collitz, “that certain consonant changes depend on geographical surroundings, the connection is easily understood. The change from media to tenuis and from tenuis to affricate or aspirate are linked by a common feature: an increase in the intensity of expiration. Therefore, we can see a change in how breath is used for pronunciation as the common cause of both these shifts. Regularly using a larger volume of breath correlates with greater lung activity. We see the connection to geographical or climatic conditions clearly here, as no one can deny that living in the mountains, especially at high elevations, boosts lung function.”
When this theory was first brought to my notice, I wrote a short footnote on it (PhG 176), in which I treated it with perhaps too little respect, merely mentioning the fact that my countrymen, the Danes, in their flat country were developing exactly the same shift as the High Germans (making p, t, k into strongly aspirated or affricated sounds and unvoicing b, d, g); I then asked ironically whether that might be a consequence of the indubitable fact that an increasing number of Danes every summer go to Switzerland and Norway for their holidays. And even now, after the theory has been endorsed by so able an advocate as Collitz, I fail to see how it can hold water. The induction seems faulty on both sides, for the shift is found among peoples living in plains, and on the other hand it is not shared by all mountain peoples—for example, not by the Italian and Ladin speaking neighbours of the High Germans in the Alps. Besides, the physiological explanation is not impeccable, for walking in the mountains affects the way in which we breathe, that is, it primarily affects the lungs, but the change in the consonants is primarily one not in the lungs, but in the glottis; as the connexion between these two things is not necessary, the whole reasoning is far from being cogent. At any rate, the theory can only with great difficulty be applied to the first Gothonic shift, for how do we know that that started in mountainous regions? and who knows whether the sounds actually found as f, þ and h for original p, t, k, had first been aspirated and affricated stops? It seems much more probable that the transition was a direct one, through slackening and opening of the stoppage, but in that case it has nothing to do with the lungs or way of breathing.
When I first heard about this theory, I wrote a brief footnote on it (PhG 176), where I may have been a bit disrespectful. I simply pointed out that my fellow countrymen, the Danes, in their flat land, were experiencing the same shift as the High Germans (turning p, t, k into strongly aspirated or affricated sounds and unvoicing b, d, g). I then jokingly questioned whether this could be linked to the undeniable fact that more and more Danes go to Switzerland and Norway for their vacations every summer. Even now, after the theory has been backed by someone as capable as Collitz, I still don't see how it holds up. The reasoning seems flawed on both sides since the shift occurs among people living in plains, yet it's not found among all mountain people—for instance, the Italian and Ladin-speaking neighbors of the High Germans in the Alps. Additionally, the physiological explanation isn't solid, as being in the mountains influences our breathing, primarily affecting the lungs, while the changes in consonants mainly involve the glottis. Since there's no necessary connection between these two factors, the logic is far from convincing. At any rate, applying this theory to the first Gothonic shift is really difficult, because how do we know that it began in mountainous areas? And who can say whether the sounds that became f, þ, and h from original p, t, k were initially aspirated and affricated stops? It seems much more likely that the transition was a direct one, through loosening and opening of the stoppage, but in that case, it has nothing to do with the lungs or our breathing.
XIV.—§ 3. National Psychology.
We are much more likely to ‘burn,’ as the children say, when, instead of looking for the cause in such outward circumstances, we try to find it in the psychology of those who initiate the change. But this does not amount to endorsing all the explanations of this kind which have found favour with linguists. Thus, since the times of Grimm it has been usual to ascribe the well-known consonant shift to psychological traits believed to be characteristic of the Germans. Grimm says that the sound shift is a consequence of the progressive tendency and desire of liberty found in the Germans (GDS 292); it is due to their courage and pride in the period of the great migration of tribes (ib. 306): “When quiet and morality returned, the sounds remained, and it may be reckoned as evidence of the superior gentleness and moderation of the Gothic, Saxon and Scandinavian tribes that they contented themselves with the first shift, while the wilder force of the High Germans was impelled to the second shift.” (Thus also Westphal.) Curtius finds energy and juvenile vigour in the Germanic sound shift (KZ 2. 331, 1852). Müllenhof saw in the transition from p, t, k to f, þ, h a sign of weakening, the Germans having apparently lost the power of pronouncing the hard stops; while further, the giving up of the aspirated ph, th, kh, bh, dh, gh was due to enervation or indolence. But the succeeding transition from the old b, d, g to p, t, k showed that they had afterwards pulled themselves together to new exertions, and the regularity with which all these changes were carried through evidenced a great steadiness and persevering force (Deutsche Altertumsk. 2. 197). His disciple Wilhelm Scherer saw in the whole history of the German language alternating periods of rise and decline in popular taste; he looked upon sound changes from the æsthetic point of view and ascribed the (second) consonant shift to a feminine period in which consonants were neglected because the nation took pleasure in vocalic sounds.
We are much more likely to ‘burn out,’ as the kids say, when, instead of searching for the cause in external circumstances, we look for it in the psychology of those who initiate the change. But this doesn’t mean accepting all the explanations of this type that have been favored by linguists. Since Grimm’s time, it has been common to attribute the well-known consonant shift to psychological traits believed to be characteristic of the Germans. Grimm argues that the sound shift is a result of the progressive tendency and desire for freedom found in the Germans (GDS 292); it stems from their courage and pride during the great migration of tribes (ib. 306): “When peace and morality returned, the sounds remained, and it can be considered evidence of the superior gentleness and moderation of the Gothic, Saxon, and Scandinavian tribes that they were satisfied with the first shift, while the more untamed nature of the High Germans drove them to the second shift.” (Thus also Westphal.) Curtius finds energy and youthful vigor in the Germanic sound shift (KZ 2. 331, 1852). Müllenhof viewed the transition from p, t, k to f, þ, h as a sign of weakening, suggesting that the Germans had apparently lost the ability to pronounce the hard stops; additionally, the abandonment of the aspirated ph, th, kh, bh, dh, gh was due to fatigue or laziness. However, the later transition from the old b, d, g to p, t, k showed that they had managed to regroup for new efforts, and the consistent manner in which all these changes occurred demonstrated significant steadiness and perseverance (Deutsche Altertumsk. 2. 197). His student Wilhelm Scherer viewed the whole history of the German language as alternating periods of rise and decline in public taste; he examined sound changes from an aesthetic perspective and attributed the (second) consonant shift to a feminine period in which consonants were overlooked because the nation enjoyed vowel sounds.
XIV.—§ 4. Speed of Utterance.
Wundt gives a different though somewhat related explanation of the Germanic shift as due to a “revolution in culture, as the subjugation of a native population through warlike immigrants, with resulting new organization of the State” (S 1. 424): this increased the speed of utterance, and he tries in detail to show that increased speed leads naturally to just those changes in consonants which are found in the Gothonic shift (1. 420 ff.). But even if we admit that the average speed of talking (tempo[259] der rede) is now probably greater than formerly, the whole theory is built up on so many doubtful or even manifestly incorrect details both in linguistic history and in general phonetic theory that it cannot be accepted. It does not account for the actual facts of the consonant shifts; moreover, it is difficult to see why such phenomena as this shift, if they were dependent on the speed of utterance, should occur only at these particular historical times and within comparatively narrow geographical limits, for there is much to be said for the view that in all periods the speech of the Western nations has been constantly gaining in rapidity as life in general has become accelerated, and in no period probably more than during the last century, which has witnessed no radical consonant shift in any of the leading civilized nations.
Wundt offers a different but somewhat related explanation of the Germanic shift, attributing it to a “revolution in culture, as the subjugation of a native population through warlike immigrants, with a resulting new organization of the State” (S 1. 424). He claims that this increased the speed of speech, and he goes into detail trying to demonstrate that this increased speed naturally leads to the kinds of consonant changes found in the Gothonic shift (1. 420 ff.). However, even if we accept that the average speaking speed (tempo[259] the speech) is likely now faster than it was in the past, the entire theory is based on many questionable or clearly wrong details, both in linguistic history and general phonetic theory, making it unacceptable. It doesn't explain the actual occurrence of consonant shifts; additionally, it's hard to understand why such shifts, if they were dependent on speech speed, would only happen at specific historical moments and within fairly narrow geographical boundaries. There's plenty of evidence to support the idea that, throughout all periods, the speech of Western nations has been consistently speeding up as life overall has accelerated, and probably not more than in the last century, which has seen no significant consonant shifts in any of the major civilized nations.
XIV.—§ 5. Periods of Rapid Change.
All these theories, different though they are in detail, have this in common, that they endeavour to explain one particular change, or set of changes, from one particular psychological trait supposed to be prevalent at the time when the change took place, but they fail because we are not able scientifically to demonstrate any intimate connexion between the pronunciation of particular sounds and a certain state of mind, and also because our knowledge of the fluctuations of collective psychology is still so very imperfect. But it is interesting to contrast these theories with the explanation of the very same sound shifts mentioned in a previous chapter (XI), and there shown to be equally unsatisfactory, the explanation, namely, that the fundamental cause of the consonant shift is to be found in the peculiar pronunciation of an aboriginal population. In both cases the Gothonic shifts are singled out, because since the time of Grimm the attention of scholars has been focused on these changes more than on any others—they are looked upon as changes sui generis, and therefore requiring a special explanation, such as is not thought necessary in the case of the innumerable minor changes that fill most of the pages of the phonological section of any historical grammar. But the sober truth seems to be that these shifts are not different in kind from those that have made, say, Fr. sève, frère, chien, ciel, faire, changer out of Lat. sapa, fratrem, canem, kælum, fakere, cambiare, etc., or those that have changed the English vowels in fate, feet, fight, foot, out from what they were when the letters which denote them still had their ‘continental’ values. Our main endeavour, therefore, must be to find out general reasons why sounds should not always remain unchanged. This seems more important, at any rate as a preliminary investigation, than attempting offhand[260] to assign particular reasons why in such and such a century this or that sound was changed in some particular way.
All these theories, despite their differences in detail, share a common goal: they try to explain a specific change, or set of changes, based on one particular psychological trait thought to be common at the time the change occurred. However, they fail because we can't scientifically demonstrate a close connection between how certain sounds are pronounced and a specific state of mind. Additionally, our understanding of the shifts in collective psychology remains quite limited. It’s interesting to compare these theories with the explanation of the same sound shifts discussed in a previous chapter (XI), which is also not very satisfying. This explanation suggests that the main cause of the consonant shift lies in the unique pronunciation of a native population. In both instances, the Gothic shifts are highlighted because since Grimm's time, scholars have focused more on these changes than on others—they are considered changes sui generis, needing a unique explanation, unlike the countless minor changes covered throughout most of the phonology sections in historical grammars. However, the plain truth appears to be that these shifts aren’t fundamentally different from those that produced French sève, frère, chien, ciel, faire, changer from Latin sapa, fratrem, canem, kælum, fakere, cambiare, etc., or those that altered the English vowels in fate, feet, fight, foot, out from their original ‘continental’ values. Therefore, our main goal should be to uncover general reasons why sounds can change over time. This seems to be more crucial, at least as an initial investigation, than trying to quickly assign specific reasons why a particular sound changed in a certain way during a specific century.
If, however, we find a particular period especially fertile in linguistic changes (phonetic, morphological, semantic, or all at once), it is quite natural that we should turn our attention to the social state of the community at that time in order, if possible, to discover some specially favouring circumstances. I am thinking especially of two kinds of condition which may operate. In the first place, the influence of parents, and grown-up people generally, may be less than usual, because an unusual number of parents may be away from home, as in great wars of long duration, or may have been killed off, as in the great plagues; cf. also what was said above of children left to shift for themselves in certain favoured regions of North America (Ch. X § 7). Secondly, there may be periods in which the ordinary restraints on linguistic change make themselves less felt than usual, because the whole community is animated by a strong feeling of independence and wants to break loose from social ties of many kinds, including those of a powerful school organization or literary tradition. This probably was the case with North America in the latter half of the eighteenth century, when the new nation wished to manifest its independence of old England and therefore, among other things, was inclined to throw overboard that respect for linguistic authority which under normal conditions makes for conservatism. If the divergence between American and British English is not greater than it actually is, this is probably due partly to the continual influx of immigrants from the old country, and partly to that increased facility of communication between the two countries in recent times which has made mutual linguistic influence possible to an extent formerly undreamt-of. But in the case of the Romanic languages both of the conditions mentioned were operating: during the centuries in which they were framed and underwent the strongest differentiation, wars with the intruding ‘barbarians’ and a series of destructive plagues kept away or killed a great many grown-up people, and at the same time each country released itself from the centralizing influence of Rome, which in the first centuries of the Christian era had been very powerful in keeping up a fairly uniform and conservative pronunciation and phraseology throughout the whole Empire.[56] There were thus at that time various forces at work which, taken together, are quite sufficient to explain the wide[261] divergence in linguistic structure that separated French, Provençal, Spanish, etc., from classical Latin (cf. above, XI § 8, p. 206).
If we find a particular time especially rich in language changes (phonetic, morphological, semantic, or all of them), it makes sense to examine the social conditions of the community during that period in order to identify any specific factors that might have contributed. I'm thinking specifically of two types of conditions that could be at play. First, the influence of parents and adults may be less significant than usual because a large number might be away due to prolonged wars or may have died off during major plagues; consider also what was mentioned earlier about children being left to fend for themselves in certain favored areas of North America (Ch. X § 7). Second, there could be times when the usual constraints on language change feel less stringent because the entire community is driven by a strong sense of independence and wants to break free from various social ties, including powerful educational institutions or literary traditions. This likely happened in North America during the late eighteenth century when the new nation wanted to express its independence from England and, among other things, was inclined to reject respect for linguistic authority, which typically promotes conservatism. If the differences between American and British English aren't as significant as they could be, it's probably partly due to the ongoing influx of immigrants from the old country and partly because of the improved communication between the two nations in recent years, which has made mutual linguistic influence possible to an unprecedented extent. In the case of the Romance languages, both of the mentioned conditions were in play: during the centuries in which they developed and experienced the greatest differentiation, wars with invading 'barbarians' and a series of devastating plagues displaced or killed many adults, while at the same time, each country was freeing itself from Rome's centralizing influence, which had been very effective in maintaining a relatively uniform and conservative pronunciation and phraseology across the Empire during the early centuries of the Christian era.[56] Thus, at that point, various forces were at work that together can sufficiently explain the significant differences in linguistic structure that separated French, Provençal, Spanish, etc., from classical Latin (cf. above, XI § 8, p. 206).
In the history of English, one of the periods most fertile in change is the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries: the wars with France, the Black Death (which is said to have killed off about one-third of the population) and similar pestilences, insurrections like those of Wat Tyler and Jack Cade, civil wars like those of the Roses, decimated the men and made home-life difficult and unsettled. In the Scandinavian languages the Viking age is probably the period that witnessed the greatest linguistic changes—if I am right, not, as has sometimes been said, on account of the heroic character of the period and the violent rise in self-respect or self-assertion, but for the more prosaic reason that the men were absent and the women had other things to attend to than their children’s linguistic education. I am also inclined to think that the unparalleled rapidity with which, during the last hundred years, the vulgar speech of English cities has been differentiated from the language of the educated classes (nearly all long vowels being shifted, etc.) finds its natural explanation in the unexampled misery of child-life among industrial workers in the first half of the last century—one of the most disgraceful blots on our overpraised civilization.
In the history of English, one of the most transformative periods was the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. The wars with France, the Black Death (which is estimated to have wiped out about one-third of the population), various pestilences, uprisings like those of Wat Tyler and Jack Cade, and civil wars such as the Wars of the Roses caused significant loss of life and made family life challenging and unstable. In the Scandinavian languages, the Viking Age likely saw the most significant linguistic changes—likely not due to the era's heroic nature and the dramatic rise in self-esteem or self-assertion, as has sometimes been suggested, but rather because the men were away, and the women had to focus more on other responsibilities than on their children’s language education. I also believe that the unprecedented speed at which, over the past hundred years, the everyday speech of English cities has diverged from the language of the educated classes (with nearly all long vowels being altered, etc.) can be explained by the extraordinary suffering of children's lives among industrial workers in the first half of the last century—one of the most shameful stains on our overly praised civilization.
XIV.—§ 6. The Ease Theory.
If we now turn to the actuating principles that determine the general changeability of human speech habits, we shall find that the moving power everywhere is an impetus starting from the individual, and that there is a curbing power in the mere fact that language exists not for the individual alone, but for the whole community. The whole history of language is, as it were, a tug-of-war between these two principles, each of which gains victories in turn.
If we now look at the driving forces that shape the way people change their speech habits, we’ll find that the motivation always comes from the individual, while there’s a limiting factor in the simple truth that language isn't just for one person; it’s for the entire community. The entire history of language is like a tug-of-war between these two forces, with each one winning at different times.
First of all we must make up our minds with regard to the disputed question whether the changes of language go in the direction of greater ease, in other words, whether they manifest a tendency towards economy of effort. The prevalent opinion among the older school was that the chief tendency was, in Whitney’s words, “to make things easy to our organs of speech, to economize time and effort in the work of expression” (L 28). Curtius very emphatically states that “Bequemlichkeit ist und bleibt der hauptanlass des lautwandels unter allen umständen” (Griech. etym. 23; cf. C 7). But Leskien, Sievers, and since them other recent writers, hold the opposite view (see quotations and summaries in Oertel 204 f., Wechssler L 88 f.), and their view has[262] prevailed to the extent that Sütterlin (WW 33) characterizes the old view as “empty talk,” “a wrong scent,” and “worthless subterfuges now rejected by our science.”
First, we need to decide on the ongoing debate about whether changes in language actually make things easier, meaning whether they show a trend towards saving effort. The common belief among the older scholars was that the main tendency was, as Whitney said, “to make things easy for our speech organs, to save time and effort in expressing ourselves” (L 28). Curtius strongly asserts that “convenience is and remains the main reason for sound change under all circumstances” (Griech. etym. 23; cf. C 7). However, Leskien, Sievers, and other modern scholars take the opposite stance (see quotes and summaries in Oertel 204 f., Wechssler L 88 f.), and their perspective has[262] become dominant to the extent that Sütterlin (WW 33) calls the old view “nonsense,” “a misguided direction,” and “useless excuses now dismissed by our science.”
Such strong words may, however, be out of place, for is it so very foolish to think that men in this, as in all other respects, tend to follow ‘the line of least resistance’ and to get off with as little exertion as possible? The question is only whether this universal tendency can be shown to prevail in those phonetic changes which are dealt with in linguistic history.
Such strong words might be out of place, because is it really so foolish to think that people, in this aspect as in many others, often take "the path of least resistance" and try to do the bare minimum? The real question is whether this common tendency can be seen in the phonetic changes discussed in linguistic history.
Sütterlin thinks it enough to mention some sound changes in which the new sound is more difficult than the old; these being admitted, he concludes (and others have said the same thing) that those other instances in which the new sound is evidently easier than the old one cannot be explained by the principle of ease. But it seems clear that this conclusion is not valid: the correct inference can only be that the tendency towards ease may be at work in some cases, though not in all, because there are other forces which may at times neutralize it or prove stronger than it. We shall meet a similar all-or-nothing fallacy in the chapter on Sound Symbolism.
Sütterlin believes it's sufficient to point out some sound changes where the new sound is tougher to pronounce than the old one. Having acknowledged this, he concludes (and others have said the same) that the situations where the new sound is clearly easier than the old cannot be explained by the principle of ease. However, it's evident that this conclusion is flawed: the correct inference is that the tendency toward ease may apply in some cases, but not all, since there are other influences that can sometimes neutralize it or be more powerful. We will encounter a similar all-or-nothing fallacy in the chapter on Sound Symbolism.
Now, it is sometimes said that natives do not feel any difficulty in the sounds of their own language, however difficult these may be to foreigners. This is quite true if we speak of a conscious perception of this or that sound being difficult to produce; but it is no less true that the act of speaking always requires some exertion, muscular as well as psychical, on the part of the speaker, and that he is therefore apt on many occasions to speak with as little effort as possible, often with the result that his voice is not loud enough, or that his words become indistinct if he does not move his tongue, lips, etc., with the required precision or force. You may as well say that when once one has learnt the art of writing, it is no longer any effort to form one’s letters properly; and yet how many written communications do we not receive in which many of the letters are formed so badly that we can do little but guess from the context what each form is meant for! There can be no doubt that the main direction of change in the development of our written alphabet has been towards forms requiring less and less exertion—and similar causes have led to analogous results in the development of spoken sounds.
It's often said that native speakers don't find any difficulty in the sounds of their own language, no matter how challenging they may be for outsiders. This is true if we consider a **conscious** awareness of specific sounds being hard to produce; however, it's also true that speaking always demands some effort, both muscular and mental, from the speaker. As a result, people often tend to speak with minimal effort, which can lead to their voices being too quiet or their words becoming unclear if they don't use their tongue, lips, and so on with the necessary precision or strength. You might as well say that once someone learns how to write, it takes no effort to form letters correctly; yet, we frequently receive written messages where many letters are so poorly formed that we can only guess their meaning from the context! There's no doubt that the main trend in the development of our written alphabet has been toward forms that require less and less effort—and similar factors have brought about similar changes in the development of spoken sounds.
It is not always easy to decide which of two articulations is the easier one, and opinions may in some instances differ—we may also find in two neighbouring nations opposite phonetic developments, each of which may perhaps be asserted by speakers of the language to be in the direction of greater ease. “To judge of the difficulty of muscular activity, the muscular quantity at play[263] cannot serve as an absolute measure. Is [d] absolutely more awkward to produce than [ð]? When a man is running full tilt, it is under certain circumstances easier for him to rush against the wall than to stop suddenly at some distance from it: when the tongue is in motion, it may be easier for it to thrust itself against the roof of the mouth or the teeth, i.e. to form a stop (a plosive), than to halt at a millimetre’s distance, i.e. to form a fricative” (Verner 78). In the same sense I wrote in 1904: “Many an articulation which obviously requires greater muscular movements is yet easier of execution than another in which the movement is less, but has to be carried out with greater precision: it requires less effort to chip wood than to operate for cataract” (PhG 181).
Deciding which of two sounds is easier to produce isn't always straightforward, and opinions can vary; we might also observe two neighboring countries with completely different phonetic changes, each of which might be considered easier by native speakers. “To evaluate the difficulty of muscle movements, the amount of muscle involved[263] can’t be a definitive measure. Is [d] really harder to say than [ð]? When someone is sprinting, it can sometimes be easier for them to crash into a wall than to stop abruptly a little distance away: when the tongue is moving, it might be simpler for it to push against the roof of the mouth or the teeth—creating a stop (a plosive)—rather than stopping just a millimeter short, which would create a fricative” (Verner 78). I also stated in 1904: “Many sounds that clearly require larger muscle movements are actually easier to produce than others where the movement is smaller but has to be done with much more precision: it’s easier to carve wood than to perform cataract surgery” (PhG 181).
In other cases, however, no such doubt is possible: [s], [f] or [x] require more muscular exertion than [h], and a replacement of one of them by [h] therefore necessarily means a lessening of effort. Now, I am firmly convinced that whenever a phonologist finds one of these oral fricatives standing regularly in one language against [h] in another, he will at once take the former sound to be the original and [h] to be the derived sound: an indisputable indication that the instinctive feeling of all linguists is still in favour of the view that a movement towards the easier sound is the rule, and not the exception.
In other cases, though, there’s no doubt: sounds like [s], [f], or [x] require more muscle effort than [h], so replacing one of them with [h] definitely means less effort. I’m convinced that whenever a phonologist sees one of these oral fricatives consistently appearing in one language instead of [h] in another, they’ll immediately consider the former sound to be the original and [h] to be a derived sound. This clearly shows that the instinctive feeling of all linguists still supports the idea that moving towards the easier sound is the standard, not the exception.
In thus taking up the cudgels for the ease theory I am not afraid of hearing the objection that I ascribe too great power to human laziness, indolence, inertia, shirking, easygoingness, sloth, sluggishness, lack of energy, or whatever other beautiful synonyms have been invented for ‘economy of effort’ or ‘following the line of least resistance.’ The fact remains that there is such a ‘tendency’ in all human beings, and by taking it into account in explaining changes of sound we are doing nothing else than applying here the same principle that attributes many simplifications of form to ‘analogy’: we see the same psychological force at work in the two different domains of phonetics and morphology.
By defending the ease theory, I'm not worried about the criticism that I give too much credit to human laziness, idleness, inertia, avoidance, casualness, sloth, sluggishness, or whatever other nice terms have been created for ‘economy of effort’ or ‘taking the easiest path.’ The truth is that there is such a ‘tendency’ in all people, and by considering this in explaining changes in sound, we're simply applying the same principle that relates many simplifications of form to ‘analogy’: we see the same psychological force at play in the different areas of phonetics and morphology.
It is, of course, no serious objection to this view that if this had been always the direction of change, speaking must have been uncommonly troublesome to our earliest ancestors[57]—who says it wasn’t?—or that “if certain combinations were really irksome in themselves, why should they have been attempted at all; why should they often have been maintained so long?” (Oertel 204)—as if people at a remote age had been able to compare consciously two articulations and to choose the easier one![264] Neither in language nor in any other activity has mankind at once hit upon the best or easiest expedients.
It’s certainly not a serious criticism of this perspective to say that if this had always been the way things changed, speaking must have been extremely difficult for our earliest ancestors[57]—who’s to say it wasn’t?—or to question “if certain combinations were really bothersome on their own, why were they ever attempted; why were they often kept up for so long?” (Oertel 204)—as if people from a long time ago could consciously compare two ways of speaking and simply choose the easier one![264] Humanity hasn’t always figured out the best or easiest methods in language or any other activity right away.
XIV.—§ 7. Sounds in Connected Speech.
In the great majority of linguistic changes we have to consider the ease or difficulty, not of the isolated sound, but of the sound in that particular conjunction with other sounds in which it occurs in words.[58] Thus in the numerous phenomena comprised under the name of assimilation. There is an interesting account in the Proceedings of the Philological Society (December 17, 1886) of a discussion of these problems, in which Sweet, while maintaining that “cases of saving of effort were very rare or non-existent” and that “all the ordinary sounds of language were about on a par as to difficulty of production,” said that assimilation “sprang from the desire to save space in articulation and secure ease of transition. Thus pn became pm, or else mn.” But in both these changes there is saving of effort, for in the former the movement of the tip of the tongue required for [n], and in the latter the movement of the soft palate required for [p], is done away with[59]: the term “saving of space” can have no other meaning than economy of muscular energy. And the same is true of what Sweet terms “saving of time,” which he finds effected by dropping superfluous sounds, especially at the end of words, e.g. [g] after [ŋ] in E. sing. Here, of course, one articulation (of the velum) is saved and this need not even be accompanied by the saving of any time, for in such cases the remaining sound is often lengthened so as to make up for the loss.[60]
In most cases of language change, we need to consider how easy or difficult a sound is, not just on its own, but in the specific combination with other sounds that it appears with in words.[58] This is evident in the many phenomena grouped under the term assimilation. An interesting discussion of these issues took place in the Proceedings of the Philological Society (December 17, 1886), where Sweet argued that “instances of effort-saving were very rare or didn't exist” and that “all the common sounds in language had a similar level of difficulty in production.” He noted that assimilation “arose from the desire to save space in speaking and ensure smooth transitions.” For example, pn turned into pm, or mn instead. In both of these changes, effort is saved, because in the first case, the tongue tip movement needed for [n] is eliminated, and in the second, the soft palate movement for [p] is also removed.[59] The phrase “saving of space” can only mean conserving muscular energy. The same applies to what Sweet calls “saving of time,” which he identifies as occurring when unnecessary sounds are dropped, particularly at the end of words, such as [g] after [ŋ] in E. sing. In this instance, one articulation (of the velum) is skipped, which might not even lead to a time savings, since the remaining sound is often elongated to compensate for the omitted one.[60]
If, then, all assimilations are to be counted as instances of saving of effort, it is worth noting that a great many phonetic[265] changes which are not always given under the heading of assimilation should really be looked upon as such. If Lat. saponem yields Fr. savon, this is the result of a whole series of assimilations: first [p] becomes [b], because the vocal vibrations continue from the vowel before to the vowel after the consonant, the opening of the glottis being thus saved; then the transition of [b] to [v] between vowels may be considered a partial assimilation to the open lip position of the vowels; the vowel [o] is nasalized in consequence of an assimilation to the nasal [n] (anticipation of the low position of the velum), and the subsequent dropping of the consonant [n] is a clear case of a different kind of assimilation (saving of a tip movement); at an early stage the two final sounds of saponem had disappeared, first [m] and later the indistinct vowel resulting from e: whether we reckon these disappearances as assimilations or not, at any rate they constitute a saving of effort. All droppings of sounds, whether consonants (as t in E. castle, postman, etc.) or vowels (as in E. p’rhaps, bus’ness, etc.), are to be viewed in the same light, and thus by their enormous number in the history of all languages form a strong argument in favour of the ease theory.
If all assimilations are considered as examples of saving effort, it's important to acknowledge that many phonetic changes, which are not always classified as assimilation, should actually be seen that way. For instance, Latin saponem transforms into French savon, and this happens due to a series of assimilations: initially, [p] changes to [b] because the vocal vibrations carry over from the vowel before to the vowel after the consonant, saving the opening of the glottis; then, the shift from [b] to [v] between vowels can be seen as a partial assimilation to the open lip position of the vowels; the vowel [o] becomes nasalized due to its assimilation to the nasal [n] (anticipating the lowered position of the velum), and the subsequent loss of the consonant [n] is a clear example of a different kind of assimilation (saving a tongue movement); at an earlier stage, the final sounds of saponem had vanished, first [m] and later the indistinct vowel resulting from e: whether we consider these losses as assimilations or not, they still represent a saving of effort. All losses of sounds, whether consonants (like t in English castle, postman, etc.) or vowels (like in English p’rhaps, bus’ness, etc.), should be viewed similarly, and their vast occurrence throughout the history of all languages provides strong support for the ease theory.
There is one more thing to be considered which is generally overlooked. In such assimilations as It. otto, sette, from octo, septem, a greater ease is effected not only by the assimilation as such, by which one of the consonants is dropped—for that would have been obtained just as well if the result had been occo, seppe—but also by the fact that it is the tip action which has been retained in both cases, for the tip of the tongue is much more flexible and more easily moved than either the lips or the back of the tongue. On the whole, many sound changes show how the tip is favoured at the cost of other organs, thus in the frequent transition of final -m to -n, found, for instance, in old Gothonic, in Middle English, in ancient Greek, in Balto-Slavic, in Finnish and in Chinese.
There’s one more thing to consider that is usually overlooked. In cases like It. otto, sette, from octo, septem, the assimilation process makes things easier not just because one of the consonants is dropped—this could have happened just as easily if the result had been occo, seppe—but also because the tip action has been kept in both cases. The tip of the tongue is much more flexible and easier to move than the lips or the back of the tongue. Overall, many sound changes show that the tip is preferred at the expense of other parts, as seen in the frequent change from final -m to -n, which appears in old Gothonic, Middle English, ancient Greek, Balto-Slavic, Finnish, and Chinese.
In the discussion referred to above Sweet was seconded by Lecky, who said that “assimilations vastly multiplied the number of elementary sounds in a language, and therefore could not be described as facilitating pronunciation.” This is a great exaggeration, for in the vast majority of instances assimilation introduces no new sounds at all (see, for instance, the lists in my LPh ch. xi.). Lecky was probably thinking of such instances as when [k, g] before front vowels become [tʃ, dʒ] or similar combinations, or when mutation caused by [i] changes [u, o] into [y, ø], which sounds were not previously found in the language. Here we might perhaps say that those individuals who for the sake of their own ease introduced new sounds made things more difficult for coming[266] generations (though even that is not quite certain), and the case would then be analogous to that of a man who has learnt a foreign expression for a new idea and then introduces it into his own language, thus burdening his countrymen with a new word instead of thinking how the same idea might have been rendered by means of native speech-material—in both cases a momentary alleviation is obtained at the cost of a permanent disadvantage, but neither case can be alleged against the view that the prevalent tendency among human beings is to prefer the easiest and shortest cut.
In the discussion mentioned earlier, Sweet was supported by Lecky, who stated that “assimilations greatly increased the number of basic sounds in a language and therefore could not be seen as making pronunciation easier.” This is a significant exaggeration, because in most cases, assimilation doesn’t introduce any new sounds at all (see, for example, the lists in my LPh ch. xi.). Lecky was likely thinking of situations where [k, g] before front vowels become [tʃ, dʒ] or similar combinations, or where the mutation caused by [i] changes [u, o] into [y, ø], which sounds weren’t previously in the language. Here, we might say that those individuals who introduced new sounds for their own convenience made things more challenging for future generations (though even that isn’t entirely certain), and this would resemble the case of someone who learns a foreign term for a new concept and then uses it in their own language, thus burdening their fellow countrymen with a new word instead of considering how the same idea might have been expressed using their native language— in both cases, a brief relief is gained at the expense of a lasting disadvantage, but neither scenario can be used to argue against the idea that the general tendency among humans is to prefer the easiest and quickest method.
XIV.—§ 8. Extreme Weakenings.
When this lazy tendency is indulged to the full, the result is an indistinct protracted vocal murmur, with here and there possibly one or other sound (most often an s) rising to the surface: think, for instance, of the way in which we often hear grace said, prayers mumbled and other similar formulas muttered inarticulately, with half-closed lips and the least possible movement of the rest of the vocal organs. This is tolerated more or less in cases in which the utterance is hardly meant as a communication to any human being; otherwise it will generally be met with a request to repeat what has been said, the social curb being thus applied to the easygoing tendencies of the individual. Now, as a matter of fact, there are in every language a certain number of word-forms that can only be explained by this very laziness in pronouncing, which in extreme cases leads to complete unintelligibility.
When this lazy habit is fully indulged, the result is a vague, prolonged vocal murmur, with occasional sounds (most often an s) surfacing. For example, think of how we often hear grace said, prayers mumbled, and other similar phrases muttered unclearly, with half-closed lips and minimal movement from the other vocal organs. This is generally tolerated when the speech isn’t really meant to communicate with anyone; otherwise, people will usually ask for clarification, applying social norms to curb the individual’s tendency to be laid-back. In fact, every language has a certain number of word forms that can only be explained by this laziness in pronunciation, which, in extreme cases, can lead to complete unintelligibility.
Russian sudar’ (gosudar’), ‘sir,’ is colloquially shortened into a mere s, which may in subservient speech be added to almost any word as a meaningless enclitic. And curiously enough the same sound is used in exactly the same way in conversational Spanish, as buenos for bueno ‘good,’ only here it is a weakening of señor (Hanssen, Span. gramm. 60): thus two entirely different words, from identical psychological motives, yield the same result in two distant countries. Fr. monsieur, instead of [mɔ̃sjœ·r], as might be expected, sounds [mɔsjø] and extremely frequently [msjø] and even [psjø], with a transition not otherwise found in French. Madame before a name is very often shortened into [mam]; in English the same word becomes a single sound in yes’m. The weakening of mistress into miss and the old-fashioned mas for master also belong here, as do It. forms for signore, signora: gnor si, gnor no, gnora si, sor Luigi, la sora sposa, and Sp. usted ‘you’ for vuestra merced. Formulas of greeting and of politeness are liable to similar truncations, e.g. E. how d(e) do, Dan. [gda’] or even [da’] for goddag, G. [gmɔ̃in, gmɔ̃] for guten morgen, [na·mt][267] for guten abend; Fr. s’il vous plaît often becomes [siuplɛ, splɛ], and the synonymous Dan. vær så god is shortened into værsgo, of which often only [sgo’] remains. In Russian popular speech some small words are frequently inserted as a vague indication that the utterance or idea belongs to some one else: griu, grit, grim, gril, various mutilated forms of the verb govorit’ ‘say,’ mol from molvit’ ‘speak,’ de from dejati (Boyer et Speranski, Manuel 293 ff.); cp. the obsolete E. co, quo, for quoth. In all the Balkan languages a particle vre is extensively used, which Hatzidakis has explained from the vocative of OGr. mōrós. Modern Gr. thà is now a particle of futurity, but originates in thená, from thélei, ‘he will’ + nà from hína, ‘that.’ These examples must suffice to show that we have here to do with a universal tendency in all languages.
Russian sudar’ (gosudar’), meaning ‘sir,’ is often casually shortened to just s, which can be stuck onto almost any word in a subservient way as a meaningless addition. Interestingly, this same sound is used in the same manner in conversational Spanish, as buenos for bueno, where it weakens from señor (Hanssen, Span. gramm. 60): thus, two completely different words, driven by similar psychological needs, create the same outcome in two distant countries. French monsieur, instead of being pronounced [mɔ̃sjœ·r] as expected, sounds like [mɔsjø] and very frequently [msjø] and even [psjø], with a transition not typically found in French. Madame before a name is often shortened to [mam]; in English, the same word becomes a single sound in yes’m. The change of mistress to miss and the old-fashioned mas for master also fit here, as well as Italian forms for signore, signora: gnor si, gnor no, gnora si, sor Luigi, la sora sposa, and Spanish usted for vuestra merced. Greetings and polite expressions often undergo similar shortening, e.g. English how d(e) do, Danish [gda’] or even [da’] for goddag, German [gmɔ̃in, gmɔ̃] for guten morgen, [na·mt][267] for guten abend; French s’il vous plaît frequently becomes [siuplɛ, splɛ], and the equivalent Danish vær så god gets shortened to værsgo, often just leaving [sgo’]. In Russian colloquial speech, some small words are commonly added to vaguely indicate that the statement or idea belongs to someone else: griu, grit, grim, gril, various distorted forms of the verb govorit’ ‘say,’ mol from molvit’ ‘speak,’ de from dejati (Boyer et Speranski, Manuel 293 ff.); compare with the obsolete English co, quo, for quoth. In all the Balkan languages, a particle vre is widely used, which Hatzidakis explained comes from the vocative of OGr. mōrós. Modern Greek thà is now a future tense particle but originates from thená, from thélei, ‘he will’ + nà from hína, ‘that.’ These examples should suffice to demonstrate that this is a universal tendency across all languages.
XIV.—§ 9. The Principle of Value.
To explain such deviations from normal phonetic development some scholars have assumed that a word or form in frequent use is liable to suffer exceptional treatment. Thus Vilhelm Thomsen, in his brilliant paper (1879) on the Romanic verb andare, andar, anar, aller, which he explains convincingly from Lat. ambulare, says that this verb “belongs to a group of words which in all languages stand as it were without the pale of the laws, that is, words which from their frequent employment are exposed to far more violent changes than other words, and therefore to some extent follow paths of their own.”[61] Schuchardt (Ueber die lautgesetze, 1885) turned upon the ‘young grammarians,’ Paul among the rest, who did not recognize this principle, and said that one word (or one sound) may need 10,000 repetitions in order to be changed into another one, and that consequently another word, which in the same time is used only 8,000 times, must be behindhand in its phonetic development. Quite apart from the fact that this number is evidently too small (for a moderately loquacious woman will easily pronounce such a word as he half a dozen times as often as these figures every year), it is obvious that the reasoning must be wrong, for were frequency the only decisive factor, G. morgen would have been treated in every other connexion exactly as it is in guten morgen, and that is just what has not happened. Frequency of repetition would in itself tend to render the habitude firmly rooted, thus really capable of resisting change, rather than the opposite; and instead of the purely mechanical explanation from the number of times a word is repeated, we must look for[268] a more psychological explanation. This naturally must be found in the ease with which a word is understood in the given connexion or situation, and especially in its worthlessness for the purpose of communication. Worthlessness, however, is not the moving power, but merely the reason why less restraint than usual is imposed on the ever-present inclination of speakers to minimize effort. A parallel from another, though cognate, sphere of human activity may perhaps bring out my point of view more clearly. The taking off of one’s hat, combined with a low bow, served from the first to mark a more or less servile submissiveness to a prince or conqueror; then the gesture was gradually weakened, and a slight raising of the hat came to be a polite greeting even between equals; this is reduced to a mere touching of the hat or cap, and among friends the slightest movement of the hand in the direction of the hat is thought a sufficient greeting. When, however, it is important to indicate deference, the full ceremonial gesture is still used (though not to the same extent by all nations); otherwise no value is attached to it, and the inclination to spare oneself all unnecessary exertion has caused it to dwindle down to the slightest muscular action possible.
To explain these deviations from normal phonetic development, some scholars believe that a word or form that is frequently used is likely to undergo exceptional changes. For instance, Vilhelm Thomsen, in his insightful paper (1879) on the Romanic verb andare, andar, anar, aller, which he convincingly traces back to Lat. ambulare, states that this verb “belongs to a group of words that, in all languages, seem to be outside the rules, meaning that words which are used frequently are subjected to much more significant changes than other words, and thus tend to follow their own paths.”[61] Schuchardt (Ueber die lautgesetze, 1885) criticized the ‘young grammarians,’ including Paul, for failing to recognize this principle, arguing that one word (or one sound) might require 10,000 repetitions to be transformed into another, while another word used only 8,000 times would lag behind in its phonetic development. Beyond the fact that this number seems too low (since a moderately talkative woman can easily say a word like he several times more than this every year), it’s clear that this reasoning is flawed. If frequency were the only determining factor, G. morgen would have been treated in every other context just like it is in guten morgen, which is exactly what has not occurred. Repeating a word many times would actually tend to make its use more established, thus making it resistant to change rather than the opposite; and instead of a purely mechanical explanation based on how often a word is repeated, we need to look for[268] a psychological explanation. This should focus on how easily a word is understood in a given context or situation, and especially on its lack of utility for communication. However, this lack of utility isn’t the driving force; it merely explains why there’s less restraint than usual on the constant tendency of speakers to minimize effort. A comparison from another related area of human behavior might illustrate my point more clearly. The act of removing one’s hat, accompanied by a bow, originally signified a degree of servile submission to a prince or conqueror; over time, this gesture softened, and a slight raising of the hat became a polite greeting even among equals; this has reduced to just a brief touch of the hat or cap, and among friends, the slightest hand movement towards the hat suffices as a greeting. However, when it’s important to show respect, the full formal gesture is still performed (though not uniformly across all cultures); otherwise, it holds no significance, and the desire to avoid unnecessary effort has led to it diminishing to the least muscular action possible.
The above instances of the truncation of everyday formulas, etc., illustrate the length to which the ease principle can be carried when a word has little significatory value and the intention of the speaker can therefore be vaguely, but sufficiently, understood if the proper sound is merely suggested or hinted at. But in most words, and even in the words mentioned above, when they are to bear their full meaning, the pronunciation cannot be slurred to the same extent, if the speaker is to make himself understood. It is consequently his interest to pronounce more carefully, and this means greater conservatism and slower phonetic development on the whole.
The examples above of shortening everyday phrases show how far the principle of ease can go when a word doesn’t carry much meaning and the speaker's intention can be understood even if the word is just suggested. However, for most words, and even for the ones mentioned, to convey their full meaning, the pronunciation can't be rushed the same way if the speaker wants to communicate clearly. Therefore, it's in the speaker's best interest to pronounce words more carefully, which leads to more conservatism and slower phonetic change overall.
There are naturally many degrees of relative value or worthlessness, and words may vary accordingly. An illustration may be taken from my own mother-tongue: the two words rigtig nok, literally ‘correct enough,’ are pronounced ['recti 'nɔk] or ['regdi 'nɔk] when keeping their full signification, but when they are reduced to an adverb with the same import as the weakened English certainly or (it is) true (that), there are various shortened pronunciations in frequent use: ['rectnɔg, 'regdnɔg, 'regnɔg, 'renɔg, 'renəg]. The worthlessness may affect a whole phrase, a word, or merely one syllable or sound.
There are naturally many levels of relative value or worthlessness, and the words may change accordingly. An example can be taken from my own language: the two words rigtig nok, which literally mean ‘correct enough,’ are pronounced ['recti 'nɔk] or ['regdi 'nɔk] when keeping their full meaning, but when they are simplified to an adverb with the same meaning as the weakened English certainly or (it is) true (that), there are various shortened pronunciations commonly used: ['rectnɔg, 'regdnɔg, 'regnɔg, 'renɔg, 'renəg]. The worthlessness can affect an entire phrase, a single word, or just one syllable or sound.
XIV.—§ 10. Application to Case System, etc.
Our principle is important in many domains of linguistic history. If it is asked why the elaborate Old English system of[269] cases and genders has gradually disappeared, an answer that will meet with the approval of most linguists of the ordinary school is (in the words of J. A. H. Murray): “The total loss of grammatical gender in English, and the almost complete disappearance of cases, are purely phonetic phenomena”—supplemented, of course, by the recognition of the action of analogy, to which is due, for instance, the levelling of the nom. and dative plural OE. stanas and stanum under the single form stones. The main explanation thus is the following: a phonetic law, operating without regard to the signification, caused the OE. unstressed vowels -a, -e, -u to become merged in an obscure -e in Middle English; as these endings were very often distinctive of cases, the Old English cases were consequently lost. Another phonetic law was operating similarly by causing the loss of final -n, which also played an important rôle in the old case system. And in this way phonetic laws and analogy have between them made a clean sweep of it, and we need look nowhere else for an explanation of the decay of the old declensions.
Our principle is significant in many areas of linguistic history. If someone asks why the complex Old English system of[269] cases and genders has gradually vanished, a common answer that would be accepted by most linguists is (in the words of J. A. H. Murray): “The total loss of grammatical gender in English, and the almost complete disappearance of cases, are purely phonetic phenomena”—additionally acknowledged by the influence of analogy, which explains, for example, the leveling of the nominative and dative plural Old English stanas and stanum into the single form stones. The main explanation is simple: a phonetic law, working regardless of meaning, caused the Old English unstressed vowels -a, -e, -u to merge into an indistinct -e in Middle English; since these endings were often key in determining cases, the Old English cases consequently disappeared. Another phonetic law similarly caused the loss of final -n, which also played an important role in the old case system. In this way, phonetic laws and analogy together have completely eliminated the old declensions, and we don’t need to look elsewhere for an explanation of their decline.
Here I beg to differ: a ‘phonetic law’ is not an explanation, but something to be explained; it is nothing else but a mere statement of facts, a formula of correspondence, which says nothing about the cause of change, and we are therefore justified if we try to dig deeper and penetrate to the real psychology of speech. Now, let us for a moment suppose that each of the terminations -a, -e, -u bore in Old English its own distinctive and sharply defined meaning, which was necessary to the right understanding of the sentences in which the terminations occurred (something like the endings found in artificial languages like Ido). Would there in that case be any probability that a phonetic law tending to their levelling could ever have succeeded in establishing itself? Most certainly not; the all-important regard for intelligibility would have been sure to counteract any inclination towards a slurred pronunciation of the endings. Nor would there have been any occasion for new formations by analogy, as the formations were already sufficiently analogous. But such a regularity was very far from prevailing in Old English, as will be particularly clear from the tabulation of the declensions as printed in my Chapters on English, p. 10 ff.: it makes the whole question of causality appear in a much clearer light than would be possible by any other arrangement of the grammatical facts: the cause of the decay of the Old English apparatus of declensions lay in its manifold incongruities. The same termination did not always denote the same thing: -u might be the nom. sg. masc. (sunu) or fem. (duru), or the acc. or the dat., or the nom. or acc. pl. neuter (hofu); -a might be the nom. sg. masc. (guma), or the dat. sg. masc. (suna),[270] or the gen. sg. fem. (dura), or the nom. pl. masc. or fem., or finally the gen. pl.; -an might be the acc. or dat. or gen. sg. or the nom. or acc. pl., etc. If we look at it from the point of view of function, we get the same picture; the nom. pl., for instance, might be denoted by the endings -as, -an, -a, -e, -u, or by mutation without ending, or by the unchanged kernel; the dat. sg. by -e, -an, -re, -um, by mutation, or the unchanged kernel. The whole is one jumble of inconsistency, for many relations plainly distinguished from each other in one class of words were but imperfectly, if at all, distinguishable in another class. Add to this that the names used above, dative, accusative, etc., have no clear and definite meaning in the case of Old English, any more than in the case of kindred tongues; sometimes it did not matter which of two or more cases the speaker chose to employ: some verbs took indifferently now one, now another case, and the same is to some extent true with regard to prepositions. No wonder, therefore, that speakers would often hesitate which of two vowels to use in the ending, and would tend to indulge in the universal inclination to pronounce weak syllables indistinctly and thus confuse the formerly distinct vowels a, i, e, u into the one neutral vowel [ə], which might even be left out without detriment to the clear understanding of each sentence.[62] The only endings that were capable of withstanding this general rout were the two in s, -as for the plural and -es for the gen. sg.; here the consonant was in itself more solid, as it were, than the other consonants used in case endings (n, m), and, which is more decisive, each of these terminations was confined to a more sharply limited sphere of use than the other endings, and the functions for which they served, that of the plural and that of the genitive, are among the most indispensable ones for clearness of thought. Hence we see that these endings from the earliest period of the English language tend to be applied to other classes of nouns than those to which they were at first confined (-as to masc. o stems ...), so as to be at last used with practically all nouns.
Here I have a different opinion: a ‘phonetic law’ is not an explanation but something that needs explaining; it’s just a statement of facts, a formula of correspondence that doesn’t say anything about the cause of change. Thus, we have every right to dig deeper and explore the real psychology behind speech. Now, let’s assume for a moment that each of the endings -a, -e, -u in Old English had its own distinct and clearly defined meaning, which was essential for properly understanding the sentences where these endings appeared (similar to the endings found in artificial languages like Ido). Would there be any chance that a phonetic law aiming to level them out could have succeeded in establishing itself? Absolutely not; the crucial focus on intelligibility would surely have countered any tendency toward a slurred pronunciation of the endings. There wouldn’t have been any need for new formations by analogy since the existing formations were already sufficiently analogous. However, such regularity was far from being the case in Old English, as becomes clear from the table of declensions presented in my Chapters on English, p. 10 ff.: it sheds much clearer light on the question of causality than any other arrangement of grammatical facts could provide: the cause of the decline of the Old English declension system lay in its many inconsistencies. The same ending didn’t always indicate the same thing: -u could represent the nom. sg. masc. (sunu) or fem. (duru), or the acc. or dat., or the nom. or acc. pl. neuter (hofu); -a could be the nom. sg. masc. (guma), or the dat. sg. masc. (suna),[270] or the gen. sg. fem. (dura), or the nom. pl. masc. or fem., or finally the gen. pl.; -an could be the acc. or dat. or gen. sg. or the nom. or acc. pl., etc. If we view this from a functional perspective, we get the same picture; for example, the nom. pl. could be indicated by the endings -as, -an, -a, -e, -u, or by mutation without an ending, or by using the unchanged kernel; the dat. sg. by -e, -an, -re, -um, by mutation, or the unchanged kernel. The whole situation is a confusing jumble, as many relationships that are clearly distinct in one class of words were only vaguely, if at all, distinguishable in another class. Additionally, the terms used above, dative, accusative, etc., have no clear and definite meaning in Old English, just as in related languages; sometimes it didn’t matter which of two or more cases the speaker decided to use: some verbs could take either one case or another, and the same is somewhat true for prepositions. It’s no surprise, then, that speakers would often be uncertain about which of two vowels to use at the end and would tend to indulge in the common habit of pronouncing weak syllables indistinctly, thus blending the previously distinct vowels a, i, e, u into the single neutral vowel [ə], which could even be omitted without impacting the clear understanding of each sentence.[62] The only endings that managed to withstand this general chaos were the two in s, -as for the plural and -es for the gen. sg.; in these cases, the consonant was inherently more solid than the other consonants used in case endings (n, m), and, what’s more decisive, each of these endings was limited to a more narrowly defined sphere of use than the other endings, and the roles they served, namely the plural and the genitive, are among the most essential for maintaining clarity of thought. Therefore, we see that these endings, from the earliest periods of the English language, started being applied to other classes of nouns than those to which they were initially confined (-as to masc. o stems ...), eventually being used with practically all nouns.
If explanations like Murray’s of the simplification of the English case system are widely accepted, while views like those attempted here will strike most readers of linguistic works as unfamiliar, the reason may, partly at any rate, be the usual arrangement of historical and other grammars. Here we first have chapters on phonology, in which the facts are tabulated,[271] each vowel being dealt with separately, no matter what its function is in the flexional system; then, after all the sounds have been treated in this way, we come to morphology (accidence, formenlehre), in which it is natural to take the phonological facts as granted or already known: these therefore come to be looked upon as primary and morphology as secondary, and no attention is paid to the value of the sounds for the purposes of mutual understanding.
If explanations like Murray’s about simplifying the English case system are widely accepted, while perspectives like the ones presented here seem unfamiliar to most readers of linguistic texts, the reason might be, at least in part, the typical structure of historical and other grammars. First, we have chapters on phonology, where the facts are organized,[271] with each vowel addressed individually, regardless of its role in the flexional system; then, after all the sounds have been covered this way, we move on to morphology (accidence, form theory), where it’s natural to assume the phonological facts are already understood: as a result, these facts are viewed as primary, while morphology is seen as secondary, and there is no focus on the value of the sounds for mutual understanding.
But everyday observations show that sounds have not always the same value. In ordinary conversation one may frequently notice how a proper name or technical term, when first introduced, is pronounced with particular care, while no such pains is taken when it recurs afterwards: the stress becomes weaker, the unstressed vowels more indistinct, and this or that consonant may be dropped. The same principle is shown in all the abbreviations of proper names and of long words in general which have been treated above (Ch IX § 7): here the speaker has felt assured that his hearer has understood what or who he is talking about, as soon as he has pronounced the initial syllable or syllables, and therefore does not take the trouble to pronounce the rest of the word. It has often been pointed out (see, e.g., Curtius K 72) that stem or root syllables are generally better preserved than the rest of the word: the reason can only be that they have greater importance for the understanding of the idea as a whole than other syllables.[63] But it is especially when we come to examine stress phenomena that we discover the full extent of this principle of value.
But everyday observations show that sounds don’t always have the same value. In casual conversation, people often notice how a proper name or technical term, when first mentioned, is pronounced with special care, while no such effort is made when it comes up again: the emphasis becomes lighter, the unstressed vowels more vague, and some consonants might be dropped. The same principle applies to all the abbreviations of proper names and long words we discussed earlier (Ch IX § 7): here the speaker feels confident that the listener understands what or who they are talking about as soon as they say the initial syllable or syllables, so they don't bother to pronounce the rest of the word. It has often been noted (see, for example, Curtius K 72) that root syllables tend to be better preserved than other parts of the word: the reason is likely that they are more crucial for understanding the overall idea than the other syllables.[63] However, it is particularly when we look at stress patterns that we uncover the full extent of this value principle.
XIV.—§ 11. Stress Phenomena.
Stress is generally believed to be dependent exclusively on the force with which the air-current is expelled from the lungs, hence the name of ‘expiratory accent’; but various observations and considerations have led me to give another definition (LPh 7. 32, 1913): stress is energy, intensive muscular activity not[272] of one organ, but of all the speech organs at once. To pronounce a ‘stressed’ syllable all organs are exerted to the utmost. The muscles of the lungs are strongly innervated; the movements of the vocal chords are stronger, leading on the one hand in voiced sounds to a greater approximation of the vocal chords, with less air escaping, but greater amplitude of vibrations and also greater risings or fallings of the tone. In voiceless sounds, on the other hand, the vocal chords are kept at greater distance (than in unstressed syllables) and accordingly allow more air to escape. In the upper organs stress is characterized by marked articulations of the velum palati, of the tongue and of the lips. As a result of all this, stressed syllables are loud, i.e. can be heard at great distance, and distinct, i.e. easy to perceive in all their components. Unstressed syllables, on the contrary, are produced with less exertion in every way: in voiced sounds the distance between the vocal chords is greater, which leads to the peculiar ‘voice of murmur’; but in voiceless sounds the glottis is not opened very wide. In the upper organs we see corresponding slack movements; thus the velum does not shut off the nasal cavity very closely, and the tongue tends towards a neutral position, in which it moves very little either up and down or backwards and forwards. The lips also are moved with less energy, and the final result is dull and indistinct sounds. Now, all this is of the greatest importance in the history of languages.
Stress is commonly thought to be based solely on how forcefully air is pushed out of the lungs, which is why it’s called ‘expiratory accent.’ However, different observations and thoughts have led me to define it differently (LPh 7. 32, 1913): stress is energy, intensive muscle activity involving not just one organ, but all the speech organs at once. To say a ‘stressed’ syllable, all organs are used to the maximum. The muscles in the lungs are highly active; the movements of the vocal cords are stronger. This results in voiced sounds having vocal cords that come closer together, allowing less air to escape but creating bigger vibrations and more noticeable changes in pitch. In voiceless sounds, the vocal cords stay farther apart (than in unstressed syllables), which lets more air escape. In the upper organs, stress is marked by pronounced movements of the palate, tongue, and lips. Because of all this, stressed syllables are loud, meaning they can be heard from a distance, and distinct, meaning their individual parts are easy to identify. In contrast, unstressed syllables are produced with less effort overall: in voiced sounds, the vocal cords are farther apart, leading to a characteristic ‘murmuring voice’; while in voiceless sounds, the glottis isn’t opened very wide. In the upper organs, we see corresponding relaxed movements; thus, the palate doesn’t close off the nasal cavity tightly, and the tongue settles into a neutral position, moving very little up and down or back and forth. The lips also move with less effort, resulting in dull and unclear sounds. All of this is extremely important in the study of languages.
The psychological importance of various elements is the chief, though not the only, factor that determines sentence stress (see, for instance, the chapters on stress in my LPh xiv. and MEG v.). Now, it is well known that sentence stress plays a most important rôle in the historical development of any language; it has determined not only the difference in vowel between [wɔz] and [wəz], both written was, or between the demonstrative [ðæt] and the relative [ðət], both written that, but also that between one and an or a, originally the same word, and between Fr. moi and me, toi and te—one might give innumerable other instances. Value also plays a not unimportant rôle in determining which syllable among several in long words is stressed most, and in some languages it has revolutionized the whole stress system. This happened with old Gothonic, whence in modern German, Scandinavian, and in the native elements of English we have the prevalent stressing of the root syllable, i.e. of that syllable which has the greatest psychological value, as in 'wishes, be'speak, etc.
The psychological significance of various elements is the main, though not the only, factor that decides sentence stress (see, for example, the chapters on stress in my LPh xiv. and MEG v.). It's well known that sentence stress plays a crucial role in the historical development of any language; it has affected not just the difference in vowel sounds between [wɔz] and [wəz], both spelled was, or between the demonstrative [ðæt] and the relative [ðət], both spelled that, but also the distinction between one and an or a, which were originally the same word, and between Fr. moi and me, toi and te—there are countless other examples. Value also plays a significant role in determining which syllable among several in long words receives the most stress, and in some languages, it has completely changed the stress system. This occurred with old Gothonic, from which modern German, Scandinavian, and the native elements of English have the predominant stressing of the root syllable, meaning the syllable with the greatest psychological value, as in 'wishes, be'speak, etc.
Now, it is generally said that if double forms arise like one and an, moi and me, the reason is that the sounds were found under ‘different phonetic conditions’ and therefore developed differently, exactly as the difference between an and a or between Fr. fol[273] and fou is due to the same word being placed in one instance before a word beginning with a vowel and in the other before a consonant, that is to say, in different external conditions. But it won’t do to identify the two things: in the latter case we really have something external or mechanical, and here we may rightly use the expression ‘phonetic condition,’ but the difference between a strongly and a weakly stressed form of the same word depends on something internal, on the very soul of the word. Stress is not what the usual way of marking it in writing and printing might lead us to think—something that hangs outside or above the word—but is at least as important an element of the word as the ‘speech sounds’ which go to make it up. Stress alternation in a sentence cannot consequently be reckoned a ‘phonetic condition’ of the same order as the initial sound of the next word. If we say that the different treatment of the vowel seen in one and an or moi and me is occasioned by varying degrees of stress, we have ‘explained’ the secondary sound change only, but not the primary change, which is that of stress itself, and that change is due to the different significance of the word under varying circumstances, i.e. to its varying value for the purposes of the exchange of ideas. Over and above mechanical principles we have here and elsewhere psychological principles, which no one can disregard with impunity.
Now, it’s commonly said that when double forms arise, like one and an, or moi and me, it’s because the sounds developed differently under ‘different phonetic conditions,’ just like the difference between an and a or between Fr. fol[273] and fou, which is due to the same word being placed before a word starting with a vowel in one case and before a consonant in another, meaning different external conditions. However, we shouldn’t conflate the two situations: in the latter case, we’re dealing with something external or mechanical, and here we can accurately use the term ‘phonetic condition,’ but the difference between a strongly stressed form and a weakly stressed form of the same word relies on something internal, the essence of the word itself. Stress isn’t just something that’s marked on paper or in print, which might give the impression it’s external or above the word; it’s just as crucial to the word as the individual ‘speech sounds’ that compose it. Because of this, stress alternation in a sentence shouldn’t be considered a ‘phonetic condition’ on the same level as the initial sound of the next word. If we say that the different handling of the vowel in one and an or moi and me comes from varying degrees of stress, we’ve only ‘explained’ the secondary sound change but not the primary change, which is the change of stress itself. That change is linked to the different meanings of the word in different contexts, or its changing value for communication. Beyond mechanical principles, we also have psychological principles here and everywhere, which no one can ignore without consequences.
XIV.—§ 12. Non-phonetic Changes.
Considerations of ease play an important part in all departments of language development. It is impossible to draw a sharp line between phonetic and syntactic phenomena. We have what might be termed prosiopesis when the speaker begins, or thinks he begins, to articulate, but produces no audible sound till one or two syllables after the beginning of what he intended to say. This phonetically is ‘aphesis,’ but in many cases leads to the omission of whole words; this may become a regular speech habit, more particularly in the case of certain set phrases, e.g. (Good) morning / (Do you) see? / (Will) that do? / (I shall) see you again this afternoon; Fr. (na)turellement / (Je ne me) rappelle plus, etc.
Considerations of ease play an important role in all areas of language development. It's impossible to draw a clear line between phonetic and syntactic phenomena. We have what could be called prosiopesis when the speaker starts to articulate, or thinks they are, but doesn't produce any audible sound until one or two syllables after the intended beginning of their statement. Phonetically, this is ‘aphesis,’ but in many cases, it leads to the omission of entire words; this can develop into a regular speech habit, especially with certain fixed phrases, e.g. (Good) morning / (Do you) see? / (Will) that do? / (I shall) see you again this afternoon; Fr. (naturally) / (I don't) remember anymore, etc.
On the other hand, we have aposiopesis if the speaker does not finish his sentence, either because he hesitates which word to employ or because he notices that the hearer has already caught his meaning. Hence such syntactic shortenings as at Brown’s (house, or shop, or whatever it may be), which may then be extended to other places in the sentence; the grocer’s was closed / St. Paul’s is very grand, etc. Similar abbreviations due to[274] the natural disinclination to use more circumstantial expressions than are necessary to convey one’s meaning are seen when, instead of my straw hat, one says simply my straw, if it is clear to one’s hearers that one is talking of a hat; thus clay comes to be used for clay pipe, return for return ticket (‘We’d better take returns’) the Haymarket for the Haymarket Theatre, etc. Sometimes these shortenings become so common as to be scarcely any longer felt as such, e.g. rifle, landau, bugle, for rifle gun, landau carriage, bugle horn (further examples MEG ii. 8. 9). In Maupassant (Bel Ami 81) I find the following scrap of conversation which illustrates the same principle in another domain: “Voilà six mois que je suis employé aux bureaux du chemin de fer du Nord.” “Mais comment diable n’as-tu pas trouvé mieux qu’une place d’employé au Nord?”[64]
On the other hand, we have aposiopesis when the speaker doesn’t finish their sentence, either because they hesitate about which word to use or because they realize the listener already understands their meaning. This leads to syntactic shortcuts like at Brown's (house, shop, or whatever it is), which can then be extended to other parts of the sentence; for example, the grocer’s was closed / St. Paul’s is really impressive, etc. Similar abbreviations occur due to the natural tendency to avoid using more elaborate expressions than needed to get one's point across, as seen when someone says my straw instead of my straw hat, assuming the listeners know they are talking about a hat; hence, clay can mean clay pipe, return can stand for return ticket (‘We’d better take returns’), the Haymarket can refer to the Haymarket Theatre, etc. Sometimes these shortenings become so common that they are hardly felt as such anymore, for instance, rifle, landau, bugle have come to mean rifle gun, landau carriage, bugle horn (see further examples in MEG ii. 8. 9). In Maupassant’s (Bel Ami 81), I found this snippet of conversation illustrating the same principle in another context: “It's been six months since I started working at the offices of the Northern Railway..” “But how on earth did you not find something better than a job as an employee up North?”[64]
The tendency to economize effort also manifests itself when the general ending -er is used instead of a more specific expression: sleeper for sleeping-car; bedder at college for bedmaker; speecher, footer, brekker (Harrow) for speech-day, football, breakfast, etc. Thus also when some noun or verb of a vague or general meaning is used because one will not take the trouble to think of the exact expression required, very often thing (sometimes extended thingumbob, cf. Dan. tingest, G. dingsda), Fr. chose, machin (even in place of a personal name); further, the verb do or fix (this especially in America). In some cases this tendency may permanently affect the meaning of a common noun which has to serve so often instead of a specific name that at last it acquires a special signification; thus, corn in England = ‘wheat,’ in Ireland = ‘oats,’ in America = ‘maize,’ deer, orig. ‘animal,’ Fr. herbe, now ‘grass,’ etc. As many people, either from ignorance or from carelessness, are far from being precise in thought and expression—they “Mean not, but blunder round about a meaning”—words come to be applied in senses unknown to former generations, and some of these senses may gradually become fixed and established. In some cases the final result of such want of precision may even be beneficial; thus English at first had no means of expressing futurity in verbs. Then it became more and more customary to say ‘he will come,’ which at first meant ‘he has the will to come,’ to express his future coming apart from his volition—thus, also, ‘it will rain,’ etc. Similarly ‘I shall go,’ which[275] originally meant ‘I am obliged to go,’ was used in a less accurate way, where no obligation was thought of, and thus the language acquired something which is at any rate a makeshift for a future tense of the verb. But considerations of space prevent me from diving too deeply into questions of semantic change.
The tendency to save effort also shows up when the general ending -er is used instead of a more specific term: sleeper for sleeping-car; bedder at college for bedmaker; speecher, footer, brekker (Harrow) for speech-day, football, breakfast, etc. This happens when a noun or verb with a vague or general meaning is used because someone won’t bother to think of the precise term needed; very often thing (sometimes lengthened to thingumbob, cf. Dan. tingest, G. dingsda), Fr. chose, machin (even in place of a personal name); additionally, the verb do or fix (especially in America). In some instances, this tendency may permanently change the meaning of a common noun that is often used instead of a specific name until it acquires a special meaning; for example, corn in England = ‘wheat,’ in Ireland = ‘oats,’ in America = ‘maize,’ deer, originally meaning ‘animal,’ Fr. herbe, now meaning ‘grass,’ etc. Since many people, either out of ignorance or carelessness, are not very precise in thought and expression—they “Mean not, but blunder round about a meaning”—words come to be used in ways that previous generations wouldn’t recognize, and some of these meanings may eventually become fixed and established. In some cases, the final result of this lack of precision may even be helpful; for example, English initially had no way to express futurity in verbs. Then it became more common to say ‘he will come,’ which originally meant ‘he has the will to come,’ to indicate his future arrival apart from his willingness—similarly, ‘it will rain,’ etc. Likewise, ‘I shall go,’ which[275] originally meant ‘I am obliged to go,’ started to be used in a less strict sense, where no obligation was considered, and thus the language developed a sort of makeshift for a future tense of the verb. But space constraints prevent me from exploring questions of semantic change any further.
CHAPTER XV
CAUSES OF CHANGE—continued
§ 1. Emotional Exaggerations. § 2. Euphony. § 3. Organic Influences. § 4. Lapses and Blendings. § 5. Latitude of Correctness. § 6. Equidistant and Convergent Changes. § 7. Homophones. § 8. Significative Sounds preserved. § 9. Divergent Changes and Analogy. § 10. Extension of Sound Laws. § 11. Spreading of Sound Change. § 12. Reaction. § 13. Sound Laws and Etymological Science. § 14. Conclusion.
§ 1. Emotional Exaggerations. § 2. Pleasant Sounds. § 3. Natural Influences. § 4. Errors and Blends. § 5. Range of Accuracy. § 6. Equal Distance and Converging Changes. § 7. Same Sound Words. § 8. Important Sounds Maintained. § 9. Divergent Changes and Similarity. § 10. Expansion of Sound Rules. § 11. Spread of Sound Change. § 12. Response. § 13. Sound Rules and Etymological Study. § 14. Summary.
XV.—§ 1. Emotional Exaggerations.
In the preceding chapter we have dwelt at great length on those changes which tend to render articulations easier and more convenient. But, important as they are, these are not the only changes that speech sounds undergo: there are other moods than that of ordinary listless everyday conversation, and they may lead to modifications of pronunciation which are different from and may even be in direct opposition to those mentioned or hinted at above. Thus, anger or other violent emotions may cause emphatic utterance, in which, e.g., stops may be much more strongly aspirated than they are in usual quiet parlance; even French, which has normally unaspirated (‘sharp’) [t] and [k], under such circumstances may aspirate them strongly—‘Mais taisez-vous donc!’ Military commands are characterized by peculiar emphasizings, even in some cases distortions of sounds and words. Pomposity and consequential airs are manifested in the treatment of speech sounds as well as in other gestures. Irony, scoffing, banter, amiable chaffing—each different mood or temper leaves its traces on enunciation. Actors and orators will often use stronger articulations than are strictly necessary to avoid those misunderstandings or that unintelligibility which may ensue from slipshod or indistinct pronunciation.[65] In short, anyone who will take careful note of the way in which people do really talk will find in the most everyday conversation as well as on more solemn occasions the greatest variety of such modifications and deviations from what might be termed ‘normal’ pronunciation; these, however, pass[277] unnoticed under ordinary circumstances, when the attention is directed exclusively to the contents and general purport of the spoken words. A vowel or a consonant will be made a trifle shorter or longer than usual, the lips will open a little too much, an [e] will approach [æ] or [i], the off-glide after a final [t] will sound nearly as [s], the closure of a [d] will be made so loosely that a little air will escape and the sound therefore will be approximately a [ð] or a weak fricative point [r], etc. Most of these modifications are so small that they cannot be represented by letters, even by those of a very exact phonetic alphabet, but they exist all the same, and are by no means insignificant to those who want to understand the real essence of speech and of linguistic change, for life is built up of such minutiæ. The great majority of such alterations are of course made quite unconsciously, but by the side of these we must recognize that there are some individuals who more or less consciously affect a certain mode of enunciation, either from artistic motives, because they think it beautiful, or simply to ‘show off’—and sometimes such pronunciations may set the fashion and be widely imitated (cf. below, p. 292).
In the previous chapter, we've spent a lot of time discussing the changes that make speech easier and more convenient. But as important as these changes are, they’re not the only ones that speech sounds go through. There are different moods besides casual, everyday conversation, and these can lead to pronunciation changes that differ from, and might even oppose, what we've talked about before. For example, anger or intense emotions can lead to more emphatic speech, where consonants might be more strongly aspirated than they would be in regular conversation. Even in French, which usually has unaspirated [t] and [k], these sounds can become aspirated in such situations—like in the phrase ‘Mais taisez-vous donc!’. Military commands showcase unique emphases, and sometimes distortions of sounds and words occur. A sense of pomposity or self-importance can also affect how people pronounce words, just like other gestures. Irony, teasing, joking, and friendly banter—each mood or attitude leaves marks on how we articulate words. Actors and public speakers often use stronger pronunciations than strictly necessary to prevent misunderstandings or confusion from sloppy or unclear enunciation.[65] To sum it up, anyone who carefully observes how people actually speak will notice the wide range of modifications and variations from what we might consider ‘normal’ pronunciation in both everyday conversations and more formal situations. These changes often go unnoticed when our focus is on the content and meaning of the spoken words. A vowel or consonant might be slightly shorter or longer than usual, lips might open too wide, an [e] might sound closer to [æ] or [i], the off-glide after a final [t] might come out sounding like [s], and a [d] might be articulated so loosely that some air escapes, making it sound like [ð] or a weak fricative point [r], and so on. Most of these changes are so small they can’t be represented by letters, even in a precise phonetic alphabet, but they exist nonetheless and are significant for anyone trying to grasp the true nature of speech and language change, as life is made up of these small details. The vast majority of these modifications happen unconsciously, but we should also recognize that some individuals deliberately adopt a specific way of speaking, either for artistic reasons, because they find it appealing, or just to show off—and sometimes such pronunciations can set trends and be widely copied (see below, p. 292).
Tender emotions may lead to certain lengthenings of sounds. The intensifying effect of lengthening was noticed by A. Gill, Milton’s teacher, in 1621, see Jiriczek’s reprint, p. 48: “Atque vt Hebræi, ad ampliorem vocis alicuius significationem, syllabas adaugent [cf. here below, Ch. XX § 9]; sic nos syllabarum tempora: vt, grët [the diæresis denotes vowel-length] magnus, grëet ingens; monstrus prodigiosum, mönstrus valde prodigiosum, möönstrus prodigiosum adeo vt hominem stupidet.” Cf. also the lengthening in the exclamation God!, by novelists sometimes written Gawd or Gord. But it is curious that the same emotional lengthening will sometimes affect a consonant (or first part of a diphthong) in a position in which otherwise we always have a short quantity; thus, Danish clergymen, when speaking with unction, will lengthen the [l] of glæde ‘joy,’ which is ridiculed by comic writers through the unphonetic spelling ge-læde; and in the same way I find in Kipling (Stalky 119): “We’ll make it a be-autiful house,” and in O. Henry (Roads of Destiny 133): “A regular Paradise Lost for elegance of scenery and be-yooty of geography.” I suppose that the spellings ber-luddy and bee-luddy, which I find in recent novels, are meant to indicate the pronunciation [bl·-ʌdi], thus the exact counterpart of the Danish example. An unstressed vowel before the stressed syllable is similarly lengthened in “Dee-lightful couple!” (Shaw, Doctor’s Dilemma 41); American girl students will often say ['di·liʃ] for delicious.
Tender emotions can sometimes make sounds longer. A. Gill, Milton’s teacher, noticed this effect of lengthening in 1621 (see Jiriczek’s reprint, p. 48): “As the Hebrews, to give greater meaning to a word, add syllables; so we have syllable lengths: as, grët [the diæresis indicates vowel length] magnus, greet huge; monstrous amazing, monstrous very amazing, monstrous so amazing that it stupefies a person.” Also note the lengthening in the exclamation God!, which some novelists write as Gawd or Gord. It’s interesting that the same emotional lengthening can sometimes affect a consonant (or the first part of a diphthong) in a context where we'd normally have a short sound; for instance, Danish clergymen, when speaking earnestly, will lengthen the [l] in glæde 'joy,' which comic writers mock with the unphonetic spelling ge-læde; similarly, Kipling uses it in (Stalky 119): “We’ll make it a be-autiful house,” and O. Henry in (Roads of Destiny 133): “A regular Paradise Lost for elegance of scenery and be-yooty of geography.” I think the spellings ber-luddy and bee-luddy, found in recent novels, are meant to show the pronunciation [bl·-ʌdi], mirroring the Danish example. An unstressed vowel before the stressed syllable is similarly lengthened in “Dee-lightful couple!” (Shaw, Doctor’s Dilemma 41); American girl students will often say ['di·liʃ] for delicious.
XV.—§ 2. Euphony.
It was not uncommon in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries to ascribe phonetic changes to a desire for euphony, a view which is represented in Bopp’s earliest works. But as early as 1821 Bredsdorff says that “people will always find that euphonious which they are accustomed to hear: considerations of euphony consequently will not cause changes in a language, but rather make for keeping it unchanged. Those changes which are generally supposed to be based on euphony are due chiefly to convenience, in some instances to care of distinctness.” This is quite true, but scarcely the whole truth. Euphony depends not only on custom, but even more on ease of articulation and on ease of perception: what requires intricate or difficult movements of the organs of speech will always be felt as cacophonous, and so will anything that is indistinct or blurred. But nations, as well as individuals, have an artistic feeling for these things in different degrees, and that may influence the phonetic character of a language, though perhaps chiefly in its broad features, while it may be difficult to point out any particular details in phonological history which have been thus worked upon. There can be no doubt that the artistic feeling is much more developed in the French than in the English nation, and we find in French fewer obscure vowels and more clearly articulated consonants than in English (cf. also my remarks on French accent, GS § 28).
It wasn’t uncommon in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries to attribute phonetic changes to a desire for pleasant sound, a perspective found in Bopp’s earliest works. However, as early as 1821, Bredsdorff noted that “people will always find what they are used to hearing to be pleasant: considerations of euphony therefore will not bring about changes in a language but will rather contribute to keeping it the same. Changes that are generally thought to be based on pleasant sound are mainly due to convenience and, in some cases, the need for clarity.” This is true, but it doesn’t tell the whole story. Pleasant sound relies not only on habit but even more on how easy it is to say and understand: anything that requires complex or difficult movements of speech organs will always be perceived as unpleasant, just like anything that is indistinct or unclear. However, nations, much like individuals, have varying degrees of artistic sensitivity to these aspects, which can influence the phonetic qualities of a language, although mostly in broad terms, making it hard to pinpoint specific details in the history of phonology that have been shaped this way. There’s no doubt that artistic sensitivity is much more developed in the French than in the English, as we see that French has fewer unclear vowels and more distinctly pronounced consonants than English (see also my comments on French accent, GS § 28).
XV.—§ 3. Organic Influences.
Some modifications of speech sounds are due to the fact that the organs of speech are used for other purposes than that of speaking. We all know the effect of someone trying to speak with his mouth full of food, or with a cigar or a pipe hanging between his lips and to some extent impeding their action. Various emotions are expressed by facial movements which may interfere with the production of ordinary speech sounds. A child that is crying speaks differently from one that is smiling or laughing. A smile requires a retraction of the corners of the mouth and a partial opening of the lips, and thus impedes the formation of that lip-closure which is an essential part of the ordinary [m]; hence most people when smiling will substitute the labiodental m, which to the ear greatly resembles the bilabial [m]. A smile will also often modify the front-round vowel [y] so as to make it approach [i]. Sweet may be right in supposing that “the habit of speaking with a constant smile or grin” is the reason for the Cockney unrounding of the vowel in [nau] for no. Schuchardt[279] (Zs. f. rom. Phil. 5. 314) says that in Andalusian quia! instead of ca! the lips, under the influence of a certain emotion, are drawn scoffingly aside. Inversely, the rounding in Josu! instead of Jesu! is due to wonder (ib.); and exactly in the same way we have the surprised or pitying exclamation jøses! from Jesus in Danish. Compare also the rounding in Dan. and G. [nø·] for [ne·, nɛ·] (nej, nein). Lundell mentions that in Swedish a caressing lilla vän often becomes lylla vön, and I have often observed the same rounding in Dan. min lille ven. Schuchardt also mentions an Italian [ʃ] instead of [s] under the influence of pain or anger (mi duole la teʃta; ti do uno ʃchiaffo); a Danish parallel is the frequent [ʃluð’ər] for sludder ‘nonsense.’ We are here verging on the subject of the symbolic value of speech sounds, which will occupy us in a later chapter (XX).
Some changes in speech sounds happen because the speech organs are used for purposes other than talking. We all know how it sounds when someone tries to talk with their mouth full, or with a cigar or pipe hanging from their lips, affecting their speech. Different emotions can be conveyed through facial movements, which can interfere with normal speech sounds. A crying child sounds different from one who is smiling or laughing. Smiling pulls the corners of the mouth back and slightly opens the lips, which makes it hard to close the lips for the typical [m] sound; therefore, when people smile, they often replace the bilabial [m] with a labiodental m that sounds quite similar. Smiling can also alter the front-round vowel [y], making it sound closer to [i]. Sweet may be correct in suggesting that “the habit of speaking with a constant smile or grin” explains the Cockney unrounding of the vowel in [nau] for no. Schuchardt[279] (Zs. f. rom. Phil. 5. 314) notes that in Andalusian, quia! is used instead of ca! because the lips are sarcastically pulled aside due to a certain emotion. Conversely, the rounding in Josu! instead of Jesu! comes from surprise (ib.); similarly, we have the surprised or pitying exclamation jøses! derived from Jesus in Danish. Check out the rounding in Danish and German [nø·] for [ne·, nɛ·] (nej, nein). Lundell points out that in Swedish, a loving lilla vän often turns into lylla vön, and I've seen that same rounding in Danish min lille ven. Schuchardt also mentions that Italians often pronounce [ʃ] instead of [s] when experiencing pain or anger (mi duole la teʃta; ti do uno ʃchiaffo); a parallel in Danish is the frequent [ʃluð’ər] for sludder meaning ‘nonsense.’ We are approaching the topic of the symbolic value of speech sounds, which we will discuss later in chapter (XX).
Observe, too, how people will pronounce under the influence of alcohol: the tongue is not under control and is incapable of accurately forming the closure necessary for [t], which therefore becomes [r], and the thin rill necessary for [s], which therefore comes to resemble [ʃ]; there is also a general tendency to run sounds and syllables together.[66]
Observe how people will speak when they're drinking: their tongues aren't in control and can't form the closure needed for [t], so it turns into [r], and the small stream of air for [s] gets confused with [ʃ]; there's also a common tendency to blend sounds and syllables together.[66]
XV.—§ 4. Lapses and Blendings.
All these deviations are due to influences from what is outside the sphere of language as such. But we now come to something of the greatest importance in the life of language, the fact, namely, that deviations from the usual or normal pronunciation are very often due to causes inside the language itself, either by lingering reminiscences of what has just been spoken or by anticipation of something that the speaker is just on the point of pronouncing. The process of speech is a very complicated one, and while one thing is being said, the mind is continually active in preparing what has to be said next, arranging the ideas and fashioning the linguistic expression in all its details. Each word is a succession of sounds, and for each of these a complicated set of orders has to be issued from the brain to the various speech organs. Sometimes these get mixed up, and a command is sent down to one organ a moment too early or too late. The inclination to make mistakes naturally increases with the number of identical or[280] similar sounds in close proximity. This is well known from those ‘jaw-breaking’ tongue-tests with which people amuse themselves in all countries and of which I need give only one typical specimen:
All these variations come from influences outside the realm of language itself. But now we turn to something crucial in the life of language: the fact that deviations from standard pronunciation often stem from factors within the language, either from lingering memories of what has just been said or anticipations of something the speaker is about to say. The process of speech is quite complex, and while one thing is being expressed, the mind is constantly working to prepare what needs to be said next, organizing thoughts and shaping the linguistic expression in all its details. Each word consists of a series of sounds, and for each sound, a complex set of commands must be sent from the brain to the different speech organs. Sometimes, these commands get mixed up, and a signal is sent to one organ just a moment too early or too late. The likelihood of making mistakes naturally increases with the number of identical or similar sounds in close proximity. This is well known from those ‘tongue twisters’ that people enjoy in every country, and I need only provide one typical example:
If the mind is occupied with one sound while another is being pronounced, and thus either runs in advance of or lags behind what should be its immediate business, the linguistic result may be of various kinds. The simplest case of influencing is assimilation of two contiguous sounds, which we have already considered from a different point of view. Next we have assimilative influence on a sound at a distance, as when we lapse into she shells instead of sea shells or she sells; such is Fr. chercher for older sercher (whence E. search) from Lat. circare, Dan. and G. vulgar ʃerʃant for sergeant; a curious mixed case is the pronunciation of transition as [træn'siʒən]: the normal development is [træn'ziʃən], but the voice-articulation of the two hissing sounds is reversed (possibly under accessory influence from the numerous words in which we have [træns] with [s], and from words ending in [iʒən], such as vision, division). Further examples of such assimilation at a distance or consonant-harmonization (malmsey from malvesie, etc.) may be found in my LPh 11. 7, where there are also examples of the corresponding harmonizings of vowels: Fr. camarade, It. uguale, Braganza, from camerade, eguale, Brigantia, etc. In Ugro-Finnic and Turkish this harmony of vowels has been raised to a principle pervading the whole structure of the language, as seen, e.g., most clearly in the varying plural endings in Yakut agalar, äsälär, ogolor, dörölör, ‘fathers, bears, children, muzzles.’
If the mind is focused on one sound while another is being spoken, it may either get ahead of or fall behind what it should be dealing with in the moment, which can lead to different linguistic outcomes. The most straightforward example of this influence is the assimilation of two adjacent sounds, which we have already explored from another angle. Then there's the influence on a sound that isn't nearby, as when we mistakenly say she shells instead of sea shells or she sells; for example, the French word chercher evolving from the older sercher (which gives us the English search) derived from the Latin circare, or the Danish and German informal ʃerʃant for sergeant; an interesting case is the pronunciation of transition as [træn'siʒən]: the expected version is [træn'ziʃən], but the articulation of the two hissing sounds is swapped (possibly influenced by the many words where we have [træns] followed by [s], as well as words ending in [iʒən], like vision and division). Additional instances of this distant assimilation or consonant-harmonization (malmsey from malvesie, etc.) can be found in my LPh 11. 7, where there are also examples of corresponding vowel harmonization: French camarade, Italian uguale, Braganza, deriving from camerade, eguale, Brigantia, etc. In Ugro-Finnic and Turkish, this vowel harmony has become a pervasive principle that shapes the entire structure of the language, as seen, for instance, most clearly in the differing plural endings in Yakut agalar, äsälär, ogolor, dörölör, meaning ‘fathers, bears, children, muzzles.’
What escapes at the wrong place and causes confusion may be a part of the same word or of a following word; as examples of the latter case may be given a few of the lapses recorded in Meringer and Mayer’s Versprechen und Verlesen (Stuttgart, 1895): instead of saying Lateinisches lehnwort Meringer said Latenisches ... and then corrected himself; paster noster instead of pater noster; wenn das wesser ... wetter wieder besser ist. This phenomenon is termed in Danish at bakke snagvendt (for snakke bagvendt) and in English Spoonerism, from an Oxford don, W. A. Spooner, about whom many comic lapses are related (“Don’t you ever feel a half-warmed fish” instead of “half-formed wish”).
What goes wrong in the wrong context and creates confusion might be part of the same word or of the next word; for example, a few mistakes noted in Meringer and Mayer’s Versprechen und Verlesen (Stuttgart, 1895) illustrate the latter case: instead of saying Lateinisches lehnwort, Meringer said Latenisches... and then corrected himself; paster noster instead of pater noster; wenn das wesser ... wetter wieder besser ist. This phenomenon is called in Danish at bakke snagvendt (for snakke bagvendt) and in English Spoonerism, named after an Oxford don, W. A. Spooner, known for many humorous slips (“Don’t you ever feel a half-warmed fish” instead of “half-formed wish”).
The simplest and most frequently occurring cases in which the order for a sound is issued too early or too late are those trans[281]positions of two sounds which the linguists term ‘metatheses.’ They occur most frequently with s in connexion with a stop (wasp, waps; ask, ax) and with r (chiefly, perhaps exclusively, the trilled form of the sound) and a vowel (third, OE. þridda). A more complicated instance is seen in Fr. trésor for tésor, thesaurum. If the mind does not realize how far the vocal organs have got, the result may be the skipping of some sound or sounds; this is particularly likely to happen when the same sound has to be repeated at some little distance, and we then have the phenomenon termed ‘haplology,’ as in eighteen, OE. eahtatiene, and in the frequent pronunciation probly for probably, Fr. contrôle, idolatrie for contrerôle, idololatrie, Lat. stipendium for stipipendium, and numerous similar instances in every language (LPh 11. 9). Sometimes a sound may be skipped because the mind is confused through the fact that the same sound has to be pronounced a little later; thus the old Gothonic word for ‘bird’ (G. vogel, OE. fugol; E. fowl with a modified meaning) is derived from the verb fly, OE. fleogan, and originally had some form like *fluglo (OE. had an adj. flugol); in recent times flugelman (G. flügelmann) has become fugleman. It. has Federigo for Frederigo—thus the exactly opposite result of what has been brought about in trésor from the same kind of mental confusion.
The simplest and most common situations where a sound is pronounced either too early or too late are those shifts of two sounds, which linguists call ‘metatheses.’ These mostly happen with s in connection with a stop (wasp, waps; ask, ax) and with r (mainly, perhaps exclusively, the rolled form of the sound) and a vowel (third, OE. þridda). A more complex example is seen in French trésor instead of tésor, thesaurum. If the mind doesn't track how far the vocal organs have moved, the result can be the dropping of some sounds, particularly likely when the same sound needs to be repeated after a short interval, leading to what’s called ‘haplology,’ as seen in eighteen, OE. eahtatiene, and in the common pronunciation probly instead of probably, for French contrôle, idolatrie seen as contrerôle, idololatrie, Latin stipendium seen as stipipendium, and many similar examples across languages (LPh 11. 9). Sometimes a sound may be dropped because the mind gets confused about having to pronounce the same sound a little later; for instance, the old Gothic word for ‘bird’ (G. vogel, OE. fugol; E. fowl with a modified meaning) comes from the verb fly, OE. fleogan, and originally had a form like *fluglo (OE. had an adjective flugol); recently, flugelman (G. wingman) has become fugleman. Italian has Federigo for Frederigo—yielding a completely opposite outcome from what happened in trésor due to similar mental confusion.
When words are often repeated in succession, sounds from one of them will often creep into another, as is seen very often in numerals: the nasal which was found in the old forms for 7, 9 and 10 and is still seen in E. seven, nine, ten, has no place in the word for 8, and accordingly we have in the ordinal ON. sjaundi, átti, níundi, tíundi, but already in ON. we find áttandi by the side of átti, and in Dan. the present-day forms are syvende, ottende, niende, tiende; in the same way OFr. had sedme, uidme, noefme, disme (which have all now disappeared with the exception of dîme as a substantive). In the names of the months we had the same formation of a series in OFr.: septembre, octembre, novembre, decembre, but learned influence has reinstated octobre. G. elf for older eilf owes its vowel to the following zwelf; and as now the latter has given way to zwölf (the vowel being rounded in consequence of the w) many dialects count zehn, ölf, zwölf. Similarly, it seems to be due to their frequent occurrence in close contact with the verbal forms in -no that the Italian plural pronouns egli, elle are extended with that ending: eglino amano, elleno dicono. Diez compares the curious Bavarian wo-st bist, dem-st gehörst, etc., in which the personal ending of the verb is transferred to some other word with which it has nothing to do (on this phenomenon see Herzog, Streitfragen d. roman. phil. 48, Buergel Goodwin, Umgangsspr. in Südbayern 99).
When words are often repeated in a row, sounds from one can easily blend into another, which is often seen with numbers. The nasal sound found in the old forms for 7, 9, and 10, and still present in English like seven, nine, ten, doesn’t appear in the word for 8. Thus, we have in Old Norse the ordinals sjaundi, átti, níundi, tíundi, but already in Old Norse we find áttandi alongside átti. In modern Danish, the forms are syvende, ottende, niende, tiende; similarly, Old French had sedme, uidme, noefme, disme (which have all since disappeared except for dîme as a noun). In the names of the months, we had the same pattern in Old French: septembre, octembre, novembre, decembre, but scholarly influence has restored octobre. German elf for the older eilf owes its vowel to the following zwelf; and now that the latter has shifted to zwölf (with the vowel rounded because of the w), many dialects count zehn, ölf, zwölf. Similarly, it seems that the frequent closeness to the verb forms ending in -no has influenced the Italian plural pronouns egli, elle to adopt that ending: eglino amano, elleno dicono. Diez compares the interesting Bavarian phrases wo-st bist, dem-st gehörst, etc., where the personal ending of the verb is applied to another word unrelated to it (for more on this, see Herzog, Streitfragen d. roman. phil. 48, Buergel Goodwin, Umgangsspr. in Südbayern 99).
In speaking, the mind is occupied not only with the words one is already pronouncing or knows that one is going to pronounce, but also with the ideas which one has to express but for which one has not yet chosen the linguistic form. In many cases two synonyms will rise to the consciousness at the same time, and the hesitation between them will often result in a compromise which contains the head of one and the tail of another word. It is evident that this process of blending is intimately related to those we have just been considering; see the detailed treatment in Ch. XVI § 6.
In speaking, the mind is focused not only on the words one is currently saying or knows will be said, but also on the ideas that need to be expressed but haven’t been shaped into the right words yet. Often, two synonyms will come to mind simultaneously, and the struggle between them can lead to a mix that combines the beginning of one word and the end of another. It’s clear that this blending process is closely connected to the ones we’ve just discussed; see the detailed treatment in Ch. XVI § 6.
Syntactical blends are very frequent. Hesitation between different from and other than will result in different than or another from, and similarly we occasionally find another to, different to, contrary than, contrary from, opposite from, anywhere than. After a clause introduced by hardly or scarcely the normal conjunction is when, but sometimes we find than, because that is regular after the synonymous no sooner.
Syntactical blends are quite common. Confusion between different from and other than can lead to phrases like different than or another from, and we also sometimes see another to, different to, contrary than, contrary from, opposite from, and anywhere than. After a clause that starts with hardly or scarcely, the typical conjunction is when, but occasionally than appears, since that’s standard after the similar no sooner.
XV.—§ 5. Latitude of Correctness.
It is a natural consequence of the essence of human speech and the way in which it is transmitted from generation to generation that we have everywhere to recognize a certain latitude of correctness, alike in the significations in which the words may be used, in syntax and in pronunciation. The nearer a speaker keeps to the centre of what is established or usual, the easier will it be to understand him. If he is ‘eccentric’ on one point or another, the result may not always be that he conveys no idea at all, or that he is misunderstood, but often merely that he is understood with some little difficulty, or that his hearers have a momentary feeling of something odd in his choice of words, or expressions or pronunciation. In many cases, when someone has overstepped the boundaries of what is established, his hearers do not at once catch his meaning and have to gather it from the whole context of what follows: not unfrequently the meaning of something you have heard as an incomprehensible string of syllables will suddenly flash upon you without your knowing how it has happened. Misunderstandings are, of course, most liable to occur if words of different meaning, which in themselves would give sense in the same collocation, are similar in sound: in that case a trifling alteration of one sound, which in other words would create no difficulty at all, may prove pernicious. Now, what is the bearing of these considerations on the question of sound changes?
It's a natural result of how human speech works and how it's passed down through generations that we have to acknowledge a certain degree of flexibility in correctness, both in the meanings of the words we use, as well as in grammar and pronunciation. The closer a speaker stays to what's considered standard or common, the easier it is for others to understand them. If they are 'unconventional' in some way, it doesn't always mean they won't get their point across or that they'll be misunderstood; often, it simply means their listeners might find them a bit difficult to follow or notice something strange about their word choices or way of speaking. In many situations, when someone deviates from what's standard, their audience may not immediately grasp their meaning and have to piece it together from the context of what comes next. It's not uncommon for something that originally sounded like an incomprehensible jumble of sounds to suddenly make sense without you realizing how that happened. Misunderstandings are more likely to arise when words that sound alike but have different meanings create confusion; in this case, a slight change in one sound that wouldn't confuse anyone in other words might cause issues here. So, what do these thoughts mean for the discussion about changes in sounds?
The latitude of correctness is very far from being the same in[283] different languages. Some sounds in each language move within narrow boundaries, while others have a much larger field assigned to them; each language is punctilious in some, but not in all points. Deviations which in one language would be considered trifling, in another would be intolerable perversions. In German, for instance, a wide margin is allowed for the (local and individual) pronunciation of the diphthong written eu or äu (in eule, träume): it may begin with [ɔ] or [œ] or even [æ, a], and it may end in [i], or the corresponding rounded vowel [y], or one of the mid front vowels, rounded or not, it does not matter much; the diphthong is recognized or acknowledged in many shapes, while the similar diphthong in English, as in toy, voice, allows a far less range of variation (for other examples see LPh 16. 22).
The latitude of correctness varies greatly between[283] different languages. Some sounds in each language have limited boundaries, while others have a much broader range; each language is precise in some aspects, but not in all. Deviations that would be minor in one language could be seen as unacceptable distortions in another. In German, for example, there's a wide range allowed for the (local and individual) pronunciation of the diphthong written eu or äu (as in eule, träume): it can start with [ɔ], [œ], or even [æ, a], and it can end in [i], the rounded vowel [y], or one of the mid front vowels, rounded or not; it doesn’t matter much. The diphthong is recognized in many forms, whereas the similar diphthong in English, as in toy or voice, allows for much less variation (for other examples see LPh 16. 22).
Now, it is very important to keep in mind that there is an intimate connexion between phonetic latitude and the significations of words. If there are in a language a great many pairs of words which are identical in sound except for, say, the difference between [e·] and [i·] (or between long and short [i], or between voiced [b] and voiceless [p], or between a high and a low tone, etc.), then the speakers of that language necessarily will make that distinction with great precision, as otherwise too many misunderstandings would result. If, on the other hand, no mistakes worth speaking of would ensue, there is not the same inducement to be careful. In English, and to a somewhat lesser degree in French, it is easy to make up long lists of pairs of words where the sole difference is between voice and voicelessness in the final consonant (cab cap, bad bat, frog frock, etc.); hence final [b] and [p], [d] and [t], [g] and [k] are kept apart conscientiously, while German possesses very few such pairs of words; in German, consequently, the natural tendency to make final consonants voiceless has not been checked, and all final stopped consonants have now become voiceless. In initial and medial position, too, there are very few examples in German of the same distinction (see the lists, LPh 6. 78), and this circumstance makes us understand why Germans are so apt to efface the difference between [b, d, g] and [p, t, k]. On the other hand, the distinction between a long and a short vowel is kept much more effectively in German than in French, because in German ten or twenty times as many words would be liable to confusion through pronouncing a long instead of a short vowel or vice versa. In French no two words are kept apart by means of stress, as in English or German; so the rule laid down in grammars that the stress falls on the final syllable of the word is very frequently broken through for rhythmic and other reasons. Other similar instances might easily be advanced.
It's important to remember that there's a close connection between pronunciation and the meanings of words. If a language has many pairs of words that sound the same except for differences like between [e·] and [i·] (or long and short [i], or voiced [b] and voiceless [p], or differing tones, etc.), the speakers will definitely notice and make those distinctions precisely, or else it would lead to a lot of misunderstandings. Conversely, if mistakes aren’t likely to happen, there’s less reason to be careful. In English, and to a lesser extent in French, we can easily come up with long lists of word pairs where the only difference is the voicing of the final consonant (like cab cap, bad bat, frog frock, etc.); thus, final [b] and [p], [d] and [t], [g] and [k] are clearly differentiated. However, German has very few such pairs, which means the tendency to make final consonants voiceless hasn’t been curbed, and all final stop consonants have become voiceless. There are also very few examples of this distinction in initial and medial positions in German (see the lists, LPh 6. 78), which helps explain why Germans often blur the lines between [b, d, g] and [p, t, k]. On the other hand, the distinction between long and short vowels is maintained much better in German than in French, because in German, ten or twenty times as many words could be confused if a long vowel is pronounced instead of a short one, or vice versa. In French, no two words are distinguished by stress, as they are in English or German; therefore, the rule in grammars stating that stress falls on the final syllable of the word is frequently broken for rhythmic or other reasons. Other similar examples could easily be provided.
XV.—§ 6. Equidistant and Convergent Changes.
Phonetic shifts are of two kinds: the shifted sound may be identical with one already found in the language, or it may be a new sound. In the former, but not in the latter kind, fresh possibilities of confusions and misunderstandings may arise. Now, in some cases one sound (or series of sounds) marches into a position which has just been abandoned by another sound (or series of sounds), which has in its turn shifted into some other place. A notable instance is the old Gothonic consonant shift: Aryan b, d, g cannot have become Gothonic p, t, k till after primitive p, t, k had already become fricatives [f, þ, x (h)], for had the shift taken place before, intolerable confusion would have reigned in all parts of the vocabulary. Another instructive example is seen in the history of English long vowels. Not till OE. long a had been rounded into something like [ɔ·] (OE. stan, ME. stoon, stone) could a new long a develop, chiefly through lengthening of an old short a in certain positions. Somewhat later we witness the great vowel-raising through which the phonetic value of the long vowels (written all the time in essentially the same way) has been constantly on the move and yet the distance between them has been kept, so that no confusions worth speaking of have ever occurred. If we here leave out of account the rounded back vowels and speak only of front vowels, the shift may be thus represented through typical examples (the first and the last columns show the spelling, the others the sounds):
Phonetic shifts come in two types: the shifted sound may match one already present in the language, or it may be a completely new sound. In the first case, but not the second, new possibilities for confusion and misunderstandings can arise. Sometimes, one sound (or series of sounds) takes over a position that was just vacated by another sound (or series of sounds), which has shifted to a different spot itself. A well-known example is the old Gothic consonant shift: Aryan b, d, g couldn't have changed to Gothic p, t, k until after the original p, t, k had already become fricatives [f, þ, x (h)], because if the shift had happened earlier, chaotic confusion would have affected the vocabulary. Another helpful example is seen in the history of English long vowels. Only after the Old English long a rounded into something resembling [ɔ·] (OE. stan, ME. stoon, stone) could a new long a emerge, mainly through lengthening an old short a in certain contexts. A bit later, we observe the significant vowel-raising that caused the phonetic value of the long vowels (which have essentially been spelled the same way all along) to constantly shift while still maintaining a distance between them, ensuring that no major confusions occurred. If we ignore the rounded back vowels and focus only on front vowels, the shift can be illustrated through typical examples (the first and last columns show the spelling, while the others show the sounds):
Middle English. | Elizabethan era. | Present English. | ||
(1) bite | bi·tə | beit | bait | bite |
(2) bete | be·tə | bit | bi·t | beet |
(3) bete | bɛ·tə | bet | bi·t | beat |
(4) abate | a'ba·tə | ə'bæ·t | ə'beit | abate |
When the sound of (2) was raised into [i·], the sound of (1) had already left that position and had been diphthongized, and when the sound of (3) was raised from an open into a close e, (2) had already become [i·]; (4) could not become [æ·] or [ɛ·] till (3) had become a comparatively close e sound. The four vowels, as it were, climbed the ladder without ever reaching each other—a climbing which took centuries and in each case implied intermediate steps not indicated in our survey. No clashings could occur so long as each category kept its distance from the sounds above and below, and thus we find that the Elizabethans as scrupulously as Chaucer kept the four classes of words apart in their rimes. But in the seventeenth century class (3) was raised,[285] and as no corresponding change had taken place with (2), the two classes have now fallen together with the single sound [i·]. This entails a certain number of homophones such as had not been created through the preceding equidistant changes.
When the sound of (2) shifted to [i·], the sound of (1) had already moved from that position and turned into a diphthong. Likewise, when the sound of (3) changed from an open to a close e, (2) had already become [i·]. The sound (4) couldn't become [æ·] or [ɛ·] until (3) had transformed into a relatively close e sound. The four vowels, in a sense, progressed step-by-step without ever meeting each other—this progression took centuries and implied intermediate steps not shown in our overview. There couldn’t be any conflicts as long as each category maintained its distance from the sounds above and below, which is why the Elizabethans, just like Chaucer, diligently kept the four classes of words separate in their rhymes. However, in the seventeenth century, class (3) was raised,[285] and since no equivalent change had happened with (2), the two classes merged into the single sound [i·]. This resulted in a number of homophones that had not been created from the previous equidistant changes.
XV.—§ 7. Homophones.
The reader here will naturally object that the fact of new homophones arising through this vowel change goes against the theory that the necessity of certain distinctions can keep in check the tendency to phonetic changes. But homophones do not always imply frequent misunderstandings: some homophones are more harmless than others. Now, if we look at the list of the homophones created by this raising of the close e (MEG i. 11. 74), we shall soon discover that very few mistakes of any consequence could arise through the obliteration of the distinction between this vowel and the previously existing [i·]. For substantives and verbal forms (like bean and been, beet beat, flea flee, heel heal, leek leak, meat meet, reed read, sea see, seam seem, steel steal), or substantives and adjectives (like deer dear, leaf lief, shear sheer, week weak) will generally be easily distinguished by their position in the sentence; nor will a plural such as feet be often mistaken for the singular feat. Actual misunderstandings of any importance are only imaginable when the two words belong to the same ‘part of speech,’ but of such pairs we meet only few: beach beech, breach breech, mead meed, peace piece, peal peel, quean queen, seal ceil, wean ween, wheal wheel. I think the judicious reader will agree with me that confusions due to these words being pronounced in the same way will be few and far between, and one understands that they cannot have been powerful enough to prevent hundreds of other words from having their sound changed. An effective prevention can only be expected when the falling together in sound would seriously impair the understanding of many sentences.
The reader might naturally argue that the emergence of new homophones due to this vowel change contradicts the idea that the need for certain distinctions can limit phonetic changes. However, homophones don't always lead to frequent misunderstandings: some homophones are less problematic than others. If we examine the list of homophones created by this raising of the close e (MEG i. 11. 74), we will quickly see that very few significant mistakes could result from the loss of the distinction between this vowel and the existing [i·]. For nouns and verb forms (like bean and been, beet beat, flea flee, heel heal, leek leak, meat meet, reed read, sea see, seam seem, steel steal), or nouns and adjectives (like deer dear, leaf lief, shear sheer, week weak), they can usually be easily distinguished by their sentence position; also, a plural like feet is rarely confused with the singular feat. Actual misunderstandings that are significant can only be imagined when the two words are from the same ‘part of speech,’ but there are only a few such pairs: beach beech, breach breech, mead meed, peace piece, peal peel, quean queen, seal ceil, wean ween, wheal wheel. I believe the thoughtful reader would agree with me that confusions caused by these words sounding the same will be rare, and it's clear that they couldn't have been significant enough to stop hundreds of other words from changing their sounds. Effective prevention can only be expected when mispronunciation would seriously hinder the understanding of many sentences.
It is, moreover, interesting to note how many of the words which were made identical with others through this change were already rare at the time or have at any rate become obsolete since: this is true of breech, lief, meed, mete (adj.), quean, weal, wheal, ween and perhaps a few others. Now, obsolescence of some words is always found in connexion with such convergent sound changes. In some cases the word had already become rare before the change in sound took place, and then it is obvious that it cannot have offered serious resistance to the change that was setting in. In other cases the dying out of a word must be looked upon as a consequence of the sound change which had actually taken place. Many scholars are now inclined to see in phonetic coalescence[286] one of the chief reasons why words fall into disuse, see, e.g., Liebisch (PBB XXIII, 228, many German examples in O. Weise, Unsere Mutterspr., 3d ed., 206) and Gilliéron, La faillite de l’étymologie phonétique (Neuveville, 1919—a book whose sensational title is hardly justified by its contents).
It’s also interesting to note how many of the words that became identical to others through this change were already rare at the time or have become obsolete since then: this includes breech, lief, meed, mete (adj.), quean, weal, wheal, ween, and perhaps a few others. The obsolescence of some words is always found in connection with such convergent sound changes. In some cases, the word had already become rare before the sound change occurred, and it’s clear that it couldn’t have resisted the change that was coming. In other cases, the disappearance of a word must be seen as a result of the sound change that actually happened. Many scholars now believe that phonetic coalescence[286] is one of the main reasons why words fall out of use, see, e.g., Liebisch (PBB XXIII, 228, many German examples in O. Weise, Unsere Mutterspr., 3d ed., 206) and Gilliéron, La faillite de l’étymologie phonétique (Neuveville, 1919—a book whose sensational title is hardly justified by its content).
The drawbacks of homophones[67] are counteracted in various ways. Very often a synonym steps forward, as when lad or boy is used in nearly all English dialects to supplant son, which has become identical in sound with sun (cf. above p. 120, a childish instance). Very often it becomes usual to avoid misunderstandings through some addition, as when we say the sole of her foot, because her sole might be taken to mean her soul, or when the French say un dé à coudre or un dé à jouer (cf. E. minister of religion and cabinet minister, the right-hand corner, the subject-matter, where the same expedient is used to obviate ambiguities arisen from other causes). Chinese, of course, is the classical example of a language abounding in homophones caused by convergent sound changes, and it is highly interesting to study the various ways in which that language has remedied the resulting drawbacks, see, e.g., B. Karlgren, Ordet och pennan i Mittens rike (Stockholm, 1918), p. 49 ff. But on the whole we must say that the ways in which these phonetic inconveniences are counteracted are the same as those in which speakers react against misunderstandings arising from semantic or syntactic causes: as soon as they perceive that their meaning is not apprehended they turn their phrases in a different way, choosing some other expression for their thought, and by this means language is gradually freed from ambiguity.
The issues with homophones[67] can be addressed in several ways. Often a synonym steps in, like when lad or boy is used instead of son, which sounds the same as sun (see above p. 120, a childish example). It’s common to avoid confusion by adding clarifications, such as saying the sole of her foot because her sole might be mistaken for her soul, or when the French say un dé à coudre or un dé à jouer (see E. minister of religion and cabinet minister, the right-hand corner, the subject-matter, where a similar method is used to avoid confusion from other sources). Chinese is, of course, the classic example of a language rich in homophones due to similar sound changes, and it’s really interesting to explore the different strategies that language has developed to solve these issues, like in B. Karlgren, Ordet och pennan i Mittens rike (Stockholm, 1918), p. 49 ff. Overall, we can say that the ways to deal with these phonetic issues are similar to how speakers manage misunderstandings caused by meaning or syntax: as soon as they realize their message isn’t understood, they rephrase it, finding another way to express their thoughts, gradually making language less ambiguous.
XV.—§ 8. Significative Sounds preserved.
My contention that the significative side of language has in so far exercised an influence on phonetic development that the possibility of many misunderstandings may effectually check the coalescence of two hitherto distinct sounds should not be identified with one of the tenets of the older school (Curtius included) against which the ‘young grammarians’ raised an emphatic protest, namely, that a tendency to preserve significative sounds and syllables might produce exceptions to the normal course of phonetic change. Delbrück and his friends may be right in much of what they said against Curtius—for instance, when he explained the retention of i in some Greek optative forms through a consciousness of the original meaning of this suffix; but their denial was in its way just as exaggerated as his affirmation. It cannot justly be urged against the influence of signification that a preservation of a sound on that account would only be imaginable on the supposition that the speaker was conscious of a threatened sound change and wanted to avoid it. One need not suppose a speaker to be on his guard against a ‘sound law’: the only thing required is that he should feel, or be made to feel, that he is not understood when he speaks indistinctly; if on that account he has to repeat his words he will naturally be careful to pronounce the sound he has skipped or slurred, and may even be tempted to exaggerate it a little.
My argument that the meaningful aspect of language has influenced phonetic development to the point where many misunderstandings can effectively prevent two distinct sounds from merging should not be confused with one of the beliefs of the older school (including Curtius) that the ‘young grammarians’ strongly opposed. This belief claimed that a tendency to maintain meaningful sounds and syllables could create exceptions to the usual patterns of phonetic change. Delbrück and his colleagues may be right in much of what they critiqued about Curtius—for example, when he explained the retention of i in some Greek optative forms as stemming from an awareness of the original meaning of this suffix. However, their denial was equally exaggerated as his claim. It's not valid to argue against the influence of meaning by saying that preserving a sound would only make sense if the speaker was aware of a pending sound change and wanted to prevent it. We don't need to assume that a speaker is conscious of a ‘sound law’; what matters is that they feel—or are made to feel—that they are not understood when they speak unclearly. If they have to repeat their words for that reason, they will naturally be more careful to pronounce the sound they might have skipped or slurred, and they may even be inclined to emphasize it a bit more.
There do not seem to be many quite unimpeachable examples of words which have received exceptional phonetic treatment to obviate misunderstandings arising from homophony; other explanations (analogy from other forms of the same word, etc.) can generally be alleged more or less plausibly. But this does seem to be the easiest explanation of the fact that the E. preposition on has always the full vowel [ɔ], though in nine cases out of ten it is weakly stressed and though all the other analogous prepositions (to, for, of, at) in the corresponding weak positions in sentences are generally pronounced with the ‘neutral’ vowel [ə]. But if on were similarly pronounced, ambiguity would very often result from its phonetic identity with the weak forms of the extremely frequent little words an (the indefinite article) and and (possibly also in), not to mention the great number of [ən]s in words like drunken, shaken, deepen, etc., where the forms without -en also exist. With the preposition upon the same considerations do not hold good, hence the frequency of the pronunciation [əpən] in weak position. Considerations of clearness have also led to the disuse of the formerly frequent form o (o’) which was the ‘natural’ development of each of the two prepositions on and of. The form written a[288] survives only in some fossilized combinations like ashore; in several others it has now disappeared (set the clock going, formerly a-going, etc.).
There aren't many clear-cut examples of words that have undergone special phonetic changes to avoid confusion from homophones; other explanations (like drawing parallels from other forms of the same word, etc.) can usually be argued somewhat convincingly. However, this seems to be the simplest explanation for why the English preposition on always has the full vowel [ɔ], even though in most cases it is weakly stressed and all the other similar prepositions (to, for, of, at) in similar weak positions in sentences are typically pronounced with the 'neutral' vowel [ə]. If on were pronounced the same way, it would often create confusion due to its phonetic similarity to the weak forms of common little words like an (the indefinite article) and and (and possibly in), not to mention the many occurrences of [ən] in words like drunken, shaken, deepen, etc., where the forms without -en also exist. For the preposition upon, these considerations don't apply, which is why you often hear it pronounced as [əpən] in weak positions. The need for clarity has also led to the decline of the once-common form o (o’), which was the natural evolution of both on and of. The form a[288] survives only in some set phrases like ashore; in several others, it has now faded away (like set the clock going, which used to be a-going, etc.).
Sometimes, when all ordinary words are affected by a certain sound change, some words prove refractory because in their case the old sound is found to be more expressive than the new one. When the long E. [i·] was diphthongized into [ai], the words pipe and whine ceased to be good echoisms, but some dialects have peep ‘complain,’ which keeps the old sound of the former, and the Irish say wheen (Joyce, English as we speak it in Ireland, 103). In squeeze the [i·] sound has been retained as more expressive—the earlier form was squize; and the same is the case with some words meaning ‘to look narrowly’: peer, peek, keek, earlier pire, pike, kike (cf. Dan. pippe, kikke, kige, G. kieken).[68] In the same way, when the old [a·] was changed into [ɛ·, ei], the word gape ceased to be expressive (as it is still in Dan. gabe), but in popular speech the tendency to raise the vowel was resisted, and the old sound [ga·p] persisted, spelt garp as a London form in 1817 (Ellis, EEP v. 228) and still common in many dialects (see gaup, garp in EDD); Professor Hempl told me that [ga·p] was also a common pronunciation in America. In the chapter on Sound Symbolism (XX) we shall see some other instances of exceptional phonetic treatment of symbolic words (especially tiny, teeny, little, cuckoo).
Sometimes, when all ordinary words are impacted by a certain sound change, some words resist this shift because the old sound is found to be more expressive than the new one. When the long E. [i·] shifted into [ai], the words pipe and whine stopped being effective echoisms, but some dialects still have peep meaning ‘complain,’ which maintains the old sound. The Irish use wheen (Joyce, English as we speak it in Ireland, 103). In squeeze, the [i·] sound has been kept as more expressive—the earlier form was squize; and the same is true for some words meaning ‘to look closely’: peer, peek, keek, earlier pire, pike, kike (cf. Dan. pippe, kikke, kige, G. kieken).[68] Similarly, when the old [a·] changed to [ɛ·, ei], the word gape lost its expressiveness (as it remains in Dan. gabe), but in everyday speech, the tendency to raise the vowel was resisted, and the old sound [ga·p] persisted, spelled garp as a London form in 1817 (Ellis, EEP v. 228) and still used in many dialects (see gaup, garp in EDD); Professor Hempl told me that [ga·p] was also a common pronunciation in America. In the chapter on Sound Symbolism (XX) we will explore some other examples of unusual phonetic treatment of symbolic words (especially tiny, teeny, little, cuckoo).
XV.—§ 9. Divergent Changes and Analogy.
Besides equidistant and convergent sound changes we have divergent changes, through which sounds at one time identical have separated themselves later. This is a mere consequence of the fact that it is rare for a sound to be changed equally in all positions in which it occurs. On the contrary, one must admit that the vast majority of sound changes are conditioned by some such circumstance as influence of neighbouring sounds, position as initial, medial or final (often with subdivisions, as position between vowels, etc.), place in a strongly or weakly stressed syllable, and so forth. One may take as examples some familiar instances from French: Latin c (pronounced [k]), is variously treated before o (corpus > corps), a (canem > chien), and e (centum > cent); in amicum > ami it has totally disappeared. Lat. a[289] becomes e in a stressed open syllable (natum > né), except before a nasal (amat > aime); but after c we have a different treatment (canem > chien), and in a close syllable it is kept (arborem > arbre); in weak syllables it is kept initially (amorem > amour), but becomes [ə] (spelt e) finally (bona > bonne). This enumeration of the chief rules will serve to show the far-reaching differentiation which in this way may take place among words closely related as parts of the same paradigm or family of words; thus, for Lat. amo, amas, amat, amamus, amatis, amant we get OFr. aim, aimes, aime, amons, amez, aiment, until the discrepancy is removed through analogy, and we get the regular modern forms aime, aimes, aime, aimons, aimez, aiment. The levelling tendency, however, is not strong enough to affect the initial a in amour and amant, which are felt as less closely connected with the verbal forms. What were at first only small differences may in course of time become greater through subsequent changes, as when the difference between feel and felt, keep and kept, etc., which was originally one of length only, became one of vowel quality as well, through the raising of long [e·] to [i·], while short [e] was not raised. And thus in many other cases. Different nations differ greatly in the degree in which they permit differentiation of cognate words; most nations resent any differentiation in initial sounds, while the Kelts have no objection to ‘the same word’ having as many as four different beginnings (for instance t-, d-, n-, nh-) according to circumstances. In Icelandic the word for ‘other, second’ has for centuries in different cases assumed such different forms as annarr, önnur, öðrum, aðrir, forms which in the other Scandinavian languages have been levelled down.
Besides equidistant and convergent sound changes, we also have divergent changes, where sounds that were once the same have later become different. This is simply because it's uncommon for a sound to change equally in all the positions where it occurs. In fact, most sound changes are influenced by factors like the sounds around them, their position (whether at the beginning, middle, or end), their placement in a stressed or unstressed syllable, and so on. For instance, consider some well-known examples from French: the Latin c (pronounced [k]) is treated differently before o (corpus > corps), a (canem > chien), and e (centum > cent); in amicum > ami, it has completely disappeared. Latin a[289] becomes e in a stressed open syllable (natum > né), except before a nasal (amat > aime); but after c, we have a different treatment (canem > chien), and in a closed syllable, it’s retained (arborem > arbre); in weak syllables, it is maintained initially (amorem > amour), but becomes [ə] (spelled e) at the end (bona > bonne). This list of main rules shows the significant differences that can occur among words that are closely related as parts of the same paradigm or word family; thus, for Latin amo, amas, amat, amamus, amatis, amant, we get Old French aim, aimes, aime, amons, amez, aiment, until the inconsistencies are resolved through analogy, leading to the regular modern forms aime, aimes, aime, aimons, aimez, aiment. However, the leveling tendency is not strong enough to affect the initial a in amour and amant, which are seen as less closely connected to the verbal forms. What were initially just small differences can grow larger over time through subsequent changes, such as the evolving difference between feel and felt, keep and kept, which originally was merely one of length, but later distinguished vowel quality as well, due to the raising of long [e·] to [i·], while short [e] was not affected. This pattern can be seen in many other cases. Different nations vary greatly in how much they allow differentiation of related words; most nations dislike any differentiation in initial sounds, while the Celts are okay with "the same word" having as many as four different beginnings (like t-, d-, n-, nh-) depending on the context. In Icelandic, the word for ‘other, second’ has for centuries taken on such different forms in various cases as annarr, önnur, öðrum, aðrir, forms which have been leveled out in the other Scandinavian languages.
It is a natural consequence of the manner in which phonology is usually investigated and represented in manuals of historical grammar—which start with some old stage and follow the various changes of each sound in later stages—that these divergent changes have attracted nearly the sole attention of scholars; this has led to the prevalent idea that sound laws and analogy are the two opposed principles in the life of languages, the former tending always to destroy regularity and harmony, and the latter reconstructing what would without it be chaos and confusion.[69]
The way phonology is typically studied and shown in historical grammar books—starting with an older stage and tracking the changes of each sound over time—naturally results in these different changes getting most of the focus from researchers. This has created a common belief that sound laws and analogy are the two conflicting forces in the evolution of languages, with sound laws often undermining consistency and harmony, while analogy helps restore order to what would otherwise be chaos and confusion.[69]
This view, however, is too rigorous and does not take into account the manysidedness of linguistic life. It is not every irregularity that is due to the operation of phonetic laws, as we have in all languages many survivals of the confused manner in which ideas were arranged and expressed in the mind of primitive man. On the other hand, there are many phonetic changes which do not increase the number of existing irregularities, but make for regularity and a simpler system through abolishing phonetic distinctions which had no semantic or functional value; such are, for instance, those convergent changes of unstressed vowels which have simplified the English flexional system (Ch. XIV § 10 above). And if we were in the habit of looking at linguistic change from the other end, tracing present sounds back to former sounds instead of beginning with antiquity, we should see that convergent changes are just as frequent as divergent ones. Indeed, many changes may be counted under both heads; an a, which is dissociated from other a’s through becoming e, is identified with and from henceforth shares the destiny of other e’s, etc.
This viewpoint, however, is too strict and overlooks the complexity of language. Not every irregularity is caused by phonetic rules, as all languages contain remnants of the jumbled ways in which early humans arranged and expressed their ideas. On the flip side, there are numerous phonetic changes that don’t create more irregularities but instead promote regularity and a simpler system by eliminating phonetic distinctions that have no meaning or function; for example, the convergent changes of unstressed vowels that have simplified the English inflectional system (Ch. XIV § 10 above). If we typically examined language change from a different perspective, tracing current sounds back to earlier ones rather than starting with the past, we would find that convergent changes occur as frequently as divergent ones. In fact, many changes can be categorized as belonging to both types; an a that separates from other a’s by becoming e is linked with and will now share the fate of other e’s, and so on.
XV.—§ 10. Extension of Sound Laws.
If a phonetic change has given to some words two forms without any difference in signification, the same alternation may be extended to other cases in which the sound in question has a different origin (‘phonetic analogy’). An undoubted instance is the unhistoric r in recent English. When the consonantal [r] was dropped finally and before a consonant while it was retained before a vowel, and words like better, here thus came to have two forms [betə, hiə] and [betər (ɔf), hiər (ən ðɛ·ə)] better off, here and there, the same alternation was transferred to words like idea, drama [ai'diə, dra·mə], so that the sound [r] is now very frequently inserted before a word beginning with a vowel: I’d no idea-r-of this, a drama-r-of Ibsen (many references MEG i. 13. 42). In French final t and s have become mute, but are retained before a vowel: il est [ɛ] venu, il est [ɛt] arrivé; les [le] femmes, les [lez] hommes; and now vulgar speakers will insert [t] or [z] in the wrong place between vowels: pa-t assez, j’allai-t écrire, avant-z-hier, moi-z-aussi; this is called ‘cuir’ or ‘velours.’
If a phonetic change has given some words two forms without any difference in meaning, that same variation can extend to other cases where the sound has a different origin (‘phonetic analogy’). A clear example is the unhistoric r in modern English. When the consonantal [r] was dropped at the end of words and before a consonant, but kept before a vowel, words like better and here ended up having two forms [betə, hiə] and [betər (ɔf), hiər (ən ðɛ·ə)] better off, here and there. This same variation was then applied to words like idea and drama [ai'diə, dra·mə], so that the sound [r] is now often added before a word starting with a vowel: I’d no idea-r-of this, a drama-r-of Ibsen (many references MEG i. 13. 42). In French, final t and s have become silent, but are kept before a vowel: il est [ɛ] venu, il est [ɛt] arrivé; les [le] femmes, les [lez] hommes; and now some speakers will incorrectly insert [t] or [z] between vowels: pa-t assez, j’allai-t écrire, avant-z-hier, moi-z-aussi; this is called ‘cuir’ or ‘velours.’
In course of time a ‘phonetic law’ may undergo a kind of metamorphosis, being extended to a greater and greater number of combinations. As regards recent times we are sometimes able to trace such a gradual development. A case in point is the dropping of [j] in [ju·] after certain consonants in English (see MEG i. 13, 7). It began with r as in true, rude; next came l when preceded by a consonant, as in blue, clue; in these cases[291] [j] is never heard. But after l not preceded by another consonant there is a good deal of vacillation, thus in Lucy, absolute; after [s, z] as in Susan, resume there is a strong tendency to suppress [j], though this pronunciation has not yet prevailed,[70] and after [t, d, n], as in tune, due, new, the suppression is in Britain only found in vulgar speakers, while in some parts of the United States it is heard from educated speakers as well. In the speech of these the sound law may be said to attack any [ju·] after any point consonant, while it will have to be formulated in various less comprehensive terms for British speakers belonging to older or younger generations. It is extremely difficult, not to say impossible, to reconcile such occurrences with the orthodox ‘young grammarian’ theory of sound changes being due to a shifting of the organic feeling or motor sensation (verschiebung des bewegungsgefühls) which is supposed to have necessarily taken place wherever the same sound was under the same phonetic conditions. For what are here the same phonetic conditions? The position after r, after l combinations, after l even when standing alone, after all point consonants? Each generation of English speakers will give a different answer to this question. Now, it is highly probable that many of the comprehensive prehistoric sound changes, of which we see only the final result, while possible intermediate stages evade our inquiry, have begun in the same modest way as the transition from [ju·] to [u·] in English: with regard to them we are in exactly the same position as a man who had heard only such speakers as say consistently [tru·, ru·d, blu·, lu·si, su·zn, ri'zu·m, tu·n, du·, nu·] and who would then naturally suppose that [j] in the combination [ju·] had been dropped all at once after any point consonant.
Over time, a ‘phonetic law’ can change, extending to more and more combinations. In recent years, we can sometimes see this gradual development. For example, the dropping of [j] in [ju·] after certain consonants in English (see MEG i. 13, 7) started with r as in true, rude; then it happened with l when it's preceded by a consonant, as in blue, clue; in these cases, [291] [j] is never heard. But after l not preceded by another consonant, there is quite a bit of variation, as in Lucy, absolute; after as in Susan, resume, there’s a strong tendency to drop [j], although this pronunciation hasn’t taken over yet,[70] and after [t, d, n], as in tune, due, new, the dropping occurs in Britain only among casual speakers, while in some parts of the United States, it’s also used by educated speakers. In their speech, the sound law seems to target any [ju·] after any point consonant, though it needs to be expressed in various less broad terms for British speakers of different ages. It’s extremely difficult, if not impossible, to align these phenomena with the traditional ‘young grammarian’ theory of sound changes arising from a shift in organic feeling or motor sensation (shift in the sense of movement) that’s supposed to occur whenever the same sound is under similar phonetic conditions. But what are the phonetic conditions here? The placement after r, after l combinations, after l standing alone, after all point consonants? Each generation of English speakers will answer this question differently. It’s quite likely that many of the comprehensive prehistoric sound changes, of which we only see the end results, while the possible intermediate stages are out of reach, began in the same simple way as the shift from [ju·] to [u·] in English: for them, we are just like someone who has only heard speakers who consistently say [tru·, ru·d, blu·, lu·si, su·zn, ri'zu·m, tu·n, du·, nu·] and who would naturally conclude that [j] in the combination [ju·] had been dropped all at once after any point consonant.
XV.—§ 11. Spreading of Sound Change.
Sound laws (to retain provisionally that firmly established term) have by some linguists, who rightly reject the comparison with natural laws (e.g. Meringer), been compared rather with the ‘laws’ of fashion in dress. But I think it is important to make a distinction here: the comparison with fashions throws no light whatever on the question how sound changes originate—it can tell us nothing about the first impulse to drop [j] in certain positions before [u·]; but the comparison is valid when we come to consider the question how such a change when first begun in one individual spreads to other individuals. While the former question has been[292] dealt with at some length in the preceding investigation, it now remains for us to say something about the latter. The spreading of phonetic change, as of any other linguistic change, is due to imitation, conscious and unconscious, of the speech habits of other people. We have already met with imitation in the chapters dealing with the child and with the influence exerted by foreign languages. But man is apt to imitate throughout the whole of his life, and this statement applies to his language as much as to his other habits. What he imitates, in this as in other fields, is not always the best; a real valuation of what would be linguistically good or preferable does not of course enter the head of the ‘man in the street.’ But he may imitate what he thinks pretty, or funny, and especially what he thinks characteristic of those people whom for some reason or other he looks up to. Imitation is essentially a social phenomenon, and if people do not always imitate the best (the best thing, the best pronunciation), they will generally imitate ‘their betters,’ i.e. those that are superior to them—in rank, in social position, in wealth, in everything that is thought enviable. What constitutes this superiority cannot be stated once for all; it varies according to surroundings, age, etc. A schoolboy may feel tempted to imitate a rough, swaggering boy a year or two older than himself rather than his teachers or parents, and in later life he may find other people worthy of imitation, according to his occupation or profession or individual taste. But when he does imitate he is apt to imitate everything, even sometimes things that are not worth imitating. In this way Percy, in Henry IV, Second Part, II. 3. 24—
Sound laws (let's stick with that well-established term for now) have been compared by some linguists, who correctly dismiss the comparison with natural laws (like Meringer does), more to the ‘laws’ of fashion in clothing. However, I think it's important to draw a line here: comparing sound changes to fashions doesn’t help us understand how they start. It doesn't explain the initial push to drop [j] in specific positions before [u·]; but this comparison does make sense when we look at how a change, once it starts with one person, spreads to others. We’ve explored the former question in detail in the previous investigation, so now we need to address the latter. The spread of phonetic change, like any other linguistic change, happens through the imitation, both conscious and unconscious, of the speech habits of others. We've touched on imitation in the chapters about children and the impact of foreign languages. But people tend to imitate throughout their lives, and this applies to their language just as much as to their other habits. What they imitate, in this area as in others, isn’t always the best; a real sense of what would be linguistically correct or preferable doesn’t usually cross the mind of the ‘average person.’ Instead, they may imitate what they find attractive or humorous, and especially what they consider typical of those they admire for some reason. Imitation is fundamentally a social behavior, and while people may not always mimic the best (the best thing, the best pronunciation), they often imitate ‘their betters,’ meaning those who are superior to them—in status, social standing, wealth, and everything else deemed desirable. What defines this superiority isn’t a fixed idea; it changes depending on factors like environment, age, and more. A schoolboy might be drawn to imitate a rough, swaggering classmate a year or two older than himself instead of his teachers or parents, and later in life, he may find different role models based on his job, profession, or personal preferences. But when he does pick up on someone, he tends to imitate everything, even things that aren’t worth copying. This way, Percy, in Henry IV, Second Part, II. 3. 24—
The spreading of a new pronunciation through imitation must necessarily take some time, though the process may in some instances be fairly rapid. In some historical instances we are able to see how a new sound, taking its rise in some particular part of a country, spreads gradually like a wave, until finally it has pervaded the whole of a linguistic area. It cannot become universal all at once; but it is evident that the more natural a new[293] mode of pronunciation seems to members of a particular speech community, the more readily will it be accepted and the more rapid will be its diffusion. Very often, both when the new pronunciation is easier and when there are special psychological inducements operating in one definite direction, the new form may originate independently in different individuals, and that of course will facilitate its acceptation by others. But as a rule a new pronunciation does not become general except after many attempts: it may have arisen many times and have died out again, until finally it finds a fertile soil in which to take firm root. It may not be superfluous to utter a warning against a fallacy which is found now and then in linguistic works: when some Danish or English document, say, of the fifteenth century contains a spelling indicative of a pronunciation which we should call ‘modern,’ it is hastily concluded that people in those days spoke in that respect exactly as they do now, whatever the usual spelling and the testimony of much later grammarians may indicate to the contrary. But this is far from certain. The more isolated such a spelling is, the greater is the probability that it shows nothing but an individual or even momentary deviation from what was then the common pronunciation—the first swallow ‘who found with horror that he’d not brought spring.’
The spread of a new pronunciation through imitation takes time, though in some cases, it can be pretty quick. Historically, we can see how a new sound starts in a specific region and gradually spreads like a wave, eventually covering an entire linguistic area. It can’t become universal all at once; however, it’s clear that the more natural a new pronunciation seems to members of a speech community, the easier it will be accepted and the faster it will spread. Often, when the new pronunciation is simpler or there are psychological reasons encouraging it, the new form can emerge independently in different people, which makes it easier for others to accept. However, as a general rule, a new pronunciation doesn’t become widespread without many attempts: it might have arisen multiple times and faded away again until it finds a suitable environment to take hold. It’s worth noting a common misconception found in some linguistic studies: when a fifteenth-century Danish or English document has a spelling that suggests a pronunciation we’d consider ‘modern,’ it’s often assumed that people spoke the same way back then, regardless of the usual spelling and what later grammarians indicate. But that assumption is far from certain. The more unique such a spelling is, the more likely it is to reflect an individual or temporary deviation from what was the common pronunciation at the time—the first swallow ‘who found with horror that he’d not brought spring.’
XV.—§ 12. Reaction.
Even those who have no linguistic training will have some apperception of sounds as such, and will notice regular correspondences, and even occasionally exaggerate them, thereby producing those ‘hypercorrect’ forms which are of specially frequent occurrence when dialect speakers try to use the ‘received standard’ of their country. The psychology of this process is well brought out by B. I. Wheeler, who relates (Transact. Am. Philol. Ass. 32. 14, 1901; I change his symbols into my own phonetic notation): “In my own native dialect I pronounced new as [nu·]. I have found myself in later years inclined to say [nju·], especially when speaking carefully and particularly in public; so also [tju·zdi] Tuesday. There has developed itself in connexion with these and other words a dual sound-image [u·:ju·] of such validity that whenever [u·] is to be formed after a dental [alveolar] explosive or nasal, the alternative [ju·] is likely to present itself and create the effect of momentary uncertainty. Less frequently than in new, Tuesday, the [j] intrudes itself in tune, duty, due, dew, tumour, tube, tutor, etc.; but under special provocation I am liable to use it in any of these, and have even caught myself, when in a mood of uttermost precision, passing beyond the bounds of the imitative[294] adoption of the new sound into self-annexed territory, and creating [dju·] do and [tju·] two.” One more instance from America may be given: “In the dialect of Missouri and the neighbouring States, final a in such words as America, Arizona, Nevada becomes y—Americy, Arizony, Nevady. All educated people in that region carefully correct this vulgarism out of their speech; and many of them carry the correction too far and say Missoura, praira, etc.” (Sturtevant, LCH 79). Similarly, many Irish people, noticing that refined English has [i·] in many cases where they have [e·] (tea, sea, please, etc.) adopt [i·] in these words, and transfer it erroneously to words like great, pear, bear, etc. (MEG i. 11. 73); they may also, when correcting their own ar into er, in such words as learn, go too far and speak of derning a stocking (Joyce, English as we speak it in Ireland, 93). Cf. from England such forms as ruing, certing, for ruin, certain.
Even people without any language training can perceive sounds and notice patterns, sometimes even exaggerating them, which leads to those ‘hypercorrect’ forms that are commonly found when dialect speakers attempt to use the ‘standard language’ of their country. B. I. Wheeler highlights the psychology behind this process, stating (Transact. Am. Philol. Ass. 32. 14, 1901; I've changed his symbols into my own phonetic notation): “In my own dialect, I pronounced new as [nu·]. As I've gotten older, I've started saying [nju·], especially when speaking carefully or in public; the same goes for [tju·zdi] Tuesday. A dual sound-image [u·:ju·] has developed with these and other words to the point where whenever [u·] follows a dental [alveolar] explosive or nasal, the alternative [ju·] often shows up, causing a moment of uncertainty. Less often than in new and Tuesday, the [j] pops up in tune, duty, due, dew, tumour, tube, tutor, and so on; but under certain circumstances, I can slip it into any of these, and I’ve even caught myself, when trying to be extremely precise, drifting beyond the imitation of the new sound and creating [dju·] do and [tju·] two.” Another example from America is: “In the dialect of Missouri and surrounding States, the final a in words like America, Arizona, Nevada turns into y—Americy, Arizony, Nevady. All educated people in that area make a point to exclude this trend from their speech; many even overcorrect and say Missoura, praira, etc.” (Sturtevant, LCH 79). Similarly, many Irish people, noticing that refined English uses [i·] where they have [e·] (like tea, sea, please), start using [i·] in these words and mistakenly apply it to words like great, pear, bear, etc. (MEG i. 11. 73); they may also, when changing their ar to er in words like learn, go too far and say derning a stocking (Joyce, English as we speak it in Ireland, 93). Examples from England include forms like ruing, certing for ruin, certain.
From Germany I may mention that Low German speakers desiring to talk High German are apt to say zeller instead of teller, because High German in many words has z for their t (zahl, zahm, etc.), and that those who in their native speech have j for g (Berlin, etc., eine jute jebratene jans ist eine jute jabe jottes) will sometimes, when trying to talk correctly, say getzt, gahr for jetzt, jahr.[72]
From Germany, I should note that Low German speakers who want to speak High German often say zeller instead of teller, because High German uses z where there is t in many words (zahl, zahm, etc.). Additionally, those whose native speech has j for g (like in Berlin, etc., eine jute jebratene jans ist eine jute jabe jottes) will sometimes mistakenly say getzt and gahr instead of jetzt and jahr.[72]
It will be easily seen that such hypercorrect forms are closely related to those ‘spelling pronunciations’ which become frequent when there is much reading of a language whose spelling is not accurately phonetic; the nineteenth century saw a great number of them, and their number is likely to increase in this century—especially among social upstarts, who are always fond of showing off their new-gained superiority in this and similar ways. But they need not detain us here, as being really foreign to our subject, the natural development of speech sounds. I only wish to point out that many forms which are apparently due to influence from spelling may not have their origin exclusively from that source, but may be genuine archaic forms that have been preserved through purely oral tradition by the side of more worn-down forms of the same word. For it must be admitted that two or three forms of the same word may coexist and be used according to the more or less solemn style of utterance employed. Even[295] among savages, who are unacquainted with the art of writing, we are told that archaic forms of speech are often kept up and remembered as parts of old songs only, or as belonging to solemn rites, cults, etc.
It’s easy to see that these overly correct forms are closely linked to those “spelling pronunciations” that become common when people read a language with inconsistent spelling. The nineteenth century saw many of these, and we’re likely to see even more of them this century—especially among social climbers who love to flaunt their newly acquired status in this way. However, they don’t really relate to our main topic, which is the natural development of speech sounds. I just want to point out that many forms that seem to come from spelling may not originate solely from that. They could also be genuine old forms that have survived through oral tradition alongside more commonly used versions of the same word. It’s worth noting that two or three forms of the same word can coexist and be used depending on the level of formality in the speech. Even[295] among people who have never learned to write, it’s said that archaic speech forms are often preserved and remembered only as parts of old songs, or associated with formal rituals, cults, etc.
XV.—§ 13. Sound Laws and Etymological Science.
In this and the preceding chapter I have tried to pass in review the various circumstances which make for changes in the phonetic structure of languages. My treatment is far from exhaustive and may have other defects; but I want to point out the fact that nowhere have I found any reason to accept the theory that sound changes always take place according to rigorous or ‘blind’ laws admitting no exceptions. On the contrary, I have found many indications that complete consistency is no more to be expected from human beings in pronunciation than in any other sphere.
In this chapter and the one before, I’ve tried to review the different factors that lead to changes in the sound structure of languages. My approach isn't comprehensive and may have its flaws; however, I want to highlight that I haven't found any evidence to support the theory that sound changes always occur according to strict or 'blind' laws with no exceptions. In fact, I’ve come across many signs that complete consistency in pronunciation is no more realistic to expect from people than in any other area.
It is very often said that if sound laws admitted of exceptions there would be no possibility of a science of etymology. Thus Curtius wrote as early as 1858 (as quoted by Oertel 259): “If the history of language really showed such sporadic aberrations, such pathological, wholly irrational phonetic malformations, we should have to give up all etymologizing. For only that which is governed by law and reducible to a coherent system can form the object of scientific investigation; whatever is due to chance may at best be guessed at, but will never yield to scientific inference.” In his practice, however, Curtius was not so strict as his followers. Leskien, one of the recognized leaders of the ‘young grammarians,’ says (Deklination, xxvii): “If exceptions are admitted at will (abweichungen), it amounts to declaring that the object of examination, language, is inaccessible to scientific comprehension.” Since then, it has been repeated over and over again that without strict adherence to phonetic laws etymological science is a sheer impossibility, and sometimes those who have doubted the existence of strict laws in phonology have been looked upon as obscurantists adverse to a scientific treatment of language in general, although, of course, they did not believe that everything is left to chance or that they were free to put forward purely arbitrary exceptions.
It’s often said that if sound laws allowed for exceptions, there would be no real possibility of etymology as a science. Curtius wrote as early as 1858 (as quoted by Oertel 259): “If the history of language really showed such random deviations and completely irrational phonetic distortions, we would have to abandon all etymology. Only what is governed by law and can be reduced to a coherent system can be the subject of scientific study; anything that is due to chance may be guessed but will never be subject to scientific reasoning.” However, in practice, Curtius was not as rigid as his followers. Leskien, one of the recognized leaders of the 'young grammarians,' says (Deklination, xxvii): “If exceptions are allowed at will (deviations), it means declaring that the subject of study, language, is beyond scientific understanding.” Since then, it’s been repeated endlessly that without strict adherence to phonetic laws, etymological science is simply impossible, and sometimes those who have questioned the existence of strict laws in phonology have been viewed as obscurantists resistant to a scientific approach to language in general, even though they certainly did not believe that everything is left to chance or that they were free to propose purely arbitrary exceptions.
There are, however, many instances in which it is hardly possible to deny etymological connexion, though ‘the phonetic laws are not observed.’ Is not Gothic azgo with its voiced consonants evidently ‘the same word’ as E. ash, G. asche, Dan. aske, with their voiceless consonants? G. neffe with short vowel must nevertheless be identical with MHG. neve, OHG. nevo; E. pebble with OE. papol; rescue with ME. rescowe; flagon with Fr. flacon,[296] though each of these words contains deviations from what we find in other cases. It is hard to keep apart two similar forms for ‘heart,’ one with initial gh in Skt. hrd and Av. zered-, and another with initial k in Gr. kardía, kēr, Lat. cor, Goth. haírto, etc. The Greek ordinals hébdomos, ógdoos have voiced consonants over against the voiceless combinations in heptá, oktṓ, and yet cannot be separated from them. All this goes to show (and many more cases might be instanced) that there are in every language words so similar in sound and signification that they cannot be separated, though they break the ‘sound laws’: in such cases, where etymologies are too palpable, even the strictest scholars momentarily forget their strictness, maybe with great reluctance and in the secret hope that some day the reason for the deviation may be discovered and the principle thus be maintained.
There are many instances where it's hard to deny a connection in word origins, even when the phonetic rules aren't followed. Isn't Gothic azgo—with its voiced consonants—clearly the same word as E. ash, G. asche, and Dan. aske, which have voiceless consonants? G. neffe with a short vowel must still be identical to MHG. neve and OHG. nevo; E. pebble connects with OE. papol; rescue relates to ME. rescowe; flagon is linked to Fr. flacon,[296] even though each of these words shows differences from what we see elsewhere. It’s tough to distinguish between two similar forms for ‘heart,’ one starting with gh in Skt. hrd and Av. zered-, and another starting with k in Gr. kardía, kēr, Lat. cor, Goth. haírto, etc. The Greek ordinals hébdomos and ógdoos have voiced consonants compared to the voiceless forms in heptá and oktṓ, yet they can’t be separated. All this shows (and there are many more examples) that in every language, there are words so similar in sound and meaning that they can’t be separated, even if they break the ‘sound laws.’ In such cases, where the connections are too obvious, even the strictest scholars temporarily set aside their rigor, possibly with great reluctance and in the quiet hope that one day the reason for the differences might be found and the principle upheld.
Instead of exacting strict adherence to sound laws everywhere as the basis of any etymologizing, it seems therefore to be in better agreement with common sense to say: whenever an etymology is not palpably evident, whenever there is some difficulty because the compared words are either too remote in sound or in sense or belong to distant periods of the same language or to remotely related languages, your etymology cannot be reckoned as proved unless you have shown by other strictly parallel cases that the sound in question has been treated in exactly the same way in the same language. This, of course, applies more to old than to modern periods, and we thus see that while in living languages accessible to direct observation we do not find sound laws observed without exceptions, and though we must suppose that, on account of the essential similarity of human psychology, conditions have been the same at all periods, it is not unreasonable, in giving etymologies for words from old periods, to act as if sound changes followed strict laws admitting no exceptions; this is simply a matter of proof, and really amounts to this: where the matter is doubtful, we must require a great degree of probability in that field which allows of the simplest and most easily controllable formulas, namely the phonetic field. For here we have comparatively definite phenomena and are consequently able with relative ease to compute the possibilities of change, while this is infinitely more difficult in the field of significations. The possibilities of semantic change are so manifold that the only thing generally required when the change is not obvious is to show some kind of parallel change, which need not even have taken place in the same language or group of languages, while with regard to sounds the corresponding changes must have occurred in the same language and at the same period in order for the evidence to be sufficient to establish the etymology in question.
Instead of insisting on strict adherence to sound laws everywhere as the basis for any etymology, it seems more reasonable to say: whenever an etymology isn’t clearly evident, when there’s some difficulty because the words being compared are either too different in sound or meaning, or belong to distant times in the same language or to loosely related languages, your etymology can’t be considered as proven unless you’ve demonstrated through other strictly parallel cases that the sound in question has been treated in exactly the same way in the same language. This, of course, applies more to older periods than to modern ones. Therefore, we observe that while in living languages that we can directly observe, sound laws are not consistently followed without exceptions, and although we must assume that, due to the fundamental similarity of human psychology, conditions have been the same across all periods, it's not unreasonable, when giving etymologies for words from earlier times, to act as if sound changes followed strict laws with no exceptions; this is merely a matter of proof, and essentially means this: where the issue is uncertain, we need a high degree of probability in that area which allows for the simplest and most easily verifiable formulas, namely the phonetic field. Because here we have relatively clear phenomena and can more easily calculate the potential for change, while doing so is infinitely more challenging in the area of meanings. The possibilities of semantic change are so numerous that the only thing generally required when the change isn’t clear is to demonstrate some kind of parallel change, which doesn’t even need to have occurred in the same language or group of languages, whereas for sounds, the corresponding changes must have taken place in the same language and during the same time period for the evidence to be sufficient to establish the proposed etymology.
It would perhaps be best if linguists entirely gave up the habit of speaking about phonetic ‘laws,’ and instead used some such expression as phonetic formulas or rules. But if we are to keep the word ‘law,’ we may with some justice think of the use of that word in juridical parlance. When we read such phrases as: this assumption is against phonetic laws, or, phonetic laws do not allow us this or that etymology, or, the writer of some book under review is guilty of many transgressions of established phonetic laws, etc., such expressions cannot help suggesting the idea that phonetic laws resemble paragraphs of some criminal law. We may formulate the principle in something like the following way: If in the etymologies you propose you do not observe these rules, if, for instance, you venture to make Gr. kaléo = E. call in spite of the fact that Gr. k in other words corresponds to E. h, then you incur the severest punishment of science, your etymology is rejected, and you yourself are put outside the pale of serious students.
It might be best if linguists completely stopped calling them phonetic ‘laws’ and instead referred to them as phonetic formulas or rules. However, if we’re going to keep the term ‘law,’ we can reasonably think of it in a legal context. When we come across phrases like: this assumption contradicts phonetic laws, or phonetic laws don’t permit this or that etymology, or the author of a certain book being reviewed has committed many violations of established phonetic laws, these expressions inevitably evoke the idea that phonetic laws are similar to sections of criminal law. We can summarize the principle in something like this: If you propose etymologies that do not adhere to these rules, for example, if you claim that Gr. kaléo = E. call despite Gr. k in other words corresponding to E. h, then you face the harshest penalty in the field; your etymology will be dismissed, and you’ll find yourself excluded from the community of serious scholars.
In another respect phonetic laws may be compared with what we might call a Darwinian law in zoology, such as this: the fore-limbs of the common ancestor of mammals have developed into flippers in whales and into hands in apes and men. The similarity between both kinds of laws is not inconsiderable. A microscopic examination of whales, even an exact investigation by means of the eye alone, will reveal innumerable little deviations: no two flippers are exactly alike. And in the same way no two persons speak in exactly the same way. But the fact that we cannot in detail account for each of these nuances should not make us doubt that they are developed in a perfectly natural way, in accordance with the great law of causality, nor should we despair of the possibility of scientific treatment, even if some of the flippers and some of the sounds are not exactly what we should expect. A law of fore-limb development can only be deduced through such observation of many flippers as will single out what is typical of whales’ flippers, and then a comparison with the typical fore-limbs of their ancestors or of their congeners among existing mammals. And in the same way we do not find laws of phonetic development until, after leaving what can be examined as it were microscopically, we go on telescopically to examine languages which are far removed from each other in space or time: then small differences disappear, and we discover nothing but the great lines of a regular evolution which is the outcome of an infinite number of small movements in many different directions.
In a different way, we can compare phonetic laws to what we might call a Darwinian law in zoology, like this: the front limbs of the common ancestor of mammals have evolved into flippers in whales and into hands in apes and humans. The similarity between these two types of laws is notable. A close inspection of whales, even just by looking, will show countless little differences: no two flippers are exactly the same. Similarly, no two people speak in the exact same way. However, the fact that we can’t detail every single one of these nuances shouldn’t make us doubt that they develop in a perfectly natural way, following the great law of causality, nor should we lose hope for scientific analysis, even if some of the flippers and sounds aren’t exactly what we might expect. A law of limb development can only be figured out by observing many flippers to identify what is typical for whale flippers and then comparing them to the typical fore-limbs of their ancestors or related species among existing mammals. In the same way, we don't find laws of phonetic development until, after examining things microscopically, we look at languages that are far apart in space or time: then, small differences fade away, and we see only the major patterns of a regular evolution that results from countless small movements in many different directions.
XV.—§ 14. Conclusion.
It has been one of the leading thoughts in the two chapters devoted to the causes of linguistic change that phonetic changes, to be fully understood, should not be isolated from other changes, for in actual linguistic life we witness a constant interplay of sound and sense. Not only should each sound change be always as far as possible seen in connexion with other sound changes going on in the same period in the same language (as in the great vowel-raising in English), but the effects on the speech material as a whole should in each case be investigated, so as to show what homophones (if any) were produced, and what danger they entailed to the understanding of natural sentences. Sounds should never be isolated from the words in which they occur, nor words from sentences. No hard-and-fast boundary can be drawn between phonetic and non-phonetic changes. The psychological motives for both kinds of changes are the same in many cases, and the way in which both kinds spread through imitation is absolutely identical: what was said on this subject above (§ 11) applies without the least qualification to any linguistic change, whether in sounds, in grammatical forms, in syntax, in the signification of words, or in the adoption of new words and dropping of old ones.
It has been a central idea in the two chapters focused on the reasons behind changes in language that phonetic changes should not be viewed in isolation from other changes, as we observe a continuous interaction of sound and meaning in real language use. Each sound change should always, as much as possible, be considered in relation to other sound changes happening at the same time in the same language (like the significant vowel-raising in English). Additionally, the impact on the overall speech material should be examined to identify what homophones (if any) were created and what challenges they posed to understanding natural sentences. Sounds should never be separated from the words they exist in, nor words from the sentences they form. There is no strict division between phonetic and non-phonetic changes. The psychological reasons behind both types of changes are often the same, and the way these changes spread through imitation is exactly the same: everything mentioned previously on this topic (§ 11) applies equally to any linguistic change, whether in sounds, grammatical forms, syntax, the meanings of words, or the introduction of new words and the phasing out of old ones.
We shall here finally very briefly consider something which plays a certain part in the development of language, but which has not been adequately dealt with in what precedes, namely, the desire to play with language. We have already met with the effects of playfulness in one of the chapters devoted to children (p. 148): here we shall see that the same tendency is also powerful in the language of grown-up people, though most among young people. There is a certain exuberance which will not rest contented with traditional expressions, but finds amusement in the creation and propagation of new words and in attaching new meanings to old words: this is the exact opposite of that linguistic poverty which we found was at the bottom of such minimum languages as Pidgin-English. We find it in the wealth of pet-names which lovers have for each other and mothers for their children, in the nicknames of schoolboys and of ‘pals’ of later life, as well as in the perversions of ordinary words which at times become the fashion among small sets of people who are constantly thrown together and have plenty of spare time; cf. also the ‘little language’ of Swift and Stella. Most of these forms of speech have a narrow range and have only an ephemeral existence, but in the world of slang the same tendencies are constantly at work.
We will briefly look at something that plays a role in the development of language but hasn't been fully addressed before: the desire to have fun with language. We've already seen the playful effects in one of the chapters focused on children (p. 148); now we'll observe that this same tendency is also strong in adult language, especially among young people. There's a certain enthusiasm that refuses to be satisfied with traditional expressions and instead enjoys creating and spreading new words as well as giving new meanings to old ones. This is the complete opposite of the linguistic simplicity found in minimal languages like Pidgin-English. We see this in the abundance of pet names lovers use for each other and mothers for their children, in the nicknames of schoolboys and later friendships, as well as in the creative twists of everyday words that sometimes become trendy among small groups of people who spend a lot of time together. Consider also the "little language" of Swift and Stella. Most of these speech forms have a narrow scope and are short-lived, but in the realm of slang, the same tendencies are constantly at play.
Slang words are often confused with vulgarisms, though the[299] two things are really different. The vulgar tongue is a class dialect, and a vulgarism is an element of the normal speech of low-class people, just as ordinary dialect words are elements of the natural speech of peasants in one particular district; slang words, on the other hand, are words used in conscious contrast to the natural or normal speech: they can be found in all classes of society in certain moods, and on certain occasions when a speaker wants to avoid the natural or normal word because he thinks it too flat or uninteresting and wants to achieve a different effect by breaking loose from the ordinary expression. A vulgarism is what will present itself at once to the mind of a person belonging to one particular class; a slang word is something that is wilfully substituted for the first word that will present itself. The distinction will perhaps appear most clearly in the case of grammar: if a man says them boys instead of those boys, or knowed instead of knew, these are the normal forms of his language, and he knows no better, but the educated man looks down upon these forms as vulgar. Inversely, an educated man may amuse himself now and then by using forms which he perfectly well knows are not the received forms, thus wunk from wink, collode from collide, praught from preach (on the analogy of taught); “We handshook and candlestuck, as somebody said, and went to bed” (H. James). But, of course, slang is more productive in the lexical than in the grammatical portion of language. And there is something that makes it difficult in practice always to keep slang and vulgar speech apart, namely, that when a person wants to leave the beaten path of normal language he is not always particular as to the source whence he takes his unusual words, and he may therefore sometimes take a vulgar word and raise it to the dignity of a slang word.
Slang words are often mistaken for vulgar language, but the two are really different. Vulgar language is a social dialect, and a vulgarism is a part of the everyday speech of lower-class people, just like regular dialect words are part of the natural speech of peasants in specific areas. Slang words, on the other hand, are used deliberately to stand out from normal speech; they appear across all social classes in certain moods and situations when a speaker wants to avoid the usual word because they find it too plain or boring and seeks a different effect by stepping away from standard expression. A vulgarism is what immediately comes to mind for someone from a particular class, while a slang word is something intentionally used in place of the first word that arises. This difference can be seen most clearly in grammar: if someone says them boys instead of those boys, or knowed instead of knew, these are the normal forms of their language, and they don't know any better, but educated people tend to look down on these forms as vulgar. Conversely, an educated person might occasionally enjoy using forms they know aren’t standard, such as wunk from wink, collode from collide, or praught from preach (following the pattern of taught); “We handshook and candlestuck, as someone said, and went to bed” (H. James). However, slang tends to be more creative in vocabulary than in grammar. It's also challenging to always keep slang and vulgar speech separate in practice, as when someone wants to veer away from standard language, they may not be particular about where they get their unusual words, sometimes using a vulgar term and elevating it to the status of slang.
A slang word is at first individual, but may through imitation become fashionable in certain sets; after some time it may either be accepted by everybody as part of the normal language, or else, more frequently, be so hackneyed that no one finds pleasure in using it any longer.
A slang word is initially unique to an individual, but can become trendy within certain groups through imitation; eventually, it may either be embraced by everyone as a standard part of the language, or, more commonly, become so overused that no one enjoys using it anymore.
Slang words may first be words from the ordinary language used in a different sense, generally metaphorically. Sometimes we meet with the same figurative expression in the slang of various countries, as when the ‘head’ is termed the upper story (upper loft, upper works) in English, øverste etage in Danish, and oberstübchen in German; more often different images are chosen in different languages, as when for the same idea we have nut or chump in English and pære (‘pear’) in Danish, coco or ciboule (or boule) in French. Slang words of this character may in some instances give rise to expressions the origin of which is totally forgotten. In old slang there is an expression for the tongue, the red rag; this is[300] shortened into the rag, and I suspect that the verb to rag, ‘to scold, rate, talk severely to’ (“of obscure origin,” NED), is simply from this substantive (cf. to jaw).
Slang words often start as regular terms used in a different way, usually in a metaphorical sense. Sometimes, we find the same figurative expression in the slang of different countries, like when "head" is referred to as the upper story (upper loft, upper works) in English, øverste etage in Danish, and oberstübchen in German; more often, different metaphors are used in different languages, as with nut or chump in English and pære ('pear') in Danish, coco or ciboule (or boule) in French. Slang words like these can sometimes lead to phrases where the original meaning is completely forgotten. For example, in old slang, the term for the tongue was the red rag; this was shortened to the rag, and I suspect that the verb to rag, meaning 'to scold, criticize, talk harshly to' (“of obscure origin,” NED), comes from this noun (see to jaw).
Secondly, slang words may be words of the normal language used in their ordinary signification, but more or less modified in regard to form. Thus we have many shortened forms, exam, quad, pub, for examination, quadrangle, public-house, etc. Not unfrequently the shortening process is combined with an extension, some ending being more or less arbitrarily substituted for the latter part of the word, as when football becomes footer, and Rugby football and Association football become Rugger and Socker, or when at Cambridge a freshman is called a fresher and a bedmaker a bedder.
Secondly, slang words can be regular words used in their usual meaning but with some changes in form. For example, we have many shortened versions like exam, quad, and pub for examination, quadrangle, and public-house, respectively. Often, the shortening process is mixed with an extension, where an ending is somewhat randomly swapped for the latter part of the word, like when football turns into footer, and Rugby football and Association football become Rugger and Socker. Likewise, at Cambridge, a freshman is referred to as a fresher and a bedmaker as a bedder.
In schoolboys’ slang (Harrow) there is an ending -agger which may be added instead of the latter part of any word; about 1885 Prince Albert Victor when at Cambridge was nicknamed the Pragger; an Agnostic was called a Nogger, etc. I strongly suspect that the word swagger is formed in the same way from swashbuckler. Another schoolboys’ ending is -g: fog, seg, lag, for ‘first, second, last,’ gag at Winchester for ‘gathering’ (a special kind of Latin exercise). Charles Lamb mentions from Christ’s Hospital crug for ‘a quarter of a loaf,’ evidently from crust; sog = sovereign, snag = snail (old), swig = swill; words like fag, peg away, and others are perhaps to be explained from the same tendency. Arnold Bennett in one of his books says of a schoolboy that his vocabulary comprised an extraordinary number of words ending in gs: foggs, seggs, for first, second, etc. It is interesting to note that in French argot there are similar endings added to more or less mutilated words: -aque, -èque, -oque (Sainéan, L’Argot ancien, 1907, 50 and especially 57).
In Harrow schoolboys' slang, there’s an ending -agger that can replace the last part of any word. Around 1885, Prince Albert Victor was nicknamed the Pragger while at Cambridge; an Agnostic was called a Nogger, and so on. I strongly suspect that the word swagger comes from swashbuckler in a similar way. Another schoolboys' ending is -g: fog, seg, lag for ‘first, second, last,’ and gag at Winchester for ‘gathering’ (a specific type of Latin exercise). Charles Lamb mentions from Christ’s Hospital crug for ‘a quarter of a loaf,’ clearly derived from crust; sog means sovereign, snag means snail (old), and swig means swill. Words like fag, peg away, and others likely reflect a similar trend. Arnold Bennett, in one of his books, notes that a schoolboy had an unusually large number of words ending in gs: foggs, seggs for first, second, and so on. It’s interesting to point out that in French argot, there are similar endings added to somewhat distorted words: -aque, -èque, -oque (Sainéan, L’Argot ancien, 1907, 50 and especially 57).
There is also a peculiar class of roundabout expressions in which the speaker avoids the regular word, but hints at it in a covert way by using some other word, generally a proper name, which bears a resemblance to it or is derived from it, really or seemingly. Instead of saying ‘I want to go to bed,’ he will say, ‘I am for Bedfordshire,’ or in German ‘Ich gehe nach Bethlehem’ or ‘nach Bettingen,’ in Danish ‘gå til Slumstrup, Sovstrup, Hvilsted.’ Thus also ‘send a person to Birching-lane,’ i.e. to whip him, ‘he has been at Hammersmith,’ i.e. has been beaten, thrashed; ‘you are on the highway to Needham,’ i.e. on the high-road to poverty, etc. (Cf. my paper on “Punning or Allusive Phrases” in Nord. Tidsskr. f. Fil. 3 r. 9. 66.)
There’s also a unique type of roundabout expressions where the speaker skips the usual word and hints at it in a subtle way by using another word—usually a proper name—that resembles it or is related to it, either directly or indirectly. Instead of saying, "I want to go to bed," he might say, "I’m off to Bedfordshire," or in German, “I'm going to Bethlehem” or “to Bettingen,” in Danish, “go to Slumstrup, Sovstrup, Hvilsted.” Similarly, saying “send someone to Birching-lane” means to whip him, “he has been to Hammersmith” means he has been beaten, and “you are on the highway to Needham” means you’re on the path to poverty, etc. (See my paper on “Punning or Allusive Phrases” in Nord. Tidsskr. f. Fil. 3 r. 9. 66.)
The language of poetry is closely related to slang, in so far as both strive to avoid commonplace and everyday expressions. The difference is that where slang looks only for the striking or[301] unexpected expression, and therefore often is merely eccentric or funny (sometimes only would-be comic), poetry looks higher and craves abiding beauty—beauty in thought as well as beauty in form, the latter obtained, among other things, by rhythm, alliteration, rime, and harmonious variety of vowel sounds.
The language of poetry is closely tied to slang because both aim to steer clear of ordinary, everyday expressions. The key difference is that while slang seeks out striking or unexpected phrases and often ends up being just eccentric or amusing (sometimes only trying to be funny), poetry aims for something deeper and yearns for lasting beauty—beauty in both thought and form. The latter is achieved through various means, including rhythm, alliteration, rhyme, and a pleasing variety of vowel sounds.
In some countries these forms tend to become stereotyped, and then may to some extent kill the poetic spirit, poetry becoming artificiality instead of art; the later Skaldic poetry may serve as an illustration. Where there is a strong literary tradition—and that may be found even where there is no written literature—veneration for the old literature handed down from one’s ancestors will often lead to a certain fossilization of the literary language, which becomes a shrine of archaic expressions that no one uses naturally or can master without great labour. If this state of things persists for centuries, it results in a cleavage between the spoken and the written language which cannot but have the most disastrous effects on all higher education: the conditions prevailing nowadays in Greece and in Southern India may serve as a warning. Space forbids me more than a bare mention of this topic, which would deserve a much fuller treatment; for details I may refer to K. Krumbacher, Das Problem der neugriechischen Schriftsprache, Munich, 1902 (for the other side of the case see G. N. Hatzidakis, Die Sprachfrage in Griechenland, Athens, 1905) and G. V. Ramamurti, A Memorandum on Modern Telugu, Madras, 1913.
In some countries, these forms can become stereotyped, which may somewhat stifle the poetic spirit, turning poetry into artificiality instead of genuine art; later Skaldic poetry is a good example of this. When there’s a strong literary tradition—and that can exist even without written literature—the respect for the old literature passed down from ancestors often leads to a kind of fossilization of the literary language. This language becomes a repository of archaic expressions that no one uses naturally or can master without significant effort. If this situation continues for centuries, it creates a divide between spoken and written language that can seriously harm higher education: the current conditions in Greece and Southern India serve as a warning. There isn't enough space here to explore this issue in depth, which certainly deserves more attention. For more details, I can refer to K. Krumbacher, Das Problem der neugriechischen Schriftsprache, Munich, 1902 (for a contrasting viewpoint, see G. N. Hatzidakis, Die Sprachfrage in Griechenland, Athens, 1905) and G. V. Ramamurti, A Memorandum on Modern Telugu, Madras, 1913.
CHAPTER XVI
WORD ORIGIN
§ 1. Achievements. § 2. Doubtful Cases. § 3. Facts, not Fancies. § 4. Hope. § 5. Requirements. § 6. Blendings. § 7. Echo Words. § 8. Some Conjunctions. § 9. Object of Etymology. § 10. Reconstruction.
§ 1. Achievements. § 2. Doubtful Cases. § 3. Facts, not Fancies. § 4. Hope. § 5. Requirements. § 6. Blendings. § 7. Echo Words. § 8. Some Conjunctions. § 9. Object of Etymology. § 10. Reconstruction.
XVI.—§ 1. Achievements.
Few things have been more often quoted in works on linguistics than Voltaire’s mot that in etymology vowels count for nothing and consonants for very little. But it is now said just as often that the satire might be justly levelled at the pseudo-scientific etymology of the eighteenth century, but has no application to our own times, in which etymology knows how to deal with both vowels and consonants, and—it should be added, though it is often forgotten—with the meanings of words. One often comes across outbursts of joy and pride in the achievements of modern etymological science, like the following, which is quoted here instar omnium: “Nowadays etymology has got past the period of more or less ‘happy thoughts’ (glücklichen einfälle) and has developed into a science in which, exactly as in any other science, serious persevering work must lead to reliable results” (H. Schröder, Ablautstudien, 1910, X; cf. above, Max Müller and Whitney, p. 89).
Few things have been quoted more in linguistics than Voltaire’s mot that in etymology vowels don’t count for much and consonants even less. But it’s now said just as often that this critique might justly apply to the pseudo-scientific etymology of the eighteenth century, but it doesn’t apply to our times, where etymology manages to consider both vowels and consonants, and—it should be noted, though people often forget—also the meanings of words. You often see expressions of joy and pride in the accomplishments of modern etymological science, like the following, quoted here instar omnium: “Nowadays, etymology has moved past the stage of more or less ‘happy thoughts’ (happy ideas) and has evolved into a science where, just like in any other science, serious, persistent work must lead to reliable results” (H. Schröder, Ablautstudien, 1910, X; cf. above, Max Müller and Whitney, p. 89).
There is no denying that much has been achieved, but it is equally true that a skeptical mind cannot fail to be struck with the uncertainty of many proposed explanations: very often scholars have not got beyond ‘happy thoughts,’ many of which have not even been happy enough to have been accepted by anybody except their first perpetrators. From English alone, which for twelve hundred years has had an abundant written literature, and which has been studied by many eminent linguists, who have had many sister-languages with which to compare it, it would be an easy matter to compile a long list of words, well-known words of everyday occurrence, which etymologists have had to give up as beyond their powers of solution (fit, put, pull, cut, rouse, pun, fun, job). And equally perplexing are many words now current all over Europe, some of them comparatively recent and yet completely enigmatic: race, baron, baroque, rococo, zinc.
There’s no doubt that a lot has been accomplished, but it’s also true that a skeptical perspective can’t help but notice the uncertainty surrounding many suggested explanations: often, scholars haven’t moved beyond mere “happy thoughts,” many of which have not even been popular enough to be accepted by anyone other than their original creators. Just from English alone, which has had a rich written literature for twelve hundred years and has been studied by many prominent linguists alongside various sister languages, it wouldn’t be difficult to create a long list of common, everyday words that etymologists have had to abandon as unsolvable (fit, put, pull, cut, rouse, pun, fun, job). Equally puzzling are many words that are currently used across Europe, some of which are relatively recent yet completely mysterious: race, baron, baroque, rococo, zinc.
XVI.—§ 2. Doubtful Cases.
Or let us take a word of that class which forms the staple subject of etymological disquisitions, one in which the semantic side is literally as clear as sunshine, namely the word for ‘sun.’ Here we have, among others, the following forms: (1) sun, OE. sunne, Goth. sunno; (2) Dan., Lat. sol, Goth. sauil, Gr. hḗlios; (3) OE. sigel, sægl, Goth. sugil; (4) OSlav. slǔnǐce, Russ. solnce (now with mute l). That these forms are related cannot be doubted, but their mutual relation, and their relation to Gr. selḗnē, which means ‘moon,’ and to OE. swegel ‘sky,’ have never been cleared up. Holthausen derives sunno from the verb sinnan ‘go’ and OE. sigel from the verb sigan ‘descend, go down’—but is it really probable that our ancestors should have thought of the sun primarily as the one that goes, or that sets? The word south (orig. *sunþ; the n as in OHG. sund is still kept in Dan. sønden) is generally explained as connected with sun, and the meaning ‘sunny side’ is perfectly natural; but now H. Schröder thinks that it is derived from a word meaning ‘right’ (OE. swiðre, orig. ‘stronger,’ a comparative of the adj. found in G. geschwind), and he says that the south is to the right when you look at the sun at sunrise—which is perfectly true, but why should people have thought of the south as being to the right when they wanted to speak of it in the afternoon or evening?
Or let’s take a word from that group that is the main focus of etymological studies, one where the meaning is as clear as day, specifically the word for ‘sun.’ Here we have, among others, the following forms: (1) sun, OE. sunne, Goth. sunno; (2) Dan., Lat. sol, Goth. sauil, Gr. hḗlios; (3) OE. sigel, sægl, Goth. sugil; (4) OSlav. slǔnǐce, Russ. solnce (now with a silent l). There's no doubt these forms are related, but their connections to each other, and to Gr. selḗnē, which means ‘moon,’ and to OE. swegel meaning ‘sky,’ have never been clarified. Holthausen suggests sunno comes from the verb sinnan meaning ‘to go’ and OE. sigel from the verb sigan meaning ‘to descend, go down’—but is it really likely that our ancestors viewed the sun primarily as something that moves or sets? The word south (originally *sunþ; the n, as in OHG. sund, is still present in Dan. sønden) is generally thought to be connected with sun, and the interpretation of ‘sunny side’ makes perfect sense; however, H. Schröder now believes it comes from a word meaning ‘right’ (OE. swiðre, originally meaning ‘stronger,’ a comparative of the adjective found in G. geschwind), and he says that the south is to the right when you face the sun at sunrise—which is true, but why would people think of the south as being to the right when they wanted to refer to it in the afternoon or evening?
Let me take one more example to show that our present methods, or perhaps our present data, sometimes leave us completely in the lurch with regard to the most ordinary words. We have a series of words which may all, without any formal difficulties, be referred to a root-form seqw-. Their significations are, respectively—
Let me provide one more example to illustrate that our current methods, or maybe our current data, sometimes leave us totally stuck when it comes to the most basic words. We have a set of words that can all, without any formal issues, be traced back to a root-form seqw-. Their meanings are, respectively—
(1) ‘say,’ E. say, OE. secgan, ON. segja, G. sagen, Lith. sakýti. To this is referred Gr. énnepe, eníspein, Lat. inseque and possibly inquam.
(1) ‘say,’ E. say, OE. secgan, ON. segja, G. sagen, Lith. sakýti. To this is referred Gr. énnepe, eníspein, Lat. inseque and possibly inquam.
(2) ‘show, point out,’ OSlav. sočiti, Lat. signum.
(2) ‘show, point out,’ OSlav. sočiti, Lat. signum.
(3) ‘see,’ E. see, OE. seon, Goth. saihwan, G. sehen, etc.
(3) ‘see,’ E. see, OE. seon, Goth. saihwan, G. sehen, etc.
(4) ‘follow,’ Lat. sequor, Gr. hépomai, Skr. sácate. Here belongs Lat. socius, OE. secg ‘man,’ orig. ‘follower.’
(4) ‘follow,’ Latin sequor, Greek hépomai, Sanskrit sácate. Also related is the Latin socius, Old English secg ‘man,’ originally meaning ‘follower.’
Now, are these four groups ‘etymologically identical’? Opinions differ widely, as may be seen from C. D. Buck, “Words of Speaking and Saying” (Am. Journ. of Philol. 36. 128, 1915). They may be thus tabulated, a comma meaning supposed identity and a dash the opposite:
Now, are these four groups ‘etymologically identical’? Opinions vary greatly, as can be seen from C. D. Buck, “Words of Speaking and Saying” (Am. Journ. of Philol. 36. 128, 1915). They can be organized like this, where a comma indicates supposed identity and a dash indicates the opposite:
For the transition in meaning from ‘see’ to ‘say’ we are referred to such words as observe, notice, G. bemerkung, while in G. anweisen, and still more in Lat. dico, there is a similar transition from ‘show’ to ‘say.’ Wood derives the signification ‘follow’ from ‘point out,’ through ‘show, guide, attend.’ With regard to the relation between 3 and 4, it has often been said that to see is to follow with the eyes. In short, it is possible, if you take some little pains, to discover notional ties between all four groups which may not be so very much looser than those between other words which everybody thinks related. And yet? I cannot see that the knowledge we have at present enables us, or can enable us, to do more than leave the mutual relation of these groups an open question. One man’s guess is just as good as another’s, or one man’s yes as another man’s no—if the connexion of these words is ‘science,’ it is, if I may borrow an expression from the old archæologist Samuel Pegge, scientia ad libitum. Personal predilection and individual taste have not been ousted from etymological research to the extent many scholars would have us believe.
For the shift in meaning from ‘see’ to ‘say,’ we look at words like observe, notice, G. bemerkung, while in G. anweisen, and even more in Lat. dico, there’s a similar shift from ‘show’ to ‘say.’ Wood traces the meaning ‘follow’ back to ‘point out,’ moving through ‘show, guide, attend.’ Regarding the connection between 3 and 4, it’s often said that seeing is following with the eyes. In short, if you put in a little effort, you can find conceptual links among all four groups that might not be much looser than those found between other words that everyone considers related. And yet? I don’t think the knowledge we currently have allows us, or will allow us, to do anything more than keep the relationship of these groups as an open question. One person's guess is just as valid as another’s, or one person's yes is as good as another person’s no—if the connection of these words is ‘science,’ it is, if I may borrow a phrase from the old archaeologist Samuel Pegge, scientia ad libitum. Personal preference and individual taste have not been entirely removed from etymological research to the extent that many scholars would have us believe.
Or we may perhaps say that among the etymologies found in dictionaries and linguistic journals some are solid and firm as rocks, but others are liquid and fluctuate like the sea; and finally not a few are in a gaseous state and blow here and there as the wind listeth. Some of them are no better than poisonous gases, from which may Heaven preserve us![74]
Or we might say that some of the etymologies in dictionaries and language journals are solid and stable like rocks, while others are fluid and changeable like the sea; and finally, quite a few are in a gaseous state, drifting around like the wind does. Some of them are about as useful as toxic gases, and may Heaven protect us from them![74]
XVI.—§ 3. Facts, not Fancies.
As early as 1867 Michel Bréal, in an excellent article (reprinted in M 267 ff.), called attention to the dangers resulting from the general tendency of comparative linguists to “jump intermediate steps in order at once to mount to the earliest stages of the language,” but his warning has not taken effect, so that etymologists in dealing with a word found only in comparatively recent times will often try to reconstruct what might have been its Proto-Aryan form and compare that with some word found in some other language. Thus, Falk and Torp refer G. krieg to an Aryan primitive form *grêigho-, *grîgho-, which is compared with Irish[308] bríg ‘force.’ But the German word is not found in use till the middle period; it is peculiar to German and unknown in related languages (for the Scandinavian and probably also the Dutch words are later loans from Germany). These writers do not take into account how improbable it is that such a word, if it were really an old traditional word for this fundamental idea, should never once have been recorded in any of the old documents of the whole of our family of languages. What should we think of the man who would refer boche, the French nickname for ‘German’ which became current in 1914, and before that time had only been used for a few years and known to a few people only, to a Proto-Aryan root-form? Yet the method in both cases is identical; it presupposes what no one can guarantee, that the words in question are of those which trot along the royal road of language for century after century without a single side-jump, semantic or phonetic. Such words are the favourites of linguists because they have always behaved themselves since the days of Noah; but others are full of the most unexpected pranks, which no scientific ingenuity can discover if we do not happen to know the historical facts. Think of grog, for example. Admiral Vernon, known to sailors by the nickname of “Old Grog” because he wore a cloak of grogram (this, by the way, from Fr. gros grain), in 1740 ordered a mixture of rum and water to be served out instead of pure rum, and the name was transferred from the person to the drink. If it be objected that such leaps are found only in slang, the answer is that slang words very often become recognized after some time, and who knows but that may have been the case with krieg just as well as with many a recent word?
As early as 1867, Michel Bréal, in an insightful article (reprinted in M 267 ff.), pointed out the risks stemming from the general trend among comparative linguists to “skip intermediate steps to immediately jump to the earliest stages of the language.” However, his warning has gone unheeded, leading etymologists to often attempt to reconstruct what might have been the Proto-Aryan form of a word that appears only in more recent times, comparing it with words from other languages. For instance, Falk and Torp trace the German word krieg back to an Aryan root form *grêigho-, *grîgho-, and compare it with the Irish bríg, meaning ‘force.’ But the German word doesn’t surface until the middle period; it is unique to German and absent in related languages (the Scandinavian and likely the Dutch terms are later borrowings from Germany). These authors overlook how unlikely it is for such a word, if it were genuinely an old, traditional term for this fundamental idea, to have never been documented in any of the historical records of our entire language family. What would we think of someone who traced boche, the French nickname for ‘German’ that became popular in 1914, back to a Proto-Aryan root-form, considering it was only used for a few years and known to just a handful of people before then? Yet the methodology in both cases is the same; it assumes something that can't be guaranteed—namely, that the words in question have traveled along the straightforward path of language for centuries without any detours, whether semantic or phonetic. Such words are favorites among linguists because they’ve maintained their integrity since the days of Noah; however, other words are full of unpredictable twists that no scientific creativity can unravel unless we know the historical details. Take grog as an example. Admiral Vernon, known to sailors as “Old Grog” because he wore a cloak made of grogram (which, by the way, comes from Fr. gros grain), ordered a mix of rum and water to be served in place of pure rum in 1740, and the name shifted from him to the drink. If it’s argued that such leaps occur only in slang, the response is that slang terms often become recognized over time, and who knows that krieg might not have had a similar fate as many recent words?
At any rate, facts weigh more than fancies, and whoever wants to establish the etymology of a word must first ascertain all the historical facts available with regard to the place and time of its rise, its earliest signification and syntactic construction, its diffusion, the synonyms it has ousted, etc. Thus, and thus only, can he hope to rise above loose conjectures. Here the great historical dictionaries, above all the Oxford New English Dictionary, render invaluable service. And let me mention one model article outside these dictionaries, in which Hermann Möller has in my opinion given a satisfactory solution of the riddle of G. ganz: he explains it as a loan from Slav konǐcǐ ‘end,’ used especially adverbially (perhaps with a preposition in the form v-konec or v-konc) ‘to the end, completely’; Slav c = G. z, Slav k pronounced essentially as South G. g; the gradual spreading and various significations and derived forms are accounted for with very great learning (Zs. f. D. Alt. 36. 326 ff.). It is curious that this article[309] should have been generally overlooked or neglected, though the writer seems to have met all the legitimate requirements of a scientific etymology.
At any rate, facts carry more weight than ideas, and anyone who wants to establish the origin of a word must first gather all the historical facts about when and where it originated, its earliest meaning and grammatical use, how it spread, the synonyms it replaced, and so on. Only by doing this can they hope to go beyond vague guesses. Here, the major historical dictionaries, especially the Oxford New English Dictionary, provide invaluable help. I should also mention one exemplary article outside these dictionaries, in which Hermann Möller has, in my opinion, satisfactorily solved the mystery of G. ganz: he explains it as a loan from Slav konǐcǐ meaning ‘end,’ primarily used adverbially (perhaps with a preposition like v-konec or v-konc) meaning ‘to the end, completely’; Slav c = G. z, Slav k pronounced similarly to South G. g; the gradual spread and various meanings and derived forms are explained with great scholarship (Zs. f. D. Alt. 36. 326 ff.). It’s interesting that this article[309] has been mostly overlooked or ignored, even though the author seems to have met all the valid criteria for a scientific etymology.
XVI.—§ 4. Hope.
I have endeavoured to fulfil these requirements in the new explanation I have given of the word hope (Dan. håbe, Swed. hoppas, G. hoffen), now used in all Gothonic tongues in exactly the same signification. Etymologists are at variance about this word. Kluge connects it with the OE. noun hyht, and from that form infers that Gothonic *hopôn stands for *huqôn, from an Aryan root kug; he says that a connexion with Lat. cupio is scarcely possible. Walde likewise rejects connexion between cupio and either hope or Goth. hugjan. To Falk and Torp hope has probably nothing to do with hyht, but probably with cupio, which is derived from a root *kup = kvap, found in Lat. vapor ‘steam,’ and with a secondary form *kub, in hope, and *kvab in Goth. af-hwapjan ‘choke’—a wonderful medley of significations. H. Möller (Indoeur.-Semit. sammenlignende Glossar. 63), in accordance with his usual method, establishes an Aryo-Semitic root *k̑-u̯-, meaning ‘ardere’ and transferred to ‘ardere amore, cupiditate, desiderio,’ the root being extended with b-: p- in hope and cupio, with gh- in Goth. hugs, and with g̑- in OE. hyht. Surely a typical example of the perplexity of our etymologists, who disagree in everything except just in the one thing which seems to me extremely doubtful, that hope with the present spiritual signification goes back to common Aryan. Now, what are the real facts of the matter? Simply these, that the word hope turns up at a comparatively late date in historical times at one particular spot, and from there it gradually spreads to the neighbouring countries. In Denmark (håb, håbe) and in Sweden (hopp, hoppas) it is first found late in the Middle Ages as a religious loan from Low German hope, hopen. High German hoffen is found very rarely about 1150, but does not become common till a hundred years later; it is undoubtedly taken (with sound substitution) from Low German and moves in Germany from north to south. Old Saxon has the subst. tō-hopa, which has probably come from OE., where we have the same form for the subst., tō-hopa. This is pretty common in religious prose, but in poetry it is found only once (Boet.)—a certain indication that the word is recent. The subst. without tō is comparatively late (Ælfric, ab. 1000). The verb is found in rare instances about a hundred years earlier, but does not become common till later. Now, it is important to notice that the verb in the old period never takes a direct object, but is always connected[310] with the preposition tō (compare the subst.), even in modern usage we have to hope to, for, in. Similarly in G., where the phrase was auf etwas hoffen; later the verb took a genitive, then a pronoun in the accusative, and finally an ordinary object; in biblical language we find also zu gott hoffen. Now, I would connect our word with the form hopu, found twice as part of a compound in Beowulf (450 and 764), where ‘refuge’ gives good sense: hopan to, then, is to ‘take one’s refuge to,’ and to-hopa ‘refuge.’ This verb I take to be at first identical with hop (the only OE. instance I know of this is Ælfric, Hom. 1. 202: hoppode ongean his drihten). We have also one instance of a verb onhupian (Cura Past. 441) ‘draw back, recoil,’ which agrees with ON. hopa ‘move backwards’ (to the quotations in Fritzner may be added Laxd. 49, 15, þeir Osvígssynir hopudu undan).[75] The original meaning seems to have been ‘bend, curb, bow, stoop,’ either in order to leap, or to flee, from something bad, or towards something good; cf. the subst. hip, OE. hype, Goth. hups, Dan. hofte, G. hüfte, Lat. cubitus, etc. (Holthausen, Anglia Beibl., 1904, 350, deals with these words, but does not connect them with hop, -hopu, or hope.) The transition from bodily movement to the spiritual ‘hope’ may have been favoured by the existence of the verb OE. hogian ‘think,’ but is not in itself more difficult than with, e.g., Lat. ex(s)ultare ‘leap up, rejoice,’ or Dan. lide på ‘lean to, confide in, trust,’ tillid ‘confidence, reliance’; and a new word for ‘hope’ was required because the old wen (Goth. wens), vb. wenan, had at an early age acquired a more general meaning ‘opinion, probability,’ vb. ‘suppose, imagine.’ The difficulty that the word for ‘hope’ has single or short p (in Swed., however, pp), while hop, OE. hoppian, has double or long p, is no serious hindrance to our etymology, because the gemination may easily be accounted for on the principle mentioned below (Ch. XX § 9), that is, as giving a more vivid expression of the rapid action.
I have tried to meet these requirements in my new explanation of the word hope (Dan. håbe, Swed. hoppas, G. hoffen), which is now used in all Germanic languages with the same meaning. Etymologists disagree about this word. Kluge links it to the Old English noun hyht and infers from that form that the Germanic *hopôn comes from *huqôn, derived from an Aryan root kug; he argues that a connection with Latin cupio is unlikely. Walde also dismisses a connection between cupio and either hope or Gothic hugjan. Falk and Torp believe hope likely has nothing to do with hyht, but rather with cupio, which comes from a root *kup = kvap, seen in Latin vapor ‘steam,’ and with a secondary form *kub in hope, and *kvab in Gothic af-hwapjan ‘choke’—a fascinating mix of meanings. H. Möller (Indoeur.-Semit. sammenlignende Glossar. 63), following his usual method, establishes an Aryo-Semitic root *k̑-u̯-, meaning ‘burn’ and expanded to mean ‘burning love, desire, longing,’ with b-: p- in hope and cupio, with gh- in Gothic hugs, and with g̑- in Old English hyht. This is a clear example of the confusion among our etymologists, who disagree on everything except one thing that seems highly uncertain to me: that hope, in its current spiritual sense, traces back to common Aryan. So, what are the actual facts? Simply that the word hope appears relatively late in historical times at one specific location and then gradually spreads to nearby countries. In Denmark (håb, håbe) and in Sweden (hopp, hoppas), it first appears late in the Middle Ages as a religious borrowing from Low German hope, hopen. High German hoffen is found very rarely around 1150 but doesn’t become common until a hundred years later; it is undoubtedly borrowed (with phonetic changes) from Low German and spreads in Germany from north to south. Old Saxon has the noun tō-hopa, likely originating from Old English, where we have a similar noun form, tō-hopa. This is somewhat common in religious prose, but it appears only once in poetry (Boet.)—a clear sign that the word is relatively recent. The noun without tō is relatively late (Ælfric, circa 1000). The verb is found in rare cases about a hundred years earlier but does not become widespread until later. It is important to note that the verb in the old period never takes a direct object; instead, it is always used with the preposition tō (similar to the noun). Even in modern usage, we say to hope to, for, in. Similarly in German, where the phrase was auf etwas hoffen; later, the verb began to take a genitive, then a pronoun in the accusative, and eventually a direct object. In biblical language, you can also find zu gott hoffen. Now, I would connect our word with the form hopu, which appears twice as part of a compound in Beowulf (450 and 764), where ‘refuge’ makes sense: hopan to, then, means ‘to take refuge in,’ and to-hopa means ‘refuge.’ I argue that this verb was initially the same as hop (the only Old English instance I know of this is Ælfric, Hom. 1. 202: hoppode ongean his drihten). We also have one instance of a verb onhupian (Cura Past. 441) ‘draw back, recoil,’ which corresponds with Old Norse hopa ‘move backwards’ (quotes from Fritzner include Laxd. 49, 15, they Osvígssynir jumped away).[75] The original meaning seems to have been ‘bend, curve, bow, stoop,’ either to leap from something bad or to reach towards something good; compare the noun hip, Old English hype, Gothic hups, Danish hofte, German hüfte, Latin cubitus, etc. (Holthausen, Anglia Beibl., 1904, 350, discusses these words but does not connect them with hop, -hopu, or hope.) The shift from physical movement to the spiritual notion of ‘hope’ may have been aided by the existence of the Old English verb hogian ‘think,’ but this transition is not more difficult than, for example, Latin ex(s)ultare ‘leap up, rejoice,’ or Danish lide på ‘lean to, confide in, trust,’ tillid ‘confidence, reliance’; and a new word for ‘hope’ was needed because the old wen (Gothic wens), verb wenan, had early taken on a more general meaning of ‘opinion, probability,’ verb ‘suppose, imagine.’ The difference that the word for ‘hope’ has a single or short p (though in Swedish it has pp), while hop, Old English hoppian, has a double or long p, is not a significant obstacle to our etymology, since the doubling may easily be explained based on the principle mentioned below (Ch. XX § 9), which indicates that it provides a more vivid expression of quick action.
XVI.—§ 5. Requirements.
It is, of course, impossible to determine once for all by hard-and-fast rules how great the correspondence must be for us to recognize two words as ‘etymologically identical,’ nor to say to which of the two sides, the phonetic and the semantic, we should attach the greater importance. With the rise of historical phonology the tendency has been to require exact correspondence in the former respect, and in semantics to be content with more or less easily found parallels. One example will show how[311] particular many scholars are in matters of sound. The word nut (OE. hnutu, G. nuss, ON. hnot, Dan. nød) is by Paul declared “not related to Lat. nux” and by Kluge “neither originally akin with nor borrowed from Lat. nux,” while the NED does not even mention nux and thus must think it quite impossible to connect it with the English word. We have here in two related languages two words resembling each other not only in sound, but in stem-formation and gender, and possessing exactly the same signification, which is as concrete and definite as possible. And yet we are bidden to keep them asunder! Fortunately I am not the first to protest against such barbarity: H. Pedersen (KZ n.f. 12. 251) explains both words from *dnuk-, which by metathesis has become *knud-, while Falk and Torp as well as Walde think the latter form the original one, which in Latin has been shifted into *dnuk-. Which of these views is correct (both may be wrong) is of less importance than the victory of common sense over phonological pedantry.
It's, of course, impossible to definitively establish hard-and-fast rules for how similar the correspondence needs to be for us to recognize two words as being "etymologically identical," nor can we decide which aspect, the phonetic or the semantic, should matter more. With the emergence of historical phonology, there has been a tendency to demand exact correspondence in pronunciation, while being satisfied with more or less easily found parallels in meaning. One example will show how[311] particular many scholars are about sound. The word nut (OE. hnutu, G. nuss, ON. hnot, Dan. nød) is stated by Paul to be “not related to Lat. nux,” and Kluge claims it’s “neither originally akin to nor borrowed from Lat. nux,” while the NED doesn’t even mention nux and must believe it's impossible to link it to the English word. Here we have two related languages with words that not only sound similar but also share stem-formation and gender, and have exactly the same meaning, which is as concrete and clear as it can be. And yet we are told to keep them apart! Luckily, I’m not the first to object to such ignorance: H. Pedersen (KZ n.f. 12. 251) explains both words as deriving from *dnuk-, which through metathesis became *knud-, while Falk, Torp, and Walde believe the latter form is the original one, which was altered into *dnuk- in Latin. Which of these perspectives is correct (both may be wrong) is less important than the triumph of common sense over phonological rigidness.
There are two explanations which have had very often to do duty where the phonological correspondence is not exact, namely root-variation (root-expansion with determinatives) and apophony (ablaut). Of the former Uhlenbeck (PBB 30. 252) says: “The theory of root determinatives no doubt contains a kernel of truth, but it has only been fatal to etymological science, as it has drawn the attention from real correspondences between well-substantiated words to delusive similarities between hypothetical abstractions.” Apophony inspires more confidence, and in many cases offers fully reliable explanations; but this principle, too, has been often abused, and it is difficult to find its true limitations. Many special applications of it appear questionable; thus, when G. stumm, Dan. stum, is explained as an apophonic form of the adj. stam, Goth. stamms, from which we have the verb stammer, G. stammeln, Dan. stamme: is it really probable that the designation of muteness should be taken from the word for stammering? This appears especially improbable when we consider that at the time when the new word stumm made its appearance there was already another word for ‘mute,’ namely dumm, dumb, the word which has been preserved in English. I therefore propose a new etymology: stumm is a blending of the two synonyms still(e) and dum(b), made up of the beginning of the one and the ending of the other word; through adopting the initial st- the word was also associated with stump, and we get an exact correspondence between dumm, dum, stumm, stum, applied to persons, and dumpf, stumpf, Dan. dump, stump, applied to things. Note that in those languages (G., Dan.) in which the new word stum(m) was used, the unchanged dum(m) was free to develop the new sense ‘stupid’ (or was the creation[312] of stum occasioned by the old word tending already to acquire this secondary meaning?), while dumb in English stuck to the old signification.
There are two explanations that often take the place of exact phonological correspondences: root variation (like root expansion with determinatives) and apophony (also known as ablaut). Concerning the first, Uhlenbeck (PBB 30. 252) states: “The theory of root determinatives probably holds some truth, but it has often been detrimental to etymological science, as it has diverted attention from real correspondences between well-documented words to misleading similarities between hypothetical abstractions.” Apophony is generally more reliable and often provides solid explanations; however, this principle has also been misapplied, making it challenging to determine its true limits. Many specific applications seem questionable; for instance, when G. stumm, Dan. stum, is explained as an apophonic form of the adjective stam, Goth. stamms, which leads to the verb stammer, G. stammeln, Dan. stamme: is it really likely that the term for muteness comes from a word for stammering? This seems particularly unlikely considering that when the new word stumm appeared, there was already another term for ‘mute,’ which was dumm, dumb, the term that has survived in English. Therefore, I suggest a new etymology: stumm is a blend of the synonyms still(e) and dum(b), formed from the beginning of one and the ending of the other; by adopting the initial st-, the word was also connected to stump. This presents a clear correspondence between dumm, dum, stumm, stum, when referring to people, and dumpf, stumpf, Dan. dump, stump, when referring to things. Note that in those languages (G., Dan.) where the new word stum(m) was used, the unchanged dum(m) was free to develop a new meaning of ‘stupid’ (or was the creation of stum influenced by the old word already tending to acquire this secondary meaning?), while dumb in English remained tied to its original meaning.
XVI.—§ 6. Blendings.
Blendings of synonyms play a much greater rôle in the development of language than is generally recognized. Many instances may be heard in everyday life, most of them being immediately corrected by the speaker (see above, XV § 4), but these momentary lapses cannot be separated from other instances which are of more permanent value because they are so natural that they will occur over and over again until speakers will hardly feel the blend as anything else than an ordinary word. M. Bloomfield (IF 4. 71) says that he has been many years conscious of an irrepressible desire to assimilate the two verbs quench and squelch in both directions by forming squench and quelch, and he has found the former word in a negro story by Page. The expression ‘irrepressible desire’ struck me on reading this, for I have myself in my Danish speech the same feeling whenever I am to speak of tending a patient, for I nearly always say plasse as a result of wavering between pleje [plaiə] and passe. Many examples may be found in G. A. Bergström, On Blendings of Synonymous or Cognate Expressions in English, Lund, 1906, and Louise Pound, Blends, Their Relation to English Word Formation, Heidelberg, 1914. But neither of these two writers has seen the full extent of this principle of formation, which explains many words of greater importance than those nonce words which are found so plentifully in Miss Pound’s paper. Let me give some examples, some of them new, some already found by others:
Blendings of synonyms play a much bigger role in the development of language than most people realize. You can hear many examples in daily life, most of which the speaker immediately corrects (see above, XV § 4), but these brief mistakes can't be separated from other examples that have more lasting value because they're so natural that they keep happening until speakers hardly notice the blend as anything other than a regular word. M. Bloomfield (IF 4. 71) mentions that he has felt an uncontainable urge for years to mix the two verbs quench and squelch in both directions by creating squench and quelch, and he found the first word in a dark story by Page. The phrase ‘uncontainable urge’ caught my attention when I read this, as I feel the same way in my Danish when I talk about caring for a patient, often saying plasse as a result of going back and forth between pleje [plaiə] and passe. Many examples can be found in G. A. Bergström, On Blendings of Synonymous or Cognate Expressions in English, Lund, 1906, and Louise Pound, Blends, Their Relation to English Word Formation, Heidelberg, 1914. But neither of these two writers has recognized the full extent of this formation principle, which explains many words that are more significant than the temporary words that appear so abundantly in Miss Pound’s paper. Let me provide some examples, some new and some already noted by others:
blot = blemish, black + spot, plot, dot; there is also an obsolete splot.
blot = blemish, black + spot, plot, dot; there is also an obsolete splot.
blunt = blind + stunt.
blunt = blind + stunt.
crouch = cringe, crook, crawl, †crouk + couch.
crouch = cringe, crook, crawl, †crouk + couch.
flush = flash + blush.
flush = flash + blush.
frush = frog + thrush (all three names of the same disease in a horse’s foot).
frush = frog + thrush (all three names for the same disease in a horse's hoof).
glaze (Shakespeare) = glare + gaze.
glaze (Shakespeare) = glare + gaze.
good-bye = good-night, good-morning + godbye (God be with ye).
goodbye = goodnight, good morning + goodbye (God be with you).
knoll = knell + toll.
knoll = knell + toll.
scroll = scrow + roll.
scroll = scrow + roll.
slash = slay, sling, slat + gash, dash.
slash = slay, sling, slat + gash, dash.
slender = slight (slim) + tender.
slender = slight (slim) + tender.
Such blends are especially frequent in words expressive of sounds or in some other way symbolical, as, for instance:
Such combinations are particularly common in words that describe sounds or are symbolically representative, like, for example:
flurry = fling, flow and many other fl-words + hurry (note also scurry).
flurry = fling, flow and many other fl-words + hurry (note also scurry).
gruff = grum, grim + rough.
grumpy = grumpy, grim + rough.
slide = slip + glide.
slide = slip + glide.
troll = trill + roll (in some senses perhaps rather from tread, trundle + roll).
troll = trill + roll (in some cases, maybe more from tread, trundle + roll).
twirl = twist + whirl.
twirl = twist + whirl.
In slang blends abound, e.g.:
Slang blends everywhere, e.g.:
tosh (Harrow) = tub + wash. (Sometimes explained as toe-wash.)
tosh (Harrow) = tub + wash. (Sometimes explained as toe-wash.)
blarmed = blamed, blessed and other bl-words + darned (damned).
blarmed = blamed, blessed, and other bl-words + darned
be danged = damned + hanged.
be damned
I swow = swear + vow.
I swear = swear + vow.
XVI.—§ 7. Echo-words.
Most etymologists are very reluctant to admit echoism; thus Diez rejects onomatopœic origin of It. pisciare, Fr. pisser—an echo-word if ever there was one—and says, “One can easily go too far in supposing onomatopœia: as a rule it is more advisable to build on existing words”; this he does by deriving this verb from a non-existing *pipisare, pipsare, from pipa ‘pipe, tube.’ Falk and Torp refer dump (Dan. dumpe) to Swed. dimpa, a Gothonic root demp, supposed to be an extension of an Aryan root dhen: thus they are too deaf to hear the sound of the heavy fall expressed by um(p), cf. Dan. bumpe, bums, plumpe, skumpe, jumpe, and similar words in other languages.
Most etymologists are very hesitant to accept echoism; thus, Diez rejects the onomatopoeic origin of Italian pisciare and French pisser—definitely an echo-word—and says, “It's easy to go too far in assuming onomatopoeia: as a rule, it's wiser to base our conclusions on existing words.” He does this by deriving this verb from a non-existent *pipisare, pipsare, from pipa meaning ‘pipe, tube.’ Falk and Torp trace dump (Danish dumpe) to Swedish dimpa, a Gothic root demp, which is thought to be an extension of an Aryan root dhen: thus, they are too deaf to hear the sound of the heavy fall expressed by um(p), cf. Danish bumpe, bums, plumpe, skumpe, jumpe, and similar words in other languages.
It may be fancy, but I think I hear the same sound in Lat. plumbum, which I take to mean at first not the metal, but the plummet that was dumped or plumped into the water and was denominated from the sound; as this was generally made of lead, the word came to be used for the metal. Most etymologists take it for granted that plumbum is a loan-word, some being honest enough to confess that they do not know from what language, while others without the least scruple or hesitation say that it was taken from Iberian: our ignorance of that language is so[314] deep that no one can enter an expert’s protest against such a supposition.[77] But if my hypothesis is right, the words plummet (from OFr. plommet, a diminutive of plomb) as well as the verb Fr. plonger, whence E. plunge, from Lat. *plumbicare, are not only derivatives from plumbum (the only thing mentioned by other scholars), but also echo-words, and they, or at any rate the verb, must to a great extent owe their diffusion to their felicitously symbolic sound. In a novel I find: “Plump went the lead”—showing how this sound is still found adequate to express the falling of the lead in sounding. The NED says under the verb plump: “Some have compared L. plumbare ... to throw the lead-line ... but the approach of form between plombar and the LG. plump-plomp group seems merely fortuitous” (!). I see sound symbolism in all the words plump, while the NED will only allow it in the most obvious cases. From the sound of a body plumping into the water we have interesting developments in the adverb, as in the following quotations: I said, plump out, that I couldn’t stand any more of it (Bernard Shaw) | The famous diatribe against Jesuitism points plumb in the same direction (Morley) | fall plum into the jaws of certain critics (Swift) | Nollie was a plumb little idiot (Galsworthy). In the last sense ‘entirely’ it is especially frequent in America, e.g. They lost their senses, plumb lost their senses (Churchill) | she’s plum crazy, it’s plum bad, etc. Related words for fall, etc., are plop, plout, plunk, plounce. Much might also be said in this connexion of various pop and bob words, but I shall refrain.
It might be fancy, but I think I hear the same sound in Latin. plumbum, which I initially interpret not as the metal, but as the plummet that was dumped or dropped into the water and got its name from the sound; since this was generally made of lead, the word came to refer to the metal itself. Most etymologists accept that plumbum is a loanword, with some honestly admitting they don’t know from which language, while others, without any hesitation, claim it was taken from Iberian: our ignorance of that language is so[314] profound that no one can expert-argue against such a suggestion.[77] But if my theory is correct, the words plummet (from Old French plommet, a diminutive of plomb) and the French verb plonger, from Latin *plumbicare, are not only derivatives of plumbum (the only aspect noted by other scholars), but also echo-words, and they, or at least the verb, likely gained popularity because of their nicely symbolic sound. In a novel, I find: “Plump went the lead”—demonstrating how this sound is still effective at expressing the lead's fall. The NED states under the verb plump: “Some have compared L. plumbare... to throw the lead-line... but the resemblance between plombar and the Low German plump-plomp group seems purely coincidental” (!). I see sound symbolism in all the words plump, while the NED only accepts it in the most apparent cases. From the sound of an object plumping into the water, we see intriguing developments in the adverb, as in the following quotes: I said, plump out, that I couldn’t take any more of it (Bernard Shaw) | The well-known critique against Jesuitism points plumb in the same direction (Morley) | fall plum into the jaws of certain critics (Swift) | Nollie was a plumb little idiot (Galsworthy). In the last sense of ‘entirely,’ it's especially common in America, e.g. They lost their senses, plumb lost their senses (Churchill) | she’s plum crazy, it’s plum bad, etc. Related words for fall, etc., are plop, plout, plunk, plounce. Much could also be said in this context about various pop and bob words, but I will hold back.
XVI.—§ 8. Some Conjunctions.
Sometimes obviously correct etymologies yet leave some psychological points unexplained. One of my pet theories concerns some adversative conjunctions. Lat. sed has been supplanted by magis: It. ma, Sp. mas, Fr. mais. The transition is easily accounted for; from ‘more’ it is no far cry to ‘rather’ (cf. G. vielmehr), which can readily be employed to correct or gainsay what has just been said. The Scandinavian word for ‘but’ is men, which came into use in the fifteenth century and is explained as a blending[315] of meden in its shortened form men (now mens) ‘while’ and Low German men ‘but,’ which stands for older niwan, from the negative ni and wan ‘wanting’; the meaning has developed through that of ‘except’ and the sound is easily understood as an instance of assimilation. The same phonetic development is found in Dutch maar, OFris. mar, from en ware ‘were not,’ the same combination which has yielded G. nur. Thus we have four different ways of getting to expressions for ‘but,’ none of which presents the least difficulty to those familiar with the semantic ways of words. But why did these various nations seize on new words? Weren’t the old ones good enough?
Sometimes, obviously correct word origins still leave some psychological aspects unexplained. One of my favorite theories involves some contrasting conjunctions. Latin sed has been replaced by magis: Italian ma, Spanish mas, French mais. The change is easy to explain; from ‘more,’ it’s a small leap to ‘rather’ (see German vielmehr), which can easily be used to correct or dispute what was just said. The Scandinavian word for ‘but’ is men, which came into use in the fifteenth century and is explained as a fusion of the shortened form meden now mens meaning ‘while’ and Low German men meaning ‘but,’ which represents an older niwan, from the negative ni and wan meaning ‘wanting’; the meaning evolved from ‘except’ and the sound change is easily understood as an instance of assimilation. The same phonetic change appears in Dutch maar, Old Frisian mar, from en ware meaning ‘were not,’ the same combination that led to German nur. Thus, we have four different ways of expressing ‘but,’ none of which poses any difficulty to those familiar with the semantic shifts of words. But why did these various nations adopt new words? Weren’t the old ones good enough?
Here I must call attention to two features that are common to these new conjunctions, first their syntactic position, which is invariably in the beginning of the sentence, while such synonymous words as Lat. autem and G. aber may be placed after one or more words; then their phonetic agreement in one point: magis, men, maar all begin with m. Now, both these features are found in two words for ‘but,’ about whose etymological origin I can find no information, Finnic mutta and Santal menkhan, as well as in me, which is used in the Ancrene Riwle and a few other early Middle English texts and has been dubiously connected with the Scandinavian (and French?) word. How are we to explain these curious coincidences? I think by the nature of the sound [m], which is produced when the lips are closed while the tongue rests passively and the soft palate is lowered so as to allow air to escape through the nostrils—in short, the position which is typical of anybody who is quietly thinking over matters without as yet saying anything, with the sole difference that in his case the vocal chords are passive, while they are made to vibrate to bring forth an m.
Here, I want to highlight two features common to these new conjunctions. First, their syntactic position is always at the beginning of the sentence, while similar words like Lat. autem and G. aber can appear after one or more words. Second, they share a phonetic characteristic: magis, men, and maar all start with m. Both of these features are also found in two words for ‘but,’ about which I can’t find any information regarding their etymological origin: Finnic mutta and Santal menkhan, as well as in me, used in the Ancrene Riwle and a few other early Middle English texts, which has been uncertainly linked to the Scandinavian (and possibly French?) word. How can we explain these interesting coincidences? I think it has to do with the nature of the sound [m], which is made when the lips are closed, the tongue is resting softly, and the soft palate is lowered to let air escape through the nostrils—in other words, it’s the position typical of someone quietly reflecting without saying anything yet, except that in this case, the vocal cords are passive, while they vibrate to produce an m.
Now, it very often happens that a man wants to say something, but has not yet made up his mind as to what to say; and in this moment of hesitation, while thoughts are in the process of conception, the lungs and vocal chords will often be prematurely set going, and the result is [m] (sometimes preceded by the corresponding voiceless sound), often written hm or h’m, which thus becomes the interjection of an unshaped contradiction. Not infrequently this [m] precedes a real word; thus M’yes (written in this way by Shaw, Misalliance 154, and Merrick, Conrad 179) and Dan. mja, to mark a hesitating consent.
Now, it often happens that a person wants to say something but hasn't figured out what to say yet; and in this moment of uncertainty, while thoughts are forming, the lungs and vocal cords will sometimes jump the gun, resulting in [m] (sometimes preceded by the related voiceless sound), often written as hm or h’m, which then becomes the interjection of an unformed disagreement. This [m] frequently comes before a real word; for example, M’yes (written this way by Shaw, Misalliance 154, and Merrick, Conrad 179) and Dan. mja, to signal a hesitant agreement.
This will make it clear why words beginning with m are so often chosen as adversative conjunctions: people begin with this sound and go on with some word that gives good sense and which happens to begin with m: mais, maar. The Dan. men in the mouth of some early speakers is probably this [m], sliding into[316] the old conjunction en, just as myes is m + yes; while other original users of men may have been thinking of men = meden, and others again of Low German men: these three etymologies are not mutually destructive, for all three origins may have concurrently contributed to the popularity of men. Modern Greek and Serbian ma are generally explained as direct loans from Italian, but may be indigenous, as may also dialectal Rumanian ma in the same sense, for in the hesitating [m] as the initial sound of objections we have one of those touches of nature which make the whole world kin.[78]
This explains why words that start with m are often used as contrasting conjunctions: people begin with this sound and follow it with a word that makes sense and also starts with m: mais, maar. The Danish men spoken by some early users likely started with this [m], transitioning into the old conjunction en, just like myes is made up of m + yes; while other original speakers of men might have been considering men as meden, and still others might have thought of the Low German men: these three origins aren't mutually exclusive, as all three could have contributed simultaneously to the use of men. Modern Greek and Serbian ma are often viewed as direct borrowings from Italian, but they might be native, as could dialectal Rumanian ma in the same context, since the hesitant [m] as the first sound in objections demonstrates one of those natural touches that connect all people.
XVI.—§ 9. Object of Etymology.
What is the object of etymological science? “To determine the true signification of a word,” answers one of the masters of etymological research (Walde, Lat. et. Wörterb. xi). But surely in most cases that can be achieved without the help of etymology. We know the true sense of hundreds of words about the etymology of which we are in complete ignorance, and we should know exactly what the word grog means, even if the tradition of its origin had been accidentally lost. Many people still believe that an account of the origin of a name throws some light on the essence of the thing it stands for; when they want to define say ‘religion’ or ‘civilization,’ they start by stating the (real or supposed) origin of the name—but surely that is superstition, though the first framers of the name ‘etymology’ (from Gr. etumon ‘true’) must have had the same idea in their heads. Etymology tells us nothing about the things, nor even about the present meaning of a word, but only about the way in which a word has come into existence. At best, it tells us not what is true, but what has been true.
What is the purpose of etymological science? “To determine the true meaning of a word,” replies one of the experts in etymology (Walde, Lat. et. Wörterb. xi). But we can usually achieve that without etymology. We know the actual meanings of hundreds of words, even when we have no idea about their etymology, and we would understand exactly what the word grog means, even if we had completely lost its origin story. Many people still think that knowing the origin of a name sheds some light on what it represents; when they want to define words like ‘religion’ or ‘civilization,’ they often start by discussing the (real or imagined) origin of the name—but that’s just a superstition, even though the original creators of the word ‘etymology’ (from Gr. etumon ‘true’) likely had the same notion. Etymology doesn’t reveal anything about the actual things themselves, nor does it clarify the current meaning of a word; it only informs us about how a word came into being. At best, it shows us not what is true, but what has been true.
The overestimation of etymology is largely attributable to the “conviction that there can be nothing in language that had not an intelligible purpose, that there is nothing that is now irregular that was not at first regular, nothing irrational that was not originally rational” (Max Müller)—a conviction which is still found to underlie many utterances about linguistic matters, but which readers of the present volume will have seen is erroneous in many ways. On the whole, Max Müller naïvely gives expression to what is unconsciously at the back of much that is said and believed about language; thus, when he says (L 1. 44): “I must ask you at present to take it for granted that everything in language had originally a meaning. As language can have no other object but to express our meaning, it might seem to follow almost by[317] necessity that language should contain neither more nor less than what is required for that purpose.” Yes, so it would if language had been constructed by an omniscient and omnipotent being, but as it was developed by imperfect human beings, there is every possibility of their having failed to achieve their purpose and having done either more or less than was required to express their meaning. It would be wrong to say that language (i.e. speaking man) created first what was strictly necessary, and afterwards what might be considered superfluous; but it would be equally wrong to say that linguistic luxuries were always created before necessaries; yet that view would probably be nearer the truth than the former. Much of what in former ages was felt to be necessary to express thoughts was afterwards felt as pedantic crisscross and gradually eliminated; but at all times many things have been found in language that can never have been anything else but superfluous, exactly as many people use a great many superfluous gestures which are not in the least significant and in no way assist the comprehension of their intentions, but which they somehow feel an impulse to perform. In language, as in life generally, we have too little in some respects, and too much in others.
The overestimation of etymology mostly comes from the belief that everything in language has a clear purpose, that nothing currently seems irregular was ever regular, and that nothing illogical ever started out logical (Max Müller). This belief still influences many discussions about language, but readers of this book will see that it’s incorrect in several ways. Overall, Max Müller expresses what is unconsciously behind much of what is said and believed about language. When he states (L 1. 44): “I must ask you to take it for granted that everything in language originally had a meaning. Since language can only serve to express our meaning, it seems almost necessary that it would contain exactly what is needed for that purpose.” That would be true if language were created by an all-knowing and all-powerful being, but since it evolved through imperfect humans, there’s a good chance they didn’t fully achieve their purpose and sometimes included more or less than needed to convey their meaning. It would be incorrect to say that language (i.e., speaking humans) first created only what was strictly necessary and then added what was extra; however, it would also be wrong to claim that luxuries in language always came before necessities. That view might actually be closer to the truth. A lot of what was once considered essential for expressing thoughts has been seen as overly complicated and gradually phased out; yet, throughout history, many elements have existed in language that could only be seen as unnecessary, just like how many people use various gestures that don’t mean anything and don’t help others understand their intentions, but they feel compelled to do them anyway. In language, as in life in general, we often have too little in some areas and too much in others.
XVI.—§ 10. Reconstruction.
Kluge somewhere (PBB 37. 479, 1911) says that the establishment of the common Aryan language is the chief task of our modern science of linguistics (to my mind it can never be more than a fragment of that task, which must be to understand the nature of language), and he thinks optimistically that “reconstructions with their reliable methods have taken so firm root that we are convinced that we know the common Aryan grundsprache just as thoroughly as any language that is more or less authenticated through literature.” This is a palpable exaggeration, for no one nowadays has the courage of Schleicher to print even the smallest fable in Proto-Aryan, and if by some miraculous accident we were to find a text written in that language we may be sure it would puzzle us just as much as Tokharian does.
Kluge mentions somewhere (PBB 37. 479, 1911) that figuring out the common Aryan language is the main goal of our modern linguistics (but I believe it can never be more than a part of that goal, which should be to understand the nature of language), and he optimistically believes that “reconstructions with their reliable methods have taken such a strong hold that we are confident we know the common Aryan grundsprache as well as any language that has been documented through literature.” This is a clear exaggeration, because no one today has the guts of Schleicher to write even the smallest fable in Proto-Aryan, and if by some miraculous chance we were to discover a text in that language, we can be sure it would confuse us just as much as Tokharian does.
Reconstruction has two sides, an outer and an inner. With regard to sounds, it seems to me that very often the masters of linguistics treat us to reconstructed forms that are little short of impossible. This is not the place to give a detailed criticism of the famous theory of ‘nasalis sonans,’ but I hope elsewhere to be able to state why I think this theory a disfiguring excrescence on linguistic science: no one has ever been able to find in any existing language such forms as mnto with stressed syllabic[318] [n], given as the old form of our word mouth (Falk and Torp even give stmnto in order to connect the word with Gr. stóma), or as dkmtóm (whence Lat. centum, etc.) or bhrghnti̯es or gu̯mskete (Brugmann). Not only are these forms phonetically impossible, but the theory fails to explain the transitions to the forms actually existing in real languages, and everything is much easier if we assume forms like [ʌm, ʌn] with some vowel like that of E. un-. The use in Proto-Aryan reconstructions of non-syllabic i and u also in some respects invites criticism, but it will be better to treat these questions in a special paper.
Reconstruction has two aspects, external and internal. When it comes to sounds, it seems to me that linguistics experts often present us with reconstructed forms that are nearly impossible. This isn’t the right place to give a detailed critique of the well-known theory of ‘nasalis sonans,’ but I hope to explain elsewhere why I find this theory to be an awkward addition to linguistic science: no one has ever been able to find in any existing language forms like mnto with stressed syllabic[318][n], claimed to be the ancient form of our word mouth (Falk and Torp even suggest stmnto to link the word to Gr. stóma), or dkmtóm (which led to Lat. centum, etc.), or bhrghnti̯es or gu̯mskete (Brugmann). Not only are these forms phonetically impossible, but the theory doesn’t explain the transitions to the forms that actually exist in real languages. Everything is much simpler if we assume forms like [ʌm, ʌn] with a vowel similar to that of E. un-. The use of non-syllabic i and u in Proto-Aryan reconstructions also raises some questions, but it would be better to discuss these issues in a separate paper.
Semantic reconstruction calls for little comment here. It is evident from the nature of the subject that no such strict rules can be given in this domain as in the domain of sound; but nowadays scholars are more realistic than formerly. Most of them will feel satisfied when moon and month are associated with words having the same two significations in related languages, without indulging in explanations of both from a root me ‘to measure’; and when our daughter has been connected with Gr. thugáter, Skt. duhitár and corresponding words in other languages, no attempt is made to go beyond the meaning common to these words ‘daughter’ and to speculate what had induced our ancestors to bestow that word on that particular relation, as when Lassen derived it from the root duh ‘to milk’ and pictured an idyllic family life, in which it was the business of the young girls to milk the cows, or when Fick derived the same word from the root dheugh ‘to be useful’ (G. taugen: ‘wie die magd, maid von mögen’), as if the daughters were the only, or the most, efficient members of the family. Unfortunately, such speculations are still found lingering in many recent handbooks of high standing: Kluge hesitates whether to assign the word mutter, mother, to the root ma in the sense ‘mete out’ or in the sense found in Sanskrit ‘to form,’ used of the fœtus in the womb. A resigned acquiescence in inevitable ignorance and a sense of reality should certainly be characteristics of future etymologists.
Semantic reconstruction requires little commentary here. It's clear from the topic that we can't apply strict rules in this area like we can in the realm of sound; however, today scholars are more pragmatic than in the past. Most of them are satisfied when moon and month are linked to words with the same meanings in related languages, without delving into explanations from the root me ‘to measure’; and when our daughter is connected to Gr. thugáter, Skt. duhitár, and similar terms in other languages, no further speculation is made about why our ancestors chose that word for that specific relationship. This contrasts with Lassen, who traced it back to the root duh ‘to milk’ and imagined an idyllic family life where young girls milked the cows, or with Fick, who derived the same word from dheugh ‘to be useful’ (G. taugen: ‘like the magd, maid from mögen’), suggesting that daughters were the only or most effective family members. Unfortunately, such speculations still appear in many reputable recent textbooks: Kluge hesitates over whether to link the word mutter, mother, to the root ma meaning ‘mete out’ or the sense found in Sanskrit ‘to form,’ as related to the fetus in the womb. A resigned acceptance of unavoidable ignorance and a sense of reality should certainly be traits of future etymologists.
CHAPTER XVII
Progress or decline?
§ 1. Linguistic Estimation. § 2. Degeneration? § 3. Appreciation of Modern Tongues. § 4. The Scientific Attitude. § 5. Final Answer. § 6. Sounds. § 7. Shortenings. § 8. Objections. Result. § 9. Verbal Forms. § 10. Synthesis and Analysis. § 11. Verbal Concord.
§ 1. Language Assessment. § 2. Decline? § 3. Value of Modern Languages. § 4. Scientific Perspective. § 5. Conclusion. § 6. Sounds. § 7. Abbreviations. § 8. Counterarguments. Outcome. § 9. Word Forms. § 10. Combination and Breakdown. § 11. Word Agreement.
XVII.—§ 1. Linguistic Estimation.
The common belief of linguists that one form or one expression is just as good as another, provided they are both found in actual use, and that each language is to be considered a perfect vehicle for the thoughts of the nation speaking it, is in some ways the exact counterpart of the conviction of the Manchester school of economics that everything is for the best in the best of all possible worlds if only no artificial hindrances are put in the way of free exchange, for demand and supply will regulate everything better than any Government would be able to. Just as economists were blind to the numerous cases in which actual wants, even crying wants, were not satisfied, so also linguists were deaf to those instances which are, however, obvious to whoever has once turned his attention to them, in which the very structure of a language calls forth misunderstandings in everyday conversation, and in which, consequently, a word has to be repeated or modified or expanded or defined in order to call forth the idea intended by the speaker: he took his stick—no, not John’s, but his own; or: I mean you in the plural (or, you all, or you girls); no, a box on the ear; un dé à jouer, non pas un dé à coudre; nein, ich meine Sie persönlich (with very strong stress on Sie), etc. Every careful writer in any language has had the experience that on re-reading his manuscript he has discovered that a sentence which he thought perfectly clear when he wrote it lends itself to misunderstanding and has to be put in a different way; sometimes he has to add a clarifying parenthesis, because his language is defective in some respect, as when Edward Carpenter (Art of Creation 171), in speaking of the deification of the Babe, writes: “It is not likely that Man—the human male—left to himself would have done this; but to woman it was natural,” thus avoiding the misunderstanding that he was speaking of the whole species,[320] comprising both sexes. Herbert Spencer writes: “Charles had recently obtained—a post in the Post Office I was about to say, but the cacophony stopped me; and then I was about to say, an office in the Post Office, which is nearly as bad; let me say—a place in the Post Office” (Autobiogr. 2. 73—but of course the defect is not really one of sound, as implied by the expression ‘cacophony,’ but one of signification, as both words post and office are ambiguous, and the attempted collocation would therefore puzzle the reader or hearer, because the same word would have to be apprehended in two different senses in close succession). Similar instances might be alleged from any language.
Linguists commonly believe that one form or expression is just as valid as another as long as both are used in practice, and that each language serves as a perfect means of conveying the thoughts of the people who speak it. This belief parallels the view of the Manchester school of economics, which claims that everything is for the best in the best of all possible worlds, provided there are no artificial obstacles to free exchange, as demand and supply will regulate everything better than any government could. Just as economists overlook the many situations where actual needs, even urgent ones, go unmet, linguists often ignore clear examples that anyone who pays attention can see, where the very structure of a language leads to misunderstandings in daily conversations. As a result, a word might need to be repeated, modified, expanded, or clarified to convey the intended meaning of the speaker: he grabbed his stick—no, not John’s, but his own; or: I mean you in the plural (or, you all, or you girls); no, a box on the ear; un dé à jouer, non pas un dé à coudre; no, I mean you personally (with very strong emphasis on Sie), etc. Every careful writer in any language has experienced the moment when, upon re-reading their manuscript, they find that a sentence they thought was clear can actually be misunderstood and needs to be rephrased. Sometimes they have to add a clarifying parenthesis, because their language has some flaw, as when Edward Carpenter (Art of Creation 171) mentions the deification of the Babe: “It is not likely that Man—the human male—left to himself would have done this; but to woman it was natural,” thereby avoiding the misunderstanding that he was referring to the entire species,[320] which includes both sexes. Herbert Spencer writes: “Charles had recently obtained—a post in the Post Office I was about to say, but the cacophony stopped me; and then I was about to say, an office in the Post Office, which is nearly as bad; let me say—a place in the Post Office” (Autobiogr. 2. 73—but of course the problem isn’t really one of sound, as the term ‘cacophony’ suggests, but rather one of meaning, since both words post and office are ambiguous, and the attempted combination would confuse the reader or listener, because the same word would have to be understood in two different senses one after the other). Similar examples could be drawn from any language.
No language is perfect, but if we admit this truth (or truism), we must also admit by implication that it is not unreasonable to investigate the relative value of different languages or of different details in languages. When comparative linguists set themselves against the narrowmindedness of classical scholars who thought Latin and Greek the only worthy objects of study, and emphasized the value of all, even the least literary languages and dialects, they were primarily thinking of their value to the scientist, who finds something of interest in each of them, but they had no idea of comparing the relative value of languages from the point of view of their users—and yet the latter comparison is of much greater importance than the former.
No language is perfect, but if we accept this truth, we also have to acknowledge that it’s reasonable to explore the relative value of different languages or various aspects within languages. When comparative linguists challenged the narrow-mindedness of classical scholars who believed Latin and Greek were the only worthy subjects to study and highlighted the importance of all languages, even the least literary ones and regional dialects, they were mainly considering their value to scientists, who find something interesting in each of them. However, they didn’t think about comparing the relative value of languages from the users' perspective—and that comparison is far more significant than the first one.
XVII.—§ 2. Degeneration?
People will often use the expressions ‘evolution’ and ‘development’ in connexion with language, but most linguists, when taken to task, will maintain that these expressions as applied to languages should be used without the implication which is commonly attached to them when used of other objects, namely, that there is a progressive tendency towards something better or nearer perfection. They will say that ‘evolution’ means here simply changes going on in languages, without any judgment as to the value of these changes.
People often use the terms 'evolution' and 'development' when talking about language, but most linguists, when pressed, will argue that these terms should be used differently in relation to languages. They believe that unlike when used for other things, these terms shouldn't imply a natural progression towards something better or closer to perfection. They will explain that 'evolution' here simply refers to the changes happening in languages, without any judgment about the quality of those changes.
But those who do pronounce such a judgment nearly always take the changes as a retrogressive rather than a progressive development: “Tongues, like governments, have a natural tendency to degeneration,” said Dr. Samuel Johnson in the Preface to his Dictionary, and the same lament has been often repeated since his time. This is quite natural: people have always had a tendency to believe in a golden age, that is, in a remote past gloriously different to the miserable present. Why not, then, have the same belief with regard to language, the more so because one cannot fail to notice things in contemporary speech which[321] (superficially at any rate) look like corruptions of the ‘good old’ forms? Everything ‘old’ thus comes to be considered ‘good.’ Lowell and others think they have justified many of the commonly reviled Americanisms if they are able to show them to have existed in England in the sixteenth century, and similar considerations are met with everywhere. The same frame of mind finds support in the usual grammar-school admiration for the two classical languages and their literatures. People were taught to look down upon modern languages as mere dialects or patois and to worship Greek and Latin; the richness and fullness of forms found in those languages came naturally to be considered the very beau idéal of linguistic structure. Bacon gives a classical expression to this view when he declares “ingenia priorum seculorum nostris fuisse multo acutiora et subtiliora” (De augm. scient.[79]). To men fresh from the ordinary grammar-school training, no language would seem really respectable that had not four or five distinct cases and three genders, or that had less than five tenses and as many moods in its verbs. Accordingly, such poor languages as had either lost much of their original richness in grammatical forms (e.g. French, English, or Danish), or had never had any, so far as one knew (e.g. Chinese), were naturally looked upon with something of the pity bestowed on relatives in reduced circumstances, or the contempt felt for foreign paupers. It is well known how in West-European languages, in English, German, Danish, Swedish, Dutch, French, etc., obsolete forms were artificially kept alive and preferred to younger forms by most grammarians; but we see exactly the same point of view in such a language as Magyar, where, under the influence of the historical studies of the grammarian Révai, the belief in the excellence of the ‘veneranda antiquitas’ as compared with the corruption of the modern language has been prevalent in schools and in literature. (See Simonyi US 259; cf. on Modern Greek and Telugu above, p. 301.)
But those who make such judgments almost always see changes as a step backward rather than forward: “Languages, like governments, tend to degenerate,” said Dr. Samuel Johnson in the Preface to his Dictionary, and this same complaint has been echoed many times since. This is completely understandable: people have always had a tendency to believe in a golden age, a distant past that is gloriously different from the miserable present. So why not hold the same belief about language, especially since it's hard not to notice that many aspects of contemporary speech seem (at least on the surface) like corruptions of the "good old" forms? Everything “old” ends up being considered “good.” Lowell and others think they've justified many of the often-criticized Americanisms if they can show they existed in England in the sixteenth century, and similar ideas are common everywhere. The same mindset is reinforced by the typical grammar-school admiration for the two classical languages and their literatures. Students were taught to look down on modern languages as mere dialects or patois and to revere Greek and Latin; the richness and variety of forms in those languages naturally came to be seen as the ideal of linguistic structure. Bacon famously stated this view when he declared “ingenia priorum seculorum nostris fuisse multo acutiora et subtiliora” (De augm. scient.). For those just out of standard grammar-school training, no language seemed truly respectable unless it had four or five distinct cases and three genders, or had at least five tenses and several moods in its verbs. Consequently, languages that had either lost much of their original richness in grammatical forms (e.g., French, English, or Danish), or had never had any to begin with (e.g., Chinese), were often viewed with the same pity given to relatives in difficult situations, or with the disdain directed at impoverished foreigners. It’s well-known how in West-European languages, including English, German, Danish, Swedish, Dutch, French, etc., outdated forms were artificially preserved and preferred over newer forms by most grammarians; we see this same perspective in a language like Magyar, where, influenced by the historical studies of grammarian Révai, the belief in the superiority of the ‘veneranda antiquitas’ compared to the corruption of the modern language has been widespread in schools and literature. (See Simonyi US 259; cf. on Modern Greek and Telugu above, p. 301.)
Comparative linguists had one more reason for adopting this manner of estimating languages. To what had the great victories won by their science been due? Whence had they got the material for that magnificent edifice which had proved spacious enough to hold Hindus and Persians, Lithuanians and Slavs, Greeks, Romans, Germans and Kelts? Surely it was neither from Modern English nor Modern Danish, but from the oldest stages of each linguistic group. The older a linguistic document was, the[322] more valuable it was to the first generation of comparative linguists. An English form like had was of no great use, but Gothic habaidedeima was easily picked to pieces, and each of its several elements lent itself capitally to comparison with Sanskrit, Lithuanian and Greek. The linguist was chiefly dependent for his material on the old and archaic languages; his interest centred round their fuller forms: what wonder, then, if in his opinion those languages were superior to all others? What wonder if by comparing had and habaidedeima he came to regard the English form as a mutilated and worn-out relic of a splendid original? or if, noting the change from the old to the modern form, he used strong language and spoke of degeneration, corruption, depravation, decline, phonetic decay, etc.?
Comparative linguists had another reason for using this method to evaluate languages. What had contributed to the significant victories achieved by their field? Where did they get the resources for that impressive structure that was spacious enough to include Hindus and Persians, Lithuanians and Slavs, Greeks, Romans, Germans, and Celts? It certainly wasn’t from Modern English or Modern Danish, but rather from the earliest stages of each language group. The older a linguistic document was, the[322] more valuable it became for the first generation of comparative linguists. An English form like had wasn’t particularly useful, but Gothic habaidedeima could easily be dissected, and each of its components was ideal for comparison with Sanskrit, Lithuanian, and Greek. Linguists primarily relied on ancient and archaic languages; their focus was on these more complex forms: so it’s no surprise that they believed those languages were superior to all others. It’s also not surprising that by comparing had and habaidedeima, they came to see the English form as a damaged and worn-out remnant of a magnificent original, or that, observing the evolution from the old to the modern form, they used strong terms and talked about degeneration, corruption, depravation, decline, phonetic decay, and so on.
The view that the modern languages of Europe, Persia and India are far inferior to the old languages, or the one old language, from which they descend, we have already encountered in the historical part of this work, in Bopp, Humboldt, Grimm and their followers. It looms very large in Schleicher, according to whom the history of language is all a Decline and Fall, and in Max Müller, who says that “on the whole, the history of all the Aryan languages is nothing but a gradual process of decay.” Nor is it yet quite extinct.
The belief that the modern languages of Europe, Persia, and India are significantly inferior to the ancient languages, or the one ancient language they originated from, has already been discussed in the historical section of this work, particularly in the writings of Bopp, Humboldt, Grimm, and their followers. This idea is prominent in Schleicher's view, which sees the history of language as a story of Decline and Fall, and in Max Müller’s assertion that “overall, the history of all the Aryan languages is just a gradual process of decay.” Additionally, this belief is still somewhat alive.
XVII.—§ 3. Appreciation of Modern Tongues.
Some scholars, however, had an indistinct feeling that this unconditional and wholesale depreciation of modern languages could not contain the whole truth, and I have collected various passages, nearly always of a perfunctory or incidental character, in which these languages are partly rehabilitated. Humboldt (Versch 284) speaks of the modern use of auxiliary verbs and prepositions as a convenience of the intellect which may even in some isolated instances lead to greater definiteness. On Grimm see above, p. 62. Rask (SA 1. 191) says that it is possible that the advantages of simplicity may be greater than those of an elaborate linguistic structure. Madvig turns against the uncritical admiration of the classical languages, but does not go further than saying that the modern analytical languages are just as good as the old synthetic ones, for thoughts can be expressed in both with equal clearness. Kräuter (Archiv f. neu. spr. 57. 204) says: “That decay is consistent with clearness and precision is shown by French; that it is not fatal to poetry is seen in the language of Shakespeare.” Osthoff (Schriftspr. u. Volksmundart, 1883, 13) protests against a one-sided depreciation of the language of Lessing and Goethe in favour of the language of Wulfila or[323] Otfried, or vice versa: a language possesses an inestimable charm if its phonetic system remains unimpaired and its etymologies are transparent; but pliancy of the material of language and flexibility to express ideas is really no less an advantage; everything depends on the point of view: the student of architecture has one point of view, the people who are to live in the house another.
Some scholars, however, felt that the complete and broad dismissal of modern languages couldn’t capture the whole truth. I've gathered various quotes, mostly of a casual or incidental nature, in which these languages are partially vindicated. Humboldt (Versch 284) mentions that the modern use of auxiliary verbs and prepositions is a convenience for the mind, which can sometimes lead to greater clarity. On Grimm, see above, p. 62. Rask (SA 1. 191) suggests that the benefits of simplicity might outweigh those of a complex linguistic structure. Madvig critiques the uncritical praise of classical languages, arguing instead that modern analytical languages are just as good as the old synthetic ones since thoughts can be expressed in both clearly. Kräuter (Archiv f. neu. spr. 57. 204) states: “The decay found in certain languages can be consistent with clarity and precision, as shown by French; it’s also clear that it isn’t detrimental to poetry, as evidenced in Shakespeare’s language.” Osthoff (Schriftspr. u. Volksmundart, 1883, 13) argues against a one-sided devaluation of the language of Lessing and Goethe in favor of Wulfila or Otfried, or the other way around: a language has immense charm if its phonetic system is intact and its etymologies are clear; however, the adaptability of language and its flexibility in expressing ideas is also a significant advantage. Ultimately, it depends on the perspective: an architecture student has one way of looking at it, while the people who will live in the house have another.
Among those who thus half-heartedly refused to accept the downhill theory to its full extent must be mentioned Whitney, many passages in whose writings show a certain hesitation to make up his mind on this question. When speaking of the loss of old forms he says that “some of these could well be spared, but others were valuable, and their relinquishment has impaired the power of expression of the language.” To phonetic corruption we owe true grammatical forms, which make the wealth of every inflective language; but it is also destructive of the very edifice which it has helped to build. He speaks of “the legitimate tendency to neglect and eliminate distinctions which are practically unnecessary,” and will not admit “that we can speak our minds any less distinctly than our ancestors could, with all their apparatus of inflexions”; gender is a luxury which any language can well afford to dispense with, but language is impoverished by the obliteration of the subjunctive mood. The giving up of grammatical endings is akin to wastefulness, and the excessive loss in English makes truly for decay (L 31, 73, 74, 76, 77, 84, 85; G 51, 105, 104).
Among those who somewhat reluctantly refused to accept the downhill theory fully is Whitney, whose writings show a certain indecision on this issue. When discussing the loss of old forms, he notes that “some of these could well be spared, but others were valuable, and their relinquishment has impaired the power of expression of the language.” To phonetic corruption, we owe true grammatical forms, which enrich every inflected language; but it also undermines the very structure it has helped to create. He mentions “the legitimate tendency to neglect and eliminate distinctions which are practically unnecessary” and does not agree that “we can speak our minds any less distinctly than our ancestors could, with all their apparatus of inflections”; gender is a luxury that any language can afford to do without, but language suffers when the subjunctive mood is erased. Giving up grammatical endings is similar to being wasteful, and the significant loss in English really leads to decay (L 31, 73, 74, 76, 77, 84, 85; G 51, 105, 104).
XVII.—§ 4. The Scientific Attitude.
Why are all such expressions either of depreciation or of partial appreciation of the modern languages so utterly unsatisfactory? One reason is that they are so vague and dependent on a general feeling of inferiority or the reverse, instead of being based on a detailed comparative estimation of real facts in linguistic structure. If, therefore, we want to arrive at a scientific answer to the question “Decay or progress?” we must examine actual instances of changes, but must take particular care that these instances are not chosen at random, but are typical and characteristic of the total structure of the languages concerned. What is wanted is not a comparison of isolated facts, but the establishment of general laws and tendencies, for only through such can we hope to decide whether or no we are justified in using terms like ‘development’ and ‘evolution’ in linguistic history.
Why are all these expressions about the modern languages being either negative or only somewhat positive so completely unsatisfactory? One reason is that they're vague and rely on a general sense of inferiority or the opposite, rather than being grounded in a detailed comparative analysis of the actual facts in linguistic structure. So, if we want to get a scientific answer to the question “Decay or progress?” we need to look at real examples of change, making sure these examples are not chosen randomly but are typical and representative of the overall structure of the languages involved. What we need is not a comparison of isolated facts, but the establishment of general principles and trends, because only then can we hope to determine whether we can legitimately use terms like ‘development’ and ‘evolution’ in the study of linguistic history.
The second reason why the earlier pronouncements quoted above do not satisfy us is that their authors nowhere raise the question of the method by which linguistic value is to be measured,[324] by what standard and what tests the comparative merits of languages or of forms are to be ascertained. Those linguists who looked upon language as a product of nature were by that very fact precluded from establishing a rational basis for determining linguistic values; nor is it possible to find one if we look at things from the one-sided point of view of the linguistic historian. An almost comical instance of this is found when Curtius (Sprachwiss. u. class. phil. 39) says that the Greek accusative póda is better than Sanskrit padam, because it is possible at once to see that it belongs to the third declension. What is to be taken into account is of course the interests of the speaking community, and if we consistently consider language as a set of human actions with a definite end in view, namely, the communication of thoughts and feelings, then it becomes easy to find tests by which to measure linguistic values, for from that point of view it is evident that THAT LANGUAGE RANKS HIGHEST WHICH GOES FARTHEST IN THE ART OF ACCOMPLISHING MUCH WITH LITTLE MEANS, OR, IN OTHER WORDS, WHICH IS ABLE TO EXPRESS THE GREATEST AMOUNT OF MEANING WITH THE SIMPLEST MECHANISM.
The second reason why the earlier statements mentioned above don’t satisfy us is that their authors never consider how to measure linguistic value, [324] what standards or tests can determine the comparative merits of languages or their forms. Those linguists who viewed language as a natural product were inherently unable to establish a rational basis for deciding linguistic values; nor can we find one if we adopt the narrow perspective of the linguistic historian. An almost funny example of this occurs when Curtius (Sprachwiss. u. class. phil. 39) claims that the Greek accusative póda is superior to Sanskrit padam because it’s immediately clear that it belongs to the third declension. What we really need to consider is the interests of the speaking community. If we consistently see language as a collection of human actions aimed at a specific purpose—namely, the communication of thoughts and feelings—it becomes straightforward to identify tests for measuring linguistic values. From that perspective, it’s clear that The best language is the one that achieves the most with the least resources, or in other words, one that can convey the most meaning using the simplest structure.
The estimation has to be thoroughly and frankly anthropocentric. This may be a defect in other sciences, in which it is a merit on the part of the investigator to be able to abstract himself from human considerations; in linguistics, on the contrary, on account of the very nature of the object of study, one must constantly look to the human interest, and judge everything from that, and from no other, point of view. Otherwise we run the risk of going astray in all directions.
The estimation has to be completely and honestly human-centered. This might be a flaw in other sciences, where it's valued for researchers to detach themselves from human concerns; however, in linguistics, due to the nature of what we study, we must always focus on human interests and evaluate everything from that perspective, and no other. Otherwise, we risk getting lost in every direction.
It will be noticed that my formula contains two requirements: it demands a maximum of efficiency and a minimum of effort. Efficiency means expressiveness, and effort means bodily and mental labour, and thus the formula is simply one of modern energetics. But unfortunately we are in possession of no method by which to measure either expressiveness or effort exactly, and in cases of conflict it may be difficult to decide to which of the two sides we are to attach the greater importance, how great a surplus of efficiency is required to counterbalance a surplus of exertion, or inversely. Still, in many cases no doubt can arise, and we are often able to state progress, because there is either a clear gain in efficiency or a diminution of exertion, or both.
You’ll notice that my formula has two main components: it requires maximum efficiency and minimum effort. Efficiency refers to expressiveness, while effort relates to physical and mental labor, so the formula is essentially about modern energy use. Unfortunately, we don’t have a way to measure expressiveness or effort precisely, and in cases of conflict, it can be hard to decide which aspect is more important, how much extra efficiency is needed to outweigh additional effort, or the other way around. Still, in many cases, there’s no doubt, and we can usually assess progress because there’s either a clear increase in efficiency or a decrease in effort, or both.
There is one objection which is likely to present itself to many of my readers, namely, that natives handle their language without the least exertion or effort (cf. XIV § 6, p. 262). Madvig (1857, 73 ff. = Kl 260 ff.) admits that a simplification in linguistic structure will make the language easier to learn for foreigners, but denies[325] that it means increased ease for the native. Similarly Wechssler (L 149) says that “der begriff der schwierigkeit und unbequemheit für die einheimischen nicht existiert.” I might quote against him his countryman Gabelentz, who expressly says that the difficulties of the German languages are felt by natives, a view that is endorsed by Schuchardt in various places.[80] To my mind there is not the slightest doubt that different languages differ very much in easiness even to native speakers. In the chapters devoted to children we have already seen that the numerous mistakes made by them in every possible way testify to the labour involved in learning one’s own language. This labour must naturally be greater in the case of a highly complicated linguistic structure with many rules and still more exceptions to the rules, than in languages constructed simply and regularly.
There’s one objection that many of my readers might have: natives use their language effortlessly (see XIV § 6, p. 262). Madvig (1857, 73 ff. = Kl 260 ff.) acknowledges that simplifying linguistic structure makes it easier for foreigners to learn, but he argues[325] that it doesn’t make it easier for natives. Similarly, Wechssler (L 149) states that “The concept of difficulty and discomfort does not exist for the locals..” I could counter his point with Gabelentz, who explicitly mentions that natives do feel the challenges of the German languages, a view supported by Schuchardt in various instances.[80] In my opinion, there’s no doubt that different languages vary significantly in ease of use, even for native speakers. In the chapters about children, we’ve already noted that their many mistakes show the effort involved in learning their own language. This effort is naturally greater in languages with complex structures and lots of rules, as well as many exceptions, compared to languages that are simpler and more regular.
Nor is the difficulty of correct speech confined to the first mastering of the language. Even to the native who has spoken the same language from a child, its daily use involves no small amount of exertion. Under ordinary circumstances he is not conscious of any exertion in speaking; but such a want of conscious feeling is no proof that the exertion is absent. And it is a strong argument to the contrary that it is next to impossible for you to speak correctly if you are suffering from excessive mental work; you will constantly make slips in grammar and idiom as well as in pronunciation; you have not the same command of language as under normal conditions. If you have to speak on a difficult and unfamiliar subject, on which you would not like to say anything but what is to the point or strictly justifiable, you will sometimes find that the thoughts themselves claim so much mental energy that there is none left for speaking with elegance, or even with complete regard to grammar: to your own vexation you will have a feeling that your phrases are confused and your language incorrect. A pianist may practise a difficult piece of music so as to have it “at his fingers’ ends”; under ordinary circumstances he will be able to play it quite mechanically, without ever being conscious of effort; but, nevertheless, the effort is there. How great the effort is appears when some day or other the musician is ‘out of humour,’ that is, when his brain is at work on other subjects or is not in its usual working order. At once his execution will be stumbling and faulty.
The challenge of speaking correctly isn’t just about learning a language for the first time. Even for a native speaker who has been using the same language since childhood, everyday communication takes a good amount of effort. Usually, they don’t notice that effort while speaking, but that lack of awareness doesn’t mean it’s not there. In fact, it’s almost impossible to speak accurately when you’re overwhelmed with mental work; you’re likely to make mistakes in grammar, phrasing, and pronunciation, and you won’t have the same command of the language as you do under normal conditions. If you need to discuss a challenging or unfamiliar topic, and you want to be precise and accurate, you might find that organizing your thoughts takes up so much mental energy that there’s little left for speaking clearly or grammatically, leading to frustration as your words may come out jumbled or incorrect. A pianist can practice a complicated piece until it feels automatic; under normal circumstances, they can play it without feeling any strain. However, when they’re having an off day or their mind is preoccupied with other things, their playing can become clumsy and flawed.
XVII.—§ 5. Final Answer.
I may here anticipate the results of the following investigation and say that in all those instances in which we are able to examine the history of any language for a sufficient length of time, we find that languages have a progressive tendency. But if languages progress towards greater perfection, it is not in a bee-line, nor are all the changes we witness to be considered steps in the right direction. The only thing I maintain is that the sum total of these changes, when we compare a remote period with the present time, shows a surplus of progressive over retrogressive or indifferent changes, so that the structure of modern languages is nearer perfection than that of ancient languages, if we take them as wholes instead of picking out at random some one or other more or less significant detail. And of course it must not be imagined that progress has been achieved through deliberate acts of men conscious that they were improving their mother-tongue. On the contrary, many a step in advance has at first been a slip or even a blunder, and, as in other fields of human activity, good results have only been won after a good deal of bungling and ‘muddling along.’[81] My attitude towards this question is the same as that of Leslie Stephen, who writes in a letter (Life 454): “I have a perhaps unreasonable amount of belief, not in a millennium, but in the world on the whole blundering rather forwards than backwards.”
I can predict the findings of the following investigation and say that in all the cases where we can study the history of any language over a significant period, we see that languages tend to progress. However, while languages do move towards greater perfection, it isn’t a straight path, and not every change we observe is a positive step forward. What I argue is that the total of these changes, when we compare a distant time to the present, shows more progress than regression or neutrality, meaning that the structure of modern languages is closer to perfection than that of ancient languages when we look at them as a whole instead of selecting some random more or less significant detail. Also, it shouldn’t be assumed that this progress happened through intentional actions by people who were aware that they were improving their language. On the contrary, many advances started as mistakes or even errors, and like in other areas of human activity, positive results often came after a lot of fumbling and 'muddling along.'[81] My perspective on this issue aligns with that of Leslie Stephen, who wrote in a letter (Life 454): “I have a perhaps unreasonable amount of belief, not in a millennium, but in the world on the whole blundering rather forwards than backwards.”
Schleicher on one occasion used the fine simile: “Our words, as contrasted with Gothic words, are like a statue that has been rolling for a long time in the bed of a river till its beautiful limbs have been worn off, so that now scarcely anything remains but a polished stone cylinder with faint indications of what it once was” (D 34). Let us turn the tables by asking: Suppose, however, that it would be quite out of the question to place the statue on a pedestal to be admired; what if, on the one hand, it was not ornamental enough as a work of art, and if, on the other hand, human well-being was at stake if it was not serviceable in a rolling-mill: which would then be the better—a rugged and unwieldy statue, making difficulties at every rotation, or an even, smooth, easygoing and well-oiled roller?
Schleicher once made a great comparison: “Our words, compared to Gothic words, are like a statue that has been rolling in a river for a long time until its beautiful parts have been worn away, so that now hardly anything is left but a polished stone cylinder with faint signs of what it used to be” (D 34). Let’s flip the question: What if it was completely out of the question to put the statue on a pedestal for people to admire? What if, on one hand, it wasn't impressive enough as art, and on the other, human well-being depended on it being useful in a rolling mill: which would be better—an awkward and heavy statue that complicates every turn, or a smooth, easy-to-use, well-oiled roller?
After these preliminary considerations we may now proceed to a comparative examination of the chief differences between ancient and modern stages of our Western European languages.
After these initial thoughts, we can now move on to a comparative look at the main differences between ancient and modern stages of our Western European languages.
XVII.—§ 6. Sounds.
The student who goes through the chapters devoted to sound changes in historical and comparative grammars will have great difficulty in getting at any great lines of development or general tendencies: everything seems just haphazard and fortuitous; a long i is here shortened and there diphthongized or lowered into e, etc. The history of sounds is dependent on surroundings in many, though not in all circumstances, but surroundings do not always act in the same way; in short, there seem to be so many conflicting tendencies that no universal or even general rules can be evolved from all these ‘sound laws.’ Still less would it seem possible to state anything about the comparative value of the forms before and after the change, for it does not seem to matter a bit for the speaking community whether it says stān as in Old English or stone as now, and thus in innumerable cases. Nay, from one point of view it may seem that any change militates against the object of language (cf. Wechssler L 28), but this is true only of the very moment when the change sets in while people are accustomed to the old sound (or the old signification), and even then the change is only injurious provided it impedes understanding or renders understanding less easy, which is far from always being the case.
The student who goes through the chapters focusing on sound changes in historical and comparative grammars will struggle to find clear lines of development or general trends: everything appears random and coincidental; a long i is shortened in some cases, diphthongized in others, or changed to e, etc. The history of sounds is influenced by surrounding factors in many, though not all, situations, but these surroundings don’t always have the same effect; in short, there are so many conflicting tendencies that no universal or even general rules can be developed from all these 'sound laws.' It’s even less feasible to determine anything about the comparative value of the forms before and after the change because it doesn’t seem to matter at all to the speaking community whether they say stān as in Old English or stone as we do now, and this applies to countless instances. In fact, from one perspective, it might appear that any change goes against the purpose of language (cf. Wechssler L 28), but this is only true at the very moment the change occurs while people are still used to the old sound (or old meaning), and even then the change is only detrimental if it hinders understanding or makes comprehension harder, which is not always the case.
There is one scholar who has asserted the existence of a universal progressive tendency in languages, or, as he calls it, a humanization of language, namely Baudouin de Courtenay (Vermenschlichung der Sprache, 1893). He is chiefly thinking of the sound system,[82] and he maintains that there is a tendency towards eliminating the innermost articulations and using instead sounds that are formed nearer to the teeth and lips. Thus some back (postpalatal, velar) consonants become p, b, while others develop into s sounds; cf. Slav slovo ‘word’ with Lat. cluo, etc. Baudouin also mentions the frequent palatalization of back consonants, as in French and Italian ce, ci, ge, gi, but as this is due to the influence of the following front vowel, it should not perhaps be mentioned as a universal tendency of human language. It is further said that throat sounds, which play such a great rôle in Semitic languages, have been discarded in most modern languages. But it may be objected that sometimes throat sounds do develop in modern periods, as in the Danish ‘stød’ and in English dialectal bu’er for[328] butter, etc. A universal tendency of sounds to move away from the throat cannot be said to be firmly established; but for our purpose it is more important to say that even were it true, the value of such a tendency for the speaking community would not be great enough to justify us in speaking of progress towards a truly ‘human’ language as opposed to the more beastlike language of our primeval ancestors. It is true that Baudouin (p. 25) says that it is possible to articulate in the front and upper part with less effort and with greater precision than in the interior and lower parts of the speaking apparatus, but if this is true with regard to the mouth proper, it cannot be maintained with regard to the vocal chords, where very important effects may be produced in the most precise way by infinitely little exertion. Thus in no single point can I see that Baudouin de Courtenay has made out a strong case for his conception of ‘humanization of language.’
There is one scholar who has claimed that there’s a universal trend toward progress in languages, or as he puts it, a humanization of language, specifically Baudouin de Courtenay (Vermenschlichung der Sprache, 1893). He primarily focuses on the sound system,[82] arguing that there’s a tendency to eliminate deeper articulations and instead use sounds that are produced closer to the teeth and lips. As a result, some back (postpalatal, velar) consonants become p, b, while others transform into s sounds; for example, Slav slovo ‘word’ is compared with Lat. cluo, etc. Baudouin also points out the common palatalization of back consonants, as seen in French and Italian ce, ci, ge, gi, but since this occurs due to the influence of the following front vowel, it might not be appropriate to label it as a universal trend in human language. Furthermore, it’s said that throat sounds, which are significant in Semitic languages, have been dropped in most modern languages. However, one could argue that throat sounds can still emerge in modern times, as seen in the Danish ‘stød’ and in some English dialects where bu’er substitutes for[328] butter, etc. The idea of a universal trend for sounds to shift away from the throat isn’t firmly established; yet for our discussion, it’s more crucial to note that even if it were true, the significance of such a trend for the speaking community wouldn't be substantial enough to suggest progress toward a genuinely ‘human’ language compared to the more animal-like speech of our early ancestors. Baudouin (p. 25) states that it’s possible to articulate in the front and upper part of the mouth with less effort and greater precision than in the back and lower parts, but while this might hold for the mouth itself, it doesn’t apply to the vocal cords, where significant effects can be produced with minimal effort. Therefore, I can’t find any strong evidence from Baudouin de Courtenay supporting his notion of ‘humanization of language.’
XVII.—§ 7. Shortenings.
But there is another phonetic tendency which is much more universal and infinitely more valuable than the one asserted by Baudouin de Courtenay, namely, the tendency to shorten words. Words get shorter and shorter in consequence of a great many of those changes that we see constantly going on in all languages: vowels in weak syllables are pronounced more and more indistinctly and finally disappear altogether, as when OE. lufu, stānas, sende, through ME. luve, stanes, sende with pronounced e’s, have become our modern monosyllables love, stones, send, or when Latin bonum, homo, viginti have become Fr. bon, on, vingt, and Lat. bona, hominem, Fr. bonne, homme, where the vowel was kept, because it was a or protected by the consonant group, but has now also disappeared in normal pronunciation. Final vowels have been dropped extensively in Danish and German dialects, and so have the u’s and i’s in Russian, which are now kept in the spelling merely as signs of the quality of the preceding consonant. It would be easy to multiply instances. Nor are the consonants more stable; the dropping of final ones is seen most easily in Modern French, because they are retained in spelling, as in tout, vers, champ, chant, etc. In the two last examples two consonants have disappeared, the m and n, however, leaving a trace in the nasalized pronunciation of the vowel, as also in bon, nom, etc. Final r and l often disappear in Fr. words like quatre, simple, and medial consonants have been dropped in such cases as côte from coste, bête from beste, sauf [so·f] from salvo, etc. We have corresponding omissions in English, where in very old times n was dropped in such cases as us, five, other, while the German[329] forms uns, fünf, ander have kept the old consonants; in more recent times l was dropped in half, calm, etc., gh [x] in light, bought, etc., and r in the prevalent pronunciation of warm, part, etc. Initial consonants are more firmly fixed in many languages, yet we see them lost in the E. combinations kn, gn, wr, where k, g, w used to be sounded, e.g. in know, gnaw, wrong. Consonant assimilation means in most cases the same thing as dropping of one consonant, for no trace of the consonant is left, at any rate after the compensating lengthening has been given up, as is often the case, e.g. in E. cupboard, blackguard [kʌbəd, blæga·d].
But there is another phonetic trend that is much more universal and far more valuable than the one mentioned by Baudouin de Courtenay, which is the tendency to shorten words. Words keep getting shorter due to many of the changes we constantly observe in all languages: vowels in weak syllables are pronounced less and less clearly and eventually disappear altogether, like how Old English lufu, stānas, sende have evolved through Middle English luve, stanes, sende with pronounced e's into our modern monosyllables love, stones, send. Or consider Latin bonum, homo, viginti, which have become French bon, on, vingt, and Latin bona, hominem turning into French bonne, homme, where the vowel was retained because it was a or protected by a consonant cluster, but has now also disappeared in normal speech. Final vowels have been extensively dropped in Danish and German dialects, as have the u's and i's in Russian, which are now only preserved in spelling as indicators of the quality of the preceding consonant. It would be easy to provide more examples. Consonants aren’t any more stable either; the dropping of final consonants is most noticeable in Modern French, where they are still kept in writing, like in tout, vers, champ, chant, etc. In the last two examples, two consonants have disappeared, the m and n, but they leave a mark in the nasalized pronunciation of the vowel, just like in bon, nom, etc. Final r and l often vanish in French words like quatre, simple, and medial consonants have been dropped in examples like côte from coste, bête from beste, sauf [so·f] from salvo, etc. We see similar omissions in English, where in very old times n was dropped in examples like us, five, other, while the German forms uns, fünf, ander have retained the old consonants; more recently, l was dropped in half, calm, etc., gh [x] in light, bought, etc., and r in the common pronunciation of warm, part, etc. Initial consonants are generally more fixed in many languages, but we still see them lost in English combinations kn, gn, wr, where k, g, w used to be pronounced, like in know, gnaw, wrong. Consonant assimilation usually means the same thing as dropping one consonant, as there’s no trace of the consonant left, especially after any compensating lengthening has been abandoned, which is often the case, for example in English cupboard, blackguard [kʌbəd, blæga·d].
So far we have given instances of what might be called the most regular or constant types of phonetic change leading to shorter forms; but the same result is the natural outcome of a process which occurs more sporadically. This is haplology, by which one sound or one group of sounds is pronounced once only instead of twice, the hearer taking it through a kind of acoustic delusion as belonging both to what precedes and to what follows. Examples are a goo(d) deal, wha(t) to do, nex(t) time, simp(le)ly, England from Englaland, eighteen from OE. eahtatiene, honesty from honestete, Glou(ce)ster, Worcester [wustə], familiarly pro(ba)bly, vulgarly lib(ra)ry, Febr(uar)y. From other languages may be quoted Fr. cont(re)rôle, ido(lo)lâtre, Neu(ve)ville, Lat. nu(tri)trix, sti(pi)pendium, It. qual(che)cosa, cosa for che cosa, etc. (Cf. my LPh 11. 9.)
So far, we’ve provided examples of what could be considered the most regular or consistent types of phonetic change that lead to shorter forms; however, the same outcome can naturally result from a process that happens more sporadically. This is called haplology, where one sound or group of sounds is pronounced only once instead of twice, causing the listener to mistakenly perceive it as belonging to both what comes before and after. Examples include a goo(d) deal, wha(t) to do, nex(t) time, simp(le)ly, England from Englaland, eighteen from OE. eahtatiene, honesty from honestete, Glou(ce)ster, Worcester [wustə], informally pro(ba)bly, and commonly lib(ra)ry, Febr(uar)y. From other languages, we can cite Fr. cont(re)rôle, ido(lo)lâtre, Neu(ve)ville, Lat. nu(tri)trix, sti(pi)pendium, It. qual(che)cosa, cosa for che cosa, etc. (Cf. my LPh 11. 9.)
The accumulation through centuries of such influences results in those instances of seemingly violent contractions with which every student of historical linguistics is familiar. One classical example has already been mentioned above, E. had, corresponding to Gothic habaidedeima; other examples are lord, with its three or four sounds, which was formerly laverd, and in Old English hlāford; the old Gothonic form of the same word contained indubitably as many as twelve sounds; Latin augustum has in French through aoust become août, pronounced [au] or even [u]; Latin oculum has shrunk into four sounds in Italian occhio, three in Spanish ojo, and two in Fr. œil; It. medesimo, Sp. mismo and Fr. même represent various stages of the shrinking of Lat. metipsimum; cf. also Fr. ménage from mansion- + -aticum. Primitive Norse ne veit ek hvat ‘not know I what’ has become Dan. noget ‘something,’ often pronounced [no·ð] or [nɔ·ð].
The accumulation of these influences over centuries leads to those instances of seemingly drastic changes that every student of historical linguistics knows well. One classic example mentioned earlier is E. had, which corresponds to Gothic habaidedeima; other examples include lord, with its three or four sounds, which used to be laverd, and in Old English hlāford; the old Gothic form of the same word likely had as many as twelve sounds; Latin augustum has become août in French, pronounced [au] or even [u]; Latin oculum has reduced to four sounds in Italian occhio, three in Spanish ojo, and two in French œil; Italian medesimo, Spanish mismo, and French même show various stages of the reduction from Latin metipsimum; see also French ménage from mansion- + -aticum. Primitive Norse ne veit ek hvat ‘not know I what’ has become Danish noget ‘something,’ often pronounced [no·ð] or [nɔ·ð].
XVII.—§ 8. Objections. Result.
There cannot therefore be the slightest doubt that the general tendency of all languages is towards shorter and shorter forms: the ancient languages of our family, Sanskrit, Zend, etc., abound in very long words; the further back we go, the greater the number of sesquipedalia. It cannot justly be objected that we see sometimes examples of phonetic lengthenings, as in E. sound from ME. soun, Fr. son, E. whilst, amongst from ME. whiles, amonges; a similar excrescence of t after s is seen in G. obst, pabst, Swed. eljest and others; after n, t is added in G. jemand, niemand (two syllables, while there is nothing added to the trisyllabic jedermann)—for even if such instances might be multiplied, their number and importance is infinitely smaller than those in the opposite direction. (On the seeming insertion of d in ndr, see p. 264, note). In some cases we witness a certain reaction against word forms that are felt to be too short and therefore too indistinct (see Ch. XV § 1, XX § 9), but on the whole such instances are few and far between: the prevailing tendency is towards shorter forms.
There is no doubt that the overall trend in languages is towards shorter forms: the ancient languages in our family, like Sanskrit and Zend, contain many long words; the further back we go, the more we find sesquipedalia. It's not accurate to argue that we sometimes see examples of phonetic lengthening, like E. sound from ME. soun, Fr. son, or E. whilst, amongst from ME. whiles, amonges; a similar addition of t after s appears in G. obst, pabst, Swed. eljest, and others; after n, t is added in G. jemand, niemand (which are two syllables, while nothing is added to the trisyllabic jedermann)—even if we could find more such examples, their number and significance is infinitely less than those in the opposite direction. (For the apparent addition of d in ndr, see p. 264, note). In some cases, we see a slight pushback against word forms that are considered too short and therefore unclear (see Ch. XV § 1, XX § 9), but overall, such examples are rare: the main trend is towards shorter forms.
Another objection must be dealt with here. It is said that it is only the purely phonetic development that tends to make words shorter, but that in languages as wholes words do not become shorter, because non-phonetic forces counteract the tendency. In modern languages we thus have some analogical formations which are longer than the forms they have supplanted, as when books has one sound more than OE. bēc, or when G. bewegte takes the place of bewog. Further, we have in modern languages many auxiliary words (prepositions, modal verbs) in places where they were formerly not required. That this objection is not valid if we take the whole of the language into consideration may perhaps be proved statistically if we compute the length of the same long text in various languages: the Gospel of St. Matthew contains in Greek about 39,000 syllables, in Swedish about 35,000, in German 33,000, in Danish 32,500, in English 29,000, and in Chinese only 17,000 (the figures for the Authorized English Version and for Danish are my own calculation; the other figures I take from Tegnér SM 51, Hoops in Anglia, Beiblatt 1896, 293, and Sturtevant LCh 175). In comparing these figures it should even be taken into consideration that translations naturally tend to be more long-winded and verbose than the original, so that the real gain in shortness may be greater than indicated.[83]
Another objection needs to be addressed here. It’s claimed that only purely phonetic development leads to shorter words, but that overall in languages, words don’t get shorter because non-phonetic factors counteract this tendency. In modern languages, we have some formations through analogy that are longer than the forms they replace, like when books has one more sound than OE. bēc, or when G. bewegte replaces bewog. Additionally, modern languages feature many auxiliary words (like prepositions and modal verbs) in places where they weren't needed before. This objection may not hold if we consider the entire language, and it might be statistically supported by calculating the length of the same long text in various languages: the Gospel of St. Matthew contains about 39,000 syllables in Greek, around 35,000 in Swedish, 33,000 in German, 32,500 in Danish, 29,000 in English, and only 17,000 in Chinese (the figures for the Authorized English Version and for Danish are my own calculations; I sourced the other figures from Tegnér SM 51, Hoops in Anglia, Beiblatt 1896, 293, and Sturtevant LCh 175). When comparing these numbers, it’s worth noting that translations usually tend to be more wordy than the original, so the actual reduction in length may be greater than indicated.[83]
Next, we come to consider the question whether the tendency towards shorter forms is a valuable asset in the development of languages or the reverse. The answer cannot be doubtful. Take the old example, English had and Gothic habaidedeima: the English form is preferable, on the principle that anyone who has to choose between walking one mile and four miles will, other things being equal, prefer the shorter cut. It is true that if we take words to be self-existing natural objects, habaidedeima has the air of a giant and had of a mere pigmy: this valuation lies at the bottom of many utterances even by recent linguistic thinkers, as when Sweet (H 10) speaks of the vanishing of sounds as “a purely destructive change.” But if we adopt the anthropocentric standard which has been explained above, and realize that what we call a word is really and primarily the combined action of human muscles to produce an audible effect, we see that the shortening of a form means a diminution of effort and a saving of time in the communication of our thoughts. If, as it is said, had has suffered from wear and tear in the long course of time, this means that the wear and tear of people now using this form in their speech is less than if they were still encumbered with the old giant habaidedeima. Voltaire was certainly very wide of the mark when he wrote: “C’est le propre des barbares d’abréger les mots”—long and clumsy words are rather to be considered as signs of barbarism, and short and nimble ones as signs of advanced culture.
Next, we consider whether the trend toward shorter forms is a valuable asset in the development of languages or not. The answer is clear. Take the old example, English had and Gothic habaidedeima: the English form is better because anyone who has to choose between walking one mile and four miles will, all else being equal, prefer the shorter route. It’s true that if we think of words as self-existing natural objects, habaidedeima seems like a giant and had like a mere tiny figure: this view underlies many statements by recent linguistic theorists, as when Sweet (H 10) refers to the loss of sounds as “a purely destructive change.” But if we adopt the human-centered perspective explained earlier and realize that what we call a word is really the coordinated effort of human muscles to create an audible effect, we can see that shortening a form means less effort and time saved in communicating our thoughts. If, as is said, had has endured wear and tear over time, it means that the wear and tear on people using this form in their speech is less than if they were still burdened with the old giant habaidedeima. Voltaire was definitely mistaken when he wrote: “It’s typical of barbarians to shorten words.”—long and awkward words should be seen as signs of barbarism, while short and agile ones indicate advanced culture.
Though I thus hold that the development towards shorter forms of expression is on the whole progressive, i.e. beneficial, I should not like to be too dogmatic on this point and assert that it is always beneficial: shortness may be carried to excess and thus cause obscurity or difficulty of understanding. This may be seen in the telegraphic style as well as in the literary style of some writers too anxious to avoid prolixity (some of Pope’s lines might be quoted in illustration of the classical: brevis esse laboro, obscurus fio). But in the case of the language of a whole community the danger certainly is very small indeed, for there will always be a natural and wholesome reaction against such excessive shortness. There is another misunderstanding I want to guard against when saying that the shortening makes on the whole for progress. It must not be thought that I lay undue stress on this point, which is after all chiefly concerned with a greater or smaller amount of physical or muscular exertion: this should neither be underrated nor overrated; but it will be seen that neither in my former work nor in this does the consideration of this point of mere shortness or length take up more than a fraction of the space allotted to the more psychical sides of the question,[332] to which we shall now turn our attention and to which I attach much more importance.
While I believe that the trend toward shorter forms of expression is generally positive and beneficial, I don't want to be overly rigid about this and claim it's always advantageous. Shortness can be taken too far, leading to confusion or difficulty in understanding. This can be seen in telegraphic writing as well as in the literary style of some authors who are too eager to avoid being verbose (some of Pope’s lines illustrate the classical idea: to be brief, I become obscure). However, in the language of an entire community, the risk is quite minimal, as there will always be a natural and healthy reaction against excessive brevity. I also want to clarify another misconception about my assertion that shortening generally leads to progress. It shouldn't be assumed that I place too much emphasis on this, which mainly relates to the physical or muscular effort involved; this should be neither undervalued nor exaggerated. It's important to note that, in both my previous work and this one, the consideration of mere shortness or length occupies only a small portion of the discussion compared to the more psychological aspects of the topic,[332] which I believe are much more significant.
XVII.—§ 9. Verbal Forms.
We may here recur to Schleicher’s example, E. had and Gothic habaidedeima. It is not only in regard to economy of muscular exertion that the former carries the day over the latter. Had corresponds not only to habaidedeima, but it unites in one short form everything expressed by the Gothic habaida, habaides, habaidedu, habaideduts, habaidedum, habaideduþ, habaidedun, habaidedjau, habaidedeis, habaidedi, habaidedeiwa, habaidedeits, habaidedeima, habaidedeiþ, habaidedeina—separate forms for two or three persons in three numbers in two distinct moods! It is clear, therefore, that the English form saves a considerable amount of brainwork to all English-speaking people—not only to children, who have fewer forms to learn, but also to adults, who have fewer forms to choose between and to keep distinct whenever they open their mouths to speak. Someone might, perhaps, say that on the other hand English people are obliged always to join personal pronouns to their verbal forms to indicate the person, and that this is a drawback counterbalancing the advantage, so that the net result is six of one and half a dozen of the other. This, however, would be a very superficial objection. For, in the first place, the personal pronouns are the same for all tenses and moods, but the endings are not. Secondly, the possession of endings does not exempt the Goths from having separate personal pronouns; and whenever these are used, as is very often the case in the first and second persons, those parts of the verbal endings which indicate persons are superfluous. They are no less superfluous in those extremely numerous cases in which the subject is either separately expressed by a noun or is understood from the preceding proposition, thus in the vast majority of the cases of the third person. If we compare a few pages of Old English prose with a modern rendering we shall see that in spite of the reduction in the latter of the person-indicating endings, personal pronouns are not required in any great number of sentences in which they were dispensed with in Old English. So that, altogether, the numerous endings of the older languages must be considered uneconomical.
We can return to Schleicher’s example, E. had and Gothic habaidedeima. The former is not just more economical in terms of muscular effort; it also outperforms the latter. Had corresponds not only to habaidedeima, but it condenses everything expressed by the Gothic forms habaida, habaides, habaidedu, habaideduts, habaidedum, habaideduþ, habaidedun, habaidedjau, habaidedeis, habaidedi, habaidedeiwa, habaidedeits, habaidedeima, habaidedeiþ, habaidedeina—distinct forms for two or three people in three numbers across two different moods! It's clear, then, that the English version saves a significant amount of mental effort for all English speakers—not just for children, who learn fewer forms, but also for adults, who have fewer forms to choose from and keep straight whenever they speak. Some might argue that, on the flip side, English speakers are always required to use personal pronouns with their verbs to indicate the subject, and that this drawback balances the benefit, resulting in a net outcome of six of one and half a dozen of the other. However, that’s a shallow critique. First, the personal pronouns are the same across all tenses and moods, but the endings are not. Second, having endings doesn’t keep the Goths from needing distinct personal pronouns; and in many cases, especially in the first and second persons, when these pronouns are used, the verb endings indicating person become unnecessary. They are equally unnecessary in the many instances where the subject is either explicitly stated with a noun or implied from the context, which is true for most cases in the third person. If we compare a few pages of Old English prose with a modern translation, we’ll see that despite the reduction in person-indicating endings, personal pronouns are not needed in a significant number of sentences where they were omitted in Old English. Therefore, overall, the numerous endings in older languages should be seen as inefficient.
If Gothic, Latin and Greek, etc., burden the memory by the number of their flexional endings, they do so even more by the many irregularities in the formation of these endings. In all the languages of this type, anomaly and flexion invariably go together. The intricacies of verbal flexion in Latin and Greek are well known, and it requires no small amount of mental energy to master the[333] various modes of forming the present stems in Sanskrit—to take only one instance. Many of these irregularities disappear in course of time, chiefly, but not exclusively, through analogical formations, and though it is true that a certain number of new irregularities may come into existence, their number is relatively small when compared with those that have been removed. Now, it is not only the forms themselves that are irregular in the early languages, but also their uses: logical simplicity prevails much more in Modern English syntax than in either Old English or Latin or Greek. But it is hardly necessary to point out that growing regularity in a language means a considerable gain to all those who learn it or speak it.
If Gothic, Latin, Greek, and others overwhelm the memory with their numerous inflectional endings, they do so even more with the many irregularities in how these endings are formed. In all these languages, anomalies and inflection always go hand in hand. The complexities of verb inflection in Latin and Greek are well known, and it takes a significant amount of mental energy to master the various ways of forming present stems in Sanskrit—just to mention one example. Many of these irregularities fade over time, primarily but not exclusively through analogical formations. While it's true that some new irregularities can arise, their numbers are relatively small compared to those that have been eliminated. Furthermore, it's not just that the forms themselves are irregular in the early languages, but their usages are too: modern English syntax is much more logically straightforward than that of Old English, Latin, or Greek. However, it’s important to note that increased regularity in a language represents a significant advantage for anyone learning or speaking it.
It has been said, however, by one of the foremost authorities on the history of English, that “in spite of the many changes which this system [i.e. the complicated system of strong verbs] has undergone in detail, it remains just as intricate as it was in Old English” (Bradley, The Making of English 51). It is true that the way in which vowel change is utilized to form tenses is rather complicated in Modern English (drink drank, give gave, hold held, etc.), but otherwise an enormous simplification has taken place. The personal endings have been discarded with the exception of -s in the third person singular of the present (and the obsolete ending -est in the second person, and then this has been regularized, thou sangest having taken the place of þu sunge); the change of vowel in ic sang, þu sunge, we sungon in the indicative and ic sunge, we sungen in the subjunctive has been given up, and so has the accompanying change of consonant in many cases. Thus, instead of the following forms, cēosan, cēose, cēoseþ, cēosaþ, cēosen, cēas, curon, cure, curen, coren, we have the following modern ones, which are both fewer in number and less irregular: choose, chooses, chose, chosen—certainly an advance from a more to a less intricate system (cf. GS § 178).
It has been said, however, by one of the leading experts on the history of English, that “despite the many changes this system [i.e., the complicated system of strong verbs] has gone through in detail, it remains just as complex as it was in Old English” (Bradley, The Making of English 51). It's true that the way vowel changes are used to form tenses is quite complicated in Modern English (drink drank, give gave, hold held, etc.), but otherwise, there has been a significant simplification. The personal endings have been dropped, except for -s in the third person singular of the present (and the outdated ending -est in the second person, which has been regularized, with thou sangest replacing þu sunge); the vowel change in ic sang, þu sunge, we sungon in the indicative and ic sunge, we sungen in the subjunctive has been abandoned, as has the related change of consonant in many cases. Thus, instead of the following forms, cēosan, cēose, cēoseþ, cēosaþ, cēosen, cēas, curon, cure, curen, coren, we have the following modern ones, which are both fewer in number and less irregular: choose, chooses, chose, chosen—certainly an improvement from a more complicated system (cf. GS § 178).
An extreme, but by no means unique example of the simplification found in modern languages is the English cut, which can serve both as present and past tense, both as singular and plural, both in the first, second and third persons, both in the infinitive, in the imperative, in the indicative, in the subjunctive, and as a past (or passive) participle; compare with this the old languages with their separate forms for different tenses, moods, numbers and persons; and remember, moreover, that the identical form, without any inconvenience being occasioned, is also used as a noun (a cut), and you will admire the economy of the living tongue. A characteristic feature of the structure of languages in their early stages is that each form contains in itself several minor modifications which are often in the later stages expressed separately[334] by means of auxiliary words. Such a word as Latin cantavisset unites into one inseparable whole the equivalents of six ideas: (1) ‘sing,’ (2) pluperfect, (3) that indefinite modification of the verbal idea which we term subjunctive, (4) active, (5) third person, and (6) singular.
An extreme, but not uncommon example of the simplification seen in modern languages is the English word cut, which can be used as both the present and past tense, for both singular and plural subjects, in the first, second, and third persons, as well as in the infinitive, imperative, indicative, subjunctive, and as a past (or passive) participle; compare this with older languages that have distinct forms for different tenses, moods, numbers, and persons. Additionally, remember that the same form can also function as a noun (a cut) without causing any confusion, showcasing the efficiency of modern language. A notable characteristic of languages in their early stages is that each form often incorporates several minor modifications that are later expressed separately using auxiliary words. For instance, the Latin word cantavisset combines six concepts into a single inseparable form: (1) ‘sing,’ (2) pluperfect, (3) the indefinite modification of the verbal idea known as the subjunctive, (4) active voice, (5) third person, and (6) singular.[334]
XVII.—§ 10. Synthesis and Analysis.
Such a form, therefore, is much more concrete than the forms found in modern languages, of which sometimes two or more have to be combined to express the composite notion which was rendered formerly by one. Now, it is one of the consequences of this change that it has become easier to express certain minute, but by no means unimportant, shades of thought by laying extra stress on some particular element in the speech-group. Latin cantaveram amalgamates into one indissoluble whole what in E. I had sung is analysed into three components, so that you can at will accentuate the personal element, the time element or the action. Now, it is possible (who can affirm and who can deny it?) that the Romans could, if necessary, make some difference in speech between cántaveram (non saltaveram) ‘I had sung,’ and cantaverám (non cantabam), ‘I had sung’; but even then, if it was the personal element which was to be emphasized, an ego had to be added. Even the possibility of laying stress on the temporal element broke down in forms like scripsi, minui, sum, audiam, and innumerable others. It seems obvious that the freedom of Latin in this respect must have been inferior to that of English. Moreover, in English, the three elements, ‘I,’ ‘had,’ and ‘sung,’ can in certain cases be arranged in a different order, and other words can be inserted between them in order to modify and qualify the meaning of the sentence. Note also the conciseness of such answers as “Who had sung?” “I had.” “What had you done?” “Sung.” “I believe he has enjoyed himself.” “I know he has.” And contrast the Latin “Cantaveram et saltaveram et luseram et riseram” with the English “I had sung and danced and played and laughed.” What would be the Latin equivalent of “Tom never did and never will beat me”?
Such a form is much more concrete than the forms found in modern languages, which sometimes need two or more elements combined to express the complex idea that was previously conveyed by one. One consequence of this change is that it has become easier to express certain subtle, yet significant, nuances of thought by emphasizing a specific element in the speech-group. Latin cantaveram combines into one unbreakable whole what in English I had sung breaks down into three parts, allowing you to highlight the personal, temporal, or action elements at will. Now, it is possible (who can say for sure?) that the Romans could, if needed, differentiate in speech between cántaveram (not saltaveram) ‘I had sung,’ and we will sing (non we were singing), ‘I had sung’; but even then, if the focus was on the personal element, an ego had to be added. Even the ability to emphasize the temporal aspect broke down in forms like scripsi, minui, sum, audiam, and countless others. It seems clear that the flexibility of Latin in this area was less than that of English. Additionally, in English, the three elements ‘I,’ ‘had,’ and ‘sung’ can sometimes be rearranged, and other words can be inserted between them to modify and clarify the meaning of the sentence. Also, notice the succinctness of responses like “Who had sung?” “I had.” “What had you done?” “Sung.” “I believe he has enjoyed himself.” “I know he has.” And compare the Latin “I sang and danced and played and laughed.” with the English “I had sung and danced and played and laughed.” What would the Latin equivalent of “Tom never did and never will beat me” be?
In such cases, analysis means suppleness, and synthesis means rigidity; in analytic languages you have the power of kaleidoscopically arranging and rearranging the elements that in synthetic forms like cantaveram are in rigid connexion and lead a Siamese-twin sort of existence. The synthetic forms of Latin verbs remind one of those languages all over the world (North America, South America, Hottentot, etc.) in which such ideas as ‘father’ or ‘mother’ or ‘head’ or ‘eye’ cannot be expressed separately,[335] but only in connexion with an indication of whose father, etc., one is speaking about: in one language the verbal idea (in the finite moods), in the other the nominal idea, is necessarily fused with the personal idea.
In these situations, analysis represents flexibility, while synthesis represents rigidity; in analytic languages, you can rearrange and mix the elements freely, whereas in synthetic forms like cantaveram, they are tightly connected and exist like conjoined twins. The synthetic forms of Latin verbs are reminiscent of languages from around the world (North America, South America, Hottentot, etc.) where concepts like ‘father’ or ‘mother’ or ‘head’ or ‘eye’ can't be expressed separately,[335] but only in reference to who is being talked about: in one language, the verbal idea (in the finite moods), and in the other, the nominal idea, are always combined with a personal context.
XVII.—§ 11. Verbal Concord.
This formal inseparability of subordinate elements is at the root of those rules of concord which play such a large rôle in the older languages of our Aryan family, but which tend to disappear in the more recent stages. By concord we mean the fact that a secondary word (adjective or verb) is made to agree with the primary word (substantive or subject) to which it belongs. Verbal concord, by which a verb is governed in number and person by the subject, has disappeared from spoken Danish, where, for instance, the present tense of the verb meaning ‘to travel’ is uniformly rejser in all persons of both numbers; while the written language till towards the end of the nineteenth century kept up artificially the plural rejse, although it had been dead in the spoken language for some three hundred years. The old flexion is an article of luxury, as a modification of the idea belonging properly to the subject is here transferred to the predicate, where it has no business; for when we say ‘mændene rejse’ (die männer reisen), we do not mean to imply that they undertake several journeys (cf. Madvig Kl 28, Nord. tsk. f. filol., n.r. 8. 134).
The formal connection between subordinate elements is the basis of the agreement rules that are prominent in the older languages of our Aryan family but tend to fade in more recent stages. By agreement, we refer to the way a secondary word (like an adjective or verb) conforms to the primary word (such as a noun or subject) it relates to. Verbal agreement, where a verb is influenced in number and person by the subject, has vanished from spoken Danish. For example, the present tense of the verb meaning ‘to travel’ is consistently rejser for all persons and both numbers; while the written language maintained the plural rejse artificially until the late nineteenth century, even though it had been obsolete in spoken language for about three hundred years. The old inflection is a luxury, as a change in the idea that belongs to the subject is wrongly applied to the predicate, where it doesn't belong; because when we say ‘the men travel’ (the men are traveling), we’re not suggesting that they make several journeys (cf. Madvig Kl 28, Nord. tsk. f. filol., n.r. 8. 134).
By getting rid of this superfluity, Danish has got the start of the more archaic of its Aryan sister-tongues. Even English, which has in most respects gone farthest in simplifying its flexional system, lags here behind Danish, in that in the present tense of most verbs the third person singular deviates from the other persons by ending in -s, and the verb be preserves some other traces of the old concord system, not to speak of the form in -st used with thou in the language of religion and poetry. Small and unimportant as these survivals may seem, still they are in some instances impediments to the free and easy expression of thought. In Danish, for instance, there is not the slightest difficulty in saying ‘enten du eller jeg har uret,’ as har is used both in the first and second persons singular and plural. But when an Englishman tries to render the same simple sentiment he is baffled; ‘either you or I are wrong’ is felt to be incorrect, and so is ‘either you or I am wrong’; he might say ‘either you are wrong, or I,’ but then this manner of putting it, if grammatically admissible (with or without the addition of am), is somewhat stiff and awkward; and there is no perfectly natural way out of the difficulty, for Dean Alford’s proposal to say ‘either you or I is[336] wrong’ (The Queen’s Engl. 155) is not to be recommended. The advantage of having verbal forms that are no respecters of persons is seen directly in such perfectly natural expressions as ‘either you or I must be wrong,’ or ‘either you or I may be wrong,’ or ‘either you or I began it’—and indirectly from the more or less artificial rules of Latin and Greek grammars on this point; in the following passages the Gordian knot is cut in different ways:
By eliminating this excess, Danish has maintained the essence of its older Aryan sister languages. Even English, which has generally simplified its inflection system more than most, falls short here compared to Danish. In English, the present tense of most verbs in the third-person singular ends in -s, and the verb be retains some remnants of the old agreement system, not to mention the -st form used with thou in religious and poetic language. While these remnants may seem small and insignificant, they can sometimes hinder the smooth and effortless expression of thoughts. In Danish, for example, saying ‘Enten du eller jeg tager fejl.’ poses no problems, as har is used in both the first and second-person singular and plural. However, when an English speaker tries to express the same simple idea, they get stuck; phrases like ‘either you or I are wrong’ feel incorrect, and so do ‘either you or I am wrong’. They might say ‘either you are wrong, or I,’ but that construction, though grammatically okay (with or without adding am), sounds somewhat formal and clumsy. There’s no perfectly natural solution to the problem, since Dean Alford’s suggestion to say ‘either you or I is[336] wrong’ (The Queen’s Engl. 155) isn’t advisable. The benefit of having verb forms that treat all persons equally is evident in perfectly natural phrases like ‘either you or I must be wrong,’ or ‘either you or I may be wrong,’ or ‘either you or I started it’—and we can indirectly observe it in the somewhat artificial rules of Latin and Greek grammars on this topic; in the following passages, the Gordian knot gets untangled in various ways:
Shakespeare LLL V. 2. 346 Nor God, nor I, delights in perjur’d men | id. As I. 3. 99 Thou and I am one | Tennyson Poet. W. 369 For whatsoever knight against us came Or I or he have easily overthrown | Galsworthy D 30 Am I and all women really what they think us? | Shakespeare H4B IV. 2. 121 Heauen, and not wee, haue safely fought to day (Folio, where the Quarto has: God, and not wee, hath....)
Shakespeare LLL V. 2. 346 Neither God nor I delight in perjured men | id. As I. 3. 99 You and I are one | Tennyson Poet. W. 369 For any knight who came against us, whether I or he have easily overthrown | Galsworthy D 30 Am I and all women really what they think we are? | Shakespeare H4B IV. 2. 121 Heaven, and not us, have safely fought today (Folio, where the Quarto has: God, and not us, hath....)
The same difficulty often appears in relative clauses; Alford (l.c. 152) calls attention to the fact of the Prayer Book reading “Thou art the God that doeth wonders,” whereas the Bible version runs “Thou art the God that doest wonders.” Compare also:
The same difficulty often shows up in relative clauses; Alford (l.c. 152) points out that the Prayer Book reads “You are the God that doeth wonders,” while the Bible version says “You are the God that doest wonders.” Compare also:
Shakespeare As III. 5. 55 ’Tis not her glasse, but you that flatters her | id. Meas. II. 2. 80 It is the law, not I, condemne your brother | Carlyle Fr. Rev. 38, There is none but you and I that has the people’s interest at heart (translated from: Il n’y a que vous et moi qui aimions le peuple).
Shakespeare As III. 5. 55 It’s not her mirror, but you that flatter her | id. Meas. II. 2. 80 It’s the law, not me, condemning your brother | Carlyle Fr. Rev. 38, There’s no one but you and me that cares about the people’s interest (translated from: It's just you and me who love the people.).
In all such cases the construction in Danish is as easy and natural as it generally is in the English preterit: “It was not her glass, but you that flattered her.” The disadvantage of having verbal forms which enforce the indication of person and number is perhaps seen most strikingly in a French sentence like this from Romain Rolland’s Jean Christophe (7. 221): “Ce mot, naturellement, ce n’est ni toi, ni moi, qui pouvons le dire”—the verb agrees with that which cannot be the subject (we)! For what is meant is really: ‘celui qui peut le dire, ce n’est ni moi ni toi.’
In all these cases, the construction in Danish is as straightforward and natural as it usually is in the English past tense: “It wasn’t her glass, but you who flattered her.” The downside of having verb forms that require indication of person and number is perhaps most clearly illustrated in a French sentence from Romain Rolland’s Jean Christophe (7. 221): “This word, of course, it’s neither you nor me who can say it.”—the verb agrees with something that cannot be the subject (we)! What is meant is really: ‘The one who can say it is neither me nor you..’
CHAPTER XVIII
Progress
§ 1. Nominal Forms. § 2. Irregularities Original. § 3. Syntax. § 4. Objections. § 5. Word Order. § 6. Gender. § 7. Nominal Concord. § 8. The English Genitive. § 9. Bantu Concord. § 10. Word Order Again. § 11. Compromises. § 12. Order Beneficial? § 13. Word Order and Simplification. § 14. Summary.
§ 1. Noun Forms. § 2. Original Irregularities. § 3. Sentence Structure. § 4. Critiques. § 5. Sentence Order. § 6. Gender. § 7. Noun Agreement. § 8. The English Possessive. § 9. Bantu Agreement. § 10. Sentence Order Revisited. § 11. Trade-offs. § 12. Is Order Helpful? § 13. Sentence Order and Simplification. § 14. Conclusion.
XVIII.—§ 1. Nominal Forms.
In the flexion of substantives and adjectives we see phenomena corresponding to those we have just been considering in the verbs. The ancient languages of our family have several forms where modern languages content themselves with fewer; forms originally kept distinct are in course of time confused, either through a phonetic obliteration of differences in the endings or through analogical extension of the functions of one form. The single form good is now used where OE. used the forms god, godne, gode, godum, godes, godre, godra, goda, godan, godena; Ital. uomo or French homme is used for Lat. homo, hominem, homini, homine—nay, if we take the spoken form into consideration, Fr. [ɔm] corresponds not only to these Latin forms, but also to homines, hominibus. Where the modern language has one or two cases, in an earlier stage it had three or four, and still earlier seven or eight. The difficulties inherent in the older system cannot, however, be measured adequately by the number of forms each word is susceptible of, but are multiplied by the numerous differences in the formation of the same case in different classes of declension; sometimes we even find anomalies which affect one word only.
In the inflection of nouns and adjectives, we see phenomena similar to those we’ve just discussed in verbs. The ancient languages in our family have several forms where modern languages settle for fewer. Forms that were originally distinct have become mixed over time, either due to phonetic changes that erased differences in endings or through the extension of functions from one form to another. The single form good is now used where Old English used the forms god, godne, gode, godum, godes, godre, godra, goda, godan, godena; Italian uomo or French homme is used for Latin homo, hominem, homini, homine—in fact, if we consider the spoken form, French [ɔm] corresponds not only to these Latin forms but also to homines, hominibus. Where modern languages have one or two cases, in earlier stages, they had three or four, and even earlier, seven or eight. The challenges in the older system can’t just be measured by the number of forms each word can take, but are multiplied by the many differences in how the same case is formed across different classes of declension; sometimes we even find irregularities that affect just one word.
Those who would be inclined to maintain that new irregularities may and do arise in modern languages which make up for whatever earlier irregularities have been discarded in the course of the historical development will do well to compile a systematic list of all the flexional forms of two different stages of the same languages, arranged exactly according to the same principles: this is the only way in which it is possible really to balance losses and profits in a language. This is what I have done in my Progress in Language § 111 ff. (reprinted in ChE § 9 ff.), where I have contrasted the case systems of Old and Modern English:[338] the result is that the former system takes 7 (+ 3) pages, and the latter only 2 pages. Those pages, with their abbreviations and tabulations, do not, perhaps, offer very entertaining reading, but I think they are more illustrative of the real tendencies of language than either isolated examples or abstract reasonings, and they cannot fail to convince any impartial reader of the enormous gain achieved through the changes of the intervening nine hundred years in the general structure of the English language.
Those who think that new irregularities can and do appear in modern languages to make up for earlier irregularities that have been lost over time should put together a systematic list of all the inflectional forms from two different stages of the same languages, organized according to the same principles. This is the only way to truly evaluate the losses and gains in a language. I have done this in my Progress in Language § 111 ff. (reprinted in ChE § 9 ff.), where I compared the case systems of Old and Modern English:[338] the result is that the former system takes 7 (+ 3) pages, while the latter only takes 2 pages. Those pages, with their abbreviations and tables, may not be very entertaining to read, but I believe they illustrate the real trends in language better than isolated examples or abstract arguments. They should convince any fair reader of the huge advancements made in the structure of the English language over the last nine hundred years.
For our general purposes it will be worth our while here to quote what Friedrich Müller (Gr i. 2. 7) says about a totally different language: “Even if the Hottentot distinguishes ‘he,’ ‘she’ and ‘it,’ and strictly separates the singular from the plural number, yet by his expressing ‘he’ and ‘she’ by one sound in the third person, and by another in the second, he manifests that he has no perception at all of our two grammatical categories of gender and number, and consequently those elements of his language that run parallel to our signs of gender and number must be of an entirely different nature.” Fr. Müller should not perhaps throw too many stones at the poor Hottentots, for his own native tongue is no better than a glass house, and we might with equal justice say, for instance: “As the Germans express the plural number in different manners in words like gott—götter, hand—hände, vater—väter, frau—frauen, etc., they must be entirely lacking in the sense of the category of number.” Or let us take such a language as Latin; there is nothing to show that dominus bears the same relation to domini as verbum to verba, urbs to urbes, mensis to menses, cornu to cornua, fructus to fructūs, etc.; even in the same word the idea of plurality is not expressed by the same method for all the cases, as is shown by a comparison of dominus—domini, dominum—dominos, domino—dominis, domini—dominorum. Fr. Müller is no doubt wrong in saying that such anomalies preclude the speakers of the language from conceiving the notion of plurality; but, on the other hand, it seems evident that a language in which a difference so simple even to the understanding of very young children as that between one and more than one can only be expressed by a complicated apparatus must rank lower than another language in which this difference has a single expression for all cases in which it occurs. In this respect, too, Modern English stands higher than the oldest English, Latin or Hottentot.
For our general purposes, it will be worthwhile to quote what Friedrich Müller (Gr i. 2. 7) says about a completely different language: “Even if the Hottentot distinguishes ‘he,’ ‘she,’ and ‘it,’ and clearly separates singular from plural, the fact that he expresses ‘he’ and ‘she’ with one sound in the third person and another in the second shows that he does not grasp our two grammatical categories of gender and number. Therefore, the elements of his language that align with our gender and number indicators must be of a completely different nature.” Fr. Müller perhaps shouldn't criticize the Hottentots too harshly, as his own native language is hardly better than a glass house, and we could just as easily say, for example: “Since Germans express the plural in various ways with words like gott—götter, hand—hände, vater—väter, frau—frauen, etc., they must completely lack a sense of the category of number.” Or consider a language like Latin; there’s nothing to indicate that dominus relates to domini in the same way that verbum relates to verba, urbs to urbes, mensis to menses, cornu to cornua, fructus to fructūs, etc. Even in the same word, the idea of plurality isn't expressed consistently across all cases, as we can see by comparing dominus—domini, dominum—dominos, domino—dominis, domini—dominorum. Fr. Müller is mistaken in saying that such inconsistencies prevent speakers of the language from understanding the notion of plurality. However, it seems clear that a language where such a simple difference, easily grasped by very young children—that between one and more than one—can only be expressed through a complicated system must rank lower than another language where this difference has a single expression for all instances. In this respect, too, Modern English is superior to Old English, Latin, or Hottentot.
XVIII.—§ 2. Irregularities Original.
It was the belief of the older school of comparativists that each case had originally one single ending, which was added to[339] all nouns indifferently (e.g. -as for the genitive sg.), and that the irregularities found in the existing oldest languages were of later growth; the actually existing forms were then derived from the supposed unity form by all kinds of phonetic tricks and dodges. Now people have begun to see that the primeval language cannot have been quite uniform and regular (see, for instance, Walde in Streitberg’s Gesch., 2. 194 ff.). If we look at facts, and not at imagined or reconstructed forms, we are forced to acknowledge that in the oldest stages of our family of languages not only did the endings present the spectacle of a motley variety, but the kernel of the word was also often subject to violent changes in different cases, as when it had in different forms different accentuation and (or) different apophony, or as when in some of the most frequently occurring words some cases were formed from one ‘stem’ and others from another, for instance, the nominative from an r stem and the oblique cases from an n stem. In the common word for ‘water’ Greek has preserved both stems, nom. hudōr, gen. hudatos, where a stands for original [ən]. Whatever the origin of this change of stems, it is a phenomenon belonging to the earlier stages of our languages, in which we also sometimes find an alteration between the r stem in the nominative and a combination of the n and the r stems in the other cases, as in Lat. jecur ‘liver,’ jecinoris; iter ‘voyage,’ itineris, which is supposed to have supplanted itinis, formed like feminis from femur. In the later stages we always find a simplification, one single form running through all cases; this is either the nominative stem, as in E. water, G. wasser (corresponding to Gr. hudōr), or the oblique case-stem, as in the Scandinavian forms, Old Norse vatn, Swed. vatten, Dan. vand (corresponding to Gr. hudat-), or finally a contaminated form, as in the name of the Swedish lake Vättern (Noreen’s explanation), or in Old Norse and Dan. skarn ‘dirt,’ which has its r from a form like the Gr. skōr, and its n from a form like the Gr. genitive skatos (older [skəntos]). The simplification is carried furthest in English, where the identical form water is not only used unchanged where in the older languages different case forms would have been used (‘the water is cold,’ ‘the surface of the water,’ ‘he fell into the water,’ ‘he swims in the water’), but also serves as a verb (‘did you water the flowers?’), and as an adjunct as a quasi-adjective (‘a water melon,’ ‘water plants’).
The older generation of comparativists believed that each case originally had one single ending, which was applied to all nouns indiscriminately (e.g. -as for the genitive singular), and that the irregularities seen in the oldest languages developed later; the existing forms were thought to come from this supposed unified form through various phonetic tricks and alterations. Now, people are starting to realize that the original language likely wasn't entirely uniform and regular (see, for example, Walde in Streitberg’s Gesch., 2. 194 ff.). When we focus on actual facts instead of imagined or reconstructed forms, we have to admit that in the earliest stages of our language family, not only did the endings show a striking variety, but the core of the word also frequently underwent significant changes across different cases, such as when it had different accentuation or apophony in various forms, or when some of the most common words formed certain cases from one ‘stem’ and others from a different one, for example, the nominative from an r stem while the oblique cases came from an n stem. In the common word for ‘water,’ Greek has preserved both stems: nom. hudōr, gen. hudatos, where a represents the original [ən]. Regardless of how this stem change originated, it's a phenomenon that belongs to the earlier stages of our languages, where we sometimes also find a distinction between the r stem in the nominative and a combination of the n and the r stems in other cases, as in Lat. jecur ‘liver,’ jecinoris; iter ‘voyage,’ itineris, thought to have replaced itinis, created like feminis from femur. In later stages, we consistently observe simplification, with a single form used for all cases; this is either the nominative stem, as in English water, German wasser (matching Gr. hudōr), or the oblique case-stem, as in Scandinavian forms like Old Norse vatn, Swedish vatten, Danish vand (equivalent to Gr. hudat-), or finally a mixed form, as seen in the name of the Swedish lake Vättern (Noreen’s explanation), or in Old Norse and Danish skarn meaning ‘dirt,’ which takes its r from a form like the Gr. skōr, and its n from a form akin to the Gr. genitive skatos (older [skəntos]). The simplification is most pronounced in English, where the identical form water is used unchanged even where older languages would have used different case forms (‘the water is cold,’ ‘the surface of the water,’ ‘he fell into the water,’ ‘he swims in the water’), but it also functions as a verb (‘did you water the flowers?’) and as an adjunct used as a quasi-adjective (‘a watermelon,’ ‘water plants’).
In most cases irregularities have been done away with in the way here indicated, one of the forms (or stems) being generalized; but in other cases it may have happened, as Kretschmer supposes (in Gercke and Norden, Einleit. in die Altertumswiss., I, 501) that irregular flexion caused a word to go out of use entirely; thus[340] in Modern Greek hêpar was supplanted by sukōti,[84] phréar by pēgadi, húdōr by neró, oûs by aphtí (= ōtíon), kúōn by skullí; this possibly also accounts for commando taking the place of Lat. jubeo.
In most cases, irregularities have been removed as described here, with one of the forms (or stems) being generalized. However, it might have happened, as Kretschmer suggests (in Gercke and Norden, Einleit. in die Altertumswiss., I, 501), that irregular flexion caused a word to fall out of use completely. For example, in Modern Greek, hêpar was replaced by sukōti, phréar by pēgadi, húdōr by neró, oûs by aphtí (= ōtíon), and kúōn by skullí. This might also explain why commando has taken the place of Latin jubeo.
Some scholars maintain that the medieval languages were more regular than their modern representatives; but if we look more closely into what they mean, we shall see that they are not speaking of any regularity in the sense in which the word has here been used—the only regularity which is of importance to the speakers of the language—but of the regular correspondence of a language with some earlier language from which it is derived. This is particularly the case with E. Littré, who, in his essays on L’Histoire de la Langue Française, was full of enthusiasm for Old French, but chiefly for the fidelity with which it had preserved some features of Latin. There was thus the old distinction of two cases: nom. sg. murs, acc. sg. mur, and in the plural inversely nom. mur and acc. murs, with its exact correspondence with Latin murus, murum, pl. muri, muros. When this ‘règle de l’s’ was discovered, and the use or omission of s, which had hitherto been looked upon as completely arbitrary in Old French, was thus accounted for, scholars were apt to consider this as an admirable trait in the old language which had been lost in modern French, and the same view obtained with regard to the case distinction found in other words, such as OFr. nom. maire, acc. majeur, or nom. emperere, acc. emperëur, corresponding to the Latin forms with changing stress, májor, majórem, imperátor, imperatórem, etc. But, however interesting such things may be to the historical linguist, there is no denying that to the users of French the modern simpler flexion is a gain as compared with this more complex system. “Des sprachhistorikers freud ist des sprachbrauchers leid,” as Schuchardt somewhere shrewdly remarks.
Some scholars argue that medieval languages were more consistent than their modern versions; however, if we examine their claims more closely, we see they're not talking about regularity in the way we've defined it here—the only kind of regularity that matters to speakers of the language—but rather about how a language consistently relates to some earlier version it evolved from. This is especially true for E. Littré, who, in his essays on L’Histoire de la Langue Française, expressed a lot of enthusiasm for Old French, mainly for how well it retained some features of Latin. There was, therefore, the old distinction of two cases: nom. sg. murs, acc. sg. mur, and in the plural vice versa, nom. mur and acc. murs, which corresponded exactly with Latin murus, murum, pl. muri, muros. When this ‘règle de l’s’ was discovered, accounting for the use or omission of s, which had previously seemed entirely random in Old French, scholars tended to view this as a remarkable feature of the old language that had been lost in modern French. The same perspective applied to the case distinctions found in other words, like OFr. nom. maire, acc. majeur, or nom. emperere, acc. emperëur, matching the Latin forms with shifting stress, májor, majórem, imperátor, imperatórem, etc. But, no matter how fascinating these elements may be to historical linguists, it's undeniable that for French speakers, the modern simpler inflection is an improvement compared to this more complex system. “The joy of the linguistic historian is the sorrow of the language user.,” as Schuchardt wisely notes somewhere.
XVIII.—§ 3. Syntax.
There were also in the old languages many irregularities in the syntactic use of the cases, as when some verbs governed the genitive and others the dative, etc. Even if it may be possible in many instances to account historically for these uses, to the speakers of the languages they must have appeared to be mere caprices which had to be learned separately for each verb, and it is therefore a great advantage when they have been gradually done away with, as has been the case, to a great extent, even in a language like German, which has retained many old case forms. Thus verbs like entbehren, vergessen, bedürfen, wahrnehmen, which formerly took the genitive, are now used more and more with the[341] simple accusative—a simplification which, among other things, makes the construction of sentences in the passive voice easier and more regular.
There were also many irregularities in the way cases were used in the old languages, such as some verbs taking the genitive and others taking the dative, etc. Even though it might be possible to explain these usages historically in many cases, to the speakers of those languages, they must have seemed like random quirks that had to be memorized separately for each verb. This makes it a significant advantage that these irregularities have mostly been eliminated, as has largely happened even in a language like German, which has preserved many old case forms. For example, verbs like entbehren, vergessen, bedürfen, wahrnehmen, which used to take the genitive, are now increasingly used with the[341]simple accusative—a simplification that makes constructing sentences in the passive voice easier and more consistent.
The advantage of discarding the old case distinctions is seen in the ease with which English and French speakers can say, e.g., ‘with or without my hat,’ or ‘in and round the church,’ while the correct German is ‘mit meinem hut oder ohne denselben’ and ‘in der kirche und um dieselbe’; Wackernagel writes: “Was in ihm und um ihn und über ihm ist.” When the prepositions are followed by a single substantive without case distinction, German, of course, has the same simple construction as English, e.g. ‘mit oder ohne geld,’ and sometimes even good writers will let themselves go and write ‘um und neben dem hochaltare’ (Goethe), or ‘Ihre tochter wird meine frau mit oder gegen ihren willen’ (these examples from Curme, German Grammar 191). Cf. also: ‘Ich kann deinem bruder nicht helfen und ihn unterstützen.’
The advantage of getting rid of the old case distinctions is clear in how easily English and French speakers can say things like, "with or without my hat," or "in and around the church," while in correct German, you would say ‘with my hat or without it’ and ‘in the church and around it.’ Wackernagel writes: “Was in him and around him and above him is.” When prepositions are followed by a single noun without any case distinctions, German also uses the same simple structure as English, like ‘with or without money.’ Sometimes even skilled writers will break the rules and write things like ‘um und neben dem Hauptaltar’ (Goethe), or ‘Ihre Tochter wird meine Frau, ob sie will oder nicht.’ (these examples are from Curme, German Grammar 191). Also see: ‘Ich kann deinem Bruder nicht helfen und ihn nicht unterstützen..’
Many extremely convenient idioms unknown in the older synthetic languages have been rendered possible in English through the doing away with the old case distinctions, such as: Genius, demanding bread, is given a stone after its possessor’s death (Shaw) (cf. my ChE § 79) | he was offered, and declined, the office of poet-laureate (Gosse) | the lad was spoken highly of | I love, and am loved by, my wife | these laws my readers, whom I consider as my subjects, are bound to believe in and to obey (Fielding) | he was heathenishly inclined to believe in, or to worship, the goddess Nemesis (id.) | he rather rejoiced in, than regretted, his bruise (id.) | many a dun had she talked to, and turned away from her father’s door (Thackeray) | their earthly abode, which has seen, and seemed almost to sympathize in, all their honour (Ruskin).
Many really convenient phrases that were unknown in older synthetic languages have become possible in English by getting rid of the old case distinctions, like: Genius, needing bread, is given a stone after its owner’s death (Shaw) | he was offered, but declined, the position of poet-laureate (Gosse) | the lad was highly praised | I love, and am loved by, my wife | these laws my readers, whom I see as my subjects, are bound to believe in and obey (Fielding) | he was weirdly inclined to believe in, or to worship, the goddess Nemesis (id.) | he was more pleased by, than upset about, his bruise (id.) | many a debtor had she talked to, and turned away from her father’s door (Thackeray) | their earthly home, which has witnessed, and seemed almost to sympathize with, all their honor (Ruskin).
XVIII.—§ 4. Objections.
Against my view of the superiority of languages with few case distinctions, Arwid Johannson, in a very able article (in IF I, see especially p. 247 f.), has adduced a certain number of ambiguous sentences from German:
Against my belief that languages with few case distinctions are superior, Arwid Johannson, in a well-crafted article (in IF I, see particularly p. 247 f.), has presented several ambiguous sentences from German:
Soweit die deutsche zunge klingt und gott im himmel lieder singt (is gott nominative or dative?) | Seinem landsmann, dem er in seiner ganzen bildung ebensoviel verdankte, wie Goethe (nominative or dative?) | Doch würde die gesellschaft der Indierin (genitive or dative?) lästig gewesen sein | Darin hat Caballero wohl nur einen konkurrenten, die Eliot, welche freilich die spanische dichterin nicht ganz erreicht | Nur[342] Diopeithes feindet insgeheim dich an und die schwester des Kimon und dein weib Telesippa. (In the last two sentences what is the subject, and what the object?)
As the German language sounds and God sings in heaven (is God nominative or dative?) | To his fellow countryman, to whom he owed just as much for his entire education as he did to Goethe (nominative or dative?) | But the company of the Indian woman (genitive or dative?) would have been a hassle | In this, Caballero likely only has one competitor, Eliot, who definitely doesn't match the Spanish poetess. | Only[342] Diopeithes secretly resents you, Kimon's sister, and your wife Telesippa.. (In the last two sentences what is the subject, and what the object?)
According to Johannson, these passages show the disadvantages of doing away with formal distinctions, for the sentences would have been clear if each separate case had had its distinctive sign; “the greater the wealth of forms, the more intelligible the speech.” And they show, he says, that such ambiguities will occur, even where the strictest rules of word order are observed. I shall not urge that this is not exactly the case in the last sentence if die schwester and dein weib are to be taken as accusatives, for then an should have been placed at the very end of the sentence; nor that, in the last sentence but one, the mention of George Eliot as the ‘konkurrent’ of Fernan Caballero seems to show a partiality to the Spanish authoress on the part of the writer of the sentence, so that the reader is prepared to take welche as the nominative case; freilich would seem to point in the same direction. But these, of course, are only trifling objections; the essential point is that we must grant the truth of Johannson’s contention that we have here a flaw in the German language; the defects of its grammatical system may and do cause a certain number of ambiguities. Neither is it difficult to find the reasons of these defects by considering the structure of the language in its entirety, and by translating the sentences in question into a few other languages and comparing the results.
According to Johannson, these passages highlight the drawbacks of eliminating formal distinctions, as the sentences would have been clearer if each individual case had its unique marker; “the more diverse the forms, the clearer the speech.” He points out that ambiguities can arise even when the strictest word order rules are followed. I won’t insist that this isn’t quite the case in the last sentence if die schwester and dein weib are viewed as accusatives, because then an should be at the very end of the sentence; nor will I argue that the mention of George Eliot as the ‘konkurrent’ of Fernan Caballero suggests a bias towards the Spanish author from the writer of the sentence, which might lead the reader to interpret welche as the nominative case; freilich also seems to support this idea. But these are merely minor objections; the key point is that we must accept Johannson’s claim that there’s a flaw in the German language; its grammatical system has defects that can and do lead to some ambiguities. It’s also not hard to identify the reasons behind these defects by examining the language’s overall structure and by translating the sentences in question into a few other languages for comparison.
First, with regard to the formal distinctions between cases, the really weak point cannot be the fewness of these endings, for in that case we should expect the same sort of ambiguities to be very common in English and Danish, where the formal case distinctions are considerably fewer than in German; but as a matter of fact such ambiguities are more frequent in German than in the other two languages. And, however paradoxical it may seem at first sight, one of the causes of this is the greater wealth of grammatical forms in German. Let us substitute other words for the ambiguous ones, and we shall see that the amphibology will nearly always disappear, because most other words will have different forms in the two cases, e.g.:
First, when it comes to the formal differences between cases, the real weakness can’t be the small number of these endings. If that were the case, we would expect similar ambiguities to be quite common in English and Danish, where there are significantly fewer formal case distinctions than in German. However, the truth is that such ambiguities are more common in German than in the other two languages. And, although it may seem paradoxical at first, one reason for this is the greater variety of grammatical forms in German. If we replace the ambiguous words with other words, we’ll see that the ambiguity mostly goes away because most other words will have different forms in the two cases, for example:
Soweit die deutsche zunge klingt und dem allmächtigen (or, der allmächtige) lieder singt | Seinem landsmann, dem er ebensoviel verdankte, wie dem grossen dichter (or, der grosse dichter) | Doch würde die gesellschaft des Indiers (or, dem Indier) lästig gewesen sein | Darin hat Calderon wohl nur einen konkurrenten, Shakespeare, welcher freilich den spanischen[343] dichter nicht erreicht (or, den ... der spanische dichter ...) | Nur Diopeithes feindet dich insgeheim an, und der bruder des Kimon und sein freund T. (or, den bruder ... seinen freund).
As far as the German language sounds and the almighty (or, the all-powerful) sings music | to his fellow countryman, to whom he owes as much as the great poet (or, the great poet) | Yet the company of the Indian (or, the Indian) would have been a hassle | In this regard, Calderón probably only has a rival in Shakespeare, who does not quite match the Spanish poet. (or, the Spanish poet ...) | Only Diopeithes secretly criticizes you, along with Kimon's brother and his friend T. (or, the brother ... his friend).
It is this very fact that countless sentences of this sort are perfectly clear which leads to the employment of similar constructions even where the resulting sentence is by no means clear; but if all, or most, words were identical in the nominative and the dative, like gott, or in the dative and genitive, like der Indierin, constructions like those used would be impossible to imagine in a language meant to be an intelligible vehicle of thought. And so the ultimate cause of the ambiguities is the inconsistency in the formation of the several cases. But this inconsistency is found in all the old languages of the Aryan family: cases which in one gender or with one class of stems are kept perfectly distinct, are in others identical. I take some examples from Latin, because this is perhaps the best known language of this type, but Gothic or Old Slavonic would show inconsistencies of the same kind. Domini is genitive singular and nominative plural (corresponding to, e.g., verbi and verba); verba is nominative and accusative pl. (corresponding to domini and dominos); domino is dative and ablative; dominæ gen. and dative singular and nominative plural; te is accusative and ablative; qui is singular and plural; quæ singular fem. and plural fem. and neuter, etc. Hence, while patres filios amant or patres filii amant are perfectly clear, patres consules amant allows of two interpretations; and in how many ways cannot such a proposition as Horatius et Virgilius poetæ Varii amici erant be construed? Menenii patris munus may mean ‘the gift of father Menenius,’ or ‘the gift of Menenius’s father’; expers illius periculi either ‘free from that danger’ or ‘free from (sharing) that person’s danger’; in an infinitive construction with two accusatives, the only way to know which is the subject and which the object is to consider the context, and that is not always decisive, as in the oracular response given to the Æacide Pyrrhus, as quoted by Cicero from Ennius: “Aio te, Æacida, Romanos vincere posse.” Such drawbacks seem to be inseparable from the structure of the highly flexional Aryan languages; although they are not logical consequences of a wealth of forms, yet historically they cling to those languages which have the greatest number of grammatical endings. And as we are here concerned not with the question how to construct an artificial language (and even there I should not advise the adoption of many case distinctions), but with the valuation of natural languages as actually existing in their earlier and modern stages, we cannot[344] accept Johannson’s verdict: “The greater the wealth of forms, the more intelligible the speech.”
The fact that countless sentences of this kind are perfectly clear is what leads to the use of similar structures, even when the resulting sentence is not clear at all. However, if all or most words were the same in the nominative and dative cases, like gott, or in the dative and genitive, like der Indierin, constructions like these would be unimaginable in a language designed to communicate thoughts clearly. Thus, the root cause of the ambiguities lies in the inconsistencies in the formation of the different cases. This inconsistency exists in all the ancient languages of the Aryan family: cases that are clearly distinct in one gender or category of stems may be the same in others. I’ll provide some examples from Latin, as it's probably the best-known language of this type, but Gothic or Old Slavonic would demonstrate similar inconsistencies. Domini is genitive singular and nominative plural (corresponding to, for example, verbi and verba); verba is nominative and accusative plural (corresponding to domini and dominos); domino is dative and ablative; dominæ is genitive and dative singular and nominative plural; te is accusative and ablative; qui is singular and plural; quæ is singular feminine and plural for both feminine and neuter, etc. Therefore, while patres filios amant or patres filii amant are perfectly clear, patres consules amant can be interpreted in two ways; and how many interpretations can there be for a statement like Horatius et Virgilius poetæ Varii amici erant? Menenii patris munus could mean ‘the gift of father Menenius’ or ‘the gift of Menenius’s father’; expers illius periculi could mean either ‘free from that danger’ or ‘free from (sharing) that person’s danger’; in an infinitive construction with two accusatives, the only way to determine which is the subject and which is the object is to look at the context, which is not always decisive, as seen in the oracular response given to the Æacide Pyrrhus, quoted by Cicero from Ennius: “Aio te, Æacida, Romans can win.” Such drawbacks seem to be inherent to the structure of highly inflected Aryan languages; while they are not logical results of having many forms, they historically persist in those languages that have the most grammatical endings. As we are concerned here not with how to create an artificial language (and even there, I would not recommend a lot of case distinctions), but with the evaluation of natural languages as they actually exist in their earlier and modern forms, we cannot[344] accept Johannson’s statement: “The greater the wealth of forms, the more intelligible the speech.”
XVIII.—§ 5. Word Order.
If the German sentences quoted above are ambiguous, it is not only on account of the want of clearness in the forms employed, but also on account of the German rules of word order. One rule places the verb last in subordinate sentences, and in two of the sentences there would be no ambiguity in principal sentences: Die deutsche zunge klingt und singt gott im himmel lieder; or, Die deutsche zunge klingt, und gott im himmel singt lieder | Sie erreicht freilich nicht die spanische dichterin; or, Die spanische dichterin erreicht sie freilich nicht. In one of the remaining sentences the ambiguity is caused by the rule that the verb must be placed immediately after an introductory subjunct: if we omit doch the sentence becomes clear: Die gesellschaft der Indierin würde lästig gewesen sein, or, Die gesellschaft würde der Indierin lästig gewesen sein. Here, again we see the ill consequences of inconsistency of linguistic structure; some of the rules for word position serve to show grammatical relations, but in certain cases they have to give way to other rules, which counteract this useful purpose. If you change the order of words in a German sentence, you will often find that the meaning is not changed, but the result will be an unidiomatic construction (bad grammar); while in English a transposition will often result in perfectly good grammar, only the meaning will be an entirely different one from the original sentence. This does not amount to saying that the German rules of position are useless and the English ones all useful, but only to saying that in English word order is utilized to express difference of meaning to a far greater extent than in German.
If the German sentences quoted above are unclear, it's not just because of the lack of clarity in the forms used, but also due to German word order rules. One rule states that the verb comes last in subordinate clauses, and in two of the sentences, there wouldn't be any ambiguity in main clauses: Die deutsche Sprache klingt und singt Gott im Himmel Lieder.; or, Die deutsche Sprache klingt, und Gott im Himmel singt Lieder. | She doesn't quite reach the Spanish poetess.; or, Die spanische Dichterin erreicht sie natürlich nicht. In one of the other sentences, the ambiguity arises from the rule that the verb must come immediately after an introductory subjunctive: if we remove doch, the sentence becomes clear: The society of the Indian woman would have been annoying., or, The society would have been a burden to the Indian woman.. Here, we again see the negative effects of inconsistent linguistic structure; some of the rules for word placement help indicate grammatical relationships, but in certain cases, they have to yield to other rules that undermine this helpful function. If you change the word order in a German sentence, you will often find that the meaning doesn’t change, but the result is an unidiomatic construction (bad grammar); whereas in English, a change in order often results in perfectly good grammar, but the meaning will be completely different from the original sentence. This doesn’t imply that German position rules are useless and English ones are all useful, but rather that in English, word order is used to convey differences in meaning to a much greater extent than in German.
One critic cites against me “one example, which figures in almost every Rhetoric as a violation of clearness: And thus the son the fervid sire address’d,” and he adds: “The use of a separate form for nominative and accusative would clear up the ambiguity immediately.” The retort is obvious: no doubt it would, but so would the use of a natural word order. Word order is just as much a part of English grammar as case-endings are in other languages; a violation of the rules of word order may cause the same want of intelligibility as the use of dominum instead of dominus would in Latin. And if the example is found in almost every English Rhetoric, I am glad to say that equally ambiguous sentences are very rare indeed in other English books. Even in poetry, where there is such a thing as poetic licence, and where the exigencies of rhythm and rime, as well as the fondness for[345] archaic and out-of-the-way expressions, will often induce deviations from the word order of prose, real ambiguity will very seldom arise on that account. It is true that it has been disputed which is the subject in Gray’s line:
One critic brings up “one example, which appears in almost every Rhetoric as a violation of clarity: And thus the son the fervid sire address’d,” and adds: “Using a separate form for nominative and accusative would clear up the ambiguity right away.” The response is clear: it certainly would, but so would using a natural word order. Word order is just as essential to English grammar as case endings are to other languages; breaking the rules of word order can lead to the same lack of clarity as using dominum instead of dominus would in Latin. And while this example is found in nearly every English Rhetoric, I’m happy to note that similarly ambiguous sentences are quite rare in other English texts. Even in poetry, where poetic license exists, and where the demands of rhythm and rhyme, along with a penchant for[345] archaic and unusual expressions, often lead to deviations from prose word order, genuine ambiguity seldom occurs. It is true that there has been debate over what the subject is in Gray’s line:
but then it does not matter much, for the ultimate understanding of the line must be exactly the same whether the air holds stillness or stillness holds the air. In ordinary language we may find similar collocations, but it is worth saying with some emphasis that there can never be any doubt as to which is the subject and which the object. The ordinary word order is, Subject-Verb-Object, and where there is a deviation there must always be some special reason for it. This may be the wish, especially for the sake of some contrast, to throw into relief some member of the sentence. If this is the subject, the purpose is achieved by stressing it, but the word order is not affected. But if it is the object, this may be placed in the very beginning of the sentence, but in that case English does not, like German and Danish, require inversion of the verb, and the order consequently is, Object-Subject-Verb, which is perfectly clear and unambiguous. See, for instance, Dickens’s sentence: “Talent, Mr. Micawber has; capital, Mr. Micawber has not,” and the following passage from a recent novel: “Even Royalty had not quite their glow and glitter; Royalty you might see any day, driving, bowing, smiling. The Queen had a smile for every one; but the Duchess no one, not even Lizzie, ever saw.” Thus, also, in Shakespeare’s:
but then it doesn’t matter much, because the ultimate understanding of the line must be exactly the same whether the air is still or stillness is in the air. In everyday language, we can find similar pairings, but it’s important to emphasize that there can never be any doubt about which is the subject and which is the object. The usual word order is Subject-Verb-Object, and when there’s a deviation, there must always be a specific reason for it. This may be a desire, especially for the sake of highlighting some part of the sentence. If this is the subject, the goal is accomplished by emphasizing it, but the word order remains unchanged. However, if it’s the object, this can be placed at the very beginning of the sentence; in that case, English doesn’t require inversion of the verb like German and Danish do, so the order becomes Object-Subject-Verb, which is perfectly clear and unambiguous. For example, consider Dickens’s sentence: “Talent, Mr. Micawber has; capital, Mr. Micawber has not,” and the following passage from a recent novel: “Even Royalty didn’t quite have their glow and glitter; Royalty you might see any day, driving, bowing, smiling. The Queen had a smile for everyone; but the Duchess no one, not even Lizzie, ever saw.” Similarly, in Shakespeare’s:
and in Longfellow’s translation from Logau:
and in Longfellow’s translation from Logau:
The reason for deviating from the order, Subject-Verb-Object, may again be purely grammatical: a relative or an interrogative pronoun must be placed first; but here, too, English grammar precludes ambiguity, as witness the following sentences: This picture, which surpasses Mona Lisa | This picture, which Mona Lisa surpasses | What picture surpasses Mona Lisa? | What picture does not Mona Lisa surpass? In German (dieses bild, welches die M. L. übertrifft, etc.) all four sentences would be ambiguous, in Danish the two last would be indistinguishable; but English shows that a small number of case forms is not incompatible with perfect clearness and perspicuity. If the famous[346] oracular answer (Henry VI, 2nd Part, I. 4. 33), “The Duke yet liues, that Henry shall depose,” is ambiguous, it is only because it is in verse, where you expect inversions: in ordinary prose it could be understood only in one way, as the word order would be reversed if Henry was meant as the object.
The reason for straying from the order, Subject-Verb-Object, might simply be grammatical: a relative or interrogative pronoun needs to come first; but here, too, English grammar avoids confusion, as shown by these sentences: This picture, which surpasses the Mona Lisa | This picture, which the Mona Lisa surpasses | What picture surpasses the Mona Lisa? | What picture doesn’t the Mona Lisa surpass? In German (this image, which surpasses the M. L., etc.), all four sentences would be confusing, and in Danish, the last two would be indistinguishable; but English demonstrates that having only a few case forms doesn’t compromise clarity. If the famous[346] oracular response (Henry VI, 2nd Part, I. 4. 33), “The Duke yet lives, that Henry shall depose,” is ambiguous, it’s only because it’s in verse, where inversions are expected: in regular prose, it would be clear as the word order would change if Henry was intended as the object.
XVIII.—§ 6. Gender.
Besides case distinctions the older Aryan languages have a rather complicated system of gender distinctions, which in many instances agrees with, but in many others is totally independent of, and even may be completely at war with, the natural distinction between male beings, female beings and things without sex. This grammatical gender is sometimes looked upon as something valuable for a language to possess; thus Schroeder (Die formale Unterscheidung 87) says: “The formal distinction of genders is decidedly an enormous advantage which the Aryan, Semitic and Egyptian languages have before all other languages.” Aasen (Norsk Grammatik 123) finds that the preservation of the old genders gives vividness and variety to a language; he therefore, in constructing his artificial Norwegian ‘landsmaal,’ based it on those dialects which made a formal distinction between the masculine and feminine article. But other scholars have recognized the disadvantages accruing from such distinctions; thus Tegnér (SM 50) regrets the fact that in Swedish it is impossible to give such a form to the sentence ‘sin make må man ej svika’ as to make it clear that the admonition is applicable to both husband and wife, because make, ‘mate,’ is masculine, and maka feminine. In Danish, where mage is common to both sexes, no such difficulty arises. Gabelentz (Spr 234) says: “Das grammatische geschlecht bringt es weiter mit sich dass wir deutschen nie eine frauensperson als einen menschen und nicht leicht einen mann als eine person bezeichnen.”
Besides case distinctions, the older Aryan languages have a rather complicated system of gender distinctions, which in many cases aligns with, but in many others is completely independent of, and even can be at odds with, the natural distinctions between male beings, female beings, and sexless things. This grammatical gender is sometimes seen as a valuable feature for a language to have; for example, Schroeder (Die formale Unterscheidung 87) states, “The formal distinction of genders is definitely a significant advantage that Aryan, Semitic, and Egyptian languages have over all other languages.” Aasen (Norsk Grammatik 123) believes that preserving the old genders adds vividness and variety to a language; therefore, in creating his artificial Norwegian ‘landsmaal,’ he based it on dialects that made a formal distinction between the masculine and feminine articles. However, other scholars have pointed out the disadvantages of such distinctions; for instance, Tegnér (SM 50) regrets that in Swedish, it is impossible to construct the sentence ‘Sins shouldn't be abandoned.’ in a way that makes it clear that the admonition applies to both husband and wife, since make, ‘mate,’ is masculine, while maka is feminine. In Danish, where mage is used for both sexes, no such issue arises. Gabelentz (Spr 234) notes: “Das grammatische Geschlecht führt dazu, dass wir Deutschen Frauen oft nicht einfach als Menschen und Männer schwerlich als Personen bezeichnen..”
As a matter of fact, German gender is responsible for many difficulties, not only when it is in conflict with natural sex, as when one may hesitate whether to use the pronoun es or sie in reference to a person just mentioned as das mädchen or das weib, or er or sie in reference to die schildwache, but also when sexless things are concerned, and er might be taken as either referring to the man or to der stuhl or to der wald just mentioned, etc. In France, grammarians have disputed without end as to the propriety or not of referring to the (feminine) word personnes by means of the pronoun ils (see Nyrop, Kongruens 24, and Gr. iii. § 712): “Les personnes que vous attendiez sont tous logés ici.” As a negative pronoun personne is now frankly masculine: ‘personne n’est malheureux.’[347] With gens the old feminine gender is still kept up when an adjective precedes, as in les bonnes gens, thus also toutes les bonnes gens, but when the adjective has no separate feminine form, schoolmasters prefer to say tous les honnêtes gens, and the masculine generally prevails when the adjective is at some distance from gens, as in the old school-example, Instruits par l’expérience, toutes les vieilles gens sont soupçonneux. There is a good deal of artificiality in the strict rules of grammarians on this point, and it is therefore good that the Arrêté ministériel of 1901 tolerates greater liberty; but conflicts are unavoidable, and will rise quite naturally, in any language that has not arrived at the perfect stage of complete genderlessness (which, of course, is not identical with inability to express sex-differences).
Actually, German gender causes a lot of confusion, not just when it contradicts natural gender, like when you might hesitate to use the pronoun es or sie when referring to a person previously mentioned as das mädchen or das weib, or er or sie when referring to die schildwache, but also when it comes to inanimate objects, where er could refer to either the man or der stuhl or der wald that was just mentioned, etc. In France, grammarians have endlessly debated whether it’s appropriate to refer to the (feminine) word personnes with the pronoun ils (see Nyrop, Kongruens 24, and Gr. iii. § 712): “The people you were expecting are all housed here..” As a negative pronoun, personne is now clearly masculine: ‘nobody is unhappy.’[347] With gens, the old feminine gender is still maintained when an adjective comes first, as in les bonnes gens, and similarly toutes les bonnes gens, but when the adjective doesn’t have a separate feminine form, teachers prefer to say tous les honnêtes gens, and the masculine usually wins out when the adjective is somewhat removed from gens, like in the old school example, Instruits par l’expérience, toutes les vieilles gens sont soupçonneux. There’s a lot of artificiality in the strict rules from grammarians on this topic, so it’s good that the Ministerial decree of 1901 allows for more flexibility; however, conflicts are unavoidable and will naturally arise in any language that hasn’t reached the point of complete gender neutrality (which, of course, doesn’t mean it can’t express distinctions in sex).
Most English pronouns make no distinction of sex: I, you, we, they, who, each, somebody, etc. Yet, when we hear that Finnic and Magyar, and indeed the vast majority of languages outside the Aryan and Semitic world, have no separate forms for he and she, our first thought is one of astonishment; we fail to see how it is possible to do without this distinction. But if we look more closely we shall see that it is at times an inconvenience to have to specify the sex of the person spoken about. Coleridge (Anima Poetæ 190) regretted the lack of a pronoun to refer to the word person, as it necessitated some stiff and strange construction like ‘not letting the person be aware wherein offence had been given,’ instead of ‘wherein he or she has offended.’ It has been said that if a genderless pronoun could be substituted for he in such a proposition as this: ‘It would be interesting if each of the leading poets would tell us what he considers his best work,’ ladies would be spared the disparaging implication that the leading poets were all men. Similarly there is something incongruous in the following sentence found in a German review of a book: “Was Maria und Fritz so zueinander zog, war, dass jeder von ihnen am anderen sah, wie er unglücklich war.” Anyone who has written much in Ido will have often felt how convenient it is to have the common-sex pronouns lu (he or she), singlu, altru, etc. It is interesting to see the different ways out of the difficulty resorted to in actual language. First the cumbrous use of he or she, as in Fielding TJ 1. 174, the reader’s heart (if he or she have any) | Miss Muloch H. 2. 128, each one made his or her comment.[85] Secondly, the use of he alone: If anybody behaves in such and such a manner, he will be punished (cf. the wholly[348] unobjectionable, but not always applicable, formula: Whoever behaves in such and such a manner will be punished). This use of he has been legalized by the Act 13 and 14 Vict., cap. 21. 4: “That in all acts words importing the masculine gender shall be deemed and taken to include females.” Third, the sexless but plural form they may be used. If you try to put the phrase, ‘Does anybody prevent you?’ in another way, beginning with ‘Nobody prevents you,’ and then adding the interrogatory formula, you will perceive that ‘does he’ is too definite, and ‘does he or she’ too clumsy; and you will therefore naturally say (as Thackeray does, P 2. 260), “Nobody prevents you, do they?” In the same manner Shakespeare writes (Lucr. 125): “Everybody to rest themselves betake.” The substitution of the plural for the singular is not wholly illogical; for everybody is much the same thing as ‘all men,’ and nobody is the negation of ‘all men’; but the phenomenon is extended to cases where this explanation will not hold good, as in G. Eliot, M. 2. 304, I shouldn’t like to punish any one, even if they’d done me wrong. (For many examples from good writers see my MEG. ii. 5, 56.)
Most English pronouns don’t differentiate by gender: I, you, we, they, who, each, somebody, etc. However, when we find out that Finnish and Hungarian, and indeed most languages outside the Aryan and Semitic groups, don’t have separate forms for he and she, we’re often surprised; we can’t imagine how it’s possible to manage without this distinction. But if we look closer, we’ll see that it can sometimes be inconvenient to specify the gender of the person being discussed. Coleridge (Anima Poetæ 190) lamented the lack of a pronoun for the word person, as it forced awkward and clumsy phrases like ‘not letting the person be aware of where the offense lay,’ instead of simply saying ‘where he or she has offended.’ It has been suggested that if a gender-neutral pronoun could replace he in a statement like this: ‘It would be interesting if each of the leading poets would tell us what he considers his best work,’ women would be saved from the unfavorable implication that all the leading poets are men. Similarly, there’s something off about this sentence found in a German review of a book: “Was Maria and Fritz were drawn to in each other was that each of them saw in the other how they were unhappy.” Anyone who has done a lot of writing in Ido will know how handy it is to have common-gender pronouns like lu (he or she), singlu, altru, etc. It’s interesting to see the different solutions that languages use to address this issue. First, the cumbersome phrase he or she, as in Fielding TJ 1. 174, the reader’s heart (if he or she has one) | Miss Muloch H. 2. 128, everyone made his or her comment.[85] Second, the exclusive use of he: If anyone behaves in such a way, he will be punished (see the completely[348] acceptable, but not always applicable, formula: Whoever misbehaves will be punished). This use of he has been legitimized by the Act 13 and 14 Vict., cap. 21. 4: “That in all acts, words implying the masculine gender should be understood to include females.” Third, the gender-neutral but plural form they can be used. If you attempt to rephrase ‘Does anybody prevent you?’ starting with ‘Nobody prevents you,’ then adding the interrogative phrase, you’ll see that ‘does he’ is too specific, and ‘does he or she’ is too awkward; so you would naturally say (as Thackeray does, P 2. 260), “Nobody prevents you, do they?” Similarly, Shakespeare writes (Lucr. 125): “Everybody to rest themselves betake.” The substitution of the plural for the singular isn’t entirely illogical; because everybody is similar to ‘all men,’ and nobody is the negation of ‘all men’; however, this phenomenon extends to instances where this explanation doesn’t apply, like in G. Eliot, M. 2. 304, I wouldn’t want to punish anyone, even if they’d done me wrong. (For many examples from good writers see my MEG. ii. 5, 56.)
The English interrogative who is not, like the quis or quæ of the Romans, limited to one sex and one number, so that our question ‘Who did it?’ to be rendered exactly in Latin, would require a combination of the four: Quis hoc fecit? Quæ hoc fecit? Qui hoc fecerunt? Quæ hoc fecerunt? or rather, the abstract nature of who (and of did) makes it possible to express such a question much more indefinitely in English than in any highly flexional language; and indefiniteness in many cases means greater precision, or a closer correspondence between thought and expression.
The English word who isn’t, like the Latin quis or quæ, restricted to one gender and one number. So, to translate our question ‘Who did it?’ accurately into Latin, you would need to use a combination of four forms: Quis hoc fecit? Quæ hoc fecit? Qui hoc fecerunt? Quæ hoc fecerunt? In fact, the abstract quality of who (and did) allows us to pose such a question much more generally in English than in any highly inflected language. Often, this generality leads to greater clarity, or a better alignment between thought and expression.
XVIII.—§ 7. Nominal Concord.
We have seen in the case of the verbs how widely diffused in all the old Aryan languages is the phenomenon of Concord. It is the same with the nouns. Here, as there, it consists in secondary words (here chiefly adjectives) being made to agree with principal words, but while with the verbs the agreement was in number and person, here it is in number, case and gender. This is well known in Greek and Latin; as examples from Gothic may here be given Luk. 1. 72, gamunan triggwos weihaizos seinaizos, ‘to remember[349] His holy covenant,’ and 1. 75, allans dagans unsarans, ‘all our days.’ The English translation shows how English has discarded this trait, for there is nothing in the forms of (his), holy, all and our, as in the Gothic forms, to indicate what substantive they belong to.
We have seen in the case of the verbs how widespread the phenomenon of Concord is in all the old Aryan languages. The same applies to nouns. In both cases, it involves secondary words (mainly adjectives here) agreeing with principal words, but while the agreement with verbs is based on number and person, with nouns it depends on number, case, and gender. This is well known in Greek and Latin; examples from Gothic can be seen in Luke 1:72, gamunan triggwos weihaizos seinaizos, ‘to remember[349] His holy covenant,’ and 1:75, allans dagans unsarans, ‘all our days.’ The English translation demonstrates how English has dropped this feature, as there is nothing in the forms of (his), holy, all, and our to show which noun they are associated with, unlike the Gothic forms.
Wherever the same adjectival idea is to be joined to two substantives, the concordless junction is an obvious advantage, as seen from a comparison of the English ‘my wife and children’ with the French ‘ma femme et mes enfants,’ or of ‘the local press and committees’ with ‘la presse locale et les comités locaux.’ Try to translate exactly into French or Latin such a sentence as this: “What are the present state and wants of mankind?” (Ruskin). Cf. also the expression ‘a verdict of wilful murder against some person or persons unknown,’ where some and unknown belong to the singular as well as to the plural forms; Fielding writes (TJ 3. 65): “Some particular chapter, or perhaps chapters, may be obnoxious.” Where an English editor of a text will write: “Some (indifferently singular and plural) word or words wanting here,” a Dane will write: “Et (sg.) eller flere (pl.) ord (indifferent) mangler her.” These last examples may be taken as proof that it might even in some cases be advantageous to have forms in the substantives that did not show number; still, it must be recognized that the distinction between one and more than one rightly belongs to substantival notions, but logically it has as little to do with adjectival as with verbal notions (cf. above, Ch. XVII § 11). In ‘black spots’ it is the spots, but not the qualities of black, that we count. And in ‘two black spots’ it is of course quite superfluous to add a dual or plural ending (as in Latin duo, duæ) in order to indicate once more what the word two denotes sufficiently, namely, that we have not to do with a singular. Compare, finally, E. to the father and mother, Fr. au père et à la mère, G. zu dem vater und der mutter (zum vater und zur mutter).
Wherever the same descriptive idea connects two nouns, the lack of agreement is clearly an advantage, as shown by comparing the English phrase ‘my wife and children’ with the French my wife and kids,’ or ‘the local press and committees’ with ‘local media and local committees.’ Try to translate exactly into French or Latin a sentence like this: “What are the present state and wants of mankind?” (Ruskin). Also, consider the phrase ‘a verdict of willful murder against some person or persons unknown,’ where some and unknown apply to both singular and plural forms; Fielding writes (TJ 3. 65): “Some particular chapter, or perhaps chapters, may be obnoxious.” When an English editor of a text says: “Some (either singular or plural) word or words are missing here,” a Dane will write: “Et (sg.) or more (pl.) ord (indifferent) mangling her.” These last examples can be seen as evidence that, in some cases, it might be beneficial to have noun forms that do not indicate number; however, it should be acknowledged that the distinction between one and more than one rightly belongs to notions of nouns, yet logically it has as little to do with adjectives as it does with verbs (see above, Ch. XVII § 11). In ‘black spots,’ it is the spots we count, not the qualities of black. And in ‘two black spots,’ it's unnecessary to add a dual or plural ending (as in Latin duo, duæ) to further indicate what the word two clearly denotes, which is that we are not dealing with a singular. Finally, compare E. to the father and mother, Fr. au père et à la mère, G. zu dem vater und der mutter (zum vater und zur mutter).
If it is admitted that it is an inconvenience whenever you want to use an adjective to have to put it in the form corresponding in case, number and gender to its substantive, it may be thought a redeeming feature of the language which makes this demand that, on the other hand, it allows you to place the adjective at some distance from the substantive, and yet the hearer or reader will at once connect the two together. But here, as elsewhere in ‘energetics,’ the question is whether the advantage counter-balances the disadvantage; in other words, whether the fact that you are free to place your adjective where you will is worth the price you pay for it in being always saddled with the heavy apparatus of adjectival flexions. Why should you want to remove the adjective from the substantive, which naturally must be in your[350] thought when you are thinking of the adjective? There is one natural employment of the adjective in which it has very often to stand at some distance from the substantive, namely, when it is predicative; but then the example of German shows the needlessness of concord in that case, for while the adjunct adjective is inflected (ein guter mensch, eine gute frau, ein gutes buch, gute bücher) the predicative is invariable like the adverb (der mensch ist gut, die frau ist gut, das buch ist gut, die bücher sind gut). It is chiefly in poetry that a Latin adjective is placed far from its substantive, as in Vergil: “Et bene apud memores veteris stat gratia facti” (Æn. IV. 539), where the form shows that veteris is to be taken with facti (but then, where does bene belong? it might be taken with memores, stat or facti). In Horace’s well-known aphorism: “Æquam memento rebus in arduis servare mentem,” the flexional form of æquam allows him to place it first, far from mentem, and thus facilitates for him the task of building up a perfect metrical line; but for the reader it would certainly be preferable to have had æquam mentem together at once, instead of having to hold his attention in suspense for five words, till finally he comes upon a word with which to connect the adjective. There is therefore no economizing of the energy of reader or hearer. Extreme examples may be found in Icelandic skaldic poetry, in which the poets, to fulfil the requirements of a highly complicated metrical system, entailing initial and medial rimes, very often place the words in what logically must be considered the worst disorder, thereby making their poem as difficult to understand as an intricate chess-problem is to solve—and certainly coming short of the highest poetical form.
If we accept that it's a hassle to have to change adjectives to match the case, number, and gender of their nouns, we might also appreciate that this same language feature allows us to place adjectives somewhat far from their nouns, yet the listener or reader can still quickly connect them. However, as with other aspects of "energetics," we must consider if this freedom to position adjectives wherever we like is worth the burden of always dealing with complex adjective forms. Why would you want to separate the adjective from the noun when you naturally think about the noun first? One situation where adjectives often appear distantly from their nouns is when they are predicative; however, German shows that agreement isn’t necessary here, as the adjective agreeing with the noun is inflected (ein guter mensch, eine gute frau, ein gutes buch, gute bücher) while the predicative form remains unchanged like an adverb (der mensch ist gut, die frau ist gut, das buch ist gut, die bücher sind gut). In poetry, Latin adjectives are often placed far from their nouns, as in Vergil: “And well among those who remember the past, there is honor in the deed.” (Æn. IV. 539), where the form indicates that veteris goes with facti (but then, where does bene fit? it could connect to memores, stat, or facti). In Horace’s famous saying: “Always remember to keep a clear mind in difficult situations.,” the form of æquam allows it to be placed first, far from mentem, helping him create a perfect metrical line; however, readers would likely prefer to see æquam mentem together right away, rather than waiting through five words before finding a connection for the adjective. Thus, there's no saving of energy for the reader or listener. Extreme cases are seen in Icelandic skaldic poetry, where poets, to meet the demands of a very complex metrical system requiring initial and medial rhymes, often place words in what seems like complete disorder, making their poems as difficult to grasp as a complicated chess problem to solve—and certainly not reaching the peak of poetic form.
XVIII.—§ 8. The English Genitive.
If we compare a group of Latin words, such as opera virorum omnium bonorum veterum, with a corresponding group in a few other languages of a less flexional type: OE. ealra godra ealdra manna weorc; Danish alle gode gamle mænds værker; Modern English all good old men’s works, we perceive by analyzing the ideas expressed by the several words that the Romans said really: ‘work,’ plural, nominative or accusative + ‘man,’ plural, masculine, genitive + ‘all,’ plural, genitive + ‘good,’ plural, masculine, genitive + ‘old,’ plural, masculine, genitive. Leaving opera out of consideration, we find that plural number is expressed four times, genitive case also four times, and masculine gender twice;[351][86] in Old English the signs of number and case are found four times each, while there is no indication of gender; in Danish the plural number is marked four times and the case once. And finally, in Modern English, we find each idea expressed once only; and as nothing is lost in clearness, this method, as being the easiest and shortest, must be considered the best. Mathematically the different ways of rendering the same thing might be represented by the formulas: anx + bnx + cnx = (an + bn + cn)x = (a + b + c)nx.
If we compare a group of Latin words like opera virorum omnium bonorum veterum with a matching group in a few other languages that are less flexible in their structure: OE. ealra godra ealdra manna weorc; Danish alle gode gamle mænds værker; Modern English all good old men’s works, we can analyze the ideas expressed by the different words and see that the Romans essentially said: ‘work,’ plural, nominative or accusative + ‘man,’ plural, masculine, genitive + ‘all,’ plural, genitive + ‘good,’ plural, masculine, genitive + ‘old,’ plural, masculine, genitive. Excluding opera, we find that plural is indicated four times, genitive case also four times, and masculine gender twice;[351][86] in Old English, the signs of number and case appear four times each, but there is no indication of gender; in Danish, plural is marked four times and case once. Finally, in Modern English, each idea is expressed just once; and since nothing is lost in clarity, this method, being the simplest and shortest, should be considered the best. Mathematically, the different ways of expressing the same concept could be represented by the formulas: anx + bnx + cnx = (an + bn + cn)x = (a + b + c)nx.
This unusual faculty of ‘parenthesizing’ causes Danish, and to a still greater degree English, to stand outside the definition of the Aryan family of languages given by the earlier school of linguists, according to which the Aryan substantive and adjective can never be without a sign indicating case. Schleicher (NV 526) says: “The radical difference between Magyar and Indo-Germanic (Aryan) words is brought out distinctly by the fact that the postpositions belonging to co-ordinated nouns can be dispensed with in all the nouns except the last of the series, e.g. a jó embernek, ‘dem guten menschen’ (a for az, demonstrative pronoun, article; jó, good; ember, man, -nek, -nak, postposition with pretty much the same meaning as the dative case), for az-nak (annak) jó-nak ember-nek, as if in Greek you should say το ἀγαθο ἀνθρώπῳ. An attributive adjective preceding its noun always has the form of the pure stem, the sign of plurality and the postposition indicating case not being added to it. Magyars say, for instance, Hunyady Mátyás magyar király-nak (to the Hungarian king Mathew Hunyady), -nak belonging here to all the preceding words. Nearly the same thing takes place where several words are joined together by means of ‘and.’”
This unusual ability to ‘parenthesize’ makes Danish, and even more so English, stand apart from the definition of the Aryan family of languages provided by earlier linguists. According to that definition, the Aryan noun and adjective can never lack a sign indicating case. Schleicher (NV 526) points out: “The fundamental difference between Magyar and Indo-Germanic (Aryan) words is highlighted by the fact that the postpositions attached to coordinated nouns can be omitted in all nouns except the last one in the series, e.g. a jó embernek, ‘to the good people’ (a for az, demonstrative pronoun, article; jó, good; ember, man, -nek, -nak, postposition with a similar meaning as the dative case), as in az-nak (annak) jó-nak ember-nek, as if in Greek you were to say the good person. An attributive adjective that comes before its noun always uses the form of the pure stem, without the plural sign and the postposition indicating case. For instance, Magyars say Hunyady Mátyás magyar király-nak (to the Hungarian king Mathew Hunyady), where -nak applies to all the preceding words. A similar situation occurs when multiple words are connected by ‘and.’”
Now, this is an exact parallel to the English group genitive in cases like ‘all good old men’s works,’ ‘the King of England’s power,’ ‘Beaumont and Fletcher’s plays,’ ‘somebody else’s turn,’ etc. The way in which this group genitive has developed in comparatively recent times may be summed up as follows (see the detailed exposition in my ChE ch. iii.): In the oldest English -s is a case-ending, like all others found in flexional languages; it forms together with the body of the noun one indivisible whole, in which it is sometimes impossible to tell where the kernel of the word ends and the ending begins (compare endes from ende and heriges from here); only some words have this ending, and in others the genitive is indicated in other ways. As to syntax, the meaning or function of the genitive is complicated and rather vague, and there are no fixed rules for the position of the genitive in the sentence.
Now, this is a direct parallel to the English group genitive in examples like ‘all good old men’s works,’ ‘the King of England’s power,’ ‘Beaumont and Fletcher’s plays,’ ‘somebody else’s turn,’ etc. The way this group genitive has evolved in relatively recent times can be summarized as follows (see the detailed explanation in my ChE ch. iii.): In the oldest English, -s is a case-ending, similar to other endings found in inflected languages; it combines with the body of the noun to form one indivisible unit, where it can be difficult to discern where the core of the word ends and the ending begins (compare endes from ende and heriges from here); only certain words have this ending, while others indicate the genitive in different ways. Regarding syntax, the meaning or function of the genitive is complex and somewhat unclear, and there are no strict rules for where the genitive should be placed in the sentence.
In course of time we witness a gradual development towards greater regularity and precision. The partitive, objective, descrip[352]tive and some other functions of the genitive become obsolete; the genitive is invariably put immediately before the word it belongs to; irregular forms disappear, the s ending alone surviving as the fittest, so that at last we have one definite ending with one definite function and one definite position.
Over time, we see a gradual shift towards more regularity and accuracy. The partitive, objective, descriptive, and some other uses of the genitive fall out of use; the genitive is always placed right before the word it modifies. Irregular forms fade away, with the s ending being the only one that remains, so ultimately we end up with one clear ending that has one specific function and one specific position.
In Old English, when several words belonging together were to be put in the genitive, each of them had to take the genitive mark, though this was often different in different words, and thus we had combinations like anes reades mannes, ‘a red man’s’ | þære godlican lufe, ‘the godlike love’s’ | ealra godra ealdra manna weorc, etc. Now the s used everywhere is much more independent, and may be separated from the principal word by an adverb like else or by a prepositional group like of England, and one s is sufficient at the end even of a long group of words. Here, then, we see in the full light of comparatively recent history a giving up of the old flexion with its inseparability of the constituent elements of the word and with its strictness of concord; an easier and more regular system is developed, in which the ending leads a more independent existence and may be compared with the ‘agglutinated’ elements of such a language as Magyar or even with the ‘empty words’ of Chinese grammar. The direction of this development is the direct opposite of that assumed by most linguists for the development of languages in prehistoric times.
In Old English, when several related words needed to be in the genitive, each one had to take the genitive ending, even though it varied from word to word. This resulted in combinations like anes reades mannes, meaning ‘a red man’s’ | þære godlican lufe, meaning ‘the godlike love’s’ | ealra godra ealdra manna weorc, and so on. Nowadays, the s used is much more flexible and can be separated from the main word by an adverb like else or a prepositional phrase like of England. One s at the end is enough even for a long group of words. Here, we see that, in the relatively recent past, there has been a shift away from the old grammatical structure that required the components of a word to be inseparable and adhered to strict agreement. An easier and more consistent system has emerged, where the ending exists more independently and can be compared to the ‘agglutinated’ elements of languages like Hungarian or even to the ‘empty words’ in Chinese grammar. This development moves in the opposite direction from what most linguists have assumed about the evolution of languages in prehistoric times.
XVIII.—§ 9. Bantu Concord.
One of the most characteristic traits of the history of English is thus seen to be the gradual getting rid of concord as of something superfluous. Where concord is found in our family of languages, it certainly is an heirloom from a primitive age, and strikes us now as an outcome of a tendency to be more explicit than to more advanced people seems strictly necessary. It is on a par with the ‘concord of negatives,’ as we might term the emphasizing of the negative idea by seemingly redundant repetitions. In Old English it was the regular idiom to say: nan man nyste nan þing, ‘no man not-knew nothing’; so it was in Chaucer’s time: he neuere yet no vileynye ne sayde In all his lyf unto no manner wight; and it survives in the vulgar speech of our own days: there was niver nobody else gen (gave) me nothin’ (George Eliot); whereas standard Modern English is content with one negation: no man knew anything, etc. That concord is really a primitive trait (though not, of course, found equally distributed among all ‘primitive peoples’) will be seen also by a rapid glance at the structure of the South African group[353] of languages called Bantu, for here we find not only repetition of negatives, but also other phenomena of concord in specially luxuriant growth.
One of the most distinctive features of English history is its gradual phase-out of concord as something unnecessary. Where concord exists in our language family, it's clearly a remnant from an earlier time and seems to be a result of a desire to be more explicit than what more advanced societies find strictly necessary. It’s similar to the "concord of negatives," which we could refer to as the emphasis on a negative idea through seemingly redundant repetitions. In Old English, it was common to say: nan man nyste nan þing, which translates to ‘no man not-knew nothing’; the same pattern appeared in Chaucer's time: he neuere yet no vileynye ne sayde In all his lyf unto no manner wight; and it still appears in the everyday language of our time: there was niver nobody else gen (gave) me nothin’ (George Eliot); while standard Modern English only requires one negation: no man knew anything, etc. This concord is truly a primitive feature (though, of course, not evenly distributed among all 'primitive peoples') as seen quickly in the structure of the South African language group called Bantu, where we find not only repetition of negatives but also other instances of concord in particularly abundant forms.[353]
I take the following examples chiefly from W. H. I. Bleek’s excellent, though unfortunately unfinished, Comparative Grammar, though I am well aware that expressions like si-m-tanda (we love him) “are never used by natives with this meaning without being determined by some other expression” (Torrend, p. 7). The Zulu word for ‘man’ is umuntu; every word in the same or a following sentence having any reference to that word must begin with something to remind you of the beginning of umuntu. This will be, according to fixed rules, either mu or u, or w or m. In the following sentence, the meaning of which is ‘our handsome man (or woman) appears, we love him (or her),’ these reminders (as I shall term them) are printed in italics:
I take the following examples mainly from W. H. I. Bleek’s excellent, though unfortunately unfinished, Comparative Grammar, although I know that expressions like si-m-tanda (we love him) “are never used by natives with this meaning without being determined by some other expression” (Torrend, p. 7). The Zulu word for ‘man’ is umuntu; every word in the same or a following sentence that references that word must start with something that echoes the beginning of umuntu. This will, according to fixed rules, either be mu or u, or w or m. In the following sentence, which means ‘our handsome man (or woman) appears, we love him (or her),’ these reminders (as I will call them) are printed in italics:
umuntu | wetu | omuchle uyabonakala, | simtanda (1) |
man | ours | handsome appears, | we love. |
If, instead of the singular, we take the corresponding plural abantu, ‘men, people’ (whence the generic name of Bantu), the sentence looks quite different:
If we use the plural form abantu, meaning 'men, people' (from which the term Bantu comes), the sentence changes significantly:
abantu betu abachle bayabonakala, sibatanda (2).
abantu betu abachle bayabonakala, sibatanda (2).
In the same way, if we successively take as our starting-point ilizwe, ‘country,’ the corresponding plural amazwe, ‘countries,’ isizwe, ‘nation,’ izizwe, ‘nations,’ intombi, ‘girl,’ izintombi, ‘girls,’ we get:
In the same way, if we successively take as our starting point ilizwe, ‘country,’ the corresponding plural amazwe, ‘countries,’ isizwe, ‘nation,’ izizwe, ‘nations,’ intombi, ‘girl,’ izintombi, ‘girls,’ we get:
ilizwe | letu | elichle | liyabonakala, | silitanda | (5) |
amazwe | etu | amachle | ayabonakala, | siwatanda | (6) |
isizwe | setu | esichle | siyabonakala, | sisitanda | (7) |
izizwe | zetu | ezichle | ziyabonakala, | sizitanda | (8) |
intombi | yetu | enchle | iyabonakala, | siyitanda | (9) |
izintombi | zetu | ezinchle | ziyabonakala, | sizitanda | (10) |
(girls) | our | handsome | appear, | we love.[87] |
In other words, every substantive belongs to one of several classes, of which some have a singular and others a plural meaning; each of these classes has its own prefix, by means of which the concord of the parts of a sentence is indicated. (An inhabitant[354] of the country of Uganda is called muganda, pl. baganda or waganda; the language spoken there is luganda.)
In other words, every noun belongs to one of several classes, some of which have a singular meaning and others a plural meaning; each of these classes has its own prefix, which indicates how the parts of a sentence agree with each other. (An inhabitant of the country of Uganda is called muganda, plural baganda or waganda; the language spoken there is luganda.)
It will be noticed that adjectives such as ‘handsome’ or ‘ours’ take different shapes according to the word to which they refer; in the Zulu Lord’s Prayer ‘thy’ is found in the following forms: lako (referring to igama, ‘name,’ for iligama, 5), bako, (ubukumkani, ‘kingdom,’ 14), yako (intando, ‘will,’ 9). So also the genitive case of the same noun has a great many different forms, for the genitive relation is expressed by the reminder of the governing word + the ‘relative particle’ a (which is combined with the following sound); take, for instance, inkosi, ‘chief, king’:
It will be noticed that adjectives like ‘handsome’ or ‘ours’ change form depending on the word they refer to; in the Zulu Lord’s Prayer, ‘thy’ appears in these forms: lako (referring to igame, ‘name,’ for iligama, 5), bako, (ubuking, ‘kingdom,’ 14), yako (in-tending, ‘will,’ 9). Similarly, the genitive case of the same noun has many different forms, as the genitive relationship is expressed by the reminder of the governing word + the ‘relative particle’ a (which combines with the following sound); for example, inkosi, ‘chief, king’:
umuntu wenkosi, ‘the king’s man’ (1; we for w + a + i).
abantu benkosi, ‘the king’s men’ (2).
ilizwe lenkosi, ‘the king’s country’ (5).
amazwe enkosi, ‘the king’s countries’ (6).
isizwe senkosi, ‘the king’s nation’ (7).
ukutanda kwenkosi, ‘the king’s love’ (15).
the person of the chief, ‘the king’s man’ (1; we for w + a + i).
people king, ‘the king’s men’ (2).
land of the king, ‘the king’s country’ (5).
amazing God, ‘the king’s countries’ (6).
isizwe senkosi, ‘the king’s nation’ (7).
king's throne, ‘the king’s love’ (15).
Livingstone says that these apparently redundant repetitions “impart energy and perspicuity to each member of a proposition, and prevent the possibility of a mistake as to the antecedent.” These prefixes are necessary to the Bantu languages; still, Bleek is right as against Livingstone in speaking of the repetitions as cumbersome, just as the endings of Latin multorum virorum antiquorum are cumbersome, however indispensable they may have been to the contemporaries of Cicero.
Livingstone says that these seemingly unnecessary repetitions "add energy and clarity to each part of a statement, and eliminate the chance of a mistake regarding the subject." These prefixes are essential to the Bantu languages; however, Bleek is correct in disagreeing with Livingstone by calling the repetitions cumbersome, just like the endings of Latin multorum virorum antiquorum are cumbersome, no matter how necessary they might have been to Cicero's contemporaries.
These African phenomena have been mentioned here chiefly to show to what lengths concord may go in the speech of some primitive peoples. The prevalent opinion is that each of these prefixes (umu, aba, ili, etc.) was originally an independent word, and that thus words like umuntu, ilizwe, were at first compounds like E. steamship, where it would evidently be possible to imagine a reference to this word by means of a repeated ship (our ship, which ship is a great ship, the ship appears, we love the ship); but at any rate the Zulus extend this principle to cases that would be parallel to an imagined repetition of friendship by means of the same ship, or to referring to steamer by means of the ending er (Bleek 107). Bleek and others have tried to find out by an analysis of the words making up the different classes what may have been the original meaning of the class-prefix, but very often the connecting tie is extremely loose, and in many cases it seems that a word might with equal right have belonged to another class than the one to which it actually belongs. The connexion also frequently seems to be a derived rather than an original one,[355] and much in this class-division is just as arbitrary as the reference of Aryan nouns to each of the three genders. In several of the classes the words have a definite numerical value, so that they go together in pairs as corresponding singular and plural nouns; but the existence of a certain number of exceptions shows that these numerical values cannot originally have been associated with the class prefixes, but must be due to an extension by analogy (Bleek 140 ff.). The starting-point may have been substantives standing to each other in the relation of ‘person’ to ‘people,’ ‘soldier’ to ‘army,’ ‘tree’ to ‘forest,’ etc. The prefixes of such words as the latter of each of these pairs will easily acquire a certain sense of plurality, no matter what they may have meant originally, and then they will lend themselves to forming a kind of plural in other nouns, being either put instead of the prefix belonging properly to the noun (amazwe, ‘countries,’ 6; ilizwe, ‘country,’ 5), or placed before it (ma-luto, ‘spoons,’ 6, luto, ‘spoon,’ 11).
These African phenomena are mentioned here mainly to illustrate how extensive concord can be in the language of some primitive peoples. The common belief is that each of these prefixes (umu, aba, ili, etc.) was originally an independent word, so words like umuntu and ilizwe were initially compounds similar to English steamship, where you could easily imagine a reference to this word through a repeated ship (our ship, which ship is a great ship, the ship appears, we love the ship); however, the Zulus apply this principle to situations that parallel an imagined repetition of friendship using the same ship, or to relating to steamer via the ending er (Bleek 107). Bleek and others have attempted to determine the original meaning of the class-prefix through analyzing the words that make up different classes, but often the connection is quite loose, and in many instances, it seems that a word could just as easily belong to a different class than the one it currently occupies. The connection also frequently appears to be derived rather than original,[355] and much of this class division is as arbitrary as categorizing Aryan nouns into each of the three genders. In several classes, the words possess a specific numerical value, allowing them to pair as corresponding singular and plural nouns; but the presence of a certain number of exceptions indicates that these numerical values were not originally associated with the class prefixes but resulted from an analogy extension (Bleek 140 ff.). The starting point may have involved nouns that relate to each other as ‘person’ to ‘people,’ ‘soldier’ to ‘army,’ ‘tree’ to ‘forest,’ etc. The prefixes of such words as the latter of each of these pairs can easily take on a sense of plurality, regardless of their original meanings, and will then be used to form a kind of plural in other nouns, either replacing the prefix that properly belongs to the noun (amazew, ‘countries,’ 6; ilizwe, ‘country,’ 5), or placed before it (maltto, ‘spoons,’ 6, luto, ‘spoon,’ 11).
In some of the languages “the forms of some of the prefixes have been so strongly contracted as almost to defy identification.” (Bleek 234). All the prefixes probably at first had fuller forms than appear now. Bleek noticed that the ma- prefix never, except in some degraded languages, had a corresponding ma- as particle, but, on the contrary, is followed in the sentence by ga-, ya-, or a-, and mu- (3) generally has a corresponding particle gu-. Now, Sir Harry Johnston (The Uganda Protectorate, 1902, 2. 891) has found that on Mount Eldon and in Kavirondo there are some very archaic forms of Bantu languages, in which gumu- and gama- are the commonly used forms of the mu- and ma- prefixes, as well as baba- and bubu- for ordinary ba-, bu-; he infers that the original forms of mu-, ma- were ngumu-, ngama-. I am not so sure that he is right when he says that these prefixes were originally “words which had a separate meaning of their own, either as directives or demonstrative pronouns, as indications of sex, weakness, littleness or greatness, and so on”—for, as we shall see in a subsequent chapter, such grammatical instruments may have been at first inseparable parts of long words—parts which had no meaning of their own—and have acquired some more or less vague grammatical meaning through being extended gradually to other words with which they had originally nothing to do. The actual irregularity in their distribution certainly seems to point in that direction.
In some languages, "the forms of some of the prefixes have been so strongly contracted as almost to defy identification." (Bleek 234). All the prefixes probably initially had fuller forms than what we see now. Bleek noticed that the ma- prefix never, except in some lesser languages, had a corresponding ma- as a particle, but instead is followed in sentences by ga-, ya-, or a-, and mu- usually has a corresponding particle gu-. Now, Sir Harry Johnston (The Uganda Protectorate, 1902, 2. 891) found that on Mount Eldon and in Kavirondo there are some very old forms of Bantu languages, where gumu- and gama- are commonly used forms of the mu- and ma- prefixes, as well as baba- and bubu- for the usual ba-, bu-; he infers that the original forms of mu-, ma- were ngumu-, ngama-. I’m not so sure he’s right when he says that these prefixes were originally “words that had a separate meaning of their own, either as directives or demonstrative pronouns, indicating sex, weakness, smallness, or greatness, and so on”—because, as we’ll see in a later chapter, such grammatical elements may have initially been inseparable parts of longer words—parts that had no meaning on their own—and over time gained some more or less vague grammatical meaning by being gradually extended to other words they originally weren’t related to. The actual irregularity in their distribution definitely seems to suggest this.
XVIII.—§ 10. Word Order Again.
Mention has already been made here and there of word order and its relation to the great question of simplification of gram[356]matical structure; but it will be well in this place to return to the subject in a more comprehensive way. The theory of word order has long been the Cinderella of linguistic science: how many even of the best and fullest grammars are wholly, or almost wholly, silent about it! And yet it presents a great many problems of high importance and of the greatest interest, not only in those languages in which word order has been extensively utilized for grammatical purposes, such as English and Chinese, but in other languages as well.
Mention has already been made here and there of word order and its connection to the significant issue of simplifying grammatical structure; however, it would be beneficial to revisit the topic here in a more comprehensive way. The theory of word order has long been the overlooked aspect of linguistic science: how many even of the best and most detailed grammars are completely or almost completely silent about it! Yet, it raises many important and interesting problems, not only in languages like English and Chinese where word order is extensively used for grammatical purposes, but in other languages as well.
In historical times we see a gradual evolution of strict rules for word order, while our general impression of the older stages of our languages is that words were often placed more or less at random. This is what we should naturally expect from primitive man, whose thoughts and words are most likely to have come to him rushing helter-skelter, in wild confusion. One cannot, of course, apply so strong an expression to languages such as Sanskrit, Greek or Gothic; still, compared with our modern languages, it cannot be denied that there is in them much more of what from one point of view is disorder, and from another freedom.
In earlier times, we see a gradual development of strict rules for word order, while our general impression of the earlier stages of our languages is that words were often placed in a more random way. This aligns with what we would naturally expect from primitive humans, whose thoughts and words likely came to them in a chaotic rush. While we can't use such a strong description for languages like Sanskrit, Greek, or Gothic, it is undeniable that, compared to our modern languages, they contain much more what could be seen as disorder from one perspective and freedom from another.
This is especially the case with regard to the mutual position of the subject of a sentence and its verb. In the earliest times, sometimes one of them comes first, and sometimes the other. Then there is a growing tendency to place the subject first, and as this position is found not only in most European languages but also in Chinese and other languages of far-away, the phenomenon must be founded in the very nature of human thought, though its non-prevalence in most of the older Aryan languages goes far to show that this particular order is only natural to developed human thought.
This is particularly true when it comes to the relationship between the subject of a sentence and its verb. In the earliest times, sometimes one came first and sometimes the other. Over time, there’s been an increasing tendency to place the subject first, and since this structure is found not only in most European languages but also in Chinese and other distant languages, it suggests that this pattern is rooted in the fundamental nature of human thought. However, its rarity in many of the older Aryan languages indicates that this specific order is only natural to developed human thought.
Survivals of the earlier state of things are found here and there; thus, in German ballad style: “Kam ein schlanker bursch gegangen.” But it is well worth noticing that such an arrangement is generally avoided, in German as well as in the other modern languages of Western Europe, and in those cases where there is some reason for placing the verb before the subject, the speaker still, as it were, satisfies his grammatical instinct by putting a kind of sham subject before the verb, as in E. there comes a time when ..., Dan. der kommer en tid da ..., G. es kommt eine zeit wo ..., Fr. il arrive un temps où....
Survivals of the earlier state of things are found here and there; thus, in German ballad style: “A slim young man walked in..” But it's important to note that such an arrangement is generally avoided, in German as well as in the other modern languages of Western Europe. In situations where there’s a reason to place the verb before the subject, the speaker still, in a way, satisfies their grammatical instinct by putting a sort of fake subject before the verb, as in English: there comes a time when ..., Danish: There will come a time when ..., German: es kommt eine Zeit, wo ..., French: There comes a time when...
In Keltic the habitual word order placed the verb first, but little by little the tendency prevailed to introduce most sentences by a periphrasis, as in ‘(it) is the man that comes,’ and as that came to mean merely ‘the man comes,’ the word order Subject-Verb was thus brought about circuitously.
In Keltic, the usual word order had the verb come first, but gradually it became more common to start most sentences with a phrasing like ‘(it) is the man that comes.’ As that began to simply mean ‘the man comes,’ the Subject-Verb word order was indirectly established.
Before this particular word order, Subject-Verb, was firmly established in modern Gothonic languages, an exception obtained wherever the sentence began with some other word than the subject; this might be some important member of the proposition that was placed first for the sake of emphasis, or it might be some unimportant little adverb, but the rule was that the verb should at any rate have the second place, as being felt to be in some way the middle or central part of the whole, and the subject had then to be content to be placed after the verb. This was the rule in Middle English and in Old French, and it is still strictly followed in German and Danish: Gestern kam das schiff | Pigen gav jeg kagen, ikke drengen. Traces of the practice are still found in English in parenthetic sentences to indicate who is the speaker (‘Oh, yes,’ said he), and after a somewhat long subjunct, if there is no object (‘About this time died the gentle Queen Elizabeth’), where this word order is little more than a stylistic trick to avoid the abrupt effect of ending the sentence with an isolated verb like died. Otherwise the order Subject-Verb is almost universal in English.
Before the Subject-Verb word order became firmly established in modern Gothic languages, there was an exception whenever a sentence started with a word other than the subject. This could be an important part of the proposition placed first for emphasis, or it could just be a minor adverb. The rule was that the verb should always take the second position, as it was considered the central part of the sentence. Consequently, the subject had to follow the verb. This rule was prevalent in Middle English and Old French, and it is still strictly adhered to in German and Danish: Yesterday, the ship arrived. | The girl, not the boy. You can still see traces of this practice in English in parenthetic sentences that show who is speaking (‘Oh, yes,’ said he) and after a somewhat lengthy subjunct if there’s no object (‘About this time died the gentle Queen Elizabeth’), where this word order serves as a stylistic choice to avoid the abruptness of ending the sentence with an isolated verb like died. Otherwise, the Subject-Verb order is almost universal in English.
XVIII.—§ 11. Compromises.
The inverted order, Verb-Subject, is used extensively in many languages to express questions, wishes and invitations. But, as already stated, this order was not originally peculiar to such sentences. A question was expressed, no matter how the words were arranged, by pronouncing the whole sentence, or the most important part of it, in a peculiar rising tone. This manner of indicating questions is, of course, still kept up in modern speech, and is often the only thing to show that a question is meant (‘John?’ | ‘John is here?’). But although there was thus a natural manner of expressing questions, and although the inverted word order was used in other sorts of sentences as well, yet in course of time there came to be a connexion between the two things, so that putting the verb before the subject was felt as implying a question. The rising tone then came to be less necessary, and is much less marked in inverted sentences like ‘Is John here?’ than in sentences with the usual word order: ‘John is here?’
The inverted order, Verb-Subject, is commonly used in many languages to ask questions, express wishes, and extend invitations. However, as mentioned before, this order wasn’t originally unique to those sentences. A question could be asked, regardless of how the words were arranged, by pronouncing the whole sentence, or the most important part of it, with a specific rising tone. This way of indicating questions is still used in modern speech and is often the only clue that a question is intended (‘John?’ | ‘John is here?’). Although there was a natural way to express questions and the inverted word order was used in other types of sentences, over time, a connection developed between the two. As a result, placing the verb before the subject began to suggest that a question was being asked. The rising tone then became less essential and is much less pronounced in inverted sentences like ‘Is John here?’ compared to sentences with the usual word order: ‘John is here?’
Now, after this method of indicating questions had become comparatively fixed, and after the habit of thinking of the subject first had become all but universal, these two principles entered into conflict, the result of which has been, in English, Danish and French, the establishment in some cases of various kinds of compromise, in which the interrogatory word order has formally[358] carried the day, while really the verb, that is to say the verb which means something, is placed after its subject. In English, this is attained by means of the auxiliary do: instead of Shakespeare’s “Came he not home to-night?” (Ro. II. 4. 2) we now say, “Did he not (or, Didn’t he) come home to-night?” and so in all cases where a similar arrangement is not already brought about by the presence of some other auxiliary, ‘Will he come?’, ‘Can he come?’, etc. Where we have an interrogatory pronoun as a subject, no auxiliary is required, because the natural front position of the pronoun maintains the order Subject-Verb (Who came? | What happened?). But if the pronoun is not the subject, do is required to establish the balance between the two principles (Who(m) did you see? | What does he say?).
Now that the method of indicating questions has become pretty standard, and the habit of thinking about the subject first has become almost universal, these two principles are now in conflict. This has led to various compromises in English, Danish, and French, where the question word order formally wins out, but the main verb, which carries the meaning, is placed after its subject. In English, this is achieved with the auxiliary do: instead of Shakespeare’s “Came he not home to-night?” (Ro. II. 4. 2), we now say, “Did he not (or, Didn’t he) come home to-night?” This applies to all instances where a similar arrangement isn’t already created by the presence of another auxiliary, like ‘Will he come?’, ‘Can he come?’, etc. When we have an interrogative pronoun as the subject, no auxiliary is needed because the pronoun naturally takes the front position, maintaining the Subject-Verb order (Who came? | What happened?). However, if the pronoun isn't the subject, do is needed to keep the balance between the two principles (Who(m) did you see? | What does he say?).
In Danish, the verb mon, used in the old language to indicate a weak necessity or a vague futurity, fulfils to a certain extent the same office as the English do; up to the eighteenth century mon was really an auxiliary verb, followed by the infinitive: ‘Mon han komme?’; but now the construction has changed, the indicative is used with mon: ‘Mon han kommer?’, and mon is no longer a verb, but an interrogatory adverb, which serves the purpose of placing the subject before the verb, besides making the question more indefinite and vague: ‘Kommer han?’ means ‘Does he come?’ or ‘Will he come?’ but ‘Mon han kommer?’ means ‘Does he come (Will he come), do you think?’
In Danish, the verb mon, which used to indicate a weak necessity or a vague future in the old language, somewhat serves the same function as the English do; until the eighteenth century, mon was actually an auxiliary verb, followed by the infinitive: ‘Mon have come?’; but now the construction has changed, and the indicative is used with mon: ‘När kommer han?’, and mon is no longer a verb, but an interrogative adverb that helps place the subject before the verb, also making the question more indefinite and vague: ‘Is he coming?’ means ‘Does he come?’ or ‘Will he come?’ but ‘När kommer han?’ means ‘Does he come (Will he come), do you think?’
French, finally, has developed two distinct forms of compromise between the conflicting principles, for in ‘Est-ce que Pierre bat Jean?’ est-ce represents the interrogatory and Pierre bat the usual word order, and in ‘Pierre bat-il Jean?’ the real subject is placed before and the sham subject after the verb. Here also, as in Danish, the ultimate result is the creation of ‘empty words,’ or interrogatory adverbs: est-ce-que in every respect except in spelling is one word (note that it does not change with the tense of the main verb), and thus is a sentence prefix to introduce questions; and in popular speech we find another empty word, namely ti (see, among other scholars, G. Paris, Mélanges ling. 276). The origin of this ti is very curious. While the t of Latin amat, etc., coming after a vowel, disappeared at a very early period of the French language, and so produced il aime, etc., the same t was kept in Old French wherever a consonant protected it,[88] and so gave the forms est, sont, fait (from fact, for facit), font, chantent, etc. From est-il, fait-il, etc., the t was then by analogy reintroduced in aime-t-il, instead of the earlier aime il. Now, toward[359]s the end of the Middle Ages, French final consonants were as a rule dropped in speech, except when followed immediately by a word beginning with a vowel. Consequently, while t is mute in sentences like ‘Ton frère dit | Tes frères disent,’ it is sounded in the corresponding questions, ‘Ton frère dit-il? Tes frères disent-ils?’ As the final consonants of il and ils are also generally dropped, even by educated speakers, the difference between interrogatory and declarative sentences in the spoken language depends solely on the addition of ti to the verb: written phonetically, the pairs will be:
French has finally developed two clear forms of compromise between the conflicting principles. In ‘Is Pierre beating Jean?’, est-ce indicates a question, while Pierre bat shows the typical word order. In ‘Did Pierre hit Jean?’, the actual subject is placed before the verb, and the dummy subject follows. Similarly, as in Danish, the end result is the creation of ‘empty words’ or questioning adverbs: est-ce-que acts as a single word in every way except spelling (note that it doesn’t change with the tense of the main verb), serving as a sentence prefix to introduce questions. Additionally, in casual speech, we find another empty word, ti (see, among other scholars, G. Paris, Mélanges ling. 276). The origin of this ti is quite interesting. While the t from Latin amat, etc., dropped after a vowel very early in the French language, leading to il aime, the same t was retained in Old French wherever a consonant protected it,[88] resulting in forms like est, sont, fait (from fact, for facit), font, chantent, etc. From est-il, fait-il, etc., the t was then reintroduced through analogy in aime-t-il, instead of the previous aime il. Now, towards[359] the end of the Middle Ages, final consonants in French were typically dropped in speech, except when followed immediately by a word beginning with a vowel. Therefore, while t is silent in sentences like ‘Your brother says | Your brothers say’, it is pronounced in the corresponding questions, ‘Your brother says he? Your brothers do they say?’. Since the final consonants of il and ils are also mostly dropped, even by educated speakers, the distinction between interrogative and declarative sentences in spoken language relies solely on the addition of ti to the verb: written phonetically, the pairs will be:
[te frɛ·r di·z—te frɛ·r di·z ti].
Now, popular instinct seizes upon this ti as a convenient sign of interrogative sentences, and, forgetting its origin, uses it even with a feminine subject, turning ‘Ta sœur di(t)’ into the question ‘Ta sœur di ti?’, and in the first person: ‘Je di ti?’ ‘Nous dison ti?’ ‘Je vous fais-ti tort?’ (Maupassant). In novels this is often written as if it were the adverb y: C’est-y pas vrai? | Je suis t’y bête! | C’est-y vous le monsieur de l’Académie qui va avoir cent ans? (Daudet). I have dwelt on this point because, besides showing the interest of many problems of word order, it also throws some light on the sometimes unexpected ways by which languages must often travel to arrive at new expressions for grammatical categories.
Now, popular instinct grabs onto this ti as a handy marker for questions, and, forgetting where it came from, uses it even with feminine subjects, changing ‘Your sister said’ into the question ‘Is your sister there?’, and in the first person: ‘Did I tell you?’ ‘Nous dison ti?’ ‘Am I wronging you?’ (Maupassant). In novels, this is often written like the adverb y: Isn't that true? | Am I silly! | Are you the gentleman from the Academy who's about to turn a hundred? (Daudet). I’ve spent time on this topic because, besides highlighting the interest of many issues related to word order, it also sheds light on the sometimes surprising paths that languages often take to create new expressions for grammatical categories.
It was mentioned above that the inverted order, Verb-Subject, is used extensively, not only in questions, but also to express wishes and invitations. Here, too, we find in English compromises with the usual order, Subject-Verb. For, apart from such formulas as ‘Long live the King!’ a wish is generally expressed by means of may, which is placed first, while the real verb comes after the subject: ‘May she be happy!’, and instead of the old ‘Go we!’ we have now ‘Let us go!’ with us, the virtual subject, placed before the real verb. When a pronoun is wanted with an imperative, it used to be placed after the verb, as in Shakespeare: ‘Stand thou forth’ and ‘Fear not thou,’ or in the Bible: ‘Turn ye unto him,’ but now the usual order has prevailed: ‘You try!’ ‘You take that seat, and somebody fetch a few more chairs!’ But if the auxiliary do is used, we have the compromise order: ‘Don’t you stir!’
It was mentioned earlier that the inverted order, Verb-Subject, is used a lot, not just in questions, but also to express wishes and invitations. Here, too, we see in English some compromises with the usual order, Subject-Verb. For instance, apart from formulas like ‘Long live the King!’, a wish is usually expressed with may, which is placed first, while the actual verb comes after the subject: ‘May she be happy!’, and instead of the old ‘Go we!’, we now say ‘Let us go!’ with us, the implied subject, placed before the real verb. When a pronoun is needed with an imperative, it used to be placed after the verb, as in Shakespeare: ‘Stand thou forth’ and ‘Fear not thou,’ or in the Bible: ‘Turn ye unto him,’ but now the usual order has taken over: ‘You try!’ ‘You take that seat, and somebody fetch a few more chairs!’ But if the auxiliary do is used, we see the compromise order: ‘Don’t you stir!’
XVIII.—§ 12. Order Beneficial?
I have here selected one point, the place of the subject, to illustrate the growing regularity in word order; but the same tendency is manifested in other fields as well: the place of the object (or of two objects, if we have an indirect besides a direct[360] object), the place of the adjunct adjective, the place of a subordinate adverb, which by coming regularly before a certain case may become a preposition ‘governing’ that case, etc. It cannot be denied that the tendency towards a more regular word order is universal, and in accordance with the general trend of this inquiry we must next ask the question: Is this tendency a beneficial one? Does the more regular word order found in recent stages of our languages constitute a progress in linguistic structure? Or should it be deplored because it hinders freedom of movement?
I have selected one aspect, the position of the subject, to demonstrate the increasing consistency in word order; however, this same trend appears in other areas as well: the position of the object (or two objects, if we have both an indirect and a direct object), the position of the descriptive adjective, the placement of a subordinate adverb, which by regularly coming before a specific case might become a preposition ‘governing’ that case, etc. It can’t be denied that the shift toward a more consistent word order is universal, and following the overall direction of this inquiry, we should next consider the question: Is this shift a positive one? Does the more consistent word order seen in recent stages of our languages represent progress in linguistic structure? Or should it be viewed negatively because it restricts flexibility?
In answering this question we must first of all beware of letting our judgment be run away with by the word ‘freedom.’ Because freedom is desirable elsewhere, it does not follow that it should be the best thing in this domain; just as above we did not allow ourselves to be imposed on by the phrase ‘wealth of forms,’ so here we must be on our guard against the word ‘free’: what if we turned the question in another way: Which is preferable, order or disorder? It may be true that, viewed exclusively from the standpoint of the speaker, freedom would seem to be a great advantage, as it is a restraint to him to be obliged to follow strict rules; but an orderly arrangement is decidedly in the interest of the hearer, as it very considerably facilitates his understanding of what is said; it is therefore, though indirectly, in the interest of the speaker too, because he naturally speaks for the purpose of being understood. Besides, he is soon in his turn to become the hearer: as no one is exclusively hearer or speaker, there can be no real conflict of interest between the two.
In answering this question, we should be careful not to let our judgment be swayed by the word "freedom." Just because freedom is valued in other areas, it doesn't mean it's the best thing in this context; just like we didn't let ourselves be misled by the term "wealth of forms," we need to be cautious of the word "free" here. What if we rephrased the question: Which is better, order or disorder? It may seem that, from the speaker's perspective, freedom is a huge benefit, since having to follow strict rules feels limiting. However, an orderly structure is clearly in the interest of the listener, as it makes it much easier for them to understand what's being said. This, in turn, also benefits the speaker because they naturally want to communicate clearly. Moreover, the speaker will soon become a listener themselves: since no one is solely a listener or a speaker, there can't be a true conflict of interest between the two.
If it be urged in favour of a free word order that we owe a certain regard to the interests of poets, it must be taken into consideration, first, that we cannot all of us be poets, and that a regard to all those of us who resemble Molière’s M. Jourdain in speaking prose without being aware of it is perhaps, after all, more important than a regard for those very few who are in the enviable position of writing readable verse; secondly, that a statistical investigation would, no doubt, give as its result that those poets who make the most extensive use of inversions are not among the greatest of their craft; and, finally, that so many methods are found of neutralizing the restraint of word order, in the shape of particles, passive voice, different constructions of sentences, etc., that no artist in language need despair.
If it's argued in favor of a flexible word order because we should consider the interests of poets, we need to remember, first, that not all of us can be poets, and that considering those of us who, like Molière’s M. Jourdain, speak in prose without realizing it is perhaps more important than focusing on the few who can write enjoyable verse; second, a statistical study would likely show that the poets who rely heavily on inverted word order aren’t typically the most skilled in their field; and finally, there are so many ways to smooth out the constraints of word order, such as using particles, the passive voice, and different sentence structures, that no language artist should feel discouraged.
So far, we have scarcely done more than clear the ground before answering our question. And now we must recognize that there are some rules of word order which cannot be called beneficial in any way; they are like certain rules of etiquette, in so far as one can see no reason for their existence, and yet one is obliged to[361] bow to them. Historians may, in some cases, be able to account for their origin and show that they had a raison d’être at some remote period; but the circumstances that called them into existence then have passed away, and they are now felt to be restraints with no concurrent advantage to reconcile us to their observance. Among rules of this class we may reckon those for placing the French pronouns now before, and now after, the verb, now with the dative and now with the accusative first, ‘elle me le donne | elle le lui donne | donnez-le moi | ne me le donnez pas.’ And, again, the rules for placing the verb, object, etc., in German subordinate clauses otherwise than in main sentences. That the latter rules are defective and are inferior to the English rules, which are the same for the two kinds of sentences, was pointed out before, when we examined Johannson’s German sentences (p. 341), but here we may state that the real, innermost reason for condemning them is their inconsistency: the same rule does not apply in all cases. It seems possible to establish the important principle that the more consistent a rule for word order is, the more useful it is in the economy of speech, not only as facilitating the understanding of what is said, but also as rendering possible certain thoroughgoing changes in linguistic structure.
So far, we have barely scratched the surface in answering our question. We need to acknowledge that some rules of word order aren’t helpful at all; they’re similar to certain etiquette rules—there seems to be no good reason for them, yet we feel compelled to follow them. Historians might sometimes explain how these rules originated and show that they had a purpose at one time, but the situations that created them have long since disappeared, and now they feel like limitations without any benefits that make them worth following. Among these rules are those for placing French pronouns sometimes before and sometimes after the verb, sometimes with the dative and sometimes with the accusative first, like ‘she gives it to me | she gives it to him | give-it to me | don’t give it to me.’ Additionally, there are rules for arranging the verb, object, and so on differently in German subordinate clauses than in main sentences. It has been noted that these rules are flawed and inferior to the English rules, which apply consistently to both types of sentences, as discussed earlier when we looked at Johannson’s German sentences (p. 341). Here, we can say that the fundamental issue with these rules is their inconsistency: the same rule doesn’t apply in all situations. It seems possible to establish an essential principle that the more consistent a rule for word order is, the more useful it is in communication, not only for making understanding easier but also for enabling significant changes in language structure.
XVIII.—§ 13. Word Order and Simplification.
This, then, is the conclusion I arrive at, that as simplification of grammatical structure, abolition of case distinctions, and so forth, always go hand in hand with the development of a fixed word order, this cannot be accidental, but there must exist a relation of cause and effect between the two phenomena. Which, then, is the prius or cause? To my mind undoubtedly the fixed word order, so that the grammatical simplification is the posterius or effect. It is, however, by no means uncommon to find a half-latent conception in people’s minds that the flexional endings were first lost ‘by phonetic decay,’ or ‘through the blind operation of sound laws,’ and that then a fixed word order had to step in to make up for the loss of the previous forms of expression. But if this were true we should have to imagine an intervening period in which the mutual relations of words were indicated in neither way; a period, in fact, in which speech was unintelligible and consequently practically useless. The theory is therefore untenable. It follows that a fixed word order must have come in first: it would come quite gradually as a natural consequence of greater mental development and general maturity, when the speaker’s ideas no longer came into his mind helter-skelter, but in orderly sequence. If before the establishment of some sort of fixed[362] word order any tendency to slur certain final consonants or vowels of grammatical importance had manifested itself, it could not have become universal, as it would have been constantly checked by the necessity that speech should be intelligible, and that therefore those marks which showed the relation of different words should not be obliterated. But when once each word was placed at the exact spot where it properly belonged, then there was no longer anything to forbid the endings being weakened by assimilation, etc., or being finally dropped altogether.
This is the conclusion I've reached: the simplification of grammatical structure and the elimination of case distinctions always coincide with the development of a fixed word order. This can't be a coincidence; there has to be a cause-and-effect relationship between the two. So, which is the cause? In my view, it’s definitely the fixed word order, making grammatical simplification the effect. However, it's not uncommon for people to have a somewhat hidden belief that flexional endings were first lost "due to phonetic decay" or "through the random application of sound laws," and then a fixed word order emerged to compensate for the loss of previous forms of expression. But if this were true, we would have to envision a period where the relationships between words weren't indicated in either manner, meaning speech would be unintelligible and effectively useless. Thus, this theory doesn't hold up. It follows that a fixed word order must have developed first: it would arise gradually as a natural result of increased mental development and maturity, where a speaker's ideas no longer came to mind chaotically but in a logical sequence. If, before a fixed word order was established, there was a tendency to slur certain final consonants or vowels of grammatical importance, this couldn’t have become widespread, as it would constantly be checked by the need for speech to be understandable, meaning that the markers indicating the relationships between different words should not be erased. But once each word was placed exactly where it belonged, there was nothing stopping the endings from being weakened through assimilation, etc., or ultimately being dropped altogether.
To bring out my view I have been obliged in the preceding paragraph to use expressions that should not be taken too literally; I have spoken as if the changes referred to were made ‘in the lump,’ that is, as if the word order was first settled in every respect, and after that the endings began to be dropped. The real facts are, of course, much more complicated, changes of one kind being interwoven with changes of the other in such a way as to render it difficult, if not impossible, in any particular case to discover which was the prius and which the posterius. We are not able to lay our finger on one spot and say: Here final m or n was dropped, because it was now rendered superfluous as a case-sign on account of the accusative being invariably placed after the verb, or for some other such reason. Nevertheless, the essential truth of my hypothesis seems to me unimpeachable. Look at Latin final s. Cicero (Orat. 48. 161) expressly tells us, what is corroborated by a good many inscriptions, that there existed a strong tendency to drop final s; but the tendency did not prevail. The reason seems obvious; take a page of Latin prose and try the effect of striking out all final s’s, and you will find that it will be extremely difficult to determine the meaning of many passages; a consonant playing so important a part in the endings of nouns and verbs could not be left out without loss in a language possessing so much freedom in regard to word position as Latin. Consequently it was kept, but in course of time word position became more and more subject to laws; and when, centuries later, after the splitting up of Latin into the Romanic languages, the tendency to slur over final s knocked once more at the door, it met no longer with the same resistance: final s disappeared, first in Italian and Rumanian, then in French, where it was kept till about the end of the Middle Ages, and it is now beginning to sound a retreat in Spanish; see on Andalusian Fr. Wulff, Un Chapitre de Phonétique Andalouse, 1889.
To express my opinion, I had to use phrases in the previous paragraph that shouldn’t be taken too literally. I suggested that the changes I mentioned were made all at once, as if the word order was completely settled before the endings started being dropped. The real situation is, of course, much more complex, with different types of changes intertwined in such a way that it’s difficult, if not impossible, to pinpoint which came first and which came later. We can't just identify one specific place and say, “Here, the final m or n was dropped because it was no longer needed as a case marker since the accusative always follows the verb,” or for some other reason. Still, the core truth of my argument seems solid. Consider Latin's final s. Cicero (Orat. 48. 161) explicitly tells us, backed up by many inscriptions, that there was a strong tendency to drop the final s, but this tendency didn’t win out. The reason seems clear; take a page of Latin prose and try removing all the final s’s, and you’ll find it extremely hard to understand many parts. A consonant plays such an important role in the endings of nouns and verbs that it couldn’t just be omitted without losing meaning in a language as flexible in word order as Latin. Therefore, it was retained, but over time, word order became more governed by rules. When, centuries later, after Latin evolved into the Romance languages, the tendency to drop final s knocked again at the door, it didn’t face the same opposition: final s disappeared first in Italian and Romanian, then in French, where it lasted until about the end of the Middle Ages, and it is now starting to fade in Spanish; see on Andalusian Fr. Wulff, Un Chapitre de Phonétique Andalouse, 1889.
The main line of development in historical times has, I take it, been the following: first, a period in which words were placed somewhere or other according to the fancy of the moment, but many of them provided with signs that would show their mutual[363] relations; next, a period with retention of these signs, combined with a growing regularity in word order, and at the same time in many connexions a more copious employment of prepositions; then an increasing indistinctness and finally complete dropping of the endings, word order (and prepositions) being now sufficient to indicate the relations at first shown by endings and similar means.
The main line of development throughout history has been, as I see it, the following: first, a time when words were placed randomly based on whim, but many of them included markers that indicated their relationships; next, a time when these markers were retained, along with a growing consistency in word order, and at the same time, a more frequent use of prepositions in many contexts; then, an increasing vagueness and eventually a complete loss of endings, with word order (and prepositions) now being enough to show the relationships that were initially indicated by endings and similar methods.
Viewed in this light, the transition from freedom in word position to greater strictness must be considered a beneficial change, since it has enabled the speakers to do away with more circumstantial and clumsy linguistic means. Schiller says:
Viewed this way, the shift from freedom in word placement to more strict guidelines can be seen as a positive change, as it has allowed speakers to eliminate more complicated and awkward ways of expressing themselves. Schiller says:
(Every other master is known by what he says, but the master of style by what he is wisely silent on.) What style is to the individual, the general laws of language are to the nation, and we must award the palm to that language which makes it possible “to be wisely silent” about things which in other languages have to be expressed in a troublesome way, and which have often to be expressed over and over again (virorum omnium bonorum veterum, ealra godra ealdra manna). Could any linguistic expedient be more worthy of the genus homo sapiens than using for different purposes, with different significations, two sentences like ‘John beats Henry’ and ‘Henry beats John,’ or the four Danish ones, ‘Jens slaar Henrik—Henrik slaar Jens—slaar Jens Henrik?—slaar Henrik Jens?’ (John beats Henry—H. beats J.—does J. beat H.?—does H. beat J.?), or the Chinese use of či in different places (Ch. XIX § 3)? Cannot this be compared with the ingenious Arabic system of numeration, in which 234 means something entirely different from 324, or 423, or 432, and the ideas of “tens” and “hundreds” are elegantly suggested by the order of the characters, not, as in the Roman system, ponderously expressed?
(Every other master is known by what he says, but the master of style is recognized by what he wisely keeps silent about.) What style is to an individual, the general rules of language are to a nation, and we must give credit to the language that allows us to be "wisely silent" about topics that in other languages have to be expressed in a cumbersome way, and that often need to be repeated over and over again (virorum omnium bonorum veterum, ealra godra ealdra manna). Is there any linguistic method more deserving of the genus homo sapiens than using two sentences like ‘John beats Henry’ and ‘Henry beats John’ for different purposes, or the four Danish ones, ‘Jens slaar Henrik—Henrik slaar Jens—slaar Jens Henrik?—slaar Henrik Jens?’ (John beats Henry—H. beats J.—does J. beat H.?—does H. beat J.?), or the Chinese use of či in various positions (Ch. XIX § 3)? Can this not be compared to the clever Arabic system of numeration, where 234 means something completely different from 324, or 423, or 432, and the concepts of “tens” and “hundreds” are elegantly indicated by the arrangement of the characters, instead of, as in the Roman system, being clumsily expressed?
Now, it should not be forgotten that this system, “where more is meant than meets the ear,” is not only more convenient, but also clearer than flexions, as actually found in existing languages, for word order in those languages which utilize it grammatically is used much more consistently than any endings have ever been in the old Aryan languages. It is not true, as Johannson would have us believe, that the dispensing with old flexional endings was too dearly bought, as it brought about increasing possibilities of misunderstandings; for in the evolution of languages the discarding of old flexions goes hand in hand with the development of simpler and more regular expedients that are rather less liable than the old ones to produce misunderstandings. Johannson[364] writes: “In contrast to Jespersen I do not consider that the masterly expression is the one which is ‘wisely silent,’ and consequently leaves the meaning to be partly guessed at, but the one which is able to impart the meaning of the speaker or writer clearly and perfectly”—but here he seems rather wide of the mark. For, just as in reading the arithmetical symbol 234 we are perfectly sure that two hundred and thirty-four is meant, and not three hundred and forty-two, so in reading and hearing ‘The boy hates the girl’ we cannot have the least doubt who hates whom. After all, there is less guesswork in the grammatical understanding of English than of Latin; cf. the examples given above, Ch. XVIII § 4, p. 343.
Now, it shouldn't be overlooked that this system, “where more is meant than meets the ear,” is not only more convenient but also clearer than inflections found in current languages, because word order in those languages that use it grammatically is much more consistent than any endings have ever been in the old Aryan languages. It's not accurate, as Johannson would have us think, that getting rid of old inflectional endings was too costly, as it led to more misunderstandings; in fact, as languages evolve, the elimination of old inflections goes hand in hand with the development of simpler and more regular methods that are actually less likely to cause misunderstandings than the old ones. Johannson[364] writes: “In contrast to Jespersen, I do not believe that masterful expression is the one that is ‘wisely silent,’ and thus leaves the meaning partly to be guessed at, but rather the one that can clearly and perfectly convey the speaker or writer's meaning”—but here he seems to miss the point. Just as when reading the arithmetic symbol 234, we are perfectly sure that it means two hundred and thirty-four and not three hundred and forty-two, in reading and hearing ‘The boy hates the girl,’ we cannot doubt who hates whom. After all, there's less guesswork in understanding English grammar than in Latin; see the examples given above, Ch. XVIII § 4, p. 343.
The tendency towards a fixed word order is therefore a progressive one, directly as well as indirectly. The substitution of word order for flexions means a victory of spiritual over material agencies.
The trend towards a fixed word order is, therefore, a progressive one, both directly and indirectly. Replacing word order for inflections signifies a triumph of the abstract over the tangible.
XVIII.—§ 14. Summary.
We may here sum up the results of our comparison of the main features of the grammatical structures of ancient and modern languages belonging to our family of speech. We have found certain traits common to the old stages and certain others characteristic of recent ones, and have thus been enabled to establish some definite tendencies of development and to find out the general direction of change; and we have shown reasons for the conviction that this development has on the whole and in the main been a beneficial one, thus justifying us in speaking about ‘progress in language.’ The points in which the superiority of the modern languages manifested itself were the following:
We can summarize the results of our comparison of the key features of the grammatical structures of ancient and modern languages in our speech family. We've identified some traits shared by the older stages and others that are typical of more recent ones, allowing us to establish clear development trends and understand the overall direction of change. We've provided reasons to believe that this development has generally been positive, justifying our discussion of 'progress in language.' The areas where the modern languages showed superiority were as follows:
(1) The forms are generally shorter, thus involving less muscular exertion and requiring less time for their enunciation.
(1) The forms are usually shorter, which means they involve less physical effort and take less time to articulate.
(2) There are not so many of them to burden the memory.
(2) There aren't that many to overload the memory.
(3) Their formation is much more regular.
(3) Their formation is way more regular.
(4) Their syntactic use also presents fewer irregularities.
(4) Their grammar use also shows fewer irregularities.
(5) Their more analytic and abstract character facilitates expression by rendering possible a great many combinations and constructions which were formerly impossible or unidiomatic.
(5) Their more analytical and abstract nature makes it easier to express ideas by allowing a wide range of combinations and constructions that were once impossible or awkward.
(6) The clumsy repetitions known under the name of concord have become superfluous.
(6) The awkward repetitions called concord have become unnecessary.
(7) A clear and unambiguous understanding is secured through a regular word order.
(7) A clear and straightforward understanding is achieved through a consistent word order.
These several advantages have not been won all at once, and languages differ very much in the velocity with which they have been moving in the direction indicated; thus High German is in many respects behindhand as compared with Low German;[365] European Dutch as compared with African Dutch; Swedish as compared with Danish; and all of them as compared with English; further, among the Romanic languages we see considerable variations in this respect. What is maintained is chiefly that there is a general tendency for languages to develop along the lines here indicated, and that this development may truly, from the anthropocentric point of view, which is the only justifiable one, be termed a progressive evolution.
These various advantages haven't been gained all at once, and languages differ greatly in how quickly they've been progressing in this direction; for example, High German lags behind Low German in many ways; European Dutch is behind African Dutch; Swedish trails Danish; and all of them are behind English. Additionally, among the Romance languages, we see significant differences in this regard. What's generally accepted is that there is a common trend for languages to evolve in the ways mentioned here, and that this evolution can rightly, from a human-centered perspective—which is the only valid one—be called a progressive evolution.[365]
But is this tendency really general, or even universal, in the world of languages? It will easily be seen that my examples have in the main been taken from comparatively few languages, those with which I myself and presumably most of my readers are most familiar, all of them belonging to the Gothonic and Romanic branches of the Aryan family. Would the same theory hold good with regard to other languages? Without pretending to an intimate knowledge of the history of many languages, I yet dare assert that my conclusions are confirmed by all those languages whose history is accessible to us. Colloquial Irish and Gaelic have in many ways a simpler grammatical structure than the Oldest Irish. Russian has got rid of some of the complications of Old Slavonic, and the same is true, even in a much higher degree, of some of the other Slavonic languages; thus, Bulgarian has greatly simplified its nominal and Serbian its verbal flexions. The grammar of spoken Modern Greek is much less complicated than that of the language of Homer or of Demosthenes. The structure of Modern Persian is nearly as simple as English, though that of Old Persian was highly complicated. In India we witness a constant simplification of grammar from Sanskrit through Prakrit and Pali to the modern languages, Hindi, Hindostani (Urdu), Bengali, etc. Outside the Aryan world we see the same movement: Hebrew is simpler and more regular than Assyrian, and spoken Arabic than the old classical language, Koptic than Old Egyptian. Of most of the other languages we are not in possession of written records from very early times; still, we may affirm that in Turkish there has been an evolution, though rather a slow one, of a similar kind; and, as we shall see in a later chapter, Chinese seems to have moved in the same direction, though the nature of its writing makes the task of penetrating into its history a matter of extreme difficulty. A comparative study of the numerous Bantu languages spoken all over South Africa justifies us in thinking that their evolution has been along the same lines: in some of them the prefixes characterizing various classes of nouns have been reduced in number and in extent (cf. above, § 9). Of one of them we have a grammar two hundred years old, by Brusciotto à Vetralla (re-edited by H. Grattan Guinness, London, 1882). A comparison[366] of his description with the language now spoken in the same region (Mpongwe) shows that the class signs have dwindled down considerably and the number of the classes has been reduced from 16 to 10. In short, though we can only prove it with regard to a minority of the multitudinous languages spoken on the globe, this minority embraces all the languages known to us for so long a period that we can talk of their history, and we may, therefore, confidently maintain that what may be briefly termed the tendency towards grammatical simplification is a universal fact of linguistic history.
But is this trend really common, or even universal, across all languages? It's clear that my examples mostly come from a relatively small number of languages that I and likely most of my readers are familiar with, all of them from the Gothic and Romance branches of the Aryan family. Would the same theory apply to other languages? Without claiming to have in-depth knowledge of many languages' histories, I still assert that my conclusions are supported by all languages whose histories we can access. Colloquial Irish and Gaelic have simpler grammatical structures compared to Old Irish. Russian has simplified some complexities of Old Slavonic, and the same is true, to an even greater extent, for several other Slavic languages; for example, Bulgarian has greatly simplified its noun forms, while Serbian has done so with its verbs. The grammar of spoken Modern Greek is much less complex than that of the language used by Homer or Demosthenes. The structure of Modern Persian is nearly as simple as English, although Old Persian was very complicated. In India, we see a constant simplification of grammar from Sanskrit through Prakrit and Pali to the modern languages like Hindi, Hindostani (Urdu), Bengali, etc. Outside the Aryan languages, we observe the same trend: Hebrew is simpler and more regular than Assyrian, and spoken Arabic is simpler than the old classical language, as is Coptic compared to Old Egyptian. For many other languages, we don't have written records from very early times; however, we can assert that in Turkish there has been a gradual evolution in a similar direction. As we'll see in a later chapter, Chinese seems to have moved this way too, although its writing makes exploring its history extremely challenging. A comparative study of the many Bantu languages spoken throughout South Africa suggests that their evolution has followed similar lines: in some of them, the prefixes that identify different classes of nouns have been reduced in both number and extent (see above, § 9). One Bantu language has a grammar that's two hundred years old, by Brusciotto à Vetralla (later edited by H. Grattan Guinness, London, 1882). Comparing his description with the language now spoken in the same area (Mpongwe) shows that the class signs have decreased significantly, and the number of classes has dropped from 16 to 10. In short, although we can only demonstrate this for a minority of the countless languages spoken worldwide, this minority includes all the languages known to us for a long enough time that we can discuss their history. Therefore, we can confidently assert that the tendency toward grammatical simplification is a universal aspect of linguistic history.
That this simplification is progressive, i.e. beneficial, was overlooked by the older generation of linguistic thinkers, because they saw a kosmos, a beautiful and well-arranged world, in the old languages, and missed in the modern ones several things that they had been accustomed to regard with veneration. To some extent they were right: every language, when studied in the right spirit, presents so many beautiful points in its systematic structure that it may be called a ‘kosmos.’ But it is not in every way a kosmos; like everything human, it presents fine and less fine features, and a comparative valuation, such as the one here attempted, should take both into consideration. There is undoubtedly an exquisite beauty in the old Greek language, and the ancient Hellenes, with their artistic temperament, knew how to turn that beauty to the best account in their literary productions; but there is no less beauty in many modern languages—though its appraisement is a matter of taste, and as such evades scientific inquiry. But the æsthetic point of view is not the decisive one: language is of the utmost importance to the whole practical and spiritual life of mankind, and therefore has to be estimated by such tests as those applied above; if that is done, we cannot be blind to the fact that modern languages as wholes are more practical than ancient ones, and that the latter present so many more anomalies and irregularities than our present-day languages that we may feel inclined, if not to apply to them Shakespeare’s line, “Misshapen chaos of well-seeming forms,” yet to think that the development has been from something nearer chaos to something nearer kosmos.
The fact that this simplification is progressive and beneficial was overlooked by the older generation of language thinkers because they saw a cosmos—a beautiful and well-structured world—in the old languages and missed several elements in modern ones that they had come to regard with reverence. To some extent, they were right: every language, when approached in the right way, showcases numerous beautiful aspects in its systematic structure that can be described as a ‘cosmos.’ However, it's not a cosmos in every sense; like everything human, it has both fine and less appealing features, and a comparative valuation, like the one attempted here, should consider both. There is certainly exquisite beauty in the old Greek language, and the ancient Greeks, with their artistic sensibilities, knew how to best use that beauty in their literary works. But there is also a lot of beauty in many modern languages—though evaluating it is subjective and escapes scientific assessment. However, the aesthetic perspective isn't the deciding factor: language is extremely important to the whole practical and spiritual life of humanity, and therefore must be assessed using the criteria mentioned earlier; if we do that, we can't ignore the fact that modern languages as a whole are more practical than ancient ones, and that the latter have many more anomalies and irregularities than our contemporary languages. This might lead us to think, if not to apply Shakespeare’s phrase, “Misshapen chaos of well-seeming forms,” at least to consider that the progression has moved from something closer to chaos to something more like a cosmos.
CHAPTER XIX
Origin of grammar elements
§ 1. The Old Theory. § 2. Roots. § 3. Structure of Chinese. § 4. History of Chinese. § 5. Recent Investigations. § 6. Roots Again. § 7. The Agglutination Theory. § 8. Coalescence. § 9. Flexional Endings. § 10. Validity of the Theory. § 11. Irregularity Original. § 12. Coalescence Theory dropped. § 13. Secretion. § 14. Extension of Suffixes. § 15. Tainting of Suffixes. § 16. The Classifying Instinct. § 17. Character of Suffixes. § 18. Brugmann’s Theory of Gender. § 19. Final Considerations.
§ 1. The Old Theory. § 2. Roots. § 3. Structure of Chinese. § 4. History of Chinese. § 5. Recent Investigations. § 6. Roots Again. § 7. The Agglutination Theory. § 8. Coalescence. § 9. Flexional Endings. § 10. Validity of the Theory. § 11. Original Irregularity. § 12. Coalescence Theory Discarded. § 13. Secretion. § 14. Extension of Suffixes. § 15. Contamination of Suffixes. § 16. The Classifying Instinct. § 17. Nature of Suffixes. § 18. Brugmann’s Gender Theory. § 19. Final Thoughts.
XIX.—§ 1. The Old Theory.
What has been given in the last two chapters to clear up the problem “Decay or progress?” has been based, as will readily be noticed, exclusively on easily controllable facts of linguistic history. So far, then, it has been very smooth sailing. But now we must venture out into the open sea of prehistoric speculations. Our voyage will be the safer if we never lose sight of land and have a reliable compass tested in known waters.
What we've covered in the last two chapters to tackle the question "Decay or progress?" has been based, as you'll easily see, solely on easily verifiable facts from linguistic history. So far, it's been pretty straightforward. But now we need to venture into the uncharted waters of prehistoric theories. Our journey will be safer if we keep land in view and use a reliable compass that’s been proven in familiar territory.
In our historical survey of linguistic science we have already seen that the prevalent theory concerning the prehistoric development of our speech is this: an originally isolating language, consisting of nothing but formless roots, passed through an agglutinating stage, in which formal elements had been developed, although these and the roots were mutually independent, to the third and highest stage found in flexional languages, in which formal elements penetrated the roots and made inseparable unities with them. We shall now examine the basis of this theory.
In our historical overview of language science, we've already noted that the main theory about how our speech developed before recorded history is this: it started as a purely isolating language, made up only of basic roots without structure, then moved into an agglutinating phase where grammatical elements were created, although these elements and the roots remained separate. Finally, it progressed to the third and most advanced stage found in inflected languages, where grammatical elements integrated with the roots, forming inseparable units. Now, we’ll look into the foundation of this theory.
In the beginning was the root. This is “the result of strict and careful induction from the facts recorded in the dialects of the different members of the family” (Whitney L 260). “The firm foundation of the theory of roots lies in its logical necessity as an inference from the doctrine of the historical growth of grammatical apparatus” (Whitney G 200). “An instrumentality cannot but have had rude and simple beginnings, such as, in language, the so-called roots ... such imperfect hints of expression as we call roots” (Whitney, Views of L. 338). These are really[368] three different statements: induction from the facts, a logical inference from the doctrine about grammatical apparatus (i.e. the usually accepted doctrine, but on what is that built up except on the root theory?), and the a priori argument that an ‘instrumentality’ must have simple beginnings. Even granted that these three arguments given at different times, each of them in turn as the sole argument, must be taken as supplementing each other, the three-legged stool on which the root theory is thus made to sit is a very shaky one, for none of the three legs is very solid, as we shall soon have occasion to see.
In the beginning was the root. This is “the result of strict and careful induction from the facts recorded in the dialects of the different members of the family” (Whitney L 260). “The solid foundation of the theory of roots lies in its logical necessity as an inference from the idea of the historical development of grammatical systems” (Whitney G 200). “An instrument cannot help but have had rough and simple beginnings, such as, in language, the so-called roots ... such imperfect hints of expression as we call roots” (Whitney, Views of L. 338). These are really[368] three different statements: induction from the facts, a logical inference from the theory about grammatical systems (i.e. the commonly accepted idea, but what is that built upon except the root theory?), and the a priori argument that an ‘instrument’ must have simple beginnings. Even if we accept that these three arguments, presented at different times and each used as the sole justification, must be seen as supporting one another, the three-legged stool on which the root theory rests is quite unsteady, as none of the three legs is very solid, as we will soon see.
XIX.—§ 2. Roots.
In the beginning was the root—but what was it like? Bopp took over the conception of root from the Indian grammarians, and like them was convinced that roots were all monosyllabic, and that view was accepted by his followers. These latter at times attributed other phonetic qualities to these roots, e.g. that they always had a short vowel (Curtius C 22). I quote from a very recent treatise (Wood, “Indo-European Root-formation,” Journal of Germ. Philol. 1. 291): “I range myself with those who believe that IE. roots were monosyllabic ... these roots began, for the most part, with a vowel. The vowels certainly were the first utterances,[89] and though we cannot make the beginning of IE. speech coeval with that of human speech, we may at least assume that language, at that time, was in a very primitive state.”
In the beginning was the root—but what was it like? Bopp adopted the idea of the root from Indian grammarians and, like them, believed that all roots were monosyllabic, a viewpoint accepted by his followers. At times, these followers assigned other phonetic qualities to these roots, such as the notion that they always had a short vowel (Curtius C 22). I quote from a very recent study (Wood, “Indo-European Root-formation,” Journal of Germ. Philol. 1. 291): “I align myself with those who believe that IE roots were monosyllabic ... these roots mostly started with a vowel. The vowels were definitely the first sounds, and although we cannot say that the beginning of IE speech coincided with the start of human speech, we can at least assume that language was, at that time, at a very primitive stage.”
The number of these roots was not very great (Curtius, l.c.; Wood 294). This seems a natural enough conclusion when we picture the earliest speech as the most meagre thing possible.
The number of these roots wasn't very large (Curtius, l.c.; Wood 294). This feels like a reasonable conclusion when we imagine the earliest speech as being as sparse as possible.
These few short monosyllabic roots were real words—this is a necessary assumption if we are to imagine a root stage as a real language, and it is often expressly stated; Curtius, for instance, insists that roots are real and independent words (C 22, K 132); cf. also Whitney, who says that the root VAK “had also once an independent status, that it was a word” (L 255). We shall see afterwards that there is another possible conception of what a ‘root’ is; but let us here grant that it is a real word. The question whether a language is possible which contains nothing but such root words was always answered affirmatively by a reference to Chinese—and it will therefore be well here to give a short sketch of the chief structural features of that language.
These few short one-syllable roots were actual words—this is an important assumption if we want to envision a root stage as a genuine language, and it is often clearly stated; for instance, Curtius argues that roots are real and independent words (C 22, K 132); see also Whitney, who mentions that the root VAK “once had an independent status, that it was a word” (L 255). We will later explore another possible interpretation of what a ‘root’ is; but for now, let’s assume it is a real word. The question of whether a language can exist that consists only of such root words has always been answered positively by referencing Chinese—and it’s worthwhile to provide a brief overview of the main structural features of that language here.
XIX.—§ 3. Structure of Chinese.
Each word consists of one syllable, neither more nor less. Each of these monosyllables has one of four or five distinct musical tones (not indicated here). The parts of speech are not distinguished: ta means, according to circumstances, great, much, magnitude, enlarge. Grammatical relations, such as number, person, tense, case, etc., are not expressed by endings and similar expedients; the word in itself is invariable. If a substantive is to be taken as plural, this as a rule must be gathered from the context; and it is only when there is any danger of misunderstanding, or when the notion of plurality is to be emphasized, that separate words are added, e.g. ki ‘some,’ šu ‘number.’ The most important part of Chinese grammar is that dealing with word order: ta kuok means ‘great state(s),’ but kuok ta ‘the state is great,’ or, if placed before some other word which can serve as a verb, ‘the greatness (size) of the state’; tsï niu ‘boys and girls,’ but niu tsï ‘girl (female child),’ etc. Besides words properly so called, or as Chinese grammarians call them ‘full words,’ there are several ‘empty words’ serving for grammatical purposes, often in a wonderfully clever and ingenious way. Thus či has besides other functions that of indicating a genitive relation more distinctly than would be indicated by the mere position of the words; min (people) lik (power) is of itself sufficient to signify ‘the power of the people,’ but the same notion is expressed more explicitly by min či lik. The same expedient is used to indicate different sorts of connexion: if či is placed after the subject of a sentence it makes it a genitive, thereby changing the sentence into a kind of subordinate clause: wang pao min = ‘the king protects the people’; but if you say wang či pao min yeu (is like) fu (father) či pao tsï, the whole may be rendered, by means of the English verbal noun, ‘the king’s protecting the people is like the father’s protecting his child.’ Further, it is possible to change a whole sentence into a genitive; for instance, wang pao min či tao (manner) k’o (can) kien (see, be seen), ‘the manner in which the king protects (the manner of the king’s protecting) his people is to be seen’; and in yet other positions či can be used to join a word-group consisting of a subject and verb, or of verb and object, as an adjunct (attribute) to a noun; we have participles to express the same modification of the idea: wang pao či min ‘the people protected by the king’; pao min či wang ‘a king protecting the people.’ Observe here the ingenious method of distinguishing the active and passive voices by strictly adhering to the natural order and placing the subject before and the object after the verb. If we put i before, and ku after, a single word, it[370] means ‘on account of, because of’ (cf. E. for ...’s sake); if we place a whole sentence between these ‘brackets,’ as we might term them, they are a sort of conjunction, and must be translated ‘because.’[90]
Each word has just one syllable, no more, no less. Each of these single-syllable words carries one of four or five unique musical tones (not shown here). The parts of speech aren’t separated: ta can mean, depending on the context, great, much, size, or enlarge. Grammatical relationships like number, person, tense, and case aren’t indicated through endings or similar methods; the word itself doesn’t change. If a noun needs to be understood as plural, this is usually inferred from the context; it’s only when there might be confusion or when we want to emphasize plurality that additional words are used, e.g., ki meaning ‘some,’ šu meaning ‘number.’ The key aspect of Chinese grammar revolves around word order: ta kuok means ‘great state(s),’ but kuok ta means ‘the state is great,’ or when placed before another word that can act as a verb, it implies ‘the greatness (size) of the state’; tsï niu means ‘boys and girls,’ while niu tsï means ‘girl (female child),’ etc. Besides the words themselves, or what Chinese grammarians refer to as ‘full words,’ there are several ‘empty words’ used for grammatical functions, often in a remarkably clever way. For example, či has other roles, including clearly indicating a genitive relationship more explicitly than mere word order would convey; min (people) lik (power) alone means ‘the power of the people,’ but is expressed more clearly as min či lik. This approach also shows different types of connections: if či follows the subject of a sentence, it makes it genitive, turning the sentence into a type of subordinate clause: wang pao min means ‘the king protects the people’; however, if you say wang či pao min yeu (is like) fu (father) či pao tsï, the whole translates to, using the English verbal noun, ‘the king’s protecting the people is like the father’s protecting his child.’ Additionally, you can turn a whole sentence into a genitive; for example, wang pao min či tao (manner) k’o (can) kien (see, be seen), translates to ‘the manner in which the king protects (the manner of the king’s protecting) his people is to be seen’; and in other positions, či can be used to connect a subject and verb, or verb and object, acting as an adjunct (attribute) to a noun; we have participles to express the same modification of the idea: wang pao či min means ‘the people protected by the king’; pao min či wang means ‘a king protecting the people.’ Note the clever method of distinguishing active and passive voices by strictly following the natural order and placing the subject before the verb and the object afterward. If we put i before and ku after a single word, it means ‘on account of, because of’ (cf. E. for ...’s sake); if we insert a whole sentence between these ‘brackets,’ as we might call them, they act like a conjunction and must be translated as ‘because.’
XIX.—§ 4. History of Chinese.
These few examples will give some faint idea of the Chinese language, and—if the whole older generation of scholars is to be trusted—at the same time of the primeval structure of our own language in the root-stage. But is it absolutely certain that Chinese has retained its structure unchanged from the very first period? By no means. As early as 1861, R. Lepsius, from a comparison of Chinese and Tibetan, had derived the conviction that “the monosyllabic character of Chinese is not original, but is a lapse (!) from an earlier polysyllabic structure.” J. Edkins, while still believing that the structure of Chinese represents “the speech first used in the world’s grey morning” (The Evolution of the Chinese Language, 1888), was one of the foremost to examine the evidence offered by the language itself for the determination of its earlier pronunciation. This, of course, is a much more complicated problem in Chinese than in our alphabetically written languages; for a Chinese character, standing for a complete word, may remain unchanged while the pronunciation is changed indefinitely. But by means of dialectal pronunciations in our own day, of remarks in old Chinese dictionaries, of transcriptions of Sanskrit words made by Chinese Buddhists, of rimes in ancient poetry, of phonetic or partly phonetic elements in the word-characters, etc., it has been possible to demonstrate that Chinese pronunciation has changed considerably, and that the direction of change has been, here as elsewhere, towards shorter and easier word-forms. Above all, consonant groups have been simplified.
These few examples provide a glimpse into the Chinese language and—if we can trust the entire older generation of scholars—at the same time offer insight into the early structure of our own language in its root stage. But is it completely certain that Chinese has maintained its structure unchanged since the very beginning? Absolutely not. As early as 1861, R. Lepsius, through comparing Chinese and Tibetan, was convinced that “the monosyllabic nature of Chinese is not original, but is a shift (!) from an earlier polysyllabic structure.” J. Edkins, while still believing that the structure of Chinese represents “the speech first used in the world’s grey morning” (The Evolution of the Chinese Language, 1888), was one of the first to investigate the evidence provided by the language itself to understand its earlier pronunciation. This, of course, is a much more complex issue in Chinese than in our alphabetically written languages; a Chinese character, representing a complete word, may remain the same while its pronunciation can change indefinitely. However, using modern dialect pronunciations, notes from ancient Chinese dictionaries, transcriptions of Sanskrit words made by Chinese Buddhists, rhymes in ancient poetry, phonetic or partly phonetic elements in the word characters, etc., it has been possible to show that Chinese pronunciation has changed significantly, and that this change has generally moved toward shorter and simpler word forms. Most importantly, consonant clusters have been simplified.
In 1894 I ventured to offer my mite to these investigations by suggesting an explanation of one phenomenon of pronunciation in present-day Chinese. I refer to the change sometimes wrought in the meaning of a word by the adoption of a different tone. Thus wang with one tone is ‘king,’ with another ‘to become king’; lao with one is ‘work,’ with another ‘pay the work’; tsung with one tone means ‘follow,’ with another ‘follower,’ and with a third ‘footsteps’; tshi with one tone is ‘wife,’ with another ‘marry’; haò is ‘good,’ and haó is ‘love.’ Nay, meanings so different as ‘acquire’ and ‘give’ (sheu) or ‘buy’ and ‘sell’ (mai) are only distinguished by the tones. Edkins and V. Henry[371] (Le Muséon, Louvain, 1882, i. 435) have attempted to explain this from gestures; but this is palpably wrong. In the Danish dialect spoken in Sundeved, in southernmost Jutland, two tones are distinguished, one high and one low (see articles by N. Andersen and myself in Dania, vol. iv.). Now, these tones often serve to keep words or forms of words apart that but for the tone, exactly as in Chinese, would be perfect homophones. Thus na with the low tone is ‘fool,’ but with the high tone it is either the plural ‘fools’ or else a verb ‘to cheat, hoax’; ri ‘ride’ is imperative or infinitive according to the tone in which it is uttered; jem in the low tone is ‘home’ and in the high ‘at home’; and so on in a great many words. There is no need, however, in this language to resort to gestures to explain these tonic differences: the low tone is found in words originally monosyllabic (compare standard Danish nar, rid, hjem), and the high tone in words originally dissyllabic (compare Danish narre, ride, hjemme). The tones belonging formerly to two syllables are now condensed on one syllable. Although, of course, Chinese tones cannot in every respect be paralleled with Scandinavian ones, we may provisionally conjecture that the above-mentioned pairs of Chinese words were formerly distinguished by derivative syllables or flexional endings (see below, p. 373) which have now disappeared without leaving any traces behind them except in the tones. This hypothesis is perhaps rendered more probable by what seems to be an established fact—that one of the tones has arisen through the dropping of final stopped consonants (p, t, k).
In 1894, I decided to contribute my small piece to these investigations by proposing an explanation for a pronunciation phenomenon in modern Chinese. I’m referring to how the meaning of a word can change when a different tone is used. For instance, wang with one tone means ‘king,’ while with another it means ‘to become king’; lao can mean ‘work’ with one tone and ‘pay the work’ with another; tsung has one tone that means ‘follow,’ another that means ‘follower,’ and a third that means ‘footsteps’; tshi with one tone is ‘wife,’ and with another it means ‘marry’; haò translates to ‘good,’ while haó means ‘love.’ Furthermore, totally different meanings like ‘acquire’ and ‘give’ (sheu) or ‘buy’ and ‘sell’ (mai) are just distinguished by tones. Edkins and V. Henry[371] (Le Muséon, Louvain, 1882, i. 435) have tried to explain this using gestures, but that’s clearly incorrect. In the Danish dialect spoken in Sundeved, at the southern tip of Jutland, two tones are recognized, one high and one low (see articles by N. Andersen and myself in Dania, vol. iv.). These tones often help differentiate words or forms of words that would otherwise be identical in pronunciation, just like in Chinese. For example, na with a low tone means ‘fool,’ but with a high tone it can refer to the plural ‘fools’ or function as the verb ‘to cheat, hoax’; ri means ‘ride’ and can be the imperative or infinitive depending on the tone used; jem in a low tone means ‘home,’ while in a high tone it means ‘at home’; and this pattern appears across many words. However, in this language, there's no need to use gestures to clarify these tonal differences: the low tone appears in words that were originally monosyllabic (compare standard Danish nar, rid, hjem), and the high tone in words that were originally disyllabic (compare Danish narre, ride, hjemme). The tones that used to belong to two syllables are now compressed into one. While, of course, Chinese tones can’t be completely compared to Scandinavian ones, we might provisionally suggest that the Chinese word pairs mentioned earlier were originally distinguished by derivational syllables or inflectional endings (see below, p. 373) that have now vanished without leaving any traces except in the tones. This theory is possibly supported by what seems to be a fact—that one of the tones developed from the dropping of final stopped consonants (p, t, k).
However this may be, the death-blow was given to the dogma of the primitiveness of Chinese speech by Ernst Kuhn’s lecture Ueber Herkunft und Sprache der Transgangetischen Völker (Munich, 1883). He compares Chinese with the surrounding languages of Tibet, Burmah and Siam, which are certainly related to Chinese and have essentially the same structure; they are isolating, have no flexion, and word order is their chief grammatical instrument. But the laws of word order prove to be different in these several languages, and Kuhn draws the incontrovertible conclusion that it is impossible that any one of these laws of word position should have been the original one; for that would imply that the other nations have changed it without the least reason and at a risk of terrible confusion. The only likely explanation is that these differences are the outcome of a former state of greater freedom. But if the ancestral speech had a free word order, to be at all intelligible it must have been possessed of other grammatical appliances than are now found in the derived tongues; in other words, it must have indicated the relations of words to each other by something like our derivatives or flexions.
Regardless of the circumstances, Ernst Kuhn’s lecture Ueber Herkunft und Sprache der Transgangetischen Völker (Munich, 1883) delivered a major blow to the idea that Chinese speech is primitive. He compares Chinese to the nearby languages of Tibet, Burma, and Siam, which are clearly related to Chinese and share a similar structure; they are isolating, lack inflection, and rely on word order as their main grammatical tool. However, the rules of word order vary across these languages, leading Kuhn to the undeniable conclusion that none of these word order rules could have been the original one; that would suggest that the other nations altered it without any reason and at the risk of significant confusion. The most likely explanation is that these differences stem from an earlier state of greater freedom. But if the ancestral language had a flexible word order, for it to make sense, it must have had other grammatical features that are not present in the descendant languages; in other words, it must have shown the relationships between words using something like our derivatives or inflections.
To the result thus established by Kuhn, that Chinese cannot have had a fixed word order from the beginning, we seem also to be led if we ask the question, Is primitive man likely to have arranged his words in this way? A Chinese sentence, according to Gabelentz (Spr 426), is arranged with the same logical precision as the direction on an English envelope, where the most specific word is placed first, and each subsequent word is like a box comprising all that precedes—only that a Chinaman would reverse the order, beginning with the most general word and then in due order specializing. Now, is it probable that primitive man, that unkempt, savage being, who did not yet deserve the proud generic name of homo sapiens, but would be better termed, if not homo insipiens, at best homo incipiens—is it probable that this urmensch, who was little better than an unmensch, should have been able at once to arrange his words, or, what amounts to the same thing, his thoughts, in such a perfect order? I incline to believe rather that logical, orderly thinking and speaking have only been attained by mankind after a long and troublesome struggle, and that the grammatical expedient of a fixed word order has come to Chinese as to European languages through a gradual development in which other, less logical and more material grammatical appliances have in course of time been given up.
To the conclusion reached by Kuhn, that Chinese couldn’t have had a fixed word order from the beginning, we are also led if we ask, Is it likely that early humans arranged their words this way? A Chinese sentence, according to Gabelentz (Spr 426), is structured with the same logical clarity as an address on an English envelope, where the most specific word comes first, and each following word is like a box containing all that comes before it—except that a Chinese speaker would reverse this order, starting with the most general word and then gradually becoming more specific. Now, is it likely that primitive man, that wild, untamed individual who hadn’t yet earned the esteemed title of homo sapiens and would be better referred to, if not homo insipiens, at best homo incipiens—is it likely that this urmensch, who was barely better than an unmensch, could immediately arrange his words, or, which is the same, his thoughts, in such a perfect order? I tend to believe that logical, orderly thinking and speaking were only achieved by humanity after a long and difficult struggle, and that the grammatical strategy of a fixed word order has developed in Chinese just as it has in European languages through a gradual process in which other, less logical and more tangible grammatical tools have eventually been phased out.
We have thus arrived at a conception of Chinese which is toto cælo removed from the view formerly current. The Chinese language can no longer be adduced in support of the hypothesis that our Aryan languages, or all human languages, started at first as a grammarless speech consisting of monosyllabic root-words.
We have now reached a understanding of Chinese that is completely different from the previous perspective. The Chinese language can no longer be used to support the idea that our Aryan languages, or all human languages, originally began as a grammarless speech made up of monosyllabic root words.
XIX.—§ 5. Recent Investigations.
I have reprinted the above sketch of Chinese, with a few very insignificant verbal changes, as I wrote it about thirty years ago, because I think that the main reasoning is just as valid now as then, and because everything I have since then read about this interesting language has only confirmed the opinion I ventured to express after what was certainly a very insufficient study. Chinese pronunciation, including its tones, may now be studied in two excellent books, dealing with two different dialects—Daniel Jones and Kwing Tong Woo, A Cantonese Phonetic Reader, London, 1912, and Bernhard Karlgren, A Mandarin Phonetic Reader in the Pekinese Dialect, Upsala, Leipzig and Paris, 1917 (Archives d’Études Orientales, vol. 13). Karlgren is also the author of Études sur la Phonologie Chinoise (ib. vol. 15, 1915-19), in which he deals with the history of Chinese sounds and the reconstruction[373] of the old pronunciation in a thoroughly scholarly manner on the basis of an intimate knowledge of spoken and written Chinese, and in Ordet och pennan i mittens rike (Stockholm, 1918), he has given a masterly popular sketch of the structure of the Chinese language and its system of writing.
I have reprinted the above sketch of Chinese, with a few very minor verbal changes, as I wrote it about thirty years ago, because I believe that the main arguments are just as valid now as they were then, and because everything I have read since has only confirmed the opinion I shared after what was definitely a very limited study. Chinese pronunciation, including its tones, can now be examined in two excellent books, focusing on two different dialects—Daniel Jones and Kwing Tong Woo, A Cantonese Phonetic Reader, London, 1912, and Bernhard Karlgren, A Mandarin Phonetic Reader in the Pekinese Dialect, Upsala, Leipzig and Paris, 1917 (Oriental Studies Archives, vol. 13). Karlgren is also the author of Études sur la Phonologie Chinoise (ib. vol. 15, 1915-19), where he discusses the history of Chinese sounds and the reconstruction[373] of the old pronunciation in a thoroughly scholarly way based on a deep understanding of spoken and written Chinese, and in Ordet och pennan i mittens rike (Stockholm, 1918), he provides a brilliant popular overview of the structure of the Chinese language and its writing system.
Of the greatest importance for our purposes is the same scholar’s recent brilliant discovery of a real case distinction in the oldest Chinese. In classical Chinese there are four pronouns of the first person (I, we) which have always been considered as absolutely synonymous. But Karlgren shows that the two of them which occur as the usual forms in Confucius’s conversations are so far from being used indiscriminately that one is nearly always a nominative and the other an objective case; the exceptions are not numerous and are easily explained. The present Mandarin pronunciation of the first is [u], of the second either [uo] or [ŋo]. But if we go back to the sixth century of our era we are able with certainty to say that the pronunciation of the former was [ŋuo], and of the latter [ŋa]. This, then, constitutes a real declension. Now, in the second person Karlgren is also able to point out a distinction of two pronouns, though not quite so clearly marked as in the first person, the objective showing here a greater tendency to encroach on the nominative (Karlgren here ingeniously adduces the parallel from our languages that the first person has retained the suppletive system ego: me, while the second uses the same stem tu: te). The oldest Chinese thus has the following case flexion:
Of major importance for our purposes is the recent brilliant discovery by the same scholar of a real case distinction in the oldest Chinese. In classical Chinese, there are four first-person pronouns (I, we) that have always been considered completely synonymous. However, Karlgren demonstrates that the two pronouns commonly used in Confucius’s conversations are not used interchangeably; one is almost always in the nominative case and the other in the objective case, with only a few exceptions that can be easily explained. The current Mandarin pronunciation for the first is [u], and for the second, it’s either [uo] or [ŋo]. But if we look back to the sixth century of our era, we can confidently say that the pronunciation of the first was [ŋuo], and the second was [ŋa]. This indicates a real declension. Now, in the second person, Karlgren also notes a distinction between two pronouns, although it's not as clearly marked as in the first person; the objective pronoun tends to overlap more with the nominative (Karlgren cleverly provides the parallel from our languages where the first person preserves the suppletive system ego: me, while the second shares the same stem tu: te). The oldest Chinese thus has the following case inflection:
1st Per. | 2nd Per. | |
Nom. | ŋuo | nźiwo |
Obj. | ŋa | nźia |
(See “Le Proto-chinois, langue flexionnelle,” Journal Asiatique, 1920, 205 ff.).[91]
(See “Proto-Chinese, inflected language,” Journal Asiatique, 1920, 205 ff.).[91]
XIX.—§ 6. Roots Again.
To return to roots. The influence of Indian grammar on European linguists with regard to the theory of roots extended also to the meanings assigned to roots, which were all of them[374] of verbal character, and nearly always highly general or abstract, such as ‘breathe, move, be sharp or quick, blow, go,’ etc. The impossibility of imagining anybody expressing himself by means of a language consisting exclusively of such abstracts embarrassed people much less than one would expect: Chinese, of course, has plenty of words for concrete objects.
To return to roots. The impact of Indian grammar on European linguists regarding the theory of roots also extended to the meanings assigned to those roots, which were all verbal in nature and almost always very general or abstract, like ‘breathe, move, be sharp or quick, blow, go,’ etc. The difficulty of imagining anyone speaking a language made up solely of such abstracts worried people far less than you might think: Chinese, of course, has plenty of words for concrete objects.[374]
The usual assumption was that there was one definite root period in which all the roots were created, and after which this form of activity ceased. But Whitney demurred to this (M 36), saying that E. preach and cost may be considered new roots, though ultimately coming from Lat. præ-dicare and con-stare: these old compounds are felt as units, “reducing to the semblance of roots elements that are really derivative or compound.” As Whitney goes no further than to establish the semblance of new roots, he might be taken as an adherent rather than as an opponent of the theory he objects to. But, as a matter of fact, new words are created in modern languages, and if they form the basis of derived words, we may really speak of new roots (pun—punning, punster; fun—funny; etc.). Why not say that we have a French root roul in rouler, roulement, roulage, roulier, rouleau, roulette, roulis? This only becomes unjustifiable if we think that the establishment of this root gives us the ultimate explanation of these words; for then the linguistic historian steps in with the objection that the words have been formed, not from a root, but from a real word, which is not even in itself a primary word, but a derivative, Lat. rotula, a diminutive of rota ‘wheel.’ (I take this example from Bréal M 407). To the popular instinct sorrow and sorry are undoubtedly related to one another, and we may say that they contain a root sorr-; but a thousand years ago they had nothing to do with one another, and belonged to different roots: OE. sorg ‘care’ and sārig ‘wounded, afflicted.’ If all traces of Latin and Greek were lost, a linguist would have no more scruples about connecting scene with see than most illiterate Englishmen have now. Who will vouch that many Aryan roots may not have originated at various times through similar processes as these new roots preach, cost, roul, sorr, see?
The common belief was that there was a specific period when all the roots were formed, after which this type of activity stopped. However, Whitney disagreed with this (M 36), arguing that E. preach and cost could be seen as new roots, even though they ultimately come from Lat. præ-dicare and con-stare. These old compounds are perceived as units, “reducing to the appearance of roots elements that are actually derivative or compound.” Since Whitney only goes as far as to establish the appearance of new roots, he could be seen as supporting rather than opposing the theory he's critiquing. However, the fact is that new words are created in modern languages, and if they serve as the foundation for derived words, we can really refer to them as new roots (pun—punning, punster; fun—funny; etc.). Why shouldn't we say there's a French root roul in rouler, roulement, roulage, roulier, rouleau, roulette, roulis? This only becomes unreasonable if we assume that identifying this root gives us the ultimate explanation for these words; because then the linguistic historian would argue that the words were formed, not from a root, but from a real word, which isn't even a primary word, but a derivative, Lat. rotula, a diminutive of rota ‘wheel.’ (I take this example from Bréal M 407). To popular intuition, sorrow and sorry are clearly related, and we could say they share a root sorr-; but a thousand years ago, they had nothing to do with each other and came from different roots: OE. sorg ‘care’ and sārig ‘wounded, afflicted.’ If all traces of Latin and Greek were wiped out, a linguist wouldn’t hesitate to connect scene with see any more than many illiterate English speakers do now. Who can guarantee that many Aryan roots didn’t originate at different times through similar processes as these new roots preach, cost, roul, sorr, see?
The proper definition of a root seems to be: what is common to a certain number of words felt by the popular instinct of the speakers as etymologically belonging together. In this sense we may of course speak of roots at any stage of any language, and not only at a hypothetical initial stage. In some cases these roots may be used as separate words (E. preach, fun, etc., Fr. roul = what is spelt roule, roules, roulent); in other cases this is impossible (Lat. am in amo, amor, amicus; E. sorr); in many cases because the common element cannot, for phonetic reasons,[375] be easily pronounced, as when E. drink, drank, drunk or sit, sat, seat, set are naturally felt to belong together, though it is impossible to state the root except in some formula like dr.nk, s.t, where the dot stands for some vowel. Similar considerations may be adduced with regard to the consonants if we want to establish what is felt to be common in give and gift (gi + labiodental spirant) or in speak and speech, etc.; but this need not detain us here.
The proper definition of a root seems to be: what is common to a certain number of words recognized by the general instinct of speakers as etymologically related. In this sense, we can talk about roots at any stage of any language, not just a hypothetical initial stage. In some cases, these roots may be used as separate words (E. preach, fun, etc., Fr. roul = what's spelled roule, roules, roulent); in other cases, this is not possible (Lat. am in amo, amor, amicus; E. sorr); in many cases, the common element cannot be easily pronounced for phonetic reasons,[375] as when E. drink, drank, drunk or sit, sat, seat, set are naturally recognized as belonging together, even though it’s impossible to state the root except in some formula like dr.nk, s.t, where the dot represents some vowel. Similar points can be made about the consonants if we want to identify what is seen as common in give and gift (gi + labiodental spirant) or in speak and speech, etc.; but we don’t need to focus on that here.
In my view, then, the root is something real and important, though not always tangible. And as its form is not always easy to state or pronounce, so must its meaning, as a rule, be somewhat vague and indeterminate, for what is common to several ideas must of course be more general and abstract than either of the more special ideas thus connected; it is also natural that it will often be necessary to state the signification of a root in terms of verbal ideas, for these are more general and abstract than nominal ideas. But roots thus conceived belong to any and all periods, and we must cease to speak of the earliest period of human speech as ‘the root period.’
In my opinion, the root is something real and significant, even if it's not always something you can touch. Just as its form isn't always easy to define or say, its meaning is often vague and unclear because what's shared among several ideas has to be more general and abstract than any of the specific ideas it connects. It's also natural that we often need to define a root in terms of verbal concepts, since those are more general and abstract than nominal concepts. However, roots understood this way apply to any and all times, and we should stop referring to the earliest stage of human language as 'the root period.'
XIX.—§ 7. The Agglutination Theory.
According to the received theory (see above, § 1) some of the roots became gradually attached to other roots and lost their independence, so as to become finally formatives fused with the root. This theory, generally called the agglutination theory, contains a good deal of truth; but we can only accept it with three important provisos, namely, first, that there has never been one definite period in which those languages which are now flexional were wholly agglutinative, the process of fusion being liable to occur at any time; second, that the component parts which become formatives are not at first roots, but real words; and third, that this process is not the only one by which formatives may develop: it may be called the rectilinear process, but by the side of that we have also more circuitous courses, which are no less important in the life of languages for being less obvious.
According to the accepted theory (see above, § 1), some of the roots gradually merged with other roots and lost their independence, eventually becoming part of the fused root. This theory, commonly known as the agglutination theory, holds some truth; however, we can only accept it with three important conditions: first, there has never been a specific time when languages that are now inflectional were completely agglutinative, as the process of fusion can happen at any point; second, the components that become formative are initially not roots, but actual words; and third, this process is not the only way in which formatives can develop: while we can refer to it as the direct process, there are also more indirect paths that are equally significant in the evolution of languages, even if they are less apparent.
In the process of coalescence or integration there are many possible stages, which may be denominated figuratively by such expressions as that two words are placed together (that is—in non-figurative language—pronounced after one another), tied together, knit together, glued together (‘agglutinated’), soldered together, welded together, fused together or amalgamated. What is really the most important part of the process is the degree in which one of the components loses its independence, phonetically and semantically.
In the process of merging or integrating, there are many possible stages, which can be described figuratively using phrases like two words are placed together (which means—in plain language—spoken consecutively), tied together, knit together, glued together (or ‘agglutinated’), soldered together, welded together, fused together, or amalgamated. The most crucial aspect of this process is how much one of the components loses its independence, both in terms of sound and meaning.
As ‘agglutination’ is thus only one intermediate stage in a continuous process, it would be better to have another name for the whole theory of the origin of formatives than ‘the agglutination theory,’ and I propose therefore to use the term ‘coalescence theory.’ The usual name also fixes the attention too exclusively on the so-called agglutinative languages, and if we take the formatives of such a language as Turkish, as in sev-mek ‘to love,’ sev-il-mek ‘to be loved,’ sev-dir-mek ‘to cause to love,’ sev-dir-il-mek ‘to be made to love,’ sev-ish-mek ‘to love one another,’ sev-ish-dir-il-mek ‘to be made to love one another’—who will vouch that these formatives were all of them originally independent words? Those who are most competent to have an opinion on the matter seem nowadays inclined to doubt it and to reject much of what was current in the description of these languages given by the earlier scholars; see, especially, the interesting final chapter of V. Grønbech, Forstudier til tyrkisk lydhistorie (København, 1902).
Since ‘agglutination’ is just one step in an ongoing process, it would make more sense to have a different name for the entire theory of how formatives originated than ‘the agglutination theory,’ so I suggest using the term ‘coalescence theory.’ The usual name also focuses too much on the so-called agglutinative languages. If we look at the formatives in a language like Turkish, such as sev-mek ‘to love,’ sev-il-mek ‘to be loved,’ sev-dir-mek ‘to cause to love,’ sev-dir-il-mek ‘to be made to love,’ sev-ish-mek ‘to love one another,’ sev-ish-dir-il-mek ‘to be made to love one another’—who can guarantee that these formatives were all originally standalone words? The experts most qualified to weigh in on this issue seem to lean towards skepticism and reject much of what earlier scholars described about these languages; see especially the fascinating final chapter of V. Grønbech, Forstudier til tyrkisk lydhistorie (Copenhagen, 1902).
XIX.—§ 8. Coalescence.
The various degrees of coalescence, and the coexistence at the same linguistic period of these various degrees, may be illustrated by the old example, English un-tru-th-ful-ly, and by German un-be-stimm-bar-keit. Let us look a little at each of these formatives. The only one that can still be used as an independent word is ful(l). From the collocation in ‘I have my hand full of peas’ the transition is easy to ‘a handful of peas,’ where the accentual subordination of full to hand paves the way for the combination becoming one word instead of two: this is not accomplished till it becomes possible to put the plural sign at the end (handfuls, thus also basketfuls and others), while in less familiar combinations the s is still placed in the middle (bucketsful, two donkeysful of children, see MEG ii. 2. 42). In these substantives -ful keeps its full vowel [u]. But in adjectival compounds, such as peaceful, awful, there is a colloquial pronunciation with obscured or omitted vowel [-fəl, -fl], in which the phonetic connexion with the full word is thus weakened; the semantic connexion, too, is loosened when it becomes possible to form such words as dreadful, bashful, in which it is not possible to use the definition ‘full of ...’ Here, then, the transition from a word to a derivative suffix is complete.
The different levels of merging and their coexistence during the same linguistic period can be illustrated by the classic examples, English un-tru-th-ful-ly and German un-be-stimm-bar-keit. Let’s take a closer look at each of these components. The only one that still works as an independent word is ful(l). From the phrase ‘I have my hand full of peas,’ it's easy to shift to ‘a handful of peas,’ where the emphasis on full as subordinate to hand allows the combination to evolve into one word instead of two. This change isn’t complete until we can attach the plural marker at the end (handfuls, and similarly basketfuls and others). In less familiar combinations, the s is still inserted in the middle (bucketsful, two donkeysful of children, see MEG ii. 2. 42). In these nouns, -ful retains its full vowel sound [u]. However, in adjective compounds like peaceful and awful, there’s a casual pronunciation where the vowel is weakened or dropped [-fəl, -fl], which diminishes the phonetic connection to the full word. The semantic link also weakens when we can create words like dreadful and bashful, where we can’t define them as ‘full of ...’. Thus, the shift from a word to a derivative suffix is fully realized.
English -hood, -head in childhood, maidenhead also is originally an independent word, found in OE. and ME. in the form had, meaning ‘state, condition,’ Gothic haidus. In German it has two forms, -heit, as in freiheit, and -keit, whose k was at first the final sound of the adjective in ewigkeit, MHG. ewecheit, but was later felt as part[377] of the suffix and then transferred to cases in which the stem had no k, as in tapferkeit, ehrbarkeit.
English -hood, -head in childhood, maidenhead is originally an independent word, found in Old English and Middle English as had, meaning ‘state, condition,’ similar to the Gothic haidus. In German, it has two forms: -heit, as in freiheit, and -keit, where the k was initially the final sound of the adjective in ewigkeit, Middle High German ewecheit, but was later perceived as part of the suffix and then applied to cases where the stem had no k, as in tapferkeit, ehrbarkeit.
The suffix -ly is from lik, which was a substantive meaning ‘form, appearance, body’ (‘a dead body’ in Dan. lig, E. lich in lichgate); manlik thus is ‘having the form or appearance of a man’; the adjective like originally was ge-lic ‘having the same appearance with’ (as in Lat. con-form-is). In compounds -lik was shortened into -ly: in some cases we still have competing forms like gentlemanlike and gentlemanly. The ending was, and is still, used extensively in adjectives; if it is now also used to turn adjectives into adverbs, as in truthful-ly, luxurious-ly, this is a consequence of the two OE. forms, adj. -lic and adv. -lice, having phonetically fallen together.
The suffix -ly comes from lik, which meant ‘form, appearance, body’ (like ‘a dead body’ in Danish lig, and English lich in lichgate); manlik therefore means ‘having the form or appearance of a man’; the adjective like originally was ge-lic, meaning ‘having the same appearance as’ (similar to Latin con-form-is). In compounds, -lik was shortened to -ly: in some cases we still see both forms, like gentlemanlike and gentlemanly. The suffix was, and still is, widely used in adjectives; now it’s also commonly used to convert adjectives into adverbs, as in truthful-ly, luxurious-ly, which is a result of the two Old English forms, adjective -lic and adverb -lice, merging phonetically.
It may perhaps be doubtful whether the G. suffix -bar (OHG. -bari, OE. bære) was ever really an independent word, but its connexion with the verb beran, E. bear, cannot be doubted: fruchtbar is what bears fruit (cf. OE. æppelbære ‘bearing apples’), but the connexion was later loosened, and such adjectives as ehrbar, kostbar, offenbar have little or nothing left of the original meaning of the suffix. The two prefixes in our examples, un- and be-, are differentiated forms of the old negative ne and the preposition by, and the only affix in our two long words which is thus left unexplained is -th, which makes true into truth and is found also in length, health, etc.
It might be questionable whether the G. suffix -bar (OHG. -bari, OE. bære) was ever truly an independent word, but its connection to the verb beran, E. bear, is undeniable: fruchtbar means what bears fruit (see OE. æppelbære ‘bearing apples’), but the connection was later weakened, and adjectives like ehrbar, kostbar, offenbar have little or no remnants of the original meaning of the suffix. The two prefixes in our examples, un- and be-, are different forms of the old negative ne and the preposition by, and the only affix in our two long words that remains unexplained is -th, which turns true into truth and is also found in length, health, etc.
XIX.—§ 9. Flexional Endings.
There can be no doubt, therefore, that some at any rate of our suffixes and prefixes go back to independent words which have been more or less weakened to become derivative formatives. But does the same hold good with those endings which we are accustomed to term flexional endings? The answer certainly must be in the affirmative with regard to some endings.
There’s no doubt that some of our suffixes and prefixes originate from independent words that have been somewhat weakened to become derivative forms. But does the same apply to the endings we usually call flexional endings? The answer is definitely yes regarding some endings.
Thus the Scandinavian passive originates in a coalescence of the active verb and the pronoun sik: Old Norse (þeir) finna sik (‘they find themselves’ or ‘each other’), gradually becomes one word (þeir) finnask, later finnast, finnaz, Swedish (de) finnas, Dan. (de) findes ‘they are found.’ In Old Icelandic the pronoun is still to some extent felt as such, though formally an indistinguishable part of the verb; thus combinations like the following are very frequent: Bolli kvaz þessu ráða vilja = kvað sik vilja; “Bolli dixit se velle: B. said that he would have his own way” (Laxd. 55). In Danish a distinction can sometimes be made between a reflexive and a purely passive employment: de slås with a short vowel is ‘they fight (one another),’ but with a long vowel ‘they are beaten.’[378] A similar coalescence is taking place in Russian, where sja ‘himself’ (myself, etc.) dwindles down to a suffixed s: kazalos ‘it showed itself, turned out.’
Thus, the Scandinavian passive comes from the merging of the active verb and the pronoun sik: Old Norse (þeir) finna sik (‘they find themselves’ or ‘each other’) gradually becomes one word (þeir) finnask, later finnast, finnaz, Swedish (de) finnas, Dan. (de) findes ‘they are found.’ In Old Icelandic, the pronoun is still somewhat recognized, even though it’s formally an indistinguishable part of the verb; thus, combinations like the following are very common: Bolli kvaz þessu ráða vilja = kvað sik vilja; “Bolli said he wants: B. said that he would have his own way” (Laxd. 55). In Danish, a difference can sometimes be made between a reflexive and a purely passive use: de slås with a short vowel means ‘they fight (one another),’ but with a long vowel, it means ‘they are beaten.’[378] A similar merging is happening in Russian, where sja ‘himself’ (myself, etc.) shortens to a suffixed s: kazalos ‘it showed itself, turned out.’
A similar case is the Romanic future: It. finiro, Sp. finire, Fr. finirai, from finire habeo (finir ho, etc.), originally ‘I have to finish.’ Before the coalescence was complete, it was possible to insert a pronoun, Old Sp. cantar-te-hé ‘I shall sing to you.’
A similar example is the Romance future: It. finiro, Sp. finire, Fr. finirai, from finire habeo (finir ho, etc.), which originally meant ‘I have to finish.’ Before the combination was fully formed, it was possible to insert a pronoun, Old Sp. cantar-te-hé ‘I will sing to you.’
A third case in point is the suffixed definite article, if we are allowed to consider that as a kind of flexion: Old Norse mannenn (manninn) accusative ‘the man,’ landet (landit) ‘the land’; Dan. manden, landet, from mann, land + the demonstrative pronoun enn, neuter et. Rumanian domnul ‘the lord,’ from Lat. dominu(m) illu(m), is another example.
A third example is the suffixed definite article, if we consider that a type of inflection: Old Norse mannenn (manninn) accusative ‘the man,’ landet (landit) ‘the land’; Danish manden, landet, from mann, land + the demonstrative pronoun enn, neuter et. Romanian domnul ‘the lord,’ from Latin dominu(m) illu(m), is another example.
XIX.—§ 10. Validity of the Theory.
Now, does this kind of explanation admit of universal application—in other words, were all our derivative affixes and flexional endings originally independent words before they were ‘glued’ to or fused with the main word? This has been the prevalent, one might almost say the orthodox, view of all the leading linguists, who may be mustered in formidable array in defence of the agglutination theory.[92]
Now, does this kind of explanation apply universally—in other words, were all our derivative suffixes and grammatical endings originally independent words before they were 'stuck' to or fused with the main word? This has been the common, you might say the traditional, view of all the leading linguists, who can be assembled in a strong defense of the agglutination theory.[92]
Against the universality of this origin for formatives I adduced in my former work (1894, p. 66 f., cf. Kasus, 1891, p. 36) four reasons, which I shall here restate in a different order and in a fuller form.
Against the universal origin of these formatives, I presented four reasons in my previous work (1894, p. 66 f., see Kasus, 1891, p. 36). I will now restate them in a different order and with more detail.
(1) Nothing can be proved with regard to the ultimate genesis of flexion in general from the adduced examples, for in all of them the elements were already fully flexional before the coalescence (cf. ON. finnask, fannsk; It. finirò, finirai, finira; ON. maðrenn, mannenn, mansens, etc.). What they show, then, is really nothing but the growth of new flexional formations on an old flexional soil, and it might be imagined that the fusion would not have taken place, or not so completely, if the minds of the speakers had not been already prepared to accept formations of this character. I do not, however, attach much importance to this argument, and turn to those that are more cogent.
(1) Nothing can be proven about the ultimate origin of flexion in general based on the examples provided, since in all of them the elements were already fully flexional before they came together (cf. ON. finnask, fannsk; It. finirò, finirai, finira; ON. maðrenn, mannenn, mansens, etc.). What these examples illustrate is really just the development of new flexional forms on an existing flexional foundation, and one might think that the merging wouldn't have happened, or not so thoroughly, if the speakers hadn't been already ready to accept forms like these. However, I don't consider this argument particularly significant and will focus on those that are more convincing.
(2) The number of actual forms proved beyond a doubt to[379] have originated through coalescence is comparatively small. It is true that not a few derivative syllables were originally independent; still, if we compare them with the number of those for which no such origin has been proved or even proposed, we find that the proportion is very small indeed. In the list of English suffixes enumerated in Sweet’s Grammar, only eleven can be traced back to independent words, while 74 are not thus explicable. Anyone going through the countless suffixes enumerated in the second volume of Brugmann’s Vergleichende Grammatik will, I think, be struck with the impossibility of any great number of them being traced back to words in the same way as hood, etc., above: their forms and, still more, their vague spheres of meaning, and on the whole their manner of application, distinctly speak against such an origin.
(2) The number of actual forms that have definitely come from blending is relatively small. While it’s true that quite a few derived syllables were once independent, when we compare them to the number of those whose origins have neither been proven nor even suggested, we see that the proportion is indeed very small. In the list of English suffixes outlined in Sweet’s Grammar, only eleven can be traced back to independent words, whereas 74 cannot be explained in the same way. Anyone reviewing the numerous suffixes listed in the second volume of Brugmann’s Vergleichende Grammatik will likely notice the difficulty in tracing a significant number of them back to words in the same way as hood and others mentioned above: their forms, and especially their somewhat nebulous meanings and general usage, clearly argue against such a source.
As to real flexional endings traceable to words, their number is even comparatively smaller than that of derivative suffixes; the three or four instances named above are everywhere appealed to, but are there so many more than these? And are they numerous enough to justify so general an assertion? My impression is that the basis for the induction is very far from sufficient.
As for real flexional endings that can be traced to words, there are even fewer of them compared to derivative suffixes; the three or four examples mentioned above are frequently referenced, but are there really many more than these? And are they numerous enough to support such a broad statement? My feeling is that the foundation for this conclusion is quite inadequate.
(3) This argument is strengthened when we are able to point out instances in which, as a matter of fact, flexional endings have arisen in a way that is totally opposed to the agglutinative, which then must renounce all claims to be the only possible way for a language to arrive at flexional formatives. See below (§ 13) on Secretion.
(3) This argument gets stronger when we can highlight examples where, in reality, flexional endings have developed in a way that is completely different from the agglutinative, which must then give up any claims to being the only method for a language to create flexional forms. See below (§ 13) on Secretion.
(4) Assuming the theory to be true, we should expect much greater regularity, both in formal (morphological) and in semantic (syntactic) respect than we actually find in the old Aryan languages; for if one definite element was added to signify one definite modification of the idea, we see no reason why it should not have been added to all words in the same way. As a matter of fact, the Romanic future, the Scandinavian passive voice and definite article present much greater regularity than is found in the flexion of nouns and verbs in old Aryan.
(4) If we assume the theory is correct, we should expect much more consistency, both in formal (morphological) and in semantic (syntactic) aspects than we actually see in the old Aryan languages. If one specific element was added to indicate one specific modification of the idea, there's no reason it shouldn't have been added to all words in the same way. In reality, the Romances' future tense, the Scandinavian passive voice, and the definite article show much greater regularity than what's seen in the inflection of nouns and verbs in the old Aryan languages.
XIX.—§ 11. Irregularity Original.
It will be objected that the irregularity which we find in these old languages is of later growth, and that, in fact, flexion, as Schuchardt says, is “anomal gewordene agglutination.” Whitney said that “each suffix has its distinct meaning and office, and is applied in a whole class of analogous words” (L. 254), and in reading Schleicher’s Compendium one gains the impression that the old Aryan sounds and forms were like a regiment of well-trained soldiers[380] marching along in the best military style, while all irregularities were the result of later decay in each language separately. But the trend of the whole scientific development of the last fifty years has been in the direction of demonstrating more and more irregularity in the original forms: where formerly only one ending was assumed for the same case, etc., now several are assumed. (See, e.g., Walde in Streitberg’s Gesch., 2. 194, Thumb, ib. 2. 69.) And as with the forms, so also with the meanings and applications of the forms. Madvig as early as 1857 (p. 27. Kl 202) had seen that the signification of the grammatical forms must originally have been extremely vague and fluctuating, but most scholars went on imagining that each case, each tense, each mood had originally stood for something quite settled and definite, until gradually the progress of linguistics made away with that conception point by point. In place of the belief that the original Aryan verb had a definite system of tense forms, it is now generally assumed that different ‘aspects’ (‘aktionsarten’), somewhat like those of Slav verbs, were indicated, and that the notion of ‘time’ differences was only afterwards developed out of the notion of aspect: but if we compare the divisions and definitions of these aspects given by various scholars, we see how essentially vague this notion is; instead of being a model system of nice logical distinctions, the original condition must rather have been one in which such notions as duration, completion, result, beginning, repetition were indistinctly found as germs, from which such ideas as perfect and imperfect, past and present, were finally evolved with greater and greater clearness.
It might be argued that the irregularities we see in these old languages developed later, and that, as Schuchardt puts it, inflection is “anomalous agglutination.” Whitney noted that “each suffix has its distinct meaning and role and is applied in a whole class of similar words” (L. 254). Reading Schleicher’s Compendium gives the impression that the old Aryan sounds and forms were like a well-trained regiment of soldiers marching in perfect military style, suggesting that all irregularities were due to later decline in each language individually. However, the overall trend in scientific development over the past fifty years has been towards revealing more irregularities in the original forms: where only one ending was once assumed for the same case, etc., now several are considered. (See, e.g., Walde in Streitberg’s Gesch., 2. 194, Thumb, ib. 2. 69.) Similarly, the meanings and applications of these forms have also been seen as irregular. Madvig recognized as early as 1857 (p. 27. Kl 202) that the meanings of grammatical forms must have originally been quite vague and variable, but for a long time most scholars believed that each case, tense, and mood corresponded to something clear and definite, until gradually the progress of linguistics dismantled that view piece by piece. Instead of believing that the original Aryan verb had a definite system of tense forms, it is now generally thought that different ‘aspects’ (‘action types’), somewhat similar to those of Slavic verbs, were indicated, and that the concept of ‘time’ differences developed later from the notion of aspect. Yet, when we compare the different categorizations and definitions of these aspects offered by various scholars, we see how fundamentally vague this concept is; rather than a model system of clear logical distinctions, the original state must have involved indistinct notions of duration, completion, result, beginning, and repetition, from which more refined ideas like perfect and imperfect, past and present eventually emerged with increasing clarity.
Similar remarks apply to moods. All attempts at finding out, deductively or inductively, the fundamental notion (grundbegriff) attached to such a mood as the subjunctive have failed: it is impossible to establish one original, sharply circumscribed sphere of usage, from which all the various, partly conflicting, usages in the actually existing languages can be derived. The usual theory is that there existed one true subjunctive, characterized by long thematic vowels -ē-, -ā-, -ō-, and distinct from that an optative, characterized by a formative -iē-: -ī-,[93] and that these two were fused in Latin. But, as Oertel and Morris have shown in their valuable article “An Examination of the Theories regarding the Nature and Origin of Indo-European Inflection” (Harvard Studies in Classical Philol. XVI, 1905) it is probably safer to assume for the Indo-European period substantial identity of meaning[381] in the modal formatives iē: ī and the long thematic vowels -ē-, -ā-, -ō-, which were then continued undifferentiated in Latin, while on the one hand the Germanic branch has practically discarded the forms with long thematic vowel and confined itself to the i suffix, and on the other hand two branches, Greek and Indo-Iranic, have availed themselves of the formal difference and separated a ‘subjunctive’ and an ‘optative’ mood.
Similar comments apply to moods. All attempts to determine, whether deductively or inductively, the fundamental concept (basic concept) associated with a mood like the subjunctive have not succeeded: it's impossible to define one original, clearly defined area of usage from which all the various, sometimes conflicting, usages in the currently existing languages can be derived. The common theory suggests that there was one true subjunctive, marked by long thematic vowels -ē-, -ā-, -ō-, distinct from an optative marked by a formative -iē-: -ī-,[93] and that these two merged in Latin. However, as Oertel and Morris have demonstrated in their important article “An Examination of the Theories regarding the Nature and Origin of Indo-European Inflection” (Harvard Studies in Classical Philol. XVI, 1905), it is likely safer to assume that during the Indo-European period there was a substantial identity of meaning[381] in the modal forms iē: ī and the long thematic vowels -ē-, -ā-, -ō-, which continued undifferentiated in Latin. Meanwhile, the Germanic branch has largely eliminated the forms with long thematic vowels and limited itself to the i suffix, while the Greek and Indo-Iranic branches have utilized the formal difference to distinguish a ‘subjunctive’ and an ‘optative’ mood.
XIX.—§ 12. Coalescence Theory dropped.
In the historical part I have already mentioned some instances of coalescence explanations of Aryan forms which have been abandoned by most scholars, such as the theory that the r of the Latin passive is a disguised se, which would agree very well with the Scandinavian passive, but falls to the ground when one remembers that corresponding forms are found in Keltic, where the transition from s to r is otherwise unknown: these forms are now believed to be related to some r forms found in Sanskrit, but there not possessed of any passive signification, this latter being thus a comparatively late acquisition of Keltic and Italic: these two branches turning an existing, non-meaning consonant to excellent use in their flexional system and generalizing it in the new application.[94]
In the historical section, I’ve already pointed out some cases of combined explanations for Aryan forms that most scholars have discarded, like the idea that the r in Latin passive verbs is a disguised se. This might seem to align with the Scandinavian passive, but it falls apart when we consider that similar forms exist in Celtic, where the shift from s to r isn't otherwise known. These forms are now thought to be connected to some r forms in Sanskrit, which don’t carry any passive meaning. This passive meaning is believed to have developed later in Celtic and Italic, as these two branches adapted a consonant that didn't have a specific meaning and effectively used it in their inflectional systems, making it a standard part of their new usage.[94]
The explanation of the ‘weak’ Gothonic preterit from a coalescence of did (loved = love did) was long one of the strongholds of the agglutination theory, Bopp’s original collocation of these forms with other forms which could not be thus explained (see above 51) having passed into oblivion. Now we have Collitz’s comprehensive book Das schwache Präteritum, 1912, in which the formative consonant is shown to have been Aryan t, and the close correspondence not only with the passive participle, but also with the verbal nouns in -ti is duly emphasized.
The explanation of the ‘weak’ Gothic preterit as a combination of did (loved = love did) was long a key point for the agglutination theory, with Bopp’s initial grouping of these forms alongside others that couldn't be explained in the same way now forgotten (see above 51). Now we have Collitz’s detailed book Das schwache Präteritum, 1912, where the formative consonant is identified as Aryan t, and the close relationship with the passive participle, as well as with the verbal nouns in -ti, is appropriately highlighted.
The impossibility of explaining the Latin perfect in -vi from composition with fui has been demonstrated by Merguet (see Walde in Streitberg’s Gesch., 2. 220). Instead of this rectilinear explanation, scholars now incline to assume an intricate play of various analogical influences starting from a pre-ethnic perfect in w in isolated instances.
The difficulty of explaining the Latin perfect in -vi as a combination with fui has been shown by Merguet (see Walde in Streitberg’s Gesch., 2. 220). Rather than this straightforward explanation, scholars now tend to believe that there's a complex interaction of different analogical influences originating from a pre-ethnic perfect in w in specific cases.
Many have explained the case ending -s as a coalesced demonstrative pronoun sa or, as it is now given, so; the difficulty that the same s denotes now the nominative and now the genitive was got over[382] by Curtius (C 12) by the assumption that sa was added at two distinct periods, and that each period made a different use of the addition, though Curtius does not tell us how one or the other function could be evolved from such a pronoun. The latest attempt at explanation, which reaches me as I am writing this chapter, is by Hermann Möller (KZ 49. 219): according to him the common Aryan and Semitic nominative ended in o and the genitive in e, but to this was added in the masculine, and more rarely in the feminine, the pronoun s as a definite article, so that the primitive form corresponding to Lat. lupus meant ‘the wolf’ and lupu ‘(a) wolf’; later the s-less form was given up, and lupus came to be used for both ‘the wolf’ and ‘wolf’ (similarly presumably in the genitive, if we translate the presumed original forms into Latin lupis ‘the wolf’s’ and lupi ‘(a) wolf’s,’ later lupi in both functions). In Semitic, inversely, an element m, corresponding to the Aryan accusative ending, was added as an indefinite article, the m-less form thus becoming definite, but in the oldest Babylonian-Assyrian the distinction has been given up, and the form in m is (like the Latin form in s) used both definitely and indefinitely. Ingenious as these constructions are, the whole theory seems to me highly artificial, and it is difficult to imagine that both Aryans and Semites, after having evolved such a valuable distinction as that between ‘the wolf’ and ‘a wolf,’ expressed by simple means, should have wilfully given it up—to evolve it again in a later period.[95] Fortunately one is allowed to confess one’s ignorance of the origin of the case endings s and m, but if I were on pain of death to choose between Möller’s hypothesis and the suggestion thrown out by Humboldt (Versch 129), that the light (high-pitched) s symbolized the living (personal) and active (the subject), and the dark (low-pitched) m the lifeless (neutral) and passive (the object), I should certainly prefer the latter explanation.
Many have explained the case ending -s as a combined demonstrative pronoun sa or, as it’s known today, so; the challenge that the same s indicates both the nominative and the genitive was addressed[382] by Curtius (C 12) with the idea that sa was added at two separate times, each using the addition differently, although Curtius doesn’t explain how either function could develop from such a pronoun. The most recent explanation I’ve encountered while writing this chapter comes from Hermann Möller (KZ 49. 219): he suggests that the common Aryan and Semitic nominative ended in o and the genitive in e, but in the masculine, and less often in the feminine, the pronoun s was added as a definite article, making the original form corresponding to Lat. lupus mean ‘the wolf’ and lupu mean ‘(a) wolf’; later the form without s was abandoned, and lupus came to be used for both ‘the wolf’ and ‘wolf’ (the same likely applies in the genitive, if we translate the presumed original forms into Latin lupis ‘the wolf’s’ and lupi ‘(a) wolf’s,’ later using lupi for both meanings). In Semitic, conversely, an element m, equivalent to the Aryan accusative ending, was added as an indefinite article, making the form without m definite, but in the earliest Babylonian-Assyrian, this distinction has been lost, and the form in m is (like the Latin form in s) used for both definite and indefinite. As clever as these ideas are, the entire theory seems highly artificial to me, and it’s hard to believe that both Aryans and Semites, after developing such a useful distinction between ‘the wolf’ and ‘a wolf,’ expressed in simple terms, would intentionally abandon it—only to recreate it later.[95] Fortunately, one can admit ignorance regarding the origins of the case endings s and m, but if I had to choose between Möller’s hypothesis and the suggestion made by Humboldt (Versch 129), that the light (high-pitched) s represented the living (personal) and active (the subject), and the dark (low-pitched) m the lifeless (neutral) and passive (the object), I would certainly prefer the latter explanation.
Hirt (GDS 37) also thinks that the s found in Aryan cases is an originally independent word, only he thinks that this se, so was not originally a demonstrative pronoun, but the particle, which with the extension i is found in Gothic sai ‘ecce,’ and as it can thus be compared with the particle c in Lat. hic, it is clear that it might be added in all cases—and as a matter of fact Hirt finds it in six different cases in the singular and in all cases in the plural except the genitive. Hirt makes no attempt at explaining how these various case-forms have come to acquire the signification (function) with which we find them in the oldest documents; “the s element had nothing to do with the denotation of any case, number or gender, and only after it had been added to some cases[383] and not to others could it come to be distinctive of cases” (p. 39). In other words, his explanation explains just nothing at all. The same is true with regard to the ‘particles’ om or em, e, o, i, which he thinks were added in other cases, and when he ends (p. 42) by saying that “this must be sufficient to give a glimpse of the way in which Aryan flexion originated,” the only thing we have really seen is the haphazard way in which this flexion is formed, and the impossibility at present of arriving at a fully satisfactory explanation of these things. I should especially demur to the two suppositions underlying Hirt’s theory that Aryan had at one period a completely flexionless structure, and that the same sound when occurring in various cases must have had the same origin: it seems much more probable to me that the s of the nominative and the s of the genitive were not at first identical.[96]
Hirt (GDS 37) also believes that the s found in Aryan cases is originally an independent word, but he argues that this se, so was not originally a demonstrative pronoun, but rather a particle, which with the extension i appears in Gothic sai ‘behold.’ He compares it to the particle c in Latin hic, suggesting that it could be added in all cases—and in fact, Hirt finds it in six different cases in the singular and in all the plural cases except the genitive. Hirt does not attempt to explain how these various case forms came to have the meanings (functions) we see in the oldest documents; “the s element had nothing to do with the denotation of any case, number or gender, and only after it had been added to some cases and not to others could it become distinctive of cases” (p. 39). In other words, his explanation really doesn't clarify anything. The same applies to the ‘particles’ om or em, e, o, i, which he believes were added in other cases. When he concludes (p. 42) by stating that “this must be sufficient to give a glimpse of the way in which Aryan flexion originated,” all we really see is the random way this flexion is formed, and the current inability to arrive at a fully satisfactory explanation of these matters. I particularly disagree with the two assumptions underlying Hirt’s theory: that Aryan had a completely flexionless structure at one point and that the same sound occurring in different cases must have had the same origin. It seems much more likely to me that the s of the nominative and the s of the genitive were not initially identical.[96]
That item of the coalescence theory which probably appealed most to the fancy of scholars and laymen alike was the explanation of the personal endings in the verbs from the personal pronouns: we have an m in the first person of the mi-verbs (esmi) and in the pronoun me, etc., and we have a t in the third person (esti) and in a third-person pronoun or demonstrative (to); it is, therefore, quite natural to think that esmi is simply the root es ‘to be’ + the pronoun mi ‘I,’ and esti es + the other pronoun, and to extend this view to the other persons. And yet not even this has been allowed to stand unchallenged by later disrespectful linguists, headed by A. H. Sayce (Techmer’s Zeitschr. f. allg. Sprwiss. i. 22) and Hirt. As a matter of fact, the theory is based exclusively on the above-mentioned correspondence in the first and third persons singular, while the dual and plural endings do not at all agree with the corresponding personal pronouns and the endings of the second person can only be compared with the pronoun through the employment of phonological tricks unworthy of a scientific linguist. Even in the first person the correspondence is not complete, for besides -mi we have other endings: -m, which cannot be very well considered a shortened -mi (and which agrees,[384] as Sayce remarks, much more closely with the accusative ending of nouns), -o and -a, neither of which can be explained from any known pronoun. There is thus nothing for it except to say, as Brugmann does (KG § 770): “The origin of the personal endings is not clear”; cf. also Misteli 47: “The relations between personal endings and the independent personal pronouns must be much more evident to justify this view.... The Aryan language offers direct evidence against the assumption that a sentence has been thus drawn together, because it uses in the verbal forms of the first and third person sg. pronominal stems which are otherwise employed only as objects, and, moreover, would here place the subject after the predicate, though in sentences it observes the opposite order.” Meillet expresses himself very categorically (Bulletin de la Soc. de Ling. 1911, 143): “Scarcely any linguist who has studied Aryan languages would venture to affirm that *-mi of the type Gr. fēmi is an old personal pronoun.”
The part of the coalescence theory that likely caught the attention of both scholars and everyday people was the explanation of personal endings in verbs originating from personal pronouns: we see an m in the first person of the mi-verbs (esmi) and in the pronoun me, etc., and a t in the third person (esti) and in a third-person pronoun or demonstrative (to); it's easy to think that esmi is just the root es meaning ‘to be’ plus the pronoun mi meaning ‘I,’ and esti is es plus the other pronoun, and to apply this idea to the other persons. However, even this hasn’t gone unchallenged by later critical linguists, led by A. H. Sayce (Techmer’s Zeitschr. f. allg. Sprwiss. i. 22) and Hirt. In fact, the theory hinges solely on the previously mentioned similarity in the first and third person singular, while the dual and plural endings don’t match up with the corresponding personal pronouns at all, and the endings for the second person can only be linked to pronouns through phonological manipulations that aren’t fit for a serious linguist. Even in the first person, the similarities are not complete, since besides -mi we have other endings: -m, which certainly can’t just be seen as a shortened form of -mi (and which matches, as Sayce notes, much more closely with the accusative ending of nouns), -o and -a, neither of which can be traced back to any known pronoun. Therefore, it is necessary to agree with Brugmann (KG § 770): “The origin of the personal endings is not clear”; see also Misteli 47: “The connections between personal endings and the independent personal pronouns need to be more obvious to support this view… The Aryan language provides direct evidence against the idea that a sentence has been formed in this way, because it uses pronominal stems in the verbal forms of the first and third person singular that are otherwise only used as objects, and moreover, would place the subject after the predicate here, while it usually follows the opposite order in sentences.” Meillet states this quite clearly (Bulletin de la Soc. de Ling. 1911, 143): “Hardly any linguist who has studied Aryan languages would dare to claim that *-mi like in Gr. fēmi is an old personal pronoun.”
The impression left on us by all these cases is that many of the earlier explanations by agglutination have proved unsatisfactory, and that linguists are nowadays inclined either to leave the forms entirely unexplained or else to admit less rectilinear developments, in which we see the speakers of the old languages groping tentatively after means of expression and finding them only by devious and circuitous courses. It is, of course, difficult to classify such explanations, and the agglutination or coalescence theory has to be supplemented by various other kinds of explanation; but I think one of these, which has not received its legitimate share of attention, is important and distinctive enough to have its own name, and I propose to term it the ‘secretion’ theory.
The impression we get from all these cases is that many of the earlier explanations through agglutination haven’t been satisfactory, and that today’s linguists tend to either leave the forms completely unexplained or accept less straightforward developments, where speakers of the old languages are tentatively searching for ways to express themselves and finding them only through indirect and complicated paths. It’s definitely challenging to categorize such explanations, and the agglutination or coalescence theory needs to be supplemented with various other types of explanations; however, I believe one of these, which hasn’t received the attention it deserves, is significant and unique enough to have its own name, and I’d like to call it the ‘secretion’ theory.
XIX.—§ 13. Secretion.
By secretion I understand the phenomenon that one integral portion of a word comes to acquire a grammatical signification which it had not at first, and is then felt as something added to the word itself. Secretion thus is a consequence of a ‘metanalysis’ (above, Ch. X § 2); it shows its full force when the element thus secreted comes to be added to other words not originally possessing this element.
By "secretion," I mean the process where part of a word takes on a grammatical meaning it didn't have initially, and this is perceived as something extra to the word itself. Secretion is therefore a result of ‘metanalysis’ (above, Ch. X § 2); its full impact is seen when the secreted element gets added to other words that originally didn't have this element.
A clear instance is offered in the history of some English possessive pronouns. In Old English min and þin the n is kept throughout as part and parcel of the words themselves, the other cases having such forms as mine, minum, minre, exactly as in German mein, meine, meinem, meiner, etc. But in Middle English the endings were gradually dropped, and min and þin for a short time[385] became the only forms. Soon, however, n was dropped before substantives beginning with a consonant, but was retained in other positions (my father—mine uncle, it is mine); then the former form was transferred also to those cases in which the pronoun was used (as an adjunct) before words beginning with vowels (my father, my uncle—it is mine). The distinction between my and mine, thy and thine, which was originally a purely phonetic one, exactly like that between a and an (a father, an uncle), gradually acquired a functional value, and now serves to distinguish an adjunct from a principal (or, to use the terms of some grammars, a conjoint from an absolute form); my came to be looked upon as the proper form, while the n of mine was felt as an ending serving to indicate the function as a principal word. That this is really the instinctive feeling of the people is shown by the fact that in dialectal and vulgar speech the same n is added to his, her, your and their, to form the new pronouns hisn, hern, yourn, theirn: “He that prigs what isn’t hisn, when he’s cotch’d, is sent to prison. She that prigs what isn’t hern, At the treadmill takes a turn.”
A clear example can be found in the history of some English possessive pronouns. In Old English, min and þin included the n throughout as part of the words themselves, with other cases appearing as mine, minum, minre, just like in German mein, meine, meinem, meiner, etc. However, in Middle English, the endings were gradually dropped, and min and þin for a short time[385] became the only forms. Soon after, though, n was dropped before nouns starting with a consonant but was kept in other positions (my father—mine uncle, it is mine); then, the previous form was also transferred to cases where the pronoun was used (as an adjunct) before words starting with vowels (my father, my uncle—it is mine). The distinction between my and mine, thy and thine, which was originally purely phonetic, similar to that between a and an (a father, an uncle), gradually gained a functional purpose, now helping to differentiate an adjunct from a principal (or, in some grammar terms, a conjoint from an absolute form); my began to be seen as the standard form, while the n in mine was perceived as an ending that indicates the role as a principal word. This instinctive feeling among people is illustrated by the fact that in dialectal and casual speech, the same n is added to his, her, your, and their, forming the new pronouns hisn, hern, yourn, theirn: “He that prigs what isn’t hisn, when he’s caught, is sent to prison. She that prigs what isn’t hern, at the treadmill takes a turn.”
Another instance of secretion is -en as a plural ending in E. oxen, G. ochsen, etc. Here originally n belonged to the word in all cases and all numbers, just as much as the preceding s; ox was an n stem in the same way as, for instance, Lat. (homo), hominem, hominis, etc., or Gr. kuōn, kuna, kunos, etc., are n stems. In Gothic n is found in most of the cases of similar n stems. In OE. the nom. is oxa, the other cases in the sg. oxan, pl. oxan (oxen), oxnum, oxena, but in ME. the n-less form is found throughout the singular (gen. analogically oxes), and the plural only kept -n. Thus also a great many other words, e.g. (I give the plural forms) apen, haren, sterren (stars), tungen, siden, eyen, which all of them belonged to the n declension in OE. When -en had thus become established as a plural sign, it was added analogically to words which were not originally n stems, e.g. ME. caren, synnen, treen (OE. cara, synna, treow), and this ending even seemed for some time destined to be the most usual plural ending in the South of England, until it was finally supplanted by -s, which had been the prevalent ending in the North; eyen, foen, shoen were for a time in competition with eyes, foes, shoes, and now -n is only found in oxen (and children). In German to-day things are very much as they were in Southern ME.: -en is kept extensively in the old n stems and is added to some words which had formerly other endings, e.g. hirten, soldaten, thaten. The result is that now plurality is indicated by an ending which had formerly no such function (which, indeed, had no function at all); for if we look upon the actual language, oxen (G. ochsen) is = ox (ochs) singular + the plural ending -en;[386] only we must not on any account imagine that the form was originally thus welded together (agglutinated)—and if in G. soldaten we may speak of -en being glued on to soldat, this ending is not, and has never been, an independent word, but is an originally insignificative part secreted by other words.
Another example of a suffix is -en as a plural ending in E. oxen, G. ochsen, etc. Originally, n was part of the word in all cases and numbers, just like the preceding s; ox was an n stem similar to, for example, Lat. (homo), hominem, hominis, or Gr. kuōn, kuna, kunos, which are also n stems. In Gothic, n appears in most cases of similar n stems. In Old English, the nominative is oxa, the other singular cases are oxan, plural oxan (oxen), oxnum, oxena, but in Middle English, the form without n appears in the singular (gen. analogically oxes), and the plural only retained -n. Similarly, many other words, such as (I will provide the plural forms) apen, haren, sterren (stars), tungen, siden, eyen, all belonged to the n declension in Old English. Once -en became established as a plural marker, it was added analogically to words that were not originally n stems, e.g. ME. caren, synnen, treen (OE. cara, synna, treow), and for a time, this ending seemed destined to become the most common plural ending in the South of England, until it was ultimately replaced by -s, which was the dominant ending in the North; eyen, foen, shoen temporarily competed with eyes, foes, shoes, and now -n is only used in oxen (and children). In German today, the situation is very similar to what it was in Southern Middle English: -en is widely retained in the old n stems and is added to some words that previously had different endings, e.g. hirten, soldaten, thaten. The result is that plural form is now indicated by a suffix that originally had no such function (which indeed had no function at all); for if we look at the current language, oxen (G. ochsen) equals ox (ochs) singular + plural ending -en; [386] but we must not think that the form was originally put together (agglutinated) in this way—and if in G. soldaten we can say that -en is attached to soldat, this ending is not and has never been an independent word, but is an originally insignificant part secreted by other words.
A closely similar case is the plural ending -er. The consonant originally was s, as seen, for instance, in the Gr. and Lat. nom. genos, genus, gen. Gr. gene(s)os, genous, Lat. generis for older genesis. In Gothonic languages s, in accordance with a regular sound shift in this case, became r (through z) whenever it was retained, but in the nom. sg. it was dropped, and thus we have in OE. sg. lamb, lambe, lambes, but in the pl. lambru, lambrum, lambra. In English only few words show traces of this flexion, thus OE. cild, pl. cildru, ME. child, childer, whence, with an added -en, our modern children. But in German the class had much more vitality, and we have not only words belonging to it of old, like lamm, pl. lämmer, rind, rinder, but also gradually more and more words which originally belonged to other classes, but adopted this ending after it had become a real sign of the plural number, thus wörter, bücher.
A similar case is the plural ending -er. The consonant was originally s, as seen in the Greek and Latin words genos, genus, gen. Gr. gene(s)os, genous, and Lat. generis for the older genesis. In Gothic languages, s, following a regular sound shift, became r (via z) when it was kept, but it was dropped in the nominative singular. So, we have in Old English singular forms like lamb, lambe, lambes, but in the plural lambru, lambrum, lambra. In modern English, only a few words show traces of this inflection, like Old English cild, plural cildru, Middle English child, childer, and eventually, with an added -en, our modern children. But in German, this class had much more vitality; we not only have older words like lamm, plural lämmer, rind, plural rinder, but also more words that originally belonged to other classes but adopted this ending once it became a true sign of the plural, like wörter, bücher.
There is one trait that should be noticed as highly characteristic of these instances of secretion, that is, that the occurrence of the endings originating in this way seems from the first regulated by the purest accident, seen from the point of view of the speakers: they are found in some words, but not in others, whereas the endings treated of under the heading Coalescence are added much more uniformly to the whole of the vocabulary. But as a similarly irregular or arbitrary distribution is met with in the case of nearly all flexional endings in the oldest stages of languages belonging to our family of speech, the probability is that most of those endings which it is impossible for us to trace back to their first beginnings have originated through secretion or similar processes, rather than through coalescence of independent words or roots.
There’s one characteristic that stands out in these examples of secretion: the endings that come from this process seem, to the speakers, to occur purely by chance. They appear in some words but not in others, while the endings discussed under Coalescence are added much more consistently across the entire vocabulary. However, since a similar irregular or random pattern is found in almost all inflectional endings in the earliest forms of languages within our language family, it’s likely that many of the endings we can’t trace back to their origins have come about through secretion or similar processes rather than through the merging of independent words or roots.
XIX.—§ 14. Extension of Suffixes.
A special subdivision of secretion comprises those cases in which a suffix takes over some sound or sounds from words to which it was added. Clear instances are found in French, where in consequence of the mutescence of a final consonant some suffixes to the popular instinct must seem to begin with a consonant, though originally this did not belong to the suffix. Thus laitier, at first formed from lait + ier, now came to be apprehended as = lai(t) + tier, and cabaretier as cabare(t) + tier, and the new[387] suffix was then used to form such new words as bijoutier, ferblantier, cafetier and others. In the same way we have tabatière, where we should expect tabaquière, and the predilection for the extended form of the suffix is evidently strengthened by the syllable division in frequent formations like ren-tier, por-tier, por-tière, charpen-tier. In old Gothonic we have similar extensions of suffixes, when instead of -ing we get -ling, starting from words like OHG. ediling from edili, ON. vesling from vesall, OE. lytling from lytel, etc. Consequently we have in English quite a number of words with the extended ending: duckling, gosling, hireling, underling, etc. In Gothic some words formed with -assus, such as þiudin-assus ‘kingdom,’ were apprehended as formed with -nassus, and in all the related languages the suffix is only known with the initial n; thus in E. -ness: hardness, happiness, eagerness, etc.; G. -keit with its k from adjectives in -ic has already been mentioned (376). From criticism, Scotticism, we have witti-cism, and Milton has witticaster on the analogy of criticaster, where the suffix of course is -aster, as in poetaster. Instead of -ist we also find in some cases -nist: tobacconist, lutenist (cf. botan-ist, mechan-ist).
A specific type of secretion includes cases where a suffix takes on some sounds from the words it’s added to. Clear examples are found in French, where the mute sound of a final consonant makes some suffixes seem to start with a consonant due to popular perception, even though that sound wasn’t originally part of the suffix. For instance, laitier, which was initially created from lait + ier, is now understood as = lai(t) + tier, and cabaretier as cabare(t) + tier. This new[387] suffix has then been used to create new words like bijoutier, ferblantier, cafetier, and others. Similarly, we have tabatière, where we would expect tabaquière, and the tendency for the longer form of the suffix is clearly reinforced by the syllable division in common formations like ren-tier, por-tier, por-tière, charpen-tier. In Old Gothic, we also see similar suffix extensions, where instead of -ing, we have -ling, starting from words like OHG. ediling from edili, ON. vesling from vesall, OE. lytling from lytel, etc. As a result, English has quite a few words with this extended ending: duckling, gosling, hireling, underling, etc. In Gothic, some words formed with -assus, like þiudin-assus meaning ‘kingdom,’ were interpreted as being formed with -nassus, and in all related languages, the suffix is only known with an initial n; thus in English, we have -ness: hardness, happiness, eagerness, etc.; German -keit with its k from adjectives in -ic has already been mentioned (376). From criticism, Scotticism, we get witti-cism, and Milton uses witticaster following the pattern of criticaster, where the suffix is clearly -aster, as in poetaster. Instead of -ist, we also sometimes find -nist: tobacconist, lutenist (cf. botan-ist, mechan-ist).
To form a new word it is often sufficient that some existing word is felt in a vague way to be made up of something + an ending, the latter being subsequently added on to another word. In Fr. mérovingien the v of course is legitimate, as the adjective is derived from Mérovée, Merowig, but this word was made the starting-point for the word designating the succeeding dynasty: carlovingien, where v is simply taken over as part of the suffix; nowadays historians try to be more ‘correct’ and prefer the adjective carolingien, which was unknown to Littré. Oligarchy is olig + archy, but for the opposite notion the word poligarchy or polygarchy was framed from poly and the last two syllables of oli-garchy, and though now scholars have made polyarchy the usual form, the word with the intrusive g was the common form two hundred years ago in English, and corresponding forms are found in French, Spanish and other languages. Judgmatical is made on the pattern of dogmatical, though there the stem is dogmat-. In jocular German schwachmatikus ‘valetudinarian,’ we have the same suffix with a different colouring, taken from rheumatikus (thus also Dan. svagmatiker). Swift does not hesitate to speak of a sextumvirate, which suggests triumvirate better than sexvirate would have done; and Bernard Shaw once writes “his equipage (or autopage)”—evidently starting from the popular, but erroneous, belief that equipage is derived from Lat. equus and then dividing the word equi + page. Cf. Scillonian from Scilly on account of Devonian as if this were Dev + onian instead of Devon + ian.
To create a new word, it's often enough for an existing word to be vaguely perceived as being composed of something + an ending, which is then added to another word. In French, mérovingien has a legitimate v, since the adjective comes from Mérovée, Merowig, but this word served as the basis for the one designating the next dynasty: carlovingien, where v is simply transferred as part of the suffix; nowadays, historians try to be more 'correct' and prefer the adjective carolingien, which Littré didn't recognize. Oligarchy combines olig + archy, but for the opposite concept, the word poligarchy or polygarchy was created from poly and the last two syllables of oli-garchy. Although scholars have now made polyarchy the standard form, the version with the extra g was common in English two centuries ago, and similar forms appear in French, Spanish, and other languages. Judgmatical is modeled on dogmatical, where the stem is dogmat-. In playful German, schwachmatikus means ‘valetudinarian,’ using the same suffix but with a different nuance, derived from rheumatikus (as in Danish svagmatiker). Swift does not hesitate to talk about a sextumvirate, which suggests triumvirate better than sexvirate would; and Bernard Shaw once wrote “his equipage (or autopage)”—clearly starting from the common, but incorrect, belief that equipage comes from Latin equus, and then splitting the word into equi + page. For reference, Scillonian is derived from Scilly due to Devonian, as if this were Dev + onian instead of Devon + ian.
XIX.—§ 15. Tainting of Suffixes.
It will be seen that in some of these instances the suffix has appropriated to itself not only part of the sound of the stem, but also part of its signification. This is seen very clearly in the case of chandelier, in French formed from chandelle ‘candle’ with the suffix -ier, of rather vague signification, ‘anything connected with, or having to do with’; in English the word is used for a hanging branched frame to hold a number of lights; consequently a similar apparatus for gas-burners was denominated gaselier (gasalier, gasolier), and with the introduction of electricity the formation has even been extended to electrolier. Vegetarian is from the stem veget- with added -ari-an, which ending has no special connexion with the notion of eating or food, but recently we have seen the new words fruitarian and nutarian, meaning one whose food consists (exclusively or chiefly) in fruits and nuts. Cf. solemncholy, which according to Payne is in use in Alabama, framed evidently on melancholy, analyzed in a way not approved by Greek scholars. The whole ending of septentrionalis (from the name of the constellation Septem triones, the seven oxen) is used to form the opposite: meridi-onalis.
It can be observed that in some of these cases, the suffix has taken on not only part of the sound of the root but also part of its meaning. This is clearly illustrated in the case of chandelier, which in French comes from chandelle meaning ‘candle’ with the suffix -ier, which has a rather vague meaning of ‘anything related to or associated with’; in English, the word is used for a hanging, branched frame that holds multiple lights; as a result, a similar device for gas burners was called gaselier (gasalier, gasolier), and with the rise of electricity, the term has even expanded to electrolier. Vegetarian comes from the root veget- with the addition of -ari-an, which does not specifically relate to the idea of eating or food. Recently, though, we’ve seen the new terms fruitarian and nutarian, referring to someone whose diet consists (exclusively or mainly) of fruits and nuts. Compare this to solemncholy, which according to Payne is used in Alabama, evidently formed from melancholy, analyzed in a way not accepted by Greek scholars. The entire ending of septentrionalis (from the name of the constellation Septem triones, the seven oxen) is used to create the opposite: meridi-onalis.
A similar case of ‘tainting’ is found in recent English. The NED, in the article on the suffix -eer, remarks that “in many of the words so formed there is a more or less contemptuous implication,” but does not explain this, and has not remarked that it is found only in words ending in -teer (from words in -t). I think this contemptuous implication starts from garreteer and crotcheteer (perhaps also pamphleteer and privateer); after these were formed the disparaging words sonneteer, pulpiteer. During the war (1916, I think) the additional word profiteer[97] came into use, but did not find its way into the dictionaries till 1919 (Cassell’s). And only the other day I read in an American publication a new word of the same calibre: “Against patrioteering, against fraud and violence ... Mr. Mencken has always nobly and bravely contended.”
A similar case of ‘tainting’ can be seen in modern English. The NED, in the article about the suffix -eer, notes that “in many of the words formed this way, there’s a somewhat contemptuous implication,” but doesn’t explain it and hasn’t pointed out that it only occurs in words ending in -teer (from words ending in -t). I believe this contemptuous implication started with garreteer and crotcheteer (and possibly pamphleteer and privateer); after these were created, the negative terms sonneteer and pulpiteer followed. During the war (1916, I think), the new term profiteer[97] came into use, but it didn’t make it into dictionaries until 1919 (according to Cassell’s). Just the other day, I saw a new word of the same kind in an American publication: “Against patrioteering, against fraud and violence ... Mr. Mencken has always nobly and bravely contended.”
XIX.—§ 16. The Classifying Instinct.
Man is a classifying animal: in one sense it may be said that the whole process of speaking is nothing but distributing phenomena,[389] of which no two are alike in every respect, into different classes on the strength of perceived similarities and dissimilarities. In the name-giving process we witness the same ineradicable and very useful tendency to see likenesses and to express similarity in the phenomena through similarity in name. Professor Hempl told me that one of his little daughters, when they had a black kitten which was called Nig (short for Nigger), immediately christened a gray kitten Grig and a brown one Brownig. Here we see the genesis of a suffix through a natural process, which has little in common with the gradual weakening of an originally independent word, as in -hood and the other instances mentioned above. In children’s speech similar instances are not unfrequent (cf. Ch. VII § 5); Meringer L 148 mentions a child of 1.7 who had the following forms: augn, ogn, agn, for ‘augen, ohren, haare.’ How many words formed or transformed in the same way must we require in order to speak of a suffix? Shall we recognize one in Romanic leve, greve (cf. Fr. grief), which took the place of leve, grave? Here, as Schuchardt aptly remarks, it was not only the opposite signification, but also the fact that the words were frequently uttered shortly after one another, that made one word influence the other.
Humans are natural classifiers: in a way, the entire process of speaking is just about sorting phenomena,[389] where no two are exactly the same, into different categories based on the similarities and differences we notice. In the naming process, we see the same strong and useful tendency to recognize likenesses and express those similarities through similar names. Professor Hempl told me that one of his young daughters, when they had a black kitten named Nig (short for Black), instantly named a gray kitten Grig and a brown one Brownig. This shows the development of a suffix through a natural process, which is different from how an originally independent word gradually weakens, as in -hood and the other examples mentioned earlier. Similar cases occur frequently in children’s speech (see Ch. VII § 5); Meringer L 148 mentions a child aged 1.7 who used the following forms: augn, ogn, agn, for ‘eyes, ears, hair.’ How many words created or changed in this manner do we need before we can call it a suffix? Should we consider the Romanic leve, greve (cf. Fr. grief), which replaced leve, grave? Here, as Schuchardt points out, it was not only the opposing meanings but also the fact that the words were often said in close succession that caused one word to affect the other.
The classifying instinct often manifests itself in bringing words together in form which have something in common as regards signification. In this way we have smaller classes and larger classes, and sometimes it is impossible for us to say in what way the likeness in form has come about: we can only state the fact that at a given time the words in question have a more or less close resemblance. But in other cases it is easy to see which word of the group has influenced the others or some other. In the examples I am about to give, I have been more concerned to bring together words that exhibit the classifying tendency than to try to find out the impetus which directed the formation of the several groups.
The instinct to classify often shows up in grouping words together based on their meanings. This leads to smaller and larger categories, and sometimes it's hard to pinpoint why these similarities exist; we can only acknowledge that, at a certain point, the words in question share a close resemblance. However, in other cases, it's clear which word in the group has shaped the others or vice versa. In the examples I'm about to present, I focused more on gathering words that show this classifying tendency than on figuring out what influenced the formation of these various groups.
In OE. we have some names of animals in -gga: frogga, stagga, docga, wicga, now frog, stag, dog, wig. Savour and flavour go together, the latter (OFr. flaur) having its v from the former. Groin, I suppose, has its diphthong from loin; the older form was grine, grynd(e). Claw, paw (earlier powe, OFr. pol). Rim, brim. Hook, nook. Gruff, rough (tough, bluff, huff—miff, tiff, whiff). Fleer, leer, jeer. Twig, sprig. Munch, crunch (lunch). Without uttering or muttering a word. The trees were lopped and topped. In old Gothonic the word for ‘eye’ has got its vowel from the word for ‘ear,’ with which it was frequently collocated: augo(n), auso(n), but in the modern languages the two words have again been separated in their phonetic development. In French I suspect that popular instinct will class the words air, terre, mer together as names of what used to be termed the ‘elements,’ in[390] spite of the different spelling and origin of the sounds. In Russian kogot’ ‘griffe’ (claw), nogot’ ‘ongle’ (fingernail), and lokot’ ‘coude’ (elbow), three names of parts of the body, go together in flexion and accent (Boyer et Speranski, Manuel de la l. russe 33). So do in Latin culex ‘gnat’ and pulex ‘flea.’ Atrox, ferox. A great many examples have been collected by M. Bloomfield, “On Adaptation of Suffixes in Congeneric Classes of Substantives” (Am. Journal of Philol. XII, 1891), from which I take a few. A considerable number of designations of parts of the body were formed with heteroclitic declension as r-n stems (cf. above, XVIII § 2): ‘liver,’ Gr. hēpar, hēpatos, ‘udder,’ Gr. outhar, outhatos, ‘thigh,’ Lat. femur, feminis, further Aryan names for blood, wing, viscera, excrement, etc. Other designations of parts of the body were partly assimilated to this class, having also n stems in the oblique cases, though their nominative was formed in a different way. Words for ‘right’ and ‘left’ frequently influence one another and adopt the same ending, and so do opposites generally: Bloomfield explains the t in the Gothonic word corresponding to E. white, where from Sanskr. we should expect th, çveta, as due to the word for ‘black’; Goth. hweits, swarts, ON. hvítr, svartr, etc. A great many names of birds and other animals appear with the same ending, Gr. glaux ‘owl,’ kokkux ‘cuckoo,’ korax ‘crow,’ ortux ‘quail,’ aix ‘goat,’ alopex ‘fox,’ bombux ‘silkworm,’ lunx ‘lynx’ and many others, also some plant-names. Names for winter, summer, day, evening, etc., also to a great extent form groups. In a subsequent article (in IF vi. 66 ff.) Bloomfield pursues the same line of thought and explains likenesses in various words of related signification, in direct opposition to the current explanation through added root-determinatives, as due to blendings (cf. above, Ch. XVII § 6). In Latin the inchoative value of the verbs in -esco is due to the accidentally inherent continuous character of a few verbs of the class: adolesco, senesco, cresco; but the same suffix is also found in the oldest words for ‘asking, wishing, searching,’ retained in E. ask, wish, G. forschen, which thus become a small group linked together by form and meaning alike.
In Old English, we have some animal names ending in -gga: frogga, stagga, docga, wicga, which are now frog, stag, dog, wig. Savor and flavor go hand in hand, with the latter (Old French flaur) getting its v from the former. Groin probably has its diphthong from loin; the older form was grine, grynd(e). Claw, paw (earlier powe, Old French pol). Rim, brim. Hook, nook. Gruff, rough (tough, bluff, huff—miff, tiff, whiff). Fleer, leer, jeer. Twig, sprig. Munch, crunch (lunch). Without uttering or muttering a word. The trees were lopped and topped. In Old Gothic, the word for ‘eye’ got its vowel from the word for ‘ear,’ which was often used together: augo(n), auso(n), but in modern languages, the two words have been separated again in their phonetic development. In French, I suspect that popular intuition will group the words air, terre, mer together as names for what used to be called the ‘elements,’ despite the different spelling and origin of the sounds. In Russian, kogot’ ‘claw’, nogot’ ‘fingernail’, and lokot’ ‘elbow’, three words for parts of the body, have similar infliction and stress (Boyer et Speranski, Manuel de la l. russe 33). The same is true in Latin with culex ‘gnat’ and pulex ‘flea.’ Atrox, ferox. M. Bloomfield has collected many examples in “On Adaptation of Suffixes in Congeneric Classes of Substantives” (Am. Journal of Philol. XII, 1891), from which I take a few. A significant number of body part names were formed with heteroclitic declension as r-n stems (cf. above, XVIII § 2): ‘liver,’ Gr. hēpar, hēpatos, ‘udder,’ Gr. outhar, outhatos, ‘thigh,’ Lat. femur, feminis, along with other Aryan words for blood, wing, viscera, excrement, etc. Other body part names were somewhat integrated into this class, also having n stems in the oblique cases, even though their nominative was formed in a different way. Words for ‘right’ and ‘left’ often influence each other and take the same ending, as do opposites in general: Bloomfield explains the t in the Gothic word corresponding to E. white, where from Sanskrit we would expect th, çveta, due to the word for ‘black’; Goth. hweits, swarts, ON. hvítr, svartr, etc. Many names for birds and other animals appear with the same ending, Gr. glaux ‘owl,’ kokkux ‘cuckoo,’ korax ‘crow,’ ortux ‘quail,’ aix ‘goat,’ alopex ‘fox,’ bombux ‘silkworm,’ lunx ‘lynx’ and many others, including some plant names. Names for winter, summer, day, evening, etc., also largely form groups. In a later article (in IF vi. 66 ff.) Bloomfield continues with the same idea and explains similarities in various words with related meanings, in direct contrast to the prevailing explanation through added root determinatives, attributing it to blends (cf. above, Ch. XVII § 6). In Latin, the inchoative aspect of verbs in -esco comes from the accidentally inherent continuous nature of a few verbs in the group: adolesco, senesco, cresco, but the same suffix is also found in the oldest words for ‘asking, wishing, searching,’ preserved in E. ask, wish, G. forschen, which therefore form a small group connected by both form and meaning.
XIX.—§ 17. Character of Suffixes.
There seems undoubtedly to be something accidental or haphazard in most of these transferences of sounds from one word to another through which groups of phonetically and semantically similar words are created; the process works unsystematically, or rather, it consists in spasmodic efforts at regularizing something which is from the start utterly unsystematic. But where conditions are favourable, i.e. where the notional connexion is patent[391] and the phonetic element is such that it can easily be added to many words, the group will tend constantly to grow larger within the natural boundaries given by the common resemblance in signification.
There clearly seems to be something random or chaotic in most of these shifts of sounds from one word to another that create groups of words that are phonetically and semantically similar; the process is unsystematic, or rather, it consists of intermittent efforts to make something that is fundamentally disorganized seem more regular. However, when the conditions are right, meaning when the connection is obvious and the phonetic element can easily be added to many words, the group will likely continue to expand within the natural limits defined by the common similarities in meaning.
I have no doubt that the vast majority of our formatives, such as suffixes and flexional endings, have arisen in this way through transference of some part, which at first was unmeaning in itself, from one word to another in which it had originally no business, and then to another and another, taking as it were a certain colouring from the words in which it is found, and gradually acquiring a more or less independent signification or function of its own. In long words, such as were probably frequent in primitive speech, and which were to the minds of the speakers as unanalyzable as marmalade or crocodile is to Englishmen nowadays, it would be perhaps most natural to keep the beginning unchanged and to modify the final syllable or syllables to bring about conformity with some word with which it was associated; hence the prevalence of suffixes in our languages, hence also the less systematic character of these suffixes as compared with the prefixes, most of which have originated in independent words, such as adverbs. What is from the merely phonetic point of view the ‘same’ suffix, in different languages may have the greatest variety of meaning, sometimes no discernible meaning at all, and it is in many cases utterly impossible to find out why in one particular language it can be used with one stem and not with another. Anyone going through the collections in Brugmann’s great Grammar will be struck with this purely accidental character of the use of most of the suffixes—a fact which would be simply unthinkable if each of them had originally one definite, well-determined signification, but which is easy to account for on the hypothesis here adopted. And then many of them are not added to ready-made words or ‘roots,’ but form one indivisible whole with the initial part of the word; cf., for instance, the suffix -le in English squabble, struggle, wriggle, babble, mumble, bustle, etc.
I have no doubt that most of our grammatical forms, like suffixes and endings, came about this way: a part that initially meant nothing on its own was transferred from one word to another where it didn’t originally belong, then to yet another word, gradually picking up a certain flavor from the words it appears in and slowly developing its own independent meaning or function. In longer words, which were likely common in early speech and were as indecipherable to the speakers as words like marmalade or crocodile are to modern English speakers, it would probably be more natural to keep the beginning intact and modify the final syllable or syllables to align with a related word; this explains the prevalence of suffixes in our languages and also the more chaotic nature of these suffixes compared to prefixes, most of which come from standalone words like adverbs. From a purely phonetic perspective, what appears to be the ‘same’ suffix in different languages can express a wide range of meanings, sometimes even having no clear meaning at all, and it’s often impossible to determine why a particular suffix is used with one root in one language and not with another. Anyone examining the collections in Brugmann’s great Grammar will notice the largely random nature of how most suffixes are used—a fact that would be unthinkable if each had originally had a specific, well-defined meaning, but which makes sense based on the hypothesis presented here. Many of them are not added to pre-existing words or ‘roots’ but form a single indivisible unit with the beginning of the word; for example, consider the suffix -le in English words like squabble, struggle, wriggle, babble, mumble, bustle, etc.
XIX.—§ 18. Brugmann’s Theory of Gender.
As I have said, man is a classifying animal, and in his language tends to express outwardly class distinctions which he feels more or less vaguely. One of the most important of these class divisions, and at the same time one of the most difficult to explain, is that of the three ‘genders’ in our Aryan languages. If we are to believe Brugmann, we have here a case of what I have in this work termed secretion. In his well-known paper, “Das Nominalgeschlecht in den indogermanischen Sprachen” (in Techmer’s Zs. f. allgem. Sprachwissensch. 4. 100 ff., cf. also his reply to Roethe’s criticism,[392] PBB 15. 522) he puts the question: How did it come about that the old Aryans attached a definite gender (or sex, geschlecht) to words meaning foot, head, house, town, Gr. pous, for instance, being masculine, kephalē feminine, oikos masculine, and polis feminine? The generally accepted explanation, according to which the imagination of mankind looked upon lifeless things as living beings, is, Brugmann says, unsatisfactory; the masculine and feminine of grammatical gender are merely unmeaning forms and have nothing to do with the ideas of masculinity and femininity; for even where there exists a natural difference of sex, language often employs only one gender. So in German we have der hase, die maus, and der weibliche hase is not felt to be self-contradictory. Again, in the history of languages we often find words which change their gender exclusively on account of their form. Thus, in German, many words in -e, such as traube, niere, wade, which were formerly masculine, have now become feminine, because the great majority of substantives in -e are feminine (erde, ehre, farbe, etc.). Nothing accordingly hinders us from supposing that grammatical gender originally had nothing at all to do with natural sex. The question, therefore, according to Brugmann, is essentially reduced to this: How did it come to pass that the suffix -a was used to designate female beings? At first it had no connexion with femininity, witness Lat. aqua ‘water’ and hundreds of other words; but among the old words with that ending there happened to be some denoting females: mama ‘mother’ and gena ‘woman’ (compare E. quean, queen). Now, in the history of some suffixes we see that, without any regard to their original etymological signification, they may adopt something of the radical meaning of the words to which they are added, and transfer that meaning to new formations. In this way mama and gena became the starting-point for analogical formations, as if the idea of female was denoted by the ending, and new words were formed, e.g. Lat. dea ‘goddess’ from deus ‘god,’ equa ‘mare’ from equus ‘horse,’ etc. The suffix -iē- or -ī- probably came to denote feminine sex by a similar process, possibly from Skr. strī ‘woman,’ which may have given a fem. *wḷqī ‘she-wolf’ to *wḷqos ‘wolf.’ The above is a summary of Brugmann’s reasoning; it may interest the reader to know that a closely similar point of view had, several years previously, been taken by a far-seeing scholar in respect to a totally different language, namely Hottentot, where, according to Bleek, CG 2. 118-22, 292-9, a class division which had originally nothing to do with sex has been employed to distinguish natural sex. I transcribe a few of Bleek’s remarks: “The apparent sex-denoting character which the classification of the nouns now has in the Hottentot language was evidently imparted to it after a division of the nouns into[393] classes[98] had taken place. It probably arose, in the first instance, from the possibly accidental circumstance that the nouns indicating (respectively) man and woman were formed with different derivative suffixes, and consequently belonged to different classes (or genders) of nouns, and that these suffixes thus began to indicate the distinction of sex in nouns where it could be distinguished” (p. 122). “To assume, for example, that the suffix of the m. sg. (-p) had originally the meaning of ‘man,’ or the fem. sg. (-s) that of ‘woman,’ would in no way explain the peculiar division of the nouns into classes as we find it in Hottentot, and would be opposed to all that is probable regarding the etymology of these suffixes, and also to the fact that so many nouns are included in the sex-denoting classes to which the distinction of sex can only be applied by a great effort.... If the word for ‘man’ were formed with one suffix (-p), and the word indicating ‘woman’ (be it accidentally or not) by another (-s), then other nouns would be formed with the same suffixes, in analogy with these, until the majority of the nouns of each sex were formed with certain suffixes which would thus assume a sex-denoting character” (p. 298).
As I've mentioned, humans are naturally inclined to categorize things and tend to express class distinctions in their language, even if they only partially understand them. One of the most significant and hardest to explain class divisions is the three ‘genders’ found in our Indo-European languages. If we trust Brugmann, this is an example of what I’ve referred to in this work as secretion. In his well-known paper, “The grammatical gender in Indo-European languages” (in Techmer’s Zs. f. allgem. Sprachwissensch. 4. 100 ff., cf. also his reply to Roethe’s criticism, [392] PBB 15. 522), he asks: How did the ancient Aryans assign a specific gender (or sex, gender) to words like foot, head, house, and town, with examples like Gr. pous as masculine, kephalē as feminine, oikos as masculine, and polis as feminine? The widely accepted explanation, suggesting that humans viewed inanimate objects as if they were alive, is, according to Brugmann, inadequate; the masculine and feminine forms in grammar are simply arbitrary and don’t relate to the concepts of masculinity and femininity. Even when there is a natural difference in sex, language often uses just one gender. For example, in German, we say der hase, die maus, and referring to der weibliche hase isn’t seen as contradictory. Furthermore, in the evolution of languages, we frequently find words that switch their gender purely based on their form. For instance, in German, many words ending in -e, like traube, niere, wade, which were once masculine, have now become feminine because most nouns with that ending are feminine (erde, ehre, farbe, etc.). Thus, there’s nothing preventing us from assuming that grammatical gender originally had no connection to natural sex. Consequently, according to Brugmann, the core question becomes: How did the suffix -a come to signify females? Initially, it had no link to femininity—consider Lat. aqua meaning ‘water’ and hundreds of other examples; but among the old words with that ending were some that referred to females: mama meaning ‘mother’ and gena meaning ‘woman’ (compare English quean, queen). In the evolution of certain suffixes, we've seen that they can take on some of the primary meanings of the words they are added to, consequently transferring that meaning to new terms. This led to mama and gena becoming bases for analogical formations, as if the idea of femininity was conveyed by the ending, resulting in new words, such as Lat. dea meaning ‘goddess’ from deus meaning ‘god,’ and equa meaning ‘mare’ from equus meaning ‘horse,’ etc. The suffix -iē- or -ī- likely came to indicate feminine sex through a similar process, perhaps stemming from Skr. strī meaning ‘woman,’ which might have resulted in a feminine *wḷqī meaning ‘she-wolf’ from *wḷqos meaning ‘wolf.’ The above summarizes Brugmann’s reasoning; it might interest readers to know that a similarly insightful perspective was expressed years earlier by a perceptive scholar regarding a completely different language, specifically Hottentot, where, according to Bleek, CG 2. 118-22, 292-9, a class division that originally had nothing to do with sex has been used to differentiate natural sex. I’ll quote a few of Bleek’s observations: “The apparent sex-indicating nature of the classification of nouns in the Hottentot language was clearly assigned after the nouns had been divided into[393] classes[98] This likely originated from the possibly coincidental fact that the nouns for man and woman were created with different suffixes, thus placing them in separate classes (or genders) of nouns, causing these suffixes to indicate the distinction of sex where it could be identified” (p. 122). “To assume, for instance, that the suffix for masculine singular (-p) originally meant ‘man,’ or the feminine singular (-s) meant ‘woman,’ does not explain the unique classification of the nouns in Hottentot, and contradicts all plausible views on the etymology of these suffixes, as well as the fact that many nouns in the sex-indicating classes can only have their sex distinguished with great effort.... If the word for ‘man’ was formed with one suffix (-p), and the word for ‘woman’ (whether by chance or not) was formed with another (-s), then other nouns would likely be created with the same suffixes, leading to most nouns of each sex being formed with specific suffixes that would thereby take on a sex-indicating character” (p. 298).
Brugmann’s view on Aryan gender has not been unchallenged. The weakest points in his arguments are, of course, that there are so few old naturally feminine words in -a and -i to take as starting-points for such a thoroughgoing modification of the grammatical system, and that Brugmann was unable to give any striking explanation of the concord of adjectives and pronouns with words that had not these endings, but which were nevertheless treated as masculines and feminines respectively. It would lead us too far here to give any minute account of the discussion which arose on these points;[99] one of the most valuable contributions seems to me Jacobi’s suggestion (Compositum u. Nebensatz, 1897, 115 ff.) that the origin of grammatical gender is not to be sought in the noun, but in the pronoun (he finds a parallel in the Dravidian languages)—but even he does not find a fully satisfactory explanation, and the Aryan gender distinction reaches back to so remote an antiquity, thousands of years before any literary tradition, that we shall most probably never be able to fathom all its mysteries. Of late years less attention has been given to the problem of the feminine, which presented itself to Brugmann, than to the distinction between two classes, one of which was characterized by the[394] use of a nominative in -s, which is now looked upon as a ‘transitive-active’ case, and the other by no ending or by an ending -m, which is the same as was used as the accusative in the first class (an ‘intransitive-passive’ case), and an attempt has been made to see in the distinction something analogous to the division found in Algonkin languages between a class of ‘living’ and another of ‘lifeless’ things—though these two terms are not to be taken in the strictly scientific sense, for primitive men do not reason in the same way as we do, but ascribe or deny ‘life’ to things according to criteria which we have great difficulty in apprehending. This would mean a twofold division into one class comprising the historical masculines and feminines, and another comprising the neuters.
Brugmann’s perspective on Aryan gender has faced some criticism. The main weaknesses in his arguments are that there are very few naturally feminine words ending in -a and -i to support such a significant change in the grammatical system, and that Brugmann couldn't provide a convincing explanation for why adjectives and pronouns agree with words that don’t have these endings but are still considered masculine and feminine. It would take too long to delve into the discussions that arose around these issues; [99] one of the most insightful contributions, in my opinion, is Jacobi’s suggestion (Compositum u. Nebensatz, 1897, 115 ff.) that the source of grammatical gender lies not in the noun but in the pronoun (he finds a parallel in the Dravidian languages)—however, even he doesn’t provide a fully satisfactory explanation. The Aryan gender distinction goes back to such ancient times, thousands of years before any literary tradition, that we’ll likely never uncover all its mysteries. In recent years, less focus has been on the issue of the feminine as Brugmann presented it, and more on the distinction between two categories—one characterized by a nominative in -s, now viewed as a ‘transitive-active’ case, and the other by no ending or an ending -m, which is the same as used for the accusative in the first category (an ‘intransitive-passive’ case). There has also been an effort to see this distinction as similar to the division found in Algonkin languages between a category of ‘living’ and another of ‘lifeless’ things—though these terms shouldn’t be taken in a strictly scientific sense, since primitive people didn't think the way we do; they attribute or deny ‘life’ to things based on criteria that we find hard to understand. This implies a twofold division: one group containing the historical masculines and feminines, and another consisting of the neuters.
As to the feminine, we saw two old endings characterizing that gender, a and i. With regard to the latter, I venture to throw out the suggestion that it is connected with diminutive suffixes containing that vowel in various languages: on the whole, the sound [i] has a natural affinity with the notion of small, slight, insignificant and weak (see Ch. XX § 8). In some African languages we find two classes, one comprising men and big things, and the other women and small things (Meinhof, Die Sprachen der Hamiten 23), and there is nothing unnatural in the supposition that similar views may have obtained with our ancestors. This would naturally account for Skr. vṛk-ī ‘she-wolf’ (orig. little wolf, ‘wolfy’) from Skr. vṛkas, napt-ī, Lat. neptis, G. nichte, Skr. dēv-ī, ‘goddess,’ etc. But the feminine -a is to me just as enigmatic as, say, the d of the old ablative.
As for the feminine, we identified two old endings that define that gender, a and i. Regarding the latter, I would like to suggest that it might be related to diminutive suffixes that contain that vowel in various languages: overall, the sound [i] naturally connects with the idea of small, slight, insignificant, and weak (see Ch. XX § 8). In some African languages, there are two categories—one for men and large things, and another for women and small things (Meinhof, Die Sprachen der Hamiten 23), and it's not unreasonable to think that our ancestors might have shared similar views. This could explain Skr. vṛk-ī ‘she-wolf’ (originally little wolf, ‘wolfy’) from Skr. vṛkas, napt-ī, Lat. neptis, G. nichte, Skr. dēv-ī, ‘goddess,’ etc. However, the feminine -a remains just as puzzling to me as, for example, the d in the old ablative.
XIX.—§ 19. Final Considerations.
The ending -a serves to denote not only female beings, but also abstracts, and if in later usage it is also applied to males, as in Latin nauta ‘sailor,’ auriga ‘charioteer,’ this is only a derived use of the abstracts denoting an activity, sailoring, driving, etc., just as G. die wache, besides the activity of watching, comes to mean the man on guard, or as justice (Sp. el justicia) comes to mean ‘judge.’ The original sense of Antonius collega fuit Ciceronis was ‘A. was the co-election of C.’ (Osthoff, Verbum in d. Nominal-compos., 1878, 263 ff., Delbrück, Synt. Forsch. 4. 6).
The ending -a not only indicates female beings but also abstracts. In later usage, when it is also applied to males, like in Latin nauta ‘sailor’ and auriga ‘charioteer,’ this is just a derived use of the abstracts that refer to an activity, such as sailing or driving. Similarly, in German, die wache, which refers to the activity of watching, comes to mean the man on guard. Or in Spanish, justice (Sp. el justicia) can mean ‘judge.’ The original meaning of Antonius collega fuit Ciceronis was ‘A. was the co-election of C.’ (Osthoff, Verbum in d. Nominal-compos., 1878, 263 ff., Delbrück, Synt. Forsch. 4. 6).
The same -a is finally used as the plural ending of most neuters, but, as is now universally admitted (see especially Johannes Schmidt, Die Pluralbildungen der indogerm. Neutra, 1889), the ending here was originally neither neuter nor plural, but, on the contrary, feminine and singular. The forms in -a are properly collective formations like those found, for instance, in Lat. opera, gen. operæ,[395] ‘work,’ comp. opus ‘(a piece of) work’; Lat. terra ‘earth,’ comp. Oscan terum ‘plot of ground’; pugna ‘boxing, fight,’ comp. pugnus ‘fist.’ This explains among other things the peculiar syntactic phenomenon, which is found regularly in Greek and sporadically in Sanskrit and other languages, that a neuter plural subject takes the verb in the singular. Greek toxa is often used in speaking of a single bow; and the Latin poetic use of guttura, colla, ora, where only one person’s throat, neck or face is meant, points similarly to a period of the past when these words did not denote the plural. We can now see the reason of this -a being in some cases also the plural sign of masculine substantives: Lat. loca from locus, joca from jocus, etc.; Gr. sita from sitos. Joh. Schmidt refers to similar plural formations in Arabic; and as we have seen (Ch. XIX § 9), the Bantu plural prefixes had probably a similar origin. And we are thus constantly reminded that languages must often make the most curious détours to arrive at a grammatical expression for things which appear to us so self-evident as the difference between he and she, or that between one and more than one. Expressive simplicity in linguistic structure is not a primitive, but a derived quality.
The same -a is ultimately used as the plural ending for most neuters, but, as is now universally accepted (see especially Johannes Schmidt, Die Pluralbildungen der indogerm. Neutra, 1889), this ending was originally neither neuter nor plural; rather, it was feminine and singular. The forms in -a are essentially collective formations similar to those seen in Latin, such as opera, gen. operæ, [395] meaning ‘work,’ compared to opus, which means ‘(a piece of) work’; Latin terra meaning ‘earth,’ compared to Oscan terum meaning ‘plot of ground’; and pugna, meaning ‘boxing, fight,’ compared to pugnus meaning ‘fist.’ This helps explain, among other things, the unusual syntactic phenomenon regularly found in Greek and sporadically in Sanskrit and other languages, where a neuter plural subject uses the verb in the singular. Greek toxa is often used when referring to a single bow; and the Latin poetic use of guttura, colla, ora, where only one person’s throat, neck, or face is implied, similarly suggests a time in the past when these words did not indicate the plural. We can now understand why this -a is sometimes also the plural marker for masculine nouns: Latin loca from locus, joca from jocus, etc.; Greek sita from sitos. Joh. Schmidt mentions similar plural forms in Arabic; and as we have seen (Ch. XIX § 9), the Bantu plural prefixes likely have a similar origin. This continuously reminds us that languages often take the most curious détours to develop a grammatical expression for concepts that seem so obvious to us, like the difference between he and she, or between one and more than one. Expressive simplicity in linguistic structure is not primitive, but rather a derived quality.
CHAPTER XX
Sound Symbolism
§ 1. Sound and Sense. § 2. Instinctive Feeling. § 3. Direct Imitation. § 4. Originator of the Sound. § 5. Movement. § 6. Things and Appearances. § 7. States of Mind. § 8. Size and Distance. § 9. Length and Strength of Words and Sounds. § 10. General Considerations. § 11. Importance of Suggestiveness. § 12. Ancient and Modern Times.
§ 1. Sound and Sense. § 2. Instinctive Feeling. § 3. Direct Imitation. § 4. Originator of the Sound. § 5. Movement. § 6. Things and Appearances. § 7. States of Mind. § 8. Size and Distance. § 9. Length and Strength of Words and Sounds. § 10. General Considerations. § 11. Importance of Suggestiveness. § 12. Ancient and Modern Times.
XX.—§ 1. Sound and Sense.
The idea that there is a natural correspondence between sound and sense, and that words acquire their contents and value through a certain sound symbolism, has at all times been a favourite one with linguistic dilettanti, the best-known examples being found in Plato’s Kratylos. Greek and Latin grammarians indulge in the wildest hypotheses to explain the natural origin of such and such a word, as when Nigidius Figulus said that in pronouncing vos one puts forward one’s lips and sends out breath in the direction of the other person, while this is not the case with nos. With these early writers, to make guesses at sound symbolism was the only way to etymologize; no wonder, therefore, that we with our historical methods and our wider range of knowledge find most of their explanations ridiculous and absurd. But this does not justify us in rejecting any idea of sound symbolism: abusus non tollit usum!
The belief that there's a natural connection between sound and meaning, and that words gain their significance through some kind of sound symbolism, has always been popular among language enthusiasts, with the best-known examples found in Plato’s Kratylos. Greek and Latin grammarians come up with the wildest theories to explain the natural origin of certain words, such as when Nigidius Figulus said that by pronouncing vos, one puckers their lips and breathes toward the other person, while that’s not the case with nos. For these early writers, trying to guess at sound symbolism was their only way of figuring out word origins; it's no surprise that we, with our historical methods and broader knowledge, find most of their explanations laughable and absurd. However, this doesn't mean we should completely dismiss the idea of sound symbolism: abuse does not negate use!
Humboldt (Versch 79) says that “language chooses to designate objects by sounds which partly in themselves, partly in comparison with others, produce on the ear an impression resembling the effect of the object on the mind; thus stehen, stätig, starr, the impression of firmness, Sanskrit lī ‘to melt, diverge,’ that of liquidity or solution (des zerfliessenden).... In this way objects that produce similar impressions are denoted by words with essentially the same sounds, thus wehen, wind, wolke, wirren, wunsch, in all of which the vacillating, wavering motion with its confused impression on the senses is expressed through ... w.” Madvig’s objection (1842, 13 = Kl 64) that we need only compare four of the words Humboldt quotes with the corresponding words in the very nearest sister-language, Danish blæse, vind, sky, ønske, to[397] see how wrong this is, seems to me a little cheap: Humboldt himself expressly assumes that much of primitive sound symbolism may have disappeared in course of time and warns us against making this kind of explanation a ‘constitutive principle,’ which would lead to great dangers (“so setzt man sich grossen gefahren aus und verfolgt einen in jeder rücksicht schlüpfrigen pfad”). Moreover blæse (E. blow, Lat. flare) is just as imitative as wind, vind: no one of course would pretend that there was only one way of expressing the same sense perception. Among Humboldt’s examples wolke and wunsch are doubtful, but I do not see that this affects the general truth of his contention that there is something like sound symbolism in some words.
Humboldt (Versch 79) states that “language chooses to name objects using sounds that, partly in themselves and partly in comparison with others, create an impression on the ear that resembles the effect of the object on the mind; thus, stehen, stätig, starr convey the idea of firmness, while Sanskrit lī means ‘to melt, diverge,’ conveying the idea of liquidity or solution (des melting).... In this way, objects that create similar impressions are represented by words with essentially the same sounds, such as wehen, wind, wolke, wirren, wunsch, in all of which the idea of vacillating, wavering motion and its confusing effect on the senses is expressed through ... w.” Madvig’s objection (1842, 13 = Kl 64) that we only need to compare four of the words Humboldt cites with their nearest counterparts in Danish, blæse, vind, sky, ønske, to[397] demonstrate its inaccuracy seems a bit weak: Humboldt himself clearly assumes that much of the original sound symbolism may have faded over time and cautions us against making this kind of explanation a ‘constitutive principle,’ which could lead to significant risks (“This exposes you to great dangers and leads you down a slippery path in every respect.”). Additionally, blæse (E. blow, Lat. flare) is just as imitative as wind and vind: no one would claim that there is only one way to express the same sensory perception. Among Humboldt’s examples, wolke and wunsch are questionable, but I do not believe this undermines the overall truth of his claim that there is some form of sound symbolism in some words.
Nyrop in his treatment of this question (Gr IV § 545 f.) repeats Madvig’s objection that the same name can denote various objects, that the same object can be called by different names, and that the significations of words are constantly changing; further, that the same group of sounds comes to mean different things according to the language in which it occurs. He finally exclaims: “How to explain [by means of sound symbolism] the difference in signification between murus, nurus, durus, purus, etc.?”
Nyrop, in addressing this question (Gr IV § 545 f.), reiterates Madvig’s point that the same name can refer to different objects, that the same object can have various names, and that the meanings of words are always evolving. He also notes that the same group of sounds can convey different meanings depending on the language they appear in. He ultimately asks, “How can we explain [through sound symbolism] the difference in meaning between murus, nurus, durus, purus, etc.?”
XX.—§ 2. Instinctive Feeling.
Yes, of course it would be absurd to maintain that all words at all times in all languages had a signification corresponding exactly to their sounds, each sound having a definite meaning once for all. But is there really much more logic in the opposite extreme, which denies any kind of sound symbolism[100] (apart from the small class of evident echoisms or ‘onomatopœia’) and sees in our words only a collection of wholly accidental and irrational associations of sound and meaning? It seems to me that the conclusion in this case is as false as if you were to infer that because on one occasion X told a lie, he therefore never tells the truth. The correct conclusion would be: as he has told a lie once, we cannot always trust him; we must be on our guard with him—but sometimes he may tell the truth. Thus, also, sounds may in some cases be symbolic of their sense, even if they are not so in all words. If linguistic historians are averse to admitting sound symbolism, this is a natural consequence of their being chiefly occupied with words which have undergone regular changes in sound and sense; and most of the words which form the staple of linguistic books are outside the domain of sound symbolism.
Yes, of course it would be ridiculous to say that all words at all times in all languages have meanings that correspond exactly to their sounds, with each sound having a fixed meaning forever. But is there really much more logic in the opposite extreme, which denies any form of sound symbolism (aside from the few obvious echoisms or ‘onomatopoeia’) and sees our words as just a collection of completely random and irrational connections between sound and meaning? It seems to me that the conclusion in this case is as flawed as if you were to say that just because X lied once, he never tells the truth. The right conclusion would be: since he has lied once, we can’t always trust him; we should be cautious around him—but sometimes he might tell the truth. Similarly, sounds can sometimes reflect their meaning, even if they don't do so for every word. If linguistic historians are reluctant to recognize sound symbolism, it’s because they mostly focus on words that have undergone regular changes in sound and meaning; and most of the words commonly studied in linguistic literature fall outside the realm of sound symbolism.
There is no denying, however, that there are words which we feel instinctively to be adequate to express the ideas they stand for, and others the sounds of which are felt to be more or less incongruous with their signification. Future linguists will have to find out in detail what domains of human thought admit, and what domains do not admit, of congruous expression through speech sounds, and further what sounds are suitable to express such and such a notion, for though it is clear—to take only a few examples—that there is little to choose between apple and pomme, or between window and fenster, as there is no sound or sound group that has any natural affinity with such thoroughly concrete and composite ideas as those expressed by these words, yet on the other hand everybody must feel that the word roll, rouler, rulle, rollen is more adequate than the corresponding Russian word katat’, katit’.
There’s no denying that some words instinctively feel right for the ideas they represent, while others seem awkward in comparison. Future linguists will need to explore which areas of human thought can be expressed well with speech sounds and which cannot, as well as which sounds effectively convey specific ideas. For example, there’s not much difference between apple and pomme, or window and fenster, since there’s no sound or sound combination that naturally connects with the concrete and complex concepts these words represent. However, it’s clear that the word roll, rouler, rulle, rollen feels more fitting than its Russian counterparts katat’, katit’.
It would be an interesting task to examine in detail and systematically what ideas lend themselves to symbolic presentation and what sounds are chosen for them in different languages. That, however, could only be done on the basis of many more examples than I can find space for in this work, and I shall, therefore, only attempt to give a preliminary enumeration of the most obvious classes, with a small fraction of the examples I have collected.[101]
It would be an interesting task to carefully and systematically examine which ideas can be represented symbolically and which sounds are selected for them in different languages. However, this can only be done with many more examples than I have space for in this work, so I will only provide a preliminary list of the most obvious categories, along with a small selection of the examples I have gathered.[101]
XX.—§ 3. Direct Imitation.
The simplest case is the direct imitation of the sound, thus clink, clank, ting, tinkle of various metallic sounds, splash, bubble, sizz, sizzle of sounds produced by water, bow-wow, bleat, roar of sounds produced by animals, and snort, sneeze, snigger, smack, whisper, grunt, grumble of sounds produced by human beings. Examples might easily be multiplied of such ‘echoisms’ or ‘onomatopœia’ proper. But, as our speech-organs are not capable of giving a perfect imitation of all ‘unarticulated’ sounds, the choice of speech-sounds is to a certain extent accidental, and different nations have chosen different combinations, more or less conventionalized, for the same sounds; thus cock-a-doodle-doo, Dan. kykeliky, Sw. kukeliku, G. kikeriki, Fr. coquelico, for the sound of a cock; and for whisper: Dan. hviske, ON. kvisa, G. flüstern, Fr. chuchoter, Sp. susurar. The continuity of a sound is frequently indicated by l or r after a stopped consonant: rattle, rumble, jingle, clatter, chatter, jabber, etc.
The simplest case is the direct imitation of sounds, like clink, clank, ting, tinkle for various metallic noises, splash, bubble, sizz, sizzle for sounds made by water, and bow-wow, bleat, roar for sounds made by animals, as well as snort, sneeze, sblack, smack, whisper, grunt, grumble for sounds produced by humans. There are many examples of such ‘echoisms’ or proper ‘onomatopoeia.’ However, since our speech organs can't perfectly imitate all ‘unarticulated’ sounds, the selection of speech sounds is somewhat random, and different cultures have chosen various combinations, which have become more or less standardized, for the same sounds; for example, cock-a-doodle-doo, Dan. kykeliky, Sw. kukeliku, G. kikeriki, Fr. coquelico for the sound of a rooster; and for whisper: Dan. hviske, ON. kvisa, G. flüstern, Fr. chuchoter, Sp. susurar. The continuity of a sound is often shown by l or r following a stopped consonant: rattle, rumble, jingle, clatter, chatter, jabber, etc.
XX.—§ 4. Originator of the Sound.
Next, the echoic word designates the being that produces the sound, thus the birds cuckoo and peeweet (Dan. vibe, G. kibitz, Fr. pop. dix-huit).
Next, the echoic word refers to the entity that makes the sound, like the birds cuckoo and peeweet (Dan. vibe, G. kibitz, Fr. pop. dix-huit).
A special subdivision of particular interest comprises those names, or nicknames, which are sometimes popularly given to nations from words continually occurring in their speech. Thus the French used to call an Englishman a god-damn (godon), and in China an English soldier is called a-says or I-says. In Java a Frenchman is called orang-deedong (orang ‘man’), in America ding-dong, and during the Napoleonic wars the French were called in Spain didones, from dis-donc; another name for the same nation is wi-wi (Australia), man-a-wiwi (in Beach-la-mar), or oui-men (New Caledonia). In Eleonore Christine’s Jammersminde 83 I read, “Ich habe zwei parle mi franço gefangen,” and correspondingly Goldsmith writes (Globe ed. 624): “Damn the French, the parle vous, and all that belongs to them. What makes the bread rising? the parle vous that devour us.” In Rovigno the surrounding Slavs are called čuje from their exclamation čuje ‘listen, I say,’ and in Hungary German visitors are called vigéc (from wie geht’s?), and customs officers vartapiszli (from wart’ a bissl). Round Panama everything native is called spiggoty, because in the early days the Panamanians, when addressed, used to reply, “No spiggoty [speak] Inglis.” In Yokohama an English or American sailor is called Damuraïsu H’to from ‘Damn your eyes’ and Japanese H’to ‘people.’[102]
A unique category of interest includes those names or nicknames that people often use to refer to nations based on common words in their speech. For example, the French used to call an Englishman a god-damn (godon), and in China, an English soldier is referred to as a-says or I-says. In Java, a Frenchman is called orang-deedong (orang meaning 'man'), in America ding-dong, and during the Napoleonic Wars, the French were called didones in Spain, derived from dis-donc; another name for them is wi-wi in Australia, man-a-wiwi in Beach-la-mar, or oui-men in New Caledonia. In Eleonore Christine’s Jammersminde 83, I read, “Ich habe zwei parle mi franço gefangen,” and similarly, Goldsmith writes (Globe ed. 624): “Damn the French, the parle vous, and all that belongs to them. What makes the bread rise? The parle vous that devour us.” In Rovigno, the surrounding Slavs are called čuje from their exclamation čuje meaning 'listen, I say,' and in Hungary, German visitors are called vigéc (from wie geht’s?), while customs officers are referred to as vartapiszli (from wart’ a bissl). Around Panama, everything native is called spiggoty because, in the early days, Panamanians would respond, “No spiggoty [speak] Inglis.” In Yokohama, an English or American sailor is called Damuraïsu H’to from ‘Damn your eyes’ and Japanese H’to meaning ‘people.’[102]
XX.—§ 5. Movement.
Thirdly, as sound is always produced by some movement and is nothing but the impression which that movement makes on the ear, it is quite natural that the movement itself may be expressed by the word for its sound: the two are, in fact, inseparable. Note, for instance, such verbs as bubble, splash, clash, crack, peck. Human actions may therefore be denoted by such words as to bang the door, or (with slighter sounds) to tap or rap at a door. Hence also the substantives a tap or a rap for the action, but the substantive may also come to stand for the implement, as when from the verb to hack, ‘to cut, chop off, break up hard earth,’ we have the noun hack, ‘a mattock or large pick.’
Thirdly, since sound is always made by some kind of movement and is just the impression that movement leaves on the ear, it's natural that the movement itself can be expressed by the word for its sound; they're actually inseparable. For example, consider verbs like bubble, splash, clash, crack, peck. Human actions can also be described with words like to bang the door, or (for softer sounds) to tap or rap on a door. This is why we also have the nouns tap or rap for the action, but the noun can also refer to the tool itself, as seen in the verb to hack, meaning ‘to cut, chop off, or break up hard earth,’ from which we get the noun hack, referring to ‘a mattock or large pick.’
Then we have words expressive of such movements as are not to the same extent characterized by loud sounds; thus a great[400] many words beginning with l-combinations, fl-: flow, flag (Dan. flagre), flake, flutter, flicker, fling, flit, flurry, flirt; sl-: slide, slip, slive; gl-: glide. Hence adjectives like fleet, slippery, glib. Sound and sight may have been originally combined in such expressions for an uncertain walk as totter, dodder, dialectical teeter, titter, dither, but in cases of this kind the audible element may be wanting, and the word may come to be felt as symbolic of the movement as such. This is also the case with many expressions for the sudden, rapid movement by which we take hold of something; as a short vowel, suddenly interrupted by a stopped consonant, serves to express the sound produced by a very rapid striking movement (pat, tap, knock, etc.), similar sound combinations occur frequently for the more or less noiseless seizing of a thing (with the teeth or with the hand): snap, snack, snatch, catch, Fr. happer, attraper, gripper, E. grip, Dan. hapse, nappe, Lat. capio, Gr. kaptō, Armenian kap ‘I seize,’ Turk kapmak (mak infin. ending), etc. (I shall only mention one derivative meaning that may develop from this group: E. snack ‘a hurried meal,’ in Swift’s time called a snap (Journ. to Stella 270); cf. G. schnapps, Dan. snaps ‘glass of spirits.’) E. chase and catch are both derived from two dialectically different French forms, ultimately going back to the same late Latin verb captiare, but it is no mere accident that it was the form ‘catch’ that acquired the meaning ‘to seize,’ not found in French, for it naturally associated itself with snatch, and especially with the now obsolete verb latch ‘to seize.’
Then we have words that describe movements not usually marked by loud sounds. There are many words that start with l-combinations, fl-: flow, flag (Dan. flagre), flake, flutter, flicker, fling, flit, flurry, flirt; sl-: slide, slip, slive; gl-: glide. This leads to adjectives like fleet, slippery, glib. Sound and sight might have originally merged in expressions for an uncertain walk, like totter, dodder, dialectically teeter, titter, dither, but in such cases the audible element might be missing, and the word may come to represent the movement itself. This is also true for many expressions of the quick, sudden movement by which we grab something; a short vowel, suddenly cut off by a stopped consonant, illustrates the sound made by a fast striking motion (pat, tap, knock, etc.). Similar sound combinations often appear for the more or less silent act of seizing something (with teeth or hand): snap, snack, snatch, catch, Fr. happer, attraper, gripper, E. grip, Dan. hapse, nappe, Lat. capio, Gr. kaptō, Armenian kap ‘I seize,’ Turk kapmak (mak infinitive ending), etc. (I will only mention one derivative meaning that may develop from this group: E. snack ‘a hurried meal,’ in Swift’s time called a snap (Journ. to Stella 270); cf. G. schnapps, Dan. snaps ‘glass of spirits.’) E. chase and catch both come from two dialectically different French forms, ultimately tracing back to the same late Latin verb captiare, but it's not just a coincidence that the form ‘catch’ developed the meaning ‘to seize,’ which is not found in French, as it naturally linked to snatch, and especially to the now obsolete verb latch ‘to seize.’
There is also a natural connexion between action and sound in the word to tickle, G. kitzeln, ON. kitla, Dan. kilde (d mute), Nubian killi-killi, and similar forms (Schuchardt, Nubisch. u. Bask. 9), Lat. titillare; cp. also the word for the kind of laughter thus produced: titter, G. kichern.
There’s also a natural connection between action and sound in the word to tickle, G. kitzeln, ON. kitla, Dan. kilde (d mute), Nubian killi-killi, and similar forms (Schuchardt, Nubisch. u. Bask. 9), Lat. titillare; see also the word for the type of laughter that results: titter, G. kichern.
XX.—§ 6. Things and Appearances.
Further, we have the extension of symbolical designation to things; here, too, there is some more or less obvious association of what is only visible with some sound or sounds. This has been specially studied by Hilmer, to whose book (Sch) the reader is referred for numerous examples, e.g. p. 237 ff., knap ‘a thick stick, a knot of wood, a bit of food, a protuberance, a small hill;’ knop ‘a boss, stud, button, knob, a wart, pimple, the bud of a flower, a promontory,’ with the variants knob, knup.... Hilmer’s word-lists from German and English comprise 170 pages!
Furthermore, we have the extension of symbolic designation to things; here, too, there’s a more or less obvious connection between what is only visible and certain sounds. This has been specifically studied by Hilmer, whose book (Sch) the reader can refer to for many examples, e.g., p. 237 ff., knap ‘a thick stick, a knot of wood, a bit of food, a bump, a small hill;’ knop ‘a boss, stud, button, knob, a wart, pimple, the bud of a flower, a promontory,’ along with the variants knob, knup.... Hilmer’s word lists from German and English comprise 170 pages!
There is also a natural association between high tones (sounds with very rapid vibrations) and light, and inversely between low tones and darkness, as is seen in the frequent use of adjectives[401] like ‘light’ and ‘dark’ in speaking of notes. Hence the vowel [i] is felt to be more appropriate for light, and [u] for dark, as seen most clearly in the contrast between gleam, glimmer, glitter on the one hand and gloom on the other (Zangwill somewhere writes: “The gloom of night, relieved only by the gleam from the street-lamp”); the word light itself, which has now a diphthong which is not so adequate to the meaning, used to have the vowel [i] like G. licht; for the opposite notions we have such words as G. dunkel, Dan. mulm, Gr. amolgós, skótos, Lat. obscurus, and with another ‘dark’ vowel E. murky, Dan. mörk.
There’s a natural connection between high tones (sounds with very fast vibrations) and light, and conversely between low tones and darkness, as seen in the common use of adjectives like ‘light’ and ‘dark’ when discussing notes. Therefore, the vowel [i] feels more fitting for light, while [u] suits dark, which is most evident in the contrast between gleam, glimmer, glitter on one side and gloom on the other (Zangwill once wrote: “The gloom of night, relieved only by the gleam from the street-lamp”); the word light, which now has a diphthong that doesn’t fully capture the meaning, used to have the vowel [i] like G. licht; for the opposing ideas we have words like G. dunkel, Dan. mulm, Gr. amolgós, skótos, Lat. obscurus, and another word for ‘dark’ with a different vowel, E. murky, Dan. mörk.
XX.—§ 7. States of Mind.
From this it is no far cry to words for corresponding states of mind: to some extent the very same words are used, as gloom (Dowden writes: “The good news was needed to cast a gleam on the gloom that encompassed Shelley”); hence also glum, glumpy, glumpish, grumpy, the dumps, sulky. If E. moody and sullen have changed their significations (OE. modig ‘high-spirited,’ ME. solein ‘solitary’), sound symbolism, if I am not mistaken, counts for something in the change; the adjectives now mean exactly the same as Dan. mut, but.
From this, it's not a big leap to words that describe similar states of mind: to some extent, the same words are used, like gloom (Dowden writes: “The good news was needed to cast a gleam on the gloom that surrounded Shelley”); that includes glum, glumpy, glumpish, grumpy, the dumps, sulky. If E. moody and sullen have shifted in meaning (OE. modig ‘high-spirited,’ ME. solein ‘solitary’), sound symbolism, if I'm not mistaken, plays a role in the change; the adjectives now mean exactly the same as Dan. mut, but.
If grumble comes to mean the expression of a mental state of dissatisfaction, the connexion between the sound of the word and its sense is even more direct, for the verb is imitative of the sound produced in such moods, cf. mumble and grunt, gruntle. The name of Mrs. Grundy is not badly chosen as a representative of narrow-minded conventional morality.
If grumble means expressing a mental state of dissatisfaction, the link between the sound of the word and its meaning is even more straightforward, because the verb mimics the sound made in those moods, like mumble and grunt, gruntle. The name of Mrs. Grundy fits well as a symbol of narrow-minded conventional morality.
A long list might be given of symbolic expressions for dislike, disgust, or scorn; here a few hints only can find place. First we have the same dull or dump (back) vowels as in the last paragraph: blunder, bungle, bung, clumsy, humdrum, humbug, strum, slum, slush, slubber, sloven, muck, mud, muddle, mug (various words, but all full of contempt), juggins (a silly person), numskull (old numps, nup, nupson), dunderhead, gull, scug (at Eton a dirty or untidy boy).... Many words begin with sl- (we have already seen some): slight, slim, slack, sly, sloppy, slipslop, slubby, slattern, slut, slosh.... Initial labials are also frequent.[103] After the vowel we have very often the sound [ʃ] or [tʃ], as in trash, tosh, slosh, botch, patch; cf. also G. kitsch (bad picture, smearing), patsch(e) (mire, anything worthless), quatsch (silly nonsense), putsch (riot, political coup de main). E. bosh (nonsense) is said to be a Turkish loan-word; it has become popular for the same[402] reason for which the French nickname boche for a German was widely used during the World War. Let me finally mention the It. derivative suffix -accio, as in poveraccio (miserable), acquaccia (bad water), and -uccio, as in cavalluccio (vile horse).
A long list could be provided of symbolic terms for dislike, disgust, or scorn; here are just a few examples. First, we have the same dull or harsh (back) vowels as in the last paragraph: blunder, bungle, bung, clumsy, humdrum, humbug, strum, slum, slush, slubber, sloven, muck, mud, muddle, mug (various words, but all full of contempt), juggins (a silly person), numskull (old numps, nup, nupson), dunderhead, gull, scug (at Eton a dirty or untidy boy).... Many words start with sl- (we have already seen some): slight, slim, slack, sly, sloppy, slipslop, slubby, slattern, slut, slosh.... Initial labials are also common.[103] After the vowel, we often have the sound [ʃ] or [tʃ], as in trash, tosh, slosh, botch, patch; see also G. kitsch (bad picture, smearing), patsch(e) (mire, anything worthless), quatsch (silly nonsense), putsch (riot, political coup de main). E. bosh (nonsense) is considered a Turkish loan-word; it became popular for the same[402] reason that the French nickname boche for a German was widely used during World War I. Finally, let me mention the Italian derivative suffix -accio, as in poveraccio (miserable), acquaccia (bad water), and -uccio, as in cavalluccio (vile horse).
XX.—§ 8. Size and Distance.
The vowel [i], especially in its narrow or thin variety, is particularly appropriate to express what is small, weak, insignificant, or, on the other hand, refined or dainty. It is found in a great many adjectives in various languages, e.g. little, petit, piccolo, piccino, Magy. kis, E. wee, tiny (by children often pronounced teeny [ti·ni]), slim, Lat. minor, minimus, Gr. mikros; further, in numerous words for small children or small animals (the latter frequently used as endearing or depreciative words for children), e.g. child (formerly with [i·] sound), G. kind, Dan. pilt, E. kid, chit, imp, slip, pigmy, midge, Sp. chico, or for small things: bit, chip, whit, Lat. quisquiliæ, mica, E. tip, pin, chink, slit.... The same vowel is found in diminutive suffixes in a variety of languages, as E. -y, -ie (Bobby, baby, auntie, birdie), Du. -ie, -je (koppie ‘little hill’), Gr. -i- (paid-i-on ‘little boy’), Goth. -ein, pronounced [i·n] (gumein ‘little man’), E. -kin, -ling, Swiss German -li, It. -ino, Sp. -ico, -ito, -illo....
The vowel [i], especially in its narrow or thin form, is particularly suited to convey smallness, weakness, insignificance, or, conversely, refinement or delicacy. It's found in many adjectives across different languages, for example, little, petit, piccolo, piccino, Magy. kis, E. wee, tiny (often pronounced as teeny [ti·ni]), slim, Lat. minor, minimus, Gr. mikros; additionally, in many words for young children or small animals (the latter often used as affectionate or belittling terms for children), such as child (previously pronounced with [i·] sound), G. kind, Dan. pilt, E. kid, chit, imp, slip, pigmy, midge, Sp. chico, or for small items: bit, chip, whit, Lat. quisquiliæ, mica, E. tip, pin, chink, slit.... The same vowel appears in diminutive suffixes in various languages, such as E. -y, -ie (Bobby, baby, auntie, birdie), Du. -ie, -je (koppie ‘little hill’), Gr. -i- (paid-i-on ‘little boy’), Goth. -ein, pronounced [i·n] (gumein ‘little man’), E. -kin, -ling, Swiss German -li, It. -ino, Sp. -ico, -ito, -illo....
As smallness and weakness are often taken to be characteristic of the female sex, I suspect that the Aryan feminine suffix -i, as in Skr. vṛkī ‘she-wolf,’ naptī ‘niece,’ originally denotes smallness (‘wolfy’), and in the same way we find the vowel i in many feminine suffixes; thus late Lat. -itta (Julitta, etc., whence Fr. -ette, Henriette, etc.), -ina (Carolina), further G. -in (königin), Gr. -issa (basilissa ‘queen’), whence Fr. -esse, E. -ess.
As smallness and weakness are often associated with women, I believe that the Aryan feminine suffix -i, as seen in Skr. vṛkī ‘she-wolf,’ naptī ‘niece,’ originally indicates smallness (‘wolfy’). Similarly, we find the vowel i in many feminine suffixes; for example, late Latin -itta (Julitta, etc., leading to Fr. -ette, Henriette, etc.), -ina (Carolina), and also German -in (königin), Greek -issa (basilissa ‘queen’), which gives us Fr. -esse and English -ess.
The same vowel [i] is also symbolical of a very short time, as in the phrases in a jiff, jiffy, Sc. in a clink, Dan. i en svip; and correspondingly we have adjectives like quick, swift, vivid and others. No wonder, then, that the Germans feel their word for ‘lightning,’ blitz, singularly appropriate to the effect of light and to the shortness of duration.[104]
The same vowel [i] also represents a very short time, as seen in phrases like in a jiff, jiffy, Sc. in a clink, Dan. i en svip; and similarly, we have adjectives like quick, swift, vivid, and others. It’s no surprise that the Germans find their word for ‘lightning,’ blitz, particularly fitting for both the effect of light and its brief duration.[104]
It has often been remarked[105] that in corresponding pronouns and adverbs the vowel i frequently indicates what is nearer, and other vowels, especially a or u, what is farther off; thus Fr. ci, là,[403] E. here, there, G. dies, das, Low G. dit, dat, Magy. ez, emez ‘this,’ az, amaz ‘that,’ itt ‘here,’ ott ‘there,’ Malay iki ‘this,’ ika ‘that, a little removed,’ iku ‘yon, farther away.’ In Hamitic languages i symbolizes the near and u what is far away. We may here also think of the word zigzag as denoting movement in alternate turns here and there; and if in the two E. pronouns this and that the old neuter forms have prevailed (OE. m. þes, se, f. þeos, seo, n. þis, þæt) the reason (or one of the reasons) may have been that a characteristic difference of vowels in the two contrasted pronouns was thus secured.
It has often been noted[105] that in corresponding pronouns and adverbs, the vowel i usually indicates something closer, while other vowels, especially a or u, indicate something farther away. For example, in French, we have ci for "here" and là for "there"; in English, here and there; in German, dies for "this" and das for "that"; in Low German, dit for "this" and dat for "that"; in Hungarian, ez and emez meaning "this" and "that," respectively; az and amaz meaning "that," and itt for "here" and ott for "there." In Malay, iki means "this," ika means "that, a little removed," and iku means "yon, farther away." In Hamitic languages, i represents what is near, and u represents what is far away. We can also think of the word zigzag as indicating movement in alternating turns between here and there. If in the two English pronouns this and that, the old neuter forms have persisted (OE. m. þes, se, f. þeos, seo, n. þis, þæt), one reason might be that a distinct difference in vowels between the two contrasting pronouns was maintained.
XX.—§ 9. Length and Strength of Words and Sounds.
Shorter and more abrupt forms are more appropriate to certain states of mind, longer ones to others. An imperative may be used both for command and for a more or less humble appeal or entreaty; in Magyar dialects there are short forms for command: írj, dolgozz; long for entreaty: írjál, dolgozzál (Simonyi US 359, 214). Were Lat. dic, duc, fac, fer used more than other imperatives in commands? The fact that they alone lost -e might indicate that this was so. On the other hand the imperatives es, este and i had to yield to the fuller (and more polite) esto, estote, vade, and scito is always said instead of sci (Wackernagel, Gött. Ges. d. Wiss., 1906, 182, on the avoidance of too short forms in general). Other languages, which have only one form for the imperative, soften the commanding tone by adding some word like please, bitte.
Shorter and more direct forms are better for certain moods, while longer ones suit others. An imperative can be used for both commands and more humble requests; in Hungarian dialects, there are short forms for commands: írj, dolgozz; and longer ones for requests: írjál, dolgozzál (Simonyi US 359, 214). Were Latin imperatives like dic, duc, fac, fer used more often for commands? The fact that they alone dropped -e might suggest this. On the other hand, the imperatives es, este and i had to give way to the longer (and more polite) forms esto, estote, and vade, with scito always used instead of sci (Wackernagel, Gött. Ges. d. Wiss., 1906, 182, on the avoidance of overly short forms in general). Other languages, which have only one form for the imperative, soften the commanding tone by adding words like please or bitte.
An emotional effect is obtained in some cases by lengthening a word by some derivative syllables, in themselves unmeaning; thus in Danish words for ‘lengthy’ or ‘tiresome’: langsommelig, kedsommelig, evindelig for lang(som), kedelig, evig. (Cf. Ibsen, Når vi døde vågner 98: Du er kanske ble’t ked af dette evige samliv med mig.—Evige? Sig lige så godt: evindelige.) In the same way the effect of splendid is strengthened in slang: splendiferous, splendidous, splendidious, splendacious. A long word like aggravate is felt to be more intense than vex (Coleman)—and that may be the reason why the long word acquires a meaning that is strange to its etymology. And “to disburden one’s self of a sense of contempt, a robust full-bodied detonation, like, for instance, platitudinous, is, unquestionably, very much more serviceable than any evanescing squib of one or two syllables” (Fitzedward Hall). Cf. also multitudinous, multifarious.
An emotional effect is created in some cases by stretching a word with extra syllables that don't have their own meaning; for example, in Danish words for 'long' or 'boring': langsommelig, kedsommelig, evindelig for lang(som), kedelig, evig. (See Ibsen, Når vi døde vågner 98: You might be tired of this endless relationship with me.—Endless? You might as well say: eternal.) Similarly, the impact of splendid is enhanced in slang: splendiferous, splendidous, splendidious, splendacious. A long word like aggravate feels more intense than vex (Coleman)—and that might be why the longer word takes on a meaning that's different from its origin. And “to rid oneself of a sense of contempt, a strong, full-bodied explosion, like, for instance, platitudinous, is definitely much more effective than any fleeting little word of one or two syllables” (Fitzedward Hall). Also see multitudinous, multifarious.
We see now the emotional value of some ‘mouth-filling’ words, some of which may be considered symbolical expansions of existing words (what H. Schröder terms ‘streckformen’), though others[404] cannot be thus explained; not unfrequently the effect of length is combined with some of the phonetic effects mentioned above. Such words are, e.g., slubberdegullion ‘dirty fellow,’ rumbustious ‘boisterous,’ rumgumption, rumfustian, rumbullion (cf. rumpuncheon ‘cask of rum’ as a term of abuse in Stevenson, Treas. Isl. 48, “the cowardly son of a rum-puncheon”), rampallion ‘villain,’ rapscallion, ragamuffin; sculduddery ‘obscenity’; cantankerous ‘quarrelsome,’ U.S. also rantankerous (cf. cankerous, rancorous); skilligalee ‘miserable gruel,’ flabbergast ‘confound,’ catawampous (or -ptious) ‘fierce’ (“a high-sounding word with no very definite meaning,” NED); Fr. hurluberlu ‘crazy’ and the synonymous Dan. tummelumsk, Norw. tullerusk.
We now recognize the emotional impact of certain 'mouth-filling' words, some of which can be seen as symbolic extensions of existing words (what H. Schröder refers to as ‘streckformen’), although others[404] can't be explained that way; often, the length of these words is paired with some of the phonetic effects mentioned earlier. Examples of such words include slubberdegullion for ‘dirty fellow,’ rumbustious for ‘boisterous,’ rumgumption, rumfustian, rumbullion (see rumpuncheon for ‘cask of rum’ as an insult in Stevenson, Treas. Isl. 48, “the cowardly son of a rum-puncheon”), rampallion for ‘villain,’ rapscallion, ragamuffin; sculduddery means ‘obscenity’; cantankerous means ‘quarrelsome,’ and in the U.S. there's also rantankerous (compare with cankerous, rancorous); skilligalee means ‘miserable gruel,’ flabbergast means ‘confound,’ and catawampous (or -ptious) means ‘fierce’ (“a high-sounding word with no very definite meaning,” NED); French hurluberlu means ‘crazy’ and the similar Danish tummelumsk and Norwegian tullerusk.
In this connexion one may mention the natural tendency to lengthen and to strengthen single sounds under the influence of strong feeling and in order to intensify the effect of the spoken word; thus, in ‘it’s very cold’ both the diphthong [ou] and the [l] may be pronounced extremely long, in ‘terribly dull’ the [l] is lengthened, in ‘extremely long’ either the vowel [ɔ] or the [ŋ] (or both) may be lengthened. In Fr. ‘c’était horrible’ the trill of the [r] becomes very long and intense (while the same effect is not generally possible in the corresponding English word, because the English [r] is not trilled, but pronounced by one flap of the tip). In some cases a lengthening due to such a psychological cause may permanently alter a word, as when Lat. totus in It. has become tutto (Fr. tout, toute goes back to the same form, while Sp. todo has preserved the form corresponding to the Lat. single consonant). An interesting collection of such cases from the Romanic tongues has been published by A. J. Carnoy (Mod. Philol. 15. 31, July 1917), who justly emphasizes the symbolic value of the change and the special character of the words in which it occurs (pet-names, children’s words, ironic or derisive words, imitative words ...). He says: “While to a phonetician the phenomenon would seem capricious, its apportionment in the vocabulary is quite natural to a psychologist. In fact, reduplication, be it of syllables or of consonants, generally has that character in languages. One finds it in perfective tenses, in intensive or frequentative verbs, in the plural, and in collectives. In most cases it is a reduplication of syllables, but a lengthening of vowels is not rare and the reinforcement of consonants is also found. In Chinook, for instance, the emotional words, both diminutive and augmentative, are expressed by increasing the stress of consonants. It is, of course, also well known that in Semitic the intensive radical of verbs is regularly formed by a reduplication of consonants. To a stem qatal, e.g., answers an intensive: Eth. qattala, Hebr. qittel. Cf. Hebr. shibbar ‘to cut in small pieces’[405] [cf. below], hillech ‘to walk,’ qibber ‘to bury many,’ etc. Cf. Brockelmann, Vergl. Gramm., p. 244.”
In this context, one can point out the natural tendency to stretch and strengthen individual sounds when feeling strong emotions, in order to enhance the impact of spoken words. For example, in "it’s very cold," both the diphthong [ou] and the [l] can be pronounced quite long; in "terribly dull," the [l] is lengthened; and in "extremely long," either the vowel [ɔ] or the [ŋ] (or both) may be extended. In French, “it was terrible” features a long and intense trill of the [r] (unlike in the corresponding English word, where the English [r] isn’t trilled but pronounced with a single flap of the tongue). Sometimes, lengthening caused by such psychological factors can permanently change a word, as in the case of Latin totus becoming tutto in Italian (French tout, toute share this origin, while Spanish todo retains the form that corresponds to the Latin single consonant). A fascinating collection of such examples from Romance languages has been compiled by A. J. Carnoy in Mod. Philol. 15. 31, July 1917, who appropriately highlights the symbolic significance of these changes and the unique character of the words where they occur (such as pet names, children’s words, ironic or mocking terms, and imitative expressions). He states: “To a phonetician, this phenomenon might seem random, but its distribution in the vocabulary makes perfect sense to a psychologist. In fact, reduplication, whether of syllables or consonants, typically has that quality in languages. It appears in perfective tenses, in intensive or frequentative verbs, in plurals, and in collectives. Mostly, it's a reduplication of syllables, though vowel lengthening is not uncommon, and consonant reinforcement can also be observed. For instance, in Chinook, emotional words, whether diminutive or augmentative, are formed by increasing the stress on consonants. It is also well-known that in Semitic languages, the intensive form of verbs is typically created through consonant reduplication. For a root like qatal, the intensive forms include Eth. qattala and Hebr. qittel. See also Hebr. shibbar meaning ‘to cut into small pieces’[405], hillech meaning ‘to walk,’ qibber meaning ‘to bury many,’ etc. Refer to Brockelmann, Vergl. Gramm., p. 244.”
I add a few more examples from Misteli (428 f.) of this Semitic strengthening: the first vowel is lengthened to express a tendency or an attempt: qatala jaqtulu ‘kill’ (in the third person masc., the former in the prefect-aorist, the latter in the imperfect-durative, where ja, ju is the sign of the third person m.), qātala juqātilu ‘try to kill, fight’; faXara jufXaru ‘excel in fame,’ fāXara jufāXiru ‘try to excel, vie.’ Through lengthening (doubling) of a consonant an intensification of the action is denoted: Hebr. šāβar jišbōr ‘zerbrechen,’ šibbēr jẹšabbēr ‘zerschmettern,’ Arab. ḍaraba jaḍrubu ‘strike,’ ḍarraba juḍarribu ‘beat violently, or repeatedly’; sometimes the change makes a verb into a causative or transitive, etc.
I will provide a few more examples from Misteli (428 f.) of this Semitic strengthening: the first vowel is lengthened to show a tendency or an attempt: qatala jaqtulu ‘kill’ (in the third person masculine, the former in the perfect aspect, the latter in the imperfect aspect, where ja, ju indicates the third person masculine), qātala juqātilu ‘try to kill, fight’; faXara jufXaru ‘excel in fame,’ fāXara jufāXiru ‘try to excel, vie.’ By lengthening (doubling) a consonant, an intensification of the action is indicated: Hebr. šāβar jišbōr ‘break,’ šibbēr yɛšabbēr ‘break,’ Arab. ḍaraba jaḍrubu ‘strike,’ ḍarraba juḍarribu ‘beat violently, or repeatedly’; sometimes the change turns a verb into a causative or transitive form, etc.
I imagine that we have exactly the same kind of strengthening for psychological (symbolical) reasons in a number of verbs where Danish has pp, tt, kk by the side of b, d, g (spirantic): pippe pibe, stritte stride, snitte snide, skøtte skøde, splitte splide, skrikke skrige, lukke luge, hikke hige, sikke sige, kikke kige, prikke prige (cf. also sprække sprænge). Some of these forms are obsolete, others dialectal, but it would take us too far in this place to deal with the words in detail. It is customary to ascribe this gemination to an old n derivative (see, e.g., Brugmann VG 1. 390, Streitberg Urg pp. 135, 138, Noreen UL 154), but it does not seem necessary to conjure up an n from the dead to make it disappear again immediately, as the mere strengthening of the consonant itself to express symbolically the strengthening of the action has nothing unnatural in it. Cf. also G. placken by the side of plagen. The opposite change, a weakening, may have taken place in E. flag (cf. OFr. flaquir, to become flaccid), flabby, earlier flappy, drib from drip, slab, if from OFr. esclape, clod by the side of clot, and possibly cadge, bodge, grudge, smudge, which had all of them originally -tch. But the common modification in sense is not so easily perceived here as in the cases of strengthening.
I think we have the same kind of strengthening for psychological (symbolic) reasons in many verbs where Danish has pp, tt, kk next to b, d, g (spirantic): pippe pibe, stritte stride, snitte snide, skøtte skøde, splitte splide, skrikke skrige, lukke luge, hikke hige, sikke sige, kikke kige, prikke prige (see also sprække sprænge). Some of these forms are outdated, others are dialectal, but it would be too much to go into detail about these words here. It's common to attribute this gemination to an old n derivative (see, for example, Brugmann VG 1. 390, Streitberg Urg pp. 135, 138, Noreen UL 154), but it doesn't seem necessary to bring an n back from the dead only to let it disappear again right away, since the mere strengthening of the consonant itself to symbolically express the intensification of the action isn't unnatural. Also, compare G. placken next to plagen. The opposite process, a weakening, might have happened in E. flag (see OFr. flaquir, meaning to become flaccid), flabby, earlier flappy, drib from drip, slab, if from OFr. esclape, clod next to clot, and possibly cadge, bodge, grudge, smudge, which all originally had -tch. However, the general change in meaning is not as easily recognized here as in the strengthening cases.
I may here, for the curiosity of the thing, mention that in a ‘language’ coined by two English children (a vocabulary of which was communicated to me by one of the inventors through Miss I. C. Ward, of the Department of Phonetics, University College, London) there was a word bal which meant ‘place,’ but the bigger the place the longer the vowel was made, so that with three different quantities it meant ‘village,’ ‘town’ and ‘city’ respectively. The word for ‘go’ was dudu, “the greater the speed of the going, the more quickly the word was said—[dœ·dœ·] walk slowly.” Cf. Humboldt, ed. Steinthal 82: “In the southern dialect of the Guarani language the suffix of the perfect yma is[406] pronounced more or less slowly according to the more or less remoteness of the past to be indicated.”
I want to mention, out of curiosity, that in a ‘language’ created by two English kids (a vocabulary of which was shared with me by one of the creators through Miss I. C. Ward from the Department of Phonetics at University College, London), there was a word bal that meant ‘place.’ The larger the place, the longer the vowel sound was made, so with three different lengths, it meant ‘village,’ ‘town,’ and ‘city’ respectively. The word for ‘go’ was dudu; the faster you moved, the quicker you pronounced the word—[dœ·dœ·] meant walk slowly. Cf. Humboldt, ed. Steinthal 82: “In the southern dialect of the Guarani language, the suffix of the perfect yma is[406] pronounced more or less slowly depending on how far back in the past it refers to.”
XX.—§ 10. General Considerations.
Sound symbolism, as we have considered it in this chapter, has a very wide range of application, from direct imitation of perceived natural sounds to such small quantitative changes of existing non-symbolic words as may be used for purely grammatical purposes. But in order to obtain a true valuation of this factor in the life of language it is of importance to keep in view the following considerations:
Sound symbolism, as we've discussed in this chapter, has a broad range of applications, from directly imitating natural sounds to slight quantitative changes in existing non-symbolic words for purely grammatical reasons. However, to truly assess the significance of this factor in the evolution of language, it's important to keep the following points in mind:
(1) No language utilizes sound symbolism to its full extent, but contains numerous words that are indifferent to or may even jar with symbolism. To express smallness the vowel [i] is most adequate, but it would be absurd to say that that vowel always implies smallness, or that smallness is always expressed by words containing that vowel: it is enough to mention the words big and small, or to point to the fact that thick and thin have the same vowel, to repudiate such a notion.
(1) No language fully uses sound symbolism but has many words that either ignore or even clash with symbolism. The vowel [i] is best for expressing smallness, but it would be ridiculous to claim that this vowel always suggests smallness, or that smallness is always conveyed by words with that vowel: just look at the words big and small, or consider that thick and thin share the same vowel, which disproves that idea.
(2) Words that have been symbolically expressive may cease to be so in consequence of historical development, either phonetic or semantic or both. Thus the name of the bird crow is not now so good an imitation of the sound made by the bird as OE. crawe was (Dan. krage, Du. kraai). Thus, also, the verbs whine, pipe were better imitations when the vowel was still [i·] (as in Dan. hvine, pibe). But to express the sound of a small bird the latter word is still pronounced with the vowel [i] either long or short (peep, pip), the word having been constantly renewed and as it were reshaped by fresh imitation; cf. on Irish wheen and dialectal peep, XV § 8. Lat. pipio originally meant any ‘peeping bird,’ but when it came to designate one particular kind of birds, it was free to follow the usual trend of phonetic development, and so has become Fr. pigeon [piʒɔ̃], E. pigeon [pidʒin]. E. cuckoo has resisted the change from [u] to ʌ as in cut, because people have constantly heard the sound and fashioned the name of the bird from it. I once heard a Scotch lady say [kʌku·], but on my inquiry she told me that there were no cuckoos in her native place; hence the word had there been treated as any other word containing the short [u]. The same word is interesting in another way; it has resisted the old Gothonic consonant-shift, and thus has the same consonants as Skt. kōkiláḥ, Gr. kókkux, Lat. cuculus. On the general preservation of significative sounds, cf. Ch. XV § 8.
(2) Words that used to be very expressive might lose that quality over time due to historical changes, either in sound or meaning, or both. For example, the name of the bird crow is not as close to the sound it makes now as OE. crawe was (Dan. krage, Du. kraai). Similarly, the verbs whine and pipe were better representations when the vowel was still pronounced as [i·] (as in Dan. hvine, pibe). However, to express the sound of a small bird, the latter word is still pronounced with a vowel [i], whether it's long or short (peep, pip), as the word has continually evolved and been reshaped by fresh imitation; see also the Irish wheen and dialectal peep, XV § 8. Latin pipio originally meant any ‘peeping bird,’ but when it became specific to one type of bird, it followed the usual pattern of phonetic change, evolving into Fr. pigeon [piʒɔ̃], E. pigeon [pidʒin]. The word E. cuckoo has resisted the change from [u] to ʌ as in cut, because people have constantly heard the sound and named the bird after it. I once heard a Scottish woman say [kʌku·], but when I asked her, she told me there were no cuckoos in her hometown; therefore, the word there was treated like any other word with a short [u]. This same word is interesting in another way; it has resisted the old Gothic consonant shift, preserving the same consonants as Skt. kōkiláḥ, Gr. kókkux, Lat. cuculus. For more on the general preservation of meaningful sounds, see Ch. XV § 8.
(3) On the other hand, some words have in course of time become more expressive than they were at first; we have some[407]thing that may be called secondary echoism or secondary symbolism. The verb patter comes from pater (= paternoster), and at first meant to repeat that prayer, to mumble one’s prayers; but then it was associated with the homophonous verb patter ‘to make a rapid succession of pats’ and came under the influence of echoic words like prattle, chatter, jabber; it now, like these, means ‘to talk rapidly or glibly’ and is to all intents a truly symbolical word; cf. also the substantive patter ‘secret lingo, speechifying, talk.’ Husky may at first have meant only “full of husks, of the nature of a husk” (NED), but it could not possibly from that signification have arrived at the now current sense ‘dry in the throat, hoarse’ if it had not been that the sound of the adjective had reminded one of the sound of a hoarse voice. Dan. pöjt ‘poor drink, vile stuff’ is now felt as expressive of contempt, but it originates in Poitou, an innocent geographical name of a kind of wine, like Bordeaux; it is now connected with other scornful words like spröjt and döjt.
(3) On the other hand, some words have become more expressive over time than they originally were; we have something that could be called secondary echoism or secondary symbolism. The verb patter comes from pater (= paternoster), and initially meant to repeat that prayer, to mumble one’s prayers; but then it got linked with the homophonous verb patter meaning ‘to make a rapid succession of pats’ and was influenced by echoic words like prattle, chatter, jabber; it now, like these, means ‘to talk rapidly or glibly’ and has become a truly symbolical word; see also the noun patter meaning ‘secret lingo, speechifying, talk.’ Husky may have initially meant only “full of husks, of the nature of a husk” (NED), but it could not have reached the current meaning ‘dry in the throat, hoarse’ without the sound of the adjective reminding people of a hoarse voice. Danish pöjt meaning ‘poor drink, vile stuff’ is now considered contemptuous, but it originates from Poitou, an innocent geographical name for a kind of wine, like Bordeaux; it is now linked with other scornful words like spröjt and döjt.
In E. little the symbolic vowel i is regularly developed from OE. y, lytel, whose y is a mutated u, as seen in OSax. luttil; u also appears in other related languages, and the word thus originally had nothing symbolical about it. But in Gothic the word is leitils (ei, sounded [i·]) and in ON. lítinn, and here the vowel is so difficult to account for on ordinary principles that the NED in despair thinks that the two words are “radically unconnected.” I have no hesitation in supposing that the vowel i is due to sound symbolism, exactly as the smaller change introduced in modern E. ‘leetle,’ with narrow instead of wide (broad) [i]. In the word for the opposite meaning, much, the phonetic development may also have been influenced by the tendency to get an adequate vowel, for normally we should expect the vowel [i] as in Sc. mickle, from OE. micel. In E. quick the vowel best adapted to the idea has prevailed instead of the one found in the old nom. forms cwucu, cucu from cwicu (inflected cwicne, cwices, etc.), while in the word widu, wudu, which is phonetically analogous, there was no such inducement, and the vowel [u] has been preserved: wood. The same prevalence of the symbolic i is noticed in the Dan. adj. kvik, MLG. quik, while the same word as subst. has become Dan. kvæg, MLG. quek, where there was no symbolism at work, as it has come to mean ‘cattle.’ I even see symbolism in the preservation of the k in the Dan. adj. (as against the fricative in kvæg), because the notion of ‘quick’ is best expressed by the short [i], interrupted by a stop; and may not the same force have been at work in this adjective at an earlier period? The second k in OE. cwicu, ON. kvikr as against Goth. qius, Lat. vivus, has not been sufficiently explained. An [i], symbolic of smallness, has been introduced in some comparatively recent E. words: tip from top,[408] trip ‘small flock’ from troop, sip ‘drink in small quantities’ from sup, sop.
In the word "little," the symbolic vowel "i" comes from Old English "y," as in "lytel," where the "y" is a mutated "u," similar to the Old Saxon "luttil." The "u" also appears in other related languages, indicating that the word originally had no symbolic meaning. However, in Gothic, the word is "leitils" (with "ei" pronounced [i·]), and in Old Norse, it becomes "lítinn." Here, the vowel is hard to explain through normal rules, leading the NED to suggest that the two words are “radically unconnected.” I believe that the vowel "i" arises from sound symbolism, similar to the smaller change seen in modern English “leetle,” which uses a narrow instead of wide [i]. For the opposite meaning, "much," the phonetic evolution may also have been influenced by the need for a suitable vowel. We would normally expect the vowel [i] as seen in Scottish "mickle," derived from Old English "micel." In modern English "quick," the vowel that best fits the concept has taken over rather than the one found in the old nominative forms "cwucu," "cucu" from "cwicu" (inflected forms include "cwicne," "cwices," etc.). In the word "widu," "wudu," which is phonetically similar, there was no such pressure, and the vowel [u] has been kept: "wood." The same preference for the symbolic "i" is found in the Danish adjective "kvik," and in Middle Low German "quik," while the same word as a noun has become Danish "kvæg," Middle Low German "quek," where no symbolism is present, as it now means ‘cattle.’ I even notice symbolism in the retention of the "k" in the Danish adjective (as opposed to the fricative in "kvæg"), because the idea of ‘quick’ is best conveyed with the short [i], interrupted by a stop. Might the same influence have applied to this adjective at an earlier time? The second "k" in Old English "cwicu," Old Norse "kvikr," compared to Gothic "qius," and Latin "vivus," hasn't been adequately explained. An [i], symbolizing smallness, has been introduced in some relatively recent English words: "tip" from "top," "trip" meaning ‘small flock’ from "troop," "sip" meaning ‘drink in small quantities’ from "sup," and "sop."
Through changes in meaning, too, some words have become symbolically more expressive than they were formerly; thus the agreement between sound and sense is of late growth in miniature, which now, on account of the i, has come to mean ‘a small picture,’ while at first it meant ‘image painted with minium or vermilion,’ and in pittance, now ‘a scanty allowance,’ formerly any pious donation, whether great or small. Cf. what has been said above of sullen, moody, catch.
Through changes in meaning, some words have become symbolically more expressive than they used to be; for example, the word miniature has evolved, and now, because of the i, it means ‘a small picture,’ whereas it originally referred to ‘an image painted with minium or vermilion.’ Similarly, pittance now means ‘a meager allowance,’ but it used to refer to any charitable donation, large or small. Compare this with what was mentioned earlier about sullen, moody, and catch.
XX.—§ 11. Importance of Suggestiveness.
The suggestiveness of some words as felt by present-day speakers is a fact that must be taken into account if we are to understand the realities of language. In some cases it may have existed from the very first: these words sprang thus into being because that shape at once expressed the idea the speaker wished to communicate. In other cases the suggestive element is not original: these words arose in the same way as innumerable others whose sound has never carried any suggestion. But if the sound of a word of this class was, or came to be, in some way suggestive of its signification—say, if a word containing the vowel [i] in a prominent place meant ‘small’ or something small—then the sound exerted a strong influence in gaining popular favour to the word; it was an inducement to people to choose and to prefer that particular word and to cease to use words for the same notion that were not thus favoured. Sound symbolism, we may say, makes some words more fit to survive and gives them considerable help in their struggle for existence. If we want to denote a little child by a word for some small animal, we take some word like kid, chick, kitten, rather than bat or pug or slug, though these may in themselves be smaller than the animal chosen.
The suggestiveness of certain words as perceived by modern speakers is something we need to consider to truly understand how language works. In some cases, this suggestiveness may have been there from the beginning: these words were created because their sound effectively conveyed the idea the speaker wanted to express. In other cases, the suggestive quality is not original: these words developed in the same way as countless others whose sounds don’t carry any connotation. However, if the sound of a word in this category was, or became, somehow suggestive of its meaning—like if a word with the vowel [i] prominently featured meant ‘small’ or something minor—then that sound had a strong influence in making the word popular; it encouraged people to choose and prefer that specific word over others that didn’t have the same appeal. We can say that sound symbolism makes some words more likely to survive and gives them significant support in their competition for existence. If we want to refer to a little child with a word for a small animal, we might choose words like kid, chick, kitten, rather than bat, pug, or slug, even if those might actually be smaller than the animal we selected.
It is quite true that Fr. rouler, our roll, is derived from Lat. rota ‘wheel’ + a diminutive ending -ul-, but the word would never have gained its immense popularity, extending as it does through English, Dutch, German and the Scandinavian languages, if the sound had not been eminently suggestive of the sense, so suggestive that it seems to us now the natural expression for that idea, and we have difficulty in realizing that the word has not existed from the very dawn of speech. Or let me take another example, in which the connexion between sound and sense is even more ‘fortuitous.’ About a hundred years ago a member of Congress, Felix Walker, from Buncombe County, North Carolina, made a long and tedious speech. “Many members left the hall.[409] Very naïvely he told those who remained that they might go too; he should speak for some time, but ‘he was only talking for Buncombe,’ to please his constituents.” Now buncombe (buncome, bunkum) has become a widely used word, not only in the States, but all over the English-speaking world, for political speaking or action not resting on conviction, but on the desire of gaining the favour of electors, or for any kind of empty ‘clap-trap’ oratory; but does anybody suppose that the name of Mr. Walker’s constituency would have been thus used if he had happened to hail from Annapolis or Philadelphia, or some other place with a name incapable of tickling the popular fancy in the same way as Buncombe does? (Cf. above, p. 401 on the suggestiveness of the short u.) In a similar way hullaballoo seems to have originated from the Irish village Ballyhooly (see P. W. Joyce, English as we speak it in Ireland) and to have become popular on account of its suggestive sound.
It's true that Fr. rouler, our roll, comes from Latin rota meaning 'wheel' with a diminutive ending -ul-, but the word wouldn't have become so popular across English, Dutch, German, and Scandinavian languages if its sound wasn't so strongly connected to its meaning. It feels like the natural expression for that idea, and we struggle to realize that the word hasn't always been around since language began. Let me give another example where the link between sound and meaning is even more coincidental. About a hundred years ago, a Congressman, Felix Walker, from Buncombe County, North Carolina, gave a long and boring speech. “Many members left the hall.[409] He innocently told those who stayed that they could leave too; he was planning to speak for a while, but ‘he was only talking for Buncombe,’ to entertain his constituents.” Now buncombe (also bunkum) has turned into a commonly used term not just in the States but across the English-speaking world for speeches or actions that are not based on genuine belief, but rather on trying to win over voters, or any kind of empty 'claptrap' rhetoric. But does anyone think that the name of Mr. Walker’s district would have ended up being used this way if he had come from Annapolis or Philadelphia, or some other place with a name that lacks the same charm as Buncombe? (See above, p. 401 on the suggestiveness of the short u.) Similarly, hullaballoo seems to have come from the Irish village Ballyhooly (see P. W. Joyce, English as we speak it in Ireland) and gained popularity because of its catchy sound.
In loan-words we can often see that they have been adopted less on account of any cultural necessity (see above, p. 209) than because their sound was in some way or other suggestive. Thus the Algonkin (Natick) word for ‘chief,’ mugquomp, is used in the United States in the form of mugwump for a ‘great man’ or ‘boss,’ and especially, in political life, for a man independent of parties and thinking himself superior to parties. Now, no one would have thought of going to an Indian language to express such a notion, had not an Indian word presented itself which from its uncouth sound lent itself to purposes of ridicule. Among other words whose adoption has been favoured by their sounds I may mention jungle (from Hindi jangal, associated more or less closely with jumble, tumble, bundle, bungle); bobbery, in slang ‘noise, squabble,’ “the Anglo-Indian colloquial representation of a common exclamation of Hindus when in surprise or grief—Bap-rē! or Bap-rē Bap ‘O Father!’” (Hobson-Jobson); amuck; and U.S. bunco ‘swindling game, to swindle,’ from It. banco.
In loanwords, we often see that they’ve been adopted more due to their interesting sounds than any cultural necessity (see above, p. 209). For example, the Algonkin (Natick) word for ‘chief,’ mugquomp, is used in the U.S. as mugwump to mean a ‘great man’ or ‘boss,’ especially in politics for someone who is independent of parties and thinks of themselves as above them. No one would have thought to use an Indian language to express such an idea if there hadn’t been an Indian word that, due to its awkward sound, could be used humorously. Other words that have been adopted because of their sounds include jungle (from Hindi jangal, somewhat related to jumble, tumble, bundle, bungle); bobbery, slang for ‘noise, squabble,’ which is “the Anglo-Indian informal representation of a common exclamation of Hindus when surprised or grieving—Bap-rē! or Bap-rē Bap ‘O Father!’” (Hobson-Jobson); amuck; and U.S. bunco meaning ‘swindling game, to swindle,’ from It. banco.
XX.—§ 12. Ancient and Modern Times.
It will be seen that our conception of echoism and related phenomena does not carry us back to an imaginary primitive period: these forces are vital in languages as we observe them day by day. Linguistic writers, however, often assume that sound symbolism, if existing at all, must date back to the earliest times, and therefore can have no reality nowadays. Thus Benfey (Gesch 288) turns upon de Brosse, who had found rudeness in Fr. rude and gentleness in Fr. doux, and says: “As if the sounds of such words, which are distant by an infinite length of time from[410] the time when language originated, were able to contribute ever so little to explain the original designation of things.” (But Benfey is right in saying that the impression made by those two French words may be imaginary; as examples they are not particularly well chosen.) Sütterlin (WW 14) says: “It is bold to search for such correspondence as still existing in detail in the language of our own days. For words like liebe, süss on the one hand, and zorn, hass, hart on the other, which are often alleged by dilettanti, prove nothing to the scholar, because their form is young and must have had totally different sounds in the period when language was created.”
Our understanding of echoism and related phenomena shows that these forces are essential in languages as we see them every day. However, language scholars often assume that sound symbolism, if it exists at all, must date back to the earliest times and therefore has no relevance today. For example, Benfey (Gesch 288) criticizes de Brosse, who found rudeness in Fr. rude and gentleness in Fr. doux, stating: “As if the sounds of such words, which are separated by an infinite time from[410] when language first began, could contribute even a little to explain the original names for things.” (But Benfey is correct in saying that the impression made by those two French words might be imaginary; they are not particularly good examples.) Sütterlin (WW 14) comments: “It is daring to look for such correspondences still existing in the language of today. Words like liebe, süss on one hand, and zorn, hass, hart on the other, which are often cited by amateurs, don't prove anything to a scholar because their form is modern and must have had completely different sounds in the time when language was created.”
Similarly de Saussure (LG 104) gives as one of the main principles of our science that the tie between sound and sense is arbitrary or rather motiveless (immotivé), and to those who would object that onomatopoetic words are not arbitrary he says that “they are never organic elements of a linguistic system. Besides, they are much less numerous than is generally supposed. Such words as Fr. fouet and glas may strike some ears with a suggestive ring;[106] but they have not had that character from the start, as is sufficiently proved if we go back to their Latin forms (fouet derived from fagus ‘beech,’ glas = classicum); the quality possessed by, or rather attributed to, their actual sounds is a fortuitous result of phonetic development.”
Similarly, de Saussure (LG 104) states that one of the main principles of our field is that the connection between sound and meaning is arbitrary or rather unmotivated (unmotivated). To those who argue that onomatopoeic words are not arbitrary, he replies that “they are never essential parts of a linguistic system. Moreover, they are far less common than people usually think. Words like Fr. fouet and glas might have a suggestive sound to some ears; [106] but they didn’t have that quality from the beginning, as is clearly shown when we look at their Latin origins (fouet comes from fagus ‘beech,’ glas = classicum); the quality that is associated with their current sounds is just a random outcome of phonetic evolution.”
Here we see one of the characteristics of modern linguistic science: it is so preoccupied with etymology, with the origin of words, that it pays much more attention to what words have come from than to what they have come to be. If a word has not always been suggestive on account of its sound, then its actual suggestiveness is left out of account and may even be declared to be merely fanciful. I hope that this chapter contains throughout what is psychologically a more true and linguistically a more fruitful view.
Here we see one of the traits of modern linguistic science: it is so focused on etymology, the origin of words, that it pays much more attention to where words came from than to what they have become. If a word hasn’t always been meaningful because of its sound, then its current meaning is ignored and may even be dismissed as purely imaginative. I hope this chapter consistently offers a perspective that is more accurate psychologically and more rewarding linguistically.
Though some echo words may be very old, the great majority are not; at any rate, in looking up the earliest ascertained date of a goodly number of such words in the NED, I have been struck by the fact of so many of them being quite recent, not more than a few centuries old, and some not even that. To some extent[411] their recent appearance in writing may be ascribed to the general character of the old literature as contrasted with our modern literature, which is less conventional, freer in many ways, more true to life with its infinite variety and more true, too, to the spoken language of every day. But that cannot account for everything, and there is every probability that this class of words is really more frequent in the spoken language of recent times than it was formerly, because people speak in a more vivid and fresh fashion than their ancestors of hundreds or thousands of years ago. The time of psychological reaction is shorter than it used to be, life moves at a more rapid rate, and people are less tied down to tradition than in former ages, consequently they are more apt to create and to adopt new words of this particular type, which are felt at once to be significant and expressive. In all languages the creation and use of echoic and symbolic words seems to have been on the increase in historical times. If to this we add the selective process through which words which have only secondarily acquired symbolical value survive at the cost of less adequate expressions, or less adequate forms of the same words, and subsequently give rise to a host of derivatives, then we may say that languages in course of time grow richer and richer in symbolic words. So far from believing in a golden primitive age, in which everything in language was expressive and immediately intelligible on account of the significative value of each group of sounds, we arrive rather, here as in other domains, at the conception of a slow progressive development towards a greater number of easy and adequate expressions—expressions in which sound and sense are united in a marriage-union closer than was ever known to our remote ancestors.
Although some echo words may be very old, most are not; in fact, when I looked up the earliest confirmed dates of many such words in the NED, I was surprised to find that many of them are quite recent, no more than a few centuries old, and some even less than that. To some extent[411] their recent emergence in writing can be attributed to the overall nature of old literature compared to our modern literature, which is less formal, more free in various ways, and more reflective of real life with its endless variety, as well as being truer to everyday spoken language. However, that doesn't explain everything, and it's very likely that this type of word has become more common in recent spoken language than it was in the past because people communicate in a more vibrant and fresh manner than their ancestors hundreds or thousands of years ago. The time for psychological reactions is shorter than it used to be, life moves faster, and people are less bound by tradition than in earlier times, making them more inclined to create and adopt new words of this kind, which are immediately understood to be meaningful and expressive. Across all languages, the creation and use of echoic and symbolic words seems to have increased throughout history. If we consider the selective process where words that have only secondarily gained symbolic meaning survive at the expense of less suitable alternatives, or forms of the same words, which then lead to a variety of derivatives, we can conclude that languages gradually become richer in symbolic words over time. Far from believing in a golden age of primitivity, where every aspect of language was expressive and immediately understandable due to the meaning of each sound group, we reach a view, similar to other fields, of a slow progressive development toward more easy and suitable expressions—expressions in which sound and meaning are united in a relationship closer than anything known to our distant ancestors.
CHAPTER XXI
The Origin of Speech
§ 1. Introduction. § 2. Former Theories. § 3. Method. § 4. Sounds. § 5. Grammar. § 6. Units. § 7. Irregularities. § 8. Savage Tribes. § 9. Law of Development. § 10. Vocabulary. § 11. Poetry and Prose. § 12. Emotional Songs. § 13. Primitive Singing. § 14. Approach to Language. § 15. The Earliest Sentences. § 16. Conclusion.
§ 1. Introduction. § 2. Previous Theories. § 3. Methodology. § 4. Sounds. § 5. Grammar. § 6. Units. § 7. Irregularities. § 8. Indigenous Tribes. § 9. Development Law. § 10. Vocabulary. § 11. Poetry and Prose. § 12. Emotional Songs. § 13. Primitive Singing. § 14. Language Approach. § 15. The Earliest Sentences. § 16. Conclusion.
XXI.—§ 1. Introduction.
Much of what is contained in the last chapters is preparatory to the theme which is to occupy us in this chapter, the ultimate origin of human speech. We have already seen the feeling with which this subject has often been regarded by eminent linguists, the feeling which led to an absolute taboo of the question in the French Société de linguistique (p. 96). One may here quote Whitney: “No theme in linguistic science is more often and more voluminously treated than this, and by scholars of every grade and tendency; nor any, it may be added, with less profitable result in proportion to the labour expended; the greater part of what is said and written upon it is mere windy talk, the assertion of subjective views which commend themselves to no mind save the one that produces them, and which are apt to be offered with a confidence, and defended with a tenacity, that are in inverse ratio to their acceptableness. This has given the whole question a bad repute among sober-minded philologists” (OLS 1. 279).
Much of what we find in the last chapters sets the stage for the topic we’re going to discuss in this chapter: the ultimate origin of human speech. We’ve already noted how this subject is often viewed by prominent linguists, the sentiment that led to a complete taboo on the matter in the French Language Society (p. 96). We can reference Whitney here: “No topic in linguistic science has been explored as extensively and by scholars of every level and perspective as this one; nor, it can be added, has any produced less valuable results compared to the effort involved. Most of what is said and written about it is just hot air, the expression of subjective opinions that appeal only to their originators, and are often presented with a confidence and defended with a stubbornness that are inversely related to their acceptability. This has given the entire issue a bad reputation among sensible philologists” (OLS 1. 279).
Nevertheless, linguistic science cannot refrain for ever from asking about the whence (and about the whither) of linguistic evolution. And here we must first of all realize that man is not the only animal that has a ‘language,’ though at present we know very little about the real nature and expressiveness of the languages of birds and mammals or of the signalling system of ants, etc. The speech of some animals may be more like our language than most people are willing to admit—it may also in some respects be even more perfect than human language precisely because it is unlike it and has developed along lines about which we can know nothing; but it is of little avail to speculate on these matters. What is certain is that no race of mankind is without a language which[413] in everything essential is identical in character with our own, and that there are a certain number of circumstances which have been of signal importance in assisting mankind in developing language (cf. Gabelentz Spr 294 ff.).
Nevertheless, linguistic science can't ignore the origins and future of language evolution forever. First, we need to recognize that humans aren't the only animals with a 'language,' even though we currently know very little about the true nature and expressiveness of the languages of birds, mammals, or the signaling systems of ants, etc. The communication of some animals might resemble our language more than most people are willing to admit—it could even be, in some ways, more advanced than human language simply because it differs from it and has evolved in ways we can't fully understand; but it's not very useful to speculate about these things. What’s clear is that no human group lacks a language that[413] is fundamentally similar to our own, and there are several important factors that have helped humanity develop language (cf. Gabelentz Spr 294 ff.).
First of all, man has an upright gait; this gives him two limbs more than the dog has, for instance: he can carry things and yet jabber on; he is not reduced to defending himself by biting, but can use his mouth for other purposes. Feeding also takes less time in his case than in that of the cow, who has little time for anything else than chewing and a moo now and then. The sexual life of man is not restricted to one particular time of the year, the two sexes remain together the whole year round, and thus sociability is promoted; the helplessness of babies works in the same direction through necessitating a more continuous family life, in which there is also time enough for all kinds of sports, including play with the vocal organs. Thus conditions have been generally favourable for the development of singing and talking, but the problem is, how could sounds and ideas come to be connected as they are in language?
First of all, humans walk upright, which gives them two more limbs than dogs, for example: they can carry things and still chat; they don’t just defend themselves by biting but can use their mouths for other things. Eating also takes less time for them than it does for cows, who spend most of their time chewing and occasionally making a moo. Human sexuality isn’t limited to one specific time of year; the two sexes stay together all year round, which encourages sociability. The vulnerability of infants also contributes to this by requiring a more continuous family life, allowing time for various activities, including playing with their voices. Overall, conditions have been generally favorable for the development of singing and speaking, but the question is, how did sounds and ideas become connected like they are in language?
What method or methods have we for the solution of this question? With very few exceptions those who have written about our subject have conjured up in their imagination a primitive era, and then asked themselves: How would it be possible for men or manlike beings, hitherto unfurnished with speech, to acquire speech as a means of communication of thought? Not only is this method followed, so to speak, instinctively by investigators, but we are even positively told (by Marty) that it is the only method possible. In direct opposition to this assertion, I think that it is chiefly and principally due to this method and to this way of putting the question that so little has yet been done to solve it. If we are to have any hope of success in our investigation we must try new methods and new ways—and fortunately there are ways which lead us to a point from which we may expect to see the world of primitive language revealed to us in a new light. But let us first cast a rapid glance at those theories which have been advanced by followers of the speculative or a priori method.
What methods do we have to solve this question? With very few exceptions, those who have written about our topic have imagined a primitive era and then asked themselves: How could humans or human-like beings, who previously lacked speech, acquire language as a way to communicate their thoughts? This method is used almost instinctively by researchers, and we are even explicitly told (by Marty) that it's the only possible method. In direct contrast to this claim, I believe that it is primarily because of this method and the way the question is framed that so little progress has been made in addressing it. If we hope to succeed in our investigation, we must explore new methods and approaches—and fortunately, there are paths that can lead us to a perspective where we can expect to see the world of primitive language in a new light. But first, let’s quickly look at the theories proposed by those who follow the speculative or a priori method.
XXI.—§ 2. Former Theories.
One theory is that primitive words were imitative of sounds: man copied the barking of dogs and thereby obtained a natural word with the meaning of ‘dog’ or ‘bark.’ To this theory, nicknamed the bow-wow theory, Renan objects that it seems rather absurd to set up this chronological sequence: first the lower animals are original enough to cry and roar; and then comes man, making[414] a language for himself by imitating his inferiors. But surely man would imitate not only the cries of inferior animals, but also those of his fellow-men, and the salient point of the theory is this: sounds which in one creature were produced without any meaning, but which were characteristic of that creature, could by man be used to designate the creature itself (or the movement or action productive of the sound). In this way an originally unmeaning sound could in the mouth of an imitator and in the mind of someone hearing that imitation acquire a real meaning. In the chapter on Sound Symbolism I have tried to show how from the rudest and most direct imitations of this kind we may arrive through many gradations at some of the subtlest effects of human speech, and how imitation, in the widest sense we can give to this word—a wider sense than most advocates of the theory seem able to imagine—is so far from belonging exclusively to a primitive age that it is not extinct even yet. There is not much of value in Max Müller’s remark that “the onomatopœic theory goes very smoothly as long as it deals with cackling hens and quacking ducks; but round that poultry-yard there is a high wall, and we soon find that it is behind that wall that language really begins” (Life 2. 97), or in his other remark that “words of this kind (cuckoo) are, like artificial flowers, without a root. They are sterile, and unfit to express anything beyond the one object which they imitate” (ib. 1. 410). But cuckoo may become cuckold (Fr. cocu), and from cock are derived the names Müller himself mentions, Fr. coquet, coquetterie, cocart, cocarde, coquelicot.... Echoic words may be just as fertile as any other part of the vocabulary.
One theory is that early words imitated sounds: humans mimicked the barking of dogs, creating a natural word that meant ‘dog’ or ‘bark.’ This theory, called the bow-wow theory, is challenged by Renan, who argues it's pretty ridiculous to suggest this sequence: first, lower animals make noise; then humans create language by imitating those inferior beings. However, it makes sense that humans would mimic not just the sounds of animals but also those of other humans. The key point of the theory is that sounds produced by one creature, which had no meaning but were characteristic of them, could be used by humans to refer to that creature itself (or the action that created that sound). In this way, a sound that originally had no meaning could gain significance when imitated and interpreted by someone else. In the chapter on Sound Symbolism, I've tried to show how the simplest and most direct imitations can evolve through many stages into some of the most nuanced effects of human speech. Imitation, in the broadest sense of the term—a much broader sense than most supporters of the theory can envision—is far from being exclusive to primitive times; it still exists today. Max Müller’s comment that “the onomatopoeic theory works well for cackling hens and quacking ducks, but there’s a high wall around that poultry yard, and it’s behind that wall where language truly starts” (Life 2. 97), or his claim that “words of this sort (cuckoo) are like artificial flowers—they lack roots. They are barren, unable to express anything beyond the single object they imitate” (ib. 1. 410), aren’t very insightful. But cuckoo can evolve into cuckold (Fr. cocu), and names derived from cock include those Müller mentions: Fr. coquet, coquetterie, cocart, cocarde, coquelicot.... Echoic words can be just as productive as any other part of the vocabulary.
Another theory is the interjectional, nicknamed the pooh-pooh, theory: language is derived from instinctive ejaculations called forth by pain or other intense sensations or feelings. The adherents of this theory generally take these interjections for granted, without asking about the way in which they have come into existence. Darwin, however, in The Expression of the Emotions, gives purely physiological reasons for some interjections, as when the feeling of contempt or disgust is accompanied by a tendency “to blow out of the mouth or nostrils, and this produces sounds like pooh or pish.” Again, “when anyone is startled or suddenly astonished, there is an instantaneous tendency, likewise from an intelligible cause, namely, to be ready for prolonged exertion, to open the mouth widely, so as to draw a deep and rapid inspiration. When the next full expiration follows, the mouth is slightly closed, and the lips, from causes hereafter to be discussed, are somewhat protruded; and this form of the mouth, if the voice be at all exerted, produces ... the sound of the vowel o. Certainly a deep sound of a prolonged Oh! may be heard from a whole crowd[415] of people immediately after witnessing any astonishing spectacle. If, together with surprise, pain be felt, there is a tendency to contract all the muscles of the body, including those of the face, and the lips will then be drawn back; and this will perhaps account for the sound becoming higher and assuming the character of Ah! or Ach!”
Another theory is the interjectional, nicknamed the pooh-pooh theory: language comes from instinctive exclamations triggered by pain or other strong sensations or emotions. Supporters of this theory generally take these interjections at face value, without questioning how they originated. Darwin, however, in The Expression of the Emotions, offers biological explanations for some interjections, like how feelings of contempt or disgust are often paired with a tendency “to blow out of the mouth or nostrils, which creates sounds like pooh or pish.” Additionally, “when someone is startled or suddenly shocked, there’s an immediate tendency, driven by a clear reason, to prepare for intense effort by opening the mouth wide to take in a deep and quick breath. When the next full breath out occurs, the mouth is slightly closed, and the lips, for reasons to be explained later, are somewhat protruded; in this position, if any sound is made, it produces ... the vowel sound o. Certainly, a strong, prolonged Oh! can be heard from an entire group of people immediately after witnessing something amazing. If, alongside surprise, pain is also felt, there’s a tendency to tense up all the muscles in the body, including those in the face, causing the lips to be drawn back; this might explain why the sound turns higher and takes on the quality of Ah! or Ach!.”
To the ordinary interjectional theory it may be objected that the usual interjections are abrupt expressions for sudden sensations and emotions; they are therefore isolated in relation to the speech material used in the rest of the language. “Between interjection and word there is a chasm wide enough to allow us to say that the interjection is the negation of language, for interjections are employed only when one either cannot or will not speak” (Benfey Gesch 295). This ‘chasm’ is also shown phonetically by the fact that the most spontaneous interjections often contain sounds which are not used in language proper, voiceless vowels, inspiratory sounds, clicks, etc., whence the impossibility properly to represent them by means of our ordinary alphabet: the spellings pooh, pish, whew, tut are very poor renderings indeed of the natural sounds. On the other hand, many interjections are now more or less conventionalized and are learnt like any other words, consequently with a different form in different languages: in pain a German and a Seelander will exclaim au, a Jutlander aus, a Frenchman ahi and an Englishman oh, or perhaps ow. Kipling writes in one of his stories: “That man is no Afghan, for they weep ‘Ai! Ai!’ Nor is he of Hindustan, for they weep ‘Oh! Ho!’ He weeps after the fashion of the white men, who say, ‘Ow! Ow!’”
To the standard theory of interjections, it can be argued that typical interjections are abrupt expressions of sudden feelings and emotions; they are therefore disconnected from the rest of the language. “Between interjection and word there is a wide gap that allows us to say that the interjection is the opposite of language, for interjections are used only when one either cannot or will not speak” (Benfey Gesch 295). This 'gap' is also highlighted phonetically by the fact that the most spontaneous interjections often contain sounds not found in regular language, such as voiceless vowels, inhaled sounds, clicks, etc., which makes it impossible to accurately represent them using our standard alphabet: the spellings pooh, pish, whew, tut are very inadequate representations of the natural sounds. On the flip side, many interjections have become somewhat conventionalized and are learned like any other words, resulting in different forms across languages: in pain, a German and a Seelander will exclaim au, a Jutlander aus, a Frenchman ahi and an Englishman oh, or perhaps ow. Kipling writes in one of his stories: “That man is no Afghan, for they cry ‘Ai! Ai!’ Nor is he from Hindustan, for they cry ‘Oh! Ho!’ He cries like white men, who say, ‘Ow! Ow!’”
A closely related theory is the nativistic, nicknamed the ding-dong, theory, according to which there is a mystic harmony between sound and sense: “There is a law which runs through nearly the whole of nature, that everything which is struck rings. Each substance has its peculiar ring.” Language is the result of an instinct, a “faculty peculiar to man in his primitive state, by which every impression from without received its vocal expression from within”—a faculty which “became extinct when its object was fulfilled.” This theory, which Max Müller propounded and afterwards wisely abandoned, is mentioned here for the curiosity of the matter only.
A similar theory is the nativistic one, known as the ding-dong theory, which suggests there is a mystical connection between sound and meaning: “There is a law that runs through almost all of nature, that everything that is struck rings. Each material has its unique ring.” Language comes from an instinct, a “faculty unique to humans in their early state, by which every external impression receives its vocal expression from within”—a faculty that “disappeared once its purpose was achieved.” This theory, introduced by Max Müller and later reasonably abandoned, is mentioned here just out of curiosity.
Noiré started a fourth theory, nicknamed the yo-he-ho: under any strong muscular effort it is a relief to the system to let breath come out strongly and repeatedly, and by that process to let the vocal chords vibrate in different ways; when primitive acts were performed in common, they would, therefore, naturally be accompanied with some sounds which would come to be associated with the idea of the act performed and stand as a name for it; the[416] first words would accordingly mean something like ‘heave’ or ‘haul.’
Noiré proposed a fourth theory, dubbed the yo-he-ho: during any intense physical effort, it's a relief for the body to exhale forcefully and repeatedly, allowing the vocal cords to vibrate in various ways. When primitive activities were done together, they would naturally be associated with some sounds that came to represent the idea of the action performed and serve as a name for it; the[416] first words would thus mean something like ‘heave’ or ‘haul.’
Now, these theories, here imperfectly reproduced each in a few lines, are mutually antagonistic: thus Noiré thinks it possible to explain the origin of speech without sound imitation. And yet what should prevent our combining these several theories and using them concurrently? It would seem to matter very little whether the first word uttered by man was bow-wow or pooh-pooh, for the fact remains that he said both one and the other. Each of the three chief theories enables one to explain parts of language, but still only parts, and not even the most important parts—the main body of language seems hardly to be touched by any of them. Again, with the exception of Noiré’s theory, they are too individualistic and take too little account of language as a means of human intercourse. Moreover, they all tacitly assume that up to the creation of language man had remained mute or silent; but this is most improbable from a physiological point of view. As a rule we do not find an organ already perfected on the first occasion of its use; it is only by use that an organ is developed.
Now, these theories, though briefly summarized here, are in conflict with each other: for instance, Noiré believes it's possible to explain the origin of speech without sound imitation. But why can't we combine these various theories and use them together? It seems irrelevant whether the first word spoken by man was bow-wow or pooh-pooh, since he clearly said both. Each of the three main theories helps to explain parts of language, but just parts, and not even the most significant ones—the core of language appears hardly touched by any of them. Additionally, except for Noiré’s theory, they are too focused on individual factors and don’t consider language as a means of human communication. Furthermore, they all implicitly suggest that before language was created, man was mute or silent; however, this is quite unlikely from a physiological standpoint. Typically, we don’t find an organ fully developed the first time it’s used; it’s through use that an organ evolves.
XXI.—§ 3. Method.
So much for the results of the first method of approaching the question of the origin of speech, that of trying to picture to oneself a speechless mankind and speculating on the way in which language could then have originated. We shall now, as hinted above (p. 413), indicate the ways in which it is possible to supplement, and even in some measure to supplant, this speculative or deductive method by means of inductive reasonings. These can be based on three fields of investigation, namely:
So much for the results of the first method of exploring the question of how speech originated, which involves imagining a world without language and speculating on how language could have developed. Now, as mentioned earlier (p. 413), we will outline ways to enhance and even partially replace this speculative or deductive approach with inductive reasoning. This can be based on three areas of research, namely:
(2) The language of primitive races, and
(3) The history of language.
Of these, the third is the most fruitful source of information.
Of these, the third is the most valuable source of information.
First, as to the language of children. Some biologists maintain that the development of the individual follows on the whole the same course as that of the race; the embryo, before it arrives at full maturity, will have passed through the same stages of development which in countless generations have led the whole species to its present level. It has, therefore, occurred to many that the acquisition by mankind at large of the faculty of speech may be mirrored to us in the process by which any child learns to communicate its thoughts by means of its vocal organs. Accord[417]ingly, children’s language has often been invoked to furnish illustrations and parallels of the process gone through in the formation of primitive language. But many writers have been guilty of an erroneous inference in applying this principle, inasmuch as they have taken all their examples from a child’s acquisition of an already existing language. The fallacy will be evident if we suppose for a moment the case of a man endeavouring to arrive at the evolution of music from the manner in which a child is nowadays taught to play on the piano. Manifestly, the modern learner is in quite a different position to primitive man, and has quite a different task set him: he has an instrument ready to hand, and melodies already composed for him, and finally a teacher who understands how to draw these tunes forth from the instrument. It is the same thing with language: the task of the child is to learn an existing language, that is, to connect certain sounds heard on the lips of others with the same ideas that the speakers associate with them, but not in the least to frame anything new. No; if we are seeking some parallel to the primitive acquisition of language, we must look elsewhere and turn to baby language as it is spoken in the first year of life, before the child has begun to ‘notice’ and to make out what use is made of language by grown-up people. Here, in the child’s first purposeless murmuring, crowing and babbling, we have real nature sounds; here we may expect to find some clue to the infancy of the language of the race. And, again, we must not neglect the way children have of creating new words never heard before, and often of attaching a sense to originally meaningless conglomerations of sound.
First, let's talk about how children use language. Some biologists argue that an individual's development generally follows the same path as that of the species; the embryo, before reaching full maturity, goes through the same stages of development that have taken countless generations to bring the entire species to its current level. Because of this, many have thought that how humanity overall gains the ability to speak can be reflected in how a child learns to express their thoughts through their vocal cords. Accordingly, children’s language is often used to provide examples and parallels to the process of forming primitive language. However, many writers have made the mistake of applying this idea incorrectly, as they have based all their examples on a child's learning of an already established language. This fallacy becomes clear if we consider a man trying to understand the evolution of music by looking at how a child today learns to play the piano. Clearly, the modern learner is in a very different position from primitive man and has a different task: they have an instrument available, melodies that have already been composed, and a teacher who knows how to help them play these tunes. The same is true for language: the child's job is to learn a pre-existing language, meaning they link certain sounds they hear from others with the same ideas those speakers associate with them, not to create anything new. No, if we want to find a parallel to the primitive acquisition of language, we need to look elsewhere and focus on baby language as it occurs in the first year of life, before the child has started to 'notice' and understand how adults use language. Here, in the child's initial meaningless sounds, coos, and babbles, we have genuine natural sounds; here we might find clues to the early stages of the language of the species. Additionally, we should not overlook how children invent new words never before heard and often assign meanings to seemingly random collections of sounds.
As for the languages of contemporary savages, we may in some instances take them as typical of more primitive languages than those of civilized nations, and therefore as illustrating a linguistic stage that is nearer to that in which speech originated. Still, inferences from such languages should be used with great caution, for it should never be forgotten that even the most backward race has many centuries of linguistic evolution behind it, and that the conditions therefore may, or must, be very different from those of primeval man. The so-called primitive languages will therefore in the following sections be only invoked to corroborate conclusions at which it is possible to arrive from other data.
When it comes to the languages of modern-day indigenous people, we can sometimes view them as representative of more primitive languages than those used in developed countries, which means they might reflect a linguistic stage closer to the origins of speech. However, we must be very careful when making inferences from these languages, as we should always remember that even the most disadvantaged groups have centuries of linguistic development behind them, and so the conditions may be quite different from those of early humans. Therefore, the so-called primitive languages will be referenced in the following sections only to support conclusions drawn from other sources.
The third and most fruitful source from which to gather information of value for our investigation is the history of language as it has been considered in previous chapters of this work. While the propounders of the theories of the origin of speech mentioned above made straight for the front of the lion’s den, we are like the fox in the fable, who noticed that all the traces led into the den and not a single one came out; we will therefore try and steal[418] into the den from behind. They thought it logically correct, nay necessary, to begin at the beginning; let us, for variety’s sake, begin with languages accessible at the present day, and let us attempt from that starting-point step by step to trace the backward path. Perhaps in this way we may reach the very first beginnings of speech.
The third and most valuable source for gathering information for our investigation is the history of language as discussed in earlier chapters of this work. While the theorists about the origin of speech boldly entered the lion’s den, we are like the fox in the fable who noticed that all the tracks led into the den and not a single one came out; so, we’ll try to sneak in from behind. They thought it was logically correct, even necessary, to start at the beginning; let us, for a change, begin with languages that are available today, and let’s try to trace the path backward step by step from that starting point. Perhaps this way we might reach the very origins of speech.
The method I recommend, and which I think I am the first to employ consistently, is to trace our modern twentieth-century languages as far back in time as history and our materials will allow us; and then, from this comparison of present English with Old English, of Danish with Old Norse, and of both with ‘Common Gothonic,’ of French and Italian with Latin, of modern Indian dialects with Sanskrit, etc., to deduce definite laws for the development of languages in general, and to try and find a system of lines which can be lengthened backwards beyond the reach of history. If we should succeed in discovering certain qualities to be generally typical of the earlier as opposed to the later stages of languages, we shall be justified in concluding that the same qualities obtained in a still higher degree in the earliest times of all; if we are able within the historical era to demonstrate a definite direction of linguistic evolution, we must be allowed to infer that the direction was the same even in those primeval periods for which we have no documents to guide us. But if the change witnessed in the evolution of modern speech out of older forms of speech is thus on a larger scale projected back into the childhood of mankind, and if by this process we arrive finally at uttered sounds of such a description that they can no longer be called a real language, but something antecedent to language—why, then the problem will have been solved; for transformation is something we can understand, while a creation out of nothing can never be comprehended by human understanding.
The method I suggest, and which I believe I’m the first to use consistently, is to trace our modern twentieth-century languages back in time as much as history and our resources will allow; then, by comparing present English with Old English, Danish with Old Norse, and both with ‘Common Gothonic,’ French and Italian with Latin, modern Indian dialects with Sanskrit, etc., we can identify clear laws for the development of languages in general, and try to find a system of lines that can be extended back beyond the reach of history. If we succeed in discovering certain traits that are typically found in the earlier stages of languages compared to the later ones, we will be justified in concluding that these traits were present even more strongly in the earliest times. If we can demonstrate a clear direction of linguistic evolution within historical times, we should be allowed to infer that the same direction applied even during those ancient periods for which we have no documents. However, if the changes we see in the evolution of modern speech from older forms can be projected back on a larger scale into the early days of humanity, and if through this process we arrive at sounds that can no longer be classified as a real language, but something prior to language—then the problem will have been solved; for transformation is something we can understand, while creation from nothing can never be grasped by human understanding.
This, then, will be the object of the following rapid sketch: to search the several departments of the science of language for general laws of evolution—most of them have already been discussed at some length in the preceding chapters—then to magnify the changes observed, and thus to form a picture of the outer and inner structure of some sort of speech more primitive than the most primitive language accessible to direct observation.
This will be the goal of the following brief overview: to explore different areas of the science of language for general evolution laws—most of which have already been discussed in detail in the earlier chapters—then to highlight the changes observed, and thus create a representation of the outer and inner structure of a type of speech that is more primitive than the most basic language we can observe directly.
XXI.—§ 4. Sounds.
First, as regards the purely phonetic side of language, we observe everywhere the tendency to make pronunciation more easy, so as to lessen the muscular effort; difficult combinations of sounds are discarded, those only being retained which are[419] pronounced with ease (see Ch. XIV § 6 ff.). Modern research has shown that the Proto-Aryan sound-system was much more complicated than was imagined in the reconstructions of the middle of the nineteenth century. In most languages now only such sounds are used as are produced by expiration, while inbreathed sounds and clicks or suction-stops are not found in connected speech. In civilized languages we meet with such sounds only in interjections, as when an inbreathed voiceless l (generally with rhythmic variations of strength and corresponding small movements of the tongue) is used to express delight in eating and drinking, or when the click inadequately spelt tut is used to express impatience. In some very primitive South African languages, on the other hand, clicks are found as integral parts of words; and Bleek has rendered it probable that in former stages of these languages they were in more extensive use than now. We may perhaps draw the conclusion that primitive languages in general were rich in all kinds of difficult sounds.
First, regarding the purely phonetic aspect of language, we see a consistent trend towards making pronunciation easier to reduce muscular effort. Complicated sound combinations are dropped, keeping only those that are pronounced easily (see Ch. XIV § 6 ff.). Modern research has revealed that the Proto-Aryan sound system was much more complex than previously thought in the reconstructions from the mid-nineteenth century. In most languages today, only sounds produced by exhalation are used, while inhaled sounds and clicks or suction-stops are absent from connected speech. In fully developed languages, such sounds only appear in interjections, like when an inhaled voiceless l (usually with rhythmic variations in strength and corresponding minor tongue movements) is used to express pleasure in eating and drinking, or when the click loosely spelled tut shows impatience. However, in some very primitive South African languages, clicks are integral parts of words; and Bleek has suggested that in earlier stages of these languages, they were used more broadly than they are now. We might conclude that primitive languages, in general, were rich in various challenging sounds.
The following point is of more far-reaching consequence. In some languages we find a gradual disappearance of tone or pitch accent; this has been the case in Danish, whereas Norwegian and Swedish have kept the old tones; so also in Russian as compared with Serbo-Croatian. In the works of old Indian, Greek and Latin grammarians we have express statements to the effect that pitch accent played a prominent part in those languages, and that the intervals used must have been comparatively greater than is usual in our modern languages. In modern Greek and in the Romanic languages the tone element has been obscured, and now ‘stress’ is heard on the syllable where the ancients noted only a high or a low tone. About the languages spoken nowadays by savage tribes we have generally very little information, as most of those who have made a first-hand study of such languages have not been trained to observe and to describe these delicate points; still, there is of late years an increasing number of observations of tone accents, for instance in African languages, which may justify us in thinking that tone plays an important part in many primitive languages.[107]
The following point has significant consequences. In some languages, we see a gradual loss of tone or pitch accent; this has happened in Danish, while Norwegian and Swedish have preserved the old tones. The same is true for Russian compared to Serbo-Croatian. Ancient Indian, Greek, and Latin grammarians made explicit statements that pitch accent was important in those languages, and the intervals used were likely larger than what we typically find in modern languages. In modern Greek and the Romance languages, the tone aspect has become less clear, and now ‘stress’ is placed on the syllable where the ancients recognized only a high or low tone. We generally have very little information about the languages spoken today by indigenous tribes, as most researchers who have studied these languages firsthand haven't been trained to observe and describe these subtle details. However, there has been a growing number of observations of tone accents in African languages recently, suggesting that tone plays a significant role in many primitive languages.[107]
So much for word tones; now for the sentence melody. It is a well-known fact that the modulation of sentences is strongly influenced by the effect of intense emotions in causing stronger and more rapid raisings and sinkings of the tone. “All passionate language does of itself become musical—with a finer music than the mere accent; the speech of a man even in zealous anger becomes a chant, a song” (Carlyle). “The sounds of common conversation have but little resonance; those of strong feeling have much more. Under rising ill-temper the voice acquires a metallic ring.... Grief, unburdening itself, uses tones approaching in timbre to those of chanting; and in his most pathetic passages an eloquent speaker similarly falls into tones more vibratory than those common to him.... While calm speech is comparatively monotonous, emotion makes use of fifths, octaves, and even wider intervals” (H. Spencer).
So much for word tones; now let’s talk about sentence melody. It's widely recognized that how we modulate sentences is heavily influenced by strong emotions, leading to more pronounced rises and falls in tone. “All passionate language naturally becomes musical—producing a finer music than just the basic accent; even a man’s speech in fervent anger turns into a chant, a song” (Carlyle). “The sounds in everyday conversation lack resonance; those filled with strong emotions resonate much more. When someone is getting upset, their voice takes on a metallic edge.... Grief, when it releases itself, uses tones similar to those of chanting; and during their most poignant moments, an eloquent speaker adopts tones that vibrate more than their usual speech.... While calm speech is relatively monotonous, emotion utilizes fifths, octaves, and even broader intervals” (H. Spencer).
Now, it is a consequence of advancing civilization that passion, or, at least, the expression of passion, is moderated, and we must therefore conclude that the speech of uncivilized and primitive men was more passionately agitated than ours, more like music or song. This conclusion is borne out by what we hear about the speech of many savages in our own days. European travellers very often record their impression of the speech of different tribes in expressions like these: “pronouncing whatever they spoke in a very singing manner,” “the singing tone of voice, in common conversation, was frequent,” “the speech is very much modulated and resembles singing,” “highly artificial and musical,” etc.
Now, as civilization has progressed, passion, or at least how we express it, has become more subdued. Therefore, we can conclude that the speech of uncivilized and primitive people was more emotionally charged than ours, resembling music or song. This conclusion is supported by what we hear about the speech of many indigenous people today. European travelers often share their impressions of different tribes with phrases like: “they spoke in a very singing manner,” “the singing tone of voice was common in conversations,” “their speech is very melodic and resembles singing,” “it’s highly artistic and musical,” etc.
These facts and considerations all point to the conclusion that there once was a time when all speech was song, or rather when these two actions were not yet differentiated; but perhaps this inference cannot be established inductively at the present stage of linguistic science with the same amount of certainty as the statements I am now going to make as to the nature of primitive speech.
These facts and ideas all suggest that there was a time when all communication was through song, or more precisely, when speech and song hadn’t yet been separated. However, it might not be possible to prove this through induction at the current level of linguistic science with the same confidence as the claims I’m about to make regarding the nature of early speech.
As we have seen above (Ch. XVII § 7), a great many of the changes going on regularly from century to century, as well as some of the sudden changes which take place now and then in the history of each language, result in the shortening of words. This is seen everywhere and at all times, and in consequence of this universal tendency we find that the ancient languages of our family, Sanskrit, Zend, etc., abound in very long words; the further back we go, the greater the number of sesquipedalia. We have seen also how the current theory, according to which every language started with monosyllabic roots, fails at every point to account for actual facts and breaks down before the established truths of linguistic history. Just as the history of religion does not pass[421] from the belief in one god to the belief in many gods, but inversely from polytheism towards monotheism, so language proceeds from original polysyllabism towards monosyllabism: if the development of language took the same course in prehistoric as in historic times, we see, by projecting the teaching of history on a larger scale back into the darkest ages, that early words must have been to present ones what the plesiosaurus and gigantosaurus are to present-day reptiles. The outcome of this phonetic section is, therefore, that we must imagine primitive language as consisting (chiefly at least) of very long words, full of difficult sounds, and sung rather than spoken.
As we discussed earlier (Ch. XVII § 7), many of the changes that happen regularly from century to century, along with some of the sudden shifts that occur now and then in the history of each language, lead to shorter words. This is observable everywhere and at all times, and as a result of this widespread trend, we notice that the ancient languages in our family, like Sanskrit and Zend, consist of very long words; the further back we look, the more we find sesquipedalia. We have also noted how the current theory, which suggests that every language began with monosyllabic roots, fails to explain actual facts and collapses under the established truths of linguistic history. Just as the history of religion transitions not from the belief in one god to belief in many gods, but rather the other way around from polytheism to monotheism, language evolves from originally being polysyllabic to monosyllabic: if the evolution of language followed the same path in prehistoric times as it did in historic times, we can infer, by expanding the lessons of history into earlier eras, that early words must have been to modern ones what the plesiosaurus and gigantosaurus are to contemporary reptiles. Therefore, the conclusion of this phonetic section is that we should picture primitive language as primarily consisting of very long words, filled with complex sounds, and sung rather than spoken.
XXI.—§ 5. Grammar.
Can anything be stated about the grammar of primitive languages? Yes, I think so, if we continue backwards into the past the lines of evolution resulting from the investigations of previous chapters of this volume. Ancient languages have more forms than modern ones; forms originally kept distinct are in course of time confused, either phonetically or analogically, alike in substantives, adjectives and verbs.
Can we say anything about the grammar of primitive languages? Yes, I believe so, as we look back into the history of language evolution based on the research from the earlier chapters of this book. Ancient languages have more distinct forms than modern ones; over time, forms that were originally separate have become mixed up, either through changes in sound or similar patterns, in nouns, adjectives, and verbs.
A characteristic feature of the structure of languages in their early stages is that each form of a word (whether verb or noun) contains in itself several minor modifications which, in the later stages, are expressed separately (if at all), that is, by means of auxiliary verbs or prepositions. Such a word as Latin cantavisset unites in one inseparable whole the equivalents of six ideas: (1) ‘sing,’ (2) pluperfect, (3) that indefinite modification of the verbal idea which we term subjunctive, (4) active, (5) third person, and (6) singular. The tendency of later stages is towards expressing such modifications analytically; but if we accept the terms ‘synthesis’ and ‘analysis’ for ancient and recent stages, we must first realize that there exist many gradations of both: in no single language do we find either synthesis or analysis carried out with absolute purity and consistency. Everywhere we find a more or less. Latin is synthetic in comparison with French, French analytic in comparison with Latin; but if we were able to see the direct ancestor of Latin, say two thousand years before the earliest inscriptions, we should no doubt find a language so synthetic that in comparison with it Cicero’s would have to be termed highly analytic.
A key feature of the structure of languages in their early stages is that each form of a word (whether verb or noun) contains several minor modifications within itself that, in later stages, are expressed separately (if at all), using auxiliary verbs or prepositions. A word like Latin cantavisset combines six ideas into one inseparable whole: (1) ‘sing,’ (2) pluperfect, (3) the indefinite modification of the verbal idea we call subjunctive, (4) active, (5) third person, and (6) singular. Later stages tend to express such modifications analytically. However, if we use the terms ‘synthesis’ and ‘analysis’ for ancient and recent stages, we need to recognize that there are many variations of both: no single language exhibits either synthesis or analysis with complete purity and consistency. We can consistently find varying degrees of both. Latin is more synthetic compared to French, while French is more analytic compared to Latin; but if we could see the direct ancestor of Latin, say two thousand years before the earliest inscriptions, we would likely discover a language so synthetic that compared to it, Cicero's would have to be considered highly analytic.
Secondly, we must not from the term ‘synthesis,’ which etymologically means ‘composition’ or ‘putting together,’ draw the conclusion that synthetic forms, such as we find, for instance, in Latin, consist of originally independent elements put together[422] and thus in their turn presuppose a previous stage of analysis. Whoever does not share the usual opinion that all flexional forms have originated through coalescence of separate words, but sees as we have seen (in Ch. XIX) also the reverse process of inseparable portions of words gaining greater and greater independence, will perhaps do well to look out for a better and less ambiguous word than synthesis to describe the character of primitive speech. What in the later stages of languages is analyzed or dissolved, in the earlier stages was unanalyzable or indissoluble; ‘entangled’ or ‘complicated’ would therefore be better renderings of our impression of the first state of things.
Secondly, we shouldn't assume from the term ‘synthesis,’ which etymologically means ‘composition’ or ‘putting together,’ that synthetic forms, like those we see in Latin, are made up of originally independent elements combined together[422] and, in doing so, require a prior stage of analysis. Those who disagree with the common belief that all inflectional forms originated through the merging of separate words—and instead view, as we have discussed (in Ch. XIX), the opposite process of parts of words becoming increasingly independent—might consider seeking a more precise and less ambiguous term than synthesis to describe the nature of primitive speech. What is analyzed or broken down in later stages of languages was previously unanalyzable or inseparable; therefore, ‘entangled’ or ‘complicated’ would be better representations of our impression of the original state of things.
XXI.—§ 6. Units.
But are the old forms really less dissoluble than their modern equivalents? This is repeatedly denied even by recent writers, on whom my words in Progress, p. 117, cannot have made much impression, if they have read them at all; and it will therefore be necessary to take up this cardinal point. Let me begin with quoting what others have said. “Historically considered, the Latin amat is really two words, as much as its English representative, the final t being originally a pronoun signifying ‘he,’ ‘she’ or ‘it,’ and it is only reasons of practical convenience that prevent us from writing am at or ama t as two and heloves as one word.... The really essential difference between amat and he loves is that in the former the pronominal element is expressed by a suffix, in the latter by a prefix” (Sweet PS 274, 1899). “It is purely accidental that the Latin form is not written am-av-it. To the unsophisticated Frenchman il a aimé is neither less nor more one unit than amavit to a Roman.... When the locution il a aimé sprang up, each element of it was still to some extent felt separately; but after it had become a fixed formula the elements were fused together into one whole. As a matter of fact, uneducated French people have not the least idea whether it is one or three words they speak” (Sütterlin WGS 11, 1902). “In some modern languages the personal pronoun is, just as in archaic Greek, beginning to be amalgamated with verbs so as to become a mere termination (sic: désinence; prefix must be what is meant): Fr. j’don’, tu-don’, il-don’ (je donne, tu donnes, il donne) and E. i-giv’, we giv’, you-giv’, they-giv’, correspond exactly to Gr. dido-mi, dido-si, dido-ti, only that the personal particle is in a different place” (Dauzat V 155, 1910). “If French were a savage language not yet reduced to writing, a travelling linguist, hearing the present tense of the verb aimer pronounced by the natives, would transcribe it in the following way: jèm, tu èm, ilèm, nouzémon, vouzémé, ilzèm. He would be[423] struck particularly with the agglutination of the pronominal subject and the verb, and would never feel tempted to draw up a paradigm without pronouns: aime, aimes, aime, aimons, etc., in which traditional spelling makes us believe.... He would even, through a comparison of ilèm and ilzèm, be led to establish a tendency to incorporation, as the only sign of the plural is a z infixed in the verbal complex” (Bally LV 43, 1913).
But are the old forms really less dissolvable than their modern counterparts? This is often denied even by recent writers, on whom my words in Progress, p. 117, probably didn’t leave much of an impression, if they’ve read them at all; so it’s important to address this main point. Let me start by quoting what others have said. “Historically speaking, the Latin amat is really two words, just like its English equivalent; the final t originally represented a pronoun meaning ‘he,’ ‘she,’ or ‘it,’ and it’s only for practical reasons that we don’t write am at or ama t as two separate words and heloves as one.... The essential difference between amat and he loves is that in the former, the pronoun is included as a suffix, while in the latter, it’s included as a prefix” (Sweet PS 274, 1899). “It’s purely coincidental that the Latin form is not written am-av-it. To the average French speaker, il a aimé is neither less nor more a single unit than amavit is to a Roman.... When the phrase il a aimé emerged, each part was still somewhat recognized separately; but once it became a fixed expression, the components merged into one whole. In fact, uneducated French people have no idea whether they’re saying one word or three” (Sütterlin WGS 11, 1902). “In some modern languages, the personal pronoun is, similar to archaic Greek, starting to blend with verbs to become merely an ending (sic: désinence; prefix likely refers to what is meant): Fr. j’don’, tu-don’, il-don’ (I give, you give, he gives) and E. i-giv’, we giv’, you-giv’, they-giv’, correspond exactly to Gr. dido-mi, dido-si, dido-ti, only that the personal particle is in a different spot” (Dauzat V 155, 1910). “If French were an undeveloped language not yet written down, a traveling linguist hearing the present tense of the verb aimer spoken by the locals would note it like this: jèm, tu èm, ilèm, nouzémon, vouzémé, ilzèm. He would be[423] struck by the way the pronominal subject and the verb merge, and would never think to create a paradigm without pronouns: aime, aimes, aime, aimons, etc., which traditional spelling makes us believe.... He would even, by comparing ilèm and ilzèm, notice a tendency to combine, since the only sign of the plural is a z inserted in the verbal structure” (Bally LV 43, 1913).
In these utterances two questions are really mixed together, that of the origin of Aryan flexional forms and that of the actual status of some forms in various languages. As to the former question, we have seen (p. 383) how very uncertain it is that amat and didosi, etc., contain pronouns. As to the latter question, it is quite true that we should not let the usual spelling be decisive when it is asked whether we have one or two or three words; but all these writers strangely overlook the really important criteria which we possess in this matter. Bally’s traveller could only have arrived at his result by listening to grammar lessons in which the three persons of the verb were rattled off one after the other, for if he had taken his forms from actual conversation he would have come across numerous instances in which the forms occurred without pronouns, first in the imperative, aime, aimons, aimez, then in collocations like celui qui aime, ceux qui aiment, in which there is no infix to denote the plural; in le mari aime, les maris aiment, and innumerable similar groups there is neither pronoun nor infix. If he were at first inclined to take ilaaimé as one word, he would on further acquaintance with the language discover that the elements were often separated: il n’a pas aimé, il nous a toujours aimés, etc. Similarly with the English forms adduced: I never give, you always give. This is the crucial point: the French and English combinations are two (three) words because the elements are not always placed together; Lat. amat, amavit, are each of them only one word because they can never be divided, and in the same way we never find anything placed between am and o in the first person, amo. These forms are as inseparable as E. loves, but E. heloves is separable because both he and loves can stand alone, and can also, in certain combinations, though now rarely, be transposed: loves he. Some writers would compare French combinations like il te le disait with verbal forms in certain Amerindian languages, in which subject and direct and indirect object are alike ‘incorporated’ in a ‘polysynthetic’ verbal form; it is quite true that these French pronominal forms can never be used by themselves, but only in conjunction with a verb; still, the French pronouns are more independent of each other than the elements of some other more primitive languages. In the first place, this is shown by the possibility of varying the pronunciation: il te[424] le disait may be either [itlədizɛ] or [itəldizɛ] or even more solemnly [iltələdizɛ]; secondly, by the regularity of these joined pronominal forms, for they are always the same, whatever the verb may be; and lastly, by their changing places in certain cases: te le disait-il? dis-le-lui, etc.
In these statements, two questions are really mixed together: the origin of Aryan flexional forms and the actual status of some forms in various languages. Regarding the first question, we have seen (p. 383) how uncertain it is that amat and didosi, etc., contain pronouns. As for the second question, it is true that we should not let the usual spelling determine whether we have one, two, or three words; however, all these writers strangely overlook the really important criteria we have on this issue. Bally’s traveler could only have reached his conclusion by listening to grammar lessons where the three persons of the verb were rattled off one after the other, because if he had taken his forms from real conversations, he would have encountered numerous instances where the forms appeared without pronouns, first in the imperative, aime, aimons, aimez, then in phrases like celui qui aime, ceux qui aiment, where there is no infix to indicate the plural; in le mari aime, les maris aiment, and countless similar phrases, there is neither a pronoun nor an infix. If he initially thought of ilaaimé as one word, he would, upon getting to know the language better, discover that the elements were often separated: il n’a pas aimé, il nous a toujours aimés, etc. Similarly with the English forms mentioned: I never give, you always give. This is the key point: the French and English combinations are two (or three) words because the elements are not always placed together; Latin amat, amavit, are each just one word because they can never be divided, and in the same way, we never find anything placed between am and o in the first person, amo. These forms are as inseparable as E. loves, but E. heloves is separable because both he and loves can stand alone, and can also, in certain combinations, though now rarely, be transposed: loves he. Some writers compare French combinations like il te le disait with verbal forms in certain Amerindian languages, in which the subject and the direct and indirect objects are similarly ‘incorporated’ in a ‘polysynthetic’ verbal form; it is true that these French pronominal forms can never be used independently but only in conjunction with a verb; still, the French pronouns are more independent of each other than the elements of some other more primitive languages. First of all, this is shown by the possibility of varying the pronunciation: il te[424] le disait can be either [itlədizɛ] or [itəldizɛ] or even more formally [iltələdizɛ]; secondly, by the regularity of these combined pronominal forms, as they are always the same, regardless of the verb; and lastly, by their changing positions in certain cases: te le disait-il? dis-le-lui, etc.
Nor can it be said that English forms like he’s = he is (or he has), I’d = I had (or I would), he’ll = he will show a tendency towards ‘entangling,’ for however closely together these forms are generally pronounced, each of them must be said to consist of two words, as is shown by the possibility of transposition (Is he ill?) and of intercalation of other words (I never had); it is also noteworthy that the same short forms of the verbs can be added to all kinds of words (the water’ll be ..., the sea’d been calm). In the forms don’t, won’t, can’t there is something like amalgamation of the verbal with the negative idea. Still, it is important to notice that the amalgamation only takes place with a few verbs of the auxiliary class. In saying ‘I don’t write’ the full verb is not touched by the fusion, and is even allowed to be unchanged in cases where it would have been inflected if no auxiliary had been used; compare I write, he writes, I wrote with the negative I don’t write, he doesn’t write, I didn’t write. It will be seen, especially if we take into account the colloquial or vulgar form for the third person, he don’t write, that the general movement here as elsewhere is really rather in the direction of ‘isolation’ than of fusion; for the verbal form write is stripped of all signs of person and tense, the person being indicated separately (if at all), and the tense sign being joined to the negation. So also in interrogative sentences; and if that tendency which can be observed in Elizabethan English had prevailed by using the combination I do write in positive statements, even where no special emphasis is intended, English verbs (except a few auxiliaries) would have been entirely stripped of those elements which to most grammarians constitute the very essence of a verb, namely, the marks of person, number, tense and mood, write being the universal form, besides the quasi-nominal forms writing and written.
Nor can we say that English forms like he’s = he is (or he has), I’d = I had (or I would), he’ll = he will show a tendency to become ‘entangled,’ because even though these forms are often pronounced closely together, each one is made up of two words, which is clear from the ability to switch their order (Is he ill?) and insert other words (I never had); it’s also worth noting that the same short forms of the verbs can be added to various words (the water’ll be ..., the sea’d been calm). In the forms don’t, won’t, can’t, there’s something like a merging of the verb with the negative meaning. Still, it’s important to notice that this merging only happens with a few auxiliary verbs. When we say ‘I don’t write’, the full verb remains unaffected by the fusion and can even stay unchanged in cases where it would have changed if no auxiliary were used; compare I write, he writes, I wrote with the negative I don’t write, he doesn’t write, I didn’t write. It will be seen, especially if we consider the colloquial or nonstandard form for the third person, he don’t write, that the overall trend here, as elsewhere, leans more towards ‘isolation’ than fusion; because the verb write loses all indicators of person and tense, with the person being marked separately (if at all), and the tense sign being connected to the negation. This is also true in questions; and if the tendency seen in Elizabethan English had continued by using the combination I do write in affirmative statements, even when no special emphasis is intended, English verbs (except for a few auxiliaries) would have been completely stripped of those elements that most grammarians consider essential to a verb, namely, the indicators of person, number, tense, and mood, with write being the universal form, along with the quasi-nominal forms writing and written.
Now, it is often said that the history of language shows a sort of gyration or movement in spirals, in which synthesis is followed by analysis, this by a new synthesis (flexion), and this again by analysis, and so forth. Latin amabo (which according to the old theory was once ama + some auxiliary) has been succeeded by amare habeo, which in its turn is fused into amerò, aimerai, and the latter form is now to some extent giving way to je vais aimer. But this pretended law of rotation is only arrived at by considering a comparatively small number of phenomena, and not by viewing the successive stages of the same language as wholes and drawing[425] general inferences as to their typically distinctive characters (cf. above, p. 337). If for every two instances of new flexions springing up we see ten older ones discarded in favour of analysis or isolation, are we not entitled to the generalization that flexion or indissolubility tends to give way to analysis? We should beware of being under the same delusion as a man who, in walking over a mountainous country, thinks that he goes down just as many and just as long hills as he goes up, while on the contrary each ascent is higher than the preceding descent, so that finally he finds himself unexpectedly many thousand feet above the level from which he started.
Now, it’s often said that the history of language moves in a sort of spiral, where synthesis is followed by analysis, which leads to a new synthesis (flexion), and then back to analysis, and so on. Latin amabo (which according to the old theory was once ama + some auxiliary) has been replaced by amare habeo, which eventually combines to form amerò, aimerai, and the latter is now somewhat being replaced by je vais aimer. However, this supposed rule of rotation is only observed by looking at a relatively small number of examples, rather than viewing the different stages of the same language as a whole and drawing[425] general conclusions about their distinct characteristics (cf. above, p. 337). If for every two instances of new flexions appearing, we see ten older ones replaced by analysis or isolation, aren’t we justified in generalizing that flexion or indissolubility tends to give way to analysis? We should be careful not to fall into the same trap as a person who, while walking through a mountainous area, thinks he goes down just as many and just as long hills as he goes up, while in reality, each ascent is higher than the last descent, so that he ultimately finds himself unexpectedly thousands of feet above the level he started.
The direction of movement is towards flexionless languages (such as Chinese, or to a certain extent Modern English) with freely combinable elements; the starting-point was flexional languages (such as Latin or Greek); at a still earlier stage we must suppose a language in which a verbal form might indicate not only six things, like cantavisset, but a still larger number, in which verbs were perhaps modified according to the gender (or sex) of the subject, as they are in Semitic languages, or according to the object, as in some Amerindian languages, or according to whether a man, a woman, or a person who commands respect is spoken to, as in Basque. But that amounts to the same thing as saying that the border-line between word and sentence was not so clearly defined as in more recent times; cantavisset is really nothing but a sentence-word, and the same holds good to a still greater extent of the sound conglomerations of Eskimo and some other North American languages. Primitive linguistic units must have been much more complicated in point of meaning, as well as much longer in point of sound, than those with which we are most familiar.
The trend is moving toward languages without inflections (like Chinese, or to some extent Modern English) that have freely combinable elements; the starting point was inflected languages (like Latin or Greek). At an even earlier stage, we must imagine a language where a verb form could express not just six things, like cantavisset, but an even greater range, where verbs were possibly modified based on the gender of the subject, as seen in Semitic languages, or based on the object, like in some Amerindian languages, or depending on whether the person addressed is a man, a woman, or someone of high respect, as in Basque. This suggests that the line between words and sentences wasn’t as clearly defined as it is today; cantavisset is essentially a sentence-word, and this is even more true for the sound combinations of Eskimo and some other North American languages. Primitive linguistic units must have been much more complex in meaning and longer in sound than those we're most familiar with.
XXI.—§ 7. Irregularities.
Another point of great importance is this: in early languages we find a far greater number of irregularities, exceptions, anomalies, than in modern ones. It is true that we not unfrequently see new irregularities spring up, where the formations were formerly regular; but these instances are very far from counterbalancing the opposite class, in which words once irregularly inflected become regular, or are given up in favour of regularly inflected words, or in which anomalies in syntax are levelled. The tendency is more and more to denote the same thing by the same means in every case, to extend the ending, or whatever it is, that is used in a large class of words to express a certain modification of the central idea, until it is used in all other words as well.
Another important point is this: in early languages, there are many more irregularities, exceptions, and anomalies than in modern ones. It's true that we occasionally see new irregularities arise where forms used to be regular; however, these cases do not come close to balancing out the other cases, where words that were once irregular become regular, or are replaced by regularly inflected words, or where syntax anomalies are smoothed out. The trend is increasingly to use the same means to denote the same thing in every case, to apply the ending or whatever is used in a large group of words to express a specific modification of the central idea until it is used in all other words as well.
Comparative linguistics did not attain a scientific character[426] till the principle was established that the relationship of two languages had to be determined by a thoroughgoing conformity in the most necessary parts of language, namely (besides grammar proper) pronouns and numerals and the most indispensable of nouns and verbs. But if this domain of speech, by preserving religiously, as it were, the old tradition, affords infallible criteria of the near or remote relationship of different languages, may we not reasonably expect to find in the same domain some clue to the oldest grammatical system used by our ancestors? What sort of system, then, do we find there? We see such a declension as I, me, we, us: the several forms of the ‘paradigm’ do not at all resemble each other, as they do in more recently developed declensions. We find masculines and feminines, such as father, mother, man, wife, bull, cow; while such methods of derivation as are seen in count, countess, he-bear, she-bear, belong to a later time. We meet with degrees of comparison like good, better, ill, worse, while regular forms like happy, happier, big, bigger, prevail in all the younger strata of languages. We meet with verbal flexion such as appears in am, is, was, been, which forms a striking contrast to the more modern method of adding a mere ending while leaving the body of the word unchanged. In an interesting book, Vom Suppletivwesen der indogermanischen Sprachen (1899), H. Osthoff has collected a very great number of examples from the old Aryan languages of different stems supplementing each other, and has pointed out that this phenomenon is characteristic of the most necessary ideas occurring every moment in ordinary conversation: I take at random a few of the best-known of his examples: Fr. aller, je vais, j’irai, Lat. fero, tuli, Gr. horaō, opsomai, eidon, Lat. bonus, melior, optimus. Osthoff fully agrees with me that we have here a trait of primitive psychology: our remote ancestors were not able to see and to express what was common to these ideas; their minds were very unsystematic, and separated in their linguistic expressions things which from a logical point of view are closely related: much of their grammar, therefore, was really of a lexical character.
Comparative linguistics didn’t become scientific[426] until it was established that the connection between two languages had to be determined by strict agreement in the most essential parts of language. This includes not just grammar but also pronouns, numerals, and the most basic nouns and verbs. If this area of language, by faithfully maintaining the old tradition, provides reliable indicators of how closely or distantly related different languages are, can we not expect to find some insight into the oldest grammatical system used by our ancestors? So, what kind of system do we see there? We observe declensions like I, me, we, us: the various forms of the ‘paradigm’ don’t resemble each other at all, unlike those in more recently developed declensions. We see masculine and feminine forms such as father, mother, man, wife, bull, cow; while methods of formation like count, countess, he-bear, she-bear, come from a later period. We encounter degrees of comparison like good, better, ill, worse, while regular forms such as happy, happier, big, bigger, dominate in all the newer layers of languages. We see verbal inflection like that in am, is, was, been, which contrasts sharply with the modern approach of simply adding a suffix while keeping the core of the word unchanged. In an intriguing book, Vom Suppletivwesen der indogermanischen Sprachen (1899), H. Osthoff has gathered many examples from the old Aryan languages where different roots supplement each other and highlighted that this phenomenon is typical of the most fundamental concepts encountered regularly in daily conversation: I randomly select a few of his well-known examples: Fr. aller, je vais, j’irai, Lat. fero, tuli, Gr. horaō, opsomai, eidon, Lat. bonus, melior, optimus. Osthoff completely agrees that this reflects a trait of primitive psychology: our distant ancestors couldn’t see or express what was common to these concepts; their thinking was quite unsystematic and separated in their language expressions things that are logically connected: a lot of their grammar, therefore, was actually more lexical in nature.
XXI.—§ 8. Savage Tribes.
If now it is asked whether the conclusions we have thus arrived at are borne out by a consideration of the languages of savage or primitive races nowadays, the answer is that these cannot be lumped together; there are among them many different types, even with regard to grammatical structure. But the more these languages are studied and the more accurately their structure is described, the more also students perceive intricacies and anomalies[427] in their grammar. Gabelentz (Spr 386) says that the casual observer has no idea how manifold and how nicely circumscribed grammatical categories can be, even in the seemingly crudest languages, for ordinary grammars tell us nothing about that. P. W. Schmidt (Die Stellung der Pygmäenvölker, 1910, 129) says that whoever, from the low culture of the Andamanese, would expect to find their language very simple and poor in expressions would be strangely deceived, for its mechanism is highly complicated, with many prefixes and suffixes, which often conceal the root itself. Meinhof (MSA 136) mentions the multiplicity of plural formations in African languages. Vilhelm Thomsen, in speaking of the Santhal (Khervarian) language, says that its grammar is capable of expressing a multiplicity of nuances which in other languages must be expressed by clumsy circumlocutions; the native speakers go beyond what is necessary through requiring expressions for many subordinate notions, the language having, so to speak, only one fine gold-balance, on which everything, even the simplest and commonest things, must be weighed by the adding-up of a whole series of minutiæ. Curr speaks about the erroneous belief in the simplicity of Australian languages, which on the contrary have a great number of conjugations, etc. The extreme difficulty and complex structure of Eskimo and of many Amerindian languages is so notorious that no words need be wasted on them here. And the forms of the Basque verb are so manifold and intricate that we understand how Larramendi, in his legitimate pride at having been the first to reduce them to a system, called his grammar El Imposible Vencido, ‘The Impossible Overcome.’ At Béarn they have the story that the good God, wishing to punish the devil for the temptation of Eve, sent him to the Pays Basque with the command that he should remain there till he had mastered the language. At the end of seven years God relented, finding the punishment too severe, and called the devil to him. The devil had no sooner crossed the bridge of Castelondo than he found he had forgotten all that he had so hardly learned.
If we now ask whether the conclusions we've reached are supported by looking at the languages of primitive or "savage" races today, the answer is that these can't be grouped together; there are many different types among them, even regarding grammar. However, the more these languages are studied and their structures accurately described, the more students discover complexities and irregularities in their grammar. Gabelentz (Spr 386) notes that a casual observer has no idea how varied and precisely defined grammatical categories can be, even in what seem to be the simplest languages, as traditional grammars don't cover that. P. W. Schmidt (Die Stellung der Pygmäenvölker, 1910, 129) mentions that anyone expecting the language of the Andamanese, with its low culture, to be simple and lacking expression would be greatly mistaken, as its structure is highly complex, featuring many prefixes and suffixes that often obscure the root. Meinhof (MSA 136) points out the many plural forms in African languages. Vilhelm Thomsen, discussing the Santhal (Khervarian) language, says its grammar can express a range of nuances that other languages must express with awkward circumlocutions; the native speakers require expressions for many subordinate ideas, so to speak, the language has only one finely-tuned scale on which everything, even the simplest and most ordinary concepts, must be measured by tallying a whole series of details. Curr talks about the mistaken belief in the simplicity of Australian languages, which actually have a great number of conjugations, and the extreme complexity and intricate structure of Eskimo and many Amerindian languages are so well-known that there's no need to elaborate on them here. The forms of the Basque verb are so varied and complicated that we understand why Larramendi, in his rightful pride at being the first to systematize them, called his grammar El Imposible Vencido, ‘The Impossible Overcome.’ In Béarn, there's a story that God, wishing to punish the devil for tempting Eve, sent him to the Pays Basque with the order to stay there until he had mastered the language. After seven years, God had a change of heart, realizing the punishment was too harsh, and called the devil back. No sooner had the devil crossed the Castelondo bridge than he realized he had forgotten everything he had painstakingly learned.
What is here said about the languages of wild tribes (and of the Basques, who are not exactly savages, but whose language is generally taken to have retained many primeval traits) is in exact keeping with everything that recent study of primitive man has brought to light: the life of the savage is regulated to the minutest details through ceremonies and conventionalities to be observed on every and any occasion; he is restricted in what he may eat and drink and when and how; and all these, to our mind, irrational prescriptions and innumerable prohibitions have to be observed with the most scrupulous, nay religious, care: it is the same with all the meticulous rules of his language.
What’s mentioned here about the languages of indigenous tribes (and the Basques, who aren’t exactly savages but whose language is generally thought to have kept many ancient features) aligns perfectly with what recent studies of primitive societies have revealed: a savage’s life is incredibly detailed, governed by ceremonies and traditions that must be followed in every situation. They have strict rules about what they can eat and drink, as well as when and how; all these seemingly irrational rules and countless prohibitions must be followed with the utmost, almost religious, precision, just like the intricate rules of their language.
XXI.—§ 9. Law of Development.
So far, then, from subscribing to Whitney’s dictum that “the law of simplicity of beginnings applies to language not less naturally and necessarily than to other instrumentalities” (G 226), we are drawn to the conclusion that primitive language had a superabundance of irregularities and anomalies, in syntax and word-formation no less than in accidence. It was capricious and fanciful, and displayed a luxuriant growth of forms, entangled one with another like the trees in a primeval forest. “Rien n’entre mieux dans les esprits grossiers que les subtilités des langues” (Tarde, Lois de l’imitation 285). Human minds in the early times disported themselves in long and intricate words as in the wildest and most wanton play. Nothing could be more beside the mark than to suppose that grammatical and logical categories were in primitive languages generally in harmony (as is supposed, e.g., by Sweet, New Engl. Grammar § 543): primitive speech cannot have been distinguished for logical consistency; nor, so far as we can judge, was it simple and facile: it is much more likely to have been extremely clumsy and unwieldy. Renan rightly reminds us of Turgot’s wise saying: “Des hommes grossiers ne font rien de simple. Il faut des hommes perfectionnés pour y arriver.”
So far, rather than agreeing with Whitney’s statement that “the law of simplicity of beginnings applies to language just as naturally and necessarily as it does to other tools” (G 226), we conclude that early language was full of irregularities and anomalies, in syntax and word-formation as much as in inflection. It was unpredictable and imaginative, showing a rich variety of forms, all tangled together like trees in a primeval forest. “Nothing gets through to the coarse minds better than the subtleties of languages.” (Tarde, Lois de l’imitation 285). Early humans played with long and complex words as if engaged in wild and carefree fun. It’s completely misguided to think that grammatical and logical categories were generally consistent in primitive languages (as suggested, for example, by Sweet, New Engl. Grammar § 543): primitive speech was likely not marked by logical consistency; moreover, to the best of our understanding, it wasn’t simple and easy to use: it was much more likely to have been quite awkward and cumbersome. Renan correctly reminds us of Turgot’s wise saying: “Rude men don't do anything simply. It takes refined men to make it happen.”
We have seen in earlier chapters that the old theory of the three stages through which human language was supposed always to proceed, isolation, agglutination and flexion, was built up on insufficient materials; but while we feel tempted totally to reverse this system, we must be on our guard against establishing too rigid and too absolute a system ourselves. It would not do simply to reverse the order and say that flexion is the oldest stage, from which language tends through an agglutinative stage towards complete isolation, for flexion, agglutination and isolation do not include all possible structural types of speech. The possibilities of development are so manifold, and there are such innumerable ways of arriving at more or less adequate expressions for human thought, that it is next to impossible to compare languages of different families. Even, therefore, if it is probable that English, Finnish and Chinese are all simplifications of more complex languages, we cannot say that Chinese, for instance, at one time resembled English in structure and at some other time Finnish. English was once a flexional language, and is still so in some respects, while in others it is agglutinative, and in others again isolating, or nearly so. But we may perhaps give the following formula of what is our total impression of the whole preceding inquiry:
We’ve seen in earlier chapters that the old theory about the three stages of human language— isolation, agglutination, and flexion—was based on inadequate evidence. While we might be tempted to completely overturn this theory, we need to be careful not to create a system that’s too strict or absolute ourselves. It wouldn’t be enough to just reverse the order and claim that flexion is the oldest stage, from which language evolves through an agglutinative stage toward complete isolation, because flexion, agglutination, and isolation don’t cover all possible types of language structure. The potential for development is so varied, and there are countless ways to express human thoughts adequately that it’s nearly impossible to compare languages from different families. Even if it’s likely that English, Finnish, and Chinese are all simplifications of more complex languages, we can’t say that Chinese, for example, once had a structure similar to English and later resembled Finnish. English was once a flexional language and still is in some ways, while in other aspects it’s agglutinative, and in a few others, it’s isolating, or very close to it. However, we might present the following summary of our overall impression from the preceding inquiry:
The evolution of language shows a progressive tendency from inseparable irregular conglomerations to freely and regularly combinable short elements.
The evolution of language demonstrates a gradual transition from complicated, fixed combinations to simpler elements that can be easily and consistently put together.
The old system of historical linguistics may be likened to an enormous pyramid; only it is a pity that it should have as its base the small, square, strong, smart root word, and suspended above it the unwieldy, lumbering, ill-proportioned, flexion-encumbered sentence-vocable. Structures of this sort may with some adroitness be made to stand; but their equilibrium is unstable, and sooner or later they will inevitably tumble over.
The old system of historical linguistics can be compared to a huge pyramid; it's unfortunate that its base is made up of a small, solid, clever root word, while the clumsy, awkward, and overly complicated sentence hangs above it. These kinds of structures can be made to stay up with some skill, but their balance is shaky, and eventually, they will fall apart.
XXI.—§ 10. Vocabulary.
On the lexical side of language we find a development parallel to that noticed in grammar; and, indeed, if we go deep enough into the question, we shall see that it is really the very same movement that has taken place. The more advanced a language is, the more developed is its power of expressing abstract or general ideas. Everywhere language has first attained to expressions for the concrete and special. In accounts of the languages of barbarous races we constantly come across such phrases as these: “The aborigines of Tasmania had no words representing abstract ideas; for each variety of gum-tree and wattle-tree, etc., they had a name; but they had no equivalent for the expression ‘a tree’; neither could they express abstract qualities, such as ‘hard, soft, warm, cold, long, short, round’”; or, The Mohicans have words for cutting various objects, but none to convey cutting simply. The Zulus have no word for ‘cow,’ but words for ‘red cow,’ ‘white cow,’ etc. (Sayce S 2. 5, cf. 1. 121). In Bakaïri (Central Brazil) “each parrot has its special name, and the general idea ‘parrot’ is totally unknown, as well as the general idea ‘palm.’ But they know precisely the qualities of each subspecies of parrot and palm, and attach themselves so much to these numerous particular notions that they take no interest in the common characteristics. They are choked in the abundance of the material and cannot manage it economically. They have only small coin, but in that they must be said to be excessively rich rather than poor” (K. v. d. Steinen, Unter den Naturvölkern Brasiliens, 1894, 81). The Lithuanians, like many primitive tribes, have many special, but no common names for various colours: one word for gray in speaking about wool and geese, one about horses, one about cattle, one about the hair of men and some animals, and in the same way for other colours (J. Schmidt, Kritik d. Sonantentheorie 37). Many languages have no word for ‘brother,’ but words for ‘elder brother’ and ‘younger brother’;[430] others have different words according to whose (person and number) father or brother it is (see, e.g., the paradigm in Gabelentz Spr 421), and the same applies in many languages to names for various parts of the body. In Cherokee, instead of one word for ‘washing’ we find different words, according to what is washed: kutuwo ‘I wash myself,’ kulestula ‘I wash my head,’ tsestula ‘I wash the head of somebody else,’ kukuswo ‘I wash my face,’ tsekuswo ‘I wash the face of somebody else,’ takasula ‘I wash my hands or feet,’ takunkela ‘I wash my clothes,’ takutega ‘I wash dishes,’ tsejuwu ‘I wash a child,’ kowela ‘I wash meat’ (see, however, the criticism of Hewitt, Am. Anthropologist, 1893, 398). Primitive man did not see the wood for the trees.[108]
On the vocabulary side of language, we see a development that mirrors what’s happening in grammar. If we dig deeper, we’ll realize it's really the same process at work. The more advanced a language is, the better it is at expressing abstract or general ideas. Initially, languages often develop words for concrete and specific things. In studies of the languages of primitive cultures, we often find phrases like: “The native people of Tasmania had no words for abstract ideas; they named each type of gum tree and wattle tree, but they didn’t have a term for ‘tree’ itself; they also struggled to express abstract qualities like ‘hard, soft, warm, cold, long, short, round’.” Or, “The Mohicans have words for cutting different objects, but none to simply convey cutting.” The Zulus lack a word for ‘cow’ but have terms for ‘red cow,’ ‘white cow,’ etc. (Sayce S 2. 5, cf. 1. 121). In Bakaïri (Central Brazil), “every parrot has a specific name, and the general concept of ‘parrot’ is completely unknown, as is the general concept of ‘palm.’ However, they can describe the qualities of each subspecies of parrot and palm so well that they focus so much on these specific ideas that they overlook the common characteristics. They are overwhelmed by the abundance of material and struggle to manage it effectively. Although they have only small coins, in that respect, they are incredibly rich rather than poor” (K. v. d. Steinen, Unter den Naturvölkern Brasiliens, 1894, 81). The Lithuanians, like many primitive tribes, have many specific names for different colors but no general terms: one word for gray when talking about wool and geese, another for horses, another for cattle, and another for human and animal hair, and similarly for other colors (J. Schmidt, Kritik d. Sonantentheorie 37). Many languages lack a word for ‘brother’ but have specific words for ‘older brother’ and ‘younger brother’; others have different words depending on whose (person and number) father or brother it is (see, for example, the paradigm in Gabelentz Spr 421), and this also applies to names for various body parts in many languages. In Cherokee, instead of one word for ‘washing,’ there are different words depending on what is being washed: kutuwo ‘I wash myself,’ kulestula ‘I wash my head,’ tsestula ‘I wash someone else’s head,’ kukuswo ‘I wash my face,’ tsekuswo ‘I wash someone else’s face,’ takasula ‘I wash my hands or feet,’ takunkela ‘I wash my clothes,’ takutega ‘I wash dishes,’ tsejuwu ‘I wash a child,’ kowela ‘I wash meat’ (see, however, the criticism by Hewitt, Am. Anthropologist, 1893, 398). Primitive man did not see the wood for the trees.[108]
In some Amerindian languages there are distinct series of numerals for various classes of objects; thus in Kwakiatl and Tsimoshian (Sapir, Language and Environment 239); similarly the Melanesians have special words to denote a definite number of certain objects, e.g. a buku niu ‘two coconuts,’ a buru ‘ten coconuts,’ a koro ‘a hundred coconuts,’ a selavo ‘a thousand coconuts,’ a uduudu ‘ten canoes,’ a bola ‘ten fishes,’ etc. (Gabelentz, Die melan. Spr. 1. 23). In some languages the numerals are the same for all classes of objects counted, but require after them certain class-denoting words varying according to the character of the objects (in some respects comparable to the English twenty head of cattle, Pidgin piecey; cf. Yule and Burnell, Hobson-Jobson s.v. Numerical Affixes). This reminds one of the systems of weights and measures, which even in civilized countries up to a comparatively recent period varied not only from country to country, sometimes even from district to district, but even in the same country according to the things weighed or measured (in England stone and ton still vary in this way).
In some Native American languages, there are different sets of numbers for different types of objects. For example, in Kwakiatl and Tsimoshian (Sapir, Language and Environment 239), and similarly, the Melanesians have specific terms to indicate a particular number of certain items, like a buku niu meaning 'two coconuts,' a buru meaning 'ten coconuts,' a koro meaning 'a hundred coconuts,' a selavo meaning 'a thousand coconuts,' a uduudu meaning 'ten canoes,' a bola meaning 'ten fish,' and so on (Gabelentz, Die melan. Spr. 1. 23). In some languages, the numbers are the same for all kinds of objects being counted, but they need specific class-denoting words afterward, which change based on the nature of the objects (somewhat similar to English phrases like twenty head of cattle or the Pidgin term piecey; see Yule and Burnell, Hobson-Jobson s.v. Numerical Affixes). This is reminiscent of the systems of weights and measures, which, even in developed countries, varied not only from one country to another, sometimes even from one region to another, and even within the same country based on what was being weighed or measured (in England, stone and ton still differ in this way).
In old Gothonic poetry we find an astonishing abundance of words translated in our dictionaries by ‘sea,’ ‘battle,’ ‘sword,’ ‘hero,’ and the like: these may certainly be considered as relics of an earlier state of things, in which each of these words had its separate shade of meaning, which was subsequently lost and which it is impossible now to determine with certainty. The nomenclature of a remote past was undoubtedly constructed upon similar principles to those which are still preserved in a word-group like horse, mare, stallion, foal, colt, instead of he-horse, she-horse, young horse, etc. This sort of grouping has only survived in a few cases in which a lively interest has been felt in the objects or animals concerned. We may note, however, the different terms employed[431] for essentially the same idea in a flock of sheep, a pack of wolves, a herd of cattle, a bevy of larks, a covey of partridges, a shoal of fish. Primitive language could show a far greater number of instances of this description, and, so far, had a larger vocabulary than later languages, though, of course, it lacked names for a great number of ideas that were outside the sphere of interest of uncivilized people.
In old Gothic poetry, we find an impressive number of words that our dictionaries translate as ‘sea,’ ‘battle,’ ‘sword,’ ‘hero,’ and such: these can definitely be seen as remnants of an earlier time, when each of these words had its own distinct meaning, which has since been lost and is now impossible to clearly identify. The naming conventions of a distant past were certainly based on similar principles to those still found in word groups like horse, mare, stallion, foal, colt, rather than using he-horse, she-horse, young horse, etc. This kind of grouping has only survived in a few cases where there has been a strong interest in the objects or animals involved. However, we can observe the different terms used[431] for essentially the same concept in a flock of sheep, a pack of wolves, a herd of cattle, a bevy of larks, a covey of partridges, a shoal of fish. Primitive language could demonstrate a much greater number of instances like this, and, up to this point, had a larger vocabulary than later languages, although it obviously lacked names for many ideas that were outside the interests of uncivilized people.
There was another reason for the richness of the vocabulary of primitive man: his superstition about words, which made him avoid the use of certain words under certain circumstances—during war, when out fishing, during the time of the great cultic festivals, etc.—because he feared the anger of gods or demons if he did not religiously observe the rules of the linguistic tabu. Accordingly, in many cases he had two or more sets of words for exactly the same notions, of which later generations as a rule preserved only one, unless they differentiated these words by utilizing them to discriminate objects that were similar but not identical.
There was another reason for the richness of the vocabulary of early humans: their superstition about words, which made them avoid using certain words in specific situations—during wars, when fishing, during major religious festivals, etc.—because they feared the wrath of gods or demons if they didn’t strictly follow the rules of the linguistic taboo. As a result, in many cases, they had two or more sets of words for exactly the same concepts, of which later generations usually preserved only one, unless they differentiated these words by using them to distinguish similar but not identical objects.
XXI.—§ 11. Poetry and Prose.
On the whole the development of languages, even in the matter of vocabulary, must be considered to have taken a beneficial course; still, in certain respects one may to some extent regret the consequences of this evolution. While our words are better adapted to express abstract things and to render concrete things with definite precision, they are necessarily comparatively colourless. The old words, on the contrary, spoke more immediately to the senses—they were manifestly more suggestive, more graphic and pictorial: while to express one single thing we are not unfrequently obliged to piece the image together bit by bit, the old concrete words would at once present it to the hearer’s mind as a whole; they were, accordingly, better adapted to poetic purposes. Nor is this the only point in which we see a close relationship between primitive words and poetry.
Overall, the evolution of languages, even when it comes to vocabulary, has generally been positive; however, in some ways, one might regret the effects of this change. While our words are now better suited to express abstract ideas and describe concrete things with clear accuracy, they tend to be relatively flat. In contrast, the old words connected more directly with the senses—they were clearly more evocative, more vivid, and more illustrative: where we often have to assemble an image piece by piece, the old concrete words would instantly present it to the listener's mind as a complete picture; thus, they were more effective for poetic use. This is not the only way we see a strong link between primitive words and poetry.
If by a mental effort we transport ourselves to a period in which language consisted solely of such graphic concrete words, we shall discover that, in spite of their number, they would not suffice, taken all together, to cover everything that needed expression; a wealth in such words is not incompatible with a certain poverty. They would accordingly often be required to do service outside of their proper sphere of application. That a figurative or metaphorical use of words is a factor of the utmost importance in the life of all languages is indisputable; but I am probably right in thinking that it played a more prominent[432] part in old times than now. In the course of ages a great many metaphors have lost their freshness and vividness, so that nobody feels them to be metaphors any longer. Examine closely such a sentence as this: “He came to look upon the low ebb of morals as an outcome of bad taste,” and you will find that nearly every word is a dead metaphor.[109] But the better stocked a language is with those ex-metaphors which have become regular expressions for definite ideas, the less need there is for going out of one’s way to find new metaphors. The expression of thought therefore tends to become more and more mechanical or prosaic.
If we make a mental effort to go back to a time when language consisted only of very concrete words, we’ll find that, despite their abundance, they wouldn't be enough to express everything that needed to be said; having a lot of these words doesn’t mean we have everything we need. Because of this, they often had to be used in ways that weren't their original purpose. It’s clear that figurative or metaphorical use of words is extremely important in all languages, but I believe it was likely more significant in the past than it is today. Over time, many metaphors have lost their freshness and impact, so they no longer feel like metaphors to anyone. Take a close look at the sentence: “He came to look upon the low ebb of morals as an outcome of bad taste,” and you’ll see that nearly every word is a dead metaphor.[109] The more a language has these ex-metaphors that have become standard expressions for specific ideas, the less we need to go out of our way to create new metaphors. As a result, the expression of thought tends to become more mechanical or straightforward.
Primitive man, however, on account of the nature of his language, was constantly reduced to using words and phrases figuratively: he was forced to express his thoughts in the language of poetry. The speech of modern savages is often spoken of as abounding in similes and all kinds of figurative phrases and allegorical expressions. Just as in the literature transmitted to us poetry is found in every country to precede prose, so poetic language is on the whole older than prosaic language; lyrics and cult songs come before science, and Oehlenschläger is right when he sings (in N. Møller’s translation):
Primitive man, because of the nature of his language, often had to use words and phrases in a figurative way: he had to express his thoughts using poetic language. The speech of modern tribes is often described as being full of similes and various figurative phrases and allegorical expressions. Just as we see poetry coming before prose in the literature from every country, poetic language is generally older than everyday language; lyrics and ritual songs predate science, and Oehlenschläger is right when he sings (in N. Møller’s translation):
XXI.—§ 12. Emotional Songs.
If we now try to sum up what has been inferred about primitive speech, we see that by our backward march we arrived at a language whose units had a very meagre substance of thought, and this as specialized and concrete as possible; but at the same time the phonetic body was ample; and the bigger and longer the words, the thinner the thoughts! Much cry and little wool! No period has seen less taciturn people than the first framers of speech; primitive speakers were not reticent and reserved beings, but youthful men and women babbling merrily on, without being so very particular about the meaning of each word. They did not narrowly weigh every syllable—what were a couple of syllables more or less to them? They chattered away for the mere pleasure of chattering, resembling therein many a mother of our own time, who will chatter away to baby without measuring her words or looking too closely into the meaning of each; nay, who is not a bit troubled by the consideration that the little deary does not understand a single word of her affectionate eloquence. But[433] primitive speech—and we return here to an idea thrown out above—still more resembles the speech of little baby himself, before he begins to frame his own language after the pattern of the grown-ups; the language of our remote forefathers was like that ceaseless humming and crooning with which no thoughts are as yet connected, which merely amuses and delights the little one. Language originated as play, and the organs of speech were first trained in this singing sport of idle hours.
If we try to sum up what we've learned about early speech, we see that our backward exploration led us to a language with very simple ideas, as specialized and concrete as possible; but at the same time, the sounds used were quite abundant. The longer and bigger the words were, the less meaningful the thoughts became! A lot of noise with little substance! No era has had less reserved people than the early creators of speech; primitive speakers weren't shy or reserved, but rather young men and women chatting happily, without being very precise about the meaning of each word. They didn't scrutinize every syllable—what difference did a couple extra syllables make to them? They talked just for the sake of talking, similar to many mothers today, who will chat away to their babies without measuring their words or paying too much attention to the meaning of each; in fact, they aren't even bothered that the little one doesn't understand a single word of their affectionate chatter. But primitive speech—and we're returning to a point made earlier—more closely resembles the speech of a little baby before they begin to form their own language like adults; the language of our distant ancestors was similar to that constant humming and cooing that doesn't connect to any thoughts yet, which simply entertains and delights the little one. Language began as play, and the speech organs were first trained in this singing pastime of idle moments.
Primitive language had no great store of ideas, and if we consider it as an instrument for expressing thoughts, it was clumsy, unwieldy and ineffectual; but what did that matter? Thoughts were not the first things to press forward and crave for expression; emotions and instincts were more primitive and far more powerful. But what emotions were most powerful in producing germs of speech? To be sure not hunger and that which is connected with hunger: mere individual self-assertion and the struggle for material existence. This prosaic side of life was only capable of calling forth short monosyllabic interjections, howls of pain and grunts of satisfaction or dissatisfaction; but these are isolated and incapable of much further development; they are the most immutable portions of language, and remain now at essentially the same standpoint as thousands of years ago.
Primitive language didn't have a wealth of ideas, and when we think of it as a way to express thoughts, it was awkward, cumbersome, and ineffective; but what did that really matter? Thoughts weren't the first things to push for expression; emotions and instincts were more basic and much stronger. But which emotions were most influential in sparking the beginnings of speech? Certainly not hunger and its related needs: simple self-assertion and the fight for survival. This practical side of life could only inspire short, one-syllable sounds, cries of pain, and grunts of either pleasure or displeasure; however, those are isolated and can’t develop much further; they are the most unchanging parts of language and remain fundamentally the same as they were thousands of years ago.
If after spending some time over the deep metaphysical speculations of a number of German linguistic philosophers you turn to men like Madvig and Whitney, you are at once agreeably impressed by the sobriety of their reasoning and their superior clearness of thought. But if you look more closely, you cannot help thinking that they imagine our primitive ancestors after their own image as serious and well-meaning men endowed with a large share of common-sense. By their laying such great stress on the communication of thought as the end of language and on the benefit to primitive man of being able to speak to his fellow-creatures about matters of vital importance, they leave you with the impression that these “first framers of speech” were sedate citizens with a strong interest in the purely business and matter-of-fact side of life; indeed, according to Madvig, women had no share in the creating of language.
If you spend some time delving into the deep metaphysical ideas of various German linguistic philosophers and then switch to thinkers like Madvig and Whitney, you’ll quickly notice their reasoning is much more straightforward and their thoughts are clearer. However, if you examine their views more closely, you can’t help but feel that they picture our primitive ancestors in their own image as serious, well-meaning individuals with a good dose of common sense. By emphasizing the importance of communication as the main goal of language and the advantages it provided primitive humans in discussing crucial issues, they give the impression that these “first creators of speech” were composed individuals focused on practical, everyday matters; in fact, according to Madvig, women played no role in the development of language.
In opposition to this rationalistic view I should like, for once in a way, to bring into the field the opposite view: the genesis of language is not to be sought in the prosaic, but in the poetic side of life; the source of speech is not gloomy seriousness, but merry play and youthful hilarity. And among the emotions which were most powerful in eliciting outbursts of music and of song, love must be placed in the front rank. To the feeling of love, which has left traces of its vast influence on countless points in[434] the evolution of organic nature, are due not only, as Darwin has shown, the magnificent colours of birds and flowers, but also many of the things that fill us with joy in human life; it inspired many of the first songs, and through them was instrumental in bringing about human language. In primitive speech I hear the laughing cries of exultation when lads and lasses vied with one another to attract the attention of the other sex, when everybody sang his merriest and danced his bravest to lure a pair of eyes to throw admiring glances in his direction. Language was born in the courting days of mankind; the first utterances of speech I fancy to myself like something between the nightly love-lyrics of puss upon the tiles and the melodious love-songs of the nightingale.[110]
In contrast to this rational perspective, I'd like to put forward the opposite view for once: the origin of language is found not in the mundane but in the poetic aspects of life; the source of speech comes not from serious gloom but from joyful play and youthful excitement. Among the emotions that triggered bursts of music and song, love stands out as the most significant. The feeling of love, which has left its mark on countless aspects of organic evolution, is responsible not only for the beautiful colors of birds and flowers, as Darwin pointed out, but also for many joys in human life; it inspired many of the earliest songs and played a key role in the development of human language. In early speech, I hear the joyful cries of celebration when young men and women competed for each other's attention, when everyone sang their happiest and danced their bravest to catch someone's eye. Language was born during humanity's courting rituals; I envision the first words of speech as something between the night-time love songs of a cat on the roof and the melodious love songs of the nightingale.[434][110]
XXI.—§ 13. Primitive Singing.
Love, however, was not the only feeling which tended to call forth primitive songs. Any strong emotion, and more particularly any pleasurable excitement, might result in song. Singing, like any other sort of play, is due to an overflow of energy, which is discharged in “unusual vivacity of every kind, including vocal vivacity.” Out of the full heart the mouth sings! Savages will sing whenever they are excited: exploits of war or of the chase, the deeds of their ancestors, the coming of a fat dog, any incident “from the arrival of a stranger to an earthquake” is turned into a song; and most of these songs are composed extem[435]pore. “When rowing, the Coast negroes sing either a description of some love intrigue or the praise of some woman celebrated for her beauty.” The Malays beguile all their leisure hours with the repetition of songs, etc. “In singing, the East African contents himself with improvising a few words without sense or rime and repeats them till they nauseate.” (These quotations, and many others, are found in Herbert Spencer’s Essay on the Origin of Music, with his Postscript.) The reader of Karl Bücher’s painstaking work Arbeit und Rhythmus (2te aufl. 1899) will know from his numerous examples and illustrations what an enormous rôle rhythmic singing plays in the daily life of savages all over the world, how each kind of work, especially if it is done by many jointly, has its own kind of song, and how nothing is done except to the sound of vocal music. In many instances savages are mentioned as very expert in adapting the subjects of their songs to current events. Nor is this sort of singing on every and any occasion confined to savages; it is found wherever the indoor life of civilization has not killed all open-air hilarity; formerly in our Western Europe people sang much more than they do now. The Swedish peasant Jonas Stolt (ab. 1820) writes: “I have known a time when young people were singing from morning till eve. Then they were carolling both out- and indoors, behind the plough as well as at the threshing-floor and at the spinning-wheel. This is all over long ago: nowadays there is silence everywhere; if someone were to try and sing in our days as we did of old, people would term it bawling.”
Love wasn’t the only emotion that triggered primitive songs. Any strong feeling, especially any kind of pleasurable excitement, could lead to singing. Singing, much like any form of play, happens when there’s an overflow of energy, which gets released through “unusual vivacity of every kind, including vocal vivacity.” When the heart is full, the mouth sings! People will sing whenever they feel excited: tales of war or hunting, stories about their ancestors, the arrival of a hefty dog, any event “from the arrival of a stranger to an earthquake” gets turned into a song; and most of these songs are made up on the spot. “When rowing, the Coast blacks sing either about a romantic intrigue or praise a woman known for her beauty.” The Malays fill their free time with singing over and over. “In singing, the East African content himself by improvising a few nonsensical words without rhyme and repeats them until they become tiresome.” (These quotes, and many others, are found in Herbert Spencer’s Essay on the Origin of Music, with his Postscript.) Those who read Karl Bücher’s meticulous work Arbeit und Rhythmus (2nd ed. 1899) will see through his many examples and illustrations how important rhythmic singing is in the daily lives of people all over the world, how every kind of work, especially when done in groups, has its specific kind of song, and how nothing happens without the sound of singing. In many cases, people are noted for being very skilled at adapting their songs to current events. This kind of singing isn’t limited to primitive cultures; it exists wherever the indoor routines of civilization haven’t suppressed outdoor joy; in the past, people in Western Europe sang a lot more than they do now. The Swedish peasant Jonas Stolt (circa 1820) writes: “I remember a time when young people sang from morning until night. They would sing both indoors and outdoors, behind the plow as well as at the threshing floor and at the spinning wheel. Those days are long gone: nowadays there’s silence everywhere; if someone were to try to sing today like we used to, people would call it shouting.”
The first things that were expressed in song were, to be sure, neither deep nor wise; how could you expect it? Note the frequency with which we are told that the songs of savages consist of or contain totally meaningless syllables. Thus we read about American Indians that “the native word which is translated ‘song’ does not suggest any use of words. To the Indian, the music is of primal importance; words may or may not accompany the music. When words are used in song, they are rarely employed as a narrative, the sentences are not apt to be complete” (Louise Pound, Mod. Lang. Ass. 32. 224), and similarly: “Even where the slightest vestiges of epic poetry are missing, lyric poetry of one form or another is always present. It may consist of the musical use of meaningless syllables that sustain the song; or it may consist largely of such syllables, with a few interspersed words suggesting certain ideas and certain feelings; or it may rise to the expression of emotions connected with warlike deeds, with religious feeling, love, or even to the praise of the beauties of nature” (Boas, International Journ. Amer. Ling. 1. 8). The magic incantations of the Greenland Eskimo, according to[436] W. Thalbitzer, contain many incomprehensible words never used outside these songs (but have they ever been real words?), and the same is said about the mystic religious formulas of Maoris and African negroes and many other tribes, as well as about the old Roman hymns of the Arval Brethren. The mere joy in sonorous combinations here no doubt counts for very much, as in the splendid but meaningless metrical lists of names in the Old Norse Edda, and in many a modern refrain, too. Let me give one example of half (or less than half) understood strings of syllables from “The Oath of the Canting Crew” (1749, Farmer’s Musa Pedestris, 51):
The first songs that were created were definitely not deep or wise; how could they be? It’s often noted that the songs of primitive people involve completely meaningless syllables. For instance, we learn about American Indians that “the native word translated as ‘song’ doesn’t indicate any use of words. For the Indian, the music holds primary importance; words might accompany it or not. When words are sung, they rarely form a complete narrative” (Louise Pound, Mod. Lang. Ass. 32. 224). Similarly, “even where there are no traces of epic poetry, some form of lyric poetry is always present. It may consist of the musical use of meaningless syllables that support the song, or it may largely rely on such syllables with a few scattered words hinting at certain ideas and feelings; or it could express emotions tied to war, religious sentiments, love, or even praise for the beauty of nature” (Boas, International Journ. Amer. Ling. 1. 8). The magical chants of the Greenland Eskimo, according to W. Thalbitzer, contain many incomprehensible words that are never used outside of these songs (but were they ever real words?), and similar things are said about the mystical religious formulas of Maoris, African tribes, and many others, as well as about the ancient Roman hymns of the Arval Brethren. The simple joy in the sound of these combinations is clearly significant, just like in the beautiful but meaningless lists of names in the Old Norse Edda, and in many modern lyrics, too. Let me give one example of partly (or less than partly) understood strings of syllables from “The Oath of the Canting Crew” (1749, Farmer’s Musa Pedestris, 51):
In the cultic and ceremonial songs of savage tribes in many parts of the world this is a prominent trait: it seems, indeed, to be universal. Even with us the thoughts associated with singing are generally neither very clear nor very abstruse; like humming or whistling, singing is often nothing more than an almost automatic outcome of a mood; and “What is not worth saying can be sung.” Besides, it has been the case at all times that things transient and trivial have found readier expression than Socratic wisdom. But the frivolous use tuned the instrument, and rendered it little by little more serviceable to a multiplicity of purposes, so that it became more and more fitted to express everything that touched human souls.
In the ritual and ceremonial songs of various tribal groups around the world, this is a noticeable feature: it appears to be universal. Even for us, the thoughts connected to singing are usually neither very clear nor very complex; like humming or whistling, singing is often just an almost automatic result of a mood; and “What isn’t worth saying can be sung.” Additionally, it has always been true that fleeting and trivial things have found easier expression than deep wisdom. However, this lighthearted use fine-tuned the instrument, gradually making it more useful for a wide range of purposes, so it became increasingly capable of expressing everything that touches the human spirit.
Men sang out their feelings long before they were able to speak their thoughts. But of course we must not imagine that “singing” means exactly the same thing here as in a modern concert hall. When we say that speech originated in song, what we mean is merely that our comparatively monotonous spoken language and our highly developed vocal music are differentiations of primitive utterances, which had more in them of the latter than of the former. These utterances were at first, like the singing of birds and the roaring of many animals and the crying and crooning of babies, exclamative, not communicative—that is, they came forth from an inner craving of the individual without any thought of any fellow-creatures. Our remote ancestors had not the slightest notion that such a thing as communicating ideas and feelings to someone else was possible. They little suspected that in singing[437] as nature prompted them they were paving the way for a language capable of rendering minute shades of thought; just as they could not suspect that out of their coarse pictures of men and animals there should one day grow an art enabling men of distant countries to speak to one another. As is the art of writing to primitive painting, so is the art of speaking to primitive singing. And the development of the two vehicles of communication of thought presents other curious and instructive parallels. In primitive picture-writing, each sign meant a whole sentence or even more—the image of a situation or of an incident being given as a whole; this developed into an ideographic writing of each word by itself; this system was succeeded by syllabic methods, which had in their turn to give place to alphabetic writing, in which each letter stands for, or is meant to stand for, one sound. Just as here the advance is due to a further analysis of language, smaller and smaller units of speech being progressively represented by single signs, in an exactly similar way, though not quite so unmistakably, the history of language shows us a progressive tendency towards analyzing into smaller and smaller units that which in the earlier stages was taken as an inseparable whole.
Men expressed their feelings through song long before they could articulate their thoughts. But we shouldn't assume that "singing" means the same thing here as it does in a modern concert hall. When we say that speech came from song, we simply mean that our relatively simple spoken language and our complex vocal music evolved from primitive sounds, which were more like the latter than the former. Initially, these sounds were exclamatory, like the singing of birds, the roaring of animals, and the crying and cooing of babies, rather than communicative—they arose from an individual's inner desire without any intention of reaching out to others. Our distant ancestors had no idea that sharing ideas and feelings with someone else was even possible. They didn’t realize that by singing as nature inspired them, they were setting the stage for a language that could express intricate shades of thought; just as they couldn't foresee that from their crude depictions of people and animals, an art form would eventually emerge that would allow people from far-off lands to communicate. Just as writing evolved from primitive drawing, speaking evolved from primitive singing. The development of these two ways of communicating thought showcases other interesting and insightful parallels. In early picture-writing, each symbol represented a complete thought or more, with the image depicting a situation or event in its entirety; this progressed to an ideographic writing style where each word was represented separately, followed by syllabic methods, which eventually led to alphabetic writing, where each letter represents one sound. Similarly, just as this progression resulted from a deeper breakdown of language into smaller units represented by individual signs, the history of language also shows a trend toward breaking down earlier all-encompassing forms into increasingly smaller units.
One point must be constantly kept in mind. Although we now regard the communication of thought as the main object of speaking, there is no reason for thinking that this has always been the case; it is perfectly possible that speech has developed from something which had no other purpose than that of exercising the muscles of the mouth and throat and of amusing oneself and others by the production of pleasant or possibly only strange sounds. The motives for uttering sounds may have changed entirely in the course of centuries without the speakers being at any point conscious of this change within them.
One thing we need to always remember is that while we now see sharing ideas as the main purpose of speaking, it hasn’t always been this way. It’s very possible that speech started out as a way to exercise the muscles in our mouths and throats, simply for fun or to create interesting sounds. The reasons for making sounds may have completely changed over the centuries, and speakers might not have even noticed this change happening.
XXI.—§ 14. Approach to Language.
We get the first approach to language proper when communicativeness takes precedence of exclamativeness, when sounds are uttered in order to ‘tell’ fellow-creatures something, as when birds warn their young ones of some imminent danger. In the case of human language, communication is infinitely more full and rich and elaborate; the question therefore is a very complex one: How did the association of sound and sense come about? How did that which originally was a jingle of meaningless sounds come to be an instrument of thought? How did man become, as Humboldt has somewhere defined him, “a singing creature, only associating thoughts with the tones”?
We first approach language properly when communicating is more important than just expressing emotions, when sounds are used to 'tell' others something, like when birds warn their young of an impending danger. With human language, communication is much fuller, richer, and more complex; thus, the question is quite complicated: How did the connection between sound and meaning develop? How did something that started as a jingle of meaningless sounds turn into a tool for thought? How did humans become, as Humboldt once described them, “singing beings, merely linking thoughts with sounds”?
In the case of an onomatopoetic or echo-word like bow-wow and an interjection like pooh-pooh the association was easy and direct; such words were at once employed and understood as signs for the corresponding idea. But this was not the case with the great bulk of language. Here association of sound with sense must have been arrived at by devious and circuitous ways, which to a great extent evade inquiry and make a detailed exposition impossible. But this is in exact conformity with very much that has taken place in recent periods; as we have learnt in previous chapters, it is only by indirect and roundabout ways that many words and grammatical expedients have acquired the meanings they now have, or have acquired meaning where they originally had none. Let me remind the reader of the word grog (p. 308), of interrogative particles (p. 358), of word order (p. 356), of many endings (Ch. XIX § 13 ff.), of tones (Ch. XIX § 5), of the French negative pas, of vowel-alternations like those in drink, drank, drunk, or in foot, feet, etc. Language is a complicated affair, and no more than most other human inventions has it come about in a simple way: mankind has not moved in a straight line towards a definitely perceived goal, but has muddled along from moment to moment and has thereby now and then stumbled on some happy expedient which has then been retained in accordance with the principle of the survival of the fittest.
In the case of an onomatopoeic word like bow-wow and an interjection like pooh-pooh, the connection was clear and straightforward; such words were quickly used and understood as representations of the corresponding idea. But this wasn’t true for most of the language. Here, the link between sound and meaning must have been formed through complicated and indirect paths, which largely avoid investigation and make detailed explanation difficult. However, this aligns perfectly with much of what has happened in recent times; as we've learned in previous chapters, it's often through indirect and roundabout methods that many words and grammatical tools have developed their current meanings or gained meaning where they originally had none. Let me remind the reader of the word grog (p. 308), of interrogative particles (p. 358), of word order (p. 356), of many endings (Ch. XIX § 13 ff.), of tones (Ch. XIX § 5), of the French negative pas, of vowel variations like those in drink, drank, drunk, or in foot, feet, etc. Language is a complex matter, and like most other human inventions, it hasn’t developed in a straightforward manner: humanity hasn’t progressed in a straight line towards a clear goal, but has instead moved from moment to moment, occasionally stumbling upon a useful solution that has then been preserved according to the principle of survival of the fittest.
We may perhaps succeed in forming some idea of the most primitive process of associating sound and sense if we call to mind what was said above on the signification of the earliest words, and try to fathom what that means. The first words must have been as concrete and specialized in meaning as possible. Now, what are the words whose meaning is the most concrete and the most specialized? Without any doubt proper names—that is, of course, proper names of the good old kind, borne by and denoting only one single individual. How easily might not such names spring up in a primitive state such as that described above! In the songs of a particular individual there would be a constant recurrence of a particular series of sounds sung with a particular cadence; no one can doubt the possibility of such individual habits being contracted in olden as well as in present times. Suppose, then, that “in the spring time, the only pretty ring time” a lover was in the habit of addressing his lass “with a hey, and a ho, and a hey nonino.” His comrades and rivals would not fail to remark this, and would occasionally banter him by imitating and repeating his “hey-and-a-ho-and-a-hey-nonino.” But when once this had been recognized as what Wagner would term a person’s ‘leitmotiv,’ it would be no far cry from mimicking it to using the “hey-and-a-ho-and-a-hey-nonino” as a sort of[439] nickname for the man concerned; it might be employed, for instance, to signal his arrival. And when once proper names had been bestowed, common names (or nouns) would not be slow in following; we see the transition from one to the other class in constant operation, names originally used exclusively to denote an individual being used metaphorically to connote that person’s most characteristic peculiarities, as when we say of one man that he is a ‘Crœsus’ or a ‘Vanderbilt’ or ‘Rockefeller,’ and of another that he is ‘no Bismarck.’ A German schoolboy in the ’eighties said in his history lesson that Hannibal swore he would always be a Frenchman to the Romans. This is, at least, one of the ways in which language arrives at designations of such ideas as ‘rich,’ ‘statesman’ and ‘enemy.’ From the proper name of Cæsar we have both the Russian tsar’ and the German kaiser, and from Karol (Charlemagne) Russian korol’ ‘king’ (also in the other Slav languages) and Magyar király. Besides being designations for persons, proper names may also in some cases come to mean tools or other objects, originally in most cases probably as a term of endearment, as when in thieves’ slang a crowbar or lever is called a betty or jemmy; E. derrick and dirk, as well as G. dietrich, Dan. dirk, Swed. dyrk, is nothing but Dietrich (Derrick, Theodoricus), and thus in innumerable instances. In the École polytechnique in Paris there are many words of the same character: bacha ‘cours d’allemand’ from a teacher, M. Bacharach, borius ‘bretelles’ from General Borius, malo ‘éperon’ from Captain Malo, etc. (MSL 15. 179). Pamphlet is from Pamphilet, originally Pamphilus seu de Amore, the name of a popular booklet on an erotic subject. Compare also the history of the words bluchers, jack (boot-jack, jack for turning a spit, a pike, etc., also jacket), pantaloon, hansom, boycott, to burke, to name only a few of the best-known examples.
We might be able to get an idea of the most basic way sounds connect with meaning if we think about what was mentioned earlier regarding the meaning of the earliest words and try to understand that. The first words were likely very specific and concrete in meaning. So, what are the words that are the most concrete and specialized? Without a doubt, it’s proper names—that is, traditional proper names that refer to and identify only one individual. In a primitive society like the one described, such names could easily emerge! In the songs of a specific individual, you would hear a repetitive sequence of sounds sung in a certain rhythm; no one can doubt that such personal habits can develop both in ancient and modern times. Imagine that “in the springtime, the only pretty ring time,” a lover regularly called out to his girl “with a hey, and a ho, and a hey nonino.” His friends and rivals would notice this and might tease him by imitating and repeating his “hey-and-a-ho-and-a-hey-nonino.” But once this was recognized as what Wagner would call a person’s 'leitmotiv,' it wouldn't be a leap from mimicking it to using the “hey-and-a-ho-and-a-hey-nonino” as a sort of[439]nickname for that man; it could be used, for example, to announce his arrival. And once proper names were established, common names (or nouns) would soon follow; we see the ongoing shift from one class to another, with names originally used solely to identify an individual being used metaphorically to highlight that person's most distinguishing traits, like when we say someone is a ‘Crœsus’ or a ‘Vanderbilt’ or ‘Rockefeller,’ or that another is ‘no Bismarck.’ A German schoolboy in the '80s remarked in his history lesson that Hannibal vowed he would always be a Frenchman to the Romans. This is just one way language evolves to create terms for ideas like ‘rich,’ ‘statesman,’ and ‘enemy.’ The proper name Cæsar has given us the Russian tsar’ and the German kaiser, and from Karol (Charlemagne) we get the Russian korol’ ‘king’ (also in other Slavic languages) and Magyar király. Besides being names for people, proper names can also sometimes refer to tools or other objects, likely starting as terms of endearment, like how in thieves’ slang, a crowbar or lever is called a betty or jemmy; E. derrick and dirk, as well as G. dietrich, Dan. dirk, Swed. dyrk, all come from Dietrich (Derrick, Theodoricus), and this happens in countless instances. In the Polytechnic School in Paris, there are many similar words: bacha ‘German class’ from a teacher, M. Bacharach, borius ‘suspenders’ from General Borius, malo ‘spur’ from Captain Malo, etc. (MSL 15. 179). Pamphlet is derived from Pamphilet, originally Pamphilus seu de Amore, the title of a popular book on a racy subject. Also consider the history of words like bluchers, jack (boot-jack, jack for turning a spit, a pike, etc., also jacket), pantaloon, hansom, boycott, to burke, to mention just a few well-known examples.
XXI.—§ 15. The Earliest Sentences.
Again, we saw above that the further back we went in the history of known languages, the more the sentence was one indissoluble whole, in which those elements which we are accustomed to think of as single words were not yet separated. Now, the idea that language began with sentences, not with words, appears to Whitney (Am. Journ. of Philol. 1. 338) to be, “if capable of any intelligent and intelligible statement, a fortiori, too wild and baseless to deserve respectful mention” (cf. also Madvig Kl 85). But the absurdity appears only if we think of sentences like those found in our languages, consisting of elements (words) capable of being used in other combinations and there forming other[440] sentences: this seems to be what Gabelentz (Spr 351) imagines; but it is not so wild to imagine as the first beginning something which can be translated into our languages by means of a sentence, but which is not ‘articulated’ in the same way as such a sentence; we translate or explain the dental click (‘tut’) by means of the sentence ‘that is a pity,’ but the interjection is not in other respects a grammatical ‘sentence.’ Or we may take an illustration from the modern use of a telegraphic code: if suzaw means ‘I have not received your telegram,’ or sempo ‘reserve one single room and bath at first-class hotel’—we have unanalyzable wholes capable of being rendered in complete sentences, but not in every way analogous to these sentences.
Once again, we've observed that as we look back further into the history of known languages, sentences were more often seen as a single, indivisible unit, where elements we now recognize as individual words were not yet separated. Whitney argues that the idea of language starting with sentences instead of words is, “if it can be stated intelligently, even more so too outrageous and unfounded to warrant serious discussion” (Am. Journ. of Philol. 1. 338; see also Madvig Kl 85). However, this absurdity only arises when we think of sentences like those in our current languages, which consist of elements (words) that can be rearranged in various combinations to form different [440] sentences. Gabelentz (Spr 351) seems to envision this, but it’s not so far-fetched to consider that the very beginnings of language might be something that can be translated into our languages with a sentence, yet is not ‘articulated’ in the same manner as such a sentence. For instance, we might translate the dental click (‘tut’) as ‘that is a pity,’ but the interjection isn’t a grammatical ‘sentence’ in other respects. Alternatively, we can look at modern telegraphic code usage: if suzaw means ‘I have not received your telegram,’ or sempo means ‘reserve one single room and bath at a first-class hotel,’ we have unbreakable units that can be expressed fully in sentences, but they’re not entirely analogous to those sentences.
Now, it is just units of this character (though not, of course, with exactly the same kind of meaning as the two code words) whose genesis we can most easily imagine on the supposition of a primitive period of meaningless singing. If a certain number of people have together witnessed some incident and have accompanied it with some sort of impromptu song or refrain, the two ideas are associated, and later on the same song will tend to call forth in the memory of those who were present the idea of the whole situation. Suppose some dreaded enemy has been defeated and slain; the troop will dance round the dead body and strike up a chant of triumph, say something like ‘Tarara-boom-de-ay!’ This combination of sounds, sung to a certain melody, will now easily become what might be called a proper name for that particular event; it might be roughly translated, ‘The terrible foe from beyond the river is slain,’ or ‘We have killed the dreadful man from beyond the river,’ or, ‘Do you remember when we killed him?’ or something of the same sort. Under slightly altered circumstances it may become the proper name of the man who slew the enemy. The development can now proceed further by a metaphorical transference of the expression to similar situations (‘There is another man of the same tribe: let us kill him as we did the first!’) or by a blending of two or more of these proper-name melodies. How this kind of blending may lead to the development of something like derivative affixes may be gathered from our chapter on Secretion; it may also result in parts of the whole melodic utterance being disengaged as something more like our ‘words.’ From the nature of the subject it is impossible to give more than hints, but I seem to see ways by which primitive ‘lieder ohne worte’ may have become, first, indissoluble rigmaroles, with something like a dim meaning attached to them, and then gradually combinations of word-like smaller units, more and more capable of being analyzed and combined with others of the same kind. Anyhow, this theory seems to explain better than any[441] other the great part which fortuitous coincidence and irregularity always play in that part of any language which is not immediately intelligible, thus both in lexical and grammatical elements.
Now, it's just units of this character (though not exactly with the same meaning as the two code words) that we can most easily imagine being created during a primitive time of meaningless singing. If a group of people witness some event together and start to sing an impromptu song or refrain, those ideas become linked, and later, that same song will likely bring back memories of the entire situation for those who were there. For example, if a feared enemy has been defeated and killed, the group will dance around the dead body and sing a victory chant, something like ‘Tarara-boom-de-ay!’ This mix of sounds, sung to a specific melody, could easily become a sort of proper name for that event; it might be roughly translated to, ‘The terrible foe from beyond the river is slain,’ or ‘We’ve killed the dreadful man from beyond the river,’ or, ‘Do you remember when we killed him?’ or something similar. Depending on slightly different circumstances, it might even become the proper name of the person who defeated the enemy. The development can then progress further by metaphorically applying that expression to similar situations (‘There’s another man from the same tribe: let’s kill him like we did the first!’) or by blending two or more of these proper-name melodies. The blending might lead to the creation of something like derivative affixes, as we discuss in our chapter on Secretion; it could also result in parts of the overall melodic expression being separated into something more like our ‘words.’ Due to the nature of the subject, it’s impossible to provide more than just hints, but I believe I can see how primitive ‘songs without words’ might have evolved first into inseparable rigmaroles with some vague meaning attached, and then gradually transformed into combinations of smaller units that resemble words, increasingly capable of being analyzed and combined with other similar units. In any case, this theory seems to better explain than any[441] other the significant role that chance and irregularity always play in that part of any language that isn’t immediately understandable, both in lexical and grammatical elements.
Primitive man came to attach meaning to what were originally rambling sequences of syllables in pretty much the same way as the child comes to attach a meaning to many of the words he hears from his elders, the whole situation in which they are heard giving a clue to their interpretation. The difference is that in the latter case the speaker has already associated a meaning with the sound; but from the point of view of the hearer this is comparatively immaterial: the savage of a far-distant age hearing some syllables for the first time and the child hearing them nowadays are in essentially the same position as to their interpretation. Parallels are also found in the words of the mamma class (Ch. VIII § 8), in which hearers give a signification to something pronounced unintentionally, the same syllables being then capable of serving afterwards as real words. If one of our forebears on some occasion accidentally produced a sequence of sounds, and if the people around him were seen (or heard) to respond appreciatively, he would tend to settle on the same string of sounds and repeat it on similar occasions, and in this way it would gradually become ‘conventionalized’ as a symbol of what was then foremost in his and in their minds. As in agriculture primitive man reaped before he sowed, so also in his vocal outbursts he first reaped understanding, and then discovered that by intentionally sowing the same seed he was able to call forth the same result. And as with corn, he would slowly and gradually, by weeding out (i.e. by not using) what was less useful to him, improve the quality, till finally he had come into possession of the marvellous, though far from perfect, instrument which we now call our language. The development of our ordinary speech has been largely an intellectualization, and the emotional quality which played the largest part in primitive utterances has to some extent been repressed; but it is not extinct, and still gives a definite colouring to all passionate and eloquent speaking and to poetic diction. Language, after all, is an art—one of the finest of arts.
Primitive humans began to attach meaning to what were originally just random sequences of sounds in much the same way a child learns the meaning of many words they hear from adults, with the context providing clues for interpretation. The difference is that, in the latter case, the speaker already has a meaning associated with the sounds; however, this is fairly irrelevant from the listener's perspective: the early human hearing syllables for the first time and the child hearing them today are essentially in the same position regarding interpretation. Similar parallels can be found in the words of the mamma class (Ch. VIII § 8), where listeners assign meaning to something that is uttered unintentionally, with those same syllables later being able to function as real words. If one of our ancient ancestors accidentally produced a sequence of sounds and the people around him responded positively, he would likely stick to those sounds and repeat them in similar situations, gradually 'conventionalizing' them as symbols of what was most important to him and to them. Just like in agriculture, where primitive man harvested before planting, he first gathered understanding in his vocal expressions and then realized that by intentionally repeating those same sounds, he could evoke similar reactions. And just as with crops, he would slowly improve the quality, "weeding out" (i.e., not using) what was less beneficial, until he eventually developed the wonderful, though not perfect, tool we now call language. The evolution of our everyday speech has largely been an intellectual process, and the emotional quality that played a major role in primitive expressions has been somewhat suppressed; however, it is not gone and still influences all passionate and eloquent speaking and poetic language. After all, language is an art—one of the finest arts.
XXI.—§ 16. Conclusion.
Language, then, began with half-musical unanalyzed expressions for individual beings and solitary events. Languages composed of, and evolved from, such words and quasi-sentences are clumsy and insufficient instruments of thought, being intricate, capricious and difficult. But from the beginning the tendency has been[442] one of progress, slow and fitful progress, but still progress towards greater and greater clearness, regularity, ease and pliancy. No one language has arrived at perfection; an ideal language would always express the same thing by the same, and similar things by similar means; any irregularity or ambiguity would be banished; sound and sense would be in perfect harmony; any number of delicate shades of meaning could be expressed with equal ease; poetry and prose, beauty and truth, thinking and feeling would be equally provided for: the human spirit would have found a garment combining freedom and gracefulness, fitting it closely and yet allowing full play to any movement.
Language began as half-musical expressions that described individual beings and isolated events. The languages that developed from these words and phrases are clumsy and not very effective for conveying thoughts, being complicated, unpredictable, and hard to use. However, from the start, there has been a tendency towards progress—slow and uneven progress, but still moving towards greater clarity, consistency, simplicity, and flexibility. No single language has achieved perfection; an ideal language would consistently express the same idea with the same words and similar ideas with similar expressions; any irregularities or ambiguities would be eliminated; sound and meaning would align perfectly; countless subtle shades of meaning could be conveyed with equal ease; poetry and prose, beauty and truth, thinking and feeling would all be equally represented: the human spirit would find a form that combines freedom and elegance, fitting snugly while still allowing complete freedom of movement.
But, however far our present languages are from that ideal, we must be thankful for what has been achieved, seeing that—
But, no matter how far our current languages are from that ideal, we should be grateful for what has been accomplished, knowing that—
- a Sanskrit, 52;
- -a in fem., 392;
- in pl., 394
- abbot, 156
- ablaut, see apophony
- abstract terms, 429
- accent, see stress and tone
- accusative, name, 20
- actors, 276
- adaptation of suffixes, 386 f.
- adjective flexion, 129;
- concord, 348 f.
- African languages, see Bantu
- agglutination, 54, 58, 76, 376;
- agglutination theory, 367 ff., 375 ff.
- agreement, see concord
- ambiguities, 319, 341 ff.
- America, race mixtures, 203 ff.
- American English, 260
- American Indian languages, 57, 181, 187, 229, 233, 256, 334, 425, 427, 430
- analogy, 70, 93 f., 129 f., 162 f., 289
- analytic languages, 36, 334 ff., 422 ff.
- anatomical causes of change, 255
- aphesis, 273
- apophony, 46, 53, 91 ff., 311
- aposiopesis, 273
- appreciation of languages, 29 ff., 57 f., 60, 62, 319 ff.;
- formula, 324
- archaic forms, 294
- Armenian, 195 f.
- article, 378
- Aryan, name, 63 f.;
- languages, passim
- as, root, 49
- Ascoli, 192 ff.
- assimilation, 109, 168 f., 264 f., 280
- auxiliary words, 358
- babe, 157
- bacco, 171
- back-formations, 173, 178
- Balkan tongues, agreements, 215
- Bantu, 239, 352 ff., 365
- -bar, suffix, 377
- Basque, 210, 427
- Baudouin de Courtenay, 327
- Bavarian wo-st bist, 281
- Beach-la-Mar, 216 ff.
- bead, 175
- bhu, root, 49
- bilinguism, 147 ff.
- biographical or biological science of language, 8
- blending, 132, 281 f., 311, 312 f., 390
- Bloomfield, 390
- boon, 175
- Bopp, 47 ff., 56 n.
- borrowing of words, 208
- bound, 176
- bow-wow theory, 413
- boys, 146
- Bredsdorff, 43 n., 70
- Bridges, 286
- Bröndal, 200
- Brugmann, 92 f.;
- on gender, 391
- bube, 157
- buncombe, 409
- cacuminals, 196
- Caribbean, 237 ff.
- Carlyle, 145
- case-system, English, 268 ff.;
- in old languages, 337 ff.;
- importance, 341
- catch, 400
- ch becomes f, 168
- changes, causes of, 255 ff.
- child, 103 ff.;
- sounds, 105;
- understanding, 113;
- classification of things, 114 f.;
- vocabulary, 124;
- grammar, 128 ff.;
- sentences, 133;
- echoism, 135;
- why learns so well, 140;
- influence of other children, 147;
- word-invention, 151 ff.;
- influence of, 161 ff.;
- indirect influence, 178;
- new languages, 180 ff.
- Chinese, 36, 54, 57, 286, 369 ff.
- Chinook, 228 ff.
- classification of languages, 35 f., 54, 76 ff.
- classifying instinct, 388
- clicks, 415, 419
- climate, 256
- clippings, see stump-words
- coalescence of words, 174, 376 ff.
- Cœurdoux, 33
- Collitz, 45 n., 257, 381
- concord, verbal, 335;
- nominal, 348;
- in Bantu, 352 ff.
- [444]concrete words, 429
- Condillac, 27
- confusion of words, 122, 172
- congeneric groups, 389 f.
- conjugation, see verb
- consciousness, 130;
- threshold of, 138
- consonant-shift, 43 ff., 195, 197, 204, 256, 258 f.
- contamination, see blending
- convergent changes, 284 f.
- copula, 48 f.
- correctness, latitude of, 282 ff.
- creation of new words, 151 ff.
- Creole, 226 ff.
- cuckoo, 406
- cultural loan-words, 209
- curry favour, 173
- curtailing of words, 108, 169 f., 328 f.
- Curtius, 83, 94
- -d in loved, 51, 381
- Darwin, 414
- dead languages, 67
- decay, 55, 59, 62, 77, 319 ff.
- declension, see case-system
- Delbrück, 93, 96
- dialect, study of, 68;
- spoken by children, 147
- Diez, 85
- differentiations, 176, 272
- diminutives, 180, 402
- ding-dong theory, 415
- divergent changes, 288
- doublets, 272
- Dravidian influence on Indian, 196
- drunken speech, 279
- dump, 313
- e original in Aryan, 52, 91
- ease theory, 261 ff.
- echoism, 135;
- cf. echo-words
- echo-words, 313, 398 ff.
- economizing of effort, see ease-theory
- effort in speaking, 261 ff., 324 ff.
- eglino, 281
- emotion, influence on sound, 276
- -en in plural, 385
- ending, see flexion, suffix
- English, Grimm’s appreciation, 62;
- foreign influence, 202, 210, 212 ff.;
- rapid change, 261;
- case-system, 268 ff.;
- future tense, 274;
- vowel-shift, 243, 284;
- word-order, 344 f.;
- genitive, 350
- entangling, 422
- equidistant changes, 284
- -er in plural, 386
- estimation of languages, see appreciation
- Etruscan, 195
- etymology, sound laws, 295;
- principles, 305 ff.;
- object of, 316;
- etymology of rag, 300;
- of sun, say, see, 306;
- of krieg, 307;
- of grog, ganz, 308;
- of hope, 309;
- of nut, stumm, 311;
- of mais, maar, men, 315;
- of moon, daughter, mother, 318
- euphemism, 245 ff.
- euphony, 278
- exceptions to sound-laws, 296 ff.
- exertion in speaking, 261 ff., 324 ff.
- expressive sounds preserved, 288
- extension of sound laws, 290;
- of suffixes, 386 ff.
- extra-lingual influences, 278
- f for th, 167;
- in enough, etc., 168;
- in Spanish, 193
- fable in Proto-Aryan, 81
- fain, 176
- fashion in language, 291
- father, 117
- Feist, 194 ff.
- feminine, 391 ff.;
- in -i, 394, 402;
- cf. woman
- Finnic, 197 f., 207
- flexion, 35, 54 f., 58 f., 76 ff., 79;
- origin of, 377 ff.
- foreign languages, mistakes in noting down, 116 f.;
- influence of, 191 ff.
- forgetfulness, 176
- forms, number of, 332, 337;
- origin of, 49, 58, 377 ff.
- French influence on English, 202, 209, 214;
- pronouns and verbs, 422 f.
- frequency, influence on phonetic development, 267
- -ful, suffix, 376
- Gabelentz, 98, 369
- ganz, 308
- gape, 288
- gender, 346 f., 391 ff.
- general and specific terms, 274, 429 f.
- genitive, name, 20;
- group, 351;
- s in, 382, 383 n.
- geographical distribution of languages, 187;
- influence on change, 256
- German language, appreciation of, 29, 31, 60;
- sound-shift, 43 ff., 195 f., 283;
- forms, 341 ff.;
- word-order, 344
- Germanic, see Gothonic
- gibberish, 149 f.
- girls, 146
- gleam, gloom, 401
- glottogonic theories abandoned, 96
- [445]Gothonic (Germanic, Teutonic), 42;
- sound-shift, see consonant-shift
- gradation, see apophony
- grammar, children’s, 128 ff.;
- foreign influence, 213;
- of primitive languages, 421
- grammatical elements, origin, 48, 58, 61
- Greek linguistic speculation, 19 f.;
- vowels, 91;
- personal pronouns, 286 n.;
- Modern Greek, 301
- Grimm, 37, 40 ff., 60 ff.
- Grimm’s Law, 43 f.;
- see consonant-shift
- grog, 308
- group genitive, 129, 351;
- groups of words with similar meaning, 389
- h for f in Spanish, 193;
- for s, etc., 263
- habaidedeima, 322, 329, 331 f.
- Hale, 181 ff.
- haplology, 281, 329
- harmony of vowels, 280
- Hebrew, 21
- Hegel, 72 f.
- Hempl, 201 ff.
- Herder, 27 f.
- hereditary aptness for a language, 75, 141
- Hermann, 48
- Hervas, 22
- Herzog, 164 f.
- hide, 121
- Hirt, 192, 203 f., 382 f.
- historical point of view, 32, 42
- homophones, 285 f.
- -hood, suffix, 376
- hope, 309
- humanization of language, 327 f.
- Humboldt, 55 ff.
- hypercorrect forms, 294
- I, the pronoun, 123 f.
- i denoting small, feminine, near, 402
- idioms, 139
- imitation, 291 ff.;
- of sounds, 398, 413 f.
- imperative, 403
- incorporation, 58, 79, 425
- Indian grammarians, 20;
- cacuminals, 196;
- cf. American Indian, Sanskrit
- indirect ways of obtaining expressions, 438
- indissoluble expressions of several ideas, 334, 422 ff., 428 ff.
- Indo-European (Indo-Germanic), see Aryan
- indolence, see ease-theory
- inflexion, see flexion
- interjections, 414
- interrogative sentences, 137;
- particles, 358
- invention of words, 151 ff.
- irregularities in old languages, 338 f., 379, 425
- isolating languages, 36, 76, 366 ff.
- Japanese, 243
- jaw-breakers, 280
- jaw-measurements, 104
- Jenisch, 29 ff.
- Johannson, 341 ff.
- Jones, William, 33
- [ju·], 290 f.
- Karlgren, 372 f.
- Keltic languages, 38, 39, 53;
- substratum, 192 ff.
- Kuhn, 371
- kw becomes p, 168
- languages, rise of new, 180 ff.
- language-teaching, 145
- lapses, 279
- Latin, study of, 22 f.;
- influence, 209, 215;
- forms, 334, 338 f., 343;
- word-order, 350
- latitude of correctness, 282
- law as applied to sound-changes, 297
- leaps in phonetic development, 167;
- in meanings, 175
- Leibniz, 22
- lengthening, emotional, 277, 403;
- of words, 330
- Lenz, 204
- Lepsius, 370
- Leskien, 93
- life as applied to language, 7
- lingua geral, 234
- linguistics, position of, 64 f., 73, 86, 97
- little, 407
- little language, 103, 106, 144, 147
- living languages, study of, 97
- loan-words, sound-substitution, 207;
- general theory, 208;
- culture, 209;
- classes, 211;
- with symbolic sounds, 409
- loss of sounds, 108, 168, 328 f.
- love-songs, 433 f.
- Luxemburg, bilinguism in, 148
- -ly, suffix, 377
- m in adversative conjunctions, 314 ff.;
- case-ending, 382
- ma, maar, 314 f.
- Madvig, 84, 433
- magis, mais, 314 f.
- makeshift languages, 232 ff.
- [446]mamma, 154 ff.
- man and woman, 142, 237 ff.
- Mauritius Creole, 226 ff.
- meaning, delimitation of, 118 f.;
- words of opposite meaning, 120;
- words with several meanings, 121;
- shifting of meaning, 174;
- cf. semantic changes
- meaningless gibberish, 149 f.;
- singing, 436
- Meillet, 55, 198 f.
- memory, children’s, 143
- men, 315
- mental states, words for, 401
- Meringer, 162 f., 280, 291
- metanalysis, 173
- metaphors, 431
- metathesis, 108, 281
- Meyer-Benfey, 256
- milk, 158
- Misteli, 79
- misunderstandings, 282, 286 f., 319
- mixed languages, 191 ff.
- modern languages, study of, 68;
- compared with ancient, 322 ff.
- Möller, H., 139, 308, 382
- mon, 358
- monosyllabic languages, 36, 367 ff.
- month, 318
- moods, 380
- moon, 318
- mother, 155, 318
- mother-tongue, 146
- movement, words denoting, 399
- mountains, linguistic changes in, 256 f.
- mouth-filling words, 403
- Müller, Friedrich, 79, 338
- Müller, Max, 88 ff., 414
- Murray, 269
- mutation, 37, 46
- mutilation of lips, 256;
- of words, 266
- my, 384 f.
- -n in mine, 384 f.
- names of relations, 118;
- proper, 439
- nasalis sonans, 92, 317 f.
- national psychology, 258
- negation, 136;
- redundant, 352
- neo-grammarians, see young-grammarians
- new languages, 180 ff.
- Noiré, 415
- nominal forms, 337 ff.;
- concord, 348 ff.
- number in verbs, 335;
- in pronouns, 347;
- in nouns, 129, 349, 355, 385, 394 f.
- numerals, 119;
- borrowed, 211;
- in succession, 281;
- distinct for various classes, 430
- nursery language, 179
- nut, 311
- o original in Aryan, 52, 91
- old languages compared with modern, 322 ff.
- on, 287
- oncle, 271 n.
- onomatopœia, 150, 313, 398 ff.
- opposite meaning, 120
- order of words, see word-order
- organism, language as an, 7, 65
- organs of speech, used for other purposes, 278;
- development, 416, 436
- orient, 175
- origin of language, 26 ff., 61, 412 ff.;
- of grammatical elements, 367 ff.
- Osthoff, 93
- ox, oxen, 385
- palatal law, 90 f.
- Panini, 20
- pap, 158
- papa, 154 ff.
- parenthesizing, 350 f.
- passive, Scandinavian, 50, 377;
- Latin, 50, 381
- patter, 407
- Paul, 94 f., 162
- periods of rapid change, 259
- personal forms in verbs, 53, 335, 383
- pet-names, 108, 169
- philology, 64 f., 97
- phonetic laws, see sound changes, sound laws
- Pidgin-English, 221 ff.
- pittance, 408
- Plato, 19, 396
- playfulness, 148, 298 f., 432 ff.
- plumbum, plummet, plunge, 313 f.
- plural, see number
- poetry, 300, 431 f.
- polysynthetic, 423, 425
- pooh-pooh theory, 414
- pope, 156
- popular etymology, 122
- portmanteau words, 313
- possessive pronouns, 384 f.
- prepositions, 137 f.;
- borrowed, 211
- prescriptive grammar, 24
- preterit, weak, 51, 381
- primitive languages, 417 ff.
- progressive tendency, 319 ff.
- pronouns, 123;
- borrowed, 212;
- possessive, 384;
- French, 422
- proper names, 436
- prosiopesis, 273
- Proto-Aryan, 80 f., 90 f.
- punning phrases, 300
- pupil, 157
- [447]puppet, 157
- Pușcariu, 205
- question, 137;
- word-order and auxiliaries, 357 ff.
- quick, 407
- r in Latin passive, 381;
- sound of r weakened, 244;
- r- and n- stems, 339, 390
- race and language, 75;
- race-mixture, 201 ff.
- rapidity of change, 259
- Rapp, 68 ff.
- Rask, 36 ff., 43, 46
- rational, everything originally r., 316
- reaction against change, 293
- reconstruction, 80 ff., 317
- reduplication, 109, 169
- relationship between languages, 38, 53;
- terms of, 117, 154 ff.
- right, 180
- roll, 374, 408
- Romanic languages, 202, 205 f., 234 ff., 260;
- future, 378
- root-determinatives, 311
- roots, 52, 367 ff., 373 ff.
- Rousseau, 26
- s in passive, 50, 377, 381;
- case-ending, 213, 381 ff.;
- in English plural, 214;
- in Russian and Spanish, 266;
- Latin disappears, 362
- Sandfeld, 215
- Sanskrit, 33, 67;
- vowels, 52, 90 f.;
- consonants, 90 f., 196;
- drama, 241 f.
- savages, languages of, 417, 426 ff.
- saving of effort, of space, of time, 264
- Scandinavian influence on English, 212, 214;
- passive, 50, 377;
- article, 378
- Scherer, 96
- Schlegel, A. W., 36
- Schlegel, F., 34 f.
- Schleicher, 71 ff.
- Schuchardt, 191, 213, 219, 267
- scorn, words expressive of, 401
- Scotch, 193 n.
- screaming, 103
- secondary echoism, 406
- secret languages, 149 f.
- secretion, 384 ff.
- semantic changes, 174 f., 274 ff.
- Semitic, 36, 52
- sentences, 133;
- the earliest, 439 ff.;
- sentence stress, 272
- separative linguistics, 67
- seqw-, 306 f.
- sex, 146, 237 ff.;
- cf. gender
- shifters, 123
- shortening, 328 f.;
- cf. stump-words
- signification, how apprehended, 113 ff.;
- cf. semantic changes
- significative sounds preserved, 267 f., 271, 287
- similarities cause confusion, 120 f.
- simplification, 332 ff.
- singing, 420, 432 ff.
- slang, 247, 299 f.
- small, words for, 402
- smile, 278
- so, 250
- Linguistics Society, 96, 412
- son, E., 120, 286
- songs, primitive, 420, 432 ff.
- sound changes, passim;
- see especially 161 ff., 191 ff., 242 ff., 255 ff.
- sound laws, 93;
- in children, 106 f.;
- extension and metamorphosis, 290;
- destructive, 289;
- spreading, 291;
- in the science of etymology, 295 ff.
- sound-shift, Gothonic, see consonant-shift
- special terms in primitive speech, 429 ff.
- speed of utterance, 258
- spelling pronunciations, 294
- splitting, see differentiation
- Spoonerism, 280
- stable and unstable sounds, 199 f.
- Steinthal, 79, 87
- strengthening of sounds, 404 f.
- stress, Aryan, 93;
- Gothonic, 195;
- nature and influence of, 271 ff.
- stumm, 311
- stump-words, 108, 169 f.
- substantive, see nominal and flexion
- substratum theory, 191 ff.
- subtraction, 173
- suffixes, origin, 376 f.;
- extension, 386 f.;
- tainting, 388
- suggestiveness, 408;
- cf. symbolism
- suppletivwesen, 426
- Sweet, 97, 161, 264
- syllables, number of, 330
- symbolism, 396 ff.
- syntax, 66, 95;
- foreign influence, 214;
- blends, 282;
- simplification, 340
- synthetic languages, 36, 334 ff., 421 f.
- ta, 159
- tabu, 239 ff., 431
- tainting of suffixes, 388
- tata, 158
- -teer, suffix, 388
- Telugu, 301
- [448]tempo, 258
- Teutonic, see Gothonic
- th becomes f, v, 167
- they for he or she, 347
- this and that, 403
- Thomson, 90 n., 267, 427
- threshold, under the, 138
- ti, 358 f.
- time, a child’s conception of, 120
- tone, 111;
- in Chinese, 369, 370;
- in Danish dialect, 371;
- in primitive languages, 419
- Tooke, Horne, 49
- translation-loans, 215
- translators introduce foreign words, 210
- tripos, 115
- twins having separate language, 185 f.
- u, French, 192 ff.;
- English, 290 f.
- umlaut, 37
- understanding, a baby’s, 113 f.
- units of language, 422
- value, influence on phonetic development, 266 ff.
- verb, substantive, 48;
- flexional forms, 130;
- simplification, 332 ff.;
- concord, 335
- verbal character of roots, 374 f.
- Verner, 93;
- Verner’s Law, 195, 197 f.
- vocabulary, extent of, 124 ff.;
- in primitive speech, 429
- voicing of consonants, in Gothonic and English, 198;
- symbolic, 405
- vowel-harmony, 280
- vowels, number of Aryan, 44, 52, 91
- vulgar speech, 261, 299
- wars, influence on language, 260
- weak preterit, 51, 381
- weakening of words, 266
- Wessely, 197
- Wheeler, 293
- Whitney, 88, 323, 367
- Windisch, 208
- women as language teachers, 142;
- women’s language, 237 ff.
- word, what constitutes one, 125, 422 f.
- word-division, 132, 173 f.
- word-formation, 131;
- cf. invention, suffixes
- word-order, 344 ff., 355 ff.;
- in Chinese, 369 ff.
- worthless words or sounds, 266 ff.
- Wundt, 98, 258
- yesterday, 120
- yo-he-ho theory, 415
- you for I, 124
- young-grammarians, 93
- Zulu, see Bantu
Printed in Great Britain by
UNWIN BROTHERS, LIMITED WOKING AND LONDON
Printed in Great Britain by
UNWIN BROTHERS, LIMITED WOKING AND LONDON
FOOTNOTES
[1] See his essay on Herder’s “Ursprung der sprache” in Modern Philology, 5. 117 (1907).
Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. [1] Check out his essay on Herder’s “Origin of language” in Modern Philology, 5. 117 (1907).
[3] I have given a life of Rask and an appraisement of his work in the small volume Rasmus Rask (Copenhagen, Gyldendal, 1918). See also Vilh. Thomsen, Samlede afhandlinger, 1. 47 ff. and 125 ff. A good and full account of Rask’s work is found in Raumer, Gesch.; cf. also Paul, Gr. Recent short appreciations of his genius may be read in Trombetti, Come si fa la critica, 1907, p. 41, Meillet, LI, p. 415, Hirt, Idg, pp. 74 and 578.
[3] I’ve provided a biography of Rask and an assessment of his work in the small book Rasmus Rask (Copenhagen, Gyldendal, 1918). Also, see Vilh. Thomsen, Samlede afhandlinger, 1. 47 ff. and 125 ff. A detailed and thorough account of Rask’s work can be found in Raumer, Gesch.; also refer to Paul, Gr. Recent brief evaluations of his genius can be found in Trombetti, Come si fa la critica, 1907, p. 41, Meillet, LI, p. 415, Hirt, Idg, pp. 74 and 578.
[4] Only in one subordinate point did Rask make a mistake (b = b), which is all the more venial as there are extremely few examples of this sound. Bredsdorff (Aarsagerne, 1821, p. 21) evidently had the law from Rask, and gives it in the comprehensive formula which Paul (Gr. 1. 86) misses in Rask and gives as Grimm’s meritorious improvement on Rask. “The Germanic family has most often aspirates where Greek has tenues, tenues where it has mediæ, and again mediæ where it has aspirates, e.g. fod, Gr. pous; horn, Gr. keras; þrír, Gr. treis; padde, Gr. batrakhos; kone, Gr. gunē; ti, Gr. deka; bærer, Gr. pherō; galde, Gr. kholē; dør, Gr. thura.” To the word ‘horn’ was appended a foot-note to the effect that h without doubt here originally was the German ch-sound. This was one year before Grimm stated his law!
[4] Rask only made one minor error (b = b), which is excusable since there are very few examples of this sound. Bredsdorff (Aarsagerne, 1821, p. 21) clearly followed Rask's law and presented it in the comprehensive formula that Paul (Gr. 1. 86) overlooks in Rask and attributes as Grimm’s valuable improvement on Rask. “The Germanic family typically has aspirates where Greek has voiceless stops, voiceless stops where it has voiced stops, and voiced stops where it has aspirates, e.g. fod, Gr. pous; horn, Gr. keras; þrír, Gr. treis; padde, Gr. batrakhos; kone, Gr. gunē; ti, Gr. deka; bærer, Gr. pherō; galde, Gr. kholē; dør, Gr. thura.” To the word 'horn,' a footnote noted that h likely originally represented the German ch sound. This was written one year before Grimm proposed his law!
[6] I am therefore surprised to find that in a recent article (Am. Journ. of Philol. 39. 415, 1918) Collitz praises Grimm’s view in preference to Rask’s because he saw “an inherent connexion between the various processes of the shifting,” which were “subdivisions of one great law in which the formula T:A:M may be used to illustrate the shifting (in a single language) of three different groups of consonants and the result of a double or threefold shifting (in three different languages) of a single group of consonants. This great law was unknown to Rask.” Collitz recognizes that “Grimm’s law will hold good only if we accept the term ‘aspirate’ in the broad sense in which it is employed by J. Grimm”—but ‘broad’ here means ‘wrong’ or ‘unscientific.’ There is no kreislauf in the case of initial k = h; only in a few of the nine series do we find three distinct stages (as in tres, three, drei); here we have in Danish three stages, of which the third is a reversal to the first (tre); in E. mother we have five stages: t, þ, ð, d, (OE. modor) and again ð. Is there an “inherent connexion between the various processes of this shifting” too?
[6] I am therefore surprised to see that in a recent article (Am. Journ. of Philol. 39. 415, 1918), Collitz favors Grimm’s view over Rask’s because he found “an inherent connection between the various processes of the shifting,” which were “subdivisions of one great law in which the formula T:A:M can illustrate the shifting (in a single language) of three different groups of consonants and the outcome of a double or threefold shifting (in three different languages) of a single group of consonants. This great law was unknown to Rask.” Collitz admits that “Grimm’s law will only be valid if we accept the term ‘aspirate’ in the broad sense that J. Grimm used”—but ‘broad’ here means ‘incorrect’ or ‘unscientific.’ There is no kreislauf in the case of initial k = h; only in a few of the nine series do we see three distinct stages (as in tres, three, drei); here we have in Danish three stages, with the third being a reversal to the first (tre); in English mother we have five stages: t, þ, ð, d, (OE. modor) and then again ð. Is there an “inherent connection between the various processes of this shifting” too?
[8] Humboldt’s relation to Bopp’s general ideas is worth studying; see his letters to Bopp, printed as Nachtrag to S. Lefman’s Franz Bopp, sein leben und seine wissenschaft (Berlin, 1897). He is (p. 5) on the whole of Bopp’s opinion that flexions have arisen through agglutination of syllables, the independent meaning of which was lost; still, he is not certain that all flexion can be explained in that way, and especially doubts it in the case of ‘umlaut,’ under which term he here certainly includes ‘ablaut,’ as seen by his reference (p. 12) to Greek future stalô from stéllō; he adds that “some flexions are at the same time so insignificant and so widely spread in languages that I should be inclined to call them original; for example, our i of the dative and m of the same case, both of which by their sharper sound seem intended to call attention to the peculiar nature of this case, which does not, like the other cases, denote a simple, but a double relation” (repeated p. 10). Humboldt doubts Bopp’s identification of the temporal augment with the a privativum. He says (p. 14) that cases often originate from prepositions, as in American languages and in Basque, and that he has always explained our genitive, as in G. manne-s, as a remnant of aus. This is evidently wrong, as the s of aus is a special High German development from t, while the s of the genitive is also found in languages which do not share in this development of t. But the remark is interesting because, apart from the historical proof to the contrary which we happen to possess in this case, the derivation is no whit worse than many of the explanations resorted to by adherents of the agglutinative theory. But Humboldt goes on to say that in Greek and Latin he is not prepared to maintain that one single case is to be explained in this way. Humboldt probably had some influence on Bopp’s view of the weak preterit, for he is skeptical with regard to the did explanation and inclines to connect the ending with the participle in t.
[8] Humboldt's relationship to Bopp's general ideas is worth examining; see his letters to Bopp, included as an appendix to S. Lefman's Franz Bopp, sein leben und seine wissenschaft (Berlin, 1897). He believes (p. 5) that, overall, Bopp’s view is that inflections have developed from the agglutination of syllables, whose independent meanings have been lost; however, he is not convinced that all inflections can be explained this way and definitely questions this in relation to ‘umlaut.’ It’s clear that he includes ‘ablaut’ in this term, as indicated by his reference (p. 12) to the Greek future stalô from stéllō; he adds that “some inflections are at the same time so minor and so widespread in languages that I would consider them original; for example, our i of the dative and m of the same case, both of which by their sharper sound seem meant to draw attention to the unique nature of this case, which indicates a complex relationship rather than a simple one” (repeated p. 10). Humboldt questions Bopp’s identification of the temporal augment with the a privativum. He states (p. 14) that cases often originate from prepositions, as seen in American languages and in Basque, and that he has consistently explained our genitive, as in G. manne-s, as a remnant of aus. This is clearly incorrect, as the s of aus is a specific High German development from t, while the s of the genitive appears in languages that do not have this development of t. Nonetheless, this observation is intriguing because, despite the historical evidence we possess against it in this instance, the explanation is not significantly worse than many theories proposed by supporters of the agglutinative theory. However, Humboldt continues by saying that he is not ready to assert that any single case in Greek and Latin can be explained this way. Humboldt likely had some influence on Bopp's perspective regarding the weak preterit, as he is skeptical about the did explanation and leans toward linking the ending with the participle in t.
[10] It has been objected to the use of Aryan in this wide sense that the name is also used in the restricted sense of Indian + Iranic; but no separate name is needed for that small group other than Indo-Iranic.
[10] Some people have raised concerns about using the term Aryan in this broad way since it also refers specifically to Indian and Iranian; however, there isn’t a need for a different name for that limited group beyond Indo-Iranic.
[12] For example, the correct appreciation of Scandinavian o sounds and especially the recognition of syllables without any vowel, for instance, in G. mittel, schmeicheln, E. heaven, little; this important truth was unnoticed by linguists till Sievers in 1876 called attention to it and Brugmann in 1877 used it in a famous article.
[12] For instance, a proper understanding of Scandinavian o sounds, especially the ability to recognize syllables without any vowels, like in G. mittel, schmeicheln, E. heaven, little; this important fact was overlooked by linguists until Sievers highlighted it in 1876, and Brugmann applied it in a well-known article in 1877.
[13] A young German linguist, to whom I sent the pamphlet early in 1886, wrote to me: “Wenn man sich den spass machte und das ding übersetzte mit der bemerkung, es sei vor vier jahren erschienen, wer würde einem nicht trauen? Merkwürdig, dass solche sachen so unbemerkt, ‘dem kleinen veilchen gleich,’ dahinschwinden können.” A short time afterwards the pamphlet was reprinted with a short preface by Vilh. Thomsen (Copenhagen, 1886).
[13] A young German linguist, to whom I sent the pamphlet early in 1886, wrote to me: “If someone enjoyed translating it and pointed out that it was published four years ago, who would doubt them? It's odd how things like this can slip away unnoticed, just like 'the little violet.'” A short time afterwards, the pamphlet was reprinted with a brief preface by Vilh. Thomsen (Copenhagen, 1886).
[14] In numerous papers in North Am. Review and elsewhere, and finally in the pamphlet Max Müller and the Science of Language, a Criticism (New York, 1892). Müller’s reply to the earlier attacks is found in Chips from a German Workshop, vol. iv.
[14] In several articles in North Am. Review and other places, and finally in the pamphlet Max Müller and the Science of Language, a Criticism (New York, 1892). Müller’s response to the earlier criticisms is found in Chips from a German Workshop, vol. iv.
[15] Who was the discoverer of the palatal law? This has been hotly discussed, and as the law was in so far anticipated by other discoveries of the ’seventies as to be “in the air,” it is perhaps futile to try to fix the paternity on any single man. However, it seems now perfectly clear that Vilhelm Thomsen was the first to mention it in his lectures (1875), but unfortunately the full and able paper in which he intended to lay it before the world was delayed for a couple of years and then kept in his drawers when he heard that Johannes Schmidt was preparing a paper on the same subject: it was printed in 1920 in the second volume of his Samlede Afhandlinger (from the original manuscript). Esaias Tegnér had found the law independently and had printed five sheets of a book De ariska språkens palataler, which he withdrew when he found that Collitz and de Saussure had expressed similar views. Karl Verner, too, had independently arrived at the same results; see his Afhandlinger og Breve, 109 ff., 305.
[15] Who discovered the palatal law? This has been a topic of heated debate, and since the law was partly anticipated by other findings from the '70s to the point of being “in the air,” it might be pointless to attribute it to any one person. However, it’s now clear that Vilhelm Thomsen was the first to bring it up in his lectures (1875). Unfortunately, the comprehensive paper he intended to share with the world was delayed for a couple of years and ultimately remained in his files when he learned that Johannes Schmidt was working on a similar paper. It was published in 1920 in the second volume of his Samlede Afhandlinger (from the original manuscript). Esaias Tegnér also discovered the law independently and printed five pages of a book De ariska språkens palataler, which he withdrew after realizing that Collitz and de Saussure had voiced similar ideas. Karl Verner also reached the same conclusions independently; see his Afhandlinger og Breve, 109 ff., 305.
[17] In this book the age of a child is indicated by stating the number of years and months completed: 1.6 thus means “in the seventh month of the second year,” etc.
[17] In this book, a child's age is shown by listing the number of completed years and months: 1.6 means “in the seventh month of the second year,” and so on.
[22] H. G. Wells writes (Soul of a Bishop, 94): “He was lugging things now into speech that so far had been scarcely above the threshold of his conscious thought.” Here we see the wrong interpretation of the preposition over dragging with it the synonym above.
[22] H. G. Wells writes (Soul of a Bishop, 94): “He was bringing things now into speech that so far had been barely within his conscious thought.” Here we see the incorrect interpretation of the preposition over bringing along the synonym above.
[24] This is not the place to speak of the way in which prevalent methods of teaching foreign languages can be improved. A slavish copying of the manner in which English children learn English is impracticable, and if it were practicable it would demand more time than anyone can devote to the purpose. One has to make the most of the advantages which the pupils possess over babies, thus, their being able to read, their power of more sustained attention, etc. Phonetic explanation of the new sounds and phonetic transcription have done wonders to overcome difficulties of pronunciation. But in other respects it is possible to some extent to assimilate the teaching of a foreign language to the method pursued by the child in its first years: one should not merely sprinkle the pupil, but plunge him right down into the sea of language and enable him to swim by himself as soon as possible, relying on the fact that a great deal will arrange itself in the brain without the inculcation of too many special rules and explanations. For details I may refer to my book, How to Teach a Foreign Language (London, George Allen and Unwin).
[24] This isn't the right time to discuss how we can improve the common ways of teaching foreign languages. Just copying how English kids learn English isn't realistic, and even if it were, it would require more time than anyone can spare. We need to take advantage of what students already have over babies, like their ability to read and their capacity for longer attention spans, etc. Phonetic explanations of new sounds and phonetic transcription have greatly helped with pronunciation issues. However, in some ways, we can somewhat mimic how children learn a language in their early years: instead of just giving the student a taste of the language, we should fully immerse them in it and help them learn to navigate it on their own as soon as possible, trusting that a lot will fall into place in their minds without needing too many specific rules and explanations. For more details, you can check out my book, How to Teach a Foreign Language (London, George Allen and Unwin).
[28] I subjoin a few additional examples. Basque aita ‘father,’ ama ‘mother,’ anaya ‘brother’ (Zeitsch. f. rom. Phil. 17, 146). Manchu ama ‘father,’ eme ‘mother’ (the vowel relation as in haha ‘man,’ hehe ‘woman,’ Gabelentz, S 389). Kutenai pa· ‘brother’s daughter,’ papa ‘grandmother (said by male), grandfather, grandson,’ pat! ‘nephew,’ ma ‘mother,’ nana ‘younger sister’ (of girl), alnana ‘sisters,’ tite ‘mother-in-law,’ titu ‘father’ (of male)—(Boas, Kutenai Tales, Bureau of Am. Ethnol. 59, 1918). Cf. also Sapir, “Kinship Terms of the Kootenay Indians” (Amer. Anthropologist, vol. 20). In the same writer’s Yana Terms of Relationship (Univ. of California, 1918) there seems to be very little from this source.
[28] Here are a few more examples. Basque aita means ‘father,’ ama means ‘mother,’ and anaya means ‘brother’ (Zeitsch. f. rom. Phil. 17, 146). In Manchu, ama means ‘father’ and eme means ‘mother’ (the vowel pattern is similar to haha for ‘man’ and hehe for ‘woman,’ Gabelentz, S 389). In Kutenai, pa· means ‘brother’s daughter,’ papa means ‘grandmother (when said by a male), grandfather, grandson,’ pat! means ‘nephew,’ ma means ‘mother,’ nana means ‘younger sister’ (of a girl), alnana means ‘sisters,’ tite means ‘mother-in-law,’ and titu means ‘father’ (of a male)—(Boas, Kutenai Tales, Bureau of Am. Ethnol. 59, 1918). See also Sapir, “Kinship Terms of the Kootenay Indians” (Amer. Anthropologist, vol. 20). In the same author’s Yana Terms of Relationship (Univ. of California, 1918), there seems to be very little from this source.
[29] Tata is also used for ‘a walk’ (to go out for a ta-ta, or to go out ta-tas) and for ‘a hat’—meanings that may very well have developed from the child’s saying these syllables when going out or preparing to go out.
[29] Tata is also used to mean 'a walk' (to go out for a ta-ta, or to go out ta-tas) and for 'a hat'—meanings that likely came from children saying these syllables when going out or getting ready to go out.
[31] The views advanced in § 8 have some points in contact with the remarks found in Stern’s ch. xix, p. 300, only that I lay more stress on the arbitrary interpretation of the child’s meaningless syllables on the part of the grown-ups, and that I cannot approve his theory of the m syllables as ‘centripetal’ and the p syllables as ‘centrifugal affective-volitional natural sounds.’ Paul (P § 127) says that the nursery-language with its bowwow, papa, mama, etc., “is not the invention of the children; it is handed over to them just as any other language”; he overlooks the share children have themselves in these words, or in some of them; nor are they, as he says, formed by the grown-ups with a purely pedagogical purpose. Nor can I find that Wundt’s chapter “Angebliche worterfindung des kindes” (S 1. 273-287) contains decisive arguments. Curtius (K 88) thinks that Gr. patēr was first shortened into pâ and this then extended into páppa—but certainly it is rather the other way round.
[31] The ideas presented in § 8 have some similarities with the comments found in Stern’s ch. xix, p. 300, but I emphasize more the random interpretation of the child's nonsensical syllables by adults, and I don’t agree with his theory that the m syllables are ‘centripetal’ and the p syllables are ‘centrifugal affective-volitional natural sounds.’ Paul (P § 127) mentions that nursery language, with words like bowwow, papa, mama, etc., “is not created by children; it is passed down to them just like any other language”; he overlooks the contribution children have to these words, or some of them; nor are they, as he claims, created by adults purely for educational reasons. I also don’t find that Wundt’s chapter “Alleged word invention by child” (S 1. 273-287) offers convincing arguments. Curtius (K 88) believes that Gr. patēr was first shortened to pâ, which then evolved into páppa—but it’s more likely that it went the other way around.
[32] The same inconsistency is found in Dauzat, who in 1910 thought that nothing, and in 1912 that nearly everything, was due to imperfect imitation by the child (V 22 ff., Ph 53, cf. 3). Wechssler (L p. 86) quotes passages from Bremer, Passy, Rousselot and Wallensköld, in which the chief cause of sound changes is attributed to the child; to these might be added Storm (Phonetische Studien, 5. 200) and A. Thomson (IF 24, 1909, p. 9), probably also Grammont (Mél. linguist. 61). Many writers seem to imagine that the question is settled when they are able to adduce a certain number of parallel changes in the pronunciation of some child and in the historical evolution of languages.
[32] The same inconsistency is evident in Dauzat, who in 1910 believed that nothing, and in 1912 that almost everything, was due to the child's imperfect imitation (V 22 ff., Ph 53, cf. 3). Wechssler (L p. 86) quotes sections from Bremer, Passy, Rousselot, and Wallensköld, where the main cause of sound changes is attributed to the child; to these could be added Storm (Phonetische Studien, 5. 200) and A. Thomson (IF 24, 1909, p. 9), probably also Grammont (Mél. linguist. 61). Many authors seem to think that the issue is resolved when they can provide a number of parallel changes in the pronunciation of some child and the historical development of languages.
[34] In Russian Marfa, Fyodor, etc., we also have f corresponding to original þ, but in this case it is not a transition within one and the same language, but an imperfect imitation on the part of the (adult!) Russians of a sound in a foreign language (Greek th) which was not found in their own language.
[34] In Russian Marfa, Fyodor, etc., we also see f corresponding to the original þ, but in this case, it's not a shift within the same language. Instead, it's a flawed imitation by adult Russians of a sound from a foreign language (Greek th) that doesn't exist in their own language.
[35] Reduplications and assimilations at a distance, as in Fr. tante from the older ante (whence E. aunt, from Lat. amita) and porpentine (frequent in this and analogous forms in Elizabethan writers) for porcupine (porkepine, porkespine) are different from the ordinary assimilations of neighbouring sounds in occurring much less frequently in the speech of adults than in children; cf., however, below, Ch. XV 4.
[35] Reduplications and distant assimilations, like the French word tante from the older ante (which leads to the English aunt, from the Latin amita) and porpentine (often seen in this and similar forms in Elizabethan writers) for porcupine (porkepine, porkespine), happen much less often in adults' speech compared to children's. See below, Ch. XV 4.
[36] Karl Sundén, in his diligent and painstaking book on Elliptical Words in Modern English (Upsala, 1904) [i.e. clipped proper names, for common names are not treated in the long lists given], mentions only two examples of surnames in which the final part is kept (Bart for Islebart, Piggy for Guineapig, from obscure novels), though he has scores of examples in which the beginning is preserved.
[36] Karl Sundén, in his thorough and careful book on Elliptical Words in Modern English (Upsala, 1904) [i.e. clipped proper names, since common names are not included in the extensive lists provided], mentions only two examples of surnames where the final part is retained (Bart for Islebart, Piggy for Guineapig, from obscure novels), although he has many examples where the beginning is kept.
[37] It is often said that stress is decisive of what part is left out in word-clippings, and from an a priori point of view this is what we should expect. But as a matter of fact we find in many instances that syllables with weak stress are preserved, e.g. in Mac(donald), Pen(dennis), the Cri, Vic, Nap, Nat for Nathaniel (orig. pronounced with [t], not [þ]), Val for Percival, Trix, etc. The middle is never kept as such with omission of the beginning and the ending; Liz (whence Lizzy) has not arisen at one stroke from Elizabeth, but mediately through Eliz. Some of the adults’ clippings originate through abbreviations in writing, thus probably most of the college terms (exam, trig, etc.), thus also journalists’ clippings like ad for advertisement, par for paragraph; cf. also caps for capitals. On stump-words see also below, Ch. XIV, §§ 8 and 9.
[37] People often say that stress determines which parts are left out in word shortenings, and from a theoretical perspective, this is what we would expect. However, in many cases, we actually see that syllables with weak stress are kept, for example in Mac(donald), Pen(dennis), Cri, Vic, Nap, Nat for Nathaniel (originally pronounced with [t], not [þ]), Val for Percival, Trix, and others. The middle part is never preserved when the beginning and the end are left out; Liz (from Lizzy) didn't come directly from Elizabeth, but rather indirectly from Eliz. Some of the adult abbreviations come from shortened forms in written language, like many college terms (exam, trig, etc.), as well as journalists' shortcuts like ad for advertisement, and par for paragraph; see also caps for capitals. For more on stump-words, see below, Ch. XIV, §§ 8 and 9.
[39] Semantic changes through ambiguous syntactic combinations have recently been studied especially by Carl Collin; see his Semasiologiska studier, 1906, and Le Développement de Sens du Suffixe -ATA, Lund, 1918, ch. iii and iv. Collin there treats especially of the transition from abstract to concrete nouns; he does not, as I have done above, speak of the rôle of the younger generation in such changes.
[39] Recent studies on semantic changes due to ambiguous syntactic combinations have been particularly noted in the work of Carl Collin; see his Semasiologiska studier, 1906, and Le Développement de Sens du Suffixe -ATA, Lund, 1918, ch. iii and iv. In these works, Collin specifically addresses the shift from abstract to concrete nouns; he doesn’t, as I have done above, discuss the role of the younger generation in these changes.
[40] I know perfectly well that in these and in other similar words there were reasons for the original word disappearing as unfit (shortness, possibility of mistakes through similarity with other words, etc.). What interests me here is the fact that the substitute is a word of the nursery.
[40] I completely understand that in these and other similar terms, there were reasons for the original word to fall out of use (like being too short, the chance of errors due to resembling other words, etc.). What I find interesting here is that the replacement is a word commonly used in childhood.
[41] “Einige namentlich in der ältern litteratur vorkommende angaben über kinder, die sich zusammen aufwachsend eine eigene sprache gebildet haben sollen, sind wohl ein für allemal in das gebiet der fabel zu verweisen” (S 1. 286).
[41] “Some references in older literature about children who supposedly created their own language while growing up together should probably be classified as fables.” (S 1. 286).
[42] Cf. against the assumption of Keltic influence in this instance Meyer-Lübke, Die Romanischen Sprachen, Kultur der Gegenwart, p. 457, and Ettmayer in Streitberg’s Gesch. 2. 265. H. Mutschmann, Phonology of the North-Eastern Scotch Dialect, 1909, p. 53, thinks that the fronting of u in Scotch is similar to that of Latin ū on Gallic territory, and like it is ascribable to the Keltic inhabitants: he forgets, however, that the corresponding fronting is not found in the Keltic spoken in Scotland. Moreover, the complicated Scotch phenomena cannot be compared with the French transition, for the sound of [u] remains in many cases, and [i] generally corresponds to earlier [o], whatever the explanation may be.
[42] See against the assumption of Keltic influence in this case Meyer-Lübke, Die Romanischen Sprachen, Kultur der Gegenwart, p. 457, and Ettmayer in Streitberg’s Gesch. 2. 265. H. Mutschmann, Phonology of the North-Eastern Scotch Dialect, 1909, p. 53, believes that the fronting of u in Scotch is similar to that of Latin ū in Gallic areas, and like it is attributed to the Keltic inhabitants: he overlooks, however, that the corresponding fronting is not found in the Keltic spoken in Scotland. Additionally, the complex Scotch phenomena cannot be compared to the French transition, as the sound of [u] remains in many instances, and [i] generally corresponds to earlier [o], regardless of the explanation.
[44] Feist, on the other hand (PBB 36. 329), makes the Kelts responsible for the shift from p to f, because initial p disappears in Keltic: but disappearance is not the same thing as being changed into a spirant, and there is no necessity for assuming that the sound before disappearing had been changed into f. Besides, it is characteristic of the Gothonic shift that it affects all stops equally, without regard to the place of articulation, while the Keltic change affects only the one sound p.
[44] Feist, on the other hand (PBB 36. 329), holds the Kelts accountable for the change from p to f, since the initial p drops out in Keltic. However, dropping out is not the same as being transformed into a spirant, and there's no need to assume that the sound had changed into f before it disappeared. Additionally, it’s typical of the Gothonic shift to impact all stops equally, regardless of where they are articulated, while the Keltic change only affects the single sound p.
[45] ME. knowleche, stonës [stɔ·nes], off, with [wiþ] become MnE. knowledge, stones [stounz], of [ɔv, əv], with [wið], etc.; cf. also possess, discern with [z], exert with [gz], but exercise with [ks]. See my Studier over eng. kasus, 1891, 178 ff., now MEG i. 6. 5 ff., and (for the phonetic explanation) LPh p. 121.
No changes needed. ME. knowleche, stonës [stɔ·nes], off, with [wiþ] become MnE. knowledge, stones [stounz], of [ɔv, əv], with [wið], etc.; cf. also possess, discern with [z], exert with [gz], but exercise with [ks]. See my Studier over eng. kasus, 1891, 178 ff., now MEG i. 6. 5 ff., and (for the phonetic explanation) LPh p. 121.
[46] Sharp tenues and aspirated tenues may alternate even in the life of one individual, as I have observed in the case of my own son, who at the age of 1.9 used the sharp French sounds, but five months later substituted strongly aspirated p, t, k, with even stronger aspiration than the usual Danish sounds, which it took him ten or eleven months to learn with perfect certainty.
[46] Sharp sounds and breathy sounds can switch back and forth even in one person's life. I noticed this with my own son, who at 19 months used the sharp French sounds, but five months later replaced them with heavily breathy p, t, k sounds, showing even more breathiness than the typical Danish sounds. It took him ten or eleven months to master this with complete certainty.
[47] I use the terms loan-words and borrowed words because they are convenient and firmly established, not because they are exact. There are two essential respects in which linguistic borrowing differs from the borrowing of, say, a knife or money: the lender does not deprive himself of the use of the word any more than if it had not been borrowed by the other party, and the borrower is under no obligation to return the word at any future time. Linguistic ‘borrowing’ is really nothing but imitation, and the only way in which it differs from a child’s imitation of its parents’ speech is that here something is imitated which forms a part of a speech that is not imitated as a whole.
[47] I use the terms loan-words and borrowed words because they are easy to use and widely recognized, not because they are completely accurate. There are two main ways in which linguistic borrowing is different from borrowing something like a knife or money: the lender doesn’t lose the ability to use the word just because someone else has borrowed it, and the borrower doesn’t have to give the word back at any point. Linguistic ‘borrowing’ is really just copying, and the only way it differs from a child copying their parents' speech is that in this case, only part of the speech is copied, not the whole thing.
[48] The etymology of this name is rather curious: Portuguese bicho de mar, from bicho ‘worm,’ the name of the sea slug or trepang, which is eaten as a luxury by the Chinese, was in French modified into bêche de mer, ‘sea-spade’; this by a second popular etymology was made into English beach-la-mar as if a compound of beach.
[48] The origin of this name is quite interesting: the Portuguese term bicho de mar, meaning ‘marine worm,’ refers to the sea slug or trepang, which is considered a delicacy by the Chinese. In French, this was changed to bêche de mer, meaning ‘sea spade’; and through a second popular interpretation, it became beach-la-mar in English, as if it were a combination of beach.
My sources are H. Schuchardt, KS v. (Wiener Academie, 1883); id. in ESt xiii. 158 ff., 1889; W. Churchill, Beach-la-Mar, the Jargon or Trade Speech of the Western Pacific (Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1911); Jack London, The Cruise of the Snark (Mills & Boon, London, 1911?), G. Landtman in Neuphilologische Mitteilungen (Helsingfors, 1918, p. 62 ff. Landtman calls it “the Pidgin-English of British New Guinea,” where he learnt it, though it really differs from Pidgin-English proper; see below); “The Jargon English of Torres Straits” in Reports of the Cambridge Anthropological Expedition to Torres Straits, vol. iii. p. 251 ff., Cambridge, 1907.
My sources are H. Schuchardt, KS v. (Wiener Academie, 1883); id. in ESt xiii. 158 ff., 1889; W. Churchill, Beach-la-Mar, the Jargon or Trade Speech of the Western Pacific (Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1911); Jack London, The Cruise of the Snark (Mills & Boon, London, 1911?), G. Landtman in Neuphilologische Mitteilungen (Helsingfors, 1918, p. 62 ff. Landtman calls it “the Pidgin-English of British New Guinea,” where he learned it, though it really differs from proper Pidgin-English; see below); “The Jargon English of Torres Straits” in Reports of the Cambridge Anthropological Expedition to Torres Straits, vol. iii. p. 251 ff., Cambridge, 1907.
[49] Similarly the missionary G. Brown thought that tobi was a native word of the Duke of York Islands for ‘wash,’ till one day he accidentally discovered that it was their pronunciation of English soap.
[49] Similarly, the missionary G. Brown believed that tobi was a local word from the Duke of York Islands meaning 'wash,' until one day he accidentally found out that it was how they pronounced the English word soap.
[50] There are many specimens in Charles G. Leland, Pidgin-English Sing-Song, or Songs and Stories in the China-English Dialect, with a Vocabulary (5th ed., London, 1900), but they make the impression of being artificially made-up to amuse the readers, and contain a much larger proportion of Chinese words than the rest of my sources would warrant. Besides various articles in newspapers I have used W. Simpson, “China’s Future Place in Philology” (Macmillan’s Magazine, November 1873) and Dr. Legge’s article “Pigeon English” in Chambers’s Encyclopædia, 1901 (s.v. China). The chapters devoted to Pidgin in Karl Lentzner’s Dictionary of the Slang-English of Australia and of some Mixed Languages (Halle, 1892) give little else but wholesale reprints of passages from some of the sources mentioned above.
[50] There are many examples in Charles G. Leland, Pidgin-English Sing-Song, or Songs and Stories in the China-English Dialect, with a Vocabulary (5th ed., London, 1900), but they seem to be artificially created to entertain readers and include a significantly higher number of Chinese words than my other sources would support. In addition to various articles in newspapers, I've referred to W. Simpson's “China’s Future Place in Philology” (Macmillan’s Magazine, November 1873) and Dr. Legge’s article “Pigeon English” in Chambers’s Encyclopædia, 1901 (s.v. China). The chapters dedicated to Pidgin in Karl Lentzner’s Dictionary of the Slang-English of Australia and of some Mixed Languages (Halle, 1892) mainly consist of large portions copied from some of the sources mentioned above.
[51] See An International Idiom. A Manual of the Oregon Trade Language, or Chinook Jargon, by Horatio Hale (London, 1890). Besides this I have used a Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Language of Oregon [by Lionnet] published by the Smithsonian Institution (1853), and George Gibbs, A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon (Smithsonian Inst., 1863). Lionnet spells the words according to the French fashion, while Gibbs and Hale spell them in the English way. I have given them with the continental values of the vowels in accordance with the indications in Hale’s glossary.
[51] See An International Idiom. A Manual of the Oregon Trade Language, or Chinook Jargon, by Horatio Hale (London, 1890). In addition to this, I have used Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Language of Oregon [by Lionnet] published by the Smithsonian Institution (1853), and George Gibbs' A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon (Smithsonian Inst., 1863). Lionnet spells the words in the French style, while Gibbs and Hale use English spelling. I have provided them with the continental values of the vowels based on Hale’s glossary indications.
[53] “Ai is the man’s diphthong, and soundeth full: ei, the woman’s, and soundeth finish [i.e. fineish] in the same both sense, and vse, a woman is deintie, and feinteth soon, the man fainteth not bycause he is nothing daintie.” Thus what is now distinctive of refined as opposed to vulgar pronunciation was then characteristic of the fair sex.
[53] “Ai is the man's vowel combination, and it sounds full: ei, the woman's, and it sounds delicate in both meaning and usage. A woman is delicate and easily feigns; a man does not feign because he is not delicate.” So, what is now seen as refined pronunciation compared to vulgar was previously a trait of the fairer sex.
[54] There are great differences with regard to swearing between different nations; but I think that in those countries and in those circles in which swearing is common it is found much more extensively among men than among women: this at any rate is true of Denmark. There is, however, a general social movement against swearing, and now there are many men who never swear. A friend writes to me: “The best English men hardly swear at all.... I imagine some of our fashionable women now swear as much as the men they consort with.”
[54] There are significant differences in swearing habits between different countries, but I believe that in those nations and social circles where swearing is common, it's much more prevalent among men than women: this is definitely true of Denmark. However, there's a growing social movement against swearing, and now there are many men who never curse. A friend writes to me: “The best English men hardly swear at all.... I think some of our fashionable women now swear as much as the men they hang out with.”
[55] “Où femme y a, silence n’y a.” “Deux femmes font un plaid, trois un grand caquet, quatre un plein marché.” “Due donne e un’ oca fanno una fiera” (Venice). “The tongue is the sword of a woman, and she never lets it become rusty” (China). “The North Sea will sooner be found wanting in water than a woman at a loss for a word” (Jutland).
[55] “Wherever there's a woman, there’s no silence.” “Two women are gossiping, three women are chatting, and four women are making a deal.” “Two women and a goose hold a fair” (Venice). “The tongue is a woman's sword, and she never lets it get dull” (China). “The North Sea will run dry before a woman runs out of words” (Jutland).
[56] The uniformity in the speech of the whole Roman Empire during the first centuries of our Christian era was kept up, among other things, through the habit of removing soldiers and officials from one country to the other. This ceased later, each district being left to shift more or less for itself.
[56] The consistency in the language spoken throughout the Roman Empire during the early centuries of our Christian era was maintained, among other factors, by the practice of relocating soldiers and officials from one region to another. This practice eventually stopped, and each area was left to manage on its own, to varying degrees.
[58] Sometimes appearances may be deceptive: when [nr, mr] become [ndr, mbr], it looks on the paper as if something had been added and as if the transition therefore militated against the principle of ease: in reality, the old and the new combinations require exactly the same amount of muscular activity, and the change simply consists in want of precision in the movement of the velum palati, which comes a fraction of a second too soon. If anything, the new group is a trifle easier than the old. See LPh 5. 6 for explanation and examples (E. thunder from þunor sb., þunrian vb.; timber, cf. Goth. timrian, G. zimmer, etc.).
[58] Sometimes appearances can be misleading: when [nr, mr] change to [ndr, mbr], it might seem on paper like something extra has been added, suggesting that this transition undermines the principle of ease. However, in reality, both the old and new combinations require the same amount of muscle effort; the only difference is a slight lack of precision in the movement of the velum palati, which happens just a fraction of a second too early. If anything, the new group is a bit easier than the old. See LPh 5.6 for explanation and examples (E. thunder from þunor sb., þunrian vb.; timber, cf. Goth. timrian, G. zimmer, etc.).
[59] This is rendered most clear by my ‘analphabetic’ notation (α means lips, β tip of tongue, δ soft palate, velum palati, and ε glottis; 0 stands for closed position, 1 for approximation, 3 for open position); the three sound combinations are thus analysed (cf. my Lehrbuch der Phonetik):
[59] This is made most clear by my 'analphabetic' notation (α means lips, β means tip of tongue, δ means soft palate, velum palati, and ε means glottis; 0 stands for closed position, 1 for approximation, and 3 for open position); the three sound combinations are therefore analyzed (see my Lehrbuch der Phonetik):
p | n | p | m | m | n | |
α | 0 | 3 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 3 |
β | 3 | 0 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 0 |
δ | 0 | 3 | 0 | 3 | 3 | 3 |
ε | 3 | 1 | 3 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
[61] In the reprint in Samlede Afhandlinger, ii. 417 (1920), a few lines are added in which Thomsen fully accepts the explanation which I gave as far back as 1886.
[61] In the reprint in Samlede Afhandlinger, ii. 417 (1920), a few lines are added in which Thomsen fully accepts the explanation I provided as early as 1886.
[62] The above remarks are condensed from the argument in ChE 38 ff. Note also what is said below (Ch. XIX § 13) on the loss of Lat. final -s in the Romanic languages after it had ceased to be necessary for the grammatical understanding of sentences.
[62] The comments above are summarized from the discussion in ChE 38 ff. Also, take note of what is mentioned below (Ch. XIX § 13) regarding the loss of Latin final -s in the Romance languages after it was no longer needed for grasping sentence meaning.
[63] Against this it has been urged that Fr. oncle has not preserved the stem syllable of Lat. avunculus particularly well. But this objection is a little misleading. It is quite true that at the time when the word was first framed the syllable av- contained the main idea and -unculus was only added to impart an endearing modification to that idea (‘dear little uncle’); but after some time the semantic relation was altered; avus itself passed out of use, while avunculus was handed down from generation to generation as a ready-made whole, in which the ordinary speaker was totally unable to suspect that av- was the really significative stem. He consequently treated it exactly as any other polysyllable of the same structure, and avun- (phonetically [awuŋ, auuŋ]) was naturally made into one syllable. Nothing, of course, can be protected by a sense of its significance unless it is still felt as significant. That hardly needs saying.
[63] Some have argued that Fr. oncle hasn't done a great job of keeping the root syllable of Latin avunculus intact. However, this criticism is somewhat misleading. It's true that when the word was first created, the syllable av- was the key component, while -unculus was just added to make it sound cuter (‘dear little uncle’); but over time, the meaning changed. The word avus faded from use, while avunculus was passed down as a single unit, with most speakers completely unaware that av- was the significant root. As a result, they treated it like any other polysyllabic word, and avun- (sounded as [awuŋ, auuŋ]) naturally became one syllable. Clearly, nothing can maintain a sense of significance unless it is still perceived as meaningful. That’s hardly a point that needs explaining.
[64] Compare also the results of the same principle seen in writing. In a letter a proper name or technical term when first introduced is probably written in full and very distinctly, while afterwards it is either written carelessly or indicated by a mere initial. Any shorthand-writer knows how to utilize this principle systematically.
[64] Compare also the results of the same principle seen in writing. In a letter, a proper name or technical term is likely written out fully and clearly the first time it appears, while later on it might be written more casually or just referred to by its initial. Any shorthand writer knows how to use this principle systematically.
[66] Dickens, D. Cop. 2. 149 neverberrer, 150 I’mafraid you’renorwell (ib. also r for n: Amigoarawaysoo, Goori = Good night). | Our Mut. Fr. 602 lerrers. | Thackeray, Newc. 163 Whas that? | Anstey, Vice V. 328 shupper, I shpose, wharriplease, say tharragain. | Meredith, R. Feverel 272 Nor a bir of it. | Walpole, Duch. of Wrex. 323-4 nonshensh, Wash the matter? | Galsworthy, In Chanc. 17 cursh, unshtood’m. Cf. also Fijn van Draat, ESt 34. 363 ff.
[66] Dickens, D. Cop. 2. 149 neverberrer, 150 I’m afraid you’re nor well (ib. also r for n: Amigoarawaysoo, Goori = Good night). | Our Mut. Fr. 602 lerrers. | Thackeray, Newc. 163 What’s that? | Anstey, Vice V. 328 shupper, I shuppose, wharriplease, say tharr again. | Meredith, R. Feverel 272 Nor a bir of it. | Walpole, Duch. of Wrex. 323-4 nonshensh, Wash the matter? | Galsworthy, In Chanc. 17 cursh, unshtood’m. Cf. also Fijn van Draat, ESt 34. 363 ff.
[67] The inconveniences arising from having many homophones in a language are eloquently set forth by Robert Bridges, On English Homophones (S.P.E., Oxford, 1919)—but I would not subscribe to all the Laureate’s views, least of all to his practical suggestions and to his unjustifiable attacks on some very meritorious English phoneticians. He seems also to exaggerate the dangers, e.g. of the two words know and no having the same sound, when he says (p. 22) that unless a vowel like that in law be restored to the negative no, “I should judge that the verb to know is doomed. The third person singular of its present tense is nose, and its past tense is new, and the whole inconvenience is too radical and perpetual to be received all over the world.” But surely the rôle of these words in connected speech is so different, and is nearly always made so clear by the context, that it is very difficult to imagine real sentences in which there would be any serious change of mistaking know for no, or knows for nose, or knew for new. I repeat: it is not homophony as such—the phenomenon shown in the long lists lexicographers can draw up of words of the same sound—that is decisive, but the chances of mistakes in connected speech. It has been disputed whether the loss of Gr. humeîs, ‘ye,’ was due to its identity in sound with hemeîs, ‘we’; Hatzidakis says that the new formation eseîs is earlier than the falling together of e and u [y] in the sound [i]. But according to Dieterich and C. D. Buck (Classical Philology, 9. 90, 1914) the confusion of u and i or e dates back to the second century. Anyhow, all confusion is now obviated, for both the first and the second persons pl. have new forms which are unambiguous: emeîs and eseîs or seîs.
[67] The issues that come from having many homophones in a language are clearly explained by Robert Bridges in On English Homophones (S.P.E., Oxford, 1919)—but I don’t agree with everything the Laureate suggests, especially his practical ideas and his unfair criticisms of some very skilled English phoneticians. He also seems to exaggerate the problems, talking about how the words know and no sound the same, when he says (p. 22) that unless a vowel like the one in law is added back to the negative no, “I would guess that the verb to know is doomed. The third person singular of its present tense is nose, and its past tense is new, and the whole inconvenience is too extreme and permanent to be accepted worldwide.” But surely the role of these words in a sentence is so different, and context usually makes it clear enough, that it's hard to imagine real sentences where someone would seriously mix up know with no, or knows with nose, or knew with new. I want to emphasize: it’s not really the existence of homophones—the phenomenon that lexicographers can list off of words that sound the same—that is the main issue, but the likelihood of mistakes in connected speech. There’s been some debate over whether the loss of Gr. humeîs, ‘you (plural),’ was because it sounded the same as hemeîs, ‘we’; Hatzidakis argues that the new form eseîs appeared before the merging of e and u [y] into the sound [i]. Yet according to Dieterich and C. D. Buck (Classical Philology, 9. 90, 1914), the confusion between u and i or e goes back to the second century. In any case, any confusion has now been avoided, because both the first and second plural forms have new, clear forms: emeîs and eseîs or seîs.
[68] The NED has not arrived at this explanation; it says: “Peer is not a phonetic development of pire, and cannot, so far as is at present known, be formally identified with that word”; “the verbs keek, peek, and peep are app. closely allied to each other. Kike and pike, as earlier forms of keek and peek, occur in Chaucer; pepe, peep is of later appearance.... The phonetic relations between the forms pike, peek, peak, are as yet unexplained.”
[68] The NED has not come to this conclusion; it states: “Peer is not a phonetic development of pire, and can't, as far as we currently know, be formally linked to that word”; “the verbs keek, peek, and peep are apparently closely related. Kike and pike, as earlier forms of keek and peek, appear in Chaucer; pepe, peep shows up later.... The phonetic connections between the forms pike, peek, peak, are still not explained.”
[69] See, for instance, the following strong expressions: “Une langue est sans cesse rongée et menacée de ruine par l’action des lois phonétiques, qui, livrées à elles-mêmes, opéreraient avec une régularité fatale et désagrégeraient le système grammatical.... Heureusement l’analogie (c’est ainsi qu’on désigne la tendance inconsciente à conserver ou recréer ce que les lois phonétiques menacent ou détruisent) a peu à peu effacé ces différences ... il s’agit d’une perpétuelle dégradation due aux changements phonétiques aveugles, et qui est toujours ou prévenue ou réparée par une réorganisation parallèle du système” (Bally, LV 44 f.).
[69] For example, consider these strong statements: “A language is always being eroded and at risk of falling apart due to phonetic laws that, if not kept in check, would work in a predictable way and break down the grammatical structure. Luckily, analogy (which is how we describe the unconscious tendency to maintain or reconstruct what phonetic laws threaten or destroy) has slowly eliminated these differences. It’s an ongoing decline caused by automatic phonetic changes, which is either stopped or corrected by a simultaneous restructuring of the system.” (Bally, LV 44 f.).
[70] Some speakers will say [su·] in Susan, supreme, superstition, but will take care to pronounce [sju·] in suit, sue. Others are more consistent one way or the other.
[70] Some speakers pronounce [su·] in Susan, supreme, superstition, but make sure to say [sju·] in suit, sue. Others tend to stick consistently to one way or the other.
[72] Even in speaking a foreign language one may unconsciously apply phonetic correspondences; a countryman of mine thus told me that he once, in his anger at being charged an exorbitant price for something, exclaimed: “Das sind doch unblaue preise!”—coining in the hurry the word unblaue for the Danish ublu (shameless), because the negative prefix un- corresponds to Dan. u-, and au very often stands in German where Dan. has u (haus = hus, etc.). On hearing his own words, however, he immediately saw his mistake and burst out laughing.
[72] Even when speaking a foreign language, someone might unknowingly apply phonetic similarities. A fellow countryman of mine once told me that in his anger at being charged an outrageous price for something, he shouted: “Das sind doch unblaue Preise!”—quickly inventing the word unblaue instead of the Danish ublu (shameless), because the negative prefix un- corresponds to Dan. u-, and au often replaces u in German (like haus = hus, etc.). Upon realizing what he had said, he immediately recognized his mistake and burst out laughing.
[74] It is, of course, impossible to say how great a proportion of the etymologies given in dictionaries should strictly be classed under each of the following heads: (1) certain, (2) probable, (3) possible, (4) improbable, (5) impossible—but I am afraid the first two classes would be the least numerous. Meillet (Gr 59) has some excellent remarks to the same effect; according to him, “pour une étymologie sûre, les dictionnaires en offrent plus de dix qui sont douteuses et dont, en appliquant une méthode rigoureuse, on ne saurait faire la preuve.”
[74] It’s clearly impossible to determine how many of the etymologies found in dictionaries should be categorized under each of the following labels: (1) certain, (2) probable, (3) possible, (4) improbable, (5) impossible—but I suspect that the first two categories would be the least populated. Meillet (Gr 59) has some great points regarding this; he states, “For a reliable etymology, dictionaries provide more than ten questionable options, and using a rigorous method, one cannot prove any of them..”
[77] Speculation has been rife, but without any generally accepted results, as to the relation between plumbum and words for the same metal in cognate languages: Gr. molibos, molubdos and similar forms, Ir. luaide, E. lead (G. lot, ‘plummet, half an ounce’), Scand. bly, OSlav. olovo, OPruss. alwis; see Curtius, Prellwitz, Boisacq, Hirt Idg. 686, Schrader Sprachvergl. u. Urgesch., 3d. ed., ii. 1. 95; Herm. Möller, Sml. Glossar 87, says that molibos and plumbum are extensions of the root m-l ‘mollis esse’ and explains the difference between the initial sounds by referring to multum: comp. plus—certainly most ingenious, but not convincing. Some of these words may originally have been echo-words for the plumping plummet.
[77] There has been a lot of speculation, but no widely accepted conclusions, about the connection between plumbum and the terms for the same metal in related languages: Gr. molibos, molubdos and similar variations, Ir. luaide, E. lead (G. lot, ‘plummet, half an ounce’), Scand. bly, OSlav. olovo, OPruss. alwis; see Curtius, Prellwitz, Boisacq, Hirt Idg. 686, Schrader Sprachvergl. u. Urgesch., 3d. ed., ii. 1. 95; Herm. Möller, Sml. Glossar 87, states that molibos and plumbum are derived from the root m-l ‘be soft’ and explains the difference in the initial sounds by referencing multum: compare plus—certainly clever, but not persuasive. Some of these words may have originally been sound-imitative terms for the heavy drop of lead.
[79] Quoted here from John Wilkins, An Essay towards a Real Character and a Philosophical Language, 1668, p. 448: Wilkins there subjects Bacon’s saying to a crushing criticism, laying bare a great many radical deficiencies in Latin to bring out the logical advantages of his own artificial ‘philosophical’ language.
[79] Quoted here from John Wilkins, An Essay towards a Real Character and a Philosophical Language, 1668, p. 448: Wilkins critiques Bacon's statement harshly, exposing numerous fundamental flaws in Latin to highlight the logical benefits of his own constructed 'philosophical' language.
[80] Cf. also what Paul says (P 144) about one point in German grammar (strong and weak forms of adjectives): “But the difficulty of the correct maintenance of the distinction is shown in numerous offences made by writers against the rules of grammar”—of course, not only by writers, but by ordinary speakers as well.
[80] See what Paul says (P 144) about a point in German grammar (strong and weak forms of adjectives): “But the difficulty in properly maintaining the distinction is evident in the many errors made by writers against the rules of grammar”—not just by writers, but by everyday speakers too.
[81] It has often been pointed out how Great Britain has ‘blundered’ into creating her world-wide Empire, and Gretton, in The King’s Government (1914), applies the same view to the development of governmental institutions.
[81] People often say that Great Britain has accidentally built its global Empire, and Gretton, in The King’s Government (1914), shares this perspective on how governmental institutions have developed.
[82] In the realm of significations he sees the ‘humanization’ of language exclusively in the development of abstract terms. An important point of disagreement between Baudouin and myself is in regard to morphology, where he sees only ‘oscillations’ in historical times, in which he is unable to discover a continuous movement in any definite direction, while I maintain that languages here manifest a definite progressive tendency.
[82] In the realm of meanings, he views the 'humanization' of language solely through the evolution of abstract terms. A key disagreement between Baudouin and me lies in morphology; he perceives only 'oscillations' throughout history, where he cannot find a consistent movement in any clear direction, whereas I argue that languages show a clear progressive tendency here.
[83] On the other hand, it is not, perhaps, fair to count the number of syllables, as these may vary very considerably, and some languages favour syllables with heavy consonant groups unknown in other tongues. The most rational measure of length would be to count the numbers of distinct (not sounds, but) articulations of separate speech organs—but that task is at any rate beyond my powers.
[83] On the other hand, it might not be entirely fair to count the number of syllables, since these can vary a lot, and some languages prefer syllables with heavy clusters of consonants that aren’t found in others. The most logical way to measure length would be to count the number of distinct (not sounds, but) movements of separate speech organs—but that task is definitely beyond my abilities.
[85] This ungainly repetition is frequent in the Latin of Roman law, e.g. Digest. IV. 5. 2, Qui quæve ... capite diminuti diminutæ esse dicentur, in eos easve ... iudicium dabo. | XLIII. 30, Qui quæve in potestate Lucii Titii est, si is eave apud te est, dolove malo tuo factum est quominus apud te esset, ita eum eamve exhibeas. | XI. 3, Qui servum servam alienum alienam recepisse persuasisseve quid ei dicitur dolo malo, quo eum eam deteriorem faceret, in eum, quanti ea res erit, in duplum iudicium dabo. I owe these and some other Latin examples to my late teacher, Dr. O. Siesbye. From French, Nyrop (Kongruens, p. 12) gives some corresponding examples: tous ceux et toutes celles qui, ayant été orphelins, avaient eu une enfance malheureuse (Philippe), and from Old French: Lors donna congié à ceus et à celes que il avoit rescous (Villehardouin).
[85] This clumsy repetition often appears in the Latin of Roman law, for example, Digest. IV. 5. 2, Whoever ... will be said to have diminished in head, I will give judgment on them ... | XLIII. 30, Whoever is in the power of Lucius Titii, if he or she is with you, and it has been done through your wrongful act that they are not with you, then you should produce them. | XI. 3, Whoever has received or persuaded a slave belonging to someone else with malicious intent, with the aim of making him or her worse off, I will impose a judgment on him or her to the extent of the value of that matter, doubling the penalty. I owe these and some other Latin examples to my late teacher, Dr. O. Siesbye. From French, Nyrop (Kongruens, p. 12) gives some corresponding examples: everyone who, having been orphans, had an unhappy childhood (Philippe), and from Old French: Lors donna congé à __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ que il avait sauvés. (Villehardouin).
[86] If instead of omnium veterum I had chosen, for instance, multorum antiquorum, the meaning of masculine gender would have been rendered four times: for languages, especially the older ones, are not distinguished by consistency.
[86] If instead of omnium veterum I had picked, for example, multorum antiquorum, the meaning of the masculine gender would have been represented four times: because languages, especially older ones, aren't marked by consistency.
[87] The change of the initial sound of the reminder belonging to the adjective is explained through composition with a ‘relative particle’ a; au becoming o, and ai, e. The numbers within parentheses refer to the numbers of Bleek’s classes. Similar sentences from Tonga are found in Torrend’s Compar. Gr. p. 6 f.
[87] The change in the initial sound of the reminder related to the adjective is explained by its combination with a 'relative particle' a; au becomes o, and ai becomes e. The numbers in parentheses refer to the numbers from Bleek’s classes. Similar sentences from Tonga can be found in Torrend’s Compar. Gr. p. 6 f.
[91] I must also mention A. Conrady, Eine indochinesische Causativ-denominativ-bildung (Leipzig, 1896), in which Lepsius’s theory is carried a great step further and it is demonstrated with very great learning that many of the tone relations (a well as modifications of initial sounds) of Chinese and kindred languages find their explanation in the previous existence of prefixes which are now extinct, but which can still be pointed out in Tibetan. Though I ought, therefore, to have spoken of prefixes instead of ‘flexional endings’ above, p. 371, the essence of the contention that prehistoric Chinese must have had a polysyllabic and non-isolating structure is thus borne out by the researches of competent specialists in this field.
[91] I should also mention A. Conrady, Eine indochinesische Causativ-denominativ-bildung (Leipzig, 1896), where Lepsius’s theory is taken much further, showing with great scholarship that many of the tonal relationships (as well as changes in initial sounds) in Chinese and related languages can be explained by the earlier existence of prefixes that are now extinct, but can still be identified in Tibetan. Although I should have referred to prefixes instead of 'flexional endings' above, p. 371, the core argument that prehistoric Chinese must have had a polysyllabic and non-isolating structure is supported by the research of knowledgeable experts in this area.
[92] Madvig Kl 170, Max Müller L 1. 271, Whitney OLS 1. 283, G 124, Paul P 1st ed. 181, repeated in the following editions, see 4th, 1909, 350 and 347, 349; Brugmann VG 1889, 2. 1 (but in 2nd ed. this has been struck out in favour of hopeless skepticism), Schuchardt, Anlass d. Volapüks 11, Gabelentz Spr 189, Tegnér SM 53, Sweet, New Engl. Gr. § 559, Storm, Engl. Phil. 673, Rozwadowski, Wortbildung u. Wortbed., Uhlenbeck, Karakt. d. bask. Gramm. 24, Sütterlin WGS 1902, 122, Porzezinski, Spr 1910, 229.
[92] Madvig Kl 170, Max Müller L 1. 271, Whitney OLS 1. 283, G 124, Paul P 1st ed. 181, repeated in the following editions, see 4th, 1909, 350 and 347, 349; Brugmann VG 1889, 2. 1 (but in 2nd ed. this has been struck out in favor of hopeless skepticism), Schuchardt, Anlass d. Volapüks 11, Gabelentz Spr 189, Tegnér SM 53, Sweet, New Engl. Gr. § 559, Storm, Engl. Phil. 673, Rozwadowski, Wortbildung u. Wortbed., Uhlenbeck, Karakt. d. bask. Gramm. 24, Sütterlin WGS 1902, 122, Porzezinski, Spr 1910, 229.
[93] Two explanations of this formative element were given by the old school: according to Schleicher C § 290, it was the root ja of the relative pronoun; according to Curtius and others it was the root i ‘to go,’ Greek fer-o-i-mi being analyzed as ‘I go to bear,’ whence, by an easy (?) transition, ‘I should like to bear,’ etc.
[93] Two explanations of this foundational element were provided by the traditional scholars: according to Schleicher C § 290, it was the root ja of the relative pronoun; according to Curtius and others, it was the root i meaning ‘to go,’ with Greek fer-o-i-mi interpreted as ‘I go to bear,’ leading, through a straightforward (?) transition, to ‘I would like to bear,’ and so on.
[94] Cf. Sommer, Lat. 528, and on Armenian and Tokharian r forms MSL 18. 10 ff. and Feist KI 455. But it must not be overlooked that H. Pedersen (KZ 40. 166 ff.) has revived and strengthened the old theory that r in Italic and Keltic is an original se.
[94] See Sommer, Lat. 528, and for the Armenian and Tokharian r forms MSL 18. 10 ff. and Feist KI 455. However, it's important to note that H. Pedersen (KZ 40. 166 ff.) has revitalized and reinforced the old theory that r in Italic and Keltic is originally se.
[96] While it is difficult to see the relation between a demonstrative pronoun or a deictic particle and genitival function, it would be easy enough to understand the latter if we started from a possessive pronoun (ejus, suus), and, curiously enough, we find this very sound s used as a sign for the genitive in two independent languages, starting from that notion. In Indo-Portuguese we have gobernadors casa ‘governor’s house,’ from gobernador su casa (above, Ch. XI § 12, p. 213), and in the South-African ‘Taal’ the usual expression for the genitive is by means of syn, which is generally shortened into se (s) and glued enclitically to the substantive, even to feminines and plurals: Marie-se boek ‘Maria’s book,’ di gowweneur se hond ‘the governor’s dog’ (H. Meyer, Die Sprache der Buren, 1901, p. 40, where also the confusion with the adjective ending -s, in Dutch spelt -sch, is mentioned. For the construction compare G. dem vater sein hut and others from various languages; cf. the appendix on E. Bill Stumps his mark in ChE 182 f.).
[96] While it's tough to see the connection between a demonstrative pronoun or a deictic particle and possessive function, it would be straightforward to grasp the latter if we started from a possessive pronoun (ejus, suus). Interestingly, we find this very sound s used as a marker for the genitive in two distinct languages, based on that idea. In Indo-Portuguese, we have gobernadors casa meaning ‘governor’s house,’ derived from gobernador su casa (above, Ch. XI § 12, p. 213), and in South African ‘Taal,’ the common way to express the genitive is through syn, which is typically shortened to se (s) and attached to the noun, even for feminine and plural forms: Marie-se boek meaning ‘Maria’s book,’ di gowweneur se hond meaning ‘the governor’s dog’ (H. Meyer, Die Sprache der Buren, 1901, p. 40, where the confusion with the adjective ending -s, spelled -sch in Dutch, is also noted. For the construction, compare G. dem vater sein hut and others from different languages; see the appendix on E. Bill Stumps his mark in ChE 182 f.).
[97] Cf. Lloyd George’s speech at Dundee (The Times, July 6, 1917): “The Government will not permit the burdens of the country to be increased by what is called ‘profiteering.’ Although I have been criticized for using that word, I believe on the whole it is a rather good one. It is profit-eer-ing as distinguished from profit-ing. Profiting is fair recompense for services rendered, either in production or distribution; profiteering is an extravagant recompense given for services rendered. I believe that unfair in peace. In war it is an outrage.”
[97] See Lloyd George’s speech at Dundee (The Times, July 6, 1917): “The Government won’t allow the burdens of the country to be increased by what’s called ‘profiteering.’ Even though I’ve been criticized for using that term, I think it’s a pretty good one. It’s profit-eer-ing compared to profit-ing. Profiting is a fair reward for services provided, whether in production or distribution; profiteering is an excessive reward for services provided. I think that’s unfair in peacetime. In wartime, it’s a disgrace.”
[99] For bibliography and criticism see Wheeler in Journ. of Germ. Philol. 2. 528 ff., and especially Josselin de Jong in Tijdschr. v. Ned. Taal- en Letterk. 29. 21 ff., and the same writer’s thesis De Waardeeringsonderscheiding van levend en levenloos in het Indogermaansch vergel. m. hetzelfde verschijnsel in Algonkin-talen (Leiden, 1913). Cf. also Hirt GDS 45 ff.
[99] For bibliography and criticism see Wheeler in Journ. of Germ. Philol. 2. 528 ff., and especially Josselin de Jong in Tijdschr. v. Ned. Taal- en Letterk. 29. 21 ff., and the same author's thesis De Waardeeringsonderscheiding van levend en levenloos in het Indogermaansch vergel. m. hetzelfde verschijnsel in Algonkin-talen (Leiden, 1913). Cf. also Hirt GDS 45 ff.
[101] I have learnt very little from the discussion which followed Wundt’s remarks on the subject (S 1. 312-347); see Delbrück Grfr 78 ff., Sütterlin WSG 29 ff., Hilmer Sch 10 ff.
[101] I haven't gained much insight from the conversation that followed Wundt's comments on the topic (S 1. 312-347); refer to Delbrück Grfr 78 ff., Sütterlin WSG 29 ff., Hilmer Sch 10 ff.
[102] Schuchardt, KS 5. 12, Zs. f. rom. Phil. 33. 458, Churchill B 53, Sandfeld-Jensen, Nationalfølelsen 14, Lentzner, Col. 87, Simonyi US 157, The Outlook, January 1910, New Quarterly Mag., July 1879.
[102] Schuchardt, KS 5. 12, Zs. f. rom. Phil. 33. 458, Churchill B 53, Sandfeld-Jensen, Nationalfølelsen 14, Lentzner, Col. 87, Simonyi US 157, The Outlook, January 1910, New Quarterly Mag., July 1879.
[105] Benfey Gesch 791, Misteli 539, Wundt S 1. 331 (but his examples from out-of-the-way languages must be used with caution, and curiously enough he thinks that the phenomenon is limited to primitive languages and is not found in Semitic or Aryan languages), GRM 1. 638, Simonyi US 255, Meinhof, Ham 20.
[105] Benfey Gesch 791, Misteli 539, Wundt S 1. 331 (but his examples from obscure languages should be approached carefully, and interestingly, he believes that this phenomenon is limited to primitive languages and isn't present in Semitic or Aryan languages), GRM 1. 638, Simonyi US 255, Meinhof, Ham 20.
[106] I must confess that I find nothing symbolical in glas and very little in fouet (though the verb fouetter has something of the force of E. whip). On the whole, much of what people ‘hear’ in a word appears to me fanciful and apt to discredit reasonable attempts at gaining an insight into the essence of sound symbolism; thus E. Lerch’s ridiculous remark on G. loch in GRM 7. 101: “loch malt die bewegung, die der anblick eines solchen im beschauer auslöst, durch eine entsprechende bewegung der sprachwerkzeuge, beginnend mit der liquida zur bezeichnung der rundung und endend mit dem gutturalen ch tief hinten in der gurgel.”
[106] I have to admit that I don’t see anything symbolic in glas and very little in fouet (although the verb fouetter carries some of the force of the English word whip). In general, a lot of what people ‘hear’ in a word seems fanciful to me and likely undermines reasonable efforts to understand the essence of sound symbolism; thus E. Lerch’s ridiculous comment on G. loch in GRM 7. 101: “loch shows the reaction that seeing something like this causes in the observer, reflected in the movement of the speech organs, beginning with the fluid sound to indicate rounding and concluding with the throaty guttural ch from deep in the throat..”
[107] It may not be superfluous expressly to point out that there is no contradiction between what is said here on the disappearance of tones and the remarks made above (Ch. XIX § 4) on Chinese tones. There the change wrought in the meaning of a word by a mere change of tone was explained on the principle that the difference of meaning was at an earlier stage expressed by affixes, the tone that is now concentrated on one syllable belonging formerly to two syllables or perhaps more. But this evidently presupposes that each syllable had already some tone of its own—and that is what in this chapter is taken to be the primitive state. Word-tones were originally frequent, but meaningless; afterwards they were dropped in some languages, while in others they were utilized for sense-distinguishing purposes.
[107] It's worth noting that there’s no contradiction between what is stated here about the disappearance of tones and the comments made earlier (Ch. XIX § 4) regarding Chinese tones. In that section, the way a simple change in tone alters the meaning of a word was explained by suggesting that the difference in meaning was initially conveyed through affixes, with the tone now focused on one syllable that used to belong to two or more syllables. However, this clearly assumes that each syllable already had its own tone—which is considered the primitive state in this chapter. Initially, word-tones were common but held no meaning; later, some languages dropped them, while others adopted them for distinguishing meaning.
[109] Of course, if instead of look upon and outcome we had taken the corresponding terms of Latin root, consider and result, the metaphors would have been still more dead to the natural linguistic instinct.
[109] Obviously, if instead of look upon and outcome, we had used the corresponding terms from their Latin roots, consider and result, the metaphors would have felt even more disconnected from our natural sense of language.
[110] From the experience I had with my previous book, Progress, from which this chapter has, with some alterations and amplifications, passed into this volume, I feel impelled here to warn those critics who do me the honour to mention my theory of the origin of language, not to look upon it as if it were contained simply in my remarks on primitive love-songs, etc., and as if it were based on a priori considerations, like the older speculative theories. What I may perhaps claim as my original contribution to the solution of this question is the inductive method based on the three sources of information indicated on p. 416, and especially on the ‘backward’ consideration of the history of language. Some critics think they have demolished my view by simply representing it as a romantic dream of a primitive golden age in which men had no occupation but courting and singing. I have never believed in a far-off golden age, but rather incline to believe in a progressive movement from a very raw and barbarous age to something better, though it must be said that our own age, with its national wars, world wars and class wars, makes one sometimes ashamed to think how little progress our so-called civilization has made. But primitive ages were probably still worse, and the only thing I have felt bold enough to maintain is that in those days there were some moments consecrated to youthful hilarity, and that this gave rise, among other merriment, to vocal play of such a character as closely to resemble what we may infer from the known facts of linguistic history to have been a stage of language earlier than any of those accessible to us. There is no ‘romanticism’ (in a bad sense) in such a theory, and it can only be refuted by showing that the view of language and its development on which it is based is erroneous from beginning to end.
[110] Based on my experience with my previous book, Progress, which this chapter has been adapted from with some changes and additions, I feel the need to caution those critics who kindly refer to my theory about the origin of language. They shouldn’t see it as simply being about my comments on primitive love songs and similar topics, nor should they assume it’s based on a priori reasoning, like earlier speculative theories. What I consider my unique contribution to this discussion is the inductive approach, grounded in the three sources of information mentioned on page 416, particularly focusing on the historical development of language. Some critics think they’ve disproven my argument by portraying it as a fanciful idea about a primitive golden age where men only engaged in courting and singing. I’ve never endorsed the idea of a distant golden age. Instead, I lean towards the idea of a gradual movement from a very crude and barbaric period to something better, though it must be noted that our current era, with its national conflicts, world wars, and class struggles, sometimes makes me question how little progress our so-called civilization has achieved. However, primitive times were likely much worse, and the only point I feel confident in asserting is that during those days, there were moments dedicated to youthful joy, which led to the creation of vocal expressions that closely resembled what we can deduce from the known facts of linguistic history as an earlier stage of language than any we can access today. There is no ‘romanticism’ (in a negative sense) in this theory, and it can only be challenged by demonstrating that the understanding of language and its evolution that it relies on is fundamentally flawed.
Transcriber's Note
On p. 373, "ź" is used to represent a letter "z" with a vertical line diacritic.
On p. 373, "ź" is used to represent the letter "z" with a vertical line diacritic.
The following apparent errors have been corrected:
The following obvious mistakes have been fixed:
- p. 9 "etc" changed to "etc."
- p. 49 "will" changed to "will"
- p. 63 "‘Sanskritic," changed to "‘Sanskritic,’"
- p. 98 "Bréal Delbrück" changed to "Bréal, Delbrück"
- p. 98 "Meillet Meringer" changed to "Meillet, Meringer"
- p. 109 "VIII, § 9" changed to "VIII, § 8"
- p. 173 (note) "‘Subtraktionsdannelser,”" changed to "“Subtraktionsdannelser,”"
- p. 184 "pronunication" changed to "pronunciation"
- p. 216 (note) "25 1" changed to "251"
- p. 216 "Mittleilungen" changed to "Mitteilungen"
- p. 228 "chapter" changed to "chapter."
- p. 234 (note) "ii" changed to "ii."
- p. 237 "Grammar" changed to "Grammar."
- p. 239 "accounted for" changed to "accounted for."
- p. 247 "a women" changed to "a woman"
- p. 254 "peoples" changed to "peoples."
- p. 266 "a might" changed to "as might"
- p. 274 "economzie" changed to "economize"
- p. 280 "word·" changed to "word;"
- p. 284 "(æ·]" changed to "[æ·]"
- p. 290 "[see" changed to "(see"
- p. 294 (note) "laughing" changed to "laughing."
- p. 301 "A Memorandum on Modern Telugu" changed to "A Memorandum on Modern Telugu,"
- p. 309 "Glossar" changed to "Glossar."
- p. 339 "Nolde, Einleit. in die Altertumswiss" changed to "Norden, Einleit. in die Altertumswiss."
- p. 353 "isizwe" changed to "isizwe"
- p. 355 "amazwe" changed to "amazing"
- p. 358 "uo longer" changed to "no longer"
- p. 358 "qnestion" changed to "question"
- p. 358 "oexn" changed to "oxen"
- p. 370 "is has" changed to "it has"
- p. 375 "with may" changed to "which may"
- p. 393 "respectively" changed to "respectively."
- p. 394 "ablative" changed to "ablative."
- p. 400 "hill;" changed to "hill;’"
- p. 417 "forgotten than" changed to "forgotten that"
- p. 441 "Ch. VIII § 9" changed to "Ch. VIII § 8"
- p. 443 "wost bist" changed to "wo-st bist"
- p. 447 "Puscariu" changed to "Pușcariu"
- p. 447 "stump-words," changed to "stump-words"
Inconsistent or old spelling, punctuation and hyphenation have otherwise been retained as printed.
Inconsistent or outdated spelling, punctuation, and hyphenation have been kept as originally printed.
The following possible errors have been left as printed:
The following possible errors have been left as they are printed:
- p. 130 Il a pleuvy
- p. 215 austellung
- p. 292 abusee
- p. 359 dison
- p. 378 finire
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!